This series convert lots of files to be properly parsed by Sphinx
as ReST files.
As it touches on lot of stuff, the series is based on linux-next.
I have a separate patch series with do the actual rename and
adjustment of references. I opted to submit this first, as it
sounds easier to merge this way, as each subsystem maintainer
can apply the conversion directly on their trees (or at docs
tree), avoiding merge conflects.
Both this series and the next steps are on my devel git tree,
at:
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/log/?h=all_with_indexes-v3
The final output in html can be seen at:
https://www.infradead.org/~mchehab/rst_conversion/
Mauro Carvalho Chehab (57):
docs: trace: fix some Sphinx warnings
docs: acpi: convert text files to ReST
docs: aoe: convert text files to ReST
docs: arm64: convert documentation to ReST format
docs: cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex: convert from LaTeX to ReST
docs: cdrom: convert remaining files to ReST
docs: cgroup-v1: convert to ReST file format
docs: cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.rst: add a note about CFQ scheduler
docs: cpu-freq: convert files to ReST
docs: device-mapper: convert it to ReST format
docs: extcon: move it to acpi dir and convert it to ReST
docs: fault-injection: convert it to ReST format
docs: fb: convert documentation to ReST format
docs: fpga: convert it to ReST
docs: gpio: convert it to ReST
docs: ide: convert it to ReST format
docs: infiniband: convert it to ReST format
docs: kbuild: convert it to ReST output
docs: kdump: convert it to ReST
docs: livepatch: convert it to ReST format
docs: locking: convert docs to ReST format
docs: mic: convert it to ReST format
docs: netlabel: convert it to ReST
docs: pcmcia: convert it to ReST format
docs: power: convert docs to ReST
docs: powerpc: convert docs to ReST
docs: pps/pps.txt convert it to ReST and move to API book
docs: ptp.txt: convert to ReST and move to driver-api
docs: riscv: convert it to ReST format
docs: s390: Debugging390.txt: convert table to ascii artwork
docs: s390: convert text files to ReST format
s390: include/asm/debug.h add kerneldoc markups
docs: serial: convert it to ReST format
docs: target: convert it to ReST format
docs: timers: convert documentation to ReST
docs: usb: convert documents to ReST
docs: watchdog: convert documents to ReST format
docs: x86: convert text files to ReST
docs: xilinx: convert eemi.txt to ReST
docs: scheduler: convert files to ReST
docs: EDID/HOWTO.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-API
docs: connector.txt: convert to ReST
docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt convert it to ReST and move to admin-guide
docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api
docs: m68k: convert it to ReST file format and add to arch bookset
docs: cma/debugfs.txt: convert to ReST and move to admin-guide/mm
docs: console.txt: convert to ReST format
docs: pti_intel_mid.txt: convert to ReST
docs: early-userspace: convert docs to ReST
docs: driver-model: convert it to ReST format
docs: arm: convert text files to ReST format
docs: memory-devices: convert ti-emif.txt to ReST format
docs: xen-tpmfront.txt: convert the file to ReST format
docs: bus-devices: ti-gpmc.txt: convert it to ReST
docs: nvmem: convert file to ReST format
docs: phy: convert samsung-usb2.txt to ReST format
docs: Prepare files to be renamed to *.rst
Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt | 29 +-
Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt | 59 +-
Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt | 247 +-
Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt | 52 +-
Documentation/acpi/debug.txt | 20 +-
.../drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt} | 14 +-
.../acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt | 90 +-
Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt | 58 +-
Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt | 48 +-
Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt | 132 +-
Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt | 323 +-
Documentation/acpi/osi.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt | 128 +-
Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt | 16 +-
Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt | 63 +-
Documentation/aoe/todo.txt | 3 +
Documentation/aoe/udev.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/arm/Booting | 71 +-
Documentation/arm/IXP4xx | 61 +-
Documentation/arm/Interrupts | 86 +-
Documentation/arm/Marvell/README | 537 ++--
Documentation/arm/Microchip/README | 63 +-
Documentation/arm/Netwinder | 59 +-
Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS | 112 +-
Documentation/arm/OMAP/README | 7 +
Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm | 55 +-
Documentation/arm/Porting | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/README | 50 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet | 185 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus | 45 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird | 26 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient | 46 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster | 13 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL | 8 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART | 3 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon | 4 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg | 2 -
Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART | 60 +-
Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt | 5 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt | 6 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt | 7 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt | 20 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt | 16 +-
.../arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt | 27 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/arm/Setup | 49 +-
Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt | 4 +-
.../arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt | 177 +-
Documentation/arm/firmware.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt | 3 +
Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt | 79 +-
Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/mem_alignment | 11 +-
Documentation/arm/memory.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES | 3 +
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt | 106 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt | 9 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst | 1 +
Documentation/arm/sunxi/README | 98 +-
Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/arm/swp_emulation | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/tcm.txt | 54 +-
Documentation/arm/uefi.txt | 39 +-
Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt | 288 +-
Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt | 153 +-
Documentation/arm64/booting.txt | 91 +-
Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt | 190 +-
Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt | 50 +-
Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt | 43 +-
Documentation/arm64/memory.txt | 91 +-
.../arm64/pointer-authentication.txt | 2 +
Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt | 63 +-
Documentation/arm64/sve.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt | 65 +-
Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt | 1 -
Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt | 157 +-
Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt | 50 +-
Documentation/cdrom/Makefile | 21 -
Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex | 1026 -------
Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt | 1063 +++++++
Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd | 178 +-
Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt | 27 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt | 103 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt | 180 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt | 203 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt | 40 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt | 259 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt | 449 +--
Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt | 78 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt | 66 +-
Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/connector/connector.txt | 128 +-
Documentation/console/console.txt | 61 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt | 66 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt | 217 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt | 141 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt | 102 +-
.../device-mapper/cache-policies.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt | 206 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt | 29 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt | 57 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt | 45 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt | 75 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt | 55 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt | 5 +-
.../device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt | 25 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt | 225 +-
.../device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt | 68 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt | 143 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt | 36 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt | 100 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt | 91 +-
.../device-mapper/persistent-data.txt | 4 +
Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt | 116 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt | 62 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt | 68 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt | 47 +-
.../device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt | 68 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt | 111 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt | 13 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt | 69 +-
Documentation/driver-model/class.txt | 74 +-
.../driver-model/design-patterns.txt | 106 +-
Documentation/driver-model/device.txt | 57 +-
Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt | 50 +-
Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt | 112 +-
Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt | 30 +-
Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt | 333 +--
Documentation/early-userspace/README | 3 +
.../early-userspace/buffer-format.txt | 19 +-
.../fault-injection/fault-injection.txt | 265 +-
.../fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt | 18 +-
.../fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt | 174 +-
.../fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt | 40 +-
Documentation/fb/api.txt | 29 +-
Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt | 57 +-
Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/fb/efifb.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt | 25 +-
Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt | 177 +-
Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt | 79 +-
Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt | 22 +-
Documentation/fb/intel810.txt | 77 +-
Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt | 62 +-
Documentation/fb/internals.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt | 526 ++--
Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/modedb.txt | 44 +-
Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt | 55 +-
Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt | 81 +-
Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt | 153 +-
Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt | 40 +-
Documentation/fb/sm501.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt | 231 +-
Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt | 30 +-
Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt | 34 +-
Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt | 55 +-
Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt | 128 +-
Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt | 121 +-
Documentation/fb/viafb.txt | 393 +--
Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt | 58 +-
Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt | 39 +-
Documentation/highuid.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/ide/ide.txt | 147 +-
Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/index.rst | 1 +
Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt | 64 +-
Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt | 108 +-
Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt | 5 +
Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt | 33 +-
Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 119 +-
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt | 232 +-
.../kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt | 136 +-
Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | 518 ++--
Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt | 166 +-
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt | 131 +-
Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt | 59 +-
Documentation/kobject.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/ldm.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt | 12 +-
.../livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt | 56 +-
Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt | 211 +-
Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt | 65 +-
Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt | 41 +-
Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt | 219 +-
Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt | 105 +-
Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt | 26 +-
Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt | 135 +-
Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt | 30 +-
Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt | 32 +-
Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt | 82 +-
Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt | 319 +-
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt | 25 +-
Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt | 58 +-
Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt | 19 +-
Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt | 16 +-
Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt | 16 +-
Documentation/numastat.txt | 1 -
Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt | 110 +-
Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt | 4 +
Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt | 35 +-
Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt | 39 +-
Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt | 60 +-
Documentation/pnp.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt | 77 +-
Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt | 101 +-
Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt | 5 +
Documentation/power/energy-model.txt | 101 +-
Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt | 91 +-
Documentation/power/interface.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/power/opp.txt | 175 +-
Documentation/power/pci.txt | 77 +-
Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt | 127 +-
Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt | 269 +-
Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt | 297 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt | 141 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt | 51 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 234 +-
Documentation/power/s2ram.txt | 20 +-
.../power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt | 42 +-
.../power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt | 2 +
Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt | 118 +-
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt | 639 ++--
Documentation/power/tricks.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt | 53 +-
Documentation/power/video.txt | 156 +-
Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt | 46 +-
Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt | 18 +-
.../powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt | 108 +-
.../powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt | 117 +-
Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt | 108 +-
Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst | 13 +-
Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt | 12 +-
.../powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt | 1 +
Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt | 169 +-
Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt | 29 +-
.../powerpc/transactional_memory.txt | 45 +-
Documentation/pps/pps.txt | 67 +-
Documentation/preempt-locking.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt | 135 +-
Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt | 26 +-
Documentation/rbtree.txt | 52 +-
Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt | 98 +-
Documentation/rtc.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/s390/3270.txt | 85 +-
Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 47 +-
Documentation/s390/DASD | 33 +-
Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt | 2599 ++++++++++-------
Documentation/s390/cds.txt | 354 ++-
Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt | 179 +-
Documentation/s390/monreader.txt | 85 +-
Documentation/s390/qeth.txt | 36 +-
Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt | 639 ++--
Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt | 487 +--
Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt | 88 +-
Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt | 2 +
Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt | 38 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt | 293 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt | 35 +-
Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt | 101 +-
Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ | 5 +-
Documentation/serial/driver | 113 +-
Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio | 750 ++---
Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt | 81 +-
Documentation/serial/rocket.txt | 144 +-
Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt | 22 +-
Documentation/serial/tty.txt | 111 +-
Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt | 200 +-
Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt | 268 +-
Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt | 40 +-
Documentation/timers/highres.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst | 1 +
Documentation/trace/histogram.rst | 86 +-
Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt | 56 +-
Documentation/usb/acm.txt | 156 +-
Documentation/usb/authorization.txt | 75 +-
Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt | 101 +-
Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/usb/ehci.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt | 17 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt | 609 ++--
Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt | 302 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt | 175 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt | 43 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt | 155 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt | 73 +-
Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt | 34 +-
Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt | 19 +-
Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/usb/ohci.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/usb/rio.txt | 83 +-
Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt | 203 +-
Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt | 552 ++--
Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt | 100 +-
.../convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt | 109 +-
Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt | 13 +-
Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt | 76 +-
.../watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt | 89 +-
.../watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt | 672 +++--
Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt | 3 +
Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 578 ++--
Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt | 69 +-
Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt | 245 +-
Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt | 55 +-
Documentation/x86/microcode.txt | 51 +-
Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt | 442 +--
Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt | 1 +
Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 217 +-
Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt | 33 +-
Documentation/x86/pti.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt | 621 ++--
Documentation/x86/tlb.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/x86/topology.txt | 26 +-
Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt | 33 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 98 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt | 212 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt | 67 +-
Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/zorro.txt | 5 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c | 2 +-
arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h | 231 ++
drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c | 2 +-
include/linux/connector.h | 63 +-
433 files changed, 21459 insertions(+), 16370 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/{extcon/intel-int3496.txt => acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt} (66%)
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
delete mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/Makefile
delete mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex
create mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt
--
2.20.1
In order to be able to add this file to a book, it needs
first to be converted to ReST.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt | 156 +++++++++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 105 insertions(+), 51 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
index c434fcfc5e4c..afed53688904 100644
--- a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller):
-=========================================
+========================================
+GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller)
+========================================
GPMC is an unified memory controller dedicated to interfacing external
memory devices like
@@ -49,75 +50,128 @@ most of the datasheets & hardware (to be exact none of those supported
in mainline having custom timing routine) and by simulation.
gpmc timing dependency on peripheral timings:
+
[<gpmc_timing>: <peripheral timing1>, <peripheral timing2> ...]
1. common
-cs_on: t_ceasu
-adv_on: t_avdasu, t_ceavd
+
+cs_on:
+ t_ceasu
+adv_on:
+ t_avdasu, t_ceavd
2. sync common
-sync_clk: clk
-page_burst_access: t_bacc
-clk_activation: t_ces, t_avds
+
+sync_clk:
+ clk
+page_burst_access:
+ t_bacc
+clk_activation:
+ t_ces, t_avds
3. read async muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu, t_aavdh
-access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
-rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu, t_aavdh
+access:
+ t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle:
+ t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
4. read async non-muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu
-access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
-rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu
+access:
+ t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle:
+ t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
5. read sync muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r, t_avdh
-oe_on: t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe
-access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
-rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r, t_avdh
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe
+access:
+ t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle:
+ t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
6. read sync non-muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu
-access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
-rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu
+access:
+ t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle:
+ t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
7. write async muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
-we_off: t_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off:
+ t_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
8. write async non-muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu
-we_off: t_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu
+we_off:
+ t_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
9. write sync muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w, t_avdh
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
-we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w, t_avdh
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off:
+ t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
10. write sync non-muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo
-we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_rdyo
+we_off:
+ t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
-Note: Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few
-gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that
-some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in
-indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than
-mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what
-these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in
-struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer
-IP details (link above).
+
+Note:
+ Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few
+ gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that
+ some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in
+ indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than
+ mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what
+ these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in
+ struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer
+ IP details (link above).
--
2.20.1
Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
the driver-api book.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/console/console.txt | 61 +++++++++++++++++--------------
1 file changed, 33 insertions(+), 28 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.txt
index d73c2ab4beda..8b0205d27a71 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===============
Console Drivers
===============
@@ -17,25 +18,26 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
released by the console, the system driver will take over.
-Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call::
do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver
is fully unbound
-In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+In newer kernels, the following are also available::
do_register_con_driver()
do_unregister_con_driver()
If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
-system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. Thus:
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15.
+Thus::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole
. .. vtcon0 vtcon1
-Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
. .. bind name uevent
@@ -46,27 +48,29 @@ What do these files signify?
read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
when written to. The possible values are:
- 0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+ 0
+ - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
to unbind
- 1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+ 1
+ - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
bind
- 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+ 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format::
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
- (S) VGA+
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+ (S) VGA+
- '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
- commanded to bind or unbind
+ '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
+ commanded to bind or unbind
- 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+ 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
- (M) frame buffer device
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+ (M) frame buffer device
- In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
- directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+ In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+ directly commanded to bind or unbind.
3. uevent - ignore this file
@@ -75,14 +79,17 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
system driver.
-NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1:
+ Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under::
-Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
-console drivers
+ Device Drivers ->
+ Character devices ->
+ Support for binding and unbinding console drivers
-NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
-unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
-to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+NOTE2:
+ If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+ unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the
+ console to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
@@ -92,10 +99,10 @@ framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
for more details.)
-Notes for developers:
-=====================
+Notes for developers
+====================
-do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into::
do_register_con_driver()
do_bind_con_driver() - private function
@@ -104,7 +111,7 @@ give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
driver is bound or not.
-Guidelines for console driver writers:
+Guidelines for console driver writers
=====================================
In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
@@ -140,6 +147,4 @@ The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
be made to work correctly.
-==========================
Antonino Daplas <[email protected]>
-
--
2.20.1
Convert livepatch documentation to ReST format. The changes
are mostly trivial, as the documents are already on a good
shape. Just a few markup changes are needed for Sphinx to
properly parse the docs.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt | 12 +-
.../livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt | 56 ++---
Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt | 211 ++++++++++--------
Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt | 65 ++++--
5 files changed, 199 insertions(+), 159 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt
index 182e31d4abce..d76d1f0d9fcf 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/callbacks.txt
@@ -30,16 +30,20 @@ be patched, irrespective of the target klp_object's current state.
Callbacks can be registered for the following livepatch actions:
- * Pre-patch - before a klp_object is patched
+ * Pre-patch
+ - before a klp_object is patched
- * Post-patch - after a klp_object has been patched and is active
+ * Post-patch
+ - after a klp_object has been patched and is active
across all tasks
- * Pre-unpatch - before a klp_object is unpatched (ie, patched code is
+ * Pre-unpatch
+ - before a klp_object is unpatched (ie, patched code is
active), used to clean up post-patch callback
resources
- * Post-unpatch - after a klp_object has been patched, all code has
+ * Post-unpatch
+ - after a klp_object has been patched, all code has
been restored and no tasks are running patched code,
used to cleanup pre-patch callback resources
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt
index 0012808e8d44..1931f318976a 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/cumulative-patches.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Usage
-----
The atomic replace can be enabled by setting "replace" flag in struct klp_patch,
-for example:
+for example::
static struct klp_patch patch = {
.mod = THIS_MODULE,
@@ -49,19 +49,19 @@ Features
The atomic replace allows:
- + Atomically revert some functions in a previous patch while
+ - Atomically revert some functions in a previous patch while
upgrading other functions.
- + Remove eventual performance impact caused by core redirection
+ - Remove eventual performance impact caused by core redirection
for functions that are no longer patched.
- + Decrease user confusion about dependencies between livepatches.
+ - Decrease user confusion about dependencies between livepatches.
Limitations:
------------
- + Once the operation finishes, there is no straightforward way
+ - Once the operation finishes, there is no straightforward way
to reverse it and restore the replaced patches atomically.
A good practice is to set .replace flag in any released livepatch.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Limitations:
only when the transition was not forced.
- + Only the (un)patching callbacks from the _new_ cumulative livepatch are
+ - Only the (un)patching callbacks from the _new_ cumulative livepatch are
executed. Any callbacks from the replaced patches are ignored.
In other words, the cumulative patch is responsible for doing any actions
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Limitations:
enabled patches were called.
- + There is no special handling of shadow variables. Livepatch authors
+ - There is no special handling of shadow variables. Livepatch authors
must create their own rules how to pass them from one cumulative
patch to the other. Especially that they should not blindly remove
them in module_exit() functions.
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt
index 4627b41ff02e..2a1bb3d34b11 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/livepatch.txt
@@ -4,22 +4,22 @@ Livepatch
This document outlines basic information about kernel livepatching.
-Table of Contents:
+.. Table of Contents:
-1. Motivation
-2. Kprobes, Ftrace, Livepatching
-3. Consistency model
-4. Livepatch module
- 4.1. New functions
- 4.2. Metadata
-5. Livepatch life-cycle
- 5.1. Loading
- 5.2. Enabling
- 5.3. Replacing
- 5.4. Disabling
- 5.5. Removing
-6. Sysfs
-7. Limitations
+ 1. Motivation
+ 2. Kprobes, Ftrace, Livepatching
+ 3. Consistency model
+ 4. Livepatch module
+ 4.1. New functions
+ 4.2. Metadata
+ 5. Livepatch life-cycle
+ 5.1. Loading
+ 5.2. Enabling
+ 5.3. Replacing
+ 5.4. Disabling
+ 5.5. Removing
+ 6. Sysfs
+ 7. Limitations
1. Motivation
@@ -40,14 +40,14 @@ There are multiple mechanisms in the Linux kernel that are directly related
to redirection of code execution; namely: kernel probes, function tracing,
and livepatching:
- + The kernel probes are the most generic. The code can be redirected by
+ - The kernel probes are the most generic. The code can be redirected by
putting a breakpoint instruction instead of any instruction.
- + The function tracer calls the code from a predefined location that is
+ - The function tracer calls the code from a predefined location that is
close to the function entry point. This location is generated by the
compiler using the '-pg' gcc option.
- + Livepatching typically needs to redirect the code at the very beginning
+ - Livepatching typically needs to redirect the code at the very beginning
of the function entry before the function parameters or the stack
are in any way modified.
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt for more details.
The patch is described by several structures that split the information
into three levels:
- + struct klp_func is defined for each patched function. It describes
+ - struct klp_func is defined for each patched function. It describes
the relation between the original and the new implementation of a
particular function.
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ into three levels:
only for a particular object ( vmlinux or a kernel module ). Note that
kallsyms allows for searching symbols according to the object name.
- + struct klp_object defines an array of patched functions (struct
+ - struct klp_object defines an array of patched functions (struct
klp_func) in the same object. Where the object is either vmlinux
(NULL) or a module name.
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ into three levels:
only when they are available.
- + struct klp_patch defines an array of patched objects (struct
+ - struct klp_patch defines an array of patched objects (struct
klp_object).
This structure handles all patched functions consistently and eventually,
@@ -337,14 +337,16 @@ operation fails.
Second, livepatch enters into a transition state where tasks are converging
to the patched state. If an original function is patched for the first
time, a function specific struct klp_ops is created and an universal
-ftrace handler is registered[*]. This stage is indicated by a value of '1'
+ftrace handler is registered\ [#]_. This stage is indicated by a value of '1'
in /sys/kernel/livepatch/<name>/transition. For more information about
this process, see the "Consistency model" section.
Finally, once all tasks have been patched, the 'transition' value changes
to '0'.
-[*] Note that functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler
+.. [#]
+
+ Note that functions might be patched multiple times. The ftrace handler
is registered only once for a given function. Further patches just add
an entry to the list (see field `func_stack`) of the struct klp_ops.
The right implementation is selected by the ftrace handler, see
@@ -421,7 +423,7 @@ See Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-livepatch for more details.
The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
- + Only functions that can be traced could be patched.
+ - Only functions that can be traced could be patched.
Livepatch is based on the dynamic ftrace. In particular, functions
implementing ftrace or the livepatch ftrace handler could not be
@@ -431,7 +433,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
- + Livepatch works reliably only when the dynamic ftrace is located at
+ - Livepatch works reliably only when the dynamic ftrace is located at
the very beginning of the function.
The function need to be redirected before the stack or the function
@@ -445,7 +447,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
this is handled on the ftrace level.
- + Kretprobes using the ftrace framework conflict with the patched
+ - Kretprobes using the ftrace framework conflict with the patched
functions.
Both kretprobes and livepatches use a ftrace handler that modifies
@@ -453,7 +455,7 @@ The current Livepatch implementation has several limitations:
is rejected when the handler is already in use by the other.
- + Kprobes in the original function are ignored when the code is
+ - Kprobes in the original function are ignored when the code is
redirected to the new implementation.
There is a work in progress to add warnings about this situation.
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt
index f21a5289a09c..7f557c6f6deb 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/module-elf-format.txt
@@ -4,29 +4,29 @@ Livepatch module Elf format
This document outlines the Elf format requirements that livepatch modules must follow.
------------------
-Table of Contents
------------------
-0. Background and motivation
-1. Livepatch modinfo field
-2. Livepatch relocation sections
- 2.1 What are livepatch relocation sections?
- 2.2 Livepatch relocation section format
- 2.2.1 Required flags
- 2.2.2 Required name format
- 2.2.3 Example livepatch relocation section names
- 2.2.4 Example `readelf --sections` output
- 2.2.5 Example `readelf --relocs` output
-3. Livepatch symbols
- 3.1 What are livepatch symbols?
- 3.2 A livepatch module's symbol table
- 3.3 Livepatch symbol format
- 3.3.1 Required flags
- 3.3.2 Required name format
- 3.3.3 Example livepatch symbol names
- 3.3.4 Example `readelf --symbols` output
-4. Architecture-specific sections
-5. Symbol table and Elf section access
+
+.. Table of Contents
+
+ 0. Background and motivation
+ 1. Livepatch modinfo field
+ 2. Livepatch relocation sections
+ 2.1 What are livepatch relocation sections?
+ 2.2 Livepatch relocation section format
+ 2.2.1 Required flags
+ 2.2.2 Required name format
+ 2.2.3 Example livepatch relocation section names
+ 2.2.4 Example `readelf --sections` output
+ 2.2.5 Example `readelf --relocs` output
+ 3. Livepatch symbols
+ 3.1 What are livepatch symbols?
+ 3.2 A livepatch module's symbol table
+ 3.3 Livepatch symbol format
+ 3.3.1 Required flags
+ 3.3.2 Required name format
+ 3.3.3 Example livepatch symbol names
+ 3.3.4 Example `readelf --symbols` output
+ 4. Architecture-specific sections
+ 5. Symbol table and Elf section access
----------------------------
0. Background and motivation
@@ -89,12 +89,15 @@ used by the kernel module loader to identify livepatch modules.
Example modinfo output:
-----------------------
-% modinfo livepatch-meminfo.ko
-filename: livepatch-meminfo.ko
-livepatch: Y
-license: GPL
-depends:
-vermagic: 4.3.0+ SMP mod_unload
+
+::
+
+ % modinfo livepatch-meminfo.ko
+ filename: livepatch-meminfo.ko
+ livepatch: Y
+ license: GPL
+ depends:
+ vermagic: 4.3.0+ SMP mod_unload
--------------------------------
2. Livepatch relocation sections
@@ -142,17 +145,18 @@ be copied into memory along with the other SHF_ALLOC sections).
2.2.2 Required name format
--------------------------
-The name of a livepatch relocation section must conform to the following format:
+The name of a livepatch relocation section must conform to the following
+format::
-.klp.rela.objname.section_name
-^ ^^ ^ ^ ^
-|________||_____| |__________|
- [A] [B] [C]
+ .klp.rela.objname.section_name
+ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^
+ |________||_____| |__________|
+ [A] [B] [C]
-[A] The relocation section name is prefixed with the string ".klp.rela."
-[B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
- which the relocation section belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
-[C] The actual name of the section to which this relocation section applies.
+ [A] The relocation section name is prefixed with the string ".klp.rela."
+ [B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
+ which the relocation section belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
+ [C] The actual name of the section to which this relocation section applies.
2.2.3 Example livepatch relocation section names:
-------------------------------------------------
@@ -162,6 +166,9 @@ The name of a livepatch relocation section must conform to the following format:
2.2.4 Example `readelf --sections` output for a patch
module that patches vmlinux and modules 9p, btrfs, ext4:
--------------------------------------------------------
+
+::
+
Section Headers:
[Nr] Name Type Address Off Size ES Flg Lk Inf Al
[ snip ]
@@ -175,23 +182,26 @@ module that patches vmlinux and modules 9p, btrfs, ext4:
[ snip ] ^ ^
| |
[*] [*]
-[*] Livepatch relocation sections are SHT_RELA sections but with a few special
-characteristics. Notice that they are marked SHF_ALLOC ("A") so that they will
-not be discarded when the module is loaded into memory, as well as with the
-SHF_RELA_LIVEPATCH flag ("o" - for OS-specific).
+ [*] Livepatch relocation sections are SHT_RELA sections but with a few special
+ characteristics. Notice that they are marked SHF_ALLOC ("A") so that they will
+ not be discarded when the module is loaded into memory, as well as with the
+ SHF_RELA_LIVEPATCH flag ("o" - for OS-specific).
2.2.5 Example `readelf --relocs` output for a patch module:
-----------------------------------------------------------
-Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
- Offset Info Type Symbol's Value Symbol's Name + Addend
-000000000000001f 0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
-0000000000000028 0000003d0000000b R_X86_64_32S 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0 + 0
-0000000000000036 0000003b00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.can_modify_feature.isra.3,0 - 4
-000000000000004c 0000004900000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0 - 4
-[ snip ] ^
- |
+
+::
+
+ Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
+ Offset Info Type Symbol's Value Symbol's Name + Addend
+ 000000000000001f 0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
+ 0000000000000028 0000003d0000000b R_X86_64_32S 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0 + 0
+ 0000000000000036 0000003b00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.btrfs.can_modify_feature.isra.3,0 - 4
+ 000000000000004c 0000004900000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0 - 4
+ [ snip ] ^
+ |
[*]
-[*] Every symbol referenced by a relocation is a livepatch symbol.
+ [*] Every symbol referenced by a relocation is a livepatch symbol.
--------------------
3. Livepatch symbols
@@ -231,18 +241,19 @@ relocation section refer to their respective symbols with their symbol indices,
and the original symbol indices (and thus the symtab ordering) must be
preserved in order for apply_relocate_add() to find the right symbol.
-For example, take this particular rela from a livepatch module:
-Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
- Offset Info Type Symbol's Value Symbol's Name + Addend
-000000000000001f 0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
+For example, take this particular rela from a livepatch module:::
-This rela refers to the symbol '.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0', and the symbol index is encoded
-in 'Info'. Here its symbol index is 0x5e, which is 94 in decimal, which refers to the
-symbol index 94.
-And in this patch module's corresponding symbol table, symbol index 94 refers to that very symbol:
-[ snip ]
-94: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
-[ snip ]
+ Relocation section '.klp.rela.btrfs.text.btrfs_feature_attr_show' at offset 0x2ba0 contains 4 entries:
+ Offset Info Type Symbol's Value Symbol's Name + Addend
+ 000000000000001f 0000005e00000002 R_X86_64_PC32 0000000000000000 .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0 - 4
+
+ This rela refers to the symbol '.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0', and the symbol index is encoded
+ in 'Info'. Here its symbol index is 0x5e, which is 94 in decimal, which refers to the
+ symbol index 94.
+ And in this patch module's corresponding symbol table, symbol index 94 refers to that very symbol:
+ [ snip ]
+ 94: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
+ [ snip ]
---------------------------
3.3 Livepatch symbol format
@@ -256,42 +267,48 @@ See include/uapi/linux/elf.h for the actual definitions.
3.3.2 Required name format
--------------------------
-Livepatch symbol names must conform to the following format:
+Livepatch symbol names must conform to the following format::
-.klp.sym.objname.symbol_name,sympos
-^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^
-|_______||_____| |_________| |
- [A] [B] [C] [D]
+ .klp.sym.objname.symbol_name,sympos
+ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^
+ |_______||_____| |_________| |
+ [A] [B] [C] [D]
-[A] The symbol name is prefixed with the string ".klp.sym."
-[B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
- which the symbol belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
-[C] The actual name of the symbol.
-[D] The position of the symbol in the object (as according to kallsyms)
- This is used to differentiate duplicate symbols within the same
- object. The symbol position is expressed numerically (0, 1, 2...).
- The symbol position of a unique symbol is 0.
+ [A] The symbol name is prefixed with the string ".klp.sym."
+ [B] The name of the object (i.e. "vmlinux" or name of module) to
+ which the symbol belongs follows immediately after the prefix.
+ [C] The actual name of the symbol.
+ [D] The position of the symbol in the object (as according to kallsyms)
+ This is used to differentiate duplicate symbols within the same
+ object. The symbol position is expressed numerically (0, 1, 2...).
+ The symbol position of a unique symbol is 0.
3.3.3 Example livepatch symbol names:
-------------------------------------
-.klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
-.klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
-.klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0
+
+::
+
+ .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
+ .klp.sym.vmlinux.printk,0
+ .klp.sym.btrfs.btrfs_ktype,0
3.3.4 Example `readelf --symbols` output for a patch module:
------------------------------------------------------------
-Symbol table '.symtab' contains 127 entries:
- Num: Value Size Type Bind Vis Ndx Name
- [ snip ]
- 73: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
- 74: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.capable,0
- 75: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.find_next_bit,0
- 76: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.si_swapinfo,0
- [ snip ] ^
- |
- [*]
-[*] Note that the 'Ndx' (Section index) for these symbols is SHN_LIVEPATCH (0xff20).
- "OS" means OS-specific.
+
+::
+
+ Symbol table '.symtab' contains 127 entries:
+ Num: Value Size Type Bind Vis Ndx Name
+ [ snip ]
+ 73: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.snprintf,0
+ 74: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.capable,0
+ 75: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.find_next_bit,0
+ 76: 0000000000000000 0 NOTYPE GLOBAL DEFAULT OS [0xff20] .klp.sym.vmlinux.si_swapinfo,0
+ [ snip ] ^
+ |
+ [*]
+ [*] Note that the 'Ndx' (Section index) for these symbols is SHN_LIVEPATCH (0xff20).
+ "OS" means OS-specific.
---------------------------------
4. Architecture-specific sections
@@ -313,11 +330,11 @@ Since apply_relocate_add() requires access to a module's section headers,
symbol table, and relocation section indices, Elf information is preserved for
livepatch modules and is made accessible by the module loader through
module->klp_info, which is a klp_modinfo struct. When a livepatch module loads,
-this struct is filled in by the module loader. Its fields are documented below:
+this struct is filled in by the module loader. Its fields are documented below::
-struct klp_modinfo {
- Elf_Ehdr hdr; /* Elf header */
- Elf_Shdr *sechdrs; /* Section header table */
- char *secstrings; /* String table for the section headers */
- unsigned int symndx; /* The symbol table section index */
-};
+ struct klp_modinfo {
+ Elf_Ehdr hdr; /* Elf header */
+ Elf_Shdr *sechdrs; /* Section header table */
+ char *secstrings; /* String table for the section headers */
+ unsigned int symndx; /* The symbol table section index */
+ };
diff --git a/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt b/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt
index ecc09a7be5dd..c05715aeafa4 100644
--- a/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt
+++ b/Documentation/livepatch/shadow-vars.txt
@@ -27,10 +27,13 @@ A hashtable references all shadow variables. These references are
stored and retrieved through a <obj, id> pair.
* The klp_shadow variable data structure encapsulates both tracking
-meta-data and shadow-data:
+ meta-data and shadow-data:
+
- meta-data
+
- obj - pointer to parent object
- id - data identifier
+
- data[] - storage for shadow data
It is important to note that the klp_shadow_alloc() and
@@ -47,31 +50,43 @@ to do actions that can be done only once when a new variable is allocated.
* klp_shadow_alloc() - allocate and add a new shadow variable
- search hashtable for <obj, id> pair
+
- if exists
+
- WARN and return NULL
+
- if <obj, id> doesn't already exist
+
- allocate a new shadow variable
- initialize the variable using a custom constructor and data when provided
- add <obj, id> to the global hashtable
* klp_shadow_get_or_alloc() - get existing or alloc a new shadow variable
- search hashtable for <obj, id> pair
+
- if exists
+
- return existing shadow variable
+
- if <obj, id> doesn't already exist
+
- allocate a new shadow variable
- initialize the variable using a custom constructor and data when provided
- add <obj, id> pair to the global hashtable
* klp_shadow_free() - detach and free a <obj, id> shadow variable
- find and remove a <obj, id> reference from global hashtable
+
- if found
+
- call destructor function if defined
- free shadow variable
* klp_shadow_free_all() - detach and free all <*, id> shadow variables
- find and remove any <*, id> references from global hashtable
+
- if found
+
- call destructor function if defined
- free shadow variable
@@ -102,12 +117,12 @@ parent "goes live" (ie, any shadow variable get-API requests are made
for this <obj, id> pair.)
For commit 1d147bfa6429, when a parent sta_info structure is allocated,
-allocate a shadow copy of the ps_lock pointer, then initialize it:
+allocate a shadow copy of the ps_lock pointer, then initialize it::
-#define PS_LOCK 1
-struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
- const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
-{
+ #define PS_LOCK 1
+ struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
+ const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
+ {
struct sta_info *sta;
spinlock_t *ps_lock;
@@ -123,10 +138,10 @@ struct sta_info *sta_info_alloc(struct ieee80211_sub_if_data *sdata,
...
When requiring a ps_lock, query the shadow variable API to retrieve one
-for a specific struct sta_info:
+for a specific struct sta_info:::
-void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+ void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
+ {
spinlock_t *ps_lock;
/* sync with ieee80211_tx_h_unicast_ps_buf */
@@ -136,10 +151,10 @@ void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
...
When the parent sta_info structure is freed, first free the shadow
-variable:
+variable::
-void sta_info_free(struct ieee80211_local *local, struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+ void sta_info_free(struct ieee80211_local *local, struct sta_info *sta)
+ {
klp_shadow_free(sta, PS_LOCK, NULL);
kfree(sta);
...
@@ -155,19 +170,19 @@ these cases, the klp_shadow_get_or_alloc() call can be used to attach
shadow variables to parents already in-flight.
For commit 1d147bfa6429, a good spot to allocate a shadow spinlock is
-inside ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup():
+inside ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup()::
-int ps_lock_shadow_ctor(void *obj, void *shadow_data, void *ctor_data)
-{
+ int ps_lock_shadow_ctor(void *obj, void *shadow_data, void *ctor_data)
+ {
spinlock_t *lock = shadow_data;
spin_lock_init(lock);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-#define PS_LOCK 1
-void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
-{
+ #define PS_LOCK 1
+ void ieee80211_sta_ps_deliver_wakeup(struct sta_info *sta)
+ {
spinlock_t *ps_lock;
/* sync with ieee80211_tx_h_unicast_ps_buf */
@@ -200,10 +215,12 @@ suggests how to handle the parent object.
=============
* https://github.com/dynup/kpatch
-The livepatch implementation is based on the kpatch version of shadow
-variables.
+
+ The livepatch implementation is based on the kpatch version of shadow
+ variables.
* http://files.mkgnu.net/files/dynamos/doc/papers/dynamos_eurosys_07.pdf
-Dynamic and Adaptive Updates of Non-Quiescent Subsystems in Commodity
-Operating System Kernels (Kritis Makris, Kyung Dong Ryu 2007) presented
-a datatype update technique called "shadow data structures".
+
+ Dynamic and Adaptive Updates of Non-Quiescent Subsystems in Commodity
+ Operating System Kernels (Kritis Makris, Kyung Dong Ryu 2007) presented
+ a datatype update technique called "shadow data structures".
--
2.20.1
The converted files are focused at the Kernel internal API,
so, this is a good candidate for the kernel API set of books.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ | 5 +-
Documentation/serial/driver | 113 +++-
Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio | 750 +++++++++++++-----------
Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt | 81 +--
Documentation/serial/rocket.txt | 144 +++--
Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt | 22 +-
Documentation/serial/tty.txt | 111 ++--
8 files changed, 719 insertions(+), 528 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ b/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ
index 024a69443cc2..532ff67e2f1c 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ
+++ b/Documentation/serial/README.cycladesZ
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+================
+Cyclades-Z notes
+================
The Cyclades-Z must have firmware loaded onto the card before it will
operate. This operation should be performed during system startup,
The firmware, loader program and the latest device driver code are
available from Cyclades at
+
ftp://ftp.cyclades.com/pub/cyclades/cyclades-z/linux/
-
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver
index 86e47c19a924..7fe9e8ec0cae 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/driver
+++ b/Documentation/serial/driver
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
- Low Level Serial API
- --------------------
+====================
+Low Level Serial API
+====================
This document is meant as a brief overview of some aspects of the new serial
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ are described in the uart_ops listing below.)
There are two locks. A per-port spinlock, and an overall semaphore.
From the core driver perspective, the port->lock locks the following
-data:
+data::
port->mctrl
port->icount
@@ -75,41 +75,51 @@ hardware.
return TIOCSER_TEMT.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
This call must not sleep
set_mctrl(port, mctrl)
This function sets the modem control lines for port described
by 'port' to the state described by mctrl. The relevant bits
of mctrl are:
+
- TIOCM_RTS RTS signal.
- TIOCM_DTR DTR signal.
- TIOCM_OUT1 OUT1 signal.
- TIOCM_OUT2 OUT2 signal.
- TIOCM_LOOP Set the port into loopback mode.
+
If the appropriate bit is set, the signal should be driven
active. If the bit is clear, the signal should be driven
inactive.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
get_mctrl(port)
Returns the current state of modem control inputs. The state
of the outputs should not be returned, since the core keeps
track of their state. The state information should include:
+
- TIOCM_CAR state of DCD signal
- TIOCM_CTS state of CTS signal
- TIOCM_DSR state of DSR signal
- TIOCM_RI state of RI signal
+
The bit is set if the signal is currently driven active. If
the port does not support CTS, DCD or DSR, the driver should
indicate that the signal is permanently active. If RI is
not available, the signal should not be indicated as active.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
stop_tx(port)
@@ -121,14 +131,18 @@ hardware.
possible.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
start_tx(port)
Start transmitting characters.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
throttle(port)
@@ -138,16 +152,17 @@ hardware.
This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled.
Locking: serialized with .unthrottle() and termios modification by the
- tty layer.
+ tty layer.
unthrottle(port)
Notify the serial driver that characters can now be sent to the serial
port without fear of overrunning the input buffers of the line
disciplines.
+
This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled.
Locking: serialized with .throttle() and termios modification by the
- tty layer.
+ tty layer.
send_xchar(port,ch)
Transmit a high priority character, even if the port is stopped.
@@ -159,6 +174,7 @@ hardware.
Do not transmit if ch == '\0' (__DISABLED_CHAR).
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
stop_rx(port)
@@ -166,7 +182,9 @@ hardware.
being closed.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
enable_ms(port)
@@ -177,7 +195,9 @@ hardware.
called.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
break_ctl(port,ctl)
@@ -196,6 +216,7 @@ hardware.
This method will only be called when the port is initially opened.
Locking: port_sem taken.
+
Interrupts: globally disabled.
shutdown(port)
@@ -210,6 +231,7 @@ hardware.
this port.
Locking: port_sem taken.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
flush_buffer(port)
@@ -220,7 +242,9 @@ hardware.
buffer is cleared.
Locking: port->lock taken.
+
Interrupts: locally disabled.
+
This call must not sleep
set_termios(port,termios,oldtermios)
@@ -228,29 +252,46 @@ hardware.
bits. Update read_status_mask and ignore_status_mask to indicate
the types of events we are interested in receiving. Relevant
termios->c_cflag bits are:
- CSIZE - word size
- CSTOPB - 2 stop bits
- PARENB - parity enable
- PARODD - odd parity (when PARENB is in force)
- CREAD - enable reception of characters (if not set,
+
+ CSIZE
+ - word size
+ CSTOPB
+ - 2 stop bits
+ PARENB
+ - parity enable
+ PARODD
+ - odd parity (when PARENB is in force)
+ CREAD
+ - enable reception of characters (if not set,
still receive characters from the port, but
throw them away.
- CRTSCTS - if set, enable CTS status change reporting
- CLOCAL - if not set, enable modem status change
+ CRTSCTS
+ - if set, enable CTS status change reporting
+ CLOCAL
+ - if not set, enable modem status change
reporting.
+
Relevant termios->c_iflag bits are:
- INPCK - enable frame and parity error events to be
+
+ INPCK
+ - enable frame and parity error events to be
passed to the TTY layer.
- BRKINT
- PARMRK - both of these enable break events to be
+ BRKINT / PARMRK
+ - both of these enable break events to be
passed to the TTY layer.
- IGNPAR - ignore parity and framing errors
- IGNBRK - ignore break errors, If IGNPAR is also
+ IGNPAR
+ - ignore parity and framing errors
+ IGNBRK
+ - ignore break errors, If IGNPAR is also
set, ignore overrun errors as well.
+
The interaction of the iflag bits is as follows (parity error
given as an example):
+
+ =============== ======= ====== =============================
Parity error INPCK IGNPAR
+ =============== ======= ====== =============================
n/a 0 n/a character received, marked as
TTY_NORMAL
None 1 n/a character received, marked as
@@ -258,12 +299,15 @@ hardware.
Yes 1 0 character received, marked as
TTY_PARITY
Yes 1 1 character discarded
+ =============== ======= ====== =============================
Other flags may be used (eg, xon/xoff characters) if your
hardware supports hardware "soft" flow control.
Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
This call must not sleep
set_ldisc(port,termios)
@@ -283,6 +327,7 @@ hardware.
will occur even if CONFIG_PM is not set.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
type(port)
@@ -291,6 +336,7 @@ hardware.
substituted.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
release_port(port)
@@ -298,6 +344,7 @@ hardware.
the port.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
request_port(port)
@@ -306,6 +353,7 @@ hardware.
returns, and it should return -EBUSY on failure.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
config_port(port,type)
@@ -321,6 +369,7 @@ hardware.
internally hard wired (eg, system on a chip implementations).
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
verify_port(port,serinfo)
@@ -328,6 +377,7 @@ hardware.
suitable for this port type.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
ioctl(port,cmd,arg)
@@ -335,6 +385,7 @@ hardware.
using the standard numbering system found in <asm/ioctl.h>
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
poll_init(port)
@@ -343,6 +394,7 @@ hardware.
this should not request interrupts.
Locking: tty_mutex and tty_port->mutex taken.
+
Interrupts: n/a.
poll_put_char(port,ch)
@@ -350,7 +402,9 @@ hardware.
port. It can and should block until there is space in the TX FIFO.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
This call must not sleep
poll_get_char(port)
@@ -359,7 +413,9 @@ hardware.
the function should return NO_POLL_CHAR immediately.
Locking: none.
+
Interrupts: caller dependent.
+
This call must not sleep
Other functions
@@ -370,6 +426,7 @@ uart_update_timeout(port,cflag,baud)
number of bits, parity, stop bits and baud rate.
Locking: caller is expected to take port->lock
+
Interrupts: n/a
uart_get_baud_rate(port,termios,old,min,max)
@@ -385,6 +442,7 @@ uart_get_baud_rate(port,termios,old,min,max)
Note: min..max must always allow 9600 baud to be selected.
Locking: caller dependent.
+
Interrupts: n/a
uart_get_divisor(port,baud)
@@ -395,6 +453,7 @@ uart_get_divisor(port,baud)
custom divisor instead.
Locking: caller dependent.
+
Interrupts: n/a
uart_match_port(port1,port2)
@@ -402,6 +461,7 @@ uart_match_port(port1,port2)
uart_port structures describe the same port.
Locking: n/a
+
Interrupts: n/a
uart_write_wakeup(port)
@@ -409,6 +469,7 @@ uart_write_wakeup(port)
characters in the transmit buffer have dropped below a threshold.
Locking: port->lock should be held.
+
Interrupts: n/a
uart_register_driver(drv)
@@ -419,6 +480,7 @@ uart_register_driver(drv)
registered using uart_add_one_port after this call has succeeded.
Locking: none
+
Interrupts: enabled
uart_unregister_driver()
@@ -427,15 +489,16 @@ uart_unregister_driver()
uart_remove_one_port() if it registered them with uart_add_one_port().
Locking: none
+
Interrupts: enabled
-uart_suspend_port()
+**uart_suspend_port()**
-uart_resume_port()
+**uart_resume_port()**
-uart_add_one_port()
+**uart_add_one_port()**
-uart_remove_one_port()
+**uart_remove_one_port()**
Other notes
-----------
@@ -444,7 +507,7 @@ It is intended some day to drop the 'unused' entries from uart_port, and
allow low level drivers to register their own individual uart_port's with
the core. This will allow drivers to use uart_port as a pointer to a
structure containing both the uart_port entry with their own extensions,
-thus:
+thus::
struct my_port {
struct uart_port port;
@@ -459,14 +522,14 @@ Some helpers are provided in order to set/get modem control lines via GPIO.
mctrl_gpio_init(port, idx):
This will get the {cts,rts,...}-gpios from device tree if they are
present and request them, set direction etc, and return an
- allocated structure. devm_* functions are used, so there's no need
+ allocated structure. `devm_*` functions are used, so there's no need
to call mctrl_gpio_free().
As this sets up the irq handling make sure to not handle changes to the
gpio input lines in your driver, too.
mctrl_gpio_free(dev, gpios):
This will free the requested gpios in mctrl_gpio_init().
- As devm_* functions are used, there's generally no need to call
+ As `devm_*` functions are used, there's generally no need to call
this function.
mctrl_gpio_to_gpiod(gpios, gidx)
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio
index 5d2a33be0bd8..156100f17c3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio
+++ b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio
@@ -1,28 +1,34 @@
-=============================================================================
- MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
- for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x
- Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
-=============================================================================
+=============================================================
+MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
+=============================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+ This file is outdated. It needs some care in order to make it
+ updated to Kernel 5.0 and upper
+
+Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
+
Date: 01/21/2008
-Content
+.. Content
-1. Introduction
-2. System Requirement
-3. Installation
- 3.1 Hardware installation
- 3.2 Driver files
- 3.3 Device naming convention
- 3.4 Module driver configuration
- 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
- 3.6 Custom configuration
- 3.7 Verify driver installation
-4. Utilities
-5. Setserial
-6. Troubleshooting
+ 1. Introduction
+ 2. System Requirement
+ 3. Installation
+ 3.1 Hardware installation
+ 3.2 Driver files
+ 3.3 Device naming convention
+ 3.4 Module driver configuration
+ 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
+ 3.6 Custom configuration
+ 3.7 Verify driver installation
+ 4. Utilities
+ 5. Setserial
+ 6. Troubleshooting
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Introduction
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
boards.
@@ -43,7 +49,7 @@ Content
C104H, C104HS,
CI-104J, CI-104JS,
CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
- (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P)
+ (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P),
POS-104UL,
CB-114,
CB-134I
@@ -63,13 +69,17 @@ Content
occurs, please contact Moxa at [email protected].
In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
- version. They are
- - msdiag Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
+ version. They are:
+
+ - msdiag
+ Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
Smartio/Industio boards.
- - msmon Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
+ - msmon
+ Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
- msterm A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
ports.
- - io-irq.exe Configuration program to setup ISA boards. Please note that
+ - io-irq.exe
+ Configuration program to setup ISA boards. Please note that
this program can only be executed under DOS.
All the drivers and utilities are published in form of source code under
@@ -84,65 +94,63 @@ Content
please refer to hardware installation procedure in the User's Manual.
We assume the user should be familiar with following documents.
+
- Serial-HOWTO
- Kernel-HOWTO
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System Requirement
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
- Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
- Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
- gcc version 2.72 or later
- Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Installation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
- 3.1 Hardware installation
- 3.2 Driver files
- 3.3 Device naming convention
- 3.4 Module driver configuration
- 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x.
- 3.6 Custom configuration
- 3.7 Verify driver installation
+3.1 Hardware installation
+=========================
+ There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
+ family multiport board.
- 3.1 Hardware installation
+ISA board
+---------
- There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
- family multiport board.
+ You'll have to configure CAP address, I/O address, Interrupt Vector
+ as well as IRQ before installing this driver. Please refer to hardware
+ installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
+ Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
- ISA board
- ---------
- You'll have to configure CAP address, I/O address, Interrupt Vector
- as well as IRQ before installing this driver. Please refer to hardware
- installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
- Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
+PCI/UPCI board
+--------------
- PCI/UPCI board
- --------------
- You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
- with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
- procedure in User's Manual in advance.
+ You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
+ with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
+ procedure in User's Manual in advance.
- PCI IRQ Sharing
- -----------
- Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
- 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
- together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
+PCI IRQ Sharing
+---------------
+ Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
+ 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
+ together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
- 3.2 Driver files
- The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
- first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
- directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below.
+3.2 Driver files
+================
+
+ The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
+ first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
+ directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below::
# cd /
# mkdir moxa
# cd /moxa
# tar xvf /dev/fd0
- or
+or::
# cd /
# mkdir moxa
@@ -151,278 +159,348 @@ Content
# tar xvfz mxser.tgz
- 3.3 Device naming convention
-
- You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
- Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
- run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
- If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
-
- Dialin and callout port
- -----------------------
- This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
- two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
- which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
- is "cumxx".
-
- Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
- -----------------------------------------------
- Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
- pre-defined as below.
-
- Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port
- 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7
- 2nd board ttyM8 - ttyM15 cum8 - cum15
- 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23
- 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31
-
-
- !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
- Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
- device instead.
- !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-
- Board sequence
- --------------
- This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
- in the driver. After all specified ISA board activated, PCI board
- will be installed in the system automatically driven.
- Therefore the board number is sorted by the CAP address of ISA boards.
- For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
- has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
-
- 3.4 Module driver configuration
- Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
- installation, please skip this paragraph.
-
-
- ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver--------------------
- 3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
- Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
- which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
- script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
- This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
- need to do this procedure when:
- a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
- section.
- b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
- add/delete one MOXA board.
- c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
- shell script "msmknod"
-
- The procedure is:
- # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
- # ./msmknod
-
- This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
- device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
- to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
- numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
- you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
- for more detailed procedure.
- Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
- naming.
-
- 3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
- Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
- all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
- But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
- code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
- "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
-
- Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
-
- # make clean; make install
-
- !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
- For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
- # make clean; make installsp1
-
- For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
- # make clean; make installsp2
- !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
-
- The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
- and copied to system directories respectively.
-
- ------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
- 3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
-
- # modprobe mxser <argument>
-
- will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
- if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
- <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
- information.
-
-
- ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
- 3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute
- "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
- "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
- However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
- eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
- achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
- the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
-
- But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
- to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
- rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
- manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
- encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
- completed, follow the below step.
-
- Run following command for setting rc files.
-
- # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
- # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
- # cd /etc/rc.d
-
- Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
- create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
- Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line,
-
- Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
-
- 3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
- you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
- board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
- as follows.
-
- modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
- | | | |
- | | | +- 4th ISA board
- | | +------ 3rd ISA board
- | +------------ 2nd ISA board
- +------------------- 1st ISA board
-
- 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
-
- Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
- source package.
-
- 3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel.
- # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
- # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
-
- For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
- # cd /usr/src
- # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
+3.3 Device naming convention
+============================
+
+ You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
+ Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
+ run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
+ If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
+
+Dialin and callout port
+-----------------------
+
+ This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
+ two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
+ which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
+ is "cumxx".
+
+Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+ Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
+ pre-defined as below.
+
+ ============ =============== ==============
+ Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port
+ 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7
+ 2nd board ttyM8 - ttyM15 cum8 - cum15
+ 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23
+ 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31
+ ============ =============== ==============
+
+.. note::
+
+ Under Kernel 2.6 and upper, the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
+ device instead.
+
+Board sequence
+--------------
+
+ This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
+ in the driver. After all specified ISA board activated, PCI board
+ will be installed in the system automatically driven.
+ Therefore the board number is sorted by the CAP address of ISA boards.
+ For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
+ has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
+
+3.4 Module driver configuration
+===============================
+
+ Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
+ installation, please skip this paragraph.
+
+
+ ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver --------------------
+
+3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+ Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
+ which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
+ script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
+ This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
+ need to do this procedure when:
+
+ a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
+ section.
+ b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
+ add/delete one MOXA board.
+ c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
+ shell script "msmknod"
+
+ The procedure is::
+
+ # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+ # ./msmknod
+
+ This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
+ device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
+ to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
+ numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
+ you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
+ for more detailed procedure.
+ Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
+ naming.
+
+3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
+-----------------------------------------
+
+ Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
+ all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
+ But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
+ code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
+ "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
+
+ Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
+
+ # make clean; make install
+
+ ..note::
+
+ For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
+ # make clean; make installsp1
+
+ For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
+ # make clean; make installsp2
+
+ The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
+ and copied to system directories respectively.
+
+------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
+
+3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
+--------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ # modprobe mxser <argument>
+
+ will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
+ if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
+ <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
+ information.
+
+------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
+
+3.4.4 Load the mxser driver
+---------------------------
+
+
+ For the above description, you may manually execute
+ "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
+ "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
+
+ However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
+ eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
+ achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
+ the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
+
+ But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
+ to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
+ rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
+ manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
+ encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
+ completed, follow the below step.
+
+ Run following command for setting rc files::
+
+ # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+ # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
+ # cd /etc/rc.d
+
+ Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
+ create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
+
+ Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line.
+
+ Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
+
+3.4.5. specify CAP address
+--------------------------
+
+ If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
+ you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
+ board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
+ as follows.::
+
+ modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
+ | | | |
+ | | | +- 4th ISA board
+ | | +------ 3rd ISA board
+ | +------------ 2nd ISA board
+ +-------------------1st ISA board
+
+3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
+================================================================
+
+ Note:
+ To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
+ source package.
+
+3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel
+----------------------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
+ # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
+
+ For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
+ # cd /usr/src
+ # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
+
+3.5.2 Create link
+-----------------
+ ::
- 3.5.2 Create link
# cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
# ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
- 3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user,
- please skip this step.
-
- In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
- parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
- assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
- install any ISA boards, you may skip to next portion.
- The instructions to modify driver source code are as
- below.
- a. # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
- # vi mxser.c
- b. Find the array mxserBoardCAP[] as below.
-
- static int mxserBoardCAP[]
- = {0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
-
- c. Change the address within this array using vi. For
- example, to driver 2 ISA boards with CAP address
- 0x280 and 0x180 as 1st and 2nd board. Just to change
- the source code as follows.
-
- static int mxserBoardCAP[]
- = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
-
- 3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
-
- Configure the kernel:
-
- # cd /usr/src/linux
- # make menuconfig
-
- You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
- devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
- SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
- select [Exit] to exit this program.
-
- 3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
- The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
- reference only.
- For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document.
-
- a. cd /usr/src/linux
- b. make clean /* take a few minutes */
- c. make dep /* take a few minutes */
- d. make bzImage /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
- e. make install /* copy boot image to correct position */
- f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
- correct position.
- g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
- 'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
- or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
- After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
+3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards.
+------------------------------------------
+
+ For PCI boards user, please skip this step.
+
+ In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
+ parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
+ assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
+ install any ISA boards, you may skip to next portion.
+ The instructions to modify driver source code are as
+ below.
+
+ a. run::
+
+ # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+ # vi mxser.c
+
+ b. Find the array mxserBoardCAP[] as below::
+
+ static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};
+
+ c. Change the address within this array using vi. For
+ example, to driver 2 ISA boards with CAP address
+ 0x280 and 0x180 as 1st and 2nd board. Just to change
+ the source code as follows::
+
+ static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
+
+3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
+--------------------------------
+
+ Configure the kernel::
+
+ # cd /usr/src/linux
+ # make menuconfig
+
+ You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
+ devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
+ SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
+ select [Exit] to exit this program.
+
+3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
+--------------------
+
+ The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
+ reference only.
+
+ For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document:
+
+ a. Run the following commands::
+
+ cd /usr/src/linux
+ make clean # take a few minutes
+ make dep # take a few minutes
+ make bzImage # take probably 10-20 minutes
+ make install # copy boot image to correct position
+
+ f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
+ correct position.
+ g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
+ 'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
+ or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
+ After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
directory /usr/src/linux.
- 3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
- # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
- # ./msmknod
+3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
+--------------------------------------
+
+ ::
+ # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
+ # ./msmknod
+
+3.5.7 Make utility
+------------------
+
+ ::
- 3.5.7 Make utility
# cd /moxa/mxser/utility
# make clean; make install
- 3.5.8 Reboot
-
-
-
- 3.6 Custom configuration
- Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
- still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
- change these parameters are shown as below.
-
- Change Device name
- ------------------
- If you'd like to use other device names instead of default naming
- convention, all you have to do is to modify the internal code
- within the shell script "msmknod". First, you have to open "msmknod"
- by vi. Locate each line contains "ttyM" and "cum" and change them
- to the device name you desired. "msmknod" creates the device names
- you need next time executed.
-
- Change Major number
- -------------------
- If major number 30 and 35 had been occupied, you may have to select
- 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
- major numbers.
-
- 3.6.1 Find free major numbers
- In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
- in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
- e.g. 40, 45.
- 3.6.2 Create special files
- Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
- specified major numbers.
- 3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
- Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
- contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below.
+3.5.8 Reboot
+------------
+
+
+
+3.6 Custom configuration
+========================
+
+ Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
+ still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
+ change these parameters are shown as below.
+
+a. Change Device name
+
+ If you'd like to use other device names instead of default naming
+ convention, all you have to do is to modify the internal code
+ within the shell script "msmknod". First, you have to open "msmknod"
+ by vi. Locate each line contains "ttyM" and "cum" and change them
+ to the device name you desired. "msmknod" creates the device names
+ you need next time executed.
+
+b. Change Major number
+
+ If major number 30 and 35 had been occupied, you may have to select
+ 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
+ major numbers.
+
+3.6.1 Find free major numbers
+-----------------------------
+
+ In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
+ in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
+ e.g. 40, 45.
+
+3.6.2 Create special files
+--------------------------
+
+ Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
+ specified major numbers.
+
+3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
+-----------------------------------------
+
+ Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
+ contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below::
+
#define MXSERMAJOR 40
#define MXSERCUMAJOR 45
- 3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
- 3.7 Verify driver installation
- You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
- log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
+ 3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
+
+3.7 Verify driver installation
+==============================
+
+ You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
+ log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Utilities
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
@@ -430,16 +508,19 @@ Content
Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
- msdiag - Diagnostic
- --------------------
+msdiag - Diagnostic
+===================
+
This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
board found by driver in the system.
- msmon - Port Monitoring
- -----------------------
+msmon - Port Monitoring
+=======================
+
This utility gives the user a quick view about all the MOXA ports'
activities. One can easily learn each port's total received/transmitted
(Rx/Tx) character count since the time when the monitoring is started.
+
Rx/Tx throughputs per second are also reported in interval basis (e.g.
the last 5 seconds) and in average basis (since the time the monitoring
is started). You can reset all ports' count by <HOME> key. <+> <->
@@ -447,19 +528,21 @@ Content
on the port, that cursor stay, to view the port's communication
parameters, signal status, and input/output queue.
- msterm - Terminal Emulation
- ---------------------------
+msterm - Terminal Emulation
+===========================
+
This utility provides data sending and receiving ability of all tty ports,
especially for MOXA ports. It is quite useful for testing simple
application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Setserial
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
+ ============== =========================================================
uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
close_delay set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
should be kept low while being closed.
@@ -475,49 +558,58 @@ Content
application requests 38.4kb.
divisor This option set the custom division.
baud_base This option set the base baud rate.
+ ============== =========================================================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Troubleshooting
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The boot time error messages and solutions are stated as clearly as
possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
support team to get more help.
- Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
+ Error msg:
+ More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
and after are ignored.
+
Solution:
To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
driver supports up to 4 boards.
- Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
+ Error msg:
+ Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
+
Solution:
Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
- Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
+ Error msg:
+ Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
+
Solution:
Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Please set
one IRQ (IRQ doesn't equal to zero) for one Moxa board.
- Error msg: No interrupt vector be set for Moxa ISA board(CAP=xxx).
+ Error msg:
+ No interrupt vector be set for Moxa ISA board(CAP=xxx).
+
Solution:
Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
"Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
- Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
+ Error msg:
+ Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
+
Solution:
Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
Moxa driver.
- Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
+ Error msg:
+ Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
+
Solution:
Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
-
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
index 875361bb7cb4..f3ad9fd26408 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
@@ -1,28 +1,31 @@
-n_gsm.c GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO
-===================================================
+==============================
+GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO
+==============================
This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
-detailed in the following 3GPP document :
-http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip
+detailed in the following 3GPP document:
+
+ http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip
This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G
modems connected to a physical serial port.
How to use it
-------------
-1- initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through
-its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less
-parameters to this command,
-2- switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using
-TIOCSETD ioctl,
-3- configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl,
+1. initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through
+ its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less
+ parameters to this command,
+2. switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using
+ TIOCSETD ioctl,
+3. configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl,
Major parts of the initialization program :
-(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c)
-#include <linux/gsmmux.h>
-#define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */
-#define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200
-#define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0
+(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c)::
+
+ #include <linux/gsmmux.h>
+ #define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */
+ #define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200
+ #define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0
int ldisc = N_GSM0710;
struct gsm_config c;
@@ -60,37 +63,41 @@ Major parts of the initialization program :
daemon(0,0);
pause();
-4- create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care,
-each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions,
-for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management
-of the mux)
+4. create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care,
+ each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions,
+ for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management
+ of the mux)::
-MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}`
-for i in `seq 1 4`; do
+ MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}`
+ for i in `seq 1 4`; do
mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i
-done
+ done
-5- use these devices as plain serial ports.
-for example, it's possible :
-- and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1
-- to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2
+5. use these devices as plain serial ports.
-6- first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port.
+ for example, it's possible:
-Note that after closing the physical port the modem is still in multiplexing
-mode. This may prevent a successful re-opening of the port later. To avoid
-this situation either reset the modem if your hardware allows that or send
-a disconnect command frame manually before initializing the multiplexing mode
-for the second time. The byte sequence for the disconnect command frame is:
-0xf9, 0x03, 0xef, 0x03, 0xc3, 0x16, 0xf9.
+ - and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1
+ - to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2
+
+6. first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port.
+
+ Note that after closing the physical port the modem is still in multiplexing
+ mode. This may prevent a successful re-opening of the port later. To avoid
+ this situation either reset the modem if your hardware allows that or send
+ a disconnect command frame manually before initializing the multiplexing mode
+ for the second time. The byte sequence for the disconnect command frame is::
+
+ 0xf9, 0x03, 0xef, 0x03, 0xc3, 0x16, 0xf9.
Additional Documentation
------------------------
More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial
modems can be found in the following documents :
-http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616
-http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf
-http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx
-http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf
+
+- http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616
+- http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf
+- http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx
+- http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf
11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
index 60b039891057..23761eae4282 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/rocket.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,22 @@
-Comtrol(tm) RocketPort(R)/RocketModem(TM) Series
+================================================
+Comtrol(tm) RocketPort(R)/RocketModem(TM) Series
+================================================
+
Device Driver for the Linux Operating System
+============================================
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-PRODUCT OVERVIEW
+Product overview
----------------
This driver provides a loadable kernel driver for the Comtrol RocketPort
-and RocketModem PCI boards. These boards provide, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32
+and RocketModem PCI boards. These boards provide, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32
high-speed serial ports or modems. This driver supports up to a combination
of four RocketPort or RocketModems boards in one machine simultaneously.
This file assumes that you are using the RocketPort driver which is
-integrated into the kernel sources.
+integrated into the kernel sources.
-The driver can also be installed as an external module using the usual
-"make;make install" routine. This external module driver, obtainable
+The driver can also be installed as an external module using the usual
+"make;make install" routine. This external module driver, obtainable
from the Comtrol website listed below, is useful for updating the driver
or installing it into kernels which do not have the driver configured
into them. Installations instructions for the external module
@@ -29,57 +31,59 @@ information on how to set the DIP switches.
You pass the I/O port to the driver using the following module parameters:
-board1 : I/O port for the first ISA board
-board2 : I/O port for the second ISA board
-board3 : I/O port for the third ISA board
-board4 : I/O port for the fourth ISA board
+board1:
+ I/O port for the first ISA board
+board2:
+ I/O port for the second ISA board
+board3:
+ I/O port for the third ISA board
+board4:
+ I/O port for the fourth ISA board
There is a set of utilities and scripts provided with the external driver
-( downloadable from http://www.comtrol.com ) that ease the configuration and
+(downloadable from http://www.comtrol.com) that ease the configuration and
setup of the ISA cards.
The RocketModem II PCI boards require firmware to be loaded into the card
before it will function. The driver has only been tested as a module for this
board.
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
+Installation Procedures
-----------------------
-RocketPort/RocketModem PCI cards require no driver configuration, they are
+RocketPort/RocketModem PCI cards require no driver configuration, they are
automatically detected and configured.
-The RocketPort driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built
+The RocketPort driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built
into the kernel. This is selected, as for other drivers, through the `make config`
-command from the root of the Linux source tree during the kernel build process.
+command from the root of the Linux source tree during the kernel build process.
The RocketPort/RocketModem serial ports installed by this driver are assigned
-device major number 46, and will be named /dev/ttyRx, where x is the port number
+device major number 46, and will be named /dev/ttyRx, where x is the port number
starting at zero (ex. /dev/ttyR0, /devttyR1, ...). If you have multiple cards
installed in the system, the mapping of port names to serial ports is displayed
in the system log at /var/log/messages.
If installed as a module, the module must be loaded. This can be done
manually by entering "modprobe rocket". To have the module loaded automatically
-upon system boot, edit a /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf file and add the line
+upon system boot, edit a `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` file and add the line
"alias char-major-46 rocket".
In order to use the ports, their device names (nodes) must be created with mknod.
-This is only required once, the system will retain the names once created. To
-create the RocketPort/RocketModem device names, use the command
-"mknod /dev/ttyRx c 46 x" where x is the port number starting at zero. For example:
+This is only required once, the system will retain the names once created. To
+create the RocketPort/RocketModem device names, use the command
+"mknod /dev/ttyRx c 46 x" where x is the port number starting at zero.
->mknod /dev/ttyR0 c 46 0
->mknod /dev/ttyR1 c 46 1
->mknod /dev/ttyR2 c 46 2
+For example::
+
+ > mknod /dev/ttyR0 c 46 0
+ > mknod /dev/ttyR1 c 46 1
+ > mknod /dev/ttyR2 c 46 2
The Linux script MAKEDEV will create the first 16 ttyRx device names (nodes)
-for you:
+for you::
->/dev/MAKEDEV ttyR
-
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+ >/dev/MAKEDEV ttyR
ISA Rocketport Boards
---------------------
@@ -89,7 +93,7 @@ card before installing and using it. This is done by setting a set of DIP
switches on the Rocketport board.
-SETTING THE I/O ADDRESS
+Setting the I/O address
-----------------------
Before installing RocketPort(R) or RocketPort RA boards, you must find
@@ -130,40 +134,36 @@ the first 4 bytes of that range are used by the first board. You would
need to set the second, third, or fourth board to one of the next available
blocks such as 0x180.
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+RocketPort and RocketPort RA SW1 Settings::
-RocketPort and RocketPort RA SW1 Settings:
+ +-------------------------------+
+ | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
+ +-------+-------+---------------+
+ | Unused| Card | I/O Port Block|
+ +-------------------------------+
- +-------------------------------+
- | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 |
- +-------+-------+---------------+
- | Unused| Card | I/O Port Block|
- +-------------------------------+
+ DIP Switches DIP Switches
+ 7 8 6 5
+ =================== ===================
+ On On UNUSED, MUST BE ON. On On First Card <==== Default
+ On Off Second Card
+ Off On Third Card
+ Off Off Fourth Card
-DIP Switches DIP Switches
-7 8 6 5
-=================== ===================
-On On UNUSED, MUST BE ON. On On First Card <==== Default
- On Off Second Card
- Off On Third Card
- Off Off Fourth Card
+ DIP Switches I/O Address Range
+ 4 3 2 1 Used by the First Card
+ =====================================
+ On Off On Off 100-143
+ On Off Off On 140-183
+ On Off Off Off 180-1C3 <==== Default
+ Off On On Off 200-243
+ Off On Off On 240-283
+ Off On Off Off 280-2C3
+ Off Off On Off 300-343
+ Off Off Off On 340-383
+ Off Off Off Off 380-3C3
-DIP Switches I/O Address Range
-4 3 2 1 Used by the First Card
-=====================================
-On Off On Off 100-143
-On Off Off On 140-183
-On Off Off Off 180-1C3 <==== Default
-Off On On Off 200-243
-Off On Off On 240-283
-Off On Off Off 280-2C3
-Off Off On Off 300-343
-Off Off Off On 340-383
-Off Off Off Off 380-3C3
-
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-REPORTING BUGS
+Reporting Bugs
--------------
For technical support, please provide the following
@@ -171,19 +171,15 @@ information: Driver version, kernel release, distribution of
kernel, and type of board you are using. Error messages and log
printouts port configuration details are especially helpful.
-USA
- Phone: (612) 494-4100
- FAX: (612) 494-4199
- email: [email protected]
+USA:
+ :Phone: (612) 494-4100
+ :FAX: (612) 494-4199
+ :email: [email protected]
-Comtrol Europe
- Phone: +44 (0) 1 869 323-220
- FAX: +44 (0) 1 869 323-211
- email: [email protected]
+Comtrol Europe:
+ :Phone: +44 (0) 1 869 323-220
+ :FAX: +44 (0) 1 869 323-211
+ :email: [email protected]
Web: http://www.comtrol.com
FTP: ftp.comtrol.com
-
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt
index 3193d24a2b0f..d990143de0c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-iso7816.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,15 @@
- ISO7816 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
+=============================
+ISO7816 Serial Communications
+=============================
-1. INTRODUCTION
+1. Introduction
+===============
ISO/IEC7816 is a series of standards specifying integrated circuit cards (ICC)
also known as smart cards.
-2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS
+2. Hardware-related considerations
+==================================
Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Microchip AT91) contain a built-in mode capable of
handling communication with a smart card.
@@ -15,7 +19,8 @@
available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and
vice versa.
-3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL
+3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel
+==================================================
The Linux kernel provides the serial_iso7816 structure (see [1]) to handle
ISO7816 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure
@@ -27,10 +32,11 @@
to TIOCGISO7816 and TIOCSISO7816 ioctls (see below). The iso7816_config
callback receives a pointer to struct serial_iso7816.
-4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL
+4. Usage from user-level
+========================
From user-level, ISO7816 configuration can be get/set using the previous
- ioctls. For instance, to set ISO7816 you can use the following code:
+ ioctls. For instance, to set ISO7816 you can use the following code::
#include <linux/serial.h>
@@ -78,6 +84,7 @@
/* Error handling. See errno. */
}
-5. REFERENCES
+5. References
+=============
[1] include/uapi/linux/serial.h
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt
index ce0c1a9b8aab..6bc824f948f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
+===========================
+RS485 Serial Communications
+===========================
-1. INTRODUCTION
+1. Introduction
+===============
EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the
electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced
@@ -9,7 +12,8 @@
because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically
noisy environments.
-2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS
+2. Hardware-related Considerations
+==================================
Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in
half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by
@@ -22,7 +26,8 @@
available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and
vice versa.
-3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL
+3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel
+==================================================
The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle
RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485
@@ -38,10 +43,11 @@
to TIOCSRS485 and TIOCGRS485 ioctls (see below). The rs485_config callback
receives a pointer to struct serial_rs485.
-4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL
+4. Usage from user-level
+========================
From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous
- ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code:
+ ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code::
#include <linux/serial.h>
@@ -89,7 +95,9 @@
/* Error handling. See errno. */
}
-5. REFERENCES
+5. References
+=============
[1] include/uapi/linux/serial.h
+
[2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
index b48780977a68..dd972caacf3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
- The Lockronomicon
+=================
+The Lockronomicon
+=================
Your guide to the ancient and twisted locking policies of the tty layer and
the warped logic behind them. Beware all ye who read on.
@@ -9,12 +10,12 @@ Line Discipline
---------------
Line disciplines are registered with tty_register_ldisc() passing the
-discipline number and the ldisc structure. At the point of registration the
+discipline number and the ldisc structure. At the point of registration the
discipline must be ready to use and it is possible it will get used before
the call returns success. If the call returns an error then it won't get
called. Do not re-use ldisc numbers as they are part of the userspace ABI
and writing over an existing ldisc will cause demons to eat your computer.
-After the return the ldisc data has been copied so you may free your own
+After the return the ldisc data has been copied so you may free your own
copy of the structure. You must not re-register over the top of the line
discipline even with the same data or your computer again will be eaten by
demons.
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ code manages the module counts this should not usually be a concern.
Heed this warning: the reference count field of the registered copies of the
tty_ldisc structure in the ldisc table counts the number of lines using this
-discipline. The reference count of the tty_ldisc structure within a tty
+discipline. The reference count of the tty_ldisc structure within a tty
counts the number of active users of the ldisc at this instant. In effect it
counts the number of threads of execution within an ldisc method (plus those
about to enter and exit although this detail matters not).
@@ -34,9 +35,11 @@ about to enter and exit although this detail matters not).
Line Discipline Methods
-----------------------
-TTY side interfaces:
+TTY side interfaces
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-open() - Called when the line discipline is attached to
+======================= =======================================================
+open() Called when the line discipline is attached to
the terminal. No other call into the line
discipline for this tty will occur until it
completes successfully. Should initialize any
@@ -47,66 +50,69 @@ open() - Called when the line discipline is attached to
Returning an error will prevent the ldisc from
being attached. Can sleep.
-close() - This is called on a terminal when the line
+close() This is called on a terminal when the line
discipline is being unplugged. At the point of
execution no further users will enter the
ldisc code for this tty. Can sleep.
-hangup() - Called when the tty line is hung up.
+hangup() Called when the tty line is hung up.
The line discipline should cease I/O to the tty.
No further calls into the ldisc code will occur.
The return value is ignored. Can sleep.
-read() - (optional) A process requests reading data from
+read() (optional) A process requests reading data from
the line. Multiple read calls may occur in parallel
and the ldisc must deal with serialization issues.
If not defined, the process will receive an EIO
error. May sleep.
-write() - (optional) A process requests writing data to the
+write() (optional) A process requests writing data to the
line. Multiple write calls are serialized by the
tty layer for the ldisc. If not defined, the
process will receive an EIO error. May sleep.
-flush_buffer() - (optional) May be called at any point between
+flush_buffer() (optional) May be called at any point between
open and close, and instructs the line discipline
to empty its input buffer.
-set_termios() - (optional) Called on termios structure changes.
+set_termios() (optional) Called on termios structure changes.
The caller passes the old termios data and the
current data is in the tty. Called under the
termios semaphore so allowed to sleep. Serialized
against itself only.
-poll() - (optional) Check the status for the poll/select
+poll() (optional) Check the status for the poll/select
calls. Multiple poll calls may occur in parallel.
May sleep.
-ioctl() - (optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the
+ioctl() (optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the
tty layer that might be for the ldisc. Multiple
ioctl calls may occur in parallel. May sleep.
-compat_ioctl() - (optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed
+compat_ioctl() (optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed
to the tty layer that might be for the ldisc.
Multiple ioctl calls may occur in parallel.
May sleep.
+======================= =======================================================
-Driver Side Interfaces:
+Driver Side Interfaces
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-receive_buf() - (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
+======================= =======================================================
+receive_buf() (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for
processing. The number of bytes is guaranteed not
to exceed the current value of tty->receive_room.
All bytes must be processed.
-receive_buf2() - (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
+receive_buf2() (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand
a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for
processing. Returns the number of bytes processed.
If both receive_buf() and receive_buf2() are
defined, receive_buf2() should be preferred.
-write_wakeup() - May be called at any point between open and close.
+write_wakeup() May be called at any point between open and close.
The TTY_DO_WRITE_WAKEUP flag indicates if a call
is needed but always races versus calls. Thus the
ldisc must be careful about setting order and to
@@ -117,17 +123,20 @@ write_wakeup() - May be called at any point between open and close.
is permitted to call the driver write method from
this function. In such a situation defer it.
-dcd_change() - Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status
+dcd_change() Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status
changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp
cannot be NULL.
+======================= =======================================================
Driver Access
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Line discipline methods can call the following methods of the underlying
hardware driver through the function pointers within the tty->driver
structure:
+======================= =======================================================
write() Write a block of characters to the tty device.
Returns the number of characters accepted. The
character buffer passed to this method is already
@@ -189,13 +198,16 @@ wait_until_sent() Waits until the device has written out all of the
characters in its transmitter FIFO.
send_xchar() Send a high-priority XON/XOFF character to the device.
+======================= =======================================================
Flags
+^^^^^
Line discipline methods have access to tty->flags field containing the
following interesting flags:
+======================= =======================================================
TTY_THROTTLED Driver input is throttled. The ldisc should call
tty->driver->unthrottle() in order to resume
reception when it is ready to process more data.
@@ -212,102 +224,105 @@ TTY_OTHER_CLOSED Device is a pty and the other side has closed.
TTY_NO_WRITE_SPLIT Prevent driver from splitting up writes into
smaller chunks.
+======================= =======================================================
Locking
+^^^^^^^
Callers to the line discipline functions from the tty layer are required to
take line discipline locks. The same is true of calls from the driver side
but not yet enforced.
-Three calls are now provided
+Three calls are now provided::
ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref(tty);
takes a handle to the line discipline in the tty and returns it. If no ldisc
is currently attached or the ldisc is being closed and re-opened at this
point then NULL is returned. While this handle is held the ldisc will not
-change or go away.
+change or go away::
tty_ldisc_deref(ldisc)
Returns the ldisc reference and allows the ldisc to be closed. Returning the
reference takes away your right to call the ldisc functions until you take
-a new reference.
+a new reference::
ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref_wait(tty);
Performs the same function as tty_ldisc_ref except that it will wait for an
-ldisc change to complete and then return a reference to the new ldisc.
+ldisc change to complete and then return a reference to the new ldisc.
While these functions are slightly slower than the old code they should have
minimal impact as most receive logic uses the flip buffers and they only
need to take a reference when they push bits up through the driver.
-A caution: The ldisc->open(), ldisc->close() and driver->set_ldisc
+A caution: The ldisc->open(), ldisc->close() and driver->set_ldisc
functions are called with the ldisc unavailable. Thus tty_ldisc_ref will
fail in this situation if used within these functions. Ldisc and driver
-code calling its own functions must be careful in this case.
+code calling its own functions must be careful in this case.
Driver Interface
----------------
-open() - Called when a device is opened. May sleep
+======================= =======================================================
+open() Called when a device is opened. May sleep
-close() - Called when a device is closed. At the point of
- return from this call the driver must make no
+close() Called when a device is closed. At the point of
+ return from this call the driver must make no
further ldisc calls of any kind. May sleep
-write() - Called to write bytes to the device. May not
- sleep. May occur in parallel in special cases.
+write() Called to write bytes to the device. May not
+ sleep. May occur in parallel in special cases.
Because this includes panic paths drivers generally
shouldn't try and do clever locking here.
-put_char() - Stuff a single character onto the queue. The
+put_char() Stuff a single character onto the queue. The
driver is guaranteed following up calls to
flush_chars.
-flush_chars() - Ask the kernel to write put_char queue
+flush_chars() Ask the kernel to write put_char queue
-write_room() - Return the number of characters that can be stuffed
+write_room() Return the number of characters that can be stuffed
into the port buffers without overflow (or less).
The ldisc is responsible for being intelligent
- about multi-threading of write_room/write calls
+ about multi-threading of write_room/write calls
-ioctl() - Called when an ioctl may be for the driver
+ioctl() Called when an ioctl may be for the driver
-set_termios() - Called on termios change, serialized against
+set_termios() Called on termios change, serialized against
itself by a semaphore. May sleep.
-set_ldisc() - Notifier for discipline change. At the point this
+set_ldisc() Notifier for discipline change. At the point this
is done the discipline is not yet usable. Can now
sleep (I think)
-throttle() - Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to do flow
+throttle() Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to do flow
control. Serialization including with unthrottle
is the job of the ldisc layer.
-unthrottle() - Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to stop flow
+unthrottle() Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to stop flow
control.
-stop() - Ldisc notifier to the driver to stop output. As with
+stop() Ldisc notifier to the driver to stop output. As with
throttle the serializations with start() are down
to the ldisc layer.
-start() - Ldisc notifier to the driver to start output.
+start() Ldisc notifier to the driver to start output.
-hangup() - Ask the tty driver to cause a hangup initiated
+hangup() Ask the tty driver to cause a hangup initiated
from the host side. [Can sleep ??]
-break_ctl() - Send RS232 break. Can sleep. Can get called in
+break_ctl() Send RS232 break. Can sleep. Can get called in
parallel, driver must serialize (for now), and
with write calls.
-wait_until_sent() - Wait for characters to exit the hardware queue
+wait_until_sent() Wait for characters to exit the hardware queue
of the driver. Can sleep
-send_xchar() - Send XON/XOFF and if possible jump the queue with
+send_xchar() Send XON/XOFF and if possible jump the queue with
it in order to get fast flow control responses.
Cannot sleep ??
-
+======================= =======================================================
--
2.20.1
Convert docs to ReST and add them to the arch-specific
book.
The conversion here was trivial, as almost every file there
was already using an elegant format close to ReST standard.
The changes were mostly to mark literal blocks and add a few
missing section title identifiers.
One note with regards to "--": on Sphinx, this can't be used
to identify a list, as it will format it badly. This can be
used, however, to identify a long hyphen - and "---" is an
even longer one.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt | 28 ++-
Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt | 23 +--
Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt | 46 +++--
Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt | 18 +-
.../powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt | 108 +++++------
.../powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt | 117 ++++++------
Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt | 108 ++++++-----
Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst | 13 +-
Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt | 12 +-
.../powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt | 1 +
Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt | 169 +++++++++---------
Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt | 37 ++--
Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt | 29 +--
.../powerpc/transactional_memory.txt | 45 ++---
18 files changed, 447 insertions(+), 346 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
index 2feaa6619658..882e5af02b9c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
+=====================
DAWR issues on POWER9
-============================
+=====================
On POWER9 the DAWR can cause a checkstop if it points to cache
inhibited (CI) memory. Currently Linux has no way to disinguish CI
memory when configuring the DAWR, so (for now) the DAWR is disabled by
-this commit:
+this commit::
commit 9654153158d3e0684a1bdb76dbababdb7111d5a0
Author: Michael Neuling <[email protected]>
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ this commit:
powerpc: Disable DAWR in the base POWER9 CPU features
Technical Details:
-============================
+==================
DAWR has 6 different ways of being set.
1) ptrace
@@ -37,7 +38,7 @@ DAWR on the migration.
For xmon, the 'bd' command will return an error on P9.
Consequences for users
-============================
+======================
For GDB watchpoints (ie 'watch' command) on POWER9 bare metal , GDB
will accept the command. Unfortunately since there is no hardware
@@ -55,4 +56,3 @@ guest is migrated to a POWER9 host, the watchpoint will be lost on the
POWER9. Loads and stores to the watchpoint locations will not be
trapped in GDB. The watchpoint is remembered, so if the guest is
migrated back to the POWER8 host, it will start working again.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt
index d60fced5e1cc..a6292afba573 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/bootwrapper.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+========================
The PowerPC boot wrapper
-------------------------
+========================
+
Copyright (C) Secret Lab Technologies Ltd.
PowerPC image targets compresses and wraps the kernel image (vmlinux) with
@@ -21,6 +23,7 @@ it uses the wrapper script (arch/powerpc/boot/wrapper) to generate target
image. The details of the build system is discussed in the next section.
Currently, the following image format targets exist:
+ ==================== ========================================================
cuImage.%: Backwards compatible uImage for older version of
U-Boot (for versions that don't understand the device
tree). This image embeds a device tree blob inside
@@ -29,31 +32,36 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
with boot wrapper code that extracts data from the old
bd_info structure and loads the data into the device
tree before jumping into the kernel.
- Because of the series of #ifdefs found in the
+
+ Because of the series of #ifdefs found in the
bd_info structure used in the old U-Boot interfaces,
cuImages are platform specific. Each specific
U-Boot platform has a different platform init file
which populates the embedded device tree with data
from the platform specific bd_info file. The platform
specific cuImage platform init code can be found in
- arch/powerpc/boot/cuboot.*.c. Selection of the correct
+ `arch/powerpc/boot/cuboot.*.c`. Selection of the correct
cuImage init code for a specific board can be found in
the wrapper structure.
+
dtbImage.%: Similar to zImage, except device tree blob is embedded
inside the image instead of provided by firmware. The
output image file can be either an elf file or a flat
binary depending on the platform.
- dtbImages are used on systems which do not have an
+
+ dtbImages are used on systems which do not have an
interface for passing a device tree directly.
dtbImages are similar to simpleImages except that
dtbImages have platform specific code for extracting
data from the board firmware, but simpleImages do not
talk to the firmware at all.
- PlayStation 3 support uses dtbImage. So do Embedded
+
+ PlayStation 3 support uses dtbImage. So do Embedded
Planet boards using the PlanetCore firmware. Board
specific initialization code is typically found in a
file named arch/powerpc/boot/<platform>.c; but this
can be overridden by the wrapper script.
+
simpleImage.%: Firmware independent compressed image that does not
depend on any particular firmware interface and embeds
a device tree blob. This image is a flat binary that
@@ -61,14 +69,16 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
Firmware cannot pass any configuration data to the
kernel with this image type and it depends entirely on
the embedded device tree for all information.
- The simpleImage is useful for booting systems with
+
+ The simpleImage is useful for booting systems with
an unknown firmware interface or for booting from
a debugger when no firmware is present (such as on
the Xilinx Virtex platform). The only assumption that
simpleImage makes is that RAM is correctly initialized
and that the MMU is either off or has RAM mapped to
base address 0.
- simpleImage also supports inserting special platform
+
+ simpleImage also supports inserting special platform
specific initialization code to the start of the bootup
sequence. The virtex405 platform uses this feature to
ensure that the cache is invalidated before caching
@@ -81,9 +91,11 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
named (virtex405-<board>.dts). Search the wrapper
script for 'virtex405' and see the file
arch/powerpc/boot/virtex405-head.S for details.
+
treeImage.%; Image format for used with OpenBIOS firmware found
on some ppc4xx hardware. This image embeds a device
tree blob inside the image.
+
uImage: Native image format used by U-Boot. The uImage target
does not add any boot code. It just wraps a compressed
vmlinux in the uImage data structure. This image
@@ -91,12 +103,14 @@ Currently, the following image format targets exist:
a device tree to the kernel at boot. If using an older
version of U-Boot, then you need to use a cuImage
instead.
+
zImage.%: Image format which does not embed a device tree.
Used by OpenFirmware and other firmware interfaces
which are able to supply a device tree. This image
expects firmware to provide the device tree at boot.
Typically, if you have general purpose PowerPC
hardware then you want this image format.
+ ==================== ========================================================
Image types which embed a device tree blob (simpleImage, dtbImage, treeImage,
and cuImage) all generate the device tree blob from a file in the
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt
index fc08e22feb1a..1e063c5440c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_families.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============
CPU Families
============
@@ -8,8 +9,8 @@ and are supported by arch/powerpc.
Book3S (aka sPAPR)
------------------
- - Hash MMU
- - Mix of 32 & 64 bit
+- Hash MMU
+- Mix of 32 & 64 bit::
+--------------+ +----------------+
| Old POWER | --------------> | RS64 (threads) |
@@ -108,8 +109,8 @@ Book3S (aka sPAPR)
IBM BookE
---------
- - Software loaded TLB.
- - All 32 bit
+- Software loaded TLB.
+- All 32 bit::
+--------------+
| 401 |
@@ -155,8 +156,8 @@ IBM BookE
Motorola/Freescale 8xx
----------------------
- - Software loaded with hardware assist.
- - All 32 bit
+- Software loaded with hardware assist.
+- All 32 bit::
+-------------+
| MPC8xx Core |
@@ -166,9 +167,9 @@ Motorola/Freescale 8xx
Freescale BookE
---------------
- - Software loaded TLB.
- - e6500 adds HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
- - Mix of 32 & 64 bit
+- Software loaded TLB.
+- e6500 adds HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
+- Mix of 32 & 64 bit::
+--------------+
| e200 |
@@ -207,8 +208,8 @@ Freescale BookE
IBM A2 core
-----------
- - Book3E, software loaded TLB + HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
- - 64 bit
+- Book3E, software loaded TLB + HW loaded indirect TLB entries.
+- 64 bit::
+--------------+ +----------------+
| A2 core | --> | WSP |
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
index ae09df8722c8..b7bcdd2f41bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+============
+CPU Features
+============
+
Hollis Blanchard <[email protected]>
5 Jun 2002
@@ -32,7 +36,7 @@ anyways).
After detecting the processor type, the kernel patches out sections of code
that shouldn't be used by writing nop's over it. Using cpufeatures requires
just 2 macros (found in arch/powerpc/include/asm/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
-transfer_to_handler:
+transfer_to_handler::
#ifdef CONFIG_ALTIVEC
BEGIN_FTR_SECTION
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
index c5e8d5098ed3..99e704afb09d 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cxl.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+====================================
Coherent Accelerator Interface (CXL)
====================================
@@ -21,6 +22,8 @@ Introduction
Hardware overview
=================
+ ::
+
POWER8/9 FPGA
+----------+ +---------+
| | | |
@@ -59,14 +62,16 @@ Hardware overview
the fault. The context to which this fault is serviced is based on
who owns that acceleration function.
- POWER8 <-----> PSL Version 8 is compliant to the CAIA Version 1.0.
- POWER9 <-----> PSL Version 9 is compliant to the CAIA Version 2.0.
+ - POWER8 <------> PSL Version 8 is compliant to the CAIA Version 1.0.
+ - POWER9 <------> PSL Version 9 is compliant to the CAIA Version 2.0.
+
This PSL Version 9 provides new features such as:
+
* Interaction with the nest MMU on the P9 chip.
* Native DMA support.
* Supports sending ASB_Notify messages for host thread wakeup.
* Supports Atomic operations.
- * ....
+ * etc.
Cards with a PSL9 won't work on a POWER8 system and cards with a
PSL8 won't work on a POWER9 system.
@@ -147,7 +152,9 @@ User API
master devices.
A userspace library libcxl is available here:
+
https://github.com/ibm-capi/libcxl
+
This provides a C interface to this kernel API.
open
@@ -165,7 +172,8 @@ open
When all available contexts are allocated the open call will fail
and return -ENOSPC.
- Note: IRQs need to be allocated for each context, which may limit
+ Note:
+ IRQs need to be allocated for each context, which may limit
the number of contexts that can be created, and therefore
how many times the device can be opened. The POWER8 CAPP
supports 2040 IRQs and 3 are used by the kernel, so 2037 are
@@ -186,7 +194,9 @@ ioctl
updated as userspace allocates and frees memory. This ioctl
returns once the AFU context is started.
- Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_ioctl_start_work:
+ Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_ioctl_start_work
+
+ ::
struct cxl_ioctl_start_work {
__u64 flags;
@@ -269,7 +279,7 @@ read
The buffer passed to read() must be at least 4K bytes.
The result of the read will be a buffer of one or more events,
- each event is of type struct cxl_event, of varying size.
+ each event is of type struct cxl_event, of varying size::
struct cxl_event {
struct cxl_event_header header;
@@ -280,7 +290,9 @@ read
};
};
- The struct cxl_event_header is defined as:
+ The struct cxl_event_header is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_header {
__u16 type;
@@ -307,7 +319,9 @@ read
For future extensions and padding.
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_AFU_INTERRUPT then the event
- structure is defined as:
+ structure is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_afu_interrupt {
__u16 flags;
@@ -326,7 +340,9 @@ read
For future extensions and padding.
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_DATA_STORAGE then the event
- structure is defined as:
+ structure is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_data_storage {
__u16 flags;
@@ -356,7 +372,9 @@ read
For future extensions
If the event type is CXL_EVENT_AFU_ERROR then the event structure
- is defined as:
+ is defined as
+
+ ::
struct cxl_event_afu_error {
__u16 flags;
@@ -393,15 +411,15 @@ open
ioctl
-----
-CXL_IOCTL_DOWNLOAD_IMAGE:
-CXL_IOCTL_VALIDATE_IMAGE:
+CXL_IOCTL_DOWNLOAD_IMAGE / CXL_IOCTL_VALIDATE_IMAGE:
Starts and controls flashing a new FPGA image. Partial
reconfiguration is not supported (yet), so the image must contain
a copy of the PSL and AFU(s). Since an image can be quite large,
the caller may have to iterate, splitting the image in smaller
chunks.
- Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_adapter_image:
+ Takes a pointer to a struct cxl_adapter_image::
+
struct cxl_adapter_image {
__u64 flags;
__u64 data;
@@ -442,7 +460,7 @@ Udev rules
The following udev rules could be used to create a symlink to the
most logical chardev to use in any programming mode (afuX.Yd for
dedicated, afuX.Ys for afu directed), since the API is virtually
- identical for each:
+ identical for each::
SUBSYSTEM=="cxl", ATTRS{mode}=="dedicated_process", SYMLINK="cxl/%b"
SUBSYSTEM=="cxl", ATTRS{mode}=="afu_directed", \
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
index a64bdaa0a1cf..9d79962f1999 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cxlflash.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================
+Coherent Accelerator (CXL) Flash
+================================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -58,7 +62,7 @@ Overview
The CXL Flash Adapter Driver establishes a master context with the
AFU. It uses memory mapped I/O (MMIO) for this control and setup. The
- Adapter Problem Space Memory Map looks like this:
+ Adapter Problem Space Memory Map looks like this::
+-------------------------------+
| 512 * 64 KB User MMIO |
@@ -375,7 +379,7 @@ CXL Flash Driver Host IOCTLs
Each host adapter instance that is supported by the cxlflash driver
has a special character device associated with it to enable a set of
host management function. These character devices are hosted in a
- class dedicated for cxlflash and can be accessed via /dev/cxlflash/*.
+ class dedicated for cxlflash and can be accessed via `/dev/cxlflash/*`.
Applications can be written to perform various functions using the
host ioctl APIs below.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt
index ece300c64f76..2ab99006014c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dscr.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- DSCR (Data Stream Control Register)
- ================================================
+===================================
+DSCR (Data Stream Control Register)
+===================================
DSCR register in powerpc allows user to have some control of prefetch of data
stream in the processor. Please refer to the ISA documents or related manual
@@ -10,14 +11,17 @@ user interface.
(A) Data Structures:
- (1) thread_struct:
+ (1) thread_struct::
+
dscr /* Thread DSCR value */
dscr_inherit /* Thread has changed default DSCR */
- (2) PACA:
+ (2) PACA::
+
dscr_default /* per-CPU DSCR default value */
- (3) sysfs.c:
+ (3) sysfs.c::
+
dscr_default /* System DSCR default value */
(B) Scheduler Changes:
@@ -35,8 +39,8 @@ user interface.
(C) SYSFS Interface:
- Global DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/dscr_default
- CPU specific DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/dscr
+ - Global DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/dscr_default
+ - CPU specific DSCR default: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuN/dscr
Changing the global DSCR default in the sysfs will change all the CPU
specific DSCR defaults immediately in their PACA structures. Again if
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
index 678189280bb4..438a87ebc095 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
+==========================
+PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
+==========================
+Linas Vepstas <[email protected]>
- PCI Bus EEH Error Recovery
- --------------------------
- Linas Vepstas
- <[email protected]>
- 12 January 2005
+12 January 2005
Overview:
@@ -143,17 +143,17 @@ seen in /proc/ppc64/eeh (subject to change). Normally, almost
all of these occur during boot, when the PCI bus is scanned, where
a large number of 0xff reads are part of the bus scan procedure.
-If a frozen slot is detected, code in
-arch/powerpc/platforms/pseries/eeh.c will print a stack trace to
-syslog (/var/log/messages). This stack trace has proven to be very
-useful to device-driver authors for finding out at what point the EEH
-error was detected, as the error itself usually occurs slightly
+If a frozen slot is detected, code in
+arch/powerpc/platforms/pseries/eeh.c will print a stack trace to
+syslog (/var/log/messages). This stack trace has proven to be very
+useful to device-driver authors for finding out at what point the EEH
+error was detected, as the error itself usually occurs slightly
beforehand.
Next, it uses the Linux kernel notifier chain/work queue mechanism to
allow any interested parties to find out about the failure. Device
drivers, or other parts of the kernel, can use
-eeh_register_notifier(struct notifier_block *) to find out about EEH
+`eeh_register_notifier(struct notifier_block *)` to find out about EEH
events. The event will include a pointer to the pci device, the
device node and some state info. Receivers of the event can "do as
they wish"; the default handler will be described further in this
@@ -162,10 +162,13 @@ section.
To assist in the recovery of the device, eeh.c exports the
following functions:
-rtas_set_slot_reset() -- assert the PCI #RST line for 1/8th of a second
-rtas_configure_bridge() -- ask firmware to configure any PCI bridges
+rtas_set_slot_reset()
+ assert the PCI #RST line for 1/8th of a second
+rtas_configure_bridge()
+ ask firmware to configure any PCI bridges
located topologically under the pci slot.
-eeh_save_bars() and eeh_restore_bars(): save and restore the PCI
+eeh_save_bars() and eeh_restore_bars():
+ save and restore the PCI
config-space info for a device and any devices under it.
@@ -191,7 +194,7 @@ events get delivered to user-space scripts.
Following is an example sequence of events that cause a device driver
close function to be called during the first phase of an EEH reset.
-The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver.
+The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver::
rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter (struct slot *) // in rpaphp_pci.c
{
@@ -241,53 +244,54 @@ The following sequence is an example of the pcnet32 device driver.
}}}}}}
- in drivers/pci/pci_driver.c,
- struct device_driver->remove() is just pci_device_remove()
- which calls struct pci_driver->remove() which is pcnet32_remove_one()
- which calls unregister_netdev() (in net/core/dev.c)
- which calls dev_close() (in net/core/dev.c)
- which calls dev->stop() which is pcnet32_close()
- which then does the appropriate shutdown.
+in drivers/pci/pci_driver.c,
+struct device_driver->remove() is just pci_device_remove()
+which calls struct pci_driver->remove() which is pcnet32_remove_one()
+which calls unregister_netdev() (in net/core/dev.c)
+which calls dev_close() (in net/core/dev.c)
+which calls dev->stop() which is pcnet32_close()
+which then does the appropriate shutdown.
---
+
Following is the analogous stack trace for events sent to user-space
-when the pci device is unconfigured.
+when the pci device is unconfigured::
-rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter() { // in rpaphp_pci.c
- calls
- pci_remove_bus_device (struct pci_dev *) { // in /drivers/pci/remove.c
+ rpa_php_unconfig_pci_adapter() { // in rpaphp_pci.c
calls
- pci_destroy_dev (struct pci_dev *) {
+ pci_remove_bus_device (struct pci_dev *) { // in /drivers/pci/remove.c
calls
- device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ pci_destroy_dev (struct pci_dev *) {
calls
- device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ device_unregister (&dev->dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
- kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
+ device_del(struct device * dev) { // in /drivers/base/core.c
calls
- kobject_uevent() { // in /libs/kobject.c
+ kobject_del() { //in /libs/kobject.c
calls
- kset_uevent() { // in /lib/kobject.c
+ kobject_uevent() { // in /libs/kobject.c
calls
- kset->uevent_ops->uevent() // which is really just
- a call to
- dev_uevent() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ kset_uevent() { // in /lib/kobject.c
calls
- dev->bus->uevent() which is really just a call to
- pci_uevent () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
- which prints device name, etc....
+ kset->uevent_ops->uevent() // which is really just
+ a call to
+ dev_uevent() { // in /drivers/base/core.c
+ calls
+ dev->bus->uevent() which is really just a call to
+ pci_uevent () { // in drivers/pci/hotplug.c
+ which prints device name, etc....
+ }
}
- }
- then kobject_uevent() sends a netlink uevent to userspace
- --> userspace uevent
- (during early boot, nobody listens to netlink events and
- kobject_uevent() executes uevent_helper[], which runs the
- event process /sbin/hotplug)
+ then kobject_uevent() sends a netlink uevent to userspace
+ --> userspace uevent
+ (during early boot, nobody listens to netlink events and
+ kobject_uevent() executes uevent_helper[], which runs the
+ event process /sbin/hotplug)
+ }
}
- }
- kobject_del() then calls sysfs_remove_dir(), which would
- trigger any user-space daemon that was watching /sysfs,
- and notice the delete event.
+ kobject_del() then calls sysfs_remove_dir(), which would
+ trigger any user-space daemon that was watching /sysfs,
+ and notice the delete event.
Pro's and Con's of the Current Design
@@ -299,12 +303,12 @@ individual device drivers, so that the current design throws a wide net.
The biggest negative of the design is that it potentially disturbs
network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
--- A minor complaint is that resetting the network card causes
+- A minor complaint is that resetting the network card causes
user-space back-to-back ifdown/ifup burps that potentially disturb
network daemons, that didn't need to even know that the pci
card was being rebooted.
--- A more serious concern is that the same reset, for SCSI devices,
+- A more serious concern is that the same reset, for SCSI devices,
causes havoc to mounted file systems. Scripts cannot post-facto
unmount a file system without flushing pending buffers, but this
is impossible, because I/O has already been stopped. Thus,
@@ -322,7 +326,7 @@ network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
from the block layer. It would be very natural to add an EEH
reset into this chain of events.
--- If a SCSI error occurs for the root device, all is lost unless
+- If a SCSI error occurs for the root device, all is lost unless
the sysadmin had the foresight to run /bin, /sbin, /etc, /var
and so on, out of ramdisk/tmpfs.
@@ -330,5 +334,3 @@ network daemons and file systems that didn't need to be disturbed.
Conclusions
-----------
There's forward progress ...
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt
index 18c5feef2577..5cc4cb242130 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/firmware-assisted-dump.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
+======================
+Firmware-Assisted Dump
+======================
- Firmware-Assisted Dump
- ------------------------
- July 2011
+July 2011
The goal of firmware-assisted dump is to enable the dump of
a crashed system, and to do so from a fully-reset system, and
@@ -27,11 +28,11 @@ in production use.
Comparing with kdump or other strategies, firmware-assisted
dump offers several strong, practical advantages:
--- Unlike kdump, the system has been reset, and loaded
+- Unlike kdump, the system has been reset, and loaded
with a fresh copy of the kernel. In particular,
PCI and I/O devices have been reinitialized and are
in a clean, consistent state.
--- Once the dump is copied out, the memory that held the dump
+- Once the dump is copied out, the memory that held the dump
is immediately available to the running kernel. And therefore,
unlike kdump, fadump doesn't need a 2nd reboot to get back
the system to the production configuration.
@@ -40,17 +41,18 @@ The above can only be accomplished by coordination with,
and assistance from the Power firmware. The procedure is
as follows:
--- The first kernel registers the sections of memory with the
+- The first kernel registers the sections of memory with the
Power firmware for dump preservation during OS initialization.
These registered sections of memory are reserved by the first
kernel during early boot.
--- When a system crashes, the Power firmware will save
+- When a system crashes, the Power firmware will save
the low memory (boot memory of size larger of 5% of system RAM
or 256MB) of RAM to the previous registered region. It will
also save system registers, and hardware PTE's.
- NOTE: The term 'boot memory' means size of the low memory chunk
+ NOTE:
+ The term 'boot memory' means size of the low memory chunk
that is required for a kernel to boot successfully when
booted with restricted memory. By default, the boot memory
size will be the larger of 5% of system RAM or 256MB.
@@ -64,12 +66,12 @@ as follows:
as fadump uses a predefined offset to reserve memory
for boot memory dump preservation in case of a crash.
--- After the low memory (boot memory) area has been saved, the
+- After the low memory (boot memory) area has been saved, the
firmware will reset PCI and other hardware state. It will
*not* clear the RAM. It will then launch the bootloader, as
normal.
--- The freshly booted kernel will notice that there is a new
+- The freshly booted kernel will notice that there is a new
node (ibm,dump-kernel) in the device tree, indicating that
there is crash data available from a previous boot. During
the early boot OS will reserve rest of the memory above
@@ -77,17 +79,18 @@ as follows:
size. This will make sure that the second kernel will not
touch any of the dump memory area.
--- User-space tools will read /proc/vmcore to obtain the contents
+- User-space tools will read /proc/vmcore to obtain the contents
of memory, which holds the previous crashed kernel dump in ELF
format. The userspace tools may copy this info to disk, or
network, nas, san, iscsi, etc. as desired.
--- Once the userspace tool is done saving dump, it will echo
+- Once the userspace tool is done saving dump, it will echo
'1' to /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem to release the reserved
memory back to general use, except the memory required for
next firmware-assisted dump registration.
- e.g.
+ e.g.::
+
# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
Please note that the firmware-assisted dump feature
@@ -95,7 +98,7 @@ is only available on Power6 and above systems with recent
firmware versions.
Implementation details:
-----------------------
+-----------------------
During boot, a check is made to see if firmware supports
this feature on that particular machine. If it does, then
@@ -121,7 +124,7 @@ Allocator (CMA) for memory reservation if CMA is configured for kernel.
With CMA reservation this memory will be available for applications to
use it, while kernel is prevented from using it. With this fadump will
still be able to capture all of the kernel memory and most of the user
-space memory except the user pages that were present in CMA region.
+space memory except the user pages that were present in CMA region::
o Memory Reservation during first kernel
@@ -166,7 +169,7 @@ The tools to examine the dump will be same as the ones
used for kdump.
How to enable firmware-assisted dump (fadump):
--------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------------
1. Set config option CONFIG_FA_DUMP=y and build kernel.
2. Boot into linux kernel with 'fadump=on' kernel cmdline option.
@@ -177,19 +180,20 @@ How to enable firmware-assisted dump (fadump):
to specify size of the memory to reserve for boot memory dump
preservation.
-NOTE: 1. 'fadump_reserve_mem=' parameter has been deprecated. Instead
- use 'crashkernel=' to specify size of the memory to reserve
- for boot memory dump preservation.
- 2. If firmware-assisted dump fails to reserve memory then it
- will fallback to existing kdump mechanism if 'crashkernel='
- option is set at kernel cmdline.
- 3. if user wants to capture all of user space memory and ok with
- reserved memory not available to production system, then
- 'fadump=nocma' kernel parameter can be used to fallback to
- old behaviour.
+NOTE:
+ 1. 'fadump_reserve_mem=' parameter has been deprecated. Instead
+ use 'crashkernel=' to specify size of the memory to reserve
+ for boot memory dump preservation.
+ 2. If firmware-assisted dump fails to reserve memory then it
+ will fallback to existing kdump mechanism if 'crashkernel='
+ option is set at kernel cmdline.
+ 3. if user wants to capture all of user space memory and ok with
+ reserved memory not available to production system, then
+ 'fadump=nocma' kernel parameter can be used to fallback to
+ old behaviour.
Sysfs/debugfs files:
-------------
+--------------------
Firmware-assisted dump feature uses sysfs file system to hold
the control files and debugfs file to display memory reserved region.
@@ -197,20 +201,20 @@ the control files and debugfs file to display memory reserved region.
Here is the list of files under kernel sysfs:
/sys/kernel/fadump_enabled
-
This is used to display the fadump status.
- 0 = fadump is disabled
- 1 = fadump is enabled
+
+ - 0 = fadump is disabled
+ - 1 = fadump is enabled
This interface can be used by kdump init scripts to identify if
fadump is enabled in the kernel and act accordingly.
/sys/kernel/fadump_registered
-
This is used to display the fadump registration status as well
as to control (start/stop) the fadump registration.
- 0 = fadump is not registered.
- 1 = fadump is registered and ready to handle system crash.
+
+ - 0 = fadump is not registered.
+ - 1 = fadump is registered and ready to handle system crash.
To register fadump echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_registered and
echo 0 > /sys/kernel/fadump_registered for un-register and stop the
@@ -219,13 +223,12 @@ Here is the list of files under kernel sysfs:
easily integrated with kdump service start/stop.
/sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
-
This file is available only when fadump is active during
second kernel. This is used to release the reserved memory
region that are held for saving crash dump. To release the
- reserved memory echo 1 to it:
+ reserved memory echo 1 to it::
- echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/fadump_release_mem
After echo 1, the content of the /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
file will change to reflect the new memory reservations.
@@ -238,38 +241,39 @@ Here is the list of files under powerpc debugfs:
(Assuming debugfs is mounted on /sys/kernel/debug directory.)
/sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
-
This file shows the reserved memory regions if fadump is
enabled otherwise this file is empty. The output format
- is:
- <region>: [<start>-<end>] <reserved-size> bytes, Dumped: <dump-size>
+ is::
+
+ <region>: [<start>-<end>] <reserved-size> bytes, Dumped: <dump-size>
e.g.
- Contents when fadump is registered during first kernel
+ Contents when fadump is registered during first kernel::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
- CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
+ CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
+ DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x0
- Contents when fadump is active during second kernel
+ Contents when fadump is active during second kernel::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
- CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x40020
- HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x1000
- DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x10000000
- : [0x00000010000000-0x0000006ffaffff] 0x5ffb0000 bytes, Dumped: 0x5ffb0000
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/fadump_region
+ CPU : [0x0000006ffb0000-0x0000006fff001f] 0x40020 bytes, Dumped: 0x40020
+ HPTE: [0x0000006fff0020-0x0000006fff101f] 0x1000 bytes, Dumped: 0x1000
+ DUMP: [0x0000006fff1020-0x0000007fff101f] 0x10000000 bytes, Dumped: 0x10000000
+ : [0x00000010000000-0x0000006ffaffff] 0x5ffb0000 bytes, Dumped: 0x5ffb0000
-NOTE: Please refer to Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt on
+NOTE:
+ Please refer to Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt on
how to mount the debugfs filesystem.
TODO:
-----
- o Need to come up with the better approach to find out more
+ - Need to come up with the better approach to find out more
accurate boot memory size that is required for a kernel to
boot successfully when booted with restricted memory.
- o The fadump implementation introduces a fadump crash info structure
+ - The fadump implementation introduces a fadump crash info structure
in the scratch area before the ELF core header. The idea of introducing
this structure is to pass some important crash info data to the second
kernel which will help second kernel to populate ELF core header with
@@ -277,7 +281,9 @@ TODO:
design implementation does not address a possibility of introducing
additional fields (in future) to this structure without affecting
compatibility. Need to come up with the better approach to address this.
+
The possible approaches are:
+
1. Introduce version field for version tracking, bump up the version
whenever a new field is added to the structure in future. The version
field can be used to find out what fields are valid for the current
@@ -285,8 +291,11 @@ TODO:
2. Reserve the area of predefined size (say PAGE_SIZE) for this
structure and have unused area as reserved (initialized to zero)
for future field additions.
+
The advantage of approach 1 over 2 is we don't need to reserve extra space.
----
+
Author: Mahesh Salgaonkar <[email protected]>
+
This document is based on the original documentation written for phyp
+
assisted dump by Linas Vepstas and Manish Ahuja.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt
index a730ca5a07f8..6808acde672f 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt
@@ -1,19 +1,22 @@
-===========================================================================
- HVCS
- IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
- for Linux Kernel 2.6.4+
- Copyright (C) 2004 IBM Corporation
+===============================================================
+HVCS IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
+===============================================================
-===========================================================================
-NOTE:Eight space tabs are the optimum editor setting for reading this file.
-===========================================================================
+for Linux Kernel 2.6.4+
- Author(s) : Ryan S. Arnold <[email protected]>
- Date Created: March, 02, 2004
- Last Changed: August, 24, 2004
+Copyright (C) 2004 IBM Corporation
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Table of contents:
+.. ===========================================================================
+.. NOTE:Eight space tabs are the optimum editor setting for reading this file.
+.. ===========================================================================
+
+
+Author(s): Ryan S. Arnold <[email protected]>
+
+Date Created: March, 02, 2004
+Last Changed: August, 24, 2004
+
+.. Table of contents:
1. Driver Introduction:
2. System Requirements
@@ -27,8 +30,8 @@ Table of contents:
8. Questions & Answers:
9. Reporting Bugs:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Driver Introduction:
+=======================
This is the device driver for the IBM Hypervisor Virtual Console Server,
"hvcs". The IBM hvcs provides a tty driver interface to allow Linux user
@@ -38,8 +41,8 @@ ppc64 system. Physical hardware consoles per partition are not practical
on this hardware so system consoles are accessed by this driver using
firmware interfaces to virtual terminal devices.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. System Requirements:
+=======================
This device driver was written using 2.6.4 Linux kernel APIs and will only
build and run on kernels of this version or later.
@@ -52,8 +55,8 @@ Sysfs must be mounted on the system so that the user can determine which
major and minor numbers are associated with each vty-server. Directions
for sysfs mounting are outside the scope of this document.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Build Options:
+=================
The hvcs driver registers itself as a tty driver. The tty layer
dynamically allocates a block of major and minor numbers in a quantity
@@ -65,11 +68,11 @@ If the default number of device entries is adequate then this driver can be
built into the kernel. If not, the default can be over-ridden by inserting
the driver as a module with insmod parameters.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.1 Built-in:
+-------------
The following menuconfig example demonstrates selecting to build this
-driver into the kernel.
+driver into the kernel::
Device Drivers --->
Character devices --->
@@ -77,11 +80,11 @@ driver into the kernel.
Begin the kernel make process.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Module:
+-----------
The following menuconfig example demonstrates selecting to build this
-driver as a kernel module.
+driver as a kernel module::
Device Drivers --->
Character devices --->
@@ -89,11 +92,11 @@ driver as a kernel module.
The make process will build the following kernel modules:
- hvcs.ko
- hvcserver.ko
+ - hvcs.ko
+ - hvcserver.ko
To insert the module with the default allocation execute the following
-commands in the order they appear:
+commands in the order they appear::
insmod hvcserver.ko
insmod hvcs.ko
@@ -103,7 +106,7 @@ be inserted first, otherwise the hvcs module will not find some of the
symbols it expects.
To override the default use an insmod parameter as follows (requesting 4
-tty devices as an example):
+tty devices as an example)::
insmod hvcs.ko hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
@@ -115,31 +118,31 @@ source file before building.
NOTE: The length of time it takes to insmod the driver seems to be related
to the number of tty interfaces the registering driver requests.
-In order to remove the driver module execute the following command:
+In order to remove the driver module execute the following command::
rmmod hvcs.ko
The recommended method for installing hvcs as a module is to use depmod to
build a current modules.dep file in /lib/modules/`uname -r` and then
-execute:
+execute::
-modprobe hvcs hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
+ modprobe hvcs hvcs_parm_num_devs=4
The modules.dep file indicates that hvcserver.ko needs to be inserted
before hvcs.ko and modprobe uses this file to smartly insert the modules in
the proper order.
The following modprobe command is used to remove hvcs and hvcserver in the
-proper order:
+proper order::
-modprobe -r hvcs
+ modprobe -r hvcs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Installation:
+================
The tty layer creates sysfs entries which contain the major and minor
numbers allocated for the hvcs driver. The following snippet of "tree"
-output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented:
+output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented::
sys/
|-- *other sysfs base dirs*
@@ -164,7 +167,7 @@ output of the sysfs directory shows where these numbers are presented:
|-- *other sysfs base dirs*
For the above examples the following output is a result of cat'ing the
-"dev" entry in the hvcs directory:
+"dev" entry in the hvcs directory::
Pow5:/sys/class/tty/hvcs0/ # cat dev
254:0
@@ -184,7 +187,7 @@ systems running hvcs will already have the device entries created or udev
will do it automatically.
Given the example output above, to manually create a /dev/hvcs* node entry
-mknod can be used as follows:
+mknod can be used as follows::
mknod /dev/hvcs0 c 254 0
mknod /dev/hvcs1 c 254 1
@@ -195,15 +198,15 @@ Using mknod to manually create the device entries makes these device nodes
persistent. Once created they will exist prior to the driver insmod.
Attempting to connect an application to /dev/hvcs* prior to insertion of
-the hvcs module will result in an error message similar to the following:
+the hvcs module will result in an error message similar to the following::
"/dev/hvcs*: No such device".
NOTE: Just because there is a device node present doesn't mean that there
is a vty-server device configured for that node.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Connection
+=============
Since this driver controls devices that provide a tty interface a user can
interact with the device node entries using any standard tty-interactive
@@ -249,7 +252,7 @@ vty-server adapter is associated with which /dev/hvcs* node a special sysfs
attribute has been added to each vty-server sysfs entry. This entry is
called "index" and showing it reveals an integer that refers to the
/dev/hvcs* entry to use to connect to that device. For instance cating the
-index attribute of vty-server adapter 30000004 shows the following.
+index attribute of vty-server adapter 30000004 shows the following::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat index
2
@@ -262,8 +265,8 @@ system the /dev/hvcs* entry that interacts with a particular vty-server
adapter is not guaranteed to remain the same across system reboots. Look
in the Q & A section for more on this issue.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Disconnection
+================
As a security feature to prevent the delivery of stale data to an
unintended target the Power5 system firmware disables the fetching of data
@@ -305,7 +308,7 @@ connection between the vty-server and target vty ONLY if the vterm_state
previously read '1'. The write directive is ignored if the vterm_state
read '0' or if any value other than '0' was written to the vterm_state
attribute. The following example will show the method used for verifying
-the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection.
+the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat vterm_state
1
@@ -318,12 +321,12 @@ the vty-server connection status and disconnecting a vty-server connection.
All vty-server connections are automatically terminated when the device is
hotplug removed and when the module is removed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Configuration
+================
Each vty-server has a sysfs entry in the /sys/devices/vio directory, which
is symlinked in several other sysfs tree directories, notably under the
-hvcs driver entry, which looks like the following example:
+hvcs driver entry, which looks like the following example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs # ls
. .. 30000003 30000004 rescan
@@ -344,7 +347,7 @@ completed or was never executed.
Vty-server entries in this directory are a 32 bit partition unique unit
address that is created by firmware. An example vty-server sysfs entry
-looks like the following:
+looks like the following::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # ls
. current_vty devspec name partner_vtys
@@ -352,21 +355,21 @@ looks like the following:
Each entry is provided, by default with a "name" attribute. Reading the
"name" attribute will reveal the device type as shown in the following
-example:
+example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000003 # cat name
vty-server
Each entry is also provided, by default, with a "devspec" attribute which
reveals the full device specification when read, as shown in the following
-example:
+example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat devspec
/vdevice/vty-server@30000004
Each vty-server sysfs dir is provided with two read-only attributes that
provide lists of easily parsed partner vty data: "partner_vtys" and
-"partner_clcs".
+"partner_clcs"::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # cat partner_vtys
30000000
@@ -396,7 +399,7 @@ A vty-server can only be connected to a single vty at a time. The entry,
read.
The current_vty can be changed by writing a valid partner clc to the entry
-as in the following example:
+as in the following example::
Pow5:/sys/bus/vio/drivers/hvcs/30000004 # echo U5112.428.10304
8A-V4-C0 > current_vty
@@ -408,9 +411,9 @@ currently open connection is freed.
Information on the "vterm_state" attribute was covered earlier on the
chapter entitled "disconnection".
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. Questions & Answers:
-===========================================================================
+=======================
+
Q: What are the security concerns involving hvcs?
A: There are three main security concerns:
@@ -429,6 +432,7 @@ A: There are three main security concerns:
partition) will experience the previously logged in session.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: How do I multiplex a console that I grab through hvcs so that other
people can see it:
@@ -440,6 +444,7 @@ term type "screen" to others. This means that curses based programs may
not display properly in screen sessions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Why are the colors all messed up?
Q: Why are the control characters acting strange or not working?
Q: Why is the console output all strange and unintelligible?
@@ -455,6 +460,7 @@ disconnect from the console. This will ensure that the next user gets
their own TERM type set when they login.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: When I try to CONNECT kermit to an hvcs device I get:
"Sorry, can't open connection: /dev/hvcs*"What is happening?
@@ -490,6 +496,7 @@ A: There is not a corresponding vty-server device that maps to an existing
/dev/hvcs* entry.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: When I try to CONNECT kermit to an hvcs device I get:
"Sorry, write access to UUCP lockfile directory denied."
@@ -497,6 +504,7 @@ A: The /dev/hvcs* entry you have specified doesn't exist where you said it
does? Maybe you haven't inserted the module (on systems with udev).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: If I already have one Linux partition installed can I use hvcs on said
partition to provide the console for the install of a second Linux
partition?
@@ -505,6 +513,7 @@ A: Yes granted that your are connected to the /dev/hvcs* device using
kermit or cu or some other program that doesn't provide terminal emulation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Can I connect to more than one partition's console at a time using this
driver?
@@ -512,6 +521,7 @@ A: Yes. Of course this means that there must be more than one vty-server
configured for this partition and each must point to a disconnected vty.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Does the hvcs driver support dynamic (hotplug) addition of devices?
A: Yes, if you have dlpar and hotplug enabled for your system and it has
@@ -519,6 +529,7 @@ been built into the kernel the hvcs drivers is configured to dynamically
handle additions of new devices and removals of unused devices.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: For some reason /dev/hvcs* doesn't map to the same vty-server adapter
after a reboot. What happened?
@@ -533,6 +544,7 @@ on how to determine which vty-server goes with which /dev/hvcs* node.
Hint; look at the sysfs "index" attribute for the vty-server.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Q: Can I use /dev/hvcs* as a conduit to another partition and use a tty
device on that partition as the other end of the pipe?
@@ -554,7 +566,9 @@ read or write to /dev/hvcs*. Now you have a tty conduit between two
partitions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
9. Reporting Bugs:
+==================
The proper channel for reporting bugs is either through the Linux OS
distribution company that provided your OS or by posting issues to the
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst b/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
index 812e20cc898c..a363d8c1603c 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/isa-versions.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,12 @@
+==========================
CPU to ISA Version Mapping
==========================
Mapping of some CPU versions to relevant ISA versions.
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
CPU Architecture version
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
Power9 Power ISA v3.0B
Power8 Power ISA v2.07
Power7 Power ISA v2.06
@@ -22,7 +23,7 @@ PPC970 - PowerPC User Instruction Set Architecture Book I v2.01
- PowerPC Virtual Environment Architecture Book II v2.01
- PowerPC Operating Environment Architecture Book III v2.01
- Plus Altivec/VMX ~= 2.03
-========= ====================
+========= ====================================================================
Key Features
@@ -58,9 +59,9 @@ Power5 No
PPC970 No
========== ====
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
CPU Transactional Memory
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
Power9 Yes (* see transactional_memory.txt)
Power8 Yes
Power7 No
@@ -71,4 +72,4 @@ Power5++ No
Power5+ No
Power5 No
PPC970 No
-========== ====================
+========== ====================================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt
index 0d540a31ea1a..8676ac63e077 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
+=============================
Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
------------------------------
+=============================
For the latest info, go to http://www.246tNt.com/mpc52xx/
To compile/use :
- - U-Boot:
+ - U-Boot::
+
# <edit Makefile to set ARCH=ppc & CROSS_COMPILE=... ( also EXTRAVERSION
if you wish to ).
# make lite5200_defconfig
@@ -16,7 +18,8 @@ To compile/use :
=> tftpboot 400000 pRamdisk
=> bootm 200000 400000
- - DBug:
+ - DBug::
+
# <edit Makefile to set ARCH=ppc & CROSS_COMPILE=... ( also EXTRAVERSION
if you wish to ).
# make lite5200_defconfig
@@ -28,7 +31,8 @@ To compile/use :
DBug> dn -i zImage.initrd.lite5200
-Some remarks :
+Some remarks:
+
- The port is named mpc52xxx, and config options are PPC_MPC52xx. The MGT5100
is not supported, and I'm not sure anyone is interesting in working on it
so. I didn't took 5xxx because there's apparently a lot of 5xxx that have
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt
index b55c5cd83f8d..f5a5793e1613 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/pci_iov_resource_on_powernv.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,13 @@
+===================================================
+PCI Express I/O Virtualization Resource on Powerenv
+===================================================
+
Wei Yang <[email protected]>
+
Benjamin Herrenschmidt <[email protected]>
+
Bjorn Helgaas <[email protected]>
+
26 Aug 2014
This document describes the requirement from hardware for PCI MMIO resource
@@ -10,6 +17,7 @@ Endpoints and the implementation on P8 (IODA2). The next two sections talks
about considerations on enabling SRIOV on IODA2.
1. Introduction to Partitionable Endpoints
+==========================================
A Partitionable Endpoint (PE) is a way to group the various resources
associated with a device or a set of devices to provide isolation between
@@ -35,6 +43,7 @@ is a completely separate HW entity that replicates the entire logic, so has
its own set of PEs, etc.
2. Implementation of Partitionable Endpoints on P8 (IODA2)
+==========================================================
P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
@@ -149,6 +158,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
sense, but we haven't done it yet.
3. Considerations for SR-IOV on PowerKVM
+========================================
* SR-IOV Background
@@ -224,7 +234,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
IODA supports 256 PEs, so segmented windows contain 256 segments, so if
total_VFs is less than 256, we have the situation in Figure 1.0, where
segments [total_VFs, 255] of the M64 window may map to some MMIO range on
- other devices:
+ other devices::
0 1 total_VFs - 1
+------+------+- -+------+------+
@@ -243,7 +253,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
Figure 1.0 Direct map VF(n) BAR space
Our current solution is to allocate 256 segments even if the VF(n) BAR
- space doesn't need that much, as shown in Figure 1.1:
+ space doesn't need that much, as shown in Figure 1.1::
0 1 total_VFs - 1 255
+------+------+- -+------+------+- -+------+------+
@@ -269,6 +279,7 @@ P8 supports up to 256 Partitionable Endpoints per PHB.
responds to segments [total_VFs, 255].
4. Implications for the Generic PCI Code
+========================================
The PCIe SR-IOV spec requires that the base of the VF(n) BAR space be
aligned to the size of an individual VF BAR.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
index 73cd163dbfb8..4f474758eb55 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/pmu-ebb.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+========================
PMU Event Based Branches
========================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
index 99c5ce88d0fe..864d4b6dddd1 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/ptrace.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+======
+Ptrace
+======
+
GDB intends to support the following hardware debug features of BookE
processors:
@@ -12,6 +16,7 @@ that GDB doesn't need to special-case each of them. We added the
following 3 new ptrace requests.
1. PTRACE_PPC_GETHWDEBUGINFO
+============================
Query for GDB to discover the hardware debug features. The main info to
be returned here is the minimum alignment for the hardware watchpoints.
@@ -22,9 +27,9 @@ adding special cases to GDB based on what it sees in AUXV.
Since we're at it, we added other useful info that the kernel can return to
GDB: this query will return the number of hardware breakpoints, hardware
watchpoints and whether it supports a range of addresses and a condition.
-The query will fill the following structure provided by the requesting process:
+The query will fill the following structure provided by the requesting process::
-struct ppc_debug_info {
+ struct ppc_debug_info {
unit32_t version;
unit32_t num_instruction_bps;
unit32_t num_data_bps;
@@ -32,46 +37,46 @@ struct ppc_debug_info {
unit32_t data_bp_alignment;
unit32_t sizeof_condition; /* size of the DVC register */
uint64_t features; /* bitmask of the individual flags */
-};
+ };
-features will have bits indicating whether there is support for:
+features will have bits indicating whether there is support for::
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_RANGE 0x1
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_MASK 0x2
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_RANGE 0x4
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_MASK 0x8
-#define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_DAWR 0x10
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_RANGE 0x1
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_INSN_BP_MASK 0x2
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_RANGE 0x4
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_MASK 0x8
+ #define PPC_DEBUG_FEATURE_DATA_BP_DAWR 0x10
2. PTRACE_SETHWDEBUG
-Sets a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, according to the provided structure:
+Sets a hardware breakpoint or watchpoint, according to the provided structure::
-struct ppc_hw_breakpoint {
+ struct ppc_hw_breakpoint {
uint32_t version;
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_WRITE 0x4
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_WRITE 0x4
uint32_t trigger_type; /* only some combinations allowed */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT 0x0
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_EXCLUSIVE 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_MASK 0x3
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT 0x0
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_EXCLUSIVE 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_MASK 0x3
uint32_t addr_mode; /* address match mode */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_MODE 0x3
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE 0x0
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND 0x1
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_EXACT 0x1 /* different name for the same thing as above */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_OR 0x2
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND_OR 0x3
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL 0x00ff0000 /* byte enable bits */
-#define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE(n) (1<<((n)+16))
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_MODE 0x3
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE 0x0
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND 0x1
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_EXACT 0x1 /* different name for the same thing as above */
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_OR 0x2
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND_OR 0x3
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL 0x00ff0000 /* byte enable bits */
+ #define PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE(n) (1<<((n)+16))
uint32_t condition_mode; /* break/watchpoint condition flags */
uint64_t addr;
uint64_t addr2;
uint64_t condition_value;
-};
+ };
A request specifies one event, not necessarily just one register to be set.
For instance, if the request is for a watchpoint with a condition, both the
@@ -88,61 +93,61 @@ can't be allocated on the registers.
Some examples of using the structure to:
-- set a breakpoint in the first breakpoint register
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint which triggers on reads in the second watchpoint register
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint which triggers only with a specific value
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND | PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
- p.addr2 = 0;
- p.condition_value = (uint64_t) condition;
-
-- set a ranged hardware breakpoint
-
- p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
- p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
- p.condition_value = 0;
-
-- set a watchpoint in server processors (BookS)
-
- p.version = 1;
- p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_RW;
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
- or
- p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
-
- p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
- p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
- /* For PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE addr2 needs to be specified, where
- * addr2 - addr <= 8 Bytes.
- */
- p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
- p.condition_value = 0;
+- set a breakpoint in the first breakpoint register::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint which triggers on reads in the second watchpoint register::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint which triggers only with a specific value::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_READ;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_AND | PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_BE_ALL;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) address;
+ p.addr2 = 0;
+ p.condition_value = (uint64_t) condition;
+
+- set a ranged hardware breakpoint::
+
+ p.version = PPC_DEBUG_CURRENT_VERSION;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_EXECUTE;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
+ p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
+
+- set a watchpoint in server processors (BookS)::
+
+ p.version = 1;
+ p.trigger_type = PPC_BREAKPOINT_TRIGGER_RW;
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE;
+ or
+ p.addr_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_EXACT;
+
+ p.condition_mode = PPC_BREAKPOINT_CONDITION_NONE;
+ p.addr = (uint64_t) begin_range;
+ /* For PPC_BREAKPOINT_MODE_RANGE_INCLUSIVE addr2 needs to be specified, where
+ * addr2 - addr <= 8 Bytes.
+ */
+ p.addr2 = (uint64_t) end_range;
+ p.condition_value = 0;
3. PTRACE_DELHWDEBUG
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
index e7ac24aec4ff..42f5103140c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
@@ -1,23 +1,23 @@
- Freescale QUICC Engine Firmware Uploading
- -----------------------------------------
+=========================================
+Freescale QUICC Engine Firmware Uploading
+=========================================
(c) 2007 Timur Tabi <timur at freescale.com>,
Freescale Semiconductor
-Table of Contents
-=================
+.. Table of Contents
- I - Software License for Firmware
+ I - Software License for Firmware
- II - Microcode Availability
+ II - Microcode Availability
- III - Description and Terminology
+ III - Description and Terminology
- IV - Microcode Programming Details
+ IV - Microcode Programming Details
- V - Firmware Structure Layout
+ V - Firmware Structure Layout
- VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
+ VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
Revision Information
====================
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ http://opensource.freescale.com. For other firmware files, please contact
your Freescale representative or your operating system vendor.
III - Description and Terminology
-================================
+=================================
In this document, the term 'microcode' refers to the sequence of 32-bit
integers that compose the actual QE microcode.
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ being fixed in the RAM package utilizing they should be activated. This data
structure signals the microcode which of these virtual traps is active.
This structure contains 6 words that the application should copy to some
-specific been defined. This table describes the structure.
+specific been defined. This table describes the structure::
---------------------------------------------------------------
| Offset in | | Destination Offset | Size of |
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Extended Modes
This is a double word bit array (64 bits) that defines special functionality
which has an impact on the software drivers. Each bit has its own impact
and has special instructions for the s/w associated with it. This structure is
-described in this table:
+described in this table::
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| Bit # | Name | Description |
@@ -220,7 +220,8 @@ The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The
'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers,
respectively, of the SOC.
-For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0:
+For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0::
+
soc.model = 8323
soc.major = 1
soc.minor = 0
@@ -273,10 +274,10 @@ library and available to any driver that calles qe_get_firmware_info().
'reserved'.
After the last microcode is a 32-bit CRC. It can be calculated using
-this algorithm:
+this algorithm::
-u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
-{
+ u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
+ {
unsigned int i;
u32 crc = 0;
@@ -286,7 +287,7 @@ u32 crc32(const u8 *p, unsigned int len)
crc = (crc >> 1) ^ ((crc & 1) ? 0xedb88320 : 0);
}
return crc;
-}
+ }
VI - Sample Code for Creating Firmware Files
============================================
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
index fa716a0d88bd..e49f69f941b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/syscall64-abi.txt
@@ -5,12 +5,12 @@ Power Architecture 64-bit Linux system call ABI
syscall
=======
-syscall calling sequence[*] matches the Power Architecture 64-bit ELF ABI
+syscall calling sequence\ [1]_ matches the Power Architecture 64-bit ELF ABI
specification C function calling sequence, including register preservation
rules, with the following differences.
-[*] Some syscalls (typically low-level management functions) may have
- different calling sequences (e.g., rt_sigreturn).
+.. [1] Some syscalls (typically low-level management functions) may have
+ different calling sequences (e.g., rt_sigreturn).
Parameters and return value
---------------------------
@@ -33,12 +33,14 @@ Register preservation rules
Register preservation rules match the ELF ABI calling sequence with the
following differences:
-r0: Volatile. (System call number.)
-r3: Volatile. (Parameter 1, and return value.)
-r4-r8: Volatile. (Parameters 2-6.)
-cr0: Volatile (cr0.SO is the return error condition)
-cr1, cr5-7: Nonvolatile.
-lr: Nonvolatile.
+=========== ============= ========================================
+r0 Volatile (System call number.)
+r3 Volatile (Parameter 1, and return value.)
+r4-r8 Volatile (Parameters 2-6.)
+cr0 Volatile (cr0.SO is the return error condition)
+cr1, cr5-7 Nonvolatile
+lr Nonvolatile
+=========== ============= ========================================
All floating point and vector data registers as well as control and status
registers are nonvolatile.
@@ -90,9 +92,12 @@ The vsyscall may or may not use the caller's stack frame save areas.
Register preservation rules
---------------------------
-r0: Volatile.
-cr1, cr5-7: Volatile.
-lr: Volatile.
+
+=========== ========
+r0 Volatile
+cr1, cr5-7 Volatile
+lr Volatile
+=========== ========
Invocation
----------
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
index 52c023e14f26..09955103acb4 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================
Transactional Memory support
============================
@@ -17,29 +18,29 @@ instructions are presented to delimit transactions; transactions are
guaranteed to either complete atomically or roll back and undo any partial
changes.
-A simple transaction looks like this:
+A simple transaction looks like this::
-begin_move_money:
- tbegin
- beq abort_handler
+ begin_move_money:
+ tbegin
+ beq abort_handler
- ld r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
- ld r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
- subi r5, r5, 1
- addi r4, r4, 1
- std r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
- std r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+ ld r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+ ld r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
+ subi r5, r5, 1
+ addi r4, r4, 1
+ std r4, SAVINGS_ACCT(r3)
+ std r5, CURRENT_ACCT(r3)
- tend
+ tend
- b continue
+ b continue
-abort_handler:
- ... test for odd failures ...
+ abort_handler:
+ ... test for odd failures ...
- /* Retry the transaction if it failed because it conflicted with
- * someone else: */
- b begin_move_money
+ /* Retry the transaction if it failed because it conflicted with
+ * someone else: */
+ b begin_move_money
The 'tbegin' instruction denotes the start point, and 'tend' the end point.
@@ -123,7 +124,7 @@ Transaction-aware signal handlers can read the transactional register state
from the second ucontext. This will be necessary for crash handlers to
determine, for example, the address of the instruction causing the SIGSEGV.
-Example signal handler:
+Example signal handler::
void crash_handler(int sig, siginfo_t *si, void *uc)
{
@@ -133,9 +134,9 @@ Example signal handler:
if (ucp_link) {
u64 msr = ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr;
/* May have transactional ucontext! */
-#ifndef __powerpc64__
+ #ifndef __powerpc64__
msr |= ((u64)transactional_ucp->uc_mcontext.regs->msr) << 32;
-#endif
+ #endif
if (MSR_TM_ACTIVE(msr)) {
/* Yes, we crashed during a transaction. Oops. */
fprintf(stderr, "Transaction to be restarted at 0x%llx, but "
@@ -176,6 +177,7 @@ Failure cause codes used by kernel
These are defined in <asm/reg.h>, and distinguish different reasons why the
kernel aborted a transaction:
+ ====================== ================================
TM_CAUSE_RESCHED Thread was rescheduled.
TM_CAUSE_TLBI Software TLB invalid.
TM_CAUSE_FAC_UNAV FP/VEC/VSX unavailable trap.
@@ -184,6 +186,7 @@ kernel aborted a transaction:
TM_CAUSE_MISC Currently unused.
TM_CAUSE_ALIGNMENT Alignment fault.
TM_CAUSE_EMULATE Emulation that touched memory.
+ ====================== ================================
These can be checked by the user program's abort handler as TEXASR[0:7]. If
bit 7 is set, it indicates that the error is consider persistent. For example
@@ -203,7 +206,7 @@ POWER9
======
TM on POWER9 has issues with storing the complete register state. This
-is described in this commit:
+is described in this commit::
commit 4bb3c7a0208fc13ca70598efd109901a7cd45ae7
Author: Paul Mackerras <[email protected]>
--
2.20.1
Convert the TCM docs to ReST format and add them to the
bookset.
This has a mix of userspace-faced and Kernelspace faced
docs. Still, it sounds a better candidate to be added at
the kernel API set of docs.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt | 200 ++++++++---------
Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt | 268 ++++++++++++-----------
2 files changed, 248 insertions(+), 220 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt
index ae22f7005540..9bfc9822e2bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt
+++ b/Documentation/target/tcm_mod_builder.txt
@@ -1,145 +1,149 @@
->>>>>>>>>> The TCM v4 fabric module script generator <<<<<<<<<<
+=========================================
+The TCM v4 fabric module script generator
+=========================================
Greetings all,
This document is intended to be a mini-HOWTO for using the tcm_mod_builder.py
script to generate a brand new functional TCM v4 fabric .ko module of your very own,
that once built can be immediately be loaded to start access the new TCM/ConfigFS
-fabric skeleton, by simply using:
+fabric skeleton, by simply using::
modprobe $TCM_NEW_MOD
mkdir -p /sys/kernel/config/target/$TCM_NEW_MOD
This script will create a new drivers/target/$TCM_NEW_MOD/, and will do the following
- *) Generate new API callers for drivers/target/target_core_fabric_configs.c logic
+ 1) Generate new API callers for drivers/target/target_core_fabric_configs.c logic
->make_tpg(), ->drop_tpg(), ->make_wwn(), ->drop_wwn(). These are created
into $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_configfs.c
- *) Generate basic infrastructure for loading/unloading LKMs and TCM/ConfigFS fabric module
+ 2) Generate basic infrastructure for loading/unloading LKMs and TCM/ConfigFS fabric module
using a skeleton struct target_core_fabric_ops API template.
- *) Based on user defined T10 Proto_Ident for the new fabric module being built,
+ 3) Based on user defined T10 Proto_Ident for the new fabric module being built,
the TransportID / Initiator and Target WWPN related handlers for
SPC-3 persistent reservation are automatically generated in $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_fabric.c
using drivers/target/target_core_fabric_lib.c logic.
- *) NOP API calls for all other Data I/O path and fabric dependent attribute logic
+ 4) NOP API calls for all other Data I/O path and fabric dependent attribute logic
in $TCM_NEW_MOD/$TCM_NEW_MOD_fabric.c
tcm_mod_builder.py depends upon the mandatory '-p $PROTO_IDENT' and '-m
-$FABRIC_MOD_name' parameters, and actually running the script looks like:
+$FABRIC_MOD_name' parameters, and actually running the script looks like::
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target# python tcm_mod_builder.py -p iSCSI -m tcm_nab5000
-tcm_dir: /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../
-Set fabric_mod_name: tcm_nab5000
-Set fabric_mod_dir:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000
-Using proto_ident: iSCSI
-Creating fabric_mod_dir:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_base.h
-Using tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.c
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.h
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_configfs.c
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kbuild
-Writing file:
-/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kconfig
-Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kbuild..? [yes,no]: yes
-Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kconfig..? [yes,no]: yes
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target# python tcm_mod_builder.py -p iSCSI -m tcm_nab5000
+ tcm_dir: /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../
+ Set fabric_mod_name: tcm_nab5000
+ Set fabric_mod_dir:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000
+ Using proto_ident: iSCSI
+ Creating fabric_mod_dir:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_base.h
+ Using tcm_mod_scan_fabric_ops:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.c
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_fabric.h
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/tcm_nab5000_configfs.c
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kbuild
+ Writing file:
+ /mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git/Documentation/target/../../drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kconfig
+ Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kbuild..? [yes,no]: yes
+ Would you like to add tcm_nab5000to drivers/target/Kconfig..? [yes,no]: yes
At the end of tcm_mod_builder.py. the script will ask to add the following
-line to drivers/target/Kbuild:
+line to drivers/target/Kbuild::
obj-$(CONFIG_TCM_NAB5000) += tcm_nab5000/
-and the same for drivers/target/Kconfig:
+and the same for drivers/target/Kconfig::
source "drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/Kconfig"
-*) Run 'make menuconfig' and select the new CONFIG_TCM_NAB5000 item:
+#) Run 'make menuconfig' and select the new CONFIG_TCM_NAB5000 item::
<M> TCM_NAB5000 fabric module
-*) Build using 'make modules', once completed you will have:
+#) Build using 'make modules', once completed you will have::
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# ls -la drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/
-total 1348
-drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:23 .
-drwxr-xr-x 9 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:22 ..
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 282 2010-10-05 03:22 Kbuild
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 171 2010-10-05 03:22 Kconfig
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 49 2010-10-05 03:23 modules.order
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 738 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_base.h
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 9096 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_configfs.c
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 191200 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_configfs.o
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40504 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_configfs.o.cmd
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 5414 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.c
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 2016 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.h
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 190932 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_fabric.o
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40713 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_fabric.o.cmd
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 401861 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.ko
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 265 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.ko.cmd
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 459 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.c
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 23896 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.o
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 22655 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.mod.o.cmd
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 379022 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.o
--rw-r--r-- 1 root root 211 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.o.cmd
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# ls -la drivers/target/tcm_nab5000/
+ total 1348
+ drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:23 .
+ drwxr-xr-x 9 root root 4096 2010-10-05 03:22 ..
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 282 2010-10-05 03:22 Kbuild
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 171 2010-10-05 03:22 Kconfig
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 49 2010-10-05 03:23 modules.order
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 738 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_base.h
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 9096 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_configfs.c
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 191200 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_configfs.o
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40504 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_configfs.o.cmd
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 5414 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.c
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 2016 2010-10-05 03:22 tcm_nab5000_fabric.h
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 190932 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000_fabric.o
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 40713 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000_fabric.o.cmd
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 401861 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.ko
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 265 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.ko.cmd
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 459 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.c
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 23896 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.mod.o
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 22655 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.mod.o.cmd
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 379022 2010-10-05 03:23 tcm_nab5000.o
+ -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 211 2010-10-05 03:23 .tcm_nab5000.o.cmd
-*) Load the new module, create a lun_0 configfs group, and add new TCM Core
- IBLOCK backstore symlink to port:
+#) Load the new module, create a lun_0 configfs group, and add new TCM Core
+ IBLOCK backstore symlink to port::
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# insmod drivers/target/tcm_nab5000.ko
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# mkdir -p /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# cd /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0/
-target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# ln -s /sys/kernel/config/target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0 nab5000_port
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# insmod drivers/target/tcm_nab5000.ko
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# mkdir -p /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# cd /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0/
+ target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# ln -s /sys/kernel/config/target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0 nab5000_port
-target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# cd -
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# tree /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/
-/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/
-|-- discovery_auth
-|-- iqn.foo
-| `-- tpgt_1
-| |-- acls
-| |-- attrib
-| |-- lun
-| | `-- lun_0
-| | |-- alua_tg_pt_gp
-| | |-- alua_tg_pt_offline
-| | |-- alua_tg_pt_status
-| | |-- alua_tg_pt_write_md
-| | `-- nab5000_port -> ../../../../../../target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0
-| |-- np
-| `-- param
-`-- version
+ target:/sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/iqn.foo/tpgt_1/lun/lun_0# cd -
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# tree /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/
+ /sys/kernel/config/target/nab5000/
+ |-- discovery_auth
+ |-- iqn.foo
+ | `-- tpgt_1
+ | |-- acls
+ | |-- attrib
+ | |-- lun
+ | | `-- lun_0
+ | | |-- alua_tg_pt_gp
+ | | |-- alua_tg_pt_offline
+ | | |-- alua_tg_pt_status
+ | | |-- alua_tg_pt_write_md
+ | | `-- nab5000_port -> ../../../../../../target/core/iblock_0/lvm_test0
+ | |-- np
+ | `-- param
+ `-- version
-target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# lsmod
-Module Size Used by
-tcm_nab5000 3935 4
-iscsi_target_mod 193211 0
-target_core_stgt 8090 0
-target_core_pscsi 11122 1
-target_core_file 9172 2
-target_core_iblock 9280 1
-target_core_mod 228575 31
-tcm_nab5000,iscsi_target_mod,target_core_stgt,target_core_pscsi,target_core_file,target_core_iblock
-libfc 73681 0
-scsi_debug 56265 0
-scsi_tgt 8666 1 target_core_stgt
-configfs 20644 2 target_core_mod
+ target:/mnt/sdb/lio-core-2.6.git# lsmod
+ Module Size Used by
+ tcm_nab5000 3935 4
+ iscsi_target_mod 193211 0
+ target_core_stgt 8090 0
+ target_core_pscsi 11122 1
+ target_core_file 9172 2
+ target_core_iblock 9280 1
+ target_core_mod 228575 31
+ tcm_nab5000,iscsi_target_mod,target_core_stgt,target_core_pscsi,target_core_file,target_core_iblock
+ libfc 73681 0
+ scsi_debug 56265 0
+ scsi_tgt 8666 1 target_core_stgt
+ configfs 20644 2 target_core_mod
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-Future TODO items:
+Future TODO items
+=================
- *) Add more T10 proto_idents
- *) Make tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops() smarter and generate function pointer
+ 1) Add more T10 proto_idents
+ 2) Make tcm_mod_dump_fabric_ops() smarter and generate function pointer
defs directly from include/target/target_core_fabric_ops.h:struct target_core_fabric_ops
structure members.
October 5th, 2010
+
Nicholas A. Bellinger <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt b/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt
index 4cebc1ebf99a..a7b426707bf6 100644
--- a/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt
@@ -1,25 +1,30 @@
-Contents:
+====================
+TCM Userspace Design
+====================
+
+
+.. Contents:
-1) TCM Userspace Design
- a) Background
- b) Benefits
- c) Design constraints
- d) Implementation overview
- i. Mailbox
- ii. Command ring
- iii. Data Area
- e) Device discovery
- f) Device events
- g) Other contingencies
-2) Writing a user pass-through handler
- a) Discovering and configuring TCMU uio devices
- b) Waiting for events on the device(s)
- c) Managing the command ring
-3) A final note
+ 1) TCM Userspace Design
+ a) Background
+ b) Benefits
+ c) Design constraints
+ d) Implementation overview
+ i. Mailbox
+ ii. Command ring
+ iii. Data Area
+ e) Device discovery
+ f) Device events
+ g) Other contingencies
+ 2) Writing a user pass-through handler
+ a) Discovering and configuring TCMU uio devices
+ b) Waiting for events on the device(s)
+ c) Managing the command ring
+ 3) A final note
TCM Userspace Design
---------------------
+====================
TCM is another name for LIO, an in-kernel iSCSI target (server).
Existing TCM targets run in the kernel. TCMU (TCM in Userspace)
@@ -32,7 +37,8 @@ modules for file, block device, RAM or using another SCSI device as
storage. These are called "backstores" or "storage engines". These
built-in modules are implemented entirely as kernel code.
-Background:
+Background
+----------
In addition to modularizing the transport protocol used for carrying
SCSI commands ("fabrics"), the Linux kernel target, LIO, also modularizes
@@ -60,7 +66,8 @@ kernel, another approach is to create a userspace pass-through
backstore for LIO, "TCMU".
-Benefits:
+Benefits
+--------
In addition to allowing relatively easy support for RBD and GLFS, TCMU
will also allow easier development of new backstores. TCMU combines
@@ -72,21 +79,25 @@ The disadvantage is there are more distinct components to configure, and
potentially to malfunction. This is unavoidable, but hopefully not
fatal if we're careful to keep things as simple as possible.
-Design constraints:
+Design constraints
+------------------
- Good performance: high throughput, low latency
- Cleanly handle if userspace:
+
1) never attaches
2) hangs
3) dies
4) misbehaves
+
- Allow future flexibility in user & kernel implementations
- Be reasonably memory-efficient
- Simple to configure & run
- Simple to write a userspace backend
-Implementation overview:
+Implementation overview
+-----------------------
The core of the TCMU interface is a memory region that is shared
between kernel and userspace. Within this region is: a control area
@@ -108,7 +119,8 @@ the region mapped at a different virtual address.
See target_core_user.h for the struct definitions.
-The Mailbox:
+The Mailbox
+-----------
The mailbox is always at the start of the shared memory region, and
contains a version, details about the starting offset and size of the
@@ -117,19 +129,27 @@ userspace (respectively) to put commands on the ring, and indicate
when the commands are completed.
version - 1 (userspace should abort if otherwise)
+
flags:
-- TCMU_MAILBOX_FLAG_CAP_OOOC: indicates out-of-order completion is
- supported. See "The Command Ring" for details.
-cmdr_off - The offset of the start of the command ring from the start
-of the memory region, to account for the mailbox size.
-cmdr_size - The size of the command ring. This does *not* need to be a
-power of two.
-cmd_head - Modified by the kernel to indicate when a command has been
-placed on the ring.
-cmd_tail - Modified by userspace to indicate when it has completed
-processing of a command.
+ - TCMU_MAILBOX_FLAG_CAP_OOOC:
+ indicates out-of-order completion is supported.
+ See "The Command Ring" for details.
-The Command Ring:
+cmdr_off
+ The offset of the start of the command ring from the start
+ of the memory region, to account for the mailbox size.
+cmdr_size
+ The size of the command ring. This does *not* need to be a
+ power of two.
+cmd_head
+ Modified by the kernel to indicate when a command has been
+ placed on the ring.
+cmd_tail
+ Modified by userspace to indicate when it has completed
+ processing of a command.
+
+The Command Ring
+----------------
Commands are placed on the ring by the kernel incrementing
mailbox.cmd_head by the size of the command, modulo cmdr_size, and
@@ -180,29 +200,31 @@ opcode it does not handle, it must set UNKNOWN_OP bit (bit 0) in
hdr.uflags, update cmd_tail, and proceed with processing additional
commands, if any.
-The Data Area:
+The Data Area
+-------------
This is shared-memory space after the command ring. The organization
of this area is not defined in the TCMU interface, and userspace
should access only the parts referenced by pending iovs.
-Device Discovery:
+Device Discovery
+----------------
Other devices may be using UIO besides TCMU. Unrelated user processes
may also be handling different sets of TCMU devices. TCMU userspace
processes must find their devices by scanning sysfs
class/uio/uio*/name. For TCMU devices, these names will be of the
-format:
+format::
-tcm-user/<hba_num>/<device_name>/<subtype>/<path>
+ tcm-user/<hba_num>/<device_name>/<subtype>/<path>
where "tcm-user" is common for all TCMU-backed UIO devices. <hba_num>
and <device_name> allow userspace to find the device's path in the
kernel target's configfs tree. Assuming the usual mount point, it is
-found at:
+found at::
-/sys/kernel/config/target/core/user_<hba_num>/<device_name>
+ /sys/kernel/config/target/core/user_<hba_num>/<device_name>
This location contains attributes such as "hw_block_size", that
userspace needs to know for correct operation.
@@ -214,15 +236,16 @@ configure the device, if needed. The name cannot contain ':', due to
LIO limitations.
For all devices so discovered, the user handler opens /dev/uioX and
-calls mmap():
+calls mmap()::
-mmap(NULL, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0)
+ mmap(NULL, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0)
where size must be equal to the value read from
/sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/map0/size.
-Device Events:
+Device Events
+-------------
If a new device is added or removed, a notification will be broadcast
over netlink, using a generic netlink family name of "TCM-USER" and a
@@ -233,7 +256,8 @@ the LIO device, so that after determining the device is supported
(based on subtype) it can take the appropriate action.
-Other contingencies:
+Other contingencies
+-------------------
Userspace handler process never attaches:
@@ -258,7 +282,7 @@ Userspace handler process is malicious:
Writing a user pass-through handler (with example code)
--------------------------------------------------------
+=======================================================
A user process handing a TCMU device must support the following:
@@ -277,103 +301,103 @@ TCMU is designed so that multiple unrelated processes can manage TCMU
devices separately. All handlers should make sure to only open their
devices, based opon a known subtype string.
-a) Discovering and configuring TCMU UIO devices:
+a) Discovering and configuring TCMU UIO devices::
-(error checking omitted for brevity)
+ /* error checking omitted for brevity */
-int fd, dev_fd;
-char buf[256];
-unsigned long long map_len;
-void *map;
+ int fd, dev_fd;
+ char buf[256];
+ unsigned long long map_len;
+ void *map;
-fd = open("/sys/class/uio/uio0/name", O_RDONLY);
-ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
-close(fd);
-buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */
+ fd = open("/sys/class/uio/uio0/name", O_RDONLY);
+ ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
+ close(fd);
+ buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */
-/* we only want uio devices whose name is a format we expect */
-if (strncmp(buf, "tcm-user", 8))
+ /* we only want uio devices whose name is a format we expect */
+ if (strncmp(buf, "tcm-user", 8))
exit(-1);
-/* Further checking for subtype also needed here */
+ /* Further checking for subtype also needed here */
-fd = open(/sys/class/uio/%s/maps/map0/size, O_RDONLY);
-ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
-close(fd);
-str_buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */
+ fd = open(/sys/class/uio/%s/maps/map0/size, O_RDONLY);
+ ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
+ close(fd);
+ str_buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */
-map_len = strtoull(buf, NULL, 0);
+ map_len = strtoull(buf, NULL, 0);
-dev_fd = open("/dev/uio0", O_RDWR);
-map = mmap(NULL, map_len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, dev_fd, 0);
+ dev_fd = open("/dev/uio0", O_RDWR);
+ map = mmap(NULL, map_len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, dev_fd, 0);
-b) Waiting for events on the device(s)
+ b) Waiting for events on the device(s)
-while (1) {
- char buf[4];
+ while (1) {
+ char buf[4];
- int ret = read(dev_fd, buf, 4); /* will block */
+ int ret = read(dev_fd, buf, 4); /* will block */
- handle_device_events(dev_fd, map);
-}
-
-
-c) Managing the command ring
-
-#include <linux/target_core_user.h>
-
-int handle_device_events(int fd, void *map)
-{
- struct tcmu_mailbox *mb = map;
- struct tcmu_cmd_entry *ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail;
- int did_some_work = 0;
-
- /* Process events from cmd ring until we catch up with cmd_head */
- while (ent != (void *)mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_head) {
-
- if (tcmu_hdr_get_op(ent->hdr.len_op) == TCMU_OP_CMD) {
- uint8_t *cdb = (void *)mb + ent->req.cdb_off;
- bool success = true;
+ handle_device_events(dev_fd, map);
+ }
- /* Handle command here. */
- printf("SCSI opcode: 0x%x\n", cdb[0]);
- /* Set response fields */
- if (success)
- ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_NO_SENSE;
- else {
- /* Also fill in rsp->sense_buffer here */
- ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_CHECK_CONDITION;
+c) Managing the command ring::
+
+ #include <linux/target_core_user.h>
+
+ int handle_device_events(int fd, void *map)
+ {
+ struct tcmu_mailbox *mb = map;
+ struct tcmu_cmd_entry *ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail;
+ int did_some_work = 0;
+
+ /* Process events from cmd ring until we catch up with cmd_head */
+ while (ent != (void *)mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_head) {
+
+ if (tcmu_hdr_get_op(ent->hdr.len_op) == TCMU_OP_CMD) {
+ uint8_t *cdb = (void *)mb + ent->req.cdb_off;
+ bool success = true;
+
+ /* Handle command here. */
+ printf("SCSI opcode: 0x%x\n", cdb[0]);
+
+ /* Set response fields */
+ if (success)
+ ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_NO_SENSE;
+ else {
+ /* Also fill in rsp->sense_buffer here */
+ ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_CHECK_CONDITION;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (tcmu_hdr_get_op(ent->hdr.len_op) != TCMU_OP_PAD) {
+ /* Tell the kernel we didn't handle unknown opcodes */
+ ent->hdr.uflags |= TCMU_UFLAG_UNKNOWN_OP;
+ }
+ else {
+ /* Do nothing for PAD entries except update cmd_tail */
+ }
+
+ /* update cmd_tail */
+ mb->cmd_tail = (mb->cmd_tail + tcmu_hdr_get_len(&ent->hdr)) % mb->cmdr_size;
+ ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail;
+ did_some_work = 1;
+ }
+
+ /* Notify the kernel that work has been finished */
+ if (did_some_work) {
+ uint32_t buf = 0;
+
+ write(fd, &buf, 4);
+ }
+
+ return 0;
}
- }
- else if (tcmu_hdr_get_op(ent->hdr.len_op) != TCMU_OP_PAD) {
- /* Tell the kernel we didn't handle unknown opcodes */
- ent->hdr.uflags |= TCMU_UFLAG_UNKNOWN_OP;
- }
- else {
- /* Do nothing for PAD entries except update cmd_tail */
- }
-
- /* update cmd_tail */
- mb->cmd_tail = (mb->cmd_tail + tcmu_hdr_get_len(&ent->hdr)) % mb->cmdr_size;
- ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail;
- did_some_work = 1;
- }
-
- /* Notify the kernel that work has been finished */
- if (did_some_work) {
- uint32_t buf = 0;
-
- write(fd, &buf, 4);
- }
-
- return 0;
-}
A final note
-------------
+============
Please be careful to return codes as defined by the SCSI
specifications. These are different than some values defined in the
--
2.20.1
Convert the PM documents to ReST, in order to allow them to
build with Sphinx.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt | 77 ++-
Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt | 101 +--
Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt | 5 +
Documentation/power/energy-model.txt | 101 +--
Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt | 91 +--
Documentation/power/interface.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/power/opp.txt | 175 +++--
Documentation/power/pci.txt | 77 ++-
Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt | 127 ++--
Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt | 269 +++++---
Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt | 297 ++++----
Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt | 141 ++--
Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt | 51 +-
Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 234 ++++---
Documentation/power/s2ram.txt | 20 +-
.../power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt | 42 +-
.../power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt | 2 +
Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt | 118 ++--
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt | 639 ++++++++++--------
Documentation/power/tricks.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt | 53 +-
Documentation/power/video.txt | 156 +++--
27 files changed, 1637 insertions(+), 1264 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
index 6cc423d3662e..5b90d947126d 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+============
APM or ACPI?
-------------
+============
+
If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system,
odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). ACPI is the newer
@@ -28,5 +30,7 @@ and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process.
Go ahead and start both. If ACPI or APM is not available on your
system the associated daemon will exit gracefully.
- apmd: http://ftp.debian.org/pool/main/a/apmd/
- acpid: http://acpid.sf.net/
+ ===== =======================================
+ apmd http://ftp.debian.org/pool/main/a/apmd/
+ acpid http://acpid.sf.net/
+ ===== =======================================
diff --git a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
index 708f87f78a75..db418a5b15df 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
+=================================
Debugging hibernation and suspend
+=================================
+
(C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, GPL
1. Testing hibernation (aka suspend to disk or STD)
+===================================================
-To check if hibernation works, you can try to hibernate in the "reboot" mode:
+To check if hibernation works, you can try to hibernate in the "reboot" mode::
-# echo reboot > /sys/power/disk
-# echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ # echo reboot > /sys/power/disk
+ # echo disk > /sys/power/state
and the system should create a hibernation image, reboot, resume and get back to
the command prompt where you have started the transition. If that happens,
@@ -15,20 +19,21 @@ test at least a couple of times in a row for confidence. [This is necessary,
because some problems only show up on a second attempt at suspending and
resuming the system.] Moreover, hibernating in the "reboot" and "shutdown"
modes causes the PM core to skip some platform-related callbacks which on ACPI
-systems might be necessary to make hibernation work. Thus, if your machine fails
-to hibernate or resume in the "reboot" mode, you should try the "platform" mode:
+systems might be necessary to make hibernation work. Thus, if your machine
+fails to hibernate or resume in the "reboot" mode, you should try the
+"platform" mode::
-# echo platform > /sys/power/disk
-# echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ # echo platform > /sys/power/disk
+ # echo disk > /sys/power/state
which is the default and recommended mode of hibernation.
Unfortunately, the "platform" mode of hibernation does not work on some systems
with broken BIOSes. In such cases the "shutdown" mode of hibernation might
-work:
+work::
-# echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk
-# echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ # echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk
+ # echo disk > /sys/power/state
(it is similar to the "reboot" mode, but it requires you to press the power
button to make the system resume).
@@ -37,6 +42,7 @@ If neither "platform" nor "shutdown" hibernation mode works, you will need to
identify what goes wrong.
a) Test modes of hibernation
+----------------------------
To find out why hibernation fails on your system, you can use a special testing
facility available if the kernel is compiled with CONFIG_PM_DEBUG set. Then,
@@ -44,36 +50,38 @@ there is the file /sys/power/pm_test that can be used to make the hibernation
core run in a test mode. There are 5 test modes available:
freezer
-- test the freezing of processes
+ - test the freezing of processes
devices
-- test the freezing of processes and suspending of devices
+ - test the freezing of processes and suspending of devices
platform
-- test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices and platform
- global control methods(*)
+ - test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices and platform
+ global control methods [1]_
processors
-- test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices, platform
- global control methods(*) and the disabling of nonboot CPUs
+ - test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices, platform
+ global control methods [1]_ and the disabling of nonboot CPUs
core
-- test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices, platform global
- control methods(*), the disabling of nonboot CPUs and suspending of
- platform/system devices
+ - test the freezing of processes, suspending of devices, platform global
+ control methods\ [1]_, the disabling of nonboot CPUs and suspending
+ of platform/system devices
-(*) the platform global control methods are only available on ACPI systems
+.. [1]
+
+ the platform global control methods are only available on ACPI systems
and are only tested if the hibernation mode is set to "platform"
To use one of them it is necessary to write the corresponding string to
/sys/power/pm_test (eg. "devices" to test the freezing of processes and
suspending devices) and issue the standard hibernation commands. For example,
to use the "devices" test mode along with the "platform" mode of hibernation,
-you should do the following:
+you should do the following::
-# echo devices > /sys/power/pm_test
-# echo platform > /sys/power/disk
-# echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ # echo devices > /sys/power/pm_test
+ # echo platform > /sys/power/disk
+ # echo disk > /sys/power/state
Then, the kernel will try to freeze processes, suspend devices, wait a few
seconds (5 by default, but configurable by the suspend.pm_test_delay module
@@ -108,11 +116,12 @@ If the "devices" test fails, most likely there is a driver that cannot suspend
or resume its device (in the latter case the system may hang or become unstable
after the test, so please take that into consideration). To find this driver,
you can carry out a binary search according to the rules:
+
- if the test fails, unload a half of the drivers currently loaded and repeat
-(that would probably involve rebooting the system, so always note what drivers
-have been loaded before the test),
+ (that would probably involve rebooting the system, so always note what drivers
+ have been loaded before the test),
- if the test succeeds, load a half of the drivers you have unloaded most
-recently and repeat.
+ recently and repeat.
Once you have found the failing driver (there can be more than just one of
them), you have to unload it every time before hibernation. In that case please
@@ -146,6 +155,7 @@ indicates a serious problem that very well may be related to the hardware, but
please report it anyway.
b) Testing minimal configuration
+--------------------------------
If all of the hibernation test modes work, you can boot the system with the
"init=/bin/bash" command line parameter and attempt to hibernate in the
@@ -165,14 +175,15 @@ Again, if you find the offending module(s), it(they) must be unloaded every time
before hibernation, and please report the problem with it(them).
c) Using the "test_resume" hibernation option
+---------------------------------------------
/sys/power/disk generally tells the kernel what to do after creating a
hibernation image. One of the available options is "test_resume" which
causes the just created image to be used for immediate restoration. Namely,
-after doing:
+after doing::
-# echo test_resume > /sys/power/disk
-# echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ # echo test_resume > /sys/power/disk
+ # echo disk > /sys/power/state
a hibernation image will be created and a resume from it will be triggered
immediately without involving the platform firmware in any way.
@@ -190,6 +201,7 @@ to resume may be related to the differences between the restore and image
kernels.
d) Advanced debugging
+---------------------
In case that hibernation does not work on your system even in the minimal
configuration and compiling more drivers as modules is not practical or some
@@ -203,6 +215,7 @@ it may be possible to use a FireWire port for debugging with firescope
use the PM_TRACE mechanism documented in Documentation/power/s2ram.txt .
2. Testing suspend to RAM (STR)
+===============================
To verify that the STR works, it is generally more convenient to use the s2ram
tool available from http://suspend.sf.net and documented at
@@ -230,7 +243,8 @@ you will have to unload them every time before an STR transition (ie. before
you run s2ram), and please report the problems with them.
There is a debugfs entry which shows the suspend to RAM statistics. Here is an
-example of its output.
+example of its output::
+
# mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/suspend_stats
success: 20
@@ -248,6 +262,7 @@ example of its output.
-16
last_failed_step: suspend
suspend
+
Field success means the success number of suspend to RAM, and field fail means
the failure number. Others are the failure number of different steps of suspend
to RAM. suspend_stats just lists the last 2 failed devices, error number and
diff --git a/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt b/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
index 9ff1105e58d6..84fab9376792 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/charger-manager.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+===============
Charger Manager
+===============
+
(C) 2011 MyungJoo Ham <[email protected]>, GPL
Charger Manager provides in-kernel battery charger management that
@@ -55,41 +58,39 @@ Charger Manager supports the following:
notification to users with UEVENT.
2. Global Charger-Manager Data related with suspend_again
-========================================================
+=========================================================
In order to setup Charger Manager with suspend-again feature
(in-suspend monitoring), the user should provide charger_global_desc
-with setup_charger_manager(struct charger_global_desc *).
+with setup_charger_manager(`struct charger_global_desc *`).
This charger_global_desc data for in-suspend monitoring is global
as the name suggests. Thus, the user needs to provide only once even
if there are multiple batteries. If there are multiple batteries, the
multiple instances of Charger Manager share the same charger_global_desc
and it will manage in-suspend monitoring for all instances of Charger Manager.
-The user needs to provide all the three entries properly in order to activate
-in-suspend monitoring:
+The user needs to provide all the three entries to `struct charger_global_desc`
+properly in order to activate in-suspend monitoring:
-struct charger_global_desc {
-
-char *rtc_name;
- : The name of rtc (e.g., "rtc0") used to wakeup the system from
+`char *rtc_name;`
+ The name of rtc (e.g., "rtc0") used to wakeup the system from
suspend for Charger Manager. The alarm interrupt (AIE) of the rtc
should be able to wake up the system from suspend. Charger Manager
saves and restores the alarm value and use the previously-defined
alarm if it is going to go off earlier than Charger Manager so that
Charger Manager does not interfere with previously-defined alarms.
-bool (*rtc_only_wakeup)(void);
- : This callback should let CM know whether
+`bool (*rtc_only_wakeup)(void);`
+ This callback should let CM know whether
the wakeup-from-suspend is caused only by the alarm of "rtc" in the
same struct. If there is any other wakeup source triggered the
wakeup, it should return false. If the "rtc" is the only wakeup
reason, it should return true.
-bool assume_timer_stops_in_suspend;
- : if true, Charger Manager assumes that
+`bool assume_timer_stops_in_suspend;`
+ if true, Charger Manager assumes that
the timer (CM uses jiffies as timer) stops during suspend. Then, CM
assumes that the suspend-duration is same as the alarm length.
-};
+
3. How to setup suspend_again
=============================
@@ -109,26 +110,28 @@ if the system was woken up by Charger Manager and the polling
=============================================
For each battery charged independently from other batteries (if a series of
batteries are charged by a single charger, they are counted as one independent
-battery), an instance of Charger Manager is attached to it.
+battery), an instance of Charger Manager is attached to it. The following
-struct charger_desc {
+struct charger_desc elements:
-char *psy_name;
- : The power-supply-class name of the battery. Default is
+`char *psy_name;`
+ The power-supply-class name of the battery. Default is
"battery" if psy_name is NULL. Users can access the psy entries
at "/sys/class/power_supply/[psy_name]/".
-enum polling_modes polling_mode;
- : CM_POLL_DISABLE: do not poll this battery.
- CM_POLL_ALWAYS: always poll this battery.
- CM_POLL_EXTERNAL_POWER_ONLY: poll this battery if and only if
- an external power source is attached.
- CM_POLL_CHARGING_ONLY: poll this battery if and only if the
- battery is being charged.
+`enum polling_modes polling_mode;`
+ CM_POLL_DISABLE:
+ do not poll this battery.
+ CM_POLL_ALWAYS:
+ always poll this battery.
+ CM_POLL_EXTERNAL_POWER_ONLY:
+ poll this battery if and only if an external power
+ source is attached.
+ CM_POLL_CHARGING_ONLY:
+ poll this battery if and only if the battery is being charged.
-unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms;
-unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV;
- : If both have non-zero values, Charger Manager will check the
+`unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms; / unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV;`
+ If both have non-zero values, Charger Manager will check the
battery voltage drop fullbatt_vchkdrop_ms after the battery is fully
charged. If the voltage drop is over fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV, Charger
Manager will try to recharge the battery by disabling and enabling
@@ -136,50 +139,52 @@ unsigned int fullbatt_vchkdrop_uV;
condition) is needed to be implemented with hardware interrupts from
fuel gauges or charger devices/chips.
-unsigned int fullbatt_uV;
- : If specified with a non-zero value, Charger Manager assumes
+`unsigned int fullbatt_uV;`
+ If specified with a non-zero value, Charger Manager assumes
that the battery is full (capacity = 100) if the battery is not being
charged and the battery voltage is equal to or greater than
fullbatt_uV.
-unsigned int polling_interval_ms;
- : Required polling interval in ms. Charger Manager will poll
+`unsigned int polling_interval_ms;`
+ Required polling interval in ms. Charger Manager will poll
this battery every polling_interval_ms or more frequently.
-enum data_source battery_present;
- : CM_BATTERY_PRESENT: assume that the battery exists.
- CM_NO_BATTERY: assume that the battery does not exists.
- CM_FUEL_GAUGE: get battery presence information from fuel gauge.
- CM_CHARGER_STAT: get battery presence from chargers.
+`enum data_source battery_present;`
+ CM_BATTERY_PRESENT:
+ assume that the battery exists.
+ CM_NO_BATTERY:
+ assume that the battery does not exists.
+ CM_FUEL_GAUGE:
+ get battery presence information from fuel gauge.
+ CM_CHARGER_STAT:
+ get battery presence from chargers.
-char **psy_charger_stat;
- : An array ending with NULL that has power-supply-class names of
+`char **psy_charger_stat;`
+ An array ending with NULL that has power-supply-class names of
chargers. Each power-supply-class should provide "PRESENT" (if
battery_present is "CM_CHARGER_STAT"), "ONLINE" (shows whether an
external power source is attached or not), and "STATUS" (shows whether
the battery is {"FULL" or not FULL} or {"FULL", "Charging",
"Discharging", "NotCharging"}).
-int num_charger_regulators;
-struct regulator_bulk_data *charger_regulators;
- : Regulators representing the chargers in the form for
+`int num_charger_regulators; / struct regulator_bulk_data *charger_regulators;`
+ Regulators representing the chargers in the form for
regulator framework's bulk functions.
-char *psy_fuel_gauge;
- : Power-supply-class name of the fuel gauge.
+`char *psy_fuel_gauge;`
+ Power-supply-class name of the fuel gauge.
-int (*temperature_out_of_range)(int *mC);
-bool measure_battery_temp;
- : This callback returns 0 if the temperature is safe for charging,
+`int (*temperature_out_of_range)(int *mC); / bool measure_battery_temp;`
+ This callback returns 0 if the temperature is safe for charging,
a positive number if it is too hot to charge, and a negative number
if it is too cold to charge. With the variable mC, the callback returns
the temperature in 1/1000 of centigrade.
The source of temperature can be battery or ambient one according to
the value of measure_battery_temp.
-};
+
5. Notify Charger-Manager of charger events: cm_notify_event()
-=========================================================
+==============================================================
If there is an charger event is required to notify
Charger Manager, a charger device driver that triggers the event can call
cm_notify_event(psy, type, msg) to notify the corresponding Charger Manager.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt
index 638afdf4d6b8..10f65eac1328 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,11 @@
+====================================================
Testing suspend and resume support in device drivers
+====================================================
+
(C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, GPL
1. Preparing the test system
+============================
Unfortunately, to effectively test the support for the system-wide suspend and
resume transitions in a driver, it is necessary to suspend and resume a fully
@@ -18,6 +22,7 @@ testing the new driver. Please see Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt
for more information about the debugging of suspend/resume functionality.
2. Testing the driver
+=====================
Once you have resolved the suspend/resume-related problems with your test system
without the new driver, you are ready to test it:
diff --git a/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
index a2b0ae4c76bd..90a345d57ae9 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/energy-model.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
- ====================
- Energy Model of CPUs
- ====================
+====================
+Energy Model of CPUs
+====================
1. Overview
-----------
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ kernel, hence enabling to avoid redundant work.
The figure below depicts an example of drivers (Arm-specific here, but the
approach is applicable to any architecture) providing power costs to the EM
-framework, and interested clients reading the data from it.
+framework, and interested clients reading the data from it::
+---------------+ +-----------------+ +---------------+
| Thermal (IPA) | | Scheduler (EAS) | | Other |
@@ -58,15 +58,17 @@ micro-architectures.
2. Core APIs
------------
- 2.1 Config options
+2.1 Config options
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
CONFIG_ENERGY_MODEL must be enabled to use the EM framework.
- 2.2 Registration of performance domains
+2.2 Registration of performance domains
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Drivers are expected to register performance domains into the EM framework by
-calling the following API:
+calling the following API::
int em_register_perf_domain(cpumask_t *span, unsigned int nr_states,
struct em_data_callback *cb);
@@ -80,7 +82,8 @@ callback, and kernel/power/energy_model.c for further documentation on this
API.
- 2.3 Accessing performance domains
+2.3 Accessing performance domains
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Subsystems interested in the energy model of a CPU can retrieve it using the
em_cpu_get() API. The energy model tables are allocated once upon creation of
@@ -99,46 +102,46 @@ More details about the above APIs can be found in include/linux/energy_model.h.
This section provides a simple example of a CPUFreq driver registering a
performance domain in the Energy Model framework using the (fake) 'foo'
protocol. The driver implements an est_power() function to be provided to the
-EM framework.
+EM framework::
- -> drivers/cpufreq/foo_cpufreq.c
+ -> drivers/cpufreq/foo_cpufreq.c
-01 static int est_power(unsigned long *mW, unsigned long *KHz, int cpu)
-02 {
-03 long freq, power;
-04
-05 /* Use the 'foo' protocol to ceil the frequency */
-06 freq = foo_get_freq_ceil(cpu, *KHz);
-07 if (freq < 0);
-08 return freq;
-09
-10 /* Estimate the power cost for the CPU at the relevant freq. */
-11 power = foo_estimate_power(cpu, freq);
-12 if (power < 0);
-13 return power;
-14
-15 /* Return the values to the EM framework */
-16 *mW = power;
-17 *KHz = freq;
-18
-19 return 0;
-20 }
-21
-22 static int foo_cpufreq_init(struct cpufreq_policy *policy)
-23 {
-24 struct em_data_callback em_cb = EM_DATA_CB(est_power);
-25 int nr_opp, ret;
-26
-27 /* Do the actual CPUFreq init work ... */
-28 ret = do_foo_cpufreq_init(policy);
-29 if (ret)
-30 return ret;
-31
-32 /* Find the number of OPPs for this policy */
-33 nr_opp = foo_get_nr_opp(policy);
-34
-35 /* And register the new performance domain */
-36 em_register_perf_domain(policy->cpus, nr_opp, &em_cb);
-37
-38 return 0;
-39 }
+ 01 static int est_power(unsigned long *mW, unsigned long *KHz, int cpu)
+ 02 {
+ 03 long freq, power;
+ 04
+ 05 /* Use the 'foo' protocol to ceil the frequency */
+ 06 freq = foo_get_freq_ceil(cpu, *KHz);
+ 07 if (freq < 0);
+ 08 return freq;
+ 09
+ 10 /* Estimate the power cost for the CPU at the relevant freq. */
+ 11 power = foo_estimate_power(cpu, freq);
+ 12 if (power < 0);
+ 13 return power;
+ 14
+ 15 /* Return the values to the EM framework */
+ 16 *mW = power;
+ 17 *KHz = freq;
+ 18
+ 19 return 0;
+ 20 }
+ 21
+ 22 static int foo_cpufreq_init(struct cpufreq_policy *policy)
+ 23 {
+ 24 struct em_data_callback em_cb = EM_DATA_CB(est_power);
+ 25 int nr_opp, ret;
+ 26
+ 27 /* Do the actual CPUFreq init work ... */
+ 28 ret = do_foo_cpufreq_init(policy);
+ 29 if (ret)
+ 30 return ret;
+ 31
+ 32 /* Find the number of OPPs for this policy */
+ 33 nr_opp = foo_get_nr_opp(policy);
+ 34
+ 35 /* And register the new performance domain */
+ 36 em_register_perf_domain(policy->cpus, nr_opp, &em_cb);
+ 37
+ 38 return 0;
+ 39 }
diff --git a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
index cd283190855a..ef110fe55e82 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,18 @@
+=================
Freezing of tasks
- (C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, GPL
+=================
+
+(C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, GPL
I. What is the freezing of tasks?
+=================================
The freezing of tasks is a mechanism by which user space processes and some
kernel threads are controlled during hibernation or system-wide suspend (on some
architectures).
II. How does it work?
+=====================
There are three per-task flags used for that, PF_NOFREEZE, PF_FROZEN
and PF_FREEZER_SKIP (the last one is auxiliary). The tasks that have
@@ -41,7 +46,7 @@ explicitly in suitable places or use the wait_event_freezable() or
wait_event_freezable_timeout() macros (defined in include/linux/freezer.h)
that combine interruptible sleep with checking if the task is to be frozen and
calling try_to_freeze(). The main loop of a freezable kernel thread may look
-like the following one:
+like the following one::
set_freezable();
do {
@@ -65,7 +70,7 @@ order to clear the PF_FROZEN flag for each frozen task. Then, the tasks that
have been frozen leave __refrigerator() and continue running.
-Rationale behind the functions dealing with freezing and thawing of tasks:
+Rationale behind the functions dealing with freezing and thawing of tasks
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
freeze_processes():
@@ -86,6 +91,7 @@ thaw_processes():
III. Which kernel threads are freezable?
+========================================
Kernel threads are not freezable by default. However, a kernel thread may clear
PF_NOFREEZE for itself by calling set_freezable() (the resetting of PF_NOFREEZE
@@ -93,37 +99,39 @@ directly is not allowed). From this point it is regarded as freezable
and must call try_to_freeze() in a suitable place.
IV. Why do we do that?
+======================
Generally speaking, there is a couple of reasons to use the freezing of tasks:
1. The principal reason is to prevent filesystems from being damaged after
-hibernation. At the moment we have no simple means of checkpointing
-filesystems, so if there are any modifications made to filesystem data and/or
-metadata on disks, we cannot bring them back to the state from before the
-modifications. At the same time each hibernation image contains some
-filesystem-related information that must be consistent with the state of the
-on-disk data and metadata after the system memory state has been restored from
-the image (otherwise the filesystems will be damaged in a nasty way, usually
-making them almost impossible to repair). We therefore freeze tasks that might
-cause the on-disk filesystems' data and metadata to be modified after the
-hibernation image has been created and before the system is finally powered off.
-The majority of these are user space processes, but if any of the kernel threads
-may cause something like this to happen, they have to be freezable.
+ hibernation. At the moment we have no simple means of checkpointing
+ filesystems, so if there are any modifications made to filesystem data and/or
+ metadata on disks, we cannot bring them back to the state from before the
+ modifications. At the same time each hibernation image contains some
+ filesystem-related information that must be consistent with the state of the
+ on-disk data and metadata after the system memory state has been restored
+ from the image (otherwise the filesystems will be damaged in a nasty way,
+ usually making them almost impossible to repair). We therefore freeze
+ tasks that might cause the on-disk filesystems' data and metadata to be
+ modified after the hibernation image has been created and before the
+ system is finally powered off. The majority of these are user space
+ processes, but if any of the kernel threads may cause something like this
+ to happen, they have to be freezable.
2. Next, to create the hibernation image we need to free a sufficient amount of
-memory (approximately 50% of available RAM) and we need to do that before
-devices are deactivated, because we generally need them for swapping out. Then,
-after the memory for the image has been freed, we don't want tasks to allocate
-additional memory and we prevent them from doing that by freezing them earlier.
-[Of course, this also means that device drivers should not allocate substantial
-amounts of memory from their .suspend() callbacks before hibernation, but this
-is a separate issue.]
+ memory (approximately 50% of available RAM) and we need to do that before
+ devices are deactivated, because we generally need them for swapping out.
+ Then, after the memory for the image has been freed, we don't want tasks
+ to allocate additional memory and we prevent them from doing that by
+ freezing them earlier. [Of course, this also means that device drivers
+ should not allocate substantial amounts of memory from their .suspend()
+ callbacks before hibernation, but this is a separate issue.]
3. The third reason is to prevent user space processes and some kernel threads
-from interfering with the suspending and resuming of devices. A user space
-process running on a second CPU while we are suspending devices may, for
-example, be troublesome and without the freezing of tasks we would need some
-safeguards against race conditions that might occur in such a case.
+ from interfering with the suspending and resuming of devices. A user space
+ process running on a second CPU while we are suspending devices may, for
+ example, be troublesome and without the freezing of tasks we would need some
+ safeguards against race conditions that might occur in such a case.
Although Linus Torvalds doesn't like the freezing of tasks, he said this in one
of the discussions on LKML (http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/4/27/608):
@@ -132,7 +140,7 @@ of the discussions on LKML (http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/4/27/608):
Linus: In many ways, 'at all'.
-I _do_ realize the IO request queue issues, and that we cannot actually do
+I **do** realize the IO request queue issues, and that we cannot actually do
s2ram with some devices in the middle of a DMA. So we want to be able to
avoid *that*, there's no question about that. And I suspect that stopping
user threads and then waiting for a sync is practically one of the easier
@@ -150,17 +158,18 @@ thawed after the driver's .resume() callback has run, so it won't be accessing
the device while it's suspended.
4. Another reason for freezing tasks is to prevent user space processes from
-realizing that hibernation (or suspend) operation takes place. Ideally, user
-space processes should not notice that such a system-wide operation has occurred
-and should continue running without any problems after the restore (or resume
-from suspend). Unfortunately, in the most general case this is quite difficult
-to achieve without the freezing of tasks. Consider, for example, a process
-that depends on all CPUs being online while it's running. Since we need to
-disable nonboot CPUs during the hibernation, if this process is not frozen, it
-may notice that the number of CPUs has changed and may start to work incorrectly
-because of that.
+ realizing that hibernation (or suspend) operation takes place. Ideally, user
+ space processes should not notice that such a system-wide operation has
+ occurred and should continue running without any problems after the restore
+ (or resume from suspend). Unfortunately, in the most general case this
+ is quite difficult to achieve without the freezing of tasks. Consider,
+ for example, a process that depends on all CPUs being online while it's
+ running. Since we need to disable nonboot CPUs during the hibernation,
+ if this process is not frozen, it may notice that the number of CPUs has
+ changed and may start to work incorrectly because of that.
V. Are there any problems related to the freezing of tasks?
+===========================================================
Yes, there are.
@@ -172,11 +181,12 @@ may be undesirable. That's why kernel threads are not freezable by default.
Second, there are the following two problems related to the freezing of user
space processes:
+
1. Putting processes into an uninterruptible sleep distorts the load average.
2. Now that we have FUSE, plus the framework for doing device drivers in
-userspace, it gets even more complicated because some userspace processes are
-now doing the sorts of things that kernel threads do
-(https://lists.linux-foundation.org/pipermail/linux-pm/2007-May/012309.html).
+ userspace, it gets even more complicated because some userspace processes are
+ now doing the sorts of things that kernel threads do
+ (https://lists.linux-foundation.org/pipermail/linux-pm/2007-May/012309.html).
The problem 1. seems to be fixable, although it hasn't been fixed so far. The
other one is more serious, but it seems that we can work around it by using
@@ -201,6 +211,7 @@ requested early enough using the suspend notifier API described in
Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst.
VI. Are there any precautions to be taken to prevent freezing failures?
+=======================================================================
Yes, there are.
@@ -226,6 +237,8 @@ So, to summarize, use [un]lock_system_sleep() instead of directly using
mutex_[un]lock(&system_transition_mutex). That would prevent freezing failures.
V. Miscellaneous
+================
+
/sys/power/pm_freeze_timeout controls how long it will cost at most to freeze
all user space processes or all freezable kernel threads, in unit of millisecond.
The default value is 20000, with range of unsigned integer.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/interface.txt b/Documentation/power/interface.txt
index 27df7f98668a..6e22a4d02d4b 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/interface.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+===========================================
Power Management Interface for System Sleep
+===========================================
Copyright (c) 2016 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
@@ -11,10 +13,10 @@ mounted at /sys).
Reading from it returns a list of supported sleep states, encoded as:
-'freeze' (Suspend-to-Idle)
-'standby' (Power-On Suspend)
-'mem' (Suspend-to-RAM)
-'disk' (Suspend-to-Disk)
+- 'freeze' (Suspend-to-Idle)
+- 'standby' (Power-On Suspend)
+- 'mem' (Suspend-to-RAM)
+- 'disk' (Suspend-to-Disk)
Suspend-to-Idle is always supported. Suspend-to-Disk is always supported
too as long the kernel has been configured to support hibernation at all
@@ -32,11 +34,11 @@ Specifically, it tells the kernel what to do after creating a hibernation image.
Reading from it returns a list of supported options encoded as:
-'platform' (put the system into sleep using a platform-provided method)
-'shutdown' (shut the system down)
-'reboot' (reboot the system)
-'suspend' (trigger a Suspend-to-RAM transition)
-'test_resume' (resume-after-hibernation test mode)
+- 'platform' (put the system into sleep using a platform-provided method)
+- 'shutdown' (shut the system down)
+- 'reboot' (reboot the system)
+- 'suspend' (trigger a Suspend-to-RAM transition)
+- 'test_resume' (resume-after-hibernation test mode)
The currently selected option is printed in square brackets.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt
index 0c007e250cd1..b3cf1def9dee 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,23 @@
+==========================================
Operating Performance Points (OPP) Library
==========================================
(C) 2009-2010 Nishanth Menon <[email protected]>, Texas Instruments Incorporated
-Contents
---------
-1. Introduction
-2. Initial OPP List Registration
-3. OPP Search Functions
-4. OPP Availability Control Functions
-5. OPP Data Retrieval Functions
-6. Data Structures
+.. Contents
+
+ 1. Introduction
+ 2. Initial OPP List Registration
+ 3. OPP Search Functions
+ 4. OPP Availability Control Functions
+ 5. OPP Data Retrieval Functions
+ 6. Data Structures
1. Introduction
===============
+
1.1 What is an Operating Performance Point (OPP)?
+-------------------------------------------------
Complex SoCs of today consists of a multiple sub-modules working in conjunction.
In an operational system executing varied use cases, not all modules in the SoC
@@ -28,16 +31,19 @@ the device will support per domain are called Operating Performance Points or
OPPs.
As an example:
+
Let us consider an MPU device which supports the following:
{300MHz at minimum voltage of 1V}, {800MHz at minimum voltage of 1.2V},
{1GHz at minimum voltage of 1.3V}
We can represent these as three OPPs as the following {Hz, uV} tuples:
-{300000000, 1000000}
-{800000000, 1200000}
-{1000000000, 1300000}
+
+- {300000000, 1000000}
+- {800000000, 1200000}
+- {1000000000, 1300000}
1.2 Operating Performance Points Library
+----------------------------------------
OPP library provides a set of helper functions to organize and query the OPP
information. The library is located in drivers/base/power/opp.c and the header
@@ -46,9 +52,10 @@ CONFIG_PM_OPP from power management menuconfig menu. OPP library depends on
CONFIG_PM as certain SoCs such as Texas Instrument's OMAP framework allows to
optionally boot at a certain OPP without needing cpufreq.
-Typical usage of the OPP library is as follows:
-(users) -> registers a set of default OPPs -> (library)
-SoC framework -> modifies on required cases certain OPPs -> OPP layer
+Typical usage of the OPP library is as follows::
+
+ (users) -> registers a set of default OPPs -> (library)
+ SoC framework -> modifies on required cases certain OPPs -> OPP layer
-> queries to search/retrieve information ->
OPP layer expects each domain to be represented by a unique device pointer. SoC
@@ -57,8 +64,9 @@ list is expected to be an optimally small number typically around 5 per device.
This initial list contains a set of OPPs that the framework expects to be safely
enabled by default in the system.
-Note on OPP Availability:
-------------------------
+Note on OPP Availability
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
As the system proceeds to operate, SoC framework may choose to make certain
OPPs available or not available on each device based on various external
factors. Example usage: Thermal management or other exceptional situations where
@@ -88,7 +96,8 @@ registering the OPPs is maintained by OPP library throughout the device
operation. The SoC framework can subsequently control the availability of the
OPPs dynamically using the dev_pm_opp_enable / disable functions.
-dev_pm_opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer.
+dev_pm_opp_add
+ Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer.
The OPP is defined using the frequency and voltage. Once added, the OPP
is assumed to be available and control of it's availability can be done
with the dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions. OPP library internally stores
@@ -96,9 +105,11 @@ dev_pm_opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device p
used by SoC framework to define a optimal list as per the demands of
SoC usage environment.
- WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context.
+ WARNING:
+ Do not use this function in interrupt context.
+
+ Example::
- Example:
soc_pm_init()
{
/* Do things */
@@ -125,12 +136,15 @@ Callers of these functions shall call dev_pm_opp_put() after they have used the
OPP. Otherwise the memory for the OPP will never get freed and result in
memleak.
-dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact - Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and
+dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact
+ Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and
availability. This function is especially useful to enable an OPP which
is not available by default.
Example: In a case when SoC framework detects a situation where a
higher frequency could be made available, it can use this function to
- find the OPP prior to call the dev_pm_opp_enable to actually make it available.
+ find the OPP prior to call the dev_pm_opp_enable to actually make
+ it available::
+
opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false);
dev_pm_opp_put(opp);
/* dont operate on the pointer.. just do a sanity check.. */
@@ -141,27 +155,34 @@ dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact - Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and
dev_pm_opp_enable(dev,1000000000);
}
- NOTE: This is the only search function that operates on OPPs which are
- not available.
+ NOTE:
+ This is the only search function that operates on OPPs which are
+ not available.
-dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor - Search for an available OPP which is *at most* the
+dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor
+ Search for an available OPP which is *at most* the
provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a lesser
match OR operating on OPP information in the order of decreasing
frequency.
- Example: To find the highest opp for a device:
+ Example: To find the highest opp for a device::
+
freq = ULONG_MAX;
opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor(dev, &freq);
dev_pm_opp_put(opp);
-dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the
+dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil
+ Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the
provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a
higher match OR operating on OPP information in the order of increasing
frequency.
- Example 1: To find the lowest opp for a device:
+ Example 1: To find the lowest opp for a device::
+
freq = 0;
opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq);
dev_pm_opp_put(opp);
- Example 2: A simplified implementation of a SoC cpufreq_driver->target:
+
+ Example 2: A simplified implementation of a SoC cpufreq_driver->target::
+
soc_cpufreq_target(..)
{
/* Do stuff like policy checks etc. */
@@ -184,12 +205,15 @@ fine grained dynamic control of which sets of OPPs are operationally available.
These functions are intended to *temporarily* remove an OPP in conditions such
as thermal considerations (e.g. don't use OPPx until the temperature drops).
-WARNING: Do not use these functions in interrupt context.
+WARNING:
+ Do not use these functions in interrupt context.
-dev_pm_opp_enable - Make a OPP available for operation.
+dev_pm_opp_enable
+ Make a OPP available for operation.
Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be made available only if the
SoC temperature is lower than a certain threshold. The SoC framework
- implementation might choose to do something as follows:
+ implementation might choose to do something as follows::
+
if (cur_temp < temp_low_thresh) {
/* Enable 1GHz if it was disabled */
opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false);
@@ -201,10 +225,12 @@ dev_pm_opp_enable - Make a OPP available for operation.
goto try_something_else;
}
-dev_pm_opp_disable - Make an OPP to be not available for operation
+dev_pm_opp_disable
+ Make an OPP to be not available for operation
Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be disabled if the temperature
exceeds a threshold value. The SoC framework implementation might
- choose to do something as follows:
+ choose to do something as follows::
+
if (cur_temp > temp_high_thresh) {
/* Disable 1GHz if it was enabled */
opp = dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, true);
@@ -223,11 +249,13 @@ information from the OPP structure is necessary. Once an OPP pointer is
retrieved using the search functions, the following functions can be used by SoC
framework to retrieve the information represented inside the OPP layer.
-dev_pm_opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer.
+dev_pm_opp_get_voltage
+ Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer.
Example: At a cpufreq transition to a different frequency, SoC
framework requires to set the voltage represented by the OPP using
the regulator framework to the Power Management chip providing the
- voltage.
+ voltage::
+
soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq)
{
/* do things */
@@ -239,10 +267,12 @@ dev_pm_opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer.
/* do other things */
}
-dev_pm_opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer.
+dev_pm_opp_get_freq
+ Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer.
Example: Lets say the SoC framework uses a couple of helper functions
we could pass opp pointers instead of doing additional parameters to
- handle quiet a bit of data parameters.
+ handle quiet a bit of data parameters::
+
soc_cpufreq_target(..)
{
/* do things.. */
@@ -264,9 +294,11 @@ dev_pm_opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer.
/* do things.. */
}
-dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device
+dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count
+ Retrieve the number of available opps for a device
Example: Lets say a co-processor in the SoC needs to know the available
- frequencies in a table, the main processor can notify as following:
+ frequencies in a table, the main processor can notify as following::
+
soc_notify_coproc_available_frequencies()
{
/* Do things */
@@ -289,54 +321,59 @@ dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device
==================
Typically an SoC contains multiple voltage domains which are variable. Each
domain is represented by a device pointer. The relationship to OPP can be
-represented as follows:
-SoC
- |- device 1
- | |- opp 1 (availability, freq, voltage)
- | |- opp 2 ..
- ... ...
- | `- opp n ..
- |- device 2
- ...
- `- device m
+represented as follows::
+
+ SoC
+ |- device 1
+ | |- opp 1 (availability, freq, voltage)
+ | |- opp 2 ..
+ ... ...
+ | `- opp n ..
+ |- device 2
+ ...
+ `- device m
OPP library maintains a internal list that the SoC framework populates and
accessed by various functions as described above. However, the structures
representing the actual OPPs and domains are internal to the OPP library itself
to allow for suitable abstraction reusable across systems.
-struct dev_pm_opp - The internal data structure of OPP library which is used to
+struct dev_pm_opp
+ The internal data structure of OPP library which is used to
represent an OPP. In addition to the freq, voltage, availability
information, it also contains internal book keeping information required
for the OPP library to operate on. Pointer to this structure is
provided back to the users such as SoC framework to be used as a
identifier for OPP in the interactions with OPP layer.
- WARNING: The struct dev_pm_opp pointer should not be parsed or modified by the
- users. The defaults of for an instance is populated by dev_pm_opp_add, but the
- availability of the OPP can be modified by dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions.
+ WARNING:
+ The struct dev_pm_opp pointer should not be parsed or modified by the
+ users. The defaults of for an instance is populated by
+ dev_pm_opp_add, but the availability of the OPP can be modified
+ by dev_pm_opp_enable/disable functions.
-struct device - This is used to identify a domain to the OPP layer. The
+struct device
+ This is used to identify a domain to the OPP layer. The
nature of the device and it's implementation is left to the user of
OPP library such as the SoC framework.
Overall, in a simplistic view, the data structure operations is represented as
-following:
+following::
-Initialization / modification:
- +-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_enable
-dev_pm_opp_add --> | opp | <-------
- | +-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_disable
- \-------> domain_info(device)
+ Initialization / modification:
+ +-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_enable
+ dev_pm_opp_add --> | opp | <-------
+ | +-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_disable
+ \-------> domain_info(device)
-Search functions:
- /-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil ---\ +-----+
-domain_info<---- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact -----> | opp |
- \-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor ---/ +-----+
+ Search functions:
+ /-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_ceil ---\ +-----+
+ domain_info<---- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_exact -----> | opp |
+ \-- dev_pm_opp_find_freq_floor ---/ +-----+
-Retrieval functions:
-+-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_get_voltage
-| opp | <---
-+-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_get_freq
+ Retrieval functions:
+ +-----+ /- dev_pm_opp_get_voltage
+ | opp | <---
+ +-----+ \- dev_pm_opp_get_freq
-domain_info <- dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count
+ domain_info <- dev_pm_opp_get_opp_count
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pci.txt b/Documentation/power/pci.txt
index 8eaf9ee24d43..99189b36b58b 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/pci.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+====================
PCI Power Management
+====================
Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, Novell Inc.
@@ -11,12 +13,12 @@ devices. For general description of the kernel's interfaces related to device
power management refer to Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst and
Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+.. contents:
-1. Hardware and Platform Support for PCI Power Management
-2. PCI Subsystem and Device Power Management
-3. PCI Device Drivers and Power Management
-4. Resources
+ 1. Hardware and Platform Support for PCI Power Management
+ 2. PCI Subsystem and Device Power Management
+ 3. PCI Device Drivers and Power Management
+ 4. Resources
1. Hardware and Platform Support for PCI Power Management
@@ -24,6 +26,7 @@ Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
1.1. Native and Platform-Based Power Management
-----------------------------------------------
+
In general, power management is a feature allowing one to save energy by putting
devices into states in which they draw less power (low-power states) at the
price of reduced functionality or performance.
@@ -67,6 +70,7 @@ mechanisms have to be used simultaneously to obtain the desired result.
1.2. Native PCI Power Management
--------------------------------
+
The PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification (PCI PM Spec) was
introduced between the PCI 2.1 and PCI 2.2 Specifications. It defined a
standard interface for performing various operations related to power
@@ -134,6 +138,7 @@ sufficiently active to generate a wakeup signal.
1.3. ACPI Device Power Management
---------------------------------
+
The platform firmware support for the power management of PCI devices is
system-specific. However, if the system in question is compliant with the
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, like the
@@ -194,6 +199,7 @@ enabled for the device to be able to generate wakeup signals.
1.4. Wakeup Signaling
---------------------
+
Wakeup signals generated by PCI devices, either as native PCI PMEs, or as
a result of the execution of the _DSW (or _PSW) ACPI control method before
putting the device into a low-power state, have to be caught and handled as
@@ -265,14 +271,15 @@ the native PCI Express PME signaling cannot be used by the kernel in that case.
2.1. Device Power Management Callbacks
--------------------------------------
+
The PCI Subsystem participates in the power management of PCI devices in a
number of ways. First of all, it provides an intermediate code layer between
the device power management core (PM core) and PCI device drivers.
Specifically, the pm field of the PCI subsystem's struct bus_type object,
pci_bus_type, points to a struct dev_pm_ops object, pci_dev_pm_ops, containing
-pointers to several device power management callbacks:
+pointers to several device power management callbacks::
-const struct dev_pm_ops pci_dev_pm_ops = {
+ const struct dev_pm_ops pci_dev_pm_ops = {
.prepare = pci_pm_prepare,
.complete = pci_pm_complete,
.suspend = pci_pm_suspend,
@@ -290,7 +297,7 @@ const struct dev_pm_ops pci_dev_pm_ops = {
.runtime_suspend = pci_pm_runtime_suspend,
.runtime_resume = pci_pm_runtime_resume,
.runtime_idle = pci_pm_runtime_idle,
-};
+ };
These callbacks are executed by the PM core in various situations related to
device power management and they, in turn, execute power management callbacks
@@ -299,9 +306,9 @@ involving some standard configuration registers of PCI devices that device
drivers need not know or care about.
The structure representing a PCI device, struct pci_dev, contains several fields
-that these callbacks operate on:
+that these callbacks operate on::
-struct pci_dev {
+ struct pci_dev {
...
pci_power_t current_state; /* Current operating state. */
int pm_cap; /* PM capability offset in the
@@ -315,13 +322,14 @@ struct pci_dev {
unsigned int wakeup_prepared:1; /* Device prepared for wake up */
unsigned int d3_delay; /* D3->D0 transition time in ms */
...
-};
+ };
They also indirectly use some fields of the struct device that is embedded in
struct pci_dev.
2.2. Device Initialization
--------------------------
+
The PCI subsystem's first task related to device power management is to
prepare the device for power management and initialize the fields of struct
pci_dev used for this purpose. This happens in two functions defined in
@@ -348,10 +356,11 @@ during system-wide transitions to a sleep state and back to the working state.
2.3. Runtime Device Power Management
------------------------------------
+
The PCI subsystem plays a vital role in the runtime power management of PCI
devices. For this purpose it uses the general runtime power management
(runtime PM) framework described in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
-Namely, it provides subsystem-level callbacks:
+Namely, it provides subsystem-level callbacks::
pci_pm_runtime_suspend()
pci_pm_runtime_resume()
@@ -425,13 +434,14 @@ to the given subsystem before the next phase begins. These phases always run
after tasks have been frozen.
2.4.1. System Suspend
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When the system is going into a sleep state in which the contents of memory will
be preserved, such as one of the ACPI sleep states S1-S3, the phases are:
prepare, suspend, suspend_noirq.
-The following PCI bus type's callbacks, respectively, are used in these phases:
+The following PCI bus type's callbacks, respectively, are used in these phases::
pci_pm_prepare()
pci_pm_suspend()
@@ -492,6 +502,7 @@ this purpose). PCI device drivers are not encouraged to do that, but in some
rare cases doing that in the driver may be the optimum approach.
2.4.2. System Resume
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
When the system is undergoing a transition from a sleep state in which the
contents of memory have been preserved, such as one of the ACPI sleep states
@@ -500,7 +511,7 @@ S1-S3, into the working state (ACPI S0), the phases are:
resume_noirq, resume, complete.
The following PCI bus type's callbacks, respectively, are executed in these
-phases:
+phases::
pci_pm_resume_noirq()
pci_pm_resume()
@@ -539,6 +550,7 @@ The pci_pm_complete() routine only executes the device driver's pm->complete()
callback, if defined.
2.4.3. System Hibernation
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
System hibernation is more complicated than system suspend, because it requires
a system image to be created and written into a persistent storage medium. The
@@ -551,7 +563,7 @@ to be free) in the following three phases:
prepare, freeze, freeze_noirq
-that correspond to the PCI bus type's callbacks:
+that correspond to the PCI bus type's callbacks::
pci_pm_prepare()
pci_pm_freeze()
@@ -580,7 +592,7 @@ back to the fully functional state and this is done in the following phases:
thaw_noirq, thaw, complete
-using the following PCI bus type's callbacks:
+using the following PCI bus type's callbacks::
pci_pm_thaw_noirq()
pci_pm_thaw()
@@ -608,7 +620,7 @@ three phases:
where the prepare phase is exactly the same as for system suspend. The other
two phases are analogous to the suspend and suspend_noirq phases, respectively.
-The PCI subsystem-level callbacks they correspond to
+The PCI subsystem-level callbacks they correspond to::
pci_pm_poweroff()
pci_pm_poweroff_noirq()
@@ -618,6 +630,7 @@ although they don't attempt to save the device's standard configuration
registers.
2.4.4. System Restore
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
System restore requires a hibernation image to be loaded into memory and the
pre-hibernation memory contents to be restored before the pre-hibernation system
@@ -653,7 +666,7 @@ phases:
The first two of these are analogous to the resume_noirq and resume phases
described above, respectively, and correspond to the following PCI subsystem
-callbacks:
+callbacks::
pci_pm_restore_noirq()
pci_pm_restore()
@@ -671,6 +684,7 @@ resume.
3.1. Power Management Callbacks
-------------------------------
+
PCI device drivers participate in power management by providing callbacks to be
executed by the PCI subsystem's power management routines described above and by
controlling the runtime power management of their devices.
@@ -698,6 +712,7 @@ defined, though, they are expected to behave as described in the following
subsections.
3.1.1. prepare()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The prepare() callback is executed during system suspend, during hibernation
(when a hibernation image is about to be created), during power-off after
@@ -716,6 +731,7 @@ preallocated earlier, for example in a suspend/hibernate notifier as described
in Documentation/driver-api/pm/notifiers.rst).
3.1.2. suspend()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The suspend() callback is only executed during system suspend, after prepare()
callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system.
@@ -742,6 +758,7 @@ operations relying on the driver's ability to handle interrupts should be
carried out in this callback.
3.1.3. suspend_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The suspend_noirq() callback is only executed during system suspend, after
suspend() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
@@ -753,6 +770,7 @@ suspend_noirq() can carry out operations that would cause race conditions to
arise if they were performed in suspend().
3.1.4. freeze()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The freeze() callback is hibernation-specific and is executed in two situations,
during hibernation, after prepare() callbacks have been executed for all devices
@@ -770,6 +788,7 @@ or put it into a low-power state. Still, either it or freeze_noirq() should
save the device's standard configuration registers using pci_save_state().
3.1.5. freeze_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The freeze_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed during
hibernation, after prepare() and freeze() callbacks have been executed for all
@@ -786,6 +805,7 @@ The difference between freeze_noirq() and freeze() is analogous to the
difference between suspend_noirq() and suspend().
3.1.6. poweroff()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The poweroff() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed when the system
is about to be powered off after saving a hibernation image to a persistent
@@ -802,6 +822,7 @@ into a low-power state, respectively, but it need not save the device's standard
configuration registers.
3.1.7. poweroff_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The poweroff_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed after
poweroff() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system.
@@ -814,6 +835,7 @@ The difference between poweroff_noirq() and poweroff() is analogous to the
difference between suspend_noirq() and suspend().
3.1.8. resume_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The resume_noirq() callback is only executed during system resume, after the
PM core has enabled the non-boot CPUs. The driver's interrupt handler will not
@@ -827,6 +849,7 @@ it should only be used for performing operations that would lead to race
conditions if carried out by resume().
3.1.9. resume()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The resume() callback is only executed during system resume, after
resume_noirq() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
@@ -837,6 +860,7 @@ device and bringing it back to the fully functional state. The device should be
able to process I/O in a usual way after resume() has returned.
3.1.10. thaw_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The thaw_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed after a
system image has been created and the non-boot CPUs have been enabled by the PM
@@ -851,6 +875,7 @@ freeze() and freeze_noirq(), so in general it does not need to modify the
contents of the device's registers.
3.1.11. thaw()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The thaw() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed after thaw_noirq()
callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and after device
@@ -860,6 +885,7 @@ This callback is responsible for restoring the pre-freeze configuration of
the device, so that it will work in a usual way after thaw() has returned.
3.1.12. restore_noirq()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The restore_noirq() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed in the
restore_noirq phase of hibernation, when the boot kernel has passed control to
@@ -875,6 +901,7 @@ For the vast majority of PCI device drivers there is no difference between
resume_noirq() and restore_noirq().
3.1.13. restore()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The restore() callback is hibernation-specific. It is executed after
restore_noirq() callbacks have been executed for all devices in the system and
@@ -888,14 +915,17 @@ For the vast majority of PCI device drivers there is no difference between
resume() and restore().
3.1.14. complete()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The complete() callback is executed in the following situations:
+
- during system resume, after resume() callbacks have been executed for all
devices,
- during hibernation, before saving the system image, after thaw() callbacks
have been executed for all devices,
- during system restore, when the system is going back to its pre-hibernation
state, after restore() callbacks have been executed for all devices.
+
It also may be executed if the loading of a hibernation image into memory fails
(in that case it is run after thaw() callbacks have been executed for all
devices that have drivers in the boot kernel).
@@ -904,6 +934,7 @@ This callback is entirely optional, although it may be necessary if the
prepare() callback performs operations that need to be reversed.
3.1.15. runtime_suspend()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The runtime_suspend() callback is specific to device runtime power management
(runtime PM). It is executed by the PM core's runtime PM framework when the
@@ -915,6 +946,7 @@ put into a low-power state, but it must allow the PCI subsystem to perform all
of the PCI-specific actions necessary for suspending the device.
3.1.16. runtime_resume()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The runtime_resume() callback is specific to device runtime PM. It is executed
by the PM core's runtime PM framework when the device is about to be resumed
@@ -927,6 +959,7 @@ The device is expected to be able to process I/O in the usual way after
runtime_resume() has returned.
3.1.17. runtime_idle()
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The runtime_idle() callback is specific to device runtime PM. It is executed
by the PM core's runtime PM framework whenever it may be desirable to suspend
@@ -939,6 +972,7 @@ PCI subsystem will call pm_runtime_suspend() for the device, which in turn will
cause the driver's runtime_suspend() callback to be executed.
3.1.18. Pointing Multiple Callback Pointers to One Routine
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Although in principle each of the callbacks described in the previous
subsections can be defined as a separate function, it often is convenient to
@@ -962,6 +996,7 @@ dev_pm_ops to indicate that one suspend routine is to be pointed to by the
be pointed to by the .resume(), .thaw(), and .restore() members.
3.1.19. Driver Flags for Power Management
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The PM core allows device drivers to set flags that influence the handling of
power management for the devices by the core itself and by middle layer code
@@ -1007,6 +1042,7 @@ it.
3.2. Device Runtime Power Management
------------------------------------
+
In addition to providing device power management callbacks PCI device drivers
are responsible for controlling the runtime power management (runtime PM) of
their devices.
@@ -1087,8 +1123,13 @@ Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.
============
PCI Local Bus Specification, Rev. 3.0
+
PCI Bus Power Management Interface Specification, Rev. 1.2
+
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, Rev. 3.0b
+
PCI Express Base Specification, Rev. 2.0
+
Documentation/driver-api/pm/devices.rst
+
Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
index 19c5f7b1a7ba..945fc6d760c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-PM Quality Of Service Interface.
+===============================
+PM Quality Of Service Interface
+===============================
This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering
performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on
@@ -11,6 +13,7 @@ memory_bandwidth.
constraints and PM QoS flags.
Each parameters have defined units:
+
* latency: usec
* timeout: usec
* throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec)
@@ -18,6 +21,7 @@ Each parameters have defined units:
1. PM QoS framework
+===================
The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented
parameter. The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init()
@@ -37,38 +41,39 @@ reading the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism.
From kernel mode the use of this interface is simple:
void pm_qos_add_request(handle, param_class, target_value):
-Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM QoS class with the
-target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
-registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
-Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle for future use in other
-pm_qos API functions.
+ Will insert an element into the list for that identified PM QoS class with the
+ target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
+ registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
+ Clients of pm_qos need to save the returned handle for future use in other
+ pm_qos API functions.
void pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_target_value):
-Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value
-and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification tree if the
-target is changed.
+ Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value
+ and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification tree if the
+ target is changed.
void pm_qos_remove_request(handle):
-Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and
-call the notification tree if the target was changed as a result of removing
-the request.
+ Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and
+ call the notification tree if the target was changed as a result of removing
+ the request.
int pm_qos_request(param_class):
-Returns the aggregated value for a given PM QoS class.
+ Returns the aggregated value for a given PM QoS class.
int pm_qos_request_active(handle):
-Returns if the request is still active, i.e. it has not been removed from a
-PM QoS class constraints list.
+ Returns if the request is still active, i.e. it has not been removed from a
+ PM QoS class constraints list.
int pm_qos_add_notifier(param_class, notifier):
-Adds a notification callback function to the PM QoS class. The callback is
-called when the aggregated value for the PM QoS class is changed.
+ Adds a notification callback function to the PM QoS class. The callback is
+ called when the aggregated value for the PM QoS class is changed.
int pm_qos_remove_notifier(int param_class, notifier):
-Removes the notification callback function for the PM QoS class.
+ Removes the notification callback function for the PM QoS class.
From user mode:
+
Only processes can register a pm_qos request. To provide for automatic
cleanup of a process, the interface requires the process to register its
parameter requests in the following way:
@@ -89,6 +94,7 @@ node.
2. PM QoS per-device latency and flags framework
+================================================
For each device, there are three lists of PM QoS requests. Two of them are
maintained along with the aggregated targets of resume latency and active
@@ -107,73 +113,80 @@ the aggregated value does not require any locking mechanism.
From kernel mode the use of this interface is the following:
int dev_pm_qos_add_request(device, handle, type, value):
-Will insert an element into the list for that identified device with the
-target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
-registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
-Clients of dev_pm_qos need to save the handle for future use in other
-dev_pm_qos API functions.
+ Will insert an element into the list for that identified device with the
+ target value. Upon change to this list the new target is recomputed and any
+ registered notifiers are called only if the target value is now different.
+ Clients of dev_pm_qos need to save the handle for future use in other
+ dev_pm_qos API functions.
int dev_pm_qos_update_request(handle, new_value):
-Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target value
-and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification trees if the
-target is changed.
+ Will update the list element pointed to by the handle with the new target
+ value and recompute the new aggregated target, calling the notification
+ trees if the target is changed.
int dev_pm_qos_remove_request(handle):
-Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target and
-call the notification trees if the target was changed as a result of removing
-the request.
+ Will remove the element. After removal it will update the aggregate target
+ and call the notification trees if the target was changed as a result of
+ removing the request.
s32 dev_pm_qos_read_value(device):
-Returns the aggregated value for a given device's constraints list.
+ Returns the aggregated value for a given device's constraints list.
enum pm_qos_flags_status dev_pm_qos_flags(device, mask)
-Check PM QoS flags of the given device against the given mask of flags.
-The meaning of the return values is as follows:
- PM_QOS_FLAGS_ALL: All flags from the mask are set
- PM_QOS_FLAGS_SOME: Some flags from the mask are set
- PM_QOS_FLAGS_NONE: No flags from the mask are set
- PM_QOS_FLAGS_UNDEFINED: The device's PM QoS structure has not been
- initialized or the list of requests is empty.
+ Check PM QoS flags of the given device against the given mask of flags.
+ The meaning of the return values is as follows:
+
+ PM_QOS_FLAGS_ALL:
+ All flags from the mask are set
+ PM_QOS_FLAGS_SOME:
+ Some flags from the mask are set
+ PM_QOS_FLAGS_NONE:
+ No flags from the mask are set
+ PM_QOS_FLAGS_UNDEFINED:
+ The device's PM QoS structure has not been initialized
+ or the list of requests is empty.
int dev_pm_qos_add_ancestor_request(dev, handle, type, value)
-Add a PM QoS request for the first direct ancestor of the given device whose
-power.ignore_children flag is unset (for DEV_PM_QOS_RESUME_LATENCY requests)
-or whose power.set_latency_tolerance callback pointer is not NULL (for
-DEV_PM_QOS_LATENCY_TOLERANCE requests).
+ Add a PM QoS request for the first direct ancestor of the given device whose
+ power.ignore_children flag is unset (for DEV_PM_QOS_RESUME_LATENCY requests)
+ or whose power.set_latency_tolerance callback pointer is not NULL (for
+ DEV_PM_QOS_LATENCY_TOLERANCE requests).
int dev_pm_qos_expose_latency_limit(device, value)
-Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of resume latency constraints and
-create a sysfs attribute pm_qos_resume_latency_us under the device's power
-directory allowing user space to manipulate that request.
+ Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of resume latency constraints and
+ create a sysfs attribute pm_qos_resume_latency_us under the device's power
+ directory allowing user space to manipulate that request.
void dev_pm_qos_hide_latency_limit(device)
-Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_latency_limit() from the device's
-PM QoS list of resume latency constraints and remove sysfs attribute
-pm_qos_resume_latency_us from the device's power directory.
+ Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_latency_limit() from the device's
+ PM QoS list of resume latency constraints and remove sysfs attribute
+ pm_qos_resume_latency_us from the device's power directory.
int dev_pm_qos_expose_flags(device, value)
-Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of flags and create sysfs attribute
-pm_qos_no_power_off under the device's power directory allowing user space to
-change the value of the PM_QOS_FLAG_NO_POWER_OFF flag.
+ Add a request to the device's PM QoS list of flags and create sysfs attribute
+ pm_qos_no_power_off under the device's power directory allowing user space to
+ change the value of the PM_QOS_FLAG_NO_POWER_OFF flag.
void dev_pm_qos_hide_flags(device)
-Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_flags() from the device's PM QoS list
-of flags and remove sysfs attribute pm_qos_no_power_off from the device's power
-directory.
+ Drop the request added by dev_pm_qos_expose_flags() from the device's PM QoS list
+ of flags and remove sysfs attribute pm_qos_no_power_off from the device's power
+ directory.
Notification mechanisms:
+
The per-device PM QoS framework has a per-device notification tree.
int dev_pm_qos_add_notifier(device, notifier):
-Adds a notification callback function for the device.
-The callback is called when the aggregated value of the device constraints list
-is changed (for resume latency device PM QoS only).
+ Adds a notification callback function for the device.
+ The callback is called when the aggregated value of the device constraints list
+ is changed (for resume latency device PM QoS only).
int dev_pm_qos_remove_notifier(device, notifier):
-Removes the notification callback function for the device.
+ Removes the notification callback function for the device.
Active state latency tolerance
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
This device PM QoS type is used to support systems in which hardware may switch
to energy-saving operation modes on the fly. In those systems, if the operation
diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
index 300d37896e51..3f2c3fe38a61 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+========================
Linux power supply class
========================
@@ -56,112 +57,155 @@ Quoting include/linux/power_supply.h:
Attributes/properties detailed
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Charge/Energy/Capacity - how to not confuse ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
-~ ~
-~ Because both "charge" (µAh) and "energy" (µWh) represents "capacity" ~
-~ of battery, this class distinguish these terms. Don't mix them! ~
-~ ~
-~ CHARGE_* attributes represents capacity in µAh only. ~
-~ ENERGY_* attributes represents capacity in µWh only. ~
-~ CAPACITY attribute represents capacity in *percents*, from 0 to 100. ~
-~ ~
-~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
++--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Charge/Energy/Capacity - how to not confuse** |
++--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Because both "charge" (µAh) and "energy" (µWh) represents "capacity" |
+| of battery, this class distinguish these terms. Don't mix them!** |
+| |
+| - `CHARGE_*` |
+| attributes represents capacity in µAh only. |
+| - `ENERGY_*` |
+| attributes represents capacity in µWh only. |
+| - `CAPACITY` |
+| attribute represents capacity in *percents*, from 0 to 100. |
++--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Postfixes:
-_AVG - *hardware* averaged value, use it if your hardware is really able to
-report averaged values.
-_NOW - momentary/instantaneous values.
-STATUS - this attribute represents operating status (charging, full,
-discharging (i.e. powering a load), etc.). This corresponds to
-BATTERY_STATUS_* values, as defined in battery.h.
-
-CHARGE_TYPE - batteries can typically charge at different rates.
-This defines trickle and fast charges. For batteries that
-are already charged or discharging, 'n/a' can be displayed (or
-'unknown', if the status is not known).
-
-AUTHENTIC - indicates the power supply (battery or charger) connected
-to the platform is authentic(1) or non authentic(0).
-
-HEALTH - represents health of the battery, values corresponds to
-POWER_SUPPLY_HEALTH_*, defined in battery.h.
-
-VOLTAGE_OCV - open circuit voltage of the battery.
-
-VOLTAGE_MAX_DESIGN, VOLTAGE_MIN_DESIGN - design values for maximal and
-minimal power supply voltages. Maximal/minimal means values of voltages
-when battery considered "full"/"empty" at normal conditions. Yes, there is
-no direct relation between voltage and battery capacity, but some dumb
-batteries use voltage for very approximated calculation of capacity.
-Battery driver also can use this attribute just to inform userspace
-about maximal and minimal voltage thresholds of a given battery.
-
-VOLTAGE_MAX, VOLTAGE_MIN - same as _DESIGN voltage values except that
-these ones should be used if hardware could only guess (measure and
-retain) the thresholds of a given power supply.
-
-VOLTAGE_BOOT - Reports the voltage measured during boot
-
-CURRENT_BOOT - Reports the current measured during boot
-
-CHARGE_FULL_DESIGN, CHARGE_EMPTY_DESIGN - design charge values, when
-battery considered full/empty.
-
-ENERGY_FULL_DESIGN, ENERGY_EMPTY_DESIGN - same as above but for energy.
-
-CHARGE_FULL, CHARGE_EMPTY - These attributes means "last remembered value
-of charge when battery became full/empty". It also could mean "value of
-charge when battery considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature,
-age)". I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values.
-
-ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy.
-
-CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh). This could easily
-be negative; there is no empty or full value. It is only useful for
-relative, time-based measurements.
-
-PRECHARGE_CURRENT - the maximum charge current during precharge phase
-of charge cycle (typically 20% of battery capacity).
-CHARGE_TERM_CURRENT - Charge termination current. The charge cycle
-terminates when battery voltage is above recharge threshold, and charge
-current is below this setting (typically 10% of battery capacity).
-
-CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT - constant charge current programmed by charger.
-CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT_MAX - maximum charge current supported by the
-power supply object.
-
-CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE - constant charge voltage programmed by charger.
-CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE_MAX - maximum charge voltage supported by the
-power supply object.
-
-INPUT_CURRENT_LIMIT - input current limit programmed by charger. Indicates
-the current drawn from a charging source.
-
-CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT - current charge control limit setting
-CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT_MAX - maximum charge control limit setting
-
-CALIBRATE - battery or coulomb counter calibration status
-
-CAPACITY - capacity in percents.
-CAPACITY_ALERT_MIN - minimum capacity alert value in percents.
-CAPACITY_ALERT_MAX - maximum capacity alert value in percents.
-CAPACITY_LEVEL - capacity level. This corresponds to
-POWER_SUPPLY_CAPACITY_LEVEL_*.
-
-TEMP - temperature of the power supply.
-TEMP_ALERT_MIN - minimum battery temperature alert.
-TEMP_ALERT_MAX - maximum battery temperature alert.
-TEMP_AMBIENT - ambient temperature.
-TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN - minimum ambient temperature alert.
-TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX - maximum ambient temperature alert.
-TEMP_MIN - minimum operatable temperature
-TEMP_MAX - maximum operatable temperature
-
-TIME_TO_EMPTY - seconds left for battery to be considered empty (i.e.
-while battery powers a load)
-TIME_TO_FULL - seconds left for battery to be considered full (i.e.
-while battery is charging)
+_AVG
+ *hardware* averaged value, use it if your hardware is really able to
+ report averaged values.
+_NOW
+ momentary/instantaneous values.
+
+STATUS
+ this attribute represents operating status (charging, full,
+ discharging (i.e. powering a load), etc.). This corresponds to
+ `BATTERY_STATUS_*` values, as defined in battery.h.
+
+CHARGE_TYPE
+ batteries can typically charge at different rates.
+ This defines trickle and fast charges. For batteries that
+ are already charged or discharging, 'n/a' can be displayed (or
+ 'unknown', if the status is not known).
+
+AUTHENTIC
+ indicates the power supply (battery or charger) connected
+ to the platform is authentic(1) or non authentic(0).
+
+HEALTH
+ represents health of the battery, values corresponds to
+ POWER_SUPPLY_HEALTH_*, defined in battery.h.
+
+VOLTAGE_OCV
+ open circuit voltage of the battery.
+
+VOLTAGE_MAX_DESIGN, VOLTAGE_MIN_DESIGN
+ design values for maximal and minimal power supply voltages.
+ Maximal/minimal means values of voltages when battery considered
+ "full"/"empty" at normal conditions. Yes, there is no direct relation
+ between voltage and battery capacity, but some dumb
+ batteries use voltage for very approximated calculation of capacity.
+ Battery driver also can use this attribute just to inform userspace
+ about maximal and minimal voltage thresholds of a given battery.
+
+VOLTAGE_MAX, VOLTAGE_MIN
+ same as _DESIGN voltage values except that these ones should be used
+ if hardware could only guess (measure and retain) the thresholds of a
+ given power supply.
+
+VOLTAGE_BOOT
+ Reports the voltage measured during boot
+
+CURRENT_BOOT
+ Reports the current measured during boot
+
+CHARGE_FULL_DESIGN, CHARGE_EMPTY_DESIGN
+ design charge values, when battery considered full/empty.
+
+ENERGY_FULL_DESIGN, ENERGY_EMPTY_DESIGN
+ same as above but for energy.
+
+CHARGE_FULL, CHARGE_EMPTY
+ These attributes means "last remembered value of charge when battery
+ became full/empty". It also could mean "value of charge when battery
+ considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature, age)".
+ I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values.
+
+ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY
+ same as above but for energy.
+
+CHARGE_COUNTER
+ the current charge counter (in µAh). This could easily
+ be negative; there is no empty or full value. It is only useful for
+ relative, time-based measurements.
+
+PRECHARGE_CURRENT
+ the maximum charge current during precharge phase of charge cycle
+ (typically 20% of battery capacity).
+
+CHARGE_TERM_CURRENT
+ Charge termination current. The charge cycle terminates when battery
+ voltage is above recharge threshold, and charge current is below
+ this setting (typically 10% of battery capacity).
+
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT
+ constant charge current programmed by charger.
+
+
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_CURRENT_MAX
+ maximum charge current supported by the power supply object.
+
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE
+ constant charge voltage programmed by charger.
+CONSTANT_CHARGE_VOLTAGE_MAX
+ maximum charge voltage supported by the power supply object.
+
+INPUT_CURRENT_LIMIT
+ input current limit programmed by charger. Indicates
+ the current drawn from a charging source.
+
+CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT
+ current charge control limit setting
+CHARGE_CONTROL_LIMIT_MAX
+ maximum charge control limit setting
+
+CALIBRATE
+ battery or coulomb counter calibration status
+
+CAPACITY
+ capacity in percents.
+CAPACITY_ALERT_MIN
+ minimum capacity alert value in percents.
+CAPACITY_ALERT_MAX
+ maximum capacity alert value in percents.
+CAPACITY_LEVEL
+ capacity level. This corresponds to POWER_SUPPLY_CAPACITY_LEVEL_*.
+
+TEMP
+ temperature of the power supply.
+TEMP_ALERT_MIN
+ minimum battery temperature alert.
+TEMP_ALERT_MAX
+ maximum battery temperature alert.
+TEMP_AMBIENT
+ ambient temperature.
+TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MIN
+ minimum ambient temperature alert.
+TEMP_AMBIENT_ALERT_MAX
+ maximum ambient temperature alert.
+TEMP_MIN
+ minimum operatable temperature
+TEMP_MAX
+ maximum operatable temperature
+
+TIME_TO_EMPTY
+ seconds left for battery to be considered empty
+ (i.e. while battery powers a load)
+TIME_TO_FULL
+ seconds left for battery to be considered full
+ (i.e. while battery is charging)
Battery <-> external power supply interaction
@@ -193,8 +237,11 @@ for naming consistency between sysfs attributes and battery node properties.
QA
~~
-Q: Where is POWER_SUPPLY_PROP_XYZ attribute?
-A: If you cannot find attribute suitable for your driver needs, feel free
+
+Q:
+ Where is POWER_SUPPLY_PROP_XYZ attribute?
+A:
+ If you cannot find attribute suitable for your driver needs, feel free
to add it and send patch along with your driver.
The attributes available currently are the ones currently provided by the
@@ -204,20 +251,24 @@ A: If you cannot find attribute suitable for your driver needs, feel free
etc.
-Q: I have some very specific attribute (e.g. battery color), should I add
+Q:
+ I have some very specific attribute (e.g. battery color), should I add
this attribute to standard ones?
-A: Most likely, no. Such attribute can be placed in the driver itself, if
+A:
+ Most likely, no. Such attribute can be placed in the driver itself, if
it is useful. Of course, if the attribute in question applicable to
large set of batteries, provided by many drivers, and/or comes from
some general battery specification/standard, it may be a candidate to
be added to the core attribute set.
-Q: Suppose, my battery monitoring chip/firmware does not provides capacity
+Q:
+ Suppose, my battery monitoring chip/firmware does not provides capacity
in percents, but provides charge_{now,full,empty}. Should I calculate
percentage capacity manually, inside the driver, and register CAPACITY
attribute? The same question about time_to_empty/time_to_full.
-A: Most likely, no. This class is designed to export properties which are
+A:
+ Most likely, no. This class is designed to export properties which are
directly measurable by the specific hardware available.
Inferring not available properties using some heuristics or mathematical
diff --git a/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt b/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt
index 1e6ef164e07a..7ae3b44c7624 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/powercap/powercap.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
+=======================
Power Capping Framework
-==================================
+=======================
The power capping framework provides a consistent interface between the kernel
and the user space that allows power capping drivers to expose the settings to
user space in a uniform way.
Terminology
-=========================
+===========
+
The framework exposes power capping devices to user space via sysfs in the
form of a tree of objects. The objects at the root level of the tree represent
'control types', which correspond to different methods of power capping. For
@@ -27,121 +29,121 @@ capping to a set of devices together using the parent power zone and if more
fine grained control is required, it can be applied through the subzones.
-Example sysfs interface tree:
+Example sysfs interface tree::
-/sys/devices/virtual/powercap
-??? intel-rapl
- ??? intel-rapl:0
- ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl
- ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ??? intel-rapl:0:0
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:0
- ? ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ? ??? name
- ? ? ??? enabled
- ? ? ??? power
- ? ? ? ??? async
- ? ? ? []
- ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ? ??? uevent
- ? ??? intel-rapl:0:1
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:0
- ? ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ? ??? name
- ? ? ??? enabled
- ? ? ??? power
- ? ? ? ??? async
- ? ? ? []
- ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ? ??? uevent
- ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ??? max_power_range_uw
- ? ??? name
- ? ??? enabled
- ? ??? power
- ? ? ??? async
- ? ? []
- ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ??? enabled
- ? ??? uevent
- ??? intel-rapl:1
- ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl
- ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ??? intel-rapl:1:0
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:1
- ? ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ? ??? name
- ? ? ??? enabled
- ? ? ??? power
- ? ? ? ??? async
- ? ? ? []
- ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ? ??? uevent
- ? ??? intel-rapl:1:1
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_0_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_name
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_power_limit_uw
- ? ? ??? constraint_1_time_window_us
- ? ? ??? device -> ../../intel-rapl:1
- ? ? ??? energy_uj
- ? ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ? ??? name
- ? ? ??? enabled
- ? ? ??? power
- ? ? ? ??? async
- ? ? ? []
- ? ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ? ??? uevent
- ? ??? max_energy_range_uj
- ? ??? max_power_range_uw
- ? ??? name
- ? ??? enabled
- ? ??? power
- ? ? ??? async
- ? ? []
- ? ??? subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap
- ? ??? uevent
- ??? power
- ? ??? async
- ? []
- ??? subsystem -> ../../../../class/power_cap
- ??? enabled
- ??? uevent
+ /sys/devices/virtual/powercap
+ └──intel-rapl
+ ├──intel-rapl:0
+ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl
+ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ ├──intel-rapl:0:0
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl:0
+ │ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ │ ├──name
+ │ │ ├──enabled
+ │ │ ├──power
+ │ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ │ []
+ │ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ │ └──uevent
+ │ ├──intel-rapl:0:1
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl:0
+ │ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ │ ├──name
+ │ │ ├──enabled
+ │ │ ├──power
+ │ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ │ []
+ │ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ │ └──uevent
+ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ ├──max_power_range_uw
+ │ ├──name
+ │ ├──enabled
+ │ ├──power
+ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ []
+ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ ├──enabled
+ │ ├──uevent
+ ├──intel-rapl:1
+ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl
+ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ ├──intel-rapl:1:0
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl:1
+ │ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ │ ├──name
+ │ │ ├──enabled
+ │ │ ├──power
+ │ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ │ []
+ │ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ │ └──uevent
+ │ ├──intel-rapl:1:1
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_0_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_name
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_power_limit_uw
+ │ │ ├──constraint_1_time_window_us
+ │ │ ├──device -> ../../intel-rapl:1
+ │ │ ├──energy_uj
+ │ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ │ ├──name
+ │ │ ├──enabled
+ │ │ ├──power
+ │ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ │ []
+ │ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ │ └──uevent
+ │ ├──max_energy_range_uj
+ │ ├──max_power_range_uw
+ │ ├──name
+ │ ├──enabled
+ │ ├──power
+ │ │ ├──async
+ │ │ []
+ │ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../../class/power_cap
+ │ ├──uevent
+ ├──power
+ │ ├──async
+ │ []
+ ├──subsystem -> ../../../../class/power_cap
+ ├──enabled
+ └──uevent
The above example illustrates a case in which the Intel RAPL technology,
available in Intel® IA-64 and IA-32 Processor Architectures, is used. There is one
@@ -158,10 +160,12 @@ power value, there is no power_uw attribute.
In addition to that, each power zone contains a name attribute, allowing the
part of the system represented by that zone to be identified.
-For example:
+For example::
+
+ cat /sys/class/power_cap/intel-rapl/intel-rapl:0/name
-cat /sys/class/power_cap/intel-rapl/intel-rapl:0/name
package-0
+---------
The Intel RAPL technology allows two constraints, short term and long term,
with two different time windows to be applied to each power zone. Thus for
@@ -169,7 +173,8 @@ each zone there are 2 attributes representing the constraint names, 2 power
limits and 2 attributes representing the sizes of the time windows. Such that,
constraint_j_* attributes correspond to the jth constraint (j = 0,1).
-For example:
+For example::
+
constraint_0_name
constraint_0_power_limit_uw
constraint_0_time_window_us
@@ -178,50 +183,66 @@ For example:
constraint_1_time_window_us
Power Zone Attributes
-=================================
+=====================
+
Monitoring attributes
-----------------------
+---------------------
-energy_uj (rw): Current energy counter in micro joules. Write "0" to reset.
-If the counter can not be reset, then this attribute is read only.
+energy_uj (rw)
+ Current energy counter in micro joules. Write "0" to reset.
+ If the counter can not be reset, then this attribute is read only.
-max_energy_range_uj (ro): Range of the above energy counter in micro-joules.
+max_energy_range_uj (ro)
+ Range of the above energy counter in micro-joules.
-power_uw (ro): Current power in micro watts.
+power_uw (ro)
+ Current power in micro watts.
-max_power_range_uw (ro): Range of the above power value in micro-watts.
+max_power_range_uw (ro)
+ Range of the above power value in micro-watts.
-name (ro): Name of this power zone.
+name (ro)
+ Name of this power zone.
It is possible that some domains have both power ranges and energy counter ranges;
however, only one is mandatory.
Constraints
-----------------
-constraint_X_power_limit_uw (rw): Power limit in micro watts, which should be
-applicable for the time window specified by "constraint_X_time_window_us".
+-----------
-constraint_X_time_window_us (rw): Time window in micro seconds.
+constraint_X_power_limit_uw (rw)
+ Power limit in micro watts, which should be applicable for the
+ time window specified by "constraint_X_time_window_us".
-constraint_X_name (ro): An optional name of the constraint
+constraint_X_time_window_us (rw)
+ Time window in micro seconds.
-constraint_X_max_power_uw(ro): Maximum allowed power in micro watts.
+constraint_X_name (ro)
+ An optional name of the constraint
-constraint_X_min_power_uw(ro): Minimum allowed power in micro watts.
+constraint_X_max_power_uw(ro)
+ Maximum allowed power in micro watts.
-constraint_X_max_time_window_us(ro): Maximum allowed time window in micro seconds.
+constraint_X_min_power_uw(ro)
+ Minimum allowed power in micro watts.
-constraint_X_min_time_window_us(ro): Minimum allowed time window in micro seconds.
+constraint_X_max_time_window_us(ro)
+ Maximum allowed time window in micro seconds.
+
+constraint_X_min_time_window_us(ro)
+ Minimum allowed time window in micro seconds.
Except power_limit_uw and time_window_us other fields are optional.
Common zone and control type attributes
-----------------------------------------
+---------------------------------------
+
enabled (rw): Enable/Disable controls at zone level or for all zones using
a control type.
Power Cap Client Driver Interface
-==================================
+=================================
+
The API summary:
Call powercap_register_control_type() to register control type object.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
index e51564c1a140..0cd8cc1275a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===================================
Regulator Consumer Driver Interface
===================================
@@ -8,73 +9,77 @@ Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text.
1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers)
=======================================================
-A consumer driver can get access to its supply regulator by calling :-
+A consumer driver can get access to its supply regulator by calling ::
-regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");
+ regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc");
The consumer passes in its struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core
then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table.
If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct
regulator that supplies this consumer.
-To release the regulator the consumer driver should call :-
+To release the regulator the consumer driver should call ::
-regulator_put(regulator);
+ regulator_put(regulator);
Consumers can be supplied by more than one regulator e.g. codec consumer with
-analog and digital supplies :-
+analog and digital supplies ::
-digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); /* digital core */
-analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd"); /* analog */
+ digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); /* digital core */
+ analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd"); /* analog */
The regulator access functions regulator_get() and regulator_put() will
usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively.
2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers)
-====================================================================
+===============================================================
-A consumer can enable its power supply by calling:-
-int regulator_enable(regulator);
+A consumer can enable its power supply by calling::
-NOTE: The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called.
-This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been
-previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code.
+ int regulator_enable(regulator);
-A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling :-
+NOTE:
+ The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called.
+ This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been
+ previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code.
-int regulator_is_enabled(regulator);
+A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling::
+
+ int regulator_is_enabled(regulator);
This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled.
-A consumer can disable its supply when no longer needed by calling :-
+A consumer can disable its supply when no longer needed by calling::
-int regulator_disable(regulator);
+ int regulator_disable(regulator);
-NOTE: This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The
-regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero.
+NOTE:
+ This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The
+ regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero.
-Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency :-
+Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency::
-int regulator_force_disable(regulator);
+ int regulator_force_disable(regulator);
-NOTE: this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All
-consumers will be powered off.
+NOTE:
+ this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All
+ consumers will be powered off.
3. Regulator Voltage Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
-======================================================
+=======================================================
Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
voltage to match system operating points. e.g. CPUfreq drivers can scale
voltage along with frequency to save power, SD drivers may need to select the
correct card voltage, etc.
-Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling :-
+Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling::
-int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
+ int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV);
Where min_uV and max_uV are the minimum and maximum acceptable voltages in
microvolts.
@@ -84,47 +89,50 @@ when enabled, then the voltage changes instantly, otherwise the voltage
configuration changes and the voltage is physically set when the regulator is
next enabled.
-The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling :-
+The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling::
-int regulator_get_voltage(regulator);
+ int regulator_get_voltage(regulator);
-NOTE: get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the
-regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator
-output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to
-determine the regulator physical output voltage.
+NOTE:
+ get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the
+ regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator
+ output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to
+ determine the regulator physical output voltage.
4. Regulator Current Limit Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
-===========================================================
+=============================================================
Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply
current limit to match system operating points. e.g. LCD backlight driver can
change the current limit to vary the backlight brightness, USB drivers may want
to set the limit to 500mA when supplying power.
-Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling :-
+Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling::
-int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uA, max_uA);
+ int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uA, max_uA);
Where min_uA and max_uA are the minimum and maximum acceptable current limit in
microamps.
-NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
-when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current
-limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the
-regulator is next enabled.
+NOTE:
+ this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called
+ when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current
+ limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the
+ regulator is next enabled.
-A regulators current limit can be found by calling :-
+A regulators current limit can be found by calling::
-int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator);
+ int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator);
-NOTE: get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator
-is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current
-load.
+NOTE:
+ get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator
+ is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current
+ load.
5. Regulator Operating Mode Control & Status (dynamic drivers)
-=============================================================
+==============================================================
Some consumers can further save system power by changing the operating mode of
their supply regulator to be more efficient when the consumers operating state
@@ -135,9 +143,9 @@ Regulator operating mode can be changed indirectly or directly.
Indirect operating mode control.
--------------------------------
Consumer drivers can request a change in their supply regulator operating mode
-by calling :-
+by calling::
-int regulator_set_load(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA);
+ int regulator_set_load(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA);
This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based
on all its consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted)
@@ -153,12 +161,13 @@ consumers.
Direct operating mode control.
------------------------------
+
Bespoke or tightly coupled drivers may want to directly control regulator
operating mode depending on their operating point. This can be achieved by
-calling :-
+calling::
-int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode);
-unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator);
+ int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode);
+ unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator);
Direct mode will only be used by consumers that *know* about the regulator and
are not sharing the regulator with other consumers.
@@ -166,24 +175,26 @@ are not sharing the regulator with other consumers.
6. Regulator Events
===================
+
Regulators can notify consumers of external events. Events could be received by
consumers under regulator stress or failure conditions.
-Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling :-
+Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling::
-int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
- struct notifier_block *nb);
+ int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+ struct notifier_block *nb);
-Consumers can unregister interest by calling :-
+Consumers can unregister interest by calling::
-int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
- struct notifier_block *nb);
+ int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator,
+ struct notifier_block *nb);
Regulators use the kernel notifier framework to send event to their interested
consumers.
7. Regulator Direct Register Access
===================================
+
Some kinds of power management hardware or firmware are designed such that
they need to do low-level hardware access to regulators, with no involvement
from the kernel. Examples of such devices are:
@@ -199,20 +210,20 @@ to it. The regulator framework provides the following helpers for querying
these details.
Bus-specific details, like I2C addresses or transfer rates are handled by the
-regmap framework. To get the regulator's regmap (if supported), use :-
+regmap framework. To get the regulator's regmap (if supported), use::
-struct regmap *regulator_get_regmap(struct regulator *regulator);
+ struct regmap *regulator_get_regmap(struct regulator *regulator);
To obtain the hardware register offset and bitmask for the regulator's voltage
-selector register, use :-
+selector register, use::
-int regulator_get_hardware_vsel_register(struct regulator *regulator,
- unsigned *vsel_reg,
- unsigned *vsel_mask);
+ int regulator_get_hardware_vsel_register(struct regulator *regulator,
+ unsigned *vsel_reg,
+ unsigned *vsel_mask);
To convert a regulator framework voltage selector code (used by
regulator_list_voltage) to a hardware-specific voltage selector that can be
-directly written to the voltage selector register, use :-
+directly written to the voltage selector register, use::
-int regulator_list_hardware_vsel(struct regulator *regulator,
- unsigned selector);
+ int regulator_list_hardware_vsel(struct regulator *regulator,
+ unsigned selector);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt
index fdd919b96830..3b09c6841dc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/design.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==========================
Regulator API design notes
==========================
@@ -14,7 +15,9 @@ Safety
have different power requirements, and not all components with power
requirements are visible to software.
- => The API should make no changes to the hardware state unless it has
+.. note::
+
+ The API should make no changes to the hardware state unless it has
specific knowledge that these changes are safe to perform on this
particular system.
@@ -28,6 +31,8 @@ Consumer use cases
- Many of the power supplies in the system will be shared between many
different consumers.
- => The consumer API should be structured so that these use cases are
+.. note::
+
+ The consumer API should be structured so that these use cases are
very easy to handle and so that consumers will work with shared
supplies without any additional effort.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
index eff4dcaaa252..22fffefaa3ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
+==================================
Regulator Machine Driver Interface
-===================================
+==================================
The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific
initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem.
-Consider the following machine :-
+Consider the following machine::
Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V]
|
@@ -13,31 +14,31 @@ Consider the following machine :-
The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in
order to control their power supplies. This mapping can be achieved in machine
initialisation code by creating a struct regulator_consumer_supply for
-each regulator.
+each regulator::
-struct regulator_consumer_supply {
+ struct regulator_consumer_supply {
const char *dev_name; /* consumer dev_name() */
const char *supply; /* consumer supply - e.g. "vcc" */
-};
+ };
-e.g. for the machine above
+e.g. for the machine above::
-static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = {
+ static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator1_consumers[] = {
REGULATOR_SUPPLY("Vcc", "consumer B"),
-};
+ };
-static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = {
+ static struct regulator_consumer_supply regulator2_consumers[] = {
REGULATOR_SUPPLY("Vcc", "consumer A"),
-};
+ };
This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2
to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A.
Constraints can now be registered by defining a struct regulator_init_data
for each regulator power domain. This structure also maps the consumers
-to their supply regulators :-
+to their supply regulators::
-static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = {
+ static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = {
.constraints = {
.name = "Regulator-1",
.min_uV = 3300000,
@@ -46,7 +47,7 @@ static struct regulator_init_data regulator1_data = {
},
.num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator1_consumers),
.consumer_supplies = regulator1_consumers,
-};
+ };
The name field should be set to something that is usefully descriptive
for the board for configuration of supplies for other regulators and
@@ -57,9 +58,9 @@ name is provided then the subsystem will choose one.
Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered
with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables its
supply (Regulator-2). The supply regulator is set by the supply_regulator
-field below and co:-
+field below and co::
-static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = {
+ static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = {
.supply_regulator = "Regulator-1",
.constraints = {
.min_uV = 1800000,
@@ -69,11 +70,11 @@ static struct regulator_init_data regulator2_data = {
},
.num_consumer_supplies = ARRAY_SIZE(regulator2_consumers),
.consumer_supplies = regulator2_consumers,
-};
+ };
-Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner.
+Finally the regulator devices must be registered in the usual manner::
-static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = {
+ static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = {
{
.name = "regulator",
.id = DCDC_1,
@@ -88,9 +89,9 @@ static struct platform_device regulator_devices[] = {
.platform_data = ®ulator2_data,
},
},
-};
-/* register regulator 1 device */
-platform_device_register(®ulator_devices[0]);
+ };
+ /* register regulator 1 device */
+ platform_device_register(®ulator_devices[0]);
-/* register regulator 2 device */
-platform_device_register(®ulator_devices[1]);
+ /* register regulator 2 device */
+ platform_device_register(®ulator_devices[1]);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
index 721b4739ec32..28d0fc283a6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================================
Linux voltage and current regulator framework
=============================================
@@ -13,26 +14,30 @@ regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where
current limit is controllable).
(C) 2008 Wolfson Microelectronics PLC.
+
Author: Liam Girdwood <[email protected]>
Nomenclature
============
-Some terms used in this document:-
+Some terms used in this document:
- o Regulator - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices.
+ - Regulator
+ - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices.
Most regulators can enable and disable their output while
some can control their output voltage and or current.
Input Voltage -> Regulator -> Output Voltage
- o PMIC - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous regulators
- and often contains other subsystems.
+ - PMIC
+ - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous
+ regulators and often contains other subsystems.
- o Consumer - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator.
+ - Consumer
+ - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator.
Consumers can be classified into two types:-
Static: consumer does not change its supply voltage or
@@ -44,46 +49,48 @@ Some terms used in this document:-
current limit to meet operation demands.
- o Power Domain - Electronic circuit that is supplied its input power by the
+ - Power Domain
+ - Electronic circuit that is supplied its input power by the
output power of a regulator, switch or by another power
domain.
- The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e.
+ The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e.::
- Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A]
- | |
- | +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C]
- |
- +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E]
+ Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A]
+ | |
+ | +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C]
+ |
+ +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E]
That is one regulator and three power domains:
- Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E.
- Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C.
- Domain 3: Consumer A.
+ - Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E.
+ - Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C.
+ - Domain 3: Consumer A.
and this represents a "supplies" relationship:
Domain-1 --> Domain-2 --> Domain-3.
A power domain may have regulators that are supplied power
- by other regulators. i.e.
+ by other regulators. i.e.::
- Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A]
- |
- +-> [Consumer B]
+ Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A]
+ |
+ +-> [Consumer B]
This gives us two regulators and two power domains:
- Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
- Domain 2: Consumer A.
+ - Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B.
+ - Domain 2: Consumer A.
and a "supplies" relationship:
Domain-1 --> Domain-2
- o Constraints - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance
+ - Constraints
+ - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance
and hardware protection. Constraints exist at three levels:
Regulator Level: This is defined by the regulator hardware
diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
index b17e5833ce21..794b3256fbb9 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==========================
Regulator Driver Interface
==========================
@@ -8,23 +9,24 @@ regulator drivers to register their services with the core framework.
Registration
============
-Drivers can register a regulator by calling :-
+Drivers can register a regulator by calling::
-struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
- const struct regulator_config *config);
+ struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc,
+ const struct regulator_config *config);
This will register the regulator's capabilities and operations to the regulator
core.
-Regulators can be unregistered by calling :-
+Regulators can be unregistered by calling::
-void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev);
+ void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev);
Regulator Events
================
+
Regulators can send events (e.g. overtemperature, undervoltage, etc) to
-consumer drivers by calling :-
+consumer drivers by calling::
-int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev,
- unsigned long event, void *data);
+ int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev,
+ unsigned long event, void *data);
diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index 937e33c46211..2c2ec99b5088 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
+==================================================
Runtime Power Management Framework for I/O Devices
+==================================================
(C) 2009-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>, Novell Inc.
+
(C) 2010 Alan Stern <[email protected]>
+
(C) 2014 Intel Corp., Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
1. Introduction
+===============
Support for runtime power management (runtime PM) of I/O devices is provided
at the power management core (PM core) level by means of:
@@ -33,16 +38,17 @@ fields of 'struct dev_pm_info' and the core helper functions provided for
runtime PM are described below.
2. Device Runtime PM Callbacks
+==============================
-There are three device runtime PM callbacks defined in 'struct dev_pm_ops':
+There are three device runtime PM callbacks defined in 'struct dev_pm_ops'::
-struct dev_pm_ops {
+ struct dev_pm_ops {
...
int (*runtime_suspend)(struct device *dev);
int (*runtime_resume)(struct device *dev);
int (*runtime_idle)(struct device *dev);
...
-};
+ };
The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks
are executed by the PM core for the device's subsystem that may be either of
@@ -112,7 +118,7 @@ low-power state during the execution of the suspend callback, it is expected
that remote wakeup will be enabled for the device. Generally, remote wakeup
should be enabled for all input devices put into low-power states at run time.
-The subsystem-level resume callback, if present, is _entirely_ _responsible_ for
+The subsystem-level resume callback, if present, is **entirely responsible** for
handling the resume of the device as appropriate, which may, but need not
include executing the device driver's own ->runtime_resume() callback (from the
PM core's point of view it is not necessary to implement a ->runtime_resume()
@@ -197,95 +203,96 @@ rules:
except for scheduled autosuspends.
3. Runtime PM Device Fields
+===========================
The following device runtime PM fields are present in 'struct dev_pm_info', as
defined in include/linux/pm.h:
- struct timer_list suspend_timer;
+ `struct timer_list suspend_timer;`
- timer used for scheduling (delayed) suspend and autosuspend requests
- unsigned long timer_expires;
+ `unsigned long timer_expires;`
- timer expiration time, in jiffies (if this is different from zero, the
timer is running and will expire at that time, otherwise the timer is not
running)
- struct work_struct work;
+ `struct work_struct work;`
- work structure used for queuing up requests (i.e. work items in pm_wq)
- wait_queue_head_t wait_queue;
+ `wait_queue_head_t wait_queue;`
- wait queue used if any of the helper functions needs to wait for another
one to complete
- spinlock_t lock;
+ `spinlock_t lock;`
- lock used for synchronization
- atomic_t usage_count;
+ `atomic_t usage_count;`
- the usage counter of the device
- atomic_t child_count;
+ `atomic_t child_count;`
- the count of 'active' children of the device
- unsigned int ignore_children;
+ `unsigned int ignore_children;`
- if set, the value of child_count is ignored (but still updated)
- unsigned int disable_depth;
+ `unsigned int disable_depth;`
- used for disabling the helper functions (they work normally if this is
equal to zero); the initial value of it is 1 (i.e. runtime PM is
initially disabled for all devices)
- int runtime_error;
+ `int runtime_error;`
- if set, there was a fatal error (one of the callbacks returned error code
as described in Section 2), so the helper functions will not work until
this flag is cleared; this is the error code returned by the failing
callback
- unsigned int idle_notification;
+ `unsigned int idle_notification;`
- if set, ->runtime_idle() is being executed
- unsigned int request_pending;
+ `unsigned int request_pending;`
- if set, there's a pending request (i.e. a work item queued up into pm_wq)
- enum rpm_request request;
+ `enum rpm_request request;`
- type of request that's pending (valid if request_pending is set)
- unsigned int deferred_resume;
+ `unsigned int deferred_resume;`
- set if ->runtime_resume() is about to be run while ->runtime_suspend() is
being executed for that device and it is not practical to wait for the
suspend to complete; means "start a resume as soon as you've suspended"
- enum rpm_status runtime_status;
+ `enum rpm_status runtime_status;`
- the runtime PM status of the device; this field's initial value is
RPM_SUSPENDED, which means that each device is initially regarded by the
PM core as 'suspended', regardless of its real hardware status
- unsigned int runtime_auto;
+ `unsigned int runtime_auto;`
- if set, indicates that the user space has allowed the device driver to
power manage the device at run time via the /sys/devices/.../power/control
- interface; it may only be modified with the help of the pm_runtime_allow()
+ `interface;` it may only be modified with the help of the pm_runtime_allow()
and pm_runtime_forbid() helper functions
- unsigned int no_callbacks;
+ `unsigned int no_callbacks;`
- indicates that the device does not use the runtime PM callbacks (see
Section 8); it may be modified only by the pm_runtime_no_callbacks()
helper function
- unsigned int irq_safe;
+ `unsigned int irq_safe;`
- indicates that the ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() callbacks
will be invoked with the spinlock held and interrupts disabled
- unsigned int use_autosuspend;
+ `unsigned int use_autosuspend;`
- indicates that the device's driver supports delayed autosuspend (see
Section 9); it may be modified only by the
pm_runtime{_dont}_use_autosuspend() helper functions
- unsigned int timer_autosuspends;
+ `unsigned int timer_autosuspends;`
- indicates that the PM core should attempt to carry out an autosuspend
when the timer expires rather than a normal suspend
- int autosuspend_delay;
+ `int autosuspend_delay;`
- the delay time (in milliseconds) to be used for autosuspend
- unsigned long last_busy;
+ `unsigned long last_busy;`
- the time (in jiffies) when the pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() helper
function was last called for this device; used in calculating inactivity
periods for autosuspend
@@ -293,37 +300,38 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h:
All of the above fields are members of the 'power' member of 'struct device'.
4. Runtime PM Device Helper Functions
+=====================================
The following runtime PM helper functions are defined in
drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
- void pm_runtime_init(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_init(struct device *dev);`
- initialize the device runtime PM fields in 'struct dev_pm_info'
- void pm_runtime_remove(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_remove(struct device *dev);`
- make sure that the runtime PM of the device will be disabled after
removing the device from device hierarchy
- int pm_runtime_idle(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_idle(struct device *dev);`
- execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the device; returns an
error code on failure, where -EINPROGRESS means that ->runtime_idle() is
already being executed; if there is no callback or the callback returns 0
then run pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result
- int pm_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);`
- execute the subsystem-level suspend callback for the device; returns 0 on
success, 1 if the device's runtime PM status was already 'suspended', or
error code on failure, where -EAGAIN or -EBUSY means it is safe to attempt
to suspend the device again in future and -EACCES means that
'power.disable_depth' is different from 0
- int pm_runtime_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- same as pm_runtime_suspend() except that the autosuspend delay is taken
- into account; if pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() says the delay has
+ `into account;` if pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() says the delay has
not yet expired then an autosuspend is scheduled for the appropriate time
and 0 is returned
- int pm_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);`
- execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the device; returns 0 on
success, 1 if the device's runtime PM status was already 'active' or
error code on failure, where -EAGAIN means it may be safe to attempt to
@@ -331,17 +339,17 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
checked additionally, and -EACCES means that 'power.disable_depth' is
different from 0
- int pm_request_idle(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_request_idle(struct device *dev);`
- submit a request to execute the subsystem-level idle callback for the
device (the request is represented by a work item in pm_wq); returns 0 on
success or error code if the request has not been queued up
- int pm_request_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_request_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- schedule the execution of the subsystem-level suspend callback for the
device when the autosuspend delay has expired; if the delay has already
expired then the work item is queued up immediately
- int pm_schedule_suspend(struct device *dev, unsigned int delay);
+ `int pm_schedule_suspend(struct device *dev, unsigned int delay);`
- schedule the execution of the subsystem-level suspend callback for the
device in future, where 'delay' is the time to wait before queuing up a
suspend work item in pm_wq, in milliseconds (if 'delay' is zero, the work
@@ -351,58 +359,58 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
->runtime_suspend() is already scheduled and not yet expired, the new
value of 'delay' will be used as the time to wait
- int pm_request_resume(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_request_resume(struct device *dev);`
- submit a request to execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the
device (the request is represented by a work item in pm_wq); returns 0 on
success, 1 if the device's runtime PM status was already 'active', or
error code if the request hasn't been queued up
- void pm_runtime_get_noresume(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_get_noresume(struct device *dev);`
- increment the device's usage counter
- int pm_runtime_get(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_get(struct device *dev);`
- increment the device's usage counter, run pm_request_resume(dev) and
return its result
- int pm_runtime_get_sync(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_get_sync(struct device *dev);`
- increment the device's usage counter, run pm_runtime_resume(dev) and
return its result
- int pm_runtime_get_if_in_use(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_get_if_in_use(struct device *dev);`
- return -EINVAL if 'power.disable_depth' is nonzero; otherwise, if the
runtime PM status is RPM_ACTIVE and the runtime PM usage counter is
nonzero, increment the counter and return 1; otherwise return 0 without
changing the counter
- void pm_runtime_put_noidle(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_put_noidle(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter
- int pm_runtime_put(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_put(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
pm_request_idle(dev) and return its result
- int pm_runtime_put_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_put_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
pm_request_autosuspend(dev) and return its result
- int pm_runtime_put_sync(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_put_sync(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return its result
- int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result
- int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run
pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result
- void pm_runtime_enable(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_enable(struct device *dev);`
- decrement the device's 'power.disable_depth' field; if that field is equal
to zero, the runtime PM helper functions can execute subsystem-level
callbacks described in Section 2 for the device
- int pm_runtime_disable(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_disable(struct device *dev);`
- increment the device's 'power.disable_depth' field (if the value of that
field was previously zero, this prevents subsystem-level runtime PM
callbacks from being run for the device), make sure that all of the
@@ -411,7 +419,7 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
necessary to execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the device
to satisfy that request, otherwise 0 is returned
- int pm_runtime_barrier(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_barrier(struct device *dev);`
- check if there's a resume request pending for the device and resume it
(synchronously) in that case, cancel any other pending runtime PM requests
regarding it and wait for all runtime PM operations on it in progress to
@@ -419,10 +427,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
necessary to execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the device to
satisfy that request, otherwise 0 is returned
- void pm_suspend_ignore_children(struct device *dev, bool enable);
+ `void pm_suspend_ignore_children(struct device *dev, bool enable);`
- set/unset the power.ignore_children flag of the device
- int pm_runtime_set_active(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_runtime_set_active(struct device *dev);`
- clear the device's 'power.runtime_error' flag, set the device's runtime
PM status to 'active' and update its parent's counter of 'active'
children as appropriate (it is only valid to use this function if
@@ -430,61 +438,61 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
zero); it will fail and return error code if the device has a parent
which is not active and the 'power.ignore_children' flag of which is unset
- void pm_runtime_set_suspended(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_set_suspended(struct device *dev);`
- clear the device's 'power.runtime_error' flag, set the device's runtime
PM status to 'suspended' and update its parent's counter of 'active'
children as appropriate (it is only valid to use this function if
'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than
zero)
- bool pm_runtime_active(struct device *dev);
+ `bool pm_runtime_active(struct device *dev);`
- return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'active' or its
'power.disable_depth' field is not equal to zero, or false otherwise
- bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev);
+ `bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev);`
- return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its
'power.disable_depth' field is equal to zero, or false otherwise
- bool pm_runtime_status_suspended(struct device *dev);
+ `bool pm_runtime_status_suspended(struct device *dev);`
- return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended'
- void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev);`
- set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage
counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to
effectively allow the device to be power managed at run time)
- void pm_runtime_forbid(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_forbid(struct device *dev);`
- unset the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and increase its usage
counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to
effectively prevent the device from being power managed at run time)
- void pm_runtime_no_callbacks(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_no_callbacks(struct device *dev);`
- set the power.no_callbacks flag for the device and remove the runtime
PM attributes from /sys/devices/.../power (or prevent them from being
added when the device is registered)
- void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev);`
- set the power.irq_safe flag for the device, causing the runtime-PM
callbacks to be invoked with interrupts off
- bool pm_runtime_is_irq_safe(struct device *dev);
+ `bool pm_runtime_is_irq_safe(struct device *dev);`
- return true if power.irq_safe flag was set for the device, causing
the runtime-PM callbacks to be invoked with interrupts off
- void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev);`
- set the power.last_busy field to the current time
- void pm_runtime_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- set the power.use_autosuspend flag, enabling autosuspend delays; call
pm_runtime_get_sync if the flag was previously cleared and
power.autosuspend_delay is negative
- void pm_runtime_dont_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev);
+ `void pm_runtime_dont_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev);`
- clear the power.use_autosuspend flag, disabling autosuspend delays;
decrement the device's usage counter if the flag was previously set and
power.autosuspend_delay is negative; call pm_runtime_idle
- void pm_runtime_set_autosuspend_delay(struct device *dev, int delay);
+ `void pm_runtime_set_autosuspend_delay(struct device *dev, int delay);`
- set the power.autosuspend_delay value to 'delay' (expressed in
milliseconds); if 'delay' is negative then runtime suspends are
prevented; if power.use_autosuspend is set, pm_runtime_get_sync may be
@@ -493,7 +501,7 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
changed to or from a negative value; if power.use_autosuspend is clear,
pm_runtime_idle is called
- unsigned long pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration(struct device *dev);
+ `unsigned long pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration(struct device *dev);`
- calculate the time when the current autosuspend delay period will expire,
based on power.last_busy and power.autosuspend_delay; if the delay time
is 1000 ms or larger then the expiration time is rounded up to the
@@ -503,36 +511,37 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
It is safe to execute the following helper functions from interrupt context:
-pm_request_idle()
-pm_request_autosuspend()
-pm_schedule_suspend()
-pm_request_resume()
-pm_runtime_get_noresume()
-pm_runtime_get()
-pm_runtime_put_noidle()
-pm_runtime_put()
-pm_runtime_put_autosuspend()
-pm_runtime_enable()
-pm_suspend_ignore_children()
-pm_runtime_set_active()
-pm_runtime_set_suspended()
-pm_runtime_suspended()
-pm_runtime_mark_last_busy()
-pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration()
+- pm_request_idle()
+- pm_request_autosuspend()
+- pm_schedule_suspend()
+- pm_request_resume()
+- pm_runtime_get_noresume()
+- pm_runtime_get()
+- pm_runtime_put_noidle()
+- pm_runtime_put()
+- pm_runtime_put_autosuspend()
+- pm_runtime_enable()
+- pm_suspend_ignore_children()
+- pm_runtime_set_active()
+- pm_runtime_set_suspended()
+- pm_runtime_suspended()
+- pm_runtime_mark_last_busy()
+- pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration()
If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper
functions may also be used in interrupt context:
-pm_runtime_idle()
-pm_runtime_suspend()
-pm_runtime_autosuspend()
-pm_runtime_resume()
-pm_runtime_get_sync()
-pm_runtime_put_sync()
-pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend()
-pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend()
+- pm_runtime_idle()
+- pm_runtime_suspend()
+- pm_runtime_autosuspend()
+- pm_runtime_resume()
+- pm_runtime_get_sync()
+- pm_runtime_put_sync()
+- pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend()
+- pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend()
5. Runtime PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal
+========================================================
Initially, the runtime PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the
majority of the runtime PM helper functions described in Section 4 will return
@@ -608,6 +617,7 @@ manage the device at run time, the driver may confuse it by using
pm_runtime_forbid() this way.
6. Runtime PM and System Sleep
+==============================
Runtime PM and system sleep (i.e., system suspend and hibernation, also known
as suspend-to-RAM and suspend-to-disk) interact with each other in a couple of
@@ -647,9 +657,9 @@ brought back to full power during resume, then its runtime PM status will have
to be updated to reflect the actual post-system sleep status. The way to do
this is:
- pm_runtime_disable(dev);
- pm_runtime_set_active(dev);
- pm_runtime_enable(dev);
+ - pm_runtime_disable(dev);
+ - pm_runtime_set_active(dev);
+ - pm_runtime_enable(dev);
The PM core always increments the runtime usage counter before calling the
->suspend() callback and decrements it after calling the ->resume() callback.
@@ -705,66 +715,66 @@ Subsystems may wish to conserve code space by using the set of generic power
management callbacks provided by the PM core, defined in
driver/base/power/generic_ops.c:
- int pm_generic_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->runtime_suspend() callback provided by the driver of this
device and return its result, or return 0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->runtime_resume() callback provided by the driver of this
device and return its result, or return 0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_suspend(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_suspend(struct device *dev);`
- if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->suspend()
callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
defined
- int pm_generic_suspend_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_suspend_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- if pm_runtime_suspended(dev) returns "false", invoke the ->suspend_noirq()
callback provided by the device's driver and return its result, or return
0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_resume(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_resume(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->resume() callback provided by the driver of this device and,
if successful, change the device's runtime PM status to 'active'
- int pm_generic_resume_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_resume_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->resume_noirq() callback provided by the driver of this device
- int pm_generic_freeze(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_freeze(struct device *dev);`
- if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->freeze()
callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
defined
- int pm_generic_freeze_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_freeze_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- if pm_runtime_suspended(dev) returns "false", invoke the ->freeze_noirq()
callback provided by the device's driver and return its result, or return
0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_thaw(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_thaw(struct device *dev);`
- if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->thaw()
callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
defined
- int pm_generic_thaw_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_thaw_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- if pm_runtime_suspended(dev) returns "false", invoke the ->thaw_noirq()
callback provided by the device's driver and return its result, or return
0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_poweroff(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_poweroff(struct device *dev);`
- if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->poweroff()
callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
defined
- int pm_generic_poweroff_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_poweroff_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- if pm_runtime_suspended(dev) returns "false", run the ->poweroff_noirq()
callback provided by the device's driver and return its result, or return
0 if not defined
- int pm_generic_restore(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_restore(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->restore() callback provided by the driver of this device and,
if successful, change the device's runtime PM status to 'active'
- int pm_generic_restore_noirq(struct device *dev);
+ `int pm_generic_restore_noirq(struct device *dev);`
- invoke the ->restore_noirq() callback provided by the device's driver
These functions are the defaults used by the PM core, if a subsystem doesn't
@@ -781,6 +791,7 @@ UNIVERSAL_DEV_PM_OPS macro defined in include/linux/pm.h (possibly setting its
last argument to NULL).
8. "No-Callback" Devices
+========================
Some "devices" are only logical sub-devices of their parent and cannot be
power-managed on their own. (The prototype example is a USB interface. Entire
@@ -807,6 +818,7 @@ parent must take responsibility for telling the device's driver when the
parent's power state changes.
9. Autosuspend, or automatically-delayed suspends
+=================================================
Changing a device's power state isn't free; it requires both time and energy.
A device should be put in a low-power state only when there's some reason to
@@ -832,8 +844,8 @@ registration the length should be controlled by user space, using the
In order to use autosuspend, subsystems or drivers must call
pm_runtime_use_autosuspend() (preferably before registering the device), and
-thereafter they should use the various *_autosuspend() helper functions instead
-of the non-autosuspend counterparts:
+thereafter they should use the various `*_autosuspend()` helper functions
+instead of the non-autosuspend counterparts::
Instead of: pm_runtime_suspend use: pm_runtime_autosuspend;
Instead of: pm_schedule_suspend use: pm_request_autosuspend;
@@ -858,7 +870,7 @@ The implementation is well suited for asynchronous use in interrupt contexts.
However such use inevitably involves races, because the PM core can't
synchronize ->runtime_suspend() callbacks with the arrival of I/O requests.
This synchronization must be handled by the driver, using its private lock.
-Here is a schematic pseudo-code example:
+Here is a schematic pseudo-code example::
foo_read_or_write(struct foo_priv *foo, void *data)
{
diff --git a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
index 4685aee197fd..d739aa7c742c 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- How to get s2ram working
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- 2006 Linus Torvalds
- 2006 Pavel Machek
+========================
+How to get s2ram working
+========================
+
+2006 Linus Torvalds
+2006 Pavel Machek
1) Check suspend.sf.net, program s2ram there has long whitelist of
"known ok" machines, along with tricks to use on each one.
@@ -12,8 +14,8 @@
3) You can use Linus' TRACE_RESUME infrastructure, described below.
- Using TRACE_RESUME
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Using TRACE_RESUME
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I've been working at making the machines I have able to STR, and almost
always it's a driver that is buggy. Thank God for the suspend/resume
@@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ machine that doesn't boot) is:
- enable PM_DEBUG, and PM_TRACE
- - use a script like this:
+ - use a script like this::
#!/bin/sh
sync
@@ -38,7 +40,7 @@ machine that doesn't boot) is:
- if it doesn't come back up (which is usually the problem), reboot by
holding the power button down, and look at the dmesg output for things
- like
+ like::
Magic number: 4:156:725
hash matches drivers/base/power/resume.c:28
@@ -52,7 +54,7 @@ machine that doesn't boot) is:
If no device matches the hash (or any matches appear to be false positives),
the culprit may be a device from a loadable kernel module that is not loaded
until after the hash is checked. You can check the hash against the current
- devices again after more modules are loaded using sysfs:
+ devices again after more modules are loaded using sysfs::
cat /sys/power/pm_trace_dev_match
diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
index a8751b8df10e..9df664f5423a 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
+====================================================================
Interaction of Suspend code (S3) with the CPU hotplug infrastructure
+====================================================================
- (C) 2011 - 2014 Srivatsa S. Bhat <[email protected]>
+(C) 2011 - 2014 Srivatsa S. Bhat <[email protected]>
-I. How does the regular CPU hotplug code differ from how the Suspend-to-RAM
- infrastructure uses it internally? And where do they share common code?
+I. Differences between CPU hotplug and Suspend-to-RAM
+======================================================
+
+How does the regular CPU hotplug code differ from how the Suspend-to-RAM
+infrastructure uses it internally? And where do they share common code?
Well, a picture is worth a thousand words... So ASCII art follows :-)
@@ -16,13 +21,13 @@ of describing where they take different paths and where they share code.
What happens when regular CPU hotplug and Suspend-to-RAM race with each other
is not depicted here.]
-On a high level, the suspend-resume cycle goes like this:
+On a high level, the suspend-resume cycle goes like this::
-|Freeze| -> |Disable nonboot| -> |Do suspend| -> |Enable nonboot| -> |Thaw |
-|tasks | | cpus | | | | cpus | |tasks|
+ |Freeze| -> |Disable nonboot| -> |Do suspend| -> |Enable nonboot| -> |Thaw |
+ |tasks | | cpus | | | | cpus | |tasks|
-More details follow:
+More details follow::
Suspend call path
-----------------
@@ -87,7 +92,9 @@ More details follow:
Resuming back is likewise, with the counterparts being (in the order of
execution during resume):
-* enable_nonboot_cpus() which involves:
+
+* enable_nonboot_cpus() which involves::
+
| Acquire cpu_add_remove_lock
| Decrease cpu_hotplug_disabled, thereby enabling regular cpu hotplug
| Call _cpu_up() [for all those cpus in the frozen_cpus mask, in a loop]
@@ -101,7 +108,7 @@ execution during resume):
It is to be noted here that the system_transition_mutex lock is acquired at the very
beginning, when we are just starting out to suspend, and then released only
-after the entire cycle is complete (i.e., suspend + resume).
+after the entire cycle is complete (i.e., suspend + resume)::
@@ -152,16 +159,16 @@ with the 'tasks_frozen' argument set to 1.
Important files and functions/entry points:
-------------------------------------------
+-------------------------------------------
-kernel/power/process.c : freeze_processes(), thaw_processes()
-kernel/power/suspend.c : suspend_prepare(), suspend_enter(), suspend_finish()
-kernel/cpu.c: cpu_[up|down](), _cpu_[up|down](), [disable|enable]_nonboot_cpus()
+- kernel/power/process.c : freeze_processes(), thaw_processes()
+- kernel/power/suspend.c : suspend_prepare(), suspend_enter(), suspend_finish()
+- kernel/cpu.c: cpu_[up|down](), _cpu_[up|down](), [disable|enable]_nonboot_cpus()
II. What are the issues involved in CPU hotplug?
- -------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------------------
There are some interesting situations involving CPU hotplug and microcode
update on the CPUs, as discussed below:
@@ -243,8 +250,11 @@ d. Handling microcode update during suspend/hibernate:
cycles).
-III. Are there any known problems when regular CPU hotplug and suspend race
- with each other?
+III. Known problems
+===================
+
+Are there any known problems when regular CPU hotplug and suspend race
+with each other?
Yes, they are listed below:
diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt
index 8afb29a8604a..4cda6617709a 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+====================================
System Suspend and Device Interrupts
+====================================
Copyright (C) 2014 Intel Corp.
Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt
index f281886de490..b3188d9ca538 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+===============================================
Using swap files with software suspend (swsusp)
+===============================================
+
(C) 2006 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
The Linux kernel handles swap files almost in the same way as it handles swap
@@ -21,20 +24,20 @@ units.
In order to use a swap file with swsusp, you need to:
-1) Create the swap file and make it active, eg.
+1) Create the swap file and make it active, eg.::
-# dd if=/dev/zero of=<swap_file_path> bs=1024 count=<swap_file_size_in_k>
-# mkswap <swap_file_path>
-# swapon <swap_file_path>
+ # dd if=/dev/zero of=<swap_file_path> bs=1024 count=<swap_file_size_in_k>
+ # mkswap <swap_file_path>
+ # swapon <swap_file_path>
2) Use an application that will bmap the swap file with the help of the
FIBMAP ioctl and determine the location of the file's swap header, as the
offset, in <PAGE_SIZE> units, from the beginning of the partition which
holds the swap file.
-3) Add the following parameters to the kernel command line:
+3) Add the following parameters to the kernel command line::
-resume=<swap_file_partition> resume_offset=<swap_file_offset>
+ resume=<swap_file_partition> resume_offset=<swap_file_offset>
where <swap_file_partition> is the partition on which the swap file is located
and <swap_file_offset> is the offset of the swap header determined by the
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt
index b802fbfd95ef..16d2f89ba1e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp-dmcrypt.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
+=======================================
+How to use dm-crypt and swsusp together
+=======================================
+
Author: Andreas Steinmetz <[email protected]>
-How to use dm-crypt and swsusp together:
-========================================
Some prerequisites:
You know how dm-crypt works. If not, visit the following web page:
@@ -29,23 +31,23 @@ a way that the swap device you suspend to/resume from has
always the same major/minor within the initrd as well as
within your running system. The easiest way to achieve this is
to always set up this swap device first with dmsetup, so that
-it will always look like the following:
+it will always look like the following::
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 0 Jul 28 13:37 /dev/mapper/swap0
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 0 Jul 28 13:37 /dev/mapper/swap0
Now set up your kernel to use /dev/mapper/swap0 as the default
-resume partition, so your kernel .config contains:
+resume partition, so your kernel .config contains::
-CONFIG_PM_STD_PARTITION="/dev/mapper/swap0"
+ CONFIG_PM_STD_PARTITION="/dev/mapper/swap0"
Prepare your boot loader to use the initrd you will create or
modify. For lilo the simplest setup looks like the following
-lines:
+lines::
-image=/boot/vmlinuz
-initrd=/boot/initrd.gz
-label=linux
-append="root=/dev/ram0 init=/linuxrc rw"
+ image=/boot/vmlinuz
+ initrd=/boot/initrd.gz
+ label=linux
+ append="root=/dev/ram0 init=/linuxrc rw"
Finally you need to create or modify your initrd. Lets assume
you create an initrd that reads the required dm-crypt setup
@@ -53,66 +55,66 @@ from a pcmcia flash disk card. The card is formatted with an ext2
fs which resides on /dev/hde1 when the card is inserted. The
card contains at least the encrypted swap setup in a file
named "swapkey". /etc/fstab of your initrd contains something
-like the following:
+like the following::
-/dev/hda1 /mnt ext3 ro 0 0
-none /proc proc defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0
-none /sys sysfs defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0
+ /dev/hda1 /mnt ext3 ro 0 0
+ none /proc proc defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults,noatime,nodiratime 0 0
/dev/hda1 contains an unencrypted mini system that sets up all
of your crypto devices, again by reading the setup from the
pcmcia flash disk. What follows now is a /linuxrc for your
initrd that allows you to resume from encrypted swap and that
continues boot with your mini system on /dev/hda1 if resume
-does not happen:
+does not happen::
-#!/bin/sh
-PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin
-mount /proc
-mount /sys
-mapped=0
-noresume=`grep -c noresume /proc/cmdline`
-if [ "$*" != "" ]
-then
- noresume=1
-fi
-dmesg -n 1
-/sbin/cardmgr -q
-for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
-do
- if [ -f /proc/ide/hde/media ]
+ #!/bin/sh
+ PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin
+ mount /proc
+ mount /sys
+ mapped=0
+ noresume=`grep -c noresume /proc/cmdline`
+ if [ "$*" != "" ]
then
+ noresume=1
+ fi
+ dmesg -n 1
+ /sbin/cardmgr -q
+ for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
+ do
+ if [ -f /proc/ide/hde/media ]
+ then
+ usleep 500000
+ mount -t ext2 -o ro /dev/hde1 /mnt
+ if [ -f /mnt/swapkey ]
+ then
+ dmsetup create swap0 /mnt/swapkey > /dev/null 2>&1 && mapped=1
+ fi
+ umount /mnt
+ break
+ fi
usleep 500000
- mount -t ext2 -o ro /dev/hde1 /mnt
- if [ -f /mnt/swapkey ]
+ done
+ killproc /sbin/cardmgr
+ dmesg -n 6
+ if [ $mapped = 1 ]
+ then
+ if [ $noresume != 0 ]
then
- dmsetup create swap0 /mnt/swapkey > /dev/null 2>&1 && mapped=1
+ mkswap /dev/mapper/swap0 > /dev/null 2>&1
fi
- umount /mnt
- break
+ echo 254:0 > /sys/power/resume
+ dmsetup remove swap0
fi
- usleep 500000
-done
-killproc /sbin/cardmgr
-dmesg -n 6
-if [ $mapped = 1 ]
-then
- if [ $noresume != 0 ]
- then
- mkswap /dev/mapper/swap0 > /dev/null 2>&1
- fi
- echo 254:0 > /sys/power/resume
- dmsetup remove swap0
-fi
-umount /sys
-mount /mnt
-umount /proc
-cd /mnt
-pivot_root . mnt
-mount /proc
-umount -l /mnt
-umount /proc
-exec chroot . /sbin/init $* < dev/console > dev/console 2>&1
+ umount /sys
+ mount /mnt
+ umount /proc
+ cd /mnt
+ pivot_root . mnt
+ mount /proc
+ umount -l /mnt
+ umount /proc
+ exec chroot . /sbin/init $* < dev/console > dev/console 2>&1
Please don't mind the weird loop above, busybox's msh doesn't know
the let statement. Now, what is happening in the script?
diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
index 236d1fb13640..d000312f6965 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
@@ -1,68 +1,76 @@
+============
+Swap suspend
+============
+
Some warnings, first.
- * BIG FAT WARNING *********************************************************
- *
- * If you touch anything on disk between suspend and resume...
- * ...kiss your data goodbye.
- *
- * If you do resume from initrd after your filesystems are mounted...
- * ...bye bye root partition.
- * [this is actually same case as above]
- *
- * If you have unsupported (*) devices using DMA, you may have some
- * problems. If your disk driver does not support suspend... (IDE does),
- * it may cause some problems, too. If you change kernel command line
- * between suspend and resume, it may do something wrong. If you change
- * your hardware while system is suspended... well, it was not good idea;
- * but it will probably only crash.
- *
- * (*) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe.
- *
- * If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before software suspend,
- * they won't be accessible after resume and you may lose data, as though
- * you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them;
- * see the FAQ below for details. (This is not true for more traditional
- * power states like "standby", which normally don't turn USB off.)
+.. warning::
+
+ **BIG FAT WARNING**
+
+ If you touch anything on disk between suspend and resume...
+ ...kiss your data goodbye.
+
+ If you do resume from initrd after your filesystems are mounted...
+ ...bye bye root partition.
+
+ [this is actually same case as above]
+
+ If you have unsupported ( ) devices using DMA, you may have some
+ problems. If your disk driver does not support suspend... (IDE does),
+ it may cause some problems, too. If you change kernel command line
+ between suspend and resume, it may do something wrong. If you change
+ your hardware while system is suspended... well, it was not good idea;
+ but it will probably only crash.
+
+ ( ) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe.
+
+ If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before software suspend,
+ they won't be accessible after resume and you may lose data, as though
+ you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them;
+ see the FAQ below for details. (This is not true for more traditional
+ power states like "standby", which normally don't turn USB off.)
Swap partition:
-You need to append resume=/dev/your_swap_partition to kernel command
-line or specify it using /sys/power/resume.
+ You need to append resume=/dev/your_swap_partition to kernel command
+ line or specify it using /sys/power/resume.
Swap file:
-If using a swapfile you can also specify a resume offset using
-resume_offset=<number> on the kernel command line or specify it
-in /sys/power/resume_offset.
+ If using a swapfile you can also specify a resume offset using
+ resume_offset=<number> on the kernel command line or specify it
+ in /sys/power/resume_offset.
-After preparing then you suspend by
+After preparing then you suspend by::
-echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ echo shutdown > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
-. If you feel ACPI works pretty well on your system, you might try
+- If you feel ACPI works pretty well on your system, you might try::
-echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ echo platform > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
-. If you would like to write hibernation image to swap and then suspend
-to RAM (provided your platform supports it), you can try
+- If you would like to write hibernation image to swap and then suspend
+ to RAM (provided your platform supports it), you can try::
-echo suspend > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
+ echo suspend > /sys/power/disk; echo disk > /sys/power/state
-. If you have SATA disks, you'll need recent kernels with SATA suspend
-support. For suspend and resume to work, make sure your disk drivers
-are built into kernel -- not modules. [There's way to make
-suspend/resume with modular disk drivers, see FAQ, but you probably
-should not do that.]
+- If you have SATA disks, you'll need recent kernels with SATA suspend
+ support. For suspend and resume to work, make sure your disk drivers
+ are built into kernel -- not modules. [There's way to make
+ suspend/resume with modular disk drivers, see FAQ, but you probably
+ should not do that.]
-If you want to limit the suspend image size to N bytes, do
+If you want to limit the suspend image size to N bytes, do::
-echo N > /sys/power/image_size
+ echo N > /sys/power/image_size
before suspend (it is limited to around 2/5 of available RAM by default).
-. The resume process checks for the presence of the resume device,
-if found, it then checks the contents for the hibernation image signature.
-If both are found, it resumes the hibernation image.
+- The resume process checks for the presence of the resume device,
+ if found, it then checks the contents for the hibernation image signature.
+ If both are found, it resumes the hibernation image.
+
+- The resume process may be triggered in two ways:
-. The resume process may be triggered in two ways:
1) During lateinit: If resume=/dev/your_swap_partition is specified on
the kernel command line, lateinit runs the resume process. If the
resume device has not been probed yet, the resume process fails and
@@ -73,26 +81,28 @@ If both are found, it resumes the hibernation image.
read-only) otherwise data may be corrupted.
Article about goals and implementation of Software Suspend for Linux
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+====================================================================
+
Author: Gábor Kuti
Last revised: 2003-10-20 by Pavel Machek
Idea and goals to achieve
+-------------------------
Nowadays it is common in several laptops that they have a suspend button. It
saves the state of the machine to a filesystem or to a partition and switches
to standby mode. Later resuming the machine the saved state is loaded back to
ram and the machine can continue its work. It has two real benefits. First we
save ourselves the time machine goes down and later boots up, energy costs
-are real high when running from batteries. The other gain is that we don't have to
-interrupt our programs so processes that are calculating something for a long
+are real high when running from batteries. The other gain is that we don't have
+to interrupt our programs so processes that are calculating something for a long
time shouldn't need to be written interruptible.
swsusp saves the state of the machine into active swaps and then reboots or
powerdowns. You must explicitly specify the swap partition to resume from with
-``resume='' kernel option. If signature is found it loads and restores saved
-state. If the option ``noresume'' is specified as a boot parameter, it skips
-the resuming. If the option ``hibernate=nocompress'' is specified as a boot
+`resume=` kernel option. If signature is found it loads and restores saved
+state. If the option `noresume` is specified as a boot parameter, it skips
+the resuming. If the option `hibernate=nocompress` is specified as a boot
parameter, it saves hibernation image without compression.
In the meantime while the system is suspended you should not add/remove any
@@ -104,151 +114,173 @@ Sleep states summary
There are three different interfaces you can use, /proc/acpi should
work like this:
-In a really perfect world:
-echo 1 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for standby
-echo 2 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to ram
-echo 3 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to ram, but with more power conservative
-echo 4 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to disk
-echo 5 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for shutdown unfriendly the system
+In a really perfect world::
-and perhaps
-echo 4b > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to disk via s4bios
+ echo 1 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for standby
+ echo 2 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to ram
+ echo 3 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to ram, but with more power conservative
+ echo 4 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to disk
+ echo 5 > /proc/acpi/sleep # for shutdown unfriendly the system
+
+and perhaps::
+
+ echo 4b > /proc/acpi/sleep # for suspend to disk via s4bios
Frequently Asked Questions
==========================
-Q: well, suspending a server is IMHO a really stupid thing,
-but... (Diego Zuccato):
+Q:
+ well, suspending a server is IMHO a really stupid thing,
+ but... (Diego Zuccato):
-A: You bought new UPS for your server. How do you install it without
-bringing machine down? Suspend to disk, rearrange power cables,
-resume.
-
-You have your server on UPS. Power died, and UPS is indicating 30
-seconds to failure. What do you do? Suspend to disk.
+A:
+ You bought new UPS for your server. How do you install it without
+ bringing machine down? Suspend to disk, rearrange power cables,
+ resume.
+ You have your server on UPS. Power died, and UPS is indicating 30
+ seconds to failure. What do you do? Suspend to disk.
-Q: Maybe I'm missing something, but why don't the regular I/O paths work?
-A: We do use the regular I/O paths. However we cannot restore the data
-to its original location as we load it. That would create an
-inconsistent kernel state which would certainly result in an oops.
-Instead, we load the image into unused memory and then atomically copy
-it back to it original location. This implies, of course, a maximum
-image size of half the amount of memory.
+Q:
+ Maybe I'm missing something, but why don't the regular I/O paths work?
-There are two solutions to this:
+A:
+ We do use the regular I/O paths. However we cannot restore the data
+ to its original location as we load it. That would create an
+ inconsistent kernel state which would certainly result in an oops.
+ Instead, we load the image into unused memory and then atomically copy
+ it back to it original location. This implies, of course, a maximum
+ image size of half the amount of memory.
-* require half of memory to be free during suspend. That way you can
-read "new" data onto free spots, then cli and copy
+ There are two solutions to this:
-* assume we had special "polling" ide driver that only uses memory
-between 0-640KB. That way, I'd have to make sure that 0-640KB is free
-during suspending, but otherwise it would work...
+ * require half of memory to be free during suspend. That way you can
+ read "new" data onto free spots, then cli and copy
-suspend2 shares this fundamental limitation, but does not include user
-data and disk caches into "used memory" by saving them in
-advance. That means that the limitation goes away in practice.
+ * assume we had special "polling" ide driver that only uses memory
+ between 0-640KB. That way, I'd have to make sure that 0-640KB is free
+ during suspending, but otherwise it would work...
-Q: Does linux support ACPI S4?
+ suspend2 shares this fundamental limitation, but does not include user
+ data and disk caches into "used memory" by saving them in
+ advance. That means that the limitation goes away in practice.
-A: Yes. That's what echo platform > /sys/power/disk does.
+Q:
+ Does linux support ACPI S4?
-Q: What is 'suspend2'?
+A:
+ Yes. That's what echo platform > /sys/power/disk does.
-A: suspend2 is 'Software Suspend 2', a forked implementation of
-suspend-to-disk which is available as separate patches for 2.4 and 2.6
-kernels from swsusp.sourceforge.net. It includes support for SMP, 4GB
-highmem and preemption. It also has a extensible architecture that
-allows for arbitrary transformations on the image (compression,
-encryption) and arbitrary backends for writing the image (eg to swap
-or an NFS share[Work In Progress]). Questions regarding suspend2
-should be sent to the mailing list available through the suspend2
-website, and not to the Linux Kernel Mailing List. We are working
-toward merging suspend2 into the mainline kernel.
+Q:
+ What is 'suspend2'?
-Q: What is the freezing of tasks and why are we using it?
+A:
+ suspend2 is 'Software Suspend 2', a forked implementation of
+ suspend-to-disk which is available as separate patches for 2.4 and 2.6
+ kernels from swsusp.sourceforge.net. It includes support for SMP, 4GB
+ highmem and preemption. It also has a extensible architecture that
+ allows for arbitrary transformations on the image (compression,
+ encryption) and arbitrary backends for writing the image (eg to swap
+ or an NFS share[Work In Progress]). Questions regarding suspend2
+ should be sent to the mailing list available through the suspend2
+ website, and not to the Linux Kernel Mailing List. We are working
+ toward merging suspend2 into the mainline kernel.
+
+Q:
+ What is the freezing of tasks and why are we using it?
-A: The freezing of tasks is a mechanism by which user space processes and some
-kernel threads are controlled during hibernation or system-wide suspend (on some
-architectures). See freezing-of-tasks.txt for details.
+A:
+ The freezing of tasks is a mechanism by which user space processes and some
+ kernel threads are controlled during hibernation or system-wide suspend (on some
+ architectures). See freezing-of-tasks.txt for details.
-Q: What is the difference between "platform" and "shutdown"?
+Q:
+ What is the difference between "platform" and "shutdown"?
A:
+ shutdown:
+ save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown
-shutdown: save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown
+ platform:
+ save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown and blink
+ "suspended led"
-platform: save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown and blink
- "suspended led"
+ "platform" is actually right thing to do where supported, but
+ "shutdown" is most reliable (except on ACPI systems).
-"platform" is actually right thing to do where supported, but
-"shutdown" is most reliable (except on ACPI systems).
+Q:
+ I do not understand why you have such strong objections to idea of
+ selective suspend.
-Q: I do not understand why you have such strong objections to idea of
-selective suspend.
+A:
+ Do selective suspend during runtime power management, that's okay. But
+ it's useless for suspend-to-disk. (And I do not see how you could use
+ it for suspend-to-ram, I hope you do not want that).
-A: Do selective suspend during runtime power management, that's okay. But
-it's useless for suspend-to-disk. (And I do not see how you could use
-it for suspend-to-ram, I hope you do not want that).
+ Lets see, so you suggest to
-Lets see, so you suggest to
+ * SUSPEND all but swap device and parents
+ * Snapshot
+ * Write image to disk
+ * SUSPEND swap device and parents
+ * Powerdown
-* SUSPEND all but swap device and parents
-* Snapshot
-* Write image to disk
-* SUSPEND swap device and parents
-* Powerdown
+ Oh no, that does not work, if swap device or its parents uses DMA,
+ you've corrupted data. You'd have to do
-Oh no, that does not work, if swap device or its parents uses DMA,
-you've corrupted data. You'd have to do
+ * SUSPEND all but swap device and parents
+ * FREEZE swap device and parents
+ * Snapshot
+ * UNFREEZE swap device and parents
+ * Write
+ * SUSPEND swap device and parents
-* SUSPEND all but swap device and parents
-* FREEZE swap device and parents
-* Snapshot
-* UNFREEZE swap device and parents
-* Write
-* SUSPEND swap device and parents
+ Which means that you still need that FREEZE state, and you get more
+ complicated code. (And I have not yet introduce details like system
+ devices).
-Which means that you still need that FREEZE state, and you get more
-complicated code. (And I have not yet introduce details like system
-devices).
+Q:
+ There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral
+ distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE.
-Q: There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral
-distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE.
+A:
+ Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct,
+ but it may be unnecessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple,
+ slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later.
-A: Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct,
-but it may be unnecessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple,
-slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later.
+ For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for
+ FREEZE.
-For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for
-FREEZE.
+Q:
+ After resuming, system is paging heavily, leading to very bad interactivity.
-Q: After resuming, system is paging heavily, leading to very bad interactivity.
+A:
+ Try running::
-A: Try running
+ cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u | while read file
+ do
+ test -f "$file" && cat "$file" > /dev/null
+ done
-cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u | while read file
-do
- test -f "$file" && cat "$file" > /dev/null
-done
+ after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be useful.
-after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be useful.
+Q:
+ What happens to devices during swsusp? They seem to be resumed
+ during system suspend?
-Q: What happens to devices during swsusp? They seem to be resumed
-during system suspend?
+A:
+ That's correct. We need to resume them if we want to write image to
+ disk. Whole sequence goes like
-A: That's correct. We need to resume them if we want to write image to
-disk. Whole sequence goes like
+ **Suspend part**
- Suspend part
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~
running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk
user processes are stopped
suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere
- with state snapshot
+ with state snapshot
state snapshot: copy of whole used memory is taken with interrupts disabled
@@ -260,18 +292,19 @@ disk. Whole sequence goes like
turn the power off
- Resume part
- ~~~~~~~~~~~
+ **Resume part**
+
(is actually pretty similar)
running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk
- user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, no one knows)
+ user processes are stopped (in common case there are none,
+ but with resume-from-initrd, no one knows)
read image from disk
suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere
- with image restoration
+ with image restoration
image restoration: rewrite memory with image
@@ -279,87 +312,103 @@ disk. Whole sequence goes like
thaw all user processes
-Q: What is this 'Encrypt suspend image' for?
-
-A: First of all: it is not a replacement for dm-crypt encrypted swap.
-It cannot protect your computer while it is suspended. Instead it does
-protect from leaking sensitive data after resume from suspend.
-
-Think of the following: you suspend while an application is running
-that keeps sensitive data in memory. The application itself prevents
-the data from being swapped out. Suspend, however, must write these
-data to swap to be able to resume later on. Without suspend encryption
-your sensitive data are then stored in plaintext on disk. This means
-that after resume your sensitive data are accessible to all
-applications having direct access to the swap device which was used
-for suspend. If you don't need swap after resume these data can remain
-on disk virtually forever. Thus it can happen that your system gets
-broken in weeks later and sensitive data which you thought were
-encrypted and protected are retrieved and stolen from the swap device.
-To prevent this situation you should use 'Encrypt suspend image'.
-
-During suspend a temporary key is created and this key is used to
-encrypt the data written to disk. When, during resume, the data was
-read back into memory the temporary key is destroyed which simply
-means that all data written to disk during suspend are then
-inaccessible so they can't be stolen later on. The only thing that
-you must then take care of is that you call 'mkswap' for the swap
-partition used for suspend as early as possible during regular
-boot. This asserts that any temporary key from an oopsed suspend or
-from a failed or aborted resume is erased from the swap device.
-
-As a rule of thumb use encrypted swap to protect your data while your
-system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted
-suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after
-resume.
-
-Q: Can I suspend to a swap file?
-
-A: Generally, yes, you can. However, it requires you to use the "resume=" and
-"resume_offset=" kernel command line parameters, so the resume from a swap file
-cannot be initiated from an initrd or initramfs image. See
-swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for details.
-
-Q: Is there a maximum system RAM size that is supported by swsusp?
-
-A: It should work okay with highmem.
-
-Q: Does swsusp (to disk) use only one swap partition or can it use
-multiple swap partitions (aggregate them into one logical space)?
-
-A: Only one swap partition, sorry.
-
-Q: If my application(s) causes lots of memory & swap space to be used
-(over half of the total system RAM), is it correct that it is likely
-to be useless to try to suspend to disk while that app is running?
-
-A: No, it should work okay, as long as your app does not mlock()
-it. Just prepare big enough swap partition.
-
-Q: What information is useful for debugging suspend-to-disk problems?
-
-A: Well, last messages on the screen are always useful. If something
-is broken, it is usually some kernel driver, therefore trying with as
-little as possible modules loaded helps a lot. I also prefer people to
-suspend from console, preferably without X running. Booting with
-init=/bin/bash, then swapon and starting suspend sequence manually
-usually does the trick. Then it is good idea to try with latest
-vanilla kernel.
-
-Q: How can distributions ship a swsusp-supporting kernel with modular
-disk drivers (especially SATA)?
-
-A: Well, it can be done, load the drivers, then do echo into
-/sys/power/resume file from initrd. Be sure not to mount
-anything, not even read-only mount, or you are going to lose your
-data.
-
-Q: How do I make suspend more verbose?
-
-A: If you want to see any non-error kernel messages on the virtual
-terminal the kernel switches to during suspend, you have to set the
-kernel console loglevel to at least 4 (KERN_WARNING), for example by
-doing
+Q:
+ What is this 'Encrypt suspend image' for?
+
+A:
+ First of all: it is not a replacement for dm-crypt encrypted swap.
+ It cannot protect your computer while it is suspended. Instead it does
+ protect from leaking sensitive data after resume from suspend.
+
+ Think of the following: you suspend while an application is running
+ that keeps sensitive data in memory. The application itself prevents
+ the data from being swapped out. Suspend, however, must write these
+ data to swap to be able to resume later on. Without suspend encryption
+ your sensitive data are then stored in plaintext on disk. This means
+ that after resume your sensitive data are accessible to all
+ applications having direct access to the swap device which was used
+ for suspend. If you don't need swap after resume these data can remain
+ on disk virtually forever. Thus it can happen that your system gets
+ broken in weeks later and sensitive data which you thought were
+ encrypted and protected are retrieved and stolen from the swap device.
+ To prevent this situation you should use 'Encrypt suspend image'.
+
+ During suspend a temporary key is created and this key is used to
+ encrypt the data written to disk. When, during resume, the data was
+ read back into memory the temporary key is destroyed which simply
+ means that all data written to disk during suspend are then
+ inaccessible so they can't be stolen later on. The only thing that
+ you must then take care of is that you call 'mkswap' for the swap
+ partition used for suspend as early as possible during regular
+ boot. This asserts that any temporary key from an oopsed suspend or
+ from a failed or aborted resume is erased from the swap device.
+
+ As a rule of thumb use encrypted swap to protect your data while your
+ system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted
+ suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after
+ resume.
+
+Q:
+ Can I suspend to a swap file?
+
+A:
+ Generally, yes, you can. However, it requires you to use the "resume=" and
+ "resume_offset=" kernel command line parameters, so the resume from a swap file
+ cannot be initiated from an initrd or initramfs image. See
+ swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for details.
+
+Q:
+ Is there a maximum system RAM size that is supported by swsusp?
+
+A:
+ It should work okay with highmem.
+
+Q:
+ Does swsusp (to disk) use only one swap partition or can it use
+ multiple swap partitions (aggregate them into one logical space)?
+
+A:
+ Only one swap partition, sorry.
+
+Q:
+ If my application(s) causes lots of memory & swap space to be used
+ (over half of the total system RAM), is it correct that it is likely
+ to be useless to try to suspend to disk while that app is running?
+
+A:
+ No, it should work okay, as long as your app does not mlock()
+ it. Just prepare big enough swap partition.
+
+Q:
+ What information is useful for debugging suspend-to-disk problems?
+
+A:
+ Well, last messages on the screen are always useful. If something
+ is broken, it is usually some kernel driver, therefore trying with as
+ little as possible modules loaded helps a lot. I also prefer people to
+ suspend from console, preferably without X running. Booting with
+ init=/bin/bash, then swapon and starting suspend sequence manually
+ usually does the trick. Then it is good idea to try with latest
+ vanilla kernel.
+
+Q:
+ How can distributions ship a swsusp-supporting kernel with modular
+ disk drivers (especially SATA)?
+
+A:
+ Well, it can be done, load the drivers, then do echo into
+ /sys/power/resume file from initrd. Be sure not to mount
+ anything, not even read-only mount, or you are going to lose your
+ data.
+
+Q:
+ How do I make suspend more verbose?
+
+A:
+ If you want to see any non-error kernel messages on the virtual
+ terminal the kernel switches to during suspend, you have to set the
+ kernel console loglevel to at least 4 (KERN_WARNING), for example by
+ doing::
# save the old loglevel
read LOGLEVEL DUMMY < /proc/sys/kernel/printk
@@ -387,60 +436,66 @@ doing
echo $LOGLEVEL > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
exit $RET
-Q: Is this true that if I have a mounted filesystem on a USB device and
-I suspend to disk, I can lose data unless the filesystem has been mounted
-with "sync"?
-
-A: That's right ... if you disconnect that device, you may lose data.
-In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your programs have
-information in buffers they haven't written out to a disk you disconnect,
-or if you disconnect before the device finished saving data you wrote.
-
-Software suspend normally powers down USB controllers, which is equivalent
-to disconnecting all USB devices attached to your system.
-
-Your system might well support low-power modes for its USB controllers
-while the system is asleep, maintaining the connection, using true sleep
-modes like "suspend-to-RAM" or "standby". (Don't write "disk" to the
-/sys/power/state file; write "standby" or "mem".) We've not seen any
-hardware that can use these modes through software suspend, although in
-theory some systems might support "platform" modes that won't break the
-USB connections.
-
-Remember that it's always a bad idea to unplug a disk drive containing a
-mounted filesystem. That's true even when your system is asleep! The
-safest thing is to unmount all filesystems on removable media (such USB,
-Firewire, CompactFlash, MMC, external SATA, or even IDE hotplug bays)
-before suspending; then remount them after resuming.
-
-There is a work-around for this problem. For more information, see
-Documentation/driver-api/usb/persist.rst.
-
-Q: Can I suspend-to-disk using a swap partition under LVM?
-
-A: Yes and No. You can suspend successfully, but the kernel will not be able
-to resume on its own. You need an initramfs that can recognize the resume
-situation, activate the logical volume containing the swap volume (but not
-touch any filesystems!), and eventually call
-
-echo -n "$major:$minor" > /sys/power/resume
-
-where $major and $minor are the respective major and minor device numbers of
-the swap volume.
-
-uswsusp works with LVM, too. See http://suspend.sourceforge.net/
-
-Q: I upgraded the kernel from 2.6.15 to 2.6.16. Both kernels were
-compiled with the similar configuration files. Anyway I found that
-suspend to disk (and resume) is much slower on 2.6.16 compared to
-2.6.15. Any idea for why that might happen or how can I speed it up?
-
-A: This is because the size of the suspend image is now greater than
-for 2.6.15 (by saving more data we can get more responsive system
-after resume).
-
-There's the /sys/power/image_size knob that controls the size of the
-image. If you set it to 0 (eg. by echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size as
-root), the 2.6.15 behavior should be restored. If it is still too
-slow, take a look at suspend.sf.net -- userland suspend is faster and
-supports LZF compression to speed it up further.
+Q:
+ Is this true that if I have a mounted filesystem on a USB device and
+ I suspend to disk, I can lose data unless the filesystem has been mounted
+ with "sync"?
+
+A:
+ That's right ... if you disconnect that device, you may lose data.
+ In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your programs have
+ information in buffers they haven't written out to a disk you disconnect,
+ or if you disconnect before the device finished saving data you wrote.
+
+ Software suspend normally powers down USB controllers, which is equivalent
+ to disconnecting all USB devices attached to your system.
+
+ Your system might well support low-power modes for its USB controllers
+ while the system is asleep, maintaining the connection, using true sleep
+ modes like "suspend-to-RAM" or "standby". (Don't write "disk" to the
+ /sys/power/state file; write "standby" or "mem".) We've not seen any
+ hardware that can use these modes through software suspend, although in
+ theory some systems might support "platform" modes that won't break the
+ USB connections.
+
+ Remember that it's always a bad idea to unplug a disk drive containing a
+ mounted filesystem. That's true even when your system is asleep! The
+ safest thing is to unmount all filesystems on removable media (such USB,
+ Firewire, CompactFlash, MMC, external SATA, or even IDE hotplug bays)
+ before suspending; then remount them after resuming.
+
+ There is a work-around for this problem. For more information, see
+ Documentation/driver-api/usb/persist.rst.
+
+Q:
+ Can I suspend-to-disk using a swap partition under LVM?
+
+A:
+ Yes and No. You can suspend successfully, but the kernel will not be able
+ to resume on its own. You need an initramfs that can recognize the resume
+ situation, activate the logical volume containing the swap volume (but not
+ touch any filesystems!), and eventually call::
+
+ echo -n "$major:$minor" > /sys/power/resume
+
+ where $major and $minor are the respective major and minor device numbers of
+ the swap volume.
+
+ uswsusp works with LVM, too. See http://suspend.sourceforge.net/
+
+Q:
+ I upgraded the kernel from 2.6.15 to 2.6.16. Both kernels were
+ compiled with the similar configuration files. Anyway I found that
+ suspend to disk (and resume) is much slower on 2.6.16 compared to
+ 2.6.15. Any idea for why that might happen or how can I speed it up?
+
+A:
+ This is because the size of the suspend image is now greater than
+ for 2.6.15 (by saving more data we can get more responsive system
+ after resume).
+
+ There's the /sys/power/image_size knob that controls the size of the
+ image. If you set it to 0 (eg. by echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size as
+ root), the 2.6.15 behavior should be restored. If it is still too
+ slow, take a look at suspend.sf.net -- userland suspend is faster and
+ supports LZF compression to speed it up further.
diff --git a/Documentation/power/tricks.txt b/Documentation/power/tricks.txt
index a1b8f7249f4c..ca787f142c3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/tricks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/tricks.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
- swsusp/S3 tricks
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+================
+swsusp/S3 tricks
+================
+
Pavel Machek <[email protected]>
If you want to trick swsusp/S3 into working, you might want to try:
diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt
index bbfcd1bbedc5..c7ef24d184fd 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+=====================================================
Documentation for userland software suspend interface
+=====================================================
+
(C) 2006 Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
First, the warnings at the beginning of swsusp.txt still apply.
@@ -30,13 +33,16 @@ called.
The ioctl() commands recognized by the device are:
-SNAPSHOT_FREEZE - freeze user space processes (the current process is
+SNAPSHOT_FREEZE
+ freeze user space processes (the current process is
not frozen); this is required for SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE
and SNAPSHOT_ATOMIC_RESTORE to succeed
-SNAPSHOT_UNFREEZE - thaw user space processes frozen by SNAPSHOT_FREEZE
+SNAPSHOT_UNFREEZE
+ thaw user space processes frozen by SNAPSHOT_FREEZE
-SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE - create a snapshot of the system memory; the
+SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE
+ create a snapshot of the system memory; the
last argument of ioctl() should be a pointer to an int variable,
the value of which will indicate whether the call returned after
creating the snapshot (1) or after restoring the system memory state
@@ -45,33 +51,41 @@ SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE - create a snapshot of the system memory; the
has been created the read() operation can be used to transfer
it out of the kernel
-SNAPSHOT_ATOMIC_RESTORE - restore the system memory state from the
+SNAPSHOT_ATOMIC_RESTORE
+ restore the system memory state from the
uploaded snapshot image; before calling it you should transfer
the system memory snapshot back to the kernel using the write()
operation; this call will not succeed if the snapshot
image is not available to the kernel
-SNAPSHOT_FREE - free memory allocated for the snapshot image
+SNAPSHOT_FREE
+ free memory allocated for the snapshot image
-SNAPSHOT_PREF_IMAGE_SIZE - set the preferred maximum size of the image
+SNAPSHOT_PREF_IMAGE_SIZE
+ set the preferred maximum size of the image
(the kernel will do its best to ensure the image size will not exceed
this number, but if it turns out to be impossible, the kernel will
create the smallest image possible)
-SNAPSHOT_GET_IMAGE_SIZE - return the actual size of the hibernation image
+SNAPSHOT_GET_IMAGE_SIZE
+ return the actual size of the hibernation image
-SNAPSHOT_AVAIL_SWAP_SIZE - return the amount of available swap in bytes (the
+SNAPSHOT_AVAIL_SWAP_SIZE
+ return the amount of available swap in bytes (the
last argument should be a pointer to an unsigned int variable that will
contain the result if the call is successful).
-SNAPSHOT_ALLOC_SWAP_PAGE - allocate a swap page from the resume partition
+SNAPSHOT_ALLOC_SWAP_PAGE
+ allocate a swap page from the resume partition
(the last argument should be a pointer to a loff_t variable that
will contain the swap page offset if the call is successful)
-SNAPSHOT_FREE_SWAP_PAGES - free all swap pages allocated by
+SNAPSHOT_FREE_SWAP_PAGES
+ free all swap pages allocated by
SNAPSHOT_ALLOC_SWAP_PAGE
-SNAPSHOT_SET_SWAP_AREA - set the resume partition and the offset (in <PAGE_SIZE>
+SNAPSHOT_SET_SWAP_AREA
+ set the resume partition and the offset (in <PAGE_SIZE>
units) from the beginning of the partition at which the swap header is
located (the last ioctl() argument should point to a struct
resume_swap_area, as defined in kernel/power/suspend_ioctls.h,
@@ -80,13 +94,16 @@ SNAPSHOT_SET_SWAP_AREA - set the resume partition and the offset (in <PAGE_SIZE>
swap files (see Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt for
details).
-SNAPSHOT_PLATFORM_SUPPORT - enable/disable the hibernation platform support,
+SNAPSHOT_PLATFORM_SUPPORT
+ enable/disable the hibernation platform support,
depending on the argument value (enable, if the argument is nonzero)
-SNAPSHOT_POWER_OFF - make the kernel transition the system to the hibernation
+SNAPSHOT_POWER_OFF
+ make the kernel transition the system to the hibernation
state (eg. ACPI S4) using the platform (eg. ACPI) driver
-SNAPSHOT_S2RAM - suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to
+SNAPSHOT_S2RAM
+ suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to
immediately enter the suspend-to-RAM state, so this call must always
be preceded by the SNAPSHOT_FREEZE call and it is also necessary
to use the SNAPSHOT_UNFREEZE call after the system wakes up. This call
@@ -98,10 +115,11 @@ SNAPSHOT_S2RAM - suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to
The device's read() operation can be used to transfer the snapshot image from
the kernel. It has the following limitations:
+
- you cannot read() more than one virtual memory page at a time
- read()s across page boundaries are impossible (ie. if you read() 1/2 of
- a page in the previous call, you will only be able to read()
- _at_ _most_ 1/2 of the page in the next call)
+ a page in the previous call, you will only be able to read()
+ **at most** 1/2 of the page in the next call)
The device's write() operation is used for uploading the system memory snapshot
into the kernel. It has the same limitations as the read() operation.
@@ -143,8 +161,10 @@ preferably using mlockall(), before calling SNAPSHOT_FREEZE.
The suspending utility MUST check the value stored by SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE
in the memory location pointed to by the last argument of ioctl() and proceed
in accordance with it:
+
1. If the value is 1 (ie. the system memory snapshot has just been
created and the system is ready for saving it):
+
(a) The suspending utility MUST NOT close the snapshot device
_unless_ the whole suspend procedure is to be cancelled, in
which case, if the snapshot image has already been saved, the
@@ -158,6 +178,7 @@ in accordance with it:
called. However, it MAY mount a file system that was not
mounted at that time and perform some operations on it (eg.
use it for saving the image).
+
2. If the value is 0 (ie. the system state has just been restored from
the snapshot image), the suspending utility MUST close the snapshot
device. Afterwards it will be treated as a regular userland process,
diff --git a/Documentation/power/video.txt b/Documentation/power/video.txt
index 3e6272bc4472..337a2ba9f32f 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/video.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/video.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
+===========================
+Video issues with S3 resume
+===========================
- Video issues with S3 resume
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- 2003-2006, Pavel Machek
+2003-2006, Pavel Machek
During S3 resume, hardware needs to be reinitialized. For most
devices, this is easy, and kernel driver knows how to do
@@ -41,37 +42,37 @@ There are a few types of systems where video works after S3 resume:
(1) systems where video state is preserved over S3.
(2) systems where it is possible to call the video BIOS during S3
- resume. Unfortunately, it is not correct to call the video BIOS at
- that point, but it happens to work on some machines. Use
- acpi_sleep=s3_bios.
+ resume. Unfortunately, it is not correct to call the video BIOS at
+ that point, but it happens to work on some machines. Use
+ acpi_sleep=s3_bios.
(3) systems that initialize video card into vga text mode and where
- the BIOS works well enough to be able to set video mode. Use
- acpi_sleep=s3_mode on these.
+ the BIOS works well enough to be able to set video mode. Use
+ acpi_sleep=s3_mode on these.
(4) on some systems s3_bios kicks video into text mode, and
- acpi_sleep=s3_bios,s3_mode is needed.
+ acpi_sleep=s3_bios,s3_mode is needed.
(5) radeon systems, where X can soft-boot your video card. You'll need
- a new enough X, and a plain text console (no vesafb or radeonfb). See
- http://www.doesi.gmxhome.de/linux/tm800s3/s3.html for more information.
- Alternatively, you should use vbetool (6) instead.
+ a new enough X, and a plain text console (no vesafb or radeonfb). See
+ http://www.doesi.gmxhome.de/linux/tm800s3/s3.html for more information.
+ Alternatively, you should use vbetool (6) instead.
(6) other radeon systems, where vbetool is enough to bring system back
- to life. It needs text console to be working. Do vbetool vbestate
- save > /tmp/delme; echo 3 > /proc/acpi/sleep; vbetool post; vbetool
- vbestate restore < /tmp/delme; setfont <whatever>, and your video
- should work.
+ to life. It needs text console to be working. Do vbetool vbestate
+ save > /tmp/delme; echo 3 > /proc/acpi/sleep; vbetool post; vbetool
+ vbestate restore < /tmp/delme; setfont <whatever>, and your video
+ should work.
(7) on some systems, it is possible to boot most of kernel, and then
- POSTing bios works. Ole Rohne has patch to do just that at
- http://dev.gentoo.org/~marineam/patch-radeonfb-2.6.11-rc2-mm2.
+ POSTing bios works. Ole Rohne has patch to do just that at
+ http://dev.gentoo.org/~marineam/patch-radeonfb-2.6.11-rc2-mm2.
-(8) on some systems, you can use the video_post utility and or
- do echo 3 > /sys/power/state && /usr/sbin/video_post - which will
- initialize the display in console mode. If you are in X, you can switch
- to a virtual terminal and back to X using CTRL+ALT+F1 - CTRL+ALT+F7 to get
- the display working in graphical mode again.
+(8) on some systems, you can use the video_post utility and or
+ do echo 3 > /sys/power/state && /usr/sbin/video_post - which will
+ initialize the display in console mode. If you are in X, you can switch
+ to a virtual terminal and back to X using CTRL+ALT+F1 - CTRL+ALT+F7 to get
+ the display working in graphical mode again.
Now, if you pass acpi_sleep=something, and it does not work with your
bios, you'll get a hard crash during resume. Be careful. Also it is
@@ -87,99 +88,126 @@ chance of working.
Table of known working notebooks:
+
+=============================== ===============================================
Model hack (or "how to do it")
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+=============================== ===============================================
Acer Aspire 1406LC ole's late BIOS init (7), turn off DRI
Acer TM 230 s3_bios (2)
Acer TM 242FX vbetool (6)
Acer TM C110 video_post (8)
-Acer TM C300 vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X), vbetool (6) or video_post (8)
+Acer TM C300 vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X),
+ vbetool (6) or video_post (8)
Acer TM 4052LCi s3_bios (2)
Acer TM 636Lci s3_bios,s3_mode (4)
-Acer TM 650 (Radeon M7) vga=normal plus boot-radeon (5) gets text console back
-Acer TM 660 ??? (*)
-Acer TM 800 vga=normal, X patches, see webpage (5) or vbetool (6)
-Acer TM 803 vga=normal, X patches, see webpage (5) or vbetool (6)
+Acer TM 650 (Radeon M7) vga=normal plus boot-radeon (5) gets text
+ console back
+Acer TM 660 ??? [#f1]_
+Acer TM 800 vga=normal, X patches, see webpage (5)
+ or vbetool (6)
+Acer TM 803 vga=normal, X patches, see webpage (5)
+ or vbetool (6)
Acer TM 803LCi vga=normal, vbetool (6)
Arima W730a vbetool needed (6)
-Asus L2400D s3_mode (3)(***) (S1 also works OK)
+Asus L2400D s3_mode (3) [#f2]_ (S1 also works OK)
Asus L3350M (SiS 740) (6)
Asus L3800C (Radeon M7) s3_bios (2) (S1 also works OK)
-Asus M6887Ne vga=normal, s3_bios (2), use radeon driver instead of fglrx in x.org
+Asus M6887Ne vga=normal, s3_bios (2), use radeon driver
+ instead of fglrx in x.org
Athlon64 desktop prototype s3_bios (2)
-Compal CL-50 ??? (*)
+Compal CL-50 ??? [#f1]_
Compaq Armada E500 - P3-700 none (1) (S1 also works OK)
Compaq Evo N620c vga=normal, s3_bios (2)
Dell 600m, ATI R250 Lf none (1), but needs xorg-x11-6.8.1.902-1
Dell D600, ATI RV250 vga=normal and X, or try vbestate (6)
-Dell D610 vga=normal and X (possibly vbestate (6) too, but not tested)
-Dell Inspiron 4000 ??? (*)
-Dell Inspiron 500m ??? (*)
+Dell D610 vga=normal and X (possibly vbestate (6) too,
+ but not tested)
+Dell Inspiron 4000 ??? [#f1]_
+Dell Inspiron 500m ??? [#f1]_
Dell Inspiron 510m ???
Dell Inspiron 5150 vbetool needed (6)
-Dell Inspiron 600m ??? (*)
-Dell Inspiron 8200 ??? (*)
-Dell Inspiron 8500 ??? (*)
-Dell Inspiron 8600 ??? (*)
-eMachines athlon64 machines vbetool needed (6) (someone please get me model #s)
-HP NC6000 s3_bios, may not use radeonfb (2); or vbetool (6)
-HP NX7000 ??? (*)
-HP Pavilion ZD7000 vbetool post needed, need open-source nv driver for X
+Dell Inspiron 600m ??? [#f1]_
+Dell Inspiron 8200 ??? [#f1]_
+Dell Inspiron 8500 ??? [#f1]_
+Dell Inspiron 8600 ??? [#f1]_
+eMachines athlon64 machines vbetool needed (6) (someone please get
+ me model #s)
+HP NC6000 s3_bios, may not use radeonfb (2);
+ or vbetool (6)
+HP NX7000 ??? [#f1]_
+HP Pavilion ZD7000 vbetool post needed, need open-source nv
+ driver for X
HP Omnibook XE3 athlon version none (1)
HP Omnibook XE3GC none (1), video is S3 Savage/IX-MV
HP Omnibook XE3L-GF vbetool (6)
HP Omnibook 5150 none (1), (S1 also works OK)
-IBM TP T20, model 2647-44G none (1), video is S3 Inc. 86C270-294 Savage/IX-MV, vesafb gets "interesting" but X work.
-IBM TP A31 / Type 2652-M5G s3_mode (3) [works ok with BIOS 1.04 2002-08-23, but not at all with BIOS 1.11 2004-11-05 :-(]
+IBM TP T20, model 2647-44G none (1), video is S3 Inc. 86C270-294
+ Savage/IX-MV, vesafb gets "interesting"
+ but X work.
+IBM TP A31 / Type 2652-M5G s3_mode (3) [works ok with
+ BIOS 1.04 2002-08-23, but not at all with
+ BIOS 1.11 2004-11-05 :-(]
IBM TP R32 / Type 2658-MMG none (1)
-IBM TP R40 2722B3G ??? (*)
+IBM TP R40 2722B3G ??? [#f1]_
IBM TP R50p / Type 1832-22U s3_bios (2)
IBM TP R51 none (1)
-IBM TP T30 236681A ??? (*)
+IBM TP T30 236681A ??? [#f1]_
IBM TP T40 / Type 2373-MU4 none (1)
IBM TP T40p none (1)
IBM TP R40p s3_bios (2)
IBM TP T41p s3_bios (2), switch to X after resume
IBM TP T42 s3_bios (2)
IBM ThinkPad T42p (2373-GTG) s3_bios (2)
-IBM TP X20 ??? (*)
+IBM TP X20 ??? [#f1]_
IBM TP X30 s3_bios, s3_mode (4)
-IBM TP X31 / Type 2672-XXH none (1), use radeontool (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/) to turn off backlight.
-IBM TP X32 none (1), but backlight is on and video is trashed after long suspend. s3_bios,s3_mode (4) works too. Perhaps that gets better results?
+IBM TP X31 / Type 2672-XXH none (1), use radeontool
+ (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/) to
+ turn off backlight.
+IBM TP X32 none (1), but backlight is on and video is
+ trashed after long suspend. s3_bios,
+ s3_mode (4) works too. Perhaps that gets
+ better results?
IBM Thinkpad X40 Type 2371-7JG s3_bios,s3_mode (4)
-IBM TP 600e none(1), but a switch to console and back to X is needed
-Medion MD4220 ??? (*)
+IBM TP 600e none(1), but a switch to console and
+ back to X is needed
+Medion MD4220 ??? [#f1]_
Samsung P35 vbetool needed (6)
Sharp PC-AR10 (ATI rage) none (1), backlight does not switch off
Sony Vaio PCG-C1VRX/K s3_bios (2)
-Sony Vaio PCG-F403 ??? (*)
+Sony Vaio PCG-F403 ??? [#f1]_
Sony Vaio PCG-GRT995MP none (1), works with 'nv' X driver
-Sony Vaio PCG-GR7/K none (1), but needs radeonfb, use radeontool (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/) to turn off backlight.
-Sony Vaio PCG-N505SN ??? (*)
+Sony Vaio PCG-GR7/K none (1), but needs radeonfb, use
+ radeontool (http://fdd.com/software/radeon/)
+ to turn off backlight.
+Sony Vaio PCG-N505SN ??? [#f1]_
Sony Vaio vgn-s260 X or boot-radeon can init it (5)
-Sony Vaio vgn-S580BH vga=normal, but suspend from X. Console will be blank unless you return to X.
+Sony Vaio vgn-S580BH vga=normal, but suspend from X. Console will
+ be blank unless you return to X.
Sony Vaio vgn-FS115B s3_bios (2),s3_mode (4)
Toshiba Libretto L5 none (1)
Toshiba Libretto 100CT/110CT vbetool (6)
Toshiba Portege 3020CT s3_mode (3)
Toshiba Satellite 4030CDT s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)
Toshiba Satellite 4080XCDT s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)
-Toshiba Satellite 4090XCDT ??? (*)
-Toshiba Satellite P10-554 s3_bios,s3_mode (4)(****)
+Toshiba Satellite 4090XCDT ??? [#f1]_
+Toshiba Satellite P10-554 s3_bios,s3_mode (4)[#f3]_
Toshiba M30 (2) xor X with nvidia driver using internal AGP
-Uniwill 244IIO ??? (*)
+Uniwill 244IIO ??? [#f1]_
+=============================== ===============================================
Known working desktop systems
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=================== ============================= ========================
Mainboard Graphics card hack (or "how to do it")
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+=================== ============================= ========================
Asus A7V8X nVidia RIVA TNT2 model 64 s3_bios,s3_mode (4)
+=================== ============================= ========================
-(*) from https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HoaryPMResults, not sure
- which options to use. If you know, please tell me.
+.. [#f1] from https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HoaryPMResults, not sure
+ which options to use. If you know, please tell me.
-(***) To be tested with a newer kernel.
+.. [#f2] To be tested with a newer kernel.
-(****) Not with SMP kernel, UP only.
+.. [#f3] Not with SMP kernel, UP only.
--
2.20.1
In order to prepare to add them to the Kernel API book,
convert the files to ReST format.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt | 38 +--
Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt | 293 +++++++++---------
Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt | 47 +--
Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt | 35 ++-
10 files changed, 290 insertions(+), 226 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt
index e5b9df4d8078..9f039b4f4b09 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/completion.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================================
Completions - "wait for completion" barrier APIs
================================================
@@ -46,7 +47,7 @@ it has to wait for it.
To use completions you need to #include <linux/completion.h> and
create a static or dynamic variable of type 'struct completion',
-which has only two fields:
+which has only two fields::
struct completion {
unsigned int done;
@@ -57,7 +58,7 @@ This provides the ->wait waitqueue to place tasks on for waiting (if any), and
the ->done completion flag for indicating whether it's completed or not.
Completions should be named to refer to the event that is being synchronized on.
-A good example is:
+A good example is::
wait_for_completion(&early_console_added);
@@ -81,7 +82,7 @@ have taken place, even if these wait functions return prematurely due to a timeo
or a signal triggering.
Initializing of dynamically allocated completion objects is done via a call to
-init_completion():
+init_completion()::
init_completion(&dynamic_object->done);
@@ -100,7 +101,8 @@ but be aware of other races.
For static declaration and initialization, macros are available.
-For static (or global) declarations in file scope you can use DECLARE_COMPLETION():
+For static (or global) declarations in file scope you can use
+DECLARE_COMPLETION()::
static DECLARE_COMPLETION(setup_done);
DECLARE_COMPLETION(setup_done);
@@ -111,7 +113,7 @@ initialized to 'not done' and doesn't require an init_completion() call.
When a completion is declared as a local variable within a function,
then the initialization should always use DECLARE_COMPLETION_ONSTACK()
explicitly, not just to make lockdep happy, but also to make it clear
-that limited scope had been considered and is intentional:
+that limited scope had been considered and is intentional::
DECLARE_COMPLETION_ONSTACK(setup_done)
@@ -140,11 +142,11 @@ Waiting for completions:
------------------------
For a thread to wait for some concurrent activity to finish, it
-calls wait_for_completion() on the initialized completion structure:
+calls wait_for_completion() on the initialized completion structure::
void wait_for_completion(struct completion *done)
-A typical usage scenario is:
+A typical usage scenario is::
CPU#1 CPU#2
@@ -192,17 +194,17 @@ A common problem that occurs is to have unclean assignment of return types,
so take care to assign return-values to variables of the proper type.
Checking for the specific meaning of return values also has been found
-to be quite inaccurate, e.g. constructs like:
+to be quite inaccurate, e.g. constructs like::
if (!wait_for_completion_interruptible_timeout(...))
... would execute the same code path for successful completion and for the
-interrupted case - which is probably not what you want.
+interrupted case - which is probably not what you want::
int wait_for_completion_interruptible(struct completion *done)
This function marks the task TASK_INTERRUPTIBLE while it is waiting.
-If a signal was received while waiting it will return -ERESTARTSYS; 0 otherwise.
+If a signal was received while waiting it will return -ERESTARTSYS; 0 otherwise::
unsigned long wait_for_completion_timeout(struct completion *done, unsigned long timeout)
@@ -214,7 +216,7 @@ Timeouts are preferably calculated with msecs_to_jiffies() or usecs_to_jiffies()
to make the code largely HZ-invariant.
If the returned timeout value is deliberately ignored a comment should probably explain
-why (e.g. see drivers/mfd/wm8350-core.c wm8350_read_auxadc()).
+why (e.g. see drivers/mfd/wm8350-core.c wm8350_read_auxadc())::
long wait_for_completion_interruptible_timeout(struct completion *done, unsigned long timeout)
@@ -225,14 +227,14 @@ jiffies if completion occurred.
Further variants include _killable which uses TASK_KILLABLE as the
designated tasks state and will return -ERESTARTSYS if it is interrupted,
-or 0 if completion was achieved. There is a _timeout variant as well:
+or 0 if completion was achieved. There is a _timeout variant as well::
long wait_for_completion_killable(struct completion *done)
long wait_for_completion_killable_timeout(struct completion *done, unsigned long timeout)
The _io variants wait_for_completion_io() behave the same as the non-_io
variants, except for accounting waiting time as 'waiting on IO', which has
-an impact on how the task is accounted in scheduling/IO stats:
+an impact on how the task is accounted in scheduling/IO stats::
void wait_for_completion_io(struct completion *done)
unsigned long wait_for_completion_io_timeout(struct completion *done, unsigned long timeout)
@@ -243,11 +245,11 @@ Signaling completions:
A thread that wants to signal that the conditions for continuation have been
achieved calls complete() to signal exactly one of the waiters that it can
-continue:
+continue::
void complete(struct completion *done)
-... or calls complete_all() to signal all current and future waiters:
+... or calls complete_all() to signal all current and future waiters::
void complete_all(struct completion *done)
@@ -268,7 +270,7 @@ probably are a design bug.
Signaling completion from IRQ context is fine as it will appropriately
lock with spin_lock_irqsave()/spin_unlock_irqrestore() and it will never
-sleep.
+sleep.
try_wait_for_completion()/completion_done():
@@ -276,14 +278,14 @@ try_wait_for_completion()/completion_done():
The try_wait_for_completion() function will not put the thread on the wait
queue but rather returns false if it would need to enqueue (block) the thread,
-else it consumes one posted completion and returns true.
+else it consumes one posted completion and returns true::
bool try_wait_for_completion(struct completion *done)
Finally, to check the state of a completion without changing it in any way,
call completion_done(), which returns false if there are no posted
completions that were not yet consumed by waiters (implying that there are
-waiters) and true otherwise;
+waiters) and true otherwise::
bool completion_done(struct completion *done)
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
index a2f27bbf2cba..0eaec669790a 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code
+=================================================================
+CPU Scheduler implementation hints for architecture specific code
+=================================================================
Nick Piggin, 2005
@@ -35,9 +37,10 @@ Your cpu_idle routines need to obey the following rules:
4. The only time interrupts need to be disabled when checking
need_resched is if we are about to sleep the processor until
the next interrupt (this doesn't provide any protection of
- need_resched, it prevents losing an interrupt).
+ need_resched, it prevents losing an interrupt):
+
+ 4a. Common problem with this type of sleep appears to be::
- 4a. Common problem with this type of sleep appears to be:
local_irq_disable();
if (!need_resched()) {
local_irq_enable();
@@ -51,10 +54,10 @@ Your cpu_idle routines need to obey the following rules:
although it may be reasonable to do some background work or enter
a low CPU priority.
- 5a. If TIF_POLLING_NRFLAG is set, and we do decide to enter
- an interrupt sleep, it needs to be cleared then a memory
- barrier issued (followed by a test of need_resched with
- interrupts disabled, as explained in 3).
+ - 5a. If TIF_POLLING_NRFLAG is set, and we do decide to enter
+ an interrupt sleep, it needs to be cleared then a memory
+ barrier issued (followed by a test of need_resched with
+ interrupts disabled, as explained in 3).
arch/x86/kernel/process.c has examples of both polling and
sleeping idle functions.
@@ -71,4 +74,3 @@ sh64 - Is sleeping racy vs interrupts? (See #4a)
sparc - IRQs on at this point(?), change local_irq_save to _disable.
- TODO: needs secondary CPUs to disable preempt (See #1)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt
index f6b1873f68ab..4ee2bd2f791d 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=====================
CFS Bandwidth Control
=====================
@@ -27,7 +28,8 @@ cpu.cfs_quota_us: the total available run-time within a period (in microseconds)
cpu.cfs_period_us: the length of a period (in microseconds)
cpu.stat: exports throttling statistics [explained further below]
-The default values are:
+The default values are::
+
cpu.cfs_period_us=100ms
cpu.cfs_quota=-1
@@ -55,7 +57,8 @@ For efficiency run-time is transferred between the global pool and CPU local
on large systems. The amount transferred each time such an update is required
is described as the "slice".
-This is tunable via procfs:
+This is tunable via procfs::
+
/proc/sys/kernel/sched_cfs_bandwidth_slice_us (default=5ms)
Larger slice values will reduce transfer overheads, while smaller values allow
@@ -66,6 +69,7 @@ Statistics
A group's bandwidth statistics are exported via 3 fields in cpu.stat.
cpu.stat:
+
- nr_periods: Number of enforcement intervals that have elapsed.
- nr_throttled: Number of times the group has been throttled/limited.
- throttled_time: The total time duration (in nanoseconds) for which entities
@@ -78,12 +82,15 @@ Hierarchical considerations
The interface enforces that an individual entity's bandwidth is always
attainable, that is: max(c_i) <= C. However, over-subscription in the
aggregate case is explicitly allowed to enable work-conserving semantics
-within a hierarchy.
+within a hierarchy:
+
e.g. \Sum (c_i) may exceed C
+
[ Where C is the parent's bandwidth, and c_i its children ]
There are two ways in which a group may become throttled:
+
a. it fully consumes its own quota within a period
b. a parent's quota is fully consumed within its period
@@ -92,7 +99,7 @@ be allowed to until the parent's runtime is refreshed.
Examples
--------
-1. Limit a group to 1 CPU worth of runtime.
+1. Limit a group to 1 CPU worth of runtime::
If period is 250ms and quota is also 250ms, the group will get
1 CPU worth of runtime every 250ms.
@@ -100,10 +107,10 @@ Examples
# echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 250ms */
# echo 250000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 250ms */
-2. Limit a group to 2 CPUs worth of runtime on a multi-CPU machine.
+2. Limit a group to 2 CPUs worth of runtime on a multi-CPU machine
- With 500ms period and 1000ms quota, the group can get 2 CPUs worth of
- runtime every 500ms.
+ With 500ms period and 1000ms quota, the group can get 2 CPUs worth of
+ runtime every 500ms::
# echo 1000000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 1000ms */
# echo 500000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 500ms */
@@ -112,11 +119,10 @@ Examples
3. Limit a group to 20% of 1 CPU.
- With 50ms period, 10ms quota will be equivalent to 20% of 1 CPU.
+ With 50ms period, 10ms quota will be equivalent to 20% of 1 CPU::
# echo 10000 > cpu.cfs_quota_us /* quota = 10ms */
# echo 50000 > cpu.cfs_period_us /* period = 50ms */
- By using a small period here we are ensuring a consistent latency
- response at the expense of burst capacity.
-
+ By using a small period here we are ensuring a consistent latency
+ response at the expense of burst capacity.
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt
index b14e03ff3528..12b8147b7995 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-deadline.txt
@@ -1,29 +1,29 @@
- Deadline Task Scheduling
- ------------------------
+========================
+Deadline Task Scheduling
+========================
-CONTENTS
-========
+.. CONTENTS
- 0. WARNING
- 1. Overview
- 2. Scheduling algorithm
- 2.1 Main algorithm
- 2.2 Bandwidth reclaiming
- 3. Scheduling Real-Time Tasks
- 3.1 Definitions
- 3.2 Schedulability Analysis for Uniprocessor Systems
- 3.3 Schedulability Analysis for Multiprocessor Systems
- 3.4 Relationship with SCHED_DEADLINE Parameters
- 4. Bandwidth management
- 4.1 System-wide settings
- 4.2 Task interface
- 4.3 Default behavior
- 4.4 Behavior of sched_yield()
- 5. Tasks CPU affinity
- 5.1 SCHED_DEADLINE and cpusets HOWTO
- 6. Future plans
- A. Test suite
- B. Minimal main()
+ 0. WARNING
+ 1. Overview
+ 2. Scheduling algorithm
+ 2.1 Main algorithm
+ 2.2 Bandwidth reclaiming
+ 3. Scheduling Real-Time Tasks
+ 3.1 Definitions
+ 3.2 Schedulability Analysis for Uniprocessor Systems
+ 3.3 Schedulability Analysis for Multiprocessor Systems
+ 3.4 Relationship with SCHED_DEADLINE Parameters
+ 4. Bandwidth management
+ 4.1 System-wide settings
+ 4.2 Task interface
+ 4.3 Default behavior
+ 4.4 Behavior of sched_yield()
+ 5. Tasks CPU affinity
+ 5.1 SCHED_DEADLINE and cpusets HOWTO
+ 6. Future plans
+ A. Test suite
+ B. Minimal main()
0. WARNING
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ CONTENTS
2. Scheduling algorithm
-==================
+=======================
2.1 Main algorithm
------------------
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CONTENTS
a "remaining runtime". These two parameters are initially set to 0;
- When a SCHED_DEADLINE task wakes up (becomes ready for execution),
- the scheduler checks if
+ the scheduler checks if::
remaining runtime runtime
---------------------------------- > ---------
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ CONTENTS
left unchanged;
- When a SCHED_DEADLINE task executes for an amount of time t, its
- remaining runtime is decreased as
+ remaining runtime is decreased as::
remaining runtime = remaining runtime - t
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ CONTENTS
- When the current time is equal to the replenishment time of a
throttled task, the scheduling deadline and the remaining runtime are
- updated as
+ updated as::
scheduling deadline = scheduling deadline + period
remaining runtime = remaining runtime + runtime
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ CONTENTS
Reclamation of Unused Bandwidth) algorithm [15, 16, 17] and it is enabled
when flag SCHED_FLAG_RECLAIM is set.
- The following diagram illustrates the state names for tasks handled by GRUB:
+ The following diagram illustrates the state names for tasks handled by GRUB::
------------
(d) | Active |
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ CONTENTS
breaking the real-time guarantees.
The 0-lag time for a task entering the ActiveNonContending state is
- computed as
+ computed as::
(runtime * dl_period)
deadline - ---------------------
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ CONTENTS
the task's utilization must be removed from the previous runqueue's active
utilization and must be added to the new runqueue's active utilization.
In order to avoid races between a task waking up on a runqueue while the
- "inactive timer" is running on a different CPU, the "dl_non_contending"
+ "inactive timer" is running on a different CPU, the "dl_non_contending"
flag is used to indicate that a task is not on a runqueue but is active
(so, the flag is set when the task blocks and is cleared when the
"inactive timer" fires or when the task wakes up).
@@ -222,36 +222,36 @@ CONTENTS
Let's now see a trivial example of two deadline tasks with runtime equal
- to 4 and period equal to 8 (i.e., bandwidth equal to 0.5):
+ to 4 and period equal to 8 (i.e., bandwidth equal to 0.5)::
- A Task T1
- |
- | |
- | |
- |-------- |----
- | | V
- |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ A Task T1
+ |
+ | |
+ | |
+ |-------- |----
+ | | V
+ |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- A Task T2
- |
- | |
- | |
- | ------------------------|
- | | V
- |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ A Task T2
+ |
+ | |
+ | |
+ | ------------------------|
+ | | V
+ |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- A running_bw
- |
- 1 ----------------- ------
- | | |
- 0.5- -----------------
- | |
- |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ A running_bw
+ |
+ 1 ----------------- ------
+ | | |
+ 0.5- -----------------
+ | |
+ |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------->t
+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- Time t = 0:
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ CONTENTS
2.3 Energy-aware scheduling
-------------------------
+---------------------------
When cpufreq's schedutil governor is selected, SCHED_DEADLINE implements the
GRUB-PA [19] algorithm, reducing the CPU operating frequency to the minimum
@@ -299,15 +299,20 @@ CONTENTS
3. Scheduling Real-Time Tasks
=============================
- * BIG FAT WARNING ******************************************************
- *
- * This section contains a (not-thorough) summary on classical deadline
- * scheduling theory, and how it applies to SCHED_DEADLINE.
- * The reader can "safely" skip to Section 4 if only interested in seeing
- * how the scheduling policy can be used. Anyway, we strongly recommend
- * to come back here and continue reading (once the urge for testing is
- * satisfied :P) to be sure of fully understanding all technical details.
- ************************************************************************
+
+
+ .. BIG FAT WARNING ******************************************************
+
+ .. warning::
+
+ This section contains a (not-thorough) summary on classical deadline
+ scheduling theory, and how it applies to SCHED_DEADLINE.
+ The reader can "safely" skip to Section 4 if only interested in seeing
+ how the scheduling policy can be used. Anyway, we strongly recommend
+ to come back here and continue reading (once the urge for testing is
+ satisfied :P) to be sure of fully understanding all technical details.
+
+ .. ************************************************************************
There are no limitations on what kind of task can exploit this new
scheduling discipline, even if it must be said that it is particularly
@@ -329,6 +334,7 @@ CONTENTS
sporadic with minimum inter-arrival time P is r_{j+1} >= r_j + P. Finally,
d_j = r_j + D, where D is the task's relative deadline.
Summing up, a real-time task can be described as
+
Task = (WCET, D, P)
The utilization of a real-time task is defined as the ratio between its
@@ -352,13 +358,15 @@ CONTENTS
between the finishing time of a job and its absolute deadline).
More precisely, it can be proven that using a global EDF scheduler the
maximum tardiness of each task is smaller or equal than
+
((M − 1) · WCET_max − WCET_min)/(M − (M − 2) · U_max) + WCET_max
+
where WCET_max = max{WCET_i} is the maximum WCET, WCET_min=min{WCET_i}
is the minimum WCET, and U_max = max{WCET_i/P_i} is the maximum
utilization[12].
3.2 Schedulability Analysis for Uniprocessor Systems
-------------------------
+----------------------------------------------------
If M=1 (uniprocessor system), or in case of partitioned scheduling (each
real-time task is statically assigned to one and only one CPU), it is
@@ -370,7 +378,9 @@ CONTENTS
a task as WCET_i/min{D_i,P_i}, and EDF is able to respect all the deadlines
of all the tasks running on a CPU if the sum of the densities of the tasks
running on such a CPU is smaller or equal than 1:
+
sum(WCET_i / min{D_i, P_i}) <= 1
+
It is important to notice that this condition is only sufficient, and not
necessary: there are task sets that are schedulable, but do not respect the
condition. For example, consider the task set {Task_1,Task_2} composed by
@@ -379,7 +389,9 @@ CONTENTS
(Task_1 is scheduled as soon as it is released, and finishes just in time
to respect its deadline; Task_2 is scheduled immediately after Task_1, hence
its response time cannot be larger than 50ms + 10ms = 60ms) even if
+
50 / min{50,100} + 10 / min{100, 100} = 50 / 50 + 10 / 100 = 1.1
+
Of course it is possible to test the exact schedulability of tasks with
D_i != P_i (checking a condition that is both sufficient and necessary),
but this cannot be done by comparing the total utilization or density with
@@ -399,7 +411,7 @@ CONTENTS
4 Linux uses an admission test based on the tasks' utilizations.
3.3 Schedulability Analysis for Multiprocessor Systems
-------------------------
+------------------------------------------------------
On multiprocessor systems with global EDF scheduling (non partitioned
systems), a sufficient test for schedulability can not be based on the
@@ -428,7 +440,9 @@ CONTENTS
between total utilization (or density) and a fixed constant. If all tasks
have D_i = P_i, a sufficient schedulability condition can be expressed in
a simple way:
+
sum(WCET_i / P_i) <= M - (M - 1) · U_max
+
where U_max = max{WCET_i / P_i}[10]. Notice that for U_max = 1,
M - (M - 1) · U_max becomes M - M + 1 = 1 and this schedulability condition
just confirms the Dhall's effect. A more complete survey of the literature
@@ -447,7 +461,7 @@ CONTENTS
the tasks are limited.
3.4 Relationship with SCHED_DEADLINE Parameters
-------------------------
+-----------------------------------------------
Finally, it is important to understand the relationship between the
SCHED_DEADLINE scheduling parameters described in Section 2 (runtime,
@@ -473,6 +487,7 @@ CONTENTS
this task, as it is not possible to respect its temporal constraints.
References:
+
1 - C. L. Liu and J. W. Layland. Scheduling algorithms for multiprogram-
ming in a hard-real-time environment. Journal of the Association for
Computing Machinery, 20(1), 1973.
@@ -596,11 +611,13 @@ CONTENTS
Specifying a periodic/sporadic task that executes for a given amount of
runtime at each instance, and that is scheduled according to the urgency of
its own timing constraints needs, in general, a way of declaring:
+
- a (maximum/typical) instance execution time,
- a minimum interval between consecutive instances,
- a time constraint by which each instance must be completed.
Therefore:
+
* a new struct sched_attr, containing all the necessary fields is
provided;
* the new scheduling related syscalls that manipulate it, i.e.,
@@ -658,21 +675,21 @@ CONTENTS
------------------------------------
An example of a simple configuration (pin a -deadline task to CPU0)
- follows (rt-app is used to create a -deadline task).
+ follows (rt-app is used to create a -deadline task)::
- mkdir /dev/cpuset
- mount -t cgroup -o cpuset cpuset /dev/cpuset
- cd /dev/cpuset
- mkdir cpu0
- echo 0 > cpu0/cpuset.cpus
- echo 0 > cpu0/cpuset.mems
- echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive
- echo 0 > cpuset.sched_load_balance
- echo 1 > cpu0/cpuset.cpu_exclusive
- echo 1 > cpu0/cpuset.mem_exclusive
- echo $$ > cpu0/tasks
- rt-app -t 100000:10000:d:0 -D5 (it is now actually superfluous to specify
- task affinity)
+ mkdir /dev/cpuset
+ mount -t cgroup -o cpuset cpuset /dev/cpuset
+ cd /dev/cpuset
+ mkdir cpu0
+ echo 0 > cpu0/cpuset.cpus
+ echo 0 > cpu0/cpuset.mems
+ echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive
+ echo 0 > cpuset.sched_load_balance
+ echo 1 > cpu0/cpuset.cpu_exclusive
+ echo 1 > cpu0/cpuset.mem_exclusive
+ echo $$ > cpu0/tasks
+ rt-app -t 100000:10000:d:0 -D5 # it is now actually superfluous to specify
+ # task affinity
6. Future plans
===============
@@ -711,7 +728,7 @@ Appendix A. Test suite
rt-app is available at: https://github.com/scheduler-tools/rt-app.
Thread parameters can be specified from the command line, with something like
- this:
+ this::
# rt-app -t 100000:10000:d -t 150000:20000:f:10 -D5
@@ -721,27 +738,27 @@ Appendix A. Test suite
of 5 seconds.
More interestingly, configurations can be described with a json file that
- can be passed as input to rt-app with something like this:
+ can be passed as input to rt-app with something like this::
# rt-app my_config.json
The parameters that can be specified with the second method are a superset
of the command line options. Please refer to rt-app documentation for more
- details (<rt-app-sources>/doc/*.json).
+ details (`<rt-app-sources>/doc/*.json`).
The second testing application is a modification of schedtool, called
schedtool-dl, which can be used to setup SCHED_DEADLINE parameters for a
certain pid/application. schedtool-dl is available at:
https://github.com/scheduler-tools/schedtool-dl.git.
- The usage is straightforward:
+ The usage is straightforward::
# schedtool -E -t 10000000:100000000 -e ./my_cpuhog_app
With this, my_cpuhog_app is put to run inside a SCHED_DEADLINE reservation
of 10ms every 100ms (note that parameters are expressed in microseconds).
You can also use schedtool to create a reservation for an already running
- application, given that you know its pid:
+ application, given that you know its pid::
# schedtool -E -t 10000000:100000000 my_app_pid
@@ -750,43 +767,43 @@ Appendix B. Minimal main()
We provide in what follows a simple (ugly) self-contained code snippet
showing how SCHED_DEADLINE reservations can be created by a real-time
- application developer.
-
- #define _GNU_SOURCE
- #include <unistd.h>
- #include <stdio.h>
- #include <stdlib.h>
- #include <string.h>
- #include <time.h>
- #include <linux/unistd.h>
- #include <linux/kernel.h>
- #include <linux/types.h>
- #include <sys/syscall.h>
- #include <pthread.h>
-
- #define gettid() syscall(__NR_gettid)
-
- #define SCHED_DEADLINE 6
-
- /* XXX use the proper syscall numbers */
- #ifdef __x86_64__
- #define __NR_sched_setattr 314
- #define __NR_sched_getattr 315
- #endif
-
- #ifdef __i386__
- #define __NR_sched_setattr 351
- #define __NR_sched_getattr 352
- #endif
-
- #ifdef __arm__
- #define __NR_sched_setattr 380
- #define __NR_sched_getattr 381
- #endif
-
- static volatile int done;
-
- struct sched_attr {
+ application developer::
+
+ #define _GNU_SOURCE
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <time.h>
+ #include <linux/unistd.h>
+ #include <linux/kernel.h>
+ #include <linux/types.h>
+ #include <sys/syscall.h>
+ #include <pthread.h>
+
+ #define gettid() syscall(__NR_gettid)
+
+ #define SCHED_DEADLINE 6
+
+ /* XXX use the proper syscall numbers */
+ #ifdef __x86_64__
+ #define __NR_sched_setattr 314
+ #define __NR_sched_getattr 315
+ #endif
+
+ #ifdef __i386__
+ #define __NR_sched_setattr 351
+ #define __NR_sched_getattr 352
+ #endif
+
+ #ifdef __arm__
+ #define __NR_sched_setattr 380
+ #define __NR_sched_getattr 381
+ #endif
+
+ static volatile int done;
+
+ struct sched_attr {
__u32 size;
__u32 sched_policy;
@@ -802,25 +819,25 @@ Appendix B. Minimal main()
__u64 sched_runtime;
__u64 sched_deadline;
__u64 sched_period;
- };
+ };
- int sched_setattr(pid_t pid,
+ int sched_setattr(pid_t pid,
const struct sched_attr *attr,
unsigned int flags)
- {
+ {
return syscall(__NR_sched_setattr, pid, attr, flags);
- }
+ }
- int sched_getattr(pid_t pid,
+ int sched_getattr(pid_t pid,
struct sched_attr *attr,
unsigned int size,
unsigned int flags)
- {
+ {
return syscall(__NR_sched_getattr, pid, attr, size, flags);
- }
+ }
- void *run_deadline(void *data)
- {
+ void *run_deadline(void *data)
+ {
struct sched_attr attr;
int x = 0;
int ret;
@@ -851,10 +868,10 @@ Appendix B. Minimal main()
printf("deadline thread dies [%ld]\n", gettid());
return NULL;
- }
+ }
- int main (int argc, char **argv)
- {
+ int main (int argc, char **argv)
+ {
pthread_t thread;
printf("main thread [%ld]\n", gettid());
@@ -868,4 +885,4 @@ Appendix B. Minimal main()
printf("main dies [%ld]\n", gettid());
return 0;
- }
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
index edd861c94c1b..82406685365a 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
- =============
- CFS Scheduler
- =============
+=============
+CFS Scheduler
+=============
1. OVERVIEW
+============
CFS stands for "Completely Fair Scheduler," and is the new "desktop" process
scheduler implemented by Ingo Molnar and merged in Linux 2.6.23. It is the
@@ -27,6 +28,7 @@ is its actual runtime normalized to the total number of running tasks.
2. FEW IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS
+==============================
In CFS the virtual runtime is expressed and tracked via the per-task
p->se.vruntime (nanosec-unit) value. This way, it's possible to accurately
@@ -49,6 +51,7 @@ algorithm variants to recognize sleepers.
3. THE RBTREE
+==============
CFS's design is quite radical: it does not use the old data structures for the
runqueues, but it uses a time-ordered rbtree to build a "timeline" of future
@@ -84,6 +87,7 @@ picked and the current task is preempted.
4. SOME FEATURES OF CFS
+========================
CFS uses nanosecond granularity accounting and does not rely on any jiffies or
other HZ detail. Thus the CFS scheduler has no notion of "timeslices" in the
@@ -113,6 +117,7 @@ result.
5. Scheduling policies
+======================
CFS implements three scheduling policies:
@@ -137,6 +142,7 @@ SCHED_IDLE.
6. SCHEDULING CLASSES
+======================
The new CFS scheduler has been designed in such a way to introduce "Scheduling
Classes," an extensible hierarchy of scheduler modules. These modules
@@ -197,6 +203,7 @@ This is the (partial) list of the hooks:
7. GROUP SCHEDULER EXTENSIONS TO CFS
+=====================================
Normally, the scheduler operates on individual tasks and strives to provide
fair CPU time to each task. Sometimes, it may be desirable to group tasks and
@@ -219,7 +226,7 @@ SCHED_BATCH) tasks.
When CONFIG_FAIR_GROUP_SCHED is defined, a "cpu.shares" file is created for each
group created using the pseudo filesystem. See example steps below to create
-task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem.
+task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem::
# mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
index 4af80b1c05aa..f7504226f445 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=================
+Scheduler Domains
+=================
+
Each CPU has a "base" scheduling domain (struct sched_domain). The domain
hierarchy is built from these base domains via the ->parent pointer. ->parent
MUST be NULL terminated, and domain structures should be per-CPU as they are
@@ -46,7 +50,9 @@ CPU's runqueue and the newly found busiest one and starts moving tasks from it
to our runqueue. The exact number of tasks amounts to an imbalance previously
computed while iterating over this sched domain's groups.
-*** Implementing sched domains ***
+Implementing sched domains
+==========================
+
The "base" domain will "span" the first level of the hierarchy. In the case
of SMT, you'll span all siblings of the physical CPU, with each group being
a single virtual CPU.
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt
index 197d81f4b836..fce5858c9082 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-energy.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
- =======================
- Energy Aware Scheduling
- =======================
+=======================
+Energy Aware Scheduling
+=======================
1. Introduction
---------------
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ with a minimal impact on throughput. This document aims at providing an
introduction on how EAS works, what are the main design decisions behind it, and
details what is needed to get it to run.
-Before going any further, please note that at the time of writing:
+Before going any further, please note that at the time of writing::
/!\ EAS does not support platforms with symmetric CPU topologies /!\
@@ -33,13 +33,13 @@ To make it clear from the start:
- power = energy/time = [joule/second] = [watt]
The goal of EAS is to minimize energy, while still getting the job done. That
-is, we want to maximize:
+is, we want to maximize::
performance [inst/s]
--------------------
power [W]
-which is equivalent to minimizing:
+which is equivalent to minimizing::
energy [J]
-----------
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ domains can contain duplicate elements.
Example 1.
Let us consider a platform with 12 CPUs, split in 3 performance domains
- (pd0, pd4 and pd8), organized as follows:
+ (pd0, pd4 and pd8), organized as follows::
CPUs: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PDs: |--pd0--|--pd4--|---pd8---|
@@ -108,6 +108,7 @@ Example 1.
containing 6 CPUs. The two root domains are denoted rd1 and rd2 in the
above figure. Since pd4 intersects with both rd1 and rd2, it will be
present in the linked list '->pd' attached to each of them:
+
* rd1->pd: pd0 -> pd4
* rd2->pd: pd4 -> pd8
@@ -159,9 +160,9 @@ Example 2.
Each performance domain has three Operating Performance Points (OPPs).
The CPU capacity and power cost associated with each OPP is listed in
the Energy Model table. The util_avg of P is shown on the figures
- below as 'PP'.
+ below as 'PP'::
- CPU util.
+ CPU util.
1024 - - - - - - - Energy Model
+-----------+-------------+
| Little | Big |
@@ -188,8 +189,7 @@ Example 2.
(which is coherent with the behaviour of the schedutil CPUFreq
governor, see Section 6. for more details on this topic).
- Case 1. P is migrated to CPU1
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ **Case 1. P is migrated to CPU1**::
1024 - - - - - - -
@@ -207,8 +207,7 @@ Example 2.
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
- Case 2. P is migrated to CPU3
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ **Case 2. P is migrated to CPU3**::
1024 - - - - - - -
@@ -226,8 +225,7 @@ Example 2.
CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
- Case 3. P stays on prev_cpu / CPU 0
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ **Case 3. P stays on prev_cpu / CPU 0**::
1024 - - - - - - -
@@ -324,7 +322,9 @@ hardware properties and on other features of the kernel being enabled. This
section lists these dependencies and provides hints as to how they can be met.
- 6.1 - Asymmetric CPU topology
+6.1 - Asymmetric CPU topology
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
As mentioned in the introduction, EAS is only supported on platforms with
asymmetric CPU topologies for now. This requirement is checked at run-time by
@@ -347,7 +347,8 @@ significant savings on SMP platforms have been observed yet. This restriction
could be amended in the future if proven otherwise.
- 6.2 - Energy Model presence
+6.2 - Energy Model presence
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
EAS uses the EM of a platform to estimate the impact of scheduling decisions on
energy. So, your platform must provide power cost tables to the EM framework in
@@ -358,7 +359,8 @@ Please also note that the scheduling domains need to be re-built after the
EM has been registered in order to start EAS.
- 6.3 - Energy Model complexity
+6.3 - Energy Model complexity
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The task wake-up path is very latency-sensitive. When the EM of a platform is
too complex (too many CPUs, too many performance domains, too many performance
@@ -388,7 +390,8 @@ two possible options:
hence enabling it to cope with larger EMs in reasonable time.
- 6.4 - Schedutil governor
+6.4 - Schedutil governor
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
EAS tries to predict at which OPP will the CPUs be running in the close future
in order to estimate their energy consumption. To do so, it is assumed that OPPs
@@ -405,7 +408,8 @@ frequency requests and energy predictions.
Using EAS with any other governor than schedutil is not supported.
- 6.5 Scale-invariant utilization signals
+6.5 Scale-invariant utilization signals
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
In order to make accurate prediction across CPUs and for all performance
states, EAS needs frequency-invariant and CPU-invariant PELT signals. These can
@@ -416,7 +420,8 @@ Using EAS on a platform that doesn't implement these two callbacks is not
supported.
- 6.6 Multithreading (SMT)
+6.6 Multithreading (SMT)
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
EAS in its current form is SMT unaware and is not able to leverage
multithreaded hardware to save energy. EAS considers threads as independent
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt
index 3ac1e46d5365..0571f1b47e64 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-nice-design.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=====================
+Scheduler Nice Design
+=====================
+
This document explains the thinking about the revamped and streamlined
nice-levels implementation in the new Linux scheduler.
@@ -14,7 +18,7 @@ much stronger than they were before in 2.4 (and people were happy about
that change), and we also intentionally calibrated the linear timeslice
rule so that nice +19 level would be _exactly_ 1 jiffy. To better
understand it, the timeslice graph went like this (cheesy ASCII art
-alert!):
+alert!)::
A
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt
index d8fce3e78457..79b30a21c51a 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-rt-group.txt
@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
- Real-Time group scheduling
- --------------------------
+==========================
+Real-Time group scheduling
+==========================
-CONTENTS
-========
+.. CONTENTS
-0. WARNING
-1. Overview
- 1.1 The problem
- 1.2 The solution
-2. The interface
- 2.1 System-wide settings
- 2.2 Default behaviour
- 2.3 Basis for grouping tasks
-3. Future plans
+ 0. WARNING
+ 1. Overview
+ 1.1 The problem
+ 1.2 The solution
+ 2. The interface
+ 2.1 System-wide settings
+ 2.2 Default behaviour
+ 2.3 Basis for grouping tasks
+ 3. Future plans
0. WARNING
@@ -159,9 +159,11 @@ Consider two sibling groups A and B; both have 50% bandwidth, but A's
period is twice the length of B's.
* group A: period=100000us, runtime=50000us
+
- this runs for 0.05s once every 0.1s
* group B: period= 50000us, runtime=25000us
+
- this runs for 0.025s twice every 0.1s (or once every 0.05 sec).
This means that currently a while (1) loop in A will run for the full period of
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt
index 8259b34a66ae..0cb0aa714545 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-stats.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====================
+Scheduler Statistics
+====================
+
Version 15 of schedstats dropped counters for some sched_yield:
yld_exp_empty, yld_act_empty and yld_both_empty. Otherwise, it is
identical to version 14.
@@ -35,19 +39,23 @@ CPU statistics
cpu<N> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
First field is a sched_yield() statistic:
+
1) # of times sched_yield() was called
Next three are schedule() statistics:
+
2) This field is a legacy array expiration count field used in the O(1)
scheduler. We kept it for ABI compatibility, but it is always set to zero.
3) # of times schedule() was called
4) # of times schedule() left the processor idle
Next two are try_to_wake_up() statistics:
+
5) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called
6) # of times try_to_wake_up() was called to wake up the local cpu
Next three are statistics describing scheduling latency:
+
7) sum of all time spent running by tasks on this processor (in jiffies)
8) sum of all time spent waiting to run by tasks on this processor (in
jiffies)
@@ -67,24 +75,23 @@ The first field is a bit mask indicating what cpus this domain operates over.
The next 24 are a variety of load_balance() statistics in grouped into types
of idleness (idle, busy, and newly idle):
- 1) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called when the
+ 1) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called when the
cpu was idle
- 2) # of times in this domain load_balance() checked but found
+ 2) # of times in this domain load_balance() checked but found
the load did not require balancing when the cpu was idle
- 3) # of times in this domain load_balance() tried to move one or
+ 3) # of times in this domain load_balance() tried to move one or
more tasks and failed, when the cpu was idle
- 4) sum of imbalances discovered (if any) with each call to
+ 4) sum of imbalances discovered (if any) with each call to
load_balance() in this domain when the cpu was idle
- 5) # of times in this domain pull_task() was called when the cpu
+ 5) # of times in this domain pull_task() was called when the cpu
was idle
- 6) # of times in this domain pull_task() was called even though
+ 6) # of times in this domain pull_task() was called even though
the target task was cache-hot when idle
- 7) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called but did
+ 7) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called but did
not find a busier queue while the cpu was idle
- 8) # of times in this domain a busier queue was found while the
+ 8) # of times in this domain a busier queue was found while the
cpu was idle but no busier group was found
-
- 9) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called when the
+ 9) # of times in this domain load_balance() was called when the
cpu was busy
10) # of times in this domain load_balance() checked but found the
load did not require balancing when busy
@@ -117,21 +124,25 @@ of idleness (idle, busy, and newly idle):
was just becoming idle but no busier group was found
Next three are active_load_balance() statistics:
+
25) # of times active_load_balance() was called
26) # of times active_load_balance() tried to move a task and failed
27) # of times active_load_balance() successfully moved a task
Next three are sched_balance_exec() statistics:
+
28) sbe_cnt is not used
29) sbe_balanced is not used
30) sbe_pushed is not used
Next three are sched_balance_fork() statistics:
+
31) sbf_cnt is not used
32) sbf_balanced is not used
33) sbf_pushed is not used
Next three are try_to_wake_up() statistics:
+
34) # of times in this domain try_to_wake_up() awoke a task that
last ran on a different cpu in this domain
35) # of times in this domain try_to_wake_up() moved a task to the
@@ -139,10 +150,11 @@ of idleness (idle, busy, and newly idle):
36) # of times in this domain try_to_wake_up() started passive balancing
/proc/<pid>/schedstat
-----------------
+---------------------
schedstats also adds a new /proc/<pid>/schedstat file to include some of
the same information on a per-process level. There are three fields in
this file correlating for that process to:
+
1) time spent on the cpu
2) time spent waiting on a runqueue
3) # of timeslices run on this cpu
@@ -151,4 +163,5 @@ A program could be easily written to make use of these extra fields to
report on how well a particular process or set of processes is faring
under the scheduler's policies. A simple version of such a program is
available at
+
http://eaglet.rain.com/rick/linux/schedstat/v12/latency.c
--
2.20.1
In order to be able to build html and pdf files, convert the
documentation to ReST format.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt | 66 +++----
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt | 217 +++++++++++----------
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt | 141 ++++++-------
Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt | 102 +++++-----
6 files changed, 281 insertions(+), 268 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt
index 254da155fa47..50b2c45c3a2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/amd-powernow.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=============================
+AMD powernow driver specifics
+=============================
+
PowerNow! and Cool'n'Quiet are AMD names for frequency
management capabilities in AMD processors. As the hardware
@@ -23,16 +27,19 @@ not supply these tables.
7th Generation: powernow-k7: Athlon, Duron, Geode.
8th Generation: powernow-k8: Athlon, Athlon 64, Opteron, Sempron.
+
Documentation on this functionality in 8th generation processors
is available in the "BIOS and Kernel Developer's Guide", publication
-26094, in chapter 9, available for download from http://www.amd.com.
+26094, in chapter 9, available for download from http://www.amd.com.
BIOS supplied data, for powernow-k7 and for powernow-k8, may be
from either the PSB table or from ACPI objects. The ACPI support
is only available if the kernel config sets CONFIG_ACPI_PROCESSOR.
+
The powernow-k8 driver will attempt to use ACPI if so configured,
and fall back to PST if that fails.
+
The powernow-k7 driver will try to use the PSB support first, and
fall back to ACPI if the PSB support fails. A module parameter,
-acpi_force, is provided to force ACPI support to be used instead
+acpi_force, is provided to force ACPI support to be used instead
of PSB support.
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt
index 073f128af5a7..c719e3cb700c 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/core.txt
@@ -1,31 +1,22 @@
- CPU frequency and voltage scaling code in the Linux(TM) kernel
+================================================================
+General description of the CPUFreq core and of CPUFreq notifiers
+================================================================
+Authors:
+ - Dominik Brodowski <[email protected]>
+ - David Kimdon <[email protected]>
+ - Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
+ - Viresh Kumar <[email protected]>
- L i n u x C P U F r e q
- C P U F r e q C o r e
+.. Contents:
-
- Dominik Brodowski <[email protected]>
- David Kimdon <[email protected]>
- Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
- Viresh Kumar <[email protected]>
-
-
-
- Clock scaling allows you to change the clock speed of the CPUs on the
- fly. This is a nice method to save battery power, because the lower
- the clock speed, the less power the CPU consumes.
-
-
-Contents:
----------
-1. CPUFreq core and interfaces
-2. CPUFreq notifiers
-3. CPUFreq Table Generation with Operating Performance Point (OPP)
+ 1. CPUFreq core and interfaces
+ 2. CPUFreq notifiers
+ 3. CPUFreq Table Generation with Operating Performance Point (OPP)
1. General Information
-=======================
+======================
The CPUFreq core code is located in drivers/cpufreq/cpufreq.c. This
cpufreq code offers a standardized interface for the CPUFreq
@@ -60,18 +51,18 @@ transition notifiers.
These are notified when a new policy is intended to be set. Each
CPUFreq policy notifier is called twice for a policy transition:
-1.) During CPUFREQ_ADJUST all CPUFreq notifiers may change the limit if
- they see a need for this - may it be thermal considerations or
- hardware limitations.
+1) During CPUFREQ_ADJUST all CPUFreq notifiers may change the limit if
+ they see a need for this - may it be thermal considerations or
+ hardware limitations.
-2.) And during CPUFREQ_NOTIFY all notifiers are informed of the new policy
- - if two hardware drivers failed to agree on a new policy before this
+2) And during CPUFREQ_NOTIFY all notifiers are informed of the new policy -
+ if two hardware drivers failed to agree on a new policy before this
stage, the incompatible hardware shall be shut down, and the user
informed of this.
The phase is specified in the second argument to the notifier.
-The third argument, a void *pointer, points to a struct cpufreq_policy
+The third argument, a `void *` pointer, points to a struct cpufreq_policy
consisting of several values, including min, max (the lower and upper
frequencies (in kHz) of the new policy).
@@ -88,23 +79,27 @@ CPUFREQ_POSTCHANGE.
The third argument is a struct cpufreq_freqs with the following
values:
-cpu - number of the affected CPU
-old - old frequency
-new - new frequency
-flags - flags of the cpufreq driver
+
+======= ===========================
+cpu number of the affected CPU
+old old frequency
+new new frequency
+flags flags of the cpufreq driver
+======= ===========================
3. CPUFreq Table Generation with Operating Performance Point (OPP)
==================================================================
For details about OPP, see Documentation/power/opp.txt
-dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table -
+dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table
This function provides a ready to use conversion routine to translate
the OPP layer's internal information about the available frequencies
into a format readily providable to cpufreq.
WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
soc_pm_init()
{
/* Do things */
@@ -117,4 +112,5 @@ dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table -
NOTE: This function is available only if CONFIG_CPU_FREQ is enabled in
addition to CONFIG_PM_OPP.
-dev_pm_opp_free_cpufreq_table - Free up the table allocated by dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table
+dev_pm_opp_free_cpufreq_table
+ Free up the table allocated by dev_pm_opp_init_cpufreq_table
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
index 6e353d00cdc6..9cc2559bc34b 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpu-drivers.txt
@@ -1,35 +1,25 @@
- CPU frequency and voltage scaling code in the Linux(TM) kernel
-
-
- L i n u x C P U F r e q
-
- C P U D r i v e r s
-
- - information for developers -
-
-
- Dominik Brodowski <[email protected]>
- Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
- Viresh Kumar <[email protected]>
-
-
-
- Clock scaling allows you to change the clock speed of the CPUs on the
- fly. This is a nice method to save battery power, because the lower
- the clock speed, the less power the CPU consumes.
-
-
-Contents:
----------
-1. What To Do?
-1.1 Initialization
-1.2 Per-CPU Initialization
-1.3 verify
-1.4 target/target_index or setpolicy?
-1.5 target/target_index
-1.6 setpolicy
-1.7 get_intermediate and target_intermediate
-2. Frequency Table Helpers
+===============================================
+How to implement a new cpufreq processor driver
+===============================================
+
+.. information for developers
+
+Authors:
+ - Dominik Brodowski <[email protected]>
+ - Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
+ - Viresh Kumar <[email protected]>
+
+.. Contents:
+
+ 1. What To Do?
+ 1.1 Initialization
+ 1.2 Per-CPU Initialization
+ 1.3 verify
+ 1.4 target/target_index or setpolicy?
+ 1.5 target/target_index
+ 1.6 setpolicy
+ 1.7 get_intermediate and target_intermediate
+ 2. Frequency Table Helpers
@@ -46,59 +36,73 @@ on what is necessary:
First of all, in an __initcall level 7 (module_init()) or later
function check whether this kernel runs on the right CPU and the right
-chipset. If so, register a struct cpufreq_driver with the CPUfreq core
-using cpufreq_register_driver()
+chipset. If so, register a `struct cpufreq_driver` with the CPUfreq core
+using `cpufreq_register_driver()`
-What shall this struct cpufreq_driver contain?
+What shall this `struct cpufreq_driver` contain?
- .name - The name of this driver.
+.name
+ The name of this driver.
- .init - A pointer to the per-policy initialization function.
+.init
+ A pointer to the per-policy initialization function.
- .verify - A pointer to a "verification" function.
+.verify
+ A pointer to a "verification" function.
- .setpolicy _or_ .fast_switch _or_ .target _or_ .target_index - See
- below on the differences.
+.setpolicy **or** .fast_switch **or** .target **or** .target_index
+ See below on the differences.
And optionally
- .flags - Hints for the cpufreq core.
+.flags
+ Hints for the cpufreq core.
- .driver_data - cpufreq driver specific data.
+.driver_data
+ cpufreq driver specific data.
- .resolve_freq - Returns the most appropriate frequency for a target
- frequency. Doesn't change the frequency though.
+.resolve_freq
+ Returns the most appropriate frequency for a target
+ frequency. Doesn't change the frequency though.
- .get_intermediate and target_intermediate - Used to switch to stable
- frequency while changing CPU frequency.
+.get_intermediate and target_intermediate
+ Used to switch to stable frequency while changing CPU frequency.
- .get - Returns current frequency of the CPU.
+.get
+ Returns current frequency of the CPU.
- .bios_limit - Returns HW/BIOS max frequency limitations for the CPU.
+.bios_limit
+ Returns HW/BIOS max frequency limitations for the CPU.
- .exit - A pointer to a per-policy cleanup function called during
- CPU_POST_DEAD phase of cpu hotplug process.
+.exit
+ A pointer to a per-policy cleanup function called during
+ CPU_POST_DEAD phase of cpu hotplug process.
- .stop_cpu - A pointer to a per-policy stop function called during
- CPU_DOWN_PREPARE phase of cpu hotplug process.
+.stop_cpu
+ A pointer to a per-policy stop function called during
+ CPU_DOWN_PREPARE phase of cpu hotplug process.
- .suspend - A pointer to a per-policy suspend function which is called
- with interrupts disabled and _after_ the governor is stopped for the
- policy.
+.suspend
+ A pointer to a per-policy suspend function which is called with
+ interrupts disabled and **after** the governor is stopped for the policy.
- .resume - A pointer to a per-policy resume function which is called
- with interrupts disabled and _before_ the governor is started again.
+.resume
+ A pointer to a per-policy resume function which is called
+ with interrupts disabled and **before** the governor is started again.
- .ready - A pointer to a per-policy ready function which is called after
- the policy is fully initialized.
+.ready
+ A pointer to a per-policy ready function which is called after
+ the policy is fully initialized.
- .attr - A pointer to a NULL-terminated list of "struct freq_attr" which
- allow to export values to sysfs.
+.attr
+ A pointer to a NULL-terminated list of `struct freq_attr` which
+ allow to export values to sysfs.
- .boost_enabled - If set, boost frequencies are enabled.
+.boost_enabled
+ If set, boost frequencies are enabled.
- .set_boost - A pointer to a per-policy function to enable/disable boost
- frequencies.
+.set_boost
+ A pointer to a per-policy function to enable/disable boost frequencies.
1.2 Per-CPU Initialization
@@ -108,37 +112,42 @@ Whenever a new CPU is registered with the device model, or after the
cpufreq driver registers itself, the per-policy initialization function
cpufreq_driver.init is called if no cpufreq policy existed for the CPU.
Note that the .init() and .exit() routines are called only once for the
-policy and not for each CPU managed by the policy. It takes a struct
-cpufreq_policy *policy as argument. What to do now?
+policy and not for each CPU managed by the policy. It takes a `struct
+cpufreq_policy *policy` as argument. What to do now?
If necessary, activate the CPUfreq support on your CPU.
Then, the driver must fill in the following values:
-policy->cpuinfo.min_freq _and_
-policy->cpuinfo.max_freq - the minimum and maximum frequency
- (in kHz) which is supported by
- this CPU
-policy->cpuinfo.transition_latency the time it takes on this CPU to
- switch between two frequencies in
- nanoseconds (if appropriate, else
- specify CPUFREQ_ETERNAL)
-
-policy->cur The current operating frequency of
- this CPU (if appropriate)
-policy->min,
-policy->max,
-policy->policy and, if necessary,
-policy->governor must contain the "default policy" for
- this CPU. A few moments later,
- cpufreq_driver.verify and either
- cpufreq_driver.setpolicy or
- cpufreq_driver.target/target_index is called
- with these values.
-policy->cpus Update this with the masks of the
- (online + offline) CPUs that do DVFS
- along with this CPU (i.e. that share
- clock/voltage rails with it).
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
+| policy->cpuinfo.min_freq **and** | |
+| policy->cpuinfo.max_freq | the minimum and maximum frequency |
+| | (in kHz) which is supported by |
+| | this CPU |
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
+| policy->cpuinfo.transition_latency | the time it takes on this CPU to |
+| | switch between two frequencies in |
+| | nanoseconds (if appropriate, else |
+| | specify CPUFREQ_ETERNAL) |
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
+| policy->cur | The current operating frequency of |
+| | this CPU (if appropriate) |
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
+| policy->min, | |
+| policy->max, | |
+| policy->policy and, if necessary, | |
+| policy->governor | must contain the "default policy" |
+| | for this CPU. A few moments later, |
+| | cpufreq_driver.verify and either |
+| | cpufreq_driver.setpolicy or |
+| | cpufreq_driver.target/target_index |
+| | is called with these values. |
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
+| policy->cpus | Update this with the masks of the |
+| | (online + offline) CPUs that do DVFS |
+| | along with this CPU (i.e. that share |
+| | clock/voltage rails with it). |
++---------------------------------------+--------------------------------------+
For setting some of these values (cpuinfo.min[max]_freq, policy->min[max]), the
frequency table helpers might be helpful. See the section 2 for more information
@@ -151,8 +160,8 @@ on them.
When the user decides a new policy (consisting of
"policy,governor,min,max") shall be set, this policy must be validated
so that incompatible values can be corrected. For verifying these
-values cpufreq_verify_within_limits(struct cpufreq_policy *policy,
-unsigned int min_freq, unsigned int max_freq) function might be helpful.
+values `cpufreq_verify_within_limits(struct cpufreq_policy *policy,
+unsigned int min_freq, unsigned int max_freq)` function might be helpful.
See section 2 for details on frequency table helpers.
You need to make sure that at least one valid frequency (or operating
@@ -163,7 +172,7 @@ policy->max first, and only if this is no solution, decrease policy->min.
1.4 target or target_index or setpolicy or fast_switch?
-------------------------------------------------------
-Most cpufreq drivers or even most cpu frequency scaling algorithms
+Most cpufreq drivers or even most cpu frequency scaling algorithms
only allow the CPU frequency to be set to predefined fixed values. For
these, you use the ->target(), ->target_index() or ->fast_switch()
callbacks.
@@ -175,8 +184,8 @@ limits on their own. These shall use the ->setpolicy() callback.
1.5. target/target_index
------------------------
-The target_index call has two arguments: struct cpufreq_policy *policy,
-and unsigned int index (into the exposed frequency table).
+The target_index call has two arguments: `struct cpufreq_policy *policy`,
+and `unsigned int index` (into the exposed frequency table).
The CPUfreq driver must set the new frequency when called here. The
actual frequency must be determined by freq_table[index].frequency.
@@ -184,10 +193,10 @@ actual frequency must be determined by freq_table[index].frequency.
It should always restore to earlier frequency (i.e. policy->restore_freq) in
case of errors, even if we switched to intermediate frequency earlier.
-Deprecated:
+Deprecated
----------
-The target call has three arguments: struct cpufreq_policy *policy,
-unsigned int target_frequency, unsigned int relation.
+The target call has three arguments: `struct cpufreq_policy *policy`,
+`unsigned int target_frequency`, `unsigned int relation`.
The CPUfreq driver must set the new frequency when called here. The
actual frequency must be determined using the following rules:
@@ -210,14 +219,14 @@ Not all drivers are expected to implement it, as sleeping from within
this callback isn't allowed. This callback must be highly optimized to
do switching as fast as possible.
-This function has two arguments: struct cpufreq_policy *policy and
-unsigned int target_frequency.
+This function has two arguments: `struct cpufreq_policy *policy` and
+`unsigned int target_frequency`.
1.7 setpolicy
-------------
-The setpolicy call only takes a struct cpufreq_policy *policy as
+The setpolicy call only takes a `struct cpufreq_policy *policy` as
argument. You need to set the lower limit of the in-processor or
in-chipset dynamic frequency switching to policy->min, the upper limit
to policy->max, and -if supported- select a performance-oriented
@@ -278,10 +287,10 @@ table.
cpufreq_for_each_valid_entry(pos, table) - iterates over all entries,
excluding CPUFREQ_ENTRY_INVALID frequencies.
-Use arguments "pos" - a cpufreq_frequency_table * as a loop cursor and
-"table" - the cpufreq_frequency_table * you want to iterate over.
+Use arguments "pos" - a `cpufreq_frequency_table *` as a loop cursor and
+"table" - the `cpufreq_frequency_table *` you want to iterate over.
-For example:
+For example::
struct cpufreq_frequency_table *pos, *driver_freq_table;
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt
index babce1315026..d40700bd5083 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-nforce2.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+=================================
+nVidia nForce2 platform specifics
+=================================
The cpufreq-nforce2 driver changes the FSB on nVidia nForce2 platforms.
@@ -6,14 +9,15 @@ can be controlled independently from the PCI/AGP clock.
The module has two options:
+ ======== ======================================
fid: multiplier * 10 (for example 8.5 = 85)
min_fsb: minimum FSB
+ ======== ======================================
If not set, fid is calculated from the current CPU speed and the FSB.
min_fsb defaults to FSB at boot time - 50 MHz.
-IMPORTANT: The available range is limited downwards!
- Also the minimum available FSB can differ, for systems
+IMPORTANT:
+ The available range is limited downwards!
+ Also the minimum available FSB can differ, for systems
booting with 200 MHz, 150 should always work.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt
index 14378cecb172..3e33712b496e 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/cpufreq-stats.txt
@@ -1,21 +1,20 @@
+==========================================
+General description of sysfs cpufreq stats
+==========================================
- CPU frequency and voltage scaling statistics in the Linux(TM) kernel
+.. information for users
- L i n u x c p u f r e q - s t a t s d r i v e r
+Author: Venkatesh Pallipadi <[email protected]>
- - information for users -
-
-
- Venkatesh Pallipadi <[email protected]>
-
-Contents
-1. Introduction
-2. Statistics Provided (with example)
-3. Configuring cpufreq-stats
+.. Contents
+ 1. Introduction
+ 2. Statistics Provided (with example)
+ 3. Configuring cpufreq-stats
1. Introduction
+===============
cpufreq-stats is a driver that provides CPU frequency statistics for each CPU.
These statistics are provided in /sysfs as a bunch of read_only interfaces. This
@@ -28,6 +27,7 @@ that may be running on your CPU. So, it will work with any cpufreq_driver.
2. Statistics Provided (with example)
+=====================================
cpufreq stats provides following statistics (explained in detail below).
- time_in_state
@@ -39,78 +39,79 @@ All the statistics will be from the time the stats driver has been inserted
statistic is done. Obviously, stats driver will not have any information
about the frequency transitions before the stats driver insertion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # ls -l
-total 0
-drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 14 16:06 .
-drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 14 15:58 ..
---w------- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 reset
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 time_in_state
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 total_trans
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 trans_table
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+::
-- reset
-Write-only attribute that can be used to reset the stat counters. This can be
-useful for evaluating system behaviour under different governors without the
-need for a reboot.
+ <mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # ls -l
+ total 0
+ drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 0 May 14 16:06 .
+ drwxr-xr-x 3 root root 0 May 14 15:58 ..
+ --w------- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 reset
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 time_in_state
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 total_trans
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 May 14 16:06 trans_table
-- time_in_state
-This gives the amount of time spent in each of the frequencies supported by
-this CPU. The cat output will have "<frequency> <time>" pair in each line, which
-will mean this CPU spent <time> usertime units of time at <frequency>. Output
-will have one line for each of the supported frequencies. usertime units here
-is 10mS (similar to other time exported in /proc).
+reset
+ Write-only attribute that can be used to reset the stat counters. This can be
+ useful for evaluating system behaviour under different governors without the
+ need for a reboot.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat time_in_state
-3600000 2089
-3400000 136
-3200000 34
-3000000 67
-2800000 172488
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+time_in_state
+ This gives the amount of time spent in each of the frequencies supported by
+ this CPU. The cat output will have "<frequency> <time>" pair in each line,
+ which will mean this CPU spent <time> usertime units of time at <frequency>.
+ Output will have one line for each of the supported frequencies. usertime
+ units here is 10mS (similar to other time exported in /proc).
+::
-- total_trans
-This gives the total number of frequency transitions on this CPU. The cat
-output will have a single count which is the total number of frequency
-transitions.
+ <mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat time_in_state
+ 3600000 2089
+ 3400000 136
+ 3200000 34
+ 3000000 67
+ 2800000 172488
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat total_trans
-20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- trans_table
-This will give a fine grained information about all the CPU frequency
-transitions. The cat output here is a two dimensional matrix, where an entry
-<i,j> (row i, column j) represents the count of number of transitions from
-Freq_i to Freq_j. Freq_i rows and Freq_j columns follow the sorting order in
-which the driver has provided the frequency table initially to the cpufreq core
-and so can be sorted (ascending or descending) or unsorted. The output here
-also contains the actual freq values for each row and column for better
-readability.
+total_trans
+ This gives the total number of frequency transitions on this CPU. The cat
+ output will have a single count which is the total number of frequency
+ transitions.
-If the transition table is bigger than PAGE_SIZE, reading this will
-return an -EFBIG error.
+::
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-<mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat trans_table
- From : To
- : 3600000 3400000 3200000 3000000 2800000
- 3600000: 0 5 0 0 0
- 3400000: 4 0 2 0 0
- 3200000: 0 1 0 2 0
- 3000000: 0 0 1 0 3
- 2800000: 0 0 0 2 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ <mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat total_trans
+ 20
+trans_table
+ This will give a fine grained information about all the CPU frequency
+ transitions. The cat output here is a two dimensional matrix, where an entry
+ <i,j> (row i, column j) represents the count of number of transitions from
+ Freq_i to Freq_j. Freq_i rows and Freq_j columns follow the sorting order in
+ which the driver has provided the frequency table initially to the cpufreq
+ core and so can be sorted (ascending or descending) or unsorted. The output
+ here also contains the actual freq values for each row and column for better
+ readability.
+
+ If the transition table is bigger than PAGE_SIZE, reading this will
+ return an -EFBIG error.
+
+::
+
+ <mysystem>:/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/stats # cat trans_table
+ From : To
+ : 3600000 3400000 3200000 3000000 2800000
+ 3600000: 0 5 0 0 0
+ 3400000: 4 0 2 0 0
+ 3200000: 0 1 0 2 0
+ 3000000: 0 0 1 0 3
+ 2800000: 0 0 0 2 0
3. Configuring cpufreq-stats
+============================
-To configure cpufreq-stats in your kernel
-Config Main Menu
+To configure cpufreq-stats in your kernel::
+
+ Config Main Menu
Power management options (ACPI, APM) --->
CPU Frequency scaling --->
[*] CPU Frequency scaling
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt
index 9e3c3b33514c..d846a36536e4 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt
@@ -1,45 +1,38 @@
-/*
- * pcc-cpufreq.txt - PCC interface documentation
- *
- * Copyright (C) 2009 Red Hat, Matthew Garrett <[email protected]>
- * Copyright (C) 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
- * Nagananda Chumbalkar <[email protected]>
- *
- * ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- *
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- * the Free Software Foundation; version 2 of the License.
- *
- * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
- * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or NON
- * INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
- *
- * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
- * with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
- * 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
- *
- * ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- */
-
-
- Processor Clocking Control Driver
- ---------------------------------
-
-Contents:
----------
-1. Introduction
-1.1 PCC interface
-1.1.1 Get Average Frequency
-1.1.2 Set Desired Frequency
-1.2 Platforms affected
-2. Driver and /sys details
-2.1 scaling_available_frequencies
-2.2 cpuinfo_transition_latency
-2.3 cpuinfo_cur_freq
-2.4 related_cpus
-3. Caveats
+==========================================================
+Processor Clocking Control Driver cpufreq driver specifics
+==========================================================
+
+
+.. pcc-cpufreq.txt - PCC interface documentation
+
+ Copyright (C) 2009 Red Hat, Matthew Garrett <[email protected]>
+ Copyright (C) 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
+ Nagananda Chumbalkar <[email protected]>
+
+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; version 2 of the License.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or NON
+ INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+
+.. Contents:
+ 1. Introduction
+ 1.1 PCC interface
+ 1.1.1 Get Average Frequency
+ 1.1.2 Set Desired Frequency
+ 1.2 Platforms affected
+ 2. Driver and /sys details
+ 2.1 scaling_available_frequencies
+ 2.2 cpuinfo_transition_latency
+ 2.3 cpuinfo_cur_freq
+ 2.4 related_cpus
+ 3. Caveats
1. Introduction:
----------------
@@ -72,6 +65,7 @@ memory region. The shared memory region header contains the "command" and
doorbell.
The following commands are supported by the PCC interface:
+
* Get Average Frequency
* Set Desired Frequency
@@ -140,7 +134,9 @@ Internally, there is no need for the driver to convert the "target" frequency
to a corresponding P-state.
The VERSION number for the driver will be of the format v.xy.ab.
-eg: 1.00.02
+eg::
+
+ 1.00.02
----- --
| |
| -- this will increase with bug fixes/enhancements to the driver
@@ -168,21 +164,21 @@ A) Often cpuinfo_cur_freq will show a value different than what is declared
in the scaling_available_frequencies or scaling_cur_freq, or scaling_max_freq.
This is due to "turbo boost" available on recent Intel processors. If certain
conditions are met the BIOS can achieve a slightly higher speed than requested
-by OSPM. An example:
+by OSPM. An example::
-scaling_cur_freq : 2933000
-cpuinfo_cur_freq : 3196000
+ scaling_cur_freq : 2933000
+ cpuinfo_cur_freq : 3196000
B) There is a round-off error associated with the cpuinfo_cur_freq value.
Since the driver obtains the current frequency as a "percentage" (%) of the
nominal frequency from the BIOS, sometimes, the values displayed by
-scaling_cur_freq and cpuinfo_cur_freq may not match. An example:
+scaling_cur_freq and cpuinfo_cur_freq may not match. An example::
-scaling_cur_freq : 1600000
-cpuinfo_cur_freq : 1583000
+ scaling_cur_freq : 1600000
+ cpuinfo_cur_freq : 1583000
In this example, the nominal frequency is 2933 MHz. The driver obtains the
-current frequency, cpuinfo_cur_freq, as 54% of the nominal frequency:
+current frequency, cpuinfo_cur_freq, as 54% of the nominal frequency::
54% of 2933 MHz = 1583 MHz
@@ -191,10 +187,10 @@ corresponds to the frequency of the P0 P-state.
2.4 related_cpus:
-----------------
-The related_cpus field is identical to affected_cpus.
+The related_cpus field is identical to affected_cpus:
-affected_cpus : 4
-related_cpus : 4
+ affected_cpus : 4
+ related_cpus : 4
Currently, the PCC driver does not evaluate _PSD. The platforms that support
PCC do not implement SW_ALL. So OSPM doesn't need to perform any coordination
--
2.20.1
This is a very trivial conversion: adjust the title markup
and add a few literal block markups to produce a better
visual when parsed and avoid warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt | 8 ++++----
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt b/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
index 0ab686c173be..8ca82c782ba6 100644
--- a/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/xilinx/eemi.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+====================================
Xilinx Zynq MPSoC EEMI Documentation
----------------------------------------------------------------------
+====================================
Xilinx Zynq MPSoC Firmware Interface
-------------------------------------
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ The zynqmp-firmware driver maintain all EEMI APIs in zynqmp_eemi_ops
structure. Any driver who want to communicate with PMC using EEMI APIs
can call zynqmp_pm_get_eemi_ops().
-Example of EEMI ops:
+Example of EEMI ops::
/* zynqmp-firmware driver maintain all EEMI APIs */
struct zynqmp_eemi_ops {
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Example of EEMI ops:
.query_data = zynqmp_pm_query_data,
};
-Example of EEMI ops usage:
+Example of EEMI ops usage::
static const struct zynqmp_eemi_ops *eemi_ops;
u32 ret_payload[PAYLOAD_ARG_CNT];
--
2.20.1
The intel-int3496.txt file is a documentation for an ACPI driver.
There's no reason to keep it on a separate directory.
So, instead of keeping it on some random location, move it
to a sub-directory inside the ACPI documentation dir.
For now, keep it with .txt extension, in order to avoid
Sphinx build noise. A later patch should change it to .rst
and movin it to be together with other acpi docs.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
.../drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt} | 14 ++++++++++----
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
2 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/{extcon/intel-int3496.txt => acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt} (66%)
diff --git a/Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt b/Documentation/acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt
similarity index 66%
rename from Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt
rename to Documentation/acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt
index 8155dbc7fad3..5137ca834b54 100644
--- a/Documentation/extcon/intel-int3496.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=====================================================
Intel INT3496 ACPI device extcon driver documentation
------------------------------------------------------
+=====================================================
The Intel INT3496 ACPI device extcon driver is a driver for ACPI
devices with an acpi-id of INT3496, such as found for example on
@@ -13,15 +14,20 @@ between an USB host and an USB peripheral controller.
The ACPI devices exposes this functionality by returning an array with up
to 3 gpio descriptors from its ACPI _CRS (Current Resource Settings) call:
-Index 0: The input gpio for the id-pin, this is always present and valid
-Index 1: The output gpio for enabling Vbus output from the device to the otg
+======= =====================================================================
+Index 0 The input gpio for the id-pin, this is always present and valid
+Index 1 The output gpio for enabling Vbus output from the device to the otg
port, write 1 to enable the Vbus output (this gpio descriptor may
be absent or invalid)
-Index 2: The output gpio for muxing of the data pins between the USB host and
+Index 2 The output gpio for muxing of the data pins between the USB host and
the USB peripheral controller, write 1 to mux to the peripheral
controller
+======= =====================================================================
There is a mapping between indices and GPIO connection IDs as follows
+
+ ======= =======
id index 0
vbus index 1
mux index 2
+ ======= =======
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 8de292192227..99822421b447 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -5958,7 +5958,7 @@ S: Maintained
F: drivers/extcon/
F: include/linux/extcon/
F: include/linux/extcon.h
-F: Documentation/extcon/
+F: Documentation/acpi/drivers/extcon-intel-int3496.txt
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/
EXYNOS DP DRIVER
--
2.20.1
Convert the locking documents to ReST and add them to the
kernel development book where it belongs.
Most of the stuff here is just to make Sphinx to properly
parse the text file, as they're already in good shape,
not requiring massive changes in order to be parsed.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt | 41 ++--
Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt | 219 ++++++++++++----------
Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt | 105 +++++++----
Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt | 26 ++-
Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt | 135 +++++++------
Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt | 30 +--
Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt | 32 ++--
Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt | 82 ++++----
8 files changed, 385 insertions(+), 285 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
index 39fae143c9cb..49707a5029c5 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Runtime locking correctness validator
=====================================
started by Ingo Molnar <[email protected]>
+
additions by Arjan van de Ven <[email protected]>
Lock-class
@@ -42,7 +43,7 @@ Where STATE can be either one of (kernel/locking/lockdep_states.h)
- 'ever used' [ == !unused ]
When locking rules are violated, these state bits are presented in the
-locking error messages, inside curlies. A contrived example:
+locking error messages, inside curlies. A contrived example::
modprobe/2287 is trying to acquire lock:
(&sio_locks[i].lock){-.-.}, at: [<c02867fd>] mutex_lock+0x21/0x24
@@ -54,10 +55,12 @@ locking error messages, inside curlies. A contrived example:
The bit position indicates STATE, STATE-read, for each of the states listed
above, and the character displayed in each indicates:
+ === ===================================================
'.' acquired while irqs disabled and not in irq context
'-' acquired in irq context
'+' acquired with irqs enabled
'?' acquired in irq context with irqs enabled.
+ === ===================================================
Unused mutexes cannot be part of the cause of an error.
@@ -67,7 +70,7 @@ Single-lock state rules:
A softirq-unsafe lock-class is automatically hardirq-unsafe as well. The
following states are exclusive, and only one of them is allowed to be
-set for any lock-class:
+set for any lock-class::
<hardirq-safe> and <hardirq-unsafe>
<softirq-safe> and <softirq-unsafe>
@@ -81,7 +84,7 @@ Multi-lock dependency rules:
The same lock-class must not be acquired twice, because this could lead
to lock recursion deadlocks.
-Furthermore, two locks may not be taken in different order:
+Furthermore, two locks may not be taken in different order::
<L1> -> <L2>
<L2> -> <L1>
@@ -92,7 +95,7 @@ other locking sequence between the acquire-lock operations, the
validator will still track all dependencies between locks.)
Furthermore, the following usage based lock dependencies are not allowed
-between any two lock-classes:
+between any two lock-classes::
<hardirq-safe> -> <hardirq-unsafe>
<softirq-safe> -> <softirq-unsafe>
@@ -148,16 +151,16 @@ the ordering is not static.
In order to teach the validator about this correct usage model, new
versions of the various locking primitives were added that allow you to
specify a "nesting level". An example call, for the block device mutex,
-looks like this:
+looks like this::
-enum bdev_bd_mutex_lock_class
-{
+ enum bdev_bd_mutex_lock_class
+ {
BD_MUTEX_NORMAL,
BD_MUTEX_WHOLE,
BD_MUTEX_PARTITION
-};
+ };
- mutex_lock_nested(&bdev->bd_contains->bd_mutex, BD_MUTEX_PARTITION);
+mutex_lock_nested(&bdev->bd_contains->bd_mutex, BD_MUTEX_PARTITION);
In this case the locking is done on a bdev object that is known to be a
partition.
@@ -178,7 +181,7 @@ must be held: lockdep_assert_held*(&lock) and lockdep_*pin_lock(&lock).
As the name suggests, lockdep_assert_held* family of macros assert that a
particular lock is held at a certain time (and generate a WARN() otherwise).
This annotation is largely used all over the kernel, e.g. kernel/sched/
-core.c
+core.c::
void update_rq_clock(struct rq *rq)
{
@@ -197,7 +200,7 @@ out to be especially helpful to debug code with callbacks, where an upper
layer assumes a lock remains taken, but a lower layer thinks it can maybe drop
and reacquire the lock ("unwittingly" introducing races). lockdep_pin_lock()
returns a 'struct pin_cookie' that is then used by lockdep_unpin_lock() to check
-that nobody tampered with the lock, e.g. kernel/sched/sched.h
+that nobody tampered with the lock, e.g. kernel/sched/sched.h::
static inline void rq_pin_lock(struct rq *rq, struct rq_flags *rf)
{
@@ -224,7 +227,7 @@ correctness) in the sense that for every simple, standalone single-task
locking sequence that occurred at least once during the lifetime of the
kernel, the validator proves it with a 100% certainty that no
combination and timing of these locking sequences can cause any class of
-lock related deadlock. [*]
+lock related deadlock. [1]_
I.e. complex multi-CPU and multi-task locking scenarios do not have to
occur in practice to prove a deadlock: only the simple 'component'
@@ -243,7 +246,9 @@ possible combination of locking interaction between CPUs, combined with
every possible hardirq and softirq nesting scenario (which is impossible
to do in practice).
-[*] assuming that the validator itself is 100% correct, and no other
+.. [1]
+
+ assuming that the validator itself is 100% correct, and no other
part of the system corrupts the state of the validator in any way.
We also assume that all NMI/SMM paths [which could interrupt
even hardirq-disabled codepaths] are correct and do not interfere
@@ -254,7 +259,7 @@ to do in practice).
Performance:
------------
-The above rules require _massive_ amounts of runtime checking. If we did
+The above rules require **massive** amounts of runtime checking. If we did
that for every lock taken and for every irqs-enable event, it would
render the system practically unusably slow. The complexity of checking
is O(N^2), so even with just a few hundred lock-classes we'd have to do
@@ -313,17 +318,17 @@ be harder to do than to say.
Of course, if you do run out of lock classes, the next thing to do is
to find the offending lock classes. First, the following command gives
-you the number of lock classes currently in use along with the maximum:
+you the number of lock classes currently in use along with the maximum::
grep "lock-classes" /proc/lockdep_stats
-This command produces the following output on a modest system:
+This command produces the following output on a modest system::
- lock-classes: 748 [max: 8191]
+ lock-classes: 748 [max: 8191]
If the number allocated (748 above) increases continually over time,
then there is likely a leak. The following command can be used to
-identify the leaking lock classes:
+identify the leaking lock classes::
grep "BD" /proc/lockdep
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
index fdbeb0c45ef3..d8c1b5858c25 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/lockstat.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,25 @@
+===============
+Lock Statistics
+===============
-LOCK STATISTICS
-
-- WHAT
+What
+====
As the name suggests, it provides statistics on locks.
-- WHY
+
+Why
+===
Because things like lock contention can severely impact performance.
-- HOW
+How
+===
Lockdep already has hooks in the lock functions and maps lock instances to
lock classes. We build on that (see Documentation/locking/lockdep-design.txt).
The graph below shows the relation between the lock functions and the various
-hooks therein.
+hooks therein::
__acquire
|
@@ -36,24 +41,38 @@ hooks therein.
|
unlock
-lock, unlock - the regular lock functions
-__* - the hooks
-<> - states
+ lock, unlock - the regular lock functions
+ __* - the hooks
+ <> - states
With these hooks we provide the following statistics:
- con-bounces - number of lock contention that involved x-cpu data
- contentions - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait
- wait time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock
- max - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock
- total - total time we spend waiting on this lock
- avg - average time spent waiting on this lock
- acq-bounces - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data
- acquisitions - number of times we took the lock
- hold time min - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock
- max - longest time we ever held the lock
- total - total time this lock was held
- avg - average time this lock was held
+ con-bounces
+ - number of lock contention that involved x-cpu data
+ contentions
+ - number of lock acquisitions that had to wait
+ wait time
+ min
+ - shortest (non-0) time we ever had to wait for a lock
+ max
+ - longest time we ever had to wait for a lock
+ total
+ - total time we spend waiting on this lock
+ avg
+ - average time spent waiting on this lock
+ acq-bounces
+ - number of lock acquisitions that involved x-cpu data
+ acquisitions
+ - number of times we took the lock
+ hold time
+ min
+ - shortest (non-0) time we ever held the lock
+ max
+ - longest time we ever held the lock
+ total
+ - total time this lock was held
+ avg
+ - average time this lock was held
These numbers are gathered per lock class, per read/write state (when
applicable).
@@ -61,58 +80,60 @@ applicable).
It also tracks 4 contention points per class. A contention point is a call site
that had to wait on lock acquisition.
- - CONFIGURATION
+Configuration
+-------------
Lock statistics are enabled via CONFIG_LOCK_STAT.
- - USAGE
-
-Enable collection of statistics:
-
-# echo 1 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
-
-Disable collection of statistics:
-
-# echo 0 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
-
-Look at the current lock statistics:
-
-( line numbers not part of actual output, done for clarity in the explanation
- below )
-
-# less /proc/lock_stat
-
-01 lock_stat version 0.4
-02-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total waittime-avg acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total holdtime-avg
-04-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-05
-06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 46 84 0.26 939.10 16371.53 194.90 47291 2922365 0.16 2220301.69 17464026916.32 5975.99
-07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 37 100 1.31 299502.61 325629.52 3256.30 212344 34316685 0.10 7744.91 95016910.20 2.77
-08 ---------------
-09 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff811502a7>] khugepaged_scan_mm_slot+0x57/0x280
-10 &mm->mmap_sem 96 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
-11 &mm->mmap_sem 34 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
-12 &mm->mmap_sem 17 [<ffffffff81127e71>] vm_munmap+0x41/0x80
-13 ---------------
-14 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff81046fda>] dup_mmap+0x2a/0x3f0
-15 &mm->mmap_sem 60 [<ffffffff81129e29>] SyS_mprotect+0xe9/0x250
-16 &mm->mmap_sem 41 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
-17 &mm->mmap_sem 68 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
-18
-19.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-20
-21 unix_table_lock: 110 112 0.21 49.24 163.91 1.46 21094 66312 0.12 624.42 31589.81 0.48
-22 ---------------
-23 unix_table_lock 45 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
-24 unix_table_lock 47 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
-25 unix_table_lock 15 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
-26 unix_table_lock 5 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
-27 ---------------
-28 unix_table_lock 39 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
-29 unix_table_lock 49 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
-30 unix_table_lock 20 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
-31 unix_table_lock 4 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
+Usage
+-----
+
+Enable collection of statistics::
+
+ # echo 1 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
+
+Disable collection of statistics::
+
+ # echo 0 >/proc/sys/kernel/lock_stat
+
+Look at the current lock statistics::
+
+ ( line numbers not part of actual output, done for clarity in the explanation
+ below )
+
+ # less /proc/lock_stat
+
+ 01 lock_stat version 0.4
+ 02-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total waittime-avg acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total holdtime-avg
+ 04-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 05
+ 06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 46 84 0.26 939.10 16371.53 194.90 47291 2922365 0.16 2220301.69 17464026916.32 5975.99
+ 07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 37 100 1.31 299502.61 325629.52 3256.30 212344 34316685 0.10 7744.91 95016910.20 2.77
+ 08 ---------------
+ 09 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff811502a7>] khugepaged_scan_mm_slot+0x57/0x280
+ 10 &mm->mmap_sem 96 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
+ 11 &mm->mmap_sem 34 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
+ 12 &mm->mmap_sem 17 [<ffffffff81127e71>] vm_munmap+0x41/0x80
+ 13 ---------------
+ 14 &mm->mmap_sem 1 [<ffffffff81046fda>] dup_mmap+0x2a/0x3f0
+ 15 &mm->mmap_sem 60 [<ffffffff81129e29>] SyS_mprotect+0xe9/0x250
+ 16 &mm->mmap_sem 41 [<ffffffff815351c4>] __do_page_fault+0x1d4/0x510
+ 17 &mm->mmap_sem 68 [<ffffffff81113d77>] vm_mmap_pgoff+0x87/0xd0
+ 18
+ 19.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 20
+ 21 unix_table_lock: 110 112 0.21 49.24 163.91 1.46 21094 66312 0.12 624.42 31589.81 0.48
+ 22 ---------------
+ 23 unix_table_lock 45 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
+ 24 unix_table_lock 47 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
+ 25 unix_table_lock 15 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
+ 26 unix_table_lock 5 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
+ 27 ---------------
+ 28 unix_table_lock 39 [<ffffffff8150b111>] unix_release_sock+0x31/0x250
+ 29 unix_table_lock 49 [<ffffffff8150ad8e>] unix_create1+0x16e/0x1b0
+ 30 unix_table_lock 20 [<ffffffff8150ca37>] unix_find_other+0x117/0x230
+ 31 unix_table_lock 4 [<ffffffff8150a09f>] unix_autobind+0x11f/0x1b0
This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the
@@ -133,40 +154,40 @@ points are the points we're contending with.
The integer part of the time values is in us.
-Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear:
+Dealing with nested locks, subclasses may appear::
-32...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-33
-34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 7.91 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 3.82
-35 ---------
-36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
-37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
-38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a
-39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb
-40 ---------
-41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
-42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
-43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
-44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
-45
-46...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-47
-48 &rq->lock/1: 1526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 11.86 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 2.84
-49 -----------
-50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
-51 -----------
-52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
-53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
-54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
-55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+ 32...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 33
+ 34 &rq->lock: 13128 13128 0.43 190.53 103881.26 7.91 97454 3453404 0.00 401.11 13224683.11 3.82
+ 35 ---------
+ 36 &rq->lock 645 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
+ 37 &rq->lock 297 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+ 38 &rq->lock 360 [<ffffffff8103c4c5>] select_task_rq_fair+0x1f0/0x74a
+ 39 &rq->lock 428 [<ffffffff81045f98>] scheduler_tick+0x46/0x1fb
+ 40 ---------
+ 41 &rq->lock 77 [<ffffffff8103bfc4>] task_rq_lock+0x43/0x75
+ 42 &rq->lock 174 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
+ 43 &rq->lock 4715 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
+ 44 &rq->lock 893 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
+ 45
+ 46...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................
+ 47
+ 48 &rq->lock/1: 1526 11488 0.33 388.73 136294.31 11.86 21461 38404 0.00 37.93 109388.53 2.84
+ 49 -----------
+ 50 &rq->lock/1 11526 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
+ 51 -----------
+ 52 &rq->lock/1 5645 [<ffffffff8103ed4b>] double_rq_lock+0x42/0x54
+ 53 &rq->lock/1 1224 [<ffffffff81340524>] schedule+0x157/0x7b8
+ 54 &rq->lock/1 4336 [<ffffffff8103ed58>] double_rq_lock+0x4f/0x54
+ 55 &rq->lock/1 181 [<ffffffff8104ba65>] try_to_wake_up+0x127/0x25a
Line 48 shows statistics for the second subclass (/1) of &rq->lock class
(subclass starts from 0), since in this case, as line 50 suggests,
double_rq_lock actually acquires a nested lock of two spinlocks.
-View the top contending locks:
+View the top contending locks::
-# grep : /proc/lock_stat | head
+ # grep : /proc/lock_stat | head
clockevents_lock: 2926159 2947636 0.15 46882.81 1784540466.34 605.41 3381345 3879161 0.00 2260.97 53178395.68 13.71
tick_broadcast_lock: 346460 346717 0.18 2257.43 39364622.71 113.54 3642919 4242696 0.00 2263.79 49173646.60 11.59
&mapping->i_mmap_mutex: 203896 203899 3.36 645530.05 31767507988.39 155800.21 3361776 8893984 0.17 2254.15 14110121.02 1.59
@@ -178,6 +199,6 @@ View the top contending locks:
&(&dentry->d_lockref.lock)->rlock: 39791 40179 0.15 1302.08 88851.96 2.21 2790851 12527025 0.10 1910.75 3379714.27 0.27
rcu_node_0: 29203 30064 0.16 786.55 1555573.00 51.74 88963 244254 0.00 398.87 428872.51 1.76
-Clear the statistics:
+Clear the statistics::
-# echo 0 > /proc/lock_stat
+ # echo 0 > /proc/lock_stat
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt
index 6a8df4cd19bf..e79eeeca3ac6 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+==================================
Kernel Lock Torture Test Operation
+==================================
CONFIG_LOCK_TORTURE_TEST
+========================
The CONFIG LOCK_TORTURE_TEST config option provides a kernel module
that runs torture tests on core kernel locking primitives. The kernel
@@ -18,61 +21,77 @@ can be simulated by either enlarging this critical region hold time and/or
creating more kthreads.
-MODULE PARAMETERS
+Module Parameters
+=================
This module has the following parameters:
- ** Locktorture-specific **
+Locktorture-specific
+--------------------
-nwriters_stress Number of kernel threads that will stress exclusive lock
+nwriters_stress
+ Number of kernel threads that will stress exclusive lock
ownership (writers). The default value is twice the number
of online CPUs.
-nreaders_stress Number of kernel threads that will stress shared lock
+nreaders_stress
+ Number of kernel threads that will stress shared lock
ownership (readers). The default is the same amount of writer
locks. If the user did not specify nwriters_stress, then
both readers and writers be the amount of online CPUs.
-torture_type Type of lock to torture. By default, only spinlocks will
+torture_type
+ Type of lock to torture. By default, only spinlocks will
be tortured. This module can torture the following locks,
with string values as follows:
- o "lock_busted": Simulates a buggy lock implementation.
+ - "lock_busted":
+ Simulates a buggy lock implementation.
- o "spin_lock": spin_lock() and spin_unlock() pairs.
+ - "spin_lock":
+ spin_lock() and spin_unlock() pairs.
- o "spin_lock_irq": spin_lock_irq() and spin_unlock_irq()
- pairs.
+ - "spin_lock_irq":
+ spin_lock_irq() and spin_unlock_irq() pairs.
- o "rw_lock": read/write lock() and unlock() rwlock pairs.
+ - "rw_lock":
+ read/write lock() and unlock() rwlock pairs.
- o "rw_lock_irq": read/write lock_irq() and unlock_irq()
- rwlock pairs.
+ - "rw_lock_irq":
+ read/write lock_irq() and unlock_irq()
+ rwlock pairs.
- o "mutex_lock": mutex_lock() and mutex_unlock() pairs.
+ - "mutex_lock":
+ mutex_lock() and mutex_unlock() pairs.
- o "rtmutex_lock": rtmutex_lock() and rtmutex_unlock()
- pairs. Kernel must have CONFIG_RT_MUTEX=y.
+ - "rtmutex_lock":
+ rtmutex_lock() and rtmutex_unlock() pairs.
+ Kernel must have CONFIG_RT_MUTEX=y.
- o "rwsem_lock": read/write down() and up() semaphore pairs.
+ - "rwsem_lock":
+ read/write down() and up() semaphore pairs.
- ** Torture-framework (RCU + locking) **
+Torture-framework (RCU + locking)
+---------------------------------
-shutdown_secs The number of seconds to run the test before terminating
+shutdown_secs
+ The number of seconds to run the test before terminating
the test and powering off the system. The default is
zero, which disables test termination and system shutdown.
This capability is useful for automated testing.
-onoff_interval The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a
+onoff_interval
+ The number of seconds between each attempt to execute a
randomly selected CPU-hotplug operation. Defaults
to zero, which disables CPU hotplugging. In
CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU=n kernels, locktorture will silently
refuse to do any CPU-hotplug operations regardless of
what value is specified for onoff_interval.
-onoff_holdoff The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
+onoff_holdoff
+ The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
operations. This would normally only be used when
locktorture was built into the kernel and started
automatically at boot time, in which case it is useful
@@ -80,53 +99,59 @@ onoff_holdoff The number of seconds to wait until starting CPU-hotplug
coming and going. This parameter is only useful if
CONFIG_HOTPLUG_CPU is enabled.
-stat_interval Number of seconds between statistics-related printk()s.
+stat_interval
+ Number of seconds between statistics-related printk()s.
By default, locktorture will report stats every 60 seconds.
Setting the interval to zero causes the statistics to
be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this
is the default.
-stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
+stutter
+ The length of time to run the test before pausing for this
same period of time. Defaults to "stutter=5", so as
to run and pause for (roughly) five-second intervals.
Specifying "stutter=0" causes the test to run continuously
without pausing, which is the old default behavior.
-shuffle_interval The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
+shuffle_interval
+ The number of seconds to keep the test threads affinitied
to a particular subset of the CPUs, defaults to 3 seconds.
Used in conjunction with test_no_idle_hz.
-verbose Enable verbose debugging printing, via printk(). Enabled
+verbose
+ Enable verbose debugging printing, via printk(). Enabled
by default. This extra information is mostly related to
high-level errors and reports from the main 'torture'
framework.
-STATISTICS
+Statistics
+==========
-Statistics are printed in the following format:
+Statistics are printed in the following format::
-spin_lock-torture: Writes: Total: 93746064 Max/Min: 0/0 Fail: 0
- (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
+ spin_lock-torture: Writes: Total: 93746064 Max/Min: 0/0 Fail: 0
+ (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
-(A): Lock type that is being tortured -- torture_type parameter.
+ (A): Lock type that is being tortured -- torture_type parameter.
-(B): Number of writer lock acquisitions. If dealing with a read/write primitive
- a second "Reads" statistics line is printed.
+ (B): Number of writer lock acquisitions. If dealing with a read/write
+ primitive a second "Reads" statistics line is printed.
-(C): Number of times the lock was acquired.
+ (C): Number of times the lock was acquired.
-(D): Min and max number of times threads failed to acquire the lock.
+ (D): Min and max number of times threads failed to acquire the lock.
-(E): true/false values if there were errors acquiring the lock. This should
- -only- be positive if there is a bug in the locking primitive's
- implementation. Otherwise a lock should never fail (i.e., spin_lock()).
- Of course, the same applies for (C), above. A dummy example of this is
- the "lock_busted" type.
+ (E): true/false values if there were errors acquiring the lock. This should
+ -only- be positive if there is a bug in the locking primitive's
+ implementation. Otherwise a lock should never fail (i.e., spin_lock()).
+ Of course, the same applies for (C), above. A dummy example of this is
+ the "lock_busted" type.
-USAGE
+Usage
+=====
-The following script may be used to torture locks:
+The following script may be used to torture locks::
#!/bin/sh
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt
index 818aca19612f..4d8236b81fa5 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/mutex-design.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+=======================
Generic Mutex Subsystem
+=======================
started by Ingo Molnar <[email protected]>
+
updated by Davidlohr Bueso <[email protected]>
What are mutexes?
@@ -23,7 +26,7 @@ Implementation
Mutexes are represented by 'struct mutex', defined in include/linux/mutex.h
and implemented in kernel/locking/mutex.c. These locks use an atomic variable
(->owner) to keep track of the lock state during its lifetime. Field owner
-actually contains 'struct task_struct *' to the current lock owner and it is
+actually contains `struct task_struct *` to the current lock owner and it is
therefore NULL if not currently owned. Since task_struct pointers are aligned
at at least L1_CACHE_BYTES, low bits (3) are used to store extra state (e.g.,
if waiter list is non-empty). In its most basic form it also includes a
@@ -101,29 +104,36 @@ features that make lock debugging easier and faster:
Interfaces
----------
-Statically define the mutex:
+Statically define the mutex::
+
DEFINE_MUTEX(name);
-Dynamically initialize the mutex:
+Dynamically initialize the mutex::
+
mutex_init(mutex);
-Acquire the mutex, uninterruptible:
+Acquire the mutex, uninterruptible::
+
void mutex_lock(struct mutex *lock);
void mutex_lock_nested(struct mutex *lock, unsigned int subclass);
int mutex_trylock(struct mutex *lock);
-Acquire the mutex, interruptible:
+Acquire the mutex, interruptible::
+
int mutex_lock_interruptible_nested(struct mutex *lock,
unsigned int subclass);
int mutex_lock_interruptible(struct mutex *lock);
-Acquire the mutex, interruptible, if dec to 0:
+Acquire the mutex, interruptible, if dec to 0::
+
int atomic_dec_and_mutex_lock(atomic_t *cnt, struct mutex *lock);
-Unlock the mutex:
+Unlock the mutex::
+
void mutex_unlock(struct mutex *lock);
-Test if the mutex is taken:
+Test if the mutex is taken::
+
int mutex_is_locked(struct mutex *lock);
Disadvantages
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt
index 3d7b865539cc..c8f8b97c87e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex-design.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
-#
-# Copyright (c) 2006 Steven Rostedt
-# Licensed under the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
-#
-
+==============================
RT-mutex implementation design
-------------------------------
+==============================
+
+Copyright (c) 2006 Steven Rostedt
+
+Licensed under the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
+
This document tries to describe the design of the rtmutex.c implementation.
It doesn't describe the reasons why rtmutex.c exists. For that please see
@@ -41,17 +42,17 @@ to release the lock, because for all we know, B is a CPU hog and will
never give C a chance to release the lock. This is called unbounded priority
inversion.
-Here's a little ASCII art to show the problem.
+Here's a little ASCII art to show the problem::
- grab lock L1 (owned by C)
- |
-A ---+
- C preempted by B
- |
-C +----+
+ grab lock L1 (owned by C)
+ |
+ A ---+
+ C preempted by B
+ |
+ C +----+
-B +-------->
- B now keeps A from running.
+ B +-------->
+ B now keeps A from running.
Priority Inheritance (PI)
@@ -75,24 +76,29 @@ Terminology
Here I explain some terminology that is used in this document to help describe
the design that is used to implement PI.
-PI chain - The PI chain is an ordered series of locks and processes that cause
+PI chain
+ - The PI chain is an ordered series of locks and processes that cause
processes to inherit priorities from a previous process that is
blocked on one of its locks. This is described in more detail
later in this document.
-mutex - In this document, to differentiate from locks that implement
+mutex
+ - In this document, to differentiate from locks that implement
PI and spin locks that are used in the PI code, from now on
the PI locks will be called a mutex.
-lock - In this document from now on, I will use the term lock when
+lock
+ - In this document from now on, I will use the term lock when
referring to spin locks that are used to protect parts of the PI
algorithm. These locks disable preemption for UP (when
CONFIG_PREEMPT is enabled) and on SMP prevents multiple CPUs from
entering critical sections simultaneously.
-spin lock - Same as lock above.
+spin lock
+ - Same as lock above.
-waiter - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
+waiter
+ - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
process. Since the scope of the waiter is within the code for
a process being blocked on the mutex, it is fine to allocate
the waiter on the process's stack (local variable). This
@@ -104,14 +110,18 @@ waiter - A waiter is a struct that is stored on the stack of a blocked
waiter is sometimes used in reference to the task that is waiting
on a mutex. This is the same as waiter->task.
-waiters - A list of processes that are blocked on a mutex.
+waiters
+ - A list of processes that are blocked on a mutex.
-top waiter - The highest priority process waiting on a specific mutex.
+top waiter
+ - The highest priority process waiting on a specific mutex.
-top pi waiter - The highest priority process waiting on one of the mutexes
+top pi waiter
+ - The highest priority process waiting on one of the mutexes
that a specific process owns.
-Note: task and process are used interchangeably in this document, mostly to
+Note:
+ task and process are used interchangeably in this document, mostly to
differentiate between two processes that are being described together.
@@ -123,7 +133,7 @@ inheritance to take place. Multiple chains may converge, but a chain
would never diverge, since a process can't be blocked on more than one
mutex at a time.
-Example:
+Example::
Process: A, B, C, D, E
Mutexes: L1, L2, L3, L4
@@ -137,21 +147,21 @@ Example:
D owns L4
E blocked on L4
-The chain would be:
+The chain would be::
E->L4->D->L3->C->L2->B->L1->A
To show where two chains merge, we could add another process F and
another mutex L5 where B owns L5 and F is blocked on mutex L5.
-The chain for F would be:
+The chain for F would be::
F->L5->B->L1->A
Since a process may own more than one mutex, but never be blocked on more than
one, the chains merge.
-Here we show both chains:
+Here we show both chains::
E->L4->D->L3->C->L2-+
|
@@ -165,12 +175,12 @@ than the processes to the left or below in the chain.
Also since a mutex may have more than one process blocked on it, we can
have multiple chains merge at mutexes. If we add another process G that is
-blocked on mutex L2:
+blocked on mutex L2::
G->L2->B->L1->A
And once again, to show how this can grow I will show the merging chains
-again.
+again::
E->L4->D->L3->C-+
+->L2-+
@@ -184,7 +194,7 @@ the chain (A and B in this example), must have their priorities increased
to that of G.
Mutex Waiters Tree
------------------
+------------------
Every mutex keeps track of all the waiters that are blocked on itself. The
mutex has a rbtree to store these waiters by priority. This tree is protected
@@ -219,19 +229,19 @@ defined. But is very complex to figure it out, since it depends on all
the nesting of mutexes. Let's look at the example where we have 3 mutexes,
L1, L2, and L3, and four separate functions func1, func2, func3 and func4.
The following shows a locking order of L1->L2->L3, but may not actually
-be directly nested that way.
+be directly nested that way::
-void func1(void)
-{
+ void func1(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L1);
/* do anything */
mutex_unlock(L1);
-}
+ }
-void func2(void)
-{
+ void func2(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L1);
mutex_lock(L2);
@@ -239,10 +249,10 @@ void func2(void)
mutex_unlock(L2);
mutex_unlock(L1);
-}
+ }
-void func3(void)
-{
+ void func3(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L2);
mutex_lock(L3);
@@ -250,30 +260,30 @@ void func3(void)
mutex_unlock(L3);
mutex_unlock(L2);
-}
+ }
-void func4(void)
-{
+ void func4(void)
+ {
mutex_lock(L3);
/* do something again */
mutex_unlock(L3);
-}
+ }
Now we add 4 processes that run each of these functions separately.
Processes A, B, C, and D which run functions func1, func2, func3 and func4
respectively, and such that D runs first and A last. With D being preempted
-in func4 in the "do something again" area, we have a locking that follows:
+in func4 in the "do something again" area, we have a locking that follows::
-D owns L3
- C blocked on L3
- C owns L2
- B blocked on L2
- B owns L1
- A blocked on L1
+ D owns L3
+ C blocked on L3
+ C owns L2
+ B blocked on L2
+ B owns L1
+ A blocked on L1
-And thus we have the chain A->L1->B->L2->C->L3->D.
+ And thus we have the chain A->L1->B->L2->C->L3->D.
This gives us a PI depth of 4 (four processes), but looking at any of the
functions individually, it seems as though they only have at most a locking
@@ -307,17 +317,17 @@ Some architectures implement an atomic cmpxchg (Compare and Exchange). This
is used (when applicable) to keep the fast path of grabbing and releasing
mutexes short.
-cmpxchg is basically the following function performed atomically:
+cmpxchg is basically the following function performed atomically::
-unsigned long _cmpxchg(unsigned long *A, unsigned long *B, unsigned long *C)
-{
+ unsigned long _cmpxchg(unsigned long *A, unsigned long *B, unsigned long *C)
+ {
unsigned long T = *A;
if (*A == *B) {
*A = *C;
}
return T;
-}
-#define cmpxchg(a,b,c) _cmpxchg(&a,&b,&c)
+ }
+ #define cmpxchg(a,b,c) _cmpxchg(&a,&b,&c)
This is really nice to have, since it allows you to only update a variable
if the variable is what you expect it to be. You know if it succeeded if
@@ -352,9 +362,10 @@ Then rt_mutex_setprio is called to adjust the priority of the task to the
new priority. Note that rt_mutex_setprio is defined in kernel/sched/core.c
to implement the actual change in priority.
-(Note: For the "prio" field in task_struct, the lower the number, the
+Note:
+ For the "prio" field in task_struct, the lower the number, the
higher the priority. A "prio" of 5 is of higher priority than a
- "prio" of 10.)
+ "prio" of 10.
It is interesting to note that rt_mutex_adjust_prio can either increase
or decrease the priority of the task. In the case that a higher priority
@@ -439,6 +450,7 @@ wait_lock, which this code currently holds. So setting the "Has Waiters" flag
forces the current owner to synchronize with this code.
The lock is taken if the following are true:
+
1) The lock has no owner
2) The current task is the highest priority against all other
waiters of the lock
@@ -546,10 +558,13 @@ Credits
-------
Author: Steven Rostedt <[email protected]>
+
Updated: Alex Shi <[email protected]> - 7/6/2017
-Original Reviewers: Ingo Molnar, Thomas Gleixner, Thomas Duetsch, and
+Original Reviewers:
+ Ingo Molnar, Thomas Gleixner, Thomas Duetsch, and
Randy Dunlap
+
Update (7/6/2017) Reviewers: Steven Rostedt and Sebastian Siewior
Updates
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt
index 35793e003041..c365dc302081 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/rt-mutex.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==================================
RT-mutex subsystem with PI support
-----------------------------------
+==================================
RT-mutexes with priority inheritance are used to support PI-futexes,
which enable pthread_mutex_t priority inheritance attributes
@@ -46,27 +47,30 @@ The state of the rt-mutex is tracked via the owner field of the rt-mutex
structure:
lock->owner holds the task_struct pointer of the owner. Bit 0 is used to
-keep track of the "lock has waiters" state.
+keep track of the "lock has waiters" state:
- owner bit0
+ ============ ======= ================================================
+ owner bit0 Notes
+ ============ ======= ================================================
NULL 0 lock is free (fast acquire possible)
NULL 1 lock is free and has waiters and the top waiter
- is going to take the lock*
+ is going to take the lock [1]_
taskpointer 0 lock is held (fast release possible)
- taskpointer 1 lock is held and has waiters**
+ taskpointer 1 lock is held and has waiters [2]_
+ ============ ======= ================================================
The fast atomic compare exchange based acquire and release is only
possible when bit 0 of lock->owner is 0.
-(*) It also can be a transitional state when grabbing the lock
-with ->wait_lock is held. To prevent any fast path cmpxchg to the lock,
-we need to set the bit0 before looking at the lock, and the owner may be
-NULL in this small time, hence this can be a transitional state.
+.. [1] It also can be a transitional state when grabbing the lock
+ with ->wait_lock is held. To prevent any fast path cmpxchg to the lock,
+ we need to set the bit0 before looking at the lock, and the owner may
+ be NULL in this small time, hence this can be a transitional state.
-(**) There is a small time when bit 0 is set but there are no
-waiters. This can happen when grabbing the lock in the slow path.
-To prevent a cmpxchg of the owner releasing the lock, we need to
-set this bit before looking at the lock.
+.. [2] There is a small time when bit 0 is set but there are no
+ waiters. This can happen when grabbing the lock in the slow path.
+ To prevent a cmpxchg of the owner releasing the lock, we need to
+ set this bit before looking at the lock.
BTW, there is still technically a "Pending Owner", it's just not called
that anymore. The pending owner happens to be the top_waiter of a lock
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt
index ff35e40bdf5b..098107fb7d86 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
+===============
+Locking lessons
+===============
+
Lesson 1: Spin locks
+====================
-The most basic primitive for locking is spinlock.
+The most basic primitive for locking is spinlock::
-static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock);
+ static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock);
unsigned long flags;
@@ -19,23 +24,25 @@ worry about UP vs SMP issues: the spinlocks work correctly under both.
NOTE! Implications of spin_locks for memory are further described in:
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+
(5) LOCK operations.
+
(6) UNLOCK operations.
The above is usually pretty simple (you usually need and want only one
spinlock for most things - using more than one spinlock can make things a
lot more complex and even slower and is usually worth it only for
-sequences that you _know_ need to be split up: avoid it at all cost if you
+sequences that you **know** need to be split up: avoid it at all cost if you
aren't sure).
This is really the only really hard part about spinlocks: once you start
using spinlocks they tend to expand to areas you might not have noticed
before, because you have to make sure the spinlocks correctly protect the
-shared data structures _everywhere_ they are used. The spinlocks are most
+shared data structures **everywhere** they are used. The spinlocks are most
easily added to places that are completely independent of other code (for
example, internal driver data structures that nobody else ever touches).
- NOTE! The spin-lock is safe only when you _also_ use the lock itself
+ NOTE! The spin-lock is safe only when you **also** use the lock itself
to do locking across CPU's, which implies that EVERYTHING that
touches a shared variable has to agree about the spinlock they want
to use.
@@ -43,6 +50,7 @@ example, internal driver data structures that nobody else ever touches).
----
Lesson 2: reader-writer spinlocks.
+==================================
If your data accesses have a very natural pattern where you usually tend
to mostly read from the shared variables, the reader-writer locks
@@ -54,7 +62,7 @@ to change the variables it has to get an exclusive write lock.
simple spinlocks. Unless the reader critical section is long, you
are better off just using spinlocks.
-The routines look the same as above:
+The routines look the same as above::
rwlock_t xxx_lock = __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED(xxx_lock);
@@ -71,7 +79,7 @@ The routines look the same as above:
The above kind of lock may be useful for complex data structures like
linked lists, especially searching for entries without changing the list
itself. The read lock allows many concurrent readers. Anything that
-_changes_ the list will have to get the write lock.
+**changes** the list will have to get the write lock.
NOTE! RCU is better for list traversal, but requires careful
attention to design detail (see Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt).
@@ -87,10 +95,11 @@ to get the write-lock at the very beginning.
----
Lesson 3: spinlocks revisited.
+==============================
The single spin-lock primitives above are by no means the only ones. They
are the most safe ones, and the ones that work under all circumstances,
-but partly _because_ they are safe they are also fairly slow. They are slower
+but partly **because** they are safe they are also fairly slow. They are slower
than they'd need to be, because they do have to disable interrupts
(which is just a single instruction on a x86, but it's an expensive one -
and on other architectures it can be worse).
@@ -98,7 +107,7 @@ and on other architectures it can be worse).
If you have a case where you have to protect a data structure across
several CPU's and you want to use spinlocks you can potentially use
cheaper versions of the spinlocks. IFF you know that the spinlocks are
-never used in interrupt handlers, you can use the non-irq versions:
+never used in interrupt handlers, you can use the non-irq versions::
spin_lock(&lock);
...
@@ -110,7 +119,7 @@ This is useful if you know that the data in question is only ever
manipulated from a "process context", ie no interrupts involved.
The reasons you mustn't use these versions if you have interrupts that
-play with the spinlock is that you can get deadlocks:
+play with the spinlock is that you can get deadlocks::
spin_lock(&lock);
...
@@ -147,9 +156,10 @@ indeed), while write-locks need to protect themselves against interrupts.
----
Reference information:
+======================
For dynamic initialization, use spin_lock_init() or rwlock_init() as
-appropriate:
+appropriate::
spinlock_t xxx_lock;
rwlock_t xxx_rw_lock;
diff --git a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
index f0ed7c30e695..1846c199da23 100644
--- a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+======================================
Wound/Wait Deadlock-Proof Mutex Design
======================================
@@ -85,6 +86,7 @@ Furthermore there are three different class of w/w lock acquire functions:
no deadlock potential and hence the ww_mutex_lock call will block and not
prematurely return -EDEADLK. The advantage of the _slow functions is in
interface safety:
+
- ww_mutex_lock has a __must_check int return type, whereas ww_mutex_lock_slow
has a void return type. Note that since ww mutex code needs loops/retries
anyway the __must_check doesn't result in spurious warnings, even though the
@@ -115,36 +117,36 @@ expect the number of simultaneous competing transactions to be typically small,
and you want to reduce the number of rollbacks.
Three different ways to acquire locks within the same w/w class. Common
-definitions for methods #1 and #2:
+definitions for methods #1 and #2::
-static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+ static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
-struct obj {
+ struct obj {
struct ww_mutex lock;
/* obj data */
-};
+ };
-struct obj_entry {
+ struct obj_entry {
struct list_head head;
struct obj *obj;
-};
+ };
Method 1, using a list in execbuf->buffers that's not allowed to be reordered.
This is useful if a list of required objects is already tracked somewhere.
Furthermore the lock helper can use propagate the -EALREADY return code back to
the caller as a signal that an object is twice on the list. This is useful if
the list is constructed from userspace input and the ABI requires userspace to
-not have duplicate entries (e.g. for a gpu commandbuffer submission ioctl).
+not have duplicate entries (e.g. for a gpu commandbuffer submission ioctl)::
-int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj *res_obj = NULL;
struct obj_entry *contended_entry = NULL;
struct obj_entry *entry;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
-retry:
+ retry:
list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head) {
if (entry->obj == res_obj) {
res_obj = NULL;
@@ -160,7 +162,7 @@ retry:
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-err:
+ err:
list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse (entry, list, head)
ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
@@ -176,14 +178,14 @@ err:
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
return ret;
-}
+ }
Method 2, using a list in execbuf->buffers that can be reordered. Same semantics
of duplicate entry detection using -EALREADY as method 1 above. But the
-list-reordering allows for a bit more idiomatic code.
+list-reordering allows for a bit more idiomatic code::
-int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj_entry *entry, *entry2;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
@@ -216,24 +218,25 @@ int lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-Unlocking works the same way for both methods #1 and #2:
+Unlocking works the same way for both methods #1 and #2::
-void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj_entry *entry;
list_for_each_entry (entry, list, head)
ww_mutex_unlock(&entry->obj->lock);
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
-}
+ }
Method 3 is useful if the list of objects is constructed ad-hoc and not upfront,
e.g. when adjusting edges in a graph where each node has its own ww_mutex lock,
and edges can only be changed when holding the locks of all involved nodes. w/w
mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons:
+
- They can handle lock-acquisition in any order which allows us to start walking
a graph from a starting point and then iteratively discovering new edges and
locking down the nodes those edges connect to.
@@ -243,6 +246,7 @@ mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons:
as a starting point).
Note that this approach differs in two important ways from the above methods:
+
- Since the list of objects is dynamically constructed (and might very well be
different when retrying due to hitting the -EDEADLK die condition) there's
no need to keep any object on a persistent list when it's not locked. We can
@@ -260,17 +264,17 @@ any interface misuse for these cases.
Also, method 3 can't fail the lock acquisition step since it doesn't return
-EALREADY. Of course this would be different when using the _interruptible
-variants, but that's outside of the scope of these examples here.
+variants, but that's outside of the scope of these examples here::
-struct obj {
+ struct obj {
struct ww_mutex ww_mutex;
struct list_head locked_list;
-};
+ };
-static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
+ static DEFINE_WW_CLASS(ww_class);
-void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
-{
+ void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
+ {
struct obj *entry, *temp;
list_for_each_entry_safe (entry, temp, list, locked_list) {
@@ -279,15 +283,15 @@ void __unlock_objs(struct list_head *list)
list_del(&entry->locked_list);
ww_mutex_unlock(entry->ww_mutex)
}
-}
+ }
-void lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void lock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
struct obj *obj;
ww_acquire_init(ctx, &ww_class);
-retry:
+ retry:
/* re-init loop start state */
loop {
/* magic code which walks over a graph and decides which objects
@@ -312,13 +316,13 @@ retry:
ww_acquire_done(ctx);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
-{
+ void unlock_objs(struct list_head *list, struct ww_acquire_ctx *ctx)
+ {
__unlock_objs(list);
ww_acquire_fini(ctx);
-}
+ }
Method 4: Only lock one single objects. In that case deadlock detection and
prevention is obviously overkill, since with grabbing just one lock you can't
@@ -329,11 +333,14 @@ Implementation Details
----------------------
Design:
+^^^^^^^
+
ww_mutex currently encapsulates a struct mutex, this means no extra overhead for
normal mutex locks, which are far more common. As such there is only a small
increase in code size if wait/wound mutexes are not used.
We maintain the following invariants for the wait list:
+
(1) Waiters with an acquire context are sorted by stamp order; waiters
without an acquire context are interspersed in FIFO order.
(2) For Wait-Die, among waiters with contexts, only the first one can have
@@ -355,6 +362,8 @@ Design:
therefore be directed towards the uncontended cases.
Lockdep:
+^^^^^^^^
+
Special care has been taken to warn for as many cases of api abuse
as possible. Some common api abuses will be caught with
CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, but CONFIG_PROVE_LOCKING is recommended.
@@ -379,5 +388,6 @@ Lockdep:
having called ww_acquire_fini on the first.
- 'normal' deadlocks that can occur.
-FIXME: Update this section once we have the TASK_DEADLOCK task state flag magic
-implemented.
+FIXME:
+ Update this section once we have the TASK_DEADLOCK task state flag magic
+ implemented.
--
2.20.1
In order to be able to add it into a doc book, we need first
convert it to ReST.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt | 110 ++++++++++++++++++----------------
1 file changed, 57 insertions(+), 53 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt b/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt
index fc2fe4b18655..c93a9c6cd878 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
- NVMEM SUBSYSTEM
- Srinivas Kandagatla <[email protected]>
+===============
+NVMEM Subsystem
+===============
+
+ Srinivas Kandagatla <[email protected]>
This document explains the NVMEM Framework along with the APIs provided,
and how to use it.
@@ -40,54 +43,54 @@ nvmem_device pointer.
nvmem_unregister(nvmem) is used to unregister a previously registered provider.
-For example, a simple qfprom case:
+For example, a simple qfprom case::
-static struct nvmem_config econfig = {
+ static struct nvmem_config econfig = {
.name = "qfprom",
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
-};
+ };
-static int qfprom_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
-{
+ static int qfprom_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
+ {
...
econfig.dev = &pdev->dev;
nvmem = nvmem_register(&econfig);
...
-}
+ }
It is mandatory that the NVMEM provider has a regmap associated with its
struct device. Failure to do would return error code from nvmem_register().
Users of board files can define and register nvmem cells using the
-nvmem_cell_table struct:
+nvmem_cell_table struct::
-static struct nvmem_cell_info foo_nvmem_cells[] = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_info foo_nvmem_cells[] = {
{
.name = "macaddr",
.offset = 0x7f00,
.bytes = ETH_ALEN,
}
-};
+ };
-static struct nvmem_cell_table foo_nvmem_cell_table = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_table foo_nvmem_cell_table = {
.nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom",
.cells = foo_nvmem_cells,
.ncells = ARRAY_SIZE(foo_nvmem_cells),
-};
+ };
-nvmem_add_cell_table(&foo_nvmem_cell_table);
+ nvmem_add_cell_table(&foo_nvmem_cell_table);
Additionally it is possible to create nvmem cell lookup entries and register
-them with the nvmem framework from machine code as shown in the example below:
+them with the nvmem framework from machine code as shown in the example below::
-static struct nvmem_cell_lookup foo_nvmem_lookup = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_lookup foo_nvmem_lookup = {
.nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom",
.cell_name = "macaddr",
.dev_id = "foo_mac.0",
.con_id = "mac-address",
-};
+ };
-nvmem_add_cell_lookups(&foo_nvmem_lookup, 1);
+ nvmem_add_cell_lookups(&foo_nvmem_lookup, 1);
NVMEM Consumers
+++++++++++++++
@@ -99,43 +102,43 @@ read from and to NVMEM.
=================================
NVMEM cells are the data entries/fields in the NVMEM.
-The NVMEM framework provides 3 APIs to read/write NVMEM cells.
+The NVMEM framework provides 3 APIs to read/write NVMEM cells::
-struct nvmem_cell *nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-struct nvmem_cell *devm_nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_cell *nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_cell *devm_nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void *nvmem_cell_read(struct nvmem_cell *cell, ssize_t *len);
-int nvmem_cell_write(struct nvmem_cell *cell, void *buf, ssize_t len);
+ void *nvmem_cell_read(struct nvmem_cell *cell, ssize_t *len);
+ int nvmem_cell_write(struct nvmem_cell *cell, void *buf, ssize_t len);
-*nvmem_cell_get() apis will get a reference to nvmem cell for a given id,
+`*nvmem_cell_get()` apis will get a reference to nvmem cell for a given id,
and nvmem_cell_read/write() can then read or write to the cell.
-Once the usage of the cell is finished the consumer should call *nvmem_cell_put()
-to free all the allocation memory for the cell.
+Once the usage of the cell is finished the consumer should call
+`*nvmem_cell_put()` to free all the allocation memory for the cell.
4. Direct NVMEM device based consumer APIs
==========================================
In some instances it is necessary to directly read/write the NVMEM.
-To facilitate such consumers NVMEM framework provides below apis.
+To facilitate such consumers NVMEM framework provides below apis::
-struct nvmem_device *nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-struct nvmem_device *devm_nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev,
+ struct nvmem_device *nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_device *devm_nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev,
const char *name);
-void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
-int nvmem_device_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
+ void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ int nvmem_device_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
size_t bytes, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
+ int nvmem_device_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
size_t bytes, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_cell_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
+ int nvmem_device_cell_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_cell_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
+ int nvmem_device_cell_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf);
Before the consumers can read/write NVMEM directly, it should get hold
-of nvmem_controller from one of the *nvmem_device_get() api.
+of nvmem_controller from one of the `*nvmem_device_get()` api.
The difference between these apis and cell based apis is that these apis always
take nvmem_device as parameter.
@@ -145,12 +148,12 @@ take nvmem_device as parameter.
When a consumer no longer needs the NVMEM, it has to release the reference
to the NVMEM it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section.
-The NVMEM framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the NVMEM.
+The NVMEM framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the NVMEM::
-void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
-void devm_nvmem_device_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ void devm_nvmem_device_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the NVMEM and
devm_nvmem_cell_put and devm_nvmem_device_put destroys the devres associated
@@ -162,20 +165,21 @@ Userspace
6. Userspace binary interface
==============================
-Userspace can read/write the raw NVMEM file located at
-/sys/bus/nvmem/devices/*/nvmem
+Userspace can read/write the raw NVMEM file located at::
-ex:
+ /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/*/nvmem
-hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem
+ex::
-0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
-*
-00000a0 db10 2240 0000 e000 0c00 0c00 0000 0c00
-0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
-...
-*
-0001000
+ hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem
+
+ 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
+ *
+ 00000a0 db10 2240 0000 e000 0c00 0c00 0000 0c00
+ 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
+ ...
+ *
+ 0001000
7. DeviceTree Binding
=====================
--
2.20.1
The kbuild documentation clearly shows that the documents
there are written at different times: some use markdown,
some use their own peculiar logic to split sections.
Convert everything to ReST without affecting too much
the author's style and avoiding adding uneeded markups.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 119 ++--
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt | 232 ++++----
.../kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt | 136 +++--
Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | 518 +++++++++++-------
Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt | 166 +++---
7 files changed, 720 insertions(+), 493 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt
index f0153adb95e2..1ab7294e41ac 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================================
Exporting kernel headers for use by userspace
=============================================
@@ -22,14 +23,14 @@ older kernel.
The "make headers_install" command can be run in the top level directory of the
kernel source code (or using a standard out-of-tree build). It takes two
-optional arguments:
+optional arguments::
make headers_install ARCH=i386 INSTALL_HDR_PATH=/usr
ARCH indicates which architecture to produce headers for, and defaults to the
current architecture. The linux/asm directory of the exported kernel headers
is platform-specific, to see a complete list of supported architectures use
-the command:
+the command::
ls -d include/asm-* | sed 's/.*-//'
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
index 8a3830b39c7d..ef6298ba4410 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
@@ -1,96 +1,108 @@
+======
+Kbuild
+======
+
+
Output files
+============
modules.order
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
This file records the order in which modules appear in Makefiles. This
is used by modprobe to deterministically resolve aliases that match
multiple modules.
modules.builtin
---------------------------------------------------
+---------------
This file lists all modules that are built into the kernel. This is used
by modprobe to not fail when trying to load something builtin.
Environment variables
+=====================
KCPPFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+---------
Additional options to pass when preprocessing. The preprocessing options
will be used in all cases where kbuild does preprocessing including
building C files and assembler files.
KAFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
Additional options to the assembler (for built-in and modules).
AFLAGS_MODULE
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Additional module specific options to use for $(AS).
AFLAGS_KERNEL
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Additional options for $(AS) when used for assembler
code for code that is compiled as built-in.
KCFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
Additional options to the C compiler (for built-in and modules).
CFLAGS_KERNEL
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Additional options for $(CC) when used to compile
code that is compiled as built-in.
CFLAGS_MODULE
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Additional module specific options to use for $(CC).
LDFLAGS_MODULE
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------
Additional options used for $(LD) when linking modules.
HOSTCFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+----------
Additional flags to be passed to $(HOSTCC) when building host programs.
HOSTCXXFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+------------
Additional flags to be passed to $(HOSTCXX) when building host programs.
HOSTLDFLAGS
---------------------------------------------------
+-----------
Additional flags to be passed when linking host programs.
HOSTLDLIBS
---------------------------------------------------
+----------
Additional libraries to link against when building host programs.
KBUILD_KCONFIG
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------
Set the top-level Kconfig file to the value of this environment
variable. The default name is "Kconfig".
KBUILD_VERBOSE
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------
Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assigned same values as "V=...".
+
See make help for the full list.
+
Setting "V=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_VERBOSE.
KBUILD_EXTMOD
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Set the directory to look for the kernel source when building external
modules.
+
Setting "M=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_EXTMOD.
KBUILD_OUTPUT
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Specify the output directory when building the kernel.
+
The output directory can also be specified using "O=...".
+
Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT.
KBUILD_DEBARCH
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------
For the deb-pkg target, allows overriding the normal heuristics deployed by
deb-pkg. Normally deb-pkg attempts to guess the right architecture based on
the UTS_MACHINE variable, and on some architectures also the kernel config.
@@ -98,44 +110,48 @@ The value of KBUILD_DEBARCH is assumed (not checked) to be a valid Debian
architecture.
ARCH
---------------------------------------------------
+----
Set ARCH to the architecture to be built.
+
In most cases the name of the architecture is the same as the
directory name found in the arch/ directory.
+
But some architectures such as x86 and sparc have aliases.
-x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit
-sh: sh for 32 bit, sh64 for 64 bit
-sparc: sparc32 for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit
+
+- x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit
+- sh: sh for 32 bit, sh64 for 64 bit
+- sparc: sparc32 for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit
CROSS_COMPILE
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Specify an optional fixed part of the binutils filename.
CROSS_COMPILE can be a part of the filename or the full path.
CROSS_COMPILE is also used for ccache in some setups.
CF
---------------------------------------------------
+--
Additional options for sparse.
-CF is often used on the command-line like this:
+
+CF is often used on the command-line like this::
make CF=-Wbitwise C=2
INSTALL_PATH
---------------------------------------------------
+------------
INSTALL_PATH specifies where to place the updated kernel and system map
images. Default is /boot, but you can set it to other values.
INSTALLKERNEL
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------
Install script called when using "make install".
The default name is "installkernel".
The script will be called with the following arguments:
- $1 - kernel version
- $2 - kernel image file
- $3 - kernel map file
- $4 - default install path (use root directory if blank)
+ - $1 - kernel version
+ - $2 - kernel image file
+ - $3 - kernel map file
+ - $4 - default install path (use root directory if blank)
The implementation of "make install" is architecture specific
and it may differ from the above.
@@ -144,32 +160,33 @@ INSTALLKERNEL is provided to enable the possibility to
specify a custom installer when cross compiling a kernel.
MODLIB
---------------------------------------------------
+------
Specify where to install modules.
-The default value is:
+The default value is::
$(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)
The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
INSTALL_MOD_PATH
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------
INSTALL_MOD_PATH specifies a prefix to MODLIB for module directory
relocations required by build roots. This is not defined in the
makefile but the argument can be passed to make if needed.
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
---------------------------------------------------
+-----------------
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be
stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then
the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise,
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the options to the strip command.
INSTALL_HDR_PATH
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------
INSTALL_HDR_PATH specifies where to install user space headers when
executing "make headers_*".
-The default value is:
+
+The default value is::
$(objtree)/usr
@@ -179,65 +196,65 @@ The output directory is often set using "O=..." on the commandline.
The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
KBUILD_SIGN_PIN
---------------------------------------------------
+---------------
This variable allows a passphrase or PIN to be passed to the sign-file
utility when signing kernel modules, if the private key requires such.
KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------------
KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN can be set to avoid errors in case of undefined
symbols in the final module linking stage. It changes such errors
into warnings.
KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------------
KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL can be set to skip the final link of modules.
This is solely useful to speed up test compiles.
KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------------
For modules that use symbols from other modules.
See more details in modules.txt.
ALLSOURCE_ARCHS
---------------------------------------------------
+---------------
For tags/TAGS/cscope targets, you can specify more than one arch
-to be included in the databases, separated by blank space. E.g.:
+to be included in the databases, separated by blank space. E.g.::
$ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS="x86 mips arm" tags
-To get all available archs you can also specify all. E.g.:
+To get all available archs you can also specify all. E.g.::
$ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS=all tags
KBUILD_ENABLE_EXTRA_GCC_CHECKS
---------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------
If enabled over the make command line with "W=1", it turns on additional
gcc -W... options for more extensive build-time checking.
KBUILD_BUILD_TIMESTAMP
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------------
Setting this to a date string overrides the timestamp used in the
UTS_VERSION definition (uname -v in the running kernel). The value has to
be a string that can be passed to date -d. The default value
is the output of the date command at one point during build.
KBUILD_BUILD_USER, KBUILD_BUILD_HOST
---------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------
These two variables allow to override the user@host string displayed during
boot and in /proc/version. The default value is the output of the commands
whoami and host, respectively.
KBUILD_LDS
---------------------------------------------------
+----------
The linker script with full path. Assigned by the top-level Makefile.
KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------------
All object files for vmlinux. They are linked to vmlinux in the same
order as listed in KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS.
KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------------
All .a "lib" files for vmlinux. KBUILD_VMLINUX_OBJS and KBUILD_VMLINUX_LIBS
together specify all the object files used to link vmlinux.
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
index 864e740811da..2bc8a7803365 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
+================
+Kconfig Language
+================
+
Introduction
------------
The configuration database is a collection of configuration options
-organized in a tree structure:
+organized in a tree structure::
+- Code maturity level options
| +- Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
@@ -25,9 +29,9 @@ Menu entries
------------
Most entries define a config option; all other entries help to organize
-them. A single configuration option is defined like this:
+them. A single configuration option is defined like this::
-config MODVERSIONS
+ config MODVERSIONS
bool "Set version information on all module symbols"
depends on MODULES
help
@@ -52,10 +56,12 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
Every config option must have a type. There are only two basic types:
tristate and string; the other types are based on these two. The type
definition optionally accepts an input prompt, so these two examples
- are equivalent:
+ are equivalent::
bool "Networking support"
- and
+
+ and::
+
bool
prompt "Networking support"
@@ -98,8 +104,10 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
d) Hardware or infrastructure that everybody expects, such as CONFIG_NET
or CONFIG_BLOCK. These are rare exceptions.
-- type definition + default value:
+- type definition + default value::
+
"def_bool"/"def_tristate" <expr> ["if" <expr>]
+
This is a shorthand notation for a type definition plus a value.
Optionally dependencies for this default value can be added with "if".
@@ -107,11 +115,13 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
This defines a dependency for this menu entry. If multiple
dependencies are defined, they are connected with '&&'. Dependencies
are applied to all other options within this menu entry (which also
- accept an "if" expression), so these two examples are equivalent:
+ accept an "if" expression), so these two examples are equivalent::
bool "foo" if BAR
default y if BAR
- and
+
+ and::
+
depends on BAR
bool "foo"
default y
@@ -124,6 +134,7 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
times, the limit is set to the largest selection.
Reverse dependencies can only be used with boolean or tristate
symbols.
+
Note:
select should be used with care. select will force
a symbol to a value without visiting the dependencies.
@@ -139,24 +150,26 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax).
symbol except that the "implied" symbol's value may still be set to n
from a direct dependency or with a visible prompt.
- Given the following example:
+ Given the following example::
- config FOO
+ config FOO
tristate
imply BAZ
- config BAZ
+ config BAZ
tristate
depends on BAR
The following values are possible:
+ === === ============= ==============
FOO BAR BAZ's default choice for BAZ
- --- --- ------------- --------------
+ === === ============= ==============
n y n N/m/y
m y m M/y/n
y y y Y/n
y n * N
+ === === ============= ==============
This is useful e.g. with multiple drivers that want to indicate their
ability to hook into a secondary subsystem while allowing the user to
@@ -208,9 +221,9 @@ Menu dependencies
Dependencies define the visibility of a menu entry and can also reduce
the input range of tristate symbols. The tristate logic used in the
expressions uses one more state than normal boolean logic to express the
-module state. Dependency expressions have the following syntax:
+module state. Dependency expressions have the following syntax::
-<expr> ::= <symbol> (1)
+ <expr> ::= <symbol> (1)
<symbol> '=' <symbol> (2)
<symbol> '!=' <symbol> (3)
<symbol1> '<' <symbol2> (4)
@@ -222,7 +235,7 @@ module state. Dependency expressions have the following syntax:
<expr> '&&' <expr> (7)
<expr> '||' <expr> (8)
-Expressions are listed in decreasing order of precedence.
+Expressions are listed in decreasing order of precedence.
(1) Convert the symbol into an expression. Boolean and tristate symbols
are simply converted into the respective expression values. All
@@ -255,15 +268,15 @@ Menu structure
--------------
The position of a menu entry in the tree is determined in two ways. First
-it can be specified explicitly:
+it can be specified explicitly::
-menu "Network device support"
+ menu "Network device support"
depends on NET
-config NETDEVICES
+ config NETDEVICES
...
-endmenu
+ endmenu
All entries within the "menu" ... "endmenu" block become a submenu of
"Network device support". All subentries inherit the dependencies from
@@ -275,17 +288,18 @@ dependencies. If a menu entry somehow depends on the previous entry, it
can be made a submenu of it. First, the previous (parent) symbol must
be part of the dependency list and then one of these two conditions
must be true:
+
- the child entry must become invisible, if the parent is set to 'n'
-- the child entry must only be visible, if the parent is visible
+- the child entry must only be visible, if the parent is visible::
-config MODULES
+ config MODULES
bool "Enable loadable module support"
-config MODVERSIONS
+ config MODVERSIONS
bool "Set version information on all module symbols"
depends on MODULES
-comment "module support disabled"
+ comment "module support disabled"
depends on !MODULES
MODVERSIONS directly depends on MODULES, this means it's only visible if
@@ -299,6 +313,7 @@ Kconfig syntax
The configuration file describes a series of menu entries, where every
line starts with a keyword (except help texts). The following keywords
end a menu entry:
+
- config
- menuconfig
- choice/endchoice
@@ -306,17 +321,17 @@ end a menu entry:
- menu/endmenu
- if/endif
- source
+
The first five also start the definition of a menu entry.
-config:
-
+config::
"config" <symbol>
<config options>
This defines a config symbol <symbol> and accepts any of above
attributes as options.
-menuconfig:
+menuconfig::
"menuconfig" <symbol>
<config options>
@@ -325,43 +340,43 @@ hint to front ends, that all suboptions should be displayed as a
separate list of options. To make sure all the suboptions will really
show up under the menuconfig entry and not outside of it, every item
from the <config options> list must depend on the menuconfig symbol.
-In practice, this is achieved by using one of the next two constructs:
+In practice, this is achieved by using one of the next two constructs::
-(1):
-menuconfig M
-if M
- config C1
- config C2
-endif
+ (1):
+ menuconfig M
+ if M
+ config C1
+ config C2
+ endif
-(2):
-menuconfig M
-config C1
- depends on M
-config C2
- depends on M
+ (2):
+ menuconfig M
+ config C1
+ depends on M
+ config C2
+ depends on M
In the following examples (3) and (4), C1 and C2 still have the M
dependency, but will not appear under menuconfig M anymore, because
-of C0, which doesn't depend on M:
+of C0, which doesn't depend on M::
-(3):
-menuconfig M
- config C0
-if M
- config C1
- config C2
-endif
+ (3):
+ menuconfig M
+ config C0
+ if M
+ config C1
+ config C2
+ endif
-(4):
-menuconfig M
-config C0
-config C1
- depends on M
-config C2
- depends on M
+ (4):
+ menuconfig M
+ config C0
+ config C1
+ depends on M
+ config C2
+ depends on M
-choices:
+choices::
"choice" [symbol]
<choice options>
@@ -387,7 +402,7 @@ definitions of that choice. If a [symbol] is associated to the choice,
then you may define the same choice (i.e. with the same entries) in another
place.
-comment:
+comment::
"comment" <prompt>
<comment options>
@@ -396,7 +411,7 @@ This defines a comment which is displayed to the user during the
configuration process and is also echoed to the output files. The only
possible options are dependencies.
-menu:
+menu::
"menu" <prompt>
<menu options>
@@ -407,7 +422,7 @@ This defines a menu block, see "Menu structure" above for more
information. The only possible options are dependencies and "visible"
attributes.
-if:
+if::
"if" <expr>
<if block>
@@ -416,13 +431,13 @@ if:
This defines an if block. The dependency expression <expr> is appended
to all enclosed menu entries.
-source:
+source::
"source" <prompt>
This reads the specified configuration file. This file is always parsed.
-mainmenu:
+mainmenu::
"mainmenu" <prompt>
@@ -452,20 +467,21 @@ that is defined in a common Kconfig file and selected by the relevant
architectures.
An example is the generic IOMAP functionality.
-We would in lib/Kconfig see:
+We would in lib/Kconfig see::
-# Generic IOMAP is used to ...
-config HAVE_GENERIC_IOMAP
+ # Generic IOMAP is used to ...
+ config HAVE_GENERIC_IOMAP
-config GENERIC_IOMAP
+ config GENERIC_IOMAP
depends on HAVE_GENERIC_IOMAP && FOO
-And in lib/Makefile we would see:
-obj-$(CONFIG_GENERIC_IOMAP) += iomap.o
+And in lib/Makefile we would see::
-For each architecture using the generic IOMAP functionality we would see:
+ obj-$(CONFIG_GENERIC_IOMAP) += iomap.o
-config X86
+For each architecture using the generic IOMAP functionality we would see::
+
+ config X86
select ...
select HAVE_GENERIC_IOMAP
select ...
@@ -484,25 +500,25 @@ Adding features that need compiler support
There are several features that need compiler support. The recommended way
to describe the dependency on the compiler feature is to use "depends on"
-followed by a test macro.
+followed by a test macro::
-config STACKPROTECTOR
+ config STACKPROTECTOR
bool "Stack Protector buffer overflow detection"
depends on $(cc-option,-fstack-protector)
...
If you need to expose a compiler capability to makefiles and/or C source files,
-CC_HAS_ is the recommended prefix for the config option.
+`CC_HAS_` is the recommended prefix for the config option::
-config CC_HAS_STACKPROTECTOR_NONE
+ config CC_HAS_STACKPROTECTOR_NONE
def_bool $(cc-option,-fno-stack-protector)
Build as module only
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
To restrict a component build to module-only, qualify its config symbol
-with "depends on m". E.g.:
+with "depends on m". E.g.::
-config FOO
+ config FOO
depends on BAR && m
limits FOO to module (=m) or disabled (=n).
@@ -529,18 +545,18 @@ Simple Kconfig recursive issue
Read: Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-01
-Test with:
+Test with::
-make KBUILD_KCONFIG=Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-01 allnoconfig
+ make KBUILD_KCONFIG=Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-01 allnoconfig
Cumulative Kconfig recursive issue
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Read: Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-02
-Test with:
+Test with::
-make KBUILD_KCONFIG=Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-02 allnoconfig
+ make KBUILD_KCONFIG=Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-02 allnoconfig
Practical solutions to kconfig recursive issue
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -551,7 +567,9 @@ historical issues resolved through these different solutions.
a) Remove any superfluous "select FOO" or "depends on FOO"
b) Match dependency semantics:
+
b1) Swap all "select FOO" to "depends on FOO" or,
+
b2) Swap all "depends on FOO" to "select FOO"
The resolution to a) can be tested with the sample Kconfig file
@@ -566,8 +584,9 @@ Documentation/kbuild/Kconfig.recursion-issue-02.
Below is a list of examples of prior fixes for these types of recursive issues;
all errors appear to involve one or more select's and one or more "depends on".
+============ ===================================
commit fix
-====== ===
+============ ===================================
06b718c01208 select A -> depends on A
c22eacfe82f9 depends on A -> depends on B
6a91e854442c select A -> depends on A
@@ -590,6 +609,7 @@ d9f9ab51e55e select A -> depends on A
0c51a4d8abd6 depends on A -> select A (3)
e98062ed6dc4 select A -> depends on A (3)
91e5d284a7f1 select A -> (null)
+============ ===================================
(1) Partial (or no) quote of error.
(2) That seems to be the gist of that fix.
@@ -616,11 +636,11 @@ Semantics of Kconfig
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The use of Kconfig is broad, Linux is now only one of Kconfig's users:
-one study has completed a broad analysis of Kconfig use in 12 projects [0].
+one study has completed a broad analysis of Kconfig use in 12 projects [0]_.
Despite its widespread use, and although this document does a reasonable job
in documenting basic Kconfig syntax a more precise definition of Kconfig
semantics is welcomed. One project deduced Kconfig semantics through
-the use of the xconfig configurator [1]. Work should be done to confirm if
+the use of the xconfig configurator [1]_. Work should be done to confirm if
the deduced semantics matches our intended Kconfig design goals.
Having well defined semantics can be useful for tools for practical
@@ -628,42 +648,42 @@ evaluation of depenencies, for instance one such use known case was work to
express in boolean abstraction of the inferred semantics of Kconfig to
translate Kconfig logic into boolean formulas and run a SAT solver on this to
find dead code / features (always inactive), 114 dead features were found in
-Linux using this methodology [1] (Section 8: Threats to validity).
+Linux using this methodology [1]_ (Section 8: Threats to validity).
Confirming this could prove useful as Kconfig stands as one of the the leading
-industrial variability modeling languages [1] [2]. Its study would help
+industrial variability modeling languages [1]_ [2]_. Its study would help
evaluate practical uses of such languages, their use was only theoretical
and real world requirements were not well understood. As it stands though
only reverse engineering techniques have been used to deduce semantics from
-variability modeling languages such as Kconfig [3].
+variability modeling languages such as Kconfig [3]_.
-[0] http://www.eng.uwaterloo.ca/~shshe/kconfig_semantics.pdf
-[1] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/vm-2013-berger.pdf
-[2] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/ase241-berger_0.pdf
-[3] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/icse2011.pdf
+.. [0] http://www.eng.uwaterloo.ca/~shshe/kconfig_semantics.pdf
+.. [1] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/vm-2013-berger.pdf
+.. [2] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/ase241-berger_0.pdf
+.. [3] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/icse2011.pdf
Full SAT solver for Kconfig
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Although SAT solvers [0] haven't yet been used by Kconfig directly, as noted in
-the previous subsection, work has been done however to express in boolean
+Although SAT solvers [4]_ haven't yet been used by Kconfig directly, as noted
+in the previous subsection, work has been done however to express in boolean
abstraction the inferred semantics of Kconfig to translate Kconfig logic into
-boolean formulas and run a SAT solver on it [1]. Another known related project
-is CADOS [2] (former VAMOS [3]) and the tools, mainly undertaker [4], which has
-been introduced first with [5]. The basic concept of undertaker is to exract
-variability models from Kconfig, and put them together with a propositional
-formula extracted from CPP #ifdefs and build-rules into a SAT solver in order
-to find dead code, dead files, and dead symbols. If using a SAT solver is
-desirable on Kconfig one approach would be to evaluate repurposing such efforts
-somehow on Kconfig. There is enough interest from mentors of existing projects
-to not only help advise how to integrate this work upstream but also help
-maintain it long term. Interested developers should visit:
+boolean formulas and run a SAT solver on it [5]_. Another known related project
+is CADOS [6]_ (former VAMOS [7]_) and the tools, mainly undertaker [8]_, which
+has been introduced first with [9]_. The basic concept of undertaker is to
+exract variability models from Kconfig, and put them together with a
+propositional formula extracted from CPP #ifdefs and build-rules into a SAT
+solver in order to find dead code, dead files, and dead symbols. If using a SAT
+solver is desirable on Kconfig one approach would be to evaluate repurposing
+such efforts somehow on Kconfig. There is enough interest from mentors of
+existing projects to not only help advise how to integrate this work upstream
+but also help maintain it long term. Interested developers should visit:
http://kernelnewbies.org/KernelProjects/kconfig-sat
-[0] http://www.cs.cornell.edu/~sabhar/chapters/SATSolvers-KR-Handbook.pdf
-[1] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/vm-2013-berger.pdf
-[2] https://cados.cs.fau.de
-[3] https://vamos.cs.fau.de
-[4] https://undertaker.cs.fau.de
-[5] https://www4.cs.fau.de/Publications/2011/tartler_11_eurosys.pdf
+.. [4] http://www.cs.cornell.edu/~sabhar/chapters/SATSolvers-KR-Handbook.pdf
+.. [5] http://gsd.uwaterloo.ca/sites/default/files/vm-2013-berger.pdf
+.. [6] https://cados.cs.fau.de
+.. [7] https://vamos.cs.fau.de
+.. [8] https://undertaker.cs.fau.de
+.. [9] https://www4.cs.fau.de/Publications/2011/tartler_11_eurosys.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt
index 07da2ea68dce..35b3263b7e40 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+======================
+Kconfig macro language
+======================
+
Concept
-------
@@ -7,7 +11,7 @@ targets and prerequisites. The other is a macro language for performing textual
substitution.
There is clear distinction between the two language stages. For example, you
-can write a makefile like follows:
+can write a makefile like follows::
APP := foo
SRC := foo.c
@@ -17,7 +21,7 @@ can write a makefile like follows:
$(CC) -o $(APP) $(SRC)
The macro language replaces the variable references with their expanded form,
-and handles as if the source file were input like follows:
+and handles as if the source file were input like follows::
foo: foo.c
gcc -o foo foo.c
@@ -26,7 +30,7 @@ Then, Make analyzes the dependency graph and determines the targets to be
updated.
The idea is quite similar in Kconfig - it is possible to describe a Kconfig
-file like this:
+file like this::
CC := gcc
@@ -34,7 +38,7 @@ file like this:
def_bool $(shell, $(srctree)/scripts/gcc-check-foo.sh $(CC))
The macro language in Kconfig processes the source file into the following
-intermediate:
+intermediate::
config CC_HAS_FOO
def_bool y
@@ -69,7 +73,7 @@ variable. The righthand side of += is expanded immediately if the lefthand
side was originally defined as a simple variable. Otherwise, its evaluation is
deferred.
-The variable reference can take parameters, in the following form:
+The variable reference can take parameters, in the following form::
$(name,arg1,arg2,arg3)
@@ -141,7 +145,7 @@ Make vs Kconfig
Kconfig adopts Make-like macro language, but the function call syntax is
slightly different.
-A function call in Make looks like this:
+A function call in Make looks like this::
$(func-name arg1,arg2,arg3)
@@ -149,14 +153,14 @@ The function name and the first argument are separated by at least one
whitespace. Then, leading whitespaces are trimmed from the first argument,
while whitespaces in the other arguments are kept. You need to use a kind of
trick to start the first parameter with spaces. For example, if you want
-to make "info" function print " hello", you can write like follows:
+to make "info" function print " hello", you can write like follows::
empty :=
space := $(empty) $(empty)
$(info $(space)$(space)hello)
Kconfig uses only commas for delimiters, and keeps all whitespaces in the
-function call. Some people prefer putting a space after each comma delimiter:
+function call. Some people prefer putting a space after each comma delimiter::
$(func-name, arg1, arg2, arg3)
@@ -166,7 +170,7 @@ Make - for example, $(subst .c, .o, $(sources)) is a typical mistake; it
replaces ".c" with " .o".
In Make, a user-defined function is referenced by using a built-in function,
-'call', like this:
+'call', like this::
$(call my-func,arg1,arg2,arg3)
@@ -179,12 +183,12 @@ Likewise, $(info hello, world) prints "hello, world" to stdout. You could say
this is _useful_ inconsistency.
In Kconfig, for simpler implementation and grammatical consistency, commas that
-appear in the $( ) context are always delimiters. It means
+appear in the $( ) context are always delimiters. It means::
$(shell, echo hello, world)
is an error because it is passing two parameters where the 'shell' function
-accepts only one. To pass commas in arguments, you can use the following trick:
+accepts only one. To pass commas in arguments, you can use the following trick::
comma := ,
$(shell, echo hello$(comma) world)
@@ -195,7 +199,7 @@ Caveats
A variable (or function) cannot be expanded across tokens. So, you cannot use
a variable as a shorthand for an expression that consists of multiple tokens.
-The following works:
+The following works::
RANGE_MIN := 1
RANGE_MAX := 3
@@ -204,7 +208,7 @@ The following works:
int "foo"
range $(RANGE_MIN) $(RANGE_MAX)
-But, the following does not work:
+But, the following does not work::
RANGES := 1 3
@@ -213,7 +217,7 @@ But, the following does not work:
range $(RANGES)
A variable cannot be expanded to any keyword in Kconfig. The following does
-not work:
+not work::
MY_TYPE := tristate
@@ -223,7 +227,8 @@ not work:
Obviously from the design, $(shell command) is expanded in the textual
substitution phase. You cannot pass symbols to the 'shell' function.
-The following does not work as expected.
+
+The following does not work as expected::
config ENDIAN_FLAG
string
@@ -234,7 +239,7 @@ The following does not work as expected.
def_bool $(shell $(srctree)/scripts/gcc-check-flag ENDIAN_FLAG)
Instead, you can do like follows so that any function call is statically
-expanded.
+expanded::
config CC_HAS_ENDIAN_FLAG
bool
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
index 68c82914c0f3..88129af7e539 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,8 @@
-This file contains some assistance for using "make *config".
+===================
+Kconfig make config
+===================
+
+This file contains some assistance for using `make *config`.
Use "make help" to list all of the possible configuration targets.
@@ -6,9 +10,8 @@ The xconfig ('qconf'), menuconfig ('mconf'), and nconfig ('nconf')
programs also have embedded help text. Be sure to check that for
navigation, search, and other general help text.
-======================================================================
General
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
New kernel releases often introduce new config symbols. Often more
important, new kernel releases may rename config symbols. When
@@ -17,51 +20,55 @@ this happens, using a previously working .config file and running
for you, so you may find that you need to see what NEW kernel
symbols have been introduced.
-To see a list of new config symbols, use
+To see a list of new config symbols, use::
cp user/some/old.config .config
make listnewconfig
and the config program will list any new symbols, one per line.
-Alternatively, you can use the brute force method:
+Alternatively, you can use the brute force method::
make oldconfig
scripts/diffconfig .config.old .config | less
-______________________________________________________________________
-Environment variables for '*config'
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Environment variables for `*config`
KCONFIG_CONFIG
---------------------------------------------------
+--------------
This environment variable can be used to specify a default kernel config
file name to override the default name of ".config".
KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG
---------------------------------------------------
+-----------------------
If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not
break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else.
-CONFIG_
---------------------------------------------------
-If you set CONFIG_ in the environment, Kconfig will prefix all symbols
+`CONFIG_`
+---------
+If you set `CONFIG_` in the environment, Kconfig will prefix all symbols
with its value when saving the configuration, instead of using the default,
-"CONFIG_".
+`CONFIG_`.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
-______________________________________________________________________
Environment variables for '{allyes/allmod/allno/rand}config'
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG
---------------------------------------------------
+-----------------
(partially based on lkml email from/by Rob Landley, re: miniconfig)
+
--------------------------------------------------
+
The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can also
use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a filename
that contains config symbols that the user requires to be set to a
specific value. If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a filename where
-KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "" or KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "1", "make *config"
+KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "" or KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG == "1", `make *config`
checks for a file named "all{yes/mod/no/def/random}.config"
-(corresponding to the *config command that was used) for symbol values
+(corresponding to the `*config` command that was used) for symbol values
that are to be forced. If this file is not found, it checks for a
file named "all.config" to contain forced values.
@@ -74,43 +81,55 @@ This 'KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG' file is a config file which contains
(usually a subset of all) preset config symbols. These variable
settings are still subject to normal dependency checks.
-Examples:
+Examples::
+
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=custom-notebook.config make allnoconfig
-or
+
+or::
+
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config make allnoconfig
-or
+
+or::
+
make KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config allnoconfig
These examples will disable most options (allnoconfig) but enable or
disable the options that are explicitly listed in the specified
mini-config files.
-______________________________________________________________________
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Environment variables for 'randconfig'
KCONFIG_SEED
---------------------------------------------------
+------------
You can set this to the integer value used to seed the RNG, if you want
to somehow debug the behaviour of the kconfig parser/frontends.
If not set, the current time will be used.
KCONFIG_PROBABILITY
---------------------------------------------------
+-------------------
This variable can be used to skew the probabilities. This variable can
be unset or empty, or set to three different formats:
+
+ ======================= ================== =====================
KCONFIG_PROBABILITY y:n split y:m:n split
- -----------------------------------------------------------------
+ ======================= ================== =====================
unset or empty 50 : 50 33 : 33 : 34
N N : 100-N N/2 : N/2 : 100-N
[1] N:M N+M : 100-(N+M) N : M : 100-(N+M)
[2] N:M:L N : 100-N M : L : 100-(M+L)
+ ======================= ================== =====================
where N, M and L are integers (in base 10) in the range [0,100], and so
that:
+
[1] N+M is in the range [0,100]
+
[2] M+L is in the range [0,100]
-Examples:
+Examples::
+
KCONFIG_PROBABILITY=10
10% of booleans will be set to 'y', 90% to 'n'
5% of tristates will be set to 'y', 5% to 'm', 90% to 'n'
@@ -121,34 +140,36 @@ Examples:
10% of booleans will be set to 'y', 90% to 'n'
15% of tristates will be set to 'y', 15% to 'm', 70% to 'n'
-______________________________________________________________________
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Environment variables for 'syncconfig'
KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------------
If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
config updates (requires explicit updates).
KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
---------------------------------------------------
+------------------
This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
"auto.conf" file. Its default value is "include/config/auto.conf".
KCONFIG_TRISTATE
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------
This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
"tristate.conf" file. Its default value is "include/config/tristate.conf".
KCONFIG_AUTOHEADER
---------------------------------------------------
+------------------
This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
"autoconf.h" (header) file.
Its default value is "include/generated/autoconf.h".
-======================================================================
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
menuconfig
---------------------------------------------------
+----------
SEARCHING for CONFIG symbols
@@ -158,7 +179,8 @@ Searching in menuconfig:
names, so you have to know something close to what you are
looking for.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
/hotplug
This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug",
e.g., HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG.
@@ -166,48 +188,55 @@ Searching in menuconfig:
For search help, enter / followed by TAB-TAB (to highlight
<Help>) and Enter. This will tell you that you can also use
regular expressions (regexes) in the search string, so if you
- are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try
+ are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try::
/^hotplug
When searching, symbols are sorted thus:
+
- first, exact matches, sorted alphabetically (an exact match
is when the search matches the complete symbol name);
- then, other matches, sorted alphabetically.
+
For example: ^ATH.K matches:
+
ATH5K ATH9K ATH5K_AHB ATH5K_DEBUG [...] ATH6KL ATH6KL_DEBUG
[...] ATH9K_AHB ATH9K_BTCOEX_SUPPORT ATH9K_COMMON [...]
+
of which only ATH5K and ATH9K match exactly and so are sorted
first (and in alphabetical order), then come all other symbols,
sorted in alphabetical order.
-______________________________________________________________________
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
User interface options for 'menuconfig'
MENUCONFIG_COLOR
---------------------------------------------------
+----------------
It is possible to select different color themes using the variable
-MENUCONFIG_COLOR. To select a theme use:
+MENUCONFIG_COLOR. To select a theme use::
make MENUCONFIG_COLOR=<theme> menuconfig
-Available themes are:
- mono => selects colors suitable for monochrome displays
- blackbg => selects a color scheme with black background
- classic => theme with blue background. The classic look
- bluetitle => a LCD friendly version of classic. (default)
+Available themes are::
+
+ - mono => selects colors suitable for monochrome displays
+ - blackbg => selects a color scheme with black background
+ - classic => theme with blue background. The classic look
+ - bluetitle => a LCD friendly version of classic. (default)
MENUCONFIG_MODE
---------------------------------------------------
+---------------
This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree.
-Example:
+Example::
+
make MENUCONFIG_MODE=single_menu menuconfig
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
-======================================================================
nconfig
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
nconfig is an alternate text-based configurator. It lists function
keys across the bottom of the terminal (window) that execute commands.
@@ -231,16 +260,16 @@ Searching in nconfig:
given string or regular expression (regex).
NCONFIG_MODE
---------------------------------------------------
+------------
This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree.
-Example:
+Example::
make NCONFIG_MODE=single_menu nconfig
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
-======================================================================
xconfig
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
Searching in xconfig:
@@ -260,13 +289,12 @@ Searching in xconfig:
to return to the main menu.
-======================================================================
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+
gconfig
---------------------------------------------------
+-------
Searching in gconfig:
There is no search command in gconfig. However, gconfig does
have several different viewing choices, modes, and options.
-
-###
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
index 03c065855eaf..9274cdcc9bd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
+======================
Linux Kernel Makefiles
+======================
This document describes the Linux kernel Makefiles.
-=== Table of Contents
+.. Table of Contents
=== 1 Overview
=== 2 Who does what
@@ -54,9 +56,10 @@ This document describes the Linux kernel Makefiles.
=== 10 Credits
=== 11 TODO
-=== 1 Overview
+1 Overview
+==========
-The Makefiles have five parts:
+The Makefiles have five parts::
Makefile the top Makefile.
.config the kernel configuration file.
@@ -85,7 +88,8 @@ scripts/Makefile.* contains all the definitions/rules etc. that
are used to build the kernel based on the kbuild makefiles.
-=== 2 Who does what
+2 Who does what
+===============
People have four different relationships with the kernel Makefiles.
@@ -110,7 +114,8 @@ These people need to know about all aspects of the kernel Makefiles.
This document is aimed towards normal developers and arch developers.
-=== 3 The kbuild files
+3 The kbuild files
+==================
Most Makefiles within the kernel are kbuild Makefiles that use the
kbuild infrastructure. This chapter introduces the syntax used in the
@@ -122,7 +127,8 @@ file will be used.
Section 3.1 "Goal definitions" is a quick intro, further chapters provide
more details, with real examples.
---- 3.1 Goal definitions
+3.1 Goal definitions
+--------------------
Goal definitions are the main part (heart) of the kbuild Makefile.
These lines define the files to be built, any special compilation
@@ -130,7 +136,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
The most simple kbuild makefile contains one line:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
obj-y += foo.o
This tells kbuild that there is one object in that directory, named
@@ -139,14 +146,16 @@ more details, with real examples.
If foo.o shall be built as a module, the variable obj-m is used.
Therefore the following pattern is often used:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
obj-$(CONFIG_FOO) += foo.o
$(CONFIG_FOO) evaluates to either y (for built-in) or m (for module).
If CONFIG_FOO is neither y nor m, then the file will not be compiled
nor linked.
---- 3.2 Built-in object goals - obj-y
+3.2 Built-in object goals - obj-y
+---------------------------------
The kbuild Makefile specifies object files for vmlinux
in the $(obj-y) lists. These lists depend on the kernel
@@ -167,14 +176,16 @@ more details, with real examples.
order may e.g. change the order in which your SCSI
controllers are detected, and thus your disks are renumbered.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#drivers/isdn/i4l/Makefile
# Makefile for the kernel ISDN subsystem and device drivers.
# Each configuration option enables a list of files.
obj-$(CONFIG_ISDN_I4L) += isdn.o
obj-$(CONFIG_ISDN_PPP_BSDCOMP) += isdn_bsdcomp.o
---- 3.3 Loadable module goals - obj-m
+3.3 Loadable module goals - obj-m
+---------------------------------
$(obj-m) specifies object files which are built as loadable
kernel modules.
@@ -183,7 +194,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
files. In the case of one source file, the kbuild makefile
simply adds the file to $(obj-m).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#drivers/isdn/i4l/Makefile
obj-$(CONFIG_ISDN_PPP_BSDCOMP) += isdn_bsdcomp.o
@@ -195,7 +207,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
module from, so you have to tell it by setting a $(<module_name>-y)
variable.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#drivers/isdn/i4l/Makefile
obj-$(CONFIG_ISDN_I4L) += isdn.o
isdn-y := isdn_net_lib.o isdn_v110.o isdn_common.o
@@ -205,10 +218,11 @@ more details, with real examples.
"$(LD) -r" on the list of these files to generate isdn.o.
Due to kbuild recognizing $(<module_name>-y) for composite objects,
- you can use the value of a CONFIG_ symbol to optionally include an
+ you can use the value of a `CONFIG_` symbol to optionally include an
object file as part of a composite object.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#fs/ext2/Makefile
obj-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS) += ext2.o
ext2-y := balloc.o dir.o file.o ialloc.o inode.o ioctl.o \
@@ -225,12 +239,14 @@ more details, with real examples.
kbuild will build an ext2.o file for you out of the individual
parts and then link this into built-in.a, as you would expect.
---- 3.4 Objects which export symbols
+3.4 Objects which export symbols
+--------------------------------
No special notation is required in the makefiles for
modules exporting symbols.
---- 3.5 Library file goals - lib-y
+3.5 Library file goals - lib-y
+------------------------------
Objects listed with obj-* are used for modules, or
combined in a built-in.a for that specific directory.
@@ -247,18 +263,21 @@ more details, with real examples.
and to be part of a library. Therefore the same directory
may contain both a built-in.a and a lib.a file.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/lib/Makefile
lib-y := delay.o
This will create a library lib.a based on delay.o. For kbuild to
actually recognize that there is a lib.a being built, the directory
shall be listed in libs-y.
+
See also "6.4 List directories to visit when descending".
- Use of lib-y is normally restricted to lib/ and arch/*/lib.
+ Use of lib-y is normally restricted to `lib/` and `arch/*/lib`.
---- 3.6 Descending down in directories
+3.6 Descending down in directories
+----------------------------------
A Makefile is only responsible for building objects in its own
directory. Files in subdirectories should be taken care of by
@@ -270,7 +289,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
ext2 lives in a separate directory, and the Makefile present in fs/
tells kbuild to descend down using the following assignment.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#fs/Makefile
obj-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS) += ext2/
@@ -281,11 +301,12 @@ more details, with real examples.
the directory, it is the Makefile in the subdirectory that
specifies what is modular and what is built-in.
- It is good practice to use a CONFIG_ variable when assigning directory
+ It is good practice to use a `CONFIG_` variable when assigning directory
names. This allows kbuild to totally skip the directory if the
- corresponding CONFIG_ option is neither 'y' nor 'm'.
+ corresponding `CONFIG_` option is neither 'y' nor 'm'.
---- 3.7 Compilation flags
+3.7 Compilation flags
+---------------------
ccflags-y, asflags-y and ldflags-y
These three flags apply only to the kbuild makefile in which they
@@ -297,7 +318,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
ccflags-y specifies options for compiling with $(CC).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
# drivers/acpi/acpica/Makefile
ccflags-y := -Os -D_LINUX -DBUILDING_ACPICA
ccflags-$(CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG) += -DACPI_DEBUG_OUTPUT
@@ -308,13 +330,15 @@ more details, with real examples.
asflags-y specifies options for assembling with $(AS).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/sparc/kernel/Makefile
asflags-y := -ansi
ldflags-y specifies options for linking with $(LD).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/cris/boot/compressed/Makefile
ldflags-y += -T $(srctree)/$(src)/decompress_$(arch-y).lds
@@ -325,18 +349,19 @@ more details, with real examples.
Options specified using subdir-* are added to the commandline before
the options specified using the non-subdir variants.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
subdir-ccflags-y := -Werror
CFLAGS_$@, AFLAGS_$@
-
CFLAGS_$@ and AFLAGS_$@ only apply to commands in current
kbuild makefile.
$(CFLAGS_$@) specifies per-file options for $(CC). The $@
part has a literal value which specifies the file that it is for.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
# drivers/scsi/Makefile
CFLAGS_aha152x.o = -DAHA152X_STAT -DAUTOCONF
CFLAGS_gdth.o = # -DDEBUG_GDTH=2 -D__SERIAL__ -D__COM2__ \
@@ -347,24 +372,27 @@ more details, with real examples.
$(AFLAGS_$@) is a similar feature for source files in assembly
languages.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
# arch/arm/kernel/Makefile
AFLAGS_head.o := -DTEXT_OFFSET=$(TEXT_OFFSET)
AFLAGS_crunch-bits.o := -Wa,-mcpu=ep9312
AFLAGS_iwmmxt.o := -Wa,-mcpu=iwmmxt
---- 3.9 Dependency tracking
+3.9 Dependency tracking
+-----------------------
Kbuild tracks dependencies on the following:
- 1) All prerequisite files (both *.c and *.h)
- 2) CONFIG_ options used in all prerequisite files
+ 1) All prerequisite files (both `*.c` and `*.h`)
+ 2) `CONFIG_` options used in all prerequisite files
3) Command-line used to compile target
Thus, if you change an option to $(CC) all affected files will
be re-compiled.
---- 3.10 Special Rules
+3.10 Special Rules
+------------------
Special rules are used when the kbuild infrastructure does
not provide the required support. A typical example is
@@ -379,43 +407,47 @@ more details, with real examples.
Two variables are used when defining special rules:
- $(src)
- $(src) is a relative path which points to the directory
- where the Makefile is located. Always use $(src) when
- referring to files located in the src tree.
+ $(src)
+ $(src) is a relative path which points to the directory
+ where the Makefile is located. Always use $(src) when
+ referring to files located in the src tree.
- $(obj)
- $(obj) is a relative path which points to the directory
- where the target is saved. Always use $(obj) when
- referring to generated files.
+ $(obj)
+ $(obj) is a relative path which points to the directory
+ where the target is saved. Always use $(obj) when
+ referring to generated files.
+
+ Example::
- Example:
#drivers/scsi/Makefile
$(obj)/53c8xx_d.h: $(src)/53c7,8xx.scr $(src)/script_asm.pl
$(CPP) -DCHIP=810 - < $< | ... $(src)/script_asm.pl
- This is a special rule, following the normal syntax
- required by make.
- The target file depends on two prerequisite files. References
- to the target file are prefixed with $(obj), references
- to prerequisites are referenced with $(src) (because they are not
- generated files).
-
- $(kecho)
- echoing information to user in a rule is often a good practice
- but when execution "make -s" one does not expect to see any output
- except for warnings/errors.
- To support this kbuild defines $(kecho) which will echo out the
- text following $(kecho) to stdout except if "make -s" is used.
-
- Example:
+ This is a special rule, following the normal syntax
+ required by make.
+
+ The target file depends on two prerequisite files. References
+ to the target file are prefixed with $(obj), references
+ to prerequisites are referenced with $(src) (because they are not
+ generated files).
+
+ $(kecho)
+ echoing information to user in a rule is often a good practice
+ but when execution "make -s" one does not expect to see any output
+ except for warnings/errors.
+ To support this kbuild defines $(kecho) which will echo out the
+ text following $(kecho) to stdout except if "make -s" is used.
+
+ Example::
+
#arch/blackfin/boot/Makefile
$(obj)/vmImage: $(obj)/vmlinux.gz
$(call if_changed,uimage)
@$(kecho) 'Kernel: $@ is ready'
---- 3.11 $(CC) support functions
+3.11 $(CC) support functions
+----------------------------
The kernel may be built with several different versions of
$(CC), each supporting a unique set of features and options.
@@ -425,10 +457,11 @@ more details, with real examples.
as-option
as-option is used to check if $(CC) -- when used to compile
- assembler (*.S) files -- supports the given option. An optional
+ assembler (`*.S`) files -- supports the given option. An optional
second option may be specified if the first option is not supported.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/sh/Makefile
cflags-y += $(call as-option,-Wa$(comma)-isa=$(isa-y),)
@@ -442,7 +475,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
supports the given option. An optional second option may be
specified if first option are not supported.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/kernel/Makefile
vsyscall-flags += $(call cc-ldoption, -Wl$(comma)--hash-style=sysv)
@@ -461,7 +495,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
cc-option is used to check if $(CC) supports a given option, and if
not supported to use an optional second option.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
cflags-y += $(call cc-option,-march=pentium-mmx,-march=i586)
@@ -475,7 +510,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
cc-option-yn is used to check if gcc supports a given option
and return 'y' if supported, otherwise 'n'.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/ppc/Makefile
biarch := $(call cc-option-yn, -m32)
aflags-$(biarch) += -a32
@@ -493,7 +529,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
because gcc 4.4 and later accept any unknown -Wno-* option and only
warn about it if there is another warning in the source file.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
KBUILD_CFLAGS += $(call cc-disable-warning, unused-but-set-variable)
In the above example, -Wno-unused-but-set-variable will be added to
@@ -504,7 +541,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
if version expression is true, or the fifth (if given) if the version
expression is false.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#fs/reiserfs/Makefile
ccflags-y := $(call cc-ifversion, -lt, 0402, -O1)
@@ -529,7 +567,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
build (host arch is different from target arch). And if CROSS_COMPILE
is already set then leave it with the old value.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/m68k/Makefile
ifneq ($(SUBARCH),$(ARCH))
ifeq ($(CROSS_COMPILE),)
@@ -537,7 +576,8 @@ more details, with real examples.
endif
endif
---- 3.12 $(LD) support functions
+3.12 $(LD) support functions
+----------------------------
ld-option
ld-option is used to check if $(LD) supports the supplied option.
@@ -545,12 +585,14 @@ more details, with real examples.
The second argument is an optional option that can be used if the
first option is not supported by $(LD).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#Makefile
LDFLAGS_vmlinux += $(call ld-option, -X)
-=== 4 Host Program support
+4 Host Program support
+======================
Kbuild supports building executables on the host for use during the
compilation stage.
@@ -564,21 +606,24 @@ This can be done in two ways. Either add the dependency in a rule,
or utilise the variable $(always).
Both possibilities are described in the following.
---- 4.1 Simple Host Program
+4.1 Simple Host Program
+-----------------------
In some cases there is a need to compile and run a program on the
computer where the build is running.
The following line tells kbuild that the program bin2hex shall be
built on the build host.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
hostprogs-y := bin2hex
Kbuild assumes in the above example that bin2hex is made from a single
c-source file named bin2hex.c located in the same directory as
the Makefile.
---- 4.2 Composite Host Programs
+4.2 Composite Host Programs
+---------------------------
Host programs can be made up based on composite objects.
The syntax used to define composite objects for host programs is
@@ -586,7 +631,8 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
$(<executable>-objs) lists all objects used to link the final
executable.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/lxdialog/Makefile
hostprogs-y := lxdialog
lxdialog-objs := checklist.o lxdialog.o
@@ -594,16 +640,19 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
Objects with extension .o are compiled from the corresponding .c
files. In the above example, checklist.c is compiled to checklist.o
and lxdialog.c is compiled to lxdialog.o.
+
Finally, the two .o files are linked to the executable, lxdialog.
Note: The syntax <executable>-y is not permitted for host-programs.
---- 4.3 Using C++ for host programs
+4.3 Using C++ for host programs
+-------------------------------
kbuild offers support for host programs written in C++. This was
introduced solely to support kconfig, and is not recommended
for general use.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/kconfig/Makefile
hostprogs-y := qconf
qconf-cxxobjs := qconf.o
@@ -614,13 +663,15 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
If qconf is composed of a mixture of .c and .cc files, then an
additional line can be used to identify this.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/kconfig/Makefile
hostprogs-y := qconf
qconf-cxxobjs := qconf.o
qconf-objs := check.o
---- 4.4 Controlling compiler options for host programs
+4.4 Controlling compiler options for host programs
+--------------------------------------------------
When compiling host programs, it is possible to set specific flags.
The programs will always be compiled utilising $(HOSTCC) passed
@@ -628,27 +679,31 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
To set flags that will take effect for all host programs created
in that Makefile, use the variable HOST_EXTRACFLAGS.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/lxdialog/Makefile
HOST_EXTRACFLAGS += -I/usr/include/ncurses
To set specific flags for a single file the following construction
is used:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/ppc64/boot/Makefile
HOSTCFLAGS_piggyback.o := -DKERNELBASE=$(KERNELBASE)
It is also possible to specify additional options to the linker.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/kconfig/Makefile
HOSTLDLIBS_qconf := -L$(QTDIR)/lib
When linking qconf, it will be passed the extra option
"-L$(QTDIR)/lib".
---- 4.5 When host programs are actually built
+4.5 When host programs are actually built
+-----------------------------------------
Kbuild will only build host-programs when they are referenced
as a prerequisite.
@@ -656,7 +711,8 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
(1) List the prerequisite explicitly in a special rule.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#drivers/pci/Makefile
hostprogs-y := gen-devlist
$(obj)/devlist.h: $(src)/pci.ids $(obj)/gen-devlist
@@ -667,11 +723,13 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
the host programs in special rules must be prefixed with $(obj).
(2) Use $(always)
+
When there is no suitable special rule, and the host program
shall be built when a makefile is entered, the $(always)
variable shall be used.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/lxdialog/Makefile
hostprogs-y := lxdialog
always := $(hostprogs-y)
@@ -679,11 +737,13 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
This will tell kbuild to build lxdialog even if not referenced in
any rule.
---- 4.6 Using hostprogs-$(CONFIG_FOO)
+4.6 Using hostprogs-$(CONFIG_FOO)
+---------------------------------
A typical pattern in a Kbuild file looks like this:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/Makefile
hostprogs-$(CONFIG_KALLSYMS) += kallsyms
@@ -693,7 +753,8 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following.
like hostprogs-y. But only hostprogs-y is recommended to be used
when no CONFIG symbols are involved.
-=== 5 Kbuild clean infrastructure
+5 Kbuild clean infrastructure
+=============================
"make clean" deletes most generated files in the obj tree where the kernel
is compiled. This includes generated files such as host programs.
@@ -705,7 +766,8 @@ generated by kbuild are deleted all over the kernel src tree when
Additional files can be specified in kbuild makefiles by use of $(clean-files).
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#lib/Makefile
clean-files := crc32table.h
@@ -715,7 +777,8 @@ Makefile, except if prefixed with $(objtree).
To delete a directory hierarchy use:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#scripts/package/Makefile
clean-dirs := $(objtree)/debian/
@@ -725,7 +788,8 @@ subdirectories.
To exclude certain files from make clean, use the $(no-clean-files) variable.
This is only a special case used in the top level Kbuild file:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#Kbuild
no-clean-files := $(bounds-file) $(offsets-file)
@@ -733,7 +797,8 @@ Usually kbuild descends down in subdirectories due to "obj-* := dir/",
but in the architecture makefiles where the kbuild infrastructure
is not sufficient this sometimes needs to be explicit.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/boot/Makefile
subdir- := compressed/
@@ -743,7 +808,8 @@ directory compressed/ when "make clean" is executed.
To support the clean infrastructure in the Makefiles that build the
final bootimage there is an optional target named archclean:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
archclean:
$(Q)$(MAKE) $(clean)=arch/x86/boot
@@ -759,7 +825,8 @@ is not operational at that point.
Note 2: All directories listed in core-y, libs-y, drivers-y and net-y will
be visited during "make clean".
-=== 6 Architecture Makefiles
+6 Architecture Makefiles
+========================
The top level Makefile sets up the environment and does the preparation,
before starting to descend down in the individual directories.
@@ -770,6 +837,7 @@ To do so, arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile sets up a number of variables and defines
a few targets.
When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
+
1) Configuration of the kernel => produce .config
2) Store kernel version in include/linux/version.h
3) Updating all other prerequisites to the target prepare:
@@ -787,37 +855,45 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
- Preparing initrd images and the like
---- 6.1 Set variables to tweak the build to the architecture
+6.1 Set variables to tweak the build to the architecture
+--------------------------------------------------------
- LDFLAGS Generic $(LD) options
+ LDFLAGS
+ Generic $(LD) options
Flags used for all invocations of the linker.
Often specifying the emulation is sufficient.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/s390/Makefile
LDFLAGS := -m elf_s390
+
Note: ldflags-y can be used to further customise
the flags used. See chapter 3.7.
- LDFLAGS_vmlinux Options for $(LD) when linking vmlinux
+ LDFLAGS_vmlinux
+ Options for $(LD) when linking vmlinux
LDFLAGS_vmlinux is used to specify additional flags to pass to
the linker when linking the final vmlinux image.
LDFLAGS_vmlinux uses the LDFLAGS_$@ support.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
LDFLAGS_vmlinux := -e stext
- OBJCOPYFLAGS objcopy flags
+ OBJCOPYFLAGS
+ objcopy flags
When $(call if_changed,objcopy) is used to translate a .o file,
the flags specified in OBJCOPYFLAGS will be used.
$(call if_changed,objcopy) is often used to generate raw binaries on
vmlinux.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/s390/Makefile
OBJCOPYFLAGS := -O binary
@@ -828,30 +904,34 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
In this example, the binary $(obj)/image is a binary version of
vmlinux. The usage of $(call if_changed,xxx) will be described later.
- KBUILD_AFLAGS $(AS) assembler flags
+ KBUILD_AFLAGS
+ $(AS) assembler flags
Default value - see top level Makefile
Append or modify as required per architecture.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/sparc64/Makefile
KBUILD_AFLAGS += -m64 -mcpu=ultrasparc
- KBUILD_CFLAGS $(CC) compiler flags
+ KBUILD_CFLAGS
+ $(CC) compiler flags
Default value - see top level Makefile
Append or modify as required per architecture.
Often, the KBUILD_CFLAGS variable depends on the configuration.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/boot/compressed/Makefile
cflags-$(CONFIG_X86_32) := -march=i386
cflags-$(CONFIG_X86_64) := -mcmodel=small
KBUILD_CFLAGS += $(cflags-y)
Many arch Makefiles dynamically run the target C compiler to
- probe supported options:
+ probe supported options::
#arch/x86/Makefile
@@ -867,32 +947,39 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
The first example utilises the trick that a config option expands
to 'y' when selected.
- KBUILD_AFLAGS_KERNEL $(AS) options specific for built-in
+ KBUILD_AFLAGS_KERNEL
+ $(AS) options specific for built-in
$(KBUILD_AFLAGS_KERNEL) contains extra C compiler flags used to compile
resident kernel code.
- KBUILD_AFLAGS_MODULE Options for $(AS) when building modules
+ KBUILD_AFLAGS_MODULE
+ Options for $(AS) when building modules
$(KBUILD_AFLAGS_MODULE) is used to add arch-specific options that
are used for $(AS).
+
From commandline AFLAGS_MODULE shall be used (see kbuild.txt).
- KBUILD_CFLAGS_KERNEL $(CC) options specific for built-in
+ KBUILD_CFLAGS_KERNEL
+ $(CC) options specific for built-in
$(KBUILD_CFLAGS_KERNEL) contains extra C compiler flags used to compile
resident kernel code.
- KBUILD_CFLAGS_MODULE Options for $(CC) when building modules
+ KBUILD_CFLAGS_MODULE
+ Options for $(CC) when building modules
$(KBUILD_CFLAGS_MODULE) is used to add arch-specific options that
are used for $(CC).
From commandline CFLAGS_MODULE shall be used (see kbuild.txt).
- KBUILD_LDFLAGS_MODULE Options for $(LD) when linking modules
+ KBUILD_LDFLAGS_MODULE
+ Options for $(LD) when linking modules
$(KBUILD_LDFLAGS_MODULE) is used to add arch-specific options
used when linking modules. This is often a linker script.
+
From commandline LDFLAGS_MODULE shall be used (see kbuild.txt).
KBUILD_ARFLAGS Options for $(AR) when creating archives
@@ -908,7 +995,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
means for an architecture to override the defaults.
---- 6.2 Add prerequisites to archheaders:
+6.2 Add prerequisites to archheaders
+------------------------------------
The archheaders: rule is used to generate header files that
may be installed into user space by "make header_install" or
@@ -921,13 +1009,15 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
architecture itself.
---- 6.3 Add prerequisites to archprepare:
+6.3 Add prerequisites to archprepare
+------------------------------------
The archprepare: rule is used to list prerequisites that need to be
built before starting to descend down in the subdirectories.
This is usually used for header files containing assembler constants.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/arm/Makefile
archprepare: maketools
@@ -937,7 +1027,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
generating offset header files.
---- 6.4 List directories to visit when descending
+6.4 List directories to visit when descending
+---------------------------------------------
An arch Makefile cooperates with the top Makefile to define variables
which specify how to build the vmlinux file. Note that there is no
@@ -945,28 +1036,34 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
machinery is all architecture-independent.
- head-y, init-y, core-y, libs-y, drivers-y, net-y
+ head-y, init-y, core-y, libs-y, drivers-y, net-y
+ $(head-y) lists objects to be linked first in vmlinux.
- $(head-y) lists objects to be linked first in vmlinux.
- $(libs-y) lists directories where a lib.a archive can be located.
- The rest list directories where a built-in.a object file can be
- located.
+ $(libs-y) lists directories where a lib.a archive can be located.
- $(init-y) objects will be located after $(head-y).
- Then the rest follows in this order:
- $(core-y), $(libs-y), $(drivers-y) and $(net-y).
+ The rest list directories where a built-in.a object file can be
+ located.
- The top level Makefile defines values for all generic directories,
- and arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile only adds architecture-specific directories.
+ $(init-y) objects will be located after $(head-y).
+
+ Then the rest follows in this order:
+
+ $(core-y), $(libs-y), $(drivers-y) and $(net-y).
+
+ The top level Makefile defines values for all generic directories,
+ and arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile only adds architecture-specific
+ directories.
+
+ Example::
- Example:
#arch/sparc64/Makefile
core-y += arch/sparc64/kernel/
libs-y += arch/sparc64/prom/ arch/sparc64/lib/
drivers-$(CONFIG_OPROFILE) += arch/sparc64/oprofile/
---- 6.5 Architecture-specific boot images
+6.5 Architecture-specific boot images
+-------------------------------------
An arch Makefile specifies goals that take the vmlinux file, compress
it, wrap it in bootstrapping code, and copy the resulting files
@@ -984,7 +1081,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile, and use the full path when calling down
into the arch/$(ARCH)/boot/Makefile.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
boot := arch/x86/boot
bzImage: vmlinux
@@ -997,7 +1095,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
but executing "make help" will list all relevant targets.
To support this, $(archhelp) must be defined.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
define archhelp
echo '* bzImage - Image (arch/$(ARCH)/boot/bzImage)'
@@ -1011,25 +1110,30 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
Add a new prerequisite to all: to select a default goal different
from vmlinux.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/Makefile
all: bzImage
When "make" is executed without arguments, bzImage will be built.
---- 6.6 Building non-kbuild targets
+6.6 Building non-kbuild targets
+-------------------------------
extra-y
-
extra-y specifies additional targets created in the current
- directory, in addition to any targets specified by obj-*.
+ directory, in addition to any targets specified by `obj-*`.
Listing all targets in extra-y is required for two purposes:
+
1) Enable kbuild to check changes in command lines
+
- When $(call if_changed,xxx) is used
+
2) kbuild knows what files to delete during "make clean"
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/kernel/Makefile
extra-y := head.o init_task.o
@@ -1037,16 +1141,17 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
shall be built, but shall not be linked as part of built-in.a.
---- 6.7 Commands useful for building a boot image
+6.7 Commands useful for building a boot image
+---------------------------------------------
- Kbuild provides a few macros that are useful when building a
- boot image.
+ Kbuild provides a few macros that are useful when building a
+ boot image.
if_changed
-
if_changed is the infrastructure used for the following commands.
- Usage:
+ Usage::
+
target: source(s) FORCE
$(call if_changed,ld/objcopy/gzip/...)
@@ -1064,12 +1169,16 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
Note: It is a typical mistake to forget the FORCE prerequisite.
Another common pitfall is that whitespace is sometimes
significant; for instance, the below will fail (note the extra space
- after the comma):
+ after the comma)::
+
target: source(s) FORCE
- #WRONG!# $(call if_changed, ld/objcopy/gzip/...)
- Note: if_changed should not be used more than once per target.
+ **WRONG!** $(call if_changed, ld/objcopy/gzip/...)
+
+ Note:
+ if_changed should not be used more than once per target.
It stores the executed command in a corresponding .cmd
+
file and multiple calls would result in overwrites and
unwanted results when the target is up to date and only the
tests on changed commands trigger execution of commands.
@@ -1077,7 +1186,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
ld
Link target. Often, LDFLAGS_$@ is used to set specific options to ld.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/boot/Makefile
LDFLAGS_bootsect := -Ttext 0x0 -s --oformat binary
LDFLAGS_setup := -Ttext 0x0 -s --oformat binary -e begtext
@@ -1091,12 +1201,15 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
LDFLAGS_$@ syntax - one for each potential target.
$(targets) are assigned all potential targets, by which kbuild knows
the targets and will:
+
1) check for commandline changes
2) delete target during make clean
The ": %: %.o" part of the prerequisite is a shorthand that
frees us from listing the setup.o and bootsect.o files.
- Note: It is a common mistake to forget the "targets :=" assignment,
+
+ Note:
+ It is a common mistake to forget the "targets :=" assignment,
resulting in the target file being recompiled for no
obvious reason.
@@ -1108,7 +1221,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
gzip
Compress target. Use maximum compression to compress target.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/boot/compressed/Makefile
$(obj)/vmlinux.bin.gz: $(vmlinux.bin.all-y) FORCE
$(call if_changed,gzip)
@@ -1119,26 +1233,30 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
in an init section in the image. Platform code *must* copy the
blob to non-init memory prior to calling unflatten_device_tree().
- To use this command, simply add *.dtb into obj-y or targets, or make
- some other target depend on %.dtb
+ To use this command, simply add `*.dtb` into obj-y or targets, or make
+ some other target depend on `%.dtb`
- A central rule exists to create $(obj)/%.dtb from $(src)/%.dts;
+ A central rule exists to create `$(obj)/%.dtb` from `$(src)/%.dts`;
architecture Makefiles do no need to explicitly write out that rule.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
targets += $(dtb-y)
DTC_FLAGS ?= -p 1024
---- 6.8 Custom kbuild commands
+6.8 Custom kbuild commands
+--------------------------
When kbuild is executing with KBUILD_VERBOSE=0, then only a shorthand
of a command is normally displayed.
To enable this behaviour for custom commands kbuild requires
- two variables to be set:
- quiet_cmd_<command> - what shall be echoed
- cmd_<command> - the command to execute
+ two variables to be set::
+
+ quiet_cmd_<command> - what shall be echoed
+ cmd_<command> - the command to execute
+
+ Example::
- Example:
#
quiet_cmd_image = BUILD $@
cmd_image = $(obj)/tools/build $(BUILDFLAGS) \
@@ -1149,9 +1267,9 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
$(call if_changed,image)
@echo 'Kernel: $@ is ready'
- When updating the $(obj)/bzImage target, the line
+ When updating the $(obj)/bzImage target, the line:
- BUILD arch/x86/boot/bzImage
+ BUILD arch/x86/boot/bzImage
will be displayed with "make KBUILD_VERBOSE=0".
@@ -1162,9 +1280,10 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
arch/$(ARCH)/kernel/vmlinux.lds is used.
The script is a preprocessed variant of the file vmlinux.lds.S
located in the same directory.
- kbuild knows .lds files and includes a rule *lds.S -> *lds.
+ kbuild knows .lds files and includes a rule `*lds.S` -> `*lds`.
+
+ Example::
- Example:
#arch/x86/kernel/Makefile
always := vmlinux.lds
@@ -1176,17 +1295,19 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
The assignment to $(CPPFLAGS_vmlinux.lds) tells kbuild to use the
specified options when building the target vmlinux.lds.
- When building the *.lds target, kbuild uses the variables:
- KBUILD_CPPFLAGS : Set in top-level Makefile
- cppflags-y : May be set in the kbuild makefile
- CPPFLAGS_$(@F) : Target-specific flags.
- Note that the full filename is used in this
- assignment.
+ When building the `*.lds` target, kbuild uses the variables::
- The kbuild infrastructure for *lds files is used in several
+ KBUILD_CPPFLAGS : Set in top-level Makefile
+ cppflags-y : May be set in the kbuild makefile
+ CPPFLAGS_$(@F) : Target-specific flags.
+ Note that the full filename is used in this
+ assignment.
+
+ The kbuild infrastructure for `*lds` files is used in several
architecture-specific files.
---- 6.10 Generic header files
+6.10 Generic header files
+-------------------------
The directory include/asm-generic contains the header files
that may be shared between individual architectures.
@@ -1194,7 +1315,8 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
to list the file in the Kbuild file.
See "7.2 generic-y" for further info on syntax etc.
---- 6.11 Post-link pass
+6.11 Post-link pass
+-------------------
If the file arch/xxx/Makefile.postlink exists, this makefile
will be invoked for post-link objects (vmlinux and modules.ko)
@@ -1209,15 +1331,17 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
For example, powerpc uses this to check relocation sanity of
the linked vmlinux file.
-=== 7 Kbuild syntax for exported headers
+7 Kbuild syntax for exported headers
+------------------------------------
The kernel includes a set of headers that is exported to userspace.
Many headers can be exported as-is but other headers require a
minimal pre-processing before they are ready for user-space.
The pre-processing does:
+
- drop kernel-specific annotations
- drop include of compiler.h
-- drop all sections that are kernel internal (guarded by ifdef __KERNEL__)
+- drop all sections that are kernel internal (guarded by `ifdef __KERNEL__`)
All headers under include/uapi/, include/generated/uapi/,
arch/<arch>/include/uapi/ and arch/<arch>/include/generated/uapi/
@@ -1227,40 +1351,45 @@ A Kbuild file may be defined under arch/<arch>/include/uapi/asm/ and
arch/<arch>/include/asm/ to list asm files coming from asm-generic.
See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file.
---- 7.1 no-export-headers
+7.1 no-export-headers
+---------------------
no-export-headers is essentially used by include/uapi/linux/Kbuild to
avoid exporting specific headers (e.g. kvm.h) on architectures that do
not support it. It should be avoided as much as possible.
---- 7.2 generic-y
+7.2 generic-y
+-------------
If an architecture uses a verbatim copy of a header from
include/asm-generic then this is listed in the file
arch/$(ARCH)/include/asm/Kbuild like this:
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/include/asm/Kbuild
generic-y += termios.h
generic-y += rtc.h
During the prepare phase of the build a wrapper include
- file is generated in the directory:
+ file is generated in the directory::
arch/$(ARCH)/include/generated/asm
When a header is exported where the architecture uses
the generic header a similar wrapper is generated as part
- of the set of exported headers in the directory:
+ of the set of exported headers in the directory::
usr/include/asm
The generated wrapper will in both cases look like the following:
- Example: termios.h
+ Example: termios.h::
+
#include <asm-generic/termios.h>
---- 7.3 generated-y
+7.3 generated-y
+---------------
If an architecture generates other header files alongside generic-y
wrappers, generated-y specifies them.
@@ -1268,11 +1397,13 @@ See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file.
This prevents them being treated as stale asm-generic wrappers and
removed.
- Example:
+ Example::
+
#arch/x86/include/asm/Kbuild
generated-y += syscalls_32.h
---- 7.4 mandatory-y
+7.4 mandatory-y
+---------------
mandatory-y is essentially used by include/(uapi/)asm-generic/Kbuild
to define the minimum set of ASM headers that all architectures must have.
@@ -1284,12 +1415,12 @@ See subsequent chapter for the syntax of the Kbuild file.
The convention is to list one subdir per line and
preferably in alphabetic order.
-=== 8 Kbuild Variables
+8 Kbuild Variables
+==================
The top Makefile exports the following variables:
VERSION, PATCHLEVEL, SUBLEVEL, EXTRAVERSION
-
These variables define the current kernel version. A few arch
Makefiles actually use these values directly; they should use
$(KERNELRELEASE) instead.
@@ -1303,32 +1434,28 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
such as "-pre4", and is often blank.
KERNELRELEASE
-
$(KERNELRELEASE) is a single string such as "2.4.0-pre4", suitable
for constructing installation directory names or showing in
version strings. Some arch Makefiles use it for this purpose.
ARCH
-
This variable defines the target architecture, such as "i386",
"arm", or "sparc". Some kbuild Makefiles test $(ARCH) to
determine which files to compile.
By default, the top Makefile sets $(ARCH) to be the same as the
host system architecture. For a cross build, a user may
- override the value of $(ARCH) on the command line:
+ override the value of $(ARCH) on the command line::
make ARCH=m68k ...
INSTALL_PATH
-
This variable defines a place for the arch Makefiles to install
the resident kernel image and System.map file.
Use this for architecture-specific install targets.
INSTALL_MOD_PATH, MODLIB
-
$(INSTALL_MOD_PATH) specifies a prefix to $(MODLIB) for module
installation. This variable is not defined in the Makefile but
may be passed in by the user if desired.
@@ -1339,7 +1466,6 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
override this value on the command line if desired.
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
-
If this variable is specified, it will cause modules to be stripped
after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the
default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, the
@@ -1347,7 +1473,8 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
command.
-=== 9 Makefile language
+9 Makefile language
+===================
The kernel Makefiles are designed to be run with GNU Make. The Makefiles
use only the documented features of GNU Make, but they do use many
@@ -1366,18 +1493,17 @@ time the left-hand side is used.
There are some cases where "=" is appropriate. Usually, though, ":="
is the right choice.
-=== 10 Credits
+10 Credits
+==========
-Original version made by Michael Elizabeth Chastain, <mailto:[email protected]>
-Updates by Kai Germaschewski <[email protected]>
-Updates by Sam Ravnborg <[email protected]>
-Language QA by Jan Engelhardt <[email protected]>
+- Original version made by Michael Elizabeth Chastain, <mailto:[email protected]>
+- Updates by Kai Germaschewski <[email protected]>
+- Updates by Sam Ravnborg <[email protected]>
+- Language QA by Jan Engelhardt <[email protected]>
-=== 11 TODO
+11 TODO
+=======
- Describe how kbuild supports shipped files with _shipped.
- Generating offset header files.
- Add more variables to section 7?
-
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
index 80295c613e37..81c1d8addc4b 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
+=========================
Building External Modules
+=========================
This document describes how to build an out-of-tree kernel module.
-=== Table of Contents
+.. Table of Contents
=== 1 Introduction
=== 2 How to Build External Modules
@@ -31,7 +33,8 @@ This document describes how to build an out-of-tree kernel module.
-=== 1. Introduction
+1. Introduction
+===============
"kbuild" is the build system used by the Linux kernel. Modules must use
kbuild to stay compatible with changes in the build infrastructure and
@@ -48,7 +51,8 @@ easily accomplished, and a complete example will be presented in
section 3.
-=== 2. How to Build External Modules
+2. How to Build External Modules
+================================
To build external modules, you must have a prebuilt kernel available
that contains the configuration and header files used in the build.
@@ -65,25 +69,27 @@ NOTE: "modules_prepare" will not build Module.symvers even if
CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is set; therefore, a full kernel build needs to be
executed to make module versioning work.
---- 2.1 Command Syntax
+2.1 Command Syntax
+==================
- The command to build an external module is:
+ The command to build an external module is::
$ make -C <path_to_kernel_src> M=$PWD
The kbuild system knows that an external module is being built
due to the "M=<dir>" option given in the command.
- To build against the running kernel use:
+ To build against the running kernel use::
$ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD
Then to install the module(s) just built, add the target
- "modules_install" to the command:
+ "modules_install" to the command::
$ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD modules_install
---- 2.2 Options
+2.2 Options
+===========
($KDIR refers to the path of the kernel source directory.)
@@ -100,7 +106,8 @@ executed to make module versioning work.
directory where the external module (kbuild file) is
located.
---- 2.3 Targets
+2.3 Targets
+===========
When building an external module, only a subset of the "make"
targets are available.
@@ -130,26 +137,29 @@ executed to make module versioning work.
help
List the available targets for external modules.
---- 2.4 Building Separate Files
+2.4 Building Separate Files
+===========================
It is possible to build single files that are part of a module.
This works equally well for the kernel, a module, and even for
external modules.
- Example (The module foo.ko, consist of bar.o and baz.o):
+ Example (The module foo.ko, consist of bar.o and baz.o)::
+
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD bar.lst
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD baz.o
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD foo.ko
make -C $KDIR M=$PWD ./
-=== 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module
+3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module
+================================================
In the last section we saw the command to build a module for the
running kernel. The module is not actually built, however, because a
build file is required. Contained in this file will be the name of
the module(s) being built, along with the list of requisite source
-files. The file may be as simple as a single line:
+files. The file may be as simple as a single line::
obj-m := <module_name>.o
@@ -157,7 +167,7 @@ The kbuild system will build <module_name>.o from <module_name>.c,
and, after linking, will result in the kernel module <module_name>.ko.
The above line can be put in either a "Kbuild" file or a "Makefile."
When the module is built from multiple sources, an additional line is
-needed listing the files:
+needed listing the files::
<module_name>-y := <src1>.o <src2>.o ...
@@ -165,7 +175,7 @@ NOTE: Further documentation describing the syntax used by kbuild is
located in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt.
The examples below demonstrate how to create a build file for the
-module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
+module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files::
8123_if.c
8123_if.h
@@ -181,7 +191,8 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
but should be filtered out from kbuild due to possible name
clashes.
- Example 1:
+ Example 1::
+
--> filename: Makefile
ifneq ($(KERNELRELEASE),)
# kbuild part of makefile
@@ -209,14 +220,16 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
line; the second pass is by the kbuild system, which is
initiated by the parameterized "make" in the default target.
---- 3.2 Separate Kbuild File and Makefile
+3.2 Separate Kbuild File and Makefile
+-------------------------------------
In newer versions of the kernel, kbuild will first look for a
file named "Kbuild," and only if that is not found, will it
then look for a makefile. Utilizing a "Kbuild" file allows us
to split up the makefile from example 1 into two files:
- Example 2:
+ Example 2::
+
--> filename: Kbuild
obj-m := 8123.o
8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o
@@ -238,7 +251,8 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
The next example shows a backward compatible version.
- Example 3:
+ Example 3::
+
--> filename: Kbuild
obj-m := 8123.o
8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o
@@ -266,7 +280,8 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
makefiles, to be used when the "make" and kbuild parts are
split into separate files.
---- 3.3 Binary Blobs
+3.3 Binary Blobs
+----------------
Some external modules need to include an object file as a blob.
kbuild has support for this, but requires the blob file to be
@@ -277,7 +292,7 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
Throughout this section, 8123_bin.o_shipped has been used to
build the kernel module 8123.ko; it has been included as
- 8123_bin.o.
+ 8123_bin.o::
8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o
@@ -285,11 +300,12 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
files and the binary file, kbuild will pick up different rules
when creating the object file for the module.
---- 3.4 Building Multiple Modules
+3.4 Building Multiple Modules
+=============================
kbuild supports building multiple modules with a single build
file. For example, if you wanted to build two modules, foo.ko
- and bar.ko, the kbuild lines would be:
+ and bar.ko, the kbuild lines would be::
obj-m := foo.o bar.o
foo-y := <foo_srcs>
@@ -298,7 +314,8 @@ module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files:
It is that simple!
-=== 4. Include Files
+4. Include Files
+================
Within the kernel, header files are kept in standard locations
according to the following rule:
@@ -310,22 +327,25 @@ according to the following rule:
of the kernel that are located in different directories, then
the file is placed in include/linux/.
- NOTE: There are two notable exceptions to this rule: larger
- subsystems have their own directory under include/, such as
- include/scsi; and architecture specific headers are located
- under arch/$(ARCH)/include/.
+ NOTE:
+ There are two notable exceptions to this rule: larger
+ subsystems have their own directory under include/, such as
+ include/scsi; and architecture specific headers are located
+ under arch/$(ARCH)/include/.
---- 4.1 Kernel Includes
+4.1 Kernel Includes
+-------------------
To include a header file located under include/linux/, simply
- use:
+ use::
#include <linux/module.h>
kbuild will add options to "gcc" so the relevant directories
are searched.
---- 4.2 Single Subdirectory
+4.2 Single Subdirectory
+-----------------------
External modules tend to place header files in a separate
include/ directory where their source is located, although this
@@ -334,7 +354,7 @@ according to the following rule:
Using the example from section 3, if we moved 8123_if.h to a
subdirectory named include, the resulting kbuild file would
- look like:
+ look like::
--> filename: Kbuild
obj-m := 8123.o
@@ -346,23 +366,24 @@ according to the following rule:
the path. This is a limitation of kbuild: there must be no
space present.
---- 4.3 Several Subdirectories
+4.3 Several Subdirectories
+--------------------------
kbuild can handle files that are spread over several directories.
- Consider the following example:
+ Consider the following example::
- .
- |__ src
- | |__ complex_main.c
- | |__ hal
- | |__ hardwareif.c
- | |__ include
- | |__ hardwareif.h
- |__ include
- |__ complex.h
+ .
+ |__ src
+ | |__ complex_main.c
+ | |__ hal
+ | |__ hardwareif.c
+ | |__ include
+ | |__ hardwareif.h
+ |__ include
+ |__ complex.h
To build the module complex.ko, we then need the following
- kbuild file:
+ kbuild file::
--> filename: Kbuild
obj-m := complex.o
@@ -385,7 +406,8 @@ according to the following rule:
file is located.
-=== 5. Module Installation
+5. Module Installation
+======================
Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the
directory:
@@ -396,11 +418,12 @@ And external modules are installed in:
/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/
---- 5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH
+5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH
+--------------------
Above are the default directories but as always some level of
customization is possible. A prefix can be added to the
- installation path using the variable INSTALL_MOD_PATH:
+ installation path using the variable INSTALL_MOD_PATH::
$ make INSTALL_MOD_PATH=/frodo modules_install
=> Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel/
@@ -410,20 +433,22 @@ And external modules are installed in:
calling "make." This has effect when installing both in-tree
and out-of-tree modules.
---- 5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR
+5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR
+-------------------
External modules are by default installed to a directory under
/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/, but you may wish to
locate modules for a specific functionality in a separate
directory. For this purpose, use INSTALL_MOD_DIR to specify an
- alternative name to "extra."
+ alternative name to "extra."::
$ make INSTALL_MOD_DIR=gandalf -C $KDIR \
M=$PWD modules_install
=> Install dir: /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/gandalf/
-=== 6. Module Versioning
+6. Module Versioning
+====================
Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag, and is used
as a simple ABI consistency check. A CRC value of the full prototype
@@ -435,14 +460,16 @@ module.
Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel
build.
---- 6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules)
+6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules)
+-----------------------------------------------
During a kernel build, a file named Module.symvers will be
generated. Module.symvers contains all exported symbols from
the kernel and compiled modules. For each symbol, the
corresponding CRC value is also stored.
- The syntax of the Module.symvers file is:
+ The syntax of the Module.symvers file is::
+
<CRC> <Symbol> <module>
0x2d036834 scsi_remove_host drivers/scsi/scsi_mod
@@ -451,10 +478,12 @@ build.
would read 0x00000000.
Module.symvers serves two purposes:
+
1) It lists all exported symbols from vmlinux and all modules.
2) It lists the CRC if CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is enabled.
---- 6.2 Symbols and External Modules
+6.2 Symbols and External Modules
+--------------------------------
When building an external module, the build system needs access
to the symbols from the kernel to check if all external symbols
@@ -481,17 +510,17 @@ build.
foo.ko needs symbols from bar.ko, you can use a
common top-level kbuild file so both modules are
compiled in the same build. Consider the following
- directory layout:
+ directory layout::
- ./foo/ <= contains foo.ko
- ./bar/ <= contains bar.ko
+ ./foo/ <= contains foo.ko
+ ./bar/ <= contains bar.ko
- The top-level kbuild file would then look like:
+ The top-level kbuild file would then look like::
- #./Kbuild (or ./Makefile):
- obj-y := foo/ bar/
+ #./Kbuild (or ./Makefile):
+ obj-y := foo/ bar/
- And executing
+ And executing::
$ make -C $KDIR M=$PWD
@@ -518,14 +547,16 @@ build.
initialization of its symbol tables.
-=== 7. Tips & Tricks
+7. Tips & Tricks
+================
---- 7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR
+7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR
+------------------------------
- Modules often need to check for certain CONFIG_ options to
+ Modules often need to check for certain `CONFIG_` options to
decide if a specific feature is included in the module. In
- kbuild this is done by referencing the CONFIG_ variable
- directly.
+ kbuild this is done by referencing the `CONFIG_` variable
+ directly::
#fs/ext2/Makefile
obj-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS) += ext2.o
@@ -534,8 +565,7 @@ build.
ext2-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS_XATTR) += xattr.o
External modules have traditionally used "grep" to check for
- specific CONFIG_ settings directly in .config. This usage is
+ specific `CONFIG_` settings directly in .config. This usage is
broken. As introduced before, external modules should use
kbuild for building and can therefore use the same methods as
- in-tree modules when testing for CONFIG_ definitions.
-
+ in-tree modules when testing for `CONFIG_` definitions.
--
2.20.1
Convert kdump documentation to ReST and add it to the
user faced manual, as the documents are mainly focused on
sysadmins that would be enabling kdump.
Note: the vmcoreinfo.rst has one very long title for
sub-sections. I opted to break this one, in order to make it
easier to display in html.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt | 131 +++++++++++++++++------------
Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt | 59 ++++++-------
2 files changed, 104 insertions(+), 86 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
index 51814450a7f8..1da2d7b765f6 100644
--- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
@@ -71,9 +71,8 @@ This is a symlink to the latest version.
The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at:
-git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
-and
-http://www.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
+- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
+- http://www.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
There is also a gitweb interface available at
http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
@@ -81,25 +80,25 @@ http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=utils/kernel/kexec/kexec-tools.git
More information about kexec-tools can be found at
http://horms.net/projects/kexec/
-3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
+3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows::
- tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz
+ tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz
-4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows:
+4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows::
- cd kexec-tools-VERSION
+ cd kexec-tools-VERSION
-5) Configure the package, as follows:
+5) Configure the package, as follows::
- ./configure
+ ./configure
-6) Compile the package, as follows:
+6) Compile the package, as follows::
- make
+ make
-7) Install the package, as follows:
+7) Install the package, as follows::
- make install
+ make install
Build the system and dump-capture kernels
@@ -126,25 +125,25 @@ dump-capture kernels for enabling kdump support.
System kernel config options
----------------------------
-1) Enable "kexec system call" in "Processor type and features."
+1) Enable "kexec system call" in "Processor type and features."::
- CONFIG_KEXEC=y
+ CONFIG_KEXEC=y
2) Enable "sysfs file system support" in "Filesystem" -> "Pseudo
- filesystems." This is usually enabled by default.
+ filesystems." This is usually enabled by default::
- CONFIG_SYSFS=y
+ CONFIG_SYSFS=y
Note that "sysfs file system support" might not appear in the "Pseudo
filesystems" menu if "Configure standard kernel features (for small
systems)" is not enabled in "General Setup." In this case, check the
- .config file itself to ensure that sysfs is turned on, as follows:
+ .config file itself to ensure that sysfs is turned on, as follows::
- grep 'CONFIG_SYSFS' .config
+ grep 'CONFIG_SYSFS' .config
-3) Enable "Compile the kernel with debug info" in "Kernel hacking."
+3) Enable "Compile the kernel with debug info" in "Kernel hacking."::
- CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=Y
+ CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=Y
This causes the kernel to be built with debug symbols. The dump
analysis tools require a vmlinux with debug symbols in order to read
@@ -154,29 +153,32 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Independent)
-----------------------------------------------------
1) Enable "kernel crash dumps" support under "Processor type and
- features":
+ features"::
- CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
+ CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
-2) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" under "Filesystems" -> "Pseudo filesystems".
+2) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" under "Filesystems" -> "Pseudo filesystems"::
+
+ CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
- CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
(CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE is set by default when CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP is selected.)
Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, i386 and x86_64)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1) On i386, enable high memory support under "Processor type and
- features":
+ features"::
- CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G=y
- or
- CONFIG_HIGHMEM4G
+ CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G=y
+
+ or::
+
+ CONFIG_HIGHMEM4G
2) On i386 and x86_64, disable symmetric multi-processing support
- under "Processor type and features":
+ under "Processor type and features"::
- CONFIG_SMP=n
+ CONFIG_SMP=n
(If CONFIG_SMP=y, then specify maxcpus=1 on the kernel command line
when loading the dump-capture kernel, see section "Load the Dump-capture
@@ -184,9 +186,9 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, i386 and x86_64)
3) If one wants to build and use a relocatable kernel,
Enable "Build a relocatable kernel" support under "Processor type and
- features"
+ features"::
- CONFIG_RELOCATABLE=y
+ CONFIG_RELOCATABLE=y
4) Use a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). This only appears when
@@ -211,13 +213,13 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, i386 and x86_64)
Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ppc64)
----------------------------------------------------------
-1) Enable "Build a kdump crash kernel" support under "Kernel" options:
+1) Enable "Build a kdump crash kernel" support under "Kernel" options::
- CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
+ CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
-2) Enable "Build a relocatable kernel" support
+2) Enable "Build a relocatable kernel" support::
- CONFIG_RELOCATABLE=y
+ CONFIG_RELOCATABLE=y
Make and install the kernel and its modules.
@@ -231,11 +233,13 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ia64)
The crashkernel region can be automatically placed by the system
kernel at run time. This is done by specifying the base address as 0,
- or omitting it all together.
+ or omitting it all together::
- crashkernel=256M@0
- or
- crashkernel=256M
+ crashkernel=256M@0
+
+ or::
+
+ crashkernel=256M
If the start address is specified, note that the start address of the
kernel will be aligned to 64Mb, so if the start address is not then
@@ -245,9 +249,9 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, arm)
----------------------------------------------------------
- To use a relocatable kernel,
- Enable "AUTO_ZRELADDR" support under "Boot" options:
+ Enable "AUTO_ZRELADDR" support under "Boot" options::
- AUTO_ZRELADDR=y
+ AUTO_ZRELADDR=y
Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, arm64)
----------------------------------------------------------
@@ -265,12 +269,12 @@ on the value of System RAM -- that's mostly for distributors that pre-setup
the kernel command line to avoid a unbootable system after some memory has
been removed from the machine.
-The syntax is:
+The syntax is::
crashkernel=<range1>:<size1>[,<range2>:<size2>,...][@offset]
range=start-[end]
-For example:
+For example::
crashkernel=512M-2G:64M,2G-:128M
@@ -326,35 +330,46 @@ can choose to load the uncompressed vmlinux or compressed bzImage/vmlinuz
of dump-capture kernel. Following is the summary.
For i386 and x86_64:
+
- Use vmlinux if kernel is not relocatable.
- Use bzImage/vmlinuz if kernel is relocatable.
+
For ppc64:
+
- Use vmlinux
+
For ia64:
+
- Use vmlinux or vmlinuz.gz
+
For s390x:
+
- Use image or bzImage
+
For arm:
+
- Use zImage
+
For arm64:
+
- Use vmlinux or Image
If you are using an uncompressed vmlinux image then use following command
-to load dump-capture kernel.
+to load dump-capture kernel::
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel-vmlinux-image> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> --args-linux \
--append="root=<root-dev> <arch-specific-options>"
If you are using a compressed bzImage/vmlinuz, then use following command
-to load dump-capture kernel.
+to load dump-capture kernel::
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel-bzImage> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> \
--append="root=<root-dev> <arch-specific-options>"
If you are using a compressed zImage, then use following command
-to load dump-capture kernel.
+to load dump-capture kernel::
kexec --type zImage -p <dump-capture-kernel-bzImage> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> \
@@ -362,7 +377,7 @@ to load dump-capture kernel.
--append="root=<root-dev> <arch-specific-options>"
If you are using an uncompressed Image, then use following command
-to load dump-capture kernel.
+to load dump-capture kernel::
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel-Image> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> \
@@ -376,18 +391,23 @@ Following are the arch specific command line options to be used while
loading dump-capture kernel.
For i386, x86_64 and ia64:
+
"1 irqpoll maxcpus=1 reset_devices"
For ppc64:
+
"1 maxcpus=1 noirqdistrib reset_devices"
For s390x:
+
"1 maxcpus=1 cgroup_disable=memory"
For arm:
+
"1 maxcpus=1 reset_devices"
For arm64:
+
"1 maxcpus=1 reset_devices"
Notes on loading the dump-capture kernel:
@@ -464,7 +484,7 @@ Write Out the Dump File
=======================
After the dump-capture kernel is booted, write out the dump file with
-the following command:
+the following command::
cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
@@ -476,7 +496,7 @@ Before analyzing the dump image, you should reboot into a stable kernel.
You can do limited analysis using GDB on the dump file copied out of
/proc/vmcore. Use the debug vmlinux built with -g and run the following
-command:
+command::
gdb vmlinux <dump-file>
@@ -504,6 +524,11 @@ to achieve the same behaviour.
Contact
=======
-Vivek Goyal ([email protected])
-Maneesh Soni ([email protected])
+- Vivek Goyal ([email protected])
+- Maneesh Soni ([email protected])
+GDB macros
+==========
+
+.. include:: gdbmacros.txt
+ :literal:
diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt
index bb94a4bd597a..007a6b86e0ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kdump/vmcoreinfo.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,7 @@
-================================================================
- VMCOREINFO
-================================================================
+==========
+VMCOREINFO
+==========
-===========
What is it?
===========
@@ -12,7 +11,6 @@ values, field offsets, etc. These data are packed into an ELF note
section and used by user-space tools like crash and makedumpfile to
analyze a kernel's memory layout.
-================
Common variables
================
@@ -49,7 +47,7 @@ in a system, one bit position per node number. Used to keep track of
which nodes are in the system and online.
swapper_pg_dir
--------------
+--------------
The global page directory pointer of the kernel. Used to translate
virtual to physical addresses.
@@ -132,16 +130,14 @@ nodemask_t
The size of a nodemask_t type. Used to compute the number of online
nodes.
-(page, flags|_refcount|mapping|lru|_mapcount|private|compound_dtor|
- compound_order|compound_head)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
+(page, flags|_refcount|mapping|lru|_mapcount|private|compound_dtor|compound_order|compound_head)
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
User-space tools compute their values based on the offset of these
variables. The variables are used when excluding unnecessary pages.
-(pglist_data, node_zones|nr_zones|node_mem_map|node_start_pfn|node_
- spanned_pages|node_id)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
+(pglist_data, node_zones|nr_zones|node_mem_map|node_start_pfn|node_spanned_pages|node_id)
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
On NUMA machines, each NUMA node has a pg_data_t to describe its memory
layout. On UMA machines there is a single pglist_data which describes the
@@ -245,21 +241,25 @@ NR_FREE_PAGES
On linux-2.6.21 or later, the number of free pages is in
vm_stat[NR_FREE_PAGES]. Used to get the number of free pages.
-PG_lru|PG_private|PG_swapcache|PG_swapbacked|PG_slab|PG_hwpoision
-|PG_head_mask|PAGE_BUDDY_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_buddy)
-|PAGE_OFFLINE_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_offline)
------------------------------------------------------------------
+PG_lru|PG_private|PG_swapcache|PG_swapbacked|PG_slab|PG_hwpoision|PG_head_mask
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page attributes. These flags are used to filter various unnecessary for
dumping pages.
+PAGE_BUDDY_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_buddy)|PAGE_OFFLINE_MAPCOUNT_VALUE(~PG_offline)
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+More page attributes. These flags are used to filter various unnecessary for
+dumping pages.
+
+
HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR
-----------------
The HUGETLB_PAGE_DTOR flag denotes hugetlbfs pages. Makedumpfile
excludes these pages.
-======
x86_64
======
@@ -318,12 +318,12 @@ address.
Currently, sme_mask stores the value of the C-bit position. If needed,
additional SME-relevant info can be placed in that variable.
-For example:
-[ misc ][ enc bit ][ other misc SME info ]
-0000_0000_0000_0000_1000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_..._0000
-63 59 55 51 47 43 39 35 31 27 ... 3
+For example::
+
+ [ misc ][ enc bit ][ other misc SME info ]
+ 0000_0000_0000_0000_1000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_..._0000
+ 63 59 55 51 47 43 39 35 31 27 ... 3
-======
x86_32
======
@@ -335,7 +335,6 @@ of a higher page table lookup overhead, and also consumes more page
table space per process. Used to check whether PAE was enabled in the
crash kernel when converting virtual addresses to physical addresses.
-====
ia64
====
@@ -366,7 +365,6 @@ PGTABLE_3|PGTABLE_4
User-space tools need to know whether the crash kernel was in 3-level or
4-level paging mode. Used to distinguish the page table.
-=====
ARM64
=====
@@ -395,9 +393,8 @@ KERNELOFFSET
The kernel randomization offset. Used to compute the page offset. If
KASLR is disabled, this value is zero.
-====
arm
-====
+===
ARM_LPAE
--------
@@ -405,12 +402,11 @@ ARM_LPAE
It indicates whether the crash kernel supports large physical address
extensions. Used to translate virtual to physical addresses.
-====
s390
====
lowcore_ptr
-----------
+-----------
An array with a pointer to the lowcore of every CPU. Used to print the
psw and all registers information.
@@ -425,7 +421,6 @@ Used to get the vmalloc_start address from the high_memory symbol.
The maximum number of CPUs.
-=======
powerpc
=======
@@ -460,9 +455,8 @@ Page size definitions, i.e. 4k, 64k, or 16M.
Used to make vtop translations.
-vmemmap_backing|(vmemmap_backing, list)|(vmemmap_backing, phys)|
-(vmemmap_backing, virt_addr)
-----------------------------------------------------------------
+vmemmap_backing|(vmemmap_backing, list)|(vmemmap_backing, phys)|(vmemmap_backing, virt_addr)
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The vmemmap virtual address space management does not have a traditional
page table to track which virtual struct pages are backed by a physical
@@ -480,7 +474,6 @@ member.
Used in vtop translations.
-==
sh
==
--
2.20.1
Sphinx need to know when a paragraph ends. So, do some adjustments
at the file for it to be properly parsed.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt | 29 ++++++++++++++++++-----------
1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt
index 539871c3b785..9a9b512e0ac9 100644
--- a/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/EDID/HOWTO.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+EDID
+====
+
In the good old days when graphics parameters were configured explicitly
in a file called xorg.conf, even broken hardware could be managed.
@@ -34,16 +38,19 @@ Makefile. Please note that the EDID data structure expects the timing
values in a different way as compared to the standard X11 format.
X11:
-HTimings: hdisp hsyncstart hsyncend htotal
-VTimings: vdisp vsyncstart vsyncend vtotal
+ HTimings:
+ hdisp hsyncstart hsyncend htotal
+ VTimings:
+ vdisp vsyncstart vsyncend vtotal
-EDID:
-#define XPIX hdisp
-#define XBLANK htotal-hdisp
-#define XOFFSET hsyncstart-hdisp
-#define XPULSE hsyncend-hsyncstart
+EDID::
-#define YPIX vdisp
-#define YBLANK vtotal-vdisp
-#define YOFFSET vsyncstart-vdisp
-#define YPULSE vsyncend-vsyncstart
+ #define XPIX hdisp
+ #define XBLANK htotal-hdisp
+ #define XOFFSET hsyncstart-hdisp
+ #define XPULSE hsyncend-hsyncstart
+
+ #define YPIX vdisp
+ #define YBLANK vtotal-vdisp
+ #define YOFFSET vsyncstart-vdisp
+ #define YPULSE vsyncend-vsyncstart
--
2.20.1
As it has some function definitions, move them to connector.h.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/connector/connector.txt | 128 +++++++++-----------------
include/linux/connector.h | 63 ++++++++++++-
2 files changed, 105 insertions(+), 86 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt
index ab7ca897fab7..2cf9b5adfe2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt
+++ b/Documentation/connector/connector.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-/*****************************************/
-Kernel Connector.
-/*****************************************/
+================
+Kernel Connector
+================
Kernel connector - new netlink based userspace <-> kernel space easy
to use communication module.
@@ -12,94 +12,55 @@ identifier, the appropriate callback will be called.
From the userspace point of view it's quite straightforward:
- socket();
- bind();
- send();
- recv();
+ - socket();
+ - bind();
+ - send();
+ - recv();
But if kernelspace wants to use the full power of such connections, the
driver writer must create special sockets, must know about struct sk_buff
handling, etc... The Connector driver allows any kernelspace agents to use
netlink based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly
-easier way:
+easier way::
-int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
-void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
-void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
+ int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
+ void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
+ void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
-struct cb_id
-{
+ struct cb_id
+ {
__u32 idx;
__u32 val;
-};
+ };
idx and val are unique identifiers which must be registered in the
-connector.h header for in-kernel usage. void (*callback) (void *) is a
+connector.h header for in-kernel usage. `void (*callback) (void *)` is a
callback function which will be called when a message with above idx.val
is received by the connector core. The argument for that function must
-be dereferenced to struct cn_msg *.
+be dereferenced to `struct cn_msg *`::
-struct cn_msg
-{
+ struct cn_msg
+ {
struct cb_id id;
__u32 seq;
__u32 ack;
- __u32 len; /* Length of the following data */
+ __u32 len; /* Length of the following data */
__u8 data[0];
-};
+ };
-/*****************************************/
-Connector interfaces.
-/*****************************************/
+Connector interfaces
+====================
-int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
+ .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/connector.h
- Registers new callback with connector core.
+ Note:
+ When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
+ netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
- struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier.
- It must be registered in connector.h for legal in-kernel users.
- char *name - connector's callback symbolic name.
- void (*callback) (struct cn..) - connector's callback.
- cn_msg and the sender's credentials
-
-
-void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id);
-
- Unregisters new callback with connector core.
-
- struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier.
-
-
-int cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
-int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
-
- Sends message to the specified groups. It can be safely called from
- softirq context, but may silently fail under strong memory pressure.
- If there are no listeners for given group -ESRCH can be returned.
-
- struct cn_msg * - message header(with attached data).
- u16 len - for *_multi multiple cn_msg messages can be sent
- u32 port - destination port.
- If non-zero the message will be sent to the
- given port, which should be set to the
- original sender.
- u32 __group - destination group.
- If port and __group is zero, then appropriate group will
- be searched through all registered connector users,
- and message will be delivered to the group which was
- created for user with the same ID as in msg.
- If __group is not zero, then message will be delivered
- to the specified group.
- int gfp_mask - GFP mask.
-
- Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
- netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
-
-/*****************************************/
-Protocol description.
-/*****************************************/
+Protocol description
+====================
The current framework offers a transport layer with fixed headers. The
recommended protocol which uses such a header is as following:
@@ -132,9 +93,8 @@ driver (it also registers itself with id={-1, -1}).
As example of this usage can be found in the cn_test.c module which
uses the connector to request notification and to send messages.
-/*****************************************/
-Reliability.
-/*****************************************/
+Reliability
+===========
Netlink itself is not a reliable protocol. That means that messages can
be lost due to memory pressure or process' receiving queue overflowed,
@@ -142,32 +102,31 @@ so caller is warned that it must be prepared. That is why the struct
cn_msg [main connector's message header] contains u32 seq and u32 ack
fields.
-/*****************************************/
-Userspace usage.
-/*****************************************/
+Userspace usage
+===============
2.6.14 has a new netlink socket implementation, which by default does not
allow people to send data to netlink groups other than 1.
So, if you wish to use a netlink socket (for example using connector)
with a different group number, the userspace application must subscribe to
-that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode:
+that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode::
-s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR);
+ s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR);
-l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
-l_local.nl_groups = 12345;
-l_local.nl_pid = 0;
+ l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
+ l_local.nl_groups = 12345;
+ l_local.nl_pid = 0;
-if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) {
+ if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) {
perror("bind");
close(s);
return -1;
-}
+ }
-{
+ {
int on = l_local.nl_groups;
setsockopt(s, 270, 1, &on, sizeof(on));
-}
+ }
Where 270 above is SOL_NETLINK, and 1 is a NETLINK_ADD_MEMBERSHIP socket
option. To drop a multicast subscription, one should call the above socket
@@ -180,16 +139,15 @@ group number 12345, you must increment CN_NETLINK_USERS to that number.
Additional 0xf numbers are allocated to be used by non-in-kernel users.
Due to this limitation, group 0xffffffff does not work now, so one can
-not use add/remove connector's group notifications, but as far as I know,
+not use add/remove connector's group notifications, but as far as I know,
only cn_test.c test module used it.
Some work in netlink area is still being done, so things can be changed in
2.6.15 timeframe, if it will happen, documentation will be updated for that
kernel.
-/*****************************************/
Code samples
-/*****************************************/
+============
Sample code for a connector test module and user space can be found
in samples/connector/. To build this code, enable CONFIG_CONNECTOR
diff --git a/include/linux/connector.h b/include/linux/connector.h
index 032102b19645..5aeb15f71b3a 100644
--- a/include/linux/connector.h
+++ b/include/linux/connector.h
@@ -68,10 +68,71 @@ struct cn_dev {
struct cn_queue_dev *cbdev;
};
+/**
+ * cn_add_callback() - Registers new callback with connector core.
+ *
+ * @id: unique connector's user identifier.
+ * It must be registered in connector.h for legal
+ * in-kernel users.
+ * @name: connector's callback symbolic name.
+ * @callback: connector's callback.
+ * parameters are %cn_msg and the sender's credentials
+ */
int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, const char *name,
void (*callback)(struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
-void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *);
+/**
+ * cn_del_callback() - Unregisters new callback with connector core.
+ *
+ * @id: unique connector's user identifier.
+ */
+void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id);
+
+
+/**
+ * cn_netlink_send_mult - Sends message to the specified groups.
+ *
+ * @msg: message header(with attached data).
+ * @len: Number of @msg to be sent.
+ * @portid: destination port.
+ * If non-zero the message will be sent to the given port,
+ * which should be set to the original sender.
+ * @group: destination group.
+ * If @portid and @group is zero, then appropriate group will
+ * be searched through all registered connector users, and
+ * message will be delivered to the group which was created
+ * for user with the same ID as in @msg.
+ * If @group is not zero, then message will be delivered
+ * to the specified group.
+ * @gfp_mask: GFP mask.
+ *
+ * It can be safely called from softirq context, but may silently
+ * fail under strong memory pressure.
+ *
+ * If there are no listeners for given group %-ESRCH can be returned.
+ */
int cn_netlink_send_mult(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 group, gfp_t gfp_mask);
+
+/**
+ * cn_netlink_send_mult - Sends message to the specified groups.
+ *
+ * @msg: message header(with attached data).
+ * @portid: destination port.
+ * If non-zero the message will be sent to the given port,
+ * which should be set to the original sender.
+ * @group: destination group.
+ * If @portid and @group is zero, then appropriate group will
+ * be searched through all registered connector users, and
+ * message will be delivered to the group which was created
+ * for user with the same ID as in @msg.
+ * If @group is not zero, then message will be delivered
+ * to the specified group.
+ * @gfp_mask: GFP mask.
+ *
+ * It can be safely called from softirq context, but may silently
+ * fail under strong memory pressure.
+ *
+ * If there are no listeners for given group %-ESRCH can be returned.
+ */
int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 group, gfp_t gfp_mask);
int cn_queue_add_callback(struct cn_queue_dev *dev, const char *name,
--
2.20.1
This small text file describes the usage of parallel port LCD
displays from userspace PoV. So, a good candidate for the
admin guide.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt | 7 +++++--
1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt b/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
index 7f82c905763d..a3eb00c62f53 100644
--- a/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+======================================
+Parallel port LCD/Keypad Panel support
+======================================
+
Some LCDs allow you to define up to 8 characters, mapped to ASCII
characters 0 to 7. The escape code to define a new character is
'\e[LG' followed by one digit from 0 to 7, representing the character
@@ -7,7 +11,7 @@ illuminated pixel with LSB on the right. Lines are numbered from the
top of the character to the bottom. On a 5x7 matrix, only the 5 lower
bits of the 7 first bytes are used for each character. If the string
is incomplete, only complete lines will be redefined. Here are some
-examples :
+examples::
printf "\e[LG0010101050D1F0C04;" => 0 = [enter]
printf "\e[LG1040E1F0000000000;" => 1 = [up]
@@ -21,4 +25,3 @@ examples :
printf "\e[LG00002061E1E060200;" => small speaker
Willy
-
--
2.20.1
In order to be able to add this file to the security book,
we need first to convert it to reST.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt | 101 +++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 56 insertions(+), 45 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt b/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
index 69346de87ff3..00d5b1db227d 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
+++ b/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+=============================
Virtual TPM interface for Xen
+=============================
Authors: Matthew Fioravante (JHUAPL), Daniel De Graaf (NSA)
@@ -6,7 +8,8 @@ This document describes the virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) subsystem for
Xen. The reader is assumed to have familiarity with building and installing Xen,
Linux, and a basic understanding of the TPM and vTPM concepts.
-INTRODUCTION
+Introduction
+------------
The goal of this work is to provide a TPM functionality to a virtual guest
operating system (in Xen terms, a DomU). This allows programs to interact with
@@ -24,81 +27,89 @@ This mini-os vTPM subsystem was built on top of the previous vTPM work done by
IBM and Intel corporation.
-DESIGN OVERVIEW
+Design Overview
---------------
-The architecture of vTPM is described below:
+The architecture of vTPM is described below::
-+------------------+
-| Linux DomU | ...
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| xen-tpmfront |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| mini-os/tpmback |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| vtpm-stubdom | ...
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| mini-os/tpmfront |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| mini-os/tpmback |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| vtpmmgr-stubdom |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| mini-os/tpm_tis |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| Hardware TPM |
-+------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | Linux DomU | ...
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | xen-tpmfront |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | mini-os/tpmback |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | vtpm-stubdom | ...
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | mini-os/tpmfront |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | mini-os/tpmback |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | vtpmmgr-stubdom |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | mini-os/tpm_tis |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | Hardware TPM |
+ +------------------+
- * Linux DomU: The Linux based guest that wants to use a vTPM. There may be
+* Linux DomU:
+ The Linux based guest that wants to use a vTPM. There may be
more than one of these.
- * xen-tpmfront.ko: Linux kernel virtual TPM frontend driver. This driver
+* xen-tpmfront.ko:
+ Linux kernel virtual TPM frontend driver. This driver
provides vTPM access to a Linux-based DomU.
- * mini-os/tpmback: Mini-os TPM backend driver. The Linux frontend driver
+* mini-os/tpmback:
+ Mini-os TPM backend driver. The Linux frontend driver
connects to this backend driver to facilitate communications
between the Linux DomU and its vTPM. This driver is also
used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to communicate with vtpm-stubdom.
- * vtpm-stubdom: A mini-os stub domain that implements a vTPM. There is a
+* vtpm-stubdom:
+ A mini-os stub domain that implements a vTPM. There is a
one to one mapping between running vtpm-stubdom instances and
logical vtpms on the system. The vTPM Platform Configuration
Registers (PCRs) are normally all initialized to zero.
- * mini-os/tpmfront: Mini-os TPM frontend driver. The vTPM mini-os domain
+* mini-os/tpmfront:
+ Mini-os TPM frontend driver. The vTPM mini-os domain
vtpm-stubdom uses this driver to communicate with
vtpmmgr-stubdom. This driver is also used in mini-os
domains such as pv-grub that talk to the vTPM domain.
- * vtpmmgr-stubdom: A mini-os domain that implements the vTPM manager. There is
+* vtpmmgr-stubdom:
+ A mini-os domain that implements the vTPM manager. There is
only one vTPM manager and it should be running during the
entire lifetime of the machine. This domain regulates
access to the physical TPM on the system and secures the
persistent state of each vTPM.
- * mini-os/tpm_tis: Mini-os TPM version 1.2 TPM Interface Specification (TIS)
+* mini-os/tpm_tis:
+ Mini-os TPM version 1.2 TPM Interface Specification (TIS)
driver. This driver used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to talk directly to
the hardware TPM. Communication is facilitated by mapping
hardware memory pages into vtpmmgr-stubdom.
- * Hardware TPM: The physical TPM that is soldered onto the motherboard.
+* Hardware TPM:
+ The physical TPM that is soldered onto the motherboard.
-INTEGRATION WITH XEN
+Integration With Xen
--------------------
Support for the vTPM driver was added in Xen using the libxl toolstack in Xen
--
2.20.1
Convert the IDE documentation to ReST format, in order to prepare
for its addition inside a book.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt | 23 ++--
Documentation/ide/ide.txt | 147 ++++++++++++++------------
Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt | 10 +-
3 files changed, 96 insertions(+), 84 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt b/Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt
index 3f348a0b21d8..3e061d9c0e38 100644
--- a/Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ide/ide-tape.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-IDE ATAPI streaming tape driver.
+===============================
+IDE ATAPI streaming tape driver
+===============================
This driver is a part of the Linux ide driver.
@@ -10,14 +12,14 @@ to the request-list of the block device, and waits for their completion.
The block device major and minor numbers are determined from the
tape's relative position in the ide interfaces, as explained in ide.c.
-The character device interface consists of the following devices:
+The character device interface consists of the following devices::
-ht0 major 37, minor 0 first IDE tape, rewind on close.
-ht1 major 37, minor 1 second IDE tape, rewind on close.
-...
-nht0 major 37, minor 128 first IDE tape, no rewind on close.
-nht1 major 37, minor 129 second IDE tape, no rewind on close.
-...
+ ht0 major 37, minor 0 first IDE tape, rewind on close.
+ ht1 major 37, minor 1 second IDE tape, rewind on close.
+ ...
+ nht0 major 37, minor 128 first IDE tape, no rewind on close.
+ nht1 major 37, minor 129 second IDE tape, no rewind on close.
+ ...
The general magnetic tape commands compatible interface, as defined by
include/linux/mtio.h, is accessible through the character device.
@@ -40,9 +42,10 @@ Testing was done with a 2 GB CONNER CTMA 4000 IDE ATAPI Streaming Tape Drive.
Here are some words from the first releases of hd.c, which are quoted
in ide.c and apply here as well:
-| Special care is recommended. Have Fun!
+* Special care is recommended. Have Fun!
-Possible improvements:
+Possible improvements
+=====================
1. Support for the ATAPI overlap protocol.
diff --git a/Documentation/ide/ide.txt b/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
index 7aca987c23d9..88bdcba92f7d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ide/ide.txt
@@ -1,41 +1,43 @@
-
- Information regarding the Enhanced IDE drive in Linux 2.6
-
-==============================================================================
-
+============================================
+Information regarding the Enhanced IDE drive
+============================================
The hdparm utility can be used to control various IDE features on a
running system. It is packaged separately. Please Look for it on popular
linux FTP sites.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+.. important::
-*** IMPORTANT NOTICES: BUGGY IDE CHIPSETS CAN CORRUPT DATA!!
-*** =================
-*** PCI versions of the CMD640 and RZ1000 interfaces are now detected
-*** automatically at startup when PCI BIOS support is configured.
-***
-*** Linux disables the "prefetch" ("readahead") mode of the RZ1000
-*** to prevent data corruption possible due to hardware design flaws.
-***
-*** For the CMD640, linux disables "IRQ unmasking" (hdparm -u1) on any
-*** drive for which the "prefetch" mode of the CMD640 is turned on.
-*** If "prefetch" is disabled (hdparm -p8), then "IRQ unmasking" can be
-*** used again.
-***
-*** For the CMD640, linux disables "32bit I/O" (hdparm -c1) on any drive
-*** for which the "prefetch" mode of the CMD640 is turned off.
-*** If "prefetch" is enabled (hdparm -p9), then "32bit I/O" can be
-*** used again.
-***
-*** The CMD640 is also used on some Vesa Local Bus (VLB) cards, and is *NOT*
-*** automatically detected by Linux. For safe, reliable operation with such
-*** interfaces, one *MUST* use the "cmd640.probe_vlb" kernel option.
-***
-*** Use of the "serialize" option is no longer necessary.
-
-================================================================================
-Common pitfalls:
+ BUGGY IDE CHIPSETS CAN CORRUPT DATA!!
+
+ PCI versions of the CMD640 and RZ1000 interfaces are now detected
+ automatically at startup when PCI BIOS support is configured.
+
+ Linux disables the "prefetch" ("readahead") mode of the RZ1000
+ to prevent data corruption possible due to hardware design flaws.
+
+ For the CMD640, linux disables "IRQ unmasking" (hdparm -u1) on any
+ drive for which the "prefetch" mode of the CMD640 is turned on.
+ If "prefetch" is disabled (hdparm -p8), then "IRQ unmasking" can be
+ used again.
+
+ For the CMD640, linux disables "32bit I/O" (hdparm -c1) on any drive
+ for which the "prefetch" mode of the CMD640 is turned off.
+ If "prefetch" is enabled (hdparm -p9), then "32bit I/O" can be
+ used again.
+
+ The CMD640 is also used on some Vesa Local Bus (VLB) cards, and is *NOT*
+ automatically detected by Linux. For safe, reliable operation with such
+ interfaces, one *MUST* use the "cmd640.probe_vlb" kernel option.
+
+ Use of the "serialize" option is no longer necessary.
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Common pitfalls
+===============
- 40-conductor IDE cables are capable of transferring data in DMA modes up to
udma2, but no faster.
@@ -49,19 +51,18 @@ Common pitfalls:
- Even better try to stick to the same vendor and device type on the same
cable.
-================================================================================
-
-This is the multiple IDE interface driver, as evolved from hd.c.
+This is the multiple IDE interface driver, as evolved from hd.c
+===============================================================
It supports up to 9 IDE interfaces per default, on one or more IRQs (usually
-14 & 15). There can be up to two drives per interface, as per the ATA-6 spec.
+14 & 15). There can be up to two drives per interface, as per the ATA-6 spec.::
-Primary: ide0, port 0x1f0; major=3; hda is minor=0; hdb is minor=64
-Secondary: ide1, port 0x170; major=22; hdc is minor=0; hdd is minor=64
-Tertiary: ide2, port 0x1e8; major=33; hde is minor=0; hdf is minor=64
-Quaternary: ide3, port 0x168; major=34; hdg is minor=0; hdh is minor=64
-fifth.. ide4, usually PCI, probed
-sixth.. ide5, usually PCI, probed
+ Primary: ide0, port 0x1f0; major=3; hda is minor=0; hdb is minor=64
+ Secondary: ide1, port 0x170; major=22; hdc is minor=0; hdd is minor=64
+ Tertiary: ide2, port 0x1e8; major=33; hde is minor=0; hdf is minor=64
+ Quaternary: ide3, port 0x168; major=34; hdg is minor=0; hdh is minor=64
+ fifth.. ide4, usually PCI, probed
+ sixth.. ide5, usually PCI, probed
To access devices on interfaces > ide0, device entries please make sure that
device files for them are present in /dev. If not, please create such
@@ -80,12 +81,15 @@ seldom occurs. Be careful, and if in doubt, don't do it!
Drives are normally found by auto-probing and/or examining the CMOS/BIOS data.
For really weird situations, the apparent (fdisk) geometry can also be specified
-on the kernel "command line" using LILO. The format of such lines is:
+on the kernel "command line" using LILO. The format of such lines is::
ide_core.chs=[interface_number.device_number]:cyls,heads,sects
-or ide_core.cdrom=[interface_number.device_number]
-For example:
+or::
+
+ ide_core.cdrom=[interface_number.device_number]
+
+For example::
ide_core.chs=1.0:1050,32,64 ide_core.cdrom=1.1
@@ -96,10 +100,12 @@ geometry for partitioning purposes (fdisk).
If the auto-probing during boot time confuses a drive (ie. the drive works
with hd.c but not with ide.c), then an command line option may be specified
for each drive for which you'd like the drive to skip the hardware
-probe/identification sequence. For example:
+probe/identification sequence. For example::
ide_core.noprobe=0.1
-or
+
+or::
+
ide_core.chs=1.0:768,16,32
ide_core.noprobe=1.0
@@ -115,22 +121,24 @@ Such drives will be identified at boot time, just like a hard disk.
If for some reason your cdrom drive is *not* found at boot time, you can force
the probe to look harder by supplying a kernel command line parameter
-via LILO, such as:
+via LILO, such as:::
ide_core.cdrom=1.0 /* "master" on second interface (hdc) */
-or
+
+or::
+
ide_core.cdrom=1.1 /* "slave" on second interface (hdd) */
For example, a GW2000 system might have a hard drive on the primary
interface (/dev/hda) and an IDE cdrom drive on the secondary interface
-(/dev/hdc). To mount a CD in the cdrom drive, one would use something like:
+(/dev/hdc). To mount a CD in the cdrom drive, one would use something like::
ln -sf /dev/hdc /dev/cdrom
mkdir /mnt/cdrom
mount /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom -t iso9660 -o ro
If, after doing all of the above, mount doesn't work and you see
-errors from the driver (with dmesg) complaining about `status=0xff',
+errors from the driver (with dmesg) complaining about `status=0xff`,
this means that the hardware is not responding to the driver's attempts
to read it. One of the following is probably the problem:
@@ -165,7 +173,7 @@ drivers can always be compiled as loadable modules, the chipset drivers
can only be compiled into the kernel, and the core code (ide.c) can be
compiled as a loadable module provided no chipset support is needed.
-When using ide.c as a module in combination with kmod, add:
+When using ide.c as a module in combination with kmod, add::
alias block-major-3 ide-probe
@@ -176,10 +184,8 @@ driver using the "options=" keyword to insmod, while replacing any ',' with
';'.
-================================================================================
-
Summary of ide driver parameters for kernel command line
---------------------------------------------------------
+========================================================
For legacy IDE VLB host drivers (ali14xx/dtc2278/ht6560b/qd65xx/umc8672)
you need to explicitly enable probing by using "probe" kernel parameter,
@@ -226,28 +232,31 @@ Other kernel parameters for ide_core are:
* "chs=[interface_number.device_number]" to force device as a disk (using CHS)
-================================================================================
Some Terminology
-----------------
-IDE = Integrated Drive Electronics, meaning that each drive has a built-in
-controller, which is why an "IDE interface card" is not a "controller card".
+================
-ATA = AT (the old IBM 286 computer) Attachment Interface, a draft American
-National Standard for connecting hard drives to PCs. This is the official
-name for "IDE".
+IDE
+ Integrated Drive Electronics, meaning that each drive has a built-in
+ controller, which is why an "IDE interface card" is not a "controller card".
-The latest standards define some enhancements, known as the ATA-6 spec,
-which grew out of vendor-specific "Enhanced IDE" (EIDE) implementations.
+ATA
+ AT (the old IBM 286 computer) Attachment Interface, a draft American
+ National Standard for connecting hard drives to PCs. This is the official
+ name for "IDE".
-ATAPI = ATA Packet Interface, a new protocol for controlling the drives,
-similar to SCSI protocols, created at the same time as the ATA2 standard.
-ATAPI is currently used for controlling CDROM, TAPE and FLOPPY (ZIP or
-LS120/240) devices, removable R/W cartridges, and for high capacity hard disk
-drives.
+ The latest standards define some enhancements, known as the ATA-6 spec,
+ which grew out of vendor-specific "Enhanced IDE" (EIDE) implementations.
+
+ATAPI
+ ATA Packet Interface, a new protocol for controlling the drives,
+ similar to SCSI protocols, created at the same time as the ATA2 standard.
+ ATAPI is currently used for controlling CDROM, TAPE and FLOPPY (ZIP or
+ LS120/240) devices, removable R/W cartridges, and for high capacity hard disk
+ drives.
[email protected]
---
+
Wed Apr 17 22:52:44 CEST 2002 edited by Marcin Dalecki, the current
maintainer.
diff --git a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
index 98152bcd515a..c245242ef2f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
-
+===================
IDE warm-plug HOWTO
===================
-To warm-plug devices on a port 'idex':
+To warm-plug devices on a port 'idex'::
-# echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/delete_devices
+ # echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/delete_devices
-unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s)
+unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s)::
-# echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan
+ # echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan
done
--
2.20.1
Convert the m68k kernel-options.txt file to ReST.
The conversion is trivial, as the document is already on a format
close enough to ReST. Just some small adjustments were needed in
order to make it both good for being parsed while keeping it on
a good txt shape.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt | 319 ++++++++++++++------------
1 file changed, 173 insertions(+), 146 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
index 79d21246c75a..cabd9419740d 100644
--- a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
-
-
- Command Line Options for Linux/m68k
- ===================================
+===================================
+Command Line Options for Linux/m68k
+===================================
Last Update: 2 May 1999
+
Linux/m68k version: 2.2.6
+
Author: [email protected] (Roman Hodek)
+
Update: [email protected] (Jes Sorensen) and [email protected] (Chris Lawrence)
0) Introduction
===============
- Often I've been asked which command line options the Linux/m68k
+Often I've been asked which command line options the Linux/m68k
kernel understands, or how the exact syntax for the ... option is, or
... about the option ... . I hope, this document supplies all the
answers...
- Note that some options might be outdated, their descriptions being
+Note that some options might be outdated, their descriptions being
incomplete or missing. Please update the information and send in the
patches.
@@ -38,11 +40,11 @@ argument contains an '=', it is of class 2, and the definition is put
into init's environment. All other arguments are passed to init as
command line options.
- This document describes the valid kernel options for Linux/m68k in
+This document describes the valid kernel options for Linux/m68k in
the version mentioned at the start of this file. Later revisions may
add new such options, and some may be missing in older versions.
- In general, the value (the part after the '=') of an option is a
+In general, the value (the part after the '=') of an option is a
list of values separated by commas. The interpretation of these values
is up to the driver that "owns" the option. This association of
options with drivers is also the reason that some are further
@@ -55,21 +57,21 @@ subdivided.
2.1) root=
----------
-Syntax: root=/dev/<device>
- or: root=<hex_number>
+:Syntax: root=/dev/<device>
+:or: root=<hex_number>
This tells the kernel which device it should mount as the root
filesystem. The device must be a block device with a valid filesystem
on it.
- The first syntax gives the device by name. These names are converted
+The first syntax gives the device by name. These names are converted
into a major/minor number internally in the kernel in an unusual way.
Normally, this "conversion" is done by the device files in /dev, but
this isn't possible here, because the root filesystem (with /dev)
isn't mounted yet... So the kernel parses the name itself, with some
hardcoded name to number mappings. The name must always be a
combination of two or three letters, followed by a decimal number.
-Valid names are:
+Valid names are::
/dev/ram: -> 0x0100 (initial ramdisk)
/dev/hda: -> 0x0300 (first IDE disk)
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ Valid names are:
/dev/sde: -> 0x0840 (fifth SCSI disk)
/dev/fd : -> 0x0200 (floppy disk)
- The name must be followed by a decimal number, that stands for the
+The name must be followed by a decimal number, that stands for the
partition number. Internally, the value of the number is just
added to the device number mentioned in the table above. The
exceptions are /dev/ram and /dev/fd, where /dev/ram refers to an
@@ -100,12 +102,12 @@ the kernel command line.
[Strange and maybe uninteresting stuff ON]
- This unusual translation of device names has some strange
+This unusual translation of device names has some strange
consequences: If, for example, you have a symbolic link from /dev/fd
to /dev/fd0D720 as an abbreviation for floppy driver #0 in DD format,
you cannot use this name for specifying the root device, because the
kernel cannot see this symlink before mounting the root FS and it
-isn't in the table above. If you use it, the root device will not be
+isn't in the table above. If you use it, the root device will not be
set at all, without an error message. Another example: You cannot use a
partition on e.g. the sixth SCSI disk as the root filesystem, if you
want to specify it by name. This is, because only the devices up to
@@ -118,7 +120,7 @@ knowledge that each disk uses 16 minors, and write "root=/dev/sde17"
[Strange and maybe uninteresting stuff OFF]
- If the device containing your root partition isn't in the table
+If the device containing your root partition isn't in the table
above, you can also specify it by major and minor numbers. These are
written in hex, with no prefix and no separator between. E.g., if you
have a CD with contents appropriate as a root filesystem in the first
@@ -136,6 +138,7 @@ known partition UUID as the starting point. For example,
if partition 5 of the device has the UUID of
00112233-4455-6677-8899-AABBCCDDEEFF then partition 3 may be found as
follows:
+
PARTUUID=00112233-4455-6677-8899-AABBCCDDEEFF/PARTNROFF=-2
Authoritative information can be found in
@@ -145,8 +148,8 @@ Authoritative information can be found in
2.2) ro, rw
-----------
-Syntax: ro
- or: rw
+:Syntax: ro
+:or: rw
These two options tell the kernel whether it should mount the root
filesystem read-only or read-write. The default is read-only, except
@@ -156,7 +159,7 @@ for ramdisks, which default to read-write.
2.3) debug
----------
-Syntax: debug
+:Syntax: debug
This raises the kernel log level to 10 (the default is 7). This is the
same level as set by the "dmesg" command, just that the maximum level
@@ -166,7 +169,7 @@ selectable by dmesg is 8.
2.4) debug=
-----------
-Syntax: debug=<device>
+:Syntax: debug=<device>
This option causes certain kernel messages be printed to the selected
debugging device. This can aid debugging the kernel, since the
@@ -175,7 +178,7 @@ devices are possible depends on the machine type. There are no checks
for the validity of the device name. If the device isn't implemented,
nothing happens.
- Messages logged this way are in general stack dumps after kernel
+Messages logged this way are in general stack dumps after kernel
memory faults or bad kernel traps, and kernel panics. To be exact: all
messages of level 0 (panic messages) and all messages printed while
the log level is 8 or more (their level doesn't matter). Before stack
@@ -185,19 +188,27 @@ at least 8 can also be set by the "debug" command line option (see
Devices possible for Amiga:
- - "ser": built-in serial port; parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "mem": Save the messages to a reserved area in chip mem. After
+ - "ser":
+ built-in serial port; parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "mem":
+ Save the messages to a reserved area in chip mem. After
rebooting, they can be read under AmigaOS with the tool
'dmesg'.
Devices possible for Atari:
- - "ser1": ST-MFP serial port ("Modem1"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "ser2": SCC channel B serial port ("Modem2"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "ser" : default serial port
+ - "ser1":
+ ST-MFP serial port ("Modem1"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "ser2":
+ SCC channel B serial port ("Modem2"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "ser" :
+ default serial port
This is "ser2" for a Falcon, and "ser1" for any other machine
- - "midi": The MIDI port; parameters: 31250bps, 8N1
- - "par" : parallel port
+ - "midi":
+ The MIDI port; parameters: 31250bps, 8N1
+ - "par" :
+ parallel port
+
The printing routine for this implements a timeout for the
case there's no printer connected (else the kernel would
lock up). The timeout is not exact, but usually a few
@@ -205,26 +216,29 @@ Devices possible for Atari:
2.6) ramdisk_size=
--------------
+------------------
-Syntax: ramdisk_size=<size>
+:Syntax: ramdisk_size=<size>
- This option instructs the kernel to set up a ramdisk of the given
+This option instructs the kernel to set up a ramdisk of the given
size in KBytes. Do not use this option if the ramdisk contents are
passed by bootstrap! In this case, the size is selected automatically
and should not be overwritten.
- The only application is for root filesystems on floppy disks, that
+The only application is for root filesystems on floppy disks, that
should be loaded into memory. To do that, select the corresponding
size of the disk as ramdisk size, and set the root device to the disk
drive (with "root=").
2.7) swap=
+
+ I can't find any sign of this option in 2.2.6.
+
2.8) buff=
-----------
- I can't find any sign of these options in 2.2.6.
+ I can't find any sign of this option in 2.2.6.
3) General Device Options (Amiga and Atari)
@@ -233,13 +247,13 @@ drive (with "root=").
3.1) ether=
-----------
-Syntax: ether=[<irq>[,<base_addr>[,<mem_start>[,<mem_end>]]]],<dev-name>
+:Syntax: ether=[<irq>[,<base_addr>[,<mem_start>[,<mem_end>]]]],<dev-name>
- <dev-name> is the name of a net driver, as specified in
+<dev-name> is the name of a net driver, as specified in
drivers/net/Space.c in the Linux source. Most prominent are eth0, ...
eth3, sl0, ... sl3, ppp0, ..., ppp3, dummy, and lo.
- The non-ethernet drivers (sl, ppp, dummy, lo) obviously ignore the
+The non-ethernet drivers (sl, ppp, dummy, lo) obviously ignore the
settings by this options. Also, the existing ethernet drivers for
Linux/m68k (ariadne, a2065, hydra) don't use them because Zorro boards
are really Plug-'n-Play, so the "ether=" option is useless altogether
@@ -249,9 +263,9 @@ for Linux/m68k.
3.2) hd=
--------
-Syntax: hd=<cylinders>,<heads>,<sectors>
+:Syntax: hd=<cylinders>,<heads>,<sectors>
- This option sets the disk geometry of an IDE disk. The first hd=
+This option sets the disk geometry of an IDE disk. The first hd=
option is for the first IDE disk, the second for the second one.
(I.e., you can give this option twice.) In most cases, you won't have
to use this option, since the kernel can obtain the geometry data
@@ -262,9 +276,9 @@ disks.
3.3) max_scsi_luns=
-------------------
-Syntax: max_scsi_luns=<n>
+:Syntax: max_scsi_luns=<n>
- Sets the maximum number of LUNs (logical units) of SCSI devices to
+Sets the maximum number of LUNs (logical units) of SCSI devices to
be scanned. Valid values for <n> are between 1 and 8. Default is 8 if
"Probe all LUNs on each SCSI device" was selected during the kernel
configuration, else 1.
@@ -273,9 +287,9 @@ configuration, else 1.
3.4) st=
--------
-Syntax: st=<buffer_size>,[<write_thres>,[<max_buffers>]]
+:Syntax: st=<buffer_size>,[<write_thres>,[<max_buffers>]]
- Sets several parameters of the SCSI tape driver. <buffer_size> is
+Sets several parameters of the SCSI tape driver. <buffer_size> is
the number of 512-byte buffers reserved for tape operations for each
device. <write_thres> sets the number of blocks which must be filled
to start an actual write operation to the tape. Maximum value is the
@@ -286,9 +300,9 @@ buffers allocated for all tape devices.
3.5) dmasound=
--------------
-Syntax: dmasound=[<buffers>,<buffer-size>[,<catch-radius>]]
+:Syntax: dmasound=[<buffers>,<buffer-size>[,<catch-radius>]]
- This option controls some configurations of the Linux/m68k DMA sound
+This option controls some configurations of the Linux/m68k DMA sound
driver (Amiga and Atari): <buffers> is the number of buffers you want
to use (minimum 4, default 4), <buffer-size> is the size of each
buffer in kilobytes (minimum 4, default 32) and <catch-radius> says
@@ -305,20 +319,22 @@ don't need to expand the sound.
4.1) video=
-----------
-Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
The <fbname> parameter specifies the name of the frame buffer,
-eg. most atari users will want to specify `atafb' here. The
+eg. most atari users will want to specify `atafb` here. The
<sub-options> is a comma-separated list of the sub-options listed
below.
-NB: Please notice that this option was renamed from `atavideo' to
- `video' during the development of the 1.3.x kernels, thus you
+NB:
+ Please notice that this option was renamed from `atavideo` to
+ `video` during the development of the 1.3.x kernels, thus you
might need to update your boot-scripts if upgrading to 2.x from
an 1.2.x kernel.
-NBB: The behavior of video= was changed in 2.1.57 so the recommended
-option is to specify the name of the frame buffer.
+NBB:
+ The behavior of video= was changed in 2.1.57 so the recommended
+ option is to specify the name of the frame buffer.
4.1.1) Video Mode
-----------------
@@ -341,11 +357,11 @@ mode, if the hardware allows. Currently defined names are:
- falh2 : 896x608x1, Falcon only
- falh16 : 896x608x4, Falcon only
- If no video mode is given on the command line, the kernel tries the
+If no video mode is given on the command line, the kernel tries the
modes names "default<n>" in turn, until one is possible with the
hardware in use.
- A video mode setting doesn't make sense, if the external driver is
+A video mode setting doesn't make sense, if the external driver is
activated by a "external:" sub-option.
4.1.2) inverse
@@ -358,17 +374,17 @@ option, you can make the background white.
4.1.3) font
-----------
-Syntax: font:<fontname>
+:Syntax: font:<fontname>
Specify the font to use in text modes. Currently you can choose only
-between `VGA8x8', `VGA8x16' and `PEARL8x8'. `VGA8x8' is default, if the
+between `VGA8x8`, `VGA8x16` and `PEARL8x8`. `VGA8x8` is default, if the
vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel rows. Otherwise, the
-`VGA8x16' font is the default.
+`VGA8x16` font is the default.
-4.1.4) hwscroll_
-----------------
+4.1.4) `hwscroll_`
+------------------
-Syntax: hwscroll_<n>
+:Syntax: `hwscroll_<n>`
The number of additional lines of video memory to reserve for
speeding up the scrolling ("hardware scrolling"). Hardware scrolling
@@ -378,7 +394,7 @@ possible with plain STs and graphics cards (The former because the
base address must be on a 256 byte boundary there, the latter because
the kernel doesn't know how to set the base address at all.)
- By default, <n> is set to the number of visible text lines on the
+By default, <n> is set to the number of visible text lines on the
display. Thus, the amount of video memory is doubled, compared to no
hardware scrolling. You can turn off the hardware scrolling altogether
by setting <n> to 0.
@@ -386,31 +402,31 @@ by setting <n> to 0.
4.1.5) internal:
----------------
-Syntax: internal:<xres>;<yres>[;<xres_max>;<yres_max>;<offset>]
+:Syntax: internal:<xres>;<yres>[;<xres_max>;<yres_max>;<offset>]
This option specifies the capabilities of some extended internal video
hardware, like e.g. OverScan. <xres> and <yres> give the (extended)
dimensions of the screen.
- If your OverScan needs a black border, you have to write the last
+If your OverScan needs a black border, you have to write the last
three arguments of the "internal:". <xres_max> is the maximum line
length the hardware allows, <yres_max> the maximum number of lines.
<offset> is the offset of the visible part of the screen memory to its
physical start, in bytes.
- Often, extended interval video hardware has to be activated somehow.
+Often, extended interval video hardware has to be activated somehow.
For this, see the "sw_*" options below.
4.1.6) external:
----------------
-Syntax:
- external:<xres>;<yres>;<depth>;<org>;<scrmem>[;<scrlen>[;<vgabase>\
- [;<colw>[;<coltype>[;<xres_virtual>]]]]]
+:Syntax:
+ external:<xres>;<yres>;<depth>;<org>;<scrmem>[;<scrlen>[;<vgabase>
+ [;<colw>[;<coltype>[;<xres_virtual>]]]]]
-[I had to break this line...]
+.. I had to break this line...
- This is probably the most complicated parameter... It specifies that
+This is probably the most complicated parameter... It specifies that
you have some external video hardware (a graphics board), and how to
use it under Linux/m68k. The kernel cannot know more about the hardware
than you tell it here! The kernel also is unable to set or change any
@@ -418,38 +434,44 @@ video modes, since it doesn't know about any board internal. So, you
have to switch to that video mode before you start Linux, and cannot
switch to another mode once Linux has started.
- The first 3 parameters of this sub-option should be obvious: <xres>,
+The first 3 parameters of this sub-option should be obvious: <xres>,
<yres> and <depth> give the dimensions of the screen and the number of
planes (depth). The depth is the logarithm to base 2 of the number
of colors possible. (Or, the other way round: The number of colors is
2^depth).
- You have to tell the kernel furthermore how the video memory is
+You have to tell the kernel furthermore how the video memory is
organized. This is done by a letter as <org> parameter:
- 'n': "normal planes", i.e. one whole plane after another
- 'i': "interleaved planes", i.e. 16 bit of the first plane, than 16 bit
+ 'n':
+ "normal planes", i.e. one whole plane after another
+ 'i':
+ "interleaved planes", i.e. 16 bit of the first plane, than 16 bit
of the next, and so on... This mode is used only with the
- built-in Atari video modes, I think there is no card that
- supports this mode.
- 'p': "packed pixels", i.e. <depth> consecutive bits stand for all
- planes of one pixel; this is the most common mode for 8 planes
- (256 colors) on graphic cards
- 't': "true color" (more or less packed pixels, but without a color
- lookup table); usually depth is 24
+ built-in Atari video modes, I think there is no card that
+ supports this mode.
+ 'p':
+ "packed pixels", i.e. <depth> consecutive bits stand for all
+ planes of one pixel; this is the most common mode for 8 planes
+ (256 colors) on graphic cards
+ 't':
+ "true color" (more or less packed pixels, but without a color
+ lookup table); usually depth is 24
For monochrome modes (i.e., <depth> is 1), the <org> letter has a
different meaning:
- 'n': normal colors, i.e. 0=white, 1=black
- 'i': inverted colors, i.e. 0=black, 1=white
+ 'n':
+ normal colors, i.e. 0=white, 1=black
+ 'i':
+ inverted colors, i.e. 0=black, 1=white
- The next important information about the video hardware is the base
+The next important information about the video hardware is the base
address of the video memory. That is given in the <scrmem> parameter,
as a hexadecimal number with a "0x" prefix. You have to find out this
address in the documentation of your hardware.
- The next parameter, <scrlen>, tells the kernel about the size of the
+The next parameter, <scrlen>, tells the kernel about the size of the
video memory. If it's missing, the size is calculated from <xres>,
<yres>, and <depth>. For now, it is not useful to write a value here.
It would be used only for hardware scrolling (which isn't possible
@@ -460,7 +482,7 @@ empty, either by ending the "external:" after the video address or by
writing two consecutive semicolons, if you want to give a <vgabase>
(it is allowed to leave this parameter empty).
- The <vgabase> parameter is optional. If it is not given, the kernel
+The <vgabase> parameter is optional. If it is not given, the kernel
cannot read or write any color registers of the video hardware, and
thus you have to set appropriate colors before you start Linux. But if
your card is somehow VGA compatible, you can tell the kernel the base
@@ -472,18 +494,18 @@ uses the addresses vgabase+0x3c7...vgabase+0x3c9. The <vgabase>
parameter is written in hexadecimal with a "0x" prefix, just as
<scrmem>.
- <colw> is meaningful only if <vgabase> is specified. It tells the
+<colw> is meaningful only if <vgabase> is specified. It tells the
kernel how wide each of the color register is, i.e. the number of bits
per single color (red/green/blue). Default is 6, another quite usual
value is 8.
- Also <coltype> is used together with <vgabase>. It tells the kernel
+Also <coltype> is used together with <vgabase>. It tells the kernel
about the color register model of your gfx board. Currently, the types
"vga" (which is also the default) and "mv300" (SANG MV300) are
implemented.
- Parameter <xres_virtual> is required for ProMST or ET4000 cards where
-the physical linelength differs from the visible length. With ProMST,
+Parameter <xres_virtual> is required for ProMST or ET4000 cards where
+the physical linelength differs from the visible length. With ProMST,
xres_virtual must be set to 2048. For ET4000, xres_virtual depends on the
initialisation of the video-card.
If you're missing a corresponding yres_virtual: the external part is legacy,
@@ -499,13 +521,13 @@ currently works only with the ScreenWonder!
4.1.8) monitorcap:
-------------------
-Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
+:Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
This describes the capabilities of a multisync monitor. Don't use it
with a fixed-frequency monitor! For now, only the Falcon frame buffer
uses the settings of "monitorcap:".
- <vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
+<vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
your monitor can work with, in Hz. <hmin> and <hmax> are the same for
the horizontal frequency, in kHz.
@@ -520,28 +542,28 @@ If this option is given, the framebuffer device doesn't do any video
mode calculations and settings on its own. The only Atari fb device
that does this currently is the Falcon.
- What you reach with this: Settings for unknown video extensions
+What you reach with this: Settings for unknown video extensions
aren't overridden by the driver, so you can still use the mode found
when booting, when the driver doesn't know to set this mode itself.
But this also means, that you can't switch video modes anymore...
- An example where you may want to use "keep" is the ScreenBlaster for
+An example where you may want to use "keep" is the ScreenBlaster for
the Falcon.
4.2) atamouse=
--------------
-Syntax: atamouse=<x-threshold>,[<y-threshold>]
+:Syntax: atamouse=<x-threshold>,[<y-threshold>]
- With this option, you can set the mouse movement reporting threshold.
+With this option, you can set the mouse movement reporting threshold.
This is the number of pixels of mouse movement that have to accumulate
before the IKBD sends a new mouse packet to the kernel. Higher values
reduce the mouse interrupt load and thus reduce the chance of keyboard
overruns. Lower values give a slightly faster mouse responses and
slightly better mouse tracking.
- You can set the threshold in x and y separately, but usually this is
+You can set the threshold in x and y separately, but usually this is
of little practical use. If there's just one number in the option, it
is used for both dimensions. The default value is 2 for both
thresholds.
@@ -550,7 +572,7 @@ thresholds.
4.3) ataflop=
-------------
-Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
+:Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
The drive type may be 0, 1, or 2, for DD, HD, and ED, resp. This
setting affects how many buffers are reserved and which formats are
@@ -563,15 +585,15 @@ Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
no for the Medusa and yes for all others.
With the two following parameters, you can change the default
- steprate used for drive A and B, resp.
+ steprate used for drive A and B, resp.
4.4) atascsi=
-------------
-Syntax: atascsi=<can_queue>[,<cmd_per_lun>[,<scat-gat>[,<host-id>[,<tagged>]]]]
+:Syntax: atascsi=<can_queue>[,<cmd_per_lun>[,<scat-gat>[,<host-id>[,<tagged>]]]]
- This option sets some parameters for the Atari native SCSI driver.
+This option sets some parameters for the Atari native SCSI driver.
Generally, any number of arguments can be omitted from the end. And
for each of the numbers, a negative value means "use default". The
defaults depend on whether TT-style or Falcon-style SCSI is used.
@@ -597,11 +619,14 @@ ignored (others aren't affected).
32). Default: 8/1. (Note: Values > 1 seem to cause problems on a
Falcon, cause not yet known.)
- The <cmd_per_lun> value at a great part determines the amount of
+ The <cmd_per_lun> value at a great part determines the amount of
memory SCSI reserves for itself. The formula is rather
complicated, but I can give you some hints:
- no scatter-gather : cmd_per_lun * 232 bytes
- full scatter-gather: cmd_per_lun * approx. 17 Kbytes
+
+ no scatter-gather:
+ cmd_per_lun * 232 bytes
+ full scatter-gather:
+ cmd_per_lun * approx. 17 Kbytes
<scat-gat>:
Size of the scatter-gather table, i.e. the number of requests
@@ -634,19 +659,23 @@ ignored (others aren't affected).
4.5 switches=
-------------
-Syntax: switches=<list of switches>
+:Syntax: switches=<list of switches>
- With this option you can switch some hardware lines that are often
+With this option you can switch some hardware lines that are often
used to enable/disable certain hardware extensions. Examples are
OverScan, overclocking, ...
- The <list of switches> is a comma-separated list of the following
+The <list of switches> is a comma-separated list of the following
items:
- ikbd: set RTS of the keyboard ACIA high
- midi: set RTS of the MIDI ACIA high
- snd6: set bit 6 of the PSG port A
- snd7: set bit 6 of the PSG port A
+ ikbd:
+ set RTS of the keyboard ACIA high
+ midi:
+ set RTS of the MIDI ACIA high
+ snd6:
+ set bit 6 of the PSG port A
+ snd7:
+ set bit 6 of the PSG port A
It doesn't make sense to mention a switch more than once (no
difference to only once), but you can give as many switches as you
@@ -654,16 +683,16 @@ want to enable different features. The switch lines are set as early
as possible during kernel initialization (even before determining the
present hardware.)
- All of the items can also be prefixed with "ov_", i.e. "ov_ikbd",
-"ov_midi", ... These options are meant for switching on an OverScan
+All of the items can also be prefixed with `ov_`, i.e. `ov_ikbd`,
+`ov_midi`, ... These options are meant for switching on an OverScan
video extension. The difference to the bare option is that the
switch-on is done after video initialization, and somehow synchronized
to the HBLANK. A speciality is that ov_ikbd and ov_midi are switched
off before rebooting, so that OverScan is disabled and TOS boots
correctly.
- If you give an option both, with and without the "ov_" prefix, the
-earlier initialization ("ov_"-less) takes precedence. But the
+If you give an option both, with and without the `ov_` prefix, the
+earlier initialization (`ov_`-less) takes precedence. But the
switching-off on reset still happens in this case.
5) Options for Amiga Only:
@@ -672,10 +701,10 @@ switching-off on reset still happens in this case.
5.1) video=
-----------
-Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
The <fbname> parameter specifies the name of the frame buffer, valid
-options are `amifb', `cyber', 'virge', `retz3' and `clgen', provided
+options are `amifb`, `cyber`, 'virge', `retz3` and `clgen`, provided
that the respective frame buffer devices have been compiled into the
kernel (or compiled as loadable modules). The behavior of the <fbname>
option was changed in 2.1.57 so it is now recommended to specify this
@@ -697,9 +726,11 @@ predefined video modes are available:
NTSC modes:
- ntsc : 640x200, 15 kHz, 60 Hz
- ntsc-lace : 640x400, 15 kHz, 60 Hz interlaced
+
PAL modes:
- pal : 640x256, 15 kHz, 50 Hz
- pal-lace : 640x512, 15 kHz, 50 Hz interlaced
+
ECS modes:
- multiscan : 640x480, 29 kHz, 57 Hz
- multiscan-lace : 640x960, 29 kHz, 57 Hz interlaced
@@ -715,6 +746,7 @@ ECS modes:
- dblpal-lace : 640x1024, 27 kHz, 47 Hz interlaced
- dblntsc : 640x200, 27 kHz, 57 Hz doublescan
- dblpal : 640x256, 27 kHz, 47 Hz doublescan
+
VGA modes:
- vga : 640x480, 31 kHz, 60 Hz
- vga70 : 640x400, 31 kHz, 70 Hz
@@ -726,7 +758,7 @@ chipset and 8-bit color for the AGA chipset.
5.1.2) depth
------------
-Syntax: depth:<nr. of bit-planes>
+:Syntax: depth:<nr. of bit-planes>
Specify the number of bit-planes for the selected video-mode.
@@ -739,32 +771,32 @@ Use inverted display (black on white). Functionally the same as the
5.1.4) font
-----------
-Syntax: font:<fontname>
+:Syntax: font:<fontname>
Specify the font to use in text modes. Functionally the same as the
-"font" sub-option for the Atari, except that `PEARL8x8' is used instead
-of `VGA8x8' if the vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel
+"font" sub-option for the Atari, except that `PEARL8x8` is used instead
+of `VGA8x8` if the vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel
rows.
5.1.5) monitorcap:
-------------------
-Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
+:Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
This describes the capabilities of a multisync monitor. For now, only
the color frame buffer uses the settings of "monitorcap:".
- <vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
+<vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
your monitor can work with, in Hz. <hmin> and <hmax> are the same for
the horizontal frequency, in kHz.
- The defaults are 50;90;15;38 (Generic Amiga multisync monitor).
+The defaults are 50;90;15;38 (Generic Amiga multisync monitor).
5.2) fd_def_df0=
----------------
-Syntax: fd_def_df0=<value>
+:Syntax: fd_def_df0=<value>
Sets the df0 value for "silent" floppy drives. The value should be in
hexadecimal with "0x" prefix.
@@ -773,7 +805,7 @@ hexadecimal with "0x" prefix.
5.3) wd33c93=
-------------
-Syntax: wd33c93=<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: wd33c93=<sub-options...>
These options affect the A590/A2091, A3000 and GVP Series II SCSI
controllers.
@@ -784,9 +816,9 @@ below.
5.3.1) nosync
-------------
-Syntax: nosync:bitmask
+:Syntax: nosync:bitmask
- bitmask is a byte where the 1st 7 bits correspond with the 7
+bitmask is a byte where the 1st 7 bits correspond with the 7
possible SCSI devices. Set a bit to prevent sync negotiation on that
device. To maintain backwards compatibility, a command-line such as
"wd33c93=255" will be automatically translated to
@@ -796,35 +828,35 @@ all devices, eg. nosync:0xff.
5.3.2) period
-------------
-Syntax: period:ns
+:Syntax: period:ns
- `ns' is the minimum # of nanoseconds in a SCSI data transfer
+`ns` is the minimum # of nanoseconds in a SCSI data transfer
period. Default is 500; acceptable values are 250 - 1000.
5.3.3) disconnect
-----------------
-Syntax: disconnect:x
+:Syntax: disconnect:x
- Specify x = 0 to never allow disconnects, 2 to always allow them.
+Specify x = 0 to never allow disconnects, 2 to always allow them.
x = 1 does 'adaptive' disconnects, which is the default and generally
the best choice.
5.3.4) debug
------------
-Syntax: debug:x
+:Syntax: debug:x
- If `DEBUGGING_ON' is defined, x is a bit mask that causes various
+If `DEBUGGING_ON` is defined, x is a bit mask that causes various
types of debug output to printed - see the DB_xxx defines in
wd33c93.h.
5.3.5) clock
------------
-Syntax: clock:x
+:Syntax: clock:x
- x = clock input in MHz for WD33c93 chip. Normal values would be from
+x = clock input in MHz for WD33c93 chip. Normal values would be from
8 through 20. The default value depends on your hostadapter(s),
default for the A3000 internal controller is 14, for the A2091 it's 8
and for the GVP hostadapters it's either 8 or 14, depending on the
@@ -834,15 +866,15 @@ hostadapters.
5.3.6) next
-----------
- No argument. Used to separate blocks of keywords when there's more
+No argument. Used to separate blocks of keywords when there's more
than one wd33c93-based host adapter in the system.
5.3.7) nodma
------------
-Syntax: nodma:x
+:Syntax: nodma:x
- If x is 1 (or if the option is just written as "nodma"), the WD33c93
+If x is 1 (or if the option is just written as "nodma"), the WD33c93
controller will not use DMA (= direct memory access) to access the
Amiga's memory. This is useful for some systems (like A3000's and
A4000's with the A3640 accelerator, revision 3.0) that have problems
@@ -853,32 +885,27 @@ possible.
5.4) gvp11=
-----------
-Syntax: gvp11=<addr-mask>
+:Syntax: gvp11=<addr-mask>
- The earlier versions of the GVP driver did not handle DMA
+The earlier versions of the GVP driver did not handle DMA
address-mask settings correctly which made it necessary for some
people to use this option, in order to get their GVP controller
running under Linux. These problems have hopefully been solved and the
use of this option is now highly unrecommended!
- Incorrect use can lead to unpredictable behavior, so please only use
+Incorrect use can lead to unpredictable behavior, so please only use
this option if you *know* what you are doing and have a reason to do
so. In any case if you experience problems and need to use this
option, please inform us about it by mailing to the Linux/68k kernel
mailing list.
- The address mask set by this option specifies which addresses are
+The address mask set by this option specifies which addresses are
valid for DMA with the GVP Series II SCSI controller. An address is
valid, if no bits are set except the bits that are set in the mask,
too.
- Some versions of the GVP can only DMA into a 24 bit address range,
+Some versions of the GVP can only DMA into a 24 bit address range,
some can address a 25 bit address range while others can use the whole
32 bit address range for DMA. The correct setting depends on your
controller and should be autodetected by the driver. An example is the
24 bit region which is specified by a mask of 0x00fffffe.
-
-
-/* Local Variables: */
-/* mode: text */
-/* End: */
--
2.20.1
This file is already in a good shape: just its title and
adding some literal block markups is needed for it to be
part of the document.
While it has a small chapter with sysfs stuff, most of
the document is focused on driver development.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/pps/pps.txt | 67 ++++++++++++++++++++-------------------
1 file changed, 34 insertions(+), 33 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt
index 99f5d8c4c652..262151a6dad5 100644
--- a/Documentation/pps/pps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pps/pps.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
+======================
+PPS - Pulse Per Second
+======================
- PPS - Pulse Per Second
- ----------------------
-
-(C) Copyright 2007 Rodolfo Giometti <[email protected]>
+Copyright (C) 2007 Rodolfo Giometti <[email protected]>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Coding example
--------------
To register a PPS source into the kernel you should define a struct
-pps_source_info as follows:
+pps_source_info as follows::
static struct pps_source_info pps_ktimer_info = {
.name = "ktimer",
@@ -101,12 +101,12 @@ pps_source_info as follows:
};
and then calling the function pps_register_source() in your
-initialization routine as follows:
+initialization routine as follows::
source = pps_register_source(&pps_ktimer_info,
PPS_CAPTUREASSERT | PPS_OFFSETASSERT);
-The pps_register_source() prototype is:
+The pps_register_source() prototype is::
int pps_register_source(struct pps_source_info *info, int default_params)
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ pps_source_info which describe the capabilities of the driver).
Once you have registered a new PPS source into the system you can
signal an assert event (for example in the interrupt handler routine)
-just using:
+just using::
pps_event(source, &ts, PPS_CAPTUREASSERT, ptr)
@@ -134,13 +134,13 @@ Please see the file drivers/pps/clients/pps-ktimer.c for example code.
SYSFS support
-------------
-If the SYSFS filesystem is enabled in the kernel it provides a new class:
+If the SYSFS filesystem is enabled in the kernel it provides a new class::
$ ls /sys/class/pps/
pps0/ pps1/ pps2/
Every directory is the ID of a PPS sources defined in the system and
-inside you find several files:
+inside you find several files::
$ ls -F /sys/class/pps/pps0/
assert dev mode path subsystem@
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ inside you find several files:
Inside each "assert" and "clear" file you can find the timestamp and a
-sequence number:
+sequence number::
$ cat /sys/class/pps/pps0/assert
1170026870.983207967#8
@@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ and the userland tools available in your distribution's pps-tools package,
http://linuxpps.org , or https://github.com/redlab-i/pps-tools.
Once you have enabled the compilation of pps-ktimer just modprobe it (if
-not statically compiled):
+not statically compiled)::
# modprobe pps-ktimer
-and the run ppstest as follow:
+and the run ppstest as follow::
$ ./ppstest /dev/pps1
trying PPS source "/dev/pps1"
@@ -204,26 +204,27 @@ nor affordable. The cheap way is to load a PPS generator on one of the
computers (master) and PPS clients on others (slaves), and use very simple
cables to deliver signals using parallel ports, for example.
-Parallel port cable pinout:
-pin name master slave
-1 STROBE *------ *
-2 D0 * | *
-3 D1 * | *
-4 D2 * | *
-5 D3 * | *
-6 D4 * | *
-7 D5 * | *
-8 D6 * | *
-9 D7 * | *
-10 ACK * ------*
-11 BUSY * *
-12 PE * *
-13 SEL * *
-14 AUTOFD * *
-15 ERROR * *
-16 INIT * *
-17 SELIN * *
-18-25 GND *-----------*
+Parallel port cable pinout::
+
+ pin name master slave
+ 1 STROBE *------ *
+ 2 D0 * | *
+ 3 D1 * | *
+ 4 D2 * | *
+ 5 D3 * | *
+ 6 D4 * | *
+ 7 D5 * | *
+ 8 D6 * | *
+ 9 D7 * | *
+ 10 ACK * ------*
+ 11 BUSY * *
+ 12 PE * *
+ 13 SEL * *
+ 14 AUTOFD * *
+ 15 ERROR * *
+ 16 INIT * *
+ 17 SELIN * *
+ 18-25 GND *-----------*
Please note that parallel port interrupt occurs only on high->low transition,
so it is used for PPS assert edge. PPS clear edge can be determined only
--
2.20.1
Remove some blank spaces at the end of the lines.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt | 1 -
Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt | 50 ++++++++++++------------
Documentation/highuid.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/kobject.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/ldm.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/numastat.txt | 1 -
Documentation/pnp.txt | 11 +++---
Documentation/preempt-locking.txt | 2 +-
Documentation/rbtree.txt | 52 ++++++++++++-------------
Documentation/rtc.txt | 6 +--
Documentation/zorro.txt | 5 +--
12 files changed, 66 insertions(+), 71 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
index a845feb074de..4f937bead52c 100644
--- a/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
@@ -59,4 +59,3 @@ The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23::
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
^
This is pin 1
-
diff --git a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
index 4bb07c2f3e7d..0d45d6cf0fcb 100644
--- a/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/bus-virt-phys-mapping.txt
@@ -19,35 +19,35 @@ How to access I/O mapped memory from within device drivers
The AHA-1542 is a bus-master device, and your patch makes the driver give the
controller the physical address of the buffers, which is correct on x86
-(because all bus master devices see the physical memory mappings directly).
+(because all bus master devices see the physical memory mappings directly).
However, on many setups, there are actually **three** different ways of looking
at memory addresses, and in this case we actually want the third, the
-so-called "bus address".
+so-called "bus address".
Essentially, the three ways of addressing memory are (this is "real memory",
-that is, normal RAM--see later about other details):
+that is, normal RAM--see later about other details):
- - CPU untranslated. This is the "physical" address. Physical address
+ - CPU untranslated. This is the "physical" address. Physical address
0 is what the CPU sees when it drives zeroes on the memory bus.
- - CPU translated address. This is the "virtual" address, and is
+ - CPU translated address. This is the "virtual" address, and is
completely internal to the CPU itself with the CPU doing the appropriate
- translations into "CPU untranslated".
+ translations into "CPU untranslated".
- - bus address. This is the address of memory as seen by OTHER devices,
- not the CPU. Now, in theory there could be many different bus
+ - bus address. This is the address of memory as seen by OTHER devices,
+ not the CPU. Now, in theory there could be many different bus
addresses, with each device seeing memory in some device-specific way, but
happily most hardware designers aren't actually actively trying to make
- things any more complex than necessary, so you can assume that all
- external hardware sees the memory the same way.
+ things any more complex than necessary, so you can assume that all
+ external hardware sees the memory the same way.
Now, on normal PCs the bus address is exactly the same as the physical
address, and things are very simple indeed. However, they are that simple
because the memory and the devices share the same address space, and that is
-not generally necessarily true on other PCI/ISA setups.
+not generally necessarily true on other PCI/ISA setups.
-Now, just as an example, on the PReP (PowerPC Reference Platform), the
+Now, just as an example, on the PReP (PowerPC Reference Platform), the
CPU sees a memory map something like this (this is from memory)::
0-2 GB "real memory"
@@ -58,17 +58,17 @@ Now, that looks simple enough. However, when you look at the same thing from
the viewpoint of the devices, you have the reverse, and the physical memory
address 0 actually shows up as address 2 GB for any IO master.
-So when the CPU wants any bus master to write to physical memory 0, it
+So when the CPU wants any bus master to write to physical memory 0, it
has to give the master address 0x80000000 as the memory address.
-So, for example, depending on how the kernel is actually mapped on the
+So, for example, depending on how the kernel is actually mapped on the
PPC, you can end up with a setup like this::
physical address: 0
virtual address: 0xC0000000
bus address: 0x80000000
-where all the addresses actually point to the same thing. It's just seen
+where all the addresses actually point to the same thing. It's just seen
through different translations..
Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is::
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Similarly, on the Alpha, the normal translation is::
bus address: 0x40000000
(but there are also Alphas where the physical address and the bus address
-are the same).
+are the same).
Anyway, the way to look up all these translations, you do::
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ pointer from the kernel. So you can have something like this::
case STATUS_OK:
...
-on the other hand, you want the bus address when you have a buffer that
+on the other hand, you want the bus address when you have a buffer that
you want to give to the controller::
/* ask the controller to read the sense status into "sense_buffer" */
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ you want to give to the controller::
And you generally **never** want to use the physical address, because you can't
use that from the CPU (the CPU only uses translated virtual addresses), and
-you can't use it from the bus master.
+you can't use it from the bus master.
So why do we care about the physical address at all? We do need the physical
address in some cases, it's just not very often in normal code. The physical
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ shouldn't need to know about "bus addresses" etc).
There is a completely different type of memory too, and that's the "shared
memory" on the PCI or ISA bus. That's generally not RAM (although in the case
of a video graphics card it can be normal DRAM that is just used for a frame
-buffer), but can be things like a packet buffer in a network card etc.
+buffer), but can be things like a packet buffer in a network card etc.
This memory is called "PCI memory" or "shared memory" or "IO memory" or
whatever, and there is only one way to access it: the readb/writeb and
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ there is really nothing you can do with such an address: it's not
conceptually in the same memory space as "real memory" at all, so you cannot
just dereference a pointer. (Sadly, on x86 it **is** in the same memory space,
so on x86 it actually works to just deference a pointer, but it's not
-portable).
+portable).
For such memory, you can do things like:
@@ -197,19 +197,19 @@ Note that kernel versions 2.0.x (and earlier) mistakenly called the
ioremap() function "vremap()". ioremap() is the proper name, but I
didn't think straight when I wrote it originally. People who have to
support both can do something like::
-
+
/* support old naming silliness */
#if LINUX_VERSION_CODE < 0x020100
#define ioremap vremap
- #define iounmap vfree
+ #define iounmap vfree
#endif
-
+
at the top of their source files, and then they can use the right names
-even on 2.0.x systems.
+even on 2.0.x systems.
And the above sounds worse than it really is. Most real drivers really
don't do all that complex things (or rather: the complexity is not so
-much in the actual IO accesses as in error handling and timeouts etc).
+much in the actual IO accesses as in error handling and timeouts etc).
It's generally not hard to fix drivers, and in many cases the code
actually looks better afterwards::
diff --git a/Documentation/highuid.txt b/Documentation/highuid.txt
index 6ee70465c0ea..1ab59d7807d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/highuid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/highuid.txt
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ What's left to be done for 32-bit UIDs on all Linux architectures:
underlying filesystem, because quota records are written at offsets
corresponding to the UID in question.
Further investigation is needed to see if the quota system can cope
- properly with huge UIDs. If it can deal with 64-bit file offsets on all
+ properly with huge UIDs. If it can deal with 64-bit file offsets on all
architectures, this should not be a problem.
- Decide whether or not to keep backwards compatibility with the system
diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt
index ff4c25098119..fa0009ca0bc7 100644
--- a/Documentation/kobject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ such a method has a form like::
void my_object_release(struct kobject *kobj)
{
- struct my_object *mine = container_of(kobj, struct my_object, kobj);
+ struct my_object *mine = container_of(kobj, struct my_object, kobj);
/* Perform any additional cleanup on this object, then... */
kfree(mine);
diff --git a/Documentation/ldm.txt b/Documentation/ldm.txt
index 12c571368e73..90ccf24ebfdd 100644
--- a/Documentation/ldm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ldm.txt
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ When Linux boots, you will see something like::
Compiling LDM Support
---------------------
-To enable LDM, choose the following two options:
+To enable LDM, choose the following two options:
- "Advanced partition selection" CONFIG_PARTITION_ADVANCED
- "Windows Logical Disk Manager (Dynamic Disk) support" CONFIG_LDM_PARTITION
@@ -118,4 +118,3 @@ me.
Cheers,
FlatCap - Richard Russon
[email protected]
-
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
index 4e0446230205..f585022aed8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ And there are anti-guarantees:
of the standard containing this guarantee is Section 3.14, which
defines "memory location" as follows:
- memory location
+ memory location
either an object of scalar type, or a maximal sequence
of adjacent bit-fields all having nonzero width
diff --git a/Documentation/numastat.txt b/Documentation/numastat.txt
index aaf1667489f8..d6f07ca00c27 100644
--- a/Documentation/numastat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/numastat.txt
@@ -27,4 +27,3 @@ interleave_hit Interleaving wanted to allocate from this node
For easier reading you can use the numastat utility from the numactl package
(http://oss.sgi.com/projects/libnuma/). Note that it only works
well right now on machines with a small number of CPUs.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/pnp.txt b/Documentation/pnp.txt
index bab2d10631f0..c103acb9ad99 100644
--- a/Documentation/pnp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pnp.txt
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Overview
--------
Plug and Play provides a means of detecting and setting resources for legacy or
-otherwise unconfigurable devices. The Linux Plug and Play Layer provides these
+otherwise unconfigurable devices. The Linux Plug and Play Layer provides these
services to compatible drivers.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ The User Interface
------------------
The Linux Plug and Play user interface provides a means to activate PnP devices
-for legacy and user level drivers that do not support Linux Plug and Play. The
+for legacy and user level drivers that do not support Linux Plug and Play. The
user interface is integrated into sysfs.
In addition to the standard sysfs file the following are created in each
@@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ The Unified Plug and Play Layer
-------------------------------
All Plug and Play drivers, protocols, and services meet at a central location
-called the Plug and Play Layer. This layer is responsible for the exchange of
-information between PnP drivers and PnP protocols. Thus it automatically
-forwards commands to the proper protocol. This makes writing PnP drivers
+called the Plug and Play Layer. This layer is responsible for the exchange of
+information between PnP drivers and PnP protocols. Thus it automatically
+forwards commands to the proper protocol. This makes writing PnP drivers
significantly easier.
The following functions are available from the Plug and Play Layer:
@@ -289,4 +289,3 @@ They are as follows::
unsigned short vendor,
unsigned short function,
struct pnp_dev *from)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt b/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
index 509f5a422d57..47ad9688dc11 100644
--- a/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
+++ b/Documentation/preempt-locking.txt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ requires explicit additional locking for very few additional situations.
This document is for all kernel hackers. Developing code in the kernel
requires protecting these situations.
-
+
RULE #1: Per-CPU data structures need explicit protection
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
index c42a21b99046..f2bea06b471b 100644
--- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
@@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ Creating a new rbtree
Data nodes in an rbtree tree are structures containing a struct rb_node member::
struct mytype {
- struct rb_node node;
- char *keystring;
+ struct rb_node node;
+ char *keystring;
};
When dealing with a pointer to the embedded struct rb_node, the containing data
@@ -85,20 +85,20 @@ Example::
struct mytype *my_search(struct rb_root *root, char *string)
{
- struct rb_node *node = root->rb_node;
+ struct rb_node *node = root->rb_node;
- while (node) {
- struct mytype *data = container_of(node, struct mytype, node);
+ while (node) {
+ struct mytype *data = container_of(node, struct mytype, node);
int result;
result = strcmp(string, data->keystring);
if (result < 0)
- node = node->rb_left;
+ node = node->rb_left;
else if (result > 0)
- node = node->rb_right;
+ node = node->rb_right;
else
- return data;
+ return data;
}
return NULL;
}
@@ -117,25 +117,25 @@ Example::
int my_insert(struct rb_root *root, struct mytype *data)
{
- struct rb_node **new = &(root->rb_node), *parent = NULL;
+ struct rb_node **new = &(root->rb_node), *parent = NULL;
- /* Figure out where to put new node */
- while (*new) {
- struct mytype *this = container_of(*new, struct mytype, node);
- int result = strcmp(data->keystring, this->keystring);
+ /* Figure out where to put new node */
+ while (*new) {
+ struct mytype *this = container_of(*new, struct mytype, node);
+ int result = strcmp(data->keystring, this->keystring);
parent = *new;
- if (result < 0)
- new = &((*new)->rb_left);
- else if (result > 0)
- new = &((*new)->rb_right);
- else
- return FALSE;
- }
+ if (result < 0)
+ new = &((*new)->rb_left);
+ else if (result > 0)
+ new = &((*new)->rb_right);
+ else
+ return FALSE;
+ }
- /* Add new node and rebalance tree. */
- rb_link_node(&data->node, parent, new);
- rb_insert_color(&data->node, root);
+ /* Add new node and rebalance tree. */
+ rb_link_node(&data->node, parent, new);
+ rb_insert_color(&data->node, root);
return TRUE;
}
@@ -152,14 +152,14 @@ Example::
struct mytype *data = mysearch(&mytree, "walrus");
if (data) {
- rb_erase(&data->node, &mytree);
- myfree(data);
+ rb_erase(&data->node, &mytree);
+ myfree(data);
}
To replace an existing node in a tree with a new one with the same key, call::
void rb_replace_node(struct rb_node *old, struct rb_node *new,
- struct rb_root *tree);
+ struct rb_root *tree);
Replacing a node this way does not re-sort the tree: If the new node doesn't
have the same key as the old node, the rbtree will probably become corrupted.
diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt
index 688c95b11919..c7647de33c69 100644
--- a/Documentation/rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt
@@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ a different value to /proc/sys/dev/rtc/max-user-freq. Note that the
interrupt handler is only a few lines of code to minimize any possibility
of this effect.
-Also, if the kernel time is synchronized with an external source, the
-kernel will write the time back to the CMOS clock every 11 minutes. In
-the process of doing this, the kernel briefly turns off RTC periodic
+Also, if the kernel time is synchronized with an external source, the
+kernel will write the time back to the CMOS clock every 11 minutes. In
+the process of doing this, the kernel briefly turns off RTC periodic
interrupts, so be aware of this if you are doing serious work. If you
don't synchronize the kernel time with an external source (via ntp or
whatever) then the kernel will keep its hands off the RTC, allowing you
diff --git a/Documentation/zorro.txt b/Documentation/zorro.txt
index 664072b017e3..59fb1634d903 100644
--- a/Documentation/zorro.txt
+++ b/Documentation/zorro.txt
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The treatment of these regions depends on the type of Zorro space:
- Zorro II address space is always mapped and does not have to be mapped
explicitly using z_ioremap().
-
+
Conversion from bus/physical Zorro II addresses to kernel virtual addresses
and vice versa is done using::
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ The treatment of these regions depends on the type of Zorro space:
- Zorro III address space must be mapped explicitly using z_ioremap() first
before it can be accessed::
-
+
virt_addr = z_ioremap(bus_addr, size);
...
z_iounmap(virt_addr);
@@ -101,4 +101,3 @@ References
#. linux/arch/m68k/include/asm/zorro.h
#. linux/drivers/zorro
#. /proc/bus/zorro
-
--
2.20.1
The InfiniBand docs are plain text with no markups.
So, all we needed to do were to add the title markups and
some markup sequences in order to properly parse tables,
lists and literal blocks.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt | 64 +++++++------
Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt | 24 +++--
Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt | 108 ++++++++++++----------
Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt | 5 +
Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt | 33 +++++--
Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt | 12 ++-
7 files changed, 149 insertions(+), 101 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt
index 4b1f36b6ada0..f34669beb4fe 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-INFINIBAND MIDLAYER LOCKING
+===========================
+InfiniBand Midlayer Locking
+===========================
This guide is an attempt to make explicit the locking assumptions
made by the InfiniBand midlayer. It describes the requirements on
@@ -6,45 +8,47 @@ INFINIBAND MIDLAYER LOCKING
protocols that use the midlayer.
Sleeping and interrupt context
+==============================
With the following exceptions, a low-level driver implementation of
all of the methods in struct ib_device may sleep. The exceptions
are any methods from the list:
- create_ah
- modify_ah
- query_ah
- destroy_ah
- post_send
- post_recv
- poll_cq
- req_notify_cq
- map_phys_fmr
+ - create_ah
+ - modify_ah
+ - query_ah
+ - destroy_ah
+ - post_send
+ - post_recv
+ - poll_cq
+ - req_notify_cq
+ - map_phys_fmr
which may not sleep and must be callable from any context.
The corresponding functions exported to upper level protocol
consumers:
- ib_create_ah
- ib_modify_ah
- ib_query_ah
- ib_destroy_ah
- ib_post_send
- ib_post_recv
- ib_req_notify_cq
- ib_map_phys_fmr
+ - ib_create_ah
+ - ib_modify_ah
+ - ib_query_ah
+ - ib_destroy_ah
+ - ib_post_send
+ - ib_post_recv
+ - ib_req_notify_cq
+ - ib_map_phys_fmr
are therefore safe to call from any context.
In addition, the function
- ib_dispatch_event
+ - ib_dispatch_event
used by low-level drivers to dispatch asynchronous events through
the midlayer is also safe to call from any context.
Reentrancy
+----------
All of the methods in struct ib_device exported by a low-level
driver must be fully reentrant. The low-level driver is required to
@@ -62,6 +66,7 @@ Reentrancy
information between different calls of ib_poll_cq() is not defined.
Callbacks
+---------
A low-level driver must not perform a callback directly from the
same callchain as an ib_device method call. For example, it is not
@@ -74,18 +79,18 @@ Callbacks
completion event handlers for the same CQ are not called
simultaneously. The driver must guarantee that only one CQ event
handler for a given CQ is running at a time. In other words, the
- following situation is not allowed:
+ following situation is not allowed::
- CPU1 CPU2
+ CPU1 CPU2
- low-level driver ->
- consumer CQ event callback:
- /* ... */
- ib_req_notify_cq(cq, ...);
- low-level driver ->
- /* ... */ consumer CQ event callback:
- /* ... */
- return from CQ event handler
+ low-level driver ->
+ consumer CQ event callback:
+ /* ... */
+ ib_req_notify_cq(cq, ...);
+ low-level driver ->
+ /* ... */ consumer CQ event callback:
+ /* ... */
+ return from CQ event handler
The context in which completion event and asynchronous event
callbacks run is not defined. Depending on the low-level driver, it
@@ -93,6 +98,7 @@ Callbacks
Upper level protocol consumers may not sleep in a callback.
Hot-plug
+--------
A low-level driver announces that a device is ready for use by
consumers when it calls ib_register_device(), all initialization
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
index 47c1dd9818f2..0dd36154c0c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-IP OVER INFINIBAND
+==================
+IP over InfiniBand
+==================
The ib_ipoib driver is an implementation of the IP over InfiniBand
protocol as specified by RFC 4391 and 4392, issued by the IETF ipoib
@@ -8,16 +10,17 @@ IP OVER INFINIBAND
masqueraded to the kernel as ethernet interfaces).
Partitions and P_Keys
+=====================
When the IPoIB driver is loaded, it creates one interface for each
port using the P_Key at index 0. To create an interface with a
different P_Key, write the desired P_Key into the main interface's
- /sys/class/net/<intf name>/create_child file. For example:
+ /sys/class/net/<intf name>/create_child file. For example::
echo 0x8001 > /sys/class/net/ib0/create_child
This will create an interface named ib0.8001 with P_Key 0x8001. To
- remove a subinterface, use the "delete_child" file:
+ remove a subinterface, use the "delete_child" file::
echo 0x8001 > /sys/class/net/ib0/delete_child
@@ -28,6 +31,7 @@ Partitions and P_Keys
rtnl_link_ops, where children created using either way behave the same.
Datagram vs Connected modes
+===========================
The IPoIB driver supports two modes of operation: datagram and
connected. The mode is set and read through an interface's
@@ -51,6 +55,7 @@ Datagram vs Connected modes
networking stack to use the smaller UD MTU for these neighbours.
Stateless offloads
+==================
If the IB HW supports IPoIB stateless offloads, IPoIB advertises
TCP/IP checksum and/or Large Send (LSO) offloading capability to the
@@ -60,9 +65,10 @@ Stateless offloads
on/off using ethtool calls. Currently LRO is supported only for
checksum offload capable devices.
- Stateless offloads are supported only in datagram mode.
+ Stateless offloads are supported only in datagram mode.
Interrupt moderation
+====================
If the underlying IB device supports CQ event moderation, one can
use ethtool to set interrupt mitigation parameters and thus reduce
@@ -71,6 +77,7 @@ Interrupt moderation
moderation is supported.
Debugging Information
+=====================
By compiling the IPoIB driver with CONFIG_INFINIBAND_IPOIB_DEBUG set
to 'y', tracing messages are compiled into the driver. They are
@@ -79,7 +86,7 @@ Debugging Information
runtime through files in /sys/module/ib_ipoib/.
CONFIG_INFINIBAND_IPOIB_DEBUG also enables files in the debugfs
- virtual filesystem. By mounting this filesystem, for example with
+ virtual filesystem. By mounting this filesystem, for example with::
mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
@@ -96,10 +103,13 @@ Debugging Information
performance, because it adds tests to the fast path.
References
+==========
Transmission of IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) (RFC 4391)
- http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4391.txt
+ http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4391.txt
+
IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) Architecture (RFC 4392)
- http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4392.txt
+ http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4392.txt
+
IP over InfiniBand: Connected Mode (RFC 4755)
http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4755.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt
index 282e17be798a..2f888d9ffec0 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/opa_vnic.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=================================================================
+Intel Omni-Path (OPA) Virtual Network Interface Controller (VNIC)
+=================================================================
+
Intel Omni-Path (OPA) Virtual Network Interface Controller (VNIC) feature
supports Ethernet functionality over Omni-Path fabric by encapsulating
the Ethernet packets between HFI nodes.
@@ -17,70 +21,72 @@ an independent Ethernet network. The configuration is performed by an
Ethernet Manager (EM) which is part of the trusted Fabric Manager (FM)
application. HFI nodes can have multiple VNICs each connected to a
different virtual Ethernet switch. The below diagram presents a case
-of two virtual Ethernet switches with two HFI nodes.
+of two virtual Ethernet switches with two HFI nodes::
- +-------------------+
- | Subnet/ |
- | Ethernet |
- | Manager |
- +-------------------+
- / /
- / /
- / /
- / /
-+-----------------------------+ +------------------------------+
-| Virtual Ethernet Switch | | Virtual Ethernet Switch |
-| +---------+ +---------+ | | +---------+ +---------+ |
-| | VPORT | | VPORT | | | | VPORT | | VPORT | |
-+--+---------+----+---------+-+ +-+---------+----+---------+---+
- | \ / |
- | \ / |
- | \/ |
- | / \ |
- | / \ |
- +-----------+------------+ +-----------+------------+
- | VNIC | VNIC | | VNIC | VNIC |
- +-----------+------------+ +-----------+------------+
- | HFI | | HFI |
- +------------------------+ +------------------------+
+ +-------------------+
+ | Subnet/ |
+ | Ethernet |
+ | Manager |
+ +-------------------+
+ / /
+ / /
+ / /
+ / /
+ +-----------------------------+ +------------------------------+
+ | Virtual Ethernet Switch | | Virtual Ethernet Switch |
+ | +---------+ +---------+ | | +---------+ +---------+ |
+ | | VPORT | | VPORT | | | | VPORT | | VPORT | |
+ +--+---------+----+---------+-+ +-+---------+----+---------+---+
+ | \ / |
+ | \ / |
+ | \/ |
+ | / \ |
+ | / \ |
+ +-----------+------------+ +-----------+------------+
+ | VNIC | VNIC | | VNIC | VNIC |
+ +-----------+------------+ +-----------+------------+
+ | HFI | | HFI |
+ +------------------------+ +------------------------+
The Omni-Path encapsulated Ethernet packet format is as described below.
-Bits Field
-------------------------------------
+==================== ================================
+Bits Field
+==================== ================================
Quad Word 0:
-0-19 SLID (lower 20 bits)
-20-30 Length (in Quad Words)
-31 BECN bit
-32-51 DLID (lower 20 bits)
-52-56 SC (Service Class)
-57-59 RC (Routing Control)
-60 FECN bit
-61-62 L2 (=10, 16B format)
-63 LT (=1, Link Transfer Head Flit)
+0-19 SLID (lower 20 bits)
+20-30 Length (in Quad Words)
+31 BECN bit
+32-51 DLID (lower 20 bits)
+52-56 SC (Service Class)
+57-59 RC (Routing Control)
+60 FECN bit
+61-62 L2 (=10, 16B format)
+63 LT (=1, Link Transfer Head Flit)
Quad Word 1:
-0-7 L4 type (=0x78 ETHERNET)
-8-11 SLID[23:20]
-12-15 DLID[23:20]
-16-31 PKEY
-32-47 Entropy
-48-63 Reserved
+0-7 L4 type (=0x78 ETHERNET)
+8-11 SLID[23:20]
+12-15 DLID[23:20]
+16-31 PKEY
+32-47 Entropy
+48-63 Reserved
Quad Word 2:
-0-15 Reserved
-16-31 L4 header
-32-63 Ethernet Packet
+0-15 Reserved
+16-31 L4 header
+32-63 Ethernet Packet
Quad Words 3 to N-1:
-0-63 Ethernet packet (pad extended)
+0-63 Ethernet packet (pad extended)
Quad Word N (last):
-0-23 Ethernet packet (pad extended)
-24-55 ICRC
-56-61 Tail
-62-63 LT (=01, Link Transfer Tail Flit)
+0-23 Ethernet packet (pad extended)
+24-55 ICRC
+56-61 Tail
+62-63 LT (=01, Link Transfer Tail Flit)
+==================== ================================
Ethernet packet is padded on the transmit side to ensure that the VNIC OPA
packet is quad word aligned. The 'Tail' field contains the number of bytes
@@ -123,7 +129,7 @@ operation. It also handles the encapsulation of Ethernet packets with an
Omni-Path header in the transmit path. For each VNIC interface, the
information required for encapsulation is configured by the EM via VEMA MAD
interface. It also passes any control information to the HW dependent driver
-by invoking the RDMA netdev control operations.
+by invoking the RDMA netdev control operations::
+-------------------+ +----------------------+
| | | Linux |
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt
index 9fab5062f84b..f0abd6fa48f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/sysfs.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-SYSFS FILES
+===========
+Sysfs files
+===========
The sysfs interface has moved to
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-infiniband.
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt
index d2a3bf819226..ef56ea585f92 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/tag_matching.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
+==================
Tag matching logic
+==================
The MPI standard defines a set of rules, known as tag-matching, for matching
source send operations to destination receives. The following parameters must
match the following source and destination parameters:
+
* Communicator
* User tag - wild card may be specified by the receiver
* Source rank – wild car may be specified by the receiver
* Destination rank – wild
+
The ordering rules require that when more than one pair of send and receive
message envelopes may match, the pair that includes the earliest posted-send
and the earliest posted-receive is the pair that must be used to satisfy the
@@ -35,6 +39,7 @@ the header to initiate an RDMA READ operation directly to the matching buffer.
A fin message needs to be received in order for the buffer to be reused.
Tag matching implementation
+===========================
There are two types of matching objects used, the posted receive list and the
unexpected message list. The application posts receive buffers through calls
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
index 7aca13a54a3a..d88abfc0e370 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
-USERSPACE MAD ACCESS
+====================
+Userspace MAD access
+====================
Device files
+============
Each port of each InfiniBand device has a "umad" device and an
"issm" device attached. For example, a two-port HCA will have two
@@ -8,12 +11,13 @@ Device files
device of each type (for switch port 0).
Creating MAD agents
+===================
A MAD agent can be created by filling in a struct ib_user_mad_reg_req
and then calling the IB_USER_MAD_REGISTER_AGENT ioctl on a file
descriptor for the appropriate device file. If the registration
request succeeds, a 32-bit id will be returned in the structure.
- For example:
+ For example::
struct ib_user_mad_reg_req req = { /* ... */ };
ret = ioctl(fd, IB_USER_MAD_REGISTER_AGENT, (char *) &req);
@@ -26,12 +30,14 @@ Creating MAD agents
ioctl. Also, all agents registered through a file descriptor will
be unregistered when the descriptor is closed.
- 2014 -- a new registration ioctl is now provided which allows additional
+ 2014
+ a new registration ioctl is now provided which allows additional
fields to be provided during registration.
Users of this registration call are implicitly setting the use of
pkey_index (see below).
Receiving MADs
+==============
MADs are received using read(). The receive side now supports
RMPP. The buffer passed to read() must be at least one
@@ -41,7 +47,8 @@ Receiving MADs
MAD (RMPP), the errno is set to ENOSPC and the length of the
buffer needed is set in mad.length.
- Example for normal MAD (non RMPP) reads:
+ Example for normal MAD (non RMPP) reads::
+
struct ib_user_mad *mad;
mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + 256);
ret = read(fd, mad, sizeof *mad + 256);
@@ -50,7 +57,8 @@ Receiving MADs
free(mad);
}
- Example for RMPP reads:
+ Example for RMPP reads::
+
struct ib_user_mad *mad;
mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + 256);
ret = read(fd, mad, sizeof *mad + 256);
@@ -76,11 +84,12 @@ Receiving MADs
poll()/select() may be used to wait until a MAD can be read.
Sending MADs
+============
MADs are sent using write(). The agent ID for sending should be
filled into the id field of the MAD, the destination LID should be
filled into the lid field, and so on. The send side does support
- RMPP so arbitrary length MAD can be sent. For example:
+ RMPP so arbitrary length MAD can be sent. For example::
struct ib_user_mad *mad;
@@ -97,6 +106,7 @@ Sending MADs
perror("write");
Transaction IDs
+===============
Users of the umad devices can use the lower 32 bits of the
transaction ID field (that is, the least significant half of the
@@ -105,6 +115,7 @@ Transaction IDs
the kernel and will be overwritten before a MAD is sent.
P_Key Index Handling
+====================
The old ib_umad interface did not allow setting the P_Key index for
MADs that are sent and did not provide a way for obtaining the P_Key
@@ -119,6 +130,7 @@ P_Key Index Handling
default, and the IB_USER_MAD_ENABLE_PKEY ioctl will be removed.
Setting IsSM Capability Bit
+===========================
To set the IsSM capability bit for a port, simply open the
corresponding issm device file. If the IsSM bit is already set,
@@ -129,25 +141,26 @@ Setting IsSM Capability Bit
the issm file.
/dev files
+==========
To create the appropriate character device files automatically with
- udev, a rule like
+ udev, a rule like::
KERNEL=="umad*", NAME="infiniband/%k"
KERNEL=="issm*", NAME="infiniband/%k"
- can be used. This will create device nodes named
+ can be used. This will create device nodes named::
/dev/infiniband/umad0
/dev/infiniband/issm0
for the first port, and so on. The InfiniBand device and port
- associated with these devices can be determined from the files
+ associated with these devices can be determined from the files::
/sys/class/infiniband_mad/umad0/ibdev
/sys/class/infiniband_mad/umad0/port
- and
+ and::
/sys/class/infiniband_mad/issm0/ibdev
/sys/class/infiniband_mad/issm0/port
diff --git a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
index 47ebf2f80b2b..8ddc4b1cfef2 100644
--- a/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-USERSPACE VERBS ACCESS
+======================
+Userspace verbs access
+======================
The ib_uverbs module, built by enabling CONFIG_INFINIBAND_USER_VERBS,
enables direct userspace access to IB hardware via "verbs," as
@@ -13,6 +15,7 @@ USERSPACE VERBS ACCESS
libmthca userspace driver be installed.
User-kernel communication
+=========================
Userspace communicates with the kernel for slow path, resource
management operations via the /dev/infiniband/uverbsN character
@@ -28,6 +31,7 @@ User-kernel communication
system call.
Resource management
+===================
Since creation and destruction of all IB resources is done by
commands passed through a file descriptor, the kernel can keep track
@@ -41,6 +45,7 @@ Resource management
prevent one process from touching another process's resources.
Memory pinning
+==============
Direct userspace I/O requires that memory regions that are potential
I/O targets be kept resident at the same physical address. The
@@ -54,13 +59,14 @@ Memory pinning
number of pages pinned by a process.
/dev files
+==========
To create the appropriate character device files automatically with
- udev, a rule like
+ udev, a rule like::
KERNEL=="uverbs*", NAME="infiniband/%k"
- can be used. This will create device nodes named
+ can be used. This will create device nodes named::
/dev/infiniband/uverbs0
--
2.20.1
Convert netlabel documentation to ReST.
This was trivial: just add proper title markups.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt | 19 +++++++++++++------
Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt | 16 +++++++++++-----
Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt | 16 +++++++++++-----
3 files changed, 35 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
index a6075481fd60..cbd3f3231221 100644
--- a/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
+===================================
NetLabel CIPSO/IPv4 Protocol Engine
-==============================================================================
+===================================
+
Paul Moore, [email protected]
May 17, 2006
- * Overview
+Overview
+========
The NetLabel CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine is based on the IETF Commercial
IP Security Option (CIPSO) draft from July 16, 1992. A copy of this
@@ -13,7 +16,8 @@ draft can be found in this directory
it to an RFC standard it has become a de-facto standard for labeled
networking and is used in many trusted operating systems.
- * Outbound Packet Processing
+Outbound Packet Processing
+==========================
The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine applies the CIPSO IP option to packets by
adding the CIPSO label to the socket. This causes all packets leaving the
@@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ label by using the NetLabel security module API; if the NetLabel "domain" is
configured to use CIPSO for packet labeling then a CIPSO IP option will be
generated and attached to the socket.
- * Inbound Packet Processing
+Inbound Packet Processing
+=========================
The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine validates every CIPSO IP option it finds at the
IP layer without any special handling required by the LSM. However, in order
@@ -33,7 +38,8 @@ NetLabel security module API to extract the security attributes of the packet.
This is typically done at the socket layer using the 'socket_sock_rcv_skb()'
LSM hook.
- * Label Translation
+Label Translation
+=================
The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine contains a mechanism to translate CIPSO security
attributes such as sensitivity level and category to values which are
@@ -42,7 +48,8 @@ Domain Of Interpretation (DOI) definition and are configured through the
NetLabel user space communication layer. Each DOI definition can have a
different security attribute mapping table.
- * Label Translation Cache
+Label Translation Cache
+=======================
The NetLabel system provides a framework for caching security attribute
mappings from the network labels to the corresponding LSM identifiers. The
diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
index 3caf77bcff0f..9333bbb0adc1 100644
--- a/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
+++ b/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
+=====================
NetLabel Introduction
-==============================================================================
+=====================
+
Paul Moore, [email protected]
August 2, 2006
- * Overview
+Overview
+========
NetLabel is a mechanism which can be used by kernel security modules to attach
security attributes to outgoing network packets generated from user space
@@ -12,7 +15,8 @@ applications and read security attributes from incoming network packets. It
is composed of three main components, the protocol engines, the communication
layer, and the kernel security module API.
- * Protocol Engines
+Protocol Engines
+================
The protocol engines are responsible for both applying and retrieving the
network packet's security attributes. If any translation between the network
@@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ the NetLabel kernel security module API described below.
Detailed information about each NetLabel protocol engine can be found in this
directory.
- * Communication Layer
+Communication Layer
+===================
The communication layer exists to allow NetLabel configuration and monitoring
from user space. The NetLabel communication layer uses a message based
@@ -33,7 +38,8 @@ formatting of these NetLabel messages as well as the Generic NETLINK family
names can be found in the 'net/netlabel/' directory as comments in the
header files as well as in 'include/net/netlabel.h'.
- * Security Module API
+Security Module API
+===================
The purpose of the NetLabel security module API is to provide a protocol
independent interface to the underlying NetLabel protocol engines. In addition
diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
index 638c74f7de7f..026fc267f798 100644
--- a/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
+========================================
NetLabel Linux Security Module Interface
-==============================================================================
+========================================
+
Paul Moore, [email protected]
May 17, 2006
- * Overview
+Overview
+========
NetLabel is a mechanism which can set and retrieve security attributes from
network packets. It is intended to be used by LSM developers who want to make
@@ -12,7 +15,8 @@ use of a common code base for several different packet labeling protocols.
The NetLabel security module API is defined in 'include/net/netlabel.h' but a
brief overview is given below.
- * NetLabel Security Attributes
+NetLabel Security Attributes
+============================
Since NetLabel supports multiple different packet labeling protocols and LSMs
it uses the concept of security attributes to refer to the packet's security
@@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ configuration. It is up to the LSM developer to translate the NetLabel
security attributes into whatever security identifiers are in use for their
particular LSM.
- * NetLabel LSM Protocol Operations
+NetLabel LSM Protocol Operations
+================================
These are the functions which allow the LSM developer to manipulate the labels
on outgoing packets as well as read the labels on incoming packets. Functions
@@ -32,7 +37,8 @@ exist to operate both on sockets as well as the sk_buffs directly. These high
level functions are translated into low level protocol operations based on how
the administrator has configured the NetLabel subsystem.
- * NetLabel Label Mapping Cache Operations
+NetLabel Label Mapping Cache Operations
+=======================================
Depending on the exact configuration, translation between the network packet
label and the internal LSM security identifier can be time consuming. The
--
2.20.1
This small file seems to be an attempt to start documenting
backlight drivers.
It contains descriptions of the controls for the driver
with could sound as an somewhat user-faced description, but
it's main focus is to describe, instead, the data that should
be passed via platform data and some driver-specific stuff.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt | 65 ++++++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 40 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
index 01bce243d3d7..1e0b224fc397 100644
--- a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
+====================
Kernel driver lp855x
====================
Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
Supported chips:
+
Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and
LP8557
@@ -14,53 +16,66 @@ Description
* Brightness control
-Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
-The lp855x driver supports both cases.
+ Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
+ The lp855x driver supports both cases.
* Device attributes
-1) bl_ctl_mode
-Backlight control mode.
-Value : pwm based or register based
+ 1) bl_ctl_mode
-2) chip_id
-The lp855x chip id.
-Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
+ Backlight control mode.
+
+ Value: pwm based or register based
+
+ 2) chip_id
+
+ The lp855x chip id.
+
+ Value: lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
Platform data for lp855x
------------------------
For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
-* name : Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
-* device_control : Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
-* initial_brightness : Initial value of backlight brightness.
-* period_ns : Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
- Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
-* size_program : Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
-* rom_data : List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
+* name:
+ Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
+* device_control:
+ Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
+* initial_brightness:
+ Initial value of backlight brightness.
+* period_ns:
+ Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
+ Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
+* size_program:
+ Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
+* rom_data:
+ List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
-example 1) lp8552 platform data : i2c register mode with new eeprom data
+Examples
+========
-#define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
-#define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
+1) lp8552 platform data: i2c register mode with new eeprom data::
-static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
+ #define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
+ #define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
+
+ static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
{EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
-};
+ };
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
.name = "lcd-bl",
.device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
.initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
.size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
.rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
-};
+ };
-example 2) lp8556 platform data : pwm input mode with default rom data
+2) lp8556 platform data: pwm input mode with default rom data::
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
.device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
.initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
.period_ns = 1000000,
-};
+ };
--
2.20.1
The conversion is trivial: just adjust title markups.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt | 26 +++++++++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt b/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt
index 11e904ee073f..65c84a72e9fc 100644
--- a/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ptp/ptp.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
-* PTP hardware clock infrastructure for Linux
+===========================================
+PTP hardware clock infrastructure for Linux
+===========================================
This patch set introduces support for IEEE 1588 PTP clocks in
Linux. Together with the SO_TIMESTAMPING socket options, this
@@ -22,7 +23,8 @@
- Period output signals configurable from user space
- Synchronization of the Linux system time via the PPS subsystem
-** PTP hardware clock kernel API
+PTP hardware clock kernel API
+=============================
A PTP clock driver registers itself with the class driver. The
class driver handles all of the dealings with user space. The
@@ -36,7 +38,8 @@
development, it can be useful to have more than one clock in a
single system, in order to allow performance comparisons.
-** PTP hardware clock user space API
+PTP hardware clock user space API
+=================================
The class driver also creates a character device for each
registered clock. User space can use an open file descriptor from
@@ -49,7 +52,8 @@
ancillary clock features. User space can receive time stamped
events via blocking read() and poll().
-** Writing clock drivers
+Writing clock drivers
+=====================
Clock drivers include include/linux/ptp_clock_kernel.h and register
themselves by presenting a 'struct ptp_clock_info' to the
@@ -66,14 +70,17 @@
class driver, since the lock may also be needed by the clock
driver's interrupt service routine.
-** Supported hardware
+Supported hardware
+==================
+
+ * Freescale eTSEC gianfar
- + Freescale eTSEC gianfar
- 2 Time stamp external triggers, programmable polarity (opt. interrupt)
- 2 Alarm registers (optional interrupt)
- 3 Periodic signals (optional interrupt)
- + National DP83640
+ * National DP83640
+
- 6 GPIOs programmable as inputs or outputs
- 6 GPIOs with dedicated functions (LED/JTAG/clock) can also be
used as general inputs or outputs
@@ -81,6 +88,7 @@
- GPIO outputs can produce periodic signals
- 1 interrupt pin
- + Intel IXP465
+ * Intel IXP465
+
- Auxiliary Slave/Master Mode Snapshot (optional interrupt)
- Target Time (optional interrupt)
--
2.20.1
Convert the various documents at the driver-model, preparing
them to be part of the driver-api book.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt | 69 ++--
Documentation/driver-model/class.txt | 74 ++--
.../driver-model/design-patterns.txt | 106 +++---
Documentation/driver-model/device.txt | 57 +--
Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt | 50 +--
Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt | 112 +++---
Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt | 30 +-
Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt | 333 +++++++++---------
10 files changed, 455 insertions(+), 433 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
index abfc8e290d53..7ea1d7a41e1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Driver Binding
+==============
Driver binding is the process of associating a device with a device
driver that can control it. Bus drivers have typically handled this
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ device_register
When a new device is added, the bus's list of drivers is iterated over
to find one that supports it. In order to determine that, the device
ID of the device must match one of the device IDs that the driver
-supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
+supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
Instead of trying to derive a complex state machine and matching
algorithm, it is up to the bus driver to provide a callback to compare
a device against the IDs of a driver. The bus returns 1 if a match was
@@ -36,14 +37,14 @@ int match(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
If a match is found, the device's driver field is set to the driver
and the driver's probe callback is called. This gives the driver a
chance to verify that it really does support the hardware, and that
-it's in a working state.
+it's in a working state.
Device Class
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Upon the successful completion of probe, the device is registered with
the class to which it belongs. Device drivers belong to one and only one
-class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
+class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class
and actually register it with the class, which happens with the
class's register_dev callback.
@@ -53,7 +54,7 @@ Driver
~~~~~~
When a driver is attached to a device, the device is inserted into the
-driver's list of devices.
+driver's list of devices.
sysfs
@@ -67,18 +68,18 @@ to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
A directory for the device is created in the class's directory. A
symlink is created in that directory that points to the device's
-physical location in the sysfs tree.
+physical location in the sysfs tree.
A symlink can be created (though this isn't done yet) in the device's
physical directory to either its class directory, or the class's
top-level directory. One can also be created to point to its driver's
-directory also.
+directory also.
driver_register
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
+The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
The bus's list of devices is iterated over to find a match. Devices
that already have a driver are skipped. All the devices are iterated
over, to bind as many devices as possible to the driver.
@@ -94,5 +95,4 @@ of the driver is decremented. All symlinks between the two are removed.
When a driver is removed, the list of devices that it supports is
iterated over, and the driver's remove callback is called for each
-one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
-
+one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
index c247b488a567..016b15a6e8ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
-Bus Types
+=========
+Bus Types
+=========
Definition
~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,12 +14,12 @@ Declaration
Each bus type in the kernel (PCI, USB, etc) should declare one static
object of this type. They must initialize the name field, and may
-optionally initialize the match callback.
+optionally initialize the match callback::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
- .match = pci_bus_match,
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ .match = pci_bus_match,
+ };
The structure should be exported to drivers in a header file:
@@ -30,8 +31,8 @@ Registration
When a bus driver is initialized, it calls bus_register. This
initializes the rest of the fields in the bus object and inserts it
-into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
-the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
+into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
+the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
Callbacks
@@ -43,17 +44,17 @@ match(): Attaching Drivers to Devices
The format of device ID structures and the semantics for comparing
them are inherently bus-specific. Drivers typically declare an array
of device IDs of devices they support that reside in a bus-specific
-driver structure.
+driver structure.
The purpose of the match callback is to give the bus an opportunity to
determine if a particular driver supports a particular device by
comparing the device IDs the driver supports with the device ID of a
particular device, without sacrificing bus-specific functionality or
-type-safety.
+type-safety.
When a driver is registered with the bus, the bus's list of devices is
iterated over, and the match callback is called for each device that
-does not have a driver associated with it.
+does not have a driver associated with it.
@@ -64,22 +65,23 @@ The lists of devices and drivers are intended to replace the local
lists that many buses keep. They are lists of struct devices and
struct device_drivers, respectively. Bus drivers are free to use the
lists as they please, but conversion to the bus-specific type may be
-necessary.
+necessary.
-The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list.
+The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start, void * data,
- int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data,
+ int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
These helpers iterate over the respective list, and call the callback
for each device or driver in the list. All list accesses are
synchronized by taking the bus's lock (read currently). The reference
count on each object in the list is incremented before the callback is
called; it is decremented after the next object has been obtained. The
-lock is not held when calling the callback.
+lock is not held when calling the callback.
sysfs
@@ -87,14 +89,14 @@ sysfs
There is a top-level directory named 'bus'.
Each bus gets a directory in the bus directory, along with two default
-directories:
+directories::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
`-- drivers
Drivers registered with the bus get a directory in the bus's drivers
-directory:
+directory::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -106,7 +108,7 @@ directory:
Each device that is discovered on a bus of that type gets a symlink in
the bus's devices directory to the device's directory in the physical
-hierarchy:
+hierarchy::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -118,26 +120,27 @@ hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct bus_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct bus_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Bus drivers can export attributes using the BUS_ATTR_RW macro that works
similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW macro for devices. For example, a
-definition like this:
+definition like this::
-static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
+ static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the bus's
-sysfs directory using:
-
-int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-
+sysfs directory using::
+ int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+ void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
index 1fefc480a80b..fff55b80e86a 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Classes
-
+==============
Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,37 +13,37 @@ device. The following device classes have been identified:
Each device class defines a set of semantics and a programming interface
that devices of that class adhere to. Device drivers are the
implementation of that programming interface for a particular device on
-a particular bus.
+a particular bus.
Device classes are agnostic with respect to what bus a device resides
-on.
+on.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The device class structure looks like:
+The device class structure looks like::
-typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
-typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
+ typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
+ typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
See the kerneldoc for the struct class.
-A typical device class definition would look like:
+A typical device class definition would look like::
-struct device_class input_devclass = {
+ struct device_class input_devclass = {
.name = "input",
.add_device = input_add_device,
.remove_device = input_remove_device,
-};
+ };
Each device class structure should be exported in a header file so it
can be used by drivers, extensions and interfaces.
-Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using:
+Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using::
-int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
-void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
+ int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
+ void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
Devices
@@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ As devices are bound to drivers, they are added to the device class
that the driver belongs to. Before the driver model core, this would
typically happen during the driver's probe() callback, once the device
has been initialized. It now happens after the probe() callback
-finishes from the core.
+finishes from the core.
The device is enumerated in the class. Each time a device is added to
the class, the class's devnum field is incremented and assigned to the
device. The field is never decremented, so if the device is removed
from the class and re-added, it will receive a different enumerated
-value.
+value.
The class is allowed to create a class-specific structure for the
-device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
+device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
There is no list of devices in the device class. Each driver has a
list of devices that it supports. The device class has a list of
@@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ Device Drivers
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Device drivers are added to device classes when they are registered
with the core. A driver specifies the class it belongs to by setting
-the struct device_driver::devclass field.
+the struct device_driver::devclass field.
sysfs directory structure
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
+There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
Each class gets a directory in the class directory, along with two
-default subdirectories:
+default subdirectories::
class/
`-- input
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ default subdirectories:
`-- drivers
-Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
-that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
+Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
+that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory)::
class/
`-- input
@@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
`-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/
-Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
-device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
+Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
+device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
class/
`-- input
@@ -111,37 +111,39 @@ device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct devclass_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct devclass_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device_class *, char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device_class *, const char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
-};
+ };
Class drivers can export attributes using the DEVCLASS_ATTR macro that works
-similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
-like this:
+similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
+like this::
-static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
+ static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
+ static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
The bus driver can add and remove the attribute from the class's
-sysfs directory using:
+sysfs directory using::
-int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
-void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
In the example above, the file will be named 'debug' in placed in the
-class's directory in sysfs.
+class's directory in sysfs.
Interfaces
~~~~~~~~~~
There may exist multiple mechanisms for accessing the same device of a
-particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
+particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
When a device is added to a device class, the core attempts to add it
to every interface that is registered with the device class.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
index ba7b2df64904..41eb8f41f7dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+=============================
Device Driver Design Patterns
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=============================
This document describes a few common design patterns found in device drivers.
It is likely that subsystem maintainers will ask driver developers to
@@ -19,23 +19,23 @@ that the device the driver binds to will appear in several instances. This
means that the probe() function and all callbacks need to be reentrant.
The most common way to achieve this is to use the state container design
-pattern. It usually has this form:
+pattern. It usually has this form::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
+ (...)
+ };
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
- if (!foo)
- return -ENOMEM;
- spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
- (...)
-}
+ foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
+ if (!foo)
+ return -ENOMEM;
+ spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
+ (...)
+ }
This will create an instance of struct foo in memory every time probe() is
called. This is our state container for this instance of the device driver.
@@ -43,21 +43,21 @@ Of course it is then necessary to always pass this instance of the
state around to all functions that need access to the state and its members.
For example, if the driver is registering an interrupt handler, you would
-pass around a pointer to struct foo like this:
+pass around a pointer to struct foo like this::
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
- (...)
-}
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- (...)
- ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
-}
+ (...)
+ ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
+ }
This way you always get a pointer back to the correct instance of foo in
your interrupt handler.
@@ -66,38 +66,38 @@ your interrupt handler.
2. container_of()
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work:
+Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock;
- struct workqueue_struct *wq;
- struct work_struct offload;
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock;
+ struct workqueue_struct *wq;
+ struct work_struct offload;
+ (...)
+ };
-static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
-{
- struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
+ static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
- (...)
-}
+ (...)
+ }
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
- queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
- (...)
-}
+ queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
- INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
- (...)
-}
+ foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
+ INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
+ (...)
+ }
The design pattern is the same for an hrtimer or something similar that will
return a single argument which is a pointer to a struct member in the
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
index 2403eb856187..2b868d49d349 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==========================
The Basic Device Structure
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==========================
See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The bus driver that discovers the device uses this to register the
-device with the core:
+device with the core::
-int device_register(struct device * dev);
+ int device_register(struct device * dev);
The bus should initialize the following fields:
@@ -20,30 +20,33 @@ The bus should initialize the following fields:
- bus
A device is removed from the core when its reference count goes to
-0. The reference count can be adjusted using:
+0. The reference count can be adjusted using::
-struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
-void put_device(struct device * dev);
+ struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
+ void put_device(struct device * dev);
get_device() will return a pointer to the struct device passed to it
if the reference is not already 0 (if it's in the process of being
removed already).
-A driver can access the lock in the device structure using:
+A driver can access the lock in the device structure using::
-void lock_device(struct device * dev);
-void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void lock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct device_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct device_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
char *buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
const char *buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs.
@@ -54,39 +57,39 @@ As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be
created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize
that is by defining an attribute group.
-Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR:
+Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR::
-#define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
+ #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
-Example:
+Example:::
-static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
-static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective
names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be
-organized as follows into a group:
+organized as follows into a group::
-static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
+ static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
&dev_attr_type.attr,
&dev_attr_power.attr,
NULL,
-};
+ };
-static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
+ static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
.attrs = dev_attrs,
-};
+ };
-static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
+ static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
&dev_attr_group,
NULL,
-};
+ };
This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the
-group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked:
+group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked::
- dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
- device_register(dev);
+ dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
+ device_register(dev);
The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the
device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
index 99994a461359..4f88bdd7d555 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
Devres - Managed Device Resource
================================
@@ -5,17 +6,18 @@ Tejun Heo <[email protected]>
First draft 10 January 2007
+.. contents
-1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
-2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
-3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
-4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
-5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
-6. List of managed interfaces : Currently implemented managed interfaces
+ 1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
+ 2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
+ 3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
+ 4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
+ 5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
+ 6. List of managed interfaces: Currently implemented managed interfaces
- 1. Intro
- --------
+1. Intro
+--------
devres came up while trying to convert libata to use iomap. Each
iomapped address should be kept and unmapped on driver detach. For
@@ -42,8 +44,8 @@ would leak resources or even cause oops when failure occurs. iomap
adds more to this mix. So do msi and msix.
- 2. Devres
- ---------
+2. Devres
+---------
devres is basically linked list of arbitrarily sized memory areas
associated with a struct device. Each devres entry is associated with
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ using dma_alloc_coherent(). The managed version is called
dmam_alloc_coherent(). It is identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except
for the DMA memory allocated using it is managed and will be
automatically released on driver detach. Implementation looks like
-the following.
+the following::
struct dma_devres {
size_t size;
@@ -98,7 +100,7 @@ If a driver uses dmam_alloc_coherent(), the area is guaranteed to be
freed whether initialization fails half-way or the device gets
detached. If most resources are acquired using managed interface, a
driver can have much simpler init and exit code. Init path basically
-looks like the following.
+looks like the following::
my_init_one()
{
@@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ looks like the following.
return register_to_upper_layer(d);
}
-And exit path,
+And exit path::
my_remove_one()
{
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ on you. In some cases this may mean introducing checks that were not
necessary before moving to the managed devm_* calls.
- 3. Devres group
- ---------------
+3. Devres group
+---------------
Devres entries can be grouped using devres group. When a group is
released, all contained normal devres entries and properly nested
groups are released. One usage is to rollback series of acquired
-resources on failure. For example,
+resources on failure. For example::
if (!devres_open_group(dev, NULL, GFP_KERNEL))
return -ENOMEM;
@@ -172,7 +174,7 @@ like above are usually useful in midlayer driver (e.g. libata core
layer) where interface function shouldn't have side effect on failure.
For LLDs, just returning error code suffices in most cases.
-Each group is identified by void *id. It can either be explicitly
+Each group is identified by `void *id`. It can either be explicitly
specified by @id argument to devres_open_group() or automatically
created by passing NULL as @id as in the above example. In both
cases, devres_open_group() returns the group's id. The returned id
@@ -180,7 +182,7 @@ can be passed to other devres functions to select the target group.
If NULL is given to those functions, the latest open group is
selected.
-For example, you can do something like the following.
+For example, you can do something like the following::
int my_midlayer_create_something()
{
@@ -199,8 +201,8 @@ For example, you can do something like the following.
}
- 4. Details
- ----------
+4. Details
+----------
Lifetime of a devres entry begins on devres allocation and finishes
when it is released or destroyed (removed and freed) - no reference
@@ -220,8 +222,8 @@ All devres interface functions can be called without context if the
right gfp mask is given.
- 5. Overhead
- -----------
+5. Overhead
+-----------
Each devres bookkeeping info is allocated together with requested data
area. With debug option turned off, bookkeeping info occupies 16
@@ -237,8 +239,8 @@ and 400 bytes on 32bit machine after naive conversion (we can
certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer).
- 6. List of managed interfaces
- -----------------------------
+6. List of managed interfaces
+-----------------------------
CLOCK
devm_clk_get()
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
index d661e6f7e6a0..11d281506a04 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Drivers
+==============
See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver.
@@ -26,50 +27,50 @@ Declaration
As stated above, struct device_driver objects are statically
allocated. Below is an example declaration of the eepro100
driver. This declaration is hypothetical only; it relies on the driver
-being converted completely to the new model.
+being converted completely to the new model::
-static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .name = "eepro100",
- .bus = &pci_bus_type,
-
- .probe = eepro100_probe,
- .remove = eepro100_remove,
- .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
- .resume = eepro100_resume,
-};
+ static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .name = "eepro100",
+ .bus = &pci_bus_type,
+
+ .probe = eepro100_probe,
+ .remove = eepro100_remove,
+ .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
+ .resume = eepro100_resume,
+ };
Most drivers will not be able to be converted completely to the new
model because the bus they belong to has a bus-specific structure with
-bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
+bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
The most common example of this are device ID structures. A driver
typically defines an array of device IDs that it supports. The format
of these structures and the semantics for comparing device IDs are
completely bus-specific. Defining them as bus-specific entities would
-sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
+sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
Bus-specific drivers should include a generic struct device_driver in
-the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this:
+the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this::
-struct pci_driver {
- const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
A definition that included bus-specific fields would look like
-(using the eepro100 driver again):
+(using the eepro100 driver again)::
-static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
- .driver = {
+ static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
+ .driver = {
.name = "eepro100",
.bus = &pci_bus_type,
.probe = eepro100_probe,
.remove = eepro100_remove,
.suspend = eepro100_suspend,
.resume = eepro100_resume,
- },
-};
+ },
+ };
Some may find the syntax of embedded struct initialization awkward or
even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
@@ -77,12 +78,14 @@ even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
Registration
~~~~~~~~~~~~
-int driver_register(struct device_driver * drv);
+::
+
+ int driver_register(struct device_driver *drv);
The driver registers the structure on startup. For drivers that have
no bus-specific fields (i.e. don't have a bus-specific driver
structure), they would use driver_register and pass a pointer to their
-struct device_driver object.
+struct device_driver object.
Most drivers, however, will have a bus-specific structure and will
need to register with the bus using something like pci_driver_register.
@@ -101,7 +104,7 @@ By defining wrapper functions, the transition to the new model can be
made easier. Drivers can ignore the generic structure altogether and
let the bus wrapper fill in the fields. For the callbacks, the bus can
define generic callbacks that forward the call to the bus-specific
-callbacks of the drivers.
+callbacks of the drivers.
This solution is intended to be only temporary. In order to get class
information in the driver, the drivers must be modified anyway. Since
@@ -113,16 +116,16 @@ Access
~~~~~~
Once the object has been registered, it may access the common fields of
-the object, like the lock and the list of devices.
+the object, like the lock and the list of devices::
-int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver * drv, void * data,
- int (*callback)(struct device * dev, void * data));
+ int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver *drv, void *data,
+ int (*callback)(struct device *dev, void *data));
The devices field is a list of all the devices that have been bound to
the driver. The LDM core provides a helper function to operate on all
the devices a driver controls. This helper locks the driver on each
node access, and does proper reference counting on each device as it
-accesses it.
+accesses it.
sysfs
@@ -142,7 +145,9 @@ supports.
Callbacks
~~~~~~~~~
- int (*probe) (struct device * dev);
+::
+
+ int (*probe) (struct device *dev);
The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked
and the driver partially bound to the device. Drivers commonly use
@@ -162,9 +167,9 @@ the driver to that device.
A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that
the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have
-released all resources it allocated.
+released all resources it allocated::
- int (*remove) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*remove) (struct device *dev);
remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be
called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the
@@ -173,43 +178,46 @@ in other cases.
It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or
not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the
-device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
+device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
If the device is still present, it should quiesce the device and place
-it into a supported low-power state.
+it into a supported low-power state::
- int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state);
+ int (*suspend) (struct device *dev, pm_message_t state);
-suspend is called to put the device in a low power state.
+suspend is called to put the device in a low power state::
- int (*resume) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*resume) (struct device *dev);
Resume is used to bring a device back from a low power state.
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct driver_attribute {
- struct attribute attr;
- ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
- ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
-Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
+::
+
+ struct driver_attribute {
+ struct attribute attr;
+ ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
+ ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char *buf, size_t count);
+ };
+
+Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
Drivers can declare attributes using a DRIVER_ATTR_RW and DRIVER_ATTR_RO
macro that works identically to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW and DEVICE_ATTR_RO
macros.
-Example:
+Example::
-DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
-This is equivalent to declaring:
+This is equivalent to declaring::
-struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
+ struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the
-driver's directory using:
+driver's directory using::
-int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
-void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
index 6a8f9a8075d8..d4d1e9b40e0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+=============================
The Linux Kernel Device Model
+=============================
Patrick Mochel <[email protected]>
@@ -41,14 +43,14 @@ data structure. These fields must still be accessed by the bus layers,
and sometimes by the device-specific drivers.
Other bus layers are encouraged to do what has been done for the PCI layer.
-struct pci_dev now looks like this:
+struct pci_dev now looks like this::
-struct pci_dev {
+ struct pci_dev {
...
struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
...
-};
+ };
Note first that the struct device dev within the struct pci_dev is
statically allocated. This means only one allocation on device discovery.
@@ -80,26 +82,26 @@ easy. This has been accomplished by implementing a special purpose virtual
file system named sysfs.
Almost all mainstream Linux distros mount this filesystem automatically; you
-can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command:
+can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command::
-$ mount
-...
-none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
-...
-$
+ $ mount
+ ...
+ none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
+ ...
+ $
The auto-mounting of sysfs is typically accomplished by an entry similar to
-the following in the /etc/fstab file:
+the following in the /etc/fstab file::
-none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
-or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems:
+or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems::
-none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
-If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with:
+If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with::
-# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
+ # mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
Whenever a device is inserted into the tree, a directory is created for it.
This directory may be populated at each layer of discovery - the global layer,
@@ -108,7 +110,7 @@ the bus layer, or the device layer.
The global layer currently creates two files - 'name' and 'power'. The
former only reports the name of the device. The latter reports the
current power state of the device. It will also be used to set the current
-power state.
+power state.
The bus layer may also create files for the devices it finds while probing the
bus. For example, the PCI layer currently creates 'irq' and 'resource' files
@@ -118,6 +120,5 @@ A device-specific driver may also export files in its directory to expose
device-specific data or tunable interfaces.
More information about the sysfs directory layout can be found in
-the other documents in this directory and in the file
+the other documents in this directory and in the file
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
index 9d9e47dfc013..334dd4071ae4 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+============================
Platform Devices and Drivers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+============================
+
See <linux/platform_device.h> for the driver model interface to the
platform bus: platform_device, and platform_driver. This pseudo-bus
is used to connect devices on busses with minimal infrastructure,
@@ -19,15 +21,15 @@ be connected through a segment of some other kind of bus; but its
registers will still be directly addressable.
Platform devices are given a name, used in driver binding, and a
-list of resources such as addresses and IRQs.
+list of resources such as addresses and IRQs::
-struct platform_device {
+ struct platform_device {
const char *name;
u32 id;
struct device dev;
u32 num_resources;
struct resource *resource;
-};
+ };
Platform drivers
@@ -35,9 +37,9 @@ Platform drivers
Platform drivers follow the standard driver model convention, where
discovery/enumeration is handled outside the drivers, and drivers
provide probe() and remove() methods. They support power management
-and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions.
+and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions::
-struct platform_driver {
+ struct platform_driver {
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *);
int (*remove)(struct platform_device *);
void (*shutdown)(struct platform_device *);
@@ -46,25 +48,25 @@ struct platform_driver {
int (*resume_early)(struct platform_device *);
int (*resume)(struct platform_device *);
struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ };
Note that probe() should in general verify that the specified device hardware
actually exists; sometimes platform setup code can't be sure. The probing
can use device resources, including clocks, and device platform_data.
-Platform drivers register themselves the normal way:
+Platform drivers register themselves the normal way::
int platform_driver_register(struct platform_driver *drv);
Or, in common situations where the device is known not to be hot-pluggable,
the probe() routine can live in an init section to reduce the driver's
-runtime memory footprint:
+runtime memory footprint::
int platform_driver_probe(struct platform_driver *drv,
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *))
Kernel modules can be composed of several platform drivers. The platform core
-provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
+provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers::
int __platform_register_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers,
unsigned int count, struct module *owner);
@@ -73,7 +75,7 @@ provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
If one of the drivers fails to register, all drivers registered up to that
point will be unregistered in reverse order. Note that there is a convenience
-macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
+macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter::
#define platform_register_drivers(drivers, count)
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
Device Enumeration
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code will
-register platform devices:
+register platform devices::
int platform_device_register(struct platform_device *pdev);
@@ -133,14 +135,14 @@ tend to already have "normal" modes, such as ones using device nodes that
were created by PNP or by platform device setup.
None the less, there are some APIs to support such legacy drivers. Avoid
-using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers.
+using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers::
struct platform_device *platform_device_alloc(
const char *name, int id);
You can use platform_device_alloc() to dynamically allocate a device, which
you will then initialize with resources and platform_device_register().
-A better solution is usually:
+A better solution is usually::
struct platform_device *platform_device_register_simple(
const char *name, int id,
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
index 453053f1661f..4db1be49c6d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+=======================================
Porting Drivers to the New Driver Model
+=======================================
Patrick Mochel
@@ -8,8 +9,8 @@ Patrick Mochel
Overview
-Please refer to Documentation/driver-model/*.txt for definitions of
-various driver types and concepts.
+Please refer to `Documentation/driver-model/*.txt` for definitions of
+various driver types and concepts.
Most of the work of porting devices drivers to the new model happens
at the bus driver layer. This was intentional, to minimize the
@@ -18,11 +19,11 @@ of bus drivers.
In a nutshell, the driver model consists of a set of objects that can
be embedded in larger, bus-specific objects. Fields in these generic
-objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
+objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
The generic objects must be registered with the driver model core. By
doing so, they will exported via the sysfs filesystem. sysfs can be
-mounted by doing
+mounted by doing::
# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
@@ -30,108 +31,109 @@ mounted by doing
The Process
-Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
+Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
-Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
+Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
-- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver.
+- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ };
- Register the bus type.
+
This should be done in the initialization function for the bus type,
- which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function.
+ which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function::
-static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
-{
- return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
-}
+ static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
+ {
+ return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
+ }
-subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
+ subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
The bus type may be unregistered (if the bus driver may be compiled
- as a module) by doing:
+ as a module) by doing::
bus_unregister(&pci_bus_type);
-- Export the bus type for others to use.
+- Export the bus type for others to use.
- Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
+ Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
shared header file and export the symbol.
-From include/linux/pci.h:
+From include/linux/pci.h::
-extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
+ extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
-From file the above code appears in:
+From file the above code appears in::
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
+ EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
- This will cause the bus to show up in /sys/bus/pci/ with two
- subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'.
+ subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'::
-# tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
-/sys/bus/pci/
-|-- devices
-`-- drivers
+ # tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
+ /sys/bus/pci/
+ |-- devices
+ `-- drivers
-Step 2: Registering Devices.
+Step 2: Registering Devices.
struct device represents a single device. It mainly contains metadata
-describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
+describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
-- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type.
+- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type::
-struct pci_dev {
- ...
- struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
- ...
-};
+ struct pci_dev {
+ ...
+ struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
+ ...
+ };
- It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
+ It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
the struct to discourage programmers from doing mindless casts
between the object types. Instead macros, or inline functions,
- should be created to convert from the generic object type.
+ should be created to convert from the generic object type::
-#define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
+ #define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
-or
+ or
-static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
-{
+ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
+ {
return container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev);
-}
+ }
- This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
+ This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
that are performed (which is Good).
- Initialize the device on registration.
- When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
+ When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
bus driver should initialize the generic device. The most important
things to initialize are the bus_id, parent, and bus fields.
The bus_id is an ASCII string that contains the device's address on
the bus. The format of this string is bus-specific. This is
- necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
+ necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
parent is the physical parent of the device. It is important that
- the bus driver sets this field correctly.
+ the bus driver sets this field correctly.
The driver model maintains an ordered list of devices that it uses
for power management. This list must be in order to guarantee that
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
devices.
Also, the location of the device's sysfs directory depends on a
- device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
+ device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
the device hierarchy. Accurately setting the parent guarantees that
sysfs will accurately represent the hierarchy.
The device's bus field is a pointer to the bus type the device
belongs to. This should be set to the bus_type that was declared
- and initialized before.
+ and initialized before.
Optionally, the bus driver may set the device's name and release
fields.
@@ -155,107 +157,107 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
"ATI Technologies Inc Radeon QD"
- The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
- when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
+ The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
+ when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
been released. More on this in a moment.
-- Register the device.
+- Register the device.
Once the generic device has been initialized, it can be registered
- with the driver model core by doing:
+ with the driver model core by doing::
device_register(&dev->dev);
- It can later be unregistered by doing:
+ It can later be unregistered by doing::
device_unregister(&dev->dev);
- This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
+ This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
If a bus driver unregisters a device, it should not immediately free
- it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
- device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
+ it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
+ device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
(There may be other code that is currently referencing the device
- structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
+ structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
happening).
- When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
- The PCI tree in sysfs looks like:
+ When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
+ The PCI tree in sysfs looks like::
-/sys/devices/pci0/
-|-- 00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0
-| `-- 01:00.0
-|-- 00:02.0
-| `-- 02:1f.0
-| `-- 03:00.0
-|-- 00:1e.0
-| `-- 04:04.0
-|-- 00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1
-| |-- ide0
-| | |-- 0.0
-| | `-- 0.1
-| `-- ide1
-| `-- 1.0
-|-- 00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3
-`-- 00:1f.5
+ /sys/devices/pci0/
+ |-- 00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0
+ | `-- 01:00.0
+ |-- 00:02.0
+ | `-- 02:1f.0
+ | `-- 03:00.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0
+ | `-- 04:04.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1
+ | |-- ide0
+ | | |-- 0.0
+ | | `-- 0.1
+ | `-- ide1
+ | `-- 1.0
+ |-- 00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3
+ `-- 00:1f.5
Also, symlinks are created in the bus's 'devices' directory
- that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
+ that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
-/sys/bus/pci/devices/
-|-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
-|-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
-|-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
-|-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
-|-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
-|-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
-|-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
-|-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
-|-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
-`-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
+ /sys/bus/pci/devices/
+ |-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
+ |-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
+ |-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
+ |-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
+ |-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
+ |-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
+ |-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
+ `-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
Step 3: Registering Drivers.
struct device_driver is a simple driver structure that contains a set
-of operations that the driver model core may call.
+of operations that the driver model core may call.
-- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
+- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
- Just like with devices, do something like:
+ Just like with devices, do something like::
-struct pci_driver {
- ...
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ ...
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
-- Initialize the generic driver structure.
+- Initialize the generic driver structure.
When the driver registers with the bus (e.g. doing pci_register_driver()),
initialize the necessary fields of the driver: the name and bus
- fields.
+ fields.
- Register the driver.
- After the generic driver has been initialized, call
+ After the generic driver has been initialized, call::
driver_register(&drv->driver);
to register the driver with the core.
When the driver is unregistered from the bus, unregister it from the
- core by doing:
+ core by doing::
driver_unregister(&drv->driver);
@@ -265,15 +267,15 @@ struct pci_driver {
- Sysfs representation.
- Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
- For example:
+ Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
+ For example::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-|-- e100
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ |-- e100
+ `-- serial
Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
@@ -281,30 +283,30 @@ Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
struct device_driver defines a set of operations that the driver model
core calls. Most of these operations are probably similar to
operations the bus already defines for drivers, but taking different
-parameters.
+parameters.
It would be difficult and tedious to force every driver on a bus to
simultaneously convert their drivers to generic format. Instead, the
bus driver should define single instances of the generic methods that
-forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance:
+forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance::
-static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
-{
- struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
- struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
+ static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
+ {
+ struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
+ struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
- if (drv) {
- if (drv->remove)
- drv->remove(pci_dev);
- pci_dev->driver = NULL;
- }
- return 0;
-}
+ if (drv) {
+ if (drv->remove)
+ drv->remove(pci_dev);
+ pci_dev->driver = NULL;
+ }
+ return 0;
+ }
The generic driver should be initialized with these methods before it
-is registered.
+is registered::
/* initialize common driver fields */
drv->driver.name = drv->name;
@@ -320,23 +322,23 @@ is registered.
Ideally, the bus should only initialize the fields if they are not
already set. This allows the drivers to implement their own generic
-methods.
+methods.
-Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
+Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
The model assumes that a device or driver can be dynamically
registered with the bus at any time. When registration happens,
devices must be bound to a driver, or drivers must be bound to all
-devices that it supports.
+devices that it supports.
A driver typically contains a list of device IDs that it supports. The
-bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
+bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
The format of the device IDs, and the semantics for comparing them are
-bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
+bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
Instead, a bus may supply a method in struct bus_type that does the
-comparison:
+comparison::
int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
@@ -346,59 +348,59 @@ and zero otherwise. It may also return error code (for example
not possible.
When a device is registered, the bus's list of drivers is iterated
-over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
+over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
When a driver is registered, the bus's list of devices is iterated
over. bus->match() is called for each device that is not already
-claimed by a driver.
+claimed by a driver.
When a device is successfully bound to a driver, device->driver is
set, the device is added to a per-driver list of devices, and a
symlink is created in the driver's sysfs directory that points to the
-device's physical directory:
+device's physical directory::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-| `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-| `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- e100
-| `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ | `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ | `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- e100
+ | `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
+ `-- serial
This driver binding should replace the existing driver binding
-mechanism the bus currently uses.
+mechanism the bus currently uses.
Step 6: Supply a hotplug callback.
Whenever a device is registered with the driver model core, the
-userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
+userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
Users can define actions to perform when a device is inserted or
-removed.
+removed.
The driver model core passes several arguments to userspace via
environment variables, including
- ACTION: set to 'add' or 'remove'
-- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
+- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
A bus driver may also supply additional parameters for userspace to
consume. To do this, a bus must implement the 'hotplug' method in
-struct bus_type:
+struct bus_type::
- int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
+ int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size);
-This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
+This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
Step 7: Cleaning up the bus driver.
The generic bus, device, and driver structures provide several fields
-that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
+that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
- Device list.
@@ -407,36 +409,36 @@ type. This includes all devices on all instances of that bus type.
An internal list that the bus uses may be removed, in favor of using
this one.
-The core provides an iterator to access these devices.
+The core provides an iterator to access these devices::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
- Driver list.
struct bus_type also contains a list of all drivers registered with
-it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
-be removed in favor of using the generic one.
+it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
+be removed in favor of using the generic one.
-The drivers may be iterated over, like devices:
+The drivers may be iterated over, like devices::
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
Please see drivers/base/bus.c for more information.
-- rwsem
+- rwsem
struct bus_type contains an rwsem that protects all core accesses to
the device and driver lists. This can be used by the bus driver
internally, and should be used when accessing the device or driver
-lists the bus maintains.
+lists the bus maintains.
-- Device and driver fields.
+- Device and driver fields.
Some of the fields in struct device and struct device_driver duplicate
fields in the bus-specific representations of these objects. Feel free
@@ -444,4 +446,3 @@ to remove the bus-specific ones and favor the generic ones. Note
though, that this will likely mean fixing up all the drivers that
reference the bus-specific fields (though those should all be 1-line
changes).
-
--
2.20.1
The conversion here is trivial:
- Adjust the document title's markup
- Do some whitespace alignment;
- mark literal blocks;
- Use ReST way to markup indented lists.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt | 98 ++++++++++++++++++++-----------------
1 file changed, 52 insertions(+), 46 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt b/Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt
index b29f03a6d82f..acb216b99c26 100644
--- a/Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/riscv/pmu.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+===================================
Supporting PMUs on RISC-V platforms
-==========================================
+===================================
+
Alan Kao <[email protected]>, Mar 2018
Introduction
@@ -77,13 +79,13 @@ Note that some features can be done in this stage as well:
(2) privilege level setting (user space only, kernel space only, both);
(3) destructor setting. Normally it is sufficient to apply *riscv_destroy_event*;
(4) tweaks for non-sampling events, which will be utilized by functions such as
-*perf_adjust_period*, usually something like the follows:
+ *perf_adjust_period*, usually something like the follows::
-if (!is_sampling_event(event)) {
- hwc->sample_period = x86_pmu.max_period;
- hwc->last_period = hwc->sample_period;
- local64_set(&hwc->period_left, hwc->sample_period);
-}
+ if (!is_sampling_event(event)) {
+ hwc->sample_period = x86_pmu.max_period;
+ hwc->last_period = hwc->sample_period;
+ local64_set(&hwc->period_left, hwc->sample_period);
+ }
In the case of *riscv_base_pmu*, only (3) is provided for now.
@@ -94,10 +96,10 @@ In the case of *riscv_base_pmu*, only (3) is provided for now.
3.1. Interrupt Initialization
This often occurs at the beginning of the *event_init* method. In common
-practice, this should be a code segment like
+practice, this should be a code segment like::
-int x86_reserve_hardware(void)
-{
+ int x86_reserve_hardware(void)
+ {
int err = 0;
if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(&pmc_refcount)) {
@@ -114,7 +116,7 @@ int x86_reserve_hardware(void)
}
return err;
-}
+ }
And the magic is in *reserve_pmc_hardware*, which usually does atomic
operations to make implemented IRQ accessible from some global function pointer.
@@ -128,28 +130,28 @@ which will be introduced in the next section.)
3.2. IRQ Structure
-Basically, a IRQ runs the following pseudo code:
+Basically, a IRQ runs the following pseudo code::
-for each hardware counter that triggered this overflow
+ for each hardware counter that triggered this overflow
- get the event of this counter
+ get the event of this counter
- // following two steps are defined as *read()*,
- // check the section Reading/Writing Counters for details.
- count the delta value since previous interrupt
- update the event->count (# event occurs) by adding delta, and
- event->hw.period_left by subtracting delta
+ // following two steps are defined as *read()*,
+ // check the section Reading/Writing Counters for details.
+ count the delta value since previous interrupt
+ update the event->count (# event occurs) by adding delta, and
+ event->hw.period_left by subtracting delta
- if the event overflows
- sample data
- set the counter appropriately for the next overflow
+ if the event overflows
+ sample data
+ set the counter appropriately for the next overflow
- if the event overflows again
- too frequently, throttle this event
- fi
- fi
+ if the event overflows again
+ too frequently, throttle this event
+ fi
+ fi
-end for
+ end for
However as of this writing, none of the RISC-V implementations have designed an
interrupt for perf, so the details are to be completed in the future.
@@ -195,23 +197,26 @@ A normal flow of these state transitions are as follows:
At this stage, a general event is bound to a physical counter, if any.
The state changes to PERF_HES_STOPPED and PERF_HES_UPTODATE, because it is now
stopped, and the (software) event count does not need updating.
-** *start* is then called, and the counter is enabled.
- With flag PERF_EF_RELOAD, it writes an appropriate value to the counter (check
- previous section for detail).
- Nothing is written if the flag does not contain PERF_EF_RELOAD.
- The state now is reset to none, because it is neither stopped nor updated
- (the counting already started)
+
+ - *start* is then called, and the counter is enabled.
+ With flag PERF_EF_RELOAD, it writes an appropriate value to the counter (check
+ previous section for detail).
+ Nothing is written if the flag does not contain PERF_EF_RELOAD.
+ The state now is reset to none, because it is neither stopped nor updated
+ (the counting already started)
+
* When being context-switched out, *del* is called. It then checks out all the
events in the PMU and calls *stop* to update their counts.
-** *stop* is called by *del*
- and the perf core with flag PERF_EF_UPDATE, and it often shares the same
- subroutine as *read* with the same logic.
- The state changes to PERF_HES_STOPPED and PERF_HES_UPTODATE, again.
-** Life cycle of these two pairs: *add* and *del* are called repeatedly as
- tasks switch in-and-out; *start* and *stop* is also called when the perf core
- needs a quick stop-and-start, for instance, when the interrupt period is being
- adjusted.
+ - *stop* is called by *del*
+ and the perf core with flag PERF_EF_UPDATE, and it often shares the same
+ subroutine as *read* with the same logic.
+ The state changes to PERF_HES_STOPPED and PERF_HES_UPTODATE, again.
+
+ - Life cycle of these two pairs: *add* and *del* are called repeatedly as
+ tasks switch in-and-out; *start* and *stop* is also called when the perf core
+ needs a quick stop-and-start, for instance, when the interrupt period is being
+ adjusted.
Current implementation is sufficient for now and can be easily extended to
features in the future.
@@ -225,25 +230,26 @@ A. Related Structures
Both structures are designed to be read-only.
*struct pmu* defines some function pointer interfaces, and most of them take
-*struct perf_event* as a main argument, dealing with perf events according to
-perf's internal state machine (check kernel/events/core.c for details).
+ *struct perf_event* as a main argument, dealing with perf events according to
+ perf's internal state machine (check kernel/events/core.c for details).
*struct riscv_pmu* defines PMU-specific parameters. The naming follows the
-convention of all other architectures.
+ convention of all other architectures.
* struct perf_event: include/linux/perf_event.h
* struct hw_perf_event
The generic structure that represents perf events, and the hardware-related
-details.
+ details.
* struct riscv_hw_events: arch/riscv/include/asm/perf_event.h
The structure that holds the status of events, has two fixed members:
-the number of events and the array of the events.
+ the number of events and the array of the events.
References
----------
[1] https://github.com/riscv/riscv-linux/pull/124
+
[2] https://groups.google.com/a/groups.riscv.org/forum/#!topic/sw-dev/f19TmCNP6yA
--
2.20.1
The first bit/value table inside the document is very
hard to read and won't fit ReST format. Convert it to
a nice ascii artwork table with makes it easier to read
and is compatible with ReST format parser on Sphinx.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt | 210 ++++++++++++++++------------
1 file changed, 120 insertions(+), 90 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
index 5ae7f868a007..c35804c238ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
@@ -78,96 +78,126 @@ e.g. switching address translation off requires that you
have a logical=physical mapping for the address you are
currently running at.
- Bit Value
-s/390 z/Architecture
-0 0 Reserved ( must be 0 ) otherwise specification exception occurs.
-
-1 1 Program Event Recording 1 PER enabled,
- PER is used to facilitate debugging e.g. single stepping.
-
-2-4 2-4 Reserved ( must be 0 ).
-
-5 5 Dynamic address translation 1=DAT on.
-
-6 6 Input/Output interrupt Mask
-
-7 7 External interrupt Mask used primarily for interprocessor
- signalling and clock interrupts.
-
-8-11 8-11 PSW Key used for complex memory protection mechanism
- (not used under linux)
-
-12 12 1 on s/390 0 on z/Architecture
-
-13 13 Machine Check Mask 1=enable machine check interrupts
-
-14 14 Wait State. Set this to 1 to stop the processor except for
- interrupts and give time to other LPARS. Used in CPU idle in
- the kernel to increase overall usage of processor resources.
-
-15 15 Problem state ( if set to 1 certain instructions are disabled )
- all linux user programs run with this bit 1
- ( useful info for debugging under VM ).
-
-16-17 16-17 Address Space Control
-
- 00 Primary Space Mode:
- The register CR1 contains the primary address-space control ele-
- ment (PASCE), which points to the primary space region/segment
- table origin.
-
- 01 Access register mode
-
- 10 Secondary Space Mode:
- The register CR7 contains the secondary address-space control
- element (SASCE), which points to the secondary space region or
- segment table origin.
-
- 11 Home Space Mode:
- The register CR13 contains the home space address-space control
- element (HASCE), which points to the home space region/segment
- table origin.
-
- See "Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture" below
- for more information about address space usage in Linux.
-
-18-19 18-19 Condition codes (CC)
-
-20 20 Fixed point overflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions for this event
- occur ( normally 0 )
-
-21 21 Decimal overflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions for this event occur
- ( normally 0 )
-
-22 22 Exponent underflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions for this event occur
- ( normally 0 )
-
-23 23 Significance Mask if 1=FPU exceptions for this event occur
- ( normally 0 )
-
-24-31 24-30 Reserved Must be 0.
-
- 31 Extended Addressing Mode
- 32 Basic Addressing Mode
- Used to set addressing mode
- PSW 31 PSW 32
- 0 0 24 bit
- 0 1 31 bit
- 1 1 64 bit
-
-32 1=31 bit addressing mode 0=24 bit addressing mode (for backward
- compatibility), linux always runs with this bit set to 1
-
-33-64 Instruction address.
- 33-63 Reserved must be 0
- 64-127 Address
- In 24 bits mode bits 64-103=0 bits 104-127 Address
- In 31 bits mode bits 64-96=0 bits 97-127 Address
- Note: unlike 31 bit mode on s/390 bit 96 must be zero
- when loading the address with LPSWE otherwise a
- specification exception occurs, LPSW is fully backward
- compatible.
-
++-------------------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| Bit | |
++--------+----------------+ Value |
+| s/390 | z/Architecture | |
++========+================+=================================================+
+| 0 | 0 | Reserved (must be 0) otherwise specification |
+| | | exception occurs. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 1 | 1 | Program Event Recording 1 PER enabled, |
+| | | PER is used to facilitate debugging e.g. |
+| | | single stepping. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 2-4 | 2-4 | Reserved (must be 0). |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 5 | 5 | Dynamic address translation 1=DAT on. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 6 | 6 | Input/Output interrupt Mask |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 7 | 7 | External interrupt Mask used primarily for |
+| | | interprocessor signalling and clock interrupts. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 8-11 | 8-11 | PSW Key used for complex memory protection |
+| | | mechanism (not used under linux) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 12 | 12 | 1 on s/390 0 on z/Architecture |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 13 | 13 | Machine Check Mask 1=enable machine check |
+| | | interrupts |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 14 | 14 | Wait State. Set this to 1 to stop the processor |
+| | | except for interrupts and give time to other |
+| | | LPARS. Used in CPU idle in the kernel to |
+| | | increase overall usage of processor resources. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 15 | 15 | Problem state (if set to 1 certain instructions |
+| | | are disabled). All linux user programs run with |
+| | | this bit 1 (useful info for debugging under VM).|
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 16-17 | 16-17 | Address Space Control |
+| | | |
+| | | 00 Primary Space Mode: |
+| | | |
+| | | The register CR1 contains the primary |
+| | | address-space control element (PASCE), which |
+| | | points to the primary space region/segment |
+| | | table origin. |
+| | | |
+| | | 01 Access register mode |
+| | | |
+| | | 10 Secondary Space Mode: |
+| | | |
+| | | The register CR7 contains the secondary |
+| | | address-space control element (SASCE), which |
+| | | points to the secondary space region or |
+| | | segment table origin. |
+| | | |
+| | | 11 Home Space Mode: |
+| | | |
+| | | The register CR13 contains the home space |
+| | | address-space control element (HASCE), which |
+| | | points to the home space region/segment |
+| | | table origin. |
+| | | |
+| | | See "Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & |
+| | | z/Architecture" below for more information |
+| | | about address space usage in Linux. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 18-19 | 18-19 | Condition codes (CC) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 20 | 20 | Fixed point overflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions |
+| | | for this event occur (normally 0) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 21 | 21 | Decimal overflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions for |
+| | | this event occur (normally 0) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 22 | 22 | Exponent underflow mask if 1=FPU exceptions |
+| | | for this event occur (normally 0) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 23 | 23 | Significance Mask if 1=FPU exceptions for this |
+| | | event occur (normally 0) |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 24-31 | 24-30 | Reserved Must be 0. |
+| +----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| | 31 | Extended Addressing Mode |
+| +----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| | 32 | Basic Addressing Mode |
+| | | |
+| | | Used to set addressing mode |
+| | | |
+| | | +---------+----------+----------+ |
+| | | | PSW 31 | PSW 32 | | |
+| | | +---------+----------+----------+ |
+| | | | 0 | 0 | 24 bit | |
+| | | +---------+----------+----------+ |
+| | | | 0 | 1 | 31 bit | |
+| | | +---------+----------+----------+ |
+| | | | 1 | 1 | 64 bit | |
+| | | +---------+----------+----------+ |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 32 | | 1=31 bit addressing mode 0=24 bit addressing |
+| | | mode (for backward compatibility), linux |
+| | | always runs with this bit set to 1 |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| 33-64 | | Instruction address. |
+| +----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| | 33-63 | Reserved must be 0 |
+| +----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
+| | 64-127 | Address |
+| | | |
+| | | - In 24 bits mode bits 64-103=0 bits 104-127 |
+| | | Address |
+| | | - In 31 bits mode bits 64-96=0 bits 97-127 |
+| | | Address |
+| | | |
+| | | Note: |
+| | | unlike 31 bit mode on s/390 bit 96 must be |
+| | | zero when loading the address with LPSWE |
+| | | otherwise a specification exception occurs, |
+| | | LPSW is fully backward compatible. |
++--------+----------------+-------------------------------------------------+
Prefix Page(s)
--------------
--
2.20.1
Convert Intel Many Integrated Core architecture docs to ReST.
The conversion is trivial: just add title and literal block
markups, and adjust some identation.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt | 6 ++-
Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt | 58 +++++++++++++++++------------
2 files changed, 39 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt
index 074adbdf83a4..17d956bdaf7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mic/mic_overview.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+======================================================
+Intel Many Integrated Core (MIC) architecture overview
+======================================================
+
An Intel MIC X100 device is a PCIe form factor add-in coprocessor
card based on the Intel Many Integrated Core (MIC) architecture
that runs a Linux OS. It is a PCIe endpoint in a platform and therefore
@@ -45,7 +49,7 @@ Here is a block diagram of the various components described above. The
virtio backends are situated on the host rather than the card given better
single threaded performance for the host compared to MIC, the ability of
the host to initiate DMA's to/from the card using the MIC DMA engine and
-the fact that the virtio block storage backend can only be on the host.
+the fact that the virtio block storage backend can only be on the host::
+----------+ | +----------+
| Card OS | | | Host OS |
diff --git a/Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt b/Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt
index 0a280d986731..4c8ad9e43706 100644
--- a/Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mic/scif_overview.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+========================================
+Symmetric Communication Interface (SCIF)
+========================================
+
The Symmetric Communication Interface (SCIF (pronounced as skiff)) is a low
level communications API across PCIe currently implemented for MIC. Currently
SCIF provides inter-node communication within a single host platform, where a
@@ -8,8 +12,11 @@ is to deliver the maximum possible performance given the communication
abilities of the hardware. SCIF has been used to implement an offload compiler
runtime and OFED support for MPI implementations for MIC coprocessors.
-==== SCIF API Components ====
+SCIF API Components
+===================
+
The SCIF API has the following parts:
+
1. Connection establishment using a client server model
2. Byte stream messaging intended for short messages
3. Node enumeration to determine online nodes
@@ -28,9 +35,12 @@ can also register local memory which is followed by data transfer using either
DMA, CPU copies or remote memory mapping via mmap. SCIF supports both user and
kernel mode clients which are functionally equivalent.
-==== SCIF Performance for MIC ====
+SCIF Performance for MIC
+========================
+
DMA bandwidth comparison between the TCP (over ethernet over PCIe) stack versus
-SCIF shows the performance advantages of SCIF for HPC applications and runtimes.
+SCIF shows the performance advantages of SCIF for HPC applications and
+runtimes::
Comparison of TCP and SCIF based BW
@@ -66,33 +76,33 @@ space API similar to the kernel API in scif.h. The SCIF user space library
is distributed @ https://software.intel.com/en-us/mic-developer
Here is some pseudo code for an example of how two applications on two PCIe
-nodes would typically use the SCIF API:
+nodes would typically use the SCIF API::
-Process A (on node A) Process B (on node B)
+ Process A (on node A) Process B (on node B)
-/* get online node information */
-scif_get_node_ids(..) scif_get_node_ids(..)
-scif_open(..) scif_open(..)
-scif_bind(..) scif_bind(..)
-scif_listen(..)
-scif_accept(..) scif_connect(..)
-/* SCIF connection established */
+ /* get online node information */
+ scif_get_node_ids(..) scif_get_node_ids(..)
+ scif_open(..) scif_open(..)
+ scif_bind(..) scif_bind(..)
+ scif_listen(..)
+ scif_accept(..) scif_connect(..)
+ /* SCIF connection established */
-/* Send and receive short messages */
-scif_send(..)/scif_recv(..) scif_send(..)/scif_recv(..)
+ /* Send and receive short messages */
+ scif_send(..)/scif_recv(..) scif_send(..)/scif_recv(..)
-/* Register memory */
-scif_register(..) scif_register(..)
+ /* Register memory */
+ scif_register(..) scif_register(..)
-/* RDMA */
-scif_readfrom(..)/scif_writeto(..) scif_readfrom(..)/scif_writeto(..)
+ /* RDMA */
+ scif_readfrom(..)/scif_writeto(..) scif_readfrom(..)/scif_writeto(..)
-/* Fence DMAs */
-scif_fence_signal(..) scif_fence_signal(..)
+ /* Fence DMAs */
+ scif_fence_signal(..) scif_fence_signal(..)
-mmap(..) mmap(..)
+ mmap(..) mmap(..)
-/* Access remote registered memory */
+ /* Access remote registered memory */
-/* Close the endpoints */
-scif_close(..) scif_close(..)
+ /* Close the endpoints */
+ scif_close(..) scif_close(..)
--
2.20.1
Convert all text files with s390 documentation to ReST format.
Tried to preserve as much as possible the original document
format. Still, some of the files required some work in order
for it to be visible on both plain text and after converted
to html.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/s390/3270.txt | 85 +-
Documentation/s390/CommonIO | 47 +-
Documentation/s390/DASD | 33 +-
Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt | 2389 ++++++++++++++++-----------
Documentation/s390/cds.txt | 354 ++--
Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt | 179 +-
Documentation/s390/monreader.txt | 85 +-
Documentation/s390/qeth.txt | 36 +-
Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt | 781 +++++----
Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt | 487 +++---
Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt | 88 +-
Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt | 2 +
12 files changed, 2686 insertions(+), 1880 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/3270.txt b/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
index 7c715de99774..e09e77954238 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/3270.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,17 @@
+===============================
IBM 3270 Display System support
+===============================
This file describes the driver that supports local channel attachment
of IBM 3270 devices. It consists of three sections:
+
* Introduction
* Installation
* Operation
-INTRODUCTION.
+Introduction
+============
This paper describes installing and operating 3270 devices under
Linux/390. A 3270 device is a block-mode rows-and-columns terminal of
@@ -17,12 +21,12 @@ twenty and thirty years ago.
You may have 3270s in-house and not know it. If you're using the
VM-ESA operating system, define a 3270 to your virtual machine by using
the command "DEF GRAF <hex-address>" This paper presumes you will be
-defining four 3270s with the CP/CMS commands
+defining four 3270s with the CP/CMS commands:
- DEF GRAF 620
- DEF GRAF 621
- DEF GRAF 622
- DEF GRAF 623
+ - DEF GRAF 620
+ - DEF GRAF 621
+ - DEF GRAF 622
+ - DEF GRAF 623
Your network connection from VM-ESA allows you to use x3270, tn3270, or
another 3270 emulator, started from an xterm window on your PC or
@@ -34,7 +38,8 @@ This paper covers installation of the driver and operation of a
dialed-in x3270.
-INSTALLATION.
+Installation
+============
You install the driver by installing a patch, doing a kernel build, and
running the configuration script (config3270.sh, in this directory).
@@ -59,13 +64,15 @@ Use #CP TERM CONMODE 3270 to change it to 3270. If you generate only
at boot time to a 3270 if it is a 3215.
In brief, these are the steps:
+
1. Install the tub3270 patch
- 2. (If a module) add a line to a file in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf
+ 2. (If a module) add a line to a file in `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf`
3. (If VM) define devices with DEF GRAF
4. Reboot
5. Configure
To test that everything works, assuming VM and x3270,
+
1. Bring up an x3270 window.
2. Use the DIAL command in that window.
3. You should immediately see a Linux login screen.
@@ -74,7 +81,8 @@ Here are the installation steps in detail:
1. The 3270 driver is a part of the official Linux kernel
source. Build a tree with the kernel source and any necessary
- patches. Then do
+ patches. Then do::
+
make oldconfig
(If you wish to disable 3215 console support, edit
.config; change CONFIG_TN3215's value to "n";
@@ -84,20 +92,22 @@ Here are the installation steps in detail:
make modules_install
2. (Perform this step only if you have configured tub3270 as a
- module.) Add a line to a file /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf to automatically
+ module.) Add a line to a file `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` to automatically
load the driver when it's needed. With this line added, you will see
login prompts appear on your 3270s as soon as boot is complete (or
with emulated 3270s, as soon as you dial into your vm guest using the
command "DIAL <vmguestname>"). Since the line-mode major number is
- 227, the line to add should be:
+ 227, the line to add should be::
+
alias char-major-227 tub3270
3. Define graphic devices to your vm guest machine, if you
haven't already. Define them before you reboot (reipl):
- DEFINE GRAF 620
- DEFINE GRAF 621
- DEFINE GRAF 622
- DEFINE GRAF 623
+
+ - DEFINE GRAF 620
+ - DEFINE GRAF 621
+ - DEFINE GRAF 622
+ - DEFINE GRAF 623
4. Reboot. The reboot process scans hardware devices, including
3270s, and this enables the tub3270 driver once loaded to respond
@@ -107,21 +117,23 @@ Here are the installation steps in detail:
5. Run the 3270 configuration script config3270. It is
distributed in this same directory, Documentation/s390, as
- config3270.sh. Inspect the output script it produces,
+ config3270.sh. Inspect the output script it produces,
/tmp/mkdev3270, and then run that script. This will create the
necessary character special device files and make the necessary
changes to /etc/inittab.
Then notify /sbin/init that /etc/inittab has changed, by issuing
- the telinit command with the q operand:
+ the telinit command with the q operand::
+
cd Documentation/s390
sh config3270.sh
sh /tmp/mkdev3270
telinit q
- This should be sufficient for your first time. If your 3270
+ This should be sufficient for your first time. If your 3270
configuration has changed and you're reusing config3270, you
- should follow these steps:
+ should follow these steps::
+
Change 3270 configuration
Reboot
Run config3270 and /tmp/mkdev3270
@@ -132,8 +144,10 @@ Here are the testing steps in detail:
1. Bring up an x3270 window, or use an actual hardware 3278 or
3279, or use the 3270 emulator of your choice. You would be
running the emulator on your PC or workstation. You would use
- the command, for example,
+ the command, for example::
+
x3270 vm-esa-domain-name &
+
if you wanted a 3278 Model 4 with 43 rows of 80 columns, the
default model number. The driver does not take advantage of
extended attributes.
@@ -144,7 +158,8 @@ Here are the testing steps in detail:
2. Use the DIAL command instead of the LOGIN command to connect
to one of the virtual 3270s you defined with the DEF GRAF
- commands:
+ commands::
+
dial my-vm-guest-name
3. You should immediately see a login prompt from your
@@ -171,14 +186,17 @@ Here are the testing steps in detail:
Wrong major number? Wrong minor number? There's your
problem!
- D. Do you get the message
+ D. Do you get the message::
+
"HCPDIA047E my-vm-guest-name 0620 does not exist"?
+
If so, you must issue the command "DEF GRAF 620" from your VM
3215 console and then reboot the system.
OPERATION.
+==========
The driver defines three areas on the 3270 screen: the log area, the
input area, and the status area.
@@ -203,8 +221,10 @@ which indicates no scrolling will occur. (If you hit ENTER with "Linux
Running" and nothing typed, the application receives a newline.)
You may change the scrolling timeout value. For example, the following
-command line:
+command line::
+
echo scrolltime=60 > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
+
changes the scrolling timeout value to 60 sec. Set scrolltime to 0 if
you wish to prevent scrolling entirely.
@@ -228,7 +248,8 @@ cause an EOF also by typing "^D" and hitting ENTER.
No PF key is preassigned to cause a job suspension, but you may cause a
job suspension by typing "^Z" and hitting ENTER. You may wish to
assign this function to a PF key. To make PF7 cause job suspension,
-execute the command:
+execute the command::
+
echo pf7=^z > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
If the input you type does not end with the two characters "^n", the
@@ -243,8 +264,10 @@ command is entered into the stack only when the input area is not made
invisible (such as for password entry) and it is not identical to the
current top entry. PF10 rotates backward through the command stack;
PF11 rotates forward. You may assign the backward function to any PF
-key (or PA key, for that matter), say, PA3, with the command:
+key (or PA key, for that matter), say, PA3, with the command::
+
echo -e pa3=\\033k > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
+
This assigns the string ESC-k to PA3. Similarly, the string ESC-j
performs the forward function. (Rationale: In bash with vi-mode line
editing, ESC-k and ESC-j retrieve backward and forward history.
@@ -252,15 +275,19 @@ Suggestions welcome.)
Is a stack size of twenty commands not to your liking? Change it on
the fly. To change to saving the last 100 commands, execute the
-command:
+command::
+
echo recallsize=100 > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
Have a command you issue frequently? Assign it to a PF or PA key! Use
-the command
- echo pf24="mkdir foobar; cd foobar" > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
+the command::
+
+ echo pf24="mkdir foobar; cd foobar" > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
+
to execute the commands mkdir foobar and cd foobar immediately when you
hit PF24. Want to see the command line first, before you execute it?
-Use the -n option of the echo command:
+Use the -n option of the echo command::
+
echo -n pf24="mkdir foo; cd foo" > /proc/tty/driver/tty3270
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
index 6e0f63f343b4..bcc34954bd4b 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
+++ b/Documentation/s390/CommonIO
@@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
-S/390 common I/O-Layer - command line parameters, procfs and debugfs entries
-============================================================================
+======================
+S/390 common I/O-Layer
+======================
+
+command line parameters, procfs and debugfs entries
+===================================================
Command line parameters
-----------------------
@@ -13,7 +17,7 @@ Command line parameters
device := {all | [!]ipldev | [!]condev | [!]<devno> | [!]<devno>-<devno>}
The given devices will be ignored by the common I/O-layer; no detection
- and device sensing will be done on any of those devices. The subchannel to
+ and device sensing will be done on any of those devices. The subchannel to
which the device in question is attached will be treated as if no device was
attached.
@@ -28,14 +32,20 @@ Command line parameters
keywords can be used to refer to the CCW based boot device and CCW console
device respectively (these are probably useful only when combined with the '!'
operator). The '!' operator will cause the I/O-layer to _not_ ignore a device.
- The command line is parsed from left to right.
+ The command line
+ is parsed from left to right.
+
+ For example::
- For example,
cio_ignore=0.0.0023-0.0.0042,0.0.4711
+
will ignore all devices ranging from 0.0.0023 to 0.0.0042 and the device
0.0.4711, if detected.
- As another example,
+
+ As another example::
+
cio_ignore=all,!0.0.4711,!0.0.fd00-0.0.fd02
+
will ignore all devices but 0.0.4711, 0.0.fd00, 0.0.fd01, 0.0.fd02.
By default, no devices are ignored.
@@ -48,40 +58,45 @@ Command line parameters
Lists the ranges of devices (by bus id) which are ignored by common I/O.
- You can un-ignore certain or all devices by piping to /proc/cio_ignore.
- "free all" will un-ignore all ignored devices,
+ You can un-ignore certain or all devices by piping to /proc/cio_ignore.
+ "free all" will un-ignore all ignored devices,
"free <device range>, <device range>, ..." will un-ignore the specified
devices.
For example, if devices 0.0.0023 to 0.0.0042 and 0.0.4711 are ignored,
+
- echo free 0.0.0030-0.0.0032 > /proc/cio_ignore
will un-ignore devices 0.0.0030 to 0.0.0032 and will leave devices 0.0.0023
to 0.0.002f, 0.0.0033 to 0.0.0042 and 0.0.4711 ignored;
- echo free 0.0.0041 > /proc/cio_ignore will furthermore un-ignore device
0.0.0041;
- - echo free all > /proc/cio_ignore will un-ignore all remaining ignored
+ - echo free all > /proc/cio_ignore will un-ignore all remaining ignored
devices.
- When a device is un-ignored, device recognition and sensing is performed and
+ When a device is un-ignored, device recognition and sensing is performed and
the device driver will be notified if possible, so the device will become
available to the system. Note that un-ignoring is performed asynchronously.
- You can also add ranges of devices to be ignored by piping to
+ You can also add ranges of devices to be ignored by piping to
/proc/cio_ignore; "add <device range>, <device range>, ..." will ignore the
specified devices.
Note: While already known devices can be added to the list of devices to be
- ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device
+ ignored, there will be no effect on then. However, if such a device
disappears and then reappears, it will then be ignored. To make
known devices go away, you need the "purge" command (see below).
- For example,
+ For example::
+
"echo add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc, 0.0.af00-0.0.afff > /proc/cio_ignore"
+
will add 0.0.a000-0.0.accc and 0.0.af00-0.0.afff to the list of ignored
devices.
- You can remove already known but now ignored devices via
+ You can remove already known but now ignored devices via::
+
"echo purge > /proc/cio_ignore"
+
All devices ignored but still registered and not online (= not in use)
will be deregistered and thus removed from the system.
@@ -115,11 +130,11 @@ debugfs entries
Various debug messages from the common I/O-layer.
- /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_trace/hex_ascii
- Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable,
+ Logs the calling of functions in the common I/O-layer and, if applicable,
which subchannel they were called for, as well as dumps of some data
structures (like irb in an error case).
- The level of logging can be changed to be more or less verbose by piping to
+ The level of logging can be changed to be more or less verbose by piping to
/sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/cio_*/level a number between 0 and 6; see the
documentation on the S/390 debug feature (Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt)
for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/DASD b/Documentation/s390/DASD
index 9963f1e9c98a..9e22247285c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/DASD
+++ b/Documentation/s390/DASD
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+==================
DASD device driver
+==================
S/390's disk devices (DASDs) are managed by Linux via the DASD device
driver. It is valid for all types of DASDs and represents them to
@@ -14,14 +16,14 @@ parameters are to be given in hexadecimal notation without a leading
If you supply kernel parameters the different instances are processed
in order of appearance and a minor number is reserved for any device
covered by the supplied range up to 64 volumes. Additional DASDs are
-ignored. If you do not supply the 'dasd=' kernel parameter at all, the
+ignored. If you do not supply the 'dasd=' kernel parameter at all, the
DASD driver registers all supported DASDs of your system to a minor
number in ascending order of the subchannel number.
The driver currently supports ECKD-devices and there are stubs for
support of the FBA and CKD architectures. For the FBA architecture
only some smart data structures are missing to make the support
-complete.
+complete.
We performed our testing on 3380 and 3390 type disks of different
sizes, under VM and on the bare hardware (LPAR), using internal disks
of the multiprise as well as a RAMAC virtual array. Disks exported by
@@ -34,19 +36,22 @@ accessibility of the DASD from other OSs. In a later stage we will
provide support of partitions, maybe VTOC oriented or using a kind of
partition table in the label record.
-USAGE
+Usage
+=====
-Low-level format (?CKD only)
For using an ECKD-DASD as a Linux harddisk you have to low-level
format the tracks by issuing the BLKDASDFORMAT-ioctl on that
device. This will erase any data on that volume including IBM volume
-labels, VTOCs etc. The ioctl may take a 'struct format_data *' or
-'NULL' as an argument.
-typedef struct {
+labels, VTOCs etc. The ioctl may take a `struct format_data *` or
+'NULL' as an argument::
+
+ typedef struct {
int start_unit;
int stop_unit;
int blksize;
-} format_data_t;
+ } format_data_t;
+
When a NULL argument is passed to the BLKDASDFORMAT ioctl the whole
disk is formatted to a blocksize of 1024 bytes. Otherwise start_unit
and stop_unit are the first and last track to be formatted. If
@@ -56,17 +61,23 @@ up to the last track. blksize can be any power of two between 512 and
1kB blocks anyway and you gain approx. 50% of capacity increasing your
blksize from 512 byte to 1kB.
--Make a filesystem
+Make a filesystem
+=================
+
Then you can mk??fs the filesystem of your choice on that volume or
partition. For reasons of sanity you should build your filesystem on
-the partition /dev/dd?1 instead of the whole volume. You only lose 3kB
+the partition /dev/dd?1 instead of the whole volume. You only lose 3kB
but may be sure that you can reuse your data after introduction of a
real partition table.
-BUGS:
+Bugs
+====
+
- Performance sometimes is rather low because we don't fully exploit clustering
-TODO-List:
+TODO-List
+=========
+
- Add IBM'S Disk layout to genhd
- Enhance driver to use more than one major number
- Enable usage as a module
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
index c35804c238ad..d49305fd5e1a 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
+=============================================
+Debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
+=============================================
- Debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
- by
- Denis Joseph Barrow ([email protected],[email protected])
- Copyright (C) 2000-2001 IBM Deutschland Entwicklung GmbH, IBM Corporation
- Best viewed with fixed width fonts
+Denis Joseph Barrow ([email protected],[email protected])
+
+Copyright (C) 2000-2001 IBM Deutschland Entwicklung GmbH, IBM Corporation
+
+.. Best viewed with fixed width fonts
Overview of Document:
=====================
@@ -17,32 +20,32 @@ It is intended like the Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Reference Summary
to be printed out & used as a quick cheat sheet self help style reference when
problems occur.
-Contents
-========
-Register Set
-Address Spaces on Intel Linux
-Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
-The Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture Kernel Task Structure
-Register Usage & Stackframes on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
-A sample program with comments
-Compiling programs for debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
-Debugging under VM
-s/390 & z/Architecture IO Overview
-Debugging IO on s/390 & z/Architecture under VM
-GDB on s/390 & z/Architecture
-Stack chaining in gdb by hand
-Examining core dumps
-ldd
-Debugging modules
-The proc file system
-SysRq
-References
-Special Thanks
+.. Contents
+ ========
+ Register Set
+ Address Spaces on Intel Linux
+ Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
+ The Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture Kernel Task Structure
+ Register Usage & Stackframes on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
+ A sample program with comments
+ Compiling programs for debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
+ Debugging under VM
+ s/390 & z/Architecture IO Overview
+ Debugging IO on s/390 & z/Architecture under VM
+ GDB on s/390 & z/Architecture
+ Stack chaining in gdb by hand
+ Examining core dumps
+ ldd
+ Debugging modules
+ The proc file system
+ SysRq
+ References
+ Special Thanks
Register Set
============
The current architectures have the following registers.
-
+
16 General propose registers, 32 bit on s/390 and 64 bit on z/Architecture,
r0-r15 (or gpr0-gpr15), used for arithmetic and addressing.
@@ -59,20 +62,22 @@ Access register 0 (and access register 1 on z/Architecture, which needs a
64 bit pointer) is currently used by the pthread library as a pointer to
the current running threads private area.
-16 64 bit floating point registers (fp0-fp15 ) IEEE & HFP floating
-point format compliant on G5 upwards & a Floating point control reg (FPC)
-4 64 bit registers (fp0,fp2,fp4 & fp6) HFP only on older machines.
+16 64-bit floating point registers (fp0-fp15 ) IEEE & HFP floating
+point format compliant on G5 upwards & a Floating point control reg (FPC)
+
+4 64-bit registers (fp0,fp2,fp4 & fp6) HFP only on older machines.
+
Note:
-Linux (currently) always uses IEEE & emulates G5 IEEE format on older machines,
-( provided the kernel is configured for this ).
+ Linux (currently) always uses IEEE & emulates G5 IEEE format on older
+ machines, ( provided the kernel is configured for this ).
The PSW is the most important register on the machine it
-is 64 bit on s/390 & 128 bit on z/Architecture & serves the roles of
+is 64 bit on s/390 & 128 bit on z/Architecture & serves the roles of
a program counter (pc), condition code register,memory space designator.
In IBM standard notation I am counting bit 0 as the MSB.
It has several advantages over a normal program counter
-in that you can change address translation & program counter
+in that you can change address translation & program counter
in a single instruction. To change address translation,
e.g. switching address translation off requires that you
have a logical=physical mapping for the address you are
@@ -206,14 +211,18 @@ It exists between the real addresses 0-4096 on s/390 and between 0-8192 on
z/Architecture and is exchanged with one page on s/390 or two pages on
z/Architecture in absolute storage by the set prefix instruction during Linux
startup.
+
This page is mapped to a different prefix for each processor in an SMP
configuration (assuming the OS designer is sane of course).
+
Bytes 0-512 (200 hex) on s/390 and 0-512, 4096-4544, 4604-5119 currently on
z/Architecture are used by the processor itself for holding such information
as exception indications and entry points for exceptions.
+
Bytes after 0xc00 hex are used by linux for per processor globals on s/390 and
z/Architecture (there is a gap on z/Architecture currently between 0xc00 and
0x1000, too, which is used by Linux).
+
The closest thing to this on traditional architectures is the interrupt
vector table. This is a good thing & does simplify some of the kernel coding
however it means that we now cannot catch stray NULL pointers in the
@@ -225,27 +234,29 @@ Address Spaces on Intel Linux
=============================
The traditional Intel Linux is approximately mapped as follows forgive
-the ascii art.
-0xFFFFFFFF 4GB Himem *****************
- * *
- * Kernel Space *
- * *
- ***************** ****************
-User Space Himem * User Stack * * *
-(typically 0xC0000000 3GB ) ***************** * *
- * Shared Libs * * Next Process *
- ***************** * to *
- * * <== * Run * <==
- * User Program * * *
- * Data BSS * * *
- * Text * * *
- * Sections * * *
-0x00000000 ***************** ****************
+the ascii art::
+
+ 0xFFFFFFFF 4GB Himem *****************
+ * *
+ * Kernel Space *
+ * *
+ ***************** ****************
+ User Space Himem * User Stack * * *
+ (typically 0xC0000000 3GB ) ***************** * *
+ * Shared Libs * * Next Process *
+ ***************** * to *
+ * * <== * Run * <==
+ * User Program * * *
+ * Data BSS * * *
+ * Text * * *
+ * Sections * * *
+ 0x00000000 ***************** ****************
Now it is easy to see that on Intel it is quite easy to recognise a kernel
address as being one greater than user space himem (in this case 0xC0000000),
and addresses of less than this are the ones in the current running program on
this processor (if an smp box).
+
If using the virtual machine ( VM ) as a debugger it is quite difficult to
know which user process is running as the address space you are looking at
could be from any process in the run queue.
@@ -256,6 +267,7 @@ of Real Address=Virtual Address-User Space Himem.
This means that on Intel the kernel linux can typically only address
Himem=0xFFFFFFFF-0xC0000000=1GB & this is all the RAM these machines
can typically use.
+
They can lower User Himem to 2GB or lower & thus be
able to use 2GB of RAM however this shrinks the maximum size
of User Space from 3GB to 2GB they have a no win limit of 4GB unless
@@ -264,31 +276,31 @@ they go to 64 Bit.
On 390 our limitations & strengths make us slightly different.
For backward compatibility we are only allowed use 31 bits (2GB)
-of our 32 bit addresses, however, we use entirely separate address
+of our 32 bit addresses, however, we use entirely separate address
spaces for the user & kernel.
This means we can support 2GB of non Extended RAM on s/390, & more
-with the Extended memory management swap device &
+with the Extended memory management swap device &
currently 4TB of physical memory currently on z/Architecture.
Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
==================================================
-Our addressing scheme is basically as follows:
+Our addressing scheme is basically as follows::
- Primary Space Home Space
-Himem 0x7fffffff 2GB on s/390 ***************** ****************
-currently 0x3ffffffffff (2^42)-1 * User Stack * * *
-on z/Architecture. ***************** * *
- * Shared Libs * * *
- ***************** * *
- * * * Kernel *
- * User Program * * *
- * Data BSS * * *
- * Text * * *
- * Sections * * *
-0x00000000 ***************** ****************
+ Primary Space Home Space
+ Himem 0x7fffffff 2GB on s/390 ***************** ****************
+ currently 0x3ffffffffff (2^42)-1 * User Stack * * *
+ on z/Architecture. ***************** * *
+ * Shared Libs * * *
+ ***************** * *
+ * * * Kernel *
+ * User Program * * *
+ * Data BSS * * *
+ * Text * * *
+ * Sections * * *
+ 0x00000000 ***************** ****************
This also means that we need to look at the PSW problem state bit and the
addressing mode to decide whether we are looking at user or kernel space.
@@ -304,20 +316,25 @@ instruction on a user space address is performed.
When also looking at the ASCE control registers, this means:
User space:
+
- runs in primary or access register mode
- cr1 contains the user asce
- cr7 contains the user asce
- cr13 contains the kernel asce
Kernel space:
+
- runs in home space mode
- cr1 contains the user or kernel asce
- -> the kernel asce is loaded when a uaccess requires primary or
- secondary address mode
+
+ - the kernel asce is loaded when a uaccess requires primary or
+ secondary address mode
+
- cr7 contains the user or kernel asce, (changed with set_fs())
- cr13 contains the kernel asce
In case of uaccess the kernel changes to:
+
- primary space mode in case of a uaccess (copy_to_user) and uses
e.g. the mvcp instruction to access user space. However the kernel
will stay in home space mode if the mvcos instruction is available
@@ -337,41 +354,44 @@ Virtual Addresses on s/390 & z/Architecture
A virtual address on s/390 is made up of 3 parts
The SX (segment index, roughly corresponding to the PGD & PMD in Linux
terminology) being bits 1-11.
+
The PX (page index, corresponding to the page table entry (pte) in Linux
terminology) being bits 12-19.
+
The remaining bits BX (the byte index are the offset in the page )
i.e. bits 20 to 31.
On z/Architecture in linux we currently make up an address from 4 parts.
-The region index bits (RX) 0-32 we currently use bits 22-32
-The segment index (SX) being bits 33-43
-The page index (PX) being bits 44-51
-The byte index (BX) being bits 52-63
+
+- The region index bits (RX) 0-32 we currently use bits 22-32
+- The segment index (SX) being bits 33-43
+- The page index (PX) being bits 44-51
+- The byte index (BX) being bits 52-63
Notes:
-1) s/390 has no PMD so the PMD is really the PGD also.
-A lot of this stuff is defined in pgtable.h.
+ 1) s/390 has no PMD so the PMD is really the PGD also.
+ A lot of this stuff is defined in pgtable.h.
-2) Also seeing as s/390's page indexes are only 1k in size
-(bits 12-19 x 4 bytes per pte ) we use 1 ( page 4k )
-to make the best use of memory by updating 4 segment indices
-entries each time we mess with a PMD & use offsets
-0,1024,2048 & 3072 in this page as for our segment indexes.
-On z/Architecture our page indexes are now 2k in size
-( bits 12-19 x 8 bytes per pte ) we do a similar trick
-but only mess with 2 segment indices each time we mess with
-a PMD.
+ 2) Also seeing as s/390's page indexes are only 1k in size
+ (bits 12-19 x 4 bytes per pte ) we use 1 ( page 4k )
+ to make the best use of memory by updating 4 segment indices
+ entries each time we mess with a PMD & use offsets
+ 0,1024,2048 & 3072 in this page as for our segment indexes.
+ On z/Architecture our page indexes are now 2k in size
+ ( bits 12-19 x 8 bytes per pte ) we do a similar trick
+ but only mess with 2 segment indices each time we mess with
+ a PMD.
+
+ 3) As z/Architecture supports up to a massive 5-level page table lookup we
+ can only use 3 currently on Linux ( as this is all the generic kernel
+ currently supports ) however this may change in future
+ this allows us to access ( according to my sums )
+ 4TB of virtual storage per process i.e.
+ 4096*512(PTES)*1024(PMDS)*2048(PGD) = 4398046511104 bytes,
+ enough for another 2 or 3 of years I think :-).
+ to do this we use a region-third-table designation type in
+ our address space control registers.
-3) As z/Architecture supports up to a massive 5-level page table lookup we
-can only use 3 currently on Linux ( as this is all the generic kernel
-currently supports ) however this may change in future
-this allows us to access ( according to my sums )
-4TB of virtual storage per process i.e.
-4096*512(PTES)*1024(PMDS)*2048(PGD) = 4398046511104 bytes,
-enough for another 2 or 3 of years I think :-).
-to do this we use a region-third-table designation type in
-our address space control registers.
-
The Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture Kernel Task Structure
==========================================================
@@ -382,42 +402,43 @@ the __LC_KERNEL_STACK variable in the spare prefix area for this cpu
(which we use for per-processor globals).
The kernel stack pointer is intimately tied with the task structure for
-each processor as follows.
+each processor as follows::
- s/390
- ************************
- * 1 page kernel stack *
- * ( 4K ) *
- ************************
- * 1 page task_struct *
- * ( 4K ) *
-8K aligned ************************
+ s/390
+ ************************
+ * 1 page kernel stack *
+ * ( 4K ) *
+ ************************
+ * 1 page task_struct *
+ * ( 4K ) *
+ 8K aligned ************************
- z/Architecture
- ************************
- * 2 page kernel stack *
- * ( 8K ) *
- ************************
- * 2 page task_struct *
- * ( 8K ) *
-16K aligned ************************
+ z/Architecture
+ ************************
+ * 2 page kernel stack *
+ * ( 8K ) *
+ ************************
+ * 2 page task_struct *
+ * ( 8K ) *
+ 16K aligned ************************
What this means is that we don't need to dedicate any register or global
variable to point to the current running process & can retrieve it with the
-following very simple construct for s/390 & one very similar for z/Architecture.
+following very simple construct for s/390 & one very similar for
+z/Architecture::
-static inline struct task_struct * get_current(void)
-{
- struct task_struct *current;
- __asm__("lhi %0,-8192\n\t"
- "nr %0,15"
- : "=r" (current) );
- return current;
-}
+ static inline struct task_struct * get_current(void)
+ {
+ struct task_struct *current;
+ __asm__("lhi %0,-8192\n\t"
+ "nr %0,15"
+ : "=r" (current) );
+ return current;
+ }
i.e. just anding the current kernel stack pointer with the mask -8192.
Thankfully because Linux doesn't have support for nested IO interrupts
-& our devices have large buffers can survive interrupts being shut for
+& our devices have large buffers can survive interrupts being shut for
short amounts of time we don't need a separate stack for interrupts.
@@ -428,7 +449,7 @@ Register Usage & Stackframes on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
Overview:
---------
This is the code that gcc produces at the top & the bottom of
-each function. It usually is fairly consistent & similar from
+each function. It usually is fairly consistent & similar from
function to function & if you know its layout you can probably
make some headway in finding the ultimate cause of a problem
after a crash without a source level debugger.
@@ -443,87 +464,95 @@ didn't have to maintain compatibility with older linkage formats.
Glossary:
---------
alloca:
-This is a built in compiler function for runtime allocation
-of extra space on the callers stack which is obviously freed
-up on function exit ( e.g. the caller may choose to allocate nothing
-of a buffer of 4k if required for temporary purposes ), it generates
-very efficient code ( a few cycles ) when compared to alternatives
-like malloc.
+ This is a built in compiler function for runtime allocation
+ of extra space on the callers stack which is obviously freed
+ up on function exit ( e.g. the caller may choose to allocate nothing
+ of a buffer of 4k if required for temporary purposes ), it generates
+ very efficient code ( a few cycles ) when compared to alternatives
+ like malloc.
-automatics: These are local variables on the stack,
-i.e they aren't in registers & they aren't static.
+automatics:
+ These are local variables on the stack, i.e they aren't in registers &
+ they aren't static.
back-chain:
-This is a pointer to the stack pointer before entering a
-framed functions ( see frameless function ) prologue got by
-dereferencing the address of the current stack pointer,
- i.e. got by accessing the 32 bit value at the stack pointers
-current location.
+ This is a pointer to the stack pointer before entering a
+ framed functions ( see frameless function ) prologue got by
+ dereferencing the address of the current stack pointer,
+ i.e. got by accessing the 32 bit value at the stack pointers
+ current location.
base-pointer:
-This is a pointer to the back of the literal pool which
-is an area just behind each procedure used to store constants
-in each function.
+ This is a pointer to the back of the literal pool which
+ is an area just behind each procedure used to store constants
+ in each function.
-call-clobbered: The caller probably needs to save these registers if there
-is something of value in them, on the stack or elsewhere before making a
-call to another procedure so that it can restore it later.
+call-clobbered:
+ The caller probably needs to save these registers if there
+ is something of value in them, on the stack or elsewhere before making a
+ call to another procedure so that it can restore it later.
epilogue:
-The code generated by the compiler to return to the caller.
+ The code generated by the compiler to return to the caller.
-frameless-function
-A frameless function in Linux for s390 & z/Architecture is one which doesn't
-need more than the register save area (96 bytes on s/390, 160 on z/Architecture)
-given to it by the caller.
-A frameless function never:
-1) Sets up a back chain.
-2) Calls alloca.
-3) Calls other normal functions
-4) Has automatics.
+frameless-function:
+ A frameless function in Linux for s390 & z/Architecture is one which doesn't
+ need more than the register save area (96 bytes on s/390, 160 on z/Architecture)
+ given to it by the caller.
+
+ A frameless function never:
+
+ 1) Sets up a back chain.
+ 2) Calls alloca.
+ 3) Calls other normal functions
+ 4) Has automatics.
GOT-pointer:
-This is a pointer to the global-offset-table in ELF
-( Executable Linkable Format, Linux'es most common executable format ),
-all globals & shared library objects are found using this pointer.
+ This is a pointer to the global-offset-table in ELF
+ ( Executable Linkable Format, Linux'es most common executable format ),
+ all globals & shared library objects are found using this pointer.
lazy-binding
-ELF shared libraries are typically only loaded when routines in the shared
-library are actually first called at runtime. This is lazy binding.
+ ELF shared libraries are typically only loaded when routines in the shared
+ library are actually first called at runtime. This is lazy binding.
procedure-linkage-table
-This is a table found from the GOT which contains pointers to routines
-in other shared libraries which can't be called to by easier means.
+ This is a table found from the GOT which contains pointers to routines
+ in other shared libraries which can't be called to by easier means.
prologue:
-The code generated by the compiler to set up the stack frame.
+ The code generated by the compiler to set up the stack frame.
outgoing-args:
-This is extra area allocated on the stack of the calling function if the
-parameters for the callee's cannot all be put in registers, the same
-area can be reused by each function the caller calls.
+ This is extra area allocated on the stack of the calling function if the
+ parameters for the callee's cannot all be put in registers, the same
+ area can be reused by each function the caller calls.
routine-descriptor:
-A COFF executable format based concept of a procedure reference
-actually being 8 bytes or more as opposed to a simple pointer to the routine.
-This is typically defined as follows
-Routine Descriptor offset 0=Pointer to Function
-Routine Descriptor offset 4=Pointer to Table of Contents
-The table of contents/TOC is roughly equivalent to a GOT pointer.
-& it means that shared libraries etc. can be shared between several
-environments each with their own TOC.
+ A COFF executable format based concept of a procedure reference
+ actually being 8 bytes or more as opposed to a simple pointer to the routine.
+ This is typically defined as follows:
-
-static-chain: This is used in nested functions a concept adopted from pascal
-by gcc not used in ansi C or C++ ( although quite useful ), basically it
-is a pointer used to reference local variables of enclosing functions.
-You might come across this stuff once or twice in your lifetime.
+ - Routine Descriptor offset 0=Pointer to Function
+ - Routine Descriptor offset 4=Pointer to Table of Contents
-e.g.
-The function below should return 11 though gcc may get upset & toss warnings
-about unused variables.
-int FunctionA(int a)
-{
+ The table of contents/TOC is roughly equivalent to a GOT pointer.
+ & it means that shared libraries etc. can be shared between several
+ environments each with their own TOC.
+
+static-chain:
+ This is used in nested functions a concept adopted from pascal
+ by gcc not used in ansi C or C++ ( although quite useful ), basically it
+ is a pointer used to reference local variables of enclosing functions.
+ You might come across this stuff once or twice in your lifetime.
+
+ e.g.
+
+ The function below should return 11 though gcc may get upset & toss warnings
+ about unused variables::
+
+ int FunctionA(int a)
+ {
int b;
FunctionC(int c)
{
@@ -531,19 +560,21 @@ int FunctionA(int a)
}
FunctionC(10);
return(b);
-}
+ }
s/390 & z/Architecture Register usage
=====================================
+
+======== ========================================== ===============
r0 used by syscalls/assembly call-clobbered
-r1 used by syscalls/assembly call-clobbered
+r1 used by syscalls/assembly call-clobbered
r2 argument 0 / return value 0 call-clobbered
r3 argument 1 / return value 1 (if long long) call-clobbered
r4 argument 2 call-clobbered
r5 argument 3 call-clobbered
-r6 argument 4 saved
-r7 pointer-to arguments 5 to ... saved
+r6 argument 4 saved
+r7 pointer-to arguments 5 to ... saved
r8 this & that saved
r9 this & that saved
r10 static-chain ( if nested function ) saved
@@ -557,65 +588,74 @@ f0 argument 0 / return value ( float/double ) call-clobbered
f2 argument 1 call-clobbered
f4 z/Architecture argument 2 saved
f6 z/Architecture argument 3 saved
+======== ========================================== ===============
+
The remaining floating points
f1,f3,f5 f7-f15 are call-clobbered.
Notes:
------
1) The only requirement is that registers which are used
-by the callee are saved, e.g. the compiler is perfectly
-capable of using r11 for purposes other than a frame a
-frame pointer if a frame pointer is not needed.
-2) In functions with variable arguments e.g. printf the calling procedure
-is identical to one without variable arguments & the same number of
-parameters. However, the prologue of this function is somewhat more
-hairy owing to it having to move these parameters to the stack to
-get va_start, va_arg & va_end to work.
+ by the callee are saved, e.g. the compiler is perfectly
+ capable of using r11 for purposes other than a frame a
+ frame pointer if a frame pointer is not needed.
+2) In functions with variable arguments e.g. printf the calling procedure
+ is identical to one without variable arguments & the same number of
+ parameters. However, the prologue of this function is somewhat more
+ hairy owing to it having to move these parameters to the stack to
+ get va_start, va_arg & va_end to work.
3) Access registers are currently unused by gcc but are used in
-the kernel. Possibilities exist to use them at the moment for
-temporary storage but it isn't recommended.
+ the kernel. Possibilities exist to use them at the moment for
+ temporary storage but it isn't recommended.
4) Only 4 of the floating point registers are used for
-parameter passing as older machines such as G3 only have only 4
-& it keeps the stack frame compatible with other compilers.
-However with IEEE floating point emulation under linux on the
-older machines you are free to use the other 12.
-5) A long long or double parameter cannot be have the
-first 4 bytes in a register & the second four bytes in the
-outgoing args area. It must be purely in the outgoing args
-area if crossing this boundary.
+ parameter passing as older machines such as G3 only have only 4
+ & it keeps the stack frame compatible with other compilers.
+ However with IEEE floating point emulation under linux on the
+ older machines you are free to use the other 12.
+5) A long long or double parameter cannot be have the
+ first 4 bytes in a register & the second four bytes in the
+ outgoing args area. It must be purely in the outgoing args
+ area if crossing this boundary.
6) Floating point parameters are mixed with outgoing args
-on the outgoing args area in the order the are passed in as parameters.
-7) Floating point arguments 2 & 3 are saved in the outgoing args area for
-z/Architecture
+ on the outgoing args area in the order the are passed in as parameters.
+7) Floating point arguments 2 & 3 are saved in the outgoing args area for
+ z/Architecture
Stack Frame Layout
------------------
+
+========= ============== ======================================================
s/390 z/Architecture
-0 0 back chain ( a 0 here signifies end of back chain )
-4 8 eos ( end of stack, not used on Linux for S390 used in other linkage formats )
-8 16 glue used in other s/390 linkage formats for saved routine descriptors etc.
-12 24 glue used in other s/390 linkage formats for saved routine descriptors etc.
-16 32 scratch area
-20 40 scratch area
-24 48 saved r6 of caller function
-28 56 saved r7 of caller function
-32 64 saved r8 of caller function
-36 72 saved r9 of caller function
-40 80 saved r10 of caller function
-44 88 saved r11 of caller function
-48 96 saved r12 of caller function
-52 104 saved r13 of caller function
-56 112 saved r14 of caller function
-60 120 saved r15 of caller function
-64 128 saved f4 of caller function
-72 132 saved f6 of caller function
-80 undefined
-96 160 outgoing args passed from caller to callee
-96+x 160+x possible stack alignment ( 8 bytes desirable )
-96+x+y 160+x+y alloca space of caller ( if used )
-96+x+y+z 160+x+y+z automatics of caller ( if used )
-0 back-chain
+========= ============== ======================================================
+0 0 back chain ( a 0 here signifies end of back chain )
+4 8 eos ( end of stack, not used on Linux for S390 used
+ in other linkage formats )
+8 16 glue used in other s/390 linkage formats for saved
+ routine descriptors etc.
+12 24 glue used in other s/390 linkage formats for saved
+ routine descriptors etc.
+16 32 scratch area
+20 40 scratch area
+24 48 saved r6 of caller function
+28 56 saved r7 of caller function
+32 64 saved r8 of caller function
+36 72 saved r9 of caller function
+40 80 saved r10 of caller function
+44 88 saved r11 of caller function
+48 96 saved r12 of caller function
+52 104 saved r13 of caller function
+56 112 saved r14 of caller function
+60 120 saved r15 of caller function
+64 128 saved f4 of caller function
+72 132 saved f6 of caller function
+80 undefined
+96 160 outgoing args passed from caller to callee
+96+x 160+x possible stack alignment ( 8 bytes desirable )
+96+x+y 160+x+y alloca space of caller ( if used )
+96+x+y+z 160+x+y+z automatics of caller ( if used )
+0 back-chain
+========= ============== ======================================================
A sample program with comments.
===============================
@@ -623,82 +663,86 @@ A sample program with comments.
Comments on the function test
-----------------------------
1) It didn't need to set up a pointer to the constant pool gpr13 as it is not
-used ( :-( ).
+ used ( :-( ).
2) This is a frameless function & no stack is bought.
3) The compiler was clever enough to recognise that it could return the
-value in r2 as well as use it for the passed in parameter ( :-) ).
-4) The basr ( branch relative & save ) trick works as follows the instruction
-has a special case with r0,r0 with some instruction operands is understood as
-the literal value 0, some risc architectures also do this ). So now
-we are branching to the next address & the address new program counter is
-in r13,so now we subtract the size of the function prologue we have executed
-+ the size of the literal pool to get to the top of the literal pool
-0040037c int test(int b)
-{ # Function prologue below
- 40037c: 90 de f0 34 stm %r13,%r14,52(%r15) # Save registers r13 & r14
- 400380: 0d d0 basr %r13,%r0 # Set up pointer to constant pool using
- 400382: a7 da ff fa ahi %r13,-6 # basr trick
+ value in r2 as well as use it for the passed in parameter ( :-) ).
+4) The basr ( branch relative & save ) trick works as follows the instruction
+ has a special case with r0,r0 with some instruction operands is understood as
+ the literal value 0, some risc architectures also do this ). So now
+ we are branching to the next address & the address new program counter is
+ in r13,so now we subtract the size of the function prologue we have executed
+ the size of the literal pool to get to the top of the literal pool::
+
+
+ 0040037c int test(int b)
+ { # Function prologue below
+ 40037c: 90 de f0 34 stm %r13,%r14,52(%r15) # Save registers r13 & r14
+ 400380: 0d d0 basr %r13,%r0 # Set up pointer to constant pool using
+ 400382: a7 da ff fa ahi %r13,-6 # basr trick
return(5+b);
- # Huge main program
- 400386: a7 2a 00 05 ahi %r2,5 # add 5 to r2
+ # Huge main program
+ 400386: a7 2a 00 05 ahi %r2,5 # add 5 to r2
- # Function epilogue below
- 40038a: 98 de f0 34 lm %r13,%r14,52(%r15) # restore registers r13 & 14
- 40038e: 07 fe br %r14 # return
-}
+ # Function epilogue below
+ 40038a: 98 de f0 34 lm %r13,%r14,52(%r15) # restore registers r13 & 14
+ 40038e: 07 fe br %r14 # return
+ }
Comments on the function main
-----------------------------
-1) The compiler did this function optimally ( 8-) )
+1) The compiler did this function optimally ( 8-) )::
-Literal pool for main.
-400390: ff ff ff ec .long 0xffffffec
-main(int argc,char *argv[])
-{ # Function prologue below
- 400394: 90 bf f0 2c stm %r11,%r15,44(%r15) # Save necessary registers
- 400398: 18 0f lr %r0,%r15 # copy stack pointer to r0
- 40039a: a7 fa ff a0 ahi %r15,-96 # Make area for callee saving
- 40039e: 0d d0 basr %r13,%r0 # Set up r13 to point to
- 4003a0: a7 da ff f0 ahi %r13,-16 # literal pool
- 4003a4: 50 00 f0 00 st %r0,0(%r15) # Save backchain
+ Literal pool for main.
+ 400390: ff ff ff ec .long 0xffffffec
+ main(int argc,char *argv[])
+ { # Function prologue below
+ 400394: 90 bf f0 2c stm %r11,%r15,44(%r15) # Save necessary registers
+ 400398: 18 0f lr %r0,%r15 # copy stack pointer to r0
+ 40039a: a7 fa ff a0 ahi %r15,-96 # Make area for callee saving
+ 40039e: 0d d0 basr %r13,%r0 # Set up r13 to point to
+ 4003a0: a7 da ff f0 ahi %r13,-16 # literal pool
+ 4003a4: 50 00 f0 00 st %r0,0(%r15) # Save backchain
return(test(5)); # Main Program Below
- 4003a8: 58 e0 d0 00 l %r14,0(%r13) # load relative address of test from
- # literal pool
- 4003ac: a7 28 00 05 lhi %r2,5 # Set first parameter to 5
- 4003b0: 4d ee d0 00 bas %r14,0(%r14,%r13) # jump to test setting r14 as return
+ 4003a8: 58 e0 d0 00 l %r14,0(%r13) # load relative address of test from
+ # literal pool
+ 4003ac: a7 28 00 05 lhi %r2,5 # Set first parameter to 5
+ 4003b0: 4d ee d0 00 bas %r14,0(%r14,%r13) # jump to test setting r14 as return
# address using branch & save instruction.
# Function Epilogue below
- 4003b4: 98 bf f0 8c lm %r11,%r15,140(%r15)# Restore necessary registers.
- 4003b8: 07 fe br %r14 # return to do program exit
-}
+ 4003b4: 98 bf f0 8c lm %r11,%r15,140(%r15)# Restore necessary registers.
+ 4003b8: 07 fe br %r14 # return to do program exit
+ }
Compiler updates
----------------
-main(int argc,char *argv[])
-{
- 4004fc: 90 7f f0 1c stm %r7,%r15,28(%r15)
- 400500: a7 d5 00 04 bras %r13,400508 <main+0xc>
- 400504: 00 40 04 f4 .long 0x004004f4
- # compiler now puts constant pool in code to so it saves an instruction
- 400508: 18 0f lr %r0,%r15
- 40050a: a7 fa ff a0 ahi %r15,-96
- 40050e: 50 00 f0 00 st %r0,0(%r15)
+::
+
+ main(int argc,char *argv[])
+ {
+ 4004fc: 90 7f f0 1c stm %r7,%r15,28(%r15)
+ 400500: a7 d5 00 04 bras %r13,400508 <main+0xc>
+ 400504: 00 40 04 f4 .long 0x004004f4
+ # compiler now puts constant pool in code to so it saves an instruction
+ 400508: 18 0f lr %r0,%r15
+ 40050a: a7 fa ff a0 ahi %r15,-96
+ 40050e: 50 00 f0 00 st %r0,0(%r15)
return(test(5));
- 400512: 58 10 d0 00 l %r1,0(%r13)
- 400516: a7 28 00 05 lhi %r2,5
- 40051a: 0d e1 basr %r14,%r1
- # compiler adds 1 extra instruction to epilogue this is done to
- # avoid processor pipeline stalls owing to data dependencies on g5 &
- # above as register 14 in the old code was needed directly after being loaded
- # by the lm %r11,%r15,140(%r15) for the br %14.
- 40051c: 58 40 f0 98 l %r4,152(%r15)
- 400520: 98 7f f0 7c lm %r7,%r15,124(%r15)
- 400524: 07 f4 br %r4
-}
+ 400512: 58 10 d0 00 l %r1,0(%r13)
+ 400516: a7 28 00 05 lhi %r2,5
+ 40051a: 0d e1 basr %r14,%r1
+ # compiler adds 1 extra instruction to epilogue this is done to
+ # avoid processor pipeline stalls owing to data dependencies on g5 &
+ # above as register 14 in the old code was needed directly after being loaded
+ # by the lm %r11,%r15,140(%r15) for the br %14.
+ 40051c: 58 40 f0 98 l %r4,152(%r15)
+ 400520: 98 7f f0 7c lm %r7,%r15,124(%r15)
+ 400524: 07 f4 br %r4
+ }
Hartmut ( our compiler developer ) also has been threatening to take out the
@@ -709,38 +753,39 @@ have been warned.
--------------------------------------
If you understand the stuff above you'll understand the stuff
-below too so I'll avoid repeating myself & just say that
+below too so I'll avoid repeating myself & just say that
some of the instructions have g's on the end of them to indicate
-they are 64 bit & the stack offsets are a bigger,
+they are 64 bit & the stack offsets are a bigger,
the only other difference you'll find between 32 & 64 bit is that
-we now use f4 & f6 for floating point arguments on 64 bit.
-00000000800005b0 <test>:
-int test(int b)
-{
+we now use f4 & f6 for floating point arguments on 64 bit::
+
+ 00000000800005b0 <test>:
+ int test(int b)
+ {
return(5+b);
- 800005b0: a7 2a 00 05 ahi %r2,5
- 800005b4: b9 14 00 22 lgfr %r2,%r2 # downcast to integer
- 800005b8: 07 fe br %r14
- 800005ba: 07 07 bcr 0,%r7
+ 800005b0: a7 2a 00 05 ahi %r2,5
+ 800005b4: b9 14 00 22 lgfr %r2,%r2 # downcast to integer
+ 800005b8: 07 fe br %r14
+ 800005ba: 07 07 bcr 0,%r7
-}
+ }
-00000000800005bc <main>:
-main(int argc,char *argv[])
-{
- 800005bc: eb bf f0 58 00 24 stmg %r11,%r15,88(%r15)
- 800005c2: b9 04 00 1f lgr %r1,%r15
- 800005c6: a7 fb ff 60 aghi %r15,-160
- 800005ca: e3 10 f0 00 00 24 stg %r1,0(%r15)
+ 00000000800005bc <main>:
+ main(int argc,char *argv[])
+ {
+ 800005bc: eb bf f0 58 00 24 stmg %r11,%r15,88(%r15)
+ 800005c2: b9 04 00 1f lgr %r1,%r15
+ 800005c6: a7 fb ff 60 aghi %r15,-160
+ 800005ca: e3 10 f0 00 00 24 stg %r1,0(%r15)
return(test(5));
- 800005d0: a7 29 00 05 lghi %r2,5
- # brasl allows jumps > 64k & is overkill here bras would do fune
- 800005d4: c0 e5 ff ff ff ee brasl %r14,800005b0 <test>
- 800005da: e3 40 f1 10 00 04 lg %r4,272(%r15)
- 800005e0: eb bf f0 f8 00 04 lmg %r11,%r15,248(%r15)
- 800005e6: 07 f4 br %r4
-}
+ 800005d0: a7 29 00 05 lghi %r2,5
+ # brasl allows jumps > 64k & is overkill here bras would do fune
+ 800005d4: c0 e5 ff ff ff ee brasl %r14,800005b0 <test>
+ 800005da: e3 40 f1 10 00 04 lg %r4,272(%r15)
+ 800005e0: eb bf f0 f8 00 04 lmg %r11,%r15,248(%r15)
+ 800005e6: 07 f4 br %r4
+ }
@@ -749,15 +794,15 @@ Compiling programs for debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture
-gdwarf-2 now works it should be considered the default debugging
format for s/390 & z/Architecture as it is more reliable for debugging
shared libraries, normal -g debugging works much better now
-Thanks to the IBM java compiler developers bug reports.
+Thanks to the IBM java compiler developers bug reports.
-This is typically done adding/appending the flags -g or -gdwarf-2 to the
+This is typically done adding/appending the flags -g or -gdwarf-2 to the
CFLAGS & LDFLAGS variables Makefile of the program concerned.
If using gdb & you would like accurate displays of registers &
- stack traces compile without optimisation i.e make sure
+stack traces compile without optimisation i.e make sure
that there is no -O2 or similar on the CFLAGS line of the Makefile &
-the emitted gcc commands, obviously this will produce worse code
+the emitted gcc commands, obviously this will produce worse code
( not advisable for shipment ) but it is an aid to the debugging process.
This aids debugging because the compiler will copy parameters passed in
@@ -766,7 +811,7 @@ parameters will work, however some larger programs which use inline functions
will not compile without optimisation.
Debugging with optimisation has since much improved after fixing
-some bugs, please make sure you are using gdb-5.0 or later developed
+some bugs, please make sure you are using gdb-5.0 or later developed
after Nov'2000.
@@ -779,7 +824,7 @@ Notes
Addresses & values in the VM debugger are always hex never decimal
Address ranges are of the format <HexValue1>-<HexValue2> or
<HexValue1>.<HexValue2>
-For example, the address range 0x2000 to 0x3000 can be described as 2000-3000
+For example, the address range 0x2000 to 0x3000 can be described as 2000-3000
or 2000.1000
The VM Debugger is case insensitive.
@@ -798,27 +843,31 @@ operands are nibble (half byte aligned).
So if you have an objdump listing by hand, it is quite easy to follow, and if
you don't have an objdump listing keep a copy of the s/390 Reference Summary
or alternatively the s/390 principles of operation next to you.
-e.g. even I can guess that
+e.g. even I can guess that
0001AFF8' LR 180F CC 0
-is a ( load register ) lr r0,r15
+is a ( load register ) lr r0,r15
Also it is very easy to tell the length of a 390 instruction from the 2 most
significant bits in the instruction (not that this info is really useful except
if you are trying to make sense of a hexdump of code).
Here is a table
+
+======================= ==================
Bits Instruction Length
-------------------------------------------
+======================= ==================
00 2 Bytes
01 4 Bytes
10 4 Bytes
11 6 Bytes
+======================= ==================
The debugger also displays other useful info on the same line such as the
addresses being operated on destination addresses of branches & condition codes.
-e.g.
-00019736' AHI A7DAFF0E CC 1
-000198BA' BRC A7840004 -> 000198C2' CC 0
-000198CE' STM 900EF068 >> 0FA95E78 CC 2
+e.g.::
+
+ 00019736' AHI A7DAFF0E CC 1
+ 000198BA' BRC A7840004 -> 000198C2' CC 0
+ 000198CE' STM 900EF068 >> 0FA95E78 CC 2
@@ -826,54 +875,79 @@ Useful VM debugger commands
---------------------------
I suppose I'd better mention this before I start
-to list the current active traces do
-Q TR
+to list the current active traces do::
+
+ Q TR
+
there can be a maximum of 255 of these per set
( more about trace sets later ).
-To stop traces issue a
-TR END.
-To delete a particular breakpoint issue
-TR DEL <breakpoint number>
+
+To stop traces issue a::
+
+ TR END.
+
+To delete a particular breakpoint issue::
+
+ TR DEL <breakpoint number>
The PA1 key drops to CP mode so you can issue debugger commands,
-Doing alt c (on my 3270 console at least ) clears the screen.
+Doing alt c (on my 3270 console at least ) clears the screen.
+
hitting b <enter> comes back to the running operating system
from cp mode ( in our case linux ).
+
It is typically useful to add shortcuts to your profile.exec file
if you have one ( this is roughly equivalent to autoexec.bat in DOS ).
-file here are a few from mine.
-/* this gives me command history on issuing f12 */
-set pf12 retrieve
-/* this continues */
-set pf8 imm b
-/* goes to trace set a */
-set pf1 imm tr goto a
-/* goes to trace set b */
-set pf2 imm tr goto b
-/* goes to trace set c */
-set pf3 imm tr goto c
+file here are a few from mine::
+
+ /* this gives me command history on issuing f12 */
+ set pf12 retrieve
+ /* this continues */
+ set pf8 imm b
+ /* goes to trace set a */
+ set pf1 imm tr goto a
+ /* goes to trace set b */
+ set pf2 imm tr goto b
+ /* goes to trace set c */
+ set pf3 imm tr goto c
Instruction Tracing
-------------------
-Setting a simple breakpoint
-TR I PSWA <address>
-To debug a particular function try
-TR I R <function address range>
-TR I on its own will single step.
-TR I DATA <MNEMONIC> <OPTIONAL RANGE> will trace for particular mnemonics
-e.g.
-TR I DATA 4D R 0197BC.4000
+Setting a simple breakpoint::
+
+ TR I PSWA <address>
+
+To debug a particular function try::
+
+ TR I R <function address range>
+ TR I on its own will single step.
+ TR I DATA <MNEMONIC> <OPTIONAL RANGE> will trace for particular mnemonics
+
+e.g.::
+
+ TR I DATA 4D R 0197BC.4000
+
will trace for BAS'es ( opcode 4D ) in the range 0197BC.4000
+
if you were inclined you could add traces for all branch instructions &
-suffix them with the run prefix so you would have a backtrace on screen
-when a program crashes.
-TR BR <INTO OR FROM> will trace branches into or out of an address.
-e.g.
-TR BR INTO 0 is often quite useful if a program is getting awkward & deciding
+suffix them with the run prefix so you would have a backtrace on screen
+when a program crashes::
+
+ TR BR <INTO OR FROM> will trace branches into or out of an address.
+
+e.g.::
+
+ TR BR INTO 0
+
+is often quite useful if a program is getting awkward & deciding
to branch to 0 & crashing as this will stop at the address before in jumps to 0.
-TR I R <address range> RUN cmd d g
+
+::
+
+ TR I R <address range> RUN cmd d g
+
single steps a range of addresses but stays running &
displays the gprs on each step.
@@ -881,93 +955,129 @@ displays the gprs on each step.
Displaying & modifying Registers
--------------------------------
-D G will display all the gprs
-Adding a extra G to all the commands is necessary to access the full 64 bit
+D G
+ will display all the gprs
+
+Adding a extra G to all the commands is necessary to access the full 64 bit
content in VM on z/Architecture. Obviously this isn't required for access
registers as these are still 32 bit.
-e.g. DGG instead of DG
-D X will display all the control registers
-D AR will display all the access registers
-D AR4-7 will display access registers 4 to 7
-CPU ALL D G will display the GRPS of all CPUS in the configuration
-D PSW will display the current PSW
-st PSW 2000 will put the value 2000 into the PSW &
-cause crash your machine.
-D PREFIX displays the prefix offset
+
+e.g.
+
+DGG
+ instead of DG
+
+D X
+ will display all the control registers
+D AR
+ will display all the access registers
+D AR4-7
+ will display access registers 4 to 7
+CPU ALL D G
+ will display the GRPS of all CPUS in the configuration
+D PSW
+ will display the current PSW
+st PSW 2000
+ will put the value 2000 into the PSW & cause crash your machine.
+D PREFIX
+ displays the prefix offset
Displaying Memory
-----------------
-To display memory mapped using the current PSW's mapping try
-D <range>
+To display memory mapped using the current PSW's mapping try::
+
+ D <range>
+
To make VM display a message each time it hits a particular address and
-continue try
-D I<range> will disassemble/display a range of instructions.
-ST addr 32 bit word will store a 32 bit aligned address
-D T<range> will display the EBCDIC in an address (if you are that way inclined)
-D R<range> will display real addresses ( without DAT ) but with prefixing.
+continue try:
+
+D I<range>
+ will disassemble/display a range of instructions.
+
+ST addr 32 bit word
+ will store a 32 bit aligned address
+D T<range>
+ will display the EBCDIC in an address (if you are that way inclined)
+D R<range>
+ will display real addresses ( without DAT ) but with prefixing.
+
There are other complex options to display if you need to get at say home space
but are in primary space the easiest thing to do is to temporarily
modify the PSW to the other addressing mode, display the stuff & then
restore it.
-
+
Hints
-----
If you want to issue a debugger command without halting your virtual machine
-with the PA1 key try prefixing the command with #CP e.g.
-#cp tr i pswa 2000
+with the PA1 key try prefixing the command with #CP e.g.::
+
+ #cp tr i pswa 2000
+
also suffixing most debugger commands with RUN will cause them not
to stop just display the mnemonic at the current instruction on the console.
+
If you have several breakpoints you want to put into your program &
you get fed up of cross referencing with System.map
you can do the following trick for several symbols.
-grep do_signal System.map
-which emits the following among other things
-0001f4e0 T do_signal
-now you can do
-TR I PSWA 0001f4e0 cmd msg * do_signal
+::
+
+ grep do_signal System.map
+
+which emits the following among other things::
+
+ 0001f4e0 T do_signal
+
+now you can do::
+
+ TR I PSWA 0001f4e0 cmd msg * do_signal
+
This sends a message to your own console each time do_signal is entered.
( As an aside I wrote a perl script once which automatically generated a REXX
script with breakpoints on every kernel procedure, this isn't a good idea
because there are thousands of these routines & VM can only set 255 breakpoints
-at a time so you nearly had to spend as long pruning the file down as you would
+at a time so you nearly had to spend as long pruning the file down as you would
entering the msgs by hand), however, the trick might be useful for a single
object file. In the 3270 terminal emulator x3270 there is a very useful option
in the file menu called "Save Screen In File" - this is very good for keeping a
copy of traces.
-From CMS help <command name> will give you online help on a particular command.
-e.g.
-HELP DISPLAY
+From CMS help <command name> will give you online help on a particular command.
+e.g.::
+
+ HELP DISPLAY
Also CP has a file called profile.exec which automatically gets called
on startup of CMS ( like autoexec.bat ), keeping on a DOS analogy session
CP has a feature similar to doskey, it may be useful for you to
-use profile.exec to define some keystrokes.
-e.g.
+use profile.exec to define some keystrokes.
+
SET PF9 IMM B
-This does a single step in VM on pressing F8.
+ This does a single step in VM on pressing F8.
+
SET PF10 ^
-This sets up the ^ key.
-which can be used for ^c (ctrl-c),^z (ctrl-z) which can't be typed directly
-into some 3270 consoles.
+ This sets up the ^ key.
+ which can be used for ^c (ctrl-c),^z (ctrl-z) which can't be typed
+ directly into some 3270 consoles.
+
SET PF11 ^-
-This types the starting keystrokes for a sysrq see SysRq below.
+ This types the starting keystrokes for a sysrq see SysRq below.
SET PF12 RETRIEVE
-This retrieves command history on pressing F12.
+ This retrieves command history on pressing F12.
Sometimes in VM the display is set up to scroll automatically this
can be very annoying if there are messages you wish to look at
to stop this do
+
TERM MORE 255 255
-This will nearly stop automatic screen updates, however it will
-cause a denial of service if lots of messages go to the 3270 console,
-so it would be foolish to use this as the default on a production machine.
-
+ This will nearly stop automatic screen updates, however it will
+ cause a denial of service if lots of messages go to the 3270 console,
+ so it would be foolish to use this as the default on a production machine.
+
Tracing particular processes
----------------------------
@@ -976,69 +1086,116 @@ very seldom collide with text segments of user programs ( thanks Martin ),
this simplifies debugging the kernel.
However it is quite common for user processes to have addresses which collide
this can make debugging a particular process under VM painful under normal
-circumstances as the process may change when doing a
-TR I R <address range>.
+circumstances as the process may change when doing a::
+
+ TR I R <address range>.
+
Thankfully after reading VM's online help I figured out how to debug
I particular process.
Your first problem is to find the STD ( segment table designation )
of the program you wish to debug.
There are several ways you can do this here are a few
-1) objdump --syms <program to be debugged> | grep main
-To get the address of main in the program.
-tr i pswa <address of main>
+
+Run::
+
+ objdump --syms <program to be debugged> | grep main
+
+To get the address of main in the program. Then::
+
+ tr i pswa <address of main>
+
Start the program, if VM drops to CP on what looks like the entry
point of the main function this is most likely the process you wish to debug.
Now do a D X13 or D XG13 on z/Architecture.
-On 31 bit the STD is bits 1-19 ( the STO segment table origin )
+
+On 31 bit the STD is bits 1-19 ( the STO segment table origin )
& 25-31 ( the STL segment table length ) of CR13.
-now type
-TR I R STD <CR13's value> 0.7fffffff
-e.g.
-TR I R STD 8F32E1FF 0.7fffffff
-Another very useful variation is
-TR STORE INTO STD <CR13's value> <address range>
+
+now type::
+
+ TR I R STD <CR13's value> 0.7fffffff
+
+e.g.::
+
+ TR I R STD 8F32E1FF 0.7fffffff
+
+Another very useful variation is::
+
+ TR STORE INTO STD <CR13's value> <address range>
+
for finding out when a particular variable changes.
-An alternative way of finding the STD of a currently running process
+An alternative way of finding the STD of a currently running process
is to do the following, ( this method is more complex but
could be quite convenient if you aren't updating the kernel much &
so your kernel structures will stay constant for a reasonable period of
time ).
-grep task /proc/<pid>/status
-from this you should see something like
-task: 0f160000 ksp: 0f161de8 pt_regs: 0f161f68
+::
+
+ grep task /proc/<pid>/status
+
+from this you should see something like::
+
+ task: 0f160000 ksp: 0f161de8 pt_regs: 0f161f68
+
This now gives you a pointer to the task structure.
-Now make CC:="s390-gcc -g" kernel/sched.s
+
+Now make::
+
+ CC:="s390-gcc -g" kernel/sched.s
+
To get the task_struct stabinfo.
+
( task_struct is defined in include/linux/sched.h ).
+
Now we want to look at
task->active_mm->pgd
+
on my machine the active_mm in the task structure stab is
active_mm:(4,12),672,32
+
its offset is 672/8=84=0x54
+
the pgd member in the mm_struct stab is
pgd:(4,6)=*(29,5),96,32
so its offset is 96/8=12=0xc
-so we'll
-hexdump -s 0xf160054 /dev/mem | more
+so we'll::
+
+ hexdump -s 0xf160054 /dev/mem | more
+
i.e. task_struct+active_mm offset
-to look at the active_mm member
-f160054 0fee cc60 0019 e334 0000 0000 0000 0011
-hexdump -s 0x0feecc6c /dev/mem | more
-i.e. active_mm+pgd offset
-feecc6c 0f2c 0000 0000 0001 0000 0001 0000 0010
+to look at the active_mm member::
+
+ f160054 0fee cc60 0019 e334 0000 0000 0000 0011
+
+::
+
+ hexdump -s 0x0feecc6c /dev/mem | more
+
+i.e. active_mm+pgd offset::
+
+ feecc6c 0f2c 0000 0000 0001 0000 0001 0000 0010
+
we get something like
-now do
-TR I R STD <pgd|0x7f> 0.7fffffff
+now do::
+
+ TR I R STD <pgd|0x7f> 0.7fffffff
+
i.e. the 0x7f is added because the pgd only
gives the page table origin & we need to set the low bits
to the maximum possible segment table length.
-TR I R STD 0f2c007f 0.7fffffff
-on z/Architecture you'll probably need to do
-TR I R STD <pgd|0x7> 0.ffffffffffffffff
+
+::
+
+ TR I R STD 0f2c007f 0.7fffffff
+
+on z/Architecture you'll probably need to do::
+
+ TR I R STD <pgd|0x7> 0.ffffffffffffffff
+
to set the TableType to 0x1 & the Table length to 3.
@@ -1051,40 +1208,51 @@ You can restart linux & trace these using the tr prog <range or value> trace
option.
-The most common ones you will normally be tracing for is
-1=operation exception
-2=privileged operation exception
-4=protection exception
-5=addressing exception
-6=specification exception
-10=segment translation exception
-11=page translation exception
+The most common ones you will normally be tracing for is:
+
+- 1=operation exception
+- 2=privileged operation exception
+- 4=protection exception
+- 5=addressing exception
+- 6=specification exception
+- 10=segment translation exception
+- 11=page translation exception
The full list of these is on page 22 of the current s/390 Reference Summary.
e.g.
+
tr prog 10 will trace segment translation exceptions.
+
tr prog on its own will trace all program interruption codes.
Trace Sets
----------
On starting VM you are initially in the INITIAL trace set.
You can do a Q TR to verify this.
-If you have a complex tracing situation where you wish to wait for instance
+If you have a complex tracing situation where you wish to wait for instance
till a driver is open before you start tracing IO, but know in your
heart that you are going to have to make several runs through the code till you
-have a clue whats going on.
+have a clue whats going on.
+
+What you can do is::
+
+ TR I PSWA <Driver open address>
-What you can do is
-TR I PSWA <Driver open address>
hit b to continue till breakpoint
+
reach the breakpoint
-now do your
-TR GOTO B
-TR IO 7c08-7c09 inst int run
+
+now do your::
+
+ TR GOTO B
+ TR IO 7c08-7c09 inst int run
+
or whatever the IO channels you wish to trace are & hit b
-To got back to the initial trace set do
-TR GOTO INITIAL
+To got back to the initial trace set do::
+
+ TR GOTO INITIAL
+
& the TR I PSWA <Driver open address> will be the only active breakpoint again.
@@ -1093,11 +1261,14 @@ Tracing linux syscalls under VM
Syscalls are implemented on Linux for S390 by the Supervisor call instruction
(SVC). There 256 possibilities of these as the instruction is made up of a 0xA
opcode and the second byte being the syscall number. They are traced using the
-simple command:
-TR SVC <Optional value or range>
+simple command::
+
+ TR SVC <Optional value or range>
+
the syscalls are defined in linux/arch/s390/include/asm/unistd.h
-e.g. to trace all file opens just do
-TR SVC 5 ( as this is the syscall number of open )
+e.g. to trace all file opens just do::
+
+ TR SVC 5 ( as this is the syscall number of open )
SMP Specific commands
@@ -1105,33 +1276,51 @@ SMP Specific commands
To find out how many cpus you have
Q CPUS displays all the CPU's available to your virtual machine
To find the cpu that the current cpu VM debugger commands are being directed at
-do Q CPU to change the current cpu VM debugger commands are being directed at do
-CPU <desired cpu no>
+do Q CPU to change the current cpu VM debugger commands are being directed at
+do::
+
+ CPU <desired cpu no>
On a SMP guest issue a command to all CPUs try prefixing the command with cpu
-all. To issue a command to a particular cpu try cpu <cpu number> e.g.
-CPU 01 TR I R 2000.3000
+all. To issue a command to a particular cpu try cpu <cpu number> e.g.::
+
+ CPU 01 TR I R 2000.3000
+
If you are running on a guest with several cpus & you have a IO related problem
& cannot follow the flow of code but you know it isn't smp related.
-from the bash prompt issue
-shutdown -h now or halt.
-do a Q CPUS to find out how many cpus you have
-detach each one of them from cp except cpu 0
-by issuing a
-DETACH CPU 01-(number of cpus in configuration)
+
+from the bash prompt issue::
+
+ shutdown -h now or halt.
+
+do a::
+
+ Q CPUS
+
+to find out how many cpus you have detach each one of them from cp except
+cpu 0 by issuing a::
+
+ DETACH CPU 01-(number of cpus in configuration)
+
& boot linux again.
-TR SIGP will trace inter processor signal processor instructions.
-DEFINE CPU 01-(number in configuration)
-will get your guests cpus back.
+
+TR SIGP
+ will trace inter processor signal processor instructions.
+
+DEFINE CPU 01-(number in configuration)
+ will get your guests cpus back.
Help for displaying ascii textstrings
-------------------------------------
On the very latest VM Nucleus'es VM can now display ascii
-( thanks Neale for the hint ) by doing
-D TX<lowaddr>.<len>
-e.g.
-D TX0.100
+( thanks Neale for the hint ) by doing::
+
+ D TX<lowaddr>.<len>
+
+e.g.::
+
+ D TX0.100
Alternatively
=============
@@ -1143,66 +1332,85 @@ to your xterm if you are debugging from a linuxbox.
This is quite useful when looking at a parameter passed in as a text string
under VM ( unless you are good at decoding ASCII in your head ).
-e.g. consider tracing an open syscall
-TR SVC 5
-We have stopped at a breakpoint
-000151B0' SVC 0A05 -> 0001909A' CC 0
+e.g. consider tracing an open syscall::
+
+ TR SVC 5
+
+We have stopped at a breakpoint::
+
+ 000151B0' SVC 0A05 -> 0001909A' CC 0
D 20.8 to check the SVC old psw in the prefix area and see was it from userspace
(for the layout of the prefix area consult the "Fixed Storage Locations"
chapter of the s/390 Reference Summary if you have it available).
-V00000020 070C2000 800151B2
+
+::
+
+ V00000020 070C2000 800151B2
+
The problem state bit wasn't set & it's also too early in the boot sequence
-for it to be a userspace SVC if it was we would have to temporarily switch the
+for it to be a userspace SVC if it was we would have to temporarily switch the
psw to user space addressing so we could get at the first parameter of the open
in gpr2.
-Next do a
-D G2
-GPR 2 = 00014CB4
-Now display what gpr2 is pointing to
-D 00014CB4.20
-V00014CB4 2F646576 2F636F6E 736F6C65 00001BF5
-V00014CC4 FC00014C B4001001 E0001000 B8070707
+
+Next do a::
+
+ D G2
+ GPR 2 = 00014CB4
+
+Now display what gpr2 is pointing to::
+
+ D 00014CB4.20
+ V00014CB4 2F646576 2F636F6E 736F6C65 00001BF5
+ V00014CC4 FC00014C B4001001 E0001000 B8070707
+
Now copy the text till the first 00 hex ( which is the end of the string
-to an xterm & do hex2ascii on it.
-hex2ascii 2F646576 2F636F6E 736F6C65 00
-outputs
-Decoded Hex:=/ d e v / c o n s o l e 0x00
+to an xterm & do hex2ascii on it::
+
+ hex2ascii 2F646576 2F636F6E 736F6C65 00
+
+outputs::
+
+ Decoded Hex:=/ d e v / c o n s o l e 0x00
+
We were opening the console device,
You can compile the code below yourself for practice :-),
-/*
- * hex2ascii.c
- * a useful little tool for converting a hexadecimal command line to ascii
- *
- * Author(s): Denis Joseph Barrow ([email protected],[email protected])
- * (C) 2000 IBM Deutschland Entwicklung GmbH, IBM Corporation.
- */
-#include <stdio.h>
-int main(int argc,char *argv[])
-{
- int cnt1,cnt2,len,toggle=0;
- int startcnt=1;
- unsigned char c,hex;
-
- if(argc>1&&(strcmp(argv[1],"-a")==0))
- startcnt=2;
- printf("Decoded Hex:=");
- for(cnt1=startcnt;cnt1<argc;cnt1++)
+::
+
+ /*
+ * hex2ascii.c
+ * a useful little tool for converting a hexadecimal command line to ascii
+ *
+ * Author(s): Denis Joseph Barrow ([email protected],[email protected])
+ * (C) 2000 IBM Deutschland Entwicklung GmbH, IBM Corporation.
+ */
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ int main(int argc,char *argv[])
{
- len=strlen(argv[cnt1]);
- for(cnt2=0;cnt2<len;cnt2++)
+ int cnt1,cnt2,len,toggle=0;
+ int startcnt=1;
+ unsigned char c,hex;
+
+ if(argc>1&&(strcmp(argv[1],"-a")==0))
+ startcnt=2;
+ printf("Decoded Hex:=");
+ for(cnt1=startcnt;cnt1<argc;cnt1++)
{
- c=argv[cnt1][cnt2];
- if(c>='0'&&c<='9')
+ len=strlen(argv[cnt1]);
+ for(cnt2=0;cnt2<len;cnt2++)
+ {
+ c=argv[cnt1][cnt2];
+ if(c>='0'&&c<='9')
c=c-'0';
- if(c>='A'&&c<='F')
+ if(c>='A'&&c<='F')
c=c-'A'+10;
- if(c>='a'&&c<='f')
+ if(c>='a'&&c<='f')
c=c-'a'+10;
- switch(toggle)
- {
+ switch(toggle)
+ {
case 0:
hex=c<<4;
toggle=1;
@@ -1224,11 +1432,11 @@ int main(int argc,char *argv[])
}
toggle=0;
break;
- }
+ }
+ }
}
+ printf("\n");
}
- printf("\n");
-}
@@ -1248,48 +1456,58 @@ should be able to sniff further back if you follow the following tricks.
1) A kernel address should be easy to recognise since it is in
primary space & the problem state bit isn't set & also
The Hi bit of the address is set.
-2) Another backchain should also be easy to recognise since it is an
+2) Another backchain should also be easy to recognise since it is an
address pointing to another address approximately 100 bytes or 0x70 hex
behind the current stackpointer.
Here is some practice.
+
boot the kernel & hit PA1 at some random time
-d g to display the gprs, this should display something like
-GPR 0 = 00000001 00156018 0014359C 00000000
-GPR 4 = 00000001 001B8888 000003E0 00000000
-GPR 8 = 00100080 00100084 00000000 000FE000
-GPR 12 = 00010400 8001B2DC 8001B36A 000FFED8
+
+d g to display the gprs, this should display something like::
+
+ GPR 0 = 00000001 00156018 0014359C 00000000
+ GPR 4 = 00000001 001B8888 000003E0 00000000
+ GPR 8 = 00100080 00100084 00000000 000FE000
+ GPR 12 = 00010400 8001B2DC 8001B36A 000FFED8
+
Note that GPR14 is a return address but as we are real men we are going to
trace the stack.
-display 0x40 bytes after the stack pointer.
+display 0x40 bytes after the stack pointer::
-V000FFED8 000FFF38 8001B838 80014C8E 000FFF38
-V000FFEE8 00000000 00000000 000003E0 00000000
-V000FFEF8 00100080 00100084 00000000 000FE000
-V000FFF08 00010400 8001B2DC 8001B36A 000FFED8
+ V000FFED8 000FFF38 8001B838 80014C8E 000FFF38
+ V000FFEE8 00000000 00000000 000003E0 00000000
+ V000FFEF8 00100080 00100084 00000000 000FE000
+ V000FFF08 00010400 8001B2DC 8001B36A 000FFED8
Ah now look at whats in sp+56 (sp+0x38) this is 8001B36A our saved r14 if
you look above at our stackframe & also agrees with GPR14.
-now backchain
-d 000FFF38.40
-we now are taking the contents of SP to get our first backchain.
+now backchain::
-V000FFF38 000FFFA0 00000000 00014995 00147094
-V000FFF48 00147090 001470A0 000003E0 00000000
-V000FFF58 00100080 00100084 00000000 001BF1D0
-V000FFF68 00010400 800149BA 80014CA6 000FFF38
+ d 000FFF38.40
+
+we now are taking the contents of SP to get our first backchain::
+
+ V000FFF38 000FFFA0 00000000 00014995 00147094
+ V000FFF48 00147090 001470A0 000003E0 00000000
+ V000FFF58 00100080 00100084 00000000 001BF1D0
+ V000FFF68 00010400 800149BA 80014CA6 000FFF38
This displays a 2nd return address of 80014CA6
-now do d 000FFFA0.40 for our 3rd backchain
+now do::
-V000FFFA0 04B52002 0001107F 00000000 00000000
-V000FFFB0 00000000 00000000 FF000000 0001107F
-V000FFFC0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
-V000FFFD0 00010400 80010802 8001085A 000FFFA0
+ d 000FFFA0.40
+
+for our 3rd backchain::
+
+ V000FFFA0 04B52002 0001107F 00000000 00000000
+ V000FFFB0 00000000 00000000 FF000000 0001107F
+ V000FFFC0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+ V000FFFD0 00010400 80010802 8001085A 000FFFA0
our 3rd return address is 8001085A
@@ -1297,23 +1515,35 @@ our 3rd return address is 8001085A
as the 04B52002 looks suspiciously like rubbish it is fair to assume that the
kernel entry routines for the sake of optimisation don't set up a backchain.
-now look at System.map to see if the addresses make any sense.
+now look at System.map to see if the addresses make any sense::
+
+ grep -i 0001b3 System.map
+
+outputs among other things::
+
+ 0001b304 T cpu_idle
-grep -i 0001b3 System.map
-outputs among other things
-0001b304 T cpu_idle
so 8001B36A
is cpu_idle+0x66 ( quiet the cpu is asleep, don't wake it )
+::
+
+ grep -i 00014 System.map
+
+produces among other things::
+
+ 00014a78 T start_kernel
-grep -i 00014 System.map
-produces among other things
-00014a78 T start_kernel
so 0014CA6 is start_kernel+some hex number I can't add in my head.
-grep -i 00108 System.map
-this produces
-00010800 T _stext
+::
+
+ grep -i 00108 System.map
+
+this produces::
+
+ 00010800 T _stext
+
so 8001085A is _stext+0x5a
Congrats you've done your first backchain.
@@ -1337,47 +1567,49 @@ system might be choking with around 64.
Here is some of the common IO terminology:
Subchannel:
-This is the logical number most IO commands use to talk to an IO device. There
-can be up to 0x10000 (65536) of these in a configuration, typically there are a
-few hundred. Under VM for simplicity they are allocated contiguously, however
-on the native hardware they are not. They typically stay consistent between
-boots provided no new hardware is inserted or removed.
-Under Linux for s390 we use these as IRQ's and also when issuing an IO command
-(CLEAR SUBCHANNEL, HALT SUBCHANNEL, MODIFY SUBCHANNEL, RESUME SUBCHANNEL,
-START SUBCHANNEL, STORE SUBCHANNEL and TEST SUBCHANNEL). We use this as the ID
-of the device we wish to talk to. The most important of these instructions are
-START SUBCHANNEL (to start IO), TEST SUBCHANNEL (to check whether the IO
-completed successfully) and HALT SUBCHANNEL (to kill IO). A subchannel can have
-up to 8 channel paths to a device, this offers redundancy if one is not
-available.
+ This is the logical number most IO commands use to talk to an IO device. There
+ can be up to 0x10000 (65536) of these in a configuration, typically there are a
+ few hundred. Under VM for simplicity they are allocated contiguously, however
+ on the native hardware they are not. They typically stay consistent between
+ boots provided no new hardware is inserted or removed.
+
+ Under Linux for s390 we use these as IRQ's and also when issuing an IO command
+ (CLEAR SUBCHANNEL, HALT SUBCHANNEL, MODIFY SUBCHANNEL, RESUME SUBCHANNEL,
+ START SUBCHANNEL, STORE SUBCHANNEL and TEST SUBCHANNEL). We use this as the ID
+ of the device we wish to talk to. The most important of these instructions are
+ START SUBCHANNEL (to start IO), TEST SUBCHANNEL (to check whether the IO
+ completed successfully) and HALT SUBCHANNEL (to kill IO). A subchannel can have
+ up to 8 channel paths to a device, this offers redundancy if one is not
+ available.
Device Number:
-This number remains static and is closely tied to the hardware. There are 65536
-of these, made up of a CHPID (Channel Path ID, the most significant 8 bits) and
-another lsb 8 bits. These remain static even if more devices are inserted or
-removed from the hardware. There is a 1 to 1 mapping between subchannels and
-device numbers, provided devices aren't inserted or removed.
+ This number remains static and is closely tied to the hardware. There are 65536
+ of these, made up of a CHPID (Channel Path ID, the most significant 8 bits) and
+ another lsb 8 bits. These remain static even if more devices are inserted or
+ removed from the hardware. There is a 1 to 1 mapping between subchannels and
+ device numbers, provided devices aren't inserted or removed.
Channel Control Words:
-CCWs are linked lists of instructions initially pointed to by an operation
-request block (ORB), which is initially given to Start Subchannel (SSCH)
-command along with the subchannel number for the IO subsystem to process
-while the CPU continues executing normal code.
-CCWs come in two flavours, Format 0 (24 bit for backward compatibility) and
-Format 1 (31 bit). These are typically used to issue read and write (and many
-other) instructions. They consist of a length field and an absolute address
-field.
-Each IO typically gets 1 or 2 interrupts, one for channel end (primary status)
-when the channel is idle, and the second for device end (secondary status).
-Sometimes you get both concurrently. You check how the IO went on by issuing a
-TEST SUBCHANNEL at each interrupt, from which you receive an Interruption
-response block (IRB). If you get channel and device end status in the IRB
-without channel checks etc. your IO probably went okay. If you didn't you
-probably need to examine the IRB, extended status word etc.
-If an error occurs, more sophisticated control units have a facility known as
-concurrent sense. This means that if an error occurs Extended sense information
-will be presented in the Extended status word in the IRB. If not you have to
-issue a subsequent SENSE CCW command after the test subchannel.
+ CCWs are linked lists of instructions initially pointed to by an operation
+ request block (ORB), which is initially given to Start Subchannel (SSCH)
+ command along with the subchannel number for the IO subsystem to process
+ while the CPU continues executing normal code.
+ CCWs come in two flavours, Format 0 (24 bit for backward compatibility) and
+ Format 1 (31 bit). These are typically used to issue read and write (and many
+ other) instructions. They consist of a length field and an absolute address
+ field.
+
+ Each IO typically gets 1 or 2 interrupts, one for channel end (primary status)
+ when the channel is idle, and the second for device end (secondary status).
+ Sometimes you get both concurrently. You check how the IO went on by issuing a
+ TEST SUBCHANNEL at each interrupt, from which you receive an Interruption
+ response block (IRB). If you get channel and device end status in the IRB
+ without channel checks etc. your IO probably went okay. If you didn't you
+ probably need to examine the IRB, extended status word etc.
+ If an error occurs, more sophisticated control units have a facility known as
+ concurrent sense. This means that if an error occurs Extended sense information
+ will be presented in the Extended status word in the IRB. If not you have to
+ issue a subsequent SENSE CCW command after the test subchannel.
TPI (Test pending interrupt) can also be used for polled IO, but in
@@ -1388,58 +1620,62 @@ Store Subchannel and Modify Subchannel can be used to examine and modify
operating characteristics of a subchannel (e.g. channel paths).
Other IO related Terms:
-Sysplex: S390's Clustering Technology
-QDIO: S390's new high speed IO architecture to support devices such as gigabit
-ethernet, this architecture is also designed to be forward compatible with
-upcoming 64 bit machines.
+Sysplex:
+ S390's Clustering Technology
+QDIO:
+ S390's new high speed IO architecture to support devices such as gigabit
+ ethernet, this architecture is also designed to be forward compatible with
+ upcoming 64 bit machines.
-General Concepts
+
+General Concepts
+----------------
Input Output Processors (IOP's) are responsible for communicating between
the mainframe CPU's & the channel & relieve the mainframe CPU's from the
-burden of communicating with IO devices directly, this allows the CPU's to
-concentrate on data processing.
+burden of communicating with IO devices directly, this allows the CPU's to
+concentrate on data processing.
-IOP's can use one or more links ( known as channel paths ) to talk to each
+IOP's can use one or more links ( known as channel paths ) to talk to each
IO device. It first checks for path availability & chooses an available one,
then starts ( & sometimes terminates IO ).
There are two types of channel path: ESCON & the Parallel IO interface.
IO devices are attached to control units, control units provide the
-logic to interface the channel paths & channel path IO protocols to
+logic to interface the channel paths & channel path IO protocols to
the IO devices, they can be integrated with the devices or housed separately
-& often talk to several similar devices ( typical examples would be raid
-controllers or a control unit which connects to 1000 3270 terminals ).
+& often talk to several similar devices ( typical examples would be raid
+controllers or a control unit which connects to 1000 3270 terminals )::
- +---------------------------------------------------------------+
- | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +----------+ +----------+ |
- | | CPU | | CPU | | CPU | | CPU | | Main | | Expanded | |
- | | | | | | | | | | Memory | | Storage | |
- | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +----------+ +----------+ |
- |---------------------------------------------------------------+
- | IOP | IOP | IOP |
- |---------------------------------------------------------------
- | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
- ----------------------------------------------------------------
- || ||
- || Bus & Tag Channel Path || ESCON
- || ====================== || Channel
- || || || || Path
- +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
- | | | | | |
- | CU | | CU | | CU |
- | | | | | |
- +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
- | | | | |
-+----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
-|I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device|
-+----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
- CPU = Central Processing Unit
- C = Channel
- IOP = IP Processor
- CU = Control Unit
+ +---------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +----------+ +----------+ |
+ | | CPU | | CPU | | CPU | | CPU | | Main | | Expanded | |
+ | | | | | | | | | | Memory | | Storage | |
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +----------+ +----------+ |
+ |---------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | IOP | IOP | IOP |
+ |---------------------------------------------------------------
+ | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C | C |
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------
+ || ||
+ || Bus & Tag Channel Path || ESCON
+ || ====================== || Channel
+ || || || || Path
+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
+ | | | | | |
+ | CU | | CU | | CU |
+ | | | | | |
+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
+ | | | | |
+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
+ |I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device| |I/O Device|
+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+
+ CPU = Central Processing Unit
+ C = Channel
+ IOP = IP Processor
+ CU = Control Unit
The 390 IO systems come in 2 flavours the current 390 machines support both
@@ -1447,7 +1683,7 @@ The Older 360 & 370 Interface,sometimes called the Parallel I/O interface,
sometimes called Bus-and Tag & sometimes Original Equipment Manufacturers
Interface (OEMI).
-This byte wide Parallel channel path/bus has parity & data on the "Bus" cable
+This byte wide Parallel channel path/bus has parity & data on the "Bus" cable
and control lines on the "Tag" cable. These can operate in byte multiplex mode
for sharing between several slow devices or burst mode and monopolize the
channel for the whole burst. Up to 256 devices can be addressed on one of these
@@ -1459,13 +1695,13 @@ support only transfer rates of 3.0, 2.0 & 1.0 MB/sec.
One of these paths can be daisy chained to up to 8 control units.
-ESCON if fibre optic it is also called FICON
+ESCON if fibre optic it is also called FICON
Was introduced by IBM in 1990. Has 2 fibre optic cables and uses either leds or
lasers for communication at a signaling rate of up to 200 megabits/sec. As
10bits are transferred for every 8 bits info this drops to 160 megabits/sec
and to 18.6 Megabytes/sec once control info and CRC are added. ESCON only
operates in burst mode.
-
+
ESCONs typical max cable length is 3km for the led version and 20km for the
laser version known as XDF (extended distance facility). This can be further
extended by using an ESCON director which triples the above mentioned ranges.
@@ -1489,31 +1725,29 @@ Debugging IO on s/390 & z/Architecture under VM
Now we are ready to go on with IO tracing commands under VM
-A few self explanatory queries:
-Q OSA
-Q CTC
-Q DISK ( This command is CMS specific )
-Q DASD
+A few self explanatory queries::
+ Q OSA
+ Q CTC
+ Q DISK ( This command is CMS specific )
+ Q DASD
+Q OSA on my machine returns::
-
-
-
-Q OSA on my machine returns
-OSA 7C08 ON OSA 7C08 SUBCHANNEL = 0000
-OSA 7C09 ON OSA 7C09 SUBCHANNEL = 0001
-OSA 7C14 ON OSA 7C14 SUBCHANNEL = 0002
-OSA 7C15 ON OSA 7C15 SUBCHANNEL = 0003
+ OSA 7C08 ON OSA 7C08 SUBCHANNEL = 0000
+ OSA 7C09 ON OSA 7C09 SUBCHANNEL = 0001
+ OSA 7C14 ON OSA 7C14 SUBCHANNEL = 0002
+ OSA 7C15 ON OSA 7C15 SUBCHANNEL = 0003
If you have a guest with certain privileges you may be able to see devices
which don't belong to you. To avoid this, add the option V.
-e.g.
-Q V OSA
+e.g.::
+
+ Q V OSA
Now using the device numbers returned by this command we will
Trace the io starting up on the first device 7c08 & 7c09
-In our simplest case we can trace the
+In our simplest case we can trace the
start subchannels
like TR SSCH 7C08-7C09
or the halt subchannels
@@ -1524,34 +1758,47 @@ A good trick is tracing all the IO's and CCWS and spooling them into the reader
of another VM guest so he can ftp the logfile back to his own machine. I'll do
a small bit of this and give you a look at the output.
-1) Spool stdout to VM reader
-SP PRT TO (another vm guest ) or * for the local vm guest
-2) Fill the reader with the trace
-TR IO 7c08-7c09 INST INT CCW PRT RUN
-3) Start up linux
-i 00c
-4) Finish the trace
-TR END
-5) close the reader
-C PRT
-6) list reader contents
-RDRLIST
-7) copy it to linux4's minidisk
-RECEIVE / LOG TXT A1 ( replace
+1) Spool stdout to VM reader::
+
+ SP PRT TO (another vm guest ) or * for the local vm guest
+
+2) Fill the reader with the trace::
+
+ TR IO 7c08-7c09 INST INT CCW PRT RUN
+
+3) Start up linux::
+
+ i 00c
+4) Finish the trace::
+
+ TR END
+
+5) close the reader::
+
+ C PRT
+
+6) list reader contents::
+
+ RDRLIST
+
+7) copy it to linux4's minidisk::
+
+ RECEIVE / LOG TXT A1 ( replace
+
8)
filel & press F11 to look at it
-You should see something like:
+You should see something like::
-00020942' SSCH B2334000 0048813C CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
- CPA 000FFDF0 PARM 00E2C9C4 KEY 0 FPI C0 LPM 80
- CCW 000FFDF0 E4200100 00487FE8 0000 E4240100 ........
- IDAL 43D8AFE8
- IDAL 0FB76000
-00020B0A' I/O DEV 7C08 -> 000197BC' SCH 0000 PARM 00E2C9C4
-00021628' TSCH B2354000 >> 00488164 CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
- CCWA 000FFDF8 DEV STS 0C SCH STS 00 CNT 00EC
- KEY 0 FPI C0 CC 0 CTLS 4007
-00022238' STSCH B2344000 >> 00488108 CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
+ 00020942' SSCH B2334000 0048813C CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
+ CPA 000FFDF0 PARM 00E2C9C4 KEY 0 FPI C0 LPM 80
+ CCW 000FFDF0 E4200100 00487FE8 0000 E4240100 ........
+ IDAL 43D8AFE8
+ IDAL 0FB76000
+ 00020B0A' I/O DEV 7C08 -> 000197BC' SCH 0000 PARM 00E2C9C4
+ 00021628' TSCH B2354000 >> 00488164 CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
+ CCWA 000FFDF8 DEV STS 0C SCH STS 00 CNT 00EC
+ KEY 0 FPI C0 CC 0 CTLS 4007
+ 00022238' STSCH B2344000 >> 00488108 CC 0 SCH 0000 DEV 7C08
If you don't like messing up your readed ( because you possibly booted from it )
you can alternatively spool it to another readers guest.
@@ -1563,43 +1810,58 @@ These commands are listed only because they have
been of use to me in the past & may be of use to
you too. For more complete info on each of the commands
use type HELP <command> from CMS.
-detaching devices
-DET <devno range>
-ATT <devno range> <guest>
+
+detaching devices::
+
+ DET <devno range>
+ ATT <devno range> <guest>
+
attach a device to guest * for your own guest
-READY <devno> cause VM to issue a fake interrupt.
-The VARY command is normally only available to VM administrators.
-VARY ON PATH <path> TO <devno range>
-VARY OFF PATH <PATH> FROM <devno range>
+READY <devno>
+ cause VM to issue a fake interrupt.
+
+The VARY command is normally only available to VM administrators::
+
+ VARY ON PATH <path> TO <devno range>
+ VARY OFF PATH <PATH> FROM <devno range>
+
This is used to switch on or off channel paths to devices.
Q CHPID <channel path ID>
-This displays state of devices using this channel path
+ This displays state of devices using this channel path
+
D SCHIB <subchannel>
-This displays the subchannel information SCHIB block for the device.
-this I believe is also only available to administrators.
+ This displays the subchannel information SCHIB block for the device.
+ this I believe is also only available to administrators.
+
DEFINE CTC <devno>
-defines a virtual CTC channel to channel connection
-2 need to be defined on each guest for the CTC driver to use.
+ defines a virtual CTC channel to channel connection
+ 2 need to be defined on each guest for the CTC driver to use.
+
COUPLE devno userid remote devno
-Joins a local virtual device to a remote virtual device
-( commonly used for the CTC driver ).
+ Joins a local virtual device to a remote virtual device
+ ( commonly used for the CTC driver ).
+
+Building a VM ramdisk under CMS which linux can use::
+
+ def vfb-<blocksize> <subchannel> <number blocks>
-Building a VM ramdisk under CMS which linux can use
-def vfb-<blocksize> <subchannel> <number blocks>
blocksize is commonly 4096 for linux.
-Formatting it
-format <subchannel> <driver letter e.g. x> (blksize <blocksize>
-Sharing a disk between multiple guests
-LINK userid devno1 devno2 mode password
+Formatting it::
+
+ format <subchannel> <driver letter e.g. x> (blksize <blocksize>
+
+Sharing a disk between multiple guests::
+
+ LINK userid devno1 devno2 mode password
GDB on S390
===========
-N.B. if compiling for debugging gdb works better without optimisation
+N.B. if compiling for debugging gdb works better without optimisation
( see Compiling programs for debugging )
invocation
@@ -1609,113 +1871,169 @@ gdb <victim program> <optional corefile>
Online help
-----------
help: gives help on commands
-e.g.
-help
-help display
+
+e.g.::
+
+ help
+ help display
+
Note gdb's online help is very good use it.
Assembly
--------
-info registers: displays registers other than floating point.
-info all-registers: displays floating points as well.
-disassemble: disassembles
-e.g.
-disassemble without parameters will disassemble the current function
-disassemble $pc $pc+10
+info registers:
+ displays registers other than floating point.
+
+info all-registers:
+ displays floating points as well.
+
+disassemble:
+ disassembles
+
+e.g.::
+
+ disassemble without parameters will disassemble the current function
+ disassemble $pc $pc+10
Viewing & modifying variables
-----------------------------
-print or p: displays variable or register
+print or p:
+ displays variable or register
+
e.g. p/x $sp will display the stack pointer
-display: prints variable or register each time program stops
-e.g.
-display/x $pc will display the program counter
-display argc
+display:
+ prints variable or register each time program stops
-undisplay : undo's display's
+e.g.::
-info breakpoints: shows all current breakpoints
+ display/x $pc will display the program counter
+ display argc
-info stack: shows stack back trace (if this doesn't work too well, I'll show
-you the stacktrace by hand below).
+undisplay:
+ undo's display's
-info locals: displays local variables.
+info breakpoints:
+ shows all current breakpoints
-info args: display current procedure arguments.
+info stack:
+ shows stack back trace (if this doesn't work too well, I'll show
+ you the stacktrace by hand below).
-set args: will set argc & argv each time the victim program is invoked.
+info locals:
+ displays local variables.
-set <variable>=value
-set argc=100
-set $pc=0
+info args:
+ display current procedure arguments.
+
+set args:
+ will set argc & argv each time the victim program is invoked
+
+e.g.::
+
+ set <variable>=value
+ set argc=100
+ set $pc=0
Modifying execution
-------------------
-step: steps n lines of sourcecode
-step steps 1 line.
-step 100 steps 100 lines of code.
+step:
+ steps n lines of sourcecode
-next: like step except this will not step into subroutines
+step
+ steps 1 line.
-stepi: steps a single machine code instruction.
-e.g. stepi 100
+step 100
+ steps 100 lines of code.
-nexti: steps a single machine code instruction but will not step into
-subroutines.
+next:
+ like step except this will not step into subroutines
-finish: will run until exit of the current routine
+stepi:
+ steps a single machine code instruction.
-run: (re)starts a program
+e.g.::
-cont: continues a program
+ stepi 100
-quit: exits gdb.
+nexti:
+ steps a single machine code instruction but will not step into
+ subroutines.
+
+finish:
+ will run until exit of the current routine
+
+run:
+ (re)starts a program
+
+cont:
+ continues a program
+
+quit:
+ exits gdb.
breakpoints
------------
break
-sets a breakpoint
-e.g.
+ sets a breakpoint
-break main
+e.g.::
-break *$pc
-
-break *0x400618
+ break main
+ break *$pc
+ break *0x400618
Here's a really useful one for large programs
+
rbr
-Set a breakpoint for all functions matching REGEXP
-e.g.
-rbr 390
+ Set a breakpoint for all functions matching REGEXP
+
+e.g.::
+
+ rbr 390
+
will set a breakpoint with all functions with 390 in their name.
info breakpoints
-lists all breakpoints
+ lists all breakpoints
+
+delete:
+ delete breakpoint by number or delete them all
-delete: delete breakpoint by number or delete them all
e.g.
-delete 1 will delete the first breakpoint
-delete will delete them all
-watch: This will set a watchpoint ( usually hardware assisted ),
+delete 1
+ will delete the first breakpoint
+
+
+delete
+ will delete them all
+
+watch:
+ This will set a watchpoint ( usually hardware assisted ),
+
This will watch a variable till it changes
+
e.g.
-watch cnt, will watch the variable cnt till it changes.
+
+watch cnt
+ will watch the variable cnt till it changes.
+
As an aside unfortunately gdb's, architecture independent watchpoint code
is inconsistent & not very good, watchpoints usually work but not always.
-info watchpoints: Display currently active watchpoints
+info watchpoints:
+ Display currently active watchpoints
condition: ( another useful one )
-Specify breakpoint number N to break only if COND is true.
-Usage is `condition N COND', where N is an integer and COND is an
+ Specify breakpoint number N to break only if COND is true.
+
+Usage is `condition N COND`, where N is an integer and COND is an
expression to be evaluated whenever breakpoint N is reached.
@@ -1723,41 +2041,51 @@ expression to be evaluated whenever breakpoint N is reached.
User defined functions/macros
-----------------------------
define: ( Note this is very very useful,simple & powerful )
+
usage define <name> <list of commands> end
-examples which you should consider putting into .gdbinit in your home directory
-define d
-stepi
-disassemble $pc $pc+10
-end
+examples which you should consider putting into .gdbinit in your home
+directory::
-define e
-nexti
-disassemble $pc $pc+10
-end
+ define d
+ stepi
+ disassemble $pc $pc+10
+ end
+ define e
+ nexti
+ disassemble $pc $pc+10
+ end
Other hard to classify stuff
----------------------------
signal n:
-sends the victim program a signal.
-e.g. signal 3 will send a SIGQUIT.
+ sends the victim program a signal.
+
+e.g. `signal 3` will send a SIGQUIT.
info signals:
-what gdb does when the victim receives certain signals.
+ what gdb does when the victim receives certain signals.
list:
-e.g.
-list lists current function source
-list 1,10 list first 10 lines of current file.
+
+e.g.:
+
+list
+ lists current function source
+list 1,10
+ list first 10 lines of current file.
+
list test.c:1,10
directory:
-Adds directories to be searched for source if gdb cannot find the source.
-(note it is a bit sensitive about slashes)
-e.g. To add the root of the filesystem to the searchpath do
-directory //
+ Adds directories to be searched for source if gdb cannot find the source.
+ (note it is a bit sensitive about slashes)
+
+e.g. To add the root of the filesystem to the searchpath do::
+
+ directory //
call <function>
@@ -1765,153 +2093,205 @@ This calls a function in the victim program, this is pretty powerful
e.g.
(gdb) call printf("hello world")
outputs:
-$1 = 11
+$1 = 11
You might now be thinking that the line above didn't work, something extra had
to be done.
(gdb) call fflush(stdout)
hello world$2 = 0
-As an aside the debugger also calls malloc & free under the hood
+As an aside the debugger also calls malloc & free under the hood
to make space for the "hello world" string.
hints
-----
-1) command completion works just like bash
-( if you are a bad typist like me this really helps )
+1) command completion works just like bash
+ ( if you are a bad typist like me this really helps )
+
e.g. hit br <TAB> & cursor up & down :-).
2) if you have a debugging problem that takes a few steps to recreate
put the steps into a file called .gdbinit in your current working directory
-if you have defined a few extra useful user defined commands put these in
+if you have defined a few extra useful user defined commands put these in
your home directory & they will be read each time gdb is launched.
-A typical .gdbinit file might be.
-break main
-run
-break runtime_exception
-cont
+A typical .gdbinit file might be.::
+
+ break main
+ run
+ break runtime_exception
+ cont
stack chaining in gdb by hand
-----------------------------
-This is done using a the same trick described for VM
-p/x (*($sp+56))&0x7fffffff get the first backchain.
+This is done using a the same trick described for VM::
+
+ p/x (*($sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+
+get the first backchain.
For z/Architecture
Replace 56 with 112 & ignore the &0x7fffffff
in the macros below & do nasty casts to longs like the following
as gdb unfortunately deals with printed arguments as ints which
messes up everything.
-i.e. here is a 3rd backchain dereference
-p/x *(long *)(***(long ***)$sp+112)
+i.e. here is a 3rd backchain dereference::
+
+ p/x *(long *)(***(long ***)$sp+112)
+
+
+this outputs::
+
+ $5 = 0x528f18
-this outputs
-$5 = 0x528f18
on my machine.
-Now you can use
-info symbol (*($sp+56))&0x7fffffff
-you might see something like.
-rl_getc + 36 in section .text telling you what is located at address 0x528f18
-Now do.
-p/x (*(*$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
-This outputs
-$6 = 0x528ed0
-Now do.
-info symbol (*(*$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
-rl_read_key + 180 in section .text
-now do
-p/x (*(**$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+
+Now you can use::
+
+ info symbol (*($sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+
+you might see something like::
+
+ rl_getc + 36 in section .text
+
+telling you what is located at address 0x528f18
+Now do::
+
+ p/x (*(*$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+
+This outputs::
+
+ $6 = 0x528ed0
+
+Now do::
+
+ info symbol (*(*$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+ rl_read_key + 180 in section .text
+
+now do::
+
+ p/x (*(**$sp+56))&0x7fffffff
+
& so on.
Disassembling instructions without debug info
---------------------------------------------
gdb typically complains if there is a lack of debugging
-symbols in the disassemble command with
+symbols in the disassemble command with
"No function contains specified address." To get around
-this do
-x/<number lines to disassemble>xi <address>
-e.g.
-x/20xi 0x400730
+this do::
+ x/<number lines to disassemble>xi <address>
+e.g.::
-Note: Remember gdb has history just like bash you don't need to retype the
-whole line just use the up & down arrows.
+ x/20xi 0x400730
+
+
+
+Note:
+ Remember gdb has history just like bash you don't need to retype the
+ whole line just use the up & down arrows.
For more info
-------------
-From your linuxbox do
-man gdb or info gdb.
+From your linuxbox do::
+
+ man gdb
+
+or::
+
+ info gdb.
core dumps
----------
-What a core dump ?,
+
+What a core dump ?
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
A core dump is a file generated by the kernel (if allowed) which contains the
registers and all active pages of the program which has crashed.
+
From this file gdb will allow you to look at the registers, stack trace and
memory of the program as if it just crashed on your system. It is usually
called core and created in the current working directory.
+
This is very useful in that a customer can mail a core dump to a technical
support department and the technical support department can reconstruct what
happened. Provided they have an identical copy of this program with debugging
symbols compiled in and the source base of this build is available.
+
In short it is far more useful than something like a crash log could ever hope
to be.
-Why have I never seen one ?.
-Probably because you haven't used the command
-ulimit -c unlimited in bash
-to allow core dumps, now do
-ulimit -a
+Why have I never seen one ?
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Probably because you haven't used the command::
+
+ ulimit -c unlimited in bash
+
+to allow core dumps, now do::
+
+ ulimit -a
+
to verify that the limit was accepted.
A sample core dump
-To create this I'm going to do
-ulimit -c unlimited
-gdb
-to launch gdb (my victim app. ) now be bad & do the following from another
-telnet/xterm session to the same machine
-ps -aux | grep gdb
-kill -SIGSEGV <gdb's pid>
-or alternatively use killall -SIGSEGV gdb if you have the killall command.
-Now look at the core dump.
-./gdb core
-Displays the following
-GNU gdb 4.18
-Copyright 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and you are
-welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under certain conditions.
-Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
-There is absolutely no warranty for GDB. Type "show warranty" for details.
-This GDB was configured as "s390-ibm-linux"...
-Core was generated by `./gdb'.
-Program terminated with signal 11, Segmentation fault.
-Reading symbols from /usr/lib/libncurses.so.4...done.
-Reading symbols from /lib/libm.so.6...done.
-Reading symbols from /lib/libc.so.6...done.
-Reading symbols from /lib/ld-linux.so.2...done.
-#0 0x40126d1a in read () from /lib/libc.so.6
-Setting up the environment for debugging gdb.
-Breakpoint 1 at 0x4dc6f8: file utils.c, line 471.
-Breakpoint 2 at 0x4d87a4: file top.c, line 2609.
-(top-gdb) info stack
-#0 0x40126d1a in read () from /lib/libc.so.6
-#1 0x528f26 in rl_getc (stream=0x7ffffde8) at input.c:402
-#2 0x528ed0 in rl_read_key () at input.c:381
-#3 0x5167e6 in readline_internal_char () at readline.c:454
-#4 0x5168ee in readline_internal_charloop () at readline.c:507
-#5 0x51692c in readline_internal () at readline.c:521
-#6 0x5164fe in readline (prompt=0x7ffff810)
- at readline.c:349
-#7 0x4d7a8a in command_line_input (prompt=0x564420 "(gdb) ", repeat=1,
- annotation_suffix=0x4d6b44 "prompt") at top.c:2091
-#8 0x4d6cf0 in command_loop () at top.c:1345
-#9 0x4e25bc in main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffdf4) at main.c:635
+ To create this I'm going to do::
+
+ ulimit -c unlimited
+ gdb
+
+to launch gdb (my victim app. ) now be bad & do the following from another
+telnet/xterm session to the same machine::
+
+ ps -aux | grep gdb
+ kill -SIGSEGV <gdb's pid>
+
+or alternatively use `killall -SIGSEGV gdb` if you have the killall command.
+
+Now look at the core dump::
+
+ ./gdb core
+
+Displays the following::
+
+ GNU gdb 4.18
+ Copyright 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and you are
+ welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under certain conditions.
+ Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
+ There is absolutely no warranty for GDB. Type "show warranty" for details.
+ This GDB was configured as "s390-ibm-linux"...
+ Core was generated by `./gdb'.
+ Program terminated with signal 11, Segmentation fault.
+ Reading symbols from /usr/lib/libncurses.so.4...done.
+ Reading symbols from /lib/libm.so.6...done.
+ Reading symbols from /lib/libc.so.6...done.
+ Reading symbols from /lib/ld-linux.so.2...done.
+ #0 0x40126d1a in read () from /lib/libc.so.6
+ Setting up the environment for debugging gdb.
+ Breakpoint 1 at 0x4dc6f8: file utils.c, line 471.
+ Breakpoint 2 at 0x4d87a4: file top.c, line 2609.
+ (top-gdb) info stack
+ #0 0x40126d1a in read () from /lib/libc.so.6
+ #1 0x528f26 in rl_getc (stream=0x7ffffde8) at input.c:402
+ #2 0x528ed0 in rl_read_key () at input.c:381
+ #3 0x5167e6 in readline_internal_char () at readline.c:454
+ #4 0x5168ee in readline_internal_charloop () at readline.c:507
+ #5 0x51692c in readline_internal () at readline.c:521
+ #6 0x5164fe in readline (prompt=0x7ffff810)
+ at readline.c:349
+ #7 0x4d7a8a in command_line_input (prompt=0x564420 "(gdb) ", repeat=1,
+ annotation_suffix=0x4d6b44 "prompt") at top.c:2091
+ #8 0x4d6cf0 in command_loop () at top.c:1345
+ #9 0x4e25bc in main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffdf4) at main.c:635
LDD
@@ -1919,27 +2299,32 @@ LDD
This is a program which lists the shared libraries which a library needs,
Note you also get the relocations of the shared library text segments which
help when using objdump --source.
-e.g.
- ldd ./gdb
-outputs
-libncurses.so.4 => /usr/lib/libncurses.so.4 (0x40018000)
-libm.so.6 => /lib/libm.so.6 (0x4005e000)
-libc.so.6 => /lib/libc.so.6 (0x40084000)
-/lib/ld-linux.so.2 => /lib/ld-linux.so.2 (0x40000000)
+
+e.g.::
+
+ ldd ./gdb
+
+outputs::
+
+ libncurses.so.4 => /usr/lib/libncurses.so.4 (0x40018000)
+ libm.so.6 => /lib/libm.so.6 (0x4005e000)
+ libc.so.6 => /lib/libc.so.6 (0x40084000)
+ /lib/ld-linux.so.2 => /lib/ld-linux.so.2 (0x40000000)
Debugging shared libraries
==========================
Most programs use shared libraries, however it can be very painful
-when you single step instruction into a function like printf for the
+when you single step instruction into a function like printf for the
first time & you end up in functions like _dl_runtime_resolve this is
-the ld.so doing lazy binding, lazy binding is a concept in ELF where
-shared library functions are not loaded into memory unless they are
+the ld.so doing lazy binding, lazy binding is a concept in ELF where
+shared library functions are not loaded into memory unless they are
actually used, great for saving memory but a pain to debug.
-To get around this either relink the program -static or exit gdb type
-export LD_BIND_NOW=true this will stop lazy binding & restart the gdb'ing
+
+To get around this either relink the program -static or exit gdb type
+export LD_BIND_NOW=true this will stop lazy binding & restart the gdb'ing
the program in question.
-
+
Debugging modules
@@ -1955,106 +2340,127 @@ It is a filesystem created by the kernel with files which are created on demand
by the kernel if read, or can be used to modify kernel parameters,
it is a powerful concept.
-e.g.
-
-cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
-On my machine outputs
-0
-telling me ip_forwarding is not on to switch it on I can do
-echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
-cat it again
-cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
-On my machine now outputs
-1
+e.g.::
+
+ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+
+On my machine outputs::
+
+ 0
+
+telling me ip_forwarding is not on to switch it on I can do::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+
+cat it again::
+
+ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+
+On my machine now outputs::
+
+ 1
+
IP forwarding is on.
+
There is a lot of useful info in here best found by going in and having a look
around, so I'll take you through some entries I consider important.
All the processes running on the machine have their own entry defined by
/proc/<pid>
-So lets have a look at the init process
-cd /proc/1
-cat cmdline
-emits
-init [2]
+So lets have a look at the init process::
+
+ cd /proc/1
+ cat cmdline
+
+emits::
+
+ init [2]
+
+::
+
+ cd /proc/1/fd
-cd /proc/1/fd
This contains numerical entries of all the open files,
-some of these you can cat e.g. stdout (2)
+some of these you can cat e.g. stdout (2)::
-cat /proc/29/maps
-on my machine emits
+ cat /proc/29/maps
-00400000-00478000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 4103 /bin/bash
-00478000-0047e000 rw-p 00077000 5f:00 4103 /bin/bash
-0047e000-00492000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
-40000000-40015000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14382 /lib/ld-2.1.2.so
-40015000-40016000 rw-p 00014000 5f:00 14382 /lib/ld-2.1.2.so
-40016000-40017000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
-40017000-40018000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
-40018000-4001b000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14435 /lib/libtermcap.so.2.0.8
-4001b000-4001c000 rw-p 00002000 5f:00 14435 /lib/libtermcap.so.2.0.8
-4001c000-4010d000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14387 /lib/libc-2.1.2.so
-4010d000-40111000 rw-p 000f0000 5f:00 14387 /lib/libc-2.1.2.so
-40111000-40114000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
-40114000-4011e000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14408 /lib/libnss_files-2.1.2.so
-4011e000-4011f000 rw-p 00009000 5f:00 14408 /lib/libnss_files-2.1.2.so
-7fffd000-80000000 rwxp ffffe000 00:00 0
+on my machine emits::
+
+ 00400000-00478000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 4103 /bin/bash
+ 00478000-0047e000 rw-p 00077000 5f:00 4103 /bin/bash
+ 0047e000-00492000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
+ 40000000-40015000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14382 /lib/ld-2.1.2.so
+ 40015000-40016000 rw-p 00014000 5f:00 14382 /lib/ld-2.1.2.so
+ 40016000-40017000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
+ 40017000-40018000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+ 40018000-4001b000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14435 /lib/libtermcap.so.2.0.8
+ 4001b000-4001c000 rw-p 00002000 5f:00 14435 /lib/libtermcap.so.2.0.8
+ 4001c000-4010d000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14387 /lib/libc-2.1.2.so
+ 4010d000-40111000 rw-p 000f0000 5f:00 14387 /lib/libc-2.1.2.so
+ 40111000-40114000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
+ 40114000-4011e000 r-xp 00000000 5f:00 14408 /lib/libnss_files-2.1.2.so
+ 4011e000-4011f000 rw-p 00009000 5f:00 14408 /lib/libnss_files-2.1.2.so
+ 7fffd000-80000000 rwxp ffffe000 00:00 0
Showing us the shared libraries init uses where they are in memory
& memory access permissions for each virtual memory area.
/proc/1/cwd is a softlink to the current working directory.
-/proc/1/root is the root of the filesystem for this process.
+
+/proc/1/root is the root of the filesystem for this process.
/proc/1/mem is the current running processes memory which you
can read & write to like a file.
+
strace uses this sometimes as it is a bit faster than the
rather inefficient ptrace interface for peeking at DATA.
+::
-cat status
+ cat status
-Name: init
-State: S (sleeping)
-Pid: 1
-PPid: 0
-Uid: 0 0 0 0
-Gid: 0 0 0 0
-Groups:
-VmSize: 408 kB
-VmLck: 0 kB
-VmRSS: 208 kB
-VmData: 24 kB
-VmStk: 8 kB
-VmExe: 368 kB
-VmLib: 0 kB
-SigPnd: 0000000000000000
-SigBlk: 0000000000000000
-SigIgn: 7fffffffd7f0d8fc
-SigCgt: 00000000280b2603
-CapInh: 00000000fffffeff
-CapPrm: 00000000ffffffff
-CapEff: 00000000fffffeff
+ Name: init
+ State: S (sleeping)
+ Pid: 1
+ PPid: 0
+ Uid: 0 0 0 0
+ Gid: 0 0 0 0
+ Groups:
+ VmSize: 408 kB
+ VmLck: 0 kB
+ VmRSS: 208 kB
+ VmData: 24 kB
+ VmStk: 8 kB
+ VmExe: 368 kB
+ VmLib: 0 kB
+ SigPnd: 0000000000000000
+ SigBlk: 0000000000000000
+ SigIgn: 7fffffffd7f0d8fc
+ SigCgt: 00000000280b2603
+ CapInh: 00000000fffffeff
+ CapPrm: 00000000ffffffff
+ CapEff: 00000000fffffeff
+
+ User PSW: 070de000 80414146
+ task: 004b6000 tss: 004b62d8 ksp: 004b7ca8 pt_regs: 004b7f68
+ User GPRS:
+ 00000400 00000000 0000000b 7ffffa90
+ 00000000 00000000 00000000 0045d9f4
+ 0045cafc 7ffffa90 7fffff18 0045cb08
+ 00010400 804039e8 80403af8 7ffff8b0
+ User ACRS:
+ 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+ 00000001 00000000 00000000 00000000
+ 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+ 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+ Kernel BackChain CallChain BackChain CallChain
+ 004b7ca8 8002bd0c 004b7d18 8002b92c
+ 004b7db8 8005cd50 004b7e38 8005d12a
+ 004b7f08 80019114
-User PSW: 070de000 80414146
-task: 004b6000 tss: 004b62d8 ksp: 004b7ca8 pt_regs: 004b7f68
-User GPRS:
-00000400 00000000 0000000b 7ffffa90
-00000000 00000000 00000000 0045d9f4
-0045cafc 7ffffa90 7fffff18 0045cb08
-00010400 804039e8 80403af8 7ffff8b0
-User ACRS:
-00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
-00000001 00000000 00000000 00000000
-00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
-00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
-Kernel BackChain CallChain BackChain CallChain
- 004b7ca8 8002bd0c 004b7d18 8002b92c
- 004b7db8 8005cd50 004b7e38 8005d12a
- 004b7f08 80019114
Showing among other things memory usage & status of some signals &
the processes'es registers from the kernel task_structure
as well as a backchain which may be useful if a process crashes
@@ -2067,11 +2473,16 @@ debug feature
Some of our drivers now support a "debug feature" in
/proc/s390dbf see s390dbf.txt in the linux/Documentation directory
for more info.
-e.g.
-to switch on the lcs "debug feature"
-echo 5 > /proc/s390dbf/lcs/level
-& then after the error occurred.
-cat /proc/s390dbf/lcs/sprintf >/logfile
+
+e.g.
+to switch on the lcs "debug feature"::
+
+ echo 5 > /proc/s390dbf/lcs/level
+
+& then after the error occurred::
+
+ cat /proc/s390dbf/lcs/sprintf >/logfile
+
the logfile now contains some information which may help
tech support resolve a problem in the field.
@@ -2083,35 +2494,50 @@ ifconfig is a quite useful command
it gives the current state of network drivers.
If you suspect your network device driver is dead
-one way to check is type
-ifconfig <network device>
+one way to check is type::
+
+ ifconfig <network device>
+
e.g. tr0
-You should see something like
-tr0 Link encap:16/4 Mbps Token Ring (New) HWaddr 00:04:AC:20:8E:48
- inet addr:9.164.185.132 Bcast:9.164.191.255 Mask:255.255.224.0
- UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:2000 Metric:1
- RX packets:246134 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
- TX packets:5 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
- collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
+
+You should see something like::
+
+ ifconfig tr0
+ tr0 Link encap:16/4 Mbps Token Ring (New) HWaddr 00:04:AC:20:8E:48
+ inet addr:9.164.185.132 Bcast:9.164.191.255 Mask:255.255.224.0
+ UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:2000 Metric:1
+ RX packets:246134 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+ TX packets:5 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
+ collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
if the device doesn't say up
-try
-/etc/rc.d/init.d/network start
+try::
+
+ /etc/rc.d/init.d/network start
+
( this starts the network stack & hopefully calls ifconfig tr0 up ).
ifconfig looks at the output of /proc/net/dev and presents it in a more
presentable form.
+
Now ping the device from a machine in the same subnet.
+
if the RX packets count & TX packets counts don't increment you probably
have problems.
-next
-cat /proc/net/arp
+
+next::
+
+ cat /proc/net/arp
+
Do you see any hardware addresses in the cache if not you may have problems.
-Next try
-ping -c 5 <broadcast_addr> i.e. the Bcast field above in the output of
+Next try::
+
+ ping -c 5 <broadcast_addr>
+
+i.e. the Bcast field above in the output of
ifconfig. Do you see any replies from machines other than the local machine
if not you may have problems. also if the TX packets count in ifconfig
-hasn't incremented either you have serious problems in your driver
-(e.g. the txbusy field of the network device being stuck on )
+hasn't incremented either you have serious problems in your driver
+(e.g. the txbusy field of the network device being stuck on )
or you may have multiple network devices connected.
@@ -2119,28 +2545,43 @@ chandev
-------
There is a new device layer for channel devices, some
drivers e.g. lcs are registered with this layer.
+
If the device uses the channel device layer you'll be
-able to find what interrupts it uses & the current state
+able to find what interrupts it uses & the current state
of the device.
+
See the manpage chandev.8 &type cat /proc/chandev for more info.
SysRq
=====
This is now supported by linux for s/390 & z/Architecture.
-To enable it do compile the kernel with
-Kernel Hacking -> Magic SysRq Key Enabled
-echo "1" > /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq
-also type
-echo "8" >/proc/sys/kernel/printk
+
+To enable it do compile the kernel with::
+
+ Kernel Hacking -> Magic SysRq Key Enabled
+
+Then::
+
+ echo "1" > /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq
+
+also type::
+
+ echo "8" >/proc/sys/kernel/printk
+
To make printk output go to console.
-On 390 all commands are prefixed with
-^-
-e.g.
-^-t will show tasks.
-^-? or some unknown command will display help.
+
+On 390 all commands are prefixed with::
+
+ ^-
+
+e.g.::
+
+ ^-t will show tasks.
+ ^-? or some unknown command will display help.
+
The sysrq key reading is very picky ( I have to type the keys in an
- xterm session & paste them into the x3270 console )
+xterm session & paste them into the x3270 console )
& it may be wise to predefine the keys as described in the VM hints above
This is particularly useful for syncing disks unmounting & rebooting
@@ -2150,19 +2591,19 @@ Read Documentation/admin-guide/sysrq.rst for more info
References:
===========
-Enterprise Systems Architecture Reference Summary
-Enterprise Systems Architecture Principles of Operation
-Hartmut Penners s390 stack frame sheet.
-IBM Mainframe Channel Attachment a technology brief from a CISCO webpage
-Various bits of man & info pages of Linux.
-Linux & GDB source.
-Various info & man pages.
-CMS Help on tracing commands.
-Linux for s/390 Elf Application Binary Interface
-Linux for z/Series Elf Application Binary Interface ( Both Highly Recommended )
-z/Architecture Principles of Operation SA22-7832-00
-Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Reference Summary SA22-7209-01 & the
-Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Principles of Operation SA22-7201-05
+- Enterprise Systems Architecture Reference Summary
+- Enterprise Systems Architecture Principles of Operation
+- Hartmut Penners s390 stack frame sheet.
+- IBM Mainframe Channel Attachment a technology brief from a CISCO webpage
+- Various bits of man & info pages of Linux.
+- Linux & GDB source.
+- Various info & man pages.
+- CMS Help on tracing commands.
+- Linux for s/390 Elf Application Binary Interface
+- Linux for z/Series Elf Application Binary Interface ( Both Highly Recommended )
+- z/Architecture Principles of Operation SA22-7832-00
+- Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Reference Summary SA22-7209-01 & the
+- Enterprise Systems Architecture/390 Principles of Operation SA22-7201-05
Special Thanks
==============
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
index 480a78ef5a1e..973f90b2c941 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
@@ -1,14 +1,18 @@
+===========================
Linux for S/390 and zSeries
+===========================
Common Device Support (CDS)
Device Driver I/O Support Routines
-Authors : Ingo Adlung
- Cornelia Huck
+Authors:
+ - Ingo Adlung
+ - Cornelia Huck
Copyright, IBM Corp. 1999-2002
Introduction
+============
This document describes the common device support routines for Linux/390.
Different than other hardware architectures, ESA/390 has defined a unified
@@ -27,18 +31,20 @@ Operation manual (IBM Form. No. SA22-7201).
In order to build common device support for ESA/390 I/O interfaces, a
functional layer was introduced that provides generic I/O access methods to
-the hardware.
+the hardware.
-The common device support layer comprises the I/O support routines defined
-below. Some of them implement common Linux device driver interfaces, while
+The common device support layer comprises the I/O support routines defined
+below. Some of them implement common Linux device driver interfaces, while
some of them are ESA/390 platform specific.
Note:
-In order to write a driver for S/390, you also need to look into the interface
-described in Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt.
+ In order to write a driver for S/390, you also need to look into the interface
+ described in Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt.
Note for porting drivers from 2.4:
+
The major changes are:
+
* The functions use a ccw_device instead of an irq (subchannel).
* All drivers must define a ccw_driver (see driver-model.txt) and the associated
functions.
@@ -57,19 +63,16 @@ The major changes are:
ccw_device_get_ciw()
get commands from extended sense data.
-ccw_device_start()
-ccw_device_start_timeout()
-ccw_device_start_key()
-ccw_device_start_key_timeout()
+ccw_device_start(), ccw_device_start_timeout(), ccw_device_start_key(), ccw_device_start_key_timeout()
initiate an I/O request.
ccw_device_resume()
resume channel program execution.
-ccw_device_halt()
+ccw_device_halt()
terminate the current I/O request processed on the device.
-do_IRQ()
+do_IRQ()
generic interrupt routine. This function is called by the interrupt entry
routine whenever an I/O interrupt is presented to the system. The do_IRQ()
routine determines the interrupt status and calls the device specific
@@ -82,12 +85,15 @@ first level interrupt handler only and does not comprise a device driver
callable interface. Instead, the functional description of do_IO() also
describes the input to the device specific interrupt handler.
-Note: All explanations apply also to the 64 bit architecture s390x.
+Note:
+ All explanations apply also to the 64 bit architecture s390x.
Common Device Support (CDS) for Linux/390 Device Drivers
+========================================================
General Information
+-------------------
The following chapters describe the I/O related interface routines the
Linux/390 common device support (CDS) provides to allow for device specific
@@ -101,6 +107,7 @@ can be found in the architecture specific C header file
linux/arch/s390/include/asm/irq.h.
Overview of CDS interface concepts
+----------------------------------
Different to other hardware platforms, the ESA/390 architecture doesn't define
interrupt lines managed by a specific interrupt controller and bus systems
@@ -126,7 +133,7 @@ has to call every single device driver registered on this IRQ in order to
determine the device driver owning the device that raised the interrupt.
Up to kernel 2.4, Linux/390 used to provide interfaces via the IRQ (subchannel).
-For internal use of the common I/O layer, these are still there. However,
+For internal use of the common I/O layer, these are still there. However,
device drivers should use the new calling interface via the ccw_device only.
During its startup the Linux/390 system checks for peripheral devices. Each
@@ -134,7 +141,7 @@ of those devices is uniquely defined by a so called subchannel by the ESA/390
channel subsystem. While the subchannel numbers are system generated, each
subchannel also takes a user defined attribute, the so called device number.
Both subchannel number and device number cannot exceed 65535. During sysfs
-initialisation, the information about control unit type and device types that
+initialisation, the information about control unit type and device types that
imply specific I/O commands (channel command words - CCWs) in order to operate
the device are gathered. Device drivers can retrieve this set of hardware
information during their initialization step to recognize the devices they
@@ -164,18 +171,26 @@ get_ciw() - get command information word
This call enables a device driver to get information about supported commands
from the extended SenseID data.
-struct ciw *
-ccw_device_get_ciw(struct ccw_device *cdev, __u32 cmd);
+::
-cdev - The ccw_device for which the command is to be retrieved.
-cmd - The command type to be retrieved.
+ struct ciw *
+ ccw_device_get_ciw(struct ccw_device *cdev, __u32 cmd);
+
+==== ========================================================
+cdev The ccw_device for which the command is to be retrieved.
+cmd The command type to be retrieved.
+==== ========================================================
ccw_device_get_ciw() returns:
-NULL - No extended data available, invalid device or command not found.
-!NULL - The command requested.
+===== ================================================================
+ NULL No extended data available, invalid device or command not found.
+!NULL The command requested.
+===== ================================================================
-ccw_device_start() - Initiate I/O Request
+::
+
+ ccw_device_start() - Initiate I/O Request
The ccw_device_start() routines is the I/O request front-end processor. All
device driver I/O requests must be issued using this routine. A device driver
@@ -186,93 +201,105 @@ This description also covers the status information passed to the device
driver's interrupt handler as this is related to the rules (flags) defined
with the associated I/O request when calling ccw_device_start().
-int ccw_device_start(struct ccw_device *cdev,
- struct ccw1 *cpa,
- unsigned long intparm,
- __u8 lpm,
- unsigned long flags);
-int ccw_device_start_timeout(struct ccw_device *cdev,
- struct ccw1 *cpa,
- unsigned long intparm,
- __u8 lpm,
- unsigned long flags,
- int expires);
-int ccw_device_start_key(struct ccw_device *cdev,
- struct ccw1 *cpa,
- unsigned long intparm,
- __u8 lpm,
- __u8 key,
- unsigned long flags);
-int ccw_device_start_key_timeout(struct ccw_device *cdev,
- struct ccw1 *cpa,
- unsigned long intparm,
- __u8 lpm,
- __u8 key,
- unsigned long flags,
- int expires);
+::
-cdev : ccw_device the I/O is destined for
-cpa : logical start address of channel program
-user_intparm : user specific interrupt information; will be presented
- back to the device driver's interrupt handler. Allows a
- device driver to associate the interrupt with a
- particular I/O request.
-lpm : defines the channel path to be used for a specific I/O
- request. A value of 0 will make cio use the opm.
-key : the storage key to use for the I/O (useful for operating on a
- storage with a storage key != default key)
-flag : defines the action to be performed for I/O processing
-expires : timeout value in jiffies. The common I/O layer will terminate
- the running program after this and call the interrupt handler
- with ERR_PTR(-ETIMEDOUT) as irb.
+ int ccw_device_start(struct ccw_device *cdev,
+ struct ccw1 *cpa,
+ unsigned long intparm,
+ __u8 lpm,
+ unsigned long flags);
+ int ccw_device_start_timeout(struct ccw_device *cdev,
+ struct ccw1 *cpa,
+ unsigned long intparm,
+ __u8 lpm,
+ unsigned long flags,
+ int expires);
+ int ccw_device_start_key(struct ccw_device *cdev,
+ struct ccw1 *cpa,
+ unsigned long intparm,
+ __u8 lpm,
+ __u8 key,
+ unsigned long flags);
+ int ccw_device_start_key_timeout(struct ccw_device *cdev,
+ struct ccw1 *cpa,
+ unsigned long intparm,
+ __u8 lpm,
+ __u8 key,
+ unsigned long flags,
+ int expires);
-Possible flag values are :
+============= =============================================================
+cdev ccw_device the I/O is destined for
+cpa logical start address of channel program
+user_intparm user specific interrupt information; will be presented
+ back to the device driver's interrupt handler. Allows a
+ device driver to associate the interrupt with a
+ particular I/O request.
+lpm defines the channel path to be used for a specific I/O
+ request. A value of 0 will make cio use the opm.
+key the storage key to use for the I/O (useful for operating on a
+ storage with a storage key != default key)
+flag defines the action to be performed for I/O processing
+expires timeout value in jiffies. The common I/O layer will terminate
+ the running program after this and call the interrupt handler
+ with ERR_PTR(-ETIMEDOUT) as irb.
+============= =============================================================
-DOIO_ALLOW_SUSPEND - channel program may become suspended
-DOIO_DENY_PREFETCH - don't allow for CCW prefetch; usually
- this implies the channel program might
- become modified
-DOIO_SUPPRESS_INTER - don't call the handler on intermediate status
+Possible flag values are:
-The cpa parameter points to the first format 1 CCW of a channel program :
+========================= =============================================
+DOIO_ALLOW_SUSPEND channel program may become suspended
+DOIO_DENY_PREFETCH don't allow for CCW prefetch; usually
+ this implies the channel program might
+ become modified
+DOIO_SUPPRESS_INTER don't call the handler on intermediate status
+========================= =============================================
-struct ccw1 {
- __u8 cmd_code;/* command code */
- __u8 flags; /* flags, like IDA addressing, etc. */
- __u16 count; /* byte count */
- __u32 cda; /* data address */
-} __attribute__ ((packed,aligned(8)));
+The cpa parameter points to the first format 1 CCW of a channel program::
-with the following CCW flags values defined :
+ struct ccw1 {
+ __u8 cmd_code;/* command code */
+ __u8 flags; /* flags, like IDA addressing, etc. */
+ __u16 count; /* byte count */
+ __u32 cda; /* data address */
+ } __attribute__ ((packed,aligned(8)));
-CCW_FLAG_DC - data chaining
-CCW_FLAG_CC - command chaining
-CCW_FLAG_SLI - suppress incorrect length
-CCW_FLAG_SKIP - skip
-CCW_FLAG_PCI - PCI
-CCW_FLAG_IDA - indirect addressing
-CCW_FLAG_SUSPEND - suspend
+with the following CCW flags values defined:
+
+=================== =========================
+CCW_FLAG_DC data chaining
+CCW_FLAG_CC command chaining
+CCW_FLAG_SLI suppress incorrect length
+CCW_FLAG_SKIP skip
+CCW_FLAG_PCI PCI
+CCW_FLAG_IDA indirect addressing
+CCW_FLAG_SUSPEND suspend
+=================== =========================
Via ccw_device_set_options(), the device driver may specify the following
options for the device:
-DOIO_EARLY_NOTIFICATION - allow for early interrupt notification
-DOIO_REPORT_ALL - report all interrupt conditions
+========================= ======================================
+DOIO_EARLY_NOTIFICATION allow for early interrupt notification
+DOIO_REPORT_ALL report all interrupt conditions
+========================= ======================================
-The ccw_device_start() function returns :
+The ccw_device_start() function returns:
- 0 - successful completion or request successfully initiated
--EBUSY - The device is currently processing a previous I/O request, or there is
- a status pending at the device.
--ENODEV - cdev is invalid, the device is not operational or the ccw_device is
- not online.
+======== ======================================================================
+ 0 successful completion or request successfully initiated
+ -EBUSY The device is currently processing a previous I/O request, or there is
+ a status pending at the device.
+-ENODEV cdev is invalid, the device is not operational or the ccw_device is
+ not online.
+======== ======================================================================
When the I/O request completes, the CDS first level interrupt handler will
accumulate the status in a struct irb and then call the device interrupt handler.
-The intparm field will contain the value the device driver has associated with a
-particular I/O request. If a pending device status was recognized,
+The intparm field will contain the value the device driver has associated with a
+particular I/O request. If a pending device status was recognized,
intparm will be set to 0 (zero). This may happen during I/O initiation or delayed
by an alert status notification. In any case this status is not related to the
current (last) I/O request. In case of a delayed status notification no special
@@ -282,9 +309,11 @@ never started, even though ccw_device_start() returned with successful completio
The irb may contain an error value, and the device driver should check for this
first:
--ETIMEDOUT: the common I/O layer terminated the request after the specified
- timeout value
--EIO: the common I/O layer terminated the request due to an error state
+========== =================================================================
+-ETIMEDOUT the common I/O layer terminated the request after the specified
+ timeout value
+-EIO the common I/O layer terminated the request due to an error state
+========== =================================================================
If the concurrent sense flag in the extended status word (esw) in the irb is
set, the field erw.scnt in the esw describes the number of device specific
@@ -294,6 +323,7 @@ sensing by the device driver itself is required.
The device interrupt handler can use the following definitions to investigate
the primary unit check source coded in sense byte 0 :
+======================= ====
SNS0_CMD_REJECT 0x80
SNS0_INTERVENTION_REQ 0x40
SNS0_BUS_OUT_CHECK 0x20
@@ -301,36 +331,41 @@ SNS0_EQUIPMENT_CHECK 0x10
SNS0_DATA_CHECK 0x08
SNS0_OVERRUN 0x04
SNS0_INCOMPL_DOMAIN 0x01
+======================= ====
Depending on the device status, multiple of those values may be set together.
Please refer to the device specific documentation for details.
The irb->scsw.cstat field provides the (accumulated) subchannel status :
-SCHN_STAT_PCI - program controlled interrupt
-SCHN_STAT_INCORR_LEN - incorrect length
-SCHN_STAT_PROG_CHECK - program check
-SCHN_STAT_PROT_CHECK - protection check
-SCHN_STAT_CHN_DATA_CHK - channel data check
-SCHN_STAT_CHN_CTRL_CHK - channel control check
-SCHN_STAT_INTF_CTRL_CHK - interface control check
-SCHN_STAT_CHAIN_CHECK - chaining check
+========================= ============================
+SCHN_STAT_PCI program controlled interrupt
+SCHN_STAT_INCORR_LEN incorrect length
+SCHN_STAT_PROG_CHECK program check
+SCHN_STAT_PROT_CHECK protection check
+SCHN_STAT_CHN_DATA_CHK channel data check
+SCHN_STAT_CHN_CTRL_CHK channel control check
+SCHN_STAT_INTF_CTRL_CHK interface control check
+SCHN_STAT_CHAIN_CHECK chaining check
+========================= ============================
The irb->scsw.dstat field provides the (accumulated) device status :
-DEV_STAT_ATTENTION - attention
-DEV_STAT_STAT_MOD - status modifier
-DEV_STAT_CU_END - control unit end
-DEV_STAT_BUSY - busy
-DEV_STAT_CHN_END - channel end
-DEV_STAT_DEV_END - device end
-DEV_STAT_UNIT_CHECK - unit check
-DEV_STAT_UNIT_EXCEP - unit exception
+===================== =================
+DEV_STAT_ATTENTION attention
+DEV_STAT_STAT_MOD status modifier
+DEV_STAT_CU_END control unit end
+DEV_STAT_BUSY busy
+DEV_STAT_CHN_END channel end
+DEV_STAT_DEV_END device end
+DEV_STAT_UNIT_CHECK unit check
+DEV_STAT_UNIT_EXCEP unit exception
+===================== =================
Please see the ESA/390 Principles of Operation manual for details on the
individual flag meanings.
-Usage Notes :
+Usage Notes:
ccw_device_start() must be called disabled and with the ccw device lock held.
@@ -374,32 +409,39 @@ secondary status without error (alert status) is presented, this indicates
successful completion for all overlapping ccw_device_start() requests that have
been issued since the last secondary (final) status.
-Channel programs that intend to set the suspend flag on a channel command word
-(CCW) must start the I/O operation with the DOIO_ALLOW_SUSPEND option or the
-suspend flag will cause a channel program check. At the time the channel program
-becomes suspended an intermediate interrupt will be generated by the channel
+Channel programs that intend to set the suspend flag on a channel command word
+(CCW) must start the I/O operation with the DOIO_ALLOW_SUSPEND option or the
+suspend flag will cause a channel program check. At the time the channel program
+becomes suspended an intermediate interrupt will be generated by the channel
subsystem.
-ccw_device_resume() - Resume Channel Program Execution
+ccw_device_resume() - Resume Channel Program Execution
-If a device driver chooses to suspend the current channel program execution by
-setting the CCW suspend flag on a particular CCW, the channel program execution
-is suspended. In order to resume channel program execution the CIO layer
-provides the ccw_device_resume() routine.
+If a device driver chooses to suspend the current channel program execution by
+setting the CCW suspend flag on a particular CCW, the channel program execution
+is suspended. In order to resume channel program execution the CIO layer
+provides the ccw_device_resume() routine.
-int ccw_device_resume(struct ccw_device *cdev);
+::
-cdev - ccw_device the resume operation is requested for
+ int ccw_device_resume(struct ccw_device *cdev);
+
+==== ================================================
+cdev ccw_device the resume operation is requested for
+==== ================================================
The ccw_device_resume() function returns:
- 0 - suspended channel program is resumed
--EBUSY - status pending
--ENODEV - cdev invalid or not-operational subchannel
--EINVAL - resume function not applicable
--ENOTCONN - there is no I/O request pending for completion
+========= ==============================================
+ 0 suspended channel program is resumed
+ -EBUSY status pending
+ -ENODEV cdev invalid or not-operational subchannel
+ -EINVAL resume function not applicable
+-ENOTCONN there is no I/O request pending for completion
+========= ==============================================
Usage Notes:
+
Please have a look at the ccw_device_start() usage notes for more details on
suspended channel programs.
@@ -412,22 +454,28 @@ command is provided.
ccw_device_halt() must be called disabled and with the ccw device lock held.
-int ccw_device_halt(struct ccw_device *cdev,
- unsigned long intparm);
+::
-cdev : ccw_device the halt operation is requested for
-intparm : interruption parameter; value is only used if no I/O
- is outstanding, otherwise the intparm associated with
- the I/O request is returned
+ int ccw_device_halt(struct ccw_device *cdev,
+ unsigned long intparm);
-The ccw_device_halt() function returns :
+======= =====================================================
+cdev ccw_device the halt operation is requested for
+intparm interruption parameter; value is only used if no I/O
+ is outstanding, otherwise the intparm associated with
+ the I/O request is returned
+======= =====================================================
- 0 - request successfully initiated
--EBUSY - the device is currently busy, or status pending.
--ENODEV - cdev invalid.
--EINVAL - The device is not operational or the ccw device is not online.
+The ccw_device_halt() function returns:
-Usage Notes :
+======= ==============================================================
+ 0 request successfully initiated
+-EBUSY the device is currently busy, or status pending.
+-ENODEV cdev invalid.
+-EINVAL The device is not operational or the ccw device is not online.
+======= ==============================================================
+
+Usage Notes:
A device driver may write a never-ending channel program by writing a channel
program that at its end loops back to its beginning by means of a transfer in
@@ -438,25 +486,34 @@ can then perform an appropriate action. Prior to interrupt of an outstanding
read to a network device (with or without PCI flag) a ccw_device_halt()
is required to end the pending operation.
-ccw_device_clear() - Terminage I/O Request Processing
+::
+
+ ccw_device_clear() - Terminage I/O Request Processing
In order to terminate all I/O processing at the subchannel, the clear subchannel
(CSCH) command is used. It can be issued via ccw_device_clear().
ccw_device_clear() must be called disabled and with the ccw device lock held.
-int ccw_device_clear(struct ccw_device *cdev, unsigned long intparm);
+::
-cdev: ccw_device the clear operation is requested for
-intparm: interruption parameter (see ccw_device_halt())
+ int ccw_device_clear(struct ccw_device *cdev, unsigned long intparm);
+
+======= ===============================================
+cdev ccw_device the clear operation is requested for
+intparm interruption parameter (see ccw_device_halt())
+======= ===============================================
The ccw_device_clear() function returns:
- 0 - request successfully initiated
--ENODEV - cdev invalid
--EINVAL - The device is not operational or the ccw device is not online.
+======= ==============================================================
+ 0 request successfully initiated
+-ENODEV cdev invalid
+-EINVAL The device is not operational or the ccw device is not online.
+======= ==============================================================
Miscellaneous Support Routines
+------------------------------
This chapter describes various routines to be used in a Linux/390 device
driver programming environment.
@@ -466,7 +523,8 @@ get_ccwdev_lock()
Get the address of the device specific lock. This is then used in
spin_lock() / spin_unlock() calls.
+::
-__u8 ccw_device_get_path_mask(struct ccw_device *cdev);
+ __u8 ccw_device_get_path_mask(struct ccw_device *cdev);
Get the mask of the path currently available for cdev.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
index ed265cf54cde..ad4bc2dbea43 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================
S/390 driver model interfaces
------------------------------
+=============================
1. CCW devices
--------------
@@ -7,13 +8,13 @@ S/390 driver model interfaces
All devices which can be addressed by means of ccws are called 'CCW devices' -
even if they aren't actually driven by ccws.
-All ccw devices are accessed via a subchannel, this is reflected in the
-structures under devices/:
+All ccw devices are accessed via a subchannel, this is reflected in the
+structures under devices/::
-devices/
+ devices/
- system/
- css0/
- - 0.0.0000/0.0.0815/
+ - 0.0.0000/0.0.0815/
- 0.0.0001/0.0.4711/
- 0.0.0002/
- 0.1.0000/0.1.1234/
@@ -35,14 +36,18 @@ be found under bus/ccw/devices/.
All ccw devices export some data via sysfs.
-cutype: The control unit type / model.
+cutype:
+ The control unit type / model.
-devtype: The device type / model, if applicable.
+devtype:
+ The device type / model, if applicable.
-availability: Can be 'good' or 'boxed'; 'no path' or 'no device' for
+availability:
+ Can be 'good' or 'boxed'; 'no path' or 'no device' for
disconnected devices.
-online: An interface to set the device online and offline.
+online:
+ An interface to set the device online and offline.
In the special case of the device being disconnected (see the
notify function under 1.2), piping 0 to online will forcibly delete
the device.
@@ -52,9 +57,11 @@ The device drivers can add entries to export per-device data and interfaces.
There is also some data exported on a per-subchannel basis (see under
bus/css/devices/):
-chpids: Via which chpids the device is connected.
+chpids:
+ Via which chpids the device is connected.
-pimpampom: The path installed, path available and path operational masks.
+pimpampom:
+ The path installed, path available and path operational masks.
There also might be additional data, for example for block devices.
@@ -74,77 +81,93 @@ b. After a. has been performed, if necessary, the device is finally brought up
------------------------------------
The basic struct ccw_device and struct ccw_driver data structures can be found
-under include/asm/ccwdev.h.
+under include/asm/ccwdev.h::
-struct ccw_device {
- spinlock_t *ccwlock;
- struct ccw_device_private *private;
- struct ccw_device_id id;
+ struct ccw_device {
+ spinlock_t *ccwlock;
+ struct ccw_device_private *private;
+ struct ccw_device_id id;
- struct ccw_driver *drv;
- struct device dev;
+ struct ccw_driver *drv;
+ struct device dev;
int online;
void (*handler) (struct ccw_device *dev, unsigned long intparm,
- struct irb *irb);
-};
+ struct irb *irb);
+ };
-struct ccw_driver {
- struct module *owner;
- struct ccw_device_id *ids;
- int (*probe) (struct ccw_device *);
+ struct ccw_driver {
+ struct module *owner;
+ struct ccw_device_id *ids;
+ int (*probe) (struct ccw_device *);
int (*remove) (struct ccw_device *);
int (*set_online) (struct ccw_device *);
int (*set_offline) (struct ccw_device *);
int (*notify) (struct ccw_device *, int);
struct device_driver driver;
char *name;
-};
+ };
The 'private' field contains data needed for internal i/o operation only, and
is not available to the device driver.
Each driver should declare in a MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE into which CU types/models
and/or device types/models it is interested. This information can later be found
-in the struct ccw_device_id fields:
+in the struct ccw_device_id fields::
-struct ccw_device_id {
- __u16 match_flags;
+ struct ccw_device_id {
+ __u16 match_flags;
- __u16 cu_type;
- __u16 dev_type;
- __u8 cu_model;
- __u8 dev_model;
+ __u16 cu_type;
+ __u16 dev_type;
+ __u8 cu_model;
+ __u8 dev_model;
unsigned long driver_info;
-};
+ };
The functions in ccw_driver should be used in the following way:
-probe: This function is called by the device layer for each device the driver
+
+probe:
+ This function is called by the device layer for each device the driver
is interested in. The driver should only allocate private structures
to put in dev->driver_data and create attributes (if needed). Also,
the interrupt handler (see below) should be set here.
-int (*probe) (struct ccw_device *cdev);
+::
-Parameters: cdev - the device to be probed.
+ int (*probe) (struct ccw_device *cdev);
+Parameters:
+ cdev
+ - the device to be probed.
-remove: This function is called by the device layer upon removal of the driver,
+
+remove:
+ This function is called by the device layer upon removal of the driver,
the device or the module. The driver should perform cleanups here.
-int (*remove) (struct ccw_device *cdev);
+::
-Parameters: cdev - the device to be removed.
+ int (*remove) (struct ccw_device *cdev);
+Parameters:
+ cdev
+ - the device to be removed.
-set_online: This function is called by the common I/O layer when the device is
+
+set_online:
+ This function is called by the common I/O layer when the device is
activated via the 'online' attribute. The driver should finally
setup and activate the device here.
-int (*set_online) (struct ccw_device *);
+::
-Parameters: cdev - the device to be activated. The common layer has
+ int (*set_online) (struct ccw_device *);
+
+Parameters:
+ cdev
+ - the device to be activated. The common layer has
verified that the device is not already online.
@@ -152,15 +175,22 @@ set_offline: This function is called by the common I/O layer when the device is
de-activated via the 'online' attribute. The driver should shut
down the device, but not de-allocate its private data.
-int (*set_offline) (struct ccw_device *);
+::
-Parameters: cdev - the device to be deactivated. The common layer has
+ int (*set_offline) (struct ccw_device *);
+
+Parameters:
+ cdev
+ - the device to be deactivated. The common layer has
verified that the device is online.
-notify: This function is called by the common I/O layer for some state changes
+notify:
+ This function is called by the common I/O layer for some state changes
of the device.
+
Signalled to the driver are:
+
* In online state, device detached (CIO_GONE) or last path gone
(CIO_NO_PATH). The driver must return !0 to keep the device; for
return code 0, the device will be deleted as usual (also when no
@@ -173,32 +203,40 @@ notify: This function is called by the common I/O layer for some state changes
return code of the notify function the device driver signals if it
wants the device back: !0 for keeping, 0 to make the device being
removed and re-registered.
-
-int (*notify) (struct ccw_device *, int);
-Parameters: cdev - the device whose state changed.
- event - the event that happened. This can be one of CIO_GONE,
- CIO_NO_PATH or CIO_OPER.
+::
+
+ int (*notify) (struct ccw_device *, int);
+
+Parameters:
+ cdev
+ - the device whose state changed.
+
+ event
+ - the event that happened. This can be one of CIO_GONE,
+ CIO_NO_PATH or CIO_OPER.
The handler field of the struct ccw_device is meant to be set to the interrupt
-handler for the device. In order to accommodate drivers which use several
+handler for the device. In order to accommodate drivers which use several
distinct handlers (e.g. multi subchannel devices), this is a member of ccw_device
instead of ccw_driver.
The handler is registered with the common layer during set_online() processing
before the driver is called, and is deregistered during set_offline() after the
-driver has been called. Also, after registering / before deregistering, path
+driver has been called. Also, after registering / before deregistering, path
grouping resp. disbanding of the path group (if applicable) are performed.
-void (*handler) (struct ccw_device *dev, unsigned long intparm, struct irb *irb);
+::
-Parameters: dev - the device the handler is called for
+ void (*handler) (struct ccw_device *dev, unsigned long intparm, struct irb *irb);
+
+Parameters: dev - the device the handler is called for
intparm - the intparm which allows the device driver to identify
- the i/o the interrupt is associated with, or to recognize
- the interrupt as unsolicited.
- irb - interruption response block which contains the accumulated
- status.
+ the i/o the interrupt is associated with, or to recognize
+ the interrupt as unsolicited.
+ irb - interruption response block which contains the accumulated
+ status.
-The device driver is called from the common ccw_device layer and can retrieve
+The device driver is called from the common ccw_device layer and can retrieve
information about the interrupt from the irb parameter.
@@ -237,23 +275,27 @@ only the logical state and not the physical state, since we cannot track the
latter consistently due to lacking machine support (we don't need to be aware
of it anyway).
-status - Can be 'online' or 'offline'.
+status
+ - Can be 'online' or 'offline'.
Piping 'on' or 'off' sets the chpid logically online/offline.
Piping 'on' to an online chpid triggers path reprobing for all devices
the chpid connects to. This can be used to force the kernel to re-use
a channel path the user knows to be online, but the machine hasn't
created a machine check for.
-type - The physical type of the channel path.
+type
+ - The physical type of the channel path.
-shared - Whether the channel path is shared.
+shared
+ - Whether the channel path is shared.
-cmg - The channel measurement group.
+cmg
+ - The channel measurement group.
3. System devices
-----------------
-3.1 xpram
+3.1 xpram
---------
xpram shows up under devices/system/ as 'xpram'.
@@ -279,9 +321,8 @@ Netiucv connections show up under devices/iucv/ as "netiucv<ifnum>". The interfa
number is assigned sequentially to the connections defined via the 'connection'
attribute.
-user - shows the connection partner.
-
-buffer - maximum buffer size.
- Pipe to it to change buffer size.
-
+user
+ - shows the connection partner.
+buffer
+ - maximum buffer size. Pipe to it to change buffer size.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt b/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt
index d3729585fdb0..1e857575c113 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/monreader.txt
@@ -1,24 +1,26 @@
+=================================================
+Linux API for read access to z/VM Monitor Records
+=================================================
Date : 2004-Nov-26
+
Author: Gerald Schaefer ([email protected])
- Linux API for read access to z/VM Monitor Records
- =================================================
Description
===========
This item delivers a new Linux API in the form of a misc char device that is
usable from user space and allows read access to the z/VM Monitor Records
-collected by the *MONITOR System Service of z/VM.
+collected by the `*MONITOR` System Service of z/VM.
User Requirements
=================
The z/VM guest on which you want to access this API needs to be configured in
-order to allow IUCV connections to the *MONITOR service, i.e. it needs the
-IUCV *MONITOR statement in its user entry. If the monitor DCSS to be used is
+order to allow IUCV connections to the `*MONITOR` service, i.e. it needs the
+IUCV `*MONITOR` statement in its user entry. If the monitor DCSS to be used is
restricted (likely), you also need the NAMESAVE <DCSS NAME> statement.
This item will use the IUCV device driver to access the z/VM services, so you
need a kernel with IUCV support. You also need z/VM version 4.4 or 5.1.
@@ -50,7 +52,9 @@ Your guest virtual storage has to end below the starting address of the DCSS
and you have to specify the "mem=" kernel parameter in your parmfile with a
value greater than the ending address of the DCSS.
-Example: DEF STOR 140M
+Example::
+
+ DEF STOR 140M
This defines 140MB storage size for your guest, the parameter "mem=160M" is
added to the parmfile.
@@ -66,24 +70,27 @@ kernel, the kernel parameter "monreader.mondcss=<DCSS NAME>" can be specified
in the parmfile.
The default name for the DCSS is "MONDCSS" if none is specified. In case that
-there are other users already connected to the *MONITOR service (e.g.
+there are other users already connected to the `*MONITOR` service (e.g.
Performance Toolkit), the monitor DCSS is already defined and you have to use
the same DCSS. The CP command Q MONITOR (Class E privileged) shows the name
of the monitor DCSS, if already defined, and the users connected to the
-*MONITOR service.
+`*MONITOR` service.
Refer to the "z/VM Performance" book (SC24-6109-00) on how to create a monitor
DCSS if your z/VM doesn't have one already, you need Class E privileges to
define and save a DCSS.
Example:
--------
-modprobe monreader mondcss=MYDCSS
+
+::
+
+ modprobe monreader mondcss=MYDCSS
This loads the module and sets the DCSS name to "MYDCSS".
NOTE:
-----
-This API provides no interface to control the *MONITOR service, e.g. specify
+This API provides no interface to control the `*MONITOR` service, e.g. specify
which data should be collected. This can be done by the CP command MONITOR
(Class E privileged), see "CP Command and Utility Reference".
@@ -98,6 +105,7 @@ If your distribution does not support udev, a device node will not be created
automatically and you have to create it manually after loading the module.
Therefore you need to know the major and minor numbers of the device. These
numbers can be found in /sys/class/misc/monreader/dev.
+
Typing cat /sys/class/misc/monreader/dev will give an output of the form
<major>:<minor>. The device node can be created via the mknod command, enter
mknod <name> c <major> <minor>, where <name> is the name of the device node
@@ -105,10 +113,13 @@ to be created.
Example:
--------
-# modprobe monreader
-# cat /sys/class/misc/monreader/dev
-10:63
-# mknod /dev/monreader c 10 63
+
+::
+
+ # modprobe monreader
+ # cat /sys/class/misc/monreader/dev
+ 10:63
+ # mknod /dev/monreader c 10 63
This loads the module with the default monitor DCSS (MONDCSS) and creates a
device node.
@@ -133,20 +144,21 @@ last byte of data. The start address is needed to handle "end-of-frame" records
correctly (domain 1, record 13), i.e. it can be used to determine the record
start offset relative to a 4K page (frame) boundary.
-See "Appendix A: *MONITOR" in the "z/VM Performance" document for a description
+See "Appendix A: `*MONITOR`" in the "z/VM Performance" document for a description
of the monitor control element layout. The layout of the monitor records can
be found here (z/VM 5.1): http://www.vm.ibm.com/pubs/mon510/index.html
-The layout of the data stream provided by the monreader device is as follows:
-...
-<0 byte read>
-<first MCE> \
-<first set of records> |
-... |- data set
-<last MCE> |
-<last set of records> /
-<0 byte read>
-...
+The layout of the data stream provided by the monreader device is as follows::
+
+ ...
+ <0 byte read>
+ <first MCE> \
+ <first set of records> |
+ ... |- data set
+ <last MCE> |
+ <last set of records> /
+ <0 byte read>
+ ...
There may be more than one combination of MCE and corresponding record set
within one data set and the end of each data set is indicated by a successful
@@ -165,15 +177,19 @@ As with most char devices, error conditions are indicated by returning a
negative value for the number of bytes read. In this case, the errno variable
indicates the error condition:
-EIO: reply failed, read data is invalid and the application
+EIO:
+ reply failed, read data is invalid and the application
should discard the data read since the last successful read with 0 size.
-EFAULT: copy_to_user failed, read data is invalid and the application should
- discard the data read since the last successful read with 0 size.
-EAGAIN: occurs on a non-blocking read if there is no data available at the
- moment. There is no data missing or corrupted, just try again or rather
- use polling for non-blocking reads.
-EOVERFLOW: message limit reached, the data read since the last successful
- read with 0 size is valid but subsequent records may be missing.
+EFAULT:
+ copy_to_user failed, read data is invalid and the application should
+ discard the data read since the last successful read with 0 size.
+EAGAIN:
+ occurs on a non-blocking read if there is no data available at the
+ moment. There is no data missing or corrupted, just try again or rather
+ use polling for non-blocking reads.
+EOVERFLOW:
+ message limit reached, the data read since the last successful
+ read with 0 size is valid but subsequent records may be missing.
In the last case (EOVERFLOW) there may be missing data, in the first two cases
(EIO, EFAULT) there will be missing data. It's up to the application if it will
@@ -183,7 +199,7 @@ Open:
-----
Only one user is allowed to open the char device. If it is already in use, the
open function will fail (return a negative value) and set errno to EBUSY.
-The open function may also fail if an IUCV connection to the *MONITOR service
+The open function may also fail if an IUCV connection to the `*MONITOR` service
cannot be established. In this case errno will be set to EIO and an error
message with an IPUSER SEVER code will be printed into syslog. The IPUSER SEVER
codes are described in the "z/VM Performance" book, Appendix A.
@@ -194,4 +210,3 @@ As soon as the device is opened, incoming messages will be accepted and they
will account for the message limit, i.e. opening the device without reading
from it will provoke the "message limit reached" error (EOVERFLOW error code)
eventually.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/qeth.txt b/Documentation/s390/qeth.txt
index aa06fcf5f8c2..f02fdaa68de0 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/qeth.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/qeth.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
+=============================
IBM s390 QDIO Ethernet Driver
+=============================
OSA and HiperSockets Bridge Port Support
+========================================
Uevents
+-------
To generate the events the device must be assigned a role of either
a primary or a secondary Bridge Port. For more information, see
@@ -13,12 +17,15 @@ of some configured Bridge Port device on the channel changes, a udev
event with ACTION=CHANGE is emitted on behalf of the corresponding
ccwgroup device. The event has the following attributes:
-BRIDGEPORT=statechange - indicates that the Bridge Port device changed
+BRIDGEPORT=statechange
+ indicates that the Bridge Port device changed
its state.
-ROLE={primary|secondary|none} - the role assigned to the port.
+ROLE={primary|secondary|none}
+ the role assigned to the port.
-STATE={active|standby|inactive} - the newly assumed state of the port.
+STATE={active|standby|inactive}
+ the newly assumed state of the port.
When run on HiperSockets Bridge Capable Port hardware with host address
notifications enabled, a udev event with ACTION=CHANGE is emitted.
@@ -26,25 +33,32 @@ It is emitted on behalf of the corresponding ccwgroup device when a host
or a VLAN is registered or unregistered on the network served by the device.
The event has the following attributes:
-BRIDGEDHOST={reset|register|deregister|abort} - host address
+BRIDGEDHOST={reset|register|deregister|abort}
+ host address
notifications are started afresh, a new host or VLAN is registered or
deregistered on the Bridge Port HiperSockets channel, or address
notifications are aborted.
-VLAN=numeric-vlan-id - VLAN ID on which the event occurred. Not included
+VLAN=numeric-vlan-id
+ VLAN ID on which the event occurred. Not included
if no VLAN is involved in the event.
-MAC=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx - MAC address of the host that is being registered
+MAC=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
+ MAC address of the host that is being registered
or deregistered from the HiperSockets channel. Not reported if the
event reports the creation or destruction of a VLAN.
-NTOK_BUSID=x.y.zzzz - device bus ID (CSSID, SSID and device number).
+NTOK_BUSID=x.y.zzzz
+ device bus ID (CSSID, SSID and device number).
-NTOK_IID=xx - device IID.
+NTOK_IID=xx
+ device IID.
-NTOK_CHPID=xx - device CHPID.
+NTOK_CHPID=xx
+ device CHPID.
-NTOK_CHID=xxxx - device channel ID.
+NTOK_CHID=xxxx
+ device channel ID.
-Note that the NTOK_* attributes refer to devices other than the one
+Note that the `NTOK_*` attributes refer to devices other than the one
connected to the system on which the OS is running.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
index 61329fd62e89..549dba50fc3b 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
@@ -1,34 +1,38 @@
+==================
S390 Debug Feature
==================
-files: arch/s390/kernel/debug.c
- arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
+files:
+ - arch/s390/kernel/debug.c
+ - arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
Description:
------------
-The goal of this feature is to provide a kernel debug logging API
-where log records can be stored efficiently in memory, where each component
+The goal of this feature is to provide a kernel debug logging API
+where log records can be stored efficiently in memory, where each component
(e.g. device drivers) can have one separate debug log.
One purpose of this is to inspect the debug logs after a production system crash
in order to analyze the reason for the crash.
+
If the system still runs but only a subcomponent which uses dbf fails,
it is possible to look at the debug logs on a live system via the Linux
debugfs filesystem.
+
The debug feature may also very useful for kernel and driver development.
Design:
-------
-Kernel components (e.g. device drivers) can register themselves at the debug
-feature with the function call debug_register(). This function initializes a
-debug log for the caller. For each debug log exists a number of debug areas
+Kernel components (e.g. device drivers) can register themselves at the debug
+feature with the function call debug_register(). This function initializes a
+debug log for the caller. For each debug log exists a number of debug areas
where exactly one is active at one time. Each debug area consists of contiguous
pages in memory. In the debug areas there are stored debug entries (log records)
-which are written by event- and exception-calls.
+which are written by event- and exception-calls.
An event-call writes the specified debug entry to the active debug
-area and updates the log pointer for the active area. If the end
-of the active debug area is reached, a wrap around is done (ring buffer)
-and the next debug entry will be written at the beginning of the active
+area and updates the log pointer for the active area. If the end
+of the active debug area is reached, a wrap around is done (ring buffer)
+and the next debug entry will be written at the beginning of the active
debug area.
An exception-call writes the specified debug entry to the log and
@@ -37,7 +41,7 @@ that the records which describe the origin of the exception are not
overwritten when a wrap around for the current area occurs.
The debug areas themselves are also ordered in form of a ring buffer.
-When an exception is thrown in the last debug area, the following debug
+When an exception is thrown in the last debug area, the following debug
entries are then written again in the very first area.
There are three versions for the event- and exception-calls: One for
@@ -76,22 +80,25 @@ through writing a number string "x" to the 'level' debugfs file which is
provided for every debug log. Debugging can be switched off completely
by using "-" on the 'level' debugfs file.
-Example:
+Example::
-> echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
+ > echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
It is also possible to deactivate the debug feature globally for every
debug log. You can change the behavior using 2 sysctl parameters in
/proc/sys/s390dbf:
+
There are currently 2 possible triggers, which stop the debug feature
globally. The first possibility is to use the "debug_active" sysctl. If
set to 1 the debug feature is running. If "debug_active" is set to 0 the
debug feature is turned off.
+
The second trigger which stops the debug feature is a kernel oops.
That prevents the debug feature from overwriting debug information that
happened before the oops. After an oops you can reactivate the debug feature
by piping 1 to /proc/sys/s390dbf/debug_active. Nevertheless, its not
suggested to use an oopsed kernel in a production environment.
+
If you want to disallow the deactivation of the debug feature, you can use
the "debug_stoppable" sysctl. If you set "debug_stoppable" to 0 the debug
feature cannot be stopped. If the debug feature is already stopped, it
@@ -101,219 +108,322 @@ Kernel Interfaces:
------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_info_t *debug_register(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
- int buf_size);
-Parameter: name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
- pages: number of pages, which will be allocated per area
- nr_areas: number of debug areas
- buf_size: size of data area in each debug entry
+::
-Return Value: Handle for generated debug area
- NULL if register failed
+ debug_info_t *debug_register(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
+ int buf_size);
-Description: Allocates memory for a debug log
- Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+Parameter:
+ name:
+ Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
+ pages:
+ Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
+ nr_areas:
+ Number of debug areas
+ buf_size:
+ Size of data area in each debug entry
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_info_t *debug_register_mode(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
- int buf_size, mode_t mode, uid_t uid,
- gid_t gid);
+Return Value:
+ Handle for generated debug area
-Parameter: name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
- pages: Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
- nr_areas: Number of debug areas
- buf_size: Size of data area in each debug entry
- mode: File mode for debugfs files. E.g. S_IRWXUGO
- uid: User ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
- supported.
- gid: Group ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
- supported.
-
-Return Value: Handle for generated debug area
- NULL if register failed
+ NULL if register failed
Description: Allocates memory for a debug log
Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+::
+
+ debug_info_t *debug_register_mode(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
+ int buf_size, mode_t mode, uid_t uid,
+ gid_t gid);
+
+Parameter:
+ name:
+ Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
+ pages:
+ Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
+ nr_areas:
+ Number of debug areas
+ buf_size:
+ Size of data area in each debug entry
+ mode:
+ File mode for debugfs files. E.g. S_IRWXUGO
+ uid:
+ User ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
+ supported.
+ gid:
+ Group ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
+ supported.
+
+Return Value:
+ Handle for generated debug area
+
+ NULL if register failed
+
+Description:
+ Allocates memory for a debug log
+ Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-void debug_unregister (debug_info_t * id);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+::
-Return Value: none
+ void debug_unregister (debug_info_t * id);
-Description: frees memory for a debug log and removes all registered debug
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+
+Return Value:
+ none
+
+Description:
+ frees memory for a debug log and removes all registered debug
views.
- Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+
+ Must not be called within an interrupt handler
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-void debug_set_level (debug_info_t * id, int new_level);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- new_level: new debug level
+::
+
+ void debug_set_level (debug_info_t * id, int new_level);
+
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ new_level: new debug level
-Return Value: none
+Return Value:
+ none
-Description: Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid.
+Description:
+ Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-bool debug_level_enabled (debug_info_t * id, int level);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
+::
+
+ bool debug_level_enabled (debug_info_t * id, int level);
+
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
-Return Value: True if level is less or equal to the current debug level.
+Return Value:
+ True if level is less or equal to the current debug level.
-Description: Returns true if debug events for the specified level would be
+Description:
+ Returns true if debug events for the specified level would be
logged. Otherwise returns false.
+
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-void debug_stop_all(void);
-Parameter: none
+::
+
+ void debug_stop_all(void);
+
+Parameter:
+ none
-Return Value: none
+Return Value:
+ none
-Description: stops the debug feature if stopping is allowed. Currently
- used in case of a kernel oops.
+Description:
+ stops the debug feature if stopping is allowed. Currently
+ used in case of a kernel oops.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_event (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
- int length);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: pointer to data for debug entry
- length: length of data in bytes
+::
+
+ debug_entry_t* debug_event (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
+ int length);
+
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
+ data:
+ pointer to data for debug entry
+ length:
+ length of data in bytes
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Return Value:
+ Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level)
+Description:
+ writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
+ debug level)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_int_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned int data);
-debug_entry_t* debug_long_event(debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned long data);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: integer value for debug entry
+::
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+ debug_entry_t* debug_int_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ unsigned int data);
+ debug_entry_t* debug_long_event(debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ unsigned long data);
-Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level)
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
+ data:
+ integer value for debug entry
+
+Return Value:
+ Address of written debug entry
+
+Description:
+ writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
+ debug level)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_text_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- const char* data);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: string for debug entry
+::
+
+ debug_entry_t* debug_text_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ const char* data);
+
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
+ data:
+ string for debug entry
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Return Value:
+ Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
- (if level <= actual debug level)
+Description:
+ writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
+ (if level <= actual debug level)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_sprintf_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- char* string,...);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- string: format string for debug entry
- ...: varargs used as in sprintf()
+::
+
+ debug_entry_t* debug_sprintf_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ char* string,...);
+
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
+ string:
+ format string for debug entry
+ ...:
+ varargs used as in sprintf()
Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
- active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level).
- floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
+Description:
+ writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
+ active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level).
+ floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_exception (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
- int length);
+::
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: pointer to data for debug entry
- length: length of data in bytes
+ debug_entry_t* debug_exception (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
+ int length);
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Parameter:
+ id:
+ handle for debug log
+ level:
+ debug level
+ data:
+ pointer to data for debug entry
+ length:
+ length of data in bytes
-Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level) and switches to next debug area
+Return Value:
+ Address of written debug entry
+
+Description:
+ writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
+ debug level) and switches to next debug area
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_int_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned int data);
-debug_entry_t* debug_long_exception(debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned long data);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: integer value for debug entry
+::
+ debug_entry_t* debug_int_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ unsigned int data);
+ debug_entry_t* debug_long_exception(debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ unsigned long data);
+
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ level: debug level
+ data: integer value for debug entry
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level) and switches to next debug area
+Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
+ debug level) and switches to next debug area
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-debug_entry_t* debug_text_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- const char* data);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: string for debug entry
+debug_entry_t* debug_text_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
+ const char* data);
+
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ level: debug level
+ data: string for debug entry
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
- (if level <= actual debug level) and switches to next debug
- area
+Description: writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
+ (if level <= actual debug level) and switches to next debug
+ area
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
debug_entry_t* debug_sprintf_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- char* string,...);
+ char* string,...);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- string: format string for debug entry
- ...: varargs used as in sprintf()
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ level: debug level
+ string: format string for debug entry
+ ...: varargs used as in sprintf()
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
+Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-Description: writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
- active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level) and
- switches to next debug area.
- floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
+Description: writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
+ active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level) and
+ switches to next debug area.
+ floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
int debug_register_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- view: pointer to debug view struct
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ view: pointer to debug view struct
-Return Value: 0 : ok
- < 0: Error
+Return Value: 0 : ok
+ < 0: Error
Description: registers new debug view and creates debugfs dir entry
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-int debug_unregister_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view);
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- view: pointer to debug view struct
+int debug_unregister_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view);
-Return Value: 0 : ok
- < 0: Error
+Parameter: id: handle for debug log
+ view: pointer to debug view struct
+
+Return Value: 0 : ok
+ < 0: Error
Description: unregisters debug view and removes debugfs dir entry
@@ -323,113 +433,117 @@ Predefined views:
-----------------
extern struct debug_view debug_hex_ascii_view;
+
extern struct debug_view debug_raw_view;
+
extern struct debug_view debug_sprintf_view;
Examples
--------
-/*
- * hex_ascii- + raw-view Example
- */
+::
-#include <linux/init.h>
-#include <asm/debug.h>
+ /*
+ * hex_ascii- + raw-view Example
+ */
-static debug_info_t* debug_info;
+ #include <linux/init.h>
+ #include <asm/debug.h>
-static int init(void)
-{
- /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and 4 byte data field */
+ static debug_info_t* debug_info;
- debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, 4 );
- debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_hex_ascii_view);
- debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_raw_view);
+ static int init(void)
+ {
+ /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and 4 byte data field */
- debug_text_event(debug_info, 4 , "one ");
- debug_int_exception(debug_info, 4, 4711);
- debug_event(debug_info, 3, &debug_info, 4);
+ debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, 4 );
+ debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_hex_ascii_view);
+ debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_raw_view);
- return 0;
-}
+ debug_text_event(debug_info, 4 , "one ");
+ debug_int_exception(debug_info, 4, 4711);
+ debug_event(debug_info, 3, &debug_info, 4);
-static void cleanup(void)
-{
- debug_unregister (debug_info);
-}
+ return 0;
+ }
-module_init(init);
-module_exit(cleanup);
+ static void cleanup(void)
+ {
+ debug_unregister (debug_info);
+ }
+
+ module_init(init);
+ module_exit(cleanup);
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-/*
- * sprintf-view Example
- */
+::
-#include <linux/init.h>
-#include <asm/debug.h>
+ /*
+ * sprintf-view Example
+ */
-static debug_info_t* debug_info;
+ #include <linux/init.h>
+ #include <asm/debug.h>
-static int init(void)
-{
- /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and data field for */
- /* format string pointer + 2 varargs (= 3 * sizeof(long)) */
+ static debug_info_t* debug_info;
- debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, sizeof(long) * 3);
- debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_sprintf_view);
+ static int init(void)
+ {
+ /* register 4 debug areas with one page each and data field for */
+ /* format string pointer + 2 varargs (= 3 * sizeof(long)) */
- debug_sprintf_event(debug_info, 2 , "first event in %s:%i\n",__FILE__,__LINE__);
- debug_sprintf_exception(debug_info, 1, "pointer to debug info: %p\n",&debug_info);
+ debug_info = debug_register ("test", 1, 4, sizeof(long) * 3);
+ debug_register_view(debug_info,&debug_sprintf_view);
- return 0;
-}
+ debug_sprintf_event(debug_info, 2 , "first event in %s:%i\n",__FILE__,__LINE__);
+ debug_sprintf_exception(debug_info, 1, "pointer to debug info: %p\n",&debug_info);
-static void cleanup(void)
-{
- debug_unregister (debug_info);
-}
-
-module_init(init);
-module_exit(cleanup);
+ return 0;
+ }
+ static void cleanup(void)
+ {
+ debug_unregister (debug_info);
+ }
+ module_init(init);
+ module_exit(cleanup);
Debugfs Interface
-----------------
-Views to the debug logs can be investigated through reading the corresponding
+-----------------
+Views to the debug logs can be investigated through reading the corresponding
debugfs-files:
-Example:
+Example::
-> ls /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd
-flush hex_ascii level pages raw
-> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/hex_ascii | sort -k2,2 -s
-00 00974733272:680099 2 - 02 0006ad7e 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
-00 00974733272:682210 2 - 02 0006ade6 46 52 45 45 | FREE
-00 00974733272:682213 2 - 02 0006adf6 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
-00 00974733272:682281 1 * 02 0006ab08 41 4c 4c 43 | EXCP
-01 00974733272:682284 2 - 02 0006ab16 45 43 4b 44 | ECKD
-01 00974733272:682287 2 - 02 0006ab28 00 00 00 04 | ....
-01 00974733272:682289 2 - 02 0006ab3e 00 00 00 20 | ...
-01 00974733272:682297 2 - 02 0006ad7e 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
-01 00974733272:684384 2 - 00 0006ade6 46 52 45 45 | FREE
-01 00974733272:684388 2 - 00 0006adf6 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
+ > ls /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd
+ flush hex_ascii level pages raw
+ > cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/hex_ascii | sort -k2,2 -s
+ 00 00974733272:680099 2 - 02 0006ad7e 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
+ 00 00974733272:682210 2 - 02 0006ade6 46 52 45 45 | FREE
+ 00 00974733272:682213 2 - 02 0006adf6 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
+ 00 00974733272:682281 1 * 02 0006ab08 41 4c 4c 43 | EXCP
+ 01 00974733272:682284 2 - 02 0006ab16 45 43 4b 44 | ECKD
+ 01 00974733272:682287 2 - 02 0006ab28 00 00 00 04 | ....
+ 01 00974733272:682289 2 - 02 0006ab3e 00 00 00 20 | ...
+ 01 00974733272:682297 2 - 02 0006ad7e 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
+ 01 00974733272:684384 2 - 00 0006ade6 46 52 45 45 | FREE
+ 01 00974733272:684388 2 - 00 0006adf6 07 ea 4a 90 | ....
See section about predefined views for explanation of the above output!
Changing the debug level
------------------------
-Example:
+Example::
-> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
-3
-> echo "5" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
-> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
-5
+ > cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
+ 3
+ > echo "5" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
+ > cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level
+ 5
Flushing debug areas
--------------------
@@ -439,11 +553,13 @@ are flushed.
Examples:
-1. Flush debug area 0:
-> echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush
+1. Flush debug area 0::
-2. Flush all debug areas:
-> echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush
+ > echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush
+
+2. Flush all debug areas::
+
+ > echo "-" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/flush
Changing the size of debug areas
------------------------------------
@@ -453,23 +569,27 @@ also flush the debug areas.
Example:
-Define 4 pages for the debug areas of debug feature "dasd":
-> echo "4" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/pages
+Define 4 pages for the debug areas of debug feature "dasd"::
+
+ > echo "4" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/pages
Stooping the debug feature
--------------------------
Example:
-1. Check if stopping is allowed
-> cat /proc/sys/s390dbf/debug_stoppable
-2. Stop debug feature
-> echo 0 > /proc/sys/s390dbf/debug_active
+1. Check if stopping is allowed::
+
+ > cat /proc/sys/s390dbf/debug_stoppable
+
+2. Stop debug feature::
+
+ > echo 0 > /proc/sys/s390dbf/debug_active
lcrash Interface
----------------
It is planned that the dump analysis tool lcrash gets an additional command
-'s390dbf' to display all the debug logs. With this tool it will be possible
-to investigate the debug logs on a live system and with a memory dump after
+'s390dbf' to display all the debug logs. With this tool it will be possible
+to investigate the debug logs on a live system and with a memory dump after
a system crash.
Investigating raw memory
@@ -494,32 +614,35 @@ order to see the debug entries well formatted.
Predefined Views
----------------
-There are three predefined views: hex_ascii, raw and sprintf.
-The hex_ascii view shows the data field in hex and ascii representation
-(e.g. '45 43 4b 44 | ECKD').
+There are three predefined views: hex_ascii, raw and sprintf.
+The hex_ascii view shows the data field in hex and ascii representation
+(e.g. '45 43 4b 44 | ECKD').
The raw view returns a bytestream as the debug areas are stored in memory.
The sprintf view formats the debug entries in the same way as the sprintf
function would do. The sprintf event/exception functions write to the
-debug entry a pointer to the format string (size = sizeof(long))
-and for each vararg a long value. So e.g. for a debug entry with a format
-string plus two varargs one would need to allocate a (3 * sizeof(long))
+debug entry a pointer to the format string (size = sizeof(long))
+and for each vararg a long value. So e.g. for a debug entry with a format
+string plus two varargs one would need to allocate a (3 * sizeof(long))
byte data area in the debug_register() function.
-IMPORTANT: Using "%s" in sprintf event functions is dangerous. You can only
-use "%s" in the sprintf event functions, if the memory for the passed string is
-available as long as the debug feature exists. The reason behind this is that
-due to performance considerations only a pointer to the string is stored in
-the debug feature. If you log a string that is freed afterwards, you will get
-an OOPS when inspecting the debug feature, because then the debug feature will
-access the already freed memory.
+IMPORTANT:
+ Using "%s" in sprintf event functions is dangerous. You can only
+ use "%s" in the sprintf event functions, if the memory for the passed string
+ is available as long as the debug feature exists. The reason behind this is
+ that due to performance considerations only a pointer to the string is stored
+ in the debug feature. If you log a string that is freed afterwards, you will
+ get an OOPS when inspecting the debug feature, because then the debug feature
+ will access the already freed memory.
-NOTE: If using the sprintf view do NOT use other event/exception functions
-than the sprintf-event and -exception functions.
+NOTE:
+ If using the sprintf view do NOT use other event/exception functions
+ than the sprintf-event and -exception functions.
The format of the hex_ascii and sprintf view is as follows:
+
- Number of area
-- Timestamp (formatted as seconds and microseconds since 00:00:00 Coordinated
+- Timestamp (formatted as seconds and microseconds since 00:00:00 Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), January 1, 1970)
- level of debug entry
- Exception flag (* = Exception)
@@ -528,140 +651,144 @@ The format of the hex_ascii and sprintf view is as follows:
- data field
The format of the raw view is:
+
- Header as described in debug.h
-- datafield
+- datafield
-A typical line of the hex_ascii view will look like the following (first line
+A typical line of the hex_ascii view will look like the following (first line
is only for explanation and will not be displayed when 'cating' the view):
area time level exception cpu caller data (hex + ascii)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-00 00964419409:440690 1 - 00 88023fe
+00 00964419409:440690 1 - 00 88023fe
Defining views
--------------
Views are specified with the 'debug_view' structure. There are defined
-callback functions which are used for reading and writing the debugfs files:
+callback functions which are used for reading and writing the debugfs files::
-struct debug_view {
- char name[DEBUG_MAX_PROCF_LEN];
- debug_prolog_proc_t* prolog_proc;
- debug_header_proc_t* header_proc;
- debug_format_proc_t* format_proc;
- debug_input_proc_t* input_proc;
+ struct debug_view {
+ char name[DEBUG_MAX_PROCF_LEN];
+ debug_prolog_proc_t* prolog_proc;
+ debug_header_proc_t* header_proc;
+ debug_format_proc_t* format_proc;
+ debug_input_proc_t* input_proc;
void* private_data;
-};
+ };
-where
+where::
-typedef int (debug_header_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
- struct debug_view* view,
- int area,
- debug_entry_t* entry,
- char* out_buf);
+ typedef int (debug_header_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
+ struct debug_view* view,
+ int area,
+ debug_entry_t* entry,
+ char* out_buf);
-typedef int (debug_format_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
- struct debug_view* view, char* out_buf,
- const char* in_buf);
-typedef int (debug_prolog_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
- struct debug_view* view,
- char* out_buf);
-typedef int (debug_input_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
- struct debug_view* view,
- struct file* file, const char* user_buf,
- size_t in_buf_size, loff_t* offset);
+ typedef int (debug_format_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
+ struct debug_view* view, char* out_buf,
+ const char* in_buf);
+ typedef int (debug_prolog_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
+ struct debug_view* view,
+ char* out_buf);
+ typedef int (debug_input_proc_t) (debug_info_t* id,
+ struct debug_view* view,
+ struct file* file, const char* user_buf,
+ size_t in_buf_size, loff_t* offset);
The "private_data" member can be used as pointer to view specific data.
It is not used by the debug feature itself.
-The output when reading a debugfs file is structured like this:
+The output when reading a debugfs file is structured like this::
-"prolog_proc output"
+ "prolog_proc output"
-"header_proc output 1" "format_proc output 1"
-"header_proc output 2" "format_proc output 2"
-"header_proc output 3" "format_proc output 3"
-...
+ "header_proc output 1" "format_proc output 1"
+ "header_proc output 2" "format_proc output 2"
+ "header_proc output 3" "format_proc output 3"
+ ...
When a view is read from the debugfs, the Debug Feature calls the
'prolog_proc' once for writing the prolog.
-Then 'header_proc' and 'format_proc' are called for each
+Then 'header_proc' and 'format_proc' are called for each
existing debug entry.
-The input_proc can be used to implement functionality when it is written to
+The input_proc can be used to implement functionality when it is written to
the view (e.g. like with 'echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/dasd/level).
For header_proc there can be used the default function
debug_dflt_header_fn() which is defined in debug.h.
and which produces the same header output as the predefined views.
-E.g:
-00 00964419409:440761 2 - 00 88023ec
+E.g::
+
+ 00 00964419409:440761 2 - 00 88023ec
In order to see how to use the callback functions check the implementation
of the default views!
-Example
+Example::
-#include <asm/debug.h>
+ #include <asm/debug.h>
-#define UNKNOWNSTR "data: %08x"
+ #define UNKNOWNSTR "data: %08x"
-const char* messages[] =
-{"This error...........\n",
- "That error...........\n",
- "Problem..............\n",
- "Something went wrong.\n",
- "Everything ok........\n",
- NULL
-};
+ const char* messages[] =
+ {"This error...........\n",
+ "That error...........\n",
+ "Problem..............\n",
+ "Something went wrong.\n",
+ "Everything ok........\n",
+ NULL
+ };
-static int debug_test_format_fn(
- debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view,
- char *out_buf, const char *in_buf
-)
-{
- int i, rc = 0;
+ static int debug_test_format_fn(
+ debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view,
+ char *out_buf, const char *in_buf
+ )
+ {
+ int i, rc = 0;
- if(id->buf_size >= 4) {
- int msg_nr = *((int*)in_buf);
- if(msg_nr < sizeof(messages)/sizeof(char*) - 1)
- rc += sprintf(out_buf, "%s", messages[msg_nr]);
- else
- rc += sprintf(out_buf, UNKNOWNSTR, msg_nr);
+ if(id->buf_size >= 4) {
+ int msg_nr = *((int*)in_buf);
+ if(msg_nr < sizeof(messages)/sizeof(char*) - 1)
+ rc += sprintf(out_buf, "%s", messages[msg_nr]);
+ else
+ rc += sprintf(out_buf, UNKNOWNSTR, msg_nr);
+ }
+ out:
+ return rc;
}
- out:
- return rc;
-}
-struct debug_view debug_test_view = {
- "myview", /* name of view */
- NULL, /* no prolog */
- &debug_dflt_header_fn, /* default header for each entry */
- &debug_test_format_fn, /* our own format function */
- NULL, /* no input function */
- NULL /* no private data */
-};
+ struct debug_view debug_test_view = {
+ "myview", /* name of view */
+ NULL, /* no prolog */
+ &debug_dflt_header_fn, /* default header for each entry */
+ &debug_test_format_fn, /* our own format function */
+ NULL, /* no input function */
+ NULL /* no private data */
+ };
-=====
test:
=====
-debug_info_t *debug_info;
-...
-debug_info = debug_register ("test", 0, 4, 4 ));
-debug_register_view(debug_info, &debug_test_view);
-for(i = 0; i < 10; i ++) debug_int_event(debug_info, 1, i);
-> cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/test/myview
-00 00964419734:611402 1 - 00 88042ca This error...........
-00 00964419734:611405 1 - 00 88042ca That error...........
-00 00964419734:611408 1 - 00 88042ca Problem..............
-00 00964419734:611411 1 - 00 88042ca Something went wrong.
-00 00964419734:611414 1 - 00 88042ca Everything ok........
-00 00964419734:611417 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000005
-00 00964419734:611419 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000006
-00 00964419734:611422 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000007
-00 00964419734:611425 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000008
-00 00964419734:611428 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000009
+::
+
+ debug_info_t *debug_info;
+ ...
+ debug_info = debug_register ("test", 0, 4, 4 ));
+ debug_register_view(debug_info, &debug_test_view);
+ for(i = 0; i < 10; i ++) debug_int_event(debug_info, 1, i);
+
+ > cat /sys/kernel/debug/s390dbf/test/myview
+ 00 00964419734:611402 1 - 00 88042ca This error...........
+ 00 00964419734:611405 1 - 00 88042ca That error...........
+ 00 00964419734:611408 1 - 00 88042ca Problem..............
+ 00 00964419734:611411 1 - 00 88042ca Something went wrong.
+ 00 00964419734:611414 1 - 00 88042ca Everything ok........
+ 00 00964419734:611417 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000005
+ 00 00964419734:611419 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000006
+ 00 00964419734:611422 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000007
+ 00 00964419734:611425 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000008
+ 00 00964419734:611428 1 - 00 88042ca data: 00000009
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt b/Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt
index 65167cfe4485..b5c51f7c748d 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/vfio-ap.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-Introduction:
+===============================
+Adjunct Processor (AP) facility
+===============================
+
+
+Introduction
============
The Adjunct Processor (AP) facility is an IBM Z cryptographic facility comprised
of three AP instructions and from 1 up to 256 PCIe cryptographic adapter cards.
@@ -11,7 +16,7 @@ framework. This implementation relies considerably on the s390 virtualization
facilities which do most of the hard work of providing direct access to AP
devices.
-AP Architectural Overview:
+AP Architectural Overview
=========================
To facilitate the comprehension of the design, let's start with some
definitions:
@@ -31,13 +36,13 @@ definitions:
in the LPAR, the AP bus detects the AP adapter cards assigned to the LPAR and
creates a sysfs device for each assigned adapter. For example, if AP adapters
4 and 10 (0x0a) are assigned to the LPAR, the AP bus will create the following
- sysfs device entries:
+ sysfs device entries::
/sys/devices/ap/card04
/sys/devices/ap/card0a
Symbolic links to these devices will also be created in the AP bus devices
- sub-directory:
+ sub-directory::
/sys/bus/ap/devices/[card04]
/sys/bus/ap/devices/[card04]
@@ -84,7 +89,7 @@ definitions:
the cross product of the AP adapter and usage domain numbers detected when the
AP bus module is loaded. For example, if adapters 4 and 10 (0x0a) and usage
domains 6 and 71 (0x47) are assigned to the LPAR, the AP bus will create the
- following sysfs entries:
+ following sysfs entries::
/sys/devices/ap/card04/04.0006
/sys/devices/ap/card04/04.0047
@@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ definitions:
/sys/devices/ap/card0a/0a.0047
The following symbolic links to these devices will be created in the AP bus
- devices subdirectory:
+ devices subdirectory::
/sys/bus/ap/devices/[04.0006]
/sys/bus/ap/devices/[04.0047]
@@ -112,7 +117,7 @@ definitions:
domain that is not one of the usage domains, but the modified domain
must be one of the control domains.
-AP and SIE:
+AP and SIE
==========
Let's now take a look at how AP instructions executed on a guest are interpreted
by the hardware.
@@ -153,7 +158,7 @@ and 2 and usage domains 5 and 6 are assigned to a guest, the APQNs (1,5), (1,6),
The APQNs can provide secure key functionality - i.e., a private key is stored
on the adapter card for each of its domains - so each APQN must be assigned to
-at most one guest or to the linux host.
+at most one guest or to the linux host::
Example 1: Valid configuration:
------------------------------
@@ -181,8 +186,8 @@ at most one guest or to the linux host.
This is an invalid configuration because both guests have access to
APQN (1,6).
-The Design:
-===========
+The Design
+==========
The design introduces three new objects:
1. AP matrix device
@@ -205,43 +210,43 @@ The VFIO AP (vfio_ap) device driver serves the following purposes:
Reserve APQNs for exclusive use of KVM guests
---------------------------------------------
The following block diagram illustrates the mechanism by which APQNs are
-reserved:
+reserved::
- +------------------+
- 7 remove | |
- +--------------------> cex4queue driver |
- | | |
- | +------------------+
- |
- |
- | +------------------+ +-----------------+
- | 5 register driver | | 3 create | |
- | +----------------> Device core +----------> matrix device |
- | | | | | |
- | | +--------^---------+ +-----------------+
- | | |
- | | +-------------------+
- | | +-----------------------------------+ |
- | | | 4 register AP driver | | 2 register device
- | | | | |
-+--------+---+-v---+ +--------+-------+-+
-| | | |
-| ap_bus +--------------------- > vfio_ap driver |
-| | 8 probe | |
-+--------^---------+ +--^--^------------+
-6 edit | | |
- apmask | +-----------------------------+ | 9 mdev create
- aqmask | | 1 modprobe |
-+--------+-----+---+ +----------------+-+ +------------------+
-| | | |8 create | mediated |
-| admin | | VFIO device core |---------> matrix |
-| + | | | device |
-+------+-+---------+ +--------^---------+ +--------^---------+
- | | | |
- | | 9 create vfio_ap-passthrough | |
- | +------------------------------+ |
- +-------------------------------------------------------------+
- 10 assign adapter/domain/control domain
+ +------------------+
+ 7 remove | |
+ +--------------------> cex4queue driver |
+ | | |
+ | +------------------+
+ |
+ |
+ | +------------------+ +----------------+
+ | 5 register driver | | 3 create | |
+ | +----------------> Device core +----------> matrix device |
+ | | | | | |
+ | | +--------^---------+ +----------------+
+ | | |
+ | | +-------------------+
+ | | +-----------------------------------+ |
+ | | | 4 register AP driver | | 2 register device
+ | | | | |
+ +--------+---+-v---+ +--------+-------+-+
+ | | | |
+ | ap_bus +--------------------- > vfio_ap driver |
+ | | 8 probe | |
+ +--------^---------+ +--^--^------------+
+ 6 edit | | |
+ apmask | +-----------------------------+ | 9 mdev create
+ aqmask | | 1 modprobe |
+ +--------+-----+---+ +----------------+-+ +----------------+
+ | | | |8 create | mediated |
+ | admin | | VFIO device core |---------> matrix |
+ | + | | | device |
+ +------+-+---------+ +--------^---------+ +--------^-------+
+ | | | |
+ | | 9 create vfio_ap-passthrough | |
+ | +------------------------------+ |
+ +-------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 10 assign adapter/domain/control domain
The process for reserving an AP queue for use by a KVM guest is:
@@ -250,7 +255,7 @@ The process for reserving an AP queue for use by a KVM guest is:
device with the device core. This will serve as the parent device for
all mediated matrix devices used to configure an AP matrix for a guest.
3. The /sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix device is created by the device core
-4 The vfio_ap device driver will register with the AP bus for AP queue devices
+4. The vfio_ap device driver will register with the AP bus for AP queue devices
of type 10 and higher (CEX4 and newer). The driver will provide the vfio_ap
driver's probe and remove callback interfaces. Devices older than CEX4 queues
are not supported to simplify the implementation by not needlessly
@@ -266,13 +271,14 @@ The process for reserving an AP queue for use by a KVM guest is:
it.
9. The administrator creates a passthrough type mediated matrix device to be
used by a guest
-10 The administrator assigns the adapters, usage domains and control domains
- to be exclusively used by a guest.
+10. The administrator assigns the adapters, usage domains and control domains
+ to be exclusively used by a guest.
Set up the VFIO mediated device interfaces
------------------------------------------
The VFIO AP device driver utilizes the common interface of the VFIO mediated
device core driver to:
+
* Register an AP mediated bus driver to add a mediated matrix device to and
remove it from a VFIO group.
* Create and destroy a mediated matrix device
@@ -280,25 +286,25 @@ device core driver to:
* Add a mediated matrix device to and remove it from an IOMMU group
The following high-level block diagram shows the main components and interfaces
-of the VFIO AP mediated matrix device driver:
+of the VFIO AP mediated matrix device driver::
- +-------------+
- | |
- | +---------+ | mdev_register_driver() +--------------+
- | | Mdev | +<-----------------------+ |
- | | bus | | | vfio_mdev.ko |
- | | driver | +----------------------->+ |<-> VFIO user
- | +---------+ | probe()/remove() +--------------+ APIs
- | |
- | MDEV CORE |
- | MODULE |
- | mdev.ko |
- | +---------+ | mdev_register_device() +--------------+
- | |Physical | +<-----------------------+ |
- | | device | | | vfio_ap.ko |<-> matrix
- | |interface| +----------------------->+ | device
- | +---------+ | callback +--------------+
- +-------------+
+ +-------------+
+ | |
+ | +---------+ | mdev_register_driver() +--------------+
+ | | Mdev | +<-----------------------+ |
+ | | bus | | | vfio_mdev.ko |
+ | | driver | +----------------------->+ |<-> VFIO user
+ | +---------+ | probe()/remove() +--------------+ APIs
+ | |
+ | MDEV CORE |
+ | MODULE |
+ | mdev.ko |
+ | +---------+ | mdev_register_device() +--------------+
+ | |Physical | +<-----------------------+ |
+ | | device | | | vfio_ap.ko |<-> matrix
+ | |interface| +----------------------->+ | device
+ | +---------+ | callback +--------------+
+ +-------------+
During initialization of the vfio_ap module, the matrix device is registered
with an 'mdev_parent_ops' structure that provides the sysfs attribute
@@ -306,7 +312,8 @@ structures, mdev functions and callback interfaces for managing the mediated
matrix device.
* sysfs attribute structures:
- * supported_type_groups
+
+ supported_type_groups
The VFIO mediated device framework supports creation of user-defined
mediated device types. These mediated device types are specified
via the 'supported_type_groups' structure when a device is registered
@@ -318,61 +325,72 @@ matrix device.
The VFIO AP device driver will register one mediated device type for
passthrough devices:
+
/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/mdev_supported_types/vfio_ap-passthrough
+
Only the read-only attributes required by the VFIO mdev framework will
- be provided:
- ... name
- ... device_api
- ... available_instances
- ... device_api
- Where:
- * name: specifies the name of the mediated device type
- * device_api: the mediated device type's API
- * available_instances: the number of mediated matrix passthrough devices
- that can be created
- * device_api: specifies the VFIO API
- * mdev_attr_groups
+ be provided::
+
+ ... name
+ ... device_api
+ ... available_instances
+ ... device_api
+
+ Where:
+
+ * name:
+ specifies the name of the mediated device type
+ * device_api:
+ the mediated device type's API
+ * available_instances:
+ the number of mediated matrix passthrough devices
+ that can be created
+ * device_api:
+ specifies the VFIO API
+ mdev_attr_groups
This attribute group identifies the user-defined sysfs attributes of the
mediated device. When a device is registered with the VFIO mediated device
framework, the sysfs attribute files identified in the 'mdev_attr_groups'
structure will be created in the mediated matrix device's directory. The
sysfs attributes for a mediated matrix device are:
- * assign_adapter:
- * unassign_adapter:
+
+ assign_adapter / unassign_adapter:
Write-only attributes for assigning/unassigning an AP adapter to/from the
mediated matrix device. To assign/unassign an adapter, the APID of the
adapter is echoed to the respective attribute file.
- * assign_domain:
- * unassign_domain:
+ assign_domain / unassign_domain:
Write-only attributes for assigning/unassigning an AP usage domain to/from
the mediated matrix device. To assign/unassign a domain, the domain
number of the the usage domain is echoed to the respective attribute
file.
- * matrix:
+ matrix:
A read-only file for displaying the APQNs derived from the cross product
of the adapter and domain numbers assigned to the mediated matrix device.
- * assign_control_domain:
- * unassign_control_domain:
+ assign_control_domain / unassign_control_domain:
Write-only attributes for assigning/unassigning an AP control domain
to/from the mediated matrix device. To assign/unassign a control domain,
the ID of the domain to be assigned/unassigned is echoed to the respective
attribute file.
- * control_domains:
+ control_domains:
A read-only file for displaying the control domain numbers assigned to the
mediated matrix device.
* functions:
- * create:
+
+ create:
allocates the ap_matrix_mdev structure used by the vfio_ap driver to:
+
* Store the reference to the KVM structure for the guest using the mdev
* Store the AP matrix configuration for the adapters, domains, and control
domains assigned via the corresponding sysfs attributes files
- * remove:
+
+ remove:
deallocates the mediated matrix device's ap_matrix_mdev structure. This will
be allowed only if a running guest is not using the mdev.
* callback interfaces
- * open:
+
+ open:
The vfio_ap driver uses this callback to register a
VFIO_GROUP_NOTIFY_SET_KVM notifier callback function for the mdev matrix
device. The open is invoked when QEMU connects the VFIO iommu group
@@ -380,16 +398,17 @@ matrix device.
to configure the KVM guest is provided via this callback. The KVM structure,
is used to configure the guest's access to the AP matrix defined via the
mediated matrix device's sysfs attribute files.
- * release:
+ release:
unregisters the VFIO_GROUP_NOTIFY_SET_KVM notifier callback function for the
mdev matrix device and deconfigures the guest's AP matrix.
-Configure the APM, AQM and ADM in the CRYCB:
+Configure the APM, AQM and ADM in the CRYCB
-------------------------------------------
Configuring the AP matrix for a KVM guest will be performed when the
VFIO_GROUP_NOTIFY_SET_KVM notifier callback is invoked. The notifier
function is called when QEMU connects to KVM. The guest's AP matrix is
configured via it's CRYCB by:
+
* Setting the bits in the APM corresponding to the APIDs assigned to the
mediated matrix device via its 'assign_adapter' interface.
* Setting the bits in the AQM corresponding to the domains assigned to the
@@ -418,12 +437,12 @@ available to a KVM guest via the following CPU model features:
Note: If the user chooses to specify a CPU model different than the 'host'
model to QEMU, the CPU model features and facilities need to be turned on
-explicitly; for example:
+explicitly; for example::
/usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu z13,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on
A guest can be precluded from using AP features/facilities by turning them off
-explicitly; for example:
+explicitly; for example::
/usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=off,apqci=off,apft=off
@@ -435,7 +454,7 @@ the APFT facility is not installed on the guest, then the probe of device
drivers will fail since only type 10 and newer devices can be configured for
guest use.
-Example:
+Example
=======
Let's now provide an example to illustrate how KVM guests may be given
access to AP facilities. For this example, we will show how to configure
@@ -444,30 +463,36 @@ look like this:
Guest1
------
+=========== ===== ============
CARD.DOMAIN TYPE MODE
-------------------------------
+=========== ===== ============
05 CEX5C CCA-Coproc
05.0004 CEX5C CCA-Coproc
05.00ab CEX5C CCA-Coproc
06 CEX5A Accelerator
06.0004 CEX5A Accelerator
06.00ab CEX5C CCA-Coproc
+=========== ===== ============
Guest2
------
+=========== ===== ============
CARD.DOMAIN TYPE MODE
-------------------------------
+=========== ===== ============
05 CEX5A Accelerator
05.0047 CEX5A Accelerator
05.00ff CEX5A Accelerator
+=========== ===== ============
Guest2
------
+=========== ===== ============
CARD.DOMAIN TYPE MODE
-------------------------------
+=========== ===== ============
06 CEX5A Accelerator
06.0047 CEX5A Accelerator
06.00ff CEX5A Accelerator
+=========== ===== ============
These are the steps:
@@ -492,25 +517,26 @@ These are the steps:
* VFIO_MDEV_DEVICE
* KVM
- If using make menuconfig select the following to build the vfio_ap module:
- -> Device Drivers
- -> IOMMU Hardware Support
- select S390 AP IOMMU Support
- -> VFIO Non-Privileged userspace driver framework
- -> Mediated device driver frramework
- -> VFIO driver for Mediated devices
- -> I/O subsystem
- -> VFIO support for AP devices
+ If using make menuconfig select the following to build the vfio_ap module::
+
+ -> Device Drivers
+ -> IOMMU Hardware Support
+ select S390 AP IOMMU Support
+ -> VFIO Non-Privileged userspace driver framework
+ -> Mediated device driver frramework
+ -> VFIO driver for Mediated devices
+ -> I/O subsystem
+ -> VFIO support for AP devices
2. Secure the AP queues to be used by the three guests so that the host can not
access them. To secure them, there are two sysfs files that specify
bitmasks marking a subset of the APQN range as 'usable by the default AP
queue device drivers' or 'not usable by the default device drivers' and thus
available for use by the vfio_ap device driver'. The location of the sysfs
- files containing the masks are:
+ files containing the masks are::
- /sys/bus/ap/apmask
- /sys/bus/ap/aqmask
+ /sys/bus/ap/apmask
+ /sys/bus/ap/aqmask
The 'apmask' is a 256-bit mask that identifies a set of AP adapter IDs
(APID). Each bit in the mask, from left to right (i.e., from most significant
@@ -526,7 +552,7 @@ These are the steps:
queue device drivers; otherwise, the APQI is usable by the vfio_ap device
driver.
- Take, for example, the following mask:
+ Take, for example, the following mask::
0x7dffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
@@ -548,68 +574,70 @@ These are the steps:
respective sysfs mask file in one of two formats:
* An absolute hex string starting with 0x - like "0x12345678" - sets
- the mask. If the given string is shorter than the mask, it is padded
- with 0s on the right; for example, specifying a mask value of 0x41 is
- the same as specifying:
+ the mask. If the given string is shorter than the mask, it is padded
+ with 0s on the right; for example, specifying a mask value of 0x41 is
+ the same as specifying::
- 0x4100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+ 0x4100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
- Keep in mind that the mask reads from left to right (i.e., most
- significant to least significant bit in big endian order), so the mask
- above identifies device numbers 1 and 7 (01000001).
+ Keep in mind that the mask reads from left to right (i.e., most
+ significant to least significant bit in big endian order), so the mask
+ above identifies device numbers 1 and 7 (01000001).
- If the string is longer than the mask, the operation is terminated with
- an error (EINVAL).
+ If the string is longer than the mask, the operation is terminated with
+ an error (EINVAL).
* Individual bits in the mask can be switched on and off by specifying
- each bit number to be switched in a comma separated list. Each bit
- number string must be prepended with a ('+') or minus ('-') to indicate
- the corresponding bit is to be switched on ('+') or off ('-'). Some
- valid values are:
+ each bit number to be switched in a comma separated list. Each bit
+ number string must be prepended with a ('+') or minus ('-') to indicate
+ the corresponding bit is to be switched on ('+') or off ('-'). Some
+ valid values are:
- "+0" switches bit 0 on
- "-13" switches bit 13 off
- "+0x41" switches bit 65 on
- "-0xff" switches bit 255 off
+ - "+0" switches bit 0 on
+ - "-13" switches bit 13 off
+ - "+0x41" switches bit 65 on
+ - "-0xff" switches bit 255 off
- The following example:
- +0,-6,+0x47,-0xf0
+ The following example:
- Switches bits 0 and 71 (0x47) on
- Switches bits 6 and 240 (0xf0) off
+ +0,-6,+0x47,-0xf0
- Note that the bits not specified in the list remain as they were before
- the operation.
+ Switches bits 0 and 71 (0x47) on
+
+ Switches bits 6 and 240 (0xf0) off
+
+ Note that the bits not specified in the list remain as they were before
+ the operation.
2. The masks can also be changed at boot time via parameters on the kernel
command line like this:
- ap.apmask=0xffff ap.aqmask=0x40
+ ap.apmask=0xffff ap.aqmask=0x40
- This would create the following masks:
+ This would create the following masks::
- apmask:
- 0xffff000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+ apmask:
+ 0xffff000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
- aqmask:
- 0x4000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+ aqmask:
+ 0x4000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
- Resulting in these two pools:
+ Resulting in these two pools::
- default drivers pool: adapter 0-15, domain 1
- alternate drivers pool: adapter 16-255, domains 0, 2-255
+ default drivers pool: adapter 0-15, domain 1
+ alternate drivers pool: adapter 16-255, domains 0, 2-255
- Securing the APQNs for our example:
- ----------------------------------
+Securing the APQNs for our example
+----------------------------------
To secure the AP queues 05.0004, 05.0047, 05.00ab, 05.00ff, 06.0004, 06.0047,
06.00ab, and 06.00ff for use by the vfio_ap device driver, the corresponding
- APQNs can either be removed from the default masks:
+ APQNs can either be removed from the default masks::
echo -5,-6 > /sys/bus/ap/apmask
echo -4,-0x47,-0xab,-0xff > /sys/bus/ap/aqmask
- Or the masks can be set as follows:
+ Or the masks can be set as follows::
echo 0xf9ffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff \
> apmask
@@ -620,19 +648,19 @@ These are the steps:
This will result in AP queues 05.0004, 05.0047, 05.00ab, 05.00ff, 06.0004,
06.0047, 06.00ab, and 06.00ff getting bound to the vfio_ap device driver. The
sysfs directory for the vfio_ap device driver will now contain symbolic links
- to the AP queue devices bound to it:
+ to the AP queue devices bound to it::
- /sys/bus/ap
- ... [drivers]
- ...... [vfio_ap]
- ......... [05.0004]
- ......... [05.0047]
- ......... [05.00ab]
- ......... [05.00ff]
- ......... [06.0004]
- ......... [06.0047]
- ......... [06.00ab]
- ......... [06.00ff]
+ /sys/bus/ap
+ ... [drivers]
+ ...... [vfio_ap]
+ ......... [05.0004]
+ ......... [05.0047]
+ ......... [05.00ab]
+ ......... [05.00ff]
+ ......... [06.0004]
+ ......... [06.0047]
+ ......... [06.00ab]
+ ......... [06.00ff]
Keep in mind that only type 10 and newer adapters (i.e., CEX4 and later)
can be bound to the vfio_ap device driver. The reason for this is to
@@ -645,96 +673,96 @@ These are the steps:
queue device can be read from the parent card's sysfs directory. For example,
to see the hardware type of the queue 05.0004:
- cat /sys/bus/ap/devices/card05/hwtype
+ cat /sys/bus/ap/devices/card05/hwtype
The hwtype must be 10 or higher (CEX4 or newer) in order to be bound to the
vfio_ap device driver.
3. Create the mediated devices needed to configure the AP matrixes for the
three guests and to provide an interface to the vfio_ap driver for
- use by the guests:
+ use by the guests::
- /sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/
- --- [mdev_supported_types]
- ------ [vfio_ap-passthrough] (passthrough mediated matrix device type)
- --------- create
- --------- [devices]
+ /sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/
+ --- [mdev_supported_types]
+ ------ [vfio_ap-passthrough] (passthrough mediated matrix device type)
+ --------- create
+ --------- [devices]
- To create the mediated devices for the three guests:
+ To create the mediated devices for the three guests::
uuidgen > create
uuidgen > create
uuidgen > create
- or
+ or
- echo $uuid1 > create
- echo $uuid2 > create
- echo $uuid3 > create
+ echo $uuid1 > create
+ echo $uuid2 > create
+ echo $uuid3 > create
This will create three mediated devices in the [devices] subdirectory named
after the UUID written to the create attribute file. We call them $uuid1,
- $uuid2 and $uuid3 and this is the sysfs directory structure after creation:
+ $uuid2 and $uuid3 and this is the sysfs directory structure after creation::
- /sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/
- --- [mdev_supported_types]
- ------ [vfio_ap-passthrough]
- --------- [devices]
- ------------ [$uuid1]
- --------------- assign_adapter
- --------------- assign_control_domain
- --------------- assign_domain
- --------------- matrix
- --------------- unassign_adapter
- --------------- unassign_control_domain
- --------------- unassign_domain
+ /sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/
+ --- [mdev_supported_types]
+ ------ [vfio_ap-passthrough]
+ --------- [devices]
+ ------------ [$uuid1]
+ --------------- assign_adapter
+ --------------- assign_control_domain
+ --------------- assign_domain
+ --------------- matrix
+ --------------- unassign_adapter
+ --------------- unassign_control_domain
+ --------------- unassign_domain
- ------------ [$uuid2]
- --------------- assign_adapter
- --------------- assign_control_domain
- --------------- assign_domain
- --------------- matrix
- --------------- unassign_adapter
- ----------------unassign_control_domain
- ----------------unassign_domain
+ ------------ [$uuid2]
+ --------------- assign_adapter
+ --------------- assign_control_domain
+ --------------- assign_domain
+ --------------- matrix
+ --------------- unassign_adapter
+ ----------------unassign_control_domain
+ ----------------unassign_domain
- ------------ [$uuid3]
- --------------- assign_adapter
- --------------- assign_control_domain
- --------------- assign_domain
- --------------- matrix
- --------------- unassign_adapter
- ----------------unassign_control_domain
- ----------------unassign_domain
+ ------------ [$uuid3]
+ --------------- assign_adapter
+ --------------- assign_control_domain
+ --------------- assign_domain
+ --------------- matrix
+ --------------- unassign_adapter
+ ----------------unassign_control_domain
+ ----------------unassign_domain
4. The administrator now needs to configure the matrixes for the mediated
devices $uuid1 (for Guest1), $uuid2 (for Guest2) and $uuid3 (for Guest3).
- This is how the matrix is configured for Guest1:
+ This is how the matrix is configured for Guest1::
echo 5 > assign_adapter
echo 6 > assign_adapter
echo 4 > assign_domain
echo 0xab > assign_domain
- Control domains can similarly be assigned using the assign_control_domain
- sysfs file.
+ Control domains can similarly be assigned using the assign_control_domain
+ sysfs file.
- If a mistake is made configuring an adapter, domain or control domain,
- you can use the unassign_xxx files to unassign the adapter, domain or
- control domain.
+ If a mistake is made configuring an adapter, domain or control domain,
+ you can use the unassign_xxx files to unassign the adapter, domain or
+ control domain.
- To display the matrix configuration for Guest1:
+ To display the matrix configuration for Guest1::
- cat matrix
+ cat matrix
- This is how the matrix is configured for Guest2:
+ This is how the matrix is configured for Guest2::
echo 5 > assign_adapter
echo 0x47 > assign_domain
echo 0xff > assign_domain
- This is how the matrix is configured for Guest3:
+ This is how the matrix is configured for Guest3::
echo 6 > assign_adapter
echo 0x47 > assign_domain
@@ -783,24 +811,24 @@ These are the steps:
configured for the system. If a control domain number higher than the maximum
is specified, the operation will terminate with an error (ENODEV).
-5. Start Guest1:
+5. Start Guest1::
- /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
- -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid1 ...
+ /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
+ -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid1 ...
-7. Start Guest2:
+7. Start Guest2::
- /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
- -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid2 ...
+ /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
+ -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid2 ...
-7. Start Guest3:
+7. Start Guest3::
- /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
- -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid3 ...
+ /usr/bin/qemu-system-s390x ... -cpu host,ap=on,apqci=on,apft=on \
+ -device vfio-ap,sysfsdev=/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/$uuid3 ...
When the guest is shut down, the mediated matrix devices may be removed.
-Using our example again, to remove the mediated matrix device $uuid1:
+Using our example again, to remove the mediated matrix device $uuid1::
/sys/devices/vfio_ap/matrix/
--- [mdev_supported_types]
@@ -809,18 +837,19 @@ Using our example again, to remove the mediated matrix device $uuid1:
------------ [$uuid1]
--------------- remove
+::
echo 1 > remove
- This will remove all of the mdev matrix device's sysfs structures including
- the mdev device itself. To recreate and reconfigure the mdev matrix device,
- all of the steps starting with step 3 will have to be performed again. Note
- that the remove will fail if a guest using the mdev is still running.
+This will remove all of the mdev matrix device's sysfs structures including
+the mdev device itself. To recreate and reconfigure the mdev matrix device,
+all of the steps starting with step 3 will have to be performed again. Note
+that the remove will fail if a guest using the mdev is still running.
- It is not necessary to remove an mdev matrix device, but one may want to
- remove it if no guest will use it during the remaining lifetime of the linux
- host. If the mdev matrix device is removed, one may want to also reconfigure
- the pool of adapters and queues reserved for use by the default drivers.
+It is not necessary to remove an mdev matrix device, but one may want to
+remove it if no guest will use it during the remaining lifetime of the linux
+host. If the mdev matrix device is removed, one may want to also reconfigure
+the pool of adapters and queues reserved for use by the default drivers.
Limitations
===========
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt b/Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt
index 2be11ad864ff..6278466dd9b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/vfio-ccw.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================================
vfio-ccw: the basic infrastructure
==================================
@@ -11,9 +12,11 @@ virtual machine, while vfio is the means.
Different than other hardware architectures, s390 has defined a unified
I/O access method, which is so called Channel I/O. It has its own access
patterns:
+
- Channel programs run asynchronously on a separate (co)processor.
- The channel subsystem will access any memory designated by the caller
in the channel program directly, i.e. there is no iommu involved.
+
Thus when we introduce vfio support for these devices, we realize it
with a mediated device (mdev) implementation. The vfio mdev will be
added to an iommu group, so as to make itself able to be managed by the
@@ -24,6 +27,7 @@ to perform I/O instructions.
This document does not intend to explain the s390 I/O architecture in
every detail. More information/reference could be found here:
+
- A good start to know Channel I/O in general:
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Channel_I/O
- s390 architecture:
@@ -80,6 +84,7 @@ until interrupted. The I/O completion result is received by the
interrupt handler in the form of interrupt response block (IRB).
Back to vfio-ccw, in short:
+
- ORBs and channel programs are built in guest kernel (with guest
physical addresses).
- ORBs and channel programs are passed to the host kernel.
@@ -106,6 +111,7 @@ it gets sent to hardware.
Within this implementation, we have two drivers for two types of
devices:
+
- The vfio_ccw driver for the physical subchannel device.
This is an I/O subchannel driver for the real subchannel device. It
realizes a group of callbacks and registers to the mdev framework as a
@@ -137,7 +143,7 @@ devices:
vfio_pin_pages and a vfio_unpin_pages interfaces from the vfio iommu
backend for the physical devices to pin and unpin pages by demand.
-Below is a high Level block diagram.
+Below is a high Level block diagram::
+-------------+
| |
@@ -158,6 +164,7 @@ Below is a high Level block diagram.
+-------------+
The process of how these work together.
+
1. vfio_ccw.ko drives the physical I/O subchannel, and registers the
physical device (with callbacks) to mdev framework.
When vfio_ccw probing the subchannel device, it registers device
@@ -178,17 +185,17 @@ vfio-ccw I/O region
An I/O region is used to accept channel program request from user
space and store I/O interrupt result for user space to retrieve. The
-definition of the region is:
+definition of the region is::
-struct ccw_io_region {
-#define ORB_AREA_SIZE 12
- __u8 orb_area[ORB_AREA_SIZE];
-#define SCSW_AREA_SIZE 12
- __u8 scsw_area[SCSW_AREA_SIZE];
-#define IRB_AREA_SIZE 96
- __u8 irb_area[IRB_AREA_SIZE];
- __u32 ret_code;
-} __packed;
+ struct ccw_io_region {
+ #define ORB_AREA_SIZE 12
+ __u8 orb_area[ORB_AREA_SIZE];
+ #define SCSW_AREA_SIZE 12
+ __u8 scsw_area[SCSW_AREA_SIZE];
+ #define IRB_AREA_SIZE 96
+ __u8 irb_area[IRB_AREA_SIZE];
+ __u32 ret_code;
+ } __packed;
While starting an I/O request, orb_area should be filled with the
guest ORB, and scsw_area should be filled with the SCSW of the Virtual
@@ -205,7 +212,7 @@ vfio-ccw follows what vfio-pci did on the s390 platform and uses
vfio-iommu-type1 as the vfio iommu backend.
* CCW translation APIs
- A group of APIs (start with 'cp_') to do CCW translation. The CCWs
+ A group of APIs (start with `cp_`) to do CCW translation. The CCWs
passed in by a user space program are organized with their guest
physical memory addresses. These APIs will copy the CCWs into kernel
space, and assemble a runnable kernel channel program by updating the
@@ -217,12 +224,14 @@ vfio-iommu-type1 as the vfio iommu backend.
This driver utilizes the CCW translation APIs and introduces
vfio_ccw, which is the driver for the I/O subchannel devices you want
to pass through.
- vfio_ccw implements the following vfio ioctls:
+ vfio_ccw implements the following vfio ioctls::
+
VFIO_DEVICE_GET_INFO
VFIO_DEVICE_GET_IRQ_INFO
VFIO_DEVICE_GET_REGION_INFO
VFIO_DEVICE_RESET
VFIO_DEVICE_SET_IRQS
+
This provides an I/O region, so that the user space program can pass a
channel program to the kernel, to do further CCW translation before
issuing them to a real device.
@@ -236,32 +245,49 @@ bit more detail how an I/O request triggered by the QEMU guest will be
handled (without error handling).
Explanation:
-Q1-Q7: QEMU side process.
-K1-K5: Kernel side process.
-Q1. Get I/O region info during initialization.
-Q2. Setup event notifier and handler to handle I/O completion.
+- Q1-Q7: QEMU side process.
+- K1-K5: Kernel side process.
+
+Q1.
+ Get I/O region info during initialization.
+
+Q2.
+ Setup event notifier and handler to handle I/O completion.
... ...
-Q3. Intercept a ssch instruction.
-Q4. Write the guest channel program and ORB to the I/O region.
- K1. Copy from guest to kernel.
- K2. Translate the guest channel program to a host kernel space
- channel program, which becomes runnable for a real device.
- K3. With the necessary information contained in the orb passed in
- by QEMU, issue the ccwchain to the device.
- K4. Return the ssch CC code.
-Q5. Return the CC code to the guest.
+Q3.
+ Intercept a ssch instruction.
+Q4.
+ Write the guest channel program and ORB to the I/O region.
+
+ K1.
+ Copy from guest to kernel.
+ K2.
+ Translate the guest channel program to a host kernel space
+ channel program, which becomes runnable for a real device.
+ K3.
+ With the necessary information contained in the orb passed in
+ by QEMU, issue the ccwchain to the device.
+ K4.
+ Return the ssch CC code.
+Q5.
+ Return the CC code to the guest.
... ...
- K5. Interrupt handler gets the I/O result and write the result to
- the I/O region.
- K6. Signal QEMU to retrieve the result.
-Q6. Get the signal and event handler reads out the result from the I/O
+ K5.
+ Interrupt handler gets the I/O result and write the result to
+ the I/O region.
+ K6.
+ Signal QEMU to retrieve the result.
+
+Q6.
+ Get the signal and event handler reads out the result from the I/O
region.
-Q7. Update the irb for the guest.
+Q7.
+ Update the irb for the guest.
Limitations
-----------
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt b/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt
index b064aa59714d..54e8e7caf7e7 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+==================================
The s390 SCSI dump tool (zfcpdump)
+==================================
System z machines (z900 or higher) provide hardware support for creating system
dumps on SCSI disks. The dump process is initiated by booting a dump tool, which
--
2.20.1
The debugfs interface for CMA should be there together with other
mm-related documents.
Convert this small file to ReST and move it to its rightful place.
The conversion is actually quite simple: just add a title for the
document. In order to make it to look better for the audience,
also mark the "echo" command as a literal block.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt | 6 +++++-
1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
index 6cef20a8cedc..4e06ffabd78a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=====================
+CMA Debugfs Interface
+=====================
+
The CMA debugfs interface is useful to retrieve basic information out of the
different CMA areas and to test allocation/release in each of the areas.
@@ -12,7 +16,7 @@ The structure of the files created under that directory is as follows:
- [RO] count: Amount of memory in the CMA area.
- [RO] order_per_bit: Order of pages represented by one bit.
- [RO] bitmap: The bitmap of page states in the zone.
- - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example:
+ - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example::
echo 5 > <debugfs>/cma/cma-2/alloc
--
2.20.1
The dfl.txt file is almost there. It needs just a few
adjustments to be properly parsed.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt | 58 +++++++++++++++++++++-----------------
1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt b/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt
index 6df4621c3f2a..2f125abd777f 100644
--- a/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
-===============================================================================
- FPGA Device Feature List (DFL) Framework Overview
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Enno Luebbers <[email protected]>
- Xiao Guangrong <[email protected]>
- Wu Hao <[email protected]>
+=================================================
+FPGA Device Feature List (DFL) Framework Overview
+=================================================
+
+Authors:
+
+- Enno Luebbers <[email protected]>
+- Xiao Guangrong <[email protected]>
+- Wu Hao <[email protected]>
The Device Feature List (DFL) FPGA framework (and drivers according to this
this framework) hides the very details of low layer hardwares and provides
@@ -19,7 +22,7 @@ Device Feature List (DFL) defines a linked list of feature headers within the
device MMIO space to provide an extensible way of adding features. Software can
walk through these predefined data structures to enumerate FPGA features:
FPGA Interface Unit (FIU), Accelerated Function Unit (AFU) and Private Features,
-as illustrated below:
+as illustrated below::
Header Header Header Header
+----------+ +-->+----------+ +-->+----------+ +-->+----------+
@@ -81,9 +84,9 @@ and release it using close().
The following functions are exposed through ioctls:
- Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION)
- Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION)
- Program bitstream (DFL_FPGA_FME_PORT_PR)
+- Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION)
+- Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION)
+- Program bitstream (DFL_FPGA_FME_PORT_PR)
More functions are exposed through sysfs
(/sys/class/fpga_region/regionX/dfl-fme.n/):
@@ -118,18 +121,19 @@ port by using open() on the port device node and release it using close().
The following functions are exposed through ioctls:
- Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION)
- Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION)
- Get port info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_INFO)
- Get MMIO region info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_REGION_INFO)
- Map DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_MAP)
- Unmap DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_UNMAP)
- Reset AFU (*DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET)
+- Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION)
+- Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION)
+- Get port info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_INFO)
+- Get MMIO region info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_REGION_INFO)
+- Map DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_MAP)
+- Unmap DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_UNMAP)
+- Reset AFU (DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET)
-*DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET: reset the FPGA Port and its AFU. Userspace can do Port
-reset at any time, e.g. during DMA or Partial Reconfiguration. But it should
-never cause any system level issue, only functional failure (e.g. DMA or PR
-operation failure) and be recoverable from the failure.
+DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET:
+ reset the FPGA Port and its AFU. Userspace can do Port
+ reset at any time, e.g. during DMA or Partial Reconfiguration. But it should
+ never cause any system level issue, only functional failure (e.g. DMA or PR
+ operation failure) and be recoverable from the failure.
User-space applications can also mmap() accelerator MMIO regions.
@@ -143,6 +147,8 @@ More functions are exposed through sysfs:
DFL Framework Overview
======================
+::
+
+----------+ +--------+ +--------+ +--------+
| FME | | AFU | | AFU | | AFU |
| Module | | Module | | Module | | Module |
@@ -151,7 +157,7 @@ DFL Framework Overview
| FPGA Container Device | Device Feature List
| (FPGA Base Region) | Framework
+-----------------------+
---------------------------------------------------------------------
+ ------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------------+
| FPGA DFL Device Module |
| (e.g. PCIE/Platform Device)|
@@ -220,7 +226,7 @@ the sysfs hierarchy under /sys/class/fpga_region.
In the example below, two DFL based FPGA devices are installed in the host. Each
fpga device has one FME and two ports (AFUs).
-FPGA regions are created under /sys/class/fpga_region/
+FPGA regions are created under /sys/class/fpga_region/::
/sys/class/fpga_region/region0
/sys/class/fpga_region/region1
@@ -231,7 +237,7 @@ Application needs to search each regionX folder, if feature device is found,
(e.g. "dfl-port.n" or "dfl-fme.m" is found), then it's the base
fpga region which represents the FPGA device.
-Each base region has one FME and two ports (AFUs) as child devices:
+Each base region has one FME and two ports (AFUs) as child devices::
/sys/class/fpga_region/region0/dfl-fme.0
/sys/class/fpga_region/region0/dfl-port.0
@@ -243,7 +249,7 @@ Each base region has one FME and two ports (AFUs) as child devices:
/sys/class/fpga_region/region3/dfl-port.3
...
-In general, the FME/AFU sysfs interfaces are named as follows:
+In general, the FME/AFU sysfs interfaces are named as follows::
/sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-fme.n>/
/sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-port.m>/
@@ -251,7 +257,7 @@ In general, the FME/AFU sysfs interfaces are named as follows:
with 'n' consecutively numbering all FMEs and 'm' consecutively numbering all
ports.
-The device nodes used for ioctl() or mmap() can be referenced through:
+The device nodes used for ioctl() or mmap() can be referenced through::
/sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-fme.n>/dev
/sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-port.n>/dev
--
2.20.1
Convert the pcmcia docs to ReST format. Most of the changes here
are trivial, making Sphinx properly identify titles, lists and
literal blocks.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt | 4 +++
Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt | 35 ++++++++++++++--------
Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt | 18 ++++++------
Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt | 39 +++++++++++++++++--------
4 files changed, 63 insertions(+), 33 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt
index 5f3e00ab54c4..fd1d60d12ca1 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+============
+Device table
+============
+
Matching of PCMCIA devices to drivers is done using one or more of the
following criteria:
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
index 78355c4c268a..33fe9ebec049 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,21 @@
+==============
+Driver changes
+==============
+
This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
+
* pcmcia_loop_config() and autoconfiguration (as of 2.6.36)
- If struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->config_flags is set accordingly,
+ If `struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->config_flags` is set accordingly,
pcmcia_loop_config() now sets up certain configuration values
automatically, though the driver may still override the settings
in the callback function. The following autoconfiguration options
are provided at the moment:
- CONF_AUTO_CHECK_VCC : check for matching Vcc
- CONF_AUTO_SET_VPP : set Vpp
- CONF_AUTO_AUDIO : auto-enable audio line, if required
- CONF_AUTO_SET_IO : set ioport resources (->resource[0,1])
- CONF_AUTO_SET_IOMEM : set first iomem resource (->resource[2])
+
+ - CONF_AUTO_CHECK_VCC : check for matching Vcc
+ - CONF_AUTO_SET_VPP : set Vpp
+ - CONF_AUTO_AUDIO : auto-enable audio line, if required
+ - CONF_AUTO_SET_IO : set ioport resources (->resource[0,1])
+ - CONF_AUTO_SET_IOMEM : set first iomem resource (->resource[2])
* pcmcia_request_configuration -> pcmcia_enable_device (as of 2.6.36)
pcmcia_request_configuration() got renamed to pcmcia_enable_device(),
@@ -19,14 +25,14 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
* pcmcia_request_window changes (as of 2.6.36)
Instead of win_req_t, drivers are now requested to fill out
- struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[2,3,4,5] for up to four ioport
+ `struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[2,3,4,5]` for up to four ioport
ranges. After a call to pcmcia_request_window(), the regions found there
are reserved and may be used immediately -- until pcmcia_release_window()
is called.
* pcmcia_request_io changes (as of 2.6.36)
Instead of io_req_t, drivers are now requested to fill out
- struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[0,1] for up to two ioport
+ `struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[0,1]` for up to two ioport
ranges. After a call to pcmcia_request_io(), the ports found there
are reserved, after calling pcmcia_request_configuration(), they may
be used.
@@ -42,7 +48,8 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
* New IRQ request rules (as of 2.6.35)
Instead of the old pcmcia_request_irq() interface, drivers may now
choose between:
- - calling request_irq/free_irq directly. Use the IRQ from *p_dev->irq.
+
+ - calling request_irq/free_irq directly. Use the IRQ from `*p_dev->irq`.
- use pcmcia_request_irq(p_dev, handler_t); the PCMCIA core will
clean up automatically on calls to pcmcia_disable_device() or
device ejection.
@@ -72,13 +79,16 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
exports for them were removed.
* Unify detach and REMOVAL event code, as well as attach and INSERTION
- code (as of 2.6.16)
+ code (as of 2.6.16)::
+
void (*remove) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
int (*probe) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
-* Move suspend, resume and reset out of event handler (as of 2.6.16)
+* Move suspend, resume and reset out of event handler (as of 2.6.16)::
+
int (*suspend) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
int (*resume) (struct pcmcia_device *dev);
+
should be initialized in struct pcmcia_driver, and handle
(SUSPEND == RESET_PHYSICAL) and (RESUME == CARD_RESET) events
@@ -117,7 +127,8 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
* core functions no longer available (as of 2.6.11)
The following functions have been removed from the kernel source
because they are unused by all in-kernel drivers, and no external
- driver was reported to rely on them:
+ driver was reported to rely on them::
+
pcmcia_get_first_region()
pcmcia_get_next_region()
pcmcia_modify_window()
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt
index 0ac167920778..5c4fe84d51c1 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
+=============
PCMCIA Driver
--------------
-
+=============
sysfs
-----
New PCMCIA IDs may be added to a device driver pcmcia_device_id table at
-runtime as shown below:
+runtime as shown below::
-echo "match_flags manf_id card_id func_id function device_no \
-prod_id_hash[0] prod_id_hash[1] prod_id_hash[2] prod_id_hash[3]" > \
-/sys/bus/pcmcia/drivers/{driver}/new_id
+ echo "match_flags manf_id card_id func_id function device_no \
+ prod_id_hash[0] prod_id_hash[1] prod_id_hash[2] prod_id_hash[3]" > \
+ /sys/bus/pcmcia/drivers/{driver}/new_id
All fields are passed in as hexadecimal values (no leading 0x).
The meaning is described in the PCMCIA specification, the match_flags is
@@ -22,9 +22,9 @@ PCMCIA device listed in its (newly updated) pcmcia_device_id list.
A common use-case is to add a new device according to the manufacturer ID
and the card ID (form the manf_id and card_id file in the device tree).
-For this, just use:
+For this, just use::
-echo "0x3 manf_id card_id 0 0 0 0 0 0 0" > \
- /sys/bus/pcmcia/drivers/{driver}/new_id
+ echo "0x3 manf_id card_id 0 0 0 0 0 0 0" > \
+ /sys/bus/pcmcia/drivers/{driver}/new_id
after loading the driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt
index b2c9b478906b..e35257139c89 100644
--- a/Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/locking.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=======
+Locking
+=======
+
This file explains the locking and exclusion scheme used in the PCCARD
and PCMCIA subsystems.
@@ -5,16 +9,21 @@ and PCMCIA subsystems.
A) Overview, Locking Hierarchy:
===============================
-pcmcia_socket_list_rwsem - protects only the list of sockets
-- skt_mutex - serializes card insert / ejection
- - ops_mutex - serializes socket operation
+pcmcia_socket_list_rwsem
+ - protects only the list of sockets
+
+- skt_mutex
+ - serializes card insert / ejection
+
+ - ops_mutex
+ - serializes socket operation
B) Exclusion
============
The following functions and callbacks to struct pcmcia_socket must
-be called with "skt_mutex" held:
+be called with "skt_mutex" held::
socket_detect_change()
send_event()
@@ -31,7 +40,7 @@ be called with "skt_mutex" held:
struct pcmcia_callback *callback
The following functions and callbacks to struct pcmcia_socket must
-be called with "ops_mutex" held:
+be called with "ops_mutex" held::
socket_reset()
socket_setup()
@@ -39,7 +48,7 @@ be called with "ops_mutex" held:
struct pccard_operations *ops
struct pccard_resource_ops *resource_ops;
-Note that send_event() and struct pcmcia_callback *callback must not be
+Note that send_event() and `struct pcmcia_callback *callback` must not be
called with "ops_mutex" held.
@@ -60,19 +69,23 @@ The resource_ops and their data are protected by ops_mutex.
The "main" struct pcmcia_socket is protected as follows (read-only fields
or single-use fields not mentioned):
-- by pcmcia_socket_list_rwsem:
+- by pcmcia_socket_list_rwsem::
+
struct list_head socket_list;
-- by thread_lock:
+- by thread_lock::
+
unsigned int thread_events;
-- by skt_mutex:
+- by skt_mutex::
+
u_int suspended_state;
void (*tune_bridge);
struct pcmcia_callback *callback;
int resume_status;
-- by ops_mutex:
+- by ops_mutex::
+
socket_state_t socket;
u_int state;
u_short lock_count;
@@ -100,7 +113,8 @@ The "main" struct pcmcia_device is protected as follows (read-only fields
or single-use fields not mentioned):
-- by pcmcia_socket->ops_mutex:
+- by pcmcia_socket->ops_mutex::
+
struct list_head socket_device_list;
struct config_t *function_config;
u16 _irq:1;
@@ -111,7 +125,8 @@ or single-use fields not mentioned):
u16 suspended:1;
u16 _removed:1;
-- by the PCMCIA driver:
+- by the PCMCIA driver::
+
io_req_t io;
irq_req_t irq;
config_req_t conf;
--
2.20.1
The API described at sysfs.txt is deprecated.
Still, as it is still part of the Kernel (and will likely be
there for some time, as we don't simply remove APIs). So,
it makes sense to keep it there.
The conversion of this file is trivial.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt | 39 +++++++++++++++++++++++-------------
1 file changed, 25 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt
index 58eeab81f349..ec09ffd983e7 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio/sysfs.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,12 @@
GPIO Sysfs Interface for Userspace
==================================
-THIS ABI IS DEPRECATED, THE ABI DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN MOVED TO
-Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-gpio AND NEW USERSPACE CONSUMERS
-ARE SUPPOSED TO USE THE CHARACTER DEVICE ABI. THIS OLD SYSFS ABI WILL
-NOT BE DEVELOPED (NO NEW FEATURES), IT WILL JUST BE MAINTAINED.
+.. warning::
+
+ THIS ABI IS DEPRECATED, THE ABI DOCUMENTATION HAS BEEN MOVED TO
+ Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-gpio AND NEW USERSPACE CONSUMERS
+ ARE SUPPOSED TO USE THE CHARACTER DEVICE ABI. THIS OLD SYSFS ABI WILL
+ NOT BE DEVELOPED (NO NEW FEATURES), IT WILL JUST BE MAINTAINED.
Refer to the examples in tools/gpio/* for an introduction to the new
character device ABI. Also see the userspace header in
@@ -51,13 +53,15 @@ The control interfaces are write-only:
/sys/class/gpio/
- "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
+ "export" ...
+ Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file.
Example: "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node
for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code.
- "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
+ "unexport" ...
+ Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
Example: "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19"
node exported using the "export" file.
@@ -67,7 +71,8 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
/sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
- "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may
+ "direction" ...
+ reads as either "in" or "out". This value may
normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to
initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free
operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to
@@ -78,7 +83,8 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly
allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction.
- "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO
+ "value" ...
+ reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO
is configured as an output, this value may be written;
any nonzero value is treated as high.
@@ -92,14 +98,16 @@ and have the following read/write attributes:
file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it
to read the value.
- "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or
+ "edge" ...
+ reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or
"both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s)
that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return.
This file exists only if the pin can be configured as an
interrupt generating input pin.
- "active_low" ... reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write
+ "active_low" ...
+ reads as either 0 (false) or 1 (true). Write
any nonzero value to invert the value attribute both
for reading and writing. Existing and subsequent
poll(2) support configuration via the edge attribute
@@ -112,11 +120,14 @@ read-only attributes:
/sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
- "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
+ "base" ...
+ same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
- "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
+ "label" ...
+ provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
- "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manages (N to N + ngpio - 1)
+ "ngpio" ...
+ how many GPIOs this manages (N to N + ngpio - 1)
Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for
what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on
@@ -129,7 +140,7 @@ the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal.
Exporting from Kernel code
--------------------------
Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been
-requested using gpio_request():
+requested using gpio_request()::
/* export the GPIO to userspace */
int gpiod_export(struct gpio_desc *desc, bool direction_may_change);
--
2.20.1
In order to merge it into a Sphinx book, we need first to
convert to ReST.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt | 60 +++++++++++++++---------------
1 file changed, 31 insertions(+), 29 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt b/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
index ed12d437189d..c48c8b9797b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-.------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
-| Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer |
-+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+'
+====================================
+Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer
+====================================
-| 1. Description
-+----------------
+1. Description
+--------------
The architecture of the USB 2.0 PHY module in Samsung SoCs is similar
among many SoCs. In spite of the similarities it proved difficult to
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ the PHY powering up process had to be altered. This adaptation layer is
a compromise between having separate drivers and having a single driver
with added support for many special cases.
-| 2. Files description
-+----------------------
+2. Files description
+--------------------
- phy-samsung-usb2.c
This is the main file of the adaptation layer. This file contains
@@ -32,44 +32,45 @@ with added support for many special cases.
driver. In addition it should contain extern declarations for
structures that describe particular SoCs.
-| 3. Supporting SoCs
-+--------------------
+3. Supporting SoCs
+------------------
To support a new SoC a new file should be added to the drivers/phy
directory. Each SoC's configuration is stored in an instance of the
-struct samsung_usb2_phy_config.
+struct samsung_usb2_phy_config::
-struct samsung_usb2_phy_config {
+ struct samsung_usb2_phy_config {
const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy *phys;
int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *);
unsigned int num_phys;
bool has_mode_switch;
-};
+ };
-The num_phys is the number of phys handled by the driver. *phys is an
+The num_phys is the number of phys handled by the driver. `*phys` is an
array that contains the configuration for each phy. The has_mode_switch
property is a boolean flag that determines whether the SoC has USB host
and device on a single pair of pins. If so, a special register has to
be modified to change the internal routing of these pins between a USB
device or host module.
-For example the configuration for Exynos 4210 is following:
+For example the configuration for Exynos 4210 is following::
-const struct samsung_usb2_phy_config exynos4210_usb2_phy_config = {
+ const struct samsung_usb2_phy_config exynos4210_usb2_phy_config = {
.has_mode_switch = 0,
.num_phys = EXYNOS4210_NUM_PHYS,
.phys = exynos4210_phys,
.rate_to_clk = exynos4210_rate_to_clk,
-}
+ }
+
+- `int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *)`
-- int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *)
The rate_to_clk callback is to convert the rate of the clock
used as the reference clock for the PHY module to the value
that should be written in the hardware register.
-The exynos4210_phys configuration array is as follows:
+The exynos4210_phys configuration array is as follows::
-static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
+ static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
{
.label = "device",
.id = EXYNOS4210_DEVICE,
@@ -95,29 +96,30 @@ static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
.power_off = exynos4210_power_off,
},
{},
-};
+ };
+
+- `int (*power_on)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);`
+ `int (*power_off)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);`
-- int (*power_on)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);
-- int (*power_off)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);
These two callbacks are used to power on and power off the phy
by modifying appropriate registers.
Final change to the driver is adding appropriate compatible value to the
phy-samsung-usb2.c file. In case of Exynos 4210 the following lines were
-added to the struct of_device_id samsung_usb2_phy_of_match[] array:
+added to the struct of_device_id samsung_usb2_phy_of_match[] array::
-#ifdef CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
+ #ifdef CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
{
.compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-usb2-phy",
.data = &exynos4210_usb2_phy_config,
},
-#endif
+ #endif
To add further flexibility to the driver the Kconfig file enables to
include support for selected SoCs in the compiled driver. The Kconfig
-entry for Exynos 4210 is following:
+entry for Exynos 4210 is following::
-config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
+ config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
bool "Support for Exynos 4210"
depends on PHY_SAMSUNG_USB2
depends on CPU_EXYNOS4210
@@ -128,8 +130,8 @@ config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
phys are available - device, host, HSCI0 and HSCI1.
The newly created file that supports the new SoC has to be also added to the
-Makefile. In case of Exynos 4210 the added line is following:
+Makefile. In case of Exynos 4210 the added line is following::
-obj-$(CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2) += phy-exynos4210-usb2.o
+ obj-$(CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2) += phy-exynos4210-usb2.o
After completing these steps the support for the new SoC should be ready.
--
2.20.1
The two files there describes a Kernel API feature, used to
support early userspace stuff. Prepare for moving them to
the kernel API book by converting to ReST format.
The conversion itself was quite trivial: just add/mark a few
titles as such, add a literal block markup, add a table markup
and a few blank lines, in order to make Sphinx to properly parse it.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/early-userspace/README | 3 +++
.../early-userspace/buffer-format.txt | 19 +++++++++++++------
2 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/README b/Documentation/early-userspace/README
index 955d667dc87e..3deefb34046b 100644
--- a/Documentation/early-userspace/README
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/README
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======================
Early userspace support
=======================
@@ -26,6 +27,7 @@ archive to be used as the image or have the kernel build process build
the image from specifications.
CPIO ARCHIVE method
+-------------------
You can create a cpio archive that contains the early userspace image.
Your cpio archive should be specified in CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and it
@@ -34,6 +36,7 @@ CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and directory and file names are not allowed in
combination with a cpio archive.
IMAGE BUILDING method
+---------------------
The kernel build process can also build an early userspace image from
source parts rather than supplying a cpio archive. This method provides
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt b/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt
index e1fd7f9dad16..7f74e301fdf3 100644
--- a/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
- initramfs buffer format
- -----------------------
+=======================
+initramfs buffer format
+=======================
- Al Viro, H. Peter Anvin
- Last revision: 2002-01-13
+Al Viro, H. Peter Anvin
+
+Last revision: 2002-01-13
Starting with kernel 2.5.x, the old "initial ramdisk" protocol is
getting {replaced/complemented} with the new "initial ramfs"
@@ -18,7 +20,8 @@ archive can be compressed using gzip(1). One valid version of an
initramfs buffer is thus a single .cpio.gz file.
The full format of the initramfs buffer is defined by the following
-grammar, where:
+grammar, where::
+
* is used to indicate "0 or more occurrences of"
(|) indicates alternatives
+ indicates concatenation
@@ -49,7 +52,9 @@ hexadecimal ASCII numbers fully padded with '0' on the left to the
full width of the field, for example, the integer 4780 is represented
by the ASCII string "000012ac"):
+============= ================== ==============================================
Field name Field size Meaning
+============= ================== ==============================================
c_magic 6 bytes The string "070701" or "070702"
c_ino 8 bytes File inode number
c_mode 8 bytes File mode and permissions
@@ -65,6 +70,7 @@ c_rmin 8 bytes Minor part of device node reference
c_namesize 8 bytes Length of filename, including final \0
c_chksum 8 bytes Checksum of data field if c_magic is 070702;
otherwise zero
+============= ================== ==============================================
The c_mode field matches the contents of st_mode returned by stat(2)
on Linux, and encodes the file type and file permissions.
@@ -82,7 +88,8 @@ If the filename is "TRAILER!!!" this is actually an end-of-archive
marker; the c_filesize for an end-of-archive marker must be zero.
-*** Handling of hard links
+Handling of hard links
+======================
When a nondirectory with c_nlink > 1 is seen, the (c_maj,c_min,c_ino)
tuple is looked up in a tuple buffer. If not found, it is entered in
--
2.20.1
Convert the Device Mapper documentation to ReST.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
.../device-mapper/cache-policies.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt | 206 +++++++++-------
Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt | 29 ++-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt | 57 +++--
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt | 45 ++--
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt | 75 +++---
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt | 55 +++--
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt | 5 +-
.../device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt | 25 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt | 225 +++++++++++-------
.../device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt | 68 +++---
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt | 143 ++++++-----
Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt | 36 +--
Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt | 100 ++++----
Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt | 91 +++----
.../device-mapper/persistent-data.txt | 4 +
Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt | 116 ++++-----
Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt | 62 ++---
Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt | 68 +++---
Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt | 47 ++--
.../device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt | 68 ++++--
Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt | 111 +++++----
Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt | 13 +-
Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt | 14 +-
28 files changed, 1012 insertions(+), 729 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt
index 86786d87d9a8..b17fe352fc41 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================
Guidance for writing policies
=============================
@@ -30,7 +31,7 @@ multiqueue (mq)
This policy is now an alias for smq (see below).
-The following tunables are accepted, but have no effect:
+The following tunables are accepted, but have no effect::
'sequential_threshold <#nr_sequential_ios>'
'random_threshold <#nr_random_ios>'
@@ -56,7 +57,9 @@ mq policy's hints to be dropped. Also, performance of the cache may
degrade slightly until smq recalculates the origin device's hotspots
that should be cached.
-Memory usage:
+Memory usage
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
The mq policy used a lot of memory; 88 bytes per cache block on a 64
bit machine.
@@ -69,7 +72,9 @@ cache block).
All this means smq uses ~25bytes per cache block. Still a lot of
memory, but a substantial improvement nontheless.
-Level balancing:
+Level balancing
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
mq placed entries in different levels of the multiqueue structures
based on their hit count (~ln(hit count)). This meant the bottom
levels generally had the most entries, and the top ones had very
@@ -94,7 +99,9 @@ is used to decide which blocks to promote. If the hotspot queue is
performing badly then it starts moving entries more quickly between
levels. This lets it adapt to new IO patterns very quickly.
-Performance:
+Performance
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Testing smq shows substantially better performance than mq.
cleaner
@@ -105,16 +112,19 @@ The cleaner writes back all dirty blocks in a cache to decommission it.
Examples
========
-The syntax for a table is:
+The syntax for a table is::
+
cache <metadata dev> <cache dev> <origin dev> <block size>
<#feature_args> [<feature arg>]*
<policy> <#policy_args> [<policy arg>]*
-The syntax to send a message using the dmsetup command is:
+The syntax to send a message using the dmsetup command is::
+
dmsetup message <mapped device> 0 sequential_threshold 1024
dmsetup message <mapped device> 0 random_threshold 8
-Using dmsetup:
+Using dmsetup::
+
dmsetup create blah --table "0 268435456 cache /dev/sdb /dev/sdc \
/dev/sdd 512 0 mq 4 sequential_threshold 1024 random_threshold 8"
creates a 128GB large mapped device named 'blah' with the
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
index 8ae1cf8e94da..f15e5254d05b 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=====
+Cache
+=====
+
Introduction
============
@@ -24,10 +28,13 @@ scenarios (eg. a vm image server).
Glossary
========
- Migration - Movement of the primary copy of a logical block from one
+ Migration
+ Movement of the primary copy of a logical block from one
device to the other.
- Promotion - Migration from slow device to fast device.
- Demotion - Migration from fast device to slow device.
+ Promotion
+ Migration from slow device to fast device.
+ Demotion
+ Migration from fast device to slow device.
The origin device always contains a copy of the logical block, which
may be out of date or kept in sync with the copy on the cache device
@@ -169,45 +176,53 @@ Target interface
Constructor
-----------
- cache <metadata dev> <cache dev> <origin dev> <block size>
- <#feature args> [<feature arg>]*
- <policy> <#policy args> [policy args]*
+ ::
- metadata dev : fast device holding the persistent metadata
- cache dev : fast device holding cached data blocks
- origin dev : slow device holding original data blocks
- block size : cache unit size in sectors
+ cache <metadata dev> <cache dev> <origin dev> <block size>
+ <#feature args> [<feature arg>]*
+ <policy> <#policy args> [policy args]*
- #feature args : number of feature arguments passed
- feature args : writethrough or passthrough (The default is writeback.)
+ ================ =======================================================
+ metadata dev fast device holding the persistent metadata
+ cache dev fast device holding cached data blocks
+ origin dev slow device holding original data blocks
+ block size cache unit size in sectors
- policy : the replacement policy to use
- #policy args : an even number of arguments corresponding to
- key/value pairs passed to the policy
- policy args : key/value pairs passed to the policy
- E.g. 'sequential_threshold 1024'
- See cache-policies.txt for details.
+ #feature args number of feature arguments passed
+ feature args writethrough or passthrough (The default is writeback.)
+
+ policy the replacement policy to use
+ #policy args an even number of arguments corresponding to
+ key/value pairs passed to the policy
+ policy args key/value pairs passed to the policy
+ E.g. 'sequential_threshold 1024'
+ See cache-policies.txt for details.
+ ================ =======================================================
Optional feature arguments are:
- writethrough : write through caching that prohibits cache block
- content from being different from origin block content.
- Without this argument, the default behaviour is to write
- back cache block contents later for performance reasons,
- so they may differ from the corresponding origin blocks.
- passthrough : a degraded mode useful for various cache coherency
- situations (e.g., rolling back snapshots of
- underlying storage). Reads and writes always go to
- the origin. If a write goes to a cached origin
- block, then the cache block is invalidated.
- To enable passthrough mode the cache must be clean.
- metadata2 : use version 2 of the metadata. This stores the dirty bits
- in a separate btree, which improves speed of shutting
- down the cache.
+ ==================== ========================================================
+ writethrough write through caching that prohibits cache block
+ content from being different from origin block content.
+ Without this argument, the default behaviour is to write
+ back cache block contents later for performance reasons,
+ so they may differ from the corresponding origin blocks.
- no_discard_passdown : disable passing down discards from the cache
- to the origin's data device.
+ passthrough a degraded mode useful for various cache coherency
+ situations (e.g., rolling back snapshots of
+ underlying storage). Reads and writes always go to
+ the origin. If a write goes to a cached origin
+ block, then the cache block is invalidated.
+ To enable passthrough mode the cache must be clean.
+
+ metadata2 use version 2 of the metadata. This stores the dirty
+ bits in a separate btree, which improves speed of
+ shutting down the cache.
+
+ no_discard_passdown disable passing down discards from the cache
+ to the origin's data device.
+ ==================== ========================================================
A policy called 'default' is always registered. This is an alias for
the policy we currently think is giving best all round performance.
@@ -218,54 +233,61 @@ the characteristics of a specific policy, always request it by name.
Status
------
-<metadata block size> <#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks>
-<cache block size> <#used cache blocks>/<#total cache blocks>
-<#read hits> <#read misses> <#write hits> <#write misses>
-<#demotions> <#promotions> <#dirty> <#features> <features>*
-<#core args> <core args>* <policy name> <#policy args> <policy args>*
-<cache metadata mode>
+::
-metadata block size : Fixed block size for each metadata block in
- sectors
-#used metadata blocks : Number of metadata blocks used
-#total metadata blocks : Total number of metadata blocks
-cache block size : Configurable block size for the cache device
- in sectors
-#used cache blocks : Number of blocks resident in the cache
-#total cache blocks : Total number of cache blocks
-#read hits : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
- to the cache
-#read misses : Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
- to the origin
-#write hits : Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped
- to the cache
-#write misses : Number of times a WRITE bio has been
- mapped to the origin
-#demotions : Number of times a block has been removed
- from the cache
-#promotions : Number of times a block has been moved to
- the cache
-#dirty : Number of blocks in the cache that differ
- from the origin
-#feature args : Number of feature args to follow
-feature args : 'writethrough' (optional)
-#core args : Number of core arguments (must be even)
-core args : Key/value pairs for tuning the core
- e.g. migration_threshold
-policy name : Name of the policy
-#policy args : Number of policy arguments to follow (must be even)
-policy args : Key/value pairs e.g. sequential_threshold
-cache metadata mode : ro if read-only, rw if read-write
- In serious cases where even a read-only mode is deemed unsafe
- no further I/O will be permitted and the status will just
- contain the string 'Fail'. The userspace recovery tools
- should then be used.
-needs_check : 'needs_check' if set, '-' if not set
- A metadata operation has failed, resulting in the needs_check
- flag being set in the metadata's superblock. The metadata
- device must be deactivated and checked/repaired before the
- cache can be made fully operational again. '-' indicates
- needs_check is not set.
+ <metadata block size> <#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks>
+ <cache block size> <#used cache blocks>/<#total cache blocks>
+ <#read hits> <#read misses> <#write hits> <#write misses>
+ <#demotions> <#promotions> <#dirty> <#features> <features>*
+ <#core args> <core args>* <policy name> <#policy args> <policy args>*
+ <cache metadata mode>
+
+
+========================= =====================================================
+metadata block size Fixed block size for each metadata block in
+ sectors
+#used metadata blocks Number of metadata blocks used
+#total metadata blocks Total number of metadata blocks
+cache block size Configurable block size for the cache device
+ in sectors
+#used cache blocks Number of blocks resident in the cache
+#total cache blocks Total number of cache blocks
+#read hits Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
+ to the cache
+#read misses Number of times a READ bio has been mapped
+ to the origin
+#write hits Number of times a WRITE bio has been mapped
+ to the cache
+#write misses Number of times a WRITE bio has been
+ mapped to the origin
+#demotions Number of times a block has been removed
+ from the cache
+#promotions Number of times a block has been moved to
+ the cache
+#dirty Number of blocks in the cache that differ
+ from the origin
+#feature args Number of feature args to follow
+feature args 'writethrough' (optional)
+#core args Number of core arguments (must be even)
+core args Key/value pairs for tuning the core
+ e.g. migration_threshold
+policy name Name of the policy
+#policy args Number of policy arguments to follow (must be even)
+policy args Key/value pairs e.g. sequential_threshold
+cache metadata mode ro if read-only, rw if read-write
+
+ In serious cases where even a read-only mode is
+ deemed unsafe no further I/O will be permitted and
+ the status will just contain the string 'Fail'.
+ The userspace recovery tools should then be used.
+needs_check 'needs_check' if set, '-' if not set
+ A metadata operation has failed, resulting in the
+ needs_check flag being set in the metadata's
+ superblock. The metadata device must be
+ deactivated and checked/repaired before the
+ cache can be made fully operational again.
+ '-' indicates needs_check is not set.
+========================= =====================================================
Messages
--------
@@ -274,11 +296,12 @@ Policies will have different tunables, specific to each one, so we
need a generic way of getting and setting these. Device-mapper
messages are used. (A sysfs interface would also be possible.)
-The message format is:
+The message format is::
<key> <value>
-E.g.
+E.g.::
+
dmsetup message my_cache 0 sequential_threshold 1024
@@ -290,11 +313,12 @@ of values from 5 to 9. Each cblock must be expressed as a decimal
value, in the future a variant message that takes cblock ranges
expressed in hexadecimal may be needed to better support efficient
invalidation of larger caches. The cache must be in passthrough mode
-when invalidate_cblocks is used.
+when invalidate_cblocks is used::
invalidate_cblocks [<cblock>|<cblock begin>-<cblock end>]*
-E.g.
+E.g.::
+
dmsetup message my_cache 0 invalidate_cblocks 2345 3456-4567 5678-6789
Examples
@@ -304,8 +328,10 @@ The test suite can be found here:
https://github.com/jthornber/device-mapper-test-suite
-dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
- /dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 512 1 writeback default 0'
-dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
- /dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 1024 1 writeback \
- mq 4 sequential_threshold 1024 random_threshold 8'
+::
+
+ dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
+ /dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 512 1 writeback default 0'
+ dmsetup create my_cache --table '0 41943040 cache /dev/mapper/metadata \
+ /dev/mapper/ssd /dev/mapper/origin 1024 1 writeback \
+ mq 4 sequential_threshold 1024 random_threshold 8'
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt
index 6426c45273cb..917ba8c33359 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,12 @@
+========
dm-delay
========
Device-Mapper's "delay" target delays reads and/or writes
and maps them to different devices.
-Parameters:
+Parameters::
+
<device> <offset> <delay> [<write_device> <write_offset> <write_delay>
[<flush_device> <flush_offset> <flush_delay>]]
@@ -14,15 +16,16 @@ Delays are specified in milliseconds.
Example scripts
===============
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create device delaying rw operation for 500ms
-echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` delay $1 0 500" | dmsetup create delayed
-]]
-
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create device delaying only write operation for 500ms and
-# splitting reads and writes to different devices $1 $2
-echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` delay $1 0 0 $2 0 500" | dmsetup create delayed
-]]
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create device delaying rw operation for 500ms
+ echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` delay $1 0 500" | dmsetup create delayed
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create device delaying only write operation for 500ms and
+ # splitting reads and writes to different devices $1 $2
+ echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` delay $1 0 0 $2 0 500" | dmsetup create delayed
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
index 3b3e1de21c9c..8f4a3f889d43 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+========
dm-crypt
-=========
+========
Device-Mapper's "crypt" target provides transparent encryption of block devices
using the kernel crypto API.
@@ -7,15 +8,20 @@ using the kernel crypto API.
For a more detailed description of supported parameters see:
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/wikis/DMCrypt
-Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \
+Parameters::
+
+ <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \
<offset> [<#opt_params> <opt_params>]
<cipher>
Encryption cipher, encryption mode and Initial Vector (IV) generator.
- The cipher specifications format is:
+ The cipher specifications format is::
+
cipher[:keycount]-chainmode-ivmode[:ivopts]
- Examples:
+
+ Examples::
+
aes-cbc-essiv:sha256
aes-xts-plain64
serpent-xts-plain64
@@ -25,12 +31,17 @@ Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \
as for the first format type.
This format is mainly used for specification of authenticated modes.
- The crypto API cipher specifications format is:
+ The crypto API cipher specifications format is::
+
capi:cipher_api_spec-ivmode[:ivopts]
- Examples:
+
+ Examples::
+
capi:cbc(aes)-essiv:sha256
capi:xts(aes)-plain64
- Examples of authenticated modes:
+
+ Examples of authenticated modes::
+
capi:gcm(aes)-random
capi:authenc(hmac(sha256),xts(aes))-random
capi:rfc7539(chacha20,poly1305)-random
@@ -142,21 +153,21 @@ LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk
encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create a crypt device using dmsetup
-dmsetup create crypt1 --table "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` crypt aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0 $1 0"
-]]
+::
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create a crypt device using dmsetup when encryption key is stored in keyring service
-dmsetup create crypt2 --table "0 `blockdev --getsize $1` crypt aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 :32:logon:my_prefix:my_key 0 $1 0"
-]]
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create a crypt device using dmsetup
+ dmsetup create crypt1 --table "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` crypt aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0 $1 0"
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create a crypt device using cryptsetup and LUKS header with default cipher
-cryptsetup luksFormat $1
-cryptsetup luksOpen $1 crypt1
-]]
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create a crypt device using dmsetup when encryption key is stored in keyring service
+ dmsetup create crypt2 --table "0 `blockdev --getsize $1` crypt aes-cbc-essiv:sha256 :32:logon:my_prefix:my_key 0 $1 0"
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create a crypt device using cryptsetup and LUKS header with default cipher
+ cryptsetup luksFormat $1
+ cryptsetup luksOpen $1 crypt1
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt
index 9f0e247d0877..86138735879d 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-flakey.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========
dm-flakey
=========
@@ -15,17 +16,26 @@ underlying devices.
Table parameters
----------------
+
+::
+
<dev path> <offset> <up interval> <down interval> \
[<num_features> [<feature arguments>]]
Mandatory parameters:
- <dev path>: Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
- "major:minor" device-number.
- <offset>: Starting sector within the device.
- <up interval>: Number of seconds device is available.
- <down interval>: Number of seconds device returns errors.
+
+ <dev path>:
+ Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
+ "major:minor" device-number.
+ <offset>:
+ Starting sector within the device.
+ <up interval>:
+ Number of seconds device is available.
+ <down interval>:
+ Number of seconds device returns errors.
Optional feature parameters:
+
If no feature parameters are present, during the periods of
unreliability, all I/O returns errors.
@@ -41,17 +51,24 @@ Optional feature parameters:
During <down interval>, replace <Nth_byte> of the data of
each matching bio with <value>.
- <Nth_byte>: The offset of the byte to replace.
- Counting starts at 1, to replace the first byte.
- <direction>: Either 'r' to corrupt reads or 'w' to corrupt writes.
- 'w' is incompatible with drop_writes.
- <value>: The value (from 0-255) to write.
- <flags>: Perform the replacement only if bio->bi_opf has all the
- selected flags set.
+ <Nth_byte>:
+ The offset of the byte to replace.
+ Counting starts at 1, to replace the first byte.
+ <direction>:
+ Either 'r' to corrupt reads or 'w' to corrupt writes.
+ 'w' is incompatible with drop_writes.
+ <value>:
+ The value (from 0-255) to write.
+ <flags>:
+ Perform the replacement only if bio->bi_opf has all the
+ selected flags set.
Examples:
+
+Replaces the 32nd byte of READ bios with the value 1::
+
corrupt_bio_byte 32 r 1 0
- - replaces the 32nd byte of READ bios with the value 1
+
+Replaces the 224th byte of REQ_META (=32) bios with the value 0::
corrupt_bio_byte 224 w 0 32
- - replaces the 224th byte of REQ_META (=32) bios with the value 0
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt
index 8464ee7c01b8..a0db2f30030e 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-init.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+================================
Early creation of mapped devices
-====================================
+================================
It is possible to configure a device-mapper device to act as the root device for
your system in two ways.
@@ -12,15 +13,17 @@ The second is to create one or more device-mappers using the module parameter
The format is specified as a string of data separated by commas and optionally
semi-colons, where:
+
- a comma is used to separate fields like name, uuid, flags and table
(specifies one device)
- a semi-colon is used to separate devices.
-So the format will look like this:
+So the format will look like this::
dm-mod.create=<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+][;<name>,<uuid>,<minor>,<flags>,<table>[,<table>+]+]
-Where,
+Where::
+
<name> ::= The device name.
<uuid> ::= xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx | ""
<minor> ::= The device minor number | ""
@@ -29,7 +32,7 @@ Where,
<target_type> ::= "verity" | "linear" | ... (see list below)
The dm line should be equivalent to the one used by the dmsetup tool with the
---concise argument.
+`--concise` argument.
Target types
============
@@ -38,32 +41,34 @@ Not all target types are available as there are serious risks in allowing
activation of certain DM targets without first using userspace tools to check
the validity of associated metadata.
- "cache": constrained, userspace should verify cache device
- "crypt": allowed
- "delay": allowed
- "era": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
- "flakey": constrained, meant for test
- "linear": allowed
- "log-writes": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
- "mirror": constrained, userspace should verify main/mirror device
- "raid": constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
- "snapshot": constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
- "snapshot-origin": allowed
- "snapshot-merge": constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
- "striped": allowed
- "switch": constrained, userspace should verify dev path
- "thin": constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
- "thin-pool": constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
- "verity": allowed
- "writecache": constrained, userspace should verify cache device
- "zero": constrained, not meant for rootfs
+======================= =======================================================
+`cache` constrained, userspace should verify cache device
+`crypt` allowed
+`delay` allowed
+`era` constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+`flakey` constrained, meant for test
+`linear` allowed
+`log-writes` constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+`mirror` constrained, userspace should verify main/mirror device
+`raid` constrained, userspace should verify metadata device
+`snapshot` constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
+`snapshot-origin` allowed
+`snapshot-merge` constrained, userspace should verify src/dst device
+`striped` allowed
+`switch` constrained, userspace should verify dev path
+`thin` constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
+`thin-pool` constrained, requires dm target message from userspace
+`verity` allowed
+`writecache` constrained, userspace should verify cache device
+`zero` constrained, not meant for rootfs
+======================= =======================================================
If the target is not listed above, it is constrained by default (not tested).
Examples
========
An example of booting to a linear array made up of user-mode linux block
-devices:
+devices::
dm-mod.create="lroot,,,rw, 0 4096 linear 98:16 0, 4096 4096 linear 98:32 0" root=/dev/dm-0
@@ -71,8 +76,8 @@ This will boot to a rw dm-linear target of 8192 sectors split across two block
devices identified by their major:minor numbers. After boot, udev will rename
this target to /dev/mapper/lroot (depending on the rules). No uuid was assigned.
-An example of multiple device-mappers, with the dm-mod.create="..." contents is shown here
-split on multiple lines for readability:
+An example of multiple device-mappers, with the dm-mod.create="..." contents
+is shown here split on multiple lines for readability::
vroot,,,ro,
0 1740800 verity 254:0 254:0 1740800 sha1
@@ -84,30 +89,36 @@ split on multiple lines for readability:
Other examples (per target):
-"crypt":
+"crypt"::
+
dm-crypt,,8,ro,
0 1048576 crypt aes-xts-plain64
babebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabebabe 0
/dev/sda 0 1 allow_discards
-"delay":
+"delay"::
+
dm-delay,,4,ro,0 409600 delay /dev/sda1 0 500
-"linear":
+"linear"::
+
dm-linear,,,rw,
0 32768 linear /dev/sda1 0,
32768 1024000 linear /dev/sda2 0,
1056768 204800 linear /dev/sda3 0,
1261568 512000 linear /dev/sda4 0
-"snapshot-origin":
+"snapshot-origin"::
+
dm-snap-orig,,4,ro,0 409600 snapshot-origin 8:2
-"striped":
+"striped"::
+
dm-striped,,4,ro,0 1638400 striped 4 4096
/dev/sda1 0 /dev/sda2 0 /dev/sda3 0 /dev/sda4 0
-"verity":
+"verity"::
+
dm-verity,,4,ro,
0 1638400 verity 1 8:1 8:2 4096 4096 204800 1 sha256
fb1a5a0f00deb908d8b53cb270858975e76cf64105d412ce764225d53b8f3cfd
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
index 297251b0d2d5..4fa8d2939d46 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+============
+dm-integrity
+============
+
The dm-integrity target emulates a block device that has additional
per-sector tags that can be used for storing integrity information.
@@ -28,15 +32,16 @@ zeroes. If the superblock is neither valid nor zeroed, the dm-integrity
target can't be loaded.
To use the target for the first time:
+
1. overwrite the superblock with zeroes
2. load the dm-integrity target with one-sector size, the kernel driver
- will format the device
+ will format the device
3. unload the dm-integrity target
4. read the "provided_data_sectors" value from the superblock
5. load the dm-integrity target with the the target size
- "provided_data_sectors"
+ "provided_data_sectors"
6. if you want to use dm-integrity with dm-crypt, load the dm-crypt target
- with the size "provided_data_sectors"
+ with the size "provided_data_sectors"
Target arguments:
@@ -44,22 +49,26 @@ Target arguments:
1. the underlying block device
2. the number of reserved sector at the beginning of the device - the
- dm-integrity won't read of write these sectors
+ dm-integrity won't read of write these sectors
3. the size of the integrity tag (if "-" is used, the size is taken from
- the internal-hash algorithm)
+ the internal-hash algorithm)
4. mode:
- D - direct writes (without journal) - in this mode, journaling is
+
+ D - direct writes (without journal)
+ in this mode, journaling is
not used and data sectors and integrity tags are written
separately. In case of crash, it is possible that the data
and integrity tag doesn't match.
- J - journaled writes - data and integrity tags are written to the
+ J - journaled writes
+ data and integrity tags are written to the
journal and atomicity is guaranteed. In case of crash,
either both data and tag or none of them are written. The
journaled mode degrades write throughput twice because the
data have to be written twice.
- R - recovery mode - in this mode, journal is not replayed,
+ R - recovery mode
+ in this mode, journal is not replayed,
checksums are not checked and writes to the device are not
allowed. This mode is useful for data recovery if the
device cannot be activated in any of the other standard
@@ -154,9 +163,12 @@ and the reloaded target would be non-functional.
The layout of the formatted block device:
-* reserved sectors (they are not used by this target, they can be used for
- storing LUKS metadata or for other purpose), the size of the reserved
- area is specified in the target arguments
+
+* reserved sectors
+ (they are not used by this target, they can be used for
+ storing LUKS metadata or for other purpose), the size of the reserved
+ area is specified in the target arguments
+
* superblock (4kiB)
* magic string - identifies that the device was formatted
* version
@@ -168,34 +180,47 @@ The layout of the formatted block device:
metadata and padding). The user of this target should not send
bios that access data beyond the "provided data sectors" limit.
* flags - a flag is set if journal_mac is used
+
* journal
The journal is divided into sections, each section contains:
+
* metadata area (4kiB), it contains journal entries
- every journal entry contains:
+
+ - every journal entry contains:
+
* logical sector (specifies where the data and tag should
be written)
* last 8 bytes of data
* integrity tag (the size is specified in the superblock)
- every metadata sector ends with
+
+ - every metadata sector ends with
+
* mac (8-bytes), all the macs in 8 metadata sectors form a
64-byte value. It is used to store hmac of sector
numbers in the journal section, to protect against a
possibility that the attacker tampers with sector
numbers in the journal.
* commit id
+
* data area (the size is variable; it depends on how many journal
entries fit into the metadata area)
- every sector in the data area contains:
+
+ - every sector in the data area contains:
+
* data (504 bytes of data, the last 8 bytes are stored in
the journal entry)
* commit id
+
To test if the whole journal section was written correctly, every
512-byte sector of the journal ends with 8-byte commit id. If the
commit id matches on all sectors in a journal section, then it is
assumed that the section was written correctly. If the commit id
doesn't match, the section was written partially and it should not
be replayed.
-* one or more runs of interleaved tags and data. Each run contains:
+
+* one or more runs of interleaved tags and data.
+ Each run contains:
+
* tag area - it contains integrity tags. There is one tag for each
sector in the data area
* data area - it contains data sectors. The number of data sectors
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt
index 3b5d9a52cdcf..d2492917a1f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-io.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=====
dm-io
=====
@@ -7,7 +8,7 @@ version.
The user must set up an io_region structure to describe the desired location
of the I/O. Each io_region indicates a block-device along with the starting
-sector and size of the region.
+sector and size of the region::
struct io_region {
struct block_device *bdev;
@@ -19,7 +20,7 @@ Dm-io can read from one io_region or write to one or more io_regions. Writes
to multiple regions are specified by an array of io_region structures.
The first I/O service type takes a list of memory pages as the data buffer for
-the I/O, along with an offset into the first page.
+the I/O, along with an offset into the first page::
struct page_list {
struct page_list *next;
@@ -35,7 +36,7 @@ the I/O, along with an offset into the first page.
The second I/O service type takes an array of bio vectors as the data buffer
for the I/O. This service can be handy if the caller has a pre-assembled bio,
-but wants to direct different portions of the bio to different devices.
+but wants to direct different portions of the bio to different devices::
int dm_io_sync_bvec(unsigned int num_regions, struct io_region *where,
int rw, struct bio_vec *bvec,
@@ -47,7 +48,7 @@ but wants to direct different portions of the bio to different devices.
The third I/O service type takes a pointer to a vmalloc'd memory buffer as the
data buffer for the I/O. This service can be handy if the caller needs to do
I/O to a large region but doesn't want to allocate a large number of individual
-memory pages.
+memory pages::
int dm_io_sync_vm(unsigned int num_regions, struct io_region *where, int rw,
void *data, unsigned long *error_bits);
@@ -55,11 +56,11 @@ memory pages.
void *data, io_notify_fn fn, void *context);
Callers of the asynchronous I/O services must include the name of a completion
-callback routine and a pointer to some context data for the I/O.
+callback routine and a pointer to some context data for the I/O::
typedef void (*io_notify_fn)(unsigned long error, void *context);
-The "error" parameter in this callback, as well as the "*error" parameter in
+The "error" parameter in this callback, as well as the `*error` parameter in
all of the synchronous versions, is a bitset (instead of a simple error value).
In the case of an write-I/O to multiple regions, this bitset allows dm-io to
indicate success or failure on each individual region.
@@ -72,4 +73,3 @@ always available in order to avoid unnecessary waiting while performing I/O.
When the user is finished using the dm-io services, they should call
dm_io_put() and specify the same number of pages that were given on the
dm_io_get() call.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt
index c155ac569c44..ba4fce39bc27 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-log.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=====================
Device-Mapper Logging
=====================
The device-mapper logging code is used by some of the device-mapper
@@ -16,11 +17,13 @@ dm_dirty_log_type in include/linux/dm-dirty-log.h). Various different
logging implementations are available and provide different
capabilities. The list includes:
+============== ==============================================================
Type Files
-==== =====
+============== ==============================================================
disk drivers/md/dm-log.c
core drivers/md/dm-log.c
userspace drivers/md/dm-log-userspace* include/linux/dm-log-userspace.h
+============== ==============================================================
The "disk" log type
-------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt
index f4db2562175c..d8e381c1cb02 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-queue-length.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===============
dm-queue-length
===============
@@ -6,12 +7,18 @@ which selects a path with the least number of in-flight I/Os.
The path selector name is 'queue-length'.
Table parameters for each path: [<repeat_count>]
+
+::
+
<repeat_count>: The number of I/Os to dispatch using the selected
path before switching to the next path.
If not given, internal default is used. To check
the default value, see the activated table.
Status for each path: <status> <fail-count> <in-flight>
+
+::
+
<status>: 'A' if the path is active, 'F' if the path is failed.
<fail-count>: The number of path failures.
<in-flight>: The number of in-flight I/Os on the path.
@@ -29,11 +36,13 @@ Examples
========
In case that 2 paths (sda and sdb) are used with repeat_count == 128.
-# echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 queue-length 0 2 1 8:0 128 8:16 128" \
- dmsetup create test
-#
-# dmsetup table
-test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 queue-length 0 2 1 8:0 128 8:16 128
-#
-# dmsetup status
-test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 1 8:0 A 0 0 8:16 A 0 0
+::
+
+ # echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 queue-length 0 2 1 8:0 128 8:16 128" \
+ dmsetup create test
+ #
+ # dmsetup table
+ test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 queue-length 0 2 1 8:0 128 8:16 128
+ #
+ # dmsetup status
+ test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 1 8:0 A 0 0 8:16 A 0 0
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
index 2355bef14653..2fe255b130fb 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-raid.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======
dm-raid
=======
@@ -8,49 +9,66 @@ interface.
Mapping Table Interface
-----------------------
-The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
+The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters::
<raid_type> <#raid_params> <raid_params> \
<#raid_devs> <metadata_dev0> <dev0> [.. <metadata_devN> <devN>]
<raid_type>:
+
+ ============= ===============================================================
raid0 RAID0 striping (no resilience)
raid1 RAID1 mirroring
raid4 RAID4 with dedicated last parity disk
raid5_n RAID5 with dedicated last parity disk supporting takeover
Same as raid4
- -Transitory layout
+
+ - Transitory layout
raid5_la RAID5 left asymmetric
+
- rotating parity 0 with data continuation
raid5_ra RAID5 right asymmetric
+
- rotating parity N with data continuation
raid5_ls RAID5 left symmetric
+
- rotating parity 0 with data restart
raid5_rs RAID5 right symmetric
+
- rotating parity N with data restart
raid6_zr RAID6 zero restart
+
- rotating parity zero (left-to-right) with data restart
raid6_nr RAID6 N restart
+
- rotating parity N (right-to-left) with data restart
raid6_nc RAID6 N continue
+
- rotating parity N (right-to-left) with data continuation
raid6_n_6 RAID6 with dedicate parity disks
+
- parity and Q-syndrome on the last 2 disks;
layout for takeover from/to raid4/raid5_n
raid6_la_6 Same as "raid_la" plus dedicated last Q-syndrome disk
+
- layout for takeover from raid5_la from/to raid6
raid6_ra_6 Same as "raid5_ra" dedicated last Q-syndrome disk
+
- layout for takeover from raid5_ra from/to raid6
raid6_ls_6 Same as "raid5_ls" dedicated last Q-syndrome disk
+
- layout for takeover from raid5_ls from/to raid6
raid6_rs_6 Same as "raid5_rs" dedicated last Q-syndrome disk
+
- layout for takeover from raid5_rs from/to raid6
raid10 Various RAID10 inspired algorithms chosen by additional params
(see raid10_format and raid10_copies below)
+
- RAID10: Striped Mirrors (aka 'Striping on top of mirrors')
- RAID1E: Integrated Adjacent Stripe Mirroring
- RAID1E: Integrated Offset Stripe Mirroring
- - and other similar RAID10 variants
+ - and other similar RAID10 variants
+ ============= ===============================================================
Reference: Chapter 4 of
http://www.snia.org/sites/default/files/SNIA_DDF_Technical_Position_v2.0.pdf
@@ -58,33 +76,41 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
<#raid_params>: The number of parameters that follow.
<raid_params> consists of
+
Mandatory parameters:
- <chunk_size>: Chunk size in sectors. This parameter is often known as
+ <chunk_size>:
+ Chunk size in sectors. This parameter is often known as
"stripe size". It is the only mandatory parameter and
is placed first.
followed by optional parameters (in any order):
- [sync|nosync] Force or prevent RAID initialization.
+ [sync|nosync]
+ Force or prevent RAID initialization.
- [rebuild <idx>] Rebuild drive number 'idx' (first drive is 0).
+ [rebuild <idx>]
+ Rebuild drive number 'idx' (first drive is 0).
[daemon_sleep <ms>]
Interval between runs of the bitmap daemon that
clear bits. A longer interval means less bitmap I/O but
resyncing after a failure is likely to take longer.
- [min_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>] Throttle RAID initialization
- [max_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>] Throttle RAID initialization
- [write_mostly <idx>] Mark drive index 'idx' write-mostly.
- [max_write_behind <sectors>] See '--write-behind=' (man mdadm)
- [stripe_cache <sectors>] Stripe cache size (RAID 4/5/6 only)
+ [min_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>]
+ Throttle RAID initialization
+ [max_recovery_rate <kB/sec/disk>]
+ Throttle RAID initialization
+ [write_mostly <idx>]
+ Mark drive index 'idx' write-mostly.
+ [max_write_behind <sectors>]
+ See '--write-behind=' (man mdadm)
+ [stripe_cache <sectors>]
+ Stripe cache size (RAID 4/5/6 only)
[region_size <sectors>]
The region_size multiplied by the number of regions is the
logical size of the array. The bitmap records the device
synchronisation state for each region.
- [raid10_copies <# copies>]
- [raid10_format <near|far|offset>]
+ [raid10_copies <# copies>], [raid10_format <near|far|offset>]
These two options are used to alter the default layout of
a RAID10 configuration. The number of copies is can be
specified, but the default is 2. There are also three
@@ -93,13 +119,17 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
respect to mirroring. If these options are left unspecified,
or 'raid10_copies 2' and/or 'raid10_format near' are given,
then the layouts for 2, 3 and 4 devices are:
+
+ ======== ========== ==============
2 drives 3 drives 4 drives
- -------- ---------- --------------
+ ======== ========== ==============
A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A1 A1 A2 A2
A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4
A3 A3 A4 A4 A5 A5 A5 A6 A6
A4 A4 A5 A6 A6 A7 A7 A8 A8
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
+ ======== ========== ==============
+
The 2-device layout is equivalent 2-way RAID1. The 4-device
layout is what a traditional RAID10 would look like. The
3-device layout is what might be called a 'RAID1E - Integrated
@@ -107,8 +137,10 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
If 'raid10_copies 2' and 'raid10_format far', then the layouts
for 2, 3 and 4 devices are:
+
+ ======== ============ ===================
2 drives 3 drives 4 drives
- -------- -------------- --------------------
+ ======== ============ ===================
A1 A2 A1 A2 A3 A1 A2 A3 A4
A3 A4 A4 A5 A6 A5 A6 A7 A8
A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A9 A10 A11 A12
@@ -117,11 +149,14 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
A4 A3 A6 A4 A5 A6 A5 A8 A7
A6 A5 A9 A7 A8 A10 A9 A12 A11
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
+ ======== ============ ===================
If 'raid10_copies 2' and 'raid10_format offset', then the
layouts for 2, 3 and 4 devices are:
+
+ ======== ========== ================
2 drives 3 drives 4 drives
- -------- ------------ -----------------
+ ======== ========== ================
A1 A2 A1 A2 A3 A1 A2 A3 A4
A2 A1 A3 A1 A2 A2 A1 A4 A3
A3 A4 A4 A5 A6 A5 A6 A7 A8
@@ -129,6 +164,8 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A9 A10 A11 A12
A6 A5 A9 A7 A8 A10 A9 A12 A11
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
+ ======== ========== ================
+
Here we see layouts closely akin to 'RAID1E - Integrated
Offset Stripe Mirroring'.
@@ -190,22 +227,25 @@ The target is named "raid" and it accepts the following parameters:
Example Tables
--------------
-# RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (no metadata devices)
-# No metadata devices specified to hold superblock/bitmap info
-# Chunk size of 1MiB
-# (Lines separated for easy reading)
-0 1960893648 raid \
- raid4 1 2048 \
- 5 - 8:17 - 8:33 - 8:49 - 8:65 - 8:81
+::
-# RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (with metadata devices)
-# Chunk size of 1MiB, force RAID initialization,
-# min recovery rate at 20 kiB/sec/disk
+ # RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (no metadata devices)
+ # No metadata devices specified to hold superblock/bitmap info
+ # Chunk size of 1MiB
+ # (Lines separated for easy reading)
-0 1960893648 raid \
- raid4 4 2048 sync min_recovery_rate 20 \
- 5 8:17 8:18 8:33 8:34 8:49 8:50 8:65 8:66 8:81 8:82
+ 0 1960893648 raid \
+ raid4 1 2048 \
+ 5 - 8:17 - 8:33 - 8:49 - 8:65 - 8:81
+
+ # RAID4 - 4 data drives, 1 parity (with metadata devices)
+ # Chunk size of 1MiB, force RAID initialization,
+ # min recovery rate at 20 kiB/sec/disk
+
+ 0 1960893648 raid \
+ raid4 4 2048 sync min_recovery_rate 20 \
+ 5 8:17 8:18 8:33 8:34 8:49 8:50 8:65 8:66 8:81 8:82
Status Output
@@ -219,41 +259,58 @@ Arguments that can be repeated are ordered by value.
'dmsetup status' yields information on the state and health of the array.
The output is as follows (normally a single line, but expanded here for
-clarity):
-1: <s> <l> raid \
-2: <raid_type> <#devices> <health_chars> \
-3: <sync_ratio> <sync_action> <mismatch_cnt>
+clarity)::
+
+ 1: <s> <l> raid \
+ 2: <raid_type> <#devices> <health_chars> \
+ 3: <sync_ratio> <sync_action> <mismatch_cnt>
Line 1 is the standard output produced by device-mapper.
-Line 2 & 3 are produced by the raid target and are best explained by example:
+
+Line 2 & 3 are produced by the raid target and are best explained by example::
+
0 1960893648 raid raid4 5 AAAAA 2/490221568 init 0
+
Here we can see the RAID type is raid4, there are 5 devices - all of
which are 'A'live, and the array is 2/490221568 complete with its initial
recovery. Here is a fuller description of the individual fields:
+
+ =============== =========================================================
<raid_type> Same as the <raid_type> used to create the array.
- <health_chars> One char for each device, indicating: 'A' = alive and
- in-sync, 'a' = alive but not in-sync, 'D' = dead/failed.
+ <health_chars> One char for each device, indicating:
+
+ - 'A' = alive and in-sync
+ - 'a' = alive but not in-sync
+ - 'D' = dead/failed.
<sync_ratio> The ratio indicating how much of the array has undergone
the process described by 'sync_action'. If the
'sync_action' is "check" or "repair", then the process
of "resync" or "recover" can be considered complete.
<sync_action> One of the following possible states:
- idle - No synchronization action is being performed.
- frozen - The current action has been halted.
- resync - Array is undergoing its initial synchronization
+
+ idle
+ - No synchronization action is being performed.
+ frozen
+ - The current action has been halted.
+ resync
+ - Array is undergoing its initial synchronization
or is resynchronizing after an unclean shutdown
(possibly aided by a bitmap).
- recover - A device in the array is being rebuilt or
+ recover
+ - A device in the array is being rebuilt or
replaced.
- check - A user-initiated full check of the array is
+ check
+ - A user-initiated full check of the array is
being performed. All blocks are read and
checked for consistency. The number of
discrepancies found are recorded in
<mismatch_cnt>. No changes are made to the
array by this action.
- repair - The same as "check", but discrepancies are
+ repair
+ - The same as "check", but discrepancies are
corrected.
- reshape - The array is undergoing a reshape.
+ reshape
+ - The array is undergoing a reshape.
<mismatch_cnt> The number of discrepancies found between mirror copies
in RAID1/10 or wrong parity values found in RAID4/5/6.
This value is valid only after a "check" of the array
@@ -261,10 +318,11 @@ recovery. Here is a fuller description of the individual fields:
<data_offset> The current data offset to the start of the user data on
each component device of a raid set (see the respective
raid parameter to support out-of-place reshaping).
- <journal_char> 'A' - active write-through journal device.
- 'a' - active write-back journal device.
- 'D' - dead journal device.
- '-' - no journal device.
+ <journal_char> - 'A' - active write-through journal device.
+ - 'a' - active write-back journal device.
+ - 'D' - dead journal device.
+ - '-' - no journal device.
+ =============== =========================================================
Message Interface
@@ -272,12 +330,15 @@ Message Interface
The dm-raid target will accept certain actions through the 'message' interface.
('man dmsetup' for more information on the message interface.) These actions
include:
- "idle" - Halt the current sync action.
- "frozen" - Freeze the current sync action.
- "resync" - Initiate/continue a resync.
- "recover"- Initiate/continue a recover process.
- "check" - Initiate a check (i.e. a "scrub") of the array.
- "repair" - Initiate a repair of the array.
+
+ ========= ================================================
+ "idle" Halt the current sync action.
+ "frozen" Freeze the current sync action.
+ "resync" Initiate/continue a resync.
+ "recover" Initiate/continue a recover process.
+ "check" Initiate a check (i.e. a "scrub") of the array.
+ "repair" Initiate a repair of the array.
+ ========= ================================================
Discard Support
@@ -307,48 +368,52 @@ increasingly whitelisted in the kernel and can thus be trusted.
For trusted devices, the following dm-raid module parameter can be set
to safely enable discard support for RAID 4/5/6:
+
'devices_handle_discards_safely'
Version History
---------------
-1.0.0 Initial version. Support for RAID 4/5/6
-1.1.0 Added support for RAID 1
-1.2.0 Handle creation of arrays that contain failed devices.
-1.3.0 Added support for RAID 10
-1.3.1 Allow device replacement/rebuild for RAID 10
-1.3.2 Fix/improve redundancy checking for RAID10
-1.4.0 Non-functional change. Removes arg from mapping function.
-1.4.1 RAID10 fix redundancy validation checks (commit 55ebbb5).
-1.4.2 Add RAID10 "far" and "offset" algorithm support.
-1.5.0 Add message interface to allow manipulation of the sync_action.
+
+::
+
+ 1.0.0 Initial version. Support for RAID 4/5/6
+ 1.1.0 Added support for RAID 1
+ 1.2.0 Handle creation of arrays that contain failed devices.
+ 1.3.0 Added support for RAID 10
+ 1.3.1 Allow device replacement/rebuild for RAID 10
+ 1.3.2 Fix/improve redundancy checking for RAID10
+ 1.4.0 Non-functional change. Removes arg from mapping function.
+ 1.4.1 RAID10 fix redundancy validation checks (commit 55ebbb5).
+ 1.4.2 Add RAID10 "far" and "offset" algorithm support.
+ 1.5.0 Add message interface to allow manipulation of the sync_action.
New status (STATUSTYPE_INFO) fields: sync_action and mismatch_cnt.
-1.5.1 Add ability to restore transiently failed devices on resume.
-1.5.2 'mismatch_cnt' is zero unless [last_]sync_action is "check".
-1.6.0 Add discard support (and devices_handle_discard_safely module param).
-1.7.0 Add support for MD RAID0 mappings.
-1.8.0 Explicitly check for compatible flags in the superblock metadata
+ 1.5.1 Add ability to restore transiently failed devices on resume.
+ 1.5.2 'mismatch_cnt' is zero unless [last_]sync_action is "check".
+ 1.6.0 Add discard support (and devices_handle_discard_safely module param).
+ 1.7.0 Add support for MD RAID0 mappings.
+ 1.8.0 Explicitly check for compatible flags in the superblock metadata
and reject to start the raid set if any are set by a newer
target version, thus avoiding data corruption on a raid set
with a reshape in progress.
-1.9.0 Add support for RAID level takeover/reshape/region size
+ 1.9.0 Add support for RAID level takeover/reshape/region size
and set size reduction.
-1.9.1 Fix activation of existing RAID 4/10 mapped devices
-1.9.2 Don't emit '- -' on the status table line in case the constructor
+ 1.9.1 Fix activation of existing RAID 4/10 mapped devices
+ 1.9.2 Don't emit '- -' on the status table line in case the constructor
fails reading a superblock. Correctly emit 'maj:min1 maj:min2' and
'D' on the status line. If '- -' is passed into the constructor, emit
'- -' on the table line and '-' as the status line health character.
-1.10.0 Add support for raid4/5/6 journal device
-1.10.1 Fix data corruption on reshape request
-1.11.0 Fix table line argument order
+ 1.10.0 Add support for raid4/5/6 journal device
+ 1.10.1 Fix data corruption on reshape request
+ 1.11.0 Fix table line argument order
(wrong raid10_copies/raid10_format sequence)
-1.11.1 Add raid4/5/6 journal write-back support via journal_mode option
-1.12.1 Fix for MD deadlock between mddev_suspend() and md_write_start() available
-1.13.0 Fix dev_health status at end of "recover" (was 'a', now 'A')
-1.13.1 Fix deadlock caused by early md_stop_writes(). Also fix size an
+ 1.11.1 Add raid4/5/6 journal write-back support via journal_mode option
+ 1.12.1 Fix for MD deadlock between mddev_suspend() and md_write_start() available
+ 1.13.0 Fix dev_health status at end of "recover" (was 'a', now 'A')
+ 1.13.1 Fix deadlock caused by early md_stop_writes(). Also fix size an
state races.
-1.13.2 Fix raid redundancy validation and avoid keeping raid set frozen
-1.14.0 Fix reshape race on small devices. Fix stripe adding reshape
+ 1.13.2 Fix raid redundancy validation and avoid keeping raid set frozen
+ 1.14.0 Fix reshape race on small devices. Fix stripe adding reshape
deadlock/potential data corruption. Update superblock when
specific devices are requested via rebuild. Fix RAID leg
rebuild errors.
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt
index fb1d4a0cf122..facf277fc13c 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===============
dm-service-time
===============
@@ -12,25 +13,34 @@ in a path-group, and it can be specified as a table argument.
The path selector name is 'service-time'.
-Table parameters for each path: [<repeat_count> [<relative_throughput>]]
- <repeat_count>: The number of I/Os to dispatch using the selected
+Table parameters for each path:
+
+ [<repeat_count> [<relative_throughput>]]
+ <repeat_count>:
+ The number of I/Os to dispatch using the selected
path before switching to the next path.
If not given, internal default is used. To check
the default value, see the activated table.
- <relative_throughput>: The relative throughput value of the path
+ <relative_throughput>:
+ The relative throughput value of the path
among all paths in the path-group.
The valid range is 0-100.
If not given, minimum value '1' is used.
If '0' is given, the path isn't selected while
other paths having a positive value are available.
-Status for each path: <status> <fail-count> <in-flight-size> \
- <relative_throughput>
- <status>: 'A' if the path is active, 'F' if the path is failed.
- <fail-count>: The number of path failures.
- <in-flight-size>: The size of in-flight I/Os on the path.
- <relative_throughput>: The relative throughput value of the path
- among all paths in the path-group.
+Status for each path:
+
+ <status> <fail-count> <in-flight-size> <relative_throughput>
+ <status>:
+ 'A' if the path is active, 'F' if the path is failed.
+ <fail-count>:
+ The number of path failures.
+ <in-flight-size>:
+ The size of in-flight I/Os on the path.
+ <relative_throughput>:
+ The relative throughput value of the path
+ among all paths in the path-group.
Algorithm
@@ -39,7 +49,7 @@ Algorithm
dm-service-time adds the I/O size to 'in-flight-size' when the I/O is
dispatched and subtracts when completed.
Basically, dm-service-time selects a path having minimum service time
-which is calculated by:
+which is calculated by::
('in-flight-size' + 'size-of-incoming-io') / 'relative_throughput'
@@ -67,25 +77,25 @@ Examples
========
In case that 2 paths (sda and sdb) are used with repeat_count == 128
and sda has an average throughput 1GB/s and sdb has 4GB/s,
-'relative_throughput' value may be '1' for sda and '4' for sdb.
+'relative_throughput' value may be '1' for sda and '4' for sdb::
-# echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 1 8:16 128 4" \
- dmsetup create test
-#
-# dmsetup table
-test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 1 8:16 128 4
-#
-# dmsetup status
-test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 2 8:0 A 0 0 1 8:16 A 0 0 4
+ # echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 1 8:16 128 4" \
+ dmsetup create test
+ #
+ # dmsetup table
+ test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 1 8:16 128 4
+ #
+ # dmsetup status
+ test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 2 8:0 A 0 0 1 8:16 A 0 0 4
-Or '2' for sda and '8' for sdb would be also true.
+Or '2' for sda and '8' for sdb would be also true::
-# echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 2 8:16 128 8" \
- dmsetup create test
-#
-# dmsetup table
-test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 2 8:16 128 8
-#
-# dmsetup status
-test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 2 8:0 A 0 0 2 8:16 A 0 0 8
+ # echo "0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 2 8:16 128 8" \
+ dmsetup create test
+ #
+ # dmsetup table
+ test: 0 10 multipath 0 0 1 1 service-time 0 2 2 8:0 128 2 8:16 128 8
+ #
+ # dmsetup status
+ test: 0 10 multipath 2 0 0 0 1 1 E 0 2 2 8:0 A 0 0 2 8:16 A 0 0 8
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt
index 07edbd85c714..4a8ee8d069c9 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-uevent.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====================
+device-mapper uevent
+====================
+
The device-mapper uevent code adds the capability to device-mapper to create
and send kobject uevents (uevents). Previously device-mapper events were only
available through the ioctl interface. The advantage of the uevents interface
@@ -6,92 +10,101 @@ the event avoiding the need to query the state of the device-mapper device after
the event is received.
There are two functions currently for device-mapper events. The first function
-listed creates the event and the second function sends the event(s).
+listed creates the event and the second function sends the event(s)::
-void dm_path_uevent(enum dm_uevent_type event_type, struct dm_target *ti,
- const char *path, unsigned nr_valid_paths)
+ void dm_path_uevent(enum dm_uevent_type event_type, struct dm_target *ti,
+ const char *path, unsigned nr_valid_paths)
-void dm_send_uevents(struct list_head *events, struct kobject *kobj)
+ void dm_send_uevents(struct list_head *events, struct kobject *kobj)
The variables added to the uevent environment are:
Variable Name: DM_TARGET
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: string
-Description:
-Value: Name of device-mapper target that generated the event.
+------------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: string
+:Description:
+:Value: Name of device-mapper target that generated the event.
Variable Name: DM_ACTION
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: string
-Description:
-Value: Device-mapper specific action that caused the uevent action.
- PATH_FAILED - A path has failed.
+------------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: string
+:Description:
+:Value: Device-mapper specific action that caused the uevent action.
+ PATH_FAILED - A path has failed;
PATH_REINSTATED - A path has been reinstated.
Variable Name: DM_SEQNUM
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: unsigned integer
-Description: A sequence number for this specific device-mapper device.
-Value: Valid unsigned integer range.
+------------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: unsigned integer
+:Description: A sequence number for this specific device-mapper device.
+:Value: Valid unsigned integer range.
Variable Name: DM_PATH
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: string
-Description: Major and minor number of the path device pertaining to this
-event.
-Value: Path name in the form of "Major:Minor"
+----------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: string
+:Description: Major and minor number of the path device pertaining to this
+ event.
+:Value: Path name in the form of "Major:Minor"
Variable Name: DM_NR_VALID_PATHS
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: unsigned integer
-Description:
-Value: Valid unsigned integer range.
+--------------------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: unsigned integer
+:Description:
+:Value: Valid unsigned integer range.
Variable Name: DM_NAME
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: string
-Description: Name of the device-mapper device.
-Value: Name
+----------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: string
+:Description: Name of the device-mapper device.
+:Value: Name
Variable Name: DM_UUID
-Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
-Type: string
-Description: UUID of the device-mapper device.
-Value: UUID. (Empty string if there isn't one.)
+----------------------
+:Uevent Action(s): KOBJ_CHANGE
+:Type: string
+:Description: UUID of the device-mapper device.
+:Value: UUID. (Empty string if there isn't one.)
An example of the uevents generated as captured by udevmonitor is shown
-below.
+below
-1.) Path failure.
-UEVENT[1192521009.711215] change@/block/dm-3
-ACTION=change
-DEVPATH=/block/dm-3
-SUBSYSTEM=block
-DM_TARGET=multipath
-DM_ACTION=PATH_FAILED
-DM_SEQNUM=1
-DM_PATH=8:32
-DM_NR_VALID_PATHS=0
-DM_NAME=mpath2
-DM_UUID=mpath-35333333000002328
-MINOR=3
-MAJOR=253
-SEQNUM=1130
+1.) Path failure::
-2.) Path reinstate.
-UEVENT[1192521132.989927] change@/block/dm-3
-ACTION=change
-DEVPATH=/block/dm-3
-SUBSYSTEM=block
-DM_TARGET=multipath
-DM_ACTION=PATH_REINSTATED
-DM_SEQNUM=2
-DM_PATH=8:32
-DM_NR_VALID_PATHS=1
-DM_NAME=mpath2
-DM_UUID=mpath-35333333000002328
-MINOR=3
-MAJOR=253
-SEQNUM=1131
+ UEVENT[1192521009.711215] change@/block/dm-3
+ ACTION=change
+ DEVPATH=/block/dm-3
+ SUBSYSTEM=block
+ DM_TARGET=multipath
+ DM_ACTION=PATH_FAILED
+ DM_SEQNUM=1
+ DM_PATH=8:32
+ DM_NR_VALID_PATHS=0
+ DM_NAME=mpath2
+ DM_UUID=mpath-35333333000002328
+ MINOR=3
+ MAJOR=253
+ SEQNUM=1130
+
+2.) Path reinstate::
+
+ UEVENT[1192521132.989927] change@/block/dm-3
+ ACTION=change
+ DEVPATH=/block/dm-3
+ SUBSYSTEM=block
+ DM_TARGET=multipath
+ DM_ACTION=PATH_REINSTATED
+ DM_SEQNUM=2
+ DM_PATH=8:32
+ DM_NR_VALID_PATHS=1
+ DM_NAME=mpath2
+ DM_UUID=mpath-35333333000002328
+ MINOR=3
+ MAJOR=253
+ SEQNUM=1131
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt
index 736fcc78d193..07f56ebc1730 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-zoned.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+========
dm-zoned
========
@@ -133,12 +134,13 @@ A zoned block device must first be formatted using the dmzadm tool. This
will analyze the device zone configuration, determine where to place the
metadata sets on the device and initialize the metadata sets.
-Ex:
+Ex::
-dmzadm --format /dev/sdxx
+ dmzadm --format /dev/sdxx
For a formatted device, the target can be created normally with the
dmsetup utility. The only parameter that dm-zoned requires is the
-underlying zoned block device name. Ex:
+underlying zoned block device name. Ex::
-echo "0 `blockdev --getsize ${dev}` zoned ${dev}" | dmsetup create dmz-`basename ${dev}`
+ echo "0 `blockdev --getsize ${dev}` zoned ${dev}" | \
+ dmsetup create dmz-`basename ${dev}`
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt
index 3c6d01be3560..90dd5c670b9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/era.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+======
+dm-era
+======
+
Introduction
============
@@ -14,12 +18,14 @@ coherency after rolling back a vendor snapshot.
Constructor
===========
- era <metadata dev> <origin dev> <block size>
+era <metadata dev> <origin dev> <block size>
- metadata dev : fast device holding the persistent metadata
- origin dev : device holding data blocks that may change
- block size : block size of origin data device, granularity that is
- tracked by the target
+ ================ ======================================================
+ metadata dev fast device holding the persistent metadata
+ origin dev device holding data blocks that may change
+ block size block size of origin data device, granularity that is
+ tracked by the target
+ ================ ======================================================
Messages
========
@@ -49,14 +55,16 @@ Status
<metadata block size> <#used metadata blocks>/<#total metadata blocks>
<current era> <held metadata root | '-'>
-metadata block size : Fixed block size for each metadata block in
- sectors
-#used metadata blocks : Number of metadata blocks used
-#total metadata blocks : Total number of metadata blocks
-current era : The current era
-held metadata root : The location, in blocks, of the metadata root
- that has been 'held' for userspace read
- access. '-' indicates there is no held root
+========================= ==============================================
+metadata block size Fixed block size for each metadata block in
+ sectors
+#used metadata blocks Number of metadata blocks used
+#total metadata blocks Total number of metadata blocks
+current era The current era
+held metadata root The location, in blocks, of the metadata root
+ that has been 'held' for userspace read
+ access. '-' indicates there is no held root
+========================= ==============================================
Detailed use case
=================
@@ -88,7 +96,7 @@ Memory usage
The target uses a bitset to record writes in the current era. It also
has a spare bitset ready for switching over to a new era. Other than
-that it uses a few 4k blocks for updating metadata.
+that it uses a few 4k blocks for updating metadata::
(4 * nr_blocks) bytes + buffers
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt
index 820382c4cecf..7651d395127f 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/kcopyd.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+======
kcopyd
======
@@ -7,7 +8,7 @@ notification. It is used by dm-snapshot and dm-mirror.
Users of kcopyd must first create a client and indicate how many memory pages
to set aside for their copy jobs. This is done with a call to
-kcopyd_client_create().
+kcopyd_client_create()::
int kcopyd_client_create(unsigned int num_pages,
struct kcopyd_client **result);
@@ -16,7 +17,7 @@ To start a copy job, the user must set up io_region structures to describe
the source and destinations of the copy. Each io_region indicates a
block-device along with the starting sector and size of the region. The source
of the copy is given as one io_region structure, and the destinations of the
-copy are given as an array of io_region structures.
+copy are given as an array of io_region structures::
struct io_region {
struct block_device *bdev;
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ copy are given as an array of io_region structures.
To start the copy, the user calls kcopyd_copy(), passing in the client
pointer, pointers to the source and destination io_regions, the name of a
-completion callback routine, and a pointer to some context data for the copy.
+completion callback routine, and a pointer to some context data for the copy::
int kcopyd_copy(struct kcopyd_client *kc, struct io_region *from,
unsigned int num_dests, struct io_region *dests,
@@ -41,7 +42,6 @@ write error occurred during the copy.
When a user is done with all their copy jobs, they should call
kcopyd_client_destroy() to delete the kcopyd client, which will release the
-associated memory pages.
+associated memory pages::
void kcopyd_client_destroy(struct kcopyd_client *kc);
-
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt
index 7cb98d89d3f8..9d17fc6e64a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/linear.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========
dm-linear
=========
@@ -6,56 +7,57 @@ device onto a linear range of another device. This is the basic building
block of logical volume managers.
Parameters: <dev path> <offset>
- <dev path>: Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
- "major:minor" device-number.
- <offset>: Starting sector within the device.
+ <dev path>:
+ Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
+ "major:minor" device-number.
+ <offset>:
+ Starting sector within the device.
Example scripts
===============
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Create an identity mapping for a device
-echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` linear $1 0" | dmsetup create identity
-]]
-
-
-[[
-#!/bin/sh
-# Join 2 devices together
-size1=`blockdev --getsz $1`
-size2=`blockdev --getsz $2`
-echo "0 $size1 linear $1 0
-$size1 $size2 linear $2 0" | dmsetup create joined
-]]
-
-
-[[
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Split a device into 4M chunks and then join them together in reverse order.
-
-my $name = "reverse";
-my $extent_size = 4 * 1024 * 2;
-my $dev = $ARGV[0];
-my $table = "";
-my $count = 0;
-
-if (!defined($dev)) {
- die("Please specify a device.\n");
-}
-
-my $dev_size = `blockdev --getsz $dev`;
-my $extents = int($dev_size / $extent_size) -
- (($dev_size % $extent_size) ? 1 : 0);
-
-while ($extents > 0) {
- my $this_start = $count * $extent_size;
- $extents--;
- $count++;
- my $this_offset = $extents * $extent_size;
-
- $table .= "$this_start $extent_size linear $dev $this_offset\n";
-}
-
-`echo \"$table\" | dmsetup create $name`;
-]]
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Create an identity mapping for a device
+ echo "0 `blockdev --getsz $1` linear $1 0" | dmsetup create identity
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ # Join 2 devices together
+ size1=`blockdev --getsz $1`
+ size2=`blockdev --getsz $2`
+ echo "0 $size1 linear $1 0
+ $size1 $size2 linear $2 0" | dmsetup create joined
+
+::
+
+ #!/usr/bin/perl -w
+ # Split a device into 4M chunks and then join them together in reverse order.
+
+ my $name = "reverse";
+ my $extent_size = 4 * 1024 * 2;
+ my $dev = $ARGV[0];
+ my $table = "";
+ my $count = 0;
+
+ if (!defined($dev)) {
+ die("Please specify a device.\n");
+ }
+
+ my $dev_size = `blockdev --getsz $dev`;
+ my $extents = int($dev_size / $extent_size) -
+ (($dev_size % $extent_size) ? 1 : 0);
+
+ while ($extents > 0) {
+ my $this_start = $count * $extent_size;
+ $extents--;
+ $count++;
+ my $this_offset = $extents * $extent_size;
+
+ $table .= "$this_start $extent_size linear $dev $this_offset\n";
+ }
+
+ `echo \"$table\" | dmsetup create $name`;
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt
index b638d124be6a..23141f2ffb7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/log-writes.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============
dm-log-writes
=============
@@ -25,11 +26,11 @@ completed WRITEs, at the time the REQ_PREFLUSH is issued, are added in order to
simulate the worst case scenario with regard to power failures. Consider the
following example (W means write, C means complete):
-W1,W2,W3,C3,C2,Wflush,C1,Cflush
+ W1,W2,W3,C3,C2,Wflush,C1,Cflush
-The log would show the following
+The log would show the following:
-W3,W2,flush,W1....
+ W3,W2,flush,W1....
Again this is to simulate what is actually on disk, this allows us to detect
cases where a power failure at a particular point in time would create an
@@ -42,11 +43,11 @@ Any REQ_OP_DISCARD requests are treated like WRITE requests. Otherwise we would
have all the DISCARD requests, and then the WRITE requests and then the FLUSH
request. Consider the following example:
-WRITE block 1, DISCARD block 1, FLUSH
+ WRITE block 1, DISCARD block 1, FLUSH
-If we logged DISCARD when it completed, the replay would look like this
+If we logged DISCARD when it completed, the replay would look like this:
-DISCARD 1, WRITE 1, FLUSH
+ DISCARD 1, WRITE 1, FLUSH
which isn't quite what happened and wouldn't be caught during the log replay.
@@ -57,15 +58,19 @@ i) Constructor
log-writes <dev_path> <log_dev_path>
- dev_path : Device that all of the IO will go to normally.
- log_dev_path : Device where the log entries are written to.
+ ============= ==============================================
+ dev_path Device that all of the IO will go to normally.
+ log_dev_path Device where the log entries are written to.
+ ============= ==============================================
ii) Status
<#logged entries> <highest allocated sector>
- #logged entries : Number of logged entries
- highest allocated sector : Highest allocated sector
+ =========================== ========================
+ #logged entries Number of logged entries
+ highest allocated sector Highest allocated sector
+ =========================== ========================
iii) Messages
@@ -75,15 +80,15 @@ iii) Messages
For example say you want to fsck a file system after every
write, but first you need to replay up to the mkfs to make sure
we're fsck'ing something reasonable, you would do something like
- this:
+ this::
mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
<run test>
- This would allow you to replay the log up to the mkfs mark and
- then replay from that point on doing the fsck check in the
- interval that you want.
+ This would allow you to replay the log up to the mkfs mark and
+ then replay from that point on doing the fsck check in the
+ interval that you want.
Every log has a mark at the end labeled "dm-log-writes-end".
@@ -97,42 +102,42 @@ Example usage
=============
Say you want to test fsync on your file system. You would do something like
-this:
+this::
-TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
-dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
-mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
-dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
+ TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
+ dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
+ mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
+ dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
-mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
-<some test that does fsync at the end>
-dmsetup message log 0 mark fsync
-md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
-umount /mnt/btrfs-test
+ mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
+ <some test that does fsync at the end>
+ dmsetup message log 0 mark fsync
+ md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
+ umount /mnt/btrfs-test
-dmsetup remove log
-replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark fsync
-mount /dev/sdb /mnt/btrfs-test
-md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
-<verify md5sum's are correct>
+ dmsetup remove log
+ replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark fsync
+ mount /dev/sdb /mnt/btrfs-test
+ md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
+ <verify md5sum's are correct>
-Another option is to do a complicated file system operation and verify the file
-system is consistent during the entire operation. You could do this with:
+ Another option is to do a complicated file system operation and verify the file
+ system is consistent during the entire operation. You could do this with:
-TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
-dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
-mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
-dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
+ TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
+ dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
+ mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
+ dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
-mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
-<fsstress to dirty the fs>
-btrfs filesystem balance /mnt/btrfs-test
-umount /mnt/btrfs-test
-dmsetup remove log
+ mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
+ <fsstress to dirty the fs>
+ btrfs filesystem balance /mnt/btrfs-test
+ umount /mnt/btrfs-test
+ dmsetup remove log
-replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark mkfs
-btrfsck /dev/sdb
-replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --start-mark mkfs \
+ replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark mkfs
+ btrfsck /dev/sdb
+ replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --start-mark mkfs \
--fsck "btrfsck /dev/sdb" --check fua
And that will replay the log until it sees a FUA request, run the fsck command
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt
index a333bcb3a6c2..2065c3c5a091 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/persistent-data.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===============
+Persistent data
+===============
+
Introduction
============
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
index b8bbb516f989..4c53304e72f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
+==============================
Device-mapper snapshot support
==============================
Device-mapper allows you, without massive data copying:
-*) To create snapshots of any block device i.e. mountable, saved states of
-the block device which are also writable without interfering with the
-original content;
-*) To create device "forks", i.e. multiple different versions of the
-same data stream.
-*) To merge a snapshot of a block device back into the snapshot's origin
-device.
+- To create snapshots of any block device i.e. mountable, saved states of
+ the block device which are also writable without interfering with the
+ original content;
+- To create device "forks", i.e. multiple different versions of the
+ same data stream.
+- To merge a snapshot of a block device back into the snapshot's origin
+ device.
In the first two cases, dm copies only the chunks of data that get
changed and uses a separate copy-on-write (COW) block device for
@@ -22,7 +23,7 @@ the origin device.
There are three dm targets available:
snapshot, snapshot-origin, and snapshot-merge.
-*) snapshot-origin <origin>
+- snapshot-origin <origin>
which will normally have one or more snapshots based on it.
Reads will be mapped directly to the backing device. For each write, the
@@ -30,7 +31,7 @@ original data will be saved in the <COW device> of each snapshot to keep
its visible content unchanged, at least until the <COW device> fills up.
-*) snapshot <origin> <COW device> <persistent?> <chunksize>
+- snapshot <origin> <COW device> <persistent?> <chunksize>
A snapshot of the <origin> block device is created. Changed chunks of
<chunksize> sectors will be stored on the <COW device>. Writes will
@@ -83,25 +84,25 @@ When you create the first LVM2 snapshot of a volume, four dm devices are used:
source volume), whose table is replaced by a "snapshot-origin" mapping
from device #1.
-A fixed naming scheme is used, so with the following commands:
+A fixed naming scheme is used, so with the following commands::
-lvcreate -L 1G -n base volumeGroup
-lvcreate -L 100M --snapshot -n snap volumeGroup/base
+ lvcreate -L 1G -n base volumeGroup
+ lvcreate -L 100M --snapshot -n snap volumeGroup/base
-we'll have this situation (with volumes in above order):
+we'll have this situation (with volumes in above order)::
-# dmsetup table|grep volumeGroup
+ # dmsetup table|grep volumeGroup
-volumeGroup-base-real: 0 2097152 linear 8:19 384
-volumeGroup-snap-cow: 0 204800 linear 8:19 2097536
-volumeGroup-snap: 0 2097152 snapshot 254:11 254:12 P 16
-volumeGroup-base: 0 2097152 snapshot-origin 254:11
+ volumeGroup-base-real: 0 2097152 linear 8:19 384
+ volumeGroup-snap-cow: 0 204800 linear 8:19 2097536
+ volumeGroup-snap: 0 2097152 snapshot 254:11 254:12 P 16
+ volumeGroup-base: 0 2097152 snapshot-origin 254:11
-# ls -lL /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-*
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 11 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-real
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 12 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-snap-cow
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 13 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-snap
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 10 29 ago 18:14 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base
+ # ls -lL /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-*
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 11 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-real
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 12 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-snap-cow
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 13 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-snap
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 10 29 ago 18:14 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base
How snapshot-merge is used by LVM2
@@ -114,27 +115,28 @@ merging snapshot after it completes. The "snapshot" that hands over its
COW device to the "snapshot-merge" is deactivated (unless using lvchange
--refresh); but if it is left active it will simply return I/O errors.
-A snapshot will merge into its origin with the following command:
+A snapshot will merge into its origin with the following command::
-lvconvert --merge volumeGroup/snap
+ lvconvert --merge volumeGroup/snap
-we'll now have this situation:
+we'll now have this situation::
-# dmsetup table|grep volumeGroup
+ # dmsetup table|grep volumeGroup
-volumeGroup-base-real: 0 2097152 linear 8:19 384
-volumeGroup-base-cow: 0 204800 linear 8:19 2097536
-volumeGroup-base: 0 2097152 snapshot-merge 254:11 254:12 P 16
+ volumeGroup-base-real: 0 2097152 linear 8:19 384
+ volumeGroup-base-cow: 0 204800 linear 8:19 2097536
+ volumeGroup-base: 0 2097152 snapshot-merge 254:11 254:12 P 16
-# ls -lL /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-*
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 11 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-real
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 12 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-cow
-brw------- 1 root root 254, 10 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base
+ # ls -lL /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-*
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 11 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-real
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 12 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-cow
+ brw------- 1 root root 254, 10 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base
How to determine when a merging is complete
===========================================
The snapshot-merge and snapshot status lines end with:
+
<sectors_allocated>/<total_sectors> <metadata_sectors>
Both <sectors_allocated> and <total_sectors> include both data and metadata.
@@ -142,35 +144,37 @@ During merging, the number of sectors allocated gets smaller and
smaller. Merging has finished when the number of sectors holding data
is zero, in other words <sectors_allocated> == <metadata_sectors>.
-Here is a practical example (using a hybrid of lvm and dmsetup commands):
+Here is a practical example (using a hybrid of lvm and dmsetup commands)::
-# lvs
- LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
- base volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
- snap volumeGroup swi-a- 1.00g base 18.97
+ # lvs
+ LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
+ base volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
+ snap volumeGroup swi-a- 1.00g base 18.97
-# dmsetup status volumeGroup-snap
-0 8388608 snapshot 397896/2097152 1560
- ^^^^ metadata sectors
+ # dmsetup status volumeGroup-snap
+ 0 8388608 snapshot 397896/2097152 1560
+ ^^^^ metadata sectors
-# lvconvert --merge -b volumeGroup/snap
- Merging of volume snap started.
+ # lvconvert --merge -b volumeGroup/snap
+ Merging of volume snap started.
-# lvs volumeGroup/snap
- LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
- base volumeGroup Owi-a- 4.00g 17.23
+ # lvs volumeGroup/snap
+ LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
+ base volumeGroup Owi-a- 4.00g 17.23
-# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
-0 8388608 snapshot-merge 281688/2097152 1104
+ # dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+ 0 8388608 snapshot-merge 281688/2097152 1104
-# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
-0 8388608 snapshot-merge 180480/2097152 712
+ # dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+ 0 8388608 snapshot-merge 180480/2097152 712
-# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
-0 8388608 snapshot-merge 16/2097152 16
+ # dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+ 0 8388608 snapshot-merge 16/2097152 16
Merging has finished.
-# lvs
- LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
- base volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
+::
+
+ # lvs
+ LV VG Attr LSize Origin Snap% Move Log Copy% Convert
+ base volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt
index 170ac02a1f50..3d80a9f850cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/statistics.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============
DM statistics
=============
@@ -11,7 +12,7 @@ Individual statistics will be collected for each step-sized area within
the range specified.
The I/O statistics counters for each step-sized area of a region are
-in the same format as /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats (see:
+in the same format as `/sys/block/*/stat` or `/proc/diskstats` (see:
Documentation/iostats.txt). But two extra counters (12 and 13) are
provided: total time spent reading and writing. When the histogram
argument is used, the 14th parameter is reported that represents the
@@ -32,40 +33,45 @@ on each other's data.
The creation of DM statistics will allocate memory via kmalloc or
fallback to using vmalloc space. At most, 1/4 of the overall system
memory may be allocated by DM statistics. The admin can see how much
-memory is used by reading
-/sys/module/dm_mod/parameters/stats_current_allocated_bytes
+memory is used by reading:
+
+ /sys/module/dm_mod/parameters/stats_current_allocated_bytes
Messages
========
- @stats_create <range> <step>
- [<number_of_optional_arguments> <optional_arguments>...]
- [<program_id> [<aux_data>]]
-
+ @stats_create <range> <step> [<number_of_optional_arguments> <optional_arguments>...] [<program_id> [<aux_data>]]
Create a new region and return the region_id.
<range>
- "-" - whole device
- "<start_sector>+<length>" - a range of <length> 512-byte sectors
- starting with <start_sector>.
+ "-"
+ whole device
+ "<start_sector>+<length>"
+ a range of <length> 512-byte sectors
+ starting with <start_sector>.
<step>
- "<area_size>" - the range is subdivided into areas each containing
- <area_size> sectors.
- "/<number_of_areas>" - the range is subdivided into the specified
- number of areas.
+ "<area_size>"
+ the range is subdivided into areas each containing
+ <area_size> sectors.
+ "/<number_of_areas>"
+ the range is subdivided into the specified
+ number of areas.
<number_of_optional_arguments>
The number of optional arguments
<optional_arguments>
- The following optional arguments are supported
- precise_timestamps - use precise timer with nanosecond resolution
+ The following optional arguments are supported:
+
+ precise_timestamps
+ use precise timer with nanosecond resolution
instead of the "jiffies" variable. When this argument is
used, the resulting times are in nanoseconds instead of
milliseconds. Precise timestamps are a little bit slower
to obtain than jiffies-based timestamps.
- histogram:n1,n2,n3,n4,... - collect histogram of latencies. The
+ histogram:n1,n2,n3,n4,...
+ collect histogram of latencies. The
numbers n1, n2, etc are times that represent the boundaries
of the histogram. If precise_timestamps is not used, the
times are in milliseconds, otherwise they are in
@@ -96,21 +102,18 @@ Messages
@stats_list message, but it doesn't use this value for anything.
@stats_delete <region_id>
-
Delete the region with the specified id.
<region_id>
region_id returned from @stats_create
@stats_clear <region_id>
-
Clear all the counters except the in-flight i/o counters.
<region_id>
region_id returned from @stats_create
@stats_list [<program_id>]
-
List all regions registered with @stats_create.
<program_id>
@@ -127,7 +130,6 @@ Messages
if they were specified when creating the region.
@stats_print <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>]
-
Print counters for each step-sized area of a region.
<region_id>
@@ -143,10 +145,11 @@ Messages
Output format for each step-sized area of a region:
- <start_sector>+<length> counters
+ <start_sector>+<length>
+ counters
The first 11 counters have the same meaning as
- /sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats.
+ `/sys/block/*/stat or /proc/diskstats`.
Please refer to Documentation/iostats.txt for details.
@@ -163,11 +166,11 @@ Messages
11. the weighted number of milliseconds spent doing I/Os
Additional counters:
+
12. the total time spent reading in milliseconds
13. the total time spent writing in milliseconds
@stats_print_clear <region_id> [<starting_line> <number_of_lines>]
-
Atomically print and then clear all the counters except the
in-flight i/o counters. Useful when the client consuming the
statistics does not want to lose any statistics (those updated
@@ -185,7 +188,6 @@ Messages
If omitted, all lines are printed and then cleared.
@stats_set_aux <region_id> <aux_data>
-
Store auxiliary data aux_data for the specified region.
<region_id>
@@ -201,23 +203,23 @@ Examples
========
Subdivide the DM device 'vol' into 100 pieces and start collecting
-statistics on them:
+statistics on them::
dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_create - /100
Set the auxiliary data string to "foo bar baz" (the escape for each
-space must also be escaped, otherwise the shell will consume them):
+space must also be escaped, otherwise the shell will consume them)::
dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_set_aux 0 foo\\ bar\\ baz
-List the statistics:
+List the statistics::
dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_list
-Print the statistics:
+Print the statistics::
dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_print 0
-Delete the statistics:
+Delete the statistics::
dmsetup message vol 0 @stats_delete 0
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
index 07ec492cceee..e9a8da192ae1 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/striped.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========
dm-stripe
=========
@@ -8,12 +9,16 @@ potentially provide improved I/O throughput by utilizing several physical
devices in parallel.
Parameters: <num devs> <chunk size> [<dev path> <offset>]+
- <num devs>: Number of underlying devices.
- <chunk size>: Size of each chunk of data. Must be at least as
- large as the system's PAGE_SIZE.
- <dev path>: Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
- "major:minor" device-number.
- <offset>: Starting sector within the device.
+ <num devs>:
+ Number of underlying devices.
+ <chunk size>:
+ Size of each chunk of data. Must be at least as
+ large as the system's PAGE_SIZE.
+ <dev path>:
+ Full pathname to the underlying block-device, or a
+ "major:minor" device-number.
+ <offset>:
+ Starting sector within the device.
One or more underlying devices can be specified. The striped device size must
be a multiple of the chunk size multiplied by the number of underlying devices.
@@ -22,36 +27,35 @@ be a multiple of the chunk size multiplied by the number of underlying devices.
Example scripts
===============
-[[
-#!/usr/bin/perl -w
-# Create a striped device across any number of underlying devices. The device
-# will be called "stripe_dev" and have a chunk-size of 128k.
+::
-my $chunk_size = 128 * 2;
-my $dev_name = "stripe_dev";
-my $num_devs = @ARGV;
-my @devs = @ARGV;
-my ($min_dev_size, $stripe_dev_size, $i);
+ #!/usr/bin/perl -w
+ # Create a striped device across any number of underlying devices. The device
+ # will be called "stripe_dev" and have a chunk-size of 128k.
-if (!$num_devs) {
- die("Specify at least one device\n");
-}
+ my $chunk_size = 128 * 2;
+ my $dev_name = "stripe_dev";
+ my $num_devs = @ARGV;
+ my @devs = @ARGV;
+ my ($min_dev_size, $stripe_dev_size, $i);
-$min_dev_size = `blockdev --getsz $devs[0]`;
-for ($i = 1; $i < $num_devs; $i++) {
- my $this_size = `blockdev --getsz $devs[$i]`;
- $min_dev_size = ($min_dev_size < $this_size) ?
- $min_dev_size : $this_size;
-}
+ if (!$num_devs) {
+ die("Specify at least one device\n");
+ }
-$stripe_dev_size = $min_dev_size * $num_devs;
-$stripe_dev_size -= $stripe_dev_size % ($chunk_size * $num_devs);
+ $min_dev_size = `blockdev --getsz $devs[0]`;
+ for ($i = 1; $i < $num_devs; $i++) {
+ my $this_size = `blockdev --getsz $devs[$i]`;
+ $min_dev_size = ($min_dev_size < $this_size) ?
+ $min_dev_size : $this_size;
+ }
-$table = "0 $stripe_dev_size striped $num_devs $chunk_size";
-for ($i = 0; $i < $num_devs; $i++) {
- $table .= " $devs[$i] 0";
-}
+ $stripe_dev_size = $min_dev_size * $num_devs;
+ $stripe_dev_size -= $stripe_dev_size % ($chunk_size * $num_devs);
-`echo $table | dmsetup create $dev_name`;
-]]
+ $table = "0 $stripe_dev_size striped $num_devs $chunk_size";
+ for ($i = 0; $i < $num_devs; $i++) {
+ $table .= " $devs[$i] 0";
+ }
+ `echo $table | dmsetup create $dev_name`;
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt
index 5bd4831db4a8..7dde06be1a4f 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/switch.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========
dm-switch
=========
@@ -67,27 +68,25 @@ b-tree can achieve.
Construction Parameters
=======================
- <num_paths> <region_size> <num_optional_args> [<optional_args>...]
- [<dev_path> <offset>]+
+ <num_paths> <region_size> <num_optional_args> [<optional_args>...] [<dev_path> <offset>]+
+ <num_paths>
+ The number of paths across which to distribute the I/O.
-<num_paths>
- The number of paths across which to distribute the I/O.
+ <region_size>
+ The number of 512-byte sectors in a region. Each region can be redirected
+ to any of the available paths.
-<region_size>
- The number of 512-byte sectors in a region. Each region can be redirected
- to any of the available paths.
+ <num_optional_args>
+ The number of optional arguments. Currently, no optional arguments
+ are supported and so this must be zero.
-<num_optional_args>
- The number of optional arguments. Currently, no optional arguments
- are supported and so this must be zero.
+ <dev_path>
+ The block device that represents a specific path to the device.
-<dev_path>
- The block device that represents a specific path to the device.
-
-<offset>
- The offset of the start of data on the specific <dev_path> (in units
- of 512-byte sectors). This number is added to the sector number when
- forwarding the request to the specific path. Typically it is zero.
+ <offset>
+ The offset of the start of data on the specific <dev_path> (in units
+ of 512-byte sectors). This number is added to the sector number when
+ forwarding the request to the specific path. Typically it is zero.
Messages
========
@@ -122,17 +121,21 @@ Example
Assume that you have volumes vg1/switch0 vg1/switch1 vg1/switch2 with
the same size.
-Create a switch device with 64kB region size:
+Create a switch device with 64kB region size::
+
dmsetup create switch --table "0 `blockdev --getsz /dev/vg1/switch0`
switch 3 128 0 /dev/vg1/switch0 0 /dev/vg1/switch1 0 /dev/vg1/switch2 0"
Set mappings for the first 7 entries to point to devices switch0, switch1,
-switch2, switch0, switch1, switch2, switch1:
+switch2, switch0, switch1, switch2, switch1::
+
dmsetup message switch 0 set_region_mappings 0:0 :1 :2 :0 :1 :2 :1
-Set repetitive mapping. This command:
+Set repetitive mapping. This command::
+
dmsetup message switch 0 set_region_mappings 1000:1 :2 R2,10
-is equivalent to:
+
+is equivalent to::
+
dmsetup message switch 0 set_region_mappings 1000:1 :2 :1 :2 :1 :2 :1 :2 \
:1 :2 :1 :2 :1 :2 :1 :2 :1 :2
-
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
index 883e7ca5f745..bafebf79da4b 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=================
+Thin provisioning
+=================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -95,6 +99,8 @@ previously.)
Using an existing pool device
-----------------------------
+::
+
dmsetup create pool \
--table "0 20971520 thin-pool $metadata_dev $data_dev \
$data_block_size $low_water_mark"
@@ -154,7 +160,7 @@ Thin provisioning
i) Creating a new thinly-provisioned volume.
To create a new thinly- provisioned volume you must send a message to an
- active pool device, /dev/mapper/pool in this example.
+ active pool device, /dev/mapper/pool in this example::
dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_thin 0"
@@ -164,7 +170,7 @@ i) Creating a new thinly-provisioned volume.
ii) Using a thinly-provisioned volume.
- Thinly-provisioned volumes are activated using the 'thin' target:
+ Thinly-provisioned volumes are activated using the 'thin' target::
dmsetup create thin --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 0"
@@ -181,6 +187,8 @@ i) Creating an internal snapshot.
must suspend it before creating the snapshot to avoid corruption.
This is NOT enforced at the moment, so please be careful!
+ ::
+
dmsetup suspend /dev/mapper/thin
dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_snap 1 0"
dmsetup resume /dev/mapper/thin
@@ -198,14 +206,14 @@ ii) Using an internal snapshot.
activating or removing them both. (This differs from conventional
device-mapper snapshots.)
- Activate it exactly the same way as any other thinly-provisioned volume:
+ Activate it exactly the same way as any other thinly-provisioned volume::
dmsetup create snap --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 1"
External snapshots
------------------
-You can use an external _read only_ device as an origin for a
+You can use an external **read only** device as an origin for a
thinly-provisioned volume. Any read to an unprovisioned area of the
thin device will be passed through to the origin. Writes trigger
the allocation of new blocks as usual.
@@ -223,11 +231,13 @@ i) Creating a snapshot of an external device
This is the same as creating a thin device.
You don't mention the origin at this stage.
+ ::
+
dmsetup message /dev/mapper/pool 0 "create_thin 0"
ii) Using a snapshot of an external device.
- Append an extra parameter to the thin target specifying the origin:
+ Append an extra parameter to the thin target specifying the origin::
dmsetup create snap --table "0 2097152 thin /dev/mapper/pool 0 /dev/image"
@@ -240,6 +250,8 @@ Deactivation
All devices using a pool must be deactivated before the pool itself
can be.
+::
+
dmsetup remove thin
dmsetup remove snap
dmsetup remove pool
@@ -252,25 +264,32 @@ Reference
i) Constructor
- thin-pool <metadata dev> <data dev> <data block size (sectors)> \
- <low water mark (blocks)> [<number of feature args> [<arg>]*]
+ ::
+
+ thin-pool <metadata dev> <data dev> <data block size (sectors)> \
+ <low water mark (blocks)> [<number of feature args> [<arg>]*]
Optional feature arguments:
- skip_block_zeroing: Skip the zeroing of newly-provisioned blocks.
+ skip_block_zeroing:
+ Skip the zeroing of newly-provisioned blocks.
- ignore_discard: Disable discard support.
+ ignore_discard:
+ Disable discard support.
- no_discard_passdown: Don't pass discards down to the underlying
- data device, but just remove the mapping.
+ no_discard_passdown:
+ Don't pass discards down to the underlying
+ data device, but just remove the mapping.
- read_only: Don't allow any changes to be made to the pool
+ read_only:
+ Don't allow any changes to be made to the pool
metadata. This mode is only available after the
thin-pool has been created and first used in full
read/write mode. It cannot be specified on initial
thin-pool creation.
- error_if_no_space: Error IOs, instead of queueing, if no space.
+ error_if_no_space:
+ Error IOs, instead of queueing, if no space.
Data block size must be between 64KB (128 sectors) and 1GB
(2097152 sectors) inclusive.
@@ -278,10 +297,12 @@ i) Constructor
ii) Status
- <transaction id> <used metadata blocks>/<total metadata blocks>
- <used data blocks>/<total data blocks> <held metadata root>
- ro|rw|out_of_data_space [no_]discard_passdown [error|queue]_if_no_space
- needs_check|- metadata_low_watermark
+ ::
+
+ <transaction id> <used metadata blocks>/<total metadata blocks>
+ <used data blocks>/<total data blocks> <held metadata root>
+ ro|rw|out_of_data_space [no_]discard_passdown [error|queue]_if_no_space
+ needs_check|- metadata_low_watermark
transaction id:
A 64-bit number used by userspace to help synchronise with metadata
@@ -336,13 +357,11 @@ ii) Status
iii) Messages
create_thin <dev id>
-
Create a new thinly-provisioned device.
<dev id> is an arbitrary unique 24-bit identifier chosen by
the caller.
create_snap <dev id> <origin id>
-
Create a new snapshot of another thinly-provisioned device.
<dev id> is an arbitrary unique 24-bit identifier chosen by
the caller.
@@ -350,11 +369,9 @@ iii) Messages
of which the new device will be a snapshot.
delete <dev id>
-
Deletes a thin device. Irreversible.
set_transaction_id <current id> <new id>
-
Userland volume managers, such as LVM, need a way to
synchronise their external metadata with the internal metadata of the
pool target. The thin-pool target offers to store an
@@ -364,14 +381,12 @@ iii) Messages
compare-and-swap message.
reserve_metadata_snap
-
Reserve a copy of the data mapping btree for use by userland.
This allows userland to inspect the mappings as they were when
this message was executed. Use the pool's status command to
get the root block associated with the metadata snapshot.
release_metadata_snap
-
Release a previously reserved copy of the data mapping btree.
'thin' target
@@ -379,7 +394,9 @@ iii) Messages
i) Constructor
- thin <pool dev> <dev id> [<external origin dev>]
+ ::
+
+ thin <pool dev> <dev id> [<external origin dev>]
pool dev:
the thin-pool device, e.g. /dev/mapper/my_pool or 253:0
@@ -401,8 +418,7 @@ provisioned as and when needed.
ii) Status
- <nr mapped sectors> <highest mapped sector>
-
+ <nr mapped sectors> <highest mapped sector>
If the pool has encountered device errors and failed, the status
will just contain the string 'Fail'. The userspace recovery
tools should then be used.
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt
index 0b2a306c54ee..0a8d3eb3f072 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/unstriped.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================
+Device-mapper "unstriped" target
+================================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -34,46 +38,46 @@ striped target to combine the 4 devices into one. It then will use
the unstriped target ontop of the striped device to access the
individual backing loop devices. We write data to the newly exposed
unstriped devices and verify the data written matches the correct
-underlying device on the striped array.
-
-#!/bin/bash
-
-MEMBER_SIZE=$((128 * 1024 * 1024))
-NUM=4
-SEQ_END=$((${NUM}-1))
-CHUNK=256
-BS=4096
-
-RAID_SIZE=$((${MEMBER_SIZE}*${NUM}/512))
-DM_PARMS="0 ${RAID_SIZE} striped ${NUM} ${CHUNK}"
-COUNT=$((${MEMBER_SIZE} / ${BS}))
-
-for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
- dd if=/dev/zero of=member-${i} bs=${MEMBER_SIZE} count=1 oflag=direct
- losetup /dev/loop${i} member-${i}
- DM_PARMS+=" /dev/loop${i} 0"
-done
-
-echo $DM_PARMS | dmsetup create raid0
-for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
- echo "0 1 unstriped ${NUM} ${CHUNK} ${i} /dev/mapper/raid0 0" | dmsetup create set-${i}
-done;
-
-for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
- dd if=/dev/urandom of=/dev/mapper/set-${i} bs=${BS} count=${COUNT} oflag=direct
- diff /dev/mapper/set-${i} member-${i}
-done;
-
-for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
- dmsetup remove set-${i}
-done
-
-dmsetup remove raid0
-
-for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
- losetup -d /dev/loop${i}
- rm -f member-${i}
-done
+underlying device on the striped array::
+
+ #!/bin/bash
+
+ MEMBER_SIZE=$((128 * 1024 * 1024))
+ NUM=4
+ SEQ_END=$((${NUM}-1))
+ CHUNK=256
+ BS=4096
+
+ RAID_SIZE=$((${MEMBER_SIZE}*${NUM}/512))
+ DM_PARMS="0 ${RAID_SIZE} striped ${NUM} ${CHUNK}"
+ COUNT=$((${MEMBER_SIZE} / ${BS}))
+
+ for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
+ dd if=/dev/zero of=member-${i} bs=${MEMBER_SIZE} count=1 oflag=direct
+ losetup /dev/loop${i} member-${i}
+ DM_PARMS+=" /dev/loop${i} 0"
+ done
+
+ echo $DM_PARMS | dmsetup create raid0
+ for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
+ echo "0 1 unstriped ${NUM} ${CHUNK} ${i} /dev/mapper/raid0 0" | dmsetup create set-${i}
+ done;
+
+ for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
+ dd if=/dev/urandom of=/dev/mapper/set-${i} bs=${BS} count=${COUNT} oflag=direct
+ diff /dev/mapper/set-${i} member-${i}
+ done;
+
+ for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
+ dmsetup remove set-${i}
+ done
+
+ dmsetup remove raid0
+
+ for i in $(seq 0 ${SEQ_END}); do
+ losetup -d /dev/loop${i}
+ rm -f member-${i}
+ done
Another example
---------------
@@ -81,7 +85,7 @@ Another example
Intel NVMe drives contain two cores on the physical device.
Each core of the drive has segregated access to its LBA range.
The current LBA model has a RAID 0 128k chunk on each core, resulting
-in a 256k stripe across the two cores:
+in a 256k stripe across the two cores::
Core 0: Core 1:
__________ __________
@@ -108,17 +112,24 @@ Example dmsetup usage
unstriped ontop of Intel NVMe device that has 2 cores
-----------------------------------------------------
-dmsetup create nvmset0 --table '0 512 unstriped 2 256 0 /dev/nvme0n1 0'
-dmsetup create nvmset1 --table '0 512 unstriped 2 256 1 /dev/nvme0n1 0'
+
+::
+
+ dmsetup create nvmset0 --table '0 512 unstriped 2 256 0 /dev/nvme0n1 0'
+ dmsetup create nvmset1 --table '0 512 unstriped 2 256 1 /dev/nvme0n1 0'
There will now be two devices that expose Intel NVMe core 0 and 1
-respectively:
-/dev/mapper/nvmset0
-/dev/mapper/nvmset1
+respectively::
+
+ /dev/mapper/nvmset0
+ /dev/mapper/nvmset1
unstriped ontop of striped with 4 drives using 128K chunk size
--------------------------------------------------------------
-dmsetup create raid_disk0 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 0 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
-dmsetup create raid_disk1 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 1 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
-dmsetup create raid_disk2 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 2 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
-dmsetup create raid_disk3 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 3 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
+
+::
+
+ dmsetup create raid_disk0 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 0 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
+ dmsetup create raid_disk1 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 1 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
+ dmsetup create raid_disk2 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 2 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
+ dmsetup create raid_disk3 --table '0 512 unstriped 4 256 3 /dev/mapper/striped 0'
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt
index b3d2e4a42255..a4d1c1476d72 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/verity.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=========
dm-verity
-==========
+=========
Device-Mapper's "verity" target provides transparent integrity checking of
block devices using a cryptographic digest provided by the kernel crypto API.
@@ -7,6 +8,9 @@ This target is read-only.
Construction Parameters
=======================
+
+::
+
<version> <dev> <hash_dev>
<data_block_size> <hash_block_size>
<num_data_blocks> <hash_start_block>
@@ -160,7 +164,9 @@ calculating the parent node.
The tree looks something like:
-alg = sha256, num_blocks = 32768, block_size = 4096
+ alg = sha256, num_blocks = 32768, block_size = 4096
+
+::
[ root ]
/ . . . \
@@ -189,6 +195,7 @@ block boundary) are the hash blocks which are stored a depth at a time
The full specification of kernel parameters and on-disk metadata format
is available at the cryptsetup project's wiki page
+
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/wikis/DMVerity
Status
@@ -198,7 +205,8 @@ If any check failed, C (for Corruption) is returned.
Example
=======
-Set up a device:
+Set up a device::
+
# dmsetup create vroot --readonly --table \
"0 2097152 verity 1 /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2 4096 4096 262144 1 sha256 "\
"4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076 "\
@@ -209,11 +217,13 @@ the hash tree or activate the kernel device. This is available from
the cryptsetup upstream repository https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/
(as a libcryptsetup extension).
-Create hash on the device:
+Create hash on the device::
+
# veritysetup format /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2
...
Root hash: 4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076
-Activate the device:
+Activate the device::
+
# veritysetup create vroot /dev/sda1 /dev/sda2 \
4392712ba01368efdf14b05c76f9e4df0d53664630b5d48632ed17a137f39076
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt
index 01532b3008ae..d3d7690f5e8d 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=================
+Writecache target
+=================
+
The writecache target caches writes on persistent memory or on SSD. It
doesn't cache reads because reads are supposed to be cached in page cache
in normal RAM.
@@ -6,15 +10,18 @@ When the device is constructed, the first sector should be zeroed or the
first sector should contain valid superblock from previous invocation.
Constructor parameters:
+
1. type of the cache device - "p" or "s"
- p - persistent memory
- s - SSD
+
+ - p - persistent memory
+ - s - SSD
2. the underlying device that will be cached
3. the cache device
4. block size (4096 is recommended; the maximum block size is the page
size)
5. the number of optional parameters (the parameters with an argument
count as two)
+
start_sector n (default: 0)
offset from the start of cache device in 512-byte sectors
high_watermark n (default: 50)
@@ -43,6 +50,7 @@ Constructor parameters:
applicable only to persistent memory - don't use the FUA
flag when writing back data and send the FLUSH request
afterwards
+
- some underlying devices perform better with fua, some
with nofua. The user should test it
@@ -60,6 +68,7 @@ Messages:
flush the cache device on next suspend. Use this message
when you are going to remove the cache device. The proper
sequence for removing the cache device is:
+
1. send the "flush_on_suspend" message
2. load an inactive table with a linear target that maps
to the underlying device
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt
index 20fb38e7fa7e..11fb5cf4597c 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/zero.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======
dm-zero
=======
@@ -18,20 +19,19 @@ filesystem limitations.
To create a sparse device, start by creating a dm-zero device that's the
desired size of the sparse device. For this example, we'll assume a 10TB
-sparse device.
+sparse device::
-TEN_TERABYTES=`expr 10 \* 1024 \* 1024 \* 1024 \* 2` # 10 TB in sectors
-echo "0 $TEN_TERABYTES zero" | dmsetup create zero1
+ TEN_TERABYTES=`expr 10 \* 1024 \* 1024 \* 1024 \* 2` # 10 TB in sectors
+ echo "0 $TEN_TERABYTES zero" | dmsetup create zero1
Then create a snapshot of the zero device, using any available block-device as
the COW device. The size of the COW device will determine the amount of real
space available to the sparse device. For this example, we'll assume /dev/sdb1
-is an available 10GB partition.
+is an available 10GB partition::
-echo "0 $TEN_TERABYTES snapshot /dev/mapper/zero1 /dev/sdb1 p 128" | \
- dmsetup create sparse1
+ echo "0 $TEN_TERABYTES snapshot /dev/mapper/zero1 /dev/sdb1 p 128" | \
+ dmsetup create sparse1
This will create a 10TB sparse device called /dev/mapper/sparse1 that has
10GB of actual storage space available. If more than 10GB of data is written
to this device, it will start returning I/O errors.
-
--
2.20.1
There are only two files within Documentation/aoe dir that are
documentation. The remaining ones are examples and shell
scripts.
Convert the two AoE files to ReST format.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt | 63 +++++++++++++++++++++-----------------
Documentation/aoe/todo.txt | 3 ++
Documentation/aoe/udev.txt | 2 +-
3 files changed, 39 insertions(+), 29 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
index c71487d399d1..58747ecec71d 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/aoe.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+Introduction
+============
+
ATA over Ethernet is a network protocol that provides simple access to
block storage on the LAN.
@@ -22,7 +25,8 @@ document the use of the driver and are not necessary if you install
the aoetools.
-CREATING DEVICE NODES
+Creating Device Nodes
+=====================
Users of udev should find the block device nodes created
automatically, but to create all the necessary device nodes, use the
@@ -38,7 +42,8 @@ CREATING DEVICE NODES
confusing when an AoE device is not present the first time the a
command is run but appears a second later.
-USING DEVICE NODES
+Using Device Nodes
+==================
"cat /dev/etherd/err" blocks, waiting for error diagnostic output,
like any retransmitted packets.
@@ -55,7 +60,7 @@ USING DEVICE NODES
by sysfs counterparts. Using the commands in aoetools insulates
users from these implementation details.
- The block devices are named like this:
+ The block devices are named like this::
e{shelf}.{slot}
e{shelf}.{slot}p{part}
@@ -64,7 +69,8 @@ USING DEVICE NODES
first shelf (shelf address zero). That's the whole disk. The first
partition on that disk would be "e0.2p1".
-USING SYSFS
+Using sysfs
+===========
Each aoe block device in /sys/block has the extra attributes of
state, mac, and netif. The state attribute is "up" when the device
@@ -78,29 +84,29 @@ USING SYSFS
There is a script in this directory that formats this information in
a convenient way. Users with aoetools should use the aoe-stat
- command.
+ command::
- root@makki root# sh Documentation/aoe/status.sh
- e10.0 eth3 up
- e10.1 eth3 up
- e10.2 eth3 up
- e10.3 eth3 up
- e10.4 eth3 up
- e10.5 eth3 up
- e10.6 eth3 up
- e10.7 eth3 up
- e10.8 eth3 up
- e10.9 eth3 up
- e4.0 eth1 up
- e4.1 eth1 up
- e4.2 eth1 up
- e4.3 eth1 up
- e4.4 eth1 up
- e4.5 eth1 up
- e4.6 eth1 up
- e4.7 eth1 up
- e4.8 eth1 up
- e4.9 eth1 up
+ root@makki root# sh Documentation/aoe/status.sh
+ e10.0 eth3 up
+ e10.1 eth3 up
+ e10.2 eth3 up
+ e10.3 eth3 up
+ e10.4 eth3 up
+ e10.5 eth3 up
+ e10.6 eth3 up
+ e10.7 eth3 up
+ e10.8 eth3 up
+ e10.9 eth3 up
+ e4.0 eth1 up
+ e4.1 eth1 up
+ e4.2 eth1 up
+ e4.3 eth1 up
+ e4.4 eth1 up
+ e4.5 eth1 up
+ e4.6 eth1 up
+ e4.7 eth1 up
+ e4.8 eth1 up
+ e4.9 eth1 up
Use /sys/module/aoe/parameters/aoe_iflist (or better, the driver
option discussed below) instead of /dev/etherd/interfaces to limit
@@ -113,12 +119,13 @@ USING SYSFS
for this purpose. You can also directly use the
/dev/etherd/discover special file described above.
-DRIVER OPTIONS
+Driver Options
+==============
There is a boot option for the built-in aoe driver and a
corresponding module parameter, aoe_iflist. Without this option,
all network interfaces may be used for ATA over Ethernet. Here is a
- usage example for the module parameter.
+ usage example for the module parameter::
modprobe aoe_iflist="eth1 eth3"
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/todo.txt b/Documentation/aoe/todo.txt
index c09dfad4aed8..dea8db5a33e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/todo.txt
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/todo.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+TODO
+====
+
There is a potential for deadlock when allocating a struct sk_buff for
data that needs to be written out to aoe storage. If the data is
being written from a dirty page in order to free that page, and if
diff --git a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
index 1f06daf03f5b..54feda5a0772 100644
--- a/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
+++ b/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
# udev_rules="/etc/udev/rules.d/"
# bash# ls /etc/udev/rules.d/
# 10-wacom.rules 50-udev.rules
-# bash# cp /path/to/linux-2.6.xx/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt \
+# bash# cp /path/to/linux/Documentation/aoe/udev.txt \
# /etc/udev/rules.d/60-aoe.rules
#
--
2.20.1
Converts ARM the text files to ReST, preparing them to be an
architecture book.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/arm/Booting | 71 ++-
Documentation/arm/IXP4xx | 61 +-
Documentation/arm/Interrupts | 86 +--
Documentation/arm/Marvell/README | 537 ++++++++++--------
Documentation/arm/Microchip/README | 63 +-
Documentation/arm/Netwinder | 59 +-
Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS | 112 ++--
Documentation/arm/OMAP/README | 7 +
Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm | 55 +-
Documentation/arm/Porting | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/README | 50 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet | 185 +++---
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus | 45 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird | 26 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient | 46 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster | 13 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL | 8 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART | 3 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon | 4 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg | 2 -
Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART | 60 +-
Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt | 20 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt | 5 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt | 6 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt | 7 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt | 20 +-
.../arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt | 16 +-
.../arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt | 27 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/arm/Setup | 49 +-
Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt | 4 +-
.../arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt | 177 +++---
Documentation/arm/firmware.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt | 3 +
Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt | 79 +--
Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/mem_alignment | 11 +-
Documentation/arm/memory.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES | 3 +
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt | 106 ++--
Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt | 9 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst | 5 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst | 1 +
Documentation/arm/sunxi/README | 98 +++-
Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/arm/swp_emulation | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/tcm.txt | 54 +-
Documentation/arm/uefi.txt | 39 +-
Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/index.rst | 1 +
75 files changed, 1532 insertions(+), 1107 deletions(-)
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Booting b/Documentation/arm/Booting
index f1f965ce93d6..4babb6c6ae1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Booting
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Booting
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Booting ARM Linux
- =================
+=================
+Booting ARM Linux
+=================
Author: Russell King
+
Date : 18 May 2002
The following documentation is relevant to 2.4.18-rmk6 and beyond.
@@ -25,8 +27,10 @@ following:
1. Setup and initialise RAM
---------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: MANDATORY
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
The boot loader is expected to find and initialise all RAM that the
kernel will use for volatile data storage in the system. It performs
@@ -39,8 +43,10 @@ sees fit.)
2. Initialise one serial port
-----------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
-New boot loaders: OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
+New boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
The boot loader should initialise and enable one serial port on the
target. This allows the kernel serial driver to automatically detect
@@ -57,8 +63,10 @@ serial format options as described in
3. Detect the machine type
--------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY except for DT-only platforms
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY except for DT-only platforms
The boot loader should detect the machine type its running on by some
method. Whether this is a hard coded value or some algorithm that
@@ -74,8 +82,10 @@ necessary, but assures that it will not match any existing types.
4. Setup boot data
------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL, HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
The boot loader must provide either a tagged list or a dtb image for
passing configuration data to the kernel. The physical address of the
@@ -97,15 +107,15 @@ entirety; some tags behave as the former, others the latter.
The boot loader must pass at a minimum the size and location of
the system memory, and root filesystem location. Therefore, the
-minimum tagged list should look:
+minimum tagged list should look::
- +-----------+
-base -> | ATAG_CORE | |
- +-----------+ |
- | ATAG_MEM | | increasing address
- +-----------+ |
- | ATAG_NONE | |
- +-----------+ v
+ +-----------+
+ base -> | ATAG_CORE | |
+ +-----------+ |
+ | ATAG_MEM | | increasing address
+ +-----------+ |
+ | ATAG_NONE | |
+ +-----------+ v
The tagged list should be stored in system RAM.
@@ -134,8 +144,10 @@ A safe location is just above the 128MiB boundary from start of RAM.
5. Load initramfs.
------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL
-New boot loaders: OPTIONAL
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
+New boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
If an initramfs is in use then, as with the dtb, it must be placed in
a region of memory where the kernel decompressor will not overwrite it
@@ -149,8 +161,10 @@ recommended above.
6. Calling the kernel image
---------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: MANDATORY
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
There are two options for calling the kernel zImage. If the zImage
is stored in flash, and is linked correctly to be run from flash,
@@ -174,12 +188,14 @@ In any case, the following conditions must be met:
you many hours of debug.
- CPU register settings
- r0 = 0,
- r1 = machine type number discovered in (3) above.
- r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM, or
- physical address of device tree block (dtb) in system RAM
+
+ - r0 = 0,
+ - r1 = machine type number discovered in (3) above.
+ - r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM, or
+ physical address of device tree block (dtb) in system RAM
- CPU mode
+
All forms of interrupts must be disabled (IRQs and FIQs)
For CPUs which do not include the ARM virtualization extensions, the
@@ -195,8 +211,11 @@ In any case, the following conditions must be met:
entered in SVC mode.
- Caches, MMUs
+
The MMU must be off.
+
Instruction cache may be on or off.
+
Data cache must be off.
If the kernel is entered in HYP mode, the above requirements apply to
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
index e48b74de6ac0..a57235616294 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
+++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+===========================================================
Release Notes for Linux on Intel's IXP4xx Network Processor
+===========================================================
Maintained by Deepak Saxena <[email protected]>
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Maintained by Deepak Saxena <[email protected]>
1. Overview
Intel's IXP4xx network processor is a highly integrated SOC that
-is targeted for network applications, though it has become popular
+is targeted for network applications, though it has become popular
in industrial control and other areas due to low cost and power
consumption. The IXP4xx family currently consists of several processors
that support different network offload functions such as encryption,
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ For more information on the various versions of the CPU, see:
http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp4xx.htm
-Intel also made the IXCP1100 CPU for sometime which is an IXP4xx
+Intel also made the IXCP1100 CPU for sometime which is an IXP4xx
stripped of much of the network intelligence.
2. Linux Support
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips:
- PCI interface
- Flash access (MTD/JFFS)
- I2C through GPIO on IXP42x
-- GPIO for input/output/interrupts
+- GPIO for input/output/interrupts
See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions.
- Timers (watchdog, OS)
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR software:
If you need to use any of the above, you need to download Intel's
software from:
- http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm
+ http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm
DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPRIETARY
SOFTWARE.
@@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ SOFTWARE.
There are several websites that provide directions/pointers on using
Intel's software:
- http://sourceforge.net/projects/ixp4xx-osdg/
- Open Source Developer's Guide for using uClinux and the Intel libraries
+ - http://sourceforge.net/projects/ixp4xx-osdg/
+ Open Source Developer's Guide for using uClinux and the Intel libraries
-http://gatewaymaker.sourceforge.net/
- Simple one page summary of building a gateway using an IXP425 and Linux
+ - http://gatewaymaker.sourceforge.net/
+ Simple one page summary of building a gateway using an IXP425 and Linux
-http://ixp425.sourceforge.net/
- ATM device driver for IXP425 that relies on Intel's libraries
+ - http://ixp425.sourceforge.net/
+ ATM device driver for IXP425 that relies on Intel's libraries
3. Known Issues/Limitations
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The IXP4xx family allows for up to 256MB of memory but the PCI interface
can only expose 64MB of that memory to the PCI bus. This means that if
you are running with > 64MB, all PCI buffers outside of the accessible
range will be bounced using the routines in arch/arm/common/dmabounce.c.
-
+
3b. Limited outbound PCI window
IXP4xx provides two methods of accessing PCI memory space:
@@ -79,15 +79,15 @@ IXP4xx provides two methods of accessing PCI memory space:
To access PCI via this space, we simply ioremap() the BAR
into the kernel and we can use the standard read[bwl]/write[bwl]
macros. This is the preffered method due to speed but it
- limits the system to just 64MB of PCI memory. This can be
+ limits the system to just 64MB of PCI memory. This can be
problamatic if using video cards and other memory-heavy devices.
-
-2) If > 64MB of memory space is required, the IXP4xx can be
- configured to use indirect registers to access PCI This allows
- for up to 128MB (0x48000000 to 0x4fffffff) of memory on the bus.
- The disadvantage of this is that every PCI access requires
- three local register accesses plus a spinlock, but in some
- cases the performance hit is acceptable. In addition, you cannot
+
+2) If > 64MB of memory space is required, the IXP4xx can be
+ configured to use indirect registers to access PCI This allows
+ for up to 128MB (0x48000000 to 0x4fffffff) of memory on the bus.
+ The disadvantage of this is that every PCI access requires
+ three local register accesses plus a spinlock, but in some
+ cases the performance hit is acceptable. In addition, you cannot
mmap() PCI devices in this case due to the indirect nature
of the PCI window.
@@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ you need more PCI memory, enable the IXP4XX_INDIRECT_PCI config option.
3c. GPIO as Interrupts
-Currently the code only handles level-sensitive GPIO interrupts
+Currently the code only handles level-sensitive GPIO interrupts
4. Supported platforms
ADI Engineering Coyote Gateway Reference Platform
http://www.adiengineering.com/productsCoyote.html
- The ADI Coyote platform is reference design for those building
+ The ADI Coyote platform is reference design for those building
small residential/office gateways. One NPE is connected to a 10/100
interface, one to 4-port 10/100 switch, and the third to and ADSL
interface. In addition, it also supports to POTs interfaces connected
@@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ http://www.gateworks.com/support/overview.php
the expansion bus.
Intel IXDP425 Development Platform
-http://www.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixdpg425.htm
+http://www.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixdpg425.htm
- This is Intel's standard reference platform for the IXDP425 and is
+ This is Intel's standard reference platform for the IXDP425 and is
also known as the Richfield board. It contains 4 PCI slots, 16MB
of flash, two 10/100 ports and one ADSL port.
@@ -161,11 +161,12 @@ The IXP4xx work has been funded by Intel Corp. and MontaVista Software, Inc.
The following people have contributed patches/comments/etc:
-Lennerty Buytenhek
-Lutz Jaenicke
-Justin Mayfield
-Robert E. Ranslam
-[I know I've forgotten others, please email me to be added]
+- Lennerty Buytenhek
+- Lutz Jaenicke
+- Justin Mayfield
+- Robert E. Ranslam
+
+[I know I've forgotten others, please email me to be added]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
index f09ab1b90ef1..2ae70e0e9732 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
-2.5.2-rmk5
-----------
+==========
+Interrupts
+==========
-This is the first kernel that contains a major shake up of some of the
-major architecture-specific subsystems.
+2.5.2-rmk5:
+ This is the first kernel that contains a major shake up of some of the
+ major architecture-specific subsystems.
Firstly, it contains some pretty major changes to the way we handle the
MMU TLB. Each MMU TLB variant is now handled completely separately -
@@ -18,7 +20,7 @@ Unfortunately, this means that machine types that touch the irq_desc[]
array (basically all machine types) will break, and this means every
machine type that we currently have.
-Lets take an example. On the Assabet with Neponset, we have:
+Lets take an example. On the Assabet with Neponset, we have::
GPIO25 IRR:2
SA1100 ------------> Neponset -----------> SA1111
@@ -48,42 +50,47 @@ the irqdesc array). This doesn't have to be a real "IC"; indeed the
SA11x0 IRQs are handled by two separate "chip" structures, one for
GPIO0-10, and another for all the rest. It is just a container for
the various operations (maybe this'll change to a better name).
-This structure has the following operations:
+This structure has the following operations::
-struct irqchip {
- /*
- * Acknowledge the IRQ.
- * If this is a level-based IRQ, then it is expected to mask the IRQ
- * as well.
- */
- void (*ack)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Mask the IRQ in hardware.
- */
- void (*mask)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Unmask the IRQ in hardware.
- */
- void (*unmask)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Re-run the IRQ
- */
- void (*rerun)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Set the type of the IRQ.
- */
- int (*type)(unsigned int irq, unsigned int, type);
-};
+ struct irqchip {
+ /*
+ * Acknowledge the IRQ.
+ * If this is a level-based IRQ, then it is expected to mask the IRQ
+ * as well.
+ */
+ void (*ack)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Mask the IRQ in hardware.
+ */
+ void (*mask)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Unmask the IRQ in hardware.
+ */
+ void (*unmask)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Re-run the IRQ
+ */
+ void (*rerun)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Set the type of the IRQ.
+ */
+ int (*type)(unsigned int irq, unsigned int, type);
+ };
-ack - required. May be the same function as mask for IRQs
+ack
+ - required. May be the same function as mask for IRQs
handled by do_level_IRQ.
-mask - required.
-unmask - required.
-rerun - optional. Not required if you're using do_level_IRQ for all
+mask
+ - required.
+unmask
+ - required.
+rerun
+ - optional. Not required if you're using do_level_IRQ for all
IRQs that use this 'irqchip'. Generally expected to re-trigger
the hardware IRQ if possible. If not, may call the handler
directly.
-type - optional. If you don't support changing the type of an IRQ,
+type
+ - optional. If you don't support changing the type of an IRQ,
it should be null so people can detect if they are unable to
set the IRQ type.
@@ -109,6 +116,7 @@ manipulation, nor state tracking. This is useful for things like the
SMC9196 and USAR above.
So, what's changed?
+===================
1. Machine implementations must not write to the irqdesc array.
@@ -118,24 +126,19 @@ So, what's changed?
absolutely necessary.
set_irq_chip(irq,chip)
-
Set the mask/unmask methods for handling this IRQ
set_irq_handler(irq,handler)
-
Set the handler for this IRQ (level, edge, simple)
set_irq_chained_handler(irq,handler)
-
Set a "chained" handler for this IRQ - automatically
enables this IRQ (eg, Neponset and SA1111 handlers).
set_irq_flags(irq,flags)
-
Set the valid/probe/noautoenable flags.
set_irq_type(irq,type)
-
Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level. This replaces the
SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge()
function. Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in
@@ -158,10 +161,9 @@ So, what's changed?
be re-checked for pending events. (see the Neponset IRQ handler for
details).
-7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h
+7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is `arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h`
Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are
hardware based. Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same
parent signal (eg neponset) is one such area where a software based
solution can't provide the full answer to low IRQ latency.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
index 56ada27c53be..16ab2eb085b8 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================
ARM Marvell SoCs
================
@@ -12,221 +13,309 @@ Orion family
------------
Flavors:
- 88F5082
- 88F5181
- 88F5181L
- 88F5182
- Datasheet : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-datasheet.pdf
- Programmer's User Guide : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-opensource-manual.pdf
- User Manual : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-usermanual.pdf
- 88F5281
- Datasheet : http://www.ocmodshop.com/images/reviews/networking/qnap_ts409u/marvel_88f5281_data_sheet.pdf
- 88F6183
- Core: Feroceon 88fr331 (88f51xx) or 88fr531-vd (88f52xx) ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-orion5x
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
+ - 88F5082
+ - 88F5181
+ - 88F5181L
+ - 88F5182
+
+ - Datasheet: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-datasheet.pdf
+ - Programmer's User Guide: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-opensource-manual.pdf
+ - User Manual: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-usermanual.pdf
+ - 88F5281
+
+ - Datasheet: http://www.ocmodshop.com/images/reviews/networking/qnap_ts409u/marvel_88f5281_data_sheet.pdf
+ - 88F6183
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr331 (88f51xx) or 88fr531-vd (88f52xx) ARMv5 compatible
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-orion5x
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-orion
Kirkwood family
---------------
Flavors:
- 88F6282 a.k.a Armada 300
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
- 88F6283 a.k.a Armada 310
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
- 88F6190
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6190-003_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6192
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6192-003_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6182
- 88F6180
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6180-003_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6180_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6281
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6281-004_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6281_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/
- Core: Feroceon 88fr131 ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu
- Linux kernel plat directory: none
+ - 88F6282 a.k.a Armada 300
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+ - 88F6283 a.k.a Armada 310
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+ - 88F6190
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6190-003_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6192
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6192-003_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6182
+ - 88F6180
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6180-003_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6180_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6281
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6281-004_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr131 ARMv5 compatible
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mvebu
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ none
Discovery family
----------------
Flavors:
- MV78100
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78100-003_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78100_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
- MV78200
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78200-002_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78200_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
- MV76100
+ - MV78100
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78100-003_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78100_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - MV78200
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78200-002_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - MV76100
+
Not supported by the Linux kernel.
- Core: Feroceon 88fr571-vd ARMv5 compatible
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr571-vd ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-orion
EBU Armada family
-----------------
Armada 370 Flavors:
- 88F6710
- 88F6707
- 88F6W11
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/Marvell_ARMADA_370_SoC.pdf
- Hardware Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-datasheet.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-FunctionalSpec-datasheet.pdf
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 compatible PJ4B
+ - 88F6710
+ - 88F6707
+ - 88F6W11
+
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/Marvell_ARMADA_370_SoC.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-datasheet.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-FunctionalSpec-datasheet.pdf
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 compatible PJ4B
Armada 375 Flavors:
- 88F6720
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA_375_SoC-01_product_brief.pdf
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
+ - 88F6720
+
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA_375_SoC-01_product_brief.pdf
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
Armada 38x Flavors:
- 88F6810 Armada 380
- 88F6820 Armada 385
- 88F6828 Armada 388
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-38x/
- Functional Spec: https://marvellcorp.wufoo.com/forms/marvell-armada-38x-functional-specifications/
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
+ - 88F6810 Armada 380
+ - 88F6820 Armada 385
+ - 88F6828 Armada 388
+
+ - Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-38x/
+ - Functional Spec: https://marvellcorp.wufoo.com/forms/marvell-armada-38x-functional-specifications/
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
Armada 39x Flavors:
- 88F6920 Armada 390
- 88F6928 Armada 398
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-39x/
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
+ - 88F6920 Armada 390
+ - 88F6928 Armada 398
+
+ - Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-39x/
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
Armada XP Flavors:
- MV78230
- MV78260
- MV78460
- NOTE: not to be confused with the non-SMP 78xx0 SoCs
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/ARMADA-XP-Functional-SpecDatasheet.pdf
- Hardware Specs:
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78230_OS.PDF
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78260_OS.PDF
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78460_OS.PDF
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 compatible Dual-core or Quad-core PJ4B-MP
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu
- Linux kernel plat directory: none
+ - MV78230
+ - MV78260
+ - MV78460
+
+ NOTE:
+ not to be confused with the non-SMP 78xx0 SoCs
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf
+
+ Functional Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/ARMADA-XP-Functional-SpecDatasheet.pdf
+
+ - Hardware Specs:
+
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78230_OS.PDF
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78260_OS.PDF
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78460_OS.PDF
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 compatible Dual-core or Quad-core PJ4B-MP
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mvebu
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ none
EBU Armada family ARMv8
-----------------------
Armada 3710/3720 Flavors:
- 88F3710
- 88F3720
- Core: ARM Cortex A53 (ARMv8)
+ - 88F3710
+ - 88F3720
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-3700/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/PB-88F3700-FNL.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-37*
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex A53 (ARMv8)
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-3700/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/PB-88F3700-FNL.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-37*
Armada 7K Flavors:
- 88F7020 (AP806 Dual + one CP110)
- 88F7040 (AP806 Quad + one CP110)
- Core: ARM Cortex A72
-
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-70xx/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7020PB-Jan2016.pdf
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7040PB-Jan2016.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-70*
+ - 88F7020 (AP806 Dual + one CP110)
+ - 88F7040 (AP806 Quad + one CP110)
+
+ Core: ARM Cortex A72
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-70xx/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7020PB-Jan2016.pdf
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7040PB-Jan2016.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-70*
Armada 8K Flavors:
- 88F8020 (AP806 Dual + two CP110)
- 88F8040 (AP806 Quad + two CP110)
- Core: ARM Cortex A72
+ - 88F8020 (AP806 Dual + two CP110)
+ - 88F8040 (AP806 Quad + two CP110)
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex A72
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-80xx/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8020PB-Jan2016.pdf
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8040PB-Jan2016.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-80*
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-80xx/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8020PB-Jan2016.pdf
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8040PB-Jan2016.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-80*
Avanta family
-------------
Flavors:
- 88F6510
- 88F6530P
- 88F6550
- 88F6560
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/broadband/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/broadband/assets/Marvell_Avanta_88F6510_305_060-001_product_brief.pdf
+ - 88F6510
+ - 88F6530P
+ - 88F6550
+ - 88F6560
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/broadband/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/broadband/assets/Marvell_Avanta_88F6510_305_060-001_product_brief.pdf
+
No public datasheet available.
- Core: ARMv5 compatible
+ Core:
+ ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
- Linux kernel plat directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
Storage family
--------------
Armada SP:
- 88RC1580
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/storage/armada-sp/
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 comatible Quad-core PJ4C
- (not supported in upstream Linux kernel)
+ - 88RC1580
+
+ Product infos:
+ http://www.marvell.com/storage/armada-sp/
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 comatible Quad-core PJ4C
+
+ (not supported in upstream Linux kernel)
Dove family (application processor)
-----------------------------------
Flavors:
- 88AP510 a.k.a Armada 510
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Marvell_Armada510_SoC.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Hardware-Spec.pdf
- Functional Spec : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Functional-Spec.pdf
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/
- Core: ARMv7 compatible
-
- Directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu (DT enabled platforms)
- arch/arm/mach-dove (non-DT enabled platforms)
+ - 88AP510 a.k.a Armada 510
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Marvell_Armada510_SoC.pdf
+
+ Hardware Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Hardware-Spec.pdf
+
+ Functional Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Functional-Spec.pdf
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/
+
+ Core:
+ ARMv7 compatible
+
+ Directory:
+ - arch/arm/mach-mvebu (DT enabled platforms)
+ - arch/arm/mach-dove (non-DT enabled platforms)
PXA 2xx/3xx/93x/95x family
--------------------------
Flavors:
- PXA21x, PXA25x, PXA26x
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale1 core
- PXA270, PXA271, PXA272
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_pb.pdf
- Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_design_guide.pdf
- Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_dev_man.pdf
- Specification : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_emts.pdf
- Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_spec_update.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale2 core
- PXA300, PXA310, PXA320
- PXA 300 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA300_PB_R4.pdf
- PXA 310 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA310_PB_R4.pdf
- PXA 320 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA320_PB_R4.pdf
- Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Design_Guide.pdf
- Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Developers_Manual.zip
- Specifications : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_EMTS.pdf
- Specification Update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Spec_Update.zip
- Reference Manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_TavorP_BootROM_Ref_Manual.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
- PXA930, PXA935
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
- PXA955
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+ - PXA21x, PXA25x, PXA26x
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale1 core
+ - PXA270, PXA271, PXA272
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_pb.pdf
+ - Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_design_guide.pdf
+ - Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_dev_man.pdf
+ - Specification : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_emts.pdf
+ - Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_spec_update.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale2 core
+ - PXA300, PXA310, PXA320
+ - PXA 300 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA300_PB_R4.pdf
+ - PXA 310 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA310_PB_R4.pdf
+ - PXA 320 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA320_PB_R4.pdf
+ - Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Design_Guide.pdf
+ - Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Developers_Manual.zip
+ - Specifications : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_EMTS.pdf
+ - Specification Update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Spec_Update.zip
+ - Reference Manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_TavorP_BootROM_Ref_Manual.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
+ - PXA930, PXA935
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
+ - PXA955
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
Comments:
@@ -239,48 +328,50 @@ PXA 2xx/3xx/93x/95x family
common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
SoCs, except with the MMP/MMP2 family of SoCs.
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-pxa
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-pxa
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-pxa
MMP/MMP2/MMP3 family (communication processor)
------------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------------
Flavors:
- PXA168, a.k.a Armada 168
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/armada-168.jsp
- Product brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/pxa_168_pb.pdf
- Hardware manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_datasheet.pdf
- Software manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_software_manual.pdf
- Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/ARMADA16x_Spec_update.pdf
- Boot ROM manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_ref_manual.pdf
- App node package : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_app_note_package.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
- PXA910/PXA920
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/assets/Marvell_PXA910_Platform-001_PB_final.pdf
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
- PXA688, a.k.a. MMP2, a.k.a Armada 610
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-600/assets/armada610_pb.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x core
- PXA2128, a.k.a. MMP3 (OLPC XO4, Linux support not upstream)
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada/pxa2128/assets/Marvell-ARMADA-PXA2128-SoC-PB.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4C core
- PXA960/PXA968/PXA978 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
- PXA986/PXA988 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4B-MP core
- PXA1088/PXA1920 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: quad-core ARMv7 Cortex-A7
- PXA1908/PXA1928/PXA1936
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: multi-core ARMv8 Cortex-A53
+ - PXA168, a.k.a Armada 168
+ - Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/armada-168.jsp
+ - Product brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/pxa_168_pb.pdf
+ - Hardware manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_datasheet.pdf
+ - Software manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_software_manual.pdf
+ - Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/ARMADA16x_Spec_update.pdf
+ - Boot ROM manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_ref_manual.pdf
+ - App node package : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_app_note_package.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
+ - PXA910/PXA920
+ - Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/assets/Marvell_PXA910_Platform-001_PB_final.pdf
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
+ - PXA688, a.k.a. MMP2, a.k.a Armada 610
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-600/assets/armada610_pb.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x core
+ - PXA2128, a.k.a. MMP3 (OLPC XO4, Linux support not upstream)
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada/pxa2128/assets/Marvell-ARMADA-PXA2128-SoC-PB.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4C core
+ - PXA960/PXA968/PXA978 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+ - PXA986/PXA988 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4B-MP core
+ - PXA1088/PXA1920 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: quad-core ARMv7 Cortex-A7
+ - PXA1908/PXA1928/PXA1936
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: multi-core ARMv8 Cortex-A53
Comments:
@@ -292,33 +383,35 @@ MMP/MMP2/MMP3 family (communication processor)
common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
SoCs, except with the PXA family of SoCs listed above.
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mmp
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mmp
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-pxa
Berlin family (Multimedia Solutions)
-------------------------------------
- Flavors:
- 88DE3010, Armada 1000 (no Linux support)
- Core: Marvell PJ1 (ARMv5TE), Dual-core
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com.cn/digital-entertainment/assets/armada_1000_pb.pdf
- 88DE3005, Armada 1500 Mini
- Design name: BG2CD
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
- 88DE3006, Armada 1500 Mini Plus
- Design name: BG2CDP
- Core: Dual Core ARM Cortex-A7
- 88DE3100, Armada 1500
- Design name: BG2
- Core: Marvell PJ4B-MP (ARMv7), Tauros3 L2CC
- 88DE3114, Armada 1500 Pro
- Design name: BG2Q
- Core: Quad Core ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
- 88DE3214, Armada 1500 Pro 4K
- Design name: BG3
- Core: ARM Cortex-A15, CA15 integrated L2CC
- 88DE3218, ARMADA 1500 Ultra
- Core: ARM Cortex-A53
+ - Flavors:
+ - 88DE3010, Armada 1000 (no Linux support)
+ - Core: Marvell PJ1 (ARMv5TE), Dual-core
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com.cn/digital-entertainment/assets/armada_1000_pb.pdf
+ - 88DE3005, Armada 1500 Mini
+ - Design name: BG2CD
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
+ - 88DE3006, Armada 1500 Mini Plus
+ - Design name: BG2CDP
+ - Core: Dual Core ARM Cortex-A7
+ - 88DE3100, Armada 1500
+ - Design name: BG2
+ - Core: Marvell PJ4B-MP (ARMv7), Tauros3 L2CC
+ - 88DE3114, Armada 1500 Pro
+ - Design name: BG2Q
+ - Core: Quad Core ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
+ - 88DE3214, Armada 1500 Pro 4K
+ - Design name: BG3
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A15, CA15 integrated L2CC
+ - 88DE3218, ARMADA 1500 Ultra
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A53
Homepage: https://www.synaptics.com/products/multimedia-solutions
Directory: arch/arm/mach-berlin
@@ -387,9 +480,9 @@ Long-term plans
Credits
-------
- Maen Suleiman <[email protected]>
- Lior Amsalem <[email protected]>
- Thomas Petazzoni <[email protected]>
- Andrew Lunn <[email protected]>
- Nicolas Pitre <[email protected]>
- Eric Miao <[email protected]>
+- Maen Suleiman <[email protected]>
+- Lior Amsalem <[email protected]>
+- Thomas Petazzoni <[email protected]>
+- Andrew Lunn <[email protected]>
+- Nicolas Pitre <[email protected]>
+- Eric Miao <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README b/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README
index a366f37d38f1..c9a44c98e868 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================
ARM Microchip SoCs (aka AT91)
=============================
@@ -22,32 +23,46 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
Flavors:
* ARM 920 based SoC
- at91rm9200
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-1768-32-bit-ARM920T-Embedded-Microprocessor-AT91RM9200_Datasheet.pdf
* ARM 926 based SoCs
- at91sam9260
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6221-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9260_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9xe
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6254-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9XE_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9261
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6062-ARM926EJ-S-Microprocessor-SAM9261_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9263
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6249-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9263_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9rl
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/doc6289.pdf
- at91sam9g20
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001516A.pdf
- at91sam9g45 family
@@ -55,7 +70,9 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- at91sam9g46
- at91sam9m10
- at91sam9m11 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6437-32-bit-ARM926-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9M11_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9x5 family (aka "The 5 series")
@@ -64,33 +81,44 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- at91sam9g35
- at91sam9x25
- at91sam9x35
- + Datasheet (can be considered as covering the whole family)
+
+ * Datasheet (can be considered as covering the whole family)
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-11055-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Microcontroller-SAM9X35_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9n12
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001517A.pdf
* ARM Cortex-A5 based SoCs
- sama5d3 family
+
- sama5d31
- sama5d33
- sama5d34
- sama5d35
- sama5d36 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-11121-32-bit-Cortex-A5-Microcontroller-SAMA5D3_Datasheet.pdf
* ARM Cortex-A5 + NEON based SoCs
- sama5d4 family
+
- sama5d41
- sama5d42
- sama5d43
- sama5d44 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/60001525A.pdf
- sama5d2 family
+
- sama5d21
- sama5d22
- sama5d23
@@ -98,11 +126,14 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- sama5d26
- sama5d27 (device superset)
- sama5d28 (device superset + environmental monitors)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001476B.pdf
* ARM Cortex-M7 MCUs
- sams70 family
+
- sams70j19
- sams70j20
- sams70j21
@@ -114,6 +145,7 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- sams70q21
- samv70 family
+
- samv70j19
- samv70j20
- samv70n19
@@ -122,6 +154,7 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- samv70q20
- samv71 family
+
- samv71j19
- samv71j20
- samv71j21
@@ -132,7 +165,8 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- samv71q20
- samv71q21
- + Datasheet
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/60001527A.pdf
@@ -157,6 +191,7 @@ definition of a "Stable" binding/ABI.
This statement will be removed by AT91 MAINTAINERS when appropriate.
Naming conventions and best practice:
+
- SoCs Device Tree Source Include files are named after the official name of
the product (at91sam9g20.dtsi or sama5d33.dtsi for instance).
- Device Tree Source Include files (.dtsi) are used to collect common nodes that can be
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Netwinder b/Documentation/arm/Netwinder
index f1b457fbd3de..8eab66caa2ac 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Netwinder
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Netwinder
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
NetWinder specific documentation
================================
@@ -8,44 +9,47 @@ DC21285 PCI bridge, with PC-type hardware glued around it.
Port usage
==========
-Min - Max Description
----------------------------
-0x0000 - 0x000f DMA1
-0x0020 - 0x0021 PIC1
-0x0060 - 0x006f Keyboard
-0x0070 - 0x007f RTC
-0x0080 - 0x0087 DMA1
-0x0088 - 0x008f DMA2
-0x00a0 - 0x00a3 PIC2
-0x00c0 - 0x00df DMA2
-0x0180 - 0x0187 IRDA
-0x01f0 - 0x01f6 ide0
+======= ====== ===============================
+Min Max Description
+======= ====== ===============================
+0x0000 0x000f DMA1
+0x0020 0x0021 PIC1
+0x0060 0x006f Keyboard
+0x0070 0x007f RTC
+0x0080 0x0087 DMA1
+0x0088 0x008f DMA2
+0x00a0 0x00a3 PIC2
+0x00c0 0x00df DMA2
+0x0180 0x0187 IRDA
+0x01f0 0x01f6 ide0
0x0201 Game port
0x0203 RWA010 configuration read
-0x0220 - ? SoundBlaster
-0x0250 - ? WaveArtist
+0x0220 ? SoundBlaster
+0x0250 ? WaveArtist
0x0279 RWA010 configuration index
-0x02f8 - 0x02ff Serial ttyS1
-0x0300 - 0x031f Ether10
+0x02f8 0x02ff Serial ttyS1
+0x0300 0x031f Ether10
0x0338 GPIO1
0x033a GPIO2
-0x0370 - 0x0371 W83977F configuration registers
-0x0388 - ? AdLib
-0x03c0 - 0x03df VGA
+0x0370 0x0371 W83977F configuration registers
+0x0388 ? AdLib
+0x03c0 0x03df VGA
0x03f6 ide0
-0x03f8 - 0x03ff Serial ttyS0
-0x0400 - 0x0408 DC21143
-0x0480 - 0x0487 DMA1
-0x0488 - 0x048f DMA2
+0x03f8 0x03ff Serial ttyS0
+0x0400 0x0408 DC21143
+0x0480 0x0487 DMA1
+0x0488 0x048f DMA2
0x0a79 RWA010 configuration write
-0xe800 - 0xe80f ide0/ide1 BM DMA
+0xe800 0xe80f ide0/ide1 BM DMA
+======= ====== ===============================
Interrupt usage
===============
+======= ======= ========================
IRQ type Description
----------------------------
+======= ======= ========================
0 ISA 100Hz timer
1 ISA Keyboard
2 ISA cascade
@@ -62,12 +66,14 @@ IRQ type Description
13 ISA
14 ISA hda1
15 ISA
+======= ======= ========================
DMA usage
=========
+======= ======= ===========
DMA type Description
----------------------------
+======= ======= ===========
0 ISA IRDA
1 ISA
2 ISA cascade
@@ -76,3 +82,4 @@ DMA type Description
5 ISA
6 ISA
7 ISA WaveArtist
+======= ======= ===========
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
index 4484e021290e..a40c4d9c717a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
+++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=========================
OMAP2/3 Display Subsystem
--------------------------
+=========================
This is an almost total rewrite of the OMAP FB driver in drivers/video/omap
(let's call it DSS1). The main differences between DSS1 and DSS2 are DSI,
@@ -190,6 +191,8 @@ trans_key_value transparency color key (RGB24)
default_color default background color (RGB24)
/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display? directory:
+
+=============== =============================================================
ctrl_name Controller name
mirror 0=off, 1=on
update_mode 0=off, 1=auto, 2=manual
@@ -202,6 +205,7 @@ timings Display timings (pixclock,xres/hfp/hbp/hsw,yres/vfp/vbp/vsw)
panel_name
tear_elim Tearing elimination 0=off, 1=on
output_type Output type (video encoder only): "composite" or "svideo"
+=============== =============================================================
There are also some debugfs files at <debugfs>/omapdss/ which show information
about clocks and registers.
@@ -209,22 +213,22 @@ about clocks and registers.
Examples
--------
-The following definitions have been made for the examples below:
+The following definitions have been made for the examples below::
-ovl0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay0
-ovl1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay1
-ovl2=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay2
+ ovl0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay0
+ ovl1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay1
+ ovl2=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay2
-mgr0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager0
-mgr1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager1
+ mgr0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager0
+ mgr1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager1
-lcd=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display0
-dvi=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display1
-tv=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display2
+ lcd=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display0
+ dvi=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display1
+ tv=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display2
-fb0=/sys/class/graphics/fb0
-fb1=/sys/class/graphics/fb1
-fb2=/sys/class/graphics/fb2
+ fb0=/sys/class/graphics/fb0
+ fb1=/sys/class/graphics/fb1
+ fb2=/sys/class/graphics/fb2
Default setup on OMAP3 SDP
--------------------------
@@ -232,55 +236,59 @@ Default setup on OMAP3 SDP
Here's the default setup on OMAP3 SDP board. All planes go to LCD. DVI
and TV-out are not in use. The columns from left to right are:
framebuffers, overlays, overlay managers, displays. Framebuffers are
-handled by omapfb, and the rest by the DSS.
+handled by omapfb, and the rest by the DSS::
-FB0 --- GFX -\ DVI
-FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD ---- LCD
-FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
+ FB0 --- GFX -\ DVI
+ FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD ---- LCD
+ FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
Example: Switch from LCD to DVI
-----------------------
-
-w=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-h=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-
-echo "0" > $lcd/enabled
-echo "" > $mgr0/display
-fbset -fb /dev/fb0 -xres $w -yres $h -vxres $w -vyres $h
-# at this point you have to switch the dvi/lcd dip-switch from the omap board
-echo "dvi" > $mgr0/display
-echo "1" > $dvi/enabled
-
-After this the configuration looks like:
-
-FB0 --- GFX -\ -- DVI
-FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD -/ LCD
-FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
-
-Example: Clone GFX overlay to LCD and TV
-------------------------------
-w=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-h=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+::
-echo "0" > $ovl0/enabled
-echo "0" > $ovl1/enabled
+ w=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+ h=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-echo "" > $fb1/overlays
-echo "0,1" > $fb0/overlays
+ echo "0" > $lcd/enabled
+ echo "" > $mgr0/display
+ fbset -fb /dev/fb0 -xres $w -yres $h -vxres $w -vyres $h
+ # at this point you have to switch the dvi/lcd dip-switch from the omap board
+ echo "dvi" > $mgr0/display
+ echo "1" > $dvi/enabled
-echo "$w,$h" > $ovl1/output_size
-echo "tv" > $ovl1/manager
+After this the configuration looks like:::
-echo "1" > $ovl0/enabled
-echo "1" > $ovl1/enabled
+ FB0 --- GFX -\ -- DVI
+ FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD -/ LCD
+ FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
-echo "1" > $tv/enabled
+Example: Clone GFX overlay to LCD and TV
+----------------------------------------
-After this the configuration looks like (only relevant parts shown):
+::
-FB0 +-- GFX ---- LCD ---- LCD
- \- VID1 ---- TV ---- TV
+ w=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+ h=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+
+ echo "0" > $ovl0/enabled
+ echo "0" > $ovl1/enabled
+
+ echo "" > $fb1/overlays
+ echo "0,1" > $fb0/overlays
+
+ echo "$w,$h" > $ovl1/output_size
+ echo "tv" > $ovl1/manager
+
+ echo "1" > $ovl0/enabled
+ echo "1" > $ovl1/enabled
+
+ echo "1" > $tv/enabled
+
+After this the configuration looks like (only relevant parts shown)::
+
+ FB0 +-- GFX ---- LCD ---- LCD
+ \- VID1 ---- TV ---- TV
Misc notes
----------
@@ -351,12 +359,14 @@ TODO
DSS locking
Error checking
+
- Lots of checks are missing or implemented just as BUG()
System DMA update for DSI
+
- Can be used for RGB16 and RGB24P modes. Probably not for RGB24U (how
to skip the empty byte?)
OMAP1 support
+
- Not sure if needed
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README
index 90c6c57d61e8..f440c0f4613f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README
@@ -1,7 +1,13 @@
+============
+OMAP history
+============
+
This file contains documentation for running mainline
kernel on omaps.
+====== ======================================================
KERNEL NEW DEPENDENCIES
+====== ======================================================
v4.3+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
CONFIG_REGULATOR_PBIAS is enabled for MMC1 to work
properly.
@@ -9,3 +15,4 @@ v4.3+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
v4.18+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
CONFIG_MMC_SDHCI_OMAP is enabled for all MMC instances
to work in DRA7 and K2G based boards.
+====== ======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
index 4ae915a9f899..a335e4c8ce2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
+++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+=====================
The OMAP PM interface
=====================
@@ -31,19 +31,24 @@ Drivers need to express PM parameters which:
This document proposes the OMAP PM interface, including the following
five power management functions for driver code:
-1. Set the maximum MPU wakeup latency:
+1. Set the maximum MPU wakeup latency::
+
(*pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t)
-2. Set the maximum device wakeup latency:
+2. Set the maximum device wakeup latency::
+
(*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t)
-3. Set the maximum system DMA transfer start latency (CORE pwrdm):
+3. Set the maximum system DMA transfer start latency (CORE pwrdm)::
+
(*pdata->set_max_sdma_lat)(struct device *dev, long t)
-4. Set the minimum bus throughput needed by a device:
+4. Set the minimum bus throughput needed by a device::
+
(*pdata->set_min_bus_tput)(struct device *dev, u8 agent_id, unsigned long r)
-5. Return the number of times the device has lost context
+5. Return the number of times the device has lost context::
+
(*pdata->get_dev_context_loss_count)(struct device *dev)
@@ -65,12 +70,13 @@ Driver usage of the OMAP PM functions
As the 'pdata' in the above examples indicates, these functions are
exposed to drivers through function pointers in driver .platform_data
-structures. The function pointers are initialized by the board-*.c
+structures. The function pointers are initialized by the `board-*.c`
files to point to the corresponding OMAP PM functions:
-.set_max_dev_wakeup_lat will point to
-omap_pm_set_max_dev_wakeup_lat(), etc. Other architectures which do
-not support these functions should leave these function pointers set
-to NULL. Drivers should use the following idiom:
+
+- set_max_dev_wakeup_lat will point to
+ omap_pm_set_max_dev_wakeup_lat(), etc. Other architectures which do
+ not support these functions should leave these function pointers set
+ to NULL. Drivers should use the following idiom::
if (pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)
(*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(dev, t);
@@ -81,7 +87,7 @@ becomes accessible. To accomplish this, driver writers should use the
set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the MPU wakeup
latency, and the set_max_dev_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the
device wakeup latency (from clk_enable() to accessibility). For
-example,
+example::
/* Limit MPU wakeup latency */
if (pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)
@@ -116,17 +122,17 @@ specialized cases to convert that input information (OPPs/MPU
frequency) into the form that the underlying power management
implementation needs:
-6. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp_table)(void)
+6. `(*pdata->dsp_get_opp_table)(void)`
-7. (*pdata->dsp_set_min_opp)(u8 opp_id)
+7. `(*pdata->dsp_set_min_opp)(u8 opp_id)`
-8. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp)(void)
+8. `(*pdata->dsp_get_opp)(void)`
-9. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq_table)(void)
+9. `(*pdata->cpu_get_freq_table)(void)`
-10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f)
+10. `(*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f)`
-11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void)
+11. `(*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void)`
Customizing OPP for platform
============================
@@ -134,12 +140,15 @@ Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon
and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically.
However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be
tweaked, for e.g.:
+
* enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which
could be enabled on a platform
* Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform
* Define and add a custom opp table entry
-in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows:
-arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c
+ in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows:
+
+arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c::
+
#include "pm.h"
....
static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void)
@@ -150,5 +159,7 @@ arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c
/* Do customization to the defaults */
....
}
-NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required
-based on the omap family.
+
+NOTE:
+ omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required
+ based on the omap family.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Porting b/Documentation/arm/Porting
index a492233931b9..bd21958bdb2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Porting
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Porting
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=======
+Porting
+=======
+
Taken from list archive at http://lists.arm.linux.org.uk/pipermail/linux-arm-kernel/2001-July/004064.html
Initial definitions
@@ -89,8 +93,7 @@ DATAADDR
Virtual address for the kernel data segment. Must not be defined
when using the decompressor.
-VMALLOC_START
-VMALLOC_END
+VMALLOC_START / VMALLOC_END
Virtual addresses bounding the vmalloc() area. There must not be
any static mappings in this area; vmalloc will overwrite them.
The addresses must also be in the kernel segment (see above).
@@ -107,13 +110,13 @@ Architecture Specific Macros
----------------------------
BOOT_MEM(pram,pio,vio)
- `pram' specifies the physical start address of RAM. Must always
+ `pram` specifies the physical start address of RAM. Must always
be present, and should be the same as PHYS_OFFSET.
- `pio' is the physical address of an 8MB region containing IO for
+ `pio` is the physical address of an 8MB region containing IO for
use with the debugging macros in arch/arm/kernel/debug-armv.S.
- `vio' is the virtual address of the 8MB debugging region.
+ `vio` is the virtual address of the 8MB debugging region.
It is expected that the debugging region will be re-initialised
by the architecture specific code later in the code (via the
@@ -132,4 +135,3 @@ MAPIO(func)
INITIRQ(func)
Machine specific function to initialise interrupts.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/README
index 9d1e5b2c92e6..2edc509df92a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/README
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- ARM Linux 2.6
- =============
+=======================
+ARM Linux 2.6 and upper
+=======================
Please check <ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/armlinux> for
updates.
@@ -18,22 +19,28 @@ Compilation of kernel
line as detailed below.
If you wish to cross-compile, then alter the following lines in the top
- level make file:
+ level make file::
ARCH = <whatever>
- with
+
+ with::
+
ARCH = arm
- and
+ and::
CROSS_COMPILE=
- to
+
+ to::
+
CROSS_COMPILE=<your-path-to-your-compiler-without-gcc>
- eg.
+
+ eg.::
+
CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-
- Do a 'make config', followed by 'make Image' to build the kernel
- (arch/arm/boot/Image). A compressed image can be built by doing a
+ Do a 'make config', followed by 'make Image' to build the kernel
+ (arch/arm/boot/Image). A compressed image can be built by doing a
'make zImage' instead of 'make Image'.
@@ -46,7 +53,7 @@ Bug reports etc
Bug reports should be sent to [email protected],
or submitted through the web form at
- http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/
+ http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/
When sending bug reports, please ensure that they contain all relevant
information, eg. the kernel messages that were printed before/during
@@ -60,11 +67,13 @@ Include files
which are there to reduce the clutter in the top-level directory. These
directories, and their purpose is listed below:
- arch-* machine/platform specific header files
- hardware driver-internal ARM specific data structures/definitions
- mach descriptions of generic ARM to specific machine interfaces
- proc-* processor dependent header files (currently only two
+ ============= ==========================================================
+ `arch-*` machine/platform specific header files
+ `hardware` driver-internal ARM specific data structures/definitions
+ `mach` descriptions of generic ARM to specific machine interfaces
+ `proc-*` processor dependent header files (currently only two
categories)
+ ============= ==========================================================
Machine/Platform support
@@ -129,7 +138,7 @@ ST506 hard drives
HDC base to the source.
As of 31/3/96 it works with two drives (you should get the ADFS
- *configure harddrive set to 2). I've got an internal 20MB and a great
+ `*configure` harddrive set to 2). I've got an internal 20MB and a great
big external 5.25" FH 64MB drive (who could ever want more :-) ).
I've just got 240K/s off it (a dd with bs=128k); thats about half of what
@@ -149,13 +158,13 @@ ST506 hard drives
are welcome.
-CONFIG_MACH_ and CONFIG_ARCH_
------------------------------
+`CONFIG_MACH_` and `CONFIG_ARCH_`
+---------------------------------
A change was made in 2003 to the macro names for new machines.
- Historically, CONFIG_ARCH_ was used for the bonafide architecture,
+ Historically, `CONFIG_ARCH_` was used for the bonafide architecture,
e.g. SA1100, as well as implementations of the architecture,
e.g. Assabet. It was decided to change the implementation macros
- to read CONFIG_MACH_ for clarity. Moreover, a retroactive fixup has
+ to read `CONFIG_MACH_` for clarity. Moreover, a retroactive fixup has
not been made because it would complicate patching.
Previous registrations may be found online.
@@ -163,7 +172,7 @@ CONFIG_MACH_ and CONFIG_ARCH_
<http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/>
Kernel entry (head.S)
---------------------------
+---------------------
The initial entry into the kernel is via head.S, which uses machine
independent code. The machine is selected by the value of 'r1' on
entry, which must be kept unique.
@@ -201,4 +210,5 @@ Kernel entry (head.S)
platform is DT-only, you do not need a registered machine type.
---
+
Russell King (15/03/2004)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
index f9f62e8c0719..c179cb26b682 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+===============================
ADS Bitsy Single Board Computer
+===============================
+
(It is different from Bitsy(iPAQ) of Compaq)
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
@@ -15,7 +18,9 @@ The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0400000.
Linux can be used with the ADS BootLoader that ships with the
newer rev boards. See their documentation on how to load Linux.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- SA1111 USB Master
- SA1100 serial port
@@ -25,10 +30,13 @@ Supported peripherals:
- serial ports (ttyS[0-2])
- ttyS0 is default for serial console
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions.
You should be careful to use flash on board.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet
index e08a6739e72c..3e704831c311 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================================
The Intel Assabet (SA-1110 evaluation) board
============================================
@@ -11,7 +12,7 @@ http://www.cs.cmu.edu/~wearable/software/assabet.html
Building the kernel
-------------------
-To build the kernel with current defaults:
+To build the kernel with current defaults::
make assabet_config
make oldconfig
@@ -51,9 +52,9 @@ Brief examples on how to boot Linux with RedBoot are shown below. But first
you need to have RedBoot installed in your flash memory. A known to work
precompiled RedBoot binary is available from the following location:
-ftp://ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico/
-ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/arm/people/nico/
-ftp://ftp.handhelds.org/pub/linux/arm/sa-1100-patches/
+- ftp://ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico/
+- ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/arm/people/nico/
+- ftp://ftp.handhelds.org/pub/linux/arm/sa-1100-patches/
Look for redboot-assabet*.tgz. Some installation infos are provided in
redboot-assabet*.txt.
@@ -71,12 +72,12 @@ Socket Communications Inc.), you should strongly consider using it for TFTP
file transfers. You must insert it before RedBoot runs since it can't detect
it dynamically.
-To initialize the flash directory:
+To initialize the flash directory::
fis init -f
To initialize the non-volatile settings, like whether you want to use BOOTP or
-a static IP address, etc, use this command:
+a static IP address, etc, use this command::
fconfig -i
@@ -85,15 +86,15 @@ Writing a kernel image into flash
---------------------------------
First, the kernel image must be loaded into RAM. If you have the zImage file
-available on a TFTP server:
+available on a TFTP server::
load zImage -r -b 0x100000
-If you rather want to use Y-Modem upload over the serial port:
+If you rather want to use Y-Modem upload over the serial port::
load -m ymodem -r -b 0x100000
-To write it to flash:
+To write it to flash::
fis create "Linux kernel" -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
@@ -102,18 +103,18 @@ Booting the kernel
------------------
The kernel still requires a filesystem to boot. A ramdisk image can be loaded
-as follows:
+as follows::
load ramdisk_image.gz -r -b 0x800000
Again, Y-Modem upload can be used instead of TFTP by replacing the file name
by '-y ymodem'.
-Now the kernel can be retrieved from flash like this:
+Now the kernel can be retrieved from flash like this::
fis load "Linux kernel"
-or loaded as described previously. To boot the kernel:
+or loaded as described previously. To boot the kernel::
exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
@@ -134,35 +135,35 @@ creating JFFS/JFFS2 images is available from the same site.
For instance, a sample JFFS2 image can be retrieved from the same FTP sites
mentioned below for the precompiled RedBoot image.
-To load this file:
+To load this file::
load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
-The result should look like:
+The result should look like::
-RedBoot> load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
-Raw file loaded 0x00100000-0x00377424
+ RedBoot> load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
+ Raw file loaded 0x00100000-0x00377424
-Now we must know the size of the unallocated flash:
+Now we must know the size of the unallocated flash::
fis free
-Result:
+Result::
-RedBoot> fis free
- 0x500E0000 .. 0x503C0000
+ RedBoot> fis free
+ 0x500E0000 .. 0x503C0000
The values above may be different depending on the size of the filesystem and
the type of flash. See their usage below as an example and take care of
substituting yours appropriately.
-We must determine some values:
+We must determine some values::
-size of unallocated flash: 0x503c0000 - 0x500e0000 = 0x2e0000
-size of the filesystem image: 0x00377424 - 0x00100000 = 0x277424
+ size of unallocated flash: 0x503c0000 - 0x500e0000 = 0x2e0000
+ size of the filesystem image: 0x00377424 - 0x00100000 = 0x277424
We want to fit the filesystem image of course, but we also want to give it all
-the remaining flash space as well. To write it:
+the remaining flash space as well. To write it::
fis unlock -f 0x500E0000 -l 0x2e0000
fis erase -f 0x500E0000 -l 0x2e0000
@@ -171,32 +172,32 @@ the remaining flash space as well. To write it:
Now the filesystem is associated to a MTD "partition" once Linux has discovered
what they are in the boot process. From Redboot, the 'fis list' command
-displays them:
+displays them::
-RedBoot> fis list
-Name FLASH addr Mem addr Length Entry point
-RedBoot 0x50000000 0x50000000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-RedBoot config 0x503C0000 0x503C0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-FIS directory 0x503E0000 0x503E0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-Linux kernel 0x50020000 0x00100000 0x000C0000 0x00000000
-JFFS2 0x500E0000 0x500E0000 0x002E0000 0x00000000
+ RedBoot> fis list
+ Name FLASH addr Mem addr Length Entry point
+ RedBoot 0x50000000 0x50000000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ RedBoot config 0x503C0000 0x503C0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ FIS directory 0x503E0000 0x503E0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ Linux kernel 0x50020000 0x00100000 0x000C0000 0x00000000
+ JFFS2 0x500E0000 0x500E0000 0x002E0000 0x00000000
-However Linux should display something like:
+However Linux should display something like::
-SA1100 flash: probing 32-bit flash bus
-SA1100 flash: Found 2 x16 devices at 0x0 in 32-bit mode
-Using RedBoot partition definition
-Creating 5 MTD partitions on "SA1100 flash":
-0x00000000-0x00020000 : "RedBoot"
-0x00020000-0x000e0000 : "Linux kernel"
-0x000e0000-0x003c0000 : "JFFS2"
-0x003c0000-0x003e0000 : "RedBoot config"
-0x003e0000-0x00400000 : "FIS directory"
+ SA1100 flash: probing 32-bit flash bus
+ SA1100 flash: Found 2 x16 devices at 0x0 in 32-bit mode
+ Using RedBoot partition definition
+ Creating 5 MTD partitions on "SA1100 flash":
+ 0x00000000-0x00020000 : "RedBoot"
+ 0x00020000-0x000e0000 : "Linux kernel"
+ 0x000e0000-0x003c0000 : "JFFS2"
+ 0x003c0000-0x003e0000 : "RedBoot config"
+ 0x003e0000-0x00400000 : "FIS directory"
What's important here is the position of the partition we are interested in,
which is the third one. Within Linux, this correspond to /dev/mtdblock2.
Therefore to boot Linux with the kernel and its root filesystem in flash, we
-need this RedBoot command:
+need this RedBoot command::
fis load "Linux kernel"
exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000 -c "root=/dev/mtdblock2"
@@ -218,21 +219,21 @@ time the Assabet is rebooted. Therefore it's possible to automate the boot
process using RedBoot's scripting capability.
For example, I use this to boot Linux with both the kernel and the ramdisk
-images retrieved from a TFTP server on the network:
+images retrieved from a TFTP server on the network::
-RedBoot> fconfig
-Run script at boot: false true
-Boot script:
-Enter script, terminate with empty line
->> load zImage -r -b 0x100000
->> load ramdisk_ks.gz -r -b 0x800000
->> exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
->>
-Boot script timeout (1000ms resolution): 3
-Use BOOTP for network configuration: true
-GDB connection port: 9000
-Network debug at boot time: false
-Update RedBoot non-volatile configuration - are you sure (y/n)? y
+ RedBoot> fconfig
+ Run script at boot: false true
+ Boot script:
+ Enter script, terminate with empty line
+ >> load zImage -r -b 0x100000
+ >> load ramdisk_ks.gz -r -b 0x800000
+ >> exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
+ >>
+ Boot script timeout (1000ms resolution): 3
+ Use BOOTP for network configuration: true
+ GDB connection port: 9000
+ Network debug at boot time: false
+ Update RedBoot non-volatile configuration - are you sure (y/n)? y
Then, rebooting the Assabet is just a matter of waiting for the login prompt.
@@ -240,6 +241,7 @@ Then, rebooting the Assabet is just a matter of waiting for the login prompt.
Nicolas Pitre
[email protected]
+
June 12, 2001
@@ -249,52 +251,51 @@ Status of peripherals in -rmk tree (updated 14/10/2001)
Assabet:
Serial ports:
Radio: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RI
- PM: Not tested.
- COM: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR, PM
- PM: Not tested.
- I2C: Implemented, not fully tested.
- L3: Fully tested, pass.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - COM: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR, PM
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - I2C: Implemented, not fully tested.
+ - L3: Fully tested, pass.
+ - PM: Not tested.
Video:
- LCD: Fully tested. PM
- (LCD doesn't like being blanked with
- neponset connected)
- Video out: Not fully
+ - LCD: Fully tested. PM
+
+ (LCD doesn't like being blanked with neponset connected)
+
+ - Video out: Not fully
Audio:
UDA1341:
- Playback: Fully tested, pass.
- Record: Implemented, not tested.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - Playback: Fully tested, pass.
+ - Record: Implemented, not tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
UCB1200:
- Audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Telco audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Telco audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- POTS control: No
- Touchscreen: Yes
- PM: Not tested.
+ - Audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Telco audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Telco audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - POTS control: No
+ - Touchscreen: Yes
+ - PM: Not tested.
Other:
- PCMCIA:
- LPE: Fully tested, pass.
- USB: No
- IRDA:
- SIR: Fully tested, pass.
- FIR: Fully tested, pass.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - PCMCIA:
+ - LPE: Fully tested, pass.
+ - USB: No
+ - IRDA:
+ - SIR: Fully tested, pass.
+ - FIR: Fully tested, pass.
+ - PM: Not tested.
Neponset:
Serial ports:
- COM1,2: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR
- PM: Not tested.
- USB: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PCMCIA: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PM: Not tested.
- CF: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - COM1,2: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - USB: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - PCMCIA: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - CF: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
More stuff can be found in the -np (Nicolas Pitre's) tree.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus
index 6a3aa95e9bfd..e1a23bee6d44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus
@@ -1,9 +1,13 @@
-Brutus is an evaluation platform for the SA1100 manufactured by Intel.
+======
+Brutus
+======
+
+Brutus is an evaluation platform for the SA1100 manufactured by Intel.
For more details, see:
http://developer.intel.com
-To compile for Brutus, you must issue the following commands:
+To compile for Brutus, you must issue the following commands::
make brutus_config
make config
@@ -16,25 +20,23 @@ must be loaded at 0xc0008000 in Brutus's memory and execution started at
entry.
But prior to execute the kernel, a ramdisk image must also be loaded in
-memory. Use memory address 0xd8000000 for this. Note that the file
+memory. Use memory address 0xd8000000 for this. Note that the file
containing the (compressed) ramdisk image must not exceed 4 MB.
Typically, you'll need angelboot to load the kernel.
-The following angelboot.opt file should be used:
+The following angelboot.opt file should be used::
------ begin angelboot.opt -----
-base 0xc0008000
-entry 0xc0008000
-r0 0x00000000
-r1 0x00000010
-device /dev/ttyS0
-options "9600 8N1"
-baud 115200
-otherfile ramdisk_img.gz
-otherbase 0xd8000000
------ end angelboot.opt -----
+ base 0xc0008000
+ entry 0xc0008000
+ r0 0x00000000
+ r1 0x00000010
+ device /dev/ttyS0
+ options "9600 8N1"
+ baud 115200
+ otherfile ramdisk_img.gz
+ otherbase 0xd8000000
-Then load the kernel and ramdisk with:
+Then load the kernel and ramdisk with::
angelboot -f angelboot.opt zImage
@@ -44,14 +46,16 @@ console is provided through the second Brutus serial port. To access it,
you may use minicom configured with /dev/ttyS1, 9600 baud, 8N1, no flow
control.
-Currently supported:
+Currently supported
+===================
+
- RS232 serial ports
- audio output
- LCD screen
- keyboard
-
-The actual Brutus support may not be complete without extra patches.
-If such patches exist, they should be found from
+
+The actual Brutus support may not be complete without extra patches.
+If such patches exist, they should be found from
ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico.
A full PCMCIA support is still missing, although it's possible to hack
@@ -63,4 +67,3 @@ Any contribution is welcome.
Please send patches to [email protected]
Have Fun !
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF
index b3d845301ef1..7fa71b609bf9 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==============
+CerfBoard/Cube
+==============
+
*** The StrongARM version of the CerfBoard/Cube has been discontinued ***
The Intrinsyc CerfBoard is a StrongARM 1110-based computer on a board
@@ -9,7 +13,9 @@ Intrinsyc website, http://www.intrinsyc.com.
This document describes the support in the Linux kernel for the
Intrinsyc CerfBoard.
-Supported in this version:
+Supported in this version
+=========================
+
- CompactFlash+ slot (select PCMCIA in General Setup and any options
that may be required)
- Onboard Crystal CS8900 Ethernet controller (Cerf CS8900A support in
@@ -19,7 +25,7 @@ Supported in this version:
In order to get this kernel onto your Cerf, you need a server that runs
both BOOTP and TFTP. Detailed instructions should have come with your
evaluation kit on how to use the bootloader. This series of commands
-will suffice:
+will suffice::
make ARCH=arm CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux- cerfcube_defconfig
make ARCH=arm CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux- zImage
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
index ab9193663b2b..81043d0c6d64 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
@@ -1,21 +1,25 @@
+========
+Freebird
+========
+
Freebird-1.1 is produced by Legend(C), Inc.
-http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.legend.com.cn
+`http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.legend.com.cn`
and software/linux maintained by Coventive(C), Inc.
(http://www.coventive.com)
Based on the Nicolas's strongarm kernel tree.
-===============================================================
Maintainer:
-Chester Kuo <[email protected]>
- <[email protected]>
+Chester Kuo
+ - <[email protected]>
+ - <[email protected]>
-Author :
-Tim wu <[email protected]>
-CIH <[email protected]>
-Eric Peng <[email protected]>
-Jeff Lee <[email protected]>
-Allen Cheng
-Tony Liu <[email protected]>
+Author:
+- Tim wu <[email protected]>
+- CIH <[email protected]>
+- Eric Peng <[email protected]>
+- Jeff Lee <[email protected]>
+- Allen Cheng
+- Tony Liu <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient
index 867bb35943af..a73d61c3ce91 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
+=============================================
ADS GraphicsClient Plus Single Board Computer
+=============================================
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
http://www.applieddata.net/products.html
-The original Linux support for this product has been provided by
+The original Linux support for this product has been provided by
Nicolas Pitre <[email protected]>. Continued development work by
Woojung Huh <[email protected]>
@@ -14,8 +16,8 @@ board supports MTD/JFFS, so you could also mount something on there.
Use 'make graphicsclient_config' before any 'make config'. This will set up
defaults for GraphicsClient Plus support.
-The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0200000.
-Also the following registers should have the specified values upon entry:
+The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0200000.
+Also the following registers should have the specified values upon entry::
r0 = 0
r1 = 29 (this is the GraphicsClient architecture number)
@@ -31,23 +33,21 @@ as outlined below. In any case, if you're planning on deploying
something en masse, you should probably get the newer board.
If using Angel on the older boards, here is a typical angel.opt option file
-if the kernel is loaded through the Angel Debug Monitor:
+if the kernel is loaded through the Angel Debug Monitor::
------ begin angelboot.opt -----
-base 0xc0200000
-entry 0xc0200000
-r0 0x00000000
-r1 0x0000001d
-device /dev/ttyS1
-options "38400 8N1"
-baud 115200
-#otherfile ramdisk.gz
-#otherbase 0xc0800000
-exec minicom
------ end angelboot.opt -----
+ base 0xc0200000
+ entry 0xc0200000
+ r0 0x00000000
+ r1 0x0000001d
+ device /dev/ttyS1
+ options "38400 8N1"
+ baud 115200
+ #otherfile ramdisk.gz
+ #otherbase 0xc0800000
+ exec minicom
Then the kernel (and ramdisk if otherfile/otherbase lines above are
-uncommented) would be loaded with:
+uncommented) would be loaded with::
angelboot -f angelboot.opt zImage
@@ -59,7 +59,9 @@ If any other bootloader is used, ensure it accomplish the same, especially
for r0/r1 register values before jumping into the kernel.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- on-board SMC 92C96 ethernet NIC
- SA1100 serial port
@@ -74,11 +76,14 @@ Supported peripherals:
See http://www.eurotech-inc.com/linux-sbc.asp for IOCTL documentation
and example user space code. ps/2 keybd is multiplexed through this driver
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- UCB1200 audio with new ucb_generic layer
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions. mtd0 is where
the ADS boot ROM and zImage is stored. It's been marked as
@@ -95,4 +100,3 @@ Notes:
fixed soon.
Any contribution can be sent to [email protected] and will be greatly welcome!
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster
index 9145088a0ba2..e39892514f0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+========================================
ADS GraphicsMaster Single Board Computer
+========================================
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
http://www.applieddata.net/products.html
@@ -15,7 +17,9 @@ The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0400000.
Linux can be used with the ADS BootLoader that ships with the
newer rev boards. See their documentation on how to load Linux.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- SA1111 USB Master
- on-board SMC 92C96 ethernet NIC
@@ -31,10 +35,13 @@ Supported peripherals:
See http://www.eurotech-inc.com/linux-sbc.asp for IOCTL documentation
and example user space code. ps/2 keybd is multiplexed through this driver
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions. mtd0 is where
the zImage is stored. It's been marked as read-only to keep you
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL
index fd56b48d4833..1dc7ccb165f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL
@@ -1,9 +1,14 @@
+=======================
+Hoeft & Wessel Webpanel
+=======================
+
The HUW_WEBPANEL is a product of the german company Hoeft & Wessel AG
If you want more information, please visit
http://www.hoeft-wessel.de
-To build the kernel:
+To build the kernel::
+
make huw_webpanel_config
make oldconfig
[accept all defaults]
@@ -14,4 +19,3 @@ Roman Jordan [email protected]
Christoph Schulz [email protected]
2000/12/18/
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy
index 44b94997fa0d..f49896ba3ef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+Itsy
+====
+
Itsy is a research project done by the Western Research Lab, and Systems
Research Center in Palo Alto, CA. The Itsy project is one of several
research projects at Compaq that are related to pocket computing.
@@ -7,6 +11,7 @@ For more information, see:
http://www.hpl.hp.com/downloads/crl/itsy/
Notes on initial 2.4 Itsy support (8/27/2000) :
+
The port was done on an Itsy version 1.5 machine with a daughtercard with
64 Meg of DRAM and 32 Meg of Flash. The initial work includes support for
serial console (to see what you're doing). No other devices have been
@@ -18,8 +23,10 @@ Finally, you will need to cd to arch/arm/boot/tools and execute a make there
to build the params-itsy program used to boot the kernel.
In order to install the port of 2.4 to the itsy, You will need to set the
-configuration parameters in the monitor as follows:
-Arg 1:0x08340000, Arg2: 0xC0000000, Arg3:18 (0x12), Arg4:0
+configuration parameters in the monitor as follows::
+
+ Arg 1:0x08340000, Arg2: 0xC0000000, Arg3:18 (0x12), Arg4:0
+
Make sure the start-routine address is set to 0x00060000.
Next, flash the params-itsy program to 0x00060000 ("p 1 0x00060000" in the
@@ -29,7 +36,8 @@ flash menu) Flash the kernel in arch/arm/boot/zImage into 0x08340000
handhelds.org.
The serial connection we established was at:
- 8-bit data, no parity, 1 stop bit(s), 115200.00 b/s. in the monitor, in the
+
+8-bit data, no parity, 1 stop bit(s), 115200.00 b/s. in the monitor, in the
params-itsy program, and in the kernel itself. This can be changed, but
not easily. The monitor parameters are easily changed, the params program
setup is assembly outl's, and the kernel is a configuration item specific to
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART
index 6d412b685598..94c0568d1095 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+====================================
Linux Advanced Radio Terminal (LART)
-------------------------------------
+====================================
The LART is a small (7.5 x 10cm) SA-1100 board, designed for embedded
applications. It has 32 MB DRAM, 4MB Flash ROM, double RS232 and all
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB
index b9c8a631a351..d5b732967aa3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+PLEB
+====
+
The PLEB project was started as a student initiative at the School of
Computer Science and Engineering, University of New South Wales to make a
pocket computer capable of running the Linux Kernel.
@@ -7,5 +11,3 @@ PLEB support has yet to be fully integrated.
For more information, see:
http://www.cse.unsw.edu.au
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin
index 077a6120e129..f0c5c1618553 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin
@@ -1,16 +1,22 @@
+========
+Pangolin
+========
+
Pangolin is a StrongARM 1110-based evaluation platform produced
by Dialogue Technology (http://www.dialogue.com.tw/).
It has EISA slots for ease of configuration with SDRAM/Flash
memory card, USB/Serial/Audio card, Compact Flash card,
PCMCIA/IDE card and TFT-LCD card.
-To compile for Pangolin, you must issue the following commands:
+To compile for Pangolin, you must issue the following commands::
make pangolin_config
make oldconfig
make zImage
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1110 serial port (UART1/UART2/UART3)
- flash memory access
- compact flash driver
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon
index dd1934d9c851..c26e910b9ea7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
+=====
Tifon
------
+=====
More info has to come...
Contact: Peter Danielsson <[email protected]>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy
index e14f16d836ac..5b35a5f61a44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy
@@ -1,2 +1,5 @@
-See http://www.yopydeveloper.org for more.
+====
+Yopy
+====
+See http://www.yopydeveloper.org for more.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ece4849a42c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-See ../empeg/README
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine
index 48a7934f95f6..47f1a14cf98a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
+==========
nanoEngine
-----------
+==========
-"nanoEngine" is a SA1110 based single board computer from
+"nanoEngine" is a SA1110 based single board computer from
Bright Star Engineering Inc. See http://www.brightstareng.com/arm
for more info.
(Ref: Stuart Adams <[email protected]>)
Also visit Larry Doolittle's "Linux for the nanoEngine" site:
http://www.brightstareng.com/arm/nanoeng.htm
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
index a63966f1d083..ea983642b9be 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
@@ -1,31 +1,35 @@
-The SA1100 serial port had its major/minor numbers officially assigned:
+==================
+SA1100 serial port
+==================
-> Date: Sun, 24 Sep 2000 21:40:27 -0700
-> From: H. Peter Anvin <[email protected]>
-> To: Nicolas Pitre <[email protected]>
-> Cc: Device List Maintainer <[email protected]>
-> Subject: Re: device
->
-> Okay. Note that device numbers 204 and 205 are used for "low density
-> serial devices", so you will have a range of minors on those majors (the
-> tty device layer handles this just fine, so you don't have to worry about
-> doing anything special.)
->
-> So your assignments are:
->
-> 204 char Low-density serial ports
-> 5 = /dev/ttySA0 SA1100 builtin serial port 0
-> 6 = /dev/ttySA1 SA1100 builtin serial port 1
-> 7 = /dev/ttySA2 SA1100 builtin serial port 2
->
-> 205 char Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
-> 5 = /dev/cusa0 Callout device for ttySA0
-> 6 = /dev/cusa1 Callout device for ttySA1
-> 7 = /dev/cusa2 Callout device for ttySA2
->
+The SA1100 serial port had its major/minor numbers officially assigned::
+
+ > Date: Sun, 24 Sep 2000 21:40:27 -0700
+ > From: H. Peter Anvin <[email protected]>
+ > To: Nicolas Pitre <[email protected]>
+ > Cc: Device List Maintainer <[email protected]>
+ > Subject: Re: device
+ >
+ > Okay. Note that device numbers 204 and 205 are used for "low density
+ > serial devices", so you will have a range of minors on those majors (the
+ > tty device layer handles this just fine, so you don't have to worry about
+ > doing anything special.)
+ >
+ > So your assignments are:
+ >
+ > 204 char Low-density serial ports
+ > 5 = /dev/ttySA0 SA1100 builtin serial port 0
+ > 6 = /dev/ttySA1 SA1100 builtin serial port 1
+ > 7 = /dev/ttySA2 SA1100 builtin serial port 2
+ >
+ > 205 char Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
+ > 5 = /dev/cusa0 Callout device for ttySA0
+ > 6 = /dev/cusa1 Callout device for ttySA1
+ > 7 = /dev/cusa2 Callout device for ttySA2
+ >
You must create those inodes in /dev on the root filesystem used
-by your SA1100-based device:
+by your SA1100-based device::
mknod ttySA0 c 204 5
mknod ttySA1 c 204 6
@@ -37,11 +41,11 @@ by your SA1100-based device:
In addition to the creation of the appropriate device nodes above, you
must ensure your user space applications make use of the correct device
name. The classic example is the content of the /etc/inittab file where
-you might have a getty process started on ttyS0. In this case:
+you might have a getty process started on ttyS0.
+
+In this case:
- replace occurrences of ttyS0 with ttySA0, ttyS1 with ttySA1, etc.
- don't forget to add 'ttySA0', 'console', or the appropriate tty name
in /etc/securetty for root to be allowed to login as well.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
index 1b049be6c84f..8a1a87aca427 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- SPEAr ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+========================
+SPEAr ARM Linux Overview
+========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -30,17 +31,18 @@ Introduction
- SPEAr1340 (SOC)
- SPEAr1340 Evaluation Board
- Configuration
- -------------
+Configuration
+-------------
A generic configuration is provided for each machine, and can be used as the
- default by
+ default by::
+
make spear13xx_defconfig
make spear3xx_defconfig
make spear6xx_defconfig
- Layout
- ------
+Layout
+------
The common files for multiple machine families (SPEAr3xx, SPEAr6xx and
SPEAr13xx) are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/plat-spear
@@ -57,7 +59,7 @@ Introduction
support Flattened Device Tree.
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Viresh Kumar <[email protected]>, (c) 2010-2012 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
index fa968aa99d67..2ddc26c03b1f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX CPUfreq support
- =======================
+=======================
+S3C24XX CPUfreq support
+=======================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt
index b87292e05f2f..7863c93652f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Simtec Electronics EB2410ITX (BAST)
- ===================================
+===================================
+Simtec Electronics EB2410ITX (BAST)
+===================================
http://www.simtec.co.uk/products/EB2410ITX/
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
index e8f918b96123..021930591ace 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX GPIO Control
- ====================
+====================
+S3C24XX GPIO Control
+====================
Introduction
------------
@@ -26,16 +27,16 @@ GPIOLIB
listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated
in the near future).
- The following functions now either have a s3c_ specific variant
+ The following functions now either have a `s3c_` specific variant
or are merged into gpiolib. See the definitions in
arch/arm/plat-samsung/include/plat/gpio-cfg.h:
- s3c2410_gpio_setpin() gpio_set_value() or gpio_direction_output()
- s3c2410_gpio_getpin() gpio_get_value() or gpio_direction_input()
- s3c2410_gpio_getirq() gpio_to_irq()
- s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin() s3c_gpio_cfgpin()
- s3c2410_gpio_getcfg() s3c_gpio_getcfg()
- s3c2410_gpio_pullup() s3c_gpio_setpull()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_setpin() gpio_set_value() or gpio_direction_output()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getpin() gpio_get_value() or gpio_direction_input()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getirq() gpio_to_irq()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin() s3c_gpio_cfgpin()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getcfg() s3c_gpio_getcfg()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_pullup() s3c_gpio_setpull()
GPIOLIB conversion
@@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ out s3c2410 API, then here are some notes on the process.
6) s3c2410_gpio_getirq() should be directly replaceable with the
gpio_to_irq() call.
-The s3c2410_gpio and gpio_ calls have always operated on the same gpio
+The s3c2410_gpio and `gpio_` calls have always operated on the same gpio
numberspace, so there is no problem with converting the gpio numbering
between the calls.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
index b738859b1fc0..62a562c178e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- HP IPAQ H1940
- =============
+=============
+HP IPAQ H1940
+=============
http://www.handhelds.org/projects/h1940.html
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
index bc478a3409b8..938995694ee7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX NAND Support
- ====================
+====================
+S3C24XX NAND Support
+====================
Introduction
------------
@@ -27,4 +28,3 @@ Document Author
---------------
Ben Dooks, Copyright 2007 Simtec Electronics
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
index 00d3c3141e21..0d8e59df7512 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
@@ -276,18 +277,18 @@ Platform Data
kmalloc()s an area of memory, and copies the __initdata
and then sets the relevant device's platform data. Making
the function `__init` takes care of ensuring it is discarded
- with the rest of the initialisation code
+ with the rest of the initialisation code::
- static __init void s3c24xx_xxx_set_platdata(struct xxx_data *pd)
- {
- struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info *npd;
+ static __init void s3c24xx_xxx_set_platdata(struct xxx_data *pd)
+ {
+ struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info *npd;
npd = kmalloc(sizeof(struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info), GFP_KERNEL);
if (npd) {
memcpy(npd, pd, sizeof(struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info));
s3c_device_xxx.dev.platform_data = npd;
} else {
- printk(KERN_ERR "no memory for xxx platform data\n");
+ printk(KERN_ERR "no memory for xxx platform data\n");
}
}
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt
index dc1fd362d3c1..68b985fc6bf4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C2412 ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C2412 ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt
index 909bdc7dd7b5..1f51e207fc46 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C2413 ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C2413 ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -10,7 +11,7 @@ Introduction
Camera Interface
----------------
+----------------
This block is currently not supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
index 429390bd4684..524fd0b4afaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung/Meritech SMDK2440
- =========================
+=========================
+Samsung/Meritech SMDK2440
+=========================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
index cb4f0c0cdf9d..b4f3ae9fe76e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX Suspend Support
- =======================
+=======================
+S3C24XX Suspend Support
+=======================
Introduction
@@ -57,16 +58,16 @@ Machine Support
and will end up initialising all compiled machines' pm init!
The following is an example of code used for testing wakeup from
- an falling edge on IRQ_EINT0:
+ an falling edge on IRQ_EINT0::
-static irqreturn_t button_irq(int irq, void *pw)
-{
+ static irqreturn_t button_irq(int irq, void *pw)
+ {
return IRQ_HANDLED;
-}
+ }
-statuc void __init machine_init(void)
-{
+ statuc void __init machine_init(void)
+ {
...
request_irq(IRQ_EINT0, button_irq, IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING,
@@ -75,7 +76,7 @@ statuc void __init machine_init(void)
enable_irq_wake(IRQ_EINT0);
s3c_pm_init();
-}
+ }
Debugging
@@ -134,4 +135,3 @@ Document Author
---------------
Ben Dooks, Copyright 2004 Simtec Electronics
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
index f82b1faefad5..c84268bd1884 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX USB Host support
- ========================
+========================
+S3C24XX USB Host support
+========================
@@ -13,7 +14,7 @@ Configuration
Enable at least the following kernel options:
- menuconfig:
+ menuconfig::
Device Drivers --->
USB support --->
@@ -22,8 +23,9 @@ Configuration
.config:
- CONFIG_USB
- CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD
+
+ - CONFIG_USB
+ - CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD
Once these options are configured, the standard set of USB device
@@ -60,17 +62,14 @@ Platform Data
The ports are numbered 0 and 1.
power_control:
-
Called to enable or disable the power on the port.
enable_oc:
-
Called to enable or disable the over-current monitoring.
This should claim or release the resources being used to
check the power condition on the port, such as an IRQ.
report_oc:
-
The OHCI driver fills this field in for the over-current code
to call when there is a change to the over-current state on
an port. The ports argument is a bitmask of 1 bit per port,
@@ -80,7 +79,6 @@ Platform Data
ensure this is called correctly.
port[x]:
-
This is struct describes each port, 0 or 1. The platform driver
should set the flags field of each port to S3C_HCDFLG_USED if
the port is enabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
index d17ed518a7ea..a56f325dae78 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Interface between kernel and boot loaders on Exynos boards
- ==========================================================
+==========================================================
+Interface between kernel and boot loaders on Exynos boards
+==========================================================
Author: Krzysztof Kozlowski
+
Date : 6 June 2015
The document tries to describe currently used interface between Linux kernel
@@ -17,8 +19,10 @@ executing kernel.
1. Non-Secure mode
Address: sysram_ns_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x08 exynos_cpu_resume_ns, mcpm_entry_point System suspend
0x0c 0x00000bad (Magic cookie) System suspend
0x1c exynos4_secondary_startup Secondary CPU boot
@@ -27,22 +31,28 @@ Offset Value Purpose
0x24 exynos_cpu_resume_ns AFTR
0x28 + 4*cpu 0x8 (Magic cookie, Exynos3250) AFTR
0x28 0x0 or last value during resume (Exynos542x) System suspend
+============= ============================================ ==================
2. Secure mode
Address: sysram_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x00 exynos4_secondary_startup Secondary CPU boot
0x04 exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos542x) Secondary CPU boot
4*cpu exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos4412) Secondary CPU boot
0x20 exynos_cpu_resume (Exynos4210 r1.0) AFTR
0x24 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie, Exynos4210 r1.0) AFTR
+============= ============================================ ==================
Address: pmu_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x0800 exynos_cpu_resume AFTR, suspend
0x0800 mcpm_entry_point (Exynos542x with MCPM) AFTR, suspend
0x0804 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie) AFTR
@@ -50,15 +60,18 @@ Offset Value Purpose
0x0814 exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos4210 r1.1) Secondary CPU boot
0x0818 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie, Exynos4210 r1.1) AFTR
0x081C exynos_cpu_resume (Exynos4210 r1.1) AFTR
-
+============= ============================================ ==================
3. Other (regardless of secure/non-secure mode)
Address: pmu_base_addr
+
+============= =============================== ===============================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= =============================== ===============================
0x0908 Non-zero Secondary CPU boot up indicator
on Exynos3250 and Exynos542x
+============= =============================== ===============================
4. Glossary
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
index 795adfd88081..37f991f8076d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung GPIO implementation
- ===========================
+===========================
+Samsung GPIO implementation
+===========================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
index 8f7309bad460..98164270ae40 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+Samsung ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -32,8 +33,10 @@ Configuration
A number of configurations are supplied, as there is no current way of
unifying all the SoCs into one kernel.
- s5pc110_defconfig - S5PC110 specific default configuration
- s5pv210_defconfig - S5PV210 specific default configuration
+ s5pc110_defconfig
+ - S5PC110 specific default configuration
+ s5pv210_defconfig
+ - S5PV210 specific default configuration
Layout
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Setup b/Documentation/arm/Setup
index 0cb1e64bde80..8e12ef3fb9a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Setup
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Setup
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================================
Kernel initialisation parameters on ARM Linux
----------------------------------------------
+=============================================
The following document describes the kernel initialisation parameter
structure, otherwise known as 'struct param_struct' which is used
@@ -14,12 +15,10 @@ There are a lot of parameters listed in there, and they are described
below:
page_size
-
This parameter must be set to the page size of the machine, and
will be checked by the kernel.
nr_pages
-
This is the total number of pages of memory in the system. If
the memory is banked, then this should contain the total number
of pages in the system.
@@ -28,24 +27,22 @@ below:
include this information.
ramdisk_size
-
This is now obsolete, and should not be used.
flags
-
Various kernel flags, including:
- bit 0 - 1 = mount root read only
- bit 1 - unused
- bit 2 - 0 = load ramdisk
- bit 3 - 0 = prompt for ramdisk
+
+ ===== ========================
+ bit 0 1 = mount root read only
+ bit 1 unused
+ bit 2 0 = load ramdisk
+ bit 3 0 = prompt for ramdisk
+ ===== ========================
rootdev
-
major/minor number pair of device to mount as the root filesystem.
- video_num_cols
- video_num_rows
-
+ video_num_cols / video_num_rows
These two together describe the character size of the dummy console,
or VGA console character size. They should not be used for any other
purpose.
@@ -54,66 +51,50 @@ below:
the equivalent character size of your fbcon display. This then allows
all the bootup messages to be displayed correctly.
- video_x
- video_y
-
+ video_x / video_y
This describes the character position of cursor on VGA console, and
is otherwise unused. (should not be used for other console types, and
should not be used for other purposes).
memc_control_reg
-
MEMC chip control register for Acorn Archimedes and Acorn A5000
based machines. May be used differently by different architectures.
sounddefault
-
Default sound setting on Acorn machines. May be used differently by
different architectures.
adfsdrives
-
Number of ADFS/MFM disks. May be used differently by different
architectures.
- bytes_per_char_h
- bytes_per_char_v
-
+ bytes_per_char_h / bytes_per_char_v
These are now obsolete, and should not be used.
pages_in_bank[4]
-
Number of pages in each bank of the systems memory (used for RiscPC).
This is intended to be used on systems where the physical memory
is non-contiguous from the processors point of view.
pages_in_vram
-
Number of pages in VRAM (used on Acorn RiscPC). This value may also
be used by loaders if the size of the video RAM can't be obtained
from the hardware.
- initrd_start
- initrd_size
-
+ initrd_start / initrd_size
This describes the kernel virtual start address and size of the
initial ramdisk.
rd_start
-
Start address in sectors of the ramdisk image on a floppy disk.
system_rev
-
system revision number.
- system_serial_low
- system_serial_high
-
+ system_serial_low / system_serial_high
system 64-bit serial number
mem_fclk_21285
-
The speed of the external oscillator to the 21285 (footbridge),
which control's the speed of the memory bus, timer & serial port.
Depending upon the speed of the cpu its value can be between
@@ -121,9 +102,7 @@ below:
then a value of 50 Mhz is the default on 21285 architectures.
paths[8][128]
-
These are now obsolete, and should not be used.
commandline
-
Kernel command line parameters. Details can be found elsewhere.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt b/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt
index 28a2795705ca..c6b04937cee3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+===============================================
Release notes for Linux Kernel VFP support code
------------------------------------------------
+===============================================
Date: 20 May 2004
+
Author: Russell King
This is the first release of the Linux Kernel VFP support code. It
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
index 750b6fc24af9..aa58603d3f28 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========================================================
Cluster-wide Power-up/power-down race avoidance algorithm
=========================================================
@@ -46,10 +47,12 @@ Basic model
Each cluster and CPU is assigned a state, as follows:
- DOWN
- COMING_UP
- UP
- GOING_DOWN
+ - DOWN
+ - COMING_UP
+ - UP
+ - GOING_DOWN
+
+::
+---------> UP ----------+
| v
@@ -60,18 +63,22 @@ Each cluster and CPU is assigned a state, as follows:
+--------- DOWN <--------+
-DOWN: The CPU or cluster is not coherent, and is either powered off or
+DOWN:
+ The CPU or cluster is not coherent, and is either powered off or
suspended, or is ready to be powered off or suspended.
-COMING_UP: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the UP state.
+COMING_UP:
+ The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the UP state.
It may be part way through the process of initialisation and
enabling coherency.
-UP: The CPU or cluster is active and coherent at the hardware
+UP:
+ The CPU or cluster is active and coherent at the hardware
level. A CPU in this state is not necessarily being used
actively by the kernel.
-GOING_DOWN: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the DOWN
+GOING_DOWN:
+ The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the DOWN
state. It may be part way through the process of teardown and
coherency exit.
@@ -86,8 +93,8 @@ CPUs in the cluster simultaneously modifying the state. The cluster-
level states are described in the "Cluster state" section.
To help distinguish the CPU states from cluster states in this
-discussion, the state names are given a CPU_ prefix for the CPU states,
-and a CLUSTER_ or INBOUND_ prefix for the cluster states.
+discussion, the state names are given a `CPU_` prefix for the CPU states,
+and a `CLUSTER_` or `INBOUND_` prefix for the cluster states.
CPU state
@@ -101,10 +108,12 @@ This means that CPUs fit the basic model closely.
The algorithm defines the following states for each CPU in the system:
- CPU_DOWN
- CPU_COMING_UP
- CPU_UP
- CPU_GOING_DOWN
+ - CPU_DOWN
+ - CPU_COMING_UP
+ - CPU_UP
+ - CPU_GOING_DOWN
+
+::
cluster setup and
CPU setup complete policy decision
@@ -130,17 +139,17 @@ requirement for any external event to happen.
CPU_DOWN:
-
A CPU reaches the CPU_DOWN state when it is ready for
power-down. On reaching this state, the CPU will typically
power itself down or suspend itself, via a WFI instruction or a
firmware call.
- Next state: CPU_COMING_UP
- Conditions: none
+ Next state:
+ CPU_COMING_UP
+ Conditions:
+ none
Trigger events:
-
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
from a policy decision on another CPU;
@@ -148,15 +157,17 @@ CPU_DOWN:
CPU_COMING_UP:
-
A CPU cannot start participating in hardware coherency until the
cluster is set up and coherent. If the cluster is not ready,
then the CPU will wait in the CPU_COMING_UP state until the
cluster has been set up.
- Next state: CPU_UP
- Conditions: The CPU's parent cluster must be in CLUSTER_UP.
- Trigger events: Transition of the parent cluster to CLUSTER_UP.
+ Next state:
+ CPU_UP
+ Conditions:
+ The CPU's parent cluster must be in CLUSTER_UP.
+ Trigger events:
+ Transition of the parent cluster to CLUSTER_UP.
Refer to the "Cluster state" section for a description of the
CLUSTER_UP state.
@@ -178,20 +189,25 @@ CPU_UP:
The CPU remains in this state until an explicit policy decision
is made to shut down or suspend the CPU.
- Next state: CPU_GOING_DOWN
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: explicit policy decision
+ Next state:
+ CPU_GOING_DOWN
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ explicit policy decision
CPU_GOING_DOWN:
-
While in this state, the CPU exits coherency, including any
operations required to achieve this (such as cleaning data
caches).
- Next state: CPU_DOWN
- Conditions: local CPU teardown complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CPU_DOWN
+ Conditions:
+ local CPU teardown complete
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
Cluster state
@@ -212,20 +228,20 @@ independently of the CPU which is tearing down the cluster. For this
reason, the cluster state is split into two parts:
"cluster" state: The global state of the cluster; or the state
- on the outbound side:
+ on the outbound side:
- CLUSTER_DOWN
- CLUSTER_UP
- CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+ - CLUSTER_DOWN
+ - CLUSTER_UP
+ - CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
"inbound" state: The state of the cluster on the inbound side.
- INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
- INBOUND_COMING_UP
+ - INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+ - INBOUND_COMING_UP
The different pairings of these states results in six possible
- states for the cluster as a whole:
+ states for the cluster as a whole::
CLUSTER_UP
+==========> INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP -------------+
@@ -284,11 +300,12 @@ reason, the cluster state is split into two parts:
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
- Next state: CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
Trigger events:
-
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
from a policy decision on another CPU;
@@ -306,9 +323,12 @@ CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
setup to enable other CPUs in the cluster to enter coherency
safely.
- Next state: CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: cluster-level setup and hardware coherency complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster-level setup and hardware coherency complete
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
@@ -321,9 +341,12 @@ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP. All other CPUs on the cluster
should consider treat these two states as equivalent.
- Next state: CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
@@ -335,9 +358,12 @@ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
The cluster will remain in this state until a policy decision is
made to power the cluster down.
- Next state: CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: policy decision to power down the cluster
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ policy decision to power down the cluster
CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
@@ -359,13 +385,16 @@ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
Next states:
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster torn down and ready to power off
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster torn down and ready to power off
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events:
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation,
resulting from a policy decision on another
CPU;
@@ -396,13 +425,19 @@ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
Next states:
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster-level setup and hardware
+ Conditions:
+ cluster-level setup and hardware
coherency complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster torn down and ready to power off
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster torn down and ready to power off
+
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
Last man and First man selection
@@ -452,30 +487,30 @@ Implementation:
arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c (everything else):
__mcpm_cpu_going_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the
- CPU_GOING_DOWN state.
+ CPU_GOING_DOWN state.
__mcpm_cpu_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the CPU_DOWN
- state.
+ state.
A CPU transitions to CPU_COMING_UP and then to CPU_UP via the
- low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This could
- involve CPU-specific setup code, but in the current
- implementation it does not.
+ low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This could
+ involve CPU-specific setup code, but in the current
+ implementation it does not.
__mcpm_outbound_enter_critical() and __mcpm_outbound_leave_critical()
- handle transitions from CLUSTER_UP to CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
- and from there to CLUSTER_DOWN or back to CLUSTER_UP (in
- the case of an aborted cluster power-down).
+ handle transitions from CLUSTER_UP to CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+ and from there to CLUSTER_DOWN or back to CLUSTER_UP (in
+ the case of an aborted cluster power-down).
- These functions are more complex than the __mcpm_cpu_*()
- functions due to the extra inter-CPU coordination which
- is needed for safe transitions at the cluster level.
+ These functions are more complex than the __mcpm_cpu_*()
+ functions due to the extra inter-CPU coordination which
+ is needed for safe transitions at the cluster level.
A cluster transitions from CLUSTER_DOWN back to CLUSTER_UP via
- the low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This
- typically involves platform-specific setup code,
- provided by the platform-specific power_up_setup
- function registered via mcpm_sync_init.
+ the low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This
+ typically involves platform-specific setup code,
+ provided by the platform-specific power_up_setup
+ function registered via mcpm_sync_init.
Deep topologies:
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
index 7f175dbb427e..efd844baec1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
-Interface for registering and calling firmware-specific operations for ARM.
-----
+==========================================================================
+Interface for registering and calling firmware-specific operations for ARM
+==========================================================================
+
Written by Tomasz Figa <[email protected]>
Some boards are running with secure firmware running in TrustZone secure
@@ -9,7 +11,7 @@ operations and call them when needed.
Firmware operations can be specified by filling in a struct firmware_ops
with appropriate callbacks and then registering it with register_firmware_ops()
-function.
+function::
void register_firmware_ops(const struct firmware_ops *ops)
@@ -19,7 +21,7 @@ and its members can be found in arch/arm/include/asm/firmware.h header.
There is a default, empty set of operations provided, so there is no need to
set anything if platform does not require firmware operations.
-To call a firmware operation, a helper macro is provided
+To call a firmware operation, a helper macro is provided::
#define call_firmware_op(op, ...) \
((firmware_ops->op) ? firmware_ops->op(__VA_ARGS__) : (-ENOSYS))
@@ -28,7 +30,7 @@ the macro checks if the operation is provided and calls it or otherwise returns
-ENOSYS to signal that given operation is not available (for example, to allow
fallback to legacy operation).
-Example of registering firmware operations:
+Example of registering firmware operations::
/* board file */
@@ -56,7 +58,7 @@ Example of registering firmware operations:
register_firmware_ops(&platformX_firmware_ops);
}
-Example of using a firmware operation:
+Example of using a firmware operation::
/* some platform code, e.g. SMP initialization */
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
index b9e060c5b61e..9bfb71a2a9b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================
Kernel mode NEON
================
@@ -86,6 +87,7 @@ instructions appearing in unexpected places if no special care is taken.
Therefore, the recommended and only supported way of using NEON/VFP in the
kernel is by adhering to the following rules:
+
* isolate the NEON code in a separate compilation unit and compile it with
'-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp';
* issue the calls to kernel_neon_begin(), kernel_neon_end() as well as the calls
@@ -115,6 +117,7 @@ NEON intrinsics
NEON intrinsics are also supported. However, as code using NEON intrinsics
relies on the GCC header <arm_neon.h>, (which #includes <stdint.h>), you should
observe the following in addition to the rules above:
+
* Compile the unit containing the NEON intrinsics with '-ffreestanding' so GCC
uses its builtin version of <stdint.h> (this is a C99 header which the kernel
does not supply);
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
index 5673594717cf..eb6f3d916622 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================
Kernel-provided User Helpers
============================
@@ -43,7 +44,7 @@ kuser_helper_version
Location: 0xffff0ffc
-Reference declaration:
+Reference declaration::
extern int32_t __kuser_helper_version;
@@ -53,17 +54,17 @@ Definition:
running kernel. User space may read this to determine the availability
of a particular helper.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-#define __kuser_helper_version (*(int32_t *)0xffff0ffc)
+ #define __kuser_helper_version (*(int32_t *)0xffff0ffc)
-void check_kuser_version(void)
-{
+ void check_kuser_version(void)
+ {
if (__kuser_helper_version < 2) {
fprintf(stderr, "can't do atomic operations, kernel too old\n");
abort();
}
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ kuser_get_tls
Location: 0xffff0fe0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
void * __kuser_get_tls(void);
@@ -97,16 +98,16 @@ Definition:
Get the TLS value as previously set via the __ARM_NR_set_tls syscall.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef void * (__kuser_get_tls_t)(void);
-#define __kuser_get_tls (*(__kuser_get_tls_t *)0xffff0fe0)
+ typedef void * (__kuser_get_tls_t)(void);
+ #define __kuser_get_tls (*(__kuser_get_tls_t *)0xffff0fe0)
-void foo()
-{
+ void foo()
+ {
void *tls = __kuser_get_tls();
printf("TLS = %p\n", tls);
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -117,7 +118,7 @@ kuser_cmpxchg
Location: 0xffff0fc0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
int __kuser_cmpxchg(int32_t oldval, int32_t newval, volatile int32_t *ptr);
@@ -139,18 +140,18 @@ Clobbered registers:
Definition:
- Atomically store newval in *ptr only if *ptr is equal to oldval.
- Return zero if *ptr was changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
- The C flag is also set if *ptr was changed to allow for assembly
+ Atomically store newval in `*ptr` only if `*ptr` is equal to oldval.
+ Return zero if `*ptr` was changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
+ The C flag is also set if `*ptr` was changed to allow for assembly
optimization in the calling code.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg_t)(int oldval, int newval, volatile int *ptr);
-#define __kuser_cmpxchg (*(__kuser_cmpxchg_t *)0xffff0fc0)
+ typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg_t)(int oldval, int newval, volatile int *ptr);
+ #define __kuser_cmpxchg (*(__kuser_cmpxchg_t *)0xffff0fc0)
-int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
-{
+ int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
+ {
int old, new;
do {
@@ -159,7 +160,7 @@ int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
} while(__kuser_cmpxchg(old, new, ptr));
return new;
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -172,7 +173,7 @@ kuser_memory_barrier
Location: 0xffff0fa0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
void __kuser_memory_barrier(void);
@@ -193,10 +194,10 @@ Definition:
Apply any needed memory barrier to preserve consistency with data modified
manually and __kuser_cmpxchg usage.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef void (__kuser_dmb_t)(void);
-#define __kuser_dmb (*(__kuser_dmb_t *)0xffff0fa0)
+ typedef void (__kuser_dmb_t)(void);
+ #define __kuser_dmb (*(__kuser_dmb_t *)0xffff0fa0)
Notes:
@@ -207,7 +208,7 @@ kuser_cmpxchg64
Location: 0xffff0f60
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
int __kuser_cmpxchg64(const int64_t *oldval,
const int64_t *newval,
@@ -231,22 +232,22 @@ Clobbered registers:
Definition:
- Atomically store the 64-bit value pointed by *newval in *ptr only if *ptr
- is equal to the 64-bit value pointed by *oldval. Return zero if *ptr was
+ Atomically store the 64-bit value pointed by `*newval` in `*ptr` only if `*ptr`
+ is equal to the 64-bit value pointed by `*oldval`. Return zero if `*ptr` was
changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
- The C flag is also set if *ptr was changed to allow for assembly
+ The C flag is also set if `*ptr` was changed to allow for assembly
optimization in the calling code.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg64_t)(const int64_t *oldval,
- const int64_t *newval,
- volatile int64_t *ptr);
-#define __kuser_cmpxchg64 (*(__kuser_cmpxchg64_t *)0xffff0f60)
+ typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg64_t)(const int64_t *oldval,
+ const int64_t *newval,
+ volatile int64_t *ptr);
+ #define __kuser_cmpxchg64 (*(__kuser_cmpxchg64_t *)0xffff0f60)
-int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
-{
+ int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
+ {
int64_t old, new;
do {
@@ -255,7 +256,7 @@ int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
} while(__kuser_cmpxchg64(&old, &new, ptr));
return new;
-}
+ }
Notes:
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt
index 400c0c270d2e..cd90298c493c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- TI Keystone Linux Overview
- --------------------------
+==========================
+TI Keystone Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -9,47 +10,65 @@ for users to run Linux on Keystone based EVMs from Texas Instruments.
Following SoCs & EVMs are currently supported:-
------------- K2HK SoC and EVM --------------------------------------------------
+K2HK SoC and EVM
+=================
a.k.a Keystone 2 Hawking/Kepler SoC
TCI6636K2H & TCI6636K2K: See documentation at
+
http://www.ti.com/product/tci6638k2k
http://www.ti.com/product/tci6638k2h
EVM:
-http://www.advantech.com/Support/TI-EVM/EVMK2HX_sd.aspx
+ http://www.advantech.com/Support/TI-EVM/EVMK2HX_sd.aspx
------------- K2E SoC and EVM ---------------------------------------------------
+K2E SoC and EVM
+===============
a.k.a Keystone 2 Edison SoC
-K2E - 66AK2E05: See documentation at
+
+K2E - 66AK2E05:
+
+See documentation at
+
http://www.ti.com/product/66AK2E05/technicaldocuments
EVM:
-https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2e-evm.html
+ https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2e-evm.html
------------- K2L SoC and EVM ---------------------------------------------------
+K2L SoC and EVM
+===============
a.k.a Keystone 2 Lamarr SoC
-K2L - TCI6630K2L: See documentation at
+
+K2L - TCI6630K2L:
+
+See documentation at
http://www.ti.com/product/TCI6630K2L/technicaldocuments
+
EVM:
-https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2l-evm.html
+ https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2l-evm.html
Configuration
-------------
All of the K2 SoCs/EVMs share a common defconfig, keystone_defconfig and same
image is used to boot on individual EVMs. The platform configuration is
-specified through DTS. Following are the DTS used:-
- K2HK EVM : k2hk-evm.dts
- K2E EVM : k2e-evm.dts
- K2L EVM : k2l-evm.dts
+specified through DTS. Following are the DTS used:
+
+ K2HK EVM:
+ k2hk-evm.dts
+ K2E EVM:
+ k2e-evm.dts
+ K2L EVM:
+ k2l-evm.dts
The device tree documentation for the keystone machines are located at
+
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/keystone.txt
Document Author
---------------
Murali Karicheri <[email protected]>
+
Copyright 2015 Texas Instruments
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt b/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt
index fcdb9fd5f53a..7f7638d80b42 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-* Texas Instruments Keystone Navigator Queue Management SubSystem driver
+======================================================================
+Texas Instruments Keystone Navigator Queue Management SubSystem driver
+======================================================================
Driver source code path
drivers/soc/ti/knav_qmss.c
@@ -34,11 +36,13 @@ driver that interface with the accumulator PDSP. This configures
accumulator channels defined in DTS (example in DT documentation) to monitor
1 or 32 queues per channel. More description on the firmware is available in
CPPI/QMSS Low Level Driver document (docs/CPPI_QMSS_LLD_SDS.pdf) at
+
git://git.ti.com/keystone-rtos/qmss-lld.git
k2_qmss_pdsp_acc48_k2_le_1_0_0_9.bin firmware supports upto 48 accumulator
channels. This firmware is available under ti-keystone folder of
firmware.git at
+
git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/firmware/linux-firmware.git
To use copy the firmware image to lib/firmware folder of the initramfs or
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
index 6335fcacbba9..7bef27367c9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
+++ b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================
+Memory alignment
+================
+
Too many problems poped up because of unnoticed misaligned memory access in
kernel code lately. Therefore the alignment fixup is now unconditionally
configured in for SA11x0 based targets. According to Alan Cox, this is a
@@ -26,9 +30,9 @@ space, and might cause programs to fail unexpectedly.
To change the alignment trap behavior, simply echo a number into
/proc/cpu/alignment. The number is made up from various bits:
+=== ========================================================
bit behavior when set
---- -----------------
-
+=== ========================================================
0 A user process performing an unaligned memory access
will cause the kernel to print a message indicating
process name, pid, pc, instruction, address, and the
@@ -41,12 +45,13 @@ bit behavior when set
2 The kernel will send a SIGBUS signal to the user process
performing the unaligned access.
+=== ========================================================
Note that not all combinations are supported - only values 0 through 5.
(6 and 7 don't make sense).
For example, the following will turn on the warnings, but without
-fixing up or sending SIGBUS signals:
+fixing up or sending SIGBUS signals::
echo 1 > /proc/cpu/alignment
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
index 546a39048eb0..0521b4ce5c96 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
- Kernel Memory Layout on ARM Linux
+=================================
+Kernel Memory Layout on ARM Linux
+=================================
Russell King <[email protected]>
+
November 17, 2005 (2.6.15)
This document describes the virtual memory layout which the Linux
@@ -15,8 +18,9 @@ As the ARM architecture matures, it becomes necessary to reserve
certain regions of VM space for use for new facilities; therefore
this document may reserve more VM space over time.
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Start End Use
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+=============== =============== ===============================================
ffff8000 ffffffff copy_user_page / clear_user_page use.
For SA11xx and Xscale, this is used to
setup a minicache mapping.
@@ -77,6 +81,7 @@ MODULES_VADDR MODULES_END-1 Kernel module space
place their vector page here. NULL pointer
dereferences by both the kernel and user
space are also caught via this mapping.
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Please note that mappings which collide with the above areas may result
in a non-bootable kernel, or may cause the kernel to (eventually) panic
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES
index 40577b5a49d3..102e55af8439 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+Notes
+=====
+
There seems to be a problem with exp(double) and our emulator. I haven't
been able to track it down yet. This does not occur with the emulator
supplied by Russell King.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README
index 771871de0c8b..35cd90dacbff 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
-This directory contains the version 0.92 test release of the NetWinder
+Introduction
+============
+
+This directory contains the version 0.92 test release of the NetWinder
Floating Point Emulator.
The majority of the code was written by me, Scott Bambrough It is
@@ -31,7 +34,7 @@ SoftFloat to the ARM was done by Phil Blundell, based on an earlier
port of SoftFloat version 1 by Neil Carson for NetBSD/arm32.
The file README.FPE contains a description of what has been implemented
-so far in the emulator. The file TODO contains a information on what
+so far in the emulator. The file TODO contains a information on what
remains to be done, and other ideas for the emulator.
Bug reports, comments, suggestions should be directed to me at
@@ -48,10 +51,11 @@ Legal Notices
The NetWinder Floating Point Emulator is free software. Everything Rebel.com
has written is provided under the GNU GPL. See the file COPYING for copying
-conditions. Excluded from the above is the SoftFloat code. John Hauser's
+conditions. Excluded from the above is the SoftFloat code. John Hauser's
legal notice for SoftFloat is included below.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
SoftFloat Legal Notice
SoftFloat was written by John R. Hauser. This work was made possible in
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE
index 26f5d7bb9a41..cbb320960fc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE
@@ -1,12 +1,18 @@
+=============
+Current State
+=============
+
The following describes the current state of the NetWinder's floating point
emulator.
In the following nomenclature is used to describe the floating point
instructions. It follows the conventions in the ARM manual.
-<S|D|E> = <single|double|extended>, no default
-{P|M|Z} = {round to +infinity,round to -infinity,round to zero},
- default = round to nearest
+::
+
+ <S|D|E> = <single|double|extended>, no default
+ {P|M|Z} = {round to +infinity,round to -infinity,round to zero},
+ default = round to nearest
Note: items enclosed in {} are optional.
@@ -32,10 +38,10 @@ Form 2 syntax:
<LFM|SFM>{cond}<FD,EA> Fd, <count>, [Rn]{!}
These instructions are fully implemented. They store/load three words
-for each floating point register into the memory location given in the
+for each floating point register into the memory location given in the
instruction. The format in memory is unlikely to be compatible with
other implementations, in particular the actual hardware. Specific
-mention of this is made in the ARM manuals.
+mention of this is made in the ARM manuals.
Floating Point Coprocessor Register Transfer Instructions (CPRT)
----------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -123,7 +129,7 @@ RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
-LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
+LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
@@ -134,7 +140,7 @@ ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
These are not implemented. They are not currently issued by the compiler,
and are handled by routines in libc. These are not implemented by the FPA11
-hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
+hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
be implemented in future versions.
Signalling:
@@ -147,10 +153,10 @@ current_set[0] correctly.
The kernel provided with this distribution (vmlinux-nwfpe-0.93) contains
a fix for this problem and also incorporates the current version of the
emulator directly. It is possible to run with no floating point module
-loaded with this kernel. It is provided as a demonstration of the
+loaded with this kernel. It is provided as a demonstration of the
technology and for those who want to do floating point work that depends
on signals. It is not strictly necessary to use the module.
-A module (either the one provided by Russell King, or the one in this
+A module (either the one provided by Russell King, or the one in this
distribution) can be loaded to replace the functionality of the emulator
built into the kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO
index 8027061b60eb..393f11b14540 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO
@@ -1,39 +1,42 @@
TODO LIST
----------
+=========
-POW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - power
-RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
-POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
+::
-LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
-LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
-EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
-SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
-COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
-TAN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - tangent
-ASN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arcsine
-ACS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arccosine
-ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
+ POW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - power
+ RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
+ POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
+
+ LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
+ LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
+ EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
+ SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
+ COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
+ TAN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - tangent
+ ASN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arcsine
+ ACS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arccosine
+ ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
These are not implemented. They are not currently issued by the compiler,
and are handled by routines in libc. These are not implemented by the FPA11
-hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
+hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
be implemented in future versions.
There are a couple of ways to approach the implementation of these. One
-method would be to use accurate table methods for these routines. I have
+method would be to use accurate table methods for these routines. I have
a couple of papers by S. Gal from IBM's research labs in Haifa, Israel that
seem to promise extreme accuracy (in the order of 99.8%) and reasonable speed.
These methods are used in GLIBC for some of the transcendental functions.
Another approach, which I know little about is CORDIC. This stands for
-Coordinate Rotation Digital Computer, and is a method of computing
+Coordinate Rotation Digital Computer, and is a method of computing
transcendental functions using mostly shifts and adds and a few
multiplications and divisions. The ARM excels at shifts and adds,
-so such a method could be promising, but requires more research to
+so such a method could be promising, but requires more research to
determine if it is feasible.
Rounding Methods
+----------------
The IEEE standard defines 4 rounding modes. Round to nearest is the
default, but rounding to + or - infinity or round to zero are also allowed.
@@ -42,8 +45,8 @@ in a control register. Not so with the ARM FPA11 architecture. To change
the rounding mode one must specify it with each instruction.
This has made porting some benchmarks difficult. It is possible to
-introduce such a capability into the emulator. The FPCR contains
-bits describing the rounding mode. The emulator could be altered to
+introduce such a capability into the emulator. The FPCR contains
+bits describing the rounding mode. The emulator could be altered to
examine a flag, which if set forced it to ignore the rounding mode in
the instruction, and use the mode specified in the bits in the FPCR.
@@ -52,7 +55,8 @@ in the FPCR. This requires a kernel call in ArmLinux, as WFC/RFC are
supervisor only instructions. If anyone has any ideas or comments I
would like to hear them.
-[NOTE: pulled out from some docs on ARM floating point, specifically
+NOTE:
+ pulled out from some docs on ARM floating point, specifically
for the Acorn FPE, but not limited to it:
The floating point control register (FPCR) may only be present in some
@@ -64,4 +68,5 @@ would like to hear them.
Hence, the answer is yes, you could do this, but then you will run a high
risk of becoming isolated if and when hardware FP emulation comes out
- -- Russell].
+
+ -- Russell.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
index 0b7cab978c02..ac34e5d7ee44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
+==============================================
+MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
+==============================================
Eric Miao <[email protected]>
@@ -6,15 +8,15 @@ MFP stands for Multi-Function Pin, which is the pin-mux logic on PXA3xx and
later PXA series processors. This document describes the existing MFP API,
and how board/platform driver authors could make use of it.
- Basic Concept
-===============
+Basic Concept
+=============
Unlike the GPIO alternate function settings on PXA25x and PXA27x, a new MFP
mechanism is introduced from PXA3xx to completely move the pin-mux functions
out of the GPIO controller. In addition to pin-mux configurations, the MFP
also controls the low power state, driving strength, pull-up/down and event
detection of each pin. Below is a diagram of internal connections between
-the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals:
+the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals::
+--------+
| |--(GPIO19)--+
@@ -69,8 +71,8 @@ NOTE: with such a clear separation of MFP and GPIO, by GPIO<xx> we normally
mean it is a GPIO signal, and by MFP<xxx> or pin xxx, we mean a physical
pad (or ball).
- MFP API Usage
-===============
+MFP API Usage
+=============
For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
@@ -94,9 +96,9 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
PXA310 supporting some additional ones), thus the difference is actually
covered in a single mfp-pxa300.h.
-2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.:
+2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.::
- static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
+ static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
/* Chip Select */
GPIO15_nCS_1,
@@ -116,7 +118,7 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
/* GPIO */
GPIO1_GPIO | WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH,
- };
+ };
a) once the pin configurations are passed to pxa{2xx,3xx}_mfp_config(),
and written to the actual registers, they are useless and may discard,
@@ -143,17 +145,17 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
d) although PXA3xx MFP supports edge detection on each pin, the
internal logic will only wakeup the system when those specific bits
in ADxER registers are set, which can be well mapped to the
- corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
+ corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
the peripheral IRQ to enable the wakeup.
- MFP on PXA3xx
-===============
+MFP on PXA3xx
+=============
Every external I/O pad on PXA3xx (excluding those for special purpose) has
one MFP logic associated, and is controlled by one MFP register (MFPR).
-The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
+The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320)::
31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
@@ -183,8 +185,8 @@ The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
0b006 - slow 10mA
0b007 - fast 10mA
- MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
-==============================
+MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
+============================
Due to the difference of pin-mux handling between PXA2xx and PXA3xx, a unified
MFP API is introduced to cover both series of processors.
@@ -194,11 +196,11 @@ configurations, these definitions are processor and platform independent, and
the actual API invoked to convert these definitions into register settings and
make them effective there-after.
- Files Involved
- --------------
+Files Involved
+--------------
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp.h
-
+
for
1. Unified pin definitions - enum constants for all configurable pins
2. processor-neutral bit definitions for a possible MFP configuration
@@ -226,42 +228,42 @@ make them effective there-after.
for implementation of the pin configuration to take effect for the actual
processor.
- Pin Configuration
- -----------------
+Pin Configuration
+-----------------
The following comments are copied from mfp.h (see the actual source code
- for most updated info)
-
- /*
- * a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
- *
- * bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
- * bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
- * bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
- * bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
- * bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
- * bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
- *
- * to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
- *
- * MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
- * alternate function = 0,
- * drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
- * low power mode = default
- * edge detection = none
- *
- * MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
- * MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
- * pin drive strength
- * MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
- * low power mode
- * MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
- * pin drive strength and low power mode
- */
+ for most updated info)::
- Examples of pin configurations are:
+ /*
+ * a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
+ *
+ * bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
+ * bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
+ * bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
+ * bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
+ * bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
+ * bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
+ *
+ * to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
+ *
+ * MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
+ * alternate function = 0,
+ * drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
+ * low power mode = default
+ * edge detection = none
+ *
+ * MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
+ * MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
+ * pin drive strength
+ * MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
+ * low power mode
+ * MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
+ * pin drive strength and low power mode
+ */
- #define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
+ Examples of pin configurations are::
+
+ #define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
which reads GPIO94 can be configured as SSP3_RXD, with alternate function
selection of 1, driving strength of 0b101, and a float state in low power
@@ -272,8 +274,8 @@ make them effective there-after.
do so, simply because this default setting is usually carefully encoded,
and is supposed to work in most cases.
- Register Settings
- -----------------
+Register Settings
+-----------------
Register settings on PXA3xx for a pin configuration is actually very
straight-forward, most bits can be converted directly into MFPR value
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
index 1a4e93d6027f..70743617a74f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STi ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+======================
+STi ARM Linux Overview
+======================
Introduction
------------
@@ -10,15 +11,17 @@ Introduction
B2000 and B2020 Reference boards.
- configuration
- -------------
+configuration
+-------------
A generic configuration is provided for both STiH415/416, and can be used as the
- default by
+ default by::
+
make stih41x_defconfig
- Layout
- ------
+Layout
+------
+
All the files for multiple machine families (STiH415, STiH416, and STiG125)
are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/mach-sti
@@ -27,7 +30,7 @@ Introduction
Device Trees.
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Srinivas Kandagatla <[email protected]>, (c) 2013 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt
index 3343f32f58bc..027e75bc7b7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH407 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH407 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ Introduction
- ARM Cortex-A9 1.5 GHz dual core CPU (28nm)
- SATA2, USB 3.0, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Maxime Coquelin <[email protected]>, (c) 2014 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
index 1383e33f265d..b67452d610c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH415 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH415 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -7,6 +8,7 @@ Introduction
The STiH415 is the next generation of HD, AVC set-top box processors
for satellite, cable, terrestrial and IP-STB markets.
- Features
+ Features:
+
- ARM Cortex-A9 1.0 GHz, dual-core CPU
- SATA2x2,USB 2.0x3, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet MACx2
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
index 558444c201c6..93f17d74d8db 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH416 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH416 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt
index 1cd8fc80646d..b563c1f4fe5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH418 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH418 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -14,7 +15,7 @@ Introduction
- HEVC L5.1 Main 10
- VP9
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Maxime Coquelin <[email protected]>, (c) 2015 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
index 18feda97f483..a7ebe8ea6697 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
STM32F429 Overview
==================
@@ -21,6 +22,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F429_)
.. _STM32F429: http://www.st.com/web/en/catalog/mmc/FM141/SC1169/SS1577/LN1806?ecmp=stm32f429-439_pron_pr-ces2014_nov2013
-:Authors:
-
-Maxime Coquelin <[email protected]>
+:Authors: Maxime Coquelin <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
index b5f4b6ce7656..78befddc7740 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
STM32F746 Overview
==================
@@ -28,6 +29,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F746_)
.. _STM32F746: http://www.st.com/content/st_com/en/products/microcontrollers/stm32-32-bit-arm-cortex-mcus/stm32f7-series/stm32f7x6/stm32f746ng.html
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
index 228656ced2fe..e482980ddf21 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
STM32F769 Overview
==================
@@ -30,6 +31,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F769_)
.. _STM32F769: http://www.st.com/content/st_com/en/products/microcontrollers/stm32-32-bit-arm-cortex-mcus/stm32-high-performance-mcus/stm32f7-series/stm32f7x9/stm32f769ni.html
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
index 3458dc00095d..4e15f1a42730 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
STM32H743 Overview
==================
@@ -29,6 +30,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32H743_)
.. _STM32H743: http://www.st.com/en/microcontrollers/stm32h7x3.html?querycriteria=productId=LN2033
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
index 62e176d47ca7..f62fdc8e7d8d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===================
STM32MP157 Overview
===================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
index f8efc21998bf..b037428aee98 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
ARM Allwinner SoCs
==================
@@ -10,93 +11,140 @@ SunXi family
Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-sunxi
Flavors:
+
* ARM926 based SoCs
- Allwinner F20 (sun3i)
- + Not Supported
+
+ * Not Supported
* ARM Cortex-A8 based SoCs
- Allwinner A10 (sun4i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.21%20%282012-04-06%29.pdf
- + User Manual
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-04-09%2c%20DECRYPTED%29.pdf
- Allwinner A10s (sun5i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10s/A10s%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-03-27%29.pdf
- Allwinner A13 / R8 (sun5i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.12%20%282012-03-29%29.pdf
- + User Manual
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-01-08%29.pdf
- Next Thing Co GR8 (sun5i)
* Single ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner V3s (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://linux-sunxi.org/File:Allwinner_V3s_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
* Dual ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A20 (sun7i)
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A20/A20%20User%20Manual%202013-03-22.pdf
- Allwinner A23 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20Datasheet%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20User%20Manual%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A31 (sun6i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20user%20manual%20V1.1%2020130630.pdf
- Allwinner A31s (sun6i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20User%20Manual%20%20V1.0%2020130322.pdf
- Allwinner A33 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A33/A33%20Datasheet%20release%201.1.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A33/A33%20user%20manual%20release%201.1.pdf
- Allwinner H2+ (sun8i)
- + No document available now, but is known to be working properly with
+
+ * No document available now, but is known to be working properly with
H3 drivers and memory map.
- Allwinner H3 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/H3/Allwinner_H3_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
- Allwinner R40 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
https://github.com/tinalinux/docs/raw/r40-v1.y/R40_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
https://github.com/tinalinux/docs/raw/r40-v1.y/Allwinner_R40_User_Manual_V1.0.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A15, Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A80
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A80/A80_Datasheet_Revision_1.0_0404.pdf
* Octa ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A83T
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_Datasheet_v1.3_20150510.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_User_Manual_v1.5.1_20150513.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A53 based SoCs
- Allwinner A64
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/A64_Datasheet_V1.1.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/Allwinner%20A64%20User%20Manual%20v1.0.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
index e09a88aa3136..23bd03f3e21f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======================================================
Frequently asked questions about the sunxi clock system
=======================================================
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
steps, one can gate it and keep the system running. Consider this
simplified suspend example:
- While the system is operational, you would see something like
+ While the system is operational, you would see something like::
24MHz 32kHz
|
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
[CPU]
When you are about to suspend, you switch the CPU Mux to the 32kHz
- oscillator:
+ oscillator::
24Mhz 32kHz
| |
@@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
|
[CPU]
- Finally you can gate the main oscillator
+ Finally you can gate the main oscillator::
32kHz
|
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation
index af903d22fd93..6a608a9c3715 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation
+++ b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation
@@ -11,17 +11,17 @@ sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is
signalled to the triggering process.
/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of
-the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example:
----
-Emulated SWP: 12
-Emulated SWPB: 0
-Aborted SWP{B}: 1
-Last process: 314
----
+the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example::
-NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external
-transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update
-atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can
-cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as
-the STREX operation will always fail.
+ Emulated SWP: 12
+ Emulated SWPB: 0
+ Aborted SWP{B}: 1
+ Last process: 314
+
+NOTE:
+ when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external
+ transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update
+ atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can
+ cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as
+ the STREX operation will always fail.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt b/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt
index 7c15871c1885..effd9c7bc968 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+==================================================
ARM TCM (Tightly-Coupled Memory) handling in Linux
-----
+==================================================
+
Written by Linus Walleij <[email protected]>
Some ARM SoC:s have a so-called TCM (Tightly-Coupled Memory).
@@ -85,46 +87,50 @@ to have functions called locally inside the TCM without
wasting space, there is also the __tcmlocalfunc prefix that
will make the call relative.
-Variables to go into dtcm can be tagged like this:
-int __tcmdata foo;
+Variables to go into dtcm can be tagged like this::
-Constants can be tagged like this:
-int __tcmconst foo;
+ int __tcmdata foo;
+
+Constants can be tagged like this::
+
+ int __tcmconst foo;
+
+To put assembler into TCM just use::
+
+ .section ".tcm.text" or .section ".tcm.data"
-To put assembler into TCM just use
-.section ".tcm.text" or .section ".tcm.data"
respectively.
-Example code:
+Example code::
-#include <asm/tcm.h>
+ #include <asm/tcm.h>
-/* Uninitialized data */
-static u32 __tcmdata tcmvar;
-/* Initialized data */
-static u32 __tcmdata tcmassigned = 0x2BADBABEU;
-/* Constant */
-static const u32 __tcmconst tcmconst = 0xCAFEBABEU;
+ /* Uninitialized data */
+ static u32 __tcmdata tcmvar;
+ /* Initialized data */
+ static u32 __tcmdata tcmassigned = 0x2BADBABEU;
+ /* Constant */
+ static const u32 __tcmconst tcmconst = 0xCAFEBABEU;
-static void __tcmlocalfunc tcm_to_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __tcmlocalfunc tcm_to_tcm(void)
+ {
int i;
for (i = 0; i < 100; i++)
tcmvar ++;
-}
+ }
-static void __tcmfunc hello_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __tcmfunc hello_tcm(void)
+ {
/* Some abstract code that runs in ITCM */
int i;
for (i = 0; i < 100; i++) {
tcmvar ++;
}
tcm_to_tcm();
-}
+ }
-static void __init test_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __init test_tcm(void)
+ {
u32 *tcmem;
int i;
@@ -152,4 +158,4 @@ static void __init test_tcm(void)
printk("TCM tcmem[%d] = %08x\n", i, tcmem[i]);
tcm_free(tcmem, 20);
}
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt
index 6543a0adea8a..f868330df6be 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================================
+The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
+================================================
+
UEFI, the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface, is a specification
governing the behaviours of compatible firmware interfaces. It is
maintained by the UEFI Forum - http://www.uefi.org/.
@@ -11,11 +15,13 @@ UEFI support in Linux
=====================
Booting on a platform with firmware compliant with the UEFI specification
makes it possible for the kernel to support additional features:
+
- UEFI Runtime Services
- Retrieving various configuration information through the standardised
interface of UEFI configuration tables. (ACPI, SMBIOS, ...)
For actually enabling [U]EFI support, enable:
+
- CONFIG_EFI=y
- CONFIG_EFI_VARS=y or m
@@ -42,19 +48,20 @@ Instead, the kernel reads the UEFI memory map.
The stub populates the FDT /chosen node with (and the kernel scans for) the
following parameters:
-________________________________________________________________________________
-Name | Size | Description
-================================================================================
-linux,uefi-system-table | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI System Table.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-start | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI memory map,
- | | populated by the UEFI GetMemoryMap() call.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of the UEFI memory map
- | | pointed to in previous entry.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI
- | | memory map.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver | 32-bit | Version of the mmap descriptor format.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+========================== ====== ===========================================
+Name Size Description
+========================== ====== ===========================================
+linux,uefi-system-table 64-bit Physical address of the UEFI System Table.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-start 64-bit Physical address of the UEFI memory map,
+ populated by the UEFI GetMemoryMap() call.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-size 32-bit Size in bytes of the UEFI memory map
+ pointed to in previous entry.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size 32-bit Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI
+ memory map.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver 32-bit Version of the mmap descriptor format.
+========================== ====== ===========================================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
index 45731672c564..a40a1742110b 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+======================================
vlocks for Bare-Metal Mutual Exclusion
======================================
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ started yet.
Algorithm
---------
-The easiest way to explain the vlocks algorithm is with some pseudo-code:
+The easiest way to explain the vlocks algorithm is with some pseudo-code::
int currently_voting[NR_CPUS] = { 0, };
@@ -93,7 +94,7 @@ Features and limitations
number of CPUs.
vlocks can be cascaded in a voting hierarchy to permit better scaling
- if necessary, as in the following hypothetical example for 4096 CPUs:
+ if necessary, as in the following hypothetical example for 4096 CPUs::
/* first level: local election */
my_town = towns[(this_cpu >> 4) & 0xf];
@@ -127,12 +128,12 @@ the basic algorithm:
reduces the number of round-trips required to external memory.
In the ARM implementation, this means that we can use a single load
- and comparison:
+ and comparison::
LDR Rt, [Rn]
CMP Rt, #0
- ...in place of code equivalent to:
+ ...in place of code equivalent to::
LDRB Rt, [Rn]
CMP Rt, #0
diff --git a/Documentation/index.rst b/Documentation/index.rst
index 80a421cb935e..e0a669552193 100644
--- a/Documentation/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/index.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+
.. The Linux Kernel documentation master file, created by
sphinx-quickstart on Fri Feb 12 13:51:46 2016.
You can adapt this file completely to your liking, but it should at least
--
2.20.1
Convert this small file to ReST format.
Most of the conversion were related to adjusting whitespaces
in order for each section to be properly parsed.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt | 135 ++++++++++++++--------------
1 file changed, 70 insertions(+), 65 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
index e7a5b6d1f7a9..a674317790ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,17 @@
+=============
+Intel MID PTI
+=============
+
The Intel MID PTI project is HW implemented in Intel Atom
system-on-a-chip designs based on the Parallel Trace
Interface for MIPI P1149.7 cJTAG standard. The kernel solution
-for this platform involves the following files:
+for this platform involves the following files::
-./include/linux/pti.h
-./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h
-./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c
-./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c
-./drivers/.../pti.c
+ ./include/linux/pti.h
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c
+ ./drivers/.../pti.c
pti.c is the driver that enables various debugging features
popular on platforms from certain mobile manufacturers.
@@ -24,13 +28,14 @@ kernel->user->kernel context switch overheads of routing
data).
An example debugging usage for this driver system:
- *Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start
+
+ * Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start
a console device to further capture debugging messages to PTI.
- *Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW.
+ * Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW.
This is where n_tracerouter and n_tracesink are used.
- *Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing
+ * Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing
to PTI HW.
- *Use mipi_* Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for
+ * `Use mipi_` Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for
debugging to PTI by first requesting a PTI write address via
mipi_request_masterchannel(1).
@@ -42,58 +47,58 @@ but is not just blindly executing as 'root'. Keep in mind
the use of ioctl(,TIOCSETD,) is not specific to the n_tracerouter
and n_tracesink line discpline drivers but is a generic
operation for a program to use a line discpline driver
-on a tty port other than the default n_tty.
-
-/////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink /////////
-
-// Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink.
-#include <errno.h>
-#define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne"
-#define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo"
-
-// needed global to hand onto ldisc connection
-static int g_fd_source = -1;
-static int g_fd_sink = -1;
-
-// these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers
-// in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from
-// the ldiscs loaded in the system.
-int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1;
-int retval;
-
-g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
-g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
-
-if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) {
- // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code
- printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
-if (retval < 0) {
- printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
-if (retval < 0) {
- printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-/////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ////////
-
-// First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped.
-
-// Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a
-// little cleaner shutdown on tty stack.
-sink_ldisc_num = 0;
-source_ldisc_num = 0;
-ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
-ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
-
-// Three, program closes connection, and cleanup:
-close(g_fd_uart);
-close(g_fd_gadget);
-g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL;
+on a tty port other than the default n_tty::
+
+ /////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink /////////
+
+ // Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink.
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne"
+ #define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo"
+
+ // needed global to hand onto ldisc connection
+ static int g_fd_source = -1;
+ static int g_fd_sink = -1;
+
+ // these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers
+ // in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from
+ // the ldiscs loaded in the system.
+ int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1;
+ int retval;
+
+ g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
+ g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
+
+ if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) {
+ // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code
+ printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
+ if (retval < 0) {
+ printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
+ if (retval < 0) {
+ printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ /////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ////////
+
+ // First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped.
+
+ // Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a
+ // little cleaner shutdown on tty stack.
+ sink_ldisc_num = 0;
+ source_ldisc_num = 0;
+ ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
+ ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
+
+ // Three, program closes connection, and cleanup:
+ close(g_fd_uart);
+ close(g_fd_gadget);
+ g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL;
--
2.20.1
Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
document.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt | 59 ++--
Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt | 247 +++++++-------
Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt | 52 +--
Documentation/acpi/debug.txt | 20 +-
.../acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt | 42 +--
Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt | 42 +--
Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt | 90 ++---
Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt | 58 ++--
Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt | 48 ++-
Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt | 132 ++++---
Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt | 323 +++++++++---------
Documentation/acpi/osi.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt | 128 +++----
Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt | 16 +-
24 files changed, 794 insertions(+), 633 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt b/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt
index 3e4862bdad98..2b0307a897c1 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==================================
_DSD Device Properties Usage Rules
-----------------------------------
+==================================
Properties, Property Sets and Property Subsets
----------------------------------------------
@@ -94,4 +95,5 @@ References
----------
[1] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
+
[2] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt b/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt
index effe7af3a5af..a4bc51ee2db1 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/acpi-lid.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+=========================================================
Special Usage Model of the ACPI Control Method Lid Device
+=========================================================
Copyright (C) 2016, Intel Corporation
-Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
+:Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
-Abstract:
+
+Abstract
+========
Platforms containing lids convey lid state (open/close) to OSPMs using a
control method lid device. To implement this, the AML tables issue
@@ -20,6 +24,7 @@ expections of the Linux ACPI lid device driver.
1. Restrictions of the returning value of the _LID control method
+=================================================================
The _LID control method is described to return the "current" lid state.
However the word of "current" has ambiguity, some buggy AML tables return
@@ -31,6 +36,8 @@ with cached value, the initial returning value is likely not reliable.
There are platforms always retun "closed" as initial lid state.
2. Restrictions of the lid state change notifications
+=====================================================
+
There are buggy AML tables never notifying when the lid device state is
changed to "opened". Thus the "opened" notification is not guaranteed. But
@@ -40,26 +47,32 @@ trigger some system power saving operations on Windows. Since it is fully
tested, it is reliable from all AML tables.
3. Expections for the userspace users of the ACPI lid device driver
+===================================================================
The ACPI button driver exports the lid state to the userspace via the
following file:
+
/proc/acpi/button/lid/LID0/state
+
This file actually calls the _LID control method described above. And given
the previous explanation, it is not reliable enough on some platforms. So
it is advised for the userspace program to not to solely rely on this file
to determine the actual lid state.
The ACPI button driver emits the following input event to the userspace:
- SW_LID
-The ACPI lid device driver is implemented to try to deliver the platform
-triggered events to the userspace. However, given the fact that the buggy
-firmware cannot make sure "opened"/"closed" events are paired, the ACPI
-button driver uses the following 3 modes in order not to trigger issues.
+
+SW_LID
+ The ACPI lid device driver is implemented to try to deliver the platform
+ triggered events to the userspace. However, given the fact that the buggy
+ firmware cannot make sure "opened"/"closed" events are paired, the ACPI
+ button driver uses the following 3 modes in order not to trigger issues.
If the userspace hasn't been prepared to ignore the unreliable "opened"
events and the unreliable initial state notification, Linux users can use
the following kernel parameters to handle the possible issues:
-A. button.lid_init_state=method:
+
+A. `button.lid_init_state=method`:
+
When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver reports the
initial lid state using the returning value of the _LID control method
and whether the "opened"/"closed" events are paired fully relies on the
@@ -69,7 +82,9 @@ A. button.lid_init_state=method:
notification is missing.
This option is the default behavior during the period the userspace
isn't ready to handle the buggy AML tables.
-B. button.lid_init_state=open:
+
+B. `button.lid_init_state=open`:
+
When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver always reports the
initial lid state as "opened" and whether the "opened"/"closed" events
are paired fully relies on the firmware implementation.
@@ -80,7 +95,9 @@ B. button.lid_init_state=open:
If the userspace has been prepared to ignore the unreliable "opened" events
and the unreliable initial state notification, Linux users should always
use the following kernel parameter:
-C. button.lid_init_state=ignore:
+
+C. `button.lid_init_state=ignore`:
+
When this option is specified, the ACPI button driver never reports the
initial lid state and there is a compensation mechanism implemented to
ensure that the reliable "closed" notifications can always be delievered
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt b/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt
index 75ebeb64ab29..22144e0c496d 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/aml-debugger.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+================
The AML Debugger
+================
Copyright (C) 2016, Intel Corporation
+
Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
@@ -10,16 +13,16 @@ kernel.
1. Build the debugger
The following kernel configuration items are required to enable the AML
- debugger interface from the Linux kernel:
+ debugger interface from the Linux kernel::
- CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER=y
- CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER_USER=m
+ CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER=y
+ CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER_USER=m
The userspace utilities can be built from the kernel source tree using
- the following commands:
+ the following commands::
- $ cd tools
- $ make acpi
+ $ cd tools
+ $ make acpi
The resultant userspace tool binary is then located at:
@@ -31,11 +34,11 @@ kernel.
2. Start the userspace debugger interface
After booting the kernel with the debugger built-in, the debugger can be
- started by using the following commands:
+ started by using the following commands::
- # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
- # modprobe acpi_dbg
- # tools/power/acpi/acpidbg
+ # mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
+ # modprobe acpi_dbg
+ # tools/power/acpi/acpidbg
That spawns the interactive AML debugger environment where you can execute
debugger commands.
@@ -51,9 +54,9 @@ kernel.
3. Stop the userspace debugger interface
The interactive debugger interface can be closed by pressing Ctrl+C or using
- the "quit" or "exit" commands. When finished, unload the module with:
+ the "quit" or "exit" commands. When finished, unload the module with::
- # rmmod acpi_dbg
+ # rmmod acpi_dbg
The module unloading may fail if there is an acpidbg instance running.
@@ -61,6 +64,6 @@ kernel.
It may be useful to run the AML debugger in a test script. "acpidbg" supports
this in a special "batch" mode. For example, the following command outputs
- the entire ACPI namespace:
+ the entire ACPI namespace::
- # acpidbg -b "namespace"
+ # acpidbg -b "namespace"
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
index e550c8b98139..4fe670dd2d4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/apei/einj.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,14 @@
- APEI Error INJection
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+====================
+APEI Error INJection
+====================
EINJ provides a hardware error injection mechanism. It is very useful
for debugging and testing APEI and RAS features in general.
You need to check whether your BIOS supports EINJ first. For that, look
-for early boot messages similar to this one:
+for early boot messages similar to this one::
-ACPI: EINJ 0x000000007370A000 000150 (v01 INTEL 00000001 INTL 00000001)
+ ACPI: EINJ 0x000000007370A000 000150 (v01 INTEL 00000001 INTL 00000001)
which shows that the BIOS is exposing an EINJ table - it is the
mechanism through which the injection is done.
@@ -23,11 +24,11 @@ order to see the APEI,EINJ,... functionality supported and exposed by
the BIOS menu.
To use EINJ, make sure the following are options enabled in your kernel
-configuration:
+configuration::
-CONFIG_DEBUG_FS
-CONFIG_ACPI_APEI
-CONFIG_ACPI_APEI_EINJ
+ CONFIG_DEBUG_FS
+ CONFIG_ACPI_APEI
+ CONFIG_ACPI_APEI_EINJ
The EINJ user interface is in <debugfs mount point>/apei/einj.
@@ -37,8 +38,9 @@ The following files belong to it:
This file shows which error types are supported:
+ ================ ===================================
Error Type Value Error Description
- ================ =================
+ ================ ===================================
0x00000001 Processor Correctable
0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000004 Processor Uncorrectable fatal
@@ -51,6 +53,7 @@ The following files belong to it:
0x00000200 Platform Correctable
0x00000400 Platform Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000800 Platform Uncorrectable fatal
+ ================ ===================================
The format of the file contents are as above, except present are only
the available error types.
@@ -121,7 +124,7 @@ BIOS versions based on the ACPI 5.0 specification have more control over
the target of the injection. For processor-related errors (type 0x1, 0x2
and 0x4), you can set flags to 0x3 (param3 for bit 0, and param1 and
param2 for bit 1) so that you have more information added to the error
-signature being injected. The actual data passed is this:
+signature being injected. The actual data passed is this::
memory_address = param1;
memory_address_range = param2;
@@ -131,7 +134,7 @@ signature being injected. The actual data passed is this:
For memory errors (type 0x8, 0x10 and 0x20) the address is set using
param1 with a mask in param2 (0x0 is equivalent to all ones). For PCI
express errors (type 0x40, 0x80 and 0x100) the segment, bus, device and
-function are specified using param1:
+function are specified using param1::
31 24 23 16 15 11 10 8 7 0
+-------------------------------------------------+
@@ -152,26 +155,26 @@ documentation for details (and expect changes to this API if vendors
creativity in using this feature expands beyond our expectations).
-An error injection example:
+An error injection example::
-# cd /sys/kernel/debug/apei/einj
-# cat available_error_type # See which errors can be injected
-0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
-0x00000008 Memory Correctable
-0x00000010 Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
-# echo 0x12345000 > param1 # Set memory address for injection
-# echo $((-1 << 12)) > param2 # Mask 0xfffffffffffff000 - anywhere in this page
-# echo 0x8 > error_type # Choose correctable memory error
-# echo 1 > error_inject # Inject now
+ # cd /sys/kernel/debug/apei/einj
+ # cat available_error_type # See which errors can be injected
+ 0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
+ 0x00000008 Memory Correctable
+ 0x00000010 Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
+ # echo 0x12345000 > param1 # Set memory address for injection
+ # echo $((-1 << 12)) > param2 # Mask 0xfffffffffffff000 - anywhere in this page
+ # echo 0x8 > error_type # Choose correctable memory error
+ # echo 1 > error_inject # Inject now
-You should see something like this in dmesg:
+You should see something like this in dmesg::
-[22715.830801] EDAC sbridge MC3: HANDLING MCE MEMORY ERROR
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: CPU 0: Machine Check Event: 0 Bank 7: 8c00004000010090
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: TSC 0
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: ADDR 12345000 EDAC sbridge MC3: MISC 144780c86
-[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: PROCESSOR 0:306e7 TIME 1422553404 SOCKET 0 APIC 0
-[22716.616173] EDAC MC3: 1 CE memory read error on CPU_SrcID#0_Channel#0_DIMM#0 (channel:0 slot:0 page:0x12345 offset:0x0 grain:32 syndrome:0x0 - area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 channel_mask:1 rank:0)
+ [22715.830801] EDAC sbridge MC3: HANDLING MCE MEMORY ERROR
+ [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: CPU 0: Machine Check Event: 0 Bank 7: 8c00004000010090
+ [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: TSC 0
+ [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: ADDR 12345000 EDAC sbridge MC3: MISC 144780c86
+ [22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: PROCESSOR 0:306e7 TIME 1422553404 SOCKET 0 APIC 0
+ [22716.616173] EDAC MC3: 1 CE memory read error on CPU_SrcID#0_Channel#0_DIMM#0 (channel:0 slot:0 page:0x12345 offset:0x0 grain:32 syndrome:0x0 - area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 channel_mask:1 rank:0)
For more information about EINJ, please refer to ACPI specification
version 4.0, section 17.5 and ACPI 5.0, section 18.6.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt b/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt
index 0c49c197c47a..b132bdd950b8 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/apei/output_format.txt
@@ -1,128 +1,129 @@
- APEI output format
- ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==================
+APEI output format
+==================
APEI uses printk as hardware error reporting interface, the output
-format is as follow.
-
-<error record> :=
-APEI generic hardware error status
-severity: <integer>, <severity string>
-section: <integer>, severity: <integer>, <severity string>
-flags: <integer>
-<section flags strings>
-fru_id: <uuid string>
-fru_text: <string>
-section_type: <section type string>
-<section data>
-
-<severity string>* := recoverable | fatal | corrected | info
-
-<section flags strings># :=
-[primary][, containment warning][, reset][, threshold exceeded]\
-[, resource not accessible][, latent error]
-
-<section type string> := generic processor error | memory error | \
-PCIe error | unknown, <uuid string>
-
-<section data> :=
-<generic processor section data> | <memory section data> | \
-<pcie section data> | <null>
-
-<generic processor section data> :=
-[processor_type: <integer>, <proc type string>]
-[processor_isa: <integer>, <proc isa string>]
-[error_type: <integer>
-<proc error type strings>]
-[operation: <integer>, <proc operation string>]
-[flags: <integer>
-<proc flags strings>]
-[level: <integer>]
-[version_info: <integer>]
-[processor_id: <integer>]
-[target_address: <integer>]
-[requestor_id: <integer>]
-[responder_id: <integer>]
-[IP: <integer>]
-
-<proc type string>* := IA32/X64 | IA64
-
-<proc isa string>* := IA32 | IA64 | X64
-
-<processor error type strings># :=
-[cache error][, TLB error][, bus error][, micro-architectural error]
-
-<proc operation string>* := unknown or generic | data read | data write | \
-instruction execution
-
-<proc flags strings># :=
-[restartable][, precise IP][, overflow][, corrected]
-
-<memory section data> :=
-[error_status: <integer>]
-[physical_address: <integer>]
-[physical_address_mask: <integer>]
-[node: <integer>]
-[card: <integer>]
-[module: <integer>]
-[bank: <integer>]
-[device: <integer>]
-[row: <integer>]
-[column: <integer>]
-[bit_position: <integer>]
-[requestor_id: <integer>]
-[responder_id: <integer>]
-[target_id: <integer>]
-[error_type: <integer>, <mem error type string>]
-
-<mem error type string>* :=
-unknown | no error | single-bit ECC | multi-bit ECC | \
-single-symbol chipkill ECC | multi-symbol chipkill ECC | master abort | \
-target abort | parity error | watchdog timeout | invalid address | \
-mirror Broken | memory sparing | scrub corrected error | \
-scrub uncorrected error
-
-<pcie section data> :=
-[port_type: <integer>, <pcie port type string>]
-[version: <integer>.<integer>]
-[command: <integer>, status: <integer>]
-[device_id: <integer>:<integer>:<integer>.<integer>
-slot: <integer>
-secondary_bus: <integer>
-vendor_id: <integer>, device_id: <integer>
-class_code: <integer>]
-[serial number: <integer>, <integer>]
-[bridge: secondary_status: <integer>, control: <integer>]
-[aer_status: <integer>, aer_mask: <integer>
-<aer status string>
-[aer_uncor_severity: <integer>]
-aer_layer=<aer layer string>, aer_agent=<aer agent string>
-aer_tlp_header: <integer> <integer> <integer> <integer>]
-
-<pcie port type string>* := PCIe end point | legacy PCI end point | \
-unknown | unknown | root port | upstream switch port | \
-downstream switch port | PCIe to PCI/PCI-X bridge | \
-PCI/PCI-X to PCIe bridge | root complex integrated endpoint device | \
-root complex event collector
-
-if section severity is fatal or recoverable
-<aer status string># :=
-unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | Data Link Protocol | \
-unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Poisoned TLP | Flow Control Protocol | Completion Timeout | \
-Completer Abort | Unexpected Completion | Receiver Overflow | \
-Malformed TLP | ECRC | Unsupported Request
-else
-<aer status string># :=
-Receiver Error | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Bad TLP | Bad DLLP | RELAY_NUM Rollover | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
-Replay Timer Timeout | Advisory Non-Fatal
-fi
-
-<aer layer string> :=
-Physical Layer | Data Link Layer | Transaction Layer
-
-<aer agent string> :=
-Receiver ID | Requester ID | Completer ID | Transmitter ID
+format is as follow::
+
+ <error record> :=
+ APEI generic hardware error status
+ severity: <integer>, <severity string>
+ section: <integer>, severity: <integer>, <severity string>
+ flags: <integer>
+ <section flags strings>
+ fru_id: <uuid string>
+ fru_text: <string>
+ section_type: <section type string>
+ <section data>
+
+ <severity string>* := recoverable | fatal | corrected | info
+
+ <section flags strings># :=
+ [primary][, containment warning][, reset][, threshold exceeded]\
+ [, resource not accessible][, latent error]
+
+ <section type string> := generic processor error | memory error | \
+ PCIe error | unknown, <uuid string>
+
+ <section data> :=
+ <generic processor section data> | <memory section data> | \
+ <pcie section data> | <null>
+
+ <generic processor section data> :=
+ [processor_type: <integer>, <proc type string>]
+ [processor_isa: <integer>, <proc isa string>]
+ [error_type: <integer>
+ <proc error type strings>]
+ [operation: <integer>, <proc operation string>]
+ [flags: <integer>
+ <proc flags strings>]
+ [level: <integer>]
+ [version_info: <integer>]
+ [processor_id: <integer>]
+ [target_address: <integer>]
+ [requestor_id: <integer>]
+ [responder_id: <integer>]
+ [IP: <integer>]
+
+ <proc type string>* := IA32/X64 | IA64
+
+ <proc isa string>* := IA32 | IA64 | X64
+
+ <processor error type strings># :=
+ [cache error][, TLB error][, bus error][, micro-architectural error]
+
+ <proc operation string>* := unknown or generic | data read | data write | \
+ instruction execution
+
+ <proc flags strings># :=
+ [restartable][, precise IP][, overflow][, corrected]
+
+ <memory section data> :=
+ [error_status: <integer>]
+ [physical_address: <integer>]
+ [physical_address_mask: <integer>]
+ [node: <integer>]
+ [card: <integer>]
+ [module: <integer>]
+ [bank: <integer>]
+ [device: <integer>]
+ [row: <integer>]
+ [column: <integer>]
+ [bit_position: <integer>]
+ [requestor_id: <integer>]
+ [responder_id: <integer>]
+ [target_id: <integer>]
+ [error_type: <integer>, <mem error type string>]
+
+ <mem error type string>* :=
+ unknown | no error | single-bit ECC | multi-bit ECC | \
+ single-symbol chipkill ECC | multi-symbol chipkill ECC | master abort | \
+ target abort | parity error | watchdog timeout | invalid address | \
+ mirror Broken | memory sparing | scrub corrected error | \
+ scrub uncorrected error
+
+ <pcie section data> :=
+ [port_type: <integer>, <pcie port type string>]
+ [version: <integer>.<integer>]
+ [command: <integer>, status: <integer>]
+ [device_id: <integer>:<integer>:<integer>.<integer>
+ slot: <integer>
+ secondary_bus: <integer>
+ vendor_id: <integer>, device_id: <integer>
+ class_code: <integer>]
+ [serial number: <integer>, <integer>]
+ [bridge: secondary_status: <integer>, control: <integer>]
+ [aer_status: <integer>, aer_mask: <integer>
+ <aer status string>
+ [aer_uncor_severity: <integer>]
+ aer_layer=<aer layer string>, aer_agent=<aer agent string>
+ aer_tlp_header: <integer> <integer> <integer> <integer>]
+
+ <pcie port type string>* := PCIe end point | legacy PCI end point | \
+ unknown | unknown | root port | upstream switch port | \
+ downstream switch port | PCIe to PCI/PCI-X bridge | \
+ PCI/PCI-X to PCIe bridge | root complex integrated endpoint device | \
+ root complex event collector
+
+ if section severity is fatal or recoverable
+ <aer status string># :=
+ unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | Data Link Protocol | \
+ unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+ Poisoned TLP | Flow Control Protocol | Completion Timeout | \
+ Completer Abort | Unexpected Completion | Receiver Overflow | \
+ Malformed TLP | ECRC | Unsupported Request
+ else
+ <aer status string># :=
+ Receiver Error | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+ Bad TLP | Bad DLLP | RELAY_NUM Rollover | unknown | unknown | unknown | \
+ Replay Timer Timeout | Advisory Non-Fatal
+ fi
+
+ <aer layer string> :=
+ Physical Layer | Data Link Layer | Transaction Layer
+
+ <aer agent string> :=
+ Receiver ID | Requester ID | Completer ID | Transmitter ID
Where, [] designate corresponding content is optional
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt b/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt
index f20fb445135d..e4c6bb5a3333 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/cppc_sysfs.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
- Collaborative Processor Performance Control (CPPC)
+==================================================
+Collaborative Processor Performance Control (CPPC)
+==================================================
CPPC defined in the ACPI spec describes a mechanism for the OS to manage the
performance of a logical processor on a contigious and abstract performance
@@ -8,28 +9,30 @@ to request performance levels and to measure per-cpu delivered performance.
For more details on CPPC please refer to the ACPI specification at:
-http://uefi.org/specifications
+ http://uefi.org/specifications
Some of the CPPC registers are exposed via sysfs under:
-/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/acpi_cppc/
+ /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/acpi_cppc/
for each cpu X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-$ ls -lR /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/
-/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/:
-total 0
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 feedback_ctrs
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 highest_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_freq
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_nonlinear_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 nominal_freq
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 nominal_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 reference_perf
--r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 wraparound_time
+::
+
+ $ ls -lR /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/
+ /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/acpi_cppc/:
+ total 0
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 feedback_ctrs
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 highest_perf
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_freq
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_nonlinear_perf
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 lowest_perf
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 nominal_freq
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 nominal_perf
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 reference_perf
+ -r--r--r-- 1 root root 65536 Mar 5 19:38 wraparound_time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -54,16 +57,17 @@ total 0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Computing Average Delivered Performance
+Computing Average Delivered Performance
+=======================================
Below describes the steps to compute the average performance delivered by taking
-two different snapshots of feedback counters at time T1 and T2.
+two different snapshots of feedback counters at time T1 and T2::
-T1: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t1
- Wait or run some workload
-T2: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t2
+ T1: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t1
+ Wait or run some workload
+ T2: Read feedback_ctrs as fbc_t2
-delivered_counter_delta = fbc_t2[del] - fbc_t1[del]
-reference_counter_delta = fbc_t2[ref] - fbc_t1[ref]
+ delivered_counter_delta = fbc_t2[del] - fbc_t1[del]
+ reference_counter_delta = fbc_t2[ref] - fbc_t1[ref]
-delivered_perf = (refernce_perf x delivered_counter_delta) / reference_counter_delta
+ delivered_perf = (refernce_perf x delivered_counter_delta) / reference_counter_delta
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt b/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt
index 65bf47c46b6d..259a12a1e6a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/debug.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- ACPI Debug Output
+=================
+ACPI Debug Output
+=================
The ACPI CA, the Linux ACPI core, and some ACPI drivers can generate debug
@@ -33,7 +35,7 @@ to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer.
The possible components are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h and
include/acpi/acpi_drivers.h. Reading /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer
-shows the supported mask values, currently these:
+shows the supported mask values, currently these::
ACPI_UTILITIES 0x00000001
ACPI_HARDWARE 0x00000002
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ to /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level.
The possible levels are defined in include/acpi/acoutput.h. Reading
/sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level shows the supported mask values,
-currently these:
+currently these::
ACPI_LV_INIT 0x00000001
ACPI_LV_DEBUG_OBJECT 0x00000002
@@ -115,7 +117,7 @@ currently these:
Examples
--------
-For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this:
+For example, drivers/acpi/bus.c contains this::
#define _COMPONENT ACPI_BUS_COMPONENT
...
@@ -127,22 +129,22 @@ statement uses ACPI_DB_INFO, which is macro based on the ACPI_LV_INFO
definition.)
Enable all AML "Debug" output (stores to the Debug object while interpreting
-AML) during boot:
+AML) during boot::
acpi.debug_layer=0xffffffff acpi.debug_level=0x2
-Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages:
+Enable PCI and PCI interrupt routing debug messages::
acpi.debug_layer=0x400000 acpi.debug_level=0x4
-Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages:
+Enable all ACPI hardware-related messages::
acpi.debug_layer=0x2 acpi.debug_level=0xffffffff
-Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot:
+Enable all ACPI_DB_INFO messages after boot::
# echo 0x4 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level
-Show all valid component values:
+Show all valid component values::
# cat /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt
index c3871565c8cf..9ccd02bf060c 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
+====================
+Data Node References
+====================
+
Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
+
Author: Sakari Ailus <[email protected]>
@@ -30,6 +35,8 @@ extension key.
Example
-------
+::
+
In the ASL snippet below, the "reference" _DSD property [2] contains a
device object reference to DEV0 and under that device object, a
hierarchical data extension key "node@1" referring to the NOD1 object
@@ -81,9 +88,9 @@ References
----------
[1] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf,
referenced 2018-07-17.
[2] Device Properties UUID For _DSD.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf,
referenced 2016-10-04.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt
index b9ce910781dc..618deddcf512 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+======
Graphs
+======
_DSD
@@ -40,7 +42,7 @@ All port nodes are located under the device's "_DSD" node in the hierarchical
data extension tree. The data extension related to each port node must begin
with "port" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the port
as its key. The target object it refers to should be called "PRTX", where "X" is
-the number of the port. An example of such a package would be:
+the number of the port. An example of such a package would be::
Package() { "port@4", PRT4 }
@@ -49,7 +51,7 @@ data extension key of the endpoint nodes must begin with
"endpoint" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the
endpoint. The object it refers to should be called "EPXY", where "X" is the
number of the port and "Y" is the number of the endpoint. An example of such a
-package would be:
+package would be::
Package() { "endpoint@0", EP40 }
@@ -65,7 +67,7 @@ The endpoint reference uses property extension with "remote-endpoint" property
name followed by a reference in the same package. Such references consist of the
the remote device reference, the first package entry of the port data extension
reference under the device and finally the first package entry of the endpoint
-data extension reference under the port. Individual references thus appear as:
+data extension reference under the port. Individual references thus appear as::
Package() { device, "port@X", "endpoint@Y" }
@@ -75,7 +77,7 @@ endpoint.
The references to endpoints must be always done both ways, to the
remote endpoint and back from the referred remote endpoint node.
-A simple example of this is show below:
+A simple example of this is show below::
Scope (\_SB.PCI0.I2C2)
{
@@ -151,23 +153,25 @@ References
----------
[1] _DSD (Device Specific Data) Implementation Guide.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-implementation-guide-toplevel-1_1.htm>,
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-implementation-guide-toplevel-1_1.htm,
referenced 2016-10-03.
-[2] Devicetree. <URL:http://www.devicetree.org>, referenced 2016-10-03.
+[2] Devicetree.
+ http://www.devicetree.org, referenced 2016-10-03.
-[3] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt
+[3] Linux Kernel device tree graph rules.
+ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt
[4] Device Properties UUID For _DSD.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>,
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf,
referenced 2016-10-04.
[5] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
+ URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf,
referenced 2016-10-04.
[6] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification.
- <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_1.pdf>,
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6_1.pdf,
referenced 2016-10-04.
[7] _DSD Device Properties Usage Rules.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt
index 81a63af42ed2..82ccd5cfb1fd 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/leds.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+========================================
Describing and referring to LEDs in ACPI
+========================================
Individual LEDs are described by hierarchical data extension [6] nodes under the
device node, the LED driver chip. The "reg" property in the LED specific nodes
@@ -26,7 +28,7 @@ followed by the referred object name. That object shall be named "LED" followed
by the number of the LED.
An ASL example of a camera sensor device and a LED driver device for two LEDs.
-Objects not relevant for LEDs or the references to them have been omitted.
+Objects not relevant for LEDs or the references to them have been omitted::
Device (LED)
{
@@ -72,10 +74,14 @@ Objects not relevant for LEDs or the references to them have been omitted.
where
- LED LED driver device
- LED0 First LED
- LED1 Second LED
- SEN Camera sensor device (or another device the LED is
+ LED
+ LED driver device
+ LED0
+ First LED
+ LED1
+ Second LED
+ SEN
+ Camera sensor device (or another device the LED is
related to)
[1] Device tree. <URL:http://www.devicetree.org>, referenced 2019-02-21.
@@ -96,4 +102,4 @@ where
<URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>,
referenced 2019-02-21.
-[7] Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-reference.txt
+[7] Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
index 784841caa6e6..d483b1957be1 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsdt-override.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-Linux supports a method of overriding the BIOS DSDT:
+===================================================
+Linux supports a method of overriding the BIOS DSDT
+===================================================
CONFIG_ACPI_CUSTOM_DSDT builds the image into the kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
index 1395b844649c..5b740fb9054b 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+=============================
ACPI based device enumeration
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=============================
+
ACPI 5 introduced a set of new resources (UartTSerialBus, I2cSerialBus,
SpiSerialBus, GpioIo and GpioInt) which can be used in enumerating slave
devices behind serial bus controllers.
@@ -11,10 +13,10 @@ that are accessed through memory-mapped registers.
In order to support this and re-use the existing drivers as much as
possible we decided to do following:
- o Devices that have no bus connector resource are represented as
+ - Devices that have no bus connector resource are represented as
platform devices.
- o Devices behind real busses where there is a connector resource
+ - Devices behind real busses where there is a connector resource
are represented as struct spi_device or struct i2c_device
(standard UARTs are not busses so there is no struct uart_device).
@@ -39,7 +41,7 @@ some other non-ACPI platform, the driver might work out of the box or needs
some minor changes.
Adding ACPI support for an existing driver should be pretty
-straightforward. Here is the simplest example:
+straightforward. Here is the simplest example::
#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
static const struct acpi_device_id mydrv_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -66,7 +68,7 @@ DMA controllers enumerated via ACPI should be registered in the system to
provide generic access to their resources. For example, a driver that would
like to be accessible to slave devices via generic API call
dma_request_slave_channel() must register itself at the end of the probe
-function like this:
+function like this::
err = devm_acpi_dma_controller_register(dev, xlate_func, dw);
/* Handle the error if it's not a case of !CONFIG_ACPI */
@@ -74,7 +76,7 @@ function like this:
and implement custom xlate function if needed (usually acpi_dma_simple_xlate()
is enough) which converts the FixedDMA resource provided by struct
acpi_dma_spec into the corresponding DMA channel. A piece of code for that case
-could look like:
+could look like::
#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
struct filter_args {
@@ -114,7 +116,7 @@ provided by struct acpi_dma.
Clients must call dma_request_slave_channel() with the string parameter that
corresponds to a specific FixedDMA resource. By default "tx" means the first
entry of the FixedDMA resource array, "rx" means the second entry. The table
-below shows a layout:
+below shows a layout::
Device (I2C0)
{
@@ -143,7 +145,7 @@ Slave devices behind SPI bus have SpiSerialBus resource attached to them.
This is extracted automatically by the SPI core and the slave devices are
enumerated once spi_register_master() is called by the bus driver.
-Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like:
+Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like::
Device (EEP0)
{
@@ -163,7 +165,7 @@ Here is what the ACPI namespace for a SPI slave might look like:
The SPI device drivers only need to add ACPI IDs in a similar way than with
the platform device drivers. Below is an example where we add ACPI support
-to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet):
+to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet)::
#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
static const struct acpi_device_id at25_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -182,7 +184,7 @@ to at25 SPI eeprom driver (this is meant for the above ACPI snippet):
Note that this driver actually needs more information like page size of the
eeprom etc. but at the time writing this there is no standard way of
-passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like:
+passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like::
Device (EEP0)
{
@@ -202,7 +204,7 @@ passing those. One idea is to return this in _DSM method like:
}
Then the at25 SPI driver can get this configuration by calling _DSM on its
-ACPI handle like:
+ACPI handle like::
struct acpi_buffer output = { ACPI_ALLOCATE_BUFFER, NULL };
struct acpi_object_list input;
@@ -227,7 +229,7 @@ any slave devices behind the controller device once the adapter is
registered.
Below is an example of how to add ACPI support to the existing mpu3050
-input driver:
+input driver::
#ifdef CONFIG_ACPI
static const struct acpi_device_id mpu3050_acpi_match[] = {
@@ -257,10 +259,10 @@ and GpioInt. These resources can be used to pass GPIO numbers used by
the device to the driver. ACPI 5.1 extended this with _DSD (Device
Specific Data) which made it possible to name the GPIOs among other things.
-For example:
+For example::
-Device (DEV)
-{
+ Device (DEV)
+ {
Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
{
Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate()
@@ -310,7 +312,7 @@ There is a standard GPIO API for that and is documented in
Documentation/gpio/.
In the above example we can get the corresponding two GPIO descriptors with
-a code like this:
+a code like this::
#include <linux/gpio/consumer.h>
...
@@ -340,15 +342,15 @@ devices there needs to be an ACPI handle that they can use to reference
parts of the ACPI namespace that relate to them. In the Linux MFD subsystem
we provide two ways:
- o The children share the parent ACPI handle.
- o The MFD cell can specify the ACPI id of the device.
+ - The children share the parent ACPI handle.
+ - The MFD cell can specify the ACPI id of the device.
For the first case, the MFD drivers do not need to do anything. The
resulting child platform device will have its ACPI_COMPANION() set to point
to the parent device.
If the ACPI namespace has a device that we can match using an ACPI id or ACPI
-adr, the cell should be set like:
+adr, the cell should be set like::
static struct mfd_cell_acpi_match my_subdevice_cell_acpi_match = {
.pnpid = "XYZ0001",
@@ -412,7 +414,7 @@ will be enumerated to depends on the device ID returned by _HID.
For example, the following ACPI sample might be used to enumerate an lm75-type
I2C temperature sensor and match it to the driver using the Device Tree
-namespace link:
+namespace link::
Device (TMP0)
{
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt b/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
index 88c65cb5bf0a..d8ba7a06db73 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+======================================
_DSD Device Properties Related to GPIO
---------------------------------------
+======================================
With the release of ACPI 5.1, the _DSD configuration object finally
allows names to be given to GPIOs (and other things as well) returned
@@ -8,7 +9,7 @@ the corresponding GPIO, which is pretty error prone (it depends on
the _CRS output ordering, for example).
With _DSD we can now query GPIOs using a name instead of an integer
-index, like the ASL example below shows:
+index, like the ASL example below shows::
// Bluetooth device with reset and shutdown GPIOs
Device (BTH)
@@ -34,7 +35,7 @@ index, like the ASL example below shows:
})
}
-The format of the supported GPIO property is:
+The format of the supported GPIO property is::
Package () { "name", Package () { ref, index, pin, active_low }}
@@ -55,7 +56,7 @@ It is possible to leave holes in the array of GPIOs. This is useful in
cases like with SPI host controllers where some chip selects may be
implemented as GPIOs and some as native signals. For example a SPI host
controller can have chip selects 0 and 2 implemented as GPIOs and 1 as
-native:
+native::
Package () {
"cs-gpios",
@@ -78,7 +79,7 @@ _DSD device properties for GPIO controllers:
- input
- line-name
-Example:
+Example::
Name (_DSD, Package () {
// _DSD Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID
@@ -100,7 +101,7 @@ Example:
- gpio-line-names
-Example:
+Example::
Package () {
"gpio-line-names",
@@ -139,16 +140,16 @@ line in that resource starting from zero, and the active-low flag for that line,
respectively, in analogy with the _DSD GPIO property format specified above.
For the example Bluetooth device discussed previously the data structures in
-question would look like this:
+question would look like this::
-static const struct acpi_gpio_params reset_gpio = { 1, 1, false };
-static const struct acpi_gpio_params shutdown_gpio = { 0, 0, false };
+ static const struct acpi_gpio_params reset_gpio = { 1, 1, false };
+ static const struct acpi_gpio_params shutdown_gpio = { 0, 0, false };
-static const struct acpi_gpio_mapping bluetooth_acpi_gpios[] = {
- { "reset-gpios", &reset_gpio, 1 },
- { "shutdown-gpios", &shutdown_gpio, 1 },
- { },
-};
+ static const struct acpi_gpio_mapping bluetooth_acpi_gpios[] = {
+ { "reset-gpios", &reset_gpio, 1 },
+ { "shutdown-gpios", &shutdown_gpio, 1 },
+ { },
+ };
Next, the mapping table needs to be passed as the second argument to
acpi_dev_add_driver_gpios() that will register it with the ACPI device object
@@ -163,7 +164,7 @@ Using the _CRS fallback
If a device does not have _DSD or the driver does not create ACPI GPIO
mapping, the Linux GPIO framework refuses to return any GPIOs. This is
because the driver does not know what it actually gets. For example if we
-have a device like below:
+have a device like below::
Device (BTH)
{
@@ -177,7 +178,7 @@ have a device like below:
})
}
-The driver might expect to get the right GPIO when it does:
+The driver might expect to get the right GPIO when it does::
desc = gpiod_get(dev, "reset", GPIOD_OUT_LOW);
@@ -195,18 +196,21 @@ objects, as listed in the above chapter, of the device in question.
Getting GPIO descriptor
-----------------------
-There are two main approaches to get GPIO resource from ACPI:
+There are two main approaches to get GPIO resource from ACPI::
+
desc = gpiod_get(dev, connection_id, flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, connection_id, index, flags);
We may consider two different cases here, i.e. when connection ID is
provided and otherwise.
-Case 1:
+Case 1::
+
desc = gpiod_get(dev, "non-null-connection-id", flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, "non-null-connection-id", index, flags);
-Case 2:
+Case 2::
+
desc = gpiod_get(dev, NULL, flags);
desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, index, flags);
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt b/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt
index 9fcc4f0b885e..5481cf1ad272 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/i2c-muxes.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,21 @@
+==============
ACPI I2C Muxes
---------------
+==============
Describing an I2C device hierarchy that includes I2C muxes requires an ACPI
Device () scope per mux channel.
-Consider this topology:
+Consider this topology::
-+------+ +------+
-| SMB1 |-->| MUX0 |--CH00--> i2c client A (0x50)
-| | | 0x70 |--CH01--> i2c client B (0x50)
-+------+ +------+
+ +------+ +------+
+ | SMB1 |-->| MUX0 |--CH00--> i2c client A (0x50)
+ | | | 0x70 |--CH01--> i2c client B (0x50)
+ +------+ +------+
-which corresponds to the following ASL:
+which corresponds to the following ASL::
-Device (SMB1)
-{
+ Device (SMB1)
+ {
Name (_HID, ...)
Device (MUX0)
{
@@ -55,4 +56,4 @@ Device (SMB1)
}
}
}
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
index 30437a6db373..1b89103f810a 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/initrd_table_override.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
Upgrading ACPI tables via initrd
================================
@@ -19,12 +20,14 @@ ACPI_TABLE_OVERRIDE_VIA_BUILTIN_INITRD should also be true for this
feature to work.
For a full list of ACPI tables that can be upgraded/installed, take a look
-at the char *table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE]; definition in
+at the `char *table_sigs[MAX_ACPI_SIGNATURE];` definition in
drivers/acpi/tables.c.
All ACPI tables iasl (Intel's ACPI compiler and disassembler) knows should
be overridable, except:
+
- ACPI_SIG_RSDP (has a signature of 6 bytes)
- ACPI_SIG_FACS (does not have an ordinary ACPI table header)
+
Both could get implemented as well.
@@ -50,47 +53,48 @@ change with not instrumented initrds.
3) How does it work
-------------------
-# Extract the machine's ACPI tables:
-cd /tmp
-acpidump >acpidump
-acpixtract -a acpidump
-# Disassemble, modify and recompile them:
-iasl -d *.dat
-# For example add this statement into a _PRT (PCI Routing Table) function
-# of the DSDT:
-Store("HELLO WORLD", debug)
-# And increase the OEM Revision. For example, before modification:
-DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000000)
-# After modification:
-DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000001)
-iasl -sa dsdt.dsl
-# Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
-# They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the cpio
-# archive. Note that if the table put here matches a platform table
-# (similar Table Signature, and similar OEMID, and similar OEM Table ID)
-# with a more recent OEM Revision, the platform table will be upgraded by
-# this table. If the table put here doesn't match a platform table
-# (dissimilar Table Signature, or dissimilar OEMID, or dissimilar OEM Table
-# ID), this table will be appended.
-mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp dsdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-# A maximum of "NR_ACPI_INITRD_TABLES (64)" tables are currently allowed
-# (see osl.c):
-iasl -sa facp.dsl
-iasl -sa ssdt1.dsl
-cp facp.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp ssdt1.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-# The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first. Other, typically
-# compressed cpio archives, must be concatenated on top of the uncompressed
-# one. Following command creates the uncompressed cpio archive and
-# concatenates the original initrd on top:
-find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
-cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
-# reboot with increased acpi debug level, e.g. boot params:
-acpi.debug_level=0x2 acpi.debug_layer=0xFFFFFFFF
-# and check your syslog:
-[ 1.268089] ACPI: PCI Interrupt Routing Table [\_SB_.PCI0._PRT]
-[ 1.272091] [ACPI Debug] String [0x0B] "HELLO WORLD"
+# Extract the machine's ACPI tables::
+
+ cd /tmp
+ acpidump >acpidump
+ acpixtract -a acpidump
+ # Disassemble, modify and recompile them:
+ iasl -d *.dat
+ # For example add this statement into a _PRT (PCI Routing Table) function
+ # of the DSDT:
+ # Store("HELLO WORLD", debug)
+ # And increase the OEM Revision. For example, before modification:
+ # DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000000)
+ # After modification:
+ # DefinitionBlock ("DSDT.aml", "DSDT", 2, "INTEL ", "TEMPLATE", 0x00000001)
+ iasl -sa dsdt.dsl
+ # Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
+ # They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the cpio
+ # archive. Note that if the table put here matches a platform table
+ # (similar Table Signature, and similar OEMID, and similar OEM Table ID)
+ # with a more recent OEM Revision, the platform table will be upgraded by
+ # this table. If the table put here doesn't match a platform table
+ # (dissimilar Table Signature, or dissimilar OEMID, or dissimilar OEM Table
+ # ID), this table will be appended.
+ mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
+ cp dsdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+ # A maximum of "NR_ACPI_INITRD_TABLES (64)" tables are currently allowed
+ # (see osl.c):
+ iasl -sa facp.dsl
+ iasl -sa ssdt1.dsl
+ cp facp.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+ cp ssdt1.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+ # The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first. Other, typically
+ # compressed cpio archives, must be concatenated on top of the uncompressed
+ # one. Following command creates the uncompressed cpio archive and
+ # concatenates the original initrd on top:
+ find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
+ cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
+ # reboot with increased acpi debug level, e.g. boot params:
+ acpi.debug_level=0x2 acpi.debug_layer=0xFFFFFFFF
+ # and check your syslog:
+ [ 1.268089] ACPI: PCI Interrupt Routing Table [\_SB_.PCI0._PRT]
+ [ 1.272091] [ACPI Debug] String [0x0B] "HELLO WORLD"
iasl is able to disassemble and recompile quite a lot different,
also static ACPI tables.
@@ -106,6 +110,8 @@ on SUSE).
acpidump can be found in Len Browns pmtools:
ftp://kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/lenb/acpi/utils/pmtools/acpidump
+
This tool is also part of the acpica package on SUSE.
+
Alternatively, used ACPI tables can be retrieved via sysfs in latest kernels:
/sys/firmware/acpi/tables
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt b/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt
index 3ad7b0dfb083..bb5e7e49e175 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/linuxized-acpica.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+============================================================
Linuxized ACPICA - Introduction to ACPICA Release Automation
+============================================================
Copyright (C) 2013-2016, Intel Corporation
+
Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
-Abstract:
+Abstract
+========
This document describes the ACPICA project and the relationship between
ACPICA and Linux. It also describes how ACPICA code in drivers/acpi/acpica,
@@ -13,6 +17,7 @@ upstream.
1. ACPICA Project
+=================
The ACPI Component Architecture (ACPICA) project provides an operating
system (OS)-independent reference implementation of the Advanced
@@ -25,7 +30,7 @@ upstream.
supported by Intel Corporation.
The following figure depicts the Linux ACPI subsystem where the ACPICA
- adaptation is included:
+ adaptation is included::
+---------------------------------------------------------+
| |
@@ -72,34 +77,43 @@ upstream.
Figure 1. Linux ACPI Software Components
NOTE:
+
A. OS Service Layer - Provided by Linux to offer OS dependent
- implementation of the predefined ACPICA interfaces (acpi_os_*).
+ implementation of the predefined ACPICA interfaces (acpi_os_*)::
+
include/acpi/acpiosxf.h
drivers/acpi/osl.c
include/acpi/platform
include/asm/acenv.h
+
B. ACPICA Functionality - Released from ACPICA code base to offer
- OS independent implementation of the ACPICA interfaces (acpi_*).
+ OS independent implementation of the ACPICA interfaces (acpi_*)::
+
drivers/acpi/acpica
include/acpi/ac*.h
tools/power/acpi
+
C. Linux/ACPI Functionality - Providing Linux specific ACPI
functionality to the other Linux kernel subsystems and user space
- programs.
+ programs::
+
drivers/acpi
include/linux/acpi.h
include/linux/acpi*.h
include/acpi
tools/power/acpi
+
D. Architecture Specific ACPICA/ACPI Functionalities - Provided by the
ACPI subsystem to offer architecture specific implementation of the
ACPI interfaces. They are Linux specific components and are out of
- the scope of this document.
+ the scope of this document::
+
include/asm/acpi.h
include/asm/acpi*.h
arch/*/acpi
2. ACPICA Release
+=================
The ACPICA project maintains its code base at the following repository URL:
https://github.com/acpica/acpica.git. As a rule, a release is made every
@@ -112,7 +126,7 @@ upstream.
copy the ACPICA git repository. Each commit in the monthly release is
converted into a linuxized ACPICA patch. Together, they form the monthly
ACPICA release patchset for the Linux ACPI community. This process is
- illustrated in the following figure:
+ illustrated in the following figure::
+-----------------------------+
| acpica / master (-) commits |
@@ -154,6 +168,7 @@ upstream.
Figure 2. ACPICA -> Linux Upstream Process
NOTE:
+
A. Linuxize Utilities - Provided by the ACPICA repository, including a
utility located in source/tools/acpisrc folder and a number of
scripts located in generate/linux folder.
@@ -171,6 +186,7 @@ upstream.
CONFIG_ACPI/CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG/CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUGGER
3. ACPICA Divergences
+=====================
Ideally, all of the ACPICA commits should be converted into Linux patches
automatically without manual modifications, the "linux / master" tree should
@@ -183,6 +199,7 @@ upstream.
"ACPICA Divergences".
The various sources of ACPICA divergences include:
+
1. Legacy divergences - Before the current ACPICA release process was
established, there already had been divergences between Linux and
ACPICA. Over the past several years those divergences have been greatly
@@ -214,6 +231,7 @@ upstream.
divergences are generated.
4. ACPICA Development
+=====================
This paragraph guides Linux developers to use the ACPICA upstream release
utilities to obtain Linux patches corresponding to upstream ACPICA commits
@@ -225,11 +243,11 @@ upstream.
you want to cherry pick must be committed into the local repository.
Then the gen-patch.sh command can help to cherry-pick an ACPICA commit
- from the ACPICA local repository:
+ from the ACPICA local repository::
- $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
- $ cd acpica
- $ generate/linux/gen-patch.sh -u [commit ID]
+ $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
+ $ cd acpica
+ $ generate/linux/gen-patch.sh -u [commit ID]
Here the commit ID is the ACPICA local repository commit ID you want to
cherry pick. It can be omitted if the commit is "HEAD".
@@ -240,11 +258,11 @@ upstream.
changes that haven't been applied to Linux yet.
You can generate the ACPICA release series yourself and rebase your code on
- top of the generated ACPICA release patches:
+ top of the generated ACPICA release patches::
- $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
- $ cd acpica
- $ generate/linux/make-patches.sh -u [commit ID]
+ $ git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
+ $ cd acpica
+ $ generate/linux/make-patches.sh -u [commit ID]
The commit ID should be the last ACPICA commit accepted by Linux. Usually,
it is the commit modifying ACPI_CA_VERSION. It can be found by executing
@@ -254,9 +272,9 @@ upstream.
3. Inspect the current divergences
If you have local copies of both Linux and upstream ACPICA, you can generate
- a diff file indicating the state of the current divergences:
+ a diff file indicating the state of the current divergences::
- # git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
- # git clone http://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
- # cd acpica
- # generate/linux/divergences.sh -s ../linux
+ # git clone https://github.com/acpica/acpica
+ # git clone http://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
+ # cd acpica
+ # generate/linux/divergences.sh -s ../linux
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt b/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt
index b426398d2e97..b01c97c6f739 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/lpit.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=====================
+Low Power Idle states
+=====================
+
To enumerate platform Low Power Idle states, Intel platforms are using
“Low Power Idle Table” (LPIT). More details about this table can be
downloaded from:
@@ -8,11 +12,13 @@ Residencies for each low power state can be read via FFH
On platforms supporting S0ix sleep states, there can be two types of
residencies:
+
- CPU PKG C10 (Read via FFH interface)
- Platform Controller Hub (PCH) SLP_S0 (Read via memory mapped interface)
The following attributes are added dynamically to the cpuidle
-sysfs attribute group:
+sysfs attribute group::
+
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_cpu_residency_us
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuidle/low_power_idle_system_residency_us
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt b/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt
index 7235da975f23..4a00a52e69f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/method-customizing.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======================================
Linux ACPI Custom Control Method How To
=======================================
@@ -7,47 +8,58 @@ Written by Zhang Rui <[email protected]>
Linux supports customizing ACPI control methods at runtime.
Users can use this to
+
1. override an existing method which may not work correctly,
or just for debugging purposes.
2. insert a completely new method in order to create a missing
method such as _OFF, _ON, _STA, _INI, etc.
+
For these cases, it is far simpler to dynamically install a single
control method rather than override the entire DSDT, because kernel
rebuild/reboot is not needed and test result can be got in minutes.
-Note: Only ACPI METHOD can be overridden, any other object types like
+Note:
+ Only ACPI METHOD can be overridden, any other object types like
"Device", "OperationRegion", are not recognized. Methods
declared inside scope operators are also not supported.
-Note: The same ACPI control method can be overridden for many times,
+Note:
+ The same ACPI control method can be overridden for many times,
and it's always the latest one that used by Linux/kernel.
-Note: To get the ACPI debug object output (Store (AAAA, Debug)),
+Note:
+ To get the ACPI debug object output (Store (AAAA, Debug)),
please run "echo 1 > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/aml_debug_output".
1. override an existing method
+
a) get the ACPI table via ACPI sysfs I/F. e.g. to get the DSDT,
just run "cat /sys/firmware/acpi/tables/DSDT > /tmp/dsdt.dat"
b) disassemble the table by running "iasl -d dsdt.dat".
c) rewrite the ASL code of the method and save it in a new file,
d) package the new file (psr.asl) to an ACPI table format.
- Here is an example of a customized \_SB._AC._PSR method,
+ Here is an example of a customized \_SB._AC._PSR method::
- DefinitionBlock ("", "SSDT", 1, "", "", 0x20080715)
- {
- Method (\_SB_.AC._PSR, 0, NotSerialized)
- {
+ DefinitionBlock ("", "SSDT", 1, "", "", 0x20080715)
+ {
+ Method (\_SB_.AC._PSR, 0, NotSerialized)
+ {
Store ("In AC _PSR", Debug)
Return (ACON)
- }
- }
+ }
+ }
+
Note that the full pathname of the method in ACPI namespace
should be used.
e) assemble the file to generate the AML code of the method.
- e.g. "iasl -vw 6084 psr.asl" (psr.aml is generated as a result)
- If parameter "-vw 6084" is not supported by your iASL compiler,
+ e.g. `iasl -vw 6084 psr.asl` (psr.aml is generated as a result)
+ If parameter `-vw 6084` is not supported by your iASL compiler,
please try a newer version.
- f) mount debugfs by "mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug"
- g) override the old method via the debugfs by running
- "cat /tmp/psr.aml > /sys/kernel/debug/acpi/custom_method"
+ f) mount debugfs by running::
+
+ mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
+
+ g) override the old method via the debugfs by running::
+
+ cat /tmp/psr.aml > /sys/kernel/debug/acpi/custom_method
2. insert a new method
This is easier than overriding an existing method.
@@ -62,12 +74,14 @@ Note: To get the ACPI debug object output (Store (AAAA, Debug)),
and redo step c) ~ g) to override the method with the original one.
-Note: We can use a kernel with multiple custom ACPI method running,
+Note:
+ We can use a kernel with multiple custom ACPI method running,
But each individual write to debugfs can implement a SINGLE
method override. i.e. if we want to insert/override multiple
ACPI methods, we need to redo step c) ~ g) for multiple times.
-Note: Be aware that root can mis-use this driver to modify arbitrary
+Note:
+ Be aware that root can mis-use this driver to modify arbitrary
memory and gain additional rights, if root's privileges got
restricted (for example if root is not allowed to load additional
modules after boot).
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt b/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt
index 0aba14c8f459..779475fecefb 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/method-tracing.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,20 @@
+=====================
ACPICA Trace Facility
+=====================
Copyright (C) 2015, Intel Corporation
+
Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
Abstract:
+=========
This document describes the functions and the interfaces of the method
tracing facility.
1. Functionalities and usage examples:
+======================================
ACPICA provides method tracing capability. And two functions are
currently implemented using this capability.
@@ -31,30 +36,38 @@ tracing facility.
The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "log reducer"
functionality:
+
a. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when control methods
- are being evaluated:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "enable" > trace_state
+ are being evaluated::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "enable" > trace_state
+
b. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
- control method is being evaluated:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "method" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+ control method is being evaluated::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "method" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
c. Filter out the debug layer/level matched logs when the specified
- control method is being evaluated for the first time:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "method-once" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
- Where:
- 0xXXXXXXXX/0xYYYYYYYY: Refer to Documentation/acpi/debug.txt for
+ control method is being evaluated for the first time::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0xXXXXXXXX" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0xYYYYYYYY" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "method-once" > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
+ Where::
+
+ 0xXXXXXXXX/0xYYYYYYYY: Refer to Documentation/acpi/debug.txt for
possible debug layer/level masking values.
- \PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH: Full path of a control method that can be found
+ \PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH: Full path of a control method that can be found
in the ACPI namespace. It needn't be an entry
of a control method evaluation.
@@ -63,7 +76,8 @@ tracing facility.
There are special log entries added by the method tracing facility at
the "trace points" the AML interpreter starts/stops to execute a control
method, or an AML opcode. Note that the format of the log entries are
- subject to change:
+ subject to change::
+
[ 0.186427] exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point : Method Begin [0xf58394d8:\_SB.PCI0.LPCB.ECOK] execution.
[ 0.186630] exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point : Opcode Begin [0xf5905c88:If] execution.
[ 0.186820] exdebug-0398 ex_trace_point : Opcode Begin [0xf5905cc0:LEqual] execution.
@@ -87,43 +101,54 @@ tracing facility.
The following command examples illustrate the usage of the "AML tracer"
functionality:
+
a. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when control
- methods are being evaluated:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "enable" > trace_state
+ methods are being evaluated::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "enable" > trace_state
+
b. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" when the specified
- control method is being evaluated:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "method" > trace_state
+ control method is being evaluated::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "method" > trace_state
+
c. Filter out the method start/stop "AML tracer" logs when the specified
control method is being evaluated for the first time:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "method-once" > trace_state
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "method-once" > trace_state
+
d. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
- specified control method is being evaluated:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "opcode" > trace_state
+ specified control method is being evaluated::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "opcode" > trace_state
+
e. Filter out the method/opcode start/stop "AML tracer" when the
- specified control method is being evaluated for the first time:
- # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
- # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
- # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
- # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
- # echo "opcode-opcode" > trace_state
+ specified control method is being evaluated for the first time::
+
+ # cd /sys/module/acpi/parameters
+ # echo "0x80" > trace_debug_layer
+ # echo "0x10" > trace_debug_level
+ # echo "\PPPP.AAAA.TTTT.HHHH" > trace_method_name
+ # echo "opcode-opcode" > trace_state
Note that all above method tracing facility related module parameters can
- be used as the boot parameters, for example:
+ be used as the boot parameters, for example::
+
acpi.trace_debug_layer=0x80 acpi.trace_debug_level=0x10 \
acpi.trace_method_name=\_SB.LID0._LID acpi.trace_state=opcode-once
@@ -150,9 +175,12 @@ tracing facility.
trace_state
The status of the tracing feature.
Users can enable/disable this debug tracing feature by executing
- the following command:
+ the following command::
+
# echo string > /sys/module/acpi/parameters/trace_state
+
Where "string" should be one of the following:
+
"disable"
Disable the method tracing feature.
"enable"
@@ -180,8 +208,10 @@ tracing facility.
ACPICA debugging messages matching
"trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" during method/opcode
execution of "trace_method_name" will be logged only once.
+
Note that, the difference between the "enable" and other feature
enabling options are:
+
1. When "enable" is specified, since
"trace_debug_layer/trace_debug_level" shall apply to all control
method evaluations, after configuring "trace_state" to "enable",
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt b/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
index 1860cb3865c6..9a6dca683fbc 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/namespace.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+===================================================
ACPI Device Tree - Representation of ACPI Namespace
+===================================================
Copyright (C) 2013, Intel Corporation
+
Author: Lv Zheng <[email protected]>
Abstract:
+=========
The Linux ACPI subsystem converts ACPI namespace objects into a Linux
device tree under the /sys/devices/LNXSYSTEM:00 and updates it upon
@@ -15,12 +19,14 @@ This document illustrates the structure of the ACPI device tree.
Credit:
+=======
Thanks for the help from Zhang Rui <[email protected]> and Rafael J.
Wysocki <[email protected]>.
1. ACPI Definition Blocks
+=========================
The ACPI firmware sets up RSDP (Root System Description Pointer) in the
system memory address space pointing to the XSDT (Extended System
@@ -40,7 +46,7 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
structure of the underlying hardware platform.
The relationships between ACPI System Definition Tables described above
- are illustrated in the following diagram.
+ are illustrated in the following diagram::
+---------+ +-------+ +--------+ +------------------------+
| RSDP | +->| XSDT | +->| FADT | | +-------------------+ |
@@ -68,18 +74,21 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
Figure 1. ACPI Definition Blocks
- NOTE: RSDP can also contain a pointer to the RSDT (Root System
+ NOTE:
+ RSDP can also contain a pointer to the RSDT (Root System
Description Table). Platforms provide RSDT to enable
compatibility with ACPI 1.0 operating systems. The OS is expected
to use XSDT, if present.
2. Example ACPI Namespace
+=========================
All definition blocks are loaded into a single namespace. The namespace
is a hierarchy of objects identified by names and paths.
The following naming conventions apply to object names in the ACPI
namespace:
+
1. All names are 32 bits long.
2. The first byte of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '_'.
3. Each of the remaining bytes of a name must be one of 'A' - 'Z', '0'
@@ -91,100 +100,101 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
(i.e. names prepended with '^' are relative to the parent of the
current namespace node).
- The figure below shows an example ACPI namespace.
+ The figure below shows an example ACPI namespace::
- +------+
- | \ | Root
- +------+
- |
- | +------+
- +-| _PR | Scope(_PR): the processor namespace
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| CPU0 | Processor(CPU0): the first processor
- | +------+
- |
- | +------+
- +-| _SB | Scope(_SB): the system bus namespace
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| LID0 | Device(LID0); the lid device
- | | +------+
- | | |
- | | | +------+
- | | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0C0D"): the hardware ID
- | | | +------+
- | | |
- | | | +------+
- | | +-| _STA | Method(_STA): the status control method
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| PCI0 | Device(PCI0); the PCI root bridge
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0A08"): the hardware ID
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| _CID | Name(_CID, "PNP0A03"): the compatible ID
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| RP03 | Scope(RP03): the PCI0 power scope
- | | +------+
- | | |
- | | | +------+
- | | +-| PXP3 | PowerResource(PXP3): the PCI0 power resource
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| GFX0 | Device(GFX0): the graphics adapter
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| _ADR | Name(_ADR, 0x00020000): the PCI bus address
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| DD01 | Device(DD01): the LCD output device
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| _BCL | Method(_BCL): the backlight control method
- | +------+
- |
- | +------+
- +-| _TZ | Scope(_TZ): the thermal zone namespace
- | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| FN00 | PowerResource(FN00): the FAN0 power resource
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| FAN0 | Device(FAN0): the FAN0 cooling device
- | | +------+
- | | |
- | | | +------+
- | | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0A0B"): the hardware ID
- | | +------+
- | |
- | | +------+
- | +-| TZ00 | ThermalZone(TZ00); the FAN thermal zone
- | +------+
- |
- | +------+
- +-| _GPE | Scope(_GPE): the GPE namespace
- +------+
+ +------+
+ | \ | Root
+ +------+
+ |
+ | +------+
+ +-| _PR | Scope(_PR): the processor namespace
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| CPU0 | Processor(CPU0): the first processor
+ | +------+
+ |
+ | +------+
+ +-| _SB | Scope(_SB): the system bus namespace
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| LID0 | Device(LID0); the lid device
+ | | +------+
+ | | |
+ | | | +------+
+ | | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0C0D"): the hardware ID
+ | | | +------+
+ | | |
+ | | | +------+
+ | | +-| _STA | Method(_STA): the status control method
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| PCI0 | Device(PCI0); the PCI root bridge
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0A08"): the hardware ID
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| _CID | Name(_CID, "PNP0A03"): the compatible ID
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| RP03 | Scope(RP03): the PCI0 power scope
+ | | +------+
+ | | |
+ | | | +------+
+ | | +-| PXP3 | PowerResource(PXP3): the PCI0 power resource
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| GFX0 | Device(GFX0): the graphics adapter
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| _ADR | Name(_ADR, 0x00020000): the PCI bus address
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| DD01 | Device(DD01): the LCD output device
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| _BCL | Method(_BCL): the backlight control method
+ | +------+
+ |
+ | +------+
+ +-| _TZ | Scope(_TZ): the thermal zone namespace
+ | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| FN00 | PowerResource(FN00): the FAN0 power resource
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| FAN0 | Device(FAN0): the FAN0 cooling device
+ | | +------+
+ | | |
+ | | | +------+
+ | | +-| _HID | Name(_HID, "PNP0A0B"): the hardware ID
+ | | +------+
+ | |
+ | | +------+
+ | +-| TZ00 | ThermalZone(TZ00); the FAN thermal zone
+ | +------+
+ |
+ | +------+
+ +-| _GPE | Scope(_GPE): the GPE namespace
+ +------+
Figure 2. Example ACPI Namespace
3. Linux ACPI Device Objects
+============================
The Linux kernel's core ACPI subsystem creates struct acpi_device
objects for ACPI namespace objects representing devices, power resources
@@ -230,6 +240,7 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
the basis of the contents of ACPI System Description Tables (as
indicated by the letter in the first column and the notation in the
second column of the table above):
+
N:
The object's source is an ACPI namespace node (as indicated by the
named object's type in the second column). In that case the object's
@@ -256,6 +267,7 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
The forth column of the above table indicates the 'bus_id' generation
rule of the struct acpi_device object:
+
_HID:
_HID in the last column of the table means that the object's bus_id
is derived from the _HID/_CID identification objects present under
@@ -276,6 +288,7 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
4. Linux ACPI Physical Device Glue
+==================================
ACPI device (i.e. struct acpi_device) objects may be linked to other
objects in the Linux' device hierarchy that represent "physical" devices
@@ -310,79 +323,83 @@ Wysocki <[email protected]>.
5. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
+=================================
The sysfs hierarchy of struct acpi_device objects corresponding to the
example ACPI namespace illustrated in Figure 2 with the addition of
- fixed PWR_BUTTON/SLP_BUTTON devices is shown below.
+ fixed PWR_BUTTON/SLP_BUTTON devices is shown below::
- +--------------+---+-----------------+
- | LNXSYSTEM:00 | \ | acpi:LNXSYSTEM: |
- +--------------+---+-----------------+
- |
- | +-------------+-----+----------------+
- +-| LNXPWRBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXPWRBN: |
- | +-------------+-----+----------------+
- |
- | +-------------+-----+----------------+
- +-| LNXSLPBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXSLPBN: |
- | +-------------+-----+----------------+
- |
- | +-----------+------------+--------------+
- +-| LNXCPU:00 | \_PR_.CPU0 | acpi:LNXCPU: |
- | +-----------+------------+--------------+
- |
- | +-------------+-------+----------------+
- +-| LNXSYBUS:00 | \_SB_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
- | +-------------+-------+----------------+
- | |
- | | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
- | +-| PNP0C0D:00 | \_SB_.LID0 | acpi:PNP0C0D: |
- | | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
- | |
- | | +------------+------------+-----------------------+
- | +-| PNP0A08:00 | \_SB_.PCI0 | acpi:PNP0A08:PNP0A03: |
- | +------------+------------+-----------------------+
- | |
- | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
- | +-| device:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03 | N/A |
- | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
- | | |
- | | | +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
- | | +-| LNXPOWER:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03.PXP3 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
- | | +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
- | |
- | | +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
- | +-| LNXVIDEO:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.GFX0 | acpi:LNXVIDEO: |
- | +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
- | |
- | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
- | +-| device:01 | \_SB_.PCI0.DD01 | N/A |
- | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
- |
- | +-------------+-------+----------------+
- +-| LNXSYBUS:01 | \_TZ_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
- +-------------+-------+----------------+
- |
- | +-------------+------------+----------------+
- +-| LNXPOWER:0a | \_TZ_.FN00 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
- | +-------------+------------+----------------+
- |
- | +------------+------------+---------------+
- +-| PNP0C0B:00 | \_TZ_.FAN0 | acpi:PNP0C0B: |
- | +------------+------------+---------------+
- |
- | +-------------+------------+----------------+
- +-| LNXTHERM:00 | \_TZ_.TZ00 | acpi:LNXTHERM: |
- +-------------+------------+----------------+
+ +--------------+---+-----------------+
+ | LNXSYSTEM:00 | \ | acpi:LNXSYSTEM: |
+ +--------------+---+-----------------+
+ |
+ | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+ +-| LNXPWRBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXPWRBN: |
+ | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+ |
+ | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+ +-| LNXSLPBN:00 | N/A | acpi:LNXSLPBN: |
+ | +-------------+-----+----------------+
+ |
+ | +-----------+------------+--------------+
+ +-| LNXCPU:00 | \_PR_.CPU0 | acpi:LNXCPU: |
+ | +-----------+------------+--------------+
+ |
+ | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+ +-| LNXSYBUS:00 | \_SB_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
+ | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+ | |
+ | | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
+ | +-| PNP0C0D:00 | \_SB_.LID0 | acpi:PNP0C0D: |
+ | | +- - - - - - - +- - - - - - +- - - - - - - -+
+ | |
+ | | +------------+------------+-----------------------+
+ | +-| PNP0A08:00 | \_SB_.PCI0 | acpi:PNP0A08:PNP0A03: |
+ | +------------+------------+-----------------------+
+ | |
+ | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+ | +-| device:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03 | N/A |
+ | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+ | | |
+ | | | +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
+ | | +-| LNXPOWER:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.RP03.PXP3 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
+ | | +-------------+----------------------+----------------+
+ | |
+ | | +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
+ | +-| LNXVIDEO:00 | \_SB_.PCI0.GFX0 | acpi:LNXVIDEO: |
+ | +-------------+-----------------+----------------+
+ | |
+ | | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+ | +-| device:01 | \_SB_.PCI0.DD01 | N/A |
+ | +-----------+-----------------+-----+
+ |
+ | +-------------+-------+----------------+
+ +-| LNXSYBUS:01 | \_TZ_ | acpi:LNXSYBUS: |
+ +-------------+-------+----------------+
+ |
+ | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+ +-| LNXPOWER:0a | \_TZ_.FN00 | acpi:LNXPOWER: |
+ | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+ |
+ | +------------+------------+---------------+
+ +-| PNP0C0B:00 | \_TZ_.FAN0 | acpi:PNP0C0B: |
+ | +------------+------------+---------------+
+ |
+ | +-------------+------------+----------------+
+ +-| LNXTHERM:00 | \_TZ_.TZ00 | acpi:LNXTHERM: |
+ +-------------+------------+----------------+
Figure 3. Example Linux ACPI Device Tree
- NOTE: Each node is represented as "object/path/modalias", where:
+ NOTE:
+ Each node is represented as "object/path/modalias", where:
+
1. 'object' is the name of the object's directory in sysfs.
2. 'path' is the ACPI namespace path of the corresponding
ACPI namespace object, as returned by the object's 'path'
sysfs attribute.
3. 'modalias' is the value of the object's 'modalias' sysfs
attribute (as described earlier in this document).
- NOTE: N/A indicates the device object does not have the 'path' or the
- 'modalias' attribute.
+ NOTE:
+ N/A indicates the device object does not have the 'path' or the
+ 'modalias' attribute.
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt b/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt
index 50cde0ceb9b0..401518ca15cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/osi.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==========================
ACPI _OSI and _REV methods
---------------------------
+==========================
An ACPI BIOS can use the "Operating System Interfaces" method (_OSI)
to find out what the operating system supports. Eg. If BIOS
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt b/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
index 3246ccf15992..fa8265f272d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/scan_handlers.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+==================
ACPI Scan Handlers
+==================
Copyright (C) 2012, Intel Corporation
+
Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <[email protected]>
During system initialization and ACPI-based device hot-add, the ACPI namespace
@@ -30,14 +33,14 @@ to configure that link so that the kernel can use it.
Those additional configuration tasks usually depend on the type of the hardware
component represented by the given device node which can be determined on the
basis of the device node's hardware ID (HID). They are performed by objects
-called ACPI scan handlers represented by the following structure:
+called ACPI scan handlers represented by the following structure::
-struct acpi_scan_handler {
+ struct acpi_scan_handler {
const struct acpi_device_id *ids;
struct list_head list_node;
int (*attach)(struct acpi_device *dev, const struct acpi_device_id *id);
void (*detach)(struct acpi_device *dev);
-};
+ };
where ids is the list of IDs of device nodes the given handler is supposed to
take care of, list_node is the hook to the global list of ACPI scan handlers
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt b/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt
index 5ae13f161ea2..036ba3bb8613 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/ssdt-overlays.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+=============
+SSDT Overlays
+=============
In order to support ACPI open-ended hardware configurations (e.g. development
boards) we need a way to augment the ACPI configuration provided by the firmware
@@ -15,10 +18,10 @@ user defined SSDT tables that contain the board specific information.
For example, to enumerate a Bosch BMA222E accelerometer on the I2C bus of the
Minnowboard MAX development board exposed via the LSE connector [1], the
-following ASL code can be used:
+following ASL code can be used::
-DefinitionBlock ("minnowmax.aml", "SSDT", 1, "Vendor", "Accel", 0x00000003)
-{
+ DefinitionBlock ("minnowmax.aml", "SSDT", 1, "Vendor", "Accel", 0x00000003)
+ {
External (\_SB.I2C6, DeviceObj)
Scope (\_SB.I2C6)
@@ -45,25 +48,26 @@ DefinitionBlock ("minnowmax.aml", "SSDT", 1, "Vendor", "Accel", 0x00000003)
}
}
}
-}
+ }
-which can then be compiled to AML binary format:
+which can then be compiled to AML binary format::
-$ iasl minnowmax.asl
+ $ iasl minnowmax.asl
-Intel ACPI Component Architecture
-ASL Optimizing Compiler version 20140214-64 [Mar 29 2014]
-Copyright (c) 2000 - 2014 Intel Corporation
+ Intel ACPI Component Architecture
+ ASL Optimizing Compiler version 20140214-64 [Mar 29 2014]
+ Copyright (c) 2000 - 2014 Intel Corporation
-ASL Input: minnomax.asl - 30 lines, 614 bytes, 7 keywords
-AML Output: minnowmax.aml - 165 bytes, 6 named objects, 1 executable opcodes
+ ASL Input: minnomax.asl - 30 lines, 614 bytes, 7 keywords
+ AML Output: minnowmax.aml - 165 bytes, 6 named objects, 1 executable opcodes
[1] http://wiki.minnowboard.org/MinnowBoard_MAX#Low_Speed_Expansion_Connector_.28Top.29
The resulting AML code can then be loaded by the kernel using one of the methods
below.
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from initrd ==
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from initrd
+==============================
This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from initrd and it is useful
when the system does not support EFI or when there is not enough EFI storage.
@@ -74,23 +78,24 @@ aml code must be placed in the first, uncompressed, initrd under the
in loading multiple tables. Only SSDT and OEM tables are allowed. See
initrd_table_override.txt for more details.
-Here is an example:
+Here is an example::
-# Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
-# They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the
-# cpio archive.
-# The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first.
-# Other, typically compressed cpio archives, must be
-# concatenated on top of the uncompressed one.
-mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
-cp ssdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
+ # Add the raw ACPI tables to an uncompressed cpio archive.
+ # They must be put into a /kernel/firmware/acpi directory inside the
+ # cpio archive.
+ # The uncompressed cpio archive must be the first.
+ # Other, typically compressed cpio archives, must be
+ # concatenated on top of the uncompressed one.
+ mkdir -p kernel/firmware/acpi
+ cp ssdt.aml kernel/firmware/acpi
-# Create the uncompressed cpio archive and concatenate the original initrd
-# on top:
-find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
-cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
+ # Create the uncompressed cpio archive and concatenate the original initrd
+ # on top:
+ find kernel | cpio -H newc --create > /boot/instrumented_initrd
+ cat /boot/initrd >>/boot/instrumented_initrd
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from EFI variables ==
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from EFI variables
+=====================================
This is the preferred method, when EFI is supported on the platform, because it
allows a persistent, OS independent way of storing the user defined SSDTs. There
@@ -116,48 +121,49 @@ include/linux/efi.h). Writing to the file must also be done with one write
operation.
For example, you can use the following bash script to create/update an EFI
-variable with the content from a given file:
+variable with the content from a given file::
-#!/bin/sh -e
+ #!/bin/sh -e
-while ! [ -z "$1" ]; do
- case "$1" in
- "-f") filename="$2"; shift;;
- "-g") guid="$2"; shift;;
- *) name="$1";;
- esac
- shift
-done
+ while ! [ -z "$1" ]; do
+ case "$1" in
+ "-f") filename="$2"; shift;;
+ "-g") guid="$2"; shift;;
+ *) name="$1";;
+ esac
+ shift
+ done
-usage()
-{
- echo "Syntax: ${0##*/} -f filename [ -g guid ] name"
- exit 1
-}
+ usage()
+ {
+ echo "Syntax: ${0##*/} -f filename [ -g guid ] name"
+ exit 1
+ }
-[ -n "$name" -a -f "$filename" ] || usage
+ [ -n "$name" -a -f "$filename" ] || usage
-EFIVARFS="/sys/firmware/efi/efivars"
+ EFIVARFS="/sys/firmware/efi/efivars"
-[ -d "$EFIVARFS" ] || exit 2
+ [ -d "$EFIVARFS" ] || exit 2
-if stat -tf $EFIVARFS | grep -q -v de5e81e4; then
- mount -t efivarfs none $EFIVARFS
-fi
+ if stat -tf $EFIVARFS | grep -q -v de5e81e4; then
+ mount -t efivarfs none $EFIVARFS
+ fi
-# try to pick up an existing GUID
-[ -n "$guid" ] || guid=$(find "$EFIVARFS" -name "$name-*" | head -n1 | cut -f2- -d-)
+ # try to pick up an existing GUID
+ [ -n "$guid" ] || guid=$(find "$EFIVARFS" -name "$name-*" | head -n1 | cut -f2- -d-)
-# use a randomly generated GUID
-[ -n "$guid" ] || guid="$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/uuid)"
+ # use a randomly generated GUID
+ [ -n "$guid" ] || guid="$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/uuid)"
-# efivarfs expects all of the data in one write
-tmp=$(mktemp)
-/bin/echo -ne "\007\000\000\000" | cat - $filename > $tmp
-dd if=$tmp of="$EFIVARFS/$name-$guid" bs=$(stat -c %s $tmp)
-rm $tmp
+ # efivarfs expects all of the data in one write
+ tmp=$(mktemp)
+ /bin/echo -ne "\007\000\000\000" | cat - $filename > $tmp
+ dd if=$tmp of="$EFIVARFS/$name-$guid" bs=$(stat -c %s $tmp)
+ rm $tmp
-== Loading ACPI SSDTs from configfs ==
+Loading ACPI SSDTs from configfs
+================================
This option allows loading of user defined SSDTs from userspace via the configfs
interface. The CONFIG_ACPI_CONFIGFS option must be select and configfs must be
@@ -165,8 +171,8 @@ mounted. In the following examples, we assume that configfs has been mounted in
/config.
New tables can be loading by creating new directories in /config/acpi/table/ and
-writing the SSDT aml code in the aml attribute:
+writing the SSDT aml code in the aml attribute::
-cd /config/acpi/table
-mkdir my_ssdt
-cat ~/ssdt.aml > my_ssdt/aml
+ cd /config/acpi/table
+ mkdir my_ssdt
+ cat ~/ssdt.aml > my_ssdt/aml
diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt b/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
index 79bf6a4921be..7a5882a567b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
+++ b/Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=====================
ACPI video extensions
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=====================
This driver implement the ACPI Extensions For Display Adapters for
integrated graphics devices on motherboard, as specified in ACPI 2.0
@@ -32,10 +33,10 @@ type: firmware
Note that ACPI video backlight driver will always use index for
brightness, actual_brightness and max_brightness. So if we have
-the following _BCL package:
+the following _BCL package::
-Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
-{
+ Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
+ {
Return (Package (0x0C)
{
0x64,
@@ -51,7 +52,7 @@ Method (_BCL, 0, NotSerialized)
0x5A,
0x64
})
-}
+ }
The first two levels are for when laptop are on AC or on battery and are
not used by Linux currently. The remaining 10 levels are supported levels
@@ -65,10 +66,11 @@ inclusive.
2 Notify user space about hotkey event
There are generally two cases for hotkey event reporting:
+
i) For some laptops, when user presses the hotkey, a scancode will be
generated and sent to user space through the input device created by
the keyboard driver as a key type input event, with proper remap, the
- following key code will appear to user space:
+ following key code will appear to user space::
EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
EV_KEY, KEY_BRIGHTNESSDOWN
@@ -82,7 +84,7 @@ ii) For some laptops, the press of the hotkey will not generate the
about the event. The event value is defined in the ACPI spec. ACPI
video driver will generate an key type input event according to the
notify value it received and send the event to user space through the
- input device it created:
+ input device it created::
event keycode
0x86 KEY_BRIGHTNESSUP
--
2.20.1
Prepare this file to be moved to a kernel book by converting
it to ReST format.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt | 1 +
Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt | 25 ++++++++++++++----------
2 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
index cc9ce57e0a26..c434fcfc5e4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller):
GPMC is an unified memory controller dedicated to interfacing external
memory devices like
+
* Asynchronous SRAM like memories and application specific integrated
circuit devices.
* Asynchronous, synchronous, and page mode burst NOR flash devices
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
index f4ad9a7d0f4b..371f581bd276 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
@@ -1,20 +1,22 @@
-TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver:
+===============================
+TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver
+===============================
Author
-========
+======
Aneesh V <[email protected]>
Location
-============
+========
driver/memory/emif.c
Supported SoCs:
-===================
+===============
TI OMAP44xx
TI OMAP54xx
Menuconfig option:
-==========================
+==================
Device Drivers
Memory devices
Texas Instruments EMIF driver
@@ -29,10 +31,11 @@ functions of the driver includes re-configuring AC timing
parameters and other settings during frequency, voltage and
temperature changes
-Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h):
-=====================================================================
+Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h)
+===========================================================
DDR device details and other board dependent and SoC dependent
information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data)
+
- DDR device details: 'struct ddr_device_info'
- Device AC timings: 'struct lpddr2_timings' and 'struct lpddr2_min_tck'
- Custom configurations: customizable policy options through
@@ -40,17 +43,19 @@ information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data)
- IP revision
- PHY type
-Interface to the external world:
-================================
+Interface to the external world
+===============================
EMIF driver registers notifiers for voltage and frequency changes
affecting EMIF and takes appropriate actions when these are invoked.
+
- freq_pre_notify_handling()
- freq_post_notify_handling()
- volt_notify_handling()
Debugfs
-========
+=======
The driver creates two debugfs entries per device.
+
- regcache_dump : dump of register values calculated and saved for all
frequencies used so far.
- mr4 : last polled value of MR4 register in the LPDDR2 device. MR4
--
2.20.1
Instead of having a Latex document directly there, convert
it to ReST format, as this is the Kernel format for docs.
For now, let's keep the extension as .txt in order to avoid
warnings when building the documentation with Sphinx.
A later patch will rename it to .rst and add it to the
building system.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cdrom/Makefile | 21 -
Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex | 1026 -----------------------
Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt | 1063 ++++++++++++++++++++++++
drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c | 2 +-
4 files changed, 1064 insertions(+), 1048 deletions(-)
delete mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/Makefile
delete mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex
create mode 100644 Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/Makefile b/Documentation/cdrom/Makefile
deleted file mode 100644
index a19e321928e1..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/Makefile
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-LATEXFILE = cdrom-standard
-
-all:
- make clean
- latex $(LATEXFILE)
- latex $(LATEXFILE)
- @if [ -x `which gv` ]; then \
- `dvips -q -t letter -o $(LATEXFILE).ps $(LATEXFILE).dvi` ;\
- `gv -antialias -media letter -nocenter $(LATEXFILE).ps` ;\
- else \
- `xdvi $(LATEXFILE).dvi &` ;\
- fi
- make sortofclean
-
-clean:
- rm -f $(LATEXFILE).ps $(LATEXFILE).dvi $(LATEXFILE).aux $(LATEXFILE).log
-
-sortofclean:
- rm -f $(LATEXFILE).aux $(LATEXFILE).log
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex b/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index f7cd455973f7..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1026 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-\def\version{$Id: cdrom-standard.tex,v 1.9 1997/12/28 15:42:49 david Exp $}
-\newcommand{\newsection}[1]{\newpage\section{#1}}
-
-\evensidemargin=0pt
-\oddsidemargin=0pt
-\topmargin=-\headheight \advance\topmargin by -\headsep
-\textwidth=15.99cm \textheight=24.62cm % normal A4, 1'' margin
-
-\def\linux{{\sc Linux}}
-\def\cdrom{{\sc cd-rom}}
-\def\UCD{{\sc Uniform cd-rom Driver}}
-\def\cdromc{{\tt {cdrom.c}}}
-\def\cdromh{{\tt {cdrom.h}}}
-\def\fo{\sl} % foreign words
-\def\ie{{\fo i.e.}}
-\def\eg{{\fo e.g.}}
-
-\everymath{\it} \everydisplay{\it}
-\catcode `\_=\active \def_{\_\penalty100 }
-\catcode`\<=\active \def<#1>{{\langle\hbox{\rm#1}\rangle}}
-
-\begin{document}
-\title{A \linux\ \cdrom\ standard}
-\author{David van Leeuwen\\{\normalsize\tt [email protected]}
-\\{\footnotesize updated by Erik Andersen {\tt([email protected])}}
-\\{\footnotesize updated by Jens Axboe {\tt([email protected])}}}
-\date{12 March 1999}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\newsection{Introduction}
-
-\linux\ is probably the Unix-like operating system that supports
-the widest variety of hardware devices. The reasons for this are
-presumably
-\begin{itemize}
-\item
- The large list of hardware devices available for the many platforms
- that \linux\ now supports (\ie, i386-PCs, Sparc Suns, etc.)
-\item
- The open design of the operating system, such that anybody can write a
- driver for \linux.
-\item
- There is plenty of source code around as examples of how to write a driver.
-\end{itemize}
-The openness of \linux, and the many different types of available
-hardware has allowed \linux\ to support many different hardware devices.
-Unfortunately, the very openness that has allowed \linux\ to support
-all these different devices has also allowed the behavior of each
-device driver to differ significantly from one device to another.
-This divergence of behavior has been very significant for \cdrom\
-devices; the way a particular drive reacts to a `standard' $ioctl()$
-call varies greatly from one device driver to another. To avoid making
-their drivers totally inconsistent, the writers of \linux\ \cdrom\
-drivers generally created new device drivers by understanding, copying,
-and then changing an existing one. Unfortunately, this practice did not
-maintain uniform behavior across all the \linux\ \cdrom\ drivers.
-
-This document describes an effort to establish Uniform behavior across
-all the different \cdrom\ device drivers for \linux. This document also
-defines the various $ioctl$s, and how the low-level \cdrom\ device
-drivers should implement them. Currently (as of the \linux\ 2.1.$x$
-development kernels) several low-level \cdrom\ device drivers, including
-both IDE/ATAPI and SCSI, now use this Uniform interface.
-
-When the \cdrom\ was developed, the interface between the \cdrom\ drive
-and the computer was not specified in the standards. As a result, many
-different \cdrom\ interfaces were developed. Some of them had their
-own proprietary design (Sony, Mitsumi, Panasonic, Philips), other
-manufacturers adopted an existing electrical interface and changed
-the functionality (CreativeLabs/SoundBlaster, Teac, Funai) or simply
-adapted their drives to one or more of the already existing electrical
-interfaces (Aztech, Sanyo, Funai, Vertos, Longshine, Optics Storage and
-most of the `NoName' manufacturers). In cases where a new drive really
-brought its own interface or used its own command set and flow control
-scheme, either a separate driver had to be written, or an existing
-driver had to be enhanced. History has delivered us \cdrom\ support for
-many of these different interfaces. Nowadays, almost all new \cdrom\
-drives are either IDE/ATAPI or SCSI, and it is very unlikely that any
-manufacturer will create a new interface. Even finding drives for the
-old proprietary interfaces is getting difficult.
-
-When (in the 1.3.70's) I looked at the existing software interface,
-which was expressed through \cdromh, it appeared to be a rather wild
-set of commands and data formats.\footnote{I cannot recollect what
-kernel version I looked at, then, presumably 1.2.13 and 1.3.34---the
-latest kernel that I was indirectly involved in.} It seemed that many
-features of the software interface had been added to accommodate the
-capabilities of a particular drive, in an {\fo ad hoc\/} manner. More
-importantly, it appeared that the behavior of the `standard' commands
-was different for most of the different drivers: \eg, some drivers
-close the tray if an $open()$ call occurs when the tray is open, while
-others do not. Some drivers lock the door upon opening the device, to
-prevent an incoherent file system, but others don't, to allow software
-ejection. Undoubtedly, the capabilities of the different drives vary,
-but even when two drives have the same capability their drivers'
-behavior was usually different.
-
-I decided to start a discussion on how to make all the \linux\ \cdrom\
-drivers behave more uniformly. I began by contacting the developers of
-the many \cdrom\ drivers found in the \linux\ kernel. Their reactions
-encouraged me to write the \UCD\ which this document is intended to
-describe. The implementation of the \UCD\ is in the file \cdromc. This
-driver is intended to be an additional software layer that sits on top
-of the low-level device drivers for each \cdrom\ drive. By adding this
-additional layer, it is possible to have all the different \cdrom\
-devices behave {\em exactly\/} the same (insofar as the underlying
-hardware will allow).
-
-The goal of the \UCD\ is {\em not\/} to alienate driver developers who
-have not yet taken steps to support this effort. The goal of \UCD\ is
-simply to give people writing application programs for \cdrom\ drives
-{\em one\/} \linux\ \cdrom\ interface with consistent behavior for all
-\cdrom\ devices. In addition, this also provides a consistent interface
-between the low-level device driver code and the \linux\ kernel. Care
-is taken that 100\,\% compatibility exists with the data structures and
-programmer's interface defined in \cdromh. This guide was written to
-help \cdrom\ driver developers adapt their code to use the \UCD\ code
-defined in \cdromc.
-
-Personally, I think that the most important hardware interfaces are
-the IDE/ATAPI drives and, of course, the SCSI drives, but as prices
-of hardware drop continuously, it is also likely that people may have
-more than one \cdrom\ drive, possibly of mixed types. It is important
-that these drives behave in the same way. In December 1994, one of the
-cheapest \cdrom\ drives was a Philips cm206, a double-speed proprietary
-drive. In the months that I was busy writing a \linux\ driver for it,
-proprietary drives became obsolete and IDE/ATAPI drives became the
-standard. At the time of the last update to this document (November
-1997) it is becoming difficult to even {\em find} anything less than a
-16 speed \cdrom\ drive, and 24 speed drives are common.
-
-\newsection{Standardizing through another software level}
-\label{cdrom.c}
-
-At the time this document was conceived, all drivers directly
-implemented the \cdrom\ $ioctl()$ calls through their own routines. This
-led to the danger of different drivers forgetting to do important things
-like checking that the user was giving the driver valid data. More
-importantly, this led to the divergence of behavior, which has already
-been discussed.
-
-For this reason, the \UCD\ was created to enforce consistent \cdrom\
-drive behavior, and to provide a common set of services to the various
-low-level \cdrom\ device drivers. The \UCD\ now provides another
-software-level, that separates the $ioctl()$ and $open()$ implementation
-from the actual hardware implementation. Note that this effort has
-made few changes which will affect a user's application programs. The
-greatest change involved moving the contents of the various low-level
-\cdrom\ drivers' header files to the kernel's cdrom directory. This was
-done to help ensure that the user is only presented with only one cdrom
-interface, the interface defined in \cdromh.
-
-\cdrom\ drives are specific enough (\ie, different from other
-block-devices such as floppy or hard disc drives), to define a set
-of common {\em \cdrom\ device operations}, $<cdrom-device>_dops$.
-These operations are different from the classical block-device file
-operations, $<block-device>_fops$.
-
-The routines for the \UCD\ interface level are implemented in the file
-\cdromc. In this file, the \UCD\ interfaces with the kernel as a block
-device by registering the following general $struct\ file_operations$:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-struct& file_operations\ cdrom_fops = \{\hidewidth\cr
- &NULL, & lseek \cr
- &block_read, & read---general block-dev read \cr
- &block_write, & write---general block-dev write \cr
- &NULL, & readdir \cr
- &NULL, & select \cr
- &cdrom_ioctl, & ioctl \cr
- &NULL, & mmap \cr
- &cdrom_open, & open \cr
- &cdrom_release, & release \cr
- &NULL, & fsync \cr
- &NULL, & fasync \cr
- &cdrom_media_changed, & media change \cr
- &NULL & revalidate \cr
-\};\cr
-}
-$$
-
-Every active \cdrom\ device shares this $struct$. The routines
-declared above are all implemented in \cdromc, since this file is the
-place where the behavior of all \cdrom-devices is defined and
-standardized. The actual interface to the various types of \cdrom\
-hardware is still performed by various low-level \cdrom-device
-drivers. These routines simply implement certain {\em capabilities\/}
-that are common to all \cdrom\ (and really, all removable-media
-devices).
-
-Registration of a low-level \cdrom\ device driver is now done through
-the general routines in \cdromc, not through the Virtual File System
-(VFS) any more. The interface implemented in \cdromc\ is carried out
-through two general structures that contain information about the
-capabilities of the driver, and the specific drives on which the
-driver operates. The structures are:
-\begin{description}
-\item[$cdrom_device_ops$]
- This structure contains information about the low-level driver for a
- \cdrom\ device. This structure is conceptually connected to the major
- number of the device (although some drivers may have different
- major numbers, as is the case for the IDE driver).
-\item[$cdrom_device_info$]
- This structure contains information about a particular \cdrom\ drive,
- such as its device name, speed, etc. This structure is conceptually
- connected to the minor number of the device.
-\end{description}
-
-Registering a particular \cdrom\ drive with the \UCD\ is done by the
-low-level device driver though a call to:
-$$register_cdrom(struct\ cdrom_device_info * <device>_info)
-$$
-The device information structure, $<device>_info$, contains all the
-information needed for the kernel to interface with the low-level
-\cdrom\ device driver. One of the most important entries in this
-structure is a pointer to the $cdrom_device_ops$ structure of the
-low-level driver.
-
-The device operations structure, $cdrom_device_ops$, contains a list
-of pointers to the functions which are implemented in the low-level
-device driver. When \cdromc\ accesses a \cdrom\ device, it does it
-through the functions in this structure. It is impossible to know all
-the capabilities of future \cdrom\ drives, so it is expected that this
-list may need to be expanded from time to time as new technologies are
-developed. For example, CD-R and CD-R/W drives are beginning to become
-popular, and support will soon need to be added for them. For now, the
-current $struct$ is:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$#$\ \hfil&\hbox to 10em{$#$\hss}&
- $/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-struct& cdrom_device_ops\ \{ \hidewidth\cr
- &int& (* open)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int)\cr
- &void& (* release)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *);\cr
- &int& (* drive_status)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &unsigned\ int& (* check_events)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, unsigned\ int, int);\cr
- &int& (* media_changed)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &int& (* tray_move)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &int& (* lock_door)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &int& (* select_speed)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &int& (* select_disc)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, int);\cr
- &int& (* get_last_session) (struct\ cdrom_device_info *,
- struct\ cdrom_multisession *{});\cr
- &int& (* get_mcn)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, struct\ cdrom_mcn *{});\cr
- &int& (* reset)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *);\cr
- &int& (* audio_ioctl)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, unsigned\ int,
- void *{});\cr
-\noalign{\medskip}
- &const\ int& capability;& capability flags \cr
- &int& (* generic_packet)(struct\ cdrom_device_info *, struct\ packet_command *{});\cr
-\};\cr
-}
-$$
-When a low-level device driver implements one of these capabilities,
-it should add a function pointer to this $struct$. When a particular
-function is not implemented, however, this $struct$ should contain a
-NULL instead. The $capability$ flags specify the capabilities of the
-\cdrom\ hardware and/or low-level \cdrom\ driver when a \cdrom\ drive
-is registered with the \UCD.
-
-Note that most functions have fewer parameters than their
-$blkdev_fops$ counterparts. This is because very little of the
-information in the structures $inode$ and $file$ is used. For most
-drivers, the main parameter is the $struct$ $cdrom_device_info$, from
-which the major and minor number can be extracted. (Most low-level
-\cdrom\ drivers don't even look at the major and minor number though,
-since many of them only support one device.) This will be available
-through $dev$ in $cdrom_device_info$ described below.
-
-The drive-specific, minor-like information that is registered with
-\cdromc, currently contains the following fields:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$#$\ \hfil&\hbox to 10em{$#$\hss}&
- $/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-struct& cdrom_device_info\ \{ \hidewidth\cr
- & const\ struct\ cdrom_device_ops *& ops;& device operations for this major\cr
- & struct\ list_head& list;& linked list of all device_info\cr
- & struct\ gendisk *& disk;& matching block layer disk\cr
- & void *& handle;& driver-dependent data\cr
-\noalign{\medskip}
- & int& mask;& mask of capability: disables them \cr
- & int& speed;& maximum speed for reading data \cr
- & int& capacity;& number of discs in a jukebox \cr
-\noalign{\medskip}
- &unsigned\ int& options : 30;& options flags \cr
- &unsigned& mc_flags : 2;& media-change buffer flags \cr
- &unsigned\ int& vfs_events;& cached events for vfs path\cr
- &unsigned\ int& ioctl_events;& cached events for ioctl path\cr
- & int& use_count;& number of times device is opened\cr
- & char& name[20];& name of the device type\cr
-\noalign{\medskip}
- &__u8& sanyo_slot : 2;& Sanyo 3-CD changer support\cr
- &__u8& keeplocked : 1;& CDROM_LOCKDOOR status\cr
- &__u8& reserved : 5;& not used yet\cr
- & int& cdda_method;& see CDDA_* flags\cr
- &__u8& last_sense;& saves last sense key\cr
- &__u8& media_written;& dirty flag, DVD+RW bookkeeping\cr
- &unsigned\ short& mmc3_profile;& current MMC3 profile\cr
- & int& for_data;& unknown:TBD\cr
- & int\ (* exit)\ (struct\ cdrom_device_info *);&& unknown:TBD\cr
- & int& mrw_mode_page;& which MRW mode page is in use\cr
-\}\cr
-}$$
-Using this $struct$, a linked list of the registered minor devices is
-built, using the $next$ field. The device number, the device operations
-struct and specifications of properties of the drive are stored in this
-structure.
-
-The $mask$ flags can be used to mask out some of the capabilities listed
-in $ops\to capability$, if a specific drive doesn't support a feature
-of the driver. The value $speed$ specifies the maximum head-rate of the
-drive, measured in units of normal audio speed (176\,kB/sec raw data or
-150\,kB/sec file system data). The parameters are declared $const$
-because they describe properties of the drive, which don't change after
-registration.
-
-A few registers contain variables local to the \cdrom\ drive. The
-flags $options$ are used to specify how the general \cdrom\ routines
-should behave. These various flags registers should provide enough
-flexibility to adapt to the different users' wishes (and {\em not\/} the
-`arbitrary' wishes of the author of the low-level device driver, as is
-the case in the old scheme). The register $mc_flags$ is used to buffer
-the information from $media_changed()$ to two separate queues. Other
-data that is specific to a minor drive, can be accessed through $handle$,
-which can point to a data structure specific to the low-level driver.
-The fields $use_count$, $next$, $options$ and $mc_flags$ need not be
-initialized.
-
-The intermediate software layer that \cdromc\ forms will perform some
-additional bookkeeping. The use count of the device (the number of
-processes that have the device opened) is registered in $use_count$. The
-function $cdrom_ioctl()$ will verify the appropriate user-memory regions
-for read and write, and in case a location on the CD is transferred,
-it will `sanitize' the format by making requests to the low-level
-drivers in a standard format, and translating all formats between the
-user-software and low level drivers. This relieves much of the drivers'
-memory checking and format checking and translation. Also, the necessary
-structures will be declared on the program stack.
-
-The implementation of the functions should be as defined in the
-following sections. Two functions {\em must\/} be implemented, namely
-$open()$ and $release()$. Other functions may be omitted, their
-corresponding capability flags will be cleared upon registration.
-Generally, a function returns zero on success and negative on error. A
-function call should return only after the command has completed, but of
-course waiting for the device should not use processor time.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ open(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ purpose)$}
-
-$Open()$ should try to open the device for a specific $purpose$, which
-can be either:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[0] Open for reading data, as done by {\tt {mount()}} (2), or the
-user commands {\tt {dd}} or {\tt {cat}}.
-\item[1] Open for $ioctl$ commands, as done by audio-CD playing
-programs.
-\end{itemize}
-Notice that any strategic code (closing tray upon $open()$, etc.)\ is
-done by the calling routine in \cdromc, so the low-level routine
-should only be concerned with proper initialization, such as spinning
-up the disc, etc. % and device-use count
-
-
-\subsection{$Void\ release(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi)$}
-
-
-Device-specific actions should be taken such as spinning down the device.
-However, strategic actions such as ejection of the tray, or unlocking
-the door, should be left over to the general routine $cdrom_release()$.
-This is the only function returning type $void$.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ drive_status(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ slot_nr)$}
-\label{drive status}
-
-The function $drive_status$, if implemented, should provide
-information on the status of the drive (not the status of the disc,
-which may or may not be in the drive). If the drive is not a changer,
-$slot_nr$ should be ignored. In \cdromh\ the possibilities are listed:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-CDS_NO_INFO& no information available\cr
-CDS_NO_DISC& no disc is inserted, tray is closed\cr
-CDS_TRAY_OPEN& tray is opened\cr
-CDS_DRIVE_NOT_READY& something is wrong, tray is moving?\cr
-CDS_DISC_OK& a disc is loaded and everything is fine\cr
-}
-$$
-
-\subsection{$Int\ media_changed(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ disc_nr)$}
-
-This function is very similar to the original function in $struct\
-file_operations$. It returns 1 if the medium of the device $cdi\to
-dev$ has changed since the last call, and 0 otherwise. The parameter
-$disc_nr$ identifies a specific slot in a juke-box, it should be
-ignored for single-disc drives. Note that by `re-routing' this
-function through $cdrom_media_changed()$, we can implement separate
-queues for the VFS and a new $ioctl()$ function that can report device
-changes to software (\eg, an auto-mounting daemon).
-
-\subsection{$Int\ tray_move(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ position)$}
-
-This function, if implemented, should control the tray movement. (No
-other function should control this.) The parameter $position$ controls
-the desired direction of movement:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[0] Close tray
-\item[1] Open tray
-\end{itemize}
-This function returns 0 upon success, and a non-zero value upon
-error. Note that if the tray is already in the desired position, no
-action need be taken, and the return value should be 0.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ lock_door(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ lock)$}
-
-This function (and no other code) controls locking of the door, if the
-drive allows this. The value of $lock$ controls the desired locking
-state:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item[0] Unlock door, manual opening is allowed
-\item[1] Lock door, tray cannot be ejected manually
-\end{itemize}
-This function returns 0 upon success, and a non-zero value upon
-error. Note that if the door is already in the requested state, no
-action need be taken, and the return value should be 0.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ select_speed(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ speed)$}
-
-Some \cdrom\ drives are capable of changing their head-speed. There
-are several reasons for changing the speed of a \cdrom\ drive. Badly
-pressed \cdrom s may benefit from less-than-maximum head rate. Modern
-\cdrom\ drives can obtain very high head rates (up to $24\times$ is
-common). It has been reported that these drives can make reading
-errors at these high speeds, reducing the speed can prevent data loss
-in these circumstances. Finally, some of these drives can
-make an annoyingly loud noise, which a lower speed may reduce. %Finally,
-%although the audio-low-pass filters probably aren't designed for it,
-%more than real-time playback of audio might be used for high-speed
-%copying of audio tracks.
-
-This function specifies the speed at which data is read or audio is
-played back. The value of $speed$ specifies the head-speed of the
-drive, measured in units of standard cdrom speed (176\,kB/sec raw data
-or 150\,kB/sec file system data). So to request that a \cdrom\ drive
-operate at 300\,kB/sec you would call the CDROM_SELECT_SPEED $ioctl$
-with $speed=2$. The special value `0' means `auto-selection', \ie,
-maximum data-rate or real-time audio rate. If the drive doesn't have
-this `auto-selection' capability, the decision should be made on the
-current disc loaded and the return value should be positive. A negative
-return value indicates an error.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ select_disc(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, int\ number)$}
-
-If the drive can store multiple discs (a juke-box) this function
-will perform disc selection. It should return the number of the
-selected disc on success, a negative value on error. Currently, only
-the ide-cd driver supports this functionality.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ get_last_session(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, struct\
- cdrom_multisession * ms_info)$}
-
-This function should implement the old corresponding $ioctl()$. For
-device $cdi\to dev$, the start of the last session of the current disc
-should be returned in the pointer argument $ms_info$. Note that
-routines in \cdromc\ have sanitized this argument: its requested
-format will {\em always\/} be of the type $CDROM_LBA$ (linear block
-addressing mode), whatever the calling software requested. But
-sanitization goes even further: the low-level implementation may
-return the requested information in $CDROM_MSF$ format if it wishes so
-(setting the $ms_info\rightarrow addr_format$ field appropriately, of
-course) and the routines in \cdromc\ will make the transformation if
-necessary. The return value is 0 upon success.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ get_mcn(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, struct\
- cdrom_mcn * mcn)$}
-
-Some discs carry a `Media Catalog Number' (MCN), also called
-`Universal Product Code' (UPC). This number should reflect the number
-that is generally found in the bar-code on the product. Unfortunately,
-the few discs that carry such a number on the disc don't even use the
-same format. The return argument to this function is a pointer to a
-pre-declared memory region of type $struct\ cdrom_mcn$. The MCN is
-expected as a 13-character string, terminated by a null-character.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ reset(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi)$}
-
-This call should perform a hard-reset on the drive (although in
-circumstances that a hard-reset is necessary, a drive may very well not
-listen to commands anymore). Preferably, control is returned to the
-caller only after the drive has finished resetting. If the drive is no
-longer listening, it may be wise for the underlying low-level cdrom
-driver to time out.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ audio_ioctl(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, unsigned\
- int\ cmd, void * arg)$}
-
-Some of the \cdrom-$ioctl$s defined in \cdromh\ can be
-implemented by the routines described above, and hence the function
-$cdrom_ioctl$ will use those. However, most $ioctl$s deal with
-audio-control. We have decided to leave these to be accessed through a
-single function, repeating the arguments $cmd$ and $arg$. Note that
-the latter is of type $void*{}$, rather than $unsigned\ long\
-int$. The routine $cdrom_ioctl()$ does do some useful things,
-though. It sanitizes the address format type to $CDROM_MSF$ (Minutes,
-Seconds, Frames) for all audio calls. It also verifies the memory
-location of $arg$, and reserves stack-memory for the argument. This
-makes implementation of the $audio_ioctl()$ much simpler than in the
-old driver scheme. For example, you may look up the function
-$cm206_audio_ioctl()$ in {\tt {cm206.c}} that should be updated with
-this documentation.
-
-An unimplemented ioctl should return $-ENOSYS$, but a harmless request
-(\eg, $CDROMSTART$) may be ignored by returning 0 (success). Other
-errors should be according to the standards, whatever they are. When
-an error is returned by the low-level driver, the \UCD\ tries whenever
-possible to return the error code to the calling program. (We may decide
-to sanitize the return value in $cdrom_ioctl()$ though, in order to
-guarantee a uniform interface to the audio-player software.)
-
-\subsection{$Int\ dev_ioctl(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi, unsigned\ int\
- cmd, unsigned\ long\ arg)$}
-
-Some $ioctl$s seem to be specific to certain \cdrom\ drives. That is,
-they are introduced to service some capabilities of certain drives. In
-fact, there are 6 different $ioctl$s for reading data, either in some
-particular kind of format, or audio data. Not many drives support
-reading audio tracks as data, I believe this is because of protection
-of copyrights of artists. Moreover, I think that if audio-tracks are
-supported, it should be done through the VFS and not via $ioctl$s. A
-problem here could be the fact that audio-frames are 2352 bytes long,
-so either the audio-file-system should ask for 75264 bytes at once
-(the least common multiple of 512 and 2352), or the drivers should
-bend their backs to cope with this incoherence (to which I would be
-opposed). Furthermore, it is very difficult for the hardware to find
-the exact frame boundaries, since there are no synchronization headers
-in audio frames. Once these issues are resolved, this code should be
-standardized in \cdromc.
-
-Because there are so many $ioctl$s that seem to be introduced to
-satisfy certain drivers,\footnote{Is there software around that
- actually uses these? I'd be interested!} any `non-standard' $ioctl$s
-are routed through the call $dev_ioctl()$. In principle, `private'
-$ioctl$s should be numbered after the device's major number, and not
-the general \cdrom\ $ioctl$ number, {\tt {0x53}}. Currently the
-non-supported $ioctl$s are: {\it CDROMREADMODE1, CDROMREADMODE2,
- CDROMREADAUDIO, CDROMREADRAW, CDROMREADCOOKED, CDROMSEEK,
- CDROMPLAY\-BLK and CDROM\-READALL}.
-
-
-\subsection{\cdrom\ capabilities}
-\label{capability}
-
-Instead of just implementing some $ioctl$ calls, the interface in
-\cdromc\ supplies the possibility to indicate the {\em capabilities\/}
-of a \cdrom\ drive. This can be done by ORing any number of
-capability-constants that are defined in \cdromh\ at the registration
-phase. Currently, the capabilities are any of:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-CDC_CLOSE_TRAY& can close tray by software control\cr
-CDC_OPEN_TRAY& can open tray\cr
-CDC_LOCK& can lock and unlock the door\cr
-CDC_SELECT_SPEED& can select speed, in units of $\sim$150\,kB/s\cr
-CDC_SELECT_DISC& drive is juke-box\cr
-CDC_MULTI_SESSION& can read sessions $>\rm1$\cr
-CDC_MCN& can read Media Catalog Number\cr
-CDC_MEDIA_CHANGED& can report if disc has changed\cr
-CDC_PLAY_AUDIO& can perform audio-functions (play, pause, etc)\cr
-CDC_RESET& hard reset device\cr
-CDC_IOCTLS& driver has non-standard ioctls\cr
-CDC_DRIVE_STATUS& driver implements drive status\cr
-}
-$$
-The capability flag is declared $const$, to prevent drivers from
-accidentally tampering with the contents. The capability fags actually
-inform \cdromc\ of what the driver can do. If the drive found
-by the driver does not have the capability, is can be masked out by
-the $cdrom_device_info$ variable $mask$. For instance, the SCSI \cdrom\
-driver has implemented the code for loading and ejecting \cdrom's, and
-hence its corresponding flags in $capability$ will be set. But a SCSI
-\cdrom\ drive might be a caddy system, which can't load the tray, and
-hence for this drive the $cdrom_device_info$ struct will have set
-the $CDC_CLOSE_TRAY$ bit in $mask$.
-
-In the file \cdromc\ you will encounter many constructions of the type
-$$\it
-if\ (cdo\rightarrow capability \mathrel\& \mathord{\sim} cdi\rightarrow mask
- \mathrel{\&} CDC_<capability>) \ldots
-$$
-There is no $ioctl$ to set the mask\dots The reason is that
-I think it is better to control the {\em behavior\/} rather than the
-{\em capabilities}.
-
-\subsection{Options}
-
-A final flag register controls the {\em behavior\/} of the \cdrom\
-drives, in order to satisfy different users' wishes, hopefully
-independently of the ideas of the respective author who happened to
-have made the drive's support available to the \linux\ community. The
-current behavior options are:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-CDO_AUTO_CLOSE& try to close tray upon device $open()$\cr
-CDO_AUTO_EJECT& try to open tray on last device $close()$\cr
-CDO_USE_FFLAGS& use $file_pointer\rightarrow f_flags$ to indicate
- purpose for $open()$\cr
-CDO_LOCK& try to lock door if device is opened\cr
-CDO_CHECK_TYPE& ensure disc type is data if opened for data\cr
-}
-$$
-
-The initial value of this register is $CDO_AUTO_CLOSE \mathrel|
-CDO_USE_FFLAGS \mathrel| CDO_LOCK$, reflecting my own view on user
-interface and software standards. Before you protest, there are two
-new $ioctl$s implemented in \cdromc, that allow you to control the
-behavior by software. These are:
-$$
-\halign{$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
-CDROM_SET_OPTIONS& set options specified in $(int)\ arg$\cr
-CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS& clear options specified in $(int)\ arg$\cr
-}
-$$
-One option needs some more explanation: $CDO_USE_FFLAGS$. In the next
-newsection we explain what the need for this option is.
-
-A software package {\tt setcd}, available from the Debian distribution
-and {\tt sunsite.unc.edu}, allows user level control of these flags.
-
-\newsection{The need to know the purpose of opening the \cdrom\ device}
-
-Traditionally, Unix devices can be used in two different `modes',
-either by reading/writing to the device file, or by issuing
-controlling commands to the device, by the device's $ioctl()$
-call. The problem with \cdrom\ drives, is that they can be used for
-two entirely different purposes. One is to mount removable
-file systems, \cdrom s, the other is to play audio CD's. Audio commands
-are implemented entirely through $ioctl$s, presumably because the
-first implementation (SUN?) has been such. In principle there is
-nothing wrong with this, but a good control of the `CD player' demands
-that the device can {\em always\/} be opened in order to give the
-$ioctl$ commands, regardless of the state the drive is in.
-
-On the other hand, when used as a removable-media disc drive (what the
-original purpose of \cdrom s is) we would like to make sure that the
-disc drive is ready for operation upon opening the device. In the old
-scheme, some \cdrom\ drivers don't do any integrity checking, resulting
-in a number of i/o errors reported by the VFS to the kernel when an
-attempt for mounting a \cdrom\ on an empty drive occurs. This is not a
-particularly elegant way to find out that there is no \cdrom\ inserted;
-it more-or-less looks like the old IBM-PC trying to read an empty floppy
-drive for a couple of seconds, after which the system complains it
-can't read from it. Nowadays we can {\em sense\/} the existence of a
-removable medium in a drive, and we believe we should exploit that
-fact. An integrity check on opening of the device, that verifies the
-availability of a \cdrom\ and its correct type (data), would be
-desirable.
-
-These two ways of using a \cdrom\ drive, principally for data and
-secondarily for playing audio discs, have different demands for the
-behavior of the $open()$ call. Audio use simply wants to open the
-device in order to get a file handle which is needed for issuing
-$ioctl$ commands, while data use wants to open for correct and
-reliable data transfer. The only way user programs can indicate what
-their {\em purpose\/} of opening the device is, is through the $flags$
-parameter (see {\tt {open(2)}}). For \cdrom\ devices, these flags aren't
-implemented (some drivers implement checking for write-related flags,
-but this is not strictly necessary if the device file has correct
-permission flags). Most option flags simply don't make sense to
-\cdrom\ devices: $O_CREAT$, $O_NOCTTY$, $O_TRUNC$, $O_APPEND$, and
-$O_SYNC$ have no meaning to a \cdrom.
-
-We therefore propose to use the flag $O_NONBLOCK$ to indicate
-that the device is opened just for issuing $ioctl$
-commands. Strictly, the meaning of $O_NONBLOCK$ is that opening and
-subsequent calls to the device don't cause the calling process to
-wait. We could interpret this as ``don't wait until someone has
-inserted some valid data-\cdrom.'' Thus, our proposal of the
-implementation for the $open()$ call for \cdrom s is:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item If no other flags are set than $O_RDONLY$, the device is opened
-for data transfer, and the return value will be 0 only upon successful
-initialization of the transfer. The call may even induce some actions
-on the \cdrom, such as closing the tray.
-\item If the option flag $O_NONBLOCK$ is set, opening will always be
-successful, unless the whole device doesn't exist. The drive will take
-no actions whatsoever.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\subsection{And what about standards?}
-
-You might hesitate to accept this proposal as it comes from the
-\linux\ community, and not from some standardizing institute. What
-about SUN, SGI, HP and all those other Unix and hardware vendors?
-Well, these companies are in the lucky position that they generally
-control both the hardware and software of their supported products,
-and are large enough to set their own standard. They do not have to
-deal with a dozen or more different, competing hardware
-configurations.\footnote{Incidentally, I think that SUN's approach to
-mounting \cdrom s is very good in origin: under Solaris a
-volume-daemon automatically mounts a newly inserted \cdrom\ under {\tt
-{/cdrom/$<volume-name>$/}}. In my opinion they should have pushed this
-further and have {\em every\/} \cdrom\ on the local area network be
-mounted at the similar location, \ie, no matter in which particular
-machine you insert a \cdrom, it will always appear at the same
-position in the directory tree, on every system. When I wanted to
-implement such a user-program for \linux, I came across the
-differences in behavior of the various drivers, and the need for an
-$ioctl$ informing about media changes.}
-
-We believe that using $O_NONBLOCK$ to indicate that a device is being opened
-for $ioctl$ commands only can be easily introduced in the \linux\
-community. All the CD-player authors will have to be informed, we can
-even send in our own patches to the programs. The use of $O_NONBLOCK$
-has most likely no influence on the behavior of the CD-players on
-other operating systems than \linux. Finally, a user can always revert
-to old behavior by a call to $ioctl(file_descriptor, CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS,
-CDO_USE_FFLAGS)$.
-
-\subsection{The preferred strategy of $open()$}
-
-The routines in \cdromc\ are designed in such a way that run-time
-configuration of the behavior of \cdrom\ devices (of {\em any\/} type)
-can be carried out, by the $CDROM_SET/CLEAR_OPTIONS$ $ioctls$. Thus, various
-modes of operation can be set:
-\begin{description}
-\item[$CDO_AUTO_CLOSE \mathrel| CDO_USE_FFLAGS \mathrel| CDO_LOCK$] This
-is the default setting. (With $CDO_CHECK_TYPE$ it will be better, in the
-future.) If the device is not yet opened by any other process, and if
-the device is being opened for data ($O_NONBLOCK$ is not set) and the
-tray is found to be open, an attempt to close the tray is made. Then,
-it is verified that a disc is in the drive and, if $CDO_CHECK_TYPE$ is
-set, that it contains tracks of type `data mode 1.' Only if all tests
-are passed is the return value zero. The door is locked to prevent file
-system corruption. If the drive is opened for audio ($O_NONBLOCK$ is
-set), no actions are taken and a value of 0 will be returned.
-\item[$CDO_AUTO_CLOSE \mathrel| CDO_AUTO_EJECT \mathrel| CDO_LOCK$] This
-mimics the behavior of the current sbpcd-driver. The option flags are
-ignored, the tray is closed on the first open, if necessary. Similarly,
-the tray is opened on the last release, \ie, if a \cdrom\ is unmounted,
-it is automatically ejected, such that the user can replace it.
-\end{description}
-We hope that these option can convince everybody (both driver
-maintainers and user program developers) to adopt the new \cdrom\
-driver scheme and option flag interpretation.
-
-\newsection{Description of routines in \cdromc}
-
-Only a few routines in \cdromc\ are exported to the drivers. In this
-new section we will discuss these, as well as the functions that `take
-over' the \cdrom\ interface to the kernel. The header file belonging
-to \cdromc\ is called \cdromh. Formerly, some of the contents of this
-file were placed in the file {\tt {ucdrom.h}}, but this file has now been
-merged back into \cdromh.
-
-\subsection{$Struct\ file_operations\ cdrom_fops$}
-
-The contents of this structure were described in section~\ref{cdrom.c}.
-A pointer to this structure is assigned to the $fops$ field
-of the $struct gendisk$.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ register_cdrom( struct\ cdrom_device_info\ * cdi)$}
-
-This function is used in about the same way one registers $cdrom_fops$
-with the kernel, the device operations and information structures,
-as described in section~\ref{cdrom.c}, should be registered with the
-\UCD:
-$$
-register_cdrom(\&<device>_info));
-$$
-This function returns zero upon success, and non-zero upon
-failure. The structure $<device>_info$ should have a pointer to the
-driver's $<device>_dops$, as in
-$$
-\vbox{\halign{&$#$\hfil\cr
-struct\ &cdrom_device_info\ <device>_info = \{\cr
-& <device>_dops;\cr
-&\ldots\cr
-\}\cr
-}}$$
-Note that a driver must have one static structure, $<device>_dops$, while
-it may have as many structures $<device>_info$ as there are minor devices
-active. $Register_cdrom()$ builds a linked list from these.
-
-\subsection{$Void\ unregister_cdrom(struct\ cdrom_device_info * cdi)$}
-
-Unregistering device $cdi$ with minor number $MINOR(cdi\to dev)$ removes
-the minor device from the list. If it was the last registered minor for
-the low-level driver, this disconnects the registered device-operation
-routines from the \cdrom\ interface. This function returns zero upon
-success, and non-zero upon failure.
-
-\subsection{$Int\ cdrom_open(struct\ inode * ip, struct\ file * fp)$}
-
-This function is not called directly by the low-level drivers, it is
-listed in the standard $cdrom_fops$. If the VFS opens a file, this
-function becomes active. A strategy is implemented in this routine,
-taking care of all capabilities and options that are set in the
-$cdrom_device_ops$ connected to the device. Then, the program flow is
-transferred to the device_dependent $open()$ call.
-
-\subsection{$Void\ cdrom_release(struct\ inode *ip, struct\ file
-*fp)$}
-
-This function implements the reverse-logic of $cdrom_open()$, and then
-calls the device-dependent $release()$ routine. When the use-count has
-reached 0, the allocated buffers are flushed by calls to $sync_dev(dev)$
-and $invalidate_buffers(dev)$.
-
-
-\subsection{$Int\ cdrom_ioctl(struct\ inode *ip, struct\ file *fp,
-unsigned\ int\ cmd, unsigned\ long\ arg)$}
-\label{cdrom-ioctl}
-
-This function handles all the standard $ioctl$ requests for \cdrom\
-devices in a uniform way. The different calls fall into three
-categories: $ioctl$s that can be directly implemented by device
-operations, ones that are routed through the call $audio_ioctl()$, and
-the remaining ones, that are presumable device-dependent. Generally, a
-negative return value indicates an error.
-
-\subsubsection{Directly implemented $ioctl$s}
-\label{ioctl-direct}
-
-The following `old' \cdrom-$ioctl$s are implemented by directly
-calling device-operations in $cdrom_device_ops$, if implemented and
-not masked:
-\begin{description}
-\item[CDROMMULTISESSION] Requests the last session on a \cdrom.
-\item[CDROMEJECT] Open tray.
-\item[CDROMCLOSETRAY] Close tray.
-\item[CDROMEJECT_SW] If $arg\not=0$, set behavior to auto-close (close
-tray on first open) and auto-eject (eject on last release), otherwise
-set behavior to non-moving on $open()$ and $release()$ calls.
-\item[CDROM_GET_MCN] Get the Media Catalog Number from a CD.
-\end{description}
-
-\subsubsection{$Ioctl$s routed through $audio_ioctl()$}
-\label{ioctl-audio}
-
-The following set of $ioctl$s are all implemented through a call to
-the $cdrom_fops$ function $audio_ioctl()$. Memory checks and
-allocation are performed in $cdrom_ioctl()$, and also sanitization of
-address format ($CDROM_LBA$/$CDROM_MSF$) is done.
-\begin{description}
-\item[CDROMSUBCHNL] Get sub-channel data in argument $arg$ of type $struct\
-cdrom_subchnl *{}$.
-\item[CDROMREADTOCHDR] Read Table of Contents header, in $arg$ of type
-$struct\ cdrom_tochdr *{}$.
-\item[CDROMREADTOCENTRY] Read a Table of Contents entry in $arg$ and
-specified by $arg$ of type $struct\ cdrom_tocentry *{}$.
-\item[CDROMPLAYMSF] Play audio fragment specified in Minute, Second,
-Frame format, delimited by $arg$ of type $struct\ cdrom_msf *{}$.
-\item[CDROMPLAYTRKIND] Play audio fragment in track-index format
-delimited by $arg$ of type $struct\ \penalty-1000 cdrom_ti *{}$.
-\item[CDROMVOLCTRL] Set volume specified by $arg$ of type $struct\
-cdrom_volctrl *{}$.
-\item[CDROMVOLREAD] Read volume into by $arg$ of type $struct\
-cdrom_volctrl *{}$.
-\item[CDROMSTART] Spin up disc.
-\item[CDROMSTOP] Stop playback of audio fragment.
-\item[CDROMPAUSE] Pause playback of audio fragment.
-\item[CDROMRESUME] Resume playing.
-\end{description}
-
-\subsubsection{New $ioctl$s in \cdromc}
-
-The following $ioctl$s have been introduced to allow user programs to
-control the behavior of individual \cdrom\ devices. New $ioctl$
-commands can be identified by the underscores in their names.
-\begin{description}
-\item[CDROM_SET_OPTIONS] Set options specified by $arg$. Returns the
-option flag register after modification. Use $arg = \rm0$ for reading
-the current flags.
-\item[CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS] Clear options specified by $arg$. Returns
- the option flag register after modification.
-\item[CDROM_SELECT_SPEED] Select head-rate speed of disc specified as
- by $arg$ in units of standard cdrom speed (176\,kB/sec raw data or
- 150\,kB/sec file system data). The value 0 means `auto-select', \ie,
- play audio discs at real time and data discs at maximum speed. The value
- $arg$ is checked against the maximum head rate of the drive found in the
- $cdrom_dops$.
-\item[CDROM_SELECT_DISC] Select disc numbered $arg$ from a juke-box.
- First disc is numbered 0. The number $arg$ is checked against the
- maximum number of discs in the juke-box found in the $cdrom_dops$.
-\item[CDROM_MEDIA_CHANGED] Returns 1 if a disc has been changed since
- the last call. Note that calls to $cdrom_media_changed$ by the VFS
- are treated by an independent queue, so both mechanisms will detect
- a media change once. For juke-boxes, an extra argument $arg$
- specifies the slot for which the information is given. The special
- value $CDSL_CURRENT$ requests that information about the currently
- selected slot be returned.
-\item[CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS] Returns the status of the drive by a call to
- $drive_status()$. Return values are defined in section~\ref{drive
- status}. Note that this call doesn't return information on the
- current playing activity of the drive; this can be polled through an
- $ioctl$ call to $CDROMSUBCHNL$. For juke-boxes, an extra argument
- $arg$ specifies the slot for which (possibly limited) information is
- given. The special value $CDSL_CURRENT$ requests that information
- about the currently selected slot be returned.
-\item[CDROM_DISC_STATUS] Returns the type of the disc currently in the
- drive. It should be viewed as a complement to $CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS$.
- This $ioctl$ can provide \emph {some} information about the current
- disc that is inserted in the drive. This functionality used to be
- implemented in the low level drivers, but is now carried out
- entirely in \UCD.
-
- The history of development of the CD's use as a carrier medium for
- various digital information has lead to many different disc types.
- This $ioctl$ is useful only in the case that CDs have \emph {only
- one} type of data on them. While this is often the case, it is
- also very common for CDs to have some tracks with data, and some
- tracks with audio. Because this is an existing interface, rather
- than fixing this interface by changing the assumptions it was made
- under, thereby breaking all user applications that use this
- function, the \UCD\ implements this $ioctl$ as follows: If the CD in
- question has audio tracks on it, and it has absolutely no CD-I, XA,
- or data tracks on it, it will be reported as $CDS_AUDIO$. If it has
- both audio and data tracks, it will return $CDS_MIXED$. If there
- are no audio tracks on the disc, and if the CD in question has any
- CD-I tracks on it, it will be reported as $CDS_XA_2_2$. Failing
- that, if the CD in question has any XA tracks on it, it will be
- reported as $CDS_XA_2_1$. Finally, if the CD in question has any
- data tracks on it, it will be reported as a data CD ($CDS_DATA_1$).
-
- This $ioctl$ can return:
- $$
- \halign{$#$\ \hfil&$/*$ \rm# $*/$\hfil\cr
- CDS_NO_INFO& no information available\cr
- CDS_NO_DISC& no disc is inserted, or tray is opened\cr
- CDS_AUDIO& Audio disc (2352 audio bytes/frame)\cr
- CDS_DATA_1& data disc, mode 1 (2048 user bytes/frame)\cr
- CDS_XA_2_1& mixed data (XA), mode 2, form 1 (2048 user bytes)\cr
- CDS_XA_2_2& mixed data (XA), mode 2, form 1 (2324 user bytes)\cr
- CDS_MIXED& mixed audio/data disc\cr
- }
- $$
- For some information concerning frame layout of the various disc
- types, see a recent version of \cdromh.
-
-\item[CDROM_CHANGER_NSLOTS] Returns the number of slots in a
- juke-box.
-\item[CDROMRESET] Reset the drive.
-\item[CDROM_GET_CAPABILITY] Returns the $capability$ flags for the
- drive. Refer to section \ref{capability} for more information on
- these flags.
-\item[CDROM_LOCKDOOR] Locks the door of the drive. $arg == \rm0$
- unlocks the door, any other value locks it.
-\item[CDROM_DEBUG] Turns on debugging info. Only root is allowed
- to do this. Same semantics as CDROM_LOCKDOOR.
-\end{description}
-
-\subsubsection{Device dependent $ioctl$s}
-
-Finally, all other $ioctl$s are passed to the function $dev_ioctl()$,
-if implemented. No memory allocation or verification is carried out.
-
-\newsection{How to update your driver}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Make a backup of your current driver.
-\item Get hold of the files \cdromc\ and \cdromh, they should be in
- the directory tree that came with this documentation.
-\item Make sure you include \cdromh.
-\item Change the 3rd argument of $register_blkdev$ from
-$\&<your-drive>_fops$ to $\&cdrom_fops$.
-\item Just after that line, add the following to register with the \UCD:
- $$register_cdrom(\&<your-drive>_info);$$
- Similarly, add a call to $unregister_cdrom()$ at the appropriate place.
-\item Copy an example of the device-operations $struct$ to your
- source, \eg, from {\tt {cm206.c}} $cm206_dops$, and change all
- entries to names corresponding to your driver, or names you just
- happen to like. If your driver doesn't support a certain function,
- make the entry $NULL$. At the entry $capability$ you should list all
- capabilities your driver currently supports. If your driver
- has a capability that is not listed, please send me a message.
-\item Copy the $cdrom_device_info$ declaration from the same example
- driver, and modify the entries according to your needs. If your
- driver dynamically determines the capabilities of the hardware, this
- structure should also be declared dynamically.
-\item Implement all functions in your $<device>_dops$ structure,
- according to prototypes listed in \cdromh, and specifications given
- in section~\ref{cdrom.c}. Most likely you have already implemented
- the code in a large part, and you will almost certainly need to adapt the
- prototype and return values.
-\item Rename your $<device>_ioctl()$ function to $audio_ioctl$ and
- change the prototype a little. Remove entries listed in the first
- part in section~\ref{cdrom-ioctl}, if your code was OK, these are
- just calls to the routines you adapted in the previous step.
-\item You may remove all remaining memory checking code in the
- $audio_ioctl()$ function that deals with audio commands (these are
- listed in the second part of section~\ref{cdrom-ioctl}). There is no
- need for memory allocation either, so most $case$s in the $switch$
- statement look similar to:
- $$
- case\ CDROMREADTOCENTRY\colon get_toc_entry\bigl((struct\
- cdrom_tocentry *{})\ arg\bigr);
- $$
-\item All remaining $ioctl$ cases must be moved to a separate
- function, $<device>_ioctl$, the device-dependent $ioctl$s. Note that
- memory checking and allocation must be kept in this code!
-\item Change the prototypes of $<device>_open()$ and
- $<device>_release()$, and remove any strategic code (\ie, tray
- movement, door locking, etc.).
-\item Try to recompile the drivers. We advise you to use modules, both
- for {\tt {cdrom.o}} and your driver, as debugging is much easier this
- way.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\newsection{Thanks}
-
-Thanks to all the people involved. First, Erik Andersen, who has
-taken over the torch in maintaining \cdromc\ and integrating much
-\cdrom-related code in the 2.1-kernel. Thanks to Scott Snyder and
-Gerd Knorr, who were the first to implement this interface for SCSI
-and IDE-CD drivers and added many ideas for extension of the data
-structures relative to kernel~2.0. Further thanks to Heiko Ei{\ss}feldt,
-Thomas Quinot, Jon Tombs, Ken Pizzini, Eberhard M\"onkeberg and Andrew
-Kroll, the \linux\ \cdrom\ device driver developers who were kind
-enough to give suggestions and criticisms during the writing. Finally
-of course, I want to thank Linus Torvalds for making this possible in
-the first place.
-
-\vfill
-$ \version\ $
-\eject
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt b/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dde4f7f7fdbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,1063 @@
+=======================
+A Linux CD-ROM standard
+=======================
+
+:Author: David van Leeuwen <[email protected]>
+:Date: 12 March 1999
+:Updated by: Erik Andersen ([email protected])
+:Updated by: Jens Axboe ([email protected])
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+Linux is probably the Unix-like operating system that supports
+the widest variety of hardware devices. The reasons for this are
+presumably
+
+- The large list of hardware devices available for the many platforms
+ that Linux now supports (i.e., i386-PCs, Sparc Suns, etc.)
+- The open design of the operating system, such that anybody can write a
+ driver for Linux.
+- There is plenty of source code around as examples of how to write a driver.
+
+The openness of Linux, and the many different types of available
+hardware has allowed Linux to support many different hardware devices.
+Unfortunately, the very openness that has allowed Linux to support
+all these different devices has also allowed the behavior of each
+device driver to differ significantly from one device to another.
+This divergence of behavior has been very significant for CD-ROM
+devices; the way a particular drive reacts to a `standard` *ioctl()*
+call varies greatly from one device driver to another. To avoid making
+their drivers totally inconsistent, the writers of Linux CD-ROM
+drivers generally created new device drivers by understanding, copying,
+and then changing an existing one. Unfortunately, this practice did not
+maintain uniform behavior across all the Linux CD-ROM drivers.
+
+This document describes an effort to establish Uniform behavior across
+all the different CD-ROM device drivers for Linux. This document also
+defines the various *ioctl()'s*, and how the low-level CD-ROM device
+drivers should implement them. Currently (as of the Linux 2.1.\ *x*
+development kernels) several low-level CD-ROM device drivers, including
+both IDE/ATAPI and SCSI, now use this Uniform interface.
+
+When the CD-ROM was developed, the interface between the CD-ROM drive
+and the computer was not specified in the standards. As a result, many
+different CD-ROM interfaces were developed. Some of them had their
+own proprietary design (Sony, Mitsumi, Panasonic, Philips), other
+manufacturers adopted an existing electrical interface and changed
+the functionality (CreativeLabs/SoundBlaster, Teac, Funai) or simply
+adapted their drives to one or more of the already existing electrical
+interfaces (Aztech, Sanyo, Funai, Vertos, Longshine, Optics Storage and
+most of the `NoName` manufacturers). In cases where a new drive really
+brought its own interface or used its own command set and flow control
+scheme, either a separate driver had to be written, or an existing
+driver had to be enhanced. History has delivered us CD-ROM support for
+many of these different interfaces. Nowadays, almost all new CD-ROM
+drives are either IDE/ATAPI or SCSI, and it is very unlikely that any
+manufacturer will create a new interface. Even finding drives for the
+old proprietary interfaces is getting difficult.
+
+When (in the 1.3.70's) I looked at the existing software interface,
+which was expressed through `cdrom.h`, it appeared to be a rather wild
+set of commands and data formats [#f1]_. It seemed that many
+features of the software interface had been added to accommodate the
+capabilities of a particular drive, in an *ad hoc* manner. More
+importantly, it appeared that the behavior of the `standard` commands
+was different for most of the different drivers: e. g., some drivers
+close the tray if an *open()* call occurs when the tray is open, while
+others do not. Some drivers lock the door upon opening the device, to
+prevent an incoherent file system, but others don't, to allow software
+ejection. Undoubtedly, the capabilities of the different drives vary,
+but even when two drives have the same capability their drivers'
+behavior was usually different.
+
+.. [#f1]
+ I cannot recollect what kernel version I looked at, then,
+ presumably 1.2.13 and 1.3.34 --- the latest kernel that I was
+ indirectly involved in.
+
+I decided to start a discussion on how to make all the Linux CD-ROM
+drivers behave more uniformly. I began by contacting the developers of
+the many CD-ROM drivers found in the Linux kernel. Their reactions
+encouraged me to write the Uniform CD-ROM Driver which this document is
+intended to describe. The implementation of the Uniform CD-ROM Driver is
+in the file `cdrom.c`. This driver is intended to be an additional software
+layer that sits on top of the low-level device drivers for each CD-ROM drive.
+By adding this additional layer, it is possible to have all the different
+CD-ROM devices behave **exactly** the same (insofar as the underlying
+hardware will allow).
+
+The goal of the Uniform CD-ROM Driver is **not** to alienate driver developers
+whohave not yet taken steps to support this effort. The goal of Uniform CD-ROM
+Driver is simply to give people writing application programs for CD-ROM drives
+**one** Linux CD-ROM interface with consistent behavior for all
+CD-ROM devices. In addition, this also provides a consistent interface
+between the low-level device driver code and the Linux kernel. Care
+is taken that 100% compatibility exists with the data structures and
+programmer's interface defined in `cdrom.h`. This guide was written to
+help CD-ROM driver developers adapt their code to use the Uniform CD-ROM
+Driver code defined in `cdrom.c`.
+
+Personally, I think that the most important hardware interfaces are
+the IDE/ATAPI drives and, of course, the SCSI drives, but as prices
+of hardware drop continuously, it is also likely that people may have
+more than one CD-ROM drive, possibly of mixed types. It is important
+that these drives behave in the same way. In December 1994, one of the
+cheapest CD-ROM drives was a Philips cm206, a double-speed proprietary
+drive. In the months that I was busy writing a Linux driver for it,
+proprietary drives became obsolete and IDE/ATAPI drives became the
+standard. At the time of the last update to this document (November
+1997) it is becoming difficult to even **find** anything less than a
+16 speed CD-ROM drive, and 24 speed drives are common.
+
+.. _cdrom_api:
+
+Standardizing through another software level
+============================================
+
+At the time this document was conceived, all drivers directly
+implemented the CD-ROM *ioctl()* calls through their own routines. This
+led to the danger of different drivers forgetting to do important things
+like checking that the user was giving the driver valid data. More
+importantly, this led to the divergence of behavior, which has already
+been discussed.
+
+For this reason, the Uniform CD-ROM Driver was created to enforce consistent
+CD-ROM drive behavior, and to provide a common set of services to the various
+low-level CD-ROM device drivers. The Uniform CD-ROM Driver now provides another
+software-level, that separates the *ioctl()* and *open()* implementation
+from the actual hardware implementation. Note that this effort has
+made few changes which will affect a user's application programs. The
+greatest change involved moving the contents of the various low-level
+CD-ROM drivers\' header files to the kernel's cdrom directory. This was
+done to help ensure that the user is only presented with only one cdrom
+interface, the interface defined in `cdrom.h`.
+
+CD-ROM drives are specific enough (i. e., different from other
+block-devices such as floppy or hard disc drives), to define a set
+of common **CD-ROM device operations**, *<cdrom-device>_dops*.
+These operations are different from the classical block-device file
+operations, *<block-device>_fops*.
+
+The routines for the Uniform CD-ROM Driver interface level are implemented
+in the file `cdrom.c`. In this file, the Uniform CD-ROM Driver interfaces
+with the kernel as a block device by registering the following general
+*struct file_operations*::
+
+ struct file_operations cdrom_fops = {
+ NULL, /∗ lseek ∗/
+ block _read , /∗ read—general block-dev read ∗/
+ block _write, /∗ write—general block-dev write ∗/
+ NULL, /∗ readdir ∗/
+ NULL, /∗ select ∗/
+ cdrom_ioctl, /∗ ioctl ∗/
+ NULL, /∗ mmap ∗/
+ cdrom_open, /∗ open ∗/
+ cdrom_release, /∗ release ∗/
+ NULL, /∗ fsync ∗/
+ NULL, /∗ fasync ∗/
+ cdrom_media_changed, /∗ media change ∗/
+ NULL /∗ revalidate ∗/
+ };
+
+Every active CD-ROM device shares this *struct*. The routines
+declared above are all implemented in `cdrom.c`, since this file is the
+place where the behavior of all CD-ROM-devices is defined and
+standardized. The actual interface to the various types of CD-ROM
+hardware is still performed by various low-level CD-ROM-device
+drivers. These routines simply implement certain **capabilities**
+that are common to all CD-ROM (and really, all removable-media
+devices).
+
+Registration of a low-level CD-ROM device driver is now done through
+the general routines in `cdrom.c`, not through the Virtual File System
+(VFS) any more. The interface implemented in `cdrom.c` is carried out
+through two general structures that contain information about the
+capabilities of the driver, and the specific drives on which the
+driver operates. The structures are:
+
+cdrom_device_ops
+ This structure contains information about the low-level driver for a
+ CD-ROM device. This structure is conceptually connected to the major
+ number of the device (although some drivers may have different
+ major numbers, as is the case for the IDE driver).
+
+cdrom_device_info
+ This structure contains information about a particular CD-ROM drive,
+ such as its device name, speed, etc. This structure is conceptually
+ connected to the minor number of the device.
+
+Registering a particular CD-ROM drive with the Uniform CD-ROM Driver
+is done by the low-level device driver though a call to::
+
+ register_cdrom(struct cdrom_device_info * <device>_info)
+
+The device information structure, *<device>_info*, contains all the
+information needed for the kernel to interface with the low-level
+CD-ROM device driver. One of the most important entries in this
+structure is a pointer to the *cdrom_device_ops* structure of the
+low-level driver.
+
+The device operations structure, *cdrom_device_ops*, contains a list
+of pointers to the functions which are implemented in the low-level
+device driver. When `cdrom.c` accesses a CD-ROM device, it does it
+through the functions in this structure. It is impossible to know all
+the capabilities of future CD-ROM drives, so it is expected that this
+list may need to be expanded from time to time as new technologies are
+developed. For example, CD-R and CD-R/W drives are beginning to become
+popular, and support will soon need to be added for them. For now, the
+current *struct* is::
+
+ struct cdrom_device_ops {
+ int (*open)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int)
+ void (*release)(struct cdrom_device_info *);
+ int (*drive_status)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ unsigned int (*check_events)(struct cdrom_device_info *,
+ unsigned int, int);
+ int (*media_changed)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ int (*tray_move)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ int (*lock_door)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ int (*select_speed)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ int (*select_disc)(struct cdrom_device_info *, int);
+ int (*get_last_session) (struct cdrom_device_info *,
+ struct cdrom_multisession *);
+ int (*get_mcn)(struct cdrom_device_info *, struct cdrom_mcn *);
+ int (*reset)(struct cdrom_device_info *);
+ int (*audio_ioctl)(struct cdrom_device_info *,
+ unsigned int, void *);
+ const int capability; /* capability flags */
+ int (*generic_packet)(struct cdrom_device_info *,
+ struct packet_command *);
+ };
+
+When a low-level device driver implements one of these capabilities,
+it should add a function pointer to this *struct*. When a particular
+function is not implemented, however, this *struct* should contain a
+NULL instead. The *capability* flags specify the capabilities of the
+CD-ROM hardware and/or low-level CD-ROM driver when a CD-ROM drive
+is registered with the Uniform CD-ROM Driver.
+
+Note that most functions have fewer parameters than their
+*blkdev_fops* counterparts. This is because very little of the
+information in the structures *inode* and *file* is used. For most
+drivers, the main parameter is the *struct* *cdrom_device_info*, from
+which the major and minor number can be extracted. (Most low-level
+CD-ROM drivers don't even look at the major and minor number though,
+since many of them only support one device.) This will be available
+through *dev* in *cdrom_device_info* described below.
+
+The drive-specific, minor-like information that is registered with
+`cdrom.c`, currently contains the following fields::
+
+ struct cdrom_device_info {
+ const struct cdrom_device_ops * ops; /* device operations for this major */
+ struct list_head list; /* linked list of all device_info */
+ struct gendisk * disk; /* matching block layer disk */
+ void * handle; /* driver-dependent data */
+
+ int mask; /* mask of capability: disables them */
+ int speed; /* maximum speed for reading data */
+ int capacity; /* number of discs in a jukebox */
+
+ unsigned int options:30; /* options flags */
+ unsigned mc_flags:2; /* media-change buffer flags */
+ unsigned int vfs_events; /* cached events for vfs path */
+ unsigned int ioctl_events; /* cached events for ioctl path */
+ int use_count; /* number of times device is opened */
+ char name[20]; /* name of the device type */
+
+ __u8 sanyo_slot : 2; /* Sanyo 3-CD changer support */
+ __u8 keeplocked : 1; /* CDROM_LOCKDOOR status */
+ __u8 reserved : 5; /* not used yet */
+ int cdda_method; /* see CDDA_* flags */
+ __u8 last_sense; /* saves last sense key */
+ __u8 media_written; /* dirty flag, DVD+RW bookkeeping */
+ unsigned short mmc3_profile; /* current MMC3 profile */
+ int for_data; /* unknown:TBD */
+ int (*exit)(struct cdrom_device_info *);/* unknown:TBD */
+ int mrw_mode_page; /* which MRW mode page is in use */
+ };
+
+Using this *struct*, a linked list of the registered minor devices is
+built, using the *next* field. The device number, the device operations
+struct and specifications of properties of the drive are stored in this
+structure.
+
+The *mask* flags can be used to mask out some of the capabilities listed
+in *ops->capability*, if a specific drive doesn't support a feature
+of the driver. The value *speed* specifies the maximum head-rate of the
+drive, measured in units of normal audio speed (176kB/sec raw data or
+150kB/sec file system data). The parameters are declared *const*
+because they describe properties of the drive, which don't change after
+registration.
+
+A few registers contain variables local to the CD-ROM drive. The
+flags *options* are used to specify how the general CD-ROM routines
+should behave. These various flags registers should provide enough
+flexibility to adapt to the different users' wishes (and **not** the
+`arbitrary` wishes of the author of the low-level device driver, as is
+the case in the old scheme). The register *mc_flags* is used to buffer
+the information from *media_changed()* to two separate queues. Other
+data that is specific to a minor drive, can be accessed through *handle*,
+which can point to a data structure specific to the low-level driver.
+The fields *use_count*, *next*, *options* and *mc_flags* need not be
+initialized.
+
+The intermediate software layer that `cdrom.c` forms will perform some
+additional bookkeeping. The use count of the device (the number of
+processes that have the device opened) is registered in *use_count*. The
+function *cdrom_ioctl()* will verify the appropriate user-memory regions
+for read and write, and in case a location on the CD is transferred,
+it will `sanitize` the format by making requests to the low-level
+drivers in a standard format, and translating all formats between the
+user-software and low level drivers. This relieves much of the drivers'
+memory checking and format checking and translation. Also, the necessary
+structures will be declared on the program stack.
+
+The implementation of the functions should be as defined in the
+following sections. Two functions **must** be implemented, namely
+*open()* and *release()*. Other functions may be omitted, their
+corresponding capability flags will be cleared upon registration.
+Generally, a function returns zero on success and negative on error. A
+function call should return only after the command has completed, but of
+course waiting for the device should not use processor time.
+
+::
+
+ int open(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int purpose)
+
+*Open()* should try to open the device for a specific *purpose*, which
+can be either:
+
+- Open for reading data, as done by `mount()` (2), or the
+ user commands `dd` or `cat`.
+- Open for *ioctl* commands, as done by audio-CD playing programs.
+
+Notice that any strategic code (closing tray upon *open()*, etc.) is
+done by the calling routine in `cdrom.c`, so the low-level routine
+should only be concerned with proper initialization, such as spinning
+up the disc, etc.
+
+::
+
+ void release(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi)
+
+Device-specific actions should be taken such as spinning down the device.
+However, strategic actions such as ejection of the tray, or unlocking
+the door, should be left over to the general routine *cdrom_release()*.
+This is the only function returning type *void*.
+
+.. _cdrom_drive_status:
+
+::
+
+ int drive_status(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int slot_nr)
+
+The function *drive_status*, if implemented, should provide
+information on the status of the drive (not the status of the disc,
+which may or may not be in the drive). If the drive is not a changer,
+*slot_nr* should be ignored. In `cdrom.h` the possibilities are listed::
+
+
+ CDS_NO_INFO /* no information available */
+ CDS_NO_DISC /* no disc is inserted, tray is closed */
+ CDS_TRAY_OPEN /* tray is opened */
+ CDS_DRIVE_NOT_READY /* something is wrong, tray is moving? */
+ CDS_DISC_OK /* a disc is loaded and everything is fine */
+
+::
+
+ int media_changed(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int disc_nr)
+
+This function is very similar to the original function in $struct
+file_operations*. It returns 1 if the medium of the device *cdi->dev*
+has changed since the last call, and 0 otherwise. The parameter
+*disc_nr* identifies a specific slot in a juke-box, it should be
+ignored for single-disc drives. Note that by `re-routing` this
+function through *cdrom_media_changed()*, we can implement separate
+queues for the VFS and a new *ioctl()* function that can report device
+changes to software (e. g., an auto-mounting daemon).
+
+::
+
+ int tray_move(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int position)
+
+This function, if implemented, should control the tray movement. (No
+other function should control this.) The parameter *position* controls
+the desired direction of movement:
+
+- 0 Close tray
+- 1 Open tray
+
+This function returns 0 upon success, and a non-zero value upon
+error. Note that if the tray is already in the desired position, no
+action need be taken, and the return value should be 0.
+
+::
+
+ int lock_door(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int lock)
+
+This function (and no other code) controls locking of the door, if the
+drive allows this. The value of *lock* controls the desired locking
+state:
+
+- 0 Unlock door, manual opening is allowed
+- 1 Lock door, tray cannot be ejected manually
+
+This function returns 0 upon success, and a non-zero value upon
+error. Note that if the door is already in the requested state, no
+action need be taken, and the return value should be 0.
+
+::
+
+ int select_speed(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int speed)
+
+Some CD-ROM drives are capable of changing their head-speed. There
+are several reasons for changing the speed of a CD-ROM drive. Badly
+pressed CD-ROM s may benefit from less-than-maximum head rate. Modern
+CD-ROM drives can obtain very high head rates (up to *24x* is
+common). It has been reported that these drives can make reading
+errors at these high speeds, reducing the speed can prevent data loss
+in these circumstances. Finally, some of these drives can
+make an annoyingly loud noise, which a lower speed may reduce.
+
+This function specifies the speed at which data is read or audio is
+played back. The value of *speed* specifies the head-speed of the
+drive, measured in units of standard cdrom speed (176kB/sec raw data
+or 150kB/sec file system data). So to request that a CD-ROM drive
+operate at 300kB/sec you would call the CDROM_SELECT_SPEED *ioctl*
+with *speed=2*. The special value `0` means `auto-selection`, i. e.,
+maximum data-rate or real-time audio rate. If the drive doesn't have
+this `auto-selection` capability, the decision should be made on the
+current disc loaded and the return value should be positive. A negative
+return value indicates an error.
+
+::
+
+ int select_disc(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi, int number)
+
+If the drive can store multiple discs (a juke-box) this function
+will perform disc selection. It should return the number of the
+selected disc on success, a negative value on error. Currently, only
+the ide-cd driver supports this functionality.
+
+::
+
+ int get_last_session(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi,
+ struct cdrom_multisession *ms_info)
+
+This function should implement the old corresponding *ioctl()*. For
+device *cdi->dev*, the start of the last session of the current disc
+should be returned in the pointer argument *ms_info*. Note that
+routines in `cdrom.c` have sanitized this argument: its requested
+format will **always** be of the type *CDROM_LBA* (linear block
+addressing mode), whatever the calling software requested. But
+sanitization goes even further: the low-level implementation may
+return the requested information in *CDROM_MSF* format if it wishes so
+(setting the *ms_info->addr_format* field appropriately, of
+course) and the routines in `cdrom.c` will make the transformation if
+necessary. The return value is 0 upon success.
+
+::
+
+ int get_mcn(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi,
+ struct cdrom_mcn *mcn)
+
+Some discs carry a `Media Catalog Number` (MCN), also called
+`Universal Product Code` (UPC). This number should reflect the number
+that is generally found in the bar-code on the product. Unfortunately,
+the few discs that carry such a number on the disc don't even use the
+same format. The return argument to this function is a pointer to a
+pre-declared memory region of type *struct cdrom_mcn*. The MCN is
+expected as a 13-character string, terminated by a null-character.
+
+::
+
+ int reset(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi)
+
+This call should perform a hard-reset on the drive (although in
+circumstances that a hard-reset is necessary, a drive may very well not
+listen to commands anymore). Preferably, control is returned to the
+caller only after the drive has finished resetting. If the drive is no
+longer listening, it may be wise for the underlying low-level cdrom
+driver to time out.
+
+::
+
+ int audio_ioctl(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi,
+ unsigned int cmd, void *arg)
+
+Some of the CD-ROM-\ *ioctl()*\ 's defined in `cdrom.h` can be
+implemented by the routines described above, and hence the function
+*cdrom_ioctl* will use those. However, most *ioctl()*\ 's deal with
+audio-control. We have decided to leave these to be accessed through a
+single function, repeating the arguments *cmd* and *arg*. Note that
+the latter is of type *void*, rather than *unsigned long int*.
+The routine *cdrom_ioctl()* does do some useful things,
+though. It sanitizes the address format type to *CDROM_MSF* (Minutes,
+Seconds, Frames) for all audio calls. It also verifies the memory
+location of *arg*, and reserves stack-memory for the argument. This
+makes implementation of the *audio_ioctl()* much simpler than in the
+old driver scheme. For example, you may look up the function
+*cm206_audio_ioctl()* `cm206.c` that should be updated with
+this documentation.
+
+An unimplemented ioctl should return *-ENOSYS*, but a harmless request
+(e. g., *CDROMSTART*) may be ignored by returning 0 (success). Other
+errors should be according to the standards, whatever they are. When
+an error is returned by the low-level driver, the Uniform CD-ROM Driver
+tries whenever possible to return the error code to the calling program.
+(We may decide to sanitize the return value in *cdrom_ioctl()* though, in
+order to guarantee a uniform interface to the audio-player software.)
+
+::
+
+ int dev_ioctl(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi,
+ unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg)
+
+Some *ioctl()'s* seem to be specific to certain CD-ROM drives. That is,
+they are introduced to service some capabilities of certain drives. In
+fact, there are 6 different *ioctl()'s* for reading data, either in some
+particular kind of format, or audio data. Not many drives support
+reading audio tracks as data, I believe this is because of protection
+of copyrights of artists. Moreover, I think that if audio-tracks are
+supported, it should be done through the VFS and not via *ioctl()'s*. A
+problem here could be the fact that audio-frames are 2352 bytes long,
+so either the audio-file-system should ask for 75264 bytes at once
+(the least common multiple of 512 and 2352), or the drivers should
+bend their backs to cope with this incoherence (to which I would be
+opposed). Furthermore, it is very difficult for the hardware to find
+the exact frame boundaries, since there are no synchronization headers
+in audio frames. Once these issues are resolved, this code should be
+standardized in `cdrom.c`.
+
+Because there are so many *ioctl()'s* that seem to be introduced to
+satisfy certain drivers [#f2]_, any non-standard *ioctl()*\ s
+are routed through the call *dev_ioctl()*. In principle, `private`
+*ioctl()*\ 's should be numbered after the device's major number, and not
+the general CD-ROM *ioctl* number, `0x53`. Currently the
+non-supported *ioctl()'s* are:
+
+ CDROMREADMODE1, CDROMREADMODE2, CDROMREADAUDIO, CDROMREADRAW,
+ CDROMREADCOOKED, CDROMSEEK, CDROMPLAY-BLK and CDROM-READALL
+
+.. [#f2]
+
+ Is there software around that actually uses these? I'd be interested!
+
+.. _cdrom_capabilities:
+
+CD-ROM capabilities
+-------------------
+
+Instead of just implementing some *ioctl* calls, the interface in
+`cdrom.c` supplies the possibility to indicate the **capabilities**
+of a CD-ROM drive. This can be done by ORing any number of
+capability-constants that are defined in `cdrom.h` at the registration
+phase. Currently, the capabilities are any of::
+
+ CDC_CLOSE_TRAY /* can close tray by software control */
+ CDC_OPEN_TRAY /* can open tray */
+ CDC_LOCK /* can lock and unlock the door */
+ CDC_SELECT_SPEED /* can select speed, in units of * sim*150 ,kB/s */
+ CDC_SELECT_DISC /* drive is juke-box */
+ CDC_MULTI_SESSION /* can read sessions *> rm1* */
+ CDC_MCN /* can read Media Catalog Number */
+ CDC_MEDIA_CHANGED /* can report if disc has changed */
+ CDC_PLAY_AUDIO /* can perform audio-functions (play, pause, etc) */
+ CDC_RESET /* hard reset device */
+ CDC_IOCTLS /* driver has non-standard ioctls */
+ CDC_DRIVE_STATUS /* driver implements drive status */
+
+The capability flag is declared *const*, to prevent drivers from
+accidentally tampering with the contents. The capability fags actually
+inform `cdrom.c` of what the driver can do. If the drive found
+by the driver does not have the capability, is can be masked out by
+the *cdrom_device_info* variable *mask*. For instance, the SCSI CD-ROM
+driver has implemented the code for loading and ejecting CD-ROM's, and
+hence its corresponding flags in *capability* will be set. But a SCSI
+CD-ROM drive might be a caddy system, which can't load the tray, and
+hence for this drive the *cdrom_device_info* struct will have set
+the *CDC_CLOSE_TRAY* bit in *mask*.
+
+In the file `cdrom.c` you will encounter many constructions of the type::
+
+ if (cdo->capability & ∼cdi->mask & CDC _⟨capability⟩) ...
+
+There is no *ioctl* to set the mask... The reason is that
+I think it is better to control the **behavior** rather than the
+**capabilities**.
+
+Options
+-------
+
+A final flag register controls the **behavior** of the CD-ROM
+drives, in order to satisfy different users' wishes, hopefully
+independently of the ideas of the respective author who happened to
+have made the drive's support available to the Linux community. The
+current behavior options are::
+
+ CDO_AUTO_CLOSE /* try to close tray upon device open() */
+ CDO_AUTO_EJECT /* try to open tray on last device close() */
+ CDO_USE_FFLAGS /* use file_pointer->f_flags to indicate purpose for open() */
+ CDO_LOCK /* try to lock door if device is opened */
+ CDO_CHECK_TYPE /* ensure disc type is data if opened for data */
+
+The initial value of this register is
+`CDO_AUTO_CLOSE | CDO_USE_FFLAGS | CDO_LOCK`, reflecting my own view on user
+interface and software standards. Before you protest, there are two
+new *ioctl()'s* implemented in `cdrom.c`, that allow you to control the
+behavior by software. These are::
+
+ CDROM_SET_OPTIONS /* set options specified in (int)arg */
+ CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS /* clear options specified in (int)arg */
+
+One option needs some more explanation: *CDO_USE_FFLAGS*. In the next
+newsection we explain what the need for this option is.
+
+A software package `setcd`, available from the Debian distribution
+and `sunsite.unc.edu`, allows user level control of these flags.
+
+
+The need to know the purpose of opening the CD-ROM device
+=========================================================
+
+Traditionally, Unix devices can be used in two different `modes`,
+either by reading/writing to the device file, or by issuing
+controlling commands to the device, by the device's *ioctl()*
+call. The problem with CD-ROM drives, is that they can be used for
+two entirely different purposes. One is to mount removable
+file systems, CD-ROM's, the other is to play audio CD's. Audio commands
+are implemented entirely through *ioctl()\'s*, presumably because the
+first implementation (SUN?) has been such. In principle there is
+nothing wrong with this, but a good control of the `CD player` demands
+that the device can **always** be opened in order to give the
+*ioctl* commands, regardless of the state the drive is in.
+
+On the other hand, when used as a removable-media disc drive (what the
+original purpose of CD-ROM s is) we would like to make sure that the
+disc drive is ready for operation upon opening the device. In the old
+scheme, some CD-ROM drivers don't do any integrity checking, resulting
+in a number of i/o errors reported by the VFS to the kernel when an
+attempt for mounting a CD-ROM on an empty drive occurs. This is not a
+particularly elegant way to find out that there is no CD-ROM inserted;
+it more-or-less looks like the old IBM-PC trying to read an empty floppy
+drive for a couple of seconds, after which the system complains it
+can't read from it. Nowadays we can **sense** the existence of a
+removable medium in a drive, and we believe we should exploit that
+fact. An integrity check on opening of the device, that verifies the
+availability of a CD-ROM and its correct type (data), would be
+desirable.
+
+These two ways of using a CD-ROM drive, principally for data and
+secondarily for playing audio discs, have different demands for the
+behavior of the *open()* call. Audio use simply wants to open the
+device in order to get a file handle which is needed for issuing
+*ioctl* commands, while data use wants to open for correct and
+reliable data transfer. The only way user programs can indicate what
+their *purpose* of opening the device is, is through the *flags*
+parameter (see `open(2)`). For CD-ROM devices, these flags aren't
+implemented (some drivers implement checking for write-related flags,
+but this is not strictly necessary if the device file has correct
+permission flags). Most option flags simply don't make sense to
+CD-ROM devices: *O_CREAT*, *O_NOCTTY*, *O_TRUNC*, *O_APPEND*, and
+*O_SYNC* have no meaning to a CD-ROM.
+
+We therefore propose to use the flag *O_NONBLOCK* to indicate
+that the device is opened just for issuing *ioctl*
+commands. Strictly, the meaning of *O_NONBLOCK* is that opening and
+subsequent calls to the device don't cause the calling process to
+wait. We could interpret this as don't wait until someone has
+inserted some valid data-CD-ROM. Thus, our proposal of the
+implementation for the *open()* call for CD-ROM s is:
+
+- If no other flags are set than *O_RDONLY*, the device is opened
+ for data transfer, and the return value will be 0 only upon successful
+ initialization of the transfer. The call may even induce some actions
+ on the CD-ROM, such as closing the tray.
+- If the option flag *O_NONBLOCK* is set, opening will always be
+ successful, unless the whole device doesn't exist. The drive will take
+ no actions whatsoever.
+
+And what about standards?
+-------------------------
+
+You might hesitate to accept this proposal as it comes from the
+Linux community, and not from some standardizing institute. What
+about SUN, SGI, HP and all those other Unix and hardware vendors?
+Well, these companies are in the lucky position that they generally
+control both the hardware and software of their supported products,
+and are large enough to set their own standard. They do not have to
+deal with a dozen or more different, competing hardware
+configurations\ [#f3]_.
+
+.. [#f3]
+
+ Incidentally, I think that SUN's approach to mounting CD-ROM s is very
+ good in origin: under Solaris a volume-daemon automatically mounts a
+ newly inserted CD-ROM under `/cdrom/*<volume-name>*`.
+
+ In my opinion they should have pushed this
+ further and have **every** CD-ROM on the local area network be
+ mounted at the similar location, i. e., no matter in which particular
+ machine you insert a CD-ROM, it will always appear at the same
+ position in the directory tree, on every system. When I wanted to
+ implement such a user-program for Linux, I came across the
+ differences in behavior of the various drivers, and the need for an
+ *ioctl* informing about media changes.
+
+We believe that using *O_NONBLOCK* to indicate that a device is being opened
+for *ioctl* commands only can be easily introduced in the Linux
+community. All the CD-player authors will have to be informed, we can
+even send in our own patches to the programs. The use of *O_NONBLOCK*
+has most likely no influence on the behavior of the CD-players on
+other operating systems than Linux. Finally, a user can always revert
+to old behavior by a call to
+*ioctl(file_descriptor, CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS, CDO_USE_FFLAGS)*.
+
+The preferred strategy of *open()*
+----------------------------------
+
+The routines in `cdrom.c` are designed in such a way that run-time
+configuration of the behavior of CD-ROM devices (of **any** type)
+can be carried out, by the *CDROM_SET/CLEAR_OPTIONS* *ioctls*. Thus, various
+modes of operation can be set:
+
+`CDO_AUTO_CLOSE | CDO_USE_FFLAGS | CDO_LOCK`
+ This is the default setting. (With *CDO_CHECK_TYPE* it will be better, in
+ the future.) If the device is not yet opened by any other process, and if
+ the device is being opened for data (*O_NONBLOCK* is not set) and the
+ tray is found to be open, an attempt to close the tray is made. Then,
+ it is verified that a disc is in the drive and, if *CDO_CHECK_TYPE* is
+ set, that it contains tracks of type `data mode 1`. Only if all tests
+ are passed is the return value zero. The door is locked to prevent file
+ system corruption. If the drive is opened for audio (*O_NONBLOCK* is
+ set), no actions are taken and a value of 0 will be returned.
+
+`CDO_AUTO_CLOSE | CDO_AUTO_EJECT | CDO_LOCK`
+ This mimics the behavior of the current sbpcd-driver. The option flags are
+ ignored, the tray is closed on the first open, if necessary. Similarly,
+ the tray is opened on the last release, i. e., if a CD-ROM is unmounted,
+ it is automatically ejected, such that the user can replace it.
+
+We hope that these option can convince everybody (both driver
+maintainers and user program developers) to adopt the new CD-ROM
+driver scheme and option flag interpretation.
+
+Description of routines in `cdrom.c`
+====================================
+
+Only a few routines in `cdrom.c` are exported to the drivers. In this
+new section we will discuss these, as well as the functions that `take
+over' the CD-ROM interface to the kernel. The header file belonging
+to `cdrom.c` is called `cdrom.h`. Formerly, some of the contents of this
+file were placed in the file `ucdrom.h`, but this file has now been
+merged back into `cdrom.h`.
+
+::
+
+ struct file_operations cdrom_fops
+
+The contents of this structure were described in cdrom_api_.
+A pointer to this structure is assigned to the *fops* field
+of the *struct gendisk*.
+
+::
+
+ int register_cdrom(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi)
+
+This function is used in about the same way one registers *cdrom_fops*
+with the kernel, the device operations and information structures,
+as described in cdrom_api_, should be registered with the
+Uniform CD-ROM Driver::
+
+ register_cdrom(&<device>_info);
+
+
+This function returns zero upon success, and non-zero upon
+failure. The structure *<device>_info* should have a pointer to the
+driver's *<device>_dops*, as in::
+
+ struct cdrom_device_info <device>_info = {
+ <device>_dops;
+ ...
+ }
+
+Note that a driver must have one static structure, *<device>_dops*, while
+it may have as many structures *<device>_info* as there are minor devices
+active. *Register_cdrom()* builds a linked list from these.
+
+
+::
+
+ void unregister_cdrom(struct cdrom_device_info *cdi)
+
+Unregistering device *cdi* with minor number *MINOR(cdi->dev)* removes
+the minor device from the list. If it was the last registered minor for
+the low-level driver, this disconnects the registered device-operation
+routines from the CD-ROM interface. This function returns zero upon
+success, and non-zero upon failure.
+
+::
+
+ int cdrom_open(struct inode * ip, struct file * fp)
+
+This function is not called directly by the low-level drivers, it is
+listed in the standard *cdrom_fops*. If the VFS opens a file, this
+function becomes active. A strategy is implemented in this routine,
+taking care of all capabilities and options that are set in the
+*cdrom_device_ops* connected to the device. Then, the program flow is
+transferred to the device_dependent *open()* call.
+
+::
+
+ void cdrom_release(struct inode *ip, struct file *fp)
+
+This function implements the reverse-logic of *cdrom_open()*, and then
+calls the device-dependent *release()* routine. When the use-count has
+reached 0, the allocated buffers are flushed by calls to *sync_dev(dev)*
+and *invalidate_buffers(dev)*.
+
+
+.. _cdrom_ioctl:
+
+::
+
+ int cdrom_ioctl(struct inode *ip, struct file *fp,
+ unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg)
+
+This function handles all the standard *ioctl* requests for CD-ROM
+devices in a uniform way. The different calls fall into three
+categories: *ioctl()'s* that can be directly implemented by device
+operations, ones that are routed through the call *audio_ioctl()*, and
+the remaining ones, that are presumable device-dependent. Generally, a
+negative return value indicates an error.
+
+Directly implemented *ioctl()'s*
+--------------------------------
+
+The following `old` CD-ROM *ioctl()*\ 's are implemented by directly
+calling device-operations in *cdrom_device_ops*, if implemented and
+not masked:
+
+`CDROMMULTISESSION`
+ Requests the last session on a CD-ROM.
+`CDROMEJECT`
+ Open tray.
+`CDROMCLOSETRAY`
+ Close tray.
+`CDROMEJECT_SW`
+ If *arg\not=0*, set behavior to auto-close (close
+ tray on first open) and auto-eject (eject on last release), otherwise
+ set behavior to non-moving on *open()* and *release()* calls.
+`CDROM_GET_MCN`
+ Get the Media Catalog Number from a CD.
+
+*Ioctl*s routed through *audio_ioctl()*
+---------------------------------------
+
+The following set of *ioctl()'s* are all implemented through a call to
+the *cdrom_fops* function *audio_ioctl()*. Memory checks and
+allocation are performed in *cdrom_ioctl()*, and also sanitization of
+address format (*CDROM_LBA*/*CDROM_MSF*) is done.
+
+`CDROMSUBCHNL`
+ Get sub-channel data in argument *arg* of type
+ `struct cdrom_subchnl *`.
+`CDROMREADTOCHDR`
+ Read Table of Contents header, in *arg* of type
+ `struct cdrom_tochdr *`.
+`CDROMREADTOCENTRY`
+ Read a Table of Contents entry in *arg* and specified by *arg*
+ of type `struct cdrom_tocentry *`.
+`CDROMPLAYMSF`
+ Play audio fragment specified in Minute, Second, Frame format,
+ delimited by *arg* of type `struct cdrom_msf *`.
+`CDROMPLAYTRKIND`
+ Play audio fragment in track-index format delimited by *arg*
+ of type `struct cdrom_ti *`.
+`CDROMVOLCTRL`
+ Set volume specified by *arg* of type `struct cdrom_volctrl *`.
+`CDROMVOLREAD`
+ Read volume into by *arg* of type `struct cdrom_volctrl *`.
+`CDROMSTART`
+ Spin up disc.
+`CDROMSTOP`
+ Stop playback of audio fragment.
+`CDROMPAUSE`
+ Pause playback of audio fragment.
+`CDROMRESUME`
+ Resume playing.
+
+New *ioctl()'s* in `cdrom.c`
+----------------------------
+
+The following *ioctl()'s* have been introduced to allow user programs to
+control the behavior of individual CD-ROM devices. New *ioctl*
+commands can be identified by the underscores in their names.
+
+`CDROM_SET_OPTIONS`
+ Set options specified by *arg*. Returns the option flag register
+ after modification. Use *arg = \rm0* for reading the current flags.
+`CDROM_CLEAR_OPTIONS`
+ Clear options specified by *arg*. Returns the option flag register
+ after modification.
+`CDROM_SELECT_SPEED`
+ Select head-rate speed of disc specified as by *arg* in units
+ of standard cdrom speed (176\,kB/sec raw data or
+ 150kB/sec file system data). The value 0 means `auto-select`,
+ i. e., play audio discs at real time and data discs at maximum speed.
+ The value *arg* is checked against the maximum head rate of the
+ drive found in the *cdrom_dops*.
+`CDROM_SELECT_DISC`
+ Select disc numbered *arg* from a juke-box.
+
+ First disc is numbered 0. The number *arg* is checked against the
+ maximum number of discs in the juke-box found in the *cdrom_dops*.
+`CDROM_MEDIA_CHANGED`
+ Returns 1 if a disc has been changed since the last call.
+ Note that calls to *cdrom_media_changed* by the VFS are treated
+ by an independent queue, so both mechanisms will detect a
+ media change once. For juke-boxes, an extra argument *arg*
+ specifies the slot for which the information is given. The special
+ value *CDSL_CURRENT* requests that information about the currently
+ selected slot be returned.
+`CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS`
+ Returns the status of the drive by a call to
+ *drive_status()*. Return values are defined in cdrom_drive_status_.
+ Note that this call doesn't return information on the
+ current playing activity of the drive; this can be polled through
+ an *ioctl* call to *CDROMSUBCHNL*. For juke-boxes, an extra argument
+ *arg* specifies the slot for which (possibly limited) information is
+ given. The special value *CDSL_CURRENT* requests that information
+ about the currently selected slot be returned.
+`CDROM_DISC_STATUS`
+ Returns the type of the disc currently in the drive.
+ It should be viewed as a complement to *CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS*.
+ This *ioctl* can provide *some* information about the current
+ disc that is inserted in the drive. This functionality used to be
+ implemented in the low level drivers, but is now carried out
+ entirely in Uniform CD-ROM Driver.
+
+ The history of development of the CD's use as a carrier medium for
+ various digital information has lead to many different disc types.
+ This *ioctl* is useful only in the case that CDs have \emph {only
+ one} type of data on them. While this is often the case, it is
+ also very common for CDs to have some tracks with data, and some
+ tracks with audio. Because this is an existing interface, rather
+ than fixing this interface by changing the assumptions it was made
+ under, thereby breaking all user applications that use this
+ function, the Uniform CD-ROM Driver implements this *ioctl* as
+ follows: If the CD in question has audio tracks on it, and it has
+ absolutely no CD-I, XA, or data tracks on it, it will be reported
+ as *CDS_AUDIO*. If it has both audio and data tracks, it will
+ return *CDS_MIXED*. If there are no audio tracks on the disc, and
+ if the CD in question has any CD-I tracks on it, it will be
+ reported as *CDS_XA_2_2*. Failing that, if the CD in question
+ has any XA tracks on it, it will be reported as *CDS_XA_2_1*.
+ Finally, if the CD in question has any data tracks on it,
+ it will be reported as a data CD (*CDS_DATA_1*).
+
+ This *ioctl* can return::
+
+ CDS_NO_INFO /* no information available */
+ CDS_NO_DISC /* no disc is inserted, or tray is opened */
+ CDS_AUDIO /* Audio disc (2352 audio bytes/frame) */
+ CDS_DATA_1 /* data disc, mode 1 (2048 user bytes/frame) */
+ CDS_XA_2_1 /* mixed data (XA), mode 2, form 1 (2048 user bytes) */
+ CDS_XA_2_2 /* mixed data (XA), mode 2, form 1 (2324 user bytes) */
+ CDS_MIXED /* mixed audio/data disc */
+
+ For some information concerning frame layout of the various disc
+ types, see a recent version of `cdrom.h`.
+
+`CDROM_CHANGER_NSLOTS`
+ Returns the number of slots in a juke-box.
+`CDROMRESET`
+ Reset the drive.
+`CDROM_GET_CAPABILITY`
+ Returns the *capability* flags for the drive. Refer to section
+ cdrom_capabilities_ for more information on these flags.
+`CDROM_LOCKDOOR`
+ Locks the door of the drive. `arg == 0` unlocks the door,
+ any other value locks it.
+`CDROM_DEBUG`
+ Turns on debugging info. Only root is allowed to do this.
+ Same semantics as CDROM_LOCKDOOR.
+
+
+Device dependent *ioctl()'s*
+----------------------------
+
+Finally, all other *ioctl()'s* are passed to the function *dev_ioctl()*,
+if implemented. No memory allocation or verification is carried out.
+
+How to update your driver
+=========================
+
+- Make a backup of your current driver.
+- Get hold of the files `cdrom.c` and `cdrom.h`, they should be in
+ the directory tree that came with this documentation.
+- Make sure you include `cdrom.h`.
+- Change the 3rd argument of *register_blkdev* from `&<your-drive>_fops`
+ to `&cdrom_fops`.
+- Just after that line, add the following to register with the Uniform
+ CD-ROM Driver::
+
+ register_cdrom(&<your-drive>_info);*
+
+ Similarly, add a call to *unregister_cdrom()* at the appropriate place.
+- Copy an example of the device-operations *struct* to your
+ source, e. g., from `cm206.c` *cm206_dops*, and change all
+ entries to names corresponding to your driver, or names you just
+ happen to like. If your driver doesn't support a certain function,
+ make the entry *NULL*. At the entry *capability* you should list all
+ capabilities your driver currently supports. If your driver
+ has a capability that is not listed, please send me a message.
+- Copy the *cdrom_device_info* declaration from the same example
+ driver, and modify the entries according to your needs. If your
+ driver dynamically determines the capabilities of the hardware, this
+ structure should also be declared dynamically.
+- Implement all functions in your `<device>_dops` structure,
+ according to prototypes listed in `cdrom.h`, and specifications given
+ in cdrom_api_. Most likely you have already implemented
+ the code in a large part, and you will almost certainly need to adapt the
+ prototype and return values.
+- Rename your `<device>_ioctl()` function to *audio_ioctl* and
+ change the prototype a little. Remove entries listed in the first
+ part in cdrom_ioctl_, if your code was OK, these are
+ just calls to the routines you adapted in the previous step.
+- You may remove all remaining memory checking code in the
+ *audio_ioctl()* function that deals with audio commands (these are
+ listed in the second part of cdrom_ioctl_. There is no
+ need for memory allocation either, so most *case*s in the *switch*
+ statement look similar to::
+
+ case CDROMREADTOCENTRY:
+ get_toc_entry\bigl((struct cdrom_tocentry *) arg);
+
+- All remaining *ioctl* cases must be moved to a separate
+ function, *<device>_ioctl*, the device-dependent *ioctl()'s*. Note that
+ memory checking and allocation must be kept in this code!
+- Change the prototypes of *<device>_open()* and
+ *<device>_release()*, and remove any strategic code (i. e., tray
+ movement, door locking, etc.).
+- Try to recompile the drivers. We advise you to use modules, both
+ for `cdrom.o` and your driver, as debugging is much easier this
+ way.
+
+Thanks
+======
+
+Thanks to all the people involved. First, Erik Andersen, who has
+taken over the torch in maintaining `cdrom.c` and integrating much
+CD-ROM-related code in the 2.1-kernel. Thanks to Scott Snyder and
+Gerd Knorr, who were the first to implement this interface for SCSI
+and IDE-CD drivers and added many ideas for extension of the data
+structures relative to kernel~2.0. Further thanks to Heiko Eißfeldt,
+Thomas Quinot, Jon Tombs, Ken Pizzini, Eberhard Mönkeberg and Andrew Kroll,
+the Linux CD-ROM device driver developers who were kind
+enough to give suggestions and criticisms during the writing. Finally
+of course, I want to thank Linus Torvalds for making this possible in
+the first place.
diff --git a/drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c b/drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c
index 933268b8d6a5..5d1e0a4a7d84 100644
--- a/drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c
+++ b/drivers/cdrom/cdrom.c
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
License. See linux/COPYING for more information.
Uniform CD-ROM driver for Linux.
- See Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.tex for usage information.
+ See Documentation/cdrom/cdrom-standard.txt for usage information.
The routines in the file provide a uniform interface between the
software that uses CD-ROMs and the various low-level drivers that
--
2.20.1
Convert all documents here from plain txt to ReST format, in
order to allow parsing them with the documentation build
system.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/fb/api.txt | 29 +-
Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt | 47 ++-
Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt | 57 ++--
Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt | 28 +-
Documentation/fb/efifb.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt | 25 +-
Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt | 177 ++++++-----
Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt | 79 +++--
Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt | 22 +-
Documentation/fb/intel810.txt | 77 +++--
Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt | 62 ++--
Documentation/fb/internals.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt | 526 ++++++++++++++++---------------
Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/modedb.txt | 44 +--
Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt | 55 ++--
Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt | 81 +++--
Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt | 153 +++++----
Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt | 40 +--
Documentation/fb/sm501.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt | 18 +-
Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt | 231 ++++++++------
Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt | 30 +-
Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt | 34 +-
Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt | 55 ++--
Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt | 128 ++++----
Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt | 121 +++----
Documentation/fb/viafb.txt | 393 +++++++++++++----------
Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt | 10 +-
34 files changed, 1455 insertions(+), 1217 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/api.txt b/Documentation/fb/api.txt
index d52cf1e3b975..79ec33dded74 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/api.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- The Frame Buffer Device API
- ---------------------------
+===========================
+The Frame Buffer Device API
+===========================
Last revised: June 21, 2011
@@ -21,13 +22,13 @@ deal with different behaviours.
---------------
Device and driver capabilities are reported in the fixed screen information
-capabilities field.
+capabilities field::
-struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
+ struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
...
__u16 capabilities; /* see FB_CAP_* */
...
-};
+ };
Application should use those capabilities to find out what features they can
expect from the device and driver.
@@ -151,9 +152,9 @@ fb_fix_screeninfo and fb_var_screeninfo structure respectively.
struct fb_fix_screeninfo stores device independent unchangeable information
about the frame buffer device and the current format. Those information can't
be directly modified by applications, but can be changed by the driver when an
-application modifies the format.
+application modifies the format::
-struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
+ struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
char id[16]; /* identification string eg "TT Builtin" */
unsigned long smem_start; /* Start of frame buffer mem */
/* (physical address) */
@@ -172,13 +173,13 @@ struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
/* specific chip/card we have */
__u16 capabilities; /* see FB_CAP_* */
__u16 reserved[2]; /* Reserved for future compatibility */
-};
+ };
struct fb_var_screeninfo stores device independent changeable information
about a frame buffer device, its current format and video mode, as well as
-other miscellaneous parameters.
+other miscellaneous parameters::
-struct fb_var_screeninfo {
+ struct fb_var_screeninfo {
__u32 xres; /* visible resolution */
__u32 yres;
__u32 xres_virtual; /* virtual resolution */
@@ -216,7 +217,7 @@ struct fb_var_screeninfo {
__u32 rotate; /* angle we rotate counter clockwise */
__u32 colorspace; /* colorspace for FOURCC-based modes */
__u32 reserved[4]; /* Reserved for future compatibility */
-};
+ };
To modify variable information, applications call the FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO
ioctl with a pointer to a fb_var_screeninfo structure. If the call is
@@ -255,14 +256,14 @@ monochrome, grayscale or pseudocolor visuals, although this is not required.
- For truecolor and directcolor formats, applications set the grayscale field
to zero, and the red, blue, green and transp fields to describe the layout of
- color components in memory.
+ color components in memory::
-struct fb_bitfield {
+ struct fb_bitfield {
__u32 offset; /* beginning of bitfield */
__u32 length; /* length of bitfield */
__u32 msb_right; /* != 0 : Most significant bit is */
/* right */
-};
+ };
Pixel values are bits_per_pixel wide and are split in non-overlapping red,
green, blue and alpha (transparency) components. Location and size of each
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt
index e8487a9d6a05..aeca8773dd7e 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/arkfb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
- arkfb - fbdev driver for ARK Logic chips
- ========================================
+========================================
+arkfb - fbdev driver for ARK Logic chips
+========================================
Supported Hardware
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Missing Features
(alias TODO list)
* secondary (not initialized by BIOS) device support
- * big endian support
+ * big endian support
* DPMS support
* MMIO support
* interlaced mode variant
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt
index b605204fcfe1..e3859071270f 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/aty128fb.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
-[This file is cloned from VesaFB/matroxfb]
-
+=================
What is aty128fb?
=================
+.. [This file is cloned from VesaFB/matroxfb]
+
This is a driver for a graphic framebuffer for ATI Rage128 based devices
on Intel and PPC boxes.
@@ -24,14 +25,14 @@ How to use it?
==============
Switching modes is done using the video=aty128fb:<resolution>... modedb
-boot parameter or using `fbset' program.
+boot parameter or using `fbset` program.
See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for more information on modedb
resolutions.
You should compile in both vgacon (to boot if you remove your Rage128 from
box) and aty128fb (for graphics mode). You should not compile-in vesafb
-unless you have primary display on non-Rage128 VBE2.0 device (see
+unless you have primary display on non-Rage128 VBE2.0 device (see
Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt for details).
@@ -48,16 +49,18 @@ Configuration
=============
You can pass kernel command line options to vesafb with
-`video=aty128fb:option1,option2:value2,option3' (multiple options should
-be separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:').
+`video=aty128fb:option1,option2:value2,option3` (multiple options should
+be separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:`).
Accepted options:
-noaccel - do not use acceleration engine. It is default.
-accel - use acceleration engine. Not finished.
-vmode:x - chooses PowerMacintosh video mode <x>. Deprecated.
-cmode:x - chooses PowerMacintosh colour mode <x>. Deprecated.
-<XxX@X> - selects startup videomode. See modedb.txt for detailed
- explanation. Default is 640x480x8bpp.
+========= =======================================================
+noaccel do not use acceleration engine. It is default.
+accel use acceleration engine. Not finished.
+vmode:x chooses PowerMacintosh video mode <x>. Deprecated.
+cmode:x chooses PowerMacintosh colour mode <x>. Deprecated.
+<XxX@X> selects startup videomode. See modedb.txt for detailed
+ explanation. Default is 640x480x8bpp.
+========= =======================================================
Limitations
@@ -65,8 +68,8 @@ Limitations
There are known and unknown bugs, features and misfeatures.
Currently there are following known bugs:
- + This driver is still experimental and is not finished. Too many
+
+ - This driver is still experimental and is not finished. Too many
bugs/errata to list here.
---
Brad Douglas <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
index f75950d330a4..8c3e6c6cb114 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/cirrusfb.txt
@@ -1,32 +1,32 @@
+============================================
+Framebuffer driver for Cirrus Logic chipsets
+============================================
- Framebuffer driver for Cirrus Logic chipsets
- Copyright 1999 Jeff Garzik <[email protected]>
+Copyright 1999 Jeff Garzik <[email protected]>
-
-{ just a little something to get people going; contributors welcome! }
-
+.. just a little something to get people going; contributors welcome!
Chip families supported:
- SD64
- Piccolo
- Picasso
- Spectrum
- Alpine (GD-543x/4x)
- Picasso4 (GD-5446)
- GD-5480
- Laguna (GD-546x)
+ - SD64
+ - Piccolo
+ - Picasso
+ - Spectrum
+ - Alpine (GD-543x/4x)
+ - Picasso4 (GD-5446)
+ - GD-5480
+ - Laguna (GD-546x)
Bus's supported:
- PCI
- Zorro
+ - PCI
+ - Zorro
Architectures supported:
- i386
- Alpha
- PPC (Motorola Powerstack)
- m68k (Amiga)
+ - i386
+ - Alpha
+ - PPC (Motorola Powerstack)
+ - m68k (Amiga)
@@ -34,10 +34,9 @@ Default video modes
-------------------
At the moment, there are two kernel command line arguments supported:
-mode:640x480
-mode:800x600
- or
-mode:1024x768
+- mode:640x480
+- mode:800x600
+- mode:1024x768
Full support for startup video modes (modedb) will be integrated soon.
@@ -93,5 +92,3 @@ Version 1.9.4
Version 1.9.3
-------------
* Bundled with kernel 2.3.14-pre1 or later.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt b/Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt
index 55e1f0a3d2b4..5db5e9787361 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/cmap_xfbdev.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,29 @@
+==========================
Understanding fbdev's cmap
---------------------------
+==========================
These notes explain how X's dix layer uses fbdev's cmap structures.
-*. example of relevant structures in fbdev as used for a 3-bit grayscale cmap
-struct fb_var_screeninfo {
- .bits_per_pixel = 8,
- .grayscale = 1,
- .red = { 4, 3, 0 },
- .green = { 0, 0, 0 },
- .blue = { 0, 0, 0 },
-}
-struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
- .visual = FB_VISUAL_STATIC_PSEUDOCOLOR,
-}
-for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+- example of relevant structures in fbdev as used for a 3-bit grayscale cmap::
+
+ struct fb_var_screeninfo {
+ .bits_per_pixel = 8,
+ .grayscale = 1,
+ .red = { 4, 3, 0 },
+ .green = { 0, 0, 0 },
+ .blue = { 0, 0, 0 },
+ }
+ struct fb_fix_screeninfo {
+ .visual = FB_VISUAL_STATIC_PSEUDOCOLOR,
+ }
+ for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
info->cmap.red[i] = (((2*i)+1)*(0xFFFF))/16;
-memcpy(info->cmap.green, info->cmap.red, sizeof(u16)*8);
-memcpy(info->cmap.blue, info->cmap.red, sizeof(u16)*8);
+ memcpy(info->cmap.green, info->cmap.red, sizeof(u16)*8);
+ memcpy(info->cmap.blue, info->cmap.red, sizeof(u16)*8);
-*. X11 apps do something like the following when trying to use grayscale.
-for (i=0; i < 8; i++) {
+- X11 apps do something like the following when trying to use grayscale::
+
+ for (i=0; i < 8; i++) {
char colorspec[64];
memset(colorspec,0,64);
sprintf(colorspec, "rgb:%x/%x/%x", i*36,i*36,i*36);
@@ -28,26 +31,26 @@ for (i=0; i < 8; i++) {
printf("Can't get color %s\n",colorspec);
XAllocColor(outputDisplay, testColormap, &wantedColor);
grays[i] = wantedColor;
-}
+ }
+
There's also named equivalents like gray1..x provided you have an rgb.txt.
Somewhere in X's callchain, this results in a call to X code that handles the
colormap. For example, Xfbdev hits the following:
-xc-011010/programs/Xserver/dix/colormap.c:
+xc-011010/programs/Xserver/dix/colormap.c::
-FindBestPixel(pentFirst, size, prgb, channel)
+ FindBestPixel(pentFirst, size, prgb, channel)
-dr = (long) pent->co.local.red - prgb->red;
-dg = (long) pent->co.local.green - prgb->green;
-db = (long) pent->co.local.blue - prgb->blue;
-sq = dr * dr;
-UnsignedToBigNum (sq, &sum);
-BigNumAdd (&sum, &temp, &sum);
+ dr = (long) pent->co.local.red - prgb->red;
+ dg = (long) pent->co.local.green - prgb->green;
+ db = (long) pent->co.local.blue - prgb->blue;
+ sq = dr * dr;
+ UnsignedToBigNum (sq, &sum);
+ BigNumAdd (&sum, &temp, &sum);
co.local.red are entries that were brought in through FBIOGETCMAP which come
directly from the info->cmap.red that was listed above. The prgb is the rgb
that the app wants to match to. The above code is doing what looks like a least
squares matching function. That's why the cmap entries can't be set to the left
hand side boundaries of a color range.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt b/Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt
index 748328370250..7300cff255a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/deferred_io.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+===========
Deferred IO
------------
+===========
Deferred IO is a way to delay and repurpose IO. It uses host memory as a
buffer and the MMU pagefault as a pretrigger for when to perform the device
@@ -16,7 +17,7 @@ works:
- app continues writing to that page with no additional cost. this is
the key benefit.
- the workqueue task comes in and mkcleans the pages on the list, then
- completes the work associated with updating the framebuffer. this is
+ completes the work associated with updating the framebuffer. this is
the real work talking to the device.
- app tries to write to the address (that has now been mkcleaned)
- get pagefault and the above sequence occurs again
@@ -47,29 +48,32 @@ How to use it: (for fbdev drivers)
----------------------------------
The following example may be helpful.
-1. Setup your structure. Eg:
+1. Setup your structure. Eg::
-static struct fb_deferred_io hecubafb_defio = {
- .delay = HZ,
- .deferred_io = hecubafb_dpy_deferred_io,
-};
+ static struct fb_deferred_io hecubafb_defio = {
+ .delay = HZ,
+ .deferred_io = hecubafb_dpy_deferred_io,
+ };
The delay is the minimum delay between when the page_mkwrite trigger occurs
and when the deferred_io callback is called. The deferred_io callback is
explained below.
-2. Setup your deferred IO callback. Eg:
-static void hecubafb_dpy_deferred_io(struct fb_info *info,
- struct list_head *pagelist)
+2. Setup your deferred IO callback. Eg::
+
+ static void hecubafb_dpy_deferred_io(struct fb_info *info,
+ struct list_head *pagelist)
The deferred_io callback is where you would perform all your IO to the display
device. You receive the pagelist which is the list of pages that were written
to during the delay. You must not modify this list. This callback is called
from a workqueue.
-3. Call init
+3. Call init::
+
info->fbdefio = &hecubafb_defio;
fb_deferred_io_init(info);
-4. Call cleanup
+4. Call cleanup::
+
fb_deferred_io_cleanup(info);
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/efifb.txt b/Documentation/fb/efifb.txt
index 1a85c1bdaf38..04840331a00e 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/efifb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/efifb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
What is efifb?
-===============
+==============
This is a generic EFI platform driver for Intel based Apple computers.
efifb is only for EFI booted Intel Macs.
@@ -8,16 +8,17 @@ efifb is only for EFI booted Intel Macs.
Supported Hardware
==================
-iMac 17"/20"
-Macbook
-Macbook Pro 15"/17"
-MacMini
+- iMac 17"/20"
+- Macbook
+- Macbook Pro 15"/17"
+- MacMini
How to use it?
==============
efifb does not have any kind of autodetection of your machine.
-You have to add the following kernel parameters in your elilo.conf:
+You have to add the following kernel parameters in your elilo.conf::
+
Macbook :
video=efifb:macbook
MacMini :
@@ -29,9 +30,10 @@ You have to add the following kernel parameters in your elilo.conf:
Accepted options:
+======= ===========================================================
nowc Don't map the framebuffer write combined. This can be used
to workaround side-effects and slowdowns on other CPU cores
when large amounts of console data are written.
+======= ===========================================================
---
Edgar Hucek <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt
index 5af1bd9effae..50b6f8103a49 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/ep93xx-fb.txt
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Driver for EP93xx LCD controller
The EP93xx LCD controller can drive both standard desktop monitors and
embedded LCD displays. If you have a standard desktop monitor then you
-can use the standard Linux video mode database. In your board file:
+can use the standard Linux video mode database. In your board file::
static struct ep93xxfb_mach_info some_board_fb_info = {
.num_modes = EP93XXFB_USE_MODEDB,
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ can use the standard Linux video mode database. In your board file:
};
If you have an embedded LCD display then you need to define a video
-mode for it as follows:
+mode for it as follows::
static struct fb_videomode some_board_video_modes[] = {
{
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ are in pixel clocks. See Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt for further
details.
The ep93xxfb_mach_info structure for your board should look like the
-following:
+following::
static struct ep93xxfb_mach_info some_board_fb_info = {
.num_modes = ARRAY_SIZE(some_board_video_modes),
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ following:
};
The framebuffer device can be registered by adding the following to
-your board initialisation function:
+your board initialisation function::
ep93xx_register_fb(&some_board_fb_info);
@@ -50,6 +50,7 @@ to configure the controller. The video attributes flags are fully
documented in section 7 of the EP93xx users' guide. The following
flags are available:
+=============================== ==========================================
EP93XXFB_PCLK_FALLING Clock data on the falling edge of the
pixel clock. The default is to clock
data on the rising edge.
@@ -62,10 +63,12 @@ EP93XXFB_SYNC_HORIZ_HIGH Horizontal sync is active high. By
EP93XXFB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH Vertical sync is active high. By
default the vertical sync is active high.
+=============================== ==========================================
The physical address of the framebuffer can be controlled using the
following flags:
+=============================== ======================================
EP93XXFB_USE_SDCSN0 Use SDCSn[0] for the framebuffer. This
is the default setting.
@@ -74,6 +77,7 @@ EP93XXFB_USE_SDCSN1 Use SDCSn[1] for the framebuffer.
EP93XXFB_USE_SDCSN2 Use SDCSn[2] for the framebuffer.
EP93XXFB_USE_SDCSN3 Use SDCSn[3] for the framebuffer.
+=============================== ======================================
==================
Platform callbacks
@@ -87,7 +91,7 @@ blanked or unblanked.
The setup and teardown devices pass the platform_device structure as
an argument. The fb_info and ep93xxfb_mach_info structures can be
-obtained as follows:
+obtained as follows::
static int some_board_fb_setup(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
@@ -101,17 +105,17 @@ obtained as follows:
Setting the video mode
======================
-The video mode is set using the following syntax:
+The video mode is set using the following syntax::
video=XRESxYRES[-BPP][@REFRESH]
If the EP93xx video driver is built-in then the video mode is set on
-the Linux kernel command line, for example:
+the Linux kernel command line, for example::
video=ep93xx-fb:800x600-16@60
If the EP93xx video driver is built as a module then the video mode is
-set when the module is installed:
+set when the module is installed::
modprobe ep93xx-fb video=320x240
@@ -121,13 +125,14 @@ Screenpage bug
At least on the EP9315 there is a silicon bug which causes bit 27 of
the VIDSCRNPAGE (framebuffer physical offset) to be tied low. There is
-an unofficial errata for this bug at:
+an unofficial errata for this bug at::
+
http://marc.info/?l=linux-arm-kernel&m=110061245502000&w=2
By default the EP93xx framebuffer driver checks if the allocated physical
address has bit 27 set. If it does, then the memory is freed and an
error is returned. The check can be disabled by adding the following
-option when loading the driver:
+option when loading the driver::
ep93xx-fb.check_screenpage_bug=0
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
index 60a5ec04e8f0..cfb9f7c38f18 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt
@@ -1,39 +1,41 @@
+=======================
The Framebuffer Console
=======================
- The framebuffer console (fbcon), as its name implies, is a text
+The framebuffer console (fbcon), as its name implies, is a text
console running on top of the framebuffer device. It has the functionality of
any standard text console driver, such as the VGA console, with the added
features that can be attributed to the graphical nature of the framebuffer.
- In the x86 architecture, the framebuffer console is optional, and
+In the x86 architecture, the framebuffer console is optional, and
some even treat it as a toy. For other architectures, it is the only available
display device, text or graphical.
- What are the features of fbcon? The framebuffer console supports
+What are the features of fbcon? The framebuffer console supports
high resolutions, varying font types, display rotation, primitive multihead,
etc. Theoretically, multi-colored fonts, blending, aliasing, and any feature
made available by the underlying graphics card are also possible.
A. Configuration
+================
- The framebuffer console can be enabled by using your favorite kernel
+The framebuffer console can be enabled by using your favorite kernel
configuration tool. It is under Device Drivers->Graphics Support->Frame
buffer Devices->Console display driver support->Framebuffer Console Support.
Select 'y' to compile support statically or 'm' for module support. The
module will be fbcon.
- In order for fbcon to activate, at least one framebuffer driver is
+In order for fbcon to activate, at least one framebuffer driver is
required, so choose from any of the numerous drivers available. For x86
systems, they almost universally have VGA cards, so vga16fb and vesafb will
always be available. However, using a chipset-specific driver will give you
more speed and features, such as the ability to change the video mode
dynamically.
- To display the penguin logo, choose any logo available in Graphics
+To display the penguin logo, choose any logo available in Graphics
support->Bootup logo.
- Also, you will need to select at least one compiled-in font, but if
+Also, you will need to select at least one compiled-in font, but if
you don't do anything, the kernel configuration tool will select one for you,
usually an 8x16 font.
@@ -44,6 +46,7 @@ fortunate to have a driver that does not alter the graphics chip, then you
will still get a VGA console.
B. Loading
+==========
Possible scenarios:
@@ -72,33 +75,33 @@ Possible scenarios:
C. Boot options
- The framebuffer console has several, largely unknown, boot options
- that can change its behavior.
+ The framebuffer console has several, largely unknown, boot options
+ that can change its behavior.
1. fbcon=font:<name>
- Select the initial font to use. The value 'name' can be any of the
- compiled-in fonts: 10x18, 6x10, 7x14, Acorn8x8, MINI4x6,
- PEARL8x8, ProFont6x11, SUN12x22, SUN8x16, VGA8x16, VGA8x8.
+ Select the initial font to use. The value 'name' can be any of the
+ compiled-in fonts: 10x18, 6x10, 7x14, Acorn8x8, MINI4x6,
+ PEARL8x8, ProFont6x11, SUN12x22, SUN8x16, VGA8x16, VGA8x8.
Note, not all drivers can handle font with widths not divisible by 8,
- such as vga16fb.
+ such as vga16fb.
2. fbcon=scrollback:<value>[k]
- The scrollback buffer is memory that is used to preserve display
- contents that has already scrolled past your view. This is accessed
- by using the Shift-PageUp key combination. The value 'value' is any
- integer. It defaults to 32KB. The 'k' suffix is optional, and will
- multiply the 'value' by 1024.
+ The scrollback buffer is memory that is used to preserve display
+ contents that has already scrolled past your view. This is accessed
+ by using the Shift-PageUp key combination. The value 'value' is any
+ integer. It defaults to 32KB. The 'k' suffix is optional, and will
+ multiply the 'value' by 1024.
3. fbcon=map:<0123>
- This is an interesting option. It tells which driver gets mapped to
- which console. The value '0123' is a sequence that gets repeated until
- the total length is 64 which is the number of consoles available. In
- the above example, it is expanded to 012301230123... and the mapping
- will be:
+ This is an interesting option. It tells which driver gets mapped to
+ which console. The value '0123' is a sequence that gets repeated until
+ the total length is 64 which is the number of consoles available. In
+ the above example, it is expanded to 012301230123... and the mapping
+ will be::
tty | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...
fb | 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 ...
@@ -126,20 +129,20 @@ C. Boot options
4. fbcon=rotate:<n>
- This option changes the orientation angle of the console display. The
- value 'n' accepts the following:
+ This option changes the orientation angle of the console display. The
+ value 'n' accepts the following:
- 0 - normal orientation (0 degree)
- 1 - clockwise orientation (90 degrees)
- 2 - upside down orientation (180 degrees)
- 3 - counterclockwise orientation (270 degrees)
+ - 0 - normal orientation (0 degree)
+ - 1 - clockwise orientation (90 degrees)
+ - 2 - upside down orientation (180 degrees)
+ - 3 - counterclockwise orientation (270 degrees)
The angle can be changed anytime afterwards by 'echoing' the same
numbers to any one of the 2 attributes found in
/sys/class/graphics/fbcon:
- rotate - rotate the display of the active console
- rotate_all - rotate the display of all consoles
+ - rotate - rotate the display of the active console
+ - rotate_all - rotate the display of all consoles
Console rotation will only become available if Framebuffer Console
Rotation support is compiled in your kernel.
@@ -177,9 +180,9 @@ Before going on to how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an
illustration of the dependencies may help.
The console layer, as with most subsystems, needs a driver that interfaces with
-the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console:
+the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console::
-console ---> VGA driver ---> hardware.
+ console ---> VGA driver ---> hardware.
Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
from the console layer before unloading the driver. The VGA driver cannot be
@@ -187,9 +190,9 @@ unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
This is more complicated in the case of the framebuffer console (fbcon),
-because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers:
+because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers::
-console ---> fbcon ---> fbdev drivers ---> hardware
+ console ---> fbcon ---> fbdev drivers ---> hardware
The fbdev drivers cannot be unloaded if bound to fbcon, and fbcon cannot
be unloaded if it's bound to the console layer.
@@ -204,12 +207,12 @@ So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
-driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then:
+driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then::
-echo 1 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - attach framebuffer console to
- console layer
-echo 0 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - detach framebuffer console from
- console layer
+ echo 1 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - attach framebuffer console to
+ console layer
+ echo 0 > sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind - detach framebuffer console from
+ console layer
If fbcon is detached from the console layer, your boot console driver (which is
usually VGA text mode) will take over. A few drivers (rivafb and i810fb) will
@@ -223,19 +226,19 @@ restored properly. The following is one of the several methods that you can do:
2. In your kernel configuration, ensure that CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_CONSOLE is set
to 'y' or 'm'. Enable one or more of your favorite framebuffer drivers.
-3. Boot into text mode and as root run:
+3. Boot into text mode and as root run::
vbetool vbestate save > <vga state file>
- The above command saves the register contents of your graphics
- hardware to <vga state file>. You need to do this step only once as
- the state file can be reused.
+ The above command saves the register contents of your graphics
+ hardware to <vga state file>. You need to do this step only once as
+ the state file can be reused.
-4. If fbcon is compiled as a module, load fbcon by doing:
+4. If fbcon is compiled as a module, load fbcon by doing::
modprobe fbcon
-5. Now to detach fbcon:
+5. Now to detach fbcon::
vbetool vbestate restore < <vga state file> && \
echo 0 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
@@ -243,7 +246,7 @@ restored properly. The following is one of the several methods that you can do:
6. That's it, you're back to VGA mode. And if you compiled fbcon as a module,
you can unload it by 'rmmod fbcon'.
-7. To reattach fbcon:
+7. To reattach fbcon::
echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
@@ -266,82 +269,82 @@ the following:
Variation 1:
- a. Before detaching fbcon, do
+ a. Before detaching fbcon, do::
- vbetool vbemode save > <vesa state file> # do once for each vesafb mode,
- # the file can be reused
+ vbetool vbemode save > <vesa state file> # do once for each vesafb mode,
+ # the file can be reused
b. Detach fbcon as in step 5.
- c. Attach fbcon
+ c. Attach fbcon::
- vbetool vbestate restore < <vesa state file> && \
+ vbetool vbestate restore < <vesa state file> && \
echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
Variation 2:
- a. Before detaching fbcon, do:
+ a. Before detaching fbcon, do::
+
echo <ID> > /sys/class/tty/console/bind
-
- vbetool vbemode get
+ vbetool vbemode get
b. Take note of the mode number
b. Detach fbcon as in step 5.
- c. Attach fbcon:
+ c. Attach fbcon::
- vbetool vbemode set <mode number> && \
- echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
+ vbetool vbemode set <mode number> && \
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind
Samples:
========
Here are 2 sample bash scripts that you can use to bind or unbind the
-framebuffer console driver if you are on an X86 box:
+framebuffer console driver if you are on an X86 box::
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
-# Unbind fbcon
+ #!/bin/bash
+ # Unbind fbcon
-# Change this to where your actual vgastate file is located
-# Or Use VGASTATE=$1 to indicate the state file at runtime
-VGASTATE=/tmp/vgastate
+ # Change this to where your actual vgastate file is located
+ # Or Use VGASTATE=$1 to indicate the state file at runtime
+ VGASTATE=/tmp/vgastate
-# path to vbetool
-VBETOOL=/usr/local/bin
+ # path to vbetool
+ VBETOOL=/usr/local/bin
-for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
-do
- if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
- if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
- = 1 ]; then
+ for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
+ do
+ if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
+ if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
+ = 1 ]; then
if test -x $VBETOOL/vbetool; then
echo Unbinding vtcon$i
$VBETOOL/vbetool vbestate restore < $VGASTATE
echo 0 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/bind
fi
- fi
- fi
-done
+ fi
+ fi
+ done
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
-# Bind fbcon
-for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
-do
- if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
- if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
- = 1 ]; then
+::
+
+ #!/bin/bash
+ # Bind fbcon
+
+ for (( i = 0; i < 16; i++))
+ do
+ if test -x /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i; then
+ if [ `cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/name | grep -c "frame buffer"` \
+ = 1 ]; then
echo Unbinding vtcon$i
echo 1 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon$i/bind
- fi
- fi
-done
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ fi
+ fi
+ done
---
Antonino Daplas <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt b/Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt
index 58c5ae2e9f59..b50b8268de92 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- The Frame Buffer Device
- -----------------------
+=======================
+The Frame Buffer Device
+=======================
Maintained by Geert Uytterhoeven <[email protected]>
Last revised: May 10, 2001
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ other device in /dev. It's a character device using major 29; the minor
specifies the frame buffer number.
By convention, the following device nodes are used (numbers indicate the device
-minor numbers):
+minor numbers)::
0 = /dev/fb0 First frame buffer
1 = /dev/fb1 Second frame buffer
@@ -34,15 +35,15 @@ minor numbers):
31 = /dev/fb31 32nd frame buffer
For backwards compatibility, you may want to create the following symbolic
-links:
+links::
/dev/fb0current -> fb0
/dev/fb1current -> fb1
and so on...
-The frame buffer devices are also `normal' memory devices, this means, you can
-read and write their contents. You can, for example, make a screen snapshot by
+The frame buffer devices are also `normal` memory devices, this means, you can
+read and write their contents. You can, for example, make a screen snapshot by::
cp /dev/fb0 myfile
@@ -54,11 +55,11 @@ Application software that uses the frame buffer device (e.g. the X server) will
use /dev/fb0 by default (older software uses /dev/fb0current). You can specify
an alternative frame buffer device by setting the environment variable
$FRAMEBUFFER to the path name of a frame buffer device, e.g. (for sh/bash
-users):
+users)::
export FRAMEBUFFER=/dev/fb1
-or (for csh users):
+or (for csh users)::
setenv FRAMEBUFFER /dev/fb1
@@ -90,9 +91,9 @@ which data structures they work. Here's just a brief overview:
possible).
- You can get and set parts of the color map. Communication is done with 16
- bits per color part (red, green, blue, transparency) to support all
- existing hardware. The driver does all the computations needed to apply
- it to the hardware (round it down to less bits, maybe throw away
+ bits per color part (red, green, blue, transparency) to support all
+ existing hardware. The driver does all the computations needed to apply
+ it to the hardware (round it down to less bits, maybe throw away
transparency).
All this hardware abstraction makes the implementation of application programs
@@ -113,10 +114,10 @@ much trouble...
3. Frame Buffer Resolution Maintenance
--------------------------------------
-Frame buffer resolutions are maintained using the utility `fbset'. It can
+Frame buffer resolutions are maintained using the utility `fbset`. It can
change the video mode properties of a frame buffer device. Its main usage is
-to change the current video mode, e.g. during boot up in one of your /etc/rc.*
-or /etc/init.d/* files.
+to change the current video mode, e.g. during boot up in one of your `/etc/rc.*`
+or `/etc/init.d/*` files.
Fbset uses a video mode database stored in a configuration file, so you can
easily add your own modes and refer to them with a simple identifier.
@@ -129,8 +130,8 @@ The X server (XF68_FBDev) is the most notable application program for the frame
buffer device. Starting with XFree86 release 3.2, the X server is part of
XFree86 and has 2 modes:
- - If the `Display' subsection for the `fbdev' driver in the /etc/XF86Config
- file contains a
+ - If the `Display` subsection for the `fbdev` driver in the /etc/XF86Config
+ file contains a::
Modes "default"
@@ -146,7 +147,7 @@ XFree86 and has 2 modes:
same virtual desktop size. The frame buffer device that's used is still
/dev/fb0current (or $FRAMEBUFFER), but the available resolutions are
defined by /etc/XF86Config now. The disadvantage is that you have to
- specify the timings in a different format (but `fbset -x' may help).
+ specify the timings in a different format (but `fbset -x` may help).
To tune a video mode, you can use fbset or xvidtune. Note that xvidtune doesn't
work 100% with XF68_FBDev: the reported clock values are always incorrect.
@@ -172,29 +173,29 @@ retrace, the electron beam is turned off (blanked).
The speed at which the electron beam paints the pixels is determined by the
dotclock in the graphics board. For a dotclock of e.g. 28.37516 MHz (millions
-of cycles per second), each pixel is 35242 ps (picoseconds) long:
+of cycles per second), each pixel is 35242 ps (picoseconds) long::
1/(28.37516E6 Hz) = 35.242E-9 s
-If the screen resolution is 640x480, it will take
+If the screen resolution is 640x480, it will take::
640*35.242E-9 s = 22.555E-6 s
to paint the 640 (xres) pixels on one scanline. But the horizontal retrace
-also takes time (e.g. 272 `pixels'), so a full scanline takes
+also takes time (e.g. 272 `pixels`), so a full scanline takes::
(640+272)*35.242E-9 s = 32.141E-6 s
-We'll say that the horizontal scanrate is about 31 kHz:
+We'll say that the horizontal scanrate is about 31 kHz::
1/(32.141E-6 s) = 31.113E3 Hz
A full screen counts 480 (yres) lines, but we have to consider the vertical
-retrace too (e.g. 49 `lines'). So a full screen will take
+retrace too (e.g. 49 `lines`). So a full screen will take::
(480+49)*32.141E-6 s = 17.002E-3 s
-The vertical scanrate is about 59 Hz:
+The vertical scanrate is about 59 Hz::
1/(17.002E-3 s) = 58.815 Hz
@@ -212,7 +213,7 @@ influenced by the moments at which the synchronization pulses occur.
The following picture summarizes all timings. The horizontal retrace time is
the sum of the left margin, the right margin and the hsync length, while the
vertical retrace time is the sum of the upper margin, the lower margin and the
-vsync length.
+vsync length::
+----------+---------------------------------------------+----------+-------+
| | ↑ | | |
@@ -256,7 +257,8 @@ The frame buffer device expects all horizontal timings in number of dotclocks
6. Converting XFree86 timing values info frame buffer device timings
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-An XFree86 mode line consists of the following fields:
+An XFree86 mode line consists of the following fields::
+
"800x600" 50 800 856 976 1040 600 637 643 666
< name > DCF HR SH1 SH2 HFL VR SV1 SV2 VFL
@@ -271,19 +273,27 @@ The frame buffer device uses the following fields:
- vsync_len: length of vertical sync
1) Pixelclock:
+
xfree: in MHz
+
fb: in picoseconds (ps)
pixclock = 1000000 / DCF
2) horizontal timings:
+
left_margin = HFL - SH2
+
right_margin = SH1 - HR
+
hsync_len = SH2 - SH1
3) vertical timings:
+
upper_margin = VFL - SV2
+
lower_margin = SV1 - VR
+
vsync_len = SV2 - SV1
Good examples for VESA timings can be found in the XFree86 source tree,
@@ -303,9 +313,10 @@ and to the following documentation:
- The manual pages for fbset: fbset(8), fb.modes(5)
- The manual pages for XFree86: XF68_FBDev(1), XF86Config(4/5)
- The mighty kernel sources:
- o linux/drivers/video/
- o linux/include/linux/fb.h
- o linux/include/video/
+
+ - linux/drivers/video/
+ - linux/include/linux/fb.h
+ - linux/include/video/
@@ -330,14 +341,14 @@ and on its mirrors.
The latest version of fbset can be found at
- http://www.linux-fbdev.org/
+ http://www.linux-fbdev.org/
+
+
+10. Credits
+-----------
-
-10. Credits
-----------
-
This readme was written by Geert Uytterhoeven, partly based on the original
-`X-framebuffer.README' by Roman Hodek and Martin Schaller. Section 6 was
+`X-framebuffer.README` by Roman Hodek and Martin Schaller. Section 6 was
provided by Frank Neumann.
The frame buffer device abstraction was designed by Martin Schaller.
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt
index 2f640903bbb2..eecbb4026ccb 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/gxfb.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
-[This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
-
+=============
What is gxfb?
-=================
+=============
+
+.. [This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
This is a graphics framebuffer driver for AMD Geode GX2 based processors.
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ How to use it?
==============
Switching modes is done using gxfb.mode_option=<resolution>... boot
-parameter or using `fbset' program.
+parameter or using `fbset` program.
See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for more information on modedb
resolutions.
@@ -42,11 +43,12 @@ You can pass kernel command line options to gxfb with gxfb.<option>.
For example, gxfb.mode_option=800x600@75.
Accepted options:
-mode_option - specify the video mode. Of the form
- <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
-vram - size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
-vt_switch - enable vt switching during suspend/resume. The vt
- switch is slow, but harmless.
+================ ==================================================
+mode_option specify the video mode. Of the form
+ <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
+vram size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
+vt_switch enable vt switching during suspend/resume. The vt
+ switch is slow, but harmless.
+================ ==================================================
---
Andres Salomon <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt b/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
index a8e9f5bca6f3..54f00c0c0309 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/intel810.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,31 @@
+================================
Intel 810/815 Framebuffer driver
- Tony Daplas <[email protected]>
- http://i810fb.sourceforge.net
+================================
- March 17, 2002
+Tony Daplas <[email protected]>
- First Released: July 2001
- Last Update: September 12, 2005
-================================================================
+http://i810fb.sourceforge.net
+
+March 17, 2002
+
+First Released: July 2001
+Last Update: September 12, 2005
A. Introduction
+===============
This is a framebuffer driver for various Intel 810/815 compatible
graphics devices. These include:
- Intel 810
- Intel 810E
- Intel 810-DC100
- Intel 815 Internal graphics only, 100Mhz FSB
- Intel 815 Internal graphics only
- Intel 815 Internal graphics and AGP
+ - Intel 810
+ - Intel 810E
+ - Intel 810-DC100
+ - Intel 815 Internal graphics only, 100Mhz FSB
+ - Intel 815 Internal graphics only
+ - Intel 815 Internal graphics and AGP
B. Features
+============
- Choice of using Discrete Video Timings, VESA Generalized Timing
Formula, or a framebuffer specific database to set the video mode
@@ -45,10 +50,11 @@ B. Features
- Can concurrently run with xfree86 running with native i810 drivers
- Hardware Cursor Support
-
+
- Supports EDID probing either by DDC/I2C or through the BIOS
C. List of available options
+=============================
a. "video=i810fb"
enables the i810 driver
@@ -158,7 +164,7 @@ C. List of available options
(default = not set)
n. "dcolor"
- Use directcolor visual instead of truecolor for pixel depths greater
+ Use directcolor visual instead of truecolor for pixel depths greater
than 8 bpp. Useful for color tuning, such as gamma control.
Recommendation: do not set
@@ -170,32 +176,34 @@ C. List of available options
Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for usage.
D. Kernel booting
+=================
Separate each option/option-pair by commas (,) and the option from its value
-with a colon (:) as in the following:
+with a colon (:) as in the following::
-video=i810fb:option1,option2:value2
+ video=i810fb:option1,option2:value2
Sample Usage
------------
-In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line:
+In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line::
-append="video=i810fb:vram:2,xres:1024,yres:768,bpp:8,hsync1:30,hsync2:55, \
- vsync1:50,vsync2:85,accel,mtrr"
+ append="video=i810fb:vram:2,xres:1024,yres:768,bpp:8,hsync1:30,hsync2:55, \
+ vsync1:50,vsync2:85,accel,mtrr"
This will initialize the framebuffer to 1024x768 at 8bpp. The framebuffer
will use 2 MB of System RAM. MTRR support will be enabled. The refresh rate
will be computed based on the hsync1/hsync2 and vsync1/vsync2 values.
IMPORTANT:
-You must include hsync1, hsync2, vsync1 and vsync2 to enable video modes
-better than 640x480 at 60Hz. HOWEVER, if your chipset/display combination
-supports I2C and has an EDID block, you can safely exclude hsync1, hsync2,
-vsync1 and vsync2 parameters. These parameters will be taken from the EDID
-block.
+ You must include hsync1, hsync2, vsync1 and vsync2 to enable video modes
+ better than 640x480 at 60Hz. HOWEVER, if your chipset/display combination
+ supports I2C and has an EDID block, you can safely exclude hsync1, hsync2,
+ vsync1 and vsync2 parameters. These parameters will be taken from the EDID
+ block.
E. Module options
+==================
The module parameters are essentially similar to the kernel
parameters. The main difference is that you need to include a Boolean value
@@ -206,31 +214,32 @@ Example, to enable MTRR, include "mtrr=1".
Sample Usage
------------
-Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this:
+Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this::
modprobe i810fb vram=2 xres=1024 bpp=8 hsync1=30 hsync2=55 vsync1=50 \
- vsync2=85 accel=1 mtrr=1
+ vsync2=85 accel=1 mtrr=1
-Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/
+Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/::
options i810fb vram=2 xres=1024 bpp=16 hsync1=30 hsync2=55 vsync1=50 \
vsync2=85 accel=1 mtrr=1
-and just do a
+and just do a::
modprobe i810fb
F. Setup
+=========
- a. Do your usual method of configuring the kernel.
+ a. Do your usual method of configuring the kernel
- make menuconfig/xconfig/config
+ make menuconfig/xconfig/config
b. Under "Code maturity level options" enable "Prompt for development
and/or incomplete code/drivers".
- c. Enable agpgart support for the Intel 810/815 on-board graphics.
+ c. Enable agpgart support for the Intel 810/815 on-board graphics.
This is required. The option is under "Character Devices".
d. Under "Graphics Support", select "Intel 810/815" either statically
@@ -242,7 +251,7 @@ F. Setup
set 'Enable DDC Support' to 'y'. To make this option appear, set
'use VESA Generalized Timing Formula' to 'y'.
- f. If you want a framebuffer console, enable it under "Console
+ f. If you want a framebuffer console, enable it under "Console
Drivers".
g. Compile your kernel.
@@ -253,6 +262,7 @@ F. Setup
patch to see the chipset in action (or inaction :-).
G. Acknowledgment:
+===================
1. Geert Uytterhoeven - his excellent howto and the virtual
framebuffer driver code made this possible.
@@ -269,10 +279,9 @@ G. Acknowledgment:
optimizations possible.
H. Home Page:
+==============
A more complete, and probably updated information is provided at
http://i810fb.sourceforge.net.
-###########################
Tony
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
index feac4e4d6968..e2d0903f4efb 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt
@@ -1,24 +1,28 @@
+=============================================================
Intel 830M/845G/852GM/855GM/865G/915G/945G Framebuffer driver
-================================================================
+=============================================================
A. Introduction
- This is a framebuffer driver for various Intel 8xx/9xx compatible
+===============
+
+This is a framebuffer driver for various Intel 8xx/9xx compatible
graphics devices. These would include:
- Intel 830M
- Intel 845G
- Intel 852GM
- Intel 855GM
- Intel 865G
- Intel 915G
- Intel 915GM
- Intel 945G
- Intel 945GM
- Intel 945GME
- Intel 965G
- Intel 965GM
+ - Intel 830M
+ - Intel 845G
+ - Intel 852GM
+ - Intel 855GM
+ - Intel 865G
+ - Intel 915G
+ - Intel 915GM
+ - Intel 945G
+ - Intel 945GM
+ - Intel 945GME
+ - Intel 965G
+ - Intel 965GM
B. List of available options
+=============================
a. "video=intelfb"
enables the intelfb driver
@@ -39,12 +43,12 @@ B. List of available options
(default = 4 MB)
d. "voffset=<value>"
- select at what offset in MB of the logical memory to allocate the
+ select at what offset in MB of the logical memory to allocate the
framebuffer memory. The intent is to avoid the memory blocks
used by standard graphics applications (XFree86). Depending on your
- usage, adjust the value up or down, (0 for maximum usage, 63/127 MB
- for the least amount). Note, an arbitrary setting may conflict
- with XFree86.
+ usage, adjust the value up or down, (0 for maximum usage, 63/127 MB
+ for the least amount). Note, an arbitrary setting may conflict
+ with XFree86.
Recommendation: do not set
(default = 48 MB)
@@ -80,18 +84,19 @@ B. List of available options
The default parameter (not named) is the mode.
C. Kernel booting
+=================
Separate each option/option-pair by commas (,) and the option from its value
-with an equals sign (=) as in the following:
+with an equals sign (=) as in the following::
-video=intelfb:option1,option2=value2
+ video=intelfb:option1,option2=value2
Sample Usage
------------
-In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line:
+In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line::
-append="video=intelfb:mode=800x600-32@75,accel,hwcursor,vram=8"
+ append="video=intelfb:mode=800x600-32@75,accel,hwcursor,vram=8"
This will initialize the framebuffer to 800x600 at 32bpp and 75Hz. The
framebuffer will use 8 MB of System RAM. hw acceleration of text and cursor
@@ -106,8 +111,9 @@ in this directory.
D. Module options
+==================
- The module parameters are essentially similar to the kernel
+The module parameters are essentially similar to the kernel
parameters. The main difference is that you need to include a Boolean value
(1 for TRUE, and 0 for FALSE) for those options which don't need a value.
@@ -116,23 +122,24 @@ Example, to enable MTRR, include "mtrr=1".
Sample Usage
------------
-Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this:
+Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this::
modprobe intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
-Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/
+Or just add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/::
options intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
-and just do a
+and just do a::
modprobe intelfb
E. Acknowledgment:
+===================
1. Geert Uytterhoeven - his excellent howto and the virtual
- framebuffer driver code made this possible.
+ framebuffer driver code made this possible.
2. Jeff Hartmann for his agpgart code.
@@ -145,5 +152,4 @@ E. Acknowledgment:
6. Andrew Morton for his kernel patches maintenance.
-###########################
Sylvain
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/internals.txt b/Documentation/fb/internals.txt
index 9b2a2b2f3e57..696b50aa7c24 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/internals.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/internals.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,19 @@
+=============================
+Frame Buffer device internals
+=============================
This is a first start for some documentation about frame buffer device
internals.
-Geert Uytterhoeven <[email protected]>, 21 July 1998
-James Simmons <[email protected]>, Nov 26 2002
+Authors:
+
+- Geert Uytterhoeven <[email protected]>, 21 July 1998
+- James Simmons <[email protected]>, Nov 26 2002
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- *** STRUCTURES USED BY THE FRAME BUFFER DEVICE API ***
+Structures used by the frame buffer device API
+==============================================
The following structures play a role in the game of frame buffer devices. They
are defined in <linux/fb.h>.
@@ -40,19 +46,18 @@ are defined in <linux/fb.h>.
Generic information, API and low level information about a specific frame
buffer device instance (slot number, board address, ...).
- - struct `par'
+ - struct `par`
Device dependent information that uniquely defines the video mode for this
particular piece of hardware.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- *** VISUALS USED BY THE FRAME BUFFER DEVICE API ***
+Visuals used by the frame buffer device API
+===========================================
Monochrome (FB_VISUAL_MONO01 and FB_VISUAL_MONO10)
--------------------------------------------------
+--------------------------------------------------
Each pixel is either black or white.
@@ -70,7 +75,7 @@ The pixel value is broken up into red, green, and blue fields.
Direct color (FB_VISUAL_DIRECTCOLOR)
------------------------------------
-The pixel value is broken up into red, green, and blue fields, each of which
+The pixel value is broken up into red, green, and blue fields, each of which
are looked up in separate red, green, and blue lookup tables.
@@ -79,4 +84,3 @@ Grayscale displays
Grayscale and static grayscale are special variants of pseudo color and static
pseudo color, where the red, green and blue components are always equal to
each other.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt
index 38b3ca6f6ca7..796172f261cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/lxfb.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-[This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
-
+=============
What is lxfb?
-=================
+=============
+
+.. [This file is cloned from VesaFB/aty128fb]
+
This is a graphics framebuffer driver for AMD Geode LX based processors.
@@ -23,7 +25,7 @@ How to use it?
==============
Switching modes is done using lxfb.mode_option=<resolution>... boot
-parameter or using `fbset' program.
+parameter or using `fbset` program.
See Documentation/fb/modedb.txt for more information on modedb
resolutions.
@@ -42,11 +44,12 @@ You can pass kernel command line options to lxfb with lxfb.<option>.
For example, lxfb.mode_option=800x600@75.
Accepted options:
-mode_option - specify the video mode. Of the form
- <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
-vram - size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
-vt_switch - enable vt switching during suspend/resume. The vt
- switch is slow, but harmless.
+================ ==================================================
+mode_option specify the video mode. Of the form
+ <x>x<y>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
+vram size of video ram (normally auto-detected)
+vt_switch enable vt switching during suspend/resume. The vt
+ switch is slow, but harmless.
+================ ==================================================
---
Andres Salomon <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt
index b95f5bb522f2..c5a290ddb480 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/matroxfb.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
-[This file is cloned from VesaFB. Thanks go to Gerd Knorr]
-
+=================
What is matroxfb?
=================
+.. [This file is cloned from VesaFB. Thanks go to Gerd Knorr]
+
+
This is a driver for a graphic framebuffer for Matrox devices on
Alpha, Intel and PPC boxes.
@@ -23,57 +25,66 @@ How to use it?
==============
Switching modes is done using the video=matroxfb:vesa:... boot parameter
-or using `fbset' program.
+or using `fbset` program.
If you want, for example, enable a resolution of 1280x1024x24bpp you should
pass to the kernel this command line: "video=matroxfb:vesa:0x1BB".
You should compile in both vgacon (to boot if you remove you Matrox from
box) and matroxfb (for graphics mode). You should not compile-in vesafb
-unless you have primary display on non-Matrox VBE2.0 device (see
+unless you have primary display on non-Matrox VBE2.0 device (see
Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt for details).
Currently supported video modes are (through vesa:... interface, PowerMac
has [as addon] compatibility code):
-[Graphic modes]
-
-bpp | 640x400 640x480 768x576 800x600 960x720
-----+--------------------------------------------
- 4 | 0x12 0x102
- 8 | 0x100 0x101 0x180 0x103 0x188
- 15 | 0x110 0x181 0x113 0x189
- 16 | 0x111 0x182 0x114 0x18A
- 24 | 0x1B2 0x184 0x1B5 0x18C
- 32 | 0x112 0x183 0x115 0x18B
-
-
-[Graphic modes (continued)]
-
-bpp | 1024x768 1152x864 1280x1024 1408x1056 1600x1200
-----+------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 0x104 0x106
- 8 | 0x105 0x190 0x107 0x198 0x11C
- 15 | 0x116 0x191 0x119 0x199 0x11D
- 16 | 0x117 0x192 0x11A 0x19A 0x11E
- 24 | 0x1B8 0x194 0x1BB 0x19C 0x1BF
- 32 | 0x118 0x193 0x11B 0x19B
-
-
-[Text modes]
-
-text | 640x400 640x480 1056x344 1056x400 1056x480
------+------------------------------------------------
- 8x8 | 0x1C0 0x108 0x10A 0x10B 0x10C
-8x16 | 2, 3, 7 0x109
-
-You can enter these number either hexadecimal (leading `0x') or decimal
+Graphic modes
+-------------
+
+=== ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
+bpp 640x400 640x480 768x576 800x600 960x720
+=== ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
+ 4 0x12 0x102
+ 8 0x100 0x101 0x180 0x103 0x188
+ 15 0x110 0x181 0x113 0x189
+ 16 0x111 0x182 0x114 0x18A
+ 24 0x1B2 0x184 0x1B5 0x18C
+ 32 0x112 0x183 0x115 0x18B
+=== ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
+
+
+Graphic modes (continued)
+-------------------------
+
+=== ======== ======== ========= ========= =========
+bpp 1024x768 1152x864 1280x1024 1408x1056 1600x1200
+=== ======== ======== ========= ========= =========
+ 4 0x104 0x106
+ 8 0x105 0x190 0x107 0x198 0x11C
+ 15 0x116 0x191 0x119 0x199 0x11D
+ 16 0x117 0x192 0x11A 0x19A 0x11E
+ 24 0x1B8 0x194 0x1BB 0x19C 0x1BF
+ 32 0x118 0x193 0x11B 0x19B
+=== ======== ======== ========= ========= =========
+
+
+Text modes
+----------
+
+==== ======= ======= ======== ======== ========
+text 640x400 640x480 1056x344 1056x400 1056x480
+==== ======= ======= ======== ======== ========
+ 8x8 0x1C0 0x108 0x10A 0x10B 0x10C
+8x16 2, 3, 7 0x109
+==== ======= ======= ======== ======== ========
+
+You can enter these number either hexadecimal (leading `0x`) or decimal
(0x100 = 256). You can also use value + 512 to achieve compatibility
with your old number passed to vesafb.
Non-listed number can be achieved by more complicated command-line, for
-example 1600x1200x32bpp can be specified by `video=matroxfb:vesa:0x11C,depth:32'.
+example 1600x1200x32bpp can be specified by `video=matroxfb:vesa:0x11C,depth:32`.
X11
@@ -85,7 +96,7 @@ works fine.
Running another (accelerated) X-Server like XF86_SVGA works too. But (at least)
XFree servers have big troubles in multihead configurations (even on first
-head, not even talking about second). Running XFree86 4.x accelerated mga
+head, not even talking about second). Running XFree86 4.x accelerated mga
driver is possible, but you must not enable DRI - if you do, resolution and
color depth of your X desktop must match resolution and color depths of your
virtual consoles, otherwise X will corrupt accelerator settings.
@@ -96,7 +107,7 @@ SVGALib
Driver contains SVGALib compatibility code. It is turned on by choosing textual
mode for console. You can do it at boot time by using videomode
-2,3,7,0x108-0x10C or 0x1C0. At runtime, `fbset -depth 0' does this work.
+2,3,7,0x108-0x10C or 0x1C0. At runtime, `fbset -depth 0` does this work.
Unfortunately, after SVGALib application exits, screen contents is corrupted.
Switching to another console and back fixes it. I hope that it is SVGALib's
problem and not mine, but I'm not sure.
@@ -106,175 +117,188 @@ Configuration
=============
You can pass kernel command line options to matroxfb with
-`video=matroxfb:option1,option2:value2,option3' (multiple options should be
-separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:').
+`video=matroxfb:option1,option2:value2,option3` (multiple options should be
+separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:`).
Accepted options:
-mem:X - size of memory (X can be in megabytes, kilobytes or bytes)
- You can only decrease value determined by driver because of
- it always probe for memory. Default is to use whole detected
- memory usable for on-screen display (i.e. max. 8 MB).
-disabled - do not load driver; you can use also `off', but `disabled'
- is here too.
-enabled - load driver, if you have `video=matroxfb:disabled' in LILO
- configuration, you can override it by this (you cannot override
- `off'). It is default.
-noaccel - do not use acceleration engine. It does not work on Alphas.
-accel - use acceleration engine. It is default.
-nopan - create initial consoles with vyres = yres, thus disabling virtual
- scrolling.
-pan - create initial consoles as tall as possible (vyres = memory/vxres).
- It is default.
-nopciretry - disable PCI retries. It is needed for some broken chipsets,
- it is autodetected for intel's 82437. In this case device does
- not comply to PCI 2.1 specs (it will not guarantee that every
- transaction terminate with success or retry in 32 PCLK).
-pciretry - enable PCI retries. It is default, except for intel's 82437.
-novga - disables VGA I/O ports. It is default if BIOS did not enable device.
- You should not use this option, some boards then do not restart
- without power off.
-vga - preserve state of VGA I/O ports. It is default. Driver does not
- enable VGA I/O if BIOS did not it (it is not safe to enable it in
- most cases).
-nobios - disables BIOS ROM. It is default if BIOS did not enable BIOS itself.
- You should not use this option, some boards then do not restart
- without power off.
-bios - preserve state of BIOS ROM. It is default. Driver does not enable
- BIOS if BIOS was not enabled before.
-noinit - tells driver, that devices were already initialized. You should use
- it if you have G100 and/or if driver cannot detect memory, you see
- strange pattern on screen and so on. Devices not enabled by BIOS
- are still initialized. It is default.
-init - driver initializes every device it knows about.
-memtype - specifies memory type, implies 'init'. This is valid only for G200
- and G400 and has following meaning:
- G200: 0 -> 2x128Kx32 chips, 2MB onboard, probably sgram
- 1 -> 2x128Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
- 2 -> 2x256Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
- 3 -> 2x256Kx32 chips, 8MB onboard, probably sgram
- 4 -> 2x512Kx16 chips, 8/16MB onboard, probably sdram only
- 5 -> same as above
- 6 -> 4x128Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
- 7 -> 4x128Kx32 chips, 8MB onboard, probably sgram
- G400: 0 -> 2x512Kx16 SDRAM, 16/32MB
- 2x512Kx32 SGRAM, 16/32MB
- 1 -> 2x256Kx32 SGRAM, 8/16MB
- 2 -> 4x128Kx32 SGRAM, 8/16MB
- 3 -> 4x512Kx32 SDRAM, 32MB
- 4 -> 4x256Kx32 SGRAM, 16/32MB
- 5 -> 2x1Mx32 SDRAM, 32MB
- 6 -> reserved
- 7 -> reserved
- You should use sdram or sgram parameter in addition to memtype
- parameter.
-nomtrr - disables write combining on frame buffer. This slows down driver but
- there is reported minor incompatibility between GUS DMA and XFree
- under high loads if write combining is enabled (sound dropouts).
-mtrr - enables write combining on frame buffer. It speeds up video accesses
- much. It is default. You must have MTRR support enabled in kernel
- and your CPU must have MTRR (f.e. Pentium II have them).
-sgram - tells to driver that you have Gxx0 with SGRAM memory. It has no
- effect without `init'.
-sdram - tells to driver that you have Gxx0 with SDRAM memory.
- It is a default.
-inv24 - change timings parameters for 24bpp modes on Millennium and
- Millennium II. Specify this if you see strange color shadows around
- characters.
-noinv24 - use standard timings. It is the default.
-inverse - invert colors on screen (for LCD displays)
-noinverse - show true colors on screen. It is default.
-dev:X - bind driver to device X. Driver numbers device from 0 up to N,
- where device 0 is first `known' device found, 1 second and so on.
- lspci lists devices in this order.
- Default is `every' known device.
-nohwcursor - disables hardware cursor (use software cursor instead).
-hwcursor - enables hardware cursor. It is default. If you are using
- non-accelerated mode (`noaccel' or `fbset -accel false'), software
- cursor is used (except for text mode).
-noblink - disables cursor blinking. Cursor in text mode always blinks (hw
- limitation).
-blink - enables cursor blinking. It is default.
-nofastfont - disables fastfont feature. It is default.
-fastfont:X - enables fastfont feature. X specifies size of memory reserved for
- font data, it must be >= (fontwidth*fontheight*chars_in_font)/8.
+============ ===================================================================
+mem:X size of memory (X can be in megabytes, kilobytes or bytes)
+ You can only decrease value determined by driver because of
+ it always probe for memory. Default is to use whole detected
+ memory usable for on-screen display (i.e. max. 8 MB).
+disabled do not load driver; you can use also `off`, but `disabled`
+ is here too.
+enabled load driver, if you have `video=matroxfb:disabled` in LILO
+ configuration, you can override it by this (you cannot override
+ `off`). It is default.
+noaccel do not use acceleration engine. It does not work on Alphas.
+accel use acceleration engine. It is default.
+nopan create initial consoles with vyres = yres, thus disabling virtual
+ scrolling.
+pan create initial consoles as tall as possible (vyres = memory/vxres).
+ It is default.
+nopciretry disable PCI retries. It is needed for some broken chipsets,
+ it is autodetected for intel's 82437. In this case device does
+ not comply to PCI 2.1 specs (it will not guarantee that every
+ transaction terminate with success or retry in 32 PCLK).
+pciretry enable PCI retries. It is default, except for intel's 82437.
+novga disables VGA I/O ports. It is default if BIOS did not enable
+ device. You should not use this option, some boards then do not
+ restart without power off.
+vga preserve state of VGA I/O ports. It is default. Driver does not
+ enable VGA I/O if BIOS did not it (it is not safe to enable it in
+ most cases).
+nobios disables BIOS ROM. It is default if BIOS did not enable BIOS
+ itself. You should not use this option, some boards then do not
+ restart without power off.
+bios preserve state of BIOS ROM. It is default. Driver does not enable
+ BIOS if BIOS was not enabled before.
+noinit tells driver, that devices were already initialized. You should use
+ it if you have G100 and/or if driver cannot detect memory, you see
+ strange pattern on screen and so on. Devices not enabled by BIOS
+ are still initialized. It is default.
+init driver initializes every device it knows about.
+memtype specifies memory type, implies 'init'. This is valid only for G200
+ and G400 and has following meaning:
+
+ G200:
+ - 0 -> 2x128Kx32 chips, 2MB onboard, probably sgram
+ - 1 -> 2x128Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
+ - 2 -> 2x256Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
+ - 3 -> 2x256Kx32 chips, 8MB onboard, probably sgram
+ - 4 -> 2x512Kx16 chips, 8/16MB onboard, probably sdram only
+ - 5 -> same as above
+ - 6 -> 4x128Kx32 chips, 4MB onboard, probably sgram
+ - 7 -> 4x128Kx32 chips, 8MB onboard, probably sgram
+ G400:
+ - 0 -> 2x512Kx16 SDRAM, 16/32MB
+ - 2x512Kx32 SGRAM, 16/32MB
+ - 1 -> 2x256Kx32 SGRAM, 8/16MB
+ - 2 -> 4x128Kx32 SGRAM, 8/16MB
+ - 3 -> 4x512Kx32 SDRAM, 32MB
+ - 4 -> 4x256Kx32 SGRAM, 16/32MB
+ - 5 -> 2x1Mx32 SDRAM, 32MB
+ - 6 -> reserved
+ - 7 -> reserved
+
+ You should use sdram or sgram parameter in addition to memtype
+ parameter.
+nomtrr disables write combining on frame buffer. This slows down driver
+ but there is reported minor incompatibility between GUS DMA and
+ XFree under high loads if write combining is enabled (sound
+ dropouts).
+mtrr enables write combining on frame buffer. It speeds up video
+ accesses much. It is default. You must have MTRR support enabled
+ in kernel and your CPU must have MTRR (f.e. Pentium II have them).
+sgram tells to driver that you have Gxx0 with SGRAM memory. It has no
+ effect without `init`.
+sdram tells to driver that you have Gxx0 with SDRAM memory.
+ It is a default.
+inv24 change timings parameters for 24bpp modes on Millennium and
+ Millennium II. Specify this if you see strange color shadows
+ around characters.
+noinv24 use standard timings. It is the default.
+inverse invert colors on screen (for LCD displays)
+noinverse show true colors on screen. It is default.
+dev:X bind driver to device X. Driver numbers device from 0 up to N,
+ where device 0 is first `known` device found, 1 second and so on.
+ lspci lists devices in this order.
+ Default is `every` known device.
+nohwcursor disables hardware cursor (use software cursor instead).
+hwcursor enables hardware cursor. It is default. If you are using
+ non-accelerated mode (`noaccel` or `fbset -accel false`), software
+ cursor is used (except for text mode).
+noblink disables cursor blinking. Cursor in text mode always blinks (hw
+ limitation).
+blink enables cursor blinking. It is default.
+nofastfont disables fastfont feature. It is default.
+fastfont:X enables fastfont feature. X specifies size of memory reserved for
+ font data, it must be >= (fontwidth*fontheight*chars_in_font)/8.
It is faster on Gx00 series, but slower on older cards.
-grayscale - enable grayscale summing. It works in PSEUDOCOLOR modes (text,
- 4bpp, 8bpp). In DIRECTCOLOR modes it is limited to characters
- displayed through putc/putcs. Direct accesses to framebuffer
- can paint colors.
-nograyscale - disable grayscale summing. It is default.
-cross4MB - enables that pixel line can cross 4MB boundary. It is default for
- non-Millennium.
-nocross4MB - pixel line must not cross 4MB boundary. It is default for
- Millennium I or II, because of these devices have hardware
+grayscale enable grayscale summing. It works in PSEUDOCOLOR modes (text,
+ 4bpp, 8bpp). In DIRECTCOLOR modes it is limited to characters
+ displayed through putc/putcs. Direct accesses to framebuffer
+ can paint colors.
+nograyscale disable grayscale summing. It is default.
+cross4MB enables that pixel line can cross 4MB boundary. It is default for
+ non-Millennium.
+nocross4MB pixel line must not cross 4MB boundary. It is default for
+ Millennium I or II, because of these devices have hardware
limitations which do not allow this. But this option is
incompatible with some (if not all yet released) versions of
XF86_FBDev.
-dfp - enables digital flat panel interface. This option is incompatible with
- secondary (TV) output - if DFP is active, TV output must be
- inactive and vice versa. DFP always uses same timing as primary
- (monitor) output.
-dfp:X - use settings X for digital flat panel interface. X is number from
- 0 to 0xFF, and meaning of each individual bit is described in
- G400 manual, in description of DAC register 0x1F. For normal operation
- you should set all bits to zero, except lowest bit. This lowest bit
- selects who is source of display clocks, whether G400, or panel.
- Default value is now read back from hardware - so you should specify
- this value only if you are also using `init' parameter.
-outputs:XYZ - set mapping between CRTC and outputs. Each letter can have value
- of 0 (for no CRTC), 1 (CRTC1) or 2 (CRTC2), and first letter corresponds
- to primary analog output, second letter to the secondary analog output
- and third letter to the DVI output. Default setting is 100 for
- cards below G400 or G400 without DFP, 101 for G400 with DFP, and
- 111 for G450 and G550. You can set mapping only on first card,
- use matroxset for setting up other devices.
-vesa:X - selects startup videomode. X is number from 0 to 0x1FF, see table
- above for detailed explanation. Default is 640x480x8bpp if driver
- has 8bpp support. Otherwise first available of 640x350x4bpp,
- 640x480x15bpp, 640x480x24bpp, 640x480x32bpp or 80x25 text
- (80x25 text is always available).
+dfp enables digital flat panel interface. This option is incompatible
+ with secondary (TV) output - if DFP is active, TV output must be
+ inactive and vice versa. DFP always uses same timing as primary
+ (monitor) output.
+dfp:X use settings X for digital flat panel interface. X is number from
+ 0 to 0xFF, and meaning of each individual bit is described in
+ G400 manual, in description of DAC register 0x1F. For normal
+ operation you should set all bits to zero, except lowest bit. This
+ lowest bit selects who is source of display clocks, whether G400,
+ or panel. Default value is now read back from hardware - so you
+ should specify this value only if you are also using `init`
+ parameter.
+outputs:XYZ set mapping between CRTC and outputs. Each letter can have value
+ of 0 (for no CRTC), 1 (CRTC1) or 2 (CRTC2), and first letter
+ corresponds to primary analog output, second letter to the
+ secondary analog output and third letter to the DVI output.
+ Default setting is 100 for cards below G400 or G400 without DFP,
+ 101 for G400 with DFP, and 111 for G450 and G550. You can set
+ mapping only on first card, use matroxset for setting up other
+ devices.
+vesa:X selects startup videomode. X is number from 0 to 0x1FF, see table
+ above for detailed explanation. Default is 640x480x8bpp if driver
+ has 8bpp support. Otherwise first available of 640x350x4bpp,
+ 640x480x15bpp, 640x480x24bpp, 640x480x32bpp or 80x25 text
+ (80x25 text is always available).
+============ ===================================================================
-If you are not satisfied with videomode selected by `vesa' option, you
+If you are not satisfied with videomode selected by `vesa` option, you
can modify it with these options:
-xres:X - horizontal resolution, in pixels. Default is derived from `vesa'
- option.
-yres:X - vertical resolution, in pixel lines. Default is derived from `vesa'
- option.
-upper:X - top boundary: lines between end of VSYNC pulse and start of first
- pixel line of picture. Default is derived from `vesa' option.
-lower:X - bottom boundary: lines between end of picture and start of VSYNC
- pulse. Default is derived from `vesa' option.
-vslen:X - length of VSYNC pulse, in lines. Default is derived from `vesa'
- option.
-left:X - left boundary: pixels between end of HSYNC pulse and first pixel.
- Default is derived from `vesa' option.
-right:X - right boundary: pixels between end of picture and start of HSYNC
- pulse. Default is derived from `vesa' option.
-hslen:X - length of HSYNC pulse, in pixels. Default is derived from `vesa'
- option.
-pixclock:X - dotclocks, in ps (picoseconds). Default is derived from `vesa'
- option and from `fh' and `fv' options.
-sync:X - sync. pulse - bit 0 inverts HSYNC polarity, bit 1 VSYNC polarity.
- If bit 3 (value 0x08) is set, composite sync instead of HSYNC is
- generated. If bit 5 (value 0x20) is set, sync on green is turned on.
- Do not forget that if you want sync on green, you also probably
- want composite sync.
- Default depends on `vesa'.
-depth:X - Bits per pixel: 0=text, 4,8,15,16,24 or 32. Default depends on
- `vesa'.
+============ ===================================================================
+xres:X horizontal resolution, in pixels. Default is derived from `vesa`
+ option.
+yres:X vertical resolution, in pixel lines. Default is derived from `vesa`
+ option.
+upper:X top boundary: lines between end of VSYNC pulse and start of first
+ pixel line of picture. Default is derived from `vesa` option.
+lower:X bottom boundary: lines between end of picture and start of VSYNC
+ pulse. Default is derived from `vesa` option.
+vslen:X length of VSYNC pulse, in lines. Default is derived from `vesa`
+ option.
+left:X left boundary: pixels between end of HSYNC pulse and first pixel.
+ Default is derived from `vesa` option.
+right:X right boundary: pixels between end of picture and start of HSYNC
+ pulse. Default is derived from `vesa` option.
+hslen:X length of HSYNC pulse, in pixels. Default is derived from `vesa`
+ option.
+pixclock:X dotclocks, in ps (picoseconds). Default is derived from `vesa`
+ option and from `fh` and `fv` options.
+sync:X sync. pulse - bit 0 inverts HSYNC polarity, bit 1 VSYNC polarity.
+ If bit 3 (value 0x08) is set, composite sync instead of HSYNC is
+ generated. If bit 5 (value 0x20) is set, sync on green is turned
+ on. Do not forget that if you want sync on green, you also probably
+ want composite sync.
+ Default depends on `vesa`.
+depth:X Bits per pixel: 0=text, 4,8,15,16,24 or 32. Default depends on
+ `vesa`.
+============ ===================================================================
If you know capabilities of your monitor, you can specify some (or all) of
-`maxclk', `fh' and `fv'. In this case, `pixclock' is computed so that
+`maxclk`, `fh` and `fv`. In this case, `pixclock` is computed so that
pixclock <= maxclk, real_fh <= fh and real_fv <= fv.
-maxclk:X - maximum dotclock. X can be specified in MHz, kHz or Hz. Default is
- `don't care'.
-fh:X - maximum horizontal synchronization frequency. X can be specified
- in kHz or Hz. Default is `don't care'.
-fv:X - maximum vertical frequency. X must be specified in Hz. Default is
- 70 for modes derived from `vesa' with yres <= 400, 60Hz for
- yres > 400.
+============ ==================================================================
+maxclk:X maximum dotclock. X can be specified in MHz, kHz or Hz. Default is
+ `don`t care`.
+fh:X maximum horizontal synchronization frequency. X can be specified
+ in kHz or Hz. Default is `don't care`.
+fv:X maximum vertical frequency. X must be specified in Hz. Default is
+ 70 for modes derived from `vesa` with yres <= 400, 60Hz for
+ yres > 400.
+============ ==================================================================
Limitations
@@ -282,51 +306,58 @@ Limitations
There are known and unknown bugs, features and misfeatures.
Currently there are following known bugs:
- + SVGALib does not restore screen on exit
- + generic fbcon-cfbX procedures do not work on Alphas. Due to this,
- `noaccel' (and cfb4 accel) driver does not work on Alpha. So everyone
- with access to /dev/fb* on Alpha can hang machine (you should restrict
- access to /dev/fb* - everyone with access to this device can destroy
+
+ - SVGALib does not restore screen on exit
+ - generic fbcon-cfbX procedures do not work on Alphas. Due to this,
+ `noaccel` (and cfb4 accel) driver does not work on Alpha. So everyone
+ with access to `/dev/fb*` on Alpha can hang machine (you should restrict
+ access to `/dev/fb*` - everyone with access to this device can destroy
your monitor, believe me...).
- + 24bpp does not support correctly XF-FBDev on big-endian architectures.
- + interlaced text mode is not supported; it looks like hardware limitation,
+ - 24bpp does not support correctly XF-FBDev on big-endian architectures.
+ - interlaced text mode is not supported; it looks like hardware limitation,
but I'm not sure.
- + Gxx0 SGRAM/SDRAM is not autodetected.
- + If you are using more than one framebuffer device, you must boot kernel
+ - Gxx0 SGRAM/SDRAM is not autodetected.
+ - If you are using more than one framebuffer device, you must boot kernel
with 'video=scrollback:0'.
- + maybe more...
+ - maybe more...
+
And following misfeatures:
- + SVGALib does not restore screen on exit.
- + pixclock for text modes is limited by hardware to
- 83 MHz on G200
- 66 MHz on Millennium I
- 60 MHz on Millennium II
+
+ - SVGALib does not restore screen on exit.
+ - pixclock for text modes is limited by hardware to
+
+ - 83 MHz on G200
+ - 66 MHz on Millennium I
+ - 60 MHz on Millennium II
+
Because I have no access to other devices, I do not know specific
frequencies for them. So driver does not check this and allows you to
set frequency higher that this. It causes sparks, black holes and other
pretty effects on screen. Device was not destroyed during tests. :-)
- + my Millennium G200 oscillator has frequency range from 35 MHz to 380 MHz
+ - my Millennium G200 oscillator has frequency range from 35 MHz to 380 MHz
(and it works with 8bpp on about 320 MHz dotclocks (and changed mclk)).
But Matrox says on product sheet that VCO limit is 50-250 MHz, so I believe
them (maybe that chip overheats, but it has a very big cooler (G100 has
none), so it should work).
- + special mixed video/graphics videomodes of Mystique and Gx00 - 2G8V16 and
+ - special mixed video/graphics videomodes of Mystique and Gx00 - 2G8V16 and
G16V16 are not supported
- + color keying is not supported
- + feature connector of Mystique and Gx00 is set to VGA mode (it is disabled
+ - color keying is not supported
+ - feature connector of Mystique and Gx00 is set to VGA mode (it is disabled
by BIOS)
- + DDC (monitor detection) is supported through dualhead driver
- + some check for input values are not so strict how it should be (you can
+ - DDC (monitor detection) is supported through dualhead driver
+ - some check for input values are not so strict how it should be (you can
specify vslen=4000 and so on).
- + maybe more...
+ - maybe more...
+
And following features:
- + 4bpp is available only on Millennium I and Millennium II. It is hardware
+
+ - 4bpp is available only on Millennium I and Millennium II. It is hardware
limitation.
- + selection between 1:5:5:5 and 5:6:5 16bpp videomode is done by -rgba
+ - selection between 1:5:5:5 and 5:6:5 16bpp videomode is done by -rgba
option of fbset: "fbset -depth 16 -rgba 5,5,5" selects 1:5:5:5, anything
else selects 5:6:5 mode.
- + text mode uses 6 bit VGA palette instead of 8 bit (one of 262144 colors
- instead of one of 16M colors). It is due to hardware limitation of
+ - text mode uses 6 bit VGA palette instead of 8 bit (one of 262144 colors
+ instead of one of 16M colors). It is due to hardware limitation of
Millennium I/II and SVGALib compatibility.
@@ -334,42 +365,42 @@ Benchmarks
==========
It is time to redraw whole screen 1000 times in 1024x768, 60Hz. It is
time for draw 6144000 characters on screen through /dev/vcsa
-(for 32bpp it is about 3GB of data (exactly 3000 MB); for 8x16 font in
+(for 32bpp it is about 3GB of data (exactly 3000 MB); for 8x16 font in
16 seconds, i.e. 187 MBps).
Times were obtained from one older version of driver, now they are about 3%
faster, it is kernel-space only time on P-II/350 MHz, Millennium I in 33 MHz
-PCI slot, G200 in AGP 2x slot. I did not test vgacon.
+PCI slot, G200 in AGP 2x slot. I did not test vgacon::
-NOACCEL
- 8x16 12x22
- Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200
-8bpp 16.42 9.54 12.33 9.13
-16bpp 21.00 15.70 19.11 15.02
-24bpp 36.66 36.66 35.00 35.00
-32bpp 35.00 30.00 33.85 28.66
+ NOACCEL
+ 8x16 12x22
+ Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200
+ 8bpp 16.42 9.54 12.33 9.13
+ 16bpp 21.00 15.70 19.11 15.02
+ 24bpp 36.66 36.66 35.00 35.00
+ 32bpp 35.00 30.00 33.85 28.66
-ACCEL, nofastfont
- 8x16 12x22 6x11
+ ACCEL, nofastfont
+ 8x16 12x22 6x11
Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200
-8bpp 7.79 7.24 13.55 7.78 30.00 21.01
-16bpp 9.13 7.78 16.16 7.78 30.00 21.01
-24bpp 14.17 10.72 18.69 10.24 34.99 21.01
-32bpp 16.15 16.16 18.73 13.09 34.99 21.01
+ 8bpp 7.79 7.24 13.55 7.78 30.00 21.01
+ 16bpp 9.13 7.78 16.16 7.78 30.00 21.01
+ 24bpp 14.17 10.72 18.69 10.24 34.99 21.01
+ 32bpp 16.15 16.16 18.73 13.09 34.99 21.01
-ACCEL, fastfont
- 8x16 12x22 6x11
+ ACCEL, fastfont
+ 8x16 12x22 6x11
Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200 Millennium I G200
-8bpp 8.41 6.01 6.54 4.37 16.00 10.51
-16bpp 9.54 9.12 8.76 6.17 17.52 14.01
-24bpp 15.00 12.36 11.67 10.00 22.01 18.32
-32bpp 16.18 18.29* 12.71 12.74 24.44 21.00
+ 8bpp 8.41 6.01 6.54 4.37 16.00 10.51
+ 16bpp 9.54 9.12 8.76 6.17 17.52 14.01
+ 24bpp 15.00 12.36 11.67 10.00 22.01 18.32
+ 32bpp 16.18 18.29* 12.71 12.74 24.44 21.00
-TEXT
- 8x16
+ TEXT
+ 8x16
Millennium I G200
-TEXT 3.29 1.50
+ TEXT 3.29 1.50
-* Yes, it is slower than Millennium I.
+ * Yes, it is slower than Millennium I.
Dualhead G400
@@ -408,6 +439,5 @@ Driver supports dualhead G450 with some limitations:
+ kernel is not fully multihead ready, so some things are impossible to do.
+ if you compiled it as module, you must insert matroxfb_g450 and matroxfb_crtc2
into kernel.
-
---
+
Petr Vandrovec <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt b/Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt
index 237ca412582d..63e1d31a7e54 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/metronomefb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
- Metronomefb
- -----------
+===========
+Metronomefb
+===========
+
Maintained by Jaya Kumar <jayakumar.lkml.gmail.com>
+
Last revised: Mar 10, 2008
Metronomefb is a driver for the Metronome display controller. The controller
@@ -33,4 +36,3 @@ the physical media.
Metronomefb uses the deferred IO interface so that it can provide a memory
mappable frame buffer. It has been tested with tinyx (Xfbdev). It is known
to work at this time with xeyes, xclock, xloadimage, xpdf.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt b/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
index 16aa08453911..3c2397293977 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
-
- modedb default video mode support
+=================================
+modedb default video mode support
+=================================
Currently all frame buffer device drivers have their own video mode databases,
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ When a frame buffer device receives a video= option it doesn't know, it should
consider that to be a video mode option. If no frame buffer device is specified
in a video= option, fbmem considers that to be a global video mode option.
-Valid mode specifiers (mode_option argument):
+Valid mode specifiers (mode_option argument)::
<xres>x<yres>[M][R][-<bpp>][@<refresh>][i][m][eDd]
<name>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]
@@ -45,15 +45,18 @@ signals (e.g. HDMI and DVI-I). For other outputs it behaves like 'e'. If 'd'
is specified the output is disabled.
You can additionally specify which output the options matches to.
-To force the VGA output to be enabled and drive a specific mode say:
+To force the VGA output to be enabled and drive a specific mode say::
+
video=VGA-1:1280x1024@60me
-Specifying the option multiple times for different ports is possible, e.g.:
+Specifying the option multiple times for different ports is possible, e.g.::
+
video=LVDS-1:d video=HDMI-1:D
-***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo *****
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
What is the VESA(TM) Coordinated Video Timings (CVT)?
+=====================================================
From the VESA(TM) Website:
@@ -90,14 +93,14 @@ determined from its EDID. The version 1.3 of the EDID has extra 128-byte
blocks where additional timing information is placed. As of this time, there
is no support yet in the layer to parse this additional blocks.)
-CVT also introduced a new naming convention (should be seen from dmesg output):
+CVT also introduced a new naming convention (should be seen from dmesg output)::
<pix>M<a>[-R]
where: pix = total amount of pixels in MB (xres x yres)
- M = always present
- a = aspect ratio (3 - 4:3; 4 - 5:4; 9 - 15:9, 16:9; A - 16:10)
- -R = reduced blanking
+ M = always present
+ a = aspect ratio (3 - 4:3; 4 - 5:4; 9 - 15:9, 16:9; A - 16:10)
+ -R = reduced blanking
example: .48M3-R - 800x600 with reduced blanking
@@ -110,15 +113,15 @@ Note: VESA(TM) has restrictions on what is a standard CVT timing:
If one of the above are not satisfied, the kernel will print a warning but the
timings will still be calculated.
-***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo ***** oOo *****
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-To find a suitable video mode, you just call
+To find a suitable video mode, you just call::
-int __init fb_find_mode(struct fb_var_screeninfo *var,
- struct fb_info *info, const char *mode_option,
- const struct fb_videomode *db, unsigned int dbsize,
- const struct fb_videomode *default_mode,
- unsigned int default_bpp)
+ int __init fb_find_mode(struct fb_var_screeninfo *var,
+ struct fb_info *info, const char *mode_option,
+ const struct fb_videomode *db, unsigned int dbsize,
+ const struct fb_videomode *default_mode,
+ unsigned int default_bpp)
with db/dbsize your non-standard video mode database, or NULL to use the
standard video mode database.
@@ -127,12 +130,13 @@ fb_find_mode() first tries the specified video mode (or any mode that matches,
e.g. there can be multiple 640x480 modes, each of them is tried). If that
fails, the default mode is tried. If that fails, it walks over all modes.
-To specify a video mode at bootup, use the following boot options:
+To specify a video mode at bootup, use the following boot options::
+
video=<driver>:<xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@refresh]
where <driver> is a name from the table below. Valid default modes can be
found in linux/drivers/video/modedb.c. Check your driver's documentation.
-There may be more modes.
+There may be more modes::
Drivers that support modedb boot options
Boot Name Cards Supported
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt
index 36bdeff585e2..fcf2c21c8fcf 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/pvr2fb.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-$Id: pvr2fb.txt,v 1.1 2001/05/24 05:09:16 mrbrown Exp $
-
+===============
What is pvr2fb?
===============
@@ -21,37 +20,40 @@ Configuration
=============
You can pass kernel command line options to pvr2fb with
-`video=pvr2fb:option1,option2:value2,option3' (multiple options should be
-separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:').
+`video=pvr2fb:option1,option2:value2,option3` (multiple options should be
+separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:`).
+
Accepted options:
-font:X - default font to use. All fonts are supported, including the
- SUN12x22 font which is very nice at high resolutions.
+========== ==================================================================
+font:X default font to use. All fonts are supported, including the
+ SUN12x22 font which is very nice at high resolutions.
-
-mode:X - default video mode with format [xres]x[yres]-<bpp>@<refresh rate>
- The following video modes are supported:
- 640x640-16@60, 640x480-24@60, 640x480-32@60. The Dreamcast
- defaults to 640x480-16@60. At the time of writing the
- 24bpp and 32bpp modes function poorly. Work to fix that is
- ongoing
- Note: the 640x240 mode is currently broken, and should not be
- used for any reason. It is only mentioned here as a reference.
+mode:X default video mode with format [xres]x[yres]-<bpp>@<refresh rate>
+ The following video modes are supported:
+ 640x640-16@60, 640x480-24@60, 640x480-32@60. The Dreamcast
+ defaults to 640x480-16@60. At the time of writing the
+ 24bpp and 32bpp modes function poorly. Work to fix that is
+ ongoing
-inverse - invert colors on screen (for LCD displays)
+ Note: the 640x240 mode is currently broken, and should not be
+ used for any reason. It is only mentioned here as a reference.
-nomtrr - disables write combining on frame buffer. This slows down driver
- but there is reported minor incompatibility between GUS DMA and
- XFree under high loads if write combining is enabled (sound
- dropouts). MTRR is enabled by default on systems that have it
- configured and that support it.
+inverse invert colors on screen (for LCD displays)
-cable:X - cable type. This can be any of the following: vga, rgb, and
- composite. If none is specified, we guess.
+nomtrr disables write combining on frame buffer. This slows down driver
+ but there is reported minor incompatibility between GUS DMA and
+ XFree under high loads if write combining is enabled (sound
+ dropouts). MTRR is enabled by default on systems that have it
+ configured and that support it.
-output:X - output type. This can be any of the following: pal, ntsc, and
- vga. If none is specified, we guess.
+cable:X cable type. This can be any of the following: vga, rgb, and
+ composite. If none is specified, we guess.
+
+output:X output type. This can be any of the following: pal, ntsc, and
+ vga. If none is specified, we guess.
+========== ==================================================================
X11
===
@@ -59,7 +61,6 @@ X11
XF86_FBDev has been shown to work on the Dreamcast in the past - though not yet
on any 2.6 series kernel.
---
Paul Mundt <[email protected]>
+
Updated by Adrian McMenamin <[email protected]>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt
index d143a0a749f9..90177f5e7e76 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt
@@ -1,59 +1,82 @@
+================================
Driver for PXA25x LCD controller
================================
The driver supports the following options, either via
options=<OPTIONS> when modular or video=pxafb:<OPTIONS> when built in.
-For example:
+For example::
+
modprobe pxafb options=vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
-or on the kernel command line
+
+or on the kernel command line::
+
video=pxafb:vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
vmem: VIDEO_MEM_SIZE
+
Amount of video memory to allocate (can be suffixed with K or M
for kilobytes or megabytes)
mode:XRESxYRES[-BPP]
+
XRES == LCCR1_PPL + 1
+
YRES == LLCR2_LPP + 1
+
The resolution of the display in pixels
+
BPP == The bit depth. Valid values are 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16.
pixclock:PIXCLOCK
+
Pixel clock in picoseconds
left:LEFT == LCCR1_BLW + 1
+
right:RIGHT == LCCR1_ELW + 1
+
hsynclen:HSYNC == LCCR1_HSW + 1
+
upper:UPPER == LCCR2_BFW
+
lower:LOWER == LCCR2_EFR
+
vsynclen:VSYNC == LCCR2_VSW + 1
+
Display margins and sync times
color | mono => LCCR0_CMS
+
umm...
active | passive => LCCR0_PAS
+
Active (TFT) or Passive (STN) display
single | dual => LCCR0_SDS
+
Single or dual panel passive display
4pix | 8pix => LCCR0_DPD
+
4 or 8 pixel monochrome single panel data
-hsync:HSYNC
-vsync:VSYNC
+hsync:HSYNC, vsync:VSYNC
+
Horizontal and vertical sync. 0 => active low, 1 => active
high.
dpc:DPC
+
Double pixel clock. 1=>true, 0=>false
outputen:POLARITY
+
Output Enable Polarity. 0 => active low, 1 => active high
pixclockpol:POLARITY
+
pixel clock polarity
0 => falling edge, 1 => rising edge
@@ -76,44 +99,50 @@ Overlay Support for PXA27x and later LCD controllers
not for such purpose).
2. overlay framebuffer is allocated dynamically according to specified
- 'struct fb_var_screeninfo', the amount is decided by:
+ 'struct fb_var_screeninfo', the amount is decided by::
- var->xres_virtual * var->yres_virtual * bpp
+ var->xres_virtual * var->yres_virtual * bpp
bpp = 16 -- for RGB565 or RGBT555
- = 24 -- for YUV444 packed
- = 24 -- for YUV444 planar
- = 16 -- for YUV422 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/2 Cb + 1/2 Cr)
- = 12 -- for YUV420 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/4 Cb + 1/4 Cr)
+
+ bpp = 24 -- for YUV444 packed
+
+ bpp = 24 -- for YUV444 planar
+
+ bpp = 16 -- for YUV422 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/2 Cb + 1/2 Cr)
+
+ bpp = 12 -- for YUV420 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/4 Cb + 1/4 Cr)
NOTE:
a. overlay does not support panning in x-direction, thus
- var->xres_virtual will always be equal to var->xres
+ var->xres_virtual will always be equal to var->xres
b. line length of overlay(s) must be on a 32-bit word boundary,
- for YUV planar modes, it is a requirement for the component
+ for YUV planar modes, it is a requirement for the component
with minimum bits per pixel, e.g. for YUV420, Cr component
for one pixel is actually 2-bits, it means the line length
should be a multiple of 16-pixels
c. starting horizontal position (XPOS) should start on a 32-bit
- word boundary, otherwise the fb_check_var() will just fail.
+ word boundary, otherwise the fb_check_var() will just fail.
d. the rectangle of the overlay should be within the base plane,
- otherwise fail
+ otherwise fail
Applications should follow the sequence below to operate an overlay
framebuffer:
- a. open("/dev/fb[1-2]", ...)
+ a. open("/dev/fb[1-2]", ...)
b. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_VSCREENINFO, ...)
c. modify 'var' with desired parameters:
+
1) var->xres and var->yres
2) larger var->yres_virtual if more memory is required,
usually for double-buffering
3) var->nonstd for starting (x, y) and color format
4) var->{red, green, blue, transp} if RGB mode is to be used
+
d. ioctl(fd, FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO, ...)
e. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_FSCREENINFO, ...)
f. mmap
@@ -124,19 +153,21 @@ Overlay Support for PXA27x and later LCD controllers
and lengths of each component within the framebuffer.
4. var->nonstd is used to pass starting (x, y) position and color format,
- the detailed bit fields are shown below:
+ the detailed bit fields are shown below::
- 31 23 20 10 0
- +-----------------+---+----------+----------+
- | ... unused ... |FOR| XPOS | YPOS |
- +-----------------+---+----------+----------+
+ 31 23 20 10 0
+ +-----------------+---+----------+----------+
+ | ... unused ... |FOR| XPOS | YPOS |
+ +-----------------+---+----------+----------+
FOR - color format, as defined by OVERLAY_FORMAT_* in pxafb.h
- 0 - RGB
- 1 - YUV444 PACKED
- 2 - YUV444 PLANAR
- 3 - YUV422 PLANAR
- 4 - YUR420 PLANAR
+
+ - 0 - RGB
+ - 1 - YUV444 PACKED
+ - 2 - YUV444 PLANAR
+ - 3 - YUV422 PLANAR
+ - 4 - YUR420 PLANAR
XPOS - starting horizontal position
+
YPOS - starting vertical position
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt
index 2c97770bdbaa..e809d69c21a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/s3fb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
- s3fb - fbdev driver for S3 Trio/Virge chips
- ===========================================
+===========================================
+s3fb - fbdev driver for S3 Trio/Virge chips
+===========================================
Supported Hardware
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Missing Features
(alias TODO list)
* secondary (not initialized by BIOS) device support
- * big endian support
+ * big endian support
* Zorro bus support
* MMIO support
* 24 bpp mode support on more cards
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt
index f1b4220464df..67e2650e017d 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sa1100fb.txt
@@ -1,17 +1,19 @@
-[This file is cloned from VesaFB/matroxfb]
-
+=================
What is sa1100fb?
=================
+.. [This file is cloned from VesaFB/matroxfb]
+
+
This is a driver for a graphic framebuffer for the SA-1100 LCD
controller.
Configuration
==============
-For most common passive displays, giving the option
+For most common passive displays, giving the option::
-video=sa1100fb:bpp:<value>,lccr0:<value>,lccr1:<value>,lccr2:<value>,lccr3:<value>
+ video=sa1100fb:bpp:<value>,lccr0:<value>,lccr1:<value>,lccr2:<value>,lccr3:<value>
on the kernel command line should be enough to configure the
controller. The bits per pixel (bpp) value should be 4, 8, 12, or
@@ -27,13 +29,12 @@ sa1100fb_init_fbinfo(), sa1100fb_activate_var(),
sa1100fb_disable_lcd_controller(), and sa1100fb_enable_lcd_controller()
will probably be necessary.
-Accepted options:
+Accepted options::
-bpp:<value> Configure for <value> bits per pixel
-lccr0:<value> Configure LCD control register 0 (11.7.3)
-lccr1:<value> Configure LCD control register 1 (11.7.4)
-lccr2:<value> Configure LCD control register 2 (11.7.5)
-lccr3:<value> Configure LCD control register 3 (11.7.6)
+ bpp:<value> Configure for <value> bits per pixel
+ lccr0:<value> Configure LCD control register 0 (11.7.3)
+ lccr1:<value> Configure LCD control register 1 (11.7.4)
+ lccr2:<value> Configure LCD control register 2 (11.7.5)
+ lccr3:<value> Configure LCD control register 3 (11.7.6)
---
Mark Huang <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
index b994c3b10549..5b0a822e166f 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================================
SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver
================================================
@@ -8,6 +9,7 @@ supports (in theory) resolutions ranging from 1x1 to 1024x1024,
with color depths ranging from 1 to 16 bits, on STN, DSTN and TFT Panels.
Caveats:
+
* Framebuffer memory must be a large chunk allocated at the top
of Area3 (HW requirement). Because of this requirement you should NOT
make the driver a module since at runtime it may become impossible to
@@ -23,9 +25,10 @@ Caveats:
* Rotation works only 90degress clockwise, and only if horizontal
resolution is <= 320 pixels.
-files: drivers/video/sh7760fb.c
- include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h
- Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
+Files:
+ - drivers/video/sh7760fb.c
+ - include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h
+ - Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
1. Platform setup
-----------------
@@ -50,82 +53,78 @@ Suggest you take a closer look at the SH7760 Manual, Section 30.
(http://documentation.renesas.com/eng/products/mpumcu/e602291_sh7760.pdf)
The following code illustrates what needs to be done to
-get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT:
+get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT::
-====================== cut here ======================================
+ #include <linux/fb.h>
+ #include <asm/sh7760fb.h>
-#include <linux/fb.h>
-#include <asm/sh7760fb.h>
+ /*
+ * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT
+ * dotclock 25175 kHz
+ * Xres 640 Yres 480
+ * Htotal 800 Vtotal 525
+ * HsynStart 656 VsynStart 490
+ * HsynLenn 30 VsynLenn 2
+ *
+ * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen
+ * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments
+ * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given
+ * panel sync timings.
+ */
+ static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = {
+ .name = "NL6448BC26",
+ .refresh = 60,
+ .xres = 640,
+ .yres = 480,
+ .pixclock = 39683, /* in picoseconds! */
+ .hsync_len = 30,
+ .vsync_len = 2,
+ .left_margin = 114, /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */
+ .right_margin = 16, /* HSYNSTART - XRES */
+ .upper_margin = 33, /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */
+ .lower_margin = 10, /* VSYNSTART - YRES */
+ .sync = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT,
+ .vmode = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED,
+ .flag = 0,
+ };
-/*
- * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT
- * dotclock 25175 kHz
- * Xres 640 Yres 480
- * Htotal 800 Vtotal 525
- * HsynStart 656 VsynStart 490
- * HsynLenn 30 VsynLenn 2
- *
- * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen
- * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments
- * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given
- * panel sync timings.
- */
-static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = {
- .name = "NL6448BC26",
- .refresh = 60,
- .xres = 640,
- .yres = 480,
- .pixclock = 39683, /* in picoseconds! */
- .hsync_len = 30,
- .vsync_len = 2,
- .left_margin = 114, /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */
- .right_margin = 16, /* HSYNSTART - XRES */
- .upper_margin = 33, /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */
- .lower_margin = 10, /* VSYNSTART - YRES */
- .sync = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT,
- .vmode = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED,
- .flag = 0,
-};
+ static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = {
+ .def_mode = &nl6448bc26,
+ .ldmtr = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16, /* 16bit TFT panel */
+ .lddfr = LDDFR_8BPP, /* we want 8bit output */
+ .ldpmmr = 0x0070,
+ .ldpspr = 0x0500,
+ .ldaclnr = 0,
+ .ldickr = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) |
+ LDICKR_CLKDIV(1),
+ .rotate = 0,
+ .novsync = 1,
+ .blank = NULL,
+ };
-static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = {
- .def_mode = &nl6448bc26,
- .ldmtr = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16, /* 16bit TFT panel */
- .lddfr = LDDFR_8BPP, /* we want 8bit output */
- .ldpmmr = 0x0070,
- .ldpspr = 0x0500,
- .ldaclnr = 0,
- .ldickr = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) |
- LDICKR_CLKDIV(1),
- .rotate = 0,
- .novsync = 1,
- .blank = NULL,
-};
+ /* SH7760:
+ * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram
+ * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers
+ */
+ static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = {
+ [0] = {
+ .start = 0xFE300800,
+ .end = 0xFE300CFF,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+ },
+ [1] = {
+ .start = 65,
+ .end = 65,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
+ },
+ };
-/* SH7760:
- * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram
- * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers
- */
-static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = {
- [0] = {
- .start = 0xFE300800,
- .end = 0xFE300CFF,
- .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
- },
- [1] = {
- .start = 65,
- .end = 65,
- .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
- },
-};
-
-static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = {
- .dev = {
- .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448,
- },
- .name = "sh7760-lcdc",
- .id = -1,
- .resource = sh7760_lcdc_res,
- .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res),
-};
-
-====================== cut here ======================================
+ static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = {
+ .dev = {
+ .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448,
+ },
+ .name = "sh7760-lcdc",
+ .id = -1,
+ .resource = sh7760_lcdc_res,
+ .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res),
+ };
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt
index 2e68e503e72f..8f4e502ea12e 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sisfb.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+==============
What is sisfb?
==============
@@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ statement to add the parameters to the kernel command line. Please see lilo's
parameters are given with the modprobe (or insmod) command.
Example for sisfb as part of the static kernel: Add the following line to your
-lilo.conf:
+lilo.conf::
append="video=sisfb:mode:1024x768x16,mem:12288,rate:75"
-Example for sisfb as a module: Start sisfb by typing
+Example for sisfb as a module: Start sisfb by typing::
modprobe sisfb mode=1024x768x16 rate=75 mem=12288
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ described above or the vesa keyword instead of mode). If compiled as a module,
the parameter format reads mode=none or mode=1024x768x16 (or whatever mode you
want to use). Using a "=" for a ":" (and vice versa) is a huge difference!
Additionally: If you give more than one argument to the in-kernel sisfb, the
-arguments are separated with ",". For example:
+arguments are separated with ",". For example::
video=sisfb:mode:1024x768x16,rate:75,mem:12288
@@ -73,6 +73,7 @@ supported options including some explanation.
The desired display mode can be specified using the keyword "mode" with
a parameter in one of the following formats:
+
- XxYxDepth or
- XxY-Depth or
- XxY-Depth@Rate or
@@ -130,29 +131,30 @@ Configuration
(Some) accepted options:
-off - Disable sisfb. This option is only understood if sisfb is
- in-kernel, not a module.
-mem:X - size of memory for the console, rest will be used for DRI/DRM. X
- is in kilobytes. On 300 series, the default is 4096, 8192 or
+========= ==================================================================
+off Disable sisfb. This option is only understood if sisfb is
+ in-kernel, not a module.
+mem:X size of memory for the console, rest will be used for DRI/DRM. X
+ is in kilobytes. On 300 series, the default is 4096, 8192 or
16384 (each in kilobyte) depending on how much video ram the card
- has. On 315/330 series, the default is the maximum available ram
+ has. On 315/330 series, the default is the maximum available ram
(since DRI/DRM is not supported for these chipsets).
-noaccel - do not use 2D acceleration engine. (Default: use acceleration)
-noypan - disable y-panning and scroll by redrawing the entire screen.
- This is much slower than y-panning. (Default: use y-panning)
-vesa:X - selects startup videomode. X is number from 0 to 0x1FF and
- represents the VESA mode number (can be given in decimal or
+noaccel do not use 2D acceleration engine. (Default: use acceleration)
+noypan disable y-panning and scroll by redrawing the entire screen.
+ This is much slower than y-panning. (Default: use y-panning)
+vesa:X selects startup videomode. X is number from 0 to 0x1FF and
+ represents the VESA mode number (can be given in decimal or
hexadecimal form, the latter prefixed with "0x").
-mode:X - selects startup videomode. Please see above for the format of
- "X".
+mode:X selects startup videomode. Please see above for the format of
+ "X".
+========= ==================================================================
Boolean options such as "noaccel" or "noypan" are to be given without a
parameter if sisfb is in-kernel (for example "video=sisfb:noypan). If
sisfb is a module, these are to be set to 1 (for example "modprobe sisfb
noypan=1").
---
+
Thomas Winischhofer <[email protected]>
+
May 27, 2004
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt
index 187f3b3ccb6c..03e02c8042a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sm501.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,11 @@
+=======
+sm501fb
+=======
+
Configuration:
-You can pass the following kernel command line options to sm501 videoframebuffer:
+You can pass the following kernel command line options to sm501
+videoframebuffer::
sm501fb.bpp= SM501 Display driver:
Specify bits-per-pixel if not specified by 'mode'
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt
index c388442edf51..994dad3b0238 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sm712fb.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+================
What is sm712fb?
-=================
+================
This is a graphics framebuffer driver for Silicon Motion SM712 based processors.
@@ -15,13 +16,16 @@ You should not compile-in vesafb.
Currently supported video modes are:
-[Graphic modes]
+Graphic modes
+-------------
-bpp | 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
-----+--------------------------------------------
- 8 | 0x301 0x303 0x305 0x307
- 16 | 0x311 0x314 0x317 0x31A
- 24 | 0x312 0x315 0x318 0x31B
+=== ======= ======= ======== =========
+bpp 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
+=== ======= ======= ======== =========
+ 8 0x301 0x303 0x305 0x307
+ 16 0x311 0x314 0x317 0x31A
+ 24 0x312 0x315 0x318 0x31B
+=== ======= ======= ======== =========
Missing Features
================
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt
index 13db1075e4a5..8e8c1b940359 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sstfb.txt
@@ -1,93 +1,114 @@
+=====
+sstfb
+=====
Introduction
+============
- This is a frame buffer device driver for 3dfx' Voodoo Graphics
- (aka voodoo 1, aka sst1) and Voodoo² (aka Voodoo 2, aka CVG) based
- video boards. It's highly experimental code, but is guaranteed to work
- on my computer, with my "Maxi Gamer 3D" and "Maxi Gamer 3d²" boards,
- and with me "between chair and keyboard". Some people tested other
- combinations and it seems that it works.
- The main page is located at <http://sstfb.sourceforge.net>, and if
- you want the latest version, check out the CVS, as the driver is a work
- in progress, I feel uncomfortable with releasing tarballs of something
- not completely working...Don't worry, it's still more than usable
- (I eat my own dog food)
+This is a frame buffer device driver for 3dfx' Voodoo Graphics
+(aka voodoo 1, aka sst1) and Voodoo² (aka Voodoo 2, aka CVG) based
+video boards. It's highly experimental code, but is guaranteed to work
+on my computer, with my "Maxi Gamer 3D" and "Maxi Gamer 3d²" boards,
+and with me "between chair and keyboard". Some people tested other
+combinations and it seems that it works.
+The main page is located at <http://sstfb.sourceforge.net>, and if
+you want the latest version, check out the CVS, as the driver is a work
+in progress, I feel uncomfortable with releasing tarballs of something
+not completely working...Don't worry, it's still more than usable
+(I eat my own dog food)
- Please read the Bug section, and report any success or failure to me
- (Ghozlane Toumi <[email protected]>).
- BTW, If you have only one monitor , and you don't feel like playing
- with the vga passthrou cable, I can only suggest borrowing a screen
- somewhere...
+Please read the Bug section, and report any success or failure to me
+(Ghozlane Toumi <[email protected]>).
+BTW, If you have only one monitor , and you don't feel like playing
+with the vga passthrou cable, I can only suggest borrowing a screen
+somewhere...
-Installation
+Installation
+============
- This driver (should) work on ix86, with "late" 2.2.x kernel (tested
- with x = 19) and "recent" 2.4.x kernel, as a module or compiled in.
- It has been included in mainstream kernel since the infamous 2.4.10.
- You can apply the patches found in sstfb/kernel/*-2.{2|4}.x.patch,
- and copy sstfb.c to linux/drivers/video/, or apply a single patch,
- sstfb/patch-2.{2|4}.x-sstfb-yymmdd to your linux source tree.
+This driver (should) work on ix86, with "late" 2.2.x kernel (tested
+with x = 19) and "recent" 2.4.x kernel, as a module or compiled in.
+It has been included in mainstream kernel since the infamous 2.4.10.
+You can apply the patches found in `sstfb/kernel/*-2.{2|4}.x.patch`,
+and copy sstfb.c to linux/drivers/video/, or apply a single patch,
+`sstfb/patch-2.{2|4}.x-sstfb-yymmdd` to your linux source tree.
- Then configure your kernel as usual: choose "m" or "y" to 3Dfx Voodoo
- Graphics in section "console". Compile, install, have fun... and please
- drop me a report :)
+Then configure your kernel as usual: choose "m" or "y" to 3Dfx Voodoo
+Graphics in section "console". Compile, install, have fun... and please
+drop me a report :)
Module Usage
-
- Warnings.
- # You should read completely this section before issuing any command.
- # If you have only one monitor to play with, once you insmod the
+============
+
+.. warning::
+
+ #. You should read completely this section before issuing any command.
+
+ #. If you have only one monitor to play with, once you insmod the
module, the 3dfx takes control of the output, so you'll have to
plug the monitor to the "normal" video board in order to issue
the commands, or you can blindly use sst_dbg_vgapass
- in the tools directory (See Tools). The latest solution is pass the
+ in the tools directory (See Tools). The latest solution is pass the
parameter vgapass=1 when insmodding the driver. (See Kernel/Modules
Options)
- Module insertion:
- # insmod sstfb.o
- you should see some strange output from the board:
+Module insertion
+----------------
+
+ #. insmod sstfb.o
+
+ you should see some strange output from the board:
a big blue square, a green and a red small squares and a vertical
white rectangle. why? the function's name is self-explanatory:
"sstfb_test()"...
(if you don't have a second monitor, you'll have to plug your monitor
directly to the 2D videocard to see what you're typing)
- # con2fb /dev/fbx /dev/ttyx
+
+ #. con2fb /dev/fbx /dev/ttyx
+
bind a tty to the new frame buffer. if you already have a frame
- buffer driver, the voodoo fb will likely be /dev/fb1. if not,
- the device will be /dev/fb0. You can check this by doing a
+ buffer driver, the voodoo fb will likely be /dev/fb1. if not,
+ the device will be /dev/fb0. You can check this by doing a
cat /proc/fb. You can find a copy of con2fb in tools/ directory.
if you don't have another fb device, this step is superfluous,
as the console subsystem automagicaly binds ttys to the fb.
- # switch to the virtual console you just mapped. "tadaaa" ...
+ #. switch to the virtual console you just mapped. "tadaaa" ...
+
+Module removal
+--------------
+
+ #. con2fb /dev/fbx /dev/ttyx
- Module removal:
- # con2fb /dev/fbx /dev/ttyx
bind the tty to the old frame buffer so the module can be removed.
(how does it work with vgacon ? short answer : it doesn't work)
- # rmmod sstfb
+
+ #. rmmod sstfb
Kernel/Modules Options
+----------------------
- You can pass some options to the sstfb module, and via the kernel
- command line when the driver is compiled in:
- for module : insmod sstfb.o option1=value1 option2=value2 ...
- in kernel : video=sstfb:option1,option2:value2,option3 ...
-
- sstfb supports the following options :
+You can pass some options to the sstfb module, and via the kernel
+command line when the driver is compiled in:
+for module : insmod sstfb.o option1=value1 option2=value2 ...
+in kernel : video=sstfb:option1,option2:value2,option3 ...
+sstfb supports the following options:
+
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Module Kernel Description
-
+=============== =============== ===============================================
vgapass=0 vganopass Enable or disable VGA passthrou cable.
vgapass=1 vgapass When enabled, the monitor will get the signal
from the VGA board and not from the voodoo.
+
Default: nopass
mem=x mem:x Force frame buffer memory in MiB
allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 4.
+
Default: 0 (= autodetect)
inverse=1 inverse Supposed to enable inverse console.
@@ -96,79 +117,91 @@ inverse=1 inverse Supposed to enable inverse console.
clipping=1 clipping Enable or disable clipping.
clipping=0 noclipping With clipping enabled, all offscreen
reads and writes are discarded.
+
Default: enable clipping.
gfxclk=x gfxclk:x Force graphic clock frequency (in MHz).
Be careful with this option, it may be
DANGEROUS.
- Default: auto
- 50Mhz for Voodoo 1,
- 75MHz for Voodoo 2.
+
+ Default: auto
+
+ - 50Mhz for Voodoo 1,
+ - 75MHz for Voodoo 2.
slowpci=1 fastpci Enable or disable fast PCI read/writes.
slowpci=1 slowpci Default : fastpci
dev=x dev:x Attach the driver to device number x.
- 0 is the first compatible board (in
+ 0 is the first compatible board (in
lspci order)
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Tools
+=====
- These tools are mostly for debugging purposes, but you can
- find some of these interesting :
- - con2fb , maps a tty to a fbramebuffer .
- con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty5
- - sst_dbg_vgapass , changes vga passthrou. You have to recompile the
- driver with SST_DEBUG and SST_DEBUG_IOCTL set to 1
- sst_dbg_vgapass /dev/fb1 1 (enables vga cable)
- sst_dbg_vgapass /dev/fb1 0 (disables vga cable)
- - glide_reset , resets the voodoo using glide
- use this after rmmoding sstfb, if the module refuses to
- reinsert .
+These tools are mostly for debugging purposes, but you can
+find some of these interesting:
+
+- `con2fb`, maps a tty to a fbramebuffer::
+
+ con2fb /dev/fb1 /dev/tty5
+
+- `sst_dbg_vgapass`, changes vga passthrou. You have to recompile the
+ driver with SST_DEBUG and SST_DEBUG_IOCTL set to 1::
+
+ sst_dbg_vgapass /dev/fb1 1 (enables vga cable)
+ sst_dbg_vgapass /dev/fb1 0 (disables vga cable)
+
+- `glide_reset`, resets the voodoo using glide
+ use this after rmmoding sstfb, if the module refuses to
+ reinsert.
Bugs
+====
- - DO NOT use glide while the sstfb module is in, you'll most likely
- hang your computer.
- - If you see some artefacts (pixels not cleaning and stuff like that),
- try turning off clipping (clipping=0), and/or using slowpci
- - the driver don't detect the 4Mb frame buffer voodoos, it seems that
- the 2 last Mbs wrap around. looking into that .
- - The driver is 16 bpp only, 24/32 won't work.
- - The driver is not your_favorite_toy-safe. this includes SMP...
- [Actually from inspection it seems to be safe - Alan]
- - When using XFree86 FBdev (X over fbdev) you may see strange color
- patterns at the border of your windows (the pixels lose the lowest
- byte -> basically the blue component and some of the green). I'm unable
- to reproduce this with XFree86-3.3, but one of the testers has this
- problem with XFree86-4. Apparently recent Xfree86-4.x solve this
- problem.
- - I didn't really test changing the palette, so you may find some weird
- things when playing with that.
- - Sometimes the driver will not recognise the DAC, and the
- initialisation will fail. This is specifically true for
- voodoo 2 boards, but it should be solved in recent versions. Please
- contact me.
- - The 24/32 is not likely to work anytime soon, knowing that the
- hardware does ... unusual things in 24/32 bpp.
- - When used with another video board, current limitations of the linux
- console subsystem can cause some troubles, specifically, you should
- disable software scrollback, as it can oops badly ...
+- DO NOT use glide while the sstfb module is in, you'll most likely
+ hang your computer.
+- If you see some artefacts (pixels not cleaning and stuff like that),
+ try turning off clipping (clipping=0), and/or using slowpci
+- the driver don't detect the 4Mb frame buffer voodoos, it seems that
+ the 2 last Mbs wrap around. looking into that .
+- The driver is 16 bpp only, 24/32 won't work.
+- The driver is not your_favorite_toy-safe. this includes SMP...
+
+ [Actually from inspection it seems to be safe - Alan]
+
+- When using XFree86 FBdev (X over fbdev) you may see strange color
+ patterns at the border of your windows (the pixels lose the lowest
+ byte -> basically the blue component and some of the green). I'm unable
+ to reproduce this with XFree86-3.3, but one of the testers has this
+ problem with XFree86-4. Apparently recent Xfree86-4.x solve this
+ problem.
+- I didn't really test changing the palette, so you may find some weird
+ things when playing with that.
+- Sometimes the driver will not recognise the DAC, and the
+ initialisation will fail. This is specifically true for
+ voodoo 2 boards, but it should be solved in recent versions. Please
+ contact me.
+- The 24/32 is not likely to work anytime soon, knowing that the
+ hardware does ... unusual things in 24/32 bpp.
+- When used with another video board, current limitations of the linux
+ console subsystem can cause some troubles, specifically, you should
+ disable software scrollback, as it can oops badly ...
Todo
+====
- - Get rid of the previous paragraph.
- - Buy more coffee.
- - test/port to other arch.
- - try to add panning using tweeks with front and back buffer .
- - try to implement accel on voodoo2, this board can actually do a
- lot in 2D even if it was sold as a 3D only board ...
+- Get rid of the previous paragraph.
+- Buy more coffee.
+- test/port to other arch.
+- try to add panning using tweeks with front and back buffer .
+- try to implement accel on voodoo2, this board can actually do a
+ lot in 2D even if it was sold as a 3D only board ...
-ghoz.
-
---
Ghozlane Toumi <[email protected]>
-$Date: 2002/05/09 20:11:45 $
+Date: 2002/05/09 20:11:45
+
http://sstfb.sourceforge.net/README
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt
index 250083ada8fb..0c50d2134aa4 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/tgafb.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-$Id: tgafb.txt,v 1.1.2.2 2000/04/04 06:50:18 mato Exp $
-
+==============
What is tgafb?
-===============
+==============
This is a driver for DECChip 21030 based graphics framebuffers, a.k.a. TGA
cards, which are usually found in older Digital Alpha systems. The
following models are supported:
-ZLxP-E1 (8bpp, 2 MB VRAM)
-ZLxP-E2 (32bpp, 8 MB VRAM)
-ZLxP-E3 (32bpp, 16 MB VRAM, Zbuffer)
+- ZLxP-E1 (8bpp, 2 MB VRAM)
+- ZLxP-E2 (32bpp, 8 MB VRAM)
+- ZLxP-E3 (32bpp, 16 MB VRAM, Zbuffer)
This version is an almost complete rewrite of the code written by Geert
Uytterhoeven, which was based on the original TGA console code written by
@@ -18,7 +17,7 @@ Jay Estabrook.
Major new features since Linux 2.0.x:
* Support for multiple resolutions
- * Support for fixed-frequency and other oddball monitors
+ * Support for fixed-frequency and other oddball monitors
(by allowing the video mode to be set at boot time)
User-visible changes since Linux 2.2.x:
@@ -36,19 +35,22 @@ Configuration
=============
You can pass kernel command line options to tgafb with
-`video=tgafb:option1,option2:value2,option3' (multiple options should be
-separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:').
+`video=tgafb:option1,option2:value2,option3` (multiple options should be
+separated by comma, values are separated from options by `:`).
+
Accepted options:
-font:X - default font to use. All fonts are supported, including the
- SUN12x22 font which is very nice at high resolutions.
+========== ============================================================
+font:X default font to use. All fonts are supported, including the
+ SUN12x22 font which is very nice at high resolutions.
-mode:X - default video mode. The following video modes are supported:
- 640x480-60, 800x600-56, 640x480-72, 800x600-60, 800x600-72,
+mode:X default video mode. The following video modes are supported:
+ 640x480-60, 800x600-56, 640x480-72, 800x600-60, 800x600-72,
1024x768-60, 1152x864-60, 1024x768-70, 1024x768-76,
1152x864-70, 1280x1024-61, 1024x768-85, 1280x1024-70,
1152x864-84, 1280x1024-76, 1280x1024-85
-
+========== ============================================================
+
Known Issues
============
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
index 45d9de5b13a3..d651157f7486 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=========
+Tridentfb
+=========
+
Tridentfb is a framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards.
The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are
@@ -17,6 +21,7 @@ limited comparing to the range if acceleration is disabled (see list
of parameters below).
Known bugs:
+
1. The driver randomly locks up on 3DImage975 chip with acceleration
enabled. The same happens in X11 (Xorg).
2. The ramdac speeds require some more fine tuning. It is possible to
@@ -26,28 +31,30 @@ Known bugs:
How to use it?
==============
-When booting you can pass the video parameter.
-video=tridentfb
+When booting you can pass the video parameter::
-The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example.
+ video=tridentfb
-video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel
+The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example::
+
+ video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel
The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are:
-noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card)
+======== =====================================================================
+noaccel turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card)
-fp - use flat panel related stuff
-crt - assume monitor is present instead of fp
+fp use flat panel related stuff
+crt assume monitor is present instead of fp
-center - for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the
+center for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the
image, otherwise use
stretch
-memsize - integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
+memsize integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing.
-memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
+memdiff integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
more memory than it actually has. For instance mine is 192K less than
detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M.
Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of
@@ -56,12 +63,13 @@ memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
at the bottom this might help by not letting change to that mode
anymore.
-nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024
+nativex the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024
800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it.
-bpp - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
-mode - a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in
+bpp bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
+mode a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in
Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
+======== =====================================================================
Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver
misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt
index c985cb65dd06..732b37db3504 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
What is udlfb?
-===============
+==============
This is a driver for DisplayLink USB 2.0 era graphics chips.
@@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ options udlfb fb_defio=0 console=1 shadow=1
Accepted boolean options:
+=============== ================================================================
fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel
module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults.
Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not
@@ -109,7 +110,7 @@ fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel
more stable, and higher performance.
default: fb_defio=1
-console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers.
+console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers.
Can be disabled if fbcon and other clients
(e.g. X with --shared-vt) are in conflict.
default: console=1
@@ -119,6 +120,7 @@ shadow Allocate a 2nd framebuffer to shadow what's currently across
do not transmit. Spends host memory to save USB transfers.
Enabled by default. Only disable on very low memory systems.
default: shadow=1
+=============== ================================================================
Sysfs Attributes
================
@@ -126,34 +128,35 @@ Sysfs Attributes
Udlfb creates several files in /sys/class/graphics/fb?
Where ? is the sequential framebuffer id of the particular DisplayLink device
-edid If a valid EDID blob is written to this file (typically
- by a udev rule), then udlfb will use this EDID as a
- backup in case reading the actual EDID of the monitor
- attached to the DisplayLink device fails. This is
- especially useful for fixed panels, etc. that cannot
- communicate their capabilities via EDID. Reading
- this file returns the current EDID of the attached
- monitor (or last backup value written). This is
- useful to get the EDID of the attached monitor,
- which can be passed to utilities like parse-edid.
+======================== ========================================================
+edid If a valid EDID blob is written to this file (typically
+ by a udev rule), then udlfb will use this EDID as a
+ backup in case reading the actual EDID of the monitor
+ attached to the DisplayLink device fails. This is
+ especially useful for fixed panels, etc. that cannot
+ communicate their capabilities via EDID. Reading
+ this file returns the current EDID of the attached
+ monitor (or last backup value written). This is
+ useful to get the EDID of the attached monitor,
+ which can be passed to utilities like parse-edid.
-metrics_bytes_rendered 32-bit count of pixel bytes rendered
+metrics_bytes_rendered 32-bit count of pixel bytes rendered
-metrics_bytes_identical 32-bit count of how many of those bytes were found to be
- unchanged, based on a shadow framebuffer check
+metrics_bytes_identical 32-bit count of how many of those bytes were found to be
+ unchanged, based on a shadow framebuffer check
-metrics_bytes_sent 32-bit count of how many bytes were transferred over
- USB to communicate the resulting changed pixels to the
- hardware. Includes compression and protocol overhead
+metrics_bytes_sent 32-bit count of how many bytes were transferred over
+ USB to communicate the resulting changed pixels to the
+ hardware. Includes compression and protocol overhead
metrics_cpu_kcycles_used 32-bit count of CPU cycles used in processing the
- above pixels (in thousands of cycles).
+ above pixels (in thousands of cycles).
-metrics_reset Write-only. Any write to this file resets all metrics
- above to zero. Note that the 32-bit counters above
- roll over very quickly. To get reliable results, design
- performance tests to start and finish in a very short
- period of time (one minute or less is safe).
+metrics_reset Write-only. Any write to this file resets all metrics
+ above to zero. Note that the 32-bit counters above
+ roll over very quickly. To get reliable results, design
+ performance tests to start and finish in a very short
+ period of time (one minute or less is safe).
+======================== ========================================================
---
Bernie Thompson <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
index aa924196c366..d1c2523fbb33 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/uvesafb.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+==========================================================
uvesafb - A Generic Driver for VBE2+ compliant video cards
==========================================================
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ The most important limitations are:
uvesafb can be compiled either as a module, or directly into the kernel.
In both cases it supports the same set of configuration options, which
-are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.:
+are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.::
video=uvesafb:1024x768-32,mtrr:3,ywrap (compiled into the kernel)
@@ -57,85 +57,90 @@ are either given on the kernel command line or as module parameters, e.g.:
Accepted options:
+======= =========================================================
ypan Enable display panning using the VESA protected mode
- interface. The visible screen is just a window of the
- video memory, console scrolling is done by changing the
- start of the window. This option is available on x86
- only and is the default option on that architecture.
+ interface. The visible screen is just a window of the
+ video memory, console scrolling is done by changing the
+ start of the window. This option is available on x86
+ only and is the default option on that architecture.
ywrap Same as ypan, but assumes your gfx board can wrap-around
- the video memory (i.e. starts reading from top if it
- reaches the end of video memory). Faster than ypan.
- Available on x86 only.
+ the video memory (i.e. starts reading from top if it
+ reaches the end of video memory). Faster than ypan.
+ Available on x86 only.
redraw Scroll by redrawing the affected part of the screen, this
- is the default on non-x86.
+ is the default on non-x86.
+======= =========================================================
(If you're using uvesafb as a module, the above three options are
- used a parameter of the scroll option, e.g. scroll=ypan.)
+used a parameter of the scroll option, e.g. scroll=ypan.)
-vgapal Use the standard VGA registers for palette changes.
+=========== ====================================================================
+vgapal Use the standard VGA registers for palette changes.
-pmipal Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
- This is the default if the protected mode interface is
- available. Available on x86 only.
+pmipal Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
+ This is the default if the protected mode interface is
+ available. Available on x86 only.
-mtrr:n Setup memory type range registers for the framebuffer
- where n:
- 0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr)
- 3 - write-combining (default)
+mtrr:n Setup memory type range registers for the framebuffer
+ where n:
- Values other than 0 and 3 will result in a warning and will be
- treated just like 3.
+ - 0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr)
+ - 3 - write-combining (default)
-nomtrr Do not use memory type range registers.
+ Values other than 0 and 3 will result in a warning and will be
+ treated just like 3.
+
+nomtrr Do not use memory type range registers.
vremap:n
- Remap 'n' MiB of video RAM. If 0 or not specified, remap memory
- according to video mode.
+ Remap 'n' MiB of video RAM. If 0 or not specified, remap memory
+ according to video mode.
-vtotal:n
- If the video BIOS of your card incorrectly determines the total
- amount of video RAM, use this option to override the BIOS (in MiB).
+vtotal:n If the video BIOS of your card incorrectly determines the total
+ amount of video RAM, use this option to override the BIOS (in MiB).
-<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to
- modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as
- a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the
- 'mode_option' option.
+<mode> The mode you want to set, in the standard modedb format. Refer to
+ modedb.txt for a detailed description. When uvesafb is compiled as
+ a module, the mode string should be provided as a value of the
+ 'mode_option' option.
-vbemode:x
- Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's
- found in the VBE-provided list of supported modes.
- NOTE: The mode number 'x' should be specified in VESA mode number
- notation, not the Linux kernel one (eg. 257 instead of 769).
- HINT: If you use this option because normal <mode> parameter does
- not work for you and you use a X server, you'll probably want to
- set the 'nocrtc' option to ensure that the video mode is properly
- restored after console <-> X switches.
+vbemode:x Force the use of VBE mode x. The mode will only be set if it's
+ found in the VBE-provided list of supported modes.
+ NOTE: The mode number 'x' should be specified in VESA mode number
+ notation, not the Linux kernel one (eg. 257 instead of 769).
+ HINT: If you use this option because normal <mode> parameter does
+ not work for you and you use a X server, you'll probably want to
+ set the 'nocrtc' option to ensure that the video mode is properly
+ restored after console <-> X switches.
-nocrtc Do not use CRTC timings while setting the video mode. This option
- has any effect only if the Video BIOS is VBE 3.0 compliant. Use it
- if you have problems with modes set the standard way. Note that
- using this option implies that any refresh rate adjustments will
- be ignored and the refresh rate will stay at your BIOS default (60 Hz).
+nocrtc Do not use CRTC timings while setting the video mode. This option
+ has any effect only if the Video BIOS is VBE 3.0 compliant. Use it
+ if you have problems with modes set the standard way. Note that
+ using this option implies that any refresh rate adjustments will
+ be ignored and the refresh rate will stay at your BIOS default
+ (60 Hz).
-noedid Do not try to fetch and use EDID-provided modes.
+noedid Do not try to fetch and use EDID-provided modes.
-noblank Disable hardware blanking.
+noblank Disable hardware blanking.
-v86d:path
- Set path to the v86d executable. This option is only available as
- a module parameter, and not as a part of the video= string. If you
- need to use it and have uvesafb built into the kernel, use
- uvesafb.v86d="path".
+v86d:path Set path to the v86d executable. This option is only available as
+ a module parameter, and not as a part of the video= string. If you
+ need to use it and have uvesafb built into the kernel, use
+ uvesafb.v86d="path".
+=========== ====================================================================
Additionally, the following parameters may be provided. They all override the
EDID-provided values and BIOS defaults. Refer to your monitor's specs to get
the correct values for maxhf, maxvf and maxclk for your hardware.
+=========== ======================================
maxhf:n Maximum horizontal frequency (in kHz).
maxvf:n Maximum vertical frequency (in Hz).
maxclk:n Maximum pixel clock (in MHz).
+=========== ======================================
4. The sysfs interface
----------------------
@@ -146,27 +151,26 @@ additional information.
Driver attributes:
/sys/bus/platform/drivers/uvesafb
- - v86d (default: /sbin/v86d)
+ v86d
+ (default: /sbin/v86d)
+
Path to the v86d executable. v86d is started by uvesafb
if an instance of the daemon isn't already running.
Device attributes:
/sys/bus/platform/drivers/uvesafb/uvesafb.0
- - nocrtc
+ nocrtc
Use the default refresh rate (60 Hz) if set to 1.
- - oem_product_name
- - oem_product_rev
- - oem_string
- - oem_vendor
+ oem_product_name, oem_product_rev, oem_string, oem_vendor
Information about the card and its maker.
- - vbe_modes
+ vbe_modes
A list of video modes supported by the Video BIOS along with their
VBE mode numbers in hex.
- - vbe_version
+ vbe_version
A BCD value indicating the implemented VBE standard.
5. Miscellaneous
@@ -176,9 +180,9 @@ Uvesafb will set a video mode with the default refresh rate and timings
from the Video BIOS if you set pixclock to 0 in fb_var_screeninfo.
---
+
Michal Januszewski <[email protected]>
+
Last updated: 2017-10-10
Documentation of the uvesafb options is loosely based on vesafb.txt.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt
index 413bb73235be..2ed0dfb661cf 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+===============
What is vesafb?
===============
@@ -40,30 +40,35 @@ The graphic modes are NOT in the list which you get if you boot with
vga=ask and hit return. The mode you wish to use is derived from the
VESA mode number. Here are those VESA mode numbers:
- | 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
-----+-------------------------------------
-256 | 0x101 0x103 0x105 0x107
-32k | 0x110 0x113 0x116 0x119
-64k | 0x111 0x114 0x117 0x11A
-16M | 0x112 0x115 0x118 0x11B
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
+colors 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
+256 0x101 0x103 0x105 0x107
+32k 0x110 0x113 0x116 0x119
+64k 0x111 0x114 0x117 0x11A
+16M 0x112 0x115 0x118 0x11B
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
+
The video mode number of the Linux kernel is the VESA mode number plus
-0x200.
-
+0x200:
+
Linux_kernel_mode_number = VESA_mode_number + 0x200
So the table for the Kernel mode numbers are:
- | 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
-----+-------------------------------------
-256 | 0x301 0x303 0x305 0x307
-32k | 0x310 0x313 0x316 0x319
-64k | 0x311 0x314 0x317 0x31A
-16M | 0x312 0x315 0x318 0x31B
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
+colors 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x1024
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
+256 0x301 0x303 0x305 0x307
+32k 0x310 0x313 0x316 0x319
+64k 0x311 0x314 0x317 0x31A
+16M 0x312 0x315 0x318 0x31B
+====== ======= ======= ======== =========
To enable one of those modes you have to specify "vga=ask" in the
lilo.conf file and rerun LILO. Then you can type in the desired
-mode at the "vga=ask" prompt. For example if you like to use
+mode at the "vga=ask" prompt. For example if you like to use
1024x768x256 colors you have to say "305" at this prompt.
If this does not work, this might be because your BIOS does not support
@@ -72,10 +77,10 @@ Even if your board does, it might be the BIOS which does not. VESA BIOS
Extensions v2.0 are required, 1.2 is NOT sufficient. You will get a
"bad mode number" message if something goes wrong.
-1. Note: LILO cannot handle hex, for booting directly with
- "vga=mode-number" you have to transform the numbers to decimal.
+1. Note: LILO cannot handle hex, for booting directly with
+ "vga=mode-number" you have to transform the numbers to decimal.
2. Note: Some newer versions of LILO appear to work with those hex values,
- if you set the 0x in front of the numbers.
+ if you set the 0x in front of the numbers.
X11
===
@@ -120,62 +125,68 @@ Accepted options:
inverse use inverse color map
-ypan enable display panning using the VESA protected mode
- interface. The visible screen is just a window of the
- video memory, console scrolling is done by changing the
- start of the window.
- pro: * scrolling (fullscreen) is fast, because there is
+========= ======================================================================
+ypan enable display panning using the VESA protected mode
+ interface. The visible screen is just a window of the
+ video memory, console scrolling is done by changing the
+ start of the window.
+
+ pro:
+
+ * scrolling (fullscreen) is fast, because there is
no need to copy around data.
* You'll get scrollback (the Shift-PgUp thing),
the video memory can be used as scrollback buffer
- kontra: * scrolling only parts of the screen causes some
+
+ kontra:
+
+ * scrolling only parts of the screen causes some
ugly flicker effects (boot logo flickers for
example).
-ywrap Same as ypan, but assumes your gfx board can wrap-around
- the video memory (i.e. starts reading from top if it
- reaches the end of video memory). Faster than ypan.
+ywrap Same as ypan, but assumes your gfx board can wrap-around
+ the video memory (i.e. starts reading from top if it
+ reaches the end of video memory). Faster than ypan.
-redraw scroll by redrawing the affected part of the screen, this
- is the safe (and slow) default.
+redraw Scroll by redrawing the affected part of the screen, this
+ is the safe (and slow) default.
-vgapal Use the standard vga registers for palette changes.
- This is the default.
-pmipal Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
+vgapal Use the standard vga registers for palette changes.
+ This is the default.
+pmipal Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
-mtrr:n setup memory type range registers for the vesafb framebuffer
- where n:
- 0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr) (default)
- 1 - uncachable
- 2 - write-back
- 3 - write-combining
- 4 - write-through
+mtrr:n Setup memory type range registers for the vesafb framebuffer
+ where n:
- If you see the following in dmesg, choose the type that matches the
- old one. In this example, use "mtrr:2".
+ - 0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr) (default)
+ - 1 - uncachable
+ - 2 - write-back
+ - 3 - write-combining
+ - 4 - write-through
+
+ If you see the following in dmesg, choose the type that matches the
+ old one. In this example, use "mtrr:2".
...
-mtrr: type mismatch for e0000000,8000000 old: write-back new: write-combining
+mtrr: type mismatch for e0000000,8000000 old: write-back new:
+ write-combining
...
-nomtrr disable mtrr
+nomtrr disable mtrr
vremap:n
- remap 'n' MiB of video RAM. If 0 or not specified, remap memory
- according to video mode. (2.5.66 patch/idea by Antonino Daplas
- reversed to give override possibility (allocate more fb memory
- than the kernel would) to 2.4 by [email protected])
+ Remap 'n' MiB of video RAM. If 0 or not specified, remap memory
+ according to video mode. (2.5.66 patch/idea by Antonino Daplas
+ reversed to give override possibility (allocate more fb memory
+ than the kernel would) to 2.4 by [email protected])
-vtotal:n
- if the video BIOS of your card incorrectly determines the total
- amount of video RAM, use this option to override the BIOS (in MiB).
+vtotal:n If the video BIOS of your card incorrectly determines the total
+ amount of video RAM, use this option to override the BIOS (in MiB).
+========= ======================================================================
Have fun!
- Gerd
-
---
Gerd Knorr <[email protected]>
-Minor (mostly typo) changes
+Minor (mostly typo) changes
by Nico Schmoigl <[email protected]>
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
index 1cb2462a71ce..8eb7a3bb068c 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt
@@ -1,165 +1,185 @@
+=======================================================
+VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver
+=======================================================
- VIA Integration Graphic Chip Console Framebuffer Driver
-
-[Platform]
------------------------
+Platform
+--------
The console framebuffer driver is for graphics chips of
- VIA UniChrome Family(CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300,
- P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800,
- CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890,
- CN896 / P4M900, VX800, VX855)
+ VIA UniChrome Family
+ (CLE266, PM800 / CN400 / CN300,
+ P4M800CE / P4M800Pro / CN700 / VN800,
+ CX700 / VX700, K8M890, P4M890,
+ CN896 / P4M900, VX800, VX855)
-[Driver features]
-------------------------
+Driver features
+---------------
Device: CRT, LCD, DVI
- Support viafb_mode:
- CRT:
- 640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz),
- 720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz),
- 848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz),
- 1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz),
- 1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz),
- 1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz),
- 1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz)
+ Support viafb_mode::
+
+ CRT:
+ 640x480(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz), 720x480(60 Hz),
+ 720x576(60 Hz), 800x600(60, 75, 85, 100, 120 Hz),
+ 848x480(60 Hz), 856x480(60 Hz), 1024x512(60 Hz),
+ 1024x768(60, 75, 85, 100 Hz), 1152x864(75 Hz),
+ 1280x768(60 Hz), 1280x960(60 Hz), 1280x1024(60, 75, 85 Hz),
+ 1440x1050(60 Hz), 1600x1200(60, 75 Hz), 1280x720(60 Hz),
+ 1920x1080(60 Hz), 1400x1050(60 Hz), 800x480(60 Hz)
color depth: 8 bpp, 16 bpp, 32 bpp supports.
Support 2D hardware accelerator.
-[Using the viafb module]
--- -- --------------------
- Start viafb with default settings:
- #modprobe viafb
+Using the viafb module
+----------------------
+ Start viafb with default settings::
- Start viafb with user options:
- #modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
- viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
- viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
- viafb_SAMM_ON=1
+ #modprobe viafb
+
+ Start viafb with user options::
+
+ #modprobe viafb viafb_mode=800x600 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh=60
+ viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_dvi_port=DVP1
+ viafb_mode1=1024x768 viafb_bpp=16 viafb_refresh1=60
+ viafb_SAMM_ON=1
viafb_mode:
- 640x480 (default)
- 720x480
- 800x600
- 1024x768
- ......
+ - 640x480 (default)
+ - 720x480
+ - 800x600
+ - 1024x768
viafb_bpp:
- 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
+ - 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
viafb_refresh:
- 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
+ - 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
viafb_lcd_dsp_method:
- 0 : expansion (default)
- 1 : centering
+ - 0 : expansion (default)
+ - 1 : centering
viafb_lcd_mode:
- 0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default)
- 1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input
+ 0 : LCD panel with LSB data format input (default)
+ 1 : LCD panel with MSB data format input
viafb_lcd_panel_id:
- 0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
- 1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
- 2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default)
- 3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
- 4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
- 5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
- 6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
+ - 0 : Resolution: 640x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 1 : Resolution: 800x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 2 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable (default)
+ - 3 : Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 4 : Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
+ - 5 : Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
+ - 6 : Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
- 8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
- 9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
- 10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
- 11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
- 12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
- 13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
- 14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
- 15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
- 16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
- 17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
- 18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
- 19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 8 : Resolution: 800x480, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 9 : Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
+ - 10: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
+ - 11: Resolution: 1024x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
+ - 12: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
+ - 13: Resolution: 1280x1024, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
+ - 14: Resolution: 1400x1050, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
+ - 15: Resolution: 1600x1200, Channel: dual, Dithering: Disable
+ - 16: Resolution: 1366x768, Channel: single, Dithering: Disable
+ - 17: Resolution: 1024x600, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
+ - 18: Resolution: 1280x768, Channel: dual, Dithering: Enable
+ - 19: Resolution: 1280x800, Channel: single, Dithering: Enable
viafb_accel:
- 0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration
- 1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default)
+ - 0 : No 2D Hardware Acceleration
+ - 1 : 2D Hardware Acceleration (default)
viafb_SAMM_ON:
- 0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default)
- 1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable
+ - 0 : viafb_SAMM_ON disable (default)
+ - 1 : viafb_SAMM_ON enable
viafb_mode1: (secondary display device)
- 640x480 (default)
- 720x480
- 800x600
- 1024x768
- ... ...
+ - 640x480 (default)
+ - 720x480
+ - 800x600
+ - 1024x768
viafb_bpp1: (secondary display device)
- 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
+ - 8, 16, 32 (default:32)
viafb_refresh1: (secondary display device)
- 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
+ - 60, 75, 85, 100, 120 (default:60)
viafb_active_dev:
- This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...)
- DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI,
- set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of
- viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is
- secondary device.
-
- For example:
- To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use:
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI
- To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI:
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI;
-
- For DuoView case, we can use:
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI
- OR
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT...
-
- For SAMM case:
- If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use:
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
- If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use:
- modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
+ This option is used to specify active devices.(CRT, DVI, CRT+LCD...)
+ DVI stands for DVI or HDMI, E.g., If you want to enable HDMI,
+ set viafb_active_dev=DVI. In SAMM case, the previous of
+ viafb_active_dev is primary device, and the following is
+ secondary device.
+
+ For example:
+
+ To enable one device, such as DVI only, we can use::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI
+
+ To enable two devices, such as CRT+DVI::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI;
+
+ For DuoView case, we can use::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI
+
+ OR::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT...
+
+ For SAMM case:
+
+ If CRT is primary and DVI is secondary, we should use::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=CRT+DVI viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
+
+ If DVI is primary and CRT is secondary, we should use::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_active_dev=DVI+CRT viafb_SAMM_ON=1...
viafb_display_hardware_layout:
- This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip.
- 1 : LCD only
- 2 : DVI only
- 3 : LCD+DVI (default)
- 4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal)
- 16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external)
+ This option is used to specify display hardware layout for CX700 chip.
+
+ - 1 : LCD only
+ - 2 : DVI only
+ - 3 : LCD+DVI (default)
+ - 4 : LCD1+LCD2 (internal + internal)
+ - 16: LCD1+ExternalLCD2 (internal + external)
viafb_second_size:
- This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case.
- The minimal size is 16.
+ This option is used to set second device memory size(MB) in SAMM case.
+ The minimal size is 16.
viafb_platform_epia_dvi:
- This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M
- 0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default)
- 1 : DVI on EPIA - M
+ This option is used to enable DVI on EPIA - M
+
+ - 0 : No DVI on EPIA - M (default)
+ - 1 : DVI on EPIA - M
viafb_bus_width:
- When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface,
- this option should be set.
- 12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default)
- 24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS
+ When using 24 - Bit Bus Width Digital Interface,
+ this option should be set.
+
+ - 12: 12-Bit LVDS or 12-Bit TMDS (default)
+ - 24: 24-Bit LVDS or 24-Bit TMDS
viafb_device_lcd_dualedge:
- When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set.
- 0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default)
- 1 : Dual Edge Panel
+ When using Dual Edge Panel, this option should be set.
+
+ - 0 : No Dual Edge Panel (default)
+ - 1 : Dual Edge Panel
viafb_lcd_port:
- This option is used to specify LCD output port,
- available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW".
- for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0),
- we should use:
- modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0...
+ This option is used to specify LCD output port,
+ available values are "DVP0" "DVP1" "DFP_HIGHLOW" "DFP_HIGH" "DFP_LOW".
+
+ for external LCD + external DVI on CX700(External LCD is on DVP0),
+ we should use::
+
+ modprobe viafb viafb_lcd_port=DVP0...
Notes:
1. CRT may not display properly for DuoView CRT & DVI display at
@@ -176,77 +196,102 @@ Notes:
viafb doesn't support multi-head well, or it will cause screen crush.
-[Configure viafb with "fbset" tool]
------------------------------------
+Configure viafb with "fbset" tool
+---------------------------------
+
"fbset" is an inbox utility of Linux.
- 1. Inquire current viafb information, type,
- # fbset -i
- 2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates,
- # fbset <resolution-vertical_sync>
+ 1. Inquire current viafb information, type::
+
+ # fbset -i
+
+ 2. Set various resolutions and viafb_refresh rates::
+
+ # fbset <resolution-vertical_sync>
+
+ example::
+
+ # fbset "1024x768-75"
+
+ or::
+
+ # fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32
- example,
- # fbset "1024x768-75"
- or
- # fbset -g 1024 768 1024 768 32
Check the file "/etc/fb.modes" to find display modes available.
- 3. Set the color depth,
- # fbset -depth <value>
+ 3. Set the color depth::
- example,
- # fbset -depth 16
+ # fbset -depth <value>
+ example::
-[Configure viafb via /proc]
----------------------------
+ # fbset -depth 16
+
+
+Configure viafb via /proc
+-------------------------
The following files exist in /proc/viafb
supported_output_devices
+ This read-only file contains a full ',' separated list containing all
+ output devices that could be available on your platform. It is likely
+ that not all of those have a connector on your hardware but it should
+ provide a good starting point to figure out which of those names match
+ a real connector.
+
+ Example::
+
+ # cat /proc/viafb/supported_output_devices
+
+ iga1/output_devices, iga2/output_devices
+ These two files are readable and writable. iga1 and iga2 are the two
+ independent units that produce the screen image. Those images can be
+ forwarded to one or more output devices. Reading those files is a way
+ to query which output devices are currently used by an iga.
+
+ Example::
+
+ # cat /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
+
+ If there are no output devices printed the output of this iga is lost.
+ This can happen for example if only one (the other) iga is used.
+ Writing to these files allows adjusting the output devices during
+ runtime. One can add new devices, remove existing ones or switch
+ between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' separated list of device
+ names (or a single one) in the same format as the output to those
+ files. You can add a '+' or '-' as a prefix allowing simple addition
+ and removal of devices. So a prefix '+' adds the devices from your list
+ to the already existing ones, '-' removes the listed devices from the
+ existing ones and if no prefix is given it replaces all existing ones
+ with the listed ones. If you remove devices they are expected to turn
+ off. If you add devices that are already part of the other iga they are
+ removed there and added to the new one.
+
+ Examples:
+
+ Add CRT as output device to iga1::
+
+ # echo +CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
+
+ Remove (turn off) DVP1 and LVDS1 as output devices of iga2::
+
+ # echo -DVP1,LVDS1 > /proc/viafb/iga2/output_devices
+
+ Replace all iga1 output devices by CRT::
+
+ # echo CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
+
+
+Bootup with viafb
+-----------------
+
+Add the following line to your grub.conf::
- This read-only file contains a full ',' separated list containing all
- output devices that could be available on your platform. It is likely
- that not all of those have a connector on your hardware but it should
- provide a good starting point to figure out which of those names match
- a real connector.
- Example:
- # cat /proc/viafb/supported_output_devices
-
- iga1/output_devices
- iga2/output_devices
-
- These two files are readable and writable. iga1 and iga2 are the two
- independent units that produce the screen image. Those images can be
- forwarded to one or more output devices. Reading those files is a way
- to query which output devices are currently used by an iga.
- Example:
- # cat /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
- If there are no output devices printed the output of this iga is lost.
- This can happen for example if only one (the other) iga is used.
- Writing to these files allows adjusting the output devices during
- runtime. One can add new devices, remove existing ones or switch
- between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' separated list of device
- names (or a single one) in the same format as the output to those
- files. You can add a '+' or '-' as a prefix allowing simple addition
- and removal of devices. So a prefix '+' adds the devices from your list
- to the already existing ones, '-' removes the listed devices from the
- existing ones and if no prefix is given it replaces all existing ones
- with the listed ones. If you remove devices they are expected to turn
- off. If you add devices that are already part of the other iga they are
- removed there and added to the new one.
- Examples:
- Add CRT as output device to iga1
- # echo +CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
-
- Remove (turn off) DVP1 and LVDS1 as output devices of iga2
- # echo -DVP1,LVDS1 > /proc/viafb/iga2/output_devices
-
- Replace all iga1 output devices by CRT
- # echo CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices
-
-
-[Bootup with viafb]:
---------------------
- Add the following line to your grub.conf:
append = "video=viafb:viafb_mode=1024x768,viafb_bpp=32,viafb_refresh=85"
+
+VIA Framebuffer modes
+=====================
+
+.. include:: viafb.modes
+ :literal:
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt
index f654576c56b7..ba1730937dd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/vt8623fb.txt
@@ -1,13 +1,13 @@
-
- vt8623fb - fbdev driver for graphics core in VIA VT8623 chipset
- ===============================================================
+===============================================================
+vt8623fb - fbdev driver for graphics core in VIA VT8623 chipset
+===============================================================
Supported Hardware
==================
- VIA VT8623 [CLE266] chipset and its graphics core
- (known as CastleRock or Unichrome)
+VIA VT8623 [CLE266] chipset and its graphics core
+(known as CastleRock or Unichrome)
I tested vt8623fb on VIA EPIA ML-6000
--
2.20.1
There are some warnings produced when building trace. Fix them.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst | 1 +
Documentation/trace/histogram.rst | 86 ++++++++++++++++---------------
2 files changed, 45 insertions(+), 42 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
index 809b39d066ee..f60079259669 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst
@@ -1435,6 +1435,7 @@ trace has provided some very helpful debugging information.
If we prefer function graph output instead of function, we can set
display-graph option::
+
with echo 1 > options/display-graph
# tracer: irqsoff
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
index 7612c7ad5715..2a6b23f779bb 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
+++ b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst
@@ -2121,33 +2121,33 @@ The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available:
the end the event that triggered the snapshot (in this case you
can verify the timestamps between the sched_waking and
sched_switch events, which should match the time displayed in the
- global maximum):
+ global maximum)::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
- <...>-2103 [005] d..3 309.873125: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2103 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
- <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.873611: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.873613: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.873616: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
- <...>-2102 [005] d..3 309.873625: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2102 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
- <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.874624: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874626: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] dNh3 309.874628: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874630: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
- <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.874633: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
- <idle>-0 [004] d.h3 309.874757: sched_waking: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
- <idle>-0 [004] dNh4 309.874762: sched_wakeup: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
- <idle>-0 [004] d..3 309.874766: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/4 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=gnome-terminal- next_pid=1699 next_prio=120
- gnome-terminal--1699 [004] d.h2 309.874941: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 runtime=180706 [ns] vruntime=1126870572 [ns]
- <idle>-0 [003] d.s4 309.874956: sched_waking: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
- <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874960: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=7
- <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874961: sched_wakeup: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
- <idle>-0 [007] d..3 309.874963: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/7 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=rcu_sched next_pid=9 next_prio=120
- rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874973: sched_stat_runtime: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 runtime=13646 [ns] vruntime=22531430286 [ns]
- rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874978: sched_switch: prev_comm=rcu_sched prev_pid=9 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=swapper/7 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
- <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.874994: sched_migrate_task: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 orig_cpu=5 dest_cpu=1
- <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.875185: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=1
- <idle>-0 [001] d..3 309.875200: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/1 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2103 next_prio=19
+ <...>-2103 [005] d..3 309.873125: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2103 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+ <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.873611: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.873613: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.873616: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
+ <...>-2102 [005] d..3 309.873625: sched_switch: prev_comm=cyclictest prev_pid=2102 prev_prio=19 prev_state=D ==> next_comm=swapper/5 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+ <idle>-0 [005] d.h3 309.874624: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874626: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2102 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] dNh3 309.874628: sched_waking: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] dNh4 309.874630: sched_wakeup: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 target_cpu=005
+ <idle>-0 [005] d..3 309.874633: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/5 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2102 next_prio=19
+ <idle>-0 [004] d.h3 309.874757: sched_waking: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
+ <idle>-0 [004] dNh4 309.874762: sched_wakeup: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 prio=120 target_cpu=004
+ <idle>-0 [004] d..3 309.874766: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/4 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=gnome-terminal- next_pid=1699 next_prio=120
+ gnome-terminal--1699 [004] d.h2 309.874941: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-terminal- pid=1699 runtime=180706 [ns] vruntime=1126870572 [ns]
+ <idle>-0 [003] d.s4 309.874956: sched_waking: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
+ <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874960: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=7
+ <idle>-0 [003] d.s5 309.874961: sched_wakeup: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 prio=120 target_cpu=007
+ <idle>-0 [007] d..3 309.874963: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/7 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=rcu_sched next_pid=9 next_prio=120
+ rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874973: sched_stat_runtime: comm=rcu_sched pid=9 runtime=13646 [ns] vruntime=22531430286 [ns]
+ rcu_sched-9 [007] d..3 309.874978: sched_switch: prev_comm=rcu_sched prev_pid=9 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=swapper/7 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+ <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.874994: sched_migrate_task: comm=cyclictest pid=2103 prio=19 orig_cpu=5 dest_cpu=1
+ <...>-2102 [005] d..4 309.875185: sched_wake_idle_without_ipi: cpu=1
+ <idle>-0 [001] d..3 309.875200: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/1 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=cyclictest next_pid=2103 next_prio=19
- onchange(var).save(field,.. .)
@@ -2201,9 +2201,10 @@ The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available:
following the rest of the fields.
If a snaphot was taken, there is also a message indicating that,
- along with the value and event that triggered the snapshot:
+ along with the value and event that triggered the snapshot::
+
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/hist
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/tcp/tcp_probe/hist
{ dport: 1521 } hitcount: 8
changed: 10 snd_wnd: 35456 srtt: 154262 rcv_wnd: 42112
@@ -2216,14 +2217,15 @@ The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available:
{ dport: 443 } hitcount: 211
changed: 10 snd_wnd: 26960 srtt: 17379 rcv_wnd: 28800
- Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot). Details:
+ Snapshot taken (see tracing/snapshot). Details::
+
triggering value { onchange($cwnd) }: 10
triggered by event with key: { dport: 80 }
- Totals:
- Hits: 414
- Entries: 4
- Dropped: 0
+ Totals:
+ Hits: 414
+ Entries: 4
+ Dropped: 0
In the above case, the event that triggered the snapshot has the
key with dport == 80. If you look at the bucket that has 80 as
@@ -2233,18 +2235,18 @@ The following commonly-used handler.action pairs are available:
the global snapshot).
And finally, looking at the snapshot data should show at or near
- the end the event that triggered the snapshot:
+ the end the event that triggered the snapshot::
- # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/snapshot
- gnome-shell-1261 [006] dN.3 49.823113: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-shell pid=1261 runtime=49347 [ns] vruntime=1835730389 [ns]
- kworker/u16:4-773 [003] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/u16:4 prev_pid=773 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/3:2 next_pid=135 next_prio=120
- gnome-shell-1261 [006] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=gnome-shell prev_pid=1261 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/6:2 next_pid=387 next_prio=120
- kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823118: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/3:2 pid=135 runtime=5339 [ns] vruntime=17815800388 [ns]
- kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823120: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/6:2 pid=387 runtime=9594 [ns] vruntime=14589605367 [ns]
- kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823122: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/6:2 prev_pid=387 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=gnome-shell next_pid=1261 next_prio=120
- kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823123: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/3:2 prev_pid=135 prev_prio=120 prev_state=T ==> next_comm=swapper/3 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
- <idle>-0 [004] ..s7 49.823798: tcp_probe: src=10.0.0.10:54326 dest=23.215.104.193:80 mark=0x0 length=32 snd_nxt=0xe3ae2ff5 snd_una=0xe3ae2ecd snd_cwnd=10 ssthresh=2147483647 snd_wnd=28960 srtt=19604 rcv_wnd=29312
+ gnome-shell-1261 [006] dN.3 49.823113: sched_stat_runtime: comm=gnome-shell pid=1261 runtime=49347 [ns] vruntime=1835730389 [ns]
+ kworker/u16:4-773 [003] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/u16:4 prev_pid=773 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/3:2 next_pid=135 next_prio=120
+ gnome-shell-1261 [006] d..3 49.823114: sched_switch: prev_comm=gnome-shell prev_pid=1261 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/6:2 next_pid=387 next_prio=120
+ kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823118: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/3:2 pid=135 runtime=5339 [ns] vruntime=17815800388 [ns]
+ kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823120: sched_stat_runtime: comm=kworker/6:2 pid=387 runtime=9594 [ns] vruntime=14589605367 [ns]
+ kworker/6:2-387 [006] d..3 49.823122: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/6:2 prev_pid=387 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=gnome-shell next_pid=1261 next_prio=120
+ kworker/3:2-135 [003] d..3 49.823123: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/3:2 prev_pid=135 prev_prio=120 prev_state=T ==> next_comm=swapper/3 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
+ <idle>-0 [004] ..s7 49.823798: tcp_probe: src=10.0.0.10:54326 dest=23.215.104.193:80 mark=0x0 length=32 snd_nxt=0xe3ae2ff5 snd_una=0xe3ae2ecd snd_cwnd=10 ssthresh=2147483647 snd_wnd=28960 srtt=19604 rcv_wnd=29312
3. User space creating a trigger
--------------------------------
--
2.20.1
The stuff there is almost already at ReST format. A
conversion for them is trivial: just add a missing titles
and fix some scape codes for them to match ReST syntax.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd | 178 +++++++++++++------------
Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt | 27 ++--
2 files changed, 108 insertions(+), 97 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
index a5f2a7f1ff46..dadc94ef6b6c 100644
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
@@ -1,18 +1,20 @@
IDE-CD driver documentation
-Originally by scott snyder <[email protected]> (19 May 1996)
-Carrying on the torch is: Erik Andersen <[email protected]>
-New maintainers (19 Oct 1998): Jens Axboe <[email protected]>
+===========================
+
+:Originally by: scott snyder <[email protected]> (19 May 1996)
+:Carrying on the torch is: Erik Andersen <[email protected]>
+:New maintainers (19 Oct 1998): Jens Axboe <[email protected]>
1. Introduction
---------------
-The ide-cd driver should work with all ATAPI ver 1.2 to ATAPI 2.6 compliant
+The ide-cd driver should work with all ATAPI ver 1.2 to ATAPI 2.6 compliant
CDROM drives which attach to an IDE interface. Note that some CDROM vendors
(including Mitsumi, Sony, Creative, Aztech, and Goldstar) have made
both ATAPI-compliant drives and drives which use a proprietary
interface. If your drive uses one of those proprietary interfaces,
this driver will not work with it (but one of the other CDROM drivers
-probably will). This driver will not work with `ATAPI' drives which
+probably will). This driver will not work with `ATAPI` drives which
attach to the parallel port. In addition, there is at least one drive
(CyCDROM CR520ie) which attaches to the IDE port but is not ATAPI;
this driver will not work with drives like that either (but see the
@@ -31,7 +33,7 @@ This driver provides the following features:
from audio tracks. The program cdda2wav can be used for this.
Note, however, that only some drives actually support this.
- - There is now support for CDROM changers which comply with the
+ - There is now support for CDROM changers which comply with the
ATAPI 2.6 draft standard (such as the NEC CDR-251). This additional
functionality includes a function call to query which slot is the
currently selected slot, a function call to query which slots contain
@@ -49,11 +51,11 @@ This driver provides the following features:
driver.
1. Make sure that the ide and ide-cd drivers are compiled into the
- kernel you're using. When configuring the kernel, in the section
- entitled "Floppy, IDE, and other block devices", say either `Y'
- (which will compile the support directly into the kernel) or `M'
+ kernel you're using. When configuring the kernel, in the section
+ entitled "Floppy, IDE, and other block devices", say either `Y`
+ (which will compile the support directly into the kernel) or `M`
(to compile support as a module which can be loaded and unloaded)
- to the options:
+ to the options::
ATA/ATAPI/MFM/RLL support
Include IDE/ATAPI CDROM support
@@ -72,35 +74,35 @@ This driver provides the following features:
address and an IRQ number, the standard assignments being
0x1f0 and 14 for the primary interface and 0x170 and 15 for the
secondary interface. Each interface can control up to two devices,
- where each device can be a hard drive, a CDROM drive, a floppy drive,
- or a tape drive. The two devices on an interface are called `master'
- and `slave'; this is usually selectable via a jumper on the drive.
+ where each device can be a hard drive, a CDROM drive, a floppy drive,
+ or a tape drive. The two devices on an interface are called `master`
+ and `slave`; this is usually selectable via a jumper on the drive.
Linux names these devices as follows. The master and slave devices
- on the primary IDE interface are called `hda' and `hdb',
+ on the primary IDE interface are called `hda` and `hdb`,
respectively. The drives on the secondary interface are called
- `hdc' and `hdd'. (Interfaces at other locations get other letters
+ `hdc` and `hdd`. (Interfaces at other locations get other letters
in the third position; see Documentation/ide/ide.txt.)
If you want your CDROM drive to be found automatically by the
driver, you should make sure your IDE interface uses either the
primary or secondary addresses mentioned above. In addition, if
the CDROM drive is the only device on the IDE interface, it should
- be jumpered as `master'. (If for some reason you cannot configure
+ be jumpered as `master`. (If for some reason you cannot configure
your system in this manner, you can probably still use the driver.
You may have to pass extra configuration information to the kernel
when you boot, however. See Documentation/ide/ide.txt for more
information.)
4. Boot the system. If the drive is recognized, you should see a
- message which looks like
+ message which looks like::
hdb: NEC CD-ROM DRIVE:260, ATAPI CDROM drive
If you do not see this, see section 5 below.
5. You may want to create a symbolic link /dev/cdrom pointing to the
- actual device. You can do this with the command
+ actual device. You can do this with the command::
ln -s /dev/hdX /dev/cdrom
@@ -108,14 +110,14 @@ This driver provides the following features:
drive is installed.
6. You should be able to see any error messages from the driver with
- the `dmesg' command.
+ the `dmesg` command.
3. Basic usage
--------------
-An ISO 9660 CDROM can be mounted by putting the disc in the drive and
-typing (as root)
+An ISO 9660 CDROM can be mounted by putting the disc in the drive and
+typing (as root)::
mount -t iso9660 /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom
@@ -123,7 +125,7 @@ where it is assumed that /dev/cdrom is a link pointing to the actual
device (as described in step 5 of the last section) and /mnt/cdrom is
an empty directory. You should now be able to see the contents of the
CDROM under the /mnt/cdrom directory. If you want to eject the CDROM,
-you must first dismount it with a command like
+you must first dismount it with a command like::
umount /mnt/cdrom
@@ -148,7 +150,7 @@ such as cdda2wav. The only types of drive which I've heard support
this are Sony and Toshiba drives. You will get errors if you try to
use this function on a drive which does not support it.
-For supported changers, you can use the `cdchange' program (appended to
+For supported changers, you can use the `cdchange` program (appended to
the end of this file) to switch between changer slots. Note that the
drive should be unmounted before attempting this. The program takes
two arguments: the CDROM device, and the slot number to which you wish
@@ -165,7 +167,7 @@ Documentation/ide/ide.txt for current information about the underlying
IDE support code. Some of these items apply only to earlier versions
of the driver, but are mentioned here for completeness.
-In most cases, you should probably check with `dmesg' for any errors
+In most cases, you should probably check with `dmesg` for any errors
from the driver.
a. Drive is not detected during booting.
@@ -184,9 +186,9 @@ a. Drive is not detected during booting.
- If the autoprobing is not finding your drive, you can tell the
driver to assume that one exists by using a lilo option of the
- form `hdX=cdrom', where X is the drive letter corresponding to
- where your drive is installed. Note that if you do this and you
- see a boot message like
+ form `hdX=cdrom`, where X is the drive letter corresponding to
+ where your drive is installed. Note that if you do this and you
+ see a boot message like::
hdX: ATAPI cdrom (?)
@@ -220,7 +222,7 @@ b. Timeout/IRQ errors.
probably not making it to the host.
- IRQ problems may also be indicated by the message
- `IRQ probe failed (<n>)' while booting. If <n> is zero, that
+ `IRQ probe failed (<n>)` while booting. If <n> is zero, that
means that the system did not see an interrupt from the drive when
it was expecting one (on any feasible IRQ). If <n> is negative,
that means the system saw interrupts on multiple IRQ lines, when
@@ -240,27 +242,27 @@ b. Timeout/IRQ errors.
there are hardware problems with the interrupt setup; they
apparently don't use interrupts.
- - If you own a Pioneer DR-A24X, you _will_ get nasty error messages
+ - If you own a Pioneer DR-A24X, you _will_ get nasty error messages
on boot such as "irq timeout: status=0x50 { DriveReady SeekComplete }"
The Pioneer DR-A24X CDROM drives are fairly popular these days.
Unfortunately, these drives seem to become very confused when we perform
the standard Linux ATA disk drive probe. If you own one of these drives,
- you can bypass the ATA probing which confuses these CDROM drives, by
- adding `append="hdX=noprobe hdX=cdrom"' to your lilo.conf file and running
- lilo (again where X is the drive letter corresponding to where your drive
+ you can bypass the ATA probing which confuses these CDROM drives, by
+ adding `append="hdX=noprobe hdX=cdrom"` to your lilo.conf file and running
+ lilo (again where X is the drive letter corresponding to where your drive
is installed.)
-
+
c. System hangups.
- If the system locks up when you try to access the CDROM, the most
likely cause is that you have a buggy IDE adapter which doesn't
properly handle simultaneous transactions on multiple interfaces.
The most notorious of these is the CMD640B chip. This problem can
- be worked around by specifying the `serialize' option when
+ be worked around by specifying the `serialize` option when
booting. Recent kernels should be able to detect the need for
this automatically in most cases, but the detection is not
foolproof. See Documentation/ide/ide.txt for more information
- about the `serialize' option and the CMD640B.
+ about the `serialize` option and the CMD640B.
- Note that many MS-DOS CDROM drivers will work with such buggy
hardware, apparently because they never attempt to overlap CDROM
@@ -269,14 +271,14 @@ c. System hangups.
d. Can't mount a CDROM.
- - If you get errors from mount, it may help to check `dmesg' to see
+ - If you get errors from mount, it may help to check `dmesg` to see
if there are any more specific errors from the driver or from the
filesystem.
- Make sure there's a CDROM loaded in the drive, and that's it's an
ISO 9660 disc. You can't mount an audio CD.
- - With the CDROM in the drive and unmounted, try something like
+ - With the CDROM in the drive and unmounted, try something like::
cat /dev/cdrom | od | more
@@ -284,9 +286,9 @@ d. Can't mount a CDROM.
OK, and the problem is at the filesystem level (i.e., the CDROM is
not ISO 9660 or has errors in the filesystem structure).
- - If you see `not a block device' errors, check that the definitions
+ - If you see `not a block device` errors, check that the definitions
of the device special files are correct. They should be as
- follows:
+ follows::
brw-rw---- 1 root disk 3, 0 Nov 11 18:48 /dev/hda
brw-rw---- 1 root disk 3, 64 Nov 11 18:48 /dev/hdb
@@ -301,7 +303,7 @@ d. Can't mount a CDROM.
If you have a /dev/cdrom symbolic link, check that it is pointing
to the correct device file.
- If you hear people talking of the devices `hd1a' and `hd1b', these
+ If you hear people talking of the devices `hd1a` and `hd1b`, these
were old names for what are now called hdc and hdd. Those names
should be considered obsolete.
@@ -311,8 +313,8 @@ d. Can't mount a CDROM.
always give meaningful error messages.
-e. Directory listings are unpredictably truncated, and `dmesg' shows
- `buffer botch' error messages from the driver.
+e. Directory listings are unpredictably truncated, and `dmesg` shows
+ `buffer botch` error messages from the driver.
- There was a bug in the version of the driver in 1.2.x kernels
which could cause this. It was fixed in 1.3.0. If you can't
@@ -335,34 +337,36 @@ f. Data corruption.
5. cdchange.c
-------------
-/*
- * cdchange.c [-v] <device> [<slot>]
- *
- * This loads a CDROM from a specified slot in a changer, and displays
- * information about the changer status. The drive should be unmounted before
- * using this program.
- *
- * Changer information is displayed if either the -v flag is specified
- * or no slot was specified.
- *
- * Based on code originally from Gerhard Zuber <[email protected]>.
- * Changer status information, and rewrite for the new Uniform CDROM driver
- * interface by Erik Andersen <[email protected]>.
- */
+::
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <linux/cdrom.h>
+ /*
+ * cdchange.c [-v] <device> [<slot>]
+ *
+ * This loads a CDROM from a specified slot in a changer, and displays
+ * information about the changer status. The drive should be unmounted before
+ * using this program.
+ *
+ * Changer information is displayed if either the -v flag is specified
+ * or no slot was specified.
+ *
+ * Based on code originally from Gerhard Zuber <[email protected]>.
+ * Changer status information, and rewrite for the new Uniform CDROM driver
+ * interface by Erik Andersen <[email protected]>.
+ */
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+ #include <linux/cdrom.h>
-int
-main (int argc, char **argv)
-{
+
+ int
+ main (int argc, char **argv)
+ {
char *program;
char *device;
int fd; /* file descriptor for CD-ROM device */
@@ -382,30 +386,30 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
fprintf (stderr, " Slots are numbered 1 -- n.\n");
exit (1);
}
-
+
if (strcmp (argv[0], "-v") == 0) {
verbose = 1;
++argv;
--argc;
}
-
+
device = argv[0];
-
+
if (argc == 2)
slot = atoi (argv[1]) - 1;
- /* open device */
+ /* open device */
fd = open(device, O_RDONLY | O_NONBLOCK);
if (fd < 0) {
- fprintf (stderr, "%s: open failed for `%s': %s\n",
+ fprintf (stderr, "%s: open failed for `%s`: %s\n",
program, device, strerror (errno));
exit (1);
}
- /* Check CD player status */
+ /* Check CD player status */
total_slots_available = ioctl (fd, CDROM_CHANGER_NSLOTS);
if (total_slots_available <= 1 ) {
- fprintf (stderr, "%s: Device `%s' is not an ATAPI "
+ fprintf (stderr, "%s: Device `%s` is not an ATAPI "
"compliant CD changer.\n", program, device);
exit (1);
}
@@ -418,7 +422,7 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
exit (1);
}
- /* load */
+ /* load */
slot=ioctl (fd, CDROM_SELECT_DISC, slot);
if (slot<0) {
fflush(stdout);
@@ -462,14 +466,14 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
for (x_slot=0; x_slot<total_slots_available; x_slot++) {
printf ("Slot %2d: ", x_slot+1);
- status = ioctl (fd, CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS, x_slot);
- if (status<0) {
- perror(" CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS");
- } else switch(status) {
+ status = ioctl (fd, CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS, x_slot);
+ if (status<0) {
+ perror(" CDROM_DRIVE_STATUS");
+ } else switch(status) {
case CDS_DISC_OK:
printf ("Disc present.");
break;
- case CDS_NO_DISC:
+ case CDS_NO_DISC:
printf ("Empty slot.");
break;
case CDS_TRAY_OPEN:
@@ -507,11 +511,11 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
break;
}
}
- status = ioctl (fd, CDROM_MEDIA_CHANGED, x_slot);
- if (status<0) {
+ status = ioctl (fd, CDROM_MEDIA_CHANGED, x_slot);
+ if (status<0) {
perror(" CDROM_MEDIA_CHANGED");
- }
- switch (status) {
+ }
+ switch (status) {
case 1:
printf ("Changed.\n");
break;
@@ -525,10 +529,10 @@ main (int argc, char **argv)
/* close device */
status = close (fd);
if (status != 0) {
- fprintf (stderr, "%s: close failed for `%s': %s\n",
+ fprintf (stderr, "%s: close failed for `%s`: %s\n",
program, device, strerror (errno));
exit (1);
}
-
+
exit (0);
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt
index 2834170d821e..c5c957195a5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/packet-writing.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==============
+Packet writing
+==============
+
Getting started quick
---------------------
@@ -10,13 +14,16 @@ Getting started quick
Download from http://sourceforge.net/projects/linux-udf/
- Grab a new CD-RW disc and format it (assuming CD-RW is hdc, substitute
- as appropriate):
+ as appropriate)::
+
# cdrwtool -d /dev/hdc -q
-- Setup your writer
+- Setup your writer::
+
# pktsetup dev_name /dev/hdc
-- Now you can mount /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name and copy files to it. Enjoy!
+- Now you can mount /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name and copy files to it. Enjoy::
+
# mount /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name /cdrom -t udf -o rw,noatime
@@ -25,11 +32,11 @@ Packet writing for DVD-RW media
DVD-RW discs can be written to much like CD-RW discs if they are in
the so called "restricted overwrite" mode. To put a disc in restricted
-overwrite mode, run:
+overwrite mode, run::
# dvd+rw-format /dev/hdc
-You can then use the disc the same way you would use a CD-RW disc:
+You can then use the disc the same way you would use a CD-RW disc::
# pktsetup dev_name /dev/hdc
# mount /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name /cdrom -t udf -o rw,noatime
@@ -41,7 +48,7 @@ Packet writing for DVD+RW media
According to the DVD+RW specification, a drive supporting DVD+RW discs
shall implement "true random writes with 2KB granularity", which means
that it should be possible to put any filesystem with a block size >=
-2KB on such a disc. For example, it should be possible to do:
+2KB on such a disc. For example, it should be possible to do::
# dvd+rw-format /dev/hdc (only needed if the disc has never
been formatted)
@@ -54,7 +61,7 @@ follow the specification, but suffer bad performance problems if the
writes are not 32KB aligned.
Both problems can be solved by using the pktcdvd driver, which always
-generates aligned writes.
+generates aligned writes::
# dvd+rw-format /dev/hdc
# pktsetup dev_name /dev/hdc
@@ -83,7 +90,7 @@ Notes
- Since the pktcdvd driver makes the disc appear as a regular block
device with a 2KB block size, you can put any filesystem you like on
- the disc. For example, run:
+ the disc. For example, run::
# /sbin/mke2fs /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name
@@ -97,7 +104,7 @@ Since Linux 2.6.20, the pktcdvd module has a sysfs interface
and can be controlled by it. For example the "pktcdvd" tool uses
this interface. (see http://tom.ist-im-web.de/download/pktcdvd )
-"pktcdvd" works similar to "pktsetup", e.g.:
+"pktcdvd" works similar to "pktsetup", e.g.::
# pktcdvd -a dev_name /dev/hdc
# mkudffs /dev/pktcdvd/dev_name
@@ -115,7 +122,7 @@ For a description of the sysfs interface look into the file:
Using the pktcdvd debugfs interface
-----------------------------------
-To read pktcdvd device infos in human readable form, do:
+To read pktcdvd device infos in human readable form, do::
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/pktcdvd/pktcdvd[0-7]/info
--
2.20.1
Instead of keeping the documentation inside s390dbf.txt,
move them to arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h, using standard
kernel-doc markups.
Those were converted to kerneldoc using this specially made
script and manually editted:
<script>
use strict;
my $mode = "";
my $parameter = "";
my $ret = "";
my $descr = "";
sub add_var($)
{
my $ln = shift;
$ln =~ s/^\s+//;
$ln =~ s/\s+$//;
return if ($ln eq "");
$ln =~ s/^(\S+)\s+/$1\t/;
print " * \@$ln\n";
}
sub add_return($)
{
my $ln = shift;
print " *\n * Return:\n" if ($mode ne "Return Value:");
$ln =~ s/^\s+//;
$ln =~ s/\s+$//;
return if ($ln eq "");
print " * - $ln\n";
}
sub add_description($)
{
my $ln = shift;
print " *\n * \n" if ($mode ne "Description:");
$ln =~ s/^\s+//;
$ln =~ s/\s+$//;
return if ($ln eq "");
print " * $ln\n";
}
sub flush_results()
{
print " */\n\n";
}
while (<>) {
if (m/^[\-]+$/) {
flush_results();
$mode = "";
$parameter = "";
$ret = "";
$descr = "";
next;
}
if (m/(Parameter:)(.*)/) {
print " *\n" if ($mode eq "func");
add_var($2);
$mode = $1;
next;
}
if (m/(Return Value:)(.*)/) {
add_return($2);
$mode = $1;
next;
}
if (m/(Description:)(.*)/) {
add_description($2);
$mode = $1;
next;
}
if ($mode eq "Parameter:") {
add_var($_);
next;
}
if ($mode eq "Return Value:") {
add_return($_);
next;
}
if ($mode eq "Description:") {
add_description($_);
next;
}
next if (m/^\s*$/);
if (m/^\S+.*\s\*?(\S+)\s*\(/) {
if ($mode eq "") {
print "/**\n * $1()\n";
} else {
print " * $1()\n";
}
$mode="func";
}
}
flush_results();
</script>
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt | 322 +--------------------------------
arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h | 231 +++++++++++++++++++++++
2 files changed, 232 insertions(+), 321 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
index 549dba50fc3b..b0ca0d142ea1 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
@@ -107,327 +107,7 @@ will stay deactivated.
Kernel Interfaces:
------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_info_t *debug_register(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
- int buf_size);
-
-Parameter:
- name:
- Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
- pages:
- Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
- nr_areas:
- Number of debug areas
- buf_size:
- Size of data area in each debug entry
-
-Return Value:
- Handle for generated debug area
-
- NULL if register failed
-
-Description: Allocates memory for a debug log
- Must not be called within an interrupt handler
-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_info_t *debug_register_mode(char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
- int buf_size, mode_t mode, uid_t uid,
- gid_t gid);
-
-Parameter:
- name:
- Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
- pages:
- Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
- nr_areas:
- Number of debug areas
- buf_size:
- Size of data area in each debug entry
- mode:
- File mode for debugfs files. E.g. S_IRWXUGO
- uid:
- User ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
- supported.
- gid:
- Group ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is
- supported.
-
-Return Value:
- Handle for generated debug area
-
- NULL if register failed
-
-Description:
- Allocates memory for a debug log
- Must not be called within an interrupt handler
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- void debug_unregister (debug_info_t * id);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
-
-Return Value:
- none
-
-Description:
- frees memory for a debug log and removes all registered debug
- views.
-
- Must not be called within an interrupt handler
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- void debug_set_level (debug_info_t * id, int new_level);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- new_level: new debug level
-
-Return Value:
- none
-
-Description:
- Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- bool debug_level_enabled (debug_info_t * id, int level);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
-
-Return Value:
- True if level is less or equal to the current debug level.
-
-Description:
- Returns true if debug events for the specified level would be
- logged. Otherwise returns false.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- void debug_stop_all(void);
-
-Parameter:
- none
-
-Return Value:
- none
-
-Description:
- stops the debug feature if stopping is allowed. Currently
- used in case of a kernel oops.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_entry_t* debug_event (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
- int length);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
- data:
- pointer to data for debug entry
- length:
- length of data in bytes
-
-Return Value:
- Address of written debug entry
-
-Description:
- writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level)
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_entry_t* debug_int_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned int data);
- debug_entry_t* debug_long_event(debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned long data);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
- data:
- integer value for debug entry
-
-Return Value:
- Address of written debug entry
-
-Description:
- writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level)
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_entry_t* debug_text_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- const char* data);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
- data:
- string for debug entry
-
-Return Value:
- Address of written debug entry
-
-Description:
- writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
- (if level <= actual debug level)
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_entry_t* debug_sprintf_event (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- char* string,...);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
- string:
- format string for debug entry
- ...:
- varargs used as in sprintf()
-
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-
-Description:
- writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
- active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level).
- floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
-
- debug_entry_t* debug_exception (debug_info_t* id, int level, void* data,
- int length);
-
-Parameter:
- id:
- handle for debug log
- level:
- debug level
- data:
- pointer to data for debug entry
- length:
- length of data in bytes
-
-Return Value:
- Address of written debug entry
-
-Description:
- writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level) and switches to next debug area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-::
- debug_entry_t* debug_int_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned int data);
- debug_entry_t* debug_long_exception(debug_info_t * id, int level,
- unsigned long data);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: integer value for debug entry
-
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-
-Description: writes debug entry to active debug area (if level <= actual
- debug level) and switches to next debug area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-debug_entry_t* debug_text_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- const char* data);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- data: string for debug entry
-
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-
-Description: writes debug entry in ascii format to active debug area
- (if level <= actual debug level) and switches to next debug
- area
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-debug_entry_t* debug_sprintf_exception (debug_info_t * id, int level,
- char* string,...);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- level: debug level
- string: format string for debug entry
- ...: varargs used as in sprintf()
-
-Return Value: Address of written debug entry
-
-Description: writes debug entry with format string and varargs (longs) to
- active debug area (if level $<=$ actual debug level) and
- switches to next debug area.
- floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-int debug_register_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- view: pointer to debug view struct
-
-Return Value: 0 : ok
- < 0: Error
-
-Description: registers new debug view and creates debugfs dir entry
-
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-int debug_unregister_view (debug_info_t * id, struct debug_view *view);
-
-Parameter: id: handle for debug log
- view: pointer to debug view struct
-
-Return Value: 0 : ok
- < 0: Error
-
-Description: unregisters debug view and removes debugfs dir entry
-
-
+.. kernel-doc:: arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
Predefined views:
-----------------
diff --git a/arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h b/arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
index c305d39f5016..7cc83938c659 100644
--- a/arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
+++ b/arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
@@ -95,25 +95,106 @@ debug_entry_t *debug_exception_common(debug_info_t *id, int level,
/* Debug Feature API: */
+/**
+ * debug_register() - allocates memory for a debug log.
+ *
+ * @name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
+ * @pages: Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
+ * @nr_areas: Number of debug areas
+ * @buf_size: Size of data area in each debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Handler for generated debug area
+ * - %NULL if register failed
+ *
+ * Must not be called within an interrupt handler.
+ */
debug_info_t *debug_register(const char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
int buf_size);
+/**
+ * debug_register_mode() - allocates memory for a debug log.
+ *
+ * @name: Name of debug log (e.g. used for debugfs entry)
+ * @pages: Number of pages, which will be allocated per area
+ * @nr_areas: Number of debug areas
+ * @buf_size: Size of data area in each debug entry
+ * @mode: File mode for debugfs files. E.g. S_IRWXUGO
+ * @uid: User ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is supported.
+ * @gid: Group ID for debugfs files. Currently only 0 is supported.
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Handler for generated debug area
+ * - %NULL if register failed
+ *
+ * Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+ */
debug_info_t *debug_register_mode(const char *name, int pages, int nr_areas,
int buf_size, umode_t mode, uid_t uid,
gid_t gid);
+/**
+ * debug_unregister() - frees memory for a debug log and removes all
+ * registered debug
+ * views.
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * none
+ *
+ * Must not be called within an interrupt handler
+ */
void debug_unregister(debug_info_t *id);
+/**
+ * debug_set_level() - Sets new actual debug level if new_level is valid.
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @new_level: new debug level
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * none
+ */
void debug_set_level(debug_info_t *id, int new_level);
void debug_set_critical(void);
+
+/**
+ * debug_stop_all() - stops the debug feature if stopping is allowed.
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - none
+ */
void debug_stop_all(void);
+/**
+ * debug_level_enabled() - Returns true if debug events for the specified
+ * level would be logged. Otherwise returns false.
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - %true if level is less or equal to the current debug level.
+ */
static inline bool debug_level_enabled(debug_info_t *id, int level)
{
return level <= id->level;
}
+/**
+ * debug_event() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level)
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @data: pointer to data for debug entry
+ * @length: length of data in bytes
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
void *data, int length)
{
@@ -122,6 +203,18 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_event_common(id, level, data, length);
}
+/**
+ * debug_int_event() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level)
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @tag: integer value for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_int_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
unsigned int tag)
{
@@ -132,6 +225,18 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_int_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_event_common(id, level, &t, sizeof(unsigned int));
}
+/**
+ * debug_long_event() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level)
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @tag: integer value for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_long_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
unsigned long tag)
{
@@ -142,6 +247,18 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_long_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_event_common(id, level, &t, sizeof(unsigned long));
}
+/**
+ * debug_text_event() - writes debug entry in ascii format to active
+ * debug area (if level <= actual debug level)
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @txt: string for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_text_event(debug_info_t *id, int level,
const char *txt)
{
@@ -158,6 +275,22 @@ extern debug_entry_t *
__debug_sprintf_event(debug_info_t *id, int level, char *string, ...)
__attribute__ ((format(printf, 3, 4)));
+/**
+ * debug_sprintf_event() - writes debug entry with format string
+ * and varargs (longs) to active debug area
+ * (if level $<=$ actual debug level).
+ *
+ * @_id: handle for debug log
+ * @_level: debug level
+ * @_fmt: format string for debug entry
+ * @...: varargs used as in sprintf()
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ *
+ * floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
+ */
#define debug_sprintf_event(_id, _level, _fmt, ...) \
({ \
debug_entry_t *__ret; \
@@ -172,6 +305,20 @@ __debug_sprintf_event(debug_info_t *id, int level, char *string, ...)
__ret; \
})
+/**
+ * debug_exception() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level) and switches
+ * to next debug area
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @data: pointer to data for debug entry
+ * @length: length of data in bytes
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level,
void *data, int length)
{
@@ -180,6 +327,19 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_exception_common(id, level, data, length);
}
+/**
+ * debug_int_exception() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level)
+ * and switches to next debug area
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @tag: integer value for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_int_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level,
unsigned int tag)
{
@@ -190,6 +350,19 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_int_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_exception_common(id, level, &t, sizeof(unsigned int));
}
+/**
+ * debug_long_exception() - writes debug entry to active debug area
+ * (if level <= actual debug level)
+ * and switches to next debug area
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @tag: integer value for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_long_exception (debug_info_t *id, int level,
unsigned long tag)
{
@@ -200,6 +373,20 @@ static inline debug_entry_t *debug_long_exception (debug_info_t *id, int level,
return debug_exception_common(id, level, &t, sizeof(unsigned long));
}
+/**
+ * debug_text_exception() - writes debug entry in ascii format to active
+ * debug area (if level <= actual debug level)
+ * and switches to next debug
+ * area
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @level: debug level
+ * @txt: string for debug entry
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ */
static inline debug_entry_t *debug_text_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level,
const char *txt)
{
@@ -216,6 +403,24 @@ extern debug_entry_t *
__debug_sprintf_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level, char *string, ...)
__attribute__ ((format(printf, 3, 4)));
+
+/**
+ * debug_sprintf_exception() - writes debug entry with format string and
+ * varargs (longs) to active debug area
+ * (if level $<=$ actual debug level)
+ * and switches to next debug area.
+ *
+ * @_id: handle for debug log
+ * @_level: debug level
+ * @_fmt: format string for debug entry
+ * @...: varargs used as in sprintf()
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - Address of written debug entry
+ * - %NULL if error
+ *
+ * floats and long long datatypes cannot be used as varargs.
+ */
#define debug_sprintf_exception(_id, _level, _fmt, ...) \
({ \
debug_entry_t *__ret; \
@@ -230,7 +435,33 @@ __debug_sprintf_exception(debug_info_t *id, int level, char *string, ...)
__ret; \
})
+/**
+ * debug_register_view() - registers new debug view and creates debugfs
+ * dir entry
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @view: pointer to debug view struct
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - 0 : ok
+ * - < 0: Error
+ */
int debug_register_view(debug_info_t *id, struct debug_view *view);
+
+/**
+ * debug_unregister_view()
+ *
+ * @id: handle for debug log
+ * @view: pointer to debug view struct
+ *
+ * Return:
+ * - 0 : ok
+ * - < 0: Error
+ *
+ *
+ * unregisters debug view and removes debugfs dir entry
+ */
+
int debug_unregister_view(debug_info_t *id, struct debug_view *view);
/*
--
2.20.1
The conversion here is really trivial: just a bunch of title
markups and very few puntual changes is enough to make it to
be parsed by Sphinx and generate a nice html.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt | 40 ++++++++++++++++-----------
Documentation/timers/highres.txt | 11 ++++----
Documentation/timers/hpet.txt | 4 ++-
Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt | 6 ++--
Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt | 3 +-
Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt | 15 +++++++---
6 files changed, 49 insertions(+), 30 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt b/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt
index 9591092da5e0..065db217cb04 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/NO_HZ.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- NO_HZ: Reducing Scheduling-Clock Ticks
+======================================
+NO_HZ: Reducing Scheduling-Clock Ticks
+======================================
This document describes Kconfig options and boot parameters that can
@@ -28,7 +30,8 @@ by a third section on RCU-specific considerations, a fourth section
discussing testing, and a fifth and final section listing known issues.
-NEVER OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS
+Never Omit Scheduling-Clock Ticks
+=================================
Very old versions of Linux from the 1990s and the very early 2000s
are incapable of omitting scheduling-clock ticks. It turns out that
@@ -59,7 +62,8 @@ degrade your applications performance. If this describes your workload,
you should read the following two sections.
-OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS FOR IDLE CPUs
+Omit Scheduling-Clock Ticks For Idle CPUs
+=========================================
If a CPU is idle, there is little point in sending it a scheduling-clock
interrupt. After all, the primary purpose of a scheduling-clock interrupt
@@ -97,7 +101,8 @@ By default, CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE=y kernels boot with "nohz=on", enabling
dyntick-idle mode.
-OMIT SCHEDULING-CLOCK TICKS FOR CPUs WITH ONLY ONE RUNNABLE TASK
+Omit Scheduling-Clock Ticks For CPUs With Only One Runnable Task
+================================================================
If a CPU has only one runnable task, there is little point in sending it
a scheduling-clock interrupt because there is no other task to switch to.
@@ -174,7 +179,8 @@ However, the drawbacks listed above mean that adaptive ticks should not
(yet) be enabled by default.
-RCU IMPLICATIONS
+RCU Implications
+================
There are situations in which idle CPUs cannot be permitted to
enter either dyntick-idle mode or adaptive-tick mode, the most
@@ -199,7 +205,8 @@ scheduler will decide where to run them, which might or might not be
where you want them to run.
-TESTING
+Testing
+=======
So you enable all the OS-jitter features described in this document,
but do not see any change in your workload's behavior. Is this because
@@ -222,9 +229,10 @@ We do not currently have a good way to remove OS jitter from single-CPU
systems.
-KNOWN ISSUES
+Known Issues
+============
-o Dyntick-idle slows transitions to and from idle slightly.
+* Dyntick-idle slows transitions to and from idle slightly.
In practice, this has not been a problem except for the most
aggressive real-time workloads, which have the option of disabling
dyntick-idle mode, an option that most of them take. However,
@@ -248,13 +256,13 @@ o Dyntick-idle slows transitions to and from idle slightly.
this parameter effectively disables Turbo Mode on Intel
CPUs, which can significantly reduce maximum performance.
-o Adaptive-ticks slows user/kernel transitions slightly.
+* Adaptive-ticks slows user/kernel transitions slightly.
This is not expected to be a problem for computationally intensive
workloads, which have few such transitions. Careful benchmarking
will be required to determine whether or not other workloads
are significantly affected by this effect.
-o Adaptive-ticks does not do anything unless there is only one
+* Adaptive-ticks does not do anything unless there is only one
runnable task for a given CPU, even though there are a number
of other situations where the scheduling-clock tick is not
needed. To give but one example, consider a CPU that has one
@@ -275,7 +283,7 @@ o Adaptive-ticks does not do anything unless there is only one
Better handling of these sorts of situations is future work.
-o A reboot is required to reconfigure both adaptive idle and RCU
+* A reboot is required to reconfigure both adaptive idle and RCU
callback offloading. Runtime reconfiguration could be provided
if needed, however, due to the complexity of reconfiguring RCU at
runtime, there would need to be an earthshakingly good reason.
@@ -283,12 +291,12 @@ o A reboot is required to reconfigure both adaptive idle and RCU
simply offloading RCU callbacks from all CPUs and pinning them
where you want them whenever you want them pinned.
-o Additional configuration is required to deal with other sources
+* Additional configuration is required to deal with other sources
of OS jitter, including interrupts and system-utility tasks
and processes. This configuration normally involves binding
interrupts and tasks to particular CPUs.
-o Some sources of OS jitter can currently be eliminated only by
+* Some sources of OS jitter can currently be eliminated only by
constraining the workload. For example, the only way to eliminate
OS jitter due to global TLB shootdowns is to avoid the unmapping
operations (such as kernel module unload operations) that
@@ -299,17 +307,17 @@ o Some sources of OS jitter can currently be eliminated only by
helpful, especially when combined with the mlock() and mlockall()
system calls.
-o Unless all CPUs are idle, at least one CPU must keep the
+* Unless all CPUs are idle, at least one CPU must keep the
scheduling-clock interrupt going in order to support accurate
timekeeping.
-o If there might potentially be some adaptive-ticks CPUs, there
+* If there might potentially be some adaptive-ticks CPUs, there
will be at least one CPU keeping the scheduling-clock interrupt
going, even if all CPUs are otherwise idle.
Better handling of this situation is ongoing work.
-o Some process-handling operations still require the occasional
+* Some process-handling operations still require the occasional
scheduling-clock tick. These operations include calculating CPU
load, maintaining sched average, computing CFS entity vruntime,
computing avenrun, and carrying out load balancing. They are
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
index 8f9741592123..f93528e6f1c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=====================================================
High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes
------------------------------------------------------
+=====================================================
Further information can be found in the paper of the OLS 2006 talk "hrtimers
and beyond". The paper is part of the OLS 2006 Proceedings Volume 1, which can
@@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ also figure #2 (OLS slides p. 15)
The main differences to the timer wheel, which holds the armed timer_list type
timers are:
+
- time ordered enqueueing into a rb-tree
- independent of ticks (the processing is based on nanoseconds)
@@ -55,7 +57,8 @@ merged into the 2.6.18 kernel.
Further information about the Generic Time Of Day framework is available in the
OLS 2005 Proceedings Volume 1:
-http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2005/linuxsymposium_procv1.pdf
+
+ http://www.linuxsymposium.org/2005/linuxsymposium_procv1.pdf
The paper "We Are Not Getting Any Younger: A New Approach to Time and
Timers" was written by J. Stultz, D.V. Hart, & N. Aravamudan.
@@ -100,6 +103,7 @@ accounting, profiling, and high resolution timers.
The management layer assigns one or more of the following functions to a clock
event device:
+
- system global periodic tick (jiffies update)
- cpu local update_process_times
- cpu local profiling
@@ -244,6 +248,3 @@ extended to x86_64 and ARM already. Initial (work in progress) support is also
available for MIPS and PowerPC.
Thomas, Ingo
-
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
index 895345ec513b..c9d05d3caaca 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
+===========================================
+High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
+===========================================
The High Precision Event Timer (HPET) hardware follows a specification
by Intel and Microsoft, revision 1.
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt b/Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt
index 588d85724f10..c1c20a693e8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hrtimers.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+======================================================
hrtimers - subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers
-----------------------------------------------------
+======================================================
This patch introduces a new subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers.
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ the clock_getres() interface. This will return whatever real resolution
a given clock has - be it low-res, high-res, or artificially-low-res.
hrtimers - testing and verification
-----------------------------------
+-----------------------------------
We used the high-resolution clock subsystem ontop of hrtimers to verify
the hrtimer implementation details in praxis, and we also ran the posix
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt
index 2d1732b0a868..f83e98852e2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+===========================================================
Clock sources, Clock events, sched_clock() and delay timers
------------------------------------------------------------
+===========================================================
This document tries to briefly explain some basic kernel timekeeping
abstractions. It partly pertains to the drivers usually found in
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt b/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt
index 038f8c77a076..7e3167bec2b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/timers-howto.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+===================================================================
delays - Information on the various kernel delay / sleep mechanisms
--------------------------------------------------------------------
+===================================================================
This document seeks to answer the common question: "What is the
RightWay (TM) to insert a delay?"
@@ -17,7 +18,7 @@ code in an atomic context?" This should be followed closely by "Does
it really need to delay in atomic context?" If so...
ATOMIC CONTEXT:
- You must use the *delay family of functions. These
+ You must use the `*delay` family of functions. These
functions use the jiffie estimation of clock speed
and will busy wait for enough loop cycles to achieve
the desired delay:
@@ -35,21 +36,26 @@ ATOMIC CONTEXT:
be refactored to allow for the use of msleep.
NON-ATOMIC CONTEXT:
- You should use the *sleep[_range] family of functions.
+ You should use the `*sleep[_range]` family of functions.
There are a few more options here, while any of them may
work correctly, using the "right" sleep function will
help the scheduler, power management, and just make your
driver better :)
-- Backed by busy-wait loop:
+
udelay(unsigned long usecs)
+
-- Backed by hrtimers:
+
usleep_range(unsigned long min, unsigned long max)
+
-- Backed by jiffies / legacy_timers
+
msleep(unsigned long msecs)
msleep_interruptible(unsigned long msecs)
- Unlike the *delay family, the underlying mechanism
+ Unlike the `*delay` family, the underlying mechanism
driving each of these calls varies, thus there are
quirks you should be aware of.
@@ -70,6 +76,7 @@ NON-ATOMIC CONTEXT:
- Why not msleep for (1ms - 20ms)?
Explained originally here:
http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/8/3/250
+
msleep(1~20) may not do what the caller intends, and
will often sleep longer (~20 ms actual sleep for any
value given in the 1~20ms range). In many cases this
--
2.20.1
The documentation is in pretty much ReST format. Just some
small adjustments in order to fix tables and to make Sphinx
to recognize certain format blocks are required.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt | 288 ++++++++++++------
Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt | 153 +++++-----
Documentation/arm64/booting.txt | 91 ++++--
Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt | 190 ++++++------
Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt | 50 +--
Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt | 7 +-
Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt | 43 ++-
Documentation/arm64/memory.txt | 91 +++---
.../arm64/pointer-authentication.txt | 2 +
Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt | 63 +++-
Documentation/arm64/sve.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt | 6 +-
arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c | 2 +-
13 files changed, 595 insertions(+), 401 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt b/Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt
index c77010c5c1f0..d51b69dc624d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+===========
ACPI Tables
------------
+===========
+
The expectations of individual ACPI tables are discussed in the list that
follows.
@@ -11,54 +13,71 @@ outside of the UEFI Forum (see Section 5.2.6 of the specification).
For ACPI on arm64, tables also fall into the following categories:
- -- Required: DSDT, FADT, GTDT, MADT, MCFG, RSDP, SPCR, XSDT
+ - Required: DSDT, FADT, GTDT, MADT, MCFG, RSDP, SPCR, XSDT
- -- Recommended: BERT, EINJ, ERST, HEST, PCCT, SSDT
+ - Recommended: BERT, EINJ, ERST, HEST, PCCT, SSDT
- -- Optional: BGRT, CPEP, CSRT, DBG2, DRTM, ECDT, FACS, FPDT, IORT,
+ - Optional: BGRT, CPEP, CSRT, DBG2, DRTM, ECDT, FACS, FPDT, IORT,
MCHI, MPST, MSCT, NFIT, PMTT, RASF, SBST, SLIT, SPMI, SRAT, STAO,
TCPA, TPM2, UEFI, XENV
- -- Not supported: BOOT, DBGP, DMAR, ETDT, HPET, IBFT, IVRS, LPIT,
+ - Not supported: BOOT, DBGP, DMAR, ETDT, HPET, IBFT, IVRS, LPIT,
MSDM, OEMx, PSDT, RSDT, SLIC, WAET, WDAT, WDRT, WPBT
+====== ========================================================================
Table Usage for ARMv8 Linux
------ ----------------------------------------------------------------
+====== ========================================================================
BERT Section 18.3 (signature == "BERT")
- == Boot Error Record Table ==
+
+ **Boot Error Record Table**
+
Must be supplied if RAS support is provided by the platform. It
is recommended this table be supplied.
BOOT Signature Reserved (signature == "BOOT")
- == simple BOOT flag table ==
+
+ **simple BOOT flag table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
BGRT Section 5.2.22 (signature == "BGRT")
- == Boot Graphics Resource Table ==
+
+ **Boot Graphics Resource Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported, with no real use-case for an
ARM server.
CPEP Section 5.2.18 (signature == "CPEP")
- == Corrected Platform Error Polling table ==
+
+ **Corrected Platform Error Polling table**
+
Optional, not currently supported, and not recommended until such
time as ARM-compatible hardware is available, and the specification
suitably modified.
CSRT Signature Reserved (signature == "CSRT")
- == Core System Resources Table ==
+
+ **Core System Resources Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
DBG2 Signature Reserved (signature == "DBG2")
- == DeBuG port table 2 ==
+
+ **DeBuG port table 2**
+
License has changed and should be usable. Optional if used instead
of earlycon=<device> on the command line.
DBGP Signature Reserved (signature == "DBGP")
- == DeBuG Port table ==
+
+ **DeBuG Port table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
DSDT Section 5.2.11.1 (signature == "DSDT")
- == Differentiated System Description Table ==
+
+ **Differentiated System Description Table**
+
A DSDT is required; see also SSDT.
ACPI tables contain only one DSDT but can contain one or more SSDTs,
@@ -66,22 +85,30 @@ DSDT Section 5.2.11.1 (signature == "DSDT")
but cannot modify or replace anything in the DSDT.
DMAR Signature Reserved (signature == "DMAR")
- == DMA Remapping table ==
+
+ **DMA Remapping table**
+
x86 only table, will not be supported.
DRTM Signature Reserved (signature == "DRTM")
- == Dynamic Root of Trust for Measurement table ==
+
+ **Dynamic Root of Trust for Measurement table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
ECDT Section 5.2.16 (signature == "ECDT")
- == Embedded Controller Description Table ==
+
+ **Embedded Controller Description Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported, but could be used on ARM if and
only if one uses the GPE_BIT field to represent an IRQ number, since
there are no GPE blocks defined in hardware reduced mode. This would
need to be modified in the ACPI specification.
EINJ Section 18.6 (signature == "EINJ")
- == Error Injection table ==
+
+ **Error Injection table**
+
This table is very useful for testing platform response to error
conditions; it allows one to inject an error into the system as
if it had actually occurred. However, this table should not be
@@ -89,27 +116,35 @@ EINJ Section 18.6 (signature == "EINJ")
and executed with the ACPICA tools only during testing.
ERST Section 18.5 (signature == "ERST")
- == Error Record Serialization Table ==
+
+ **Error Record Serialization Table**
+
On a platform supports RAS, this table must be supplied if it is not
UEFI-based; if it is UEFI-based, this table may be supplied. When this
table is not present, UEFI run time service will be utilized to save
and retrieve hardware error information to and from a persistent store.
ETDT Signature Reserved (signature == "ETDT")
- == Event Timer Description Table ==
+
+ **Event Timer Description Table**
+
Obsolete table, will not be supported.
FACS Section 5.2.10 (signature == "FACS")
- == Firmware ACPI Control Structure ==
+
+ **Firmware ACPI Control Structure**
+
It is unlikely that this table will be terribly useful. If it is
provided, the Global Lock will NOT be used since it is not part of
the hardware reduced profile, and only 64-bit address fields will
be considered valid.
FADT Section 5.2.9 (signature == "FACP")
- == Fixed ACPI Description Table ==
+
+ **Fixed ACPI Description Table**
Required for arm64.
+
The HW_REDUCED_ACPI flag must be set. All of the fields that are
to be ignored when HW_REDUCED_ACPI is set are expected to be set to
zero.
@@ -118,22 +153,28 @@ FADT Section 5.2.9 (signature == "FACP")
used, not FIRMWARE_CTRL.
If PSCI is used (as is recommended), make sure that ARM_BOOT_ARCH is
- filled in properly -- that the PSCI_COMPLIANT flag is set and that
+ filled in properly - that the PSCI_COMPLIANT flag is set and that
PSCI_USE_HVC is set or unset as needed (see table 5-37).
For the DSDT that is also required, the X_DSDT field is to be used,
not the DSDT field.
FPDT Section 5.2.23 (signature == "FPDT")
- == Firmware Performance Data Table ==
+
+ **Firmware Performance Data Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
GTDT Section 5.2.24 (signature == "GTDT")
- == Generic Timer Description Table ==
+
+ **Generic Timer Description Table**
+
Required for arm64.
HEST Section 18.3.2 (signature == "HEST")
- == Hardware Error Source Table ==
+
+ **Hardware Error Source Table**
+
ARM-specific error sources have been defined; please use those or the
PCI types such as type 6 (AER Root Port), 7 (AER Endpoint), or 8 (AER
Bridge), or use type 9 (Generic Hardware Error Source). Firmware first
@@ -144,122 +185,174 @@ HEST Section 18.3.2 (signature == "HEST")
is recommended this table be supplied.
HPET Signature Reserved (signature == "HPET")
- == High Precision Event timer Table ==
+
+ **High Precision Event timer Table**
+
x86 only table, will not be supported.
IBFT Signature Reserved (signature == "IBFT")
- == iSCSI Boot Firmware Table ==
+
+ **iSCSI Boot Firmware Table**
+
Microsoft defined table, support TBD.
IORT Signature Reserved (signature == "IORT")
- == Input Output Remapping Table ==
+
+ **Input Output Remapping Table**
+
arm64 only table, required in order to describe IO topology, SMMUs,
and GIC ITSs, and how those various components are connected together,
such as identifying which components are behind which SMMUs/ITSs.
This table will only be required on certain SBSA platforms (e.g.,
- when using GICv3-ITS and an SMMU); on SBSA Level 0 platforms, it
+ when using GICv3-ITS and an SMMU); on SBSA Level 0 platforms, it
remains optional.
IVRS Signature Reserved (signature == "IVRS")
- == I/O Virtualization Reporting Structure ==
+
+ **I/O Virtualization Reporting Structure**
+
x86_64 (AMD) only table, will not be supported.
LPIT Signature Reserved (signature == "LPIT")
- == Low Power Idle Table ==
+
+ **Low Power Idle Table**
+
x86 only table as of ACPI 5.1; starting with ACPI 6.0, processor
descriptions and power states on ARM platforms should use the DSDT
and define processor container devices (_HID ACPI0010, Section 8.4,
and more specifically 8.4.3 and and 8.4.4).
MADT Section 5.2.12 (signature == "APIC")
- == Multiple APIC Description Table ==
+
+ **Multiple APIC Description Table**
+
Required for arm64. Only the GIC interrupt controller structures
should be used (types 0xA - 0xF).
MCFG Signature Reserved (signature == "MCFG")
- == Memory-mapped ConFiGuration space ==
+
+ **Memory-mapped ConFiGuration space**
+
If the platform supports PCI/PCIe, an MCFG table is required.
MCHI Signature Reserved (signature == "MCHI")
- == Management Controller Host Interface table ==
+
+ **Management Controller Host Interface table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
MPST Section 5.2.21 (signature == "MPST")
- == Memory Power State Table ==
+
+ **Memory Power State Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
MSCT Section 5.2.19 (signature == "MSCT")
- == Maximum System Characteristic Table ==
+
+ **Maximum System Characteristic Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
MSDM Signature Reserved (signature == "MSDM")
- == Microsoft Data Management table ==
+
+ **Microsoft Data Management table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
NFIT Section 5.2.25 (signature == "NFIT")
- == NVDIMM Firmware Interface Table ==
+
+ **NVDIMM Firmware Interface Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
OEMx Signature of "OEMx" only
- == OEM Specific Tables ==
+
+ **OEM Specific Tables**
+
All tables starting with a signature of "OEM" are reserved for OEM
use. Since these are not meant to be of general use but are limited
to very specific end users, they are not recommended for use and are
not supported by the kernel for arm64.
PCCT Section 14.1 (signature == "PCCT)
- == Platform Communications Channel Table ==
+
+ **Platform Communications Channel Table**
+
Recommend for use on arm64; use of PCC is recommended when using CPPC
to control performance and power for platform processors.
PMTT Section 5.2.21.12 (signature == "PMTT")
- == Platform Memory Topology Table ==
+
+ **Platform Memory Topology Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
PSDT Section 5.2.11.3 (signature == "PSDT")
- == Persistent System Description Table ==
+
+ **Persistent System Description Table**
+
Obsolete table, will not be supported.
RASF Section 5.2.20 (signature == "RASF")
- == RAS Feature table ==
+
+ **RAS Feature table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
RSDP Section 5.2.5 (signature == "RSD PTR")
- == Root System Description PoinTeR ==
+
+ **Root System Description PoinTeR**
+
Required for arm64.
RSDT Section 5.2.7 (signature == "RSDT")
- == Root System Description Table ==
+
+ **Root System Description Table**
+
Since this table can only provide 32-bit addresses, it is deprecated
on arm64, and will not be used. If provided, it will be ignored.
SBST Section 5.2.14 (signature == "SBST")
- == Smart Battery Subsystem Table ==
+
+ **Smart Battery Subsystem Table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
SLIC Signature Reserved (signature == "SLIC")
- == Software LIcensing table ==
+
+ **Software LIcensing table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
SLIT Section 5.2.17 (signature == "SLIT")
- == System Locality distance Information Table ==
+
+ **System Locality distance Information Table**
+
Optional in general, but required for NUMA systems.
SPCR Signature Reserved (signature == "SPCR")
- == Serial Port Console Redirection table ==
+
+ **Serial Port Console Redirection table**
+
Required for arm64.
SPMI Signature Reserved (signature == "SPMI")
- == Server Platform Management Interface table ==
+
+ **Server Platform Management Interface table**
+
Optional, not currently supported.
SRAT Section 5.2.16 (signature == "SRAT")
- == System Resource Affinity Table ==
+
+ **System Resource Affinity Table**
+
Optional, but if used, only the GICC Affinity structures are read.
To support arm64 NUMA, this table is required.
SSDT Section 5.2.11.2 (signature == "SSDT")
- == Secondary System Description Table ==
+
+ **Secondary System Description Table**
+
These tables are a continuation of the DSDT; these are recommended
for use with devices that can be added to a running system, but can
also serve the purpose of dividing up device descriptions into more
@@ -272,49 +365,69 @@ SSDT Section 5.2.11.2 (signature == "SSDT")
one DSDT but can contain many SSDTs.
STAO Signature Reserved (signature == "STAO")
- == _STA Override table ==
+
+ **_STA Override table**
+
Optional, but only necessary in virtualized environments in order to
hide devices from guest OSs.
TCPA Signature Reserved (signature == "TCPA")
- == Trusted Computing Platform Alliance table ==
+
+ **Trusted Computing Platform Alliance table**
+
Optional, not currently supported, and may need changes to fully
interoperate with arm64.
TPM2 Signature Reserved (signature == "TPM2")
- == Trusted Platform Module 2 table ==
+
+ **Trusted Platform Module 2 table**
+
Optional, not currently supported, and may need changes to fully
interoperate with arm64.
UEFI Signature Reserved (signature == "UEFI")
- == UEFI ACPI data table ==
+
+ **UEFI ACPI data table**
+
Optional, not currently supported. No known use case for arm64,
at present.
WAET Signature Reserved (signature == "WAET")
- == Windows ACPI Emulated devices Table ==
+
+ **Windows ACPI Emulated devices Table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WDAT Signature Reserved (signature == "WDAT")
- == Watch Dog Action Table ==
+
+ **Watch Dog Action Table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WDRT Signature Reserved (signature == "WDRT")
- == Watch Dog Resource Table ==
+
+ **Watch Dog Resource Table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WPBT Signature Reserved (signature == "WPBT")
- == Windows Platform Binary Table ==
+
+ **Windows Platform Binary Table**
+
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
XENV Signature Reserved (signature == "XENV")
- == Xen project table ==
+
+ **Xen project table**
+
Optional, used only by Xen at present.
XSDT Section 5.2.8 (signature == "XSDT")
- == eXtended System Description Table ==
+
+ **eXtended System Description Table**
+
Required for arm64.
-
+====== ========================================================================
ACPI Objects
------------
@@ -323,10 +436,11 @@ shown in the list that follows; any object not explicitly mentioned below
should be used as needed for a particular platform or particular subsystem,
such as power management or PCI.
+===== ================ ========================================================
Name Section Usage for ARMv8 Linux
----- ------------ -------------------------------------------------
+===== ================ ========================================================
_CCA 6.2.17 This method must be defined for all bus masters
- on arm64 -- there are no assumptions made about
+ on arm64 - there are no assumptions made about
whether such devices are cache coherent or not.
The _CCA value is inherited by all descendants of
these devices so it does not need to be repeated.
@@ -422,8 +536,8 @@ _OSC 6.2.11 This method can be a global method in ACPI (i.e.,
by the kernel community, then register it with the
UEFI Forum.
-\_OSI 5.7.2 Deprecated on ARM64. As far as ACPI firmware is
- concerned, _OSI is not to be used to determine what
+\_OSI 5.7.2 Deprecated on ARM64. As far as ACPI firmware is
+ concerned, _OSI is not to be used to determine what
sort of system is being used or what functionality
is provided. The _OSC method is to be used instead.
@@ -447,7 +561,7 @@ _PSx 7.3.2-5 Use as needed; power management specific. If _PS0 is
usage, change them in these methods.
_RDI 8.4.4.4 Recommended for use with processor definitions (_HID
- ACPI0010) on arm64. This should only be used in
+ ACPI0010) on arm64. This should only be used in
conjunction with _LPI.
\_REV 5.7.4 Always returns the latest version of ACPI supported.
@@ -476,6 +590,7 @@ _SWS 7.4.3 Use as needed; power management specific; this may
_UID 6.1.12 Recommended for distinguishing devices of the same
class; define it if at all possible.
+===== ================ ========================================================
@@ -488,7 +603,7 @@ platforms, ACPI events must be signaled differently.
There are two options: GPIO-signaled interrupts (Section 5.6.5), and
interrupt-signaled events (Section 5.6.9). Interrupt-signaled events are a
-new feature in the ACPI 6.1 specification. Either -- or both -- can be used
+new feature in the ACPI 6.1 specification. Either - or both - can be used
on a given platform, and which to use may be dependent of limitations in any
given SoC. If possible, interrupt-signaled events are recommended.
@@ -564,39 +679,40 @@ supported.
The following classes of objects are not supported:
- -- Section 9.2: ambient light sensor devices
+ - Section 9.2: ambient light sensor devices
- -- Section 9.3: battery devices
+ - Section 9.3: battery devices
- -- Section 9.4: lids (e.g., laptop lids)
+ - Section 9.4: lids (e.g., laptop lids)
- -- Section 9.8.2: IDE controllers
+ - Section 9.8.2: IDE controllers
- -- Section 9.9: floppy controllers
+ - Section 9.9: floppy controllers
- -- Section 9.10: GPE block devices
+ - Section 9.10: GPE block devices
- -- Section 9.15: PC/AT RTC/CMOS devices
+ - Section 9.15: PC/AT RTC/CMOS devices
- -- Section 9.16: user presence detection devices
+ - Section 9.16: user presence detection devices
- -- Section 9.17: I/O APIC devices; all GICs must be enumerable via MADT
+ - Section 9.17: I/O APIC devices; all GICs must be enumerable via MADT
- -- Section 9.18: time and alarm devices (see 9.15)
+ - Section 9.18: time and alarm devices (see 9.15)
- -- Section 10: power source and power meter devices
+ - Section 10: power source and power meter devices
- -- Section 11: thermal management
+ - Section 11: thermal management
- -- Section 12: embedded controllers interface
+ - Section 12: embedded controllers interface
- -- Section 13: SMBus interfaces
+ - Section 13: SMBus interfaces
This also means that there is no support for the following objects:
+==== =========================== ==== ==========
Name Section Name Section
----- ------------ ---- ------------
+==== =========================== ==== ==========
_ALC 9.3.4 _FDM 9.10.3
_ALI 9.3.2 _FIX 6.2.7
_ALP 9.3.6 _GAI 10.4.5
@@ -619,4 +735,4 @@ _DCK 6.5.2 _UPD 9.16.1
_EC 12.12 _UPP 9.16.2
_FDE 9.10.1 _WPC 10.5.2
_FDI 9.10.2 _WPP 10.5.3
-
+==== =========================== ==== ==========
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt
index 1a74a041a443..f9341b71344b 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/arm-acpi.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+=====================
ACPI on ARMv8 Servers
----------------------
+=====================
+
ACPI can be used for ARMv8 general purpose servers designed to follow
the ARM SBSA (Server Base System Architecture) [0] and SBBR (Server
Base Boot Requirements) [1] specifications. Please note that the SBBR
@@ -34,28 +36,28 @@ of the summary text almost directly, to be honest.
The short form of the rationale for ACPI on ARM is:
--- ACPI’s byte code (AML) allows the platform to encode hardware behavior,
+- ACPI’s byte code (AML) allows the platform to encode hardware behavior,
while DT explicitly does not support this. For hardware vendors, being
able to encode behavior is a key tool used in supporting operating
system releases on new hardware.
--- ACPI’s OSPM defines a power management model that constrains what the
+- ACPI’s OSPM defines a power management model that constrains what the
platform is allowed to do into a specific model, while still providing
flexibility in hardware design.
--- In the enterprise server environment, ACPI has established bindings (such
+- In the enterprise server environment, ACPI has established bindings (such
as for RAS) which are currently used in production systems. DT does not.
Such bindings could be defined in DT at some point, but doing so means ARM
and x86 would end up using completely different code paths in both firmware
and the kernel.
--- Choosing a single interface to describe the abstraction between a platform
+- Choosing a single interface to describe the abstraction between a platform
and an OS is important. Hardware vendors would not be required to implement
both DT and ACPI if they want to support multiple operating systems. And,
agreeing on a single interface instead of being fragmented into per OS
interfaces makes for better interoperability overall.
--- The new ACPI governance process works well and Linux is now at the same
+- The new ACPI governance process works well and Linux is now at the same
table as hardware vendors and other OS vendors. In fact, there is no
longer any reason to feel that ACPI only belongs to Windows or that
Linux is in any way secondary to Microsoft in this arena. The move of
@@ -169,31 +171,31 @@ For the ACPI core to operate properly, and in turn provide the information
the kernel needs to configure devices, it expects to find the following
tables (all section numbers refer to the ACPI 6.1 specification):
- -- RSDP (Root System Description Pointer), section 5.2.5
+ - RSDP (Root System Description Pointer), section 5.2.5
- -- XSDT (eXtended System Description Table), section 5.2.8
+ - XSDT (eXtended System Description Table), section 5.2.8
- -- FADT (Fixed ACPI Description Table), section 5.2.9
+ - FADT (Fixed ACPI Description Table), section 5.2.9
- -- DSDT (Differentiated System Description Table), section
+ - DSDT (Differentiated System Description Table), section
5.2.11.1
- -- MADT (Multiple APIC Description Table), section 5.2.12
+ - MADT (Multiple APIC Description Table), section 5.2.12
- -- GTDT (Generic Timer Description Table), section 5.2.24
+ - GTDT (Generic Timer Description Table), section 5.2.24
- -- If PCI is supported, the MCFG (Memory mapped ConFiGuration
+ - If PCI is supported, the MCFG (Memory mapped ConFiGuration
Table), section 5.2.6, specifically Table 5-31.
- -- If booting without a console=<device> kernel parameter is
+ - If booting without a console=<device> kernel parameter is
supported, the SPCR (Serial Port Console Redirection table),
section 5.2.6, specifically Table 5-31.
- -- If necessary to describe the I/O topology, SMMUs and GIC ITSs,
+ - If necessary to describe the I/O topology, SMMUs and GIC ITSs,
the IORT (Input Output Remapping Table, section 5.2.6, specifically
Table 5-31).
- -- If NUMA is supported, the SRAT (System Resource Affinity Table)
+ - If NUMA is supported, the SRAT (System Resource Affinity Table)
and SLIT (System Locality distance Information Table), sections
5.2.16 and 5.2.17, respectively.
@@ -269,9 +271,9 @@ describes how to define the structure of an object returned via _DSD, and
how specific data structures are defined by specific UUIDs. Linux should
only use the _DSD Device Properties UUID [5]:
- -- UUID: daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301
+ - UUID: daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301
- -- http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
+ - http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
The UEFI Forum provides a mechanism for registering device properties [4]
so that they may be used across all operating systems supporting ACPI.
@@ -327,10 +329,10 @@ turning a device full off.
There are two options for using those Power Resources. They can:
- -- be managed in a _PSx method which gets called on entry to power
+ - be managed in a _PSx method which gets called on entry to power
state Dx.
- -- be declared separately as power resources with their own _ON and _OFF
+ - be declared separately as power resources with their own _ON and _OFF
methods. They are then tied back to D-states for a particular device
via _PRx which specifies which power resources a device needs to be on
while in Dx. Kernel then tracks number of devices using a power resource
@@ -339,16 +341,16 @@ There are two options for using those Power Resources. They can:
The kernel ACPI code will also assume that the _PSx methods follow the normal
ACPI rules for such methods:
- -- If either _PS0 or _PS3 is implemented, then the other method must also
+ - If either _PS0 or _PS3 is implemented, then the other method must also
be implemented.
- -- If a device requires usage or setup of a power resource when on, the ASL
+ - If a device requires usage or setup of a power resource when on, the ASL
should organize that it is allocated/enabled using the _PS0 method.
- -- Resources allocated or enabled in the _PS0 method should be disabled
+ - Resources allocated or enabled in the _PS0 method should be disabled
or de-allocated in the _PS3 method.
- -- Firmware will leave the resources in a reasonable state before handing
+ - Firmware will leave the resources in a reasonable state before handing
over control to the kernel.
Such code in _PSx methods will of course be very platform specific. But,
@@ -394,52 +396,52 @@ else must be discovered by the driver probe function. Then, have the rest
of the driver operate off of the contents of that struct. Doing so should
allow most divergence between ACPI and DT functionality to be kept local to
the probe function instead of being scattered throughout the driver. For
-example:
+example::
-static int device_probe_dt(struct platform_device *pdev)
-{
- /* DT specific functionality */
- ...
-}
+ static int device_probe_dt(struct platform_device *pdev)
+ {
+ /* DT specific functionality */
+ ...
+ }
-static int device_probe_acpi(struct platform_device *pdev)
-{
- /* ACPI specific functionality */
- ...
-}
+ static int device_probe_acpi(struct platform_device *pdev)
+ {
+ /* ACPI specific functionality */
+ ...
+ }
-static int device_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
-{
- ...
- struct device_node node = pdev->dev.of_node;
- ...
+ static int device_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
+ {
+ ...
+ struct device_node node = pdev->dev.of_node;
+ ...
- if (node)
- ret = device_probe_dt(pdev);
- else if (ACPI_HANDLE(&pdev->dev))
- ret = device_probe_acpi(pdev);
- else
- /* other initialization */
- ...
- /* Continue with any generic probe operations */
- ...
-}
+ if (node)
+ ret = device_probe_dt(pdev);
+ else if (ACPI_HANDLE(&pdev->dev))
+ ret = device_probe_acpi(pdev);
+ else
+ /* other initialization */
+ ...
+ /* Continue with any generic probe operations */
+ ...
+ }
DO keep the MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE entries together in the driver to make it
clear the different names the driver is probed for, both from DT and from
-ACPI:
+ACPI::
-static struct of_device_id virtio_mmio_match[] = {
- { .compatible = "virtio,mmio", },
- { }
-};
-MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, virtio_mmio_match);
+ static struct of_device_id virtio_mmio_match[] = {
+ { .compatible = "virtio,mmio", },
+ { }
+ };
+ MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, virtio_mmio_match);
-static const struct acpi_device_id virtio_mmio_acpi_match[] = {
- { "LNRO0005", },
- { }
-};
-MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, virtio_mmio_acpi_match);
+ static const struct acpi_device_id virtio_mmio_acpi_match[] = {
+ { "LNRO0005", },
+ { }
+ };
+ MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, virtio_mmio_acpi_match);
ASWG
@@ -471,7 +473,8 @@ Linux Code
Individual items specific to Linux on ARM, contained in the the Linux
source code, are in the list that follows:
-ACPI_OS_NAME This macro defines the string to be returned when
+ACPI_OS_NAME
+ This macro defines the string to be returned when
an ACPI method invokes the _OS method. On ARM64
systems, this macro will be "Linux" by default.
The command line parameter acpi_os=<string>
@@ -487,33 +490,39 @@ Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt.
References
----------
-[0] http://silver.arm.com -- document ARM-DEN-0029, or newer
+[0] http://silver.arm.com
+ document ARM-DEN-0029, or newer:
"Server Base System Architecture", version 2.3, dated 27 Mar 2014
[1] http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.den0044a/Server_Base_Boot_Requirements.pdf
Document ARM-DEN-0044A, or newer: "Server Base Boot Requirements, System
Software on ARM Platforms", dated 16 Aug 2014
-[2] http://www.secretlab.ca/archives/151, 10 Jan 2015, Copyright (c) 2015,
+[2] http://www.secretlab.ca/archives/151,
+ 10 Jan 2015, Copyright (c) 2015,
Linaro Ltd., written by Grant Likely.
-[3] AMD ACPI for Seattle platform documentation:
+[3] AMD ACPI for Seattle platform documentation
http://amd-dev.wpengine.netdna-cdn.com/wordpress/media/2012/10/Seattle_ACPI_Guide.pdf
-[4] http://www.uefi.org/acpi -- please see the link for the "ACPI _DSD Device
+
+[4] http://www.uefi.org/acpi
+ please see the link for the "ACPI _DSD Device
Property Registry Instructions"
-[5] http://www.uefi.org/acpi -- please see the link for the "_DSD (Device
+[5] http://www.uefi.org/acpi
+ please see the link for the "_DSD (Device
Specific Data) Implementation Guide"
-[6] Kernel code for the unified device property interface can be found in
+[6] Kernel code for the unified device
+ property interface can be found in
include/linux/property.h and drivers/base/property.c.
Authors
-------
-Al Stone <[email protected]>
-Graeme Gregory <[email protected]>
-Hanjun Guo <[email protected]>
+- Al Stone <[email protected]>
+- Graeme Gregory <[email protected]>
+- Hanjun Guo <[email protected]>
-Grant Likely <[email protected]>, for the "Why ACPI on ARM?" section
+- Grant Likely <[email protected]>, for the "Why ACPI on ARM?" section
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
index fbab7e21d116..3d041d0d16e8 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/booting.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Booting AArch64 Linux
- =====================
+=====================
+Booting AArch64 Linux
+=====================
Author: Will Deacon <[email protected]>
+
Date : 07 September 2012
This document is based on the ARM booting document by Russell King and
@@ -12,7 +14,7 @@ The AArch64 exception model is made up of a number of exception levels
counterpart. EL2 is the hypervisor level and exists only in non-secure
mode. EL3 is the highest priority level and exists only in secure mode.
-For the purposes of this document, we will use the term `boot loader'
+For the purposes of this document, we will use the term `boot loader`
simply to define all software that executes on the CPU(s) before control
is passed to the Linux kernel. This may include secure monitor and
hypervisor code, or it may just be a handful of instructions for
@@ -70,7 +72,7 @@ Image target is available instead.
Requirement: MANDATORY
-The decompressed kernel image contains a 64-byte header as follows:
+The decompressed kernel image contains a 64-byte header as follows::
u32 code0; /* Executable code */
u32 code1; /* Executable code */
@@ -103,19 +105,26 @@ Header notes:
- The flags field (introduced in v3.17) is a little-endian 64-bit field
composed as follows:
- Bit 0: Kernel endianness. 1 if BE, 0 if LE.
- Bit 1-2: Kernel Page size.
- 0 - Unspecified.
- 1 - 4K
- 2 - 16K
- 3 - 64K
- Bit 3: Kernel physical placement
- 0 - 2MB aligned base should be as close as possible
- to the base of DRAM, since memory below it is not
- accessible via the linear mapping
- 1 - 2MB aligned base may be anywhere in physical
- memory
- Bits 4-63: Reserved.
+
+ ============= ===============================================================
+ Bit 0 Kernel endianness. 1 if BE, 0 if LE.
+ Bit 1-2 Kernel Page size.
+
+ * 0 - Unspecified.
+ * 1 - 4K
+ * 2 - 16K
+ * 3 - 64K
+ Bit 3 Kernel physical placement
+
+ 0
+ 2MB aligned base should be as close as possible
+ to the base of DRAM, since memory below it is not
+ accessible via the linear mapping
+ 1
+ 2MB aligned base may be anywhere in physical
+ memory
+ Bits 4-63 Reserved.
+ ============= ===============================================================
- When image_size is zero, a bootloader should attempt to keep as much
memory as possible free for use by the kernel immediately after the
@@ -147,19 +156,22 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met:
corrupted by bogus network packets or disk data. This will save
you many hours of debug.
-- Primary CPU general-purpose register settings
- x0 = physical address of device tree blob (dtb) in system RAM.
- x1 = 0 (reserved for future use)
- x2 = 0 (reserved for future use)
- x3 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+- Primary CPU general-purpose register settings:
+
+ - x0 = physical address of device tree blob (dtb) in system RAM.
+ - x1 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+ - x2 = 0 (reserved for future use)
+ - x3 = 0 (reserved for future use)
- CPU mode
+
All forms of interrupts must be masked in PSTATE.DAIF (Debug, SError,
IRQ and FIQ).
The CPU must be in either EL2 (RECOMMENDED in order to have access to
the virtualisation extensions) or non-secure EL1.
- Caches, MMUs
+
The MMU must be off.
Instruction cache may be on or off.
The address range corresponding to the loaded kernel image must be
@@ -172,18 +184,21 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met:
operations (not recommended) must be configured and disabled.
- Architected timers
+
CNTFRQ must be programmed with the timer frequency and CNTVOFF must
be programmed with a consistent value on all CPUs. If entering the
kernel at EL1, CNTHCTL_EL2 must have EL1PCTEN (bit 0) set where
available.
- Coherency
+
All CPUs to be booted by the kernel must be part of the same coherency
domain on entry to the kernel. This may require IMPLEMENTATION DEFINED
initialisation to enable the receiving of maintenance operations on
each CPU.
- System registers
+
All writable architected system registers at the exception level where
the kernel image will be entered must be initialised by software at a
higher exception level to prevent execution in an UNKNOWN state.
@@ -195,28 +210,40 @@ Before jumping into the kernel, the following conditions must be met:
For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in v3 mode:
- If EL3 is present:
- ICC_SRE_EL3.Enable (bit 3) must be initialiased to 0b1.
- ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1.
+
+ - ICC_SRE_EL3.Enable (bit 3) must be initialiased to 0b1.
+ - ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1.
+
- If the kernel is entered at EL1:
- ICC.SRE_EL2.Enable (bit 3) must be initialised to 0b1
- ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1.
+
+ - ICC.SRE_EL2.Enable (bit 3) must be initialised to 0b1
+ - ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b1.
+
- The DT or ACPI tables must describe a GICv3 interrupt controller.
For systems with a GICv3 interrupt controller to be used in
compatibility (v2) mode:
+
- If EL3 is present:
- ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0.
+
+ ICC_SRE_EL3.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0.
+
- If the kernel is entered at EL1:
- ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0.
+
+ ICC_SRE_EL2.SRE (bit 0) must be initialised to 0b0.
+
- The DT or ACPI tables must describe a GICv2 interrupt controller.
For CPUs with pointer authentication functionality:
- If EL3 is present:
- SCR_EL3.APK (bit 16) must be initialised to 0b1
- SCR_EL3.API (bit 17) must be initialised to 0b1
+
+ - SCR_EL3.APK (bit 16) must be initialised to 0b1
+ - SCR_EL3.API (bit 17) must be initialised to 0b1
+
- If the kernel is entered at EL1:
- HCR_EL2.APK (bit 40) must be initialised to 0b1
- HCR_EL2.API (bit 41) must be initialised to 0b1
+
+ - HCR_EL2.APK (bit 40) must be initialised to 0b1
+ - HCR_EL2.API (bit 41) must be initialised to 0b1
The requirements described above for CPU mode, caches, MMUs, architected
timers, coherency and system registers apply to all CPUs. All CPUs must
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
index d4b4dd1fe786..251174aaa8ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- ARM64 CPU Feature Registers
- ===========================
+===========================
+ARM64 CPU Feature Registers
+===========================
Author: Suzuki K Poulose <[email protected]>
@@ -9,7 +10,7 @@ registers to userspace. The availability of this ABI is advertised
via the HWCAP_CPUID in HWCAPs.
1. Motivation
----------------
+-------------
The ARM architecture defines a set of feature registers, which describe
the capabilities of the CPU/system. Access to these system registers is
@@ -33,9 +34,10 @@ there are some issues with their usage.
2. Requirements
------------------
+---------------
+
+ a) Safety:
- a) Safety :
Applications should be able to use the information provided by the
infrastructure to run safely across the system. This has greater
implications on a system with heterogeneous CPUs.
@@ -47,7 +49,8 @@ there are some issues with their usage.
Otherwise an application could crash when scheduled on the CPU
which doesn't support CRC32.
- b) Security :
+ b) Security:
+
Applications should only be able to receive information that is
relevant to the normal operation in userspace. Hence, some of the
fields are masked out(i.e, made invisible) and their values are set to
@@ -58,10 +61,12 @@ there are some issues with their usage.
(even when the CPU provides it).
c) Implementation Defined Features
+
The infrastructure doesn't expose any register which is
IMPLEMENTATION DEFINED as per ARMv8-A Architecture.
- d) CPU Identification :
+ d) CPU Identification:
+
MIDR_EL1 is exposed to help identify the processor. On a
heterogeneous system, this could be racy (just like getcpu()). The
process could be migrated to another CPU by the time it uses the
@@ -70,7 +75,7 @@ there are some issues with their usage.
currently executing on. The REVIDR is not exposed due to this
constraint, as REVIDR makes sense only in conjunction with the
MIDR. Alternately, MIDR_EL1 and REVIDR_EL1 are exposed via sysfs
- at:
+ at::
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu$ID/regs/identification/
\- midr
@@ -85,7 +90,8 @@ exception and ends up in SIGILL being delivered to the process.
The infrastructure hooks into the exception handler and emulates the
operation if the source belongs to the supported system register space.
-The infrastructure emulates only the following system register space:
+The infrastructure emulates only the following system register space::
+
Op0=3, Op1=0, CRn=0, CRm=0,4,5,6,7
(See Table C5-6 'System instruction encodings for non-Debug System
@@ -107,73 +113,76 @@ infrastructure:
-------------------------------------------
1) ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1 - Instruction Set Attribute Register 0
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Name | bits | visible |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| TS | [55-52] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| FHM | [51-48] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| DP | [47-44] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SM4 | [43-40] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SM3 | [39-36] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SHA3 | [35-32] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| RDM | [31-28] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| ATOMICS | [23-20] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| CRC32 | [19-16] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SHA2 | [15-12] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SHA1 | [11-8] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| AES | [7-4] | y |
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
2) ID_AA64PFR0_EL1 - Processor Feature Register 0
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Name | bits | visible |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| DIT | [51-48] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| SVE | [35-32] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| GIC | [27-24] | n |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| AdvSIMD | [23-20] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| FP | [19-16] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| EL3 | [15-12] | n |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| EL2 | [11-8] | n |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| EL1 | [7-4] | n |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| EL0 | [3-0] | n |
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
3) MIDR_EL1 - Main ID Register
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Name | bits | visible |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Implementer | [31-24] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Variant | [23-20] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Architecture | [19-16] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| PartNum | [15-4] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Revision | [3-0] | y |
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
NOTE: The 'visible' fields of MIDR_EL1 will contain the value
as available on the CPU where it is fetched and is not a system
@@ -181,74 +190,76 @@ infrastructure:
4) ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1 - Instruction set attribute register 1
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Name | bits | visible |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| GPI | [31-28] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| GPA | [27-24] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| LRCPC | [23-20] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| FCMA | [19-16] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| JSCVT | [15-12] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| API | [11-8] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| APA | [7-4] | y |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| DPB | [3-0] | y |
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
5) ID_AA64MMFR2_EL1 - Memory model feature register 2
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| Name | bits | visible |
- |--------------------------------------------------|
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
| AT | [35-32] | y |
- x--------------------------------------------------x
+ +------------------------------+---------+---------+
Appendix I: Example
----------------------------
+-------------------
-/*
- * Sample program to demonstrate the MRS emulation ABI.
- *
- * Copyright (C) 2015-2016, ARM Ltd
- *
- * Author: Suzuki K Poulose <[email protected]>
- *
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
- * published by the Free Software Foundation.
- *
- * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- * GNU General Public License for more details.
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
- * published by the Free Software Foundation.
- *
- * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- * GNU General Public License for more details.
- */
+::
-#include <asm/hwcap.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <sys/auxv.h>
+ /*
+ * Sample program to demonstrate the MRS emulation ABI.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2015-2016, ARM Ltd
+ *
+ * Author: Suzuki K Poulose <[email protected]>
+ *
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ */
-#define get_cpu_ftr(id) ({ \
+ #include <asm/hwcap.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <sys/auxv.h>
+
+ #define get_cpu_ftr(id) ({ \
unsigned long __val; \
asm("mrs %0, "#id : "=r" (__val)); \
printf("%-20s: 0x%016lx\n", #id, __val); \
})
-int main(void)
-{
+ int main(void)
+ {
if (!(getauxval(AT_HWCAP) & HWCAP_CPUID)) {
fputs("CPUID registers unavailable\n", stderr);
@@ -268,13 +279,10 @@ int main(void)
get_cpu_ftr(MPIDR_EL1);
get_cpu_ftr(REVIDR_EL1);
-#if 0
+ #if 0
/* Unexposed register access causes SIGILL */
get_cpu_ftr(ID_MMFR0_EL1);
-#endif
+ #endif
return 0;
-}
-
-
-
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
index 13d6691b37be..e624d6bd89f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================
ARM64 ELF hwcaps
================
@@ -15,16 +16,16 @@ of flags called hwcaps, exposed in the auxilliary vector.
Userspace software can test for features by acquiring the AT_HWCAP entry
of the auxilliary vector, and testing whether the relevant flags are
-set, e.g.
+set, e.g.::
-bool floating_point_is_present(void)
-{
- unsigned long hwcaps = getauxval(AT_HWCAP);
- if (hwcaps & HWCAP_FP)
- return true;
+ bool floating_point_is_present(void)
+ {
+ unsigned long hwcaps = getauxval(AT_HWCAP);
+ if (hwcaps & HWCAP_FP)
+ return true;
- return false;
-}
+ return false;
+ }
Where software relies on a feature described by a hwcap, it should check
the relevant hwcap flag to verify that the feature is present before
@@ -45,7 +46,7 @@ userspace code at EL0. These hwcaps are defined in terms of ID register
fields, and should be interpreted with reference to the definition of
these fields in the ARM Architecture Reference Manual (ARM ARM).
-Such hwcaps are described below in the form:
+Such hwcaps are described below in the form::
Functionality implied by idreg.field == val.
@@ -64,133 +65,102 @@ reference to ID registers, and may refer to other documentation.
---------------------------------
HWCAP_FP
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.FP == 0b0000.
HWCAP_ASIMD
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.AdvSIMD == 0b0000.
HWCAP_EVTSTRM
-
The generic timer is configured to generate events at a frequency of
approximately 100KHz.
HWCAP_AES
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.AES == 0b0001.
HWCAP_PMULL
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.AES == 0b0010.
HWCAP_SHA1
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SHA1 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SHA2
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SHA2 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_CRC32
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.CRC32 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_ATOMICS
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.Atomic == 0b0010.
HWCAP_FPHP
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.FP == 0b0001.
HWCAP_ASIMDHP
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.AdvSIMD == 0b0001.
HWCAP_CPUID
-
EL0 access to certain ID registers is available, to the extent
described by Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.txt.
These ID registers may imply the availability of features.
HWCAP_ASIMDRDM
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.RDM == 0b0001.
HWCAP_JSCVT
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.JSCVT == 0b0001.
HWCAP_FCMA
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.FCMA == 0b0001.
HWCAP_LRCPC
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.LRCPC == 0b0001.
HWCAP_DCPOP
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.DPB == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SHA3
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SHA3 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SM3
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SM3 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SM4
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SM4 == 0b0001.
HWCAP_ASIMDDP
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.DP == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SHA512
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.SHA2 == 0b0010.
HWCAP_SVE
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.SVE == 0b0001.
HWCAP_ASIMDFHM
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.FHM == 0b0001.
HWCAP_DIT
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR0_EL1.DIT == 0b0001.
HWCAP_USCAT
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64MMFR2_EL1.AT == 0b0001.
HWCAP_ILRCPC
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.LRCPC == 0b0010.
HWCAP_FLAGM
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.TS == 0b0001.
HWCAP_SSBS
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64PFR1_EL1.SSBS == 0b0010.
HWCAP_PACA
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.APA == 0b0001 or
ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.API == 0b0001, as described by
Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt.
HWCAP_PACG
-
Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.GPA == 0b0001 or
ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.GPI == 0b0001, as described by
Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt
index cfae87dc653b..b44f939e5210 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/hugetlbpage.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+====================
HugeTLBpage on ARM64
====================
@@ -31,8 +32,10 @@ and level of the page table.
The following hugepage sizes are supported -
- CONT PTE PMD CONT PMD PUD
- -------- --- -------- ---
+ ====== ======== ==== ======== ===
+ - CONT PTE PMD CONT PMD PUD
+ ====== ======== ==== ======== ===
4K: 64K 2M 32M 1G
16K: 2M 32M 1G
64K: 2M 512M 16G
+ ====== ======== ==== ======== ===
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt b/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt
index 01bf3d9fac85..54401b22cb8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===================
+Legacy instructions
+===================
+
The arm64 port of the Linux kernel provides infrastructure to support
emulation of instructions which have been deprecated, or obsoleted in
the architecture. The infrastructure code uses undefined instruction
@@ -9,19 +13,22 @@ The emulation mode can be controlled by writing to sysctl nodes
behaviours and the corresponding values of the sysctl nodes -
* Undef
- Value: 0
+ Value: 0
+
Generates undefined instruction abort. Default for instructions that
have been obsoleted in the architecture, e.g., SWP
* Emulate
- Value: 1
+ Value: 1
+
Uses software emulation. To aid migration of software, in this mode
usage of emulated instruction is traced as well as rate limited
warnings are issued. This is the default for deprecated
instructions, .e.g., CP15 barriers
* Hardware Execution
- Value: 2
+ Value: 2
+
Although marked as deprecated, some implementations may support the
enabling/disabling of hardware support for the execution of these
instructions. Using hardware execution generally provides better
@@ -38,20 +45,24 @@ individual instruction notes for further information.
Supported legacy instructions
-----------------------------
* SWP{B}
-Node: /proc/sys/abi/swp
-Status: Obsolete
-Default: Undef (0)
+
+:Node: /proc/sys/abi/swp
+:Status: Obsolete
+:Default: Undef (0)
* CP15 Barriers
-Node: /proc/sys/abi/cp15_barrier
-Status: Deprecated
-Default: Emulate (1)
+
+:Node: /proc/sys/abi/cp15_barrier
+:Status: Deprecated
+:Default: Emulate (1)
* SETEND
-Node: /proc/sys/abi/setend
-Status: Deprecated
-Default: Emulate (1)*
-Note: All the cpus on the system must have mixed endian support at EL0
-for this feature to be enabled. If a new CPU - which doesn't support mixed
-endian - is hotplugged in after this feature has been enabled, there could
-be unexpected results in the application.
+
+:Node: /proc/sys/abi/setend
+:Status: Deprecated
+:Default: Emulate (1)*
+
+ Note: All the cpus on the system must have mixed endian support at EL0
+ for this feature to be enabled. If a new CPU - which doesn't support mixed
+ endian - is hotplugged in after this feature has been enabled, there could
+ be unexpected results in the application.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
index c5dab30d3389..464b880fc4b7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Memory Layout on AArch64 Linux
- ==============================
+==============================
+Memory Layout on AArch64 Linux
+==============================
Author: Catalin Marinas <[email protected]>
@@ -21,69 +22,69 @@ The swapper_pg_dir address is written to TTBR1 and never written to
TTBR0.
-AArch64 Linux memory layout with 4KB pages + 3 levels:
+AArch64 Linux memory layout with 4KB pages + 3 levels::
-Start End Size Use
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-0000000000000000 0000007fffffffff 512GB user
-ffffff8000000000 ffffffffffffffff 512GB kernel
+ Start End Size Use
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0000000000000000 0000007fffffffff 512GB user
+ ffffff8000000000 ffffffffffffffff 512GB kernel
-AArch64 Linux memory layout with 4KB pages + 4 levels:
+AArch64 Linux memory layout with 4KB pages + 4 levels::
-Start End Size Use
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-0000000000000000 0000ffffffffffff 256TB user
-ffff000000000000 ffffffffffffffff 256TB kernel
+ Start End Size Use
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0000000000000000 0000ffffffffffff 256TB user
+ ffff000000000000 ffffffffffffffff 256TB kernel
-AArch64 Linux memory layout with 64KB pages + 2 levels:
+AArch64 Linux memory layout with 64KB pages + 2 levels::
-Start End Size Use
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-0000000000000000 000003ffffffffff 4TB user
-fffffc0000000000 ffffffffffffffff 4TB kernel
+ Start End Size Use
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0000000000000000 000003ffffffffff 4TB user
+ fffffc0000000000 ffffffffffffffff 4TB kernel
-AArch64 Linux memory layout with 64KB pages + 3 levels:
+AArch64 Linux memory layout with 64KB pages + 3 levels::
-Start End Size Use
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-0000000000000000 0000ffffffffffff 256TB user
-ffff000000000000 ffffffffffffffff 256TB kernel
+ Start End Size Use
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0000000000000000 0000ffffffffffff 256TB user
+ ffff000000000000 ffffffffffffffff 256TB kernel
For details of the virtual kernel memory layout please see the kernel
booting log.
-Translation table lookup with 4KB pages:
+Translation table lookup with 4KB pages::
-+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-|63 56|55 48|47 40|39 32|31 24|23 16|15 8|7 0|
-+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | | |
- | | | | | v
- | | | | | [11:0] in-page offset
- | | | | +-> [20:12] L3 index
- | | | +-----------> [29:21] L2 index
- | | +---------------------> [38:30] L1 index
- | +-------------------------------> [47:39] L0 index
- +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
+ +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |63 56|55 48|47 40|39 32|31 24|23 16|15 8|7 0|
+ +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ | | | | | |
+ | | | | | v
+ | | | | | [11:0] in-page offset
+ | | | | +-> [20:12] L3 index
+ | | | +-----------> [29:21] L2 index
+ | | +---------------------> [38:30] L1 index
+ | +-------------------------------> [47:39] L0 index
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
-Translation table lookup with 64KB pages:
+Translation table lookup with 64KB pages::
-+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-|63 56|55 48|47 40|39 32|31 24|23 16|15 8|7 0|
-+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | |
- | | | | v
- | | | | [15:0] in-page offset
- | | | +----------> [28:16] L3 index
- | | +--------------------------> [41:29] L2 index
- | +-------------------------------> [47:42] L1 index
- +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
+ +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ |63 56|55 48|47 40|39 32|31 24|23 16|15 8|7 0|
+ +--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
+ | | | | |
+ | | | | v
+ | | | | [15:0] in-page offset
+ | | | +----------> [28:16] L3 index
+ | | +--------------------------> [41:29] L2 index
+ | +-------------------------------> [47:42] L1 index
+ +-------------------------------------------------> [63] TTBR0/1
When using KVM without the Virtualization Host Extensions, the
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
index 5baca42ba146..f8b9af8b6490 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/pointer-authentication.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+=======================================
Pointer authentication in AArch64 Linux
=======================================
Author: Mark Rutland <[email protected]>
+
Date: 2017-07-19
This document briefly describes the provision of pointer authentication
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
index c00efb639e46..926b2ef62cd2 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Silicon Errata and Software Workarounds
- =======================================
+=======================================
+Silicon Errata and Software Workarounds
+=======================================
Author: Will Deacon <[email protected]>
+
Date : 27 November 2015
It is an unfortunate fact of life that hardware is often produced with
@@ -9,11 +11,13 @@ so-called "errata", which can cause it to deviate from the architecture
under specific circumstances. For hardware produced by ARM, these
errata are broadly classified into the following categories:
- Category A: A critical error without a viable workaround.
- Category B: A significant or critical error with an acceptable
+ ========== ========================================================
+ Category A A critical error without a viable workaround.
+ Category B A significant or critical error with an acceptable
workaround.
- Category C: A minor error that is not expected to occur under normal
+ Category C A minor error that is not expected to occur under normal
operation.
+ ========== ========================================================
For more information, consult one of the "Software Developers Errata
Notice" documents available on infocenter.arm.com (registration
@@ -42,45 +46,82 @@ file acts as a registry of software workarounds in the Linux Kernel and
will be updated when new workarounds are committed and backported to
stable kernels.
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Implementor | Component | Erratum ID | Kconfig |
-+----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++================+=================+=================+=============================+
| Allwinner | A64/R18 | UNKNOWN1 | SUN50I_ERRATUM_UNKNOWN1 |
-| | | | |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #826319 | ARM64_ERRATUM_826319 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #827319 | ARM64_ERRATUM_827319 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #824069 | ARM64_ERRATUM_824069 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #819472 | ARM64_ERRATUM_819472 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #845719 | ARM64_ERRATUM_845719 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A53 | #843419 | ARM64_ERRATUM_843419 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A57 | #832075 | ARM64_ERRATUM_832075 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A57 | #852523 | N/A |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A57 | #834220 | ARM64_ERRATUM_834220 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A72 | #853709 | N/A |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A73 | #858921 | ARM64_ERRATUM_858921 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A55 | #1024718 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1024718 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A76 | #1188873 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1188873 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A76 | #1165522 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1165522 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | Cortex-A76 | #1286807 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1286807 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| ARM | MMU-500 | #841119,#826419 | N/A |
-| | | | |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX ITS | #22375, #24313 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_22375 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX ITS | #23144 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23144 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX GICv3 | #23154 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_23154 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX Core | #27456 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_27456 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX Core | #30115 | CAVIUM_ERRATUM_30115 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX SMMUv2 | #27704 | N/A |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX2 SMMUv3| #74 | N/A |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Cavium | ThunderX2 SMMUv3| #126 | N/A |
-| | | | |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Freescale/NXP | LS2080A/LS1043A | A-008585 | FSL_ERRATUM_A008585 |
-| | | | |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Hisilicon | Hip0{5,6,7} | #161010101 | HISILICON_ERRATUM_161010101 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Hisilicon | Hip0{6,7} | #161010701 | N/A |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Hisilicon | Hip07 | #161600802 | HISILICON_ERRATUM_161600802 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Hisilicon | Hip08 SMMU PMCG | #162001800 | N/A |
-| | | | |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Qualcomm Tech. | Kryo/Falkor v1 | E1003 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1003 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v1 | E1009 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1009 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Qualcomm Tech. | QDF2400 ITS | E0065 | QCOM_QDF2400_ERRATUM_0065 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Qualcomm Tech. | Falkor v{1,2} | E1041 | QCOM_FALKOR_ERRATUM_1041 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
| Fujitsu | A64FX | E#010001 | FUJITSU_ERRATUM_010001 |
++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt b/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
index 7169a0ec41d8..d73c8e04b22b 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/sve.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Scalable Vector Extension support for AArch64 Linux
- ===================================================
+===================================================
+Scalable Vector Extension support for AArch64 Linux
+===================================================
Author: Dave Martin <[email protected]>
+
Date: 4 August 2017
This document outlines briefly the interface provided to userspace by Linux in
@@ -409,7 +411,7 @@ In A64 state, SVE adds the following:
* FPSR and FPCR are retained from ARMv8-A, and interact with SVE floating-point
operations in a similar way to the way in which they interact with ARMv8
- floating-point operations.
+ floating-point operations::
8VL-1 128 0 bit index
+---- //// -----------------+
@@ -466,6 +468,8 @@ ARMv8-A defines the following floating-point / SIMD register state:
* 32 128-bit vector registers V0..V31
* 2 32-bit status/control registers FPSR, FPCR
+::
+
127 0 bit index
+---------------+
V0 | |
diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt
index a25a99e82bb1..2acdec3ebbeb 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm64/tagged-pointers.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Tagged virtual addresses in AArch64 Linux
- =========================================
+=========================================
+Tagged virtual addresses in AArch64 Linux
+=========================================
Author: Will Deacon <[email protected]>
+
Date : 12 June 2013
This document briefly describes the provision of tagged virtual
diff --git a/arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c b/arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c
index 07bf740bea91..31cc2f423aa8 100644
--- a/arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c
+++ b/arch/arm64/kernel/kexec_image.c
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ static void *image_load(struct kimage *image,
/*
* We require a kernel with an unambiguous Image header. Per
- * Documentation/booting.txt, this is the case when image_size
+ * Documentation/arm64/booting.txt, this is the case when image_size
* is non-zero (practically speaking, since v3.17).
*/
h = (struct arm64_image_header *)kernel;
--
2.20.1
The CFQ scheduler was removed on this changeset:
commit f382fb0bcef4c37dc049e9f6963e3baf204d815c
Author: Jens Axboe <[email protected]>
Date: Fri Oct 12 10:14:46 2018 -0600
block: remove legacy IO schedulers
Retain the deadline documentation, as that carries over to mq-deadline
as well.
Tested-by: Ming Lei <[email protected]>
Reviewed-by: Omar Sandoval <[email protected]>
Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe <[email protected]>
However, the cgroups-v1 documentation still mentions it and points
to a removed file that used to belong to such scheduler.
Add a note about that, as someone needs to fix the document pointing
to another scheduler, if cgroups-v1 blockio is not dependent of
CFQ scheduler.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt | 7 +++++++
1 file changed, 7 insertions(+)
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
index 2c1b907afc14..2836c2c31e63 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
@@ -17,6 +17,13 @@ one is throttling policy which can be used to specify upper IO rate limits
on devices. This policy is implemented in generic block layer and can be
used on leaf nodes as well as higher level logical devices like device mapper.
+.. note::
+
+ While this document mentions the CFQ scheduler, it got removed at
+ Kernel 4.20, as there are other schedulers that are more efficient.
+
+ Someone needs to update this file in order to reflect such change.
+
HOWTO
=====
Proportional Weight division of bandwidth
--
2.20.1
Convert the cgroup-v1 files to ReST format, in order to
allow a later addition to the admin-guide.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt | 96 ++--
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt | 180 +++----
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt | 15 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt | 203 ++++----
Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt | 40 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt | 31 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt | 259 ++++++----
Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt | 449 +++++++++++-------
Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt | 37 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt | 78 +--
Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt | 66 +--
13 files changed, 890 insertions(+), 602 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
index 673dc34d3f78..2c1b907afc14 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/blkio-controller.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
- Block IO Controller
- ===================
+===================
+Block IO Controller
+===================
+
Overview
========
cgroup subsys "blkio" implements the block io controller. There seems to be
@@ -22,28 +24,35 @@ Proportional Weight division of bandwidth
You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different
cgroups. Here is what you can do.
-- Enable Block IO controller
+- Enable Block IO controller::
+
CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y
-- Enable group scheduling in CFQ
+- Enable group scheduling in CFQ:
+
+
CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED=y
- Compile and boot into kernel and mount IO controller (blkio); see
cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?.
+ ::
+
mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
-- Create two cgroups
+- Create two cgroups::
+
mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/ /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2
-- Set weights of group test1 and test2
+- Set weights of group test1 and test2::
+
echo 1000 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test1/blkio.weight
echo 500 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/test2/blkio.weight
- Create two same size files (say 512MB each) on same disk (file1, file2) and
- launch two dd threads in different cgroup to read those files.
+ launch two dd threads in different cgroup to read those files::
sync
echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
@@ -65,24 +74,27 @@ cgroups. Here is what you can do.
Throttling/Upper Limit policy
-----------------------------
-- Enable Block IO controller
+- Enable Block IO controller::
+
CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y
-- Enable throttling in block layer
+- Enable throttling in block layer::
+
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_THROTTLING=y
-- Mount blkio controller (see cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?)
+- Mount blkio controller (see cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?)::
+
mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
- Specify a bandwidth rate on particular device for root group. The format
- for policy is "<major>:<minor> <bytes_per_second>".
+ for policy is "<major>:<minor> <bytes_per_second>"::
echo "8:16 1048576" > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
Above will put a limit of 1MB/second on reads happening for root group
on device having major/minor number 8:16.
-- Run dd to read a file and see if rate is throttled to 1MB/s or not.
+- Run dd to read a file and see if rate is throttled to 1MB/s or not::
# dd iflag=direct if=/mnt/common/zerofile of=/dev/null bs=4K count=1024
1024+0 records in
@@ -99,7 +111,7 @@ throttling's hierarchy support is enabled iff "sane_behavior" is
enabled from cgroup side, which currently is a development option and
not publicly available.
-If somebody created a hierarchy like as follows.
+If somebody created a hierarchy like as follows::
root
/ \
@@ -115,7 +127,7 @@ directly generated by tasks in that cgroup.
Throttling without "sane_behavior" enabled from cgroup side will
practically treat all groups at same level as if it looks like the
-following.
+following::
pivot
/ / \ \
@@ -152,27 +164,31 @@ Proportional weight policy files
These rules override the default value of group weight as specified
by blkio.weight.
- Following is the format.
+ Following is the format::
- # echo dev_maj:dev_minor weight > blkio.weight_device
- Configure weight=300 on /dev/sdb (8:16) in this cgroup
- # echo 8:16 300 > blkio.weight_device
- # cat blkio.weight_device
- dev weight
- 8:16 300
+ # echo dev_maj:dev_minor weight > blkio.weight_device
- Configure weight=500 on /dev/sda (8:0) in this cgroup
- # echo 8:0 500 > blkio.weight_device
- # cat blkio.weight_device
- dev weight
- 8:0 500
- 8:16 300
+ Configure weight=300 on /dev/sdb (8:16) in this cgroup::
- Remove specific weight for /dev/sda in this cgroup
- # echo 8:0 0 > blkio.weight_device
- # cat blkio.weight_device
- dev weight
- 8:16 300
+ # echo 8:16 300 > blkio.weight_device
+ # cat blkio.weight_device
+ dev weight
+ 8:16 300
+
+ Configure weight=500 on /dev/sda (8:0) in this cgroup::
+
+ # echo 8:0 500 > blkio.weight_device
+ # cat blkio.weight_device
+ dev weight
+ 8:0 500
+ 8:16 300
+
+ Remove specific weight for /dev/sda in this cgroup::
+
+ # echo 8:0 0 > blkio.weight_device
+ # cat blkio.weight_device
+ dev weight
+ 8:16 300
- blkio.leaf_weight[_device]
- Equivalents of blkio.weight[_device] for the purpose of
@@ -297,30 +313,30 @@ Throttling/Upper limit policy files
- blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
- Specifies upper limit on READ rate from the device. IO rate is
specified in bytes per second. Rules are per device. Following is
- the format.
+ the format::
- echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
+ echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.read_bps_device
- blkio.throttle.write_bps_device
- Specifies upper limit on WRITE rate to the device. IO rate is
specified in bytes per second. Rules are per device. Following is
- the format.
+ the format::
- echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.write_bps_device
+ echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.write_bps_device
- blkio.throttle.read_iops_device
- Specifies upper limit on READ rate from the device. IO rate is
specified in IO per second. Rules are per device. Following is
- the format.
+ the format::
- echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.read_iops_device
+ echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.read_iops_device
- blkio.throttle.write_iops_device
- Specifies upper limit on WRITE rate to the device. IO rate is
specified in io per second. Rules are per device. Following is
- the format.
+ the format::
- echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.write_iops_device
+ echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.throttle.write_iops_device
Note: If both BW and IOPS rules are specified for a device, then IO is
subjected to both the constraints.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt
index 059f7063eea6..2ee5e8b6db0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cgroups.txt
@@ -1,35 +1,39 @@
- CGROUPS
- -------
+==============
+Control Groups
+==============
Written by Paul Menage <[email protected]> based on
Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt
Original copyright statements from cpusets.txt:
+
Portions Copyright (C) 2004 BULL SA.
+
Portions Copyright (c) 2004-2006 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
+
Modified by Paul Jackson <[email protected]>
+
Modified by Christoph Lameter <[email protected]>
-CONTENTS:
-=========
+.. CONTENTS:
-1. Control Groups
- 1.1 What are cgroups ?
- 1.2 Why are cgroups needed ?
- 1.3 How are cgroups implemented ?
- 1.4 What does notify_on_release do ?
- 1.5 What does clone_children do ?
- 1.6 How do I use cgroups ?
-2. Usage Examples and Syntax
- 2.1 Basic Usage
- 2.2 Attaching processes
- 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name
-3. Kernel API
- 3.1 Overview
- 3.2 Synchronization
- 3.3 Subsystem API
-4. Extended attributes usage
-5. Questions
+ 1. Control Groups
+ 1.1 What are cgroups ?
+ 1.2 Why are cgroups needed ?
+ 1.3 How are cgroups implemented ?
+ 1.4 What does notify_on_release do ?
+ 1.5 What does clone_children do ?
+ 1.6 How do I use cgroups ?
+ 2. Usage Examples and Syntax
+ 2.1 Basic Usage
+ 2.2 Attaching processes
+ 2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name
+ 3. Kernel API
+ 3.1 Overview
+ 3.2 Synchronization
+ 3.3 Subsystem API
+ 4. Extended attributes usage
+ 5. Questions
1. Control Groups
=================
@@ -108,7 +112,7 @@ As an example of a scenario (originally proposed by [email protected])
that can benefit from multiple hierarchies, consider a large
university server with various users - students, professors, system
tasks etc. The resource planning for this server could be along the
-following lines:
+following lines::
CPU : "Top cpuset"
/ \
@@ -136,7 +140,7 @@ depending on who launched it (prof/student).
With the ability to classify tasks differently for different resources
(by putting those resource subsystems in different hierarchies),
the admin can easily set up a script which receives exec notifications
-and depending on who is launching the browser he can
+and depending on who is launching the browser he can::
# echo browser_pid > /sys/fs/cgroup/<restype>/<userclass>/tasks
@@ -151,7 +155,7 @@ wants to do online gaming :)) OR give one of the student's simulation
apps enhanced CPU power.
With ability to write PIDs directly to resource classes, it's just a
-matter of:
+matter of::
# echo pid > /sys/fs/cgroup/network/<new_class>/tasks
(after some time)
@@ -306,7 +310,7 @@ configuration from the parent during initialization.
--------------------------
To start a new job that is to be contained within a cgroup, using
-the "cpuset" cgroup subsystem, the steps are something like:
+the "cpuset" cgroup subsystem, the steps are something like::
1) mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
2) mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
@@ -320,7 +324,7 @@ the "cpuset" cgroup subsystem, the steps are something like:
For example, the following sequence of commands will setup a cgroup
named "Charlie", containing just CPUs 2 and 3, and Memory Node 1,
-and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cgroup:
+and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cgroup::
mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
@@ -345,8 +349,9 @@ and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cgroup:
Creating, modifying, using cgroups can be done through the cgroup
virtual filesystem.
-To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type:
-# mount -t cgroup xxx /sys/fs/cgroup
+To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type::
+
+ # mount -t cgroup xxx /sys/fs/cgroup
The "xxx" is not interpreted by the cgroup code, but will appear in
/proc/mounts so may be any useful identifying string that you like.
@@ -355,18 +360,19 @@ Note: Some subsystems do not work without some user input first. For instance,
if cpusets are enabled the user will have to populate the cpus and mems files
for each new cgroup created before that group can be used.
-As explained in section `1.2 Why are cgroups needed?' you should create
+As explained in section `1.2 Why are cgroups needed?` you should create
different hierarchies of cgroups for each single resource or group of
resources you want to control. Therefore, you should mount a tmpfs on
/sys/fs/cgroup and create directories for each cgroup resource or resource
-group.
+group::
-# mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
-# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
+ # mount -t tmpfs cgroup_root /sys/fs/cgroup
+ # mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory
-subsystems, type:
-# mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
+subsystems, type::
+
+ # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
While remounting cgroups is currently supported, it is not recommend
to use it. Remounting allows changing bound subsystems and
@@ -375,9 +381,10 @@ hierarchy is empty and release_agent itself should be replaced with
conventional fsnotify. The support for remounting will be removed in
the future.
-To Specify a hierarchy's release_agent:
-# mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,release_agent="/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" \
- xxx /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
+To Specify a hierarchy's release_agent::
+
+ # mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,release_agent="/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" \
+ xxx /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
Note that specifying 'release_agent' more than once will return failure.
@@ -390,32 +397,39 @@ Then under /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1 you can find a tree that corresponds to the
tree of the cgroups in the system. For instance, /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
is the cgroup that holds the whole system.
-If you want to change the value of release_agent:
-# echo "/sbin/new_release_agent" > /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1/release_agent
+If you want to change the value of release_agent::
+
+ # echo "/sbin/new_release_agent" > /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1/release_agent
It can also be changed via remount.
-If you want to create a new cgroup under /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1:
-# cd /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
-# mkdir my_cgroup
+If you want to create a new cgroup under /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1::
-Now you want to do something with this cgroup.
-# cd my_cgroup
+ # cd /sys/fs/cgroup/rg1
+ # mkdir my_cgroup
-In this directory you can find several files:
-# ls
-cgroup.procs notify_on_release tasks
-(plus whatever files added by the attached subsystems)
+Now you want to do something with this cgroup:
-Now attach your shell to this cgroup:
-# /bin/echo $$ > tasks
+ # cd my_cgroup
+
+In this directory you can find several files::
+
+ # ls
+ cgroup.procs notify_on_release tasks
+ (plus whatever files added by the attached subsystems)
+
+Now attach your shell to this cgroup::
+
+ # /bin/echo $$ > tasks
You can also create cgroups inside your cgroup by using mkdir in this
-directory.
-# mkdir my_sub_cs
+directory::
-To remove a cgroup, just use rmdir:
-# rmdir my_sub_cs
+ # mkdir my_sub_cs
+
+To remove a cgroup, just use rmdir::
+
+ # rmdir my_sub_cs
This will fail if the cgroup is in use (has cgroups inside, or
has processes attached, or is held alive by other subsystem-specific
@@ -424,19 +438,21 @@ reference).
2.2 Attaching processes
-----------------------
-# /bin/echo PID > tasks
+::
+
+ # /bin/echo PID > tasks
Note that it is PID, not PIDs. You can only attach ONE task at a time.
-If you have several tasks to attach, you have to do it one after another:
+If you have several tasks to attach, you have to do it one after another::
-# /bin/echo PID1 > tasks
-# /bin/echo PID2 > tasks
- ...
-# /bin/echo PIDn > tasks
+ # /bin/echo PID1 > tasks
+ # /bin/echo PID2 > tasks
+ ...
+ # /bin/echo PIDn > tasks
-You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0:
+You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0::
-# echo 0 > tasks
+ # echo 0 > tasks
You can use the cgroup.procs file instead of the tasks file to move all
threads in a threadgroup at once. Echoing the PID of any task in a
@@ -529,7 +545,7 @@ Each subsystem may export the following methods. The only mandatory
methods are css_alloc/free. Any others that are null are presumed to
be successful no-ops.
-struct cgroup_subsys_state *css_alloc(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+`struct cgroup_subsys_state *css_alloc(struct cgroup *cgrp)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called to allocate a subsystem state object for a cgroup. The
@@ -544,7 +560,7 @@ identified by the passed cgroup object having a NULL parent (since
it's the root of the hierarchy) and may be an appropriate place for
initialization code.
-int css_online(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+`int css_online(struct cgroup *cgrp)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called after @cgrp successfully completed all allocations and made
@@ -554,7 +570,7 @@ callback can be used to implement reliable state sharing and
propagation along the hierarchy. See the comment on
cgroup_for_each_descendant_pre() for details.
-void css_offline(struct cgroup *cgrp);
+`void css_offline(struct cgroup *cgrp);`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
This is the counterpart of css_online() and called iff css_online()
@@ -564,7 +580,7 @@ all references it's holding on @cgrp. When all references are dropped,
cgroup removal will proceed to the next step - css_free(). After this
callback, @cgrp should be considered dead to the subsystem.
-void css_free(struct cgroup *cgrp)
+`void css_free(struct cgroup *cgrp)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
The cgroup system is about to free @cgrp; the subsystem should free
@@ -573,7 +589,7 @@ is completely unused; @cgrp->parent is still valid. (Note - can also
be called for a newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this
subsystem's create() method has been called for the new cgroup).
-int can_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)
+`int can_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called prior to moving one or more tasks into a cgroup; if the
@@ -594,7 +610,7 @@ fork. If this method returns 0 (success) then this should remain valid
while the caller holds cgroup_mutex and it is ensured that either
attach() or cancel_attach() will be called in future.
-void css_reset(struct cgroup_subsys_state *css)
+`void css_reset(struct cgroup_subsys_state *css)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
An optional operation which should restore @css's configuration to the
@@ -608,7 +624,7 @@ This prevents unexpected resource control from a hidden css and
ensures that the configuration is in the initial state when it is made
visible again later.
-void cancel_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)
+`void cancel_attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called when a task attach operation has failed after can_attach() has succeeded.
@@ -617,26 +633,26 @@ function, so that the subsystem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have
succeeded. The parameters are identical to can_attach().
-void attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)
+`void attach(struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup_taskset *tset)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called after the task has been attached to the cgroup, to allow any
post-attachment activity that requires memory allocations or blocking.
The parameters are identical to can_attach().
-void fork(struct task_struct *task)
+`void fork(struct task_struct *task)`
Called when a task is forked into a cgroup.
-void exit(struct task_struct *task)
+`void exit(struct task_struct *task)`
Called during task exit.
-void free(struct task_struct *task)
+`void free(struct task_struct *task)`
Called when the task_struct is freed.
-void bind(struct cgroup *root)
+`void bind(struct cgroup *root)`
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
Called when a cgroup subsystem is rebound to a different hierarchy
@@ -649,6 +665,7 @@ that is being created/destroyed (and hence has no sub-cgroups).
cgroup filesystem supports certain types of extended attributes in its
directories and files. The current supported types are:
+
- Trusted (XATTR_TRUSTED)
- Security (XATTR_SECURITY)
@@ -666,12 +683,13 @@ in containers and systemd for assorted meta data like main PID in a cgroup
5. Questions
============
-Q: what's up with this '/bin/echo' ?
-A: bash's builtin 'echo' command does not check calls to write() against
- errors. If you use it in the cgroup file system, you won't be
- able to tell whether a command succeeded or failed.
+::
-Q: When I attach processes, only the first of the line gets really attached !
-A: We can only return one error code per call to write(). So you should also
- put only ONE PID.
+ Q: what's up with this '/bin/echo' ?
+ A: bash's builtin 'echo' command does not check calls to write() against
+ errors. If you use it in the cgroup file system, you won't be
+ able to tell whether a command succeeded or failed.
+ Q: When I attach processes, only the first of the line gets really attached !
+ A: We can only return one error code per call to write(). So you should also
+ put only ONE PID.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt
index 9d73cc0cadb9..d30ed81d2ad7 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpuacct.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=========================
CPU Accounting Controller
--------------------------
+=========================
The CPU accounting controller is used to group tasks using cgroups and
account the CPU usage of these groups of tasks.
@@ -8,9 +9,9 @@ The CPU accounting controller supports multi-hierarchy groups. An accounting
group accumulates the CPU usage of all of its child groups and the tasks
directly present in its group.
-Accounting groups can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem.
+Accounting groups can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem::
-# mount -t cgroup -ocpuacct none /sys/fs/cgroup
+ # mount -t cgroup -ocpuacct none /sys/fs/cgroup
With the above step, the initial or the parent accounting group becomes
visible at /sys/fs/cgroup. At bootup, this group includes all the tasks in
@@ -19,11 +20,11 @@ the system. /sys/fs/cgroup/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup.
by this group which is essentially the CPU time obtained by all the tasks
in the system.
-New accounting groups can be created under the parent group /sys/fs/cgroup.
+New accounting groups can be created under the parent group /sys/fs/cgroup::
-# cd /sys/fs/cgroup
-# mkdir g1
-# echo $$ > g1/tasks
+ # cd /sys/fs/cgroup
+ # mkdir g1
+ # echo $$ > g1/tasks
The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell
process (bash) into it. CPU time consumed by this bash and its children
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt
index 8402dd6de8df..7b65c9fb41d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt
@@ -1,35 +1,36 @@
- CPUSETS
- -------
+=======
+CPUSETS
+=======
Copyright (C) 2004 BULL SA.
+
Written by [email protected]
-Portions Copyright (c) 2004-2006 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
-Modified by Paul Jackson <[email protected]>
-Modified by Christoph Lameter <[email protected]>
-Modified by Paul Menage <[email protected]>
-Modified by Hidetoshi Seto <[email protected]>
+- Portions Copyright (c) 2004-2006 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
+- Modified by Paul Jackson <[email protected]>
+- Modified by Christoph Lameter <[email protected]>
+- Modified by Paul Menage <[email protected]>
+- Modified by Hidetoshi Seto <[email protected]>
-CONTENTS:
-=========
+.. CONTENTS:
-1. Cpusets
- 1.1 What are cpusets ?
- 1.2 Why are cpusets needed ?
- 1.3 How are cpusets implemented ?
- 1.4 What are exclusive cpusets ?
- 1.5 What is memory_pressure ?
- 1.6 What is memory spread ?
- 1.7 What is sched_load_balance ?
- 1.8 What is sched_relax_domain_level ?
- 1.9 How do I use cpusets ?
-2. Usage Examples and Syntax
- 2.1 Basic Usage
- 2.2 Adding/removing cpus
- 2.3 Setting flags
- 2.4 Attaching processes
-3. Questions
-4. Contact
+ 1. Cpusets
+ 1.1 What are cpusets ?
+ 1.2 Why are cpusets needed ?
+ 1.3 How are cpusets implemented ?
+ 1.4 What are exclusive cpusets ?
+ 1.5 What is memory_pressure ?
+ 1.6 What is memory spread ?
+ 1.7 What is sched_load_balance ?
+ 1.8 What is sched_relax_domain_level ?
+ 1.9 How do I use cpusets ?
+ 2. Usage Examples and Syntax
+ 2.1 Basic Usage
+ 2.2 Adding/removing cpus
+ 2.3 Setting flags
+ 2.4 Attaching processes
+ 3. Questions
+ 4. Contact
1. Cpusets
==========
@@ -157,7 +158,7 @@ modifying cpusets is via this cpuset file system.
The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has four added lines,
displaying the task's cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
and mems_allowed (on which Memory Nodes it may obtain memory),
-in the two formats seen in the following example:
+in the two formats seen in the following example::
Cpus_allowed: ffffffff,ffffffff,ffffffff,ffffffff
Cpus_allowed_list: 0-127
@@ -181,6 +182,7 @@ files describing that cpuset:
- cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level: the searching range when migrating tasks
In addition, only the root cpuset has the following file:
+
- cpuset.memory_pressure_enabled flag: compute memory_pressure?
New cpusets are created using the mkdir system call or shell
@@ -266,7 +268,8 @@ to monitor a cpuset for signs of memory pressure. It's up to the
batch manager or other user code to decide what to do about it and
take action.
-==> Unless this feature is enabled by writing "1" to the special file
+==>
+ Unless this feature is enabled by writing "1" to the special file
/dev/cpuset/memory_pressure_enabled, the hook in the rebalance
code of __alloc_pages() for this metric reduces to simply noticing
that the cpuset_memory_pressure_enabled flag is zero. So only
@@ -399,6 +402,7 @@ have tasks running on them unless explicitly assigned.
This default load balancing across all CPUs is not well suited for
the following two situations:
+
1) On large systems, load balancing across many CPUs is expensive.
If the system is managed using cpusets to place independent jobs
on separate sets of CPUs, full load balancing is unnecessary.
@@ -501,6 +505,7 @@ all the CPUs that must be load balanced.
The cpuset code builds a new such partition and passes it to the
scheduler sched domain setup code, to have the sched domains rebuilt
as necessary, whenever:
+
- the 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' flag of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs changes,
- or CPUs come or go from a cpuset with this flag enabled,
- or 'cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level' value of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs
@@ -553,13 +558,15 @@ this searching range as you like. This file takes int value which
indicates size of searching range in levels ideally as follows,
otherwise initial value -1 that indicates the cpuset has no request.
- -1 : no request. use system default or follow request of others.
- 0 : no search.
- 1 : search siblings (hyperthreads in a core).
- 2 : search cores in a package.
- 3 : search cpus in a node [= system wide on non-NUMA system]
- 4 : search nodes in a chunk of node [on NUMA system]
- 5 : search system wide [on NUMA system]
+====== ===========================================================
+ -1 no request. use system default or follow request of others.
+ 0 no search.
+ 1 search siblings (hyperthreads in a core).
+ 2 search cores in a package.
+ 3 search cpus in a node [= system wide on non-NUMA system]
+ 4 search nodes in a chunk of node [on NUMA system]
+ 5 search system wide [on NUMA system]
+====== ===========================================================
The system default is architecture dependent. The system default
can be changed using the relax_domain_level= boot parameter.
@@ -578,13 +585,14 @@ and whether it is acceptable or not depends on your situation.
Don't modify this file if you are not sure.
If your situation is:
+
- The migration costs between each cpu can be assumed considerably
small(for you) due to your special application's behavior or
special hardware support for CPU cache etc.
- The searching cost doesn't have impact(for you) or you can make
the searching cost enough small by managing cpuset to compact etc.
- The latency is required even it sacrifices cache hit rate etc.
-then increasing 'sched_relax_domain_level' would benefit you.
+ then increasing 'sched_relax_domain_level' would benefit you.
1.9 How do I use cpusets ?
@@ -678,7 +686,7 @@ To start a new job that is to be contained within a cpuset, the steps are:
For example, the following sequence of commands will setup a cpuset
named "Charlie", containing just CPUs 2 and 3, and Memory Node 1,
-and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cpuset:
+and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cpuset::
mount -t cgroup -ocpuset cpuset /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
cd /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
@@ -693,6 +701,7 @@ and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cpuset:
cat /proc/self/cpuset
There are ways to query or modify cpusets:
+
- via the cpuset file system directly, using the various cd, mkdir, echo,
cat, rmdir commands from the shell, or their equivalent from C.
- via the C library libcpuset.
@@ -722,115 +731,133 @@ Then under /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset you can find a tree that corresponds to the
tree of the cpusets in the system. For instance, /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
is the cpuset that holds the whole system.
-If you want to create a new cpuset under /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset:
-# cd /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
-# mkdir my_cpuset
+If you want to create a new cpuset under /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset::
-Now you want to do something with this cpuset.
-# cd my_cpuset
+ # cd /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
+ # mkdir my_cpuset
-In this directory you can find several files:
-# ls
-cgroup.clone_children cpuset.memory_pressure
-cgroup.event_control cpuset.memory_spread_page
-cgroup.procs cpuset.memory_spread_slab
-cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.mems
-cpuset.cpus cpuset.sched_load_balance
-cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level
-cpuset.mem_hardwall notify_on_release
-cpuset.memory_migrate tasks
+Now you want to do something with this cpuset::
+
+ # cd my_cpuset
+
+In this directory you can find several files::
+
+ # ls
+ cgroup.clone_children cpuset.memory_pressure
+ cgroup.event_control cpuset.memory_spread_page
+ cgroup.procs cpuset.memory_spread_slab
+ cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.mems
+ cpuset.cpus cpuset.sched_load_balance
+ cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level
+ cpuset.mem_hardwall notify_on_release
+ cpuset.memory_migrate tasks
Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset:
the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using
it, its properties. By writing to these files you can manipulate
the cpuset.
-Set some flags:
-# /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive
+Set some flags::
-Add some cpus:
-# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.cpus
+ # /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive
-Add some mems:
-# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.mems
+Add some cpus::
-Now attach your shell to this cpuset:
-# /bin/echo $$ > tasks
+ # /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.cpus
+
+Add some mems::
+
+ # /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.mems
+
+Now attach your shell to this cpuset::
+
+ # /bin/echo $$ > tasks
You can also create cpusets inside your cpuset by using mkdir in this
-directory.
-# mkdir my_sub_cs
+directory::
+
+ # mkdir my_sub_cs
+
+To remove a cpuset, just use rmdir::
+
+ # rmdir my_sub_cs
-To remove a cpuset, just use rmdir:
-# rmdir my_sub_cs
This will fail if the cpuset is in use (has cpusets inside, or has
processes attached).
Note that for legacy reasons, the "cpuset" filesystem exists as a
wrapper around the cgroup filesystem.
-The command
+The command::
-mount -t cpuset X /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
+ mount -t cpuset X /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
-is equivalent to
+is equivalent to::
-mount -t cgroup -ocpuset,noprefix X /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
-echo "/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" > /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/release_agent
+ mount -t cgroup -ocpuset,noprefix X /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
+ echo "/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" > /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/release_agent
2.2 Adding/removing cpus
------------------------
This is the syntax to use when writing in the cpus or mems files
-in cpuset directories:
+in cpuset directories::
-# /bin/echo 1-4 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
-# /bin/echo 1,2,3,4 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
+ # /bin/echo 1-4 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
+ # /bin/echo 1,2,3,4 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
To add a CPU to a cpuset, write the new list of CPUs including the
-CPU to be added. To add 6 to the above cpuset:
+CPU to be added. To add 6 to the above cpuset::
-# /bin/echo 1-4,6 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4,6
+ # /bin/echo 1-4,6 > cpuset.cpus -> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4,6
Similarly to remove a CPU from a cpuset, write the new list of CPUs
without the CPU to be removed.
-To remove all the CPUs:
+To remove all the CPUs::
-# /bin/echo "" > cpuset.cpus -> clear cpus list
+ # /bin/echo "" > cpuset.cpus -> clear cpus list
2.3 Setting flags
-----------------
-The syntax is very simple:
+The syntax is very simple::
-# /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive -> set flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
-# /bin/echo 0 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive -> unset flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
+ # /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive -> set flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
+ # /bin/echo 0 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive -> unset flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
2.4 Attaching processes
-----------------------
-# /bin/echo PID > tasks
+::
+
+ # /bin/echo PID > tasks
Note that it is PID, not PIDs. You can only attach ONE task at a time.
-If you have several tasks to attach, you have to do it one after another:
+If you have several tasks to attach, you have to do it one after another::
-# /bin/echo PID1 > tasks
-# /bin/echo PID2 > tasks
+ # /bin/echo PID1 > tasks
+ # /bin/echo PID2 > tasks
...
-# /bin/echo PIDn > tasks
+ # /bin/echo PIDn > tasks
3. Questions
============
-Q: what's up with this '/bin/echo' ?
-A: bash's builtin 'echo' command does not check calls to write() against
+Q:
+ what's up with this '/bin/echo' ?
+
+A:
+ bash's builtin 'echo' command does not check calls to write() against
errors. If you use it in the cpuset file system, you won't be
able to tell whether a command succeeded or failed.
-Q: When I attach processes, only the first of the line gets really attached !
-A: We can only return one error code per call to write(). So you should also
+Q:
+ When I attach processes, only the first of the line gets really attached !
+
+A:
+ We can only return one error code per call to write(). So you should also
put only ONE pid.
4. Contact
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt
index 3c1095ca02ea..73033448a3e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/devices.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+===========================
Device Whitelist Controller
+===========================
-1. Description:
+1. Description
+==============
Implement a cgroup to track and enforce open and mknod restrictions
on device files. A device cgroup associates a device access
@@ -16,24 +19,26 @@ devices from the whitelist or add new entries. A child cgroup can
never receive a device access which is denied by its parent.
2. User Interface
+=================
An entry is added using devices.allow, and removed using
-devices.deny. For instance
+devices.deny. For instance::
echo 'c 1:3 mr' > /sys/fs/cgroup/1/devices.allow
allows cgroup 1 to read and mknod the device usually known as
-/dev/null. Doing
+/dev/null. Doing::
echo a > /sys/fs/cgroup/1/devices.deny
-will remove the default 'a *:* rwm' entry. Doing
+will remove the default 'a *:* rwm' entry. Doing::
echo a > /sys/fs/cgroup/1/devices.allow
will add the 'a *:* rwm' entry to the whitelist.
3. Security
+===========
Any task can move itself between cgroups. This clearly won't
suffice, but we can decide the best way to adequately restrict
@@ -50,6 +55,7 @@ A cgroup may not be granted more permissions than the cgroup's
parent has.
4. Hierarchy
+============
device cgroups maintain hierarchy by making sure a cgroup never has more
access permissions than its parent. Every time an entry is written to
@@ -58,7 +64,8 @@ from their whitelist and all the locally set whitelist entries will be
re-evaluated. In case one of the locally set whitelist entries would provide
more access than the cgroup's parent, it'll be removed from the whitelist.
-Example:
+Example::
+
A
/ \
B
@@ -67,10 +74,12 @@ Example:
A allow "b 8:* rwm", "c 116:1 rw"
B deny "c 1:3 rwm", "c 116:2 rwm", "b 3:* rwm"
-If a device is denied in group A:
+If a device is denied in group A::
+
# echo "c 116:* r" > A/devices.deny
+
it'll propagate down and after revalidating B's entries, the whitelist entry
-"c 116:2 rwm" will be removed:
+"c 116:2 rwm" will be removed::
group whitelist entries denied devices
A all "b 8:* rwm", "c 116:* rw"
@@ -79,7 +88,8 @@ it'll propagate down and after revalidating B's entries, the whitelist entry
In case parent's exceptions change and local exceptions are not allowed
anymore, they'll be deleted.
-Notice that new whitelist entries will not be propagated:
+Notice that new whitelist entries will not be propagated::
+
A
/ \
B
@@ -88,24 +98,30 @@ Notice that new whitelist entries will not be propagated:
A "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r" all the rest
B "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r" all the rest
-when adding "c *:3 rwm":
+when adding `c *:3 rwm`::
+
# echo "c *:3 rwm" >A/devices.allow
-the result:
+the result::
+
group whitelist entries denied devices
A "c *:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r" all the rest
B "c 1:3 rwm", "c 1:5 r" all the rest
-but now it'll be possible to add new entries to B:
+but now it'll be possible to add new entries to B::
+
# echo "c 2:3 rwm" >B/devices.allow
# echo "c 50:3 r" >B/devices.allow
-or even
+
+or even::
+
# echo "c *:3 rwm" >B/devices.allow
Allowing or denying all by writing 'a' to devices.allow or devices.deny will
not be possible once the device cgroups has children.
4.1 Hierarchy (internal implementation)
+---------------------------------------
device cgroups is implemented internally using a behavior (ALLOW, DENY) and a
list of exceptions. The internal state is controlled using the same user
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt
index e831cb2b8394..582d3427de3f 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/freezer-subsystem.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==============
+Cgroup Freezer
+==============
+
The cgroup freezer is useful to batch job management system which start
and stop sets of tasks in order to schedule the resources of a machine
according to the desires of a system administrator. This sort of program
@@ -23,7 +27,7 @@ blocked, or ignored it can be seen by waiting or ptracing parent tasks.
SIGCONT is especially unsuitable since it can be caught by the task. Any
programs designed to watch for SIGSTOP and SIGCONT could be broken by
attempting to use SIGSTOP and SIGCONT to stop and resume tasks. We can
-demonstrate this problem using nested bash shells:
+demonstrate this problem using nested bash shells::
$ echo $$
16644
@@ -93,19 +97,19 @@ The following cgroupfs files are created by cgroup freezer.
The root cgroup is non-freezable and the above interface files don't
exist.
-* Examples of usage :
+* Examples of usage::
# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer
# mount -t cgroup -ofreezer freezer /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer
# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0
# echo $some_pid > /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/tasks
-to get status of the freezer subsystem :
+to get status of the freezer subsystem::
# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
THAWED
-to freeze all tasks in the container :
+to freeze all tasks in the container::
# echo FROZEN > /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
@@ -113,7 +117,7 @@ to freeze all tasks in the container :
# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
FROZEN
-to unfreeze all tasks in the container :
+to unfreeze all tasks in the container::
# echo THAWED > /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/freezer/0/freezer.state
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
index 106245c3aecc..7056a185914b 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/hugetlb.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==================
HugeTLB Controller
--------------------
+==================
The HugeTLB controller allows to limit the HugeTLB usage per control group and
enforces the controller limit during page fault. Since HugeTLB doesn't
@@ -16,16 +17,16 @@ With the above step, the initial or the parent HugeTLB group becomes
visible at /sys/fs/cgroup. At bootup, this group includes all the tasks in
the system. /sys/fs/cgroup/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup.
-New groups can be created under the parent group /sys/fs/cgroup.
+New groups can be created under the parent group /sys/fs/cgroup::
-# cd /sys/fs/cgroup
-# mkdir g1
-# echo $$ > g1/tasks
+ # cd /sys/fs/cgroup
+ # mkdir g1
+ # echo $$ > g1/tasks
The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell
process (bash) into it.
-Brief summary of control files
+Brief summary of control files::
hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage
hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.max_usage_in_bytes # show max "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage recorded
@@ -33,13 +34,13 @@ Brief summary of control files
hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.failcnt # show the number of allocation failure due to HugeTLB limit
For a system supporting two hugepage size (16M and 16G) the control
-files include:
+files include::
-hugetlb.16GB.limit_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.max_usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16GB.failcnt
-hugetlb.16MB.limit_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.max_usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.usage_in_bytes
-hugetlb.16MB.failcnt
+ hugetlb.16GB.limit_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16GB.max_usage_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16GB.usage_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16GB.failcnt
+ hugetlb.16MB.limit_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16MB.max_usage_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16MB.usage_in_bytes
+ hugetlb.16MB.failcnt
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
index 621e29ffb358..507bc99631bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memcg_test.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
-Memory Resource Controller(Memcg) Implementation Memo.
+=====================================================
+Memory Resource Controller(Memcg) Implementation Memo
+=====================================================
+
Last Updated: 2010/2
+
Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.33-rc7-mm(candidate for 34).
Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior
@@ -9,24 +13,31 @@ Please note that implementation details can be changed.
(*) Topics on API should be in Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt)
0. How to record usage ?
+========================
+
2 objects are used.
page_cgroup ....an object per page.
+
Allocated at boot or memory hotplug. Freed at memory hot removal.
swap_cgroup ... an entry per swp_entry.
+
Allocated at swapon(). Freed at swapoff().
The page_cgroup has USED bit and double count against a page_cgroup never
occurs. swap_cgroup is used only when a charged page is swapped-out.
1. Charge
+=========
a page/swp_entry may be charged (usage += PAGE_SIZE) at
mem_cgroup_try_charge()
2. Uncharge
+===========
+
a page/swp_entry may be uncharged (usage -= PAGE_SIZE) by
mem_cgroup_uncharge()
@@ -37,9 +48,12 @@ Please note that implementation details can be changed.
disappears.
3. charge-commit-cancel
+=======================
+
Memcg pages are charged in two steps:
- mem_cgroup_try_charge()
- mem_cgroup_commit_charge() or mem_cgroup_cancel_charge()
+
+ - mem_cgroup_try_charge()
+ - mem_cgroup_commit_charge() or mem_cgroup_cancel_charge()
At try_charge(), there are no flags to say "this page is charged".
at this point, usage += PAGE_SIZE.
@@ -51,6 +65,8 @@ Please note that implementation details can be changed.
Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
4. Anonymous
+============
+
Anonymous page is newly allocated at
- page fault into MAP_ANONYMOUS mapping.
- Copy-On-Write.
@@ -78,34 +94,45 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
(e) zap_pte() is called and swp_entry's refcnt -=1 -> 0.
5. Page Cache
+=============
+
Page Cache is charged at
- add_to_page_cache_locked().
The logic is very clear. (About migration, see below)
- Note: __remove_from_page_cache() is called by remove_from_page_cache()
- and __remove_mapping().
+
+ Note:
+ __remove_from_page_cache() is called by remove_from_page_cache()
+ and __remove_mapping().
6. Shmem(tmpfs) Page Cache
+===========================
+
The best way to understand shmem's page state transition is to read
mm/shmem.c.
+
But brief explanation of the behavior of memcg around shmem will be
helpful to understand the logic.
Shmem's page (just leaf page, not direct/indirect block) can be on
+
- radix-tree of shmem's inode.
- SwapCache.
- Both on radix-tree and SwapCache. This happens at swap-in
and swap-out,
It's charged when...
+
- A new page is added to shmem's radix-tree.
- A swp page is read. (move a charge from swap_cgroup to page_cgroup)
7. Page Migration
+=================
mem_cgroup_migrate()
8. LRU
+======
Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, its handling is under global
VM's control (means that it's handled under global pgdat->lru_lock).
Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
@@ -114,163 +141,211 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans
memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page
from LRU.
+
(By __isolate_lru_page(), the page is removed from both of global and
- private LRU.)
+ private LRU.)
9. Typical Tests.
+=================
Tests for racy cases.
- 9.1 Small limit to memcg.
+9.1 Small limit to memcg.
+-------------------------
+
When you do test to do racy case, it's good test to set memcg's limit
to be very small rather than GB. Many races found in the test under
xKB or xxMB limits.
+
(Memory behavior under GB and Memory behavior under MB shows very
- different situation.)
+ different situation.)
+
+9.2 Shmem
+---------
- 9.2 Shmem
Historically, memcg's shmem handling was poor and we saw some amount
of troubles here. This is because shmem is page-cache but can be
SwapCache. Test with shmem/tmpfs is always good test.
- 9.3 Migration
+9.3 Migration
+-------------
+
For NUMA, migration is an another special case. To do easy test, cpuset
- is useful. Following is a sample script to do migration.
+ is useful. Following is a sample script to do migration::
- mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /opt/cpuset
+ mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /opt/cpuset
- mkdir /opt/cpuset/01
- echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.cpus
- echo 0 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.mems
- echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.memory_migrate
- mkdir /opt/cpuset/02
- echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.cpus
- echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.mems
- echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.memory_migrate
+ mkdir /opt/cpuset/01
+ echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.cpus
+ echo 0 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.mems
+ echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.memory_migrate
+ mkdir /opt/cpuset/02
+ echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.cpus
+ echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.mems
+ echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.memory_migrate
In above set, when you moves a task from 01 to 02, page migration to
node 0 to node 1 will occur. Following is a script to migrate all
- under cpuset.
- --
- move_task()
- {
- for pid in $1
- do
- /bin/echo $pid >$2/tasks 2>/dev/null
- echo -n $pid
- echo -n " "
- done
- echo END
- }
+ under cpuset.::
+
+ --
+ move_task()
+ {
+ for pid in $1
+ do
+ /bin/echo $pid >$2/tasks 2>/dev/null
+ echo -n $pid
+ echo -n " "
+ done
+ echo END
+ }
+
+ G1_TASK=`cat ${G1}/tasks`
+ G2_TASK=`cat ${G2}/tasks`
+ move_task "${G1_TASK}" ${G2} &
+ --
+
+9.4 Memory hotplug
+------------------
- G1_TASK=`cat ${G1}/tasks`
- G2_TASK=`cat ${G2}/tasks`
- move_task "${G1_TASK}" ${G2} &
- --
- 9.4 Memory hotplug.
memory hotplug test is one of good test.
- to offline memory, do following.
- # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+
+ to offline memory, do following::
+
+ # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+
(XXX is the place of memory)
+
This is an easy way to test page migration, too.
- 9.5 mkdir/rmdir
+9.5 mkdir/rmdir
+---------------
+
When using hierarchy, mkdir/rmdir test should be done.
- Use tests like the following.
+ Use tests like the following::
- echo 1 >/opt/cgroup/01/memory/use_hierarchy
- mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_a
- mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_b
+ echo 1 >/opt/cgroup/01/memory/use_hierarchy
+ mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_a
+ mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_b
- set limit to 01.
- add limit to 01/child_b
- run jobs under child_a and child_b
+ set limit to 01.
+ add limit to 01/child_b
+ run jobs under child_a and child_b
- create/delete following groups at random while jobs are running.
- /opt/cgroup/01/child_a/child_aa
- /opt/cgroup/01/child_b/child_bb
- /opt/cgroup/01/child_c
+ create/delete following groups at random while jobs are running::
+
+ /opt/cgroup/01/child_a/child_aa
+ /opt/cgroup/01/child_b/child_bb
+ /opt/cgroup/01/child_c
running new jobs in new group is also good.
- 9.6 Mount with other subsystems.
+9.6 Mount with other subsystems
+-------------------------------
+
Mounting with other subsystems is a good test because there is a
race and lock dependency with other cgroup subsystems.
- example)
- # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
+ example::
+
+ # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
and do task move, mkdir, rmdir etc...under this.
- 9.7 swapoff.
+9.7 swapoff
+-----------
+
Besides management of swap is one of complicated parts of memcg,
call path of swap-in at swapoff is not same as usual swap-in path..
It's worth to be tested explicitly.
- For example, test like following is good.
- (Shell-A)
- # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o memory
- # mkdir /cgroup/test
- # echo 40M > /cgroup/test/memory.limit_in_bytes
- # echo 0 > /cgroup/test/tasks
+ For example, test like following is good:
+
+ (Shell-A)::
+
+ # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o memory
+ # mkdir /cgroup/test
+ # echo 40M > /cgroup/test/memory.limit_in_bytes
+ # echo 0 > /cgroup/test/tasks
+
Run malloc(100M) program under this. You'll see 60M of swaps.
- (Shell-B)
- # move all tasks in /cgroup/test to /cgroup
- # /sbin/swapoff -a
- # rmdir /cgroup/test
- # kill malloc task.
+
+ (Shell-B)::
+
+ # move all tasks in /cgroup/test to /cgroup
+ # /sbin/swapoff -a
+ # rmdir /cgroup/test
+ # kill malloc task.
Of course, tmpfs v.s. swapoff test should be tested, too.
- 9.8 OOM-Killer
+9.8 OOM-Killer
+--------------
+
Out-of-memory caused by memcg's limit will kill tasks under
the memcg. When hierarchy is used, a task under hierarchy
will be killed by the kernel.
+
In this case, panic_on_oom shouldn't be invoked and tasks
in other groups shouldn't be killed.
It's not difficult to cause OOM under memcg as following.
- Case A) when you can swapoff
- #swapoff -a
- #echo 50M > /memory.limit_in_bytes
+
+ Case A) when you can swapoff::
+
+ #swapoff -a
+ #echo 50M > /memory.limit_in_bytes
+
run 51M of malloc
- Case B) when you use mem+swap limitation.
- #echo 50M > memory.limit_in_bytes
- #echo 50M > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
+ Case B) when you use mem+swap limitation::
+
+ #echo 50M > memory.limit_in_bytes
+ #echo 50M > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
+
run 51M of malloc
- 9.9 Move charges at task migration
+9.9 Move charges at task migration
+----------------------------------
+
Charges associated with a task can be moved along with task migration.
- (Shell-A)
- #mkdir /cgroup/A
- #echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
+ (Shell-A)::
+
+ #mkdir /cgroup/A
+ #echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
+
run some programs which uses some amount of memory in /cgroup/A.
- (Shell-B)
- #mkdir /cgroup/B
- #echo 1 >/cgroup/B/memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
- #echo "pid of the program running in group A" >/cgroup/B/tasks
+ (Shell-B)::
- You can see charges have been moved by reading *.usage_in_bytes or
+ #mkdir /cgroup/B
+ #echo 1 >/cgroup/B/memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+ #echo "pid of the program running in group A" >/cgroup/B/tasks
+
+ You can see charges have been moved by reading `*.usage_in_bytes` or
memory.stat of both A and B.
- See 8.2 of Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt to see what value should be
- written to move_charge_at_immigrate.
- 9.10 Memory thresholds
+ See 8.2 of Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt to see what value should
+ be written to move_charge_at_immigrate.
+
+9.10 Memory thresholds
+----------------------
+
Memory controller implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification
API. You can use tools/cgroup/cgroup_event_listener.c to test it.
- (Shell-A) Create cgroup and run event listener
- # mkdir /cgroup/A
- # ./cgroup_event_listener /cgroup/A/memory.usage_in_bytes 5M
+ (Shell-A) Create cgroup and run event listener::
- (Shell-B) Add task to cgroup and try to allocate and free memory
- # echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
- # a="$(dd if=/dev/zero bs=1M count=10)"
- # a=
+ # mkdir /cgroup/A
+ # ./cgroup_event_listener /cgroup/A/memory.usage_in_bytes 5M
+
+ (Shell-B) Add task to cgroup and try to allocate and free memory::
+
+ # echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
+ # a="$(dd if=/dev/zero bs=1M count=10)"
+ # a=
You will see message from cgroup_event_listener every time you cross
the thresholds.
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
index a33cedf85427..9ac71f2608e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,26 @@
+==========================
Memory Resource Controller
+==========================
-NOTE: This document is hopelessly outdated and it asks for a complete
+NOTE:
+ This document is hopelessly outdated and it asks for a complete
rewrite. It still contains a useful information so we are keeping it
here but make sure to check the current code if you need a deeper
understanding.
-NOTE: The Memory Resource Controller has generically been referred to as the
+NOTE:
+ The Memory Resource Controller has generically been referred to as the
memory controller in this document. Do not confuse memory controller
used here with the memory controller that is used in hardware.
-(For editors)
-In this document:
+(For editors) In this document:
When we mention a cgroup (cgroupfs's directory) with memory controller,
we call it "memory cgroup". When you see git-log and source code, you'll
see patch's title and function names tend to use "memcg".
In this document, we avoid using it.
Benefits and Purpose of the memory controller
+=============================================
The memory controller isolates the memory behaviour of a group of tasks
from the rest of the system. The article on LWN [12] mentions some probable
@@ -38,6 +42,7 @@ e. There are several other use cases; find one or use the controller just
Current Status: linux-2.6.34-mmotm(development version of 2010/April)
Features:
+
- accounting anonymous pages, file caches, swap caches usage and limiting them.
- pages are linked to per-memcg LRU exclusively, and there is no global LRU.
- optionally, memory+swap usage can be accounted and limited.
@@ -54,41 +59,48 @@ Features:
Brief summary of control files.
- tasks # attach a task(thread) and show list of threads
- cgroup.procs # show list of processes
- cgroup.event_control # an interface for event_fd()
- memory.usage_in_bytes # show current usage for memory
- (See 5.5 for details)
- memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current usage for memory+Swap
- (See 5.5 for details)
- memory.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory usage
- memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory+Swap usage
- memory.failcnt # show the number of memory usage hits limits
- memory.memsw.failcnt # show the number of memory+Swap hits limits
- memory.max_usage_in_bytes # show max memory usage recorded
- memory.memsw.max_usage_in_bytes # show max memory+Swap usage recorded
- memory.soft_limit_in_bytes # set/show soft limit of memory usage
- memory.stat # show various statistics
- memory.use_hierarchy # set/show hierarchical account enabled
- memory.force_empty # trigger forced page reclaim
- memory.pressure_level # set memory pressure notifications
- memory.swappiness # set/show swappiness parameter of vmscan
- (See sysctl's vm.swappiness)
- memory.move_charge_at_immigrate # set/show controls of moving charges
- memory.oom_control # set/show oom controls.
- memory.numa_stat # show the number of memory usage per numa node
+==================================== ==========================================
+ tasks attach a task(thread) and show list of
+ threads
+ cgroup.procs show list of processes
+ cgroup.event_control an interface for event_fd()
+ memory.usage_in_bytes show current usage for memory
+ (See 5.5 for details)
+ memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes show current usage for memory+Swap
+ (See 5.5 for details)
+ memory.limit_in_bytes set/show limit of memory usage
+ memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes set/show limit of memory+Swap usage
+ memory.failcnt show the number of memory usage hits limits
+ memory.memsw.failcnt show the number of memory+Swap hits limits
+ memory.max_usage_in_bytes show max memory usage recorded
+ memory.memsw.max_usage_in_bytes show max memory+Swap usage recorded
+ memory.soft_limit_in_bytes set/show soft limit of memory usage
+ memory.stat show various statistics
+ memory.use_hierarchy set/show hierarchical account enabled
+ memory.force_empty trigger forced page reclaim
+ memory.pressure_level set memory pressure notifications
+ memory.swappiness set/show swappiness parameter of vmscan
+ (See sysctl's vm.swappiness)
+ memory.move_charge_at_immigrate set/show controls of moving charges
+ memory.oom_control set/show oom controls.
+ memory.numa_stat show the number of memory usage per numa
+ node
- memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes # set/show hard limit for kernel memory
- memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes # show current kernel memory allocation
- memory.kmem.failcnt # show the number of kernel memory usage hits limits
- memory.kmem.max_usage_in_bytes # show max kernel memory usage recorded
+ memory.kmem.limit_in_bytes set/show hard limit for kernel memory
+ memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes show current kernel memory allocation
+ memory.kmem.failcnt show the number of kernel memory usage
+ hits limits
+ memory.kmem.max_usage_in_bytes show max kernel memory usage recorded
- memory.kmem.tcp.limit_in_bytes # set/show hard limit for tcp buf memory
- memory.kmem.tcp.usage_in_bytes # show current tcp buf memory allocation
- memory.kmem.tcp.failcnt # show the number of tcp buf memory usage hits limits
- memory.kmem.tcp.max_usage_in_bytes # show max tcp buf memory usage recorded
+ memory.kmem.tcp.limit_in_bytes set/show hard limit for tcp buf memory
+ memory.kmem.tcp.usage_in_bytes show current tcp buf memory allocation
+ memory.kmem.tcp.failcnt show the number of tcp buf memory usage
+ hits limits
+ memory.kmem.tcp.max_usage_in_bytes show max tcp buf memory usage recorded
+==================================== ==========================================
1. History
+==========
The memory controller has a long history. A request for comments for the memory
controller was posted by Balbir Singh [1]. At the time the RFC was posted
@@ -103,6 +115,7 @@ at version 6; it combines both mapped (RSS) and unmapped Page
Cache Control [11].
2. Memory Control
+=================
Memory is a unique resource in the sense that it is present in a limited
amount. If a task requires a lot of CPU processing, the task can spread
@@ -120,6 +133,7 @@ are:
The memory controller is the first controller developed.
2.1. Design
+-----------
The core of the design is a counter called the page_counter. The
page_counter tracks the current memory usage and limit of the group of
@@ -127,6 +141,9 @@ processes associated with the controller. Each cgroup has a memory controller
specific data structure (mem_cgroup) associated with it.
2.2. Accounting
+---------------
+
+::
+--------------------+
| mem_cgroup |
@@ -165,6 +182,7 @@ updated. page_cgroup has its own LRU on cgroup.
(*) page_cgroup structure is allocated at boot/memory-hotplug time.
2.2.1 Accounting details
+------------------------
All mapped anon pages (RSS) and cache pages (Page Cache) are accounted.
Some pages which are never reclaimable and will not be on the LRU
@@ -191,6 +209,7 @@ Note: we just account pages-on-LRU because our purpose is to control amount
of used pages; not-on-LRU pages tend to be out-of-control from VM view.
2.3 Shared Page Accounting
+--------------------------
Shared pages are accounted on the basis of the first touch approach. The
cgroup that first touches a page is accounted for the page. The principle
@@ -207,11 +226,13 @@ be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the
caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem.
2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP)
+--------------------------------------
Swap Extension allows you to record charge for swap. A swapped-in page is
charged back to original page allocator if possible.
When swap is accounted, following files are added.
+
- memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes.
- memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes.
@@ -224,14 +245,16 @@ In this case, setting memsw.limit_in_bytes=3G will prevent bad use of swap.
By using the memsw limit, you can avoid system OOM which can be caused by swap
shortage.
-* why 'memory+swap' rather than swap.
+**why 'memory+swap' rather than swap**
+
The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means
to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of
memory+swap. In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without
affecting global LRU, memory+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from
an OS point of view.
-* What happens when a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
+**What happens when a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes**
+
When a cgroup hits memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes, it's useless to do swap-out
in this cgroup. Then, swap-out will not be done by cgroup routine and file
caches are dropped. But as mentioned above, global LRU can do swapout memory
@@ -239,6 +262,7 @@ from it for sanity of the system's memory management state. You can't forbid
it by cgroup.
2.5 Reclaim
+-----------
Each cgroup maintains a per cgroup LRU which has the same structure as
global VM. When a cgroup goes over its limit, we first try
@@ -251,29 +275,36 @@ The reclaim algorithm has not been modified for cgroups, except that
pages that are selected for reclaiming come from the per-cgroup LRU
list.
-NOTE: Reclaim does not work for the root cgroup, since we cannot set any
-limits on the root cgroup.
+NOTE:
+ Reclaim does not work for the root cgroup, since we cannot set any
+ limits on the root cgroup.
-Note2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic.
+Note2:
+ When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic.
When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered.
(See oom_control section)
2.6 Locking
+-----------
lock_page_cgroup()/unlock_page_cgroup() should not be called under
the i_pages lock.
Other lock order is following:
+
PG_locked.
- mm->page_table_lock
- pgdat->lru_lock
- lock_page_cgroup.
+ mm->page_table_lock
+ pgdat->lru_lock
+ lock_page_cgroup.
+
In many cases, just lock_page_cgroup() is called.
+
per-zone-per-cgroup LRU (cgroup's private LRU) is just guarded by
pgdat->lru_lock, it has no lock of its own.
2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM)
+-----------------------------------------------
With the Kernel memory extension, the Memory Controller is able to limit
the amount of kernel memory used by the system. Kernel memory is fundamentally
@@ -288,6 +319,7 @@ Kernel memory limits are not imposed for the root cgroup. Usage for the root
cgroup may or may not be accounted. The memory used is accumulated into
memory.kmem.usage_in_bytes, or in a separate counter when it makes sense.
(currently only for tcp).
+
The main "kmem" counter is fed into the main counter, so kmem charges will
also be visible from the user counter.
@@ -295,36 +327,42 @@ Currently no soft limit is implemented for kernel memory. It is future work
to trigger slab reclaim when those limits are reached.
2.7.1 Current Kernel Memory resources accounted
+-----------------------------------------------
-* stack pages: every process consumes some stack pages. By accounting into
-kernel memory, we prevent new processes from being created when the kernel
-memory usage is too high.
+stack pages:
+ every process consumes some stack pages. By accounting into
+ kernel memory, we prevent new processes from being created when the kernel
+ memory usage is too high.
-* slab pages: pages allocated by the SLAB or SLUB allocator are tracked. A copy
-of each kmem_cache is created every time the cache is touched by the first time
-from inside the memcg. The creation is done lazily, so some objects can still be
-skipped while the cache is being created. All objects in a slab page should
-belong to the same memcg. This only fails to hold when a task is migrated to a
-different memcg during the page allocation by the cache.
+slab pages:
+ pages allocated by the SLAB or SLUB allocator are tracked. A copy
+ of each kmem_cache is created every time the cache is touched by the first time
+ from inside the memcg. The creation is done lazily, so some objects can still be
+ skipped while the cache is being created. All objects in a slab page should
+ belong to the same memcg. This only fails to hold when a task is migrated to a
+ different memcg during the page allocation by the cache.
-* sockets memory pressure: some sockets protocols have memory pressure
-thresholds. The Memory Controller allows them to be controlled individually
-per cgroup, instead of globally.
+sockets memory pressure:
+ some sockets protocols have memory pressure
+ thresholds. The Memory Controller allows them to be controlled individually
+ per cgroup, instead of globally.
-* tcp memory pressure: sockets memory pressure for the tcp protocol.
+tcp memory pressure:
+ sockets memory pressure for the tcp protocol.
2.7.2 Common use cases
+----------------------
Because the "kmem" counter is fed to the main user counter, kernel memory can
never be limited completely independently of user memory. Say "U" is the user
limit, and "K" the kernel limit. There are three possible ways limits can be
set:
- U != 0, K = unlimited:
+U != 0, K = unlimited:
This is the standard memcg limitation mechanism already present before kmem
accounting. Kernel memory is completely ignored.
- U != 0, K < U:
+U != 0, K < U:
Kernel memory is a subset of the user memory. This setup is useful in
deployments where the total amount of memory per-cgroup is overcommited.
Overcommiting kernel memory limits is definitely not recommended, since the
@@ -332,19 +370,23 @@ set:
In this case, the admin could set up K so that the sum of all groups is
never greater than the total memory, and freely set U at the cost of his
QoS.
- WARNING: In the current implementation, memory reclaim will NOT be
+
+WARNING:
+ In the current implementation, memory reclaim will NOT be
triggered for a cgroup when it hits K while staying below U, which makes
this setup impractical.
- U != 0, K >= U:
+U != 0, K >= U:
Since kmem charges will also be fed to the user counter and reclaim will be
triggered for the cgroup for both kinds of memory. This setup gives the
admin a unified view of memory, and it is also useful for people who just
want to track kernel memory usage.
3. User Interface
+=================
3.0. Configuration
+------------------
a. Enable CONFIG_CGROUPS
b. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG
@@ -352,39 +394,53 @@ c. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP (to use swap extension)
d. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM (to use kmem extension)
3.1. Prepare the cgroups (see cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?)
-# mount -t tmpfs none /sys/fs/cgroup
-# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/memory
-# mount -t cgroup none /sys/fs/cgroup/memory -o memory
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
-3.2. Make the new group and move bash into it
-# mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0
-# echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/tasks
+::
-Since now we're in the 0 cgroup, we can alter the memory limit:
-# echo 4M > /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.limit_in_bytes
+ # mount -t tmpfs none /sys/fs/cgroup
+ # mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/memory
+ # mount -t cgroup none /sys/fs/cgroup/memory -o memory
-NOTE: We can use a suffix (k, K, m, M, g or G) to indicate values in kilo,
-mega or gigabytes. (Here, Kilo, Mega, Giga are Kibibytes, Mebibytes, Gibibytes.)
+3.2. Make the new group and move bash into it::
-NOTE: We can write "-1" to reset the *.limit_in_bytes(unlimited).
-NOTE: We cannot set limits on the root cgroup any more.
+ # mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0
+ # echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/tasks
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.limit_in_bytes
-4194304
+Since now we're in the 0 cgroup, we can alter the memory limit::
-We can check the usage:
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.usage_in_bytes
-1216512
+ # echo 4M > /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.limit_in_bytes
+
+NOTE:
+ We can use a suffix (k, K, m, M, g or G) to indicate values in kilo,
+ mega or gigabytes. (Here, Kilo, Mega, Giga are Kibibytes, Mebibytes,
+ Gibibytes.)
+
+NOTE:
+ We can write "-1" to reset the `*.limit_in_bytes(unlimited)`.
+
+NOTE:
+ We cannot set limits on the root cgroup any more.
+
+::
+
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.limit_in_bytes
+ 4194304
+
+We can check the usage::
+
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/0/memory.usage_in_bytes
+ 1216512
A successful write to this file does not guarantee a successful setting of
this limit to the value written into the file. This can be due to a
number of factors, such as rounding up to page boundaries or the total
availability of memory on the system. The user is required to re-read
-this file after a write to guarantee the value committed by the kernel.
+this file after a write to guarantee the value committed by the kernel::
-# echo 1 > memory.limit_in_bytes
-# cat memory.limit_in_bytes
-4096
+ # echo 1 > memory.limit_in_bytes
+ # cat memory.limit_in_bytes
+ 4096
The memory.failcnt field gives the number of times that the cgroup limit was
exceeded.
@@ -393,6 +449,7 @@ The memory.stat file gives accounting information. Now, the number of
caches, RSS and Active pages/Inactive pages are shown.
4. Testing
+==========
For testing features and implementation, see memcg_test.txt.
@@ -408,6 +465,7 @@ But the above two are testing extreme situations.
Trying usual test under memory controller is always helpful.
4.1 Troubleshooting
+-------------------
Sometimes a user might find that the application under a cgroup is
terminated by the OOM killer. There are several causes for this:
@@ -422,6 +480,7 @@ To know what happens, disabling OOM_Kill as per "10. OOM Control" (below) and
seeing what happens will be helpful.
4.2 Task migration
+------------------
When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, its charge is not
carried forward by default. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
@@ -432,6 +491,7 @@ You can move charges of a task along with task migration.
See 8. "Move charges at task migration"
4.3 Removing a cgroup
+---------------------
A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a
cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all
@@ -448,13 +508,15 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it.
About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
-5. Misc. interfaces.
+5. Misc. interfaces
+===================
5.1 force_empty
+---------------
memory.force_empty interface is provided to make cgroup's memory usage empty.
- When writing anything to this
+ When writing anything to this::
- # echo 0 > memory.force_empty
+ # echo 0 > memory.force_empty
the cgroup will be reclaimed and as many pages reclaimed as possible.
@@ -471,50 +533,61 @@ About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
About use_hierarchy, see Section 6.
5.2 stat file
+-------------
memory.stat file includes following statistics
-# per-memory cgroup local status
-cache - # of bytes of page cache memory.
-rss - # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory (includes
+per-memory cgroup local status
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+=============== ===============================================================
+cache # of bytes of page cache memory.
+rss # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory (includes
transparent hugepages).
-rss_huge - # of bytes of anonymous transparent hugepages.
-mapped_file - # of bytes of mapped file (includes tmpfs/shmem)
-pgpgin - # of charging events to the memory cgroup. The charging
+rss_huge # of bytes of anonymous transparent hugepages.
+mapped_file # of bytes of mapped file (includes tmpfs/shmem)
+pgpgin # of charging events to the memory cgroup. The charging
event happens each time a page is accounted as either mapped
anon page(RSS) or cache page(Page Cache) to the cgroup.
-pgpgout - # of uncharging events to the memory cgroup. The uncharging
+pgpgout # of uncharging events to the memory cgroup. The uncharging
event happens each time a page is unaccounted from the cgroup.
-swap - # of bytes of swap usage
-dirty - # of bytes that are waiting to get written back to the disk.
-writeback - # of bytes of file/anon cache that are queued for syncing to
+swap # of bytes of swap usage
+dirty # of bytes that are waiting to get written back to the disk.
+writeback # of bytes of file/anon cache that are queued for syncing to
disk.
-inactive_anon - # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on inactive
+inactive_anon # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on inactive
LRU list.
-active_anon - # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on active
+active_anon # of bytes of anonymous and swap cache memory on active
LRU list.
-inactive_file - # of bytes of file-backed memory on inactive LRU list.
-active_file - # of bytes of file-backed memory on active LRU list.
-unevictable - # of bytes of memory that cannot be reclaimed (mlocked etc).
+inactive_file # of bytes of file-backed memory on inactive LRU list.
+active_file # of bytes of file-backed memory on active LRU list.
+unevictable # of bytes of memory that cannot be reclaimed (mlocked etc).
+=============== ===============================================================
-# status considering hierarchy (see memory.use_hierarchy settings)
+status considering hierarchy (see memory.use_hierarchy settings)
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-hierarchical_memory_limit - # of bytes of memory limit with regard to hierarchy
- under which the memory cgroup is
-hierarchical_memsw_limit - # of bytes of memory+swap limit with regard to
- hierarchy under which memory cgroup is.
+========================= ===================================================
+hierarchical_memory_limit # of bytes of memory limit with regard to hierarchy
+ under which the memory cgroup is
+hierarchical_memsw_limit # of bytes of memory+swap limit with regard to
+ hierarchy under which memory cgroup is.
-total_<counter> - # hierarchical version of <counter>, which in
- addition to the cgroup's own value includes the
- sum of all hierarchical children's values of
- <counter>, i.e. total_cache
+total_<counter> # hierarchical version of <counter>, which in
+ addition to the cgroup's own value includes the
+ sum of all hierarchical children's values of
+ <counter>, i.e. total_cache
+========================= ===================================================
-# The following additional stats are dependent on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM.
+The following additional stats are dependent on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-recent_rotated_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
-recent_rotated_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
-recent_scanned_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
-recent_scanned_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+========================= ========================================
+recent_rotated_anon VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+recent_rotated_file VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+recent_scanned_anon VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+recent_scanned_file VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+========================= ========================================
Memo:
recent_rotated means recent frequency of LRU rotation.
@@ -525,12 +598,15 @@ Note:
Only anonymous and swap cache memory is listed as part of 'rss' stat.
This should not be confused with the true 'resident set size' or the
amount of physical memory used by the cgroup.
+
'rss + mapped_file" will give you resident set size of cgroup.
+
(Note: file and shmem may be shared among other cgroups. In that case,
- mapped_file is accounted only when the memory cgroup is owner of page
- cache.)
+ mapped_file is accounted only when the memory cgroup is owner of page
+ cache.)
5.3 swappiness
+--------------
Overrides /proc/sys/vm/swappiness for the particular group. The tunable
in the root cgroup corresponds to the global swappiness setting.
@@ -541,16 +617,19 @@ there is a swap storage available. This might lead to memcg OOM killer
if there are no file pages to reclaim.
5.4 failcnt
+-----------
A memory cgroup provides memory.failcnt and memory.memsw.failcnt files.
This failcnt(== failure count) shows the number of times that a usage counter
hit its limit. When a memory cgroup hits a limit, failcnt increases and
memory under it will be reclaimed.
-You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file.
-# echo 0 > .../memory.failcnt
+You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file::
+
+ # echo 0 > .../memory.failcnt
5.5 usage_in_bytes
+------------------
For efficiency, as other kernel components, memory cgroup uses some optimization
to avoid unnecessary cacheline false sharing. usage_in_bytes is affected by the
@@ -560,6 +639,7 @@ If you want to know more exact memory usage, you should use RSS+CACHE(+SWAP)
value in memory.stat(see 5.2).
5.6 numa_stat
+-------------
This is similar to numa_maps but operates on a per-memcg basis. This is
useful for providing visibility into the numa locality information within
@@ -571,22 +651,23 @@ Each memcg's numa_stat file includes "total", "file", "anon" and "unevictable"
per-node page counts including "hierarchical_<counter>" which sums up all
hierarchical children's values in addition to the memcg's own value.
-The output format of memory.numa_stat is:
+The output format of memory.numa_stat is::
-total=<total pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
-file=<total file pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
-anon=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
-unevictable=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
-hierarchical_<counter>=<counter pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
+ total=<total pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
+ file=<total file pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
+ anon=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
+ unevictable=<total anon pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
+ hierarchical_<counter>=<counter pages> N0=<node 0 pages> N1=<node 1 pages> ...
The "total" count is sum of file + anon + unevictable.
6. Hierarchy support
+====================
The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting.
The hierarchy is created by creating the appropriate cgroups in the
cgroup filesystem. Consider for example, the following cgroup filesystem
-hierarchy
+hierarchy::
root
/ | \
@@ -603,24 +684,28 @@ limit, the reclaim algorithm reclaims from the tasks in the ancestor and the
children of the ancestor.
6.1 Enabling hierarchical accounting and reclaim
+------------------------------------------------
A memory cgroup by default disables the hierarchy feature. Support
-can be enabled by writing 1 to memory.use_hierarchy file of the root cgroup
+can be enabled by writing 1 to memory.use_hierarchy file of the root cgroup::
-# echo 1 > memory.use_hierarchy
+ # echo 1 > memory.use_hierarchy
-The feature can be disabled by
+The feature can be disabled by::
-# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy
+ # echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy
-NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if either the cgroup already has other
+NOTE1:
+ Enabling/disabling will fail if either the cgroup already has other
cgroups created below it, or if the parent cgroup has use_hierarchy
enabled.
-NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in
+NOTE2:
+ When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in
case of an OOM event in any cgroup.
7. Soft limits
+==============
Soft limits allow for greater sharing of memory. The idea behind soft limits
is to allow control groups to use as much of the memory as needed, provided
@@ -640,22 +725,26 @@ hints/setup. Currently soft limit based reclaim is set up such that
it gets invoked from balance_pgdat (kswapd).
7.1 Interface
+-------------
Soft limits can be setup by using the following commands (in this example we
-assume a soft limit of 256 MiB)
+assume a soft limit of 256 MiB)::
-# echo 256M > memory.soft_limit_in_bytes
+ # echo 256M > memory.soft_limit_in_bytes
-If we want to change this to 1G, we can at any time use
+If we want to change this to 1G, we can at any time use::
-# echo 1G > memory.soft_limit_in_bytes
+ # echo 1G > memory.soft_limit_in_bytes
-NOTE1: Soft limits take effect over a long period of time, since they involve
+NOTE1:
+ Soft limits take effect over a long period of time, since they involve
reclaiming memory for balancing between memory cgroups
-NOTE2: It is recommended to set the soft limit always below the hard limit,
+NOTE2:
+ It is recommended to set the soft limit always below the hard limit,
otherwise the hard limit will take precedence.
8. Move charges at task migration
+=================================
Users can move charges associated with a task along with task migration, that
is, uncharge task's pages from the old cgroup and charge them to the new cgroup.
@@ -663,60 +752,71 @@ This feature is not supported in !CONFIG_MMU environments because of lack of
page tables.
8.1 Interface
+-------------
This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled (and disabled again) by
writing to memory.move_charge_at_immigrate of the destination cgroup.
-If you want to enable it:
+If you want to enable it::
-# echo (some positive value) > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+ # echo (some positive value) > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
-Note: Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type
+Note:
+ Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type
of charges should be moved. See 8.2 for details.
-Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, in other words,
+Note:
+ Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, in other words,
a leader of a thread group.
-Note: If we cannot find enough space for the task in the destination cgroup, we
+Note:
+ If we cannot find enough space for the task in the destination cgroup, we
try to make space by reclaiming memory. Task migration may fail if we
cannot make enough space.
-Note: It can take several seconds if you move charges much.
+Note:
+ It can take several seconds if you move charges much.
-And if you want disable it again:
+And if you want disable it again::
-# echo 0 > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+ # echo 0 > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
8.2 Type of charges which can be moved
+--------------------------------------
Each bit in move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of
charges should be moved. But in any case, it must be noted that an account of
a page or a swap can be moved only when it is charged to the task's current
(old) memory cgroup.
- bit | what type of charges would be moved ?
- -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0 | A charge of an anonymous page (or swap of it) used by the target task.
- | You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges.
- -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 1 | A charge of file pages (normal file, tmpfs file (e.g. ipc shared memory)
- | and swaps of tmpfs file) mmapped by the target task. Unlike the case of
- | anonymous pages, file pages (and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task
- | will be moved even if the task hasn't done page fault, i.e. they might
- | not be the task's "RSS", but other task's "RSS" that maps the same file.
- | And mapcount of the page is ignored (the page can be moved even if
- | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to
- | enable move of swap charges.
++---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+|bit| what type of charges would be moved ? |
++===+==========================================================================+
+| 0 | A charge of an anonymous page (or swap of it) used by the target task. |
+| | You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges. |
++---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+| 1 | A charge of file pages (normal file, tmpfs file (e.g. ipc shared memory) |
+| | and swaps of tmpfs file) mmapped by the target task. Unlike the case of |
+| | anonymous pages, file pages (and swaps) in the range mmapped by the task |
+| | will be moved even if the task hasn't done page fault, i.e. they might |
+| | not be the task's "RSS", but other task's "RSS" that maps the same file. |
+| | And mapcount of the page is ignored (the page can be moved even if |
+| | page_mapcount(page) > 1). You must enable Swap Extension (see 2.4) to |
+| | enable move of swap charges. |
++---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
8.3 TODO
+--------
- All of moving charge operations are done under cgroup_mutex. It's not good
behavior to hold the mutex too long, so we may need some trick.
9. Memory thresholds
+====================
Memory cgroup implements memory thresholds using the cgroups notification
API (see cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple memory and memsw
thresholds and gets notifications when it crosses.
To register a threshold, an application must:
+
- create an eventfd using eventfd(2);
- open memory.usage_in_bytes or memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes;
- write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.usage_in_bytes> <threshold>" to
@@ -728,6 +828,7 @@ threshold in any direction.
It's applicable for root and non-root cgroup.
10. OOM Control
+===============
memory.oom_control file is for OOM notification and other controls.
@@ -736,6 +837,7 @@ API (See cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple OOM notification
delivery and gets notification when OOM happens.
To register a notifier, an application must:
+
- create an eventfd using eventfd(2)
- open memory.oom_control file
- write string like "<event_fd> <fd of memory.oom_control>" to
@@ -752,8 +854,11 @@ If OOM-killer is disabled, tasks under cgroup will hang/sleep
in memory cgroup's OOM-waitqueue when they request accountable memory.
For running them, you have to relax the memory cgroup's OOM status by
+
* enlarge limit or reduce usage.
+
To reduce usage,
+
* kill some tasks.
* move some tasks to other group with account migration.
* remove some files (on tmpfs?)
@@ -761,11 +866,14 @@ To reduce usage,
Then, stopped tasks will work again.
At reading, current status of OOM is shown.
- oom_kill_disable 0 or 1 (if 1, oom-killer is disabled)
- under_oom 0 or 1 (if 1, the memory cgroup is under OOM, tasks may
- be stopped.)
+
+ - oom_kill_disable 0 or 1
+ (if 1, oom-killer is disabled)
+ - under_oom 0 or 1
+ (if 1, the memory cgroup is under OOM, tasks may be stopped.)
11. Memory Pressure
+===================
The pressure level notifications can be used to monitor the memory
allocation cost; based on the pressure, applications can implement
@@ -840,21 +948,22 @@ Test:
Here is a small script example that makes a new cgroup, sets up a
memory limit, sets up a notification in the cgroup and then makes child
- cgroup experience a critical pressure:
+ cgroup experience a critical pressure::
- # cd /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/
- # mkdir foo
- # cd foo
- # cgroup_event_listener memory.pressure_level low,hierarchy &
- # echo 8000000 > memory.limit_in_bytes
- # echo 8000000 > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
- # echo $$ > tasks
- # dd if=/dev/zero | read x
+ # cd /sys/fs/cgroup/memory/
+ # mkdir foo
+ # cd foo
+ # cgroup_event_listener memory.pressure_level low,hierarchy &
+ # echo 8000000 > memory.limit_in_bytes
+ # echo 8000000 > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
+ # echo $$ > tasks
+ # dd if=/dev/zero | read x
(Expect a bunch of notifications, and eventually, the oom-killer will
trigger.)
12. TODO
+========
1. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
2. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
@@ -862,11 +971,13 @@ Test:
not yet hit but the usage is getting closer
Summary
+=======
Overall, the memory controller has been a stable controller and has been
commented and discussed quite extensively in the community.
References
+==========
1. Singh, Balbir. RFC: Memory Controller, http://lwn.net/Articles/206697/
2. Singh, Balbir. Memory Controller (RSS Control),
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt
index ec182346dea2..a2cf272af7a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_cls.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=========================
Network classifier cgroup
--------------------------
+=========================
The Network classifier cgroup provides an interface to
tag network packets with a class identifier (classid).
@@ -17,23 +18,27 @@ values is 0xAAAABBBB; AAAA is the major handle number and BBBB
is the minor handle number.
Reading net_cls.classid yields a decimal result.
-Example:
-mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
-mount -t cgroup -onet_cls net_cls /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
-mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0
-echo 0x100001 > /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
- - setting a 10:1 handle.
+Example::
-cat /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
-1048577
+ mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
+ mount -t cgroup -onet_cls net_cls /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls
+ mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0
+ echo 0x100001 > /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
-configuring tc:
-tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 10: htb
+- setting a 10:1 handle::
-tc class add dev eth0 parent 10: classid 10:1 htb rate 40mbit
- - creating traffic class 10:1
+ cat /sys/fs/cgroup/net_cls/0/net_cls.classid
+ 1048577
-tc filter add dev eth0 parent 10: protocol ip prio 10 handle 1: cgroup
+- configuring tc::
-configuring iptables, basic example:
-iptables -A OUTPUT -m cgroup ! --cgroup 0x100001 -j DROP
+ tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 10: htb
+ tc class add dev eth0 parent 10: classid 10:1 htb rate 40mbit
+
+- creating traffic class 10:1::
+
+ tc filter add dev eth0 parent 10: protocol ip prio 10 handle 1: cgroup
+
+configuring iptables, basic example::
+
+ iptables -A OUTPUT -m cgroup ! --cgroup 0x100001 -j DROP
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt
index a82cbd28ea8a..b40905871c64 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/net_prio.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=======================
Network priority cgroup
--------------------------
+=======================
The Network priority cgroup provides an interface to allow an administrator to
dynamically set the priority of network traffic generated by various
@@ -14,9 +15,9 @@ SO_PRIORITY socket option. This however, is not always possible because:
This cgroup allows an administrator to assign a process to a group which defines
the priority of egress traffic on a given interface. Network priority groups can
-be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem.
+be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem::
-# mount -t cgroup -onet_prio none /sys/fs/cgroup/net_prio
+ # mount -t cgroup -onet_prio none /sys/fs/cgroup/net_prio
With the above step, the initial group acting as the parent accounting group
becomes visible at '/sys/fs/cgroup/net_prio'. This group includes all tasks in
@@ -25,17 +26,18 @@ the system. '/sys/fs/cgroup/net_prio/tasks' lists the tasks in this cgroup.
Each net_prio cgroup contains two files that are subsystem specific
net_prio.prioidx
-This file is read-only, and is simply informative. It contains a unique integer
-value that the kernel uses as an internal representation of this cgroup.
+ This file is read-only, and is simply informative. It contains a unique
+ integer value that the kernel uses as an internal representation of this
+ cgroup.
net_prio.ifpriomap
-This file contains a map of the priorities assigned to traffic originating from
-processes in this group and egressing the system on various interfaces. It
-contains a list of tuples in the form <ifname priority>. Contents of this file
-can be modified by echoing a string into the file using the same tuple format.
-for example:
+ This file contains a map of the priorities assigned to traffic originating
+ from processes in this group and egressing the system on various interfaces.
+ It contains a list of tuples in the form <ifname priority>. Contents of this
+ file can be modified by echoing a string into the file using the same tuple
+ format. For example::
-echo "eth0 5" > /sys/fs/cgroups/net_prio/iscsi/net_prio.ifpriomap
+ echo "eth0 5" > /sys/fs/cgroups/net_prio/iscsi/net_prio.ifpriomap
This command would force any traffic originating from processes belonging to the
iscsi net_prio cgroup and egressing on interface eth0 to have the priority of
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
index e105d708ccde..6acebd9e72c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/pids.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Process Number Controller
- =========================
+=========================
+Process Number Controller
+=========================
Abstract
--------
@@ -34,55 +35,58 @@ pids.current tracks all child cgroup hierarchies, so parent/pids.current is a
superset of parent/child/pids.current.
The pids.events file contains event counters:
+
- max: Number of times fork failed because limit was hit.
Example
-------
-First, we mount the pids controller:
-# mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/pids
-# mount -t cgroup -o pids none /sys/fs/cgroup/pids
+First, we mount the pids controller::
-Then we create a hierarchy, set limits and attach processes to it:
-# mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child
-# echo 2 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
-# echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/cgroup.procs
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
-2
-#
+ # mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/pids
+ # mount -t cgroup -o pids none /sys/fs/cgroup/pids
+
+Then we create a hierarchy, set limits and attach processes to it::
+
+ # mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child
+ # echo 2 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
+ # echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/cgroup.procs
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
+ 2
+ #
It should be noted that attempts to overcome the set limit (2 in this case) will
-fail:
+fail::
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
-2
-# ( /bin/echo "Here's some processes for you." | cat )
-sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
-#
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
+ 2
+ # ( /bin/echo "Here's some processes for you." | cat )
+ sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
+ #
Even if we migrate to a child cgroup (which doesn't have a set limit), we will
not be able to overcome the most stringent limit in the hierarchy (in this case,
-parent's):
+parent's)::
-# echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/cgroup.procs
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
-2
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/pids.current
-2
-# cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/pids.max
-max
-# ( /bin/echo "Here's some processes for you." | cat )
-sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
-#
+ # echo $$ > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/cgroup.procs
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.current
+ 2
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/pids.current
+ 2
+ # cat /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/child/pids.max
+ max
+ # ( /bin/echo "Here's some processes for you." | cat )
+ sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
+ #
We can set a limit that is smaller than pids.current, which will stop any new
processes from being forked at all (note that the shell itself counts towards
-pids.current):
+pids.current)::
-# echo 1 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
-# /bin/echo "We can't even spawn a single process now."
-sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
-# echo 0 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
-# /bin/echo "We can't even spawn a single process now."
-sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
-#
+ # echo 1 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
+ # /bin/echo "We can't even spawn a single process now."
+ sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
+ # echo 0 > /sys/fs/cgroup/pids/parent/pids.max
+ # /bin/echo "We can't even spawn a single process now."
+ sh: fork: Resource temporary unavailable
+ #
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt
index 9bdb7fd03f83..2fcb0a9bf790 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroup-v1/rdma.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
- RDMA Controller
- ----------------
+===============
+RDMA Controller
+===============
-Contents
---------
+.. Contents
-1. Overview
- 1-1. What is RDMA controller?
- 1-2. Why RDMA controller needed?
- 1-3. How is RDMA controller implemented?
-2. Usage Examples
+ 1. Overview
+ 1-1. What is RDMA controller?
+ 1-2. Why RDMA controller needed?
+ 1-3. How is RDMA controller implemented?
+ 2. Usage Examples
1. Overview
+===========
1-1. What is RDMA controller?
-----------------------------
@@ -83,27 +84,34 @@ what is configured by user for a given cgroup and what is supported by
IB device.
Following resources can be accounted by rdma controller.
+
+ ========== =============================
hca_handle Maximum number of HCA Handles
hca_object Maximum number of HCA Objects
+ ========== =============================
2. Usage Examples
------------------
-
-(a) Configure resource limit:
-echo mlx4_0 hca_handle=2 hca_object=2000 > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/1/rdma.max
-echo ocrdma1 hca_handle=3 > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.max
-
-(b) Query resource limit:
-cat /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.max
-#Output:
-mlx4_0 hca_handle=2 hca_object=2000
-ocrdma1 hca_handle=3 hca_object=max
-
-(c) Query current usage:
-cat /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.current
-#Output:
-mlx4_0 hca_handle=1 hca_object=20
-ocrdma1 hca_handle=1 hca_object=23
-
-(d) Delete resource limit:
-echo echo mlx4_0 hca_handle=max hca_object=max > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/1/rdma.max
+=================
+
+(a) Configure resource limit::
+
+ echo mlx4_0 hca_handle=2 hca_object=2000 > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/1/rdma.max
+ echo ocrdma1 hca_handle=3 > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.max
+
+(b) Query resource limit::
+
+ cat /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.max
+ #Output:
+ mlx4_0 hca_handle=2 hca_object=2000
+ ocrdma1 hca_handle=3 hca_object=max
+
+(c) Query current usage::
+
+ cat /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/2/rdma.current
+ #Output:
+ mlx4_0 hca_handle=1 hca_object=20
+ ocrdma1 hca_handle=1 hca_object=23
+
+(d) Delete resource limit::
+
+ echo echo mlx4_0 hca_handle=max hca_object=max > /sys/fs/cgroup/rdma/1/rdma.max
--
2.20.1
Instead of using plain text, convert it to ReST format, in
order for the docs to be parsed and produce html and pdf output.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
.../fault-injection/fault-injection.txt | 265 +++++++++---------
.../fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt | 18 +-
.../fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt | 174 ++++++------
.../fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt | 40 ++-
4 files changed, 263 insertions(+), 234 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
index a17517a083c3..f51bb21d20e4 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/fault-injection.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+===========================================
Fault injection capabilities infrastructure
===========================================
@@ -7,36 +8,36 @@ See also drivers/md/md-faulty.c and "every_nth" module option for scsi_debug.
Available fault injection capabilities
--------------------------------------
-o failslab
+- failslab
injects slab allocation failures. (kmalloc(), kmem_cache_alloc(), ...)
-o fail_page_alloc
+- fail_page_alloc
injects page allocation failures. (alloc_pages(), get_free_pages(), ...)
-o fail_futex
+- fail_futex
injects futex deadlock and uaddr fault errors.
-o fail_make_request
+- fail_make_request
injects disk IO errors on devices permitted by setting
/sys/block/<device>/make-it-fail or
/sys/block/<device>/<partition>/make-it-fail. (generic_make_request())
-o fail_mmc_request
+- fail_mmc_request
injects MMC data errors on devices permitted by setting
debugfs entries under /sys/kernel/debug/mmc0/fail_mmc_request
-o fail_function
+- fail_function
injects error return on specific functions, which are marked by
ALLOW_ERROR_INJECTION() macro, by setting debugfs entries
under /sys/kernel/debug/fail_function. No boot option supported.
-o NVMe fault injection
+- NVMe fault injection
inject NVMe status code and retry flag on devices permitted by setting
debugfs entries under /sys/kernel/debug/nvme*/fault_inject. The default
@@ -47,7 +48,8 @@ o NVMe fault injection
Configure fault-injection capabilities behavior
-----------------------------------------------
-o debugfs entries
+debugfs entries
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
fault-inject-debugfs kernel module provides some debugfs entries for runtime
configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
@@ -55,6 +57,7 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/probability:
likelihood of failure injection, in percent.
+
Format: <percent>
Note that one-failure-per-hundred is a very high error rate
@@ -83,6 +86,7 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/verbose
Format: { 0 | 1 | 2 }
+
specifies the verbosity of the messages when failure is
injected. '0' means no messages; '1' will print only a single
log line per failure; '2' will print a call trace too -- useful
@@ -91,14 +95,15 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/task-filter:
Format: { 'Y' | 'N' }
+
A value of 'N' disables filtering by process (default).
Any positive value limits failures to only processes indicated by
/proc/<pid>/make-it-fail==1.
-- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/require-start:
-- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/require-end:
-- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/reject-start:
-- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/reject-end:
+- /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/require-start,
+ /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/require-end,
+ /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/reject-start,
+ /sys/kernel/debug/fail*/reject-end:
specifies the range of virtual addresses tested during
stacktrace walking. Failure is injected only if some caller
@@ -116,6 +121,7 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail_page_alloc/ignore-gfp-highmem:
Format: { 'Y' | 'N' }
+
default is 'N', setting it to 'Y' won't inject failures into
highmem/user allocations.
@@ -123,6 +129,7 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail_page_alloc/ignore-gfp-wait:
Format: { 'Y' | 'N' }
+
default is 'N', setting it to 'Y' will inject failures
only into non-sleep allocations (GFP_ATOMIC allocations).
@@ -134,12 +141,14 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail_futex/ignore-private:
Format: { 'Y' | 'N' }
+
default is 'N', setting it to 'Y' will disable failure injections
when dealing with private (address space) futexes.
- /sys/kernel/debug/fail_function/inject:
Format: { 'function-name' | '!function-name' | '' }
+
specifies the target function of error injection by name.
If the function name leads '!' prefix, given function is
removed from injection list. If nothing specified ('')
@@ -160,10 +169,11 @@ configuration of fault-injection capabilities.
function for given function. This will be created when
user specifies new injection entry.
-o Boot option
+Boot option
+^^^^^^^^^^^
In order to inject faults while debugfs is not available (early boot time),
-use the boot option:
+use the boot option::
failslab=
fail_page_alloc=
@@ -171,10 +181,11 @@ use the boot option:
fail_futex=
mmc_core.fail_request=<interval>,<probability>,<space>,<times>
-o proc entries
+proc entries
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-- /proc/<pid>/fail-nth:
-- /proc/self/task/<tid>/fail-nth:
+- /proc/<pid>/fail-nth,
+ /proc/self/task/<tid>/fail-nth:
Write to this file of integer N makes N-th call in the task fail.
Read from this file returns a integer value. A value of '0' indicates
@@ -191,16 +202,16 @@ o proc entries
How to add new fault injection capability
-----------------------------------------
-o #include <linux/fault-inject.h>
+- #include <linux/fault-inject.h>
-o define the fault attributes
+- define the fault attributes
DECLARE_FAULT_ATTR(name);
Please see the definition of struct fault_attr in fault-inject.h
for details.
-o provide a way to configure fault attributes
+- provide a way to configure fault attributes
- boot option
@@ -222,126 +233,126 @@ o provide a way to configure fault attributes
single kernel module, it is better to provide module parameters to
configure the fault attributes.
-o add a hook to insert failures
+- add a hook to insert failures
- Upon should_fail() returning true, client code should inject a failure.
+ Upon should_fail() returning true, client code should inject a failure:
should_fail(attr, size);
Application Examples
--------------------
-o Inject slab allocation failures into module init/exit code
+- Inject slab allocation failures into module init/exit code::
-#!/bin/bash
+ #!/bin/bash
-FAILTYPE=failslab
-echo Y > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
-echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
-echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
-echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
-echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
-echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-wait
+ FAILTYPE=failslab
+ echo Y > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
+ echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
+ echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
+ echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
+ echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
+ echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-wait
-faulty_system()
-{
+ faulty_system()
+ {
bash -c "echo 1 > /proc/self/make-it-fail && exec $*"
-}
+ }
-if [ $# -eq 0 ]
-then
+ if [ $# -eq 0 ]
+ then
echo "Usage: $0 modulename [ modulename ... ]"
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-for m in $*
-do
+ for m in $*
+ do
echo inserting $m...
faulty_system modprobe $m
echo removing $m...
faulty_system modprobe -r $m
-done
+ done
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-o Inject page allocation failures only for a specific module
+- Inject page allocation failures only for a specific module::
-#!/bin/bash
+ #!/bin/bash
-FAILTYPE=fail_page_alloc
-module=$1
+ FAILTYPE=fail_page_alloc
+ module=$1
-if [ -z $module ]
-then
+ if [ -z $module ]
+ then
echo "Usage: $0 <modulename>"
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-modprobe $module
+ modprobe $module
-if [ ! -d /sys/module/$module/sections ]
-then
+ if [ ! -d /sys/module/$module/sections ]
+ then
echo Module $module is not loaded
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-cat /sys/module/$module/sections/.text > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/require-start
-cat /sys/module/$module/sections/.data > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/require-end
+ cat /sys/module/$module/sections/.text > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/require-start
+ cat /sys/module/$module/sections/.data > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/require-end
-echo N > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
-echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
-echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
-echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
-echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
-echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-wait
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-highmem
-echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/stacktrace-depth
+ echo N > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
+ echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
+ echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
+ echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
+ echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
+ echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-wait
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/ignore-gfp-highmem
+ echo 10 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/stacktrace-depth
-trap "echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability" SIGINT SIGTERM EXIT
+ trap "echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability" SIGINT SIGTERM EXIT
-echo "Injecting errors into the module $module... (interrupt to stop)"
-sleep 1000000
+ echo "Injecting errors into the module $module... (interrupt to stop)"
+ sleep 1000000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-o Inject open_ctree error while btrfs mount
+- Inject open_ctree error while btrfs mount::
-#!/bin/bash
+ #!/bin/bash
-rm -f testfile.img
-dd if=/dev/zero of=testfile.img bs=1M seek=1000 count=1
-DEVICE=$(losetup --show -f testfile.img)
-mkfs.btrfs -f $DEVICE
-mkdir -p tmpmnt
+ rm -f testfile.img
+ dd if=/dev/zero of=testfile.img bs=1M seek=1000 count=1
+ DEVICE=$(losetup --show -f testfile.img)
+ mkfs.btrfs -f $DEVICE
+ mkdir -p tmpmnt
-FAILTYPE=fail_function
-FAILFUNC=open_ctree
-echo $FAILFUNC > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/inject
-echo -12 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/$FAILFUNC/retval
-echo N > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
-echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
-echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
-echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
-echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
+ FAILTYPE=fail_function
+ FAILFUNC=open_ctree
+ echo $FAILFUNC > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/inject
+ echo -12 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/$FAILFUNC/retval
+ echo N > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/task-filter
+ echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/probability
+ echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/interval
+ echo -1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/times
+ echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/space
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/verbose
-mount -t btrfs $DEVICE tmpmnt
-if [ $? -ne 0 ]
-then
+ mount -t btrfs $DEVICE tmpmnt
+ if [ $? -ne 0 ]
+ then
echo "SUCCESS!"
-else
+ else
echo "FAILED!"
umount tmpmnt
-fi
+ fi
-echo > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/inject
+ echo > /sys/kernel/debug/$FAILTYPE/inject
-rmdir tmpmnt
-losetup -d $DEVICE
-rm testfile.img
+ rmdir tmpmnt
+ losetup -d $DEVICE
+ rm testfile.img
Tool to run command with failslab or fail_page_alloc
@@ -354,43 +365,43 @@ see the following examples.
Examples:
Run a command "make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests" with injecting slab
-allocation failure.
+allocation failure::
# ./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh \
-- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
Same as above except to specify 100 times failures at most instead of one time
-at most by default.
+at most by default::
# ./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --times=100 \
-- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
Same as above except to inject page allocation failure instead of slab
-allocation failure.
+allocation failure::
# env FAILCMD_TYPE=fail_page_alloc \
./tools/testing/fault-injection/failcmd.sh --times=100 \
- -- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
+ -- make -C tools/testing/selftests/ run_tests
Systematic faults using fail-nth
---------------------------------
The following code systematically faults 0-th, 1-st, 2-nd and so on
-capabilities in the socketpair() system call.
+capabilities in the socketpair() system call::
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <sys/socket.h>
-#include <sys/syscall.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <errno.h>
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <sys/stat.h>
+ #include <sys/socket.h>
+ #include <sys/syscall.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
-int main()
-{
+ int main()
+ {
int i, err, res, fail_nth, fds[2];
char buf[128];
@@ -413,23 +424,23 @@ int main()
break;
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-An example output:
+An example output::
-1-th fault Y: res=-1/23
-2-th fault Y: res=-1/23
-3-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-4-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-5-th fault Y: res=-1/23
-6-th fault Y: res=-1/23
-7-th fault Y: res=-1/23
-8-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-9-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-10-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-11-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-12-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-13-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-14-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-15-th fault Y: res=-1/12
-16-th fault N: res=0/12
+ 1-th fault Y: res=-1/23
+ 2-th fault Y: res=-1/23
+ 3-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 4-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 5-th fault Y: res=-1/23
+ 6-th fault Y: res=-1/23
+ 7-th fault Y: res=-1/23
+ 8-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 9-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 10-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 11-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 12-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 13-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 14-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 15-th fault Y: res=-1/12
+ 16-th fault N: res=0/12
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt
index e861d761de24..1668b6e48d3a 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/notifier-error-inject.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,8 @@ modules that can be used to test the following notifiers.
PM notifier error injection module
----------------------------------
This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
-/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pm/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+ /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pm/actions/<notifier event>/error
Possible PM notifier events to be failed are:
@@ -22,7 +23,7 @@ Possible PM notifier events to be failed are:
* PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE
* PM_RESTORE_PREPARE
-Example: Inject PM suspend error (-12 = -ENOMEM)
+Example: Inject PM suspend error (-12 = -ENOMEM)::
# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pm/
# echo -12 > actions/PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE/error
@@ -32,14 +33,15 @@ Example: Inject PM suspend error (-12 = -ENOMEM)
Memory hotplug notifier error injection module
----------------------------------------------
This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
-/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/memory/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+ /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/memory/actions/<notifier event>/error
Possible memory notifier events to be failed are:
* MEM_GOING_ONLINE
* MEM_GOING_OFFLINE
-Example: Inject memory hotplug offline error (-12 == -ENOMEM)
+Example: Inject memory hotplug offline error (-12 == -ENOMEM)::
# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/memory
# echo -12 > actions/MEM_GOING_OFFLINE/error
@@ -49,7 +51,8 @@ Example: Inject memory hotplug offline error (-12 == -ENOMEM)
powerpc pSeries reconfig notifier error injection module
--------------------------------------------------------
This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
-/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pSeries-reconfig/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+ /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/pSeries-reconfig/actions/<notifier event>/error
Possible pSeries reconfig notifier events to be failed are:
@@ -61,7 +64,8 @@ Possible pSeries reconfig notifier events to be failed are:
Netdevice notifier error injection module
----------------------------------------------
This feature is controlled through debugfs interface
-/sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/netdev/actions/<notifier event>/error
+
+ /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/netdev/actions/<notifier event>/error
Netdevice notifier events which can be failed are:
@@ -75,7 +79,7 @@ Netdevice notifier events which can be failed are:
* NETDEV_PRECHANGEUPPER
* NETDEV_CHANGEUPPER
-Example: Inject netdevice mtu change error (-22 == -EINVAL)
+Example: Inject netdevice mtu change error (-22 == -EINVAL)::
# cd /sys/kernel/debug/notifier-error-inject/netdev
# echo -22 > actions/NETDEV_CHANGEMTU/error
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt
index 8fbf3bf60b62..bbb1bf3e8650 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/nvme-fault-injection.txt
@@ -16,101 +16,105 @@ following.
Example 1: Inject default status code with no retry
---------------------------------------------------
-mount /dev/nvme0n1 /mnt
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/times
-echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/probability
-cp a.file /mnt
+::
-Expected Result:
+ mount /dev/nvme0n1 /mnt
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/times
+ echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/probability
+ cp a.file /mnt
-cp: cannot stat ‘/mnt/a.file’: Input/output error
+Expected Result::
-Message from dmesg:
+ cp: cannot stat ‘/mnt/a.file’: Input/output error
-FAULT_INJECTION: forcing a failure.
-name fault_inject, interval 1, probability 100, space 0, times 1
-CPU: 0 PID: 0 Comm: swapper/0 Not tainted 4.15.0-rc8+ #2
-Hardware name: innotek GmbH VirtualBox/VirtualBox,
-BIOS VirtualBox 12/01/2006
-Call Trace:
- <IRQ>
- dump_stack+0x5c/0x7d
- should_fail+0x148/0x170
- nvme_should_fail+0x2f/0x50 [nvme_core]
- nvme_process_cq+0xe7/0x1d0 [nvme]
- nvme_irq+0x1e/0x40 [nvme]
- __handle_irq_event_percpu+0x3a/0x190
- handle_irq_event_percpu+0x30/0x70
- handle_irq_event+0x36/0x60
- handle_fasteoi_irq+0x78/0x120
- handle_irq+0xa7/0x130
- ? tick_irq_enter+0xa8/0xc0
- do_IRQ+0x43/0xc0
- common_interrupt+0xa2/0xa2
- </IRQ>
-RIP: 0010:native_safe_halt+0x2/0x10
-RSP: 0018:ffffffff82003e90 EFLAGS: 00000246 ORIG_RAX: ffffffffffffffdd
-RAX: ffffffff817a10c0 RBX: ffffffff82012480 RCX: 0000000000000000
-RDX: 0000000000000000 RSI: 0000000000000000 RDI: 0000000000000000
-RBP: 0000000000000000 R08: 000000008e38ce64 R09: 0000000000000000
-R10: 0000000000000000 R11: 0000000000000000 R12: ffffffff82012480
-R13: ffffffff82012480 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: 0000000000000000
- ? __sched_text_end+0x4/0x4
- default_idle+0x18/0xf0
- do_idle+0x150/0x1d0
- cpu_startup_entry+0x6f/0x80
- start_kernel+0x4c4/0x4e4
- ? set_init_arg+0x55/0x55
- secondary_startup_64+0xa5/0xb0
- print_req_error: I/O error, dev nvme0n1, sector 9240
-EXT4-fs error (device nvme0n1): ext4_find_entry:1436:
-inode #2: comm cp: reading directory lblock 0
+Message from dmesg::
+
+ FAULT_INJECTION: forcing a failure.
+ name fault_inject, interval 1, probability 100, space 0, times 1
+ CPU: 0 PID: 0 Comm: swapper/0 Not tainted 4.15.0-rc8+ #2
+ Hardware name: innotek GmbH VirtualBox/VirtualBox,
+ BIOS VirtualBox 12/01/2006
+ Call Trace:
+ <IRQ>
+ dump_stack+0x5c/0x7d
+ should_fail+0x148/0x170
+ nvme_should_fail+0x2f/0x50 [nvme_core]
+ nvme_process_cq+0xe7/0x1d0 [nvme]
+ nvme_irq+0x1e/0x40 [nvme]
+ __handle_irq_event_percpu+0x3a/0x190
+ handle_irq_event_percpu+0x30/0x70
+ handle_irq_event+0x36/0x60
+ handle_fasteoi_irq+0x78/0x120
+ handle_irq+0xa7/0x130
+ ? tick_irq_enter+0xa8/0xc0
+ do_IRQ+0x43/0xc0
+ common_interrupt+0xa2/0xa2
+ </IRQ>
+ RIP: 0010:native_safe_halt+0x2/0x10
+ RSP: 0018:ffffffff82003e90 EFLAGS: 00000246 ORIG_RAX: ffffffffffffffdd
+ RAX: ffffffff817a10c0 RBX: ffffffff82012480 RCX: 0000000000000000
+ RDX: 0000000000000000 RSI: 0000000000000000 RDI: 0000000000000000
+ RBP: 0000000000000000 R08: 000000008e38ce64 R09: 0000000000000000
+ R10: 0000000000000000 R11: 0000000000000000 R12: ffffffff82012480
+ R13: ffffffff82012480 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: 0000000000000000
+ ? __sched_text_end+0x4/0x4
+ default_idle+0x18/0xf0
+ do_idle+0x150/0x1d0
+ cpu_startup_entry+0x6f/0x80
+ start_kernel+0x4c4/0x4e4
+ ? set_init_arg+0x55/0x55
+ secondary_startup_64+0xa5/0xb0
+ print_req_error: I/O error, dev nvme0n1, sector 9240
+ EXT4-fs error (device nvme0n1): ext4_find_entry:1436:
+ inode #2: comm cp: reading directory lblock 0
Example 2: Inject default status code with retry
------------------------------------------------
-mount /dev/nvme0n1 /mnt
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/times
-echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/probability
-echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/status
-echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/dont_retry
+::
-cp a.file /mnt
+ mount /dev/nvme0n1 /mnt
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/times
+ echo 100 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/probability
+ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/status
+ echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/nvme0n1/fault_inject/dont_retry
-Expected Result:
+ cp a.file /mnt
-command success without error
+Expected Result::
-Message from dmesg:
+ command success without error
-FAULT_INJECTION: forcing a failure.
-name fault_inject, interval 1, probability 100, space 0, times 1
-CPU: 1 PID: 0 Comm: swapper/1 Not tainted 4.15.0-rc8+ #4
-Hardware name: innotek GmbH VirtualBox/VirtualBox, BIOS VirtualBox 12/01/2006
-Call Trace:
- <IRQ>
- dump_stack+0x5c/0x7d
- should_fail+0x148/0x170
- nvme_should_fail+0x30/0x60 [nvme_core]
- nvme_loop_queue_response+0x84/0x110 [nvme_loop]
- nvmet_req_complete+0x11/0x40 [nvmet]
- nvmet_bio_done+0x28/0x40 [nvmet]
- blk_update_request+0xb0/0x310
- blk_mq_end_request+0x18/0x60
- flush_smp_call_function_queue+0x3d/0xf0
- smp_call_function_single_interrupt+0x2c/0xc0
- call_function_single_interrupt+0xa2/0xb0
- </IRQ>
-RIP: 0010:native_safe_halt+0x2/0x10
-RSP: 0018:ffffc9000068bec0 EFLAGS: 00000246 ORIG_RAX: ffffffffffffff04
-RAX: ffffffff817a10c0 RBX: ffff88011a3c9680 RCX: 0000000000000000
-RDX: 0000000000000000 RSI: 0000000000000000 RDI: 0000000000000000
-RBP: 0000000000000001 R08: 000000008e38c131 R09: 0000000000000000
-R10: 0000000000000000 R11: 0000000000000000 R12: ffff88011a3c9680
-R13: ffff88011a3c9680 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: 0000000000000000
- ? __sched_text_end+0x4/0x4
- default_idle+0x18/0xf0
- do_idle+0x150/0x1d0
- cpu_startup_entry+0x6f/0x80
- start_secondary+0x187/0x1e0
- secondary_startup_64+0xa5/0xb0
+Message from dmesg::
+
+ FAULT_INJECTION: forcing a failure.
+ name fault_inject, interval 1, probability 100, space 0, times 1
+ CPU: 1 PID: 0 Comm: swapper/1 Not tainted 4.15.0-rc8+ #4
+ Hardware name: innotek GmbH VirtualBox/VirtualBox, BIOS VirtualBox 12/01/2006
+ Call Trace:
+ <IRQ>
+ dump_stack+0x5c/0x7d
+ should_fail+0x148/0x170
+ nvme_should_fail+0x30/0x60 [nvme_core]
+ nvme_loop_queue_response+0x84/0x110 [nvme_loop]
+ nvmet_req_complete+0x11/0x40 [nvmet]
+ nvmet_bio_done+0x28/0x40 [nvmet]
+ blk_update_request+0xb0/0x310
+ blk_mq_end_request+0x18/0x60
+ flush_smp_call_function_queue+0x3d/0xf0
+ smp_call_function_single_interrupt+0x2c/0xc0
+ call_function_single_interrupt+0xa2/0xb0
+ </IRQ>
+ RIP: 0010:native_safe_halt+0x2/0x10
+ RSP: 0018:ffffc9000068bec0 EFLAGS: 00000246 ORIG_RAX: ffffffffffffff04
+ RAX: ffffffff817a10c0 RBX: ffff88011a3c9680 RCX: 0000000000000000
+ RDX: 0000000000000000 RSI: 0000000000000000 RDI: 0000000000000000
+ RBP: 0000000000000001 R08: 000000008e38c131 R09: 0000000000000000
+ R10: 0000000000000000 R11: 0000000000000000 R12: ffff88011a3c9680
+ R13: ffff88011a3c9680 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: 0000000000000000
+ ? __sched_text_end+0x4/0x4
+ default_idle+0x18/0xf0
+ do_idle+0x150/0x1d0
+ cpu_startup_entry+0x6f/0x80
+ start_secondary+0x187/0x1e0
+ secondary_startup_64+0xa5/0xb0
diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt
index 7a9d3d81525b..9279a3e12278 100644
--- a/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===============
+Provoke crashes
+===============
+
The lkdtm module provides an interface to crash or injure the kernel at
predefined crashpoints to evaluate the reliability of crash dumps obtained
using different dumping solutions. The module uses KPROBEs to instrument
@@ -8,31 +12,37 @@ support.
You can provide the way either through module arguments when inserting
the module, or through a debugfs interface.
-Usage: insmod lkdtm.ko [recur_count={>0}] cpoint_name=<> cpoint_type=<>
- [cpoint_count={>0}]
+Usage::
- recur_count : Recursion level for the stack overflow test. Default is 10.
+ insmod lkdtm.ko [recur_count={>0}] cpoint_name=<> cpoint_type=<>
+ [cpoint_count={>0}]
- cpoint_name : Crash point where the kernel is to be crashed. It can be
- one of INT_HARDWARE_ENTRY, INT_HW_IRQ_EN, INT_TASKLET_ENTRY,
- FS_DEVRW, MEM_SWAPOUT, TIMERADD, SCSI_DISPATCH_CMD,
- IDE_CORE_CP, DIRECT
+recur_count
+ Recursion level for the stack overflow test. Default is 10.
- cpoint_type : Indicates the action to be taken on hitting the crash point.
- It can be one of PANIC, BUG, EXCEPTION, LOOP, OVERFLOW,
- CORRUPT_STACK, UNALIGNED_LOAD_STORE_WRITE, OVERWRITE_ALLOCATION,
- WRITE_AFTER_FREE,
+cpoint_name
+ Crash point where the kernel is to be crashed. It can be
+ one of INT_HARDWARE_ENTRY, INT_HW_IRQ_EN, INT_TASKLET_ENTRY,
+ FS_DEVRW, MEM_SWAPOUT, TIMERADD, SCSI_DISPATCH_CMD,
+ IDE_CORE_CP, DIRECT
- cpoint_count : Indicates the number of times the crash point is to be hit
- to trigger an action. The default is 10.
+cpoint_type
+ Indicates the action to be taken on hitting the crash point.
+ It can be one of PANIC, BUG, EXCEPTION, LOOP, OVERFLOW,
+ CORRUPT_STACK, UNALIGNED_LOAD_STORE_WRITE, OVERWRITE_ALLOCATION,
+ WRITE_AFTER_FREE,
+
+cpoint_count
+ Indicates the number of times the crash point is to be hit
+ to trigger an action. The default is 10.
You can also induce failures by mounting debugfs and writing the type to
-<mountpoint>/provoke-crash/<crashpoint>. E.g.,
+<mountpoint>/provoke-crash/<crashpoint>. E.g.::
mount -t debugfs debugfs /mnt
echo EXCEPTION > /mnt/provoke-crash/INT_HARDWARE_ENTRY
-A special file is `DIRECT' which will induce the crash directly without
+A special file is `DIRECT` which will induce the crash directly without
KPROBE instrumentation. This mode is the only one available when the module
is built on a kernel without KPROBEs support.
--
2.20.1
Convert the x86/x86_64 text files to ReST and prepare them to
be part of a new architecture book.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt | 10 +-
Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 578 +++++++++---------
Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt | 69 ++-
Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt | 11 +-
Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt | 245 ++++----
Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt | 55 +-
Documentation/x86/microcode.txt | 51 +-
Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt | 442 +++++++-------
Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt | 1 +
Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 217 +++----
Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt | 33 +-
Documentation/x86/pti.txt | 8 +-
Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt | 621 +++++++++++---------
Documentation/x86/tlb.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/x86/topology.txt | 26 +-
Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt | 33 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt | 14 +-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 98 ++-
Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt | 212 ++++---
Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt | 67 ++-
22 files changed, 1575 insertions(+), 1272 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt b/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt
index afc41f544dab..bcefc00847f4 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/amd-memory-encryption.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=====================
+AMD memory encryption
+=====================
+
Secure Memory Encryption (SME) and Secure Encrypted Virtualization (SEV) are
features found on AMD processors.
@@ -34,7 +38,7 @@ is operating in 64-bit or 32-bit PAE mode, in all other modes the SEV hardware
forces the memory encryption bit to 1.
Support for SME and SEV can be determined through the CPUID instruction. The
-CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME:
+CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME::
0x8000001f[eax]:
Bit[0] indicates support for SME
@@ -48,14 +52,14 @@ CPUID function 0x8000001f reports information related to SME:
addresses)
If support for SME is present, MSR 0xc00100010 (MSR_K8_SYSCFG) can be used to
-determine if SME is enabled and/or to enable memory encryption:
+determine if SME is enabled and/or to enable memory encryption::
0xc0010010:
Bit[23] 0 = memory encryption features are disabled
1 = memory encryption features are enabled
If SEV is supported, MSR 0xc0010131 (MSR_AMD64_SEV) can be used to determine if
-SEV is active:
+SEV is active::
0xc0010131:
Bit[0] 0 = memory encryption is not active
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
index 223e484a1304..206f659e077a 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL
- ---------------------------
+===========================
+THE LINUX/x86 BOOT PROTOCOL
+===========================
On the x86 platform, the Linux kernel uses a rather complicated boot
convention. This has evolved partially due to historical aspects, as
@@ -10,6 +11,7 @@ real-mode DOS as a mainstream operating system.
Currently, the following versions of the Linux/x86 boot protocol exist.
+=============== ===============================================================
Old kernels: zImage/Image support only. Some very early kernels
may not even support a command line.
@@ -48,7 +50,7 @@ Protocol 2.08: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format
fields to aid in locating the payload.
Protocol 2.09: (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
- pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data.
+ pointer to single linked list of struct setup_data.
Protocol 2.10: (Kernel 2.6.31) Added a protocol for relaxed alignment
beyond the kernel_alignment added, new init_size and
@@ -64,33 +66,35 @@ Protocol 2.12: (Kernel 3.8) Added the xloadflags field and extension fields
Protocol 2.13: (Kernel 3.14) Support 32- and 64-bit flags being set in
xloadflags to support booting a 64-bit kernel from 32-bit
EFI
+=============== ===============================================================
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT
+MEMORY LAYOUT
+=============
The traditional memory map for the kernel loader, used for Image or
-zImage kernels, typically looks like:
+zImage kernels, typically looks like::
- | |
-0A0000 +------------------------+
- | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA.
-09A000 +------------------------+
- | Command line |
- | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-098000 +------------------------+
- | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code.
-090200 +------------------------+
- | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector.
-090000 +------------------------+
- | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image.
-010000 +------------------------+
- | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000 +------------------------+
- | Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800 +------------------------+
- | Typically used by MBR |
-000600 +------------------------+
- | BIOS use only |
-000000 +------------------------+
+ | |
+ 0A0000 +------------------------+
+ | Reserved for BIOS | Do not use. Reserved for BIOS EBDA.
+ 09A000 +------------------------+
+ | Command line |
+ | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code.
+ 098000 +------------------------+
+ | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code.
+ 090200 +------------------------+
+ | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector.
+ 090000 +------------------------+
+ | Protected-mode kernel | The bulk of the kernel image.
+ 010000 +------------------------+
+ | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
+ 001000 +------------------------+
+ | Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
+ 000800 +------------------------+
+ | Typically used by MBR |
+ 000600 +------------------------+
+ | BIOS use only |
+ 000000 +------------------------+
When using bzImage, the protected-mode kernel was relocated to
@@ -116,36 +120,37 @@ zImage or old bzImage kernels, which need data written into the
above the 0x9A000 point; too many BIOSes will break above that point.
For a modern bzImage kernel with boot protocol version >= 2.02, a
-memory layout like the following is suggested:
+memory layout like the following is suggested::
- ~ ~
- | Protected-mode kernel |
-100000 +------------------------+
- | I/O memory hole |
-0A0000 +------------------------+
- | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused
- ~ ~
- | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark)
-X+10000 +------------------------+
- | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code.
-X+08000 +------------------------+
- | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code.
- | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector.
-X +------------------------+
- | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
-001000 +------------------------+
- | Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
-000800 +------------------------+
- | Typically used by MBR |
-000600 +------------------------+
- | BIOS use only |
-000000 +------------------------+
+ ~ ~
+ | Protected-mode kernel |
+ 100000 +------------------------+
+ | I/O memory hole |
+ 0A0000 +------------------------+
+ | Reserved for BIOS | Leave as much as possible unused
+ ~ ~
+ | Command line | (Can also be below the X+10000 mark)
+ X+10000 +------------------------+
+ | Stack/heap | For use by the kernel real-mode code.
+ X+08000 +------------------------+
+ | Kernel setup | The kernel real-mode code.
+ | Kernel boot sector | The kernel legacy boot sector.
+ X +------------------------+
+ | Boot loader | <- Boot sector entry point 0000:7C00
+ 001000 +------------------------+
+ | Reserved for MBR/BIOS |
+ 000800 +------------------------+
+ | Typically used by MBR |
+ 000600 +------------------------+
+ | BIOS use only |
+ 000000 +------------------------+
-... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader
-permits.
+ ... where the address X is as low as the design of the boot loader
+ permits.
-**** THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER
+THE REAL-MODE KERNEL HEADER
+===========================
In the following text, and anywhere in the kernel boot sequence, "a
sector" refers to 512 bytes. It is independent of the actual sector
@@ -159,48 +164,54 @@ sectors (1K) and then examine the bootup sector size.
The header looks like:
-Offset Proto Name Meaning
+====== ======== ===================== ========================================
+Offset Proto Name Meaning
/Size
-01F1/1 ALL(1 setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors
-01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly
-01F4/4 2.04+(2 syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte paras
-01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control
-01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number
-01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number
-0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction
-0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS"
-0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported
-0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below)
-020C/2 2.00+ start_sys_seg The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete)
-020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string
-0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier
-0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags
-0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size (used with hooks)
-0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below)
-0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader)
-021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader)
-0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
-0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end
-0226/1 2.02+(3 ext_loader_ver Extended boot loader version
-0227/1 2.02+(3 ext_loader_type Extended boot loader ID
-0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line
-022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address
-0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for kernel
-0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not
-0235/1 2.10+ min_alignment Minimum alignment, as a power of two
-0236/2 2.12+ xloadflags Boot protocol option flags
-0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line
-023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
-0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
-0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload
-024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload
-0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list
- of struct setup_data
-0258/8 2.10+ pref_address Preferred loading address
-0260/4 2.10+ init_size Linear memory required during initialization
-0264/4 2.11+ handover_offset Offset of handover entry point
+01F1/1 ALL(1) setup_sects The size of the setup in sectors
+01F2/2 ALL root_flags If set, the root is mounted readonly
+01F4/4 2.04+(2) syssize The size of the 32-bit code in 16-byte
+ paras
+01F8/2 ALL ram_size DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
+01FA/2 ALL vid_mode Video mode control
+01FC/2 ALL root_dev Default root device number
+01FE/2 ALL boot_flag 0xAA55 magic number
+0200/2 2.00+ jump Jump instruction
+0202/4 2.00+ header Magic signature "HdrS"
+0206/2 2.00+ version Boot protocol version supported
+0208/4 2.00+ realmode_swtch Boot loader hook (see below)
+020C/2 2.00+ start_sys_seg The load-low segment (0x1000) (obsolete)
+020E/2 2.00+ kernel_version Pointer to kernel version string
+0210/1 2.00+ type_of_loader Boot loader identifier
+0211/1 2.00+ loadflags Boot protocol option flags
+0212/2 2.00+ setup_move_size Move to high memory size
+ (used with hooks)
+0214/4 2.00+ code32_start Boot loader hook (see below)
+0218/4 2.00+ ramdisk_image initrd load address (set by boot loader)
+021C/4 2.00+ ramdisk_size initrd size (set by boot loader)
+0220/4 2.00+ bootsect_kludge DO NOT USE - for bootsect.S use only
+0224/2 2.01+ heap_end_ptr Free memory after setup end
+0226/1 2.02+(3) ext_loader_ver Extended boot loader version
+0227/1 2.02+(3) ext_loader_type Extended boot loader ID
+0228/4 2.02+ cmd_line_ptr 32-bit pointer to the kernel command line
+022C/4 2.03+ initrd_addr_max Highest legal initrd address
+0230/4 2.05+ kernel_alignment Physical addr alignment required for
+ kernel
+0234/1 2.05+ relocatable_kernel Whether kernel is relocatable or not
+0235/1 2.10+ min_alignment Minimum alignment, as a power of two
+0236/2 2.12+ xloadflags Boot protocol option flags
+0238/4 2.06+ cmdline_size Maximum size of the kernel command line
+023C/4 2.07+ hardware_subarch Hardware subarchitecture
+0240/8 2.07+ hardware_subarch_data Subarchitecture-specific data
+0248/4 2.08+ payload_offset Offset of kernel payload
+024C/4 2.08+ payload_length Length of kernel payload
+0250/8 2.09+ setup_data 64-bit physical pointer to linked list
+ of struct setup_data
+0258/8 2.10+ pref_address Preferred loading address
+0260/4 2.10+ init_size Linear memory required during
+ initialization
+0264/4 2.11+ handover_offset Offset of handover entry point
+====== ======== ===================== ========================================
(1) For backwards compatibility, if the setup_sects field contains 0, the
real value is 4.
@@ -213,7 +224,7 @@ Offset Proto Name Meaning
If the "HdrS" (0x53726448) magic number is not found at offset 0x202,
the boot protocol version is "old". Loading an old kernel, the
-following parameters should be assumed:
+following parameters should be assumed::
Image type = zImage
initrd not supported
@@ -225,7 +236,8 @@ setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields
supported by the protocol version in use.
-**** DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS
+DETAILS OF HEADER FIELDS
+========================
For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader
("read"), some are expected to be filled out by the bootloader
@@ -239,106 +251,106 @@ boot loaders can ignore those fields.
The byte order of all fields is littleendian (this is x86, after all.)
-Field name: setup_sects
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x1f1/1
-Protocol: ALL
+:Field name: setup_sects
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x1f1/1
+:Protocol: ALL
The size of the setup code in 512-byte sectors. If this field is
0, the real value is 4. The real-mode code consists of the boot
sector (always one 512-byte sector) plus the setup code.
-Field name: root_flags
-Type: modify (optional)
-Offset/size: 0x1f2/2
-Protocol: ALL
+:Field name: root_flags
+:Type: modify (optional)
+:Offset/size: 0x1f2/2
+:Protocol: ALL
If this field is nonzero, the root defaults to readonly. The use of
this field is deprecated; use the "ro" or "rw" options on the
command line instead.
-Field name: syssize
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL)
-Protocol: 2.04+
+:Field name: syssize
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x1f4/4 (protocol 2.04+) 0x1f4/2 (protocol ALL)
+:Protocol: 2.04+
The size of the protected-mode code in units of 16-byte paragraphs.
For protocol versions older than 2.04 this field is only two bytes
wide, and therefore cannot be trusted for the size of a kernel if
the LOAD_HIGH flag is set.
-Field name: ram_size
-Type: kernel internal
-Offset/size: 0x1f8/2
-Protocol: ALL
+:Field name: ram_size
+:Type: kernel internal
+:Offset/size: 0x1f8/2
+:Protocol: ALL
This field is obsolete.
-Field name: vid_mode
-Type: modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x1fa/2
+:Field name: vid_mode
+:Type: modify (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x1fa/2
Please see the section on SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS.
-Field name: root_dev
-Type: modify (optional)
-Offset/size: 0x1fc/2
-Protocol: ALL
+:Field name: root_dev
+:Type: modify (optional)
+:Offset/size: 0x1fc/2
+:Protocol: ALL
The default root device device number. The use of this field is
deprecated, use the "root=" option on the command line instead.
-Field name: boot_flag
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x1fe/2
-Protocol: ALL
+:Field name: boot_flag
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x1fe/2
+:Protocol: ALL
Contains 0xAA55. This is the closest thing old Linux kernels have
to a magic number.
-Field name: jump
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x200/2
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: jump
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x200/2
+:Protocol: 2.00+
Contains an x86 jump instruction, 0xEB followed by a signed offset
relative to byte 0x202. This can be used to determine the size of
the header.
-Field name: header
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x202/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: header
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x202/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
Contains the magic number "HdrS" (0x53726448).
-Field name: version
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x206/2
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: version
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x206/2
+:Protocol: 2.00+
Contains the boot protocol version, in (major << 8)+minor format,
e.g. 0x0204 for version 2.04, and 0x0a11 for a hypothetical version
10.17.
-Field name: realmode_swtch
-Type: modify (optional)
-Offset/size: 0x208/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: realmode_swtch
+:Type: modify (optional)
+:Offset/size: 0x208/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
Boot loader hook (see ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS below.)
-Field name: start_sys_seg
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x20c/2
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: start_sys_seg
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x20c/2
+:Protocol: 2.00+
The load low segment (0x1000). Obsolete.
-Field name: kernel_version
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x20e/2
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: kernel_version
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x20e/2
+:Protocol: 2.00+
If set to a nonzero value, contains a pointer to a NUL-terminated
human-readable kernel version number string, less 0x200. This can
@@ -348,17 +360,17 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
For example, if this value is set to 0x1c00, the kernel version
number string can be found at offset 0x1e00 in the kernel file.
This is a valid value if and only if the "setup_sects" field
- contains the value 15 or higher, as:
+ contains the value 15 or higher, as::
0x1c00 < 15*0x200 (= 0x1e00) but
0x1c00 >= 14*0x200 (= 0x1c00)
0x1c00 >> 9 = 14, so the minimum value for setup_secs is 15.
-Field name: type_of_loader
-Type: write (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x210/1
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: type_of_loader
+:Type: write (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x210/1
+:Protocol: 2.00+
If your boot loader has an assigned id (see table below), enter
0xTV here, where T is an identifier for the boot loader and V is
@@ -369,13 +381,13 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
Similarly, the ext_loader_ver field can be used to provide more than
four bits for the bootloader version.
- For example, for T = 0x15, V = 0x234, write:
+ For example, for T = 0x15, V = 0x234, write::
- type_of_loader <- 0xE4
- ext_loader_type <- 0x05
- ext_loader_ver <- 0x23
+ type_of_loader <- 0xE4
+ ext_loader_type <- 0x05
+ ext_loader_ver <- 0x23
- Assigned boot loader ids (hexadecimal):
+ Assigned boot loader ids (hexadecimal)::
0 LILO (0x00 reserved for pre-2.00 bootloader)
1 Loadlin
@@ -399,10 +411,10 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
Please contact <[email protected]> if you need a bootloader ID
value assigned.
-Field name: loadflags
-Type: modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x211/1
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: loadflags
+:Type: modify (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x211/1
+:Protocol: 2.00+
This field is a bitmask.
@@ -419,14 +431,17 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
Bit 5 (write): QUIET_FLAG
- If 0, print early messages.
- If 1, suppress early messages.
+
This requests to the kernel (decompressor and early
kernel) to not write early messages that require
accessing the display hardware directly.
Bit 6 (write): KEEP_SEGMENTS
Protocol: 2.07+
+
- If 0, reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
- If 1, do not reload the segment registers in the 32bit entry point.
+
Assume that %cs %ds %ss %es are all set to flat segments with
a base of 0 (or the equivalent for their environment).
@@ -435,10 +450,10 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
heap_end_ptr is valid. If this field is clear, some setup code
functionality will be disabled.
-Field name: setup_move_size
-Type: modify (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x212/2
-Protocol: 2.00-2.01
+:Field name: setup_move_size
+:Type: modify (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x212/2
+:Protocol: 2.00-2.01
When using protocol 2.00 or 2.01, if the real mode kernel is not
loaded at 0x90000, it gets moved there later in the loading
@@ -447,14 +462,14 @@ Protocol: 2.00-2.01
itself.
The unit is bytes starting with the beginning of the boot sector.
-
+
This field is can be ignored when the protocol is 2.02 or higher, or
if the real-mode code is loaded at 0x90000.
-Field name: code32_start
-Type: modify (optional, reloc)
-Offset/size: 0x214/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: code32_start
+:Type: modify (optional, reloc)
+:Offset/size: 0x214/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
The address to jump to in protected mode. This defaults to the load
address of the kernel, and can be used by the boot loader to
@@ -468,41 +483,41 @@ Protocol: 2.00+
relocatable kernel at a nonstandard address it will have to modify
this field to point to the load address.
-Field name: ramdisk_image
-Type: write (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x218/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: ramdisk_image
+:Type: write (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x218/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
The 32-bit linear address of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at
zero if there is no initial ramdisk/ramfs.
-Field name: ramdisk_size
-Type: write (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x21c/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: ramdisk_size
+:Type: write (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x21c/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
Size of the initial ramdisk or ramfs. Leave at zero if there is no
initial ramdisk/ramfs.
-Field name: bootsect_kludge
-Type: kernel internal
-Offset/size: 0x220/4
-Protocol: 2.00+
+:Field name: bootsect_kludge
+:Type: kernel internal
+:Offset/size: 0x220/4
+:Protocol: 2.00+
This field is obsolete.
-Field name: heap_end_ptr
-Type: write (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x224/2
-Protocol: 2.01+
+:Field name: heap_end_ptr
+:Type: write (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x224/2
+:Protocol: 2.01+
Set this field to the offset (from the beginning of the real-mode
code) of the end of the setup stack/heap, minus 0x0200.
-Field name: ext_loader_ver
-Type: write (optional)
-Offset/size: 0x226/1
-Protocol: 2.02+
+:Field name: ext_loader_ver
+:Type: write (optional)
+:Offset/size: 0x226/1
+:Protocol: 2.02+
This field is used as an extension of the version number in the
type_of_loader field. The total version number is considered to be
@@ -514,10 +529,10 @@ Protocol: 2.02+
Kernels prior to 2.6.31 did not recognize this field, but it is safe
to write for protocol version 2.02 or higher.
-Field name: ext_loader_type
-Type: write (obligatory if (type_of_loader & 0xf0) == 0xe0)
-Offset/size: 0x227/1
-Protocol: 2.02+
+:Field name: ext_loader_type
+:Type: write (obligatory if (type_of_loader & 0xf0) == 0xe0)
+:Offset/size: 0x227/1
+:Protocol: 2.02+
This field is used as an extension of the type number in
type_of_loader field. If the type in type_of_loader is 0xE, then
@@ -528,10 +543,10 @@ Protocol: 2.02+
Kernels prior to 2.6.31 did not recognize this field, but it is safe
to write for protocol version 2.02 or higher.
-Field name: cmd_line_ptr
-Type: write (obligatory)
-Offset/size: 0x228/4
-Protocol: 2.02+
+:Field name: cmd_line_ptr
+:Type: write (obligatory)
+:Offset/size: 0x228/4
+:Protocol: 2.02+
Set this field to the linear address of the kernel command line.
The kernel command line can be located anywhere between the end of
@@ -544,10 +559,10 @@ Protocol: 2.02+
zero, the kernel will assume that your boot loader does not support
the 2.02+ protocol.
-Field name: initrd_addr_max
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x22c/4
-Protocol: 2.03+
+:Field name: initrd_addr_max
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x22c/4
+:Protocol: 2.03+
The maximum address that may be occupied by the initial
ramdisk/ramfs contents. For boot protocols 2.02 or earlier, this
@@ -556,10 +571,10 @@ Protocol: 2.03+
your ramdisk is exactly 131072 bytes long and this field is
0x37FFFFFF, you can start your ramdisk at 0x37FE0000.)
-Field name: kernel_alignment
-Type: read/modify (reloc)
-Offset/size: 0x230/4
-Protocol: 2.05+ (read), 2.10+ (modify)
+:Field name: kernel_alignment
+:Type: read/modify (reloc)
+:Offset/size: 0x230/4
+:Protocol: 2.05+ (read), 2.10+ (modify)
Alignment unit required by the kernel (if relocatable_kernel is
true.) A relocatable kernel that is loaded at an alignment
@@ -571,20 +586,20 @@ Protocol: 2.05+ (read), 2.10+ (modify)
loader to modify this field to permit a lesser alignment. See the
min_alignment and pref_address field below.
-Field name: relocatable_kernel
-Type: read (reloc)
-Offset/size: 0x234/1
-Protocol: 2.05+
+:Field name: relocatable_kernel
+:Type: read (reloc)
+:Offset/size: 0x234/1
+:Protocol: 2.05+
If this field is nonzero, the protected-mode part of the kernel can
be loaded at any address that satisfies the kernel_alignment field.
After loading, the boot loader must set the code32_start field to
point to the loaded code, or to a boot loader hook.
-Field name: min_alignment
-Type: read (reloc)
-Offset/size: 0x235/1
-Protocol: 2.10+
+:Field name: min_alignment
+:Type: read (reloc)
+:Offset/size: 0x235/1
+:Protocol: 2.10+
This field, if nonzero, indicates as a power of two the minimum
alignment required, as opposed to preferred, by the kernel to boot.
@@ -597,10 +612,10 @@ Protocol: 2.10+
misaligned kernel. Therefore, a loader should typically try each
power-of-two alignment from kernel_alignment down to this alignment.
-Field name: xloadflags
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x236/2
-Protocol: 2.12+
+:Field name: xloadflags
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x236/2
+:Protocol: 2.12+
This field is a bitmask.
@@ -608,33 +623,33 @@ Protocol: 2.12+
- If 1, this kernel has the legacy 64-bit entry point at 0x200.
Bit 1 (read): XLF_CAN_BE_LOADED_ABOVE_4G
- - If 1, kernel/boot_params/cmdline/ramdisk can be above 4G.
+ - If 1, kernel/boot_params/cmdline/ramdisk can be above 4G.
Bit 2 (read): XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_32
- If 1, the kernel supports the 32-bit EFI handoff entry point
- given at handover_offset.
+ given at handover_offset.
Bit 3 (read): XLF_EFI_HANDOVER_64
- If 1, the kernel supports the 64-bit EFI handoff entry point
- given at handover_offset + 0x200.
+ given at handover_offset + 0x200.
Bit 4 (read): XLF_EFI_KEXEC
- If 1, the kernel supports kexec EFI boot with EFI runtime support.
-Field name: cmdline_size
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x238/4
-Protocol: 2.06+
+:Field name: cmdline_size
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x238/4
+:Protocol: 2.06+
The maximum size of the command line without the terminating
zero. This means that the command line can contain at most
cmdline_size characters. With protocol version 2.05 and earlier, the
maximum size was 255.
-Field name: hardware_subarch
-Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC)
-Offset/size: 0x23c/4
-Protocol: 2.07+
+:Field name: hardware_subarch
+:Type: write (optional, defaults to x86/PC)
+:Offset/size: 0x23c/4
+:Protocol: 2.07+
In a paravirtualized environment the hardware low level architectural
pieces such as interrupt handling, page table handling, and
@@ -643,25 +658,27 @@ Protocol: 2.07+
This field allows the bootloader to inform the kernel we are in one
one of those environments.
+ ========== ==============================
0x00000000 The default x86/PC environment
0x00000001 lguest
0x00000002 Xen
0x00000003 Moorestown MID
0x00000004 CE4100 TV Platform
+ ========== ==============================
-Field name: hardware_subarch_data
-Type: write (subarch-dependent)
-Offset/size: 0x240/8
-Protocol: 2.07+
+:Field name: hardware_subarch_data
+:Type: write (subarch-dependent)
+:Offset/size: 0x240/8
+:Protocol: 2.07+
A pointer to data that is specific to hardware subarch
This field is currently unused for the default x86/PC environment,
do not modify.
-Field name: payload_offset
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x248/4
-Protocol: 2.08+
+:Field name: payload_offset
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x248/4
+:Protocol: 2.08+
If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the beginning
of the protected-mode code to the payload.
@@ -674,29 +691,29 @@ Protocol: 2.08+
02 21). The uncompressed payload is currently always ELF (magic
number 7F 45 4C 46).
-Field name: payload_length
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x24c/4
-Protocol: 2.08+
+:Field name: payload_length
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x24c/4
+:Protocol: 2.08+
The length of the payload.
-Field name: setup_data
-Type: write (special)
-Offset/size: 0x250/8
-Protocol: 2.09+
+:Field name: setup_data
+:Type: write (special)
+:Offset/size: 0x250/8
+:Protocol: 2.09+
The 64-bit physical pointer to NULL terminated single linked list of
struct setup_data. This is used to define a more extensible boot
parameters passing mechanism. The definition of struct setup_data is
- as follow:
+ as follow::
- struct setup_data {
+ struct setup_data {
u64 next;
u32 type;
u32 len;
u8 data[0];
- };
+ };
Where, the next is a 64-bit physical pointer to the next node of
linked list, the next field of the last node is 0; the type is used
@@ -708,10 +725,10 @@ Protocol: 2.09+
sure to consider the case where the linked list already contains
entries.
-Field name: pref_address
-Type: read (reloc)
-Offset/size: 0x258/8
-Protocol: 2.10+
+:Field name: pref_address
+:Type: read (reloc)
+:Offset/size: 0x258/8
+:Protocol: 2.10+
This field, if nonzero, represents a preferred load address for the
kernel. A relocating bootloader should attempt to load at this
@@ -720,9 +737,9 @@ Protocol: 2.10+
A non-relocatable kernel will unconditionally move itself and to run
at this address.
-Field name: init_size
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x260/4
+:Field name: init_size
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x260/4
This field indicates the amount of linear contiguous memory starting
at the kernel runtime start address that the kernel needs before it
@@ -738,9 +755,9 @@ Offset/size: 0x260/4
else
runtime_start = pref_address
-Field name: handover_offset
-Type: read
-Offset/size: 0x264/4
+:Field name: handover_offset
+:Type: read
+:Offset/size: 0x264/4
This field is the offset from the beginning of the kernel image to
the EFI handover protocol entry point. Boot loaders using the EFI
@@ -749,7 +766,8 @@ Offset/size: 0x264/4
See EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL below for more details.
-**** THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
+THE IMAGE CHECKSUM
+==================
From boot protocol version 2.08 onwards the CRC-32 is calculated over
the entire file using the characteristic polynomial 0x04C11DB7 and an
@@ -758,7 +776,8 @@ file; therefore the CRC of the file up to the limit specified in the
syssize field of the header is always 0.
-**** THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE
+THE KERNEL COMMAND LINE
+=======================
The kernel command line has become an important way for the boot
loader to communicate with the kernel. Some of its options are also
@@ -784,13 +803,14 @@ command line is entered using the following protocol:
At offset 0x0022 (word), "cmd_line_offset", enter the offset
of the kernel command line (relative to the start of the
real-mode kernel).
-
+
The kernel command line *must* be within the memory region
covered by setup_move_size, so you may need to adjust this
field.
-**** MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE
+MEMORY LAYOUT OF THE REAL-MODE CODE
+===================================
The real-mode code requires a stack/heap to be set up, as well as
memory allocated for the kernel command line. This needs to be done
@@ -806,7 +826,7 @@ segment has to be used:
- When loading a zImage kernel ((loadflags & 0x01) == 0).
- When loading a 2.01 or earlier boot protocol kernel.
- -> For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code
+ - For the 2.00 and 2.01 boot protocols, the real-mode code
can be loaded at another address, but it is internally
relocated to 0x90000. For the "old" protocol, the
real-mode code must be loaded at 0x90000.
@@ -822,24 +842,29 @@ The kernel command line should not be located below the real-mode
code, nor should it be located in high memory.
-**** SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION
+SAMPLE BOOT CONFIGURATION
+=========================
As a sample configuration, assume the following layout of the real
mode segment:
When loading below 0x90000, use the entire segment:
+ ============= ===================
0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel
0x8000-0xdfff Stack and heap
0xe000-0xffff Kernel command line
+ ============= ===================
When loading at 0x90000 OR the protocol version is 2.01 or earlier:
+ ============= ===================
0x0000-0x7fff Real mode kernel
0x8000-0x97ff Stack and heap
0x9800-0x9fff Kernel command line
+ ============= ===================
-Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
+Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header::
unsigned long base_ptr; /* base address for real-mode segment */
@@ -887,7 +912,7 @@ Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
if ( base_ptr != 0x90000 ) {
/* Copy the real-mode kernel */
memcpy(0x90000, base_ptr, (setup_sects+1)*512);
- base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */
+ base_ptr = 0x90000; /* Relocated */
}
strcpy(0x90000+cmd_line_offset, cmdline);
@@ -898,7 +923,8 @@ Such a boot loader should enter the following fields in the header:
}
-**** LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL
+LOADING THE REST OF THE KERNEL
+==============================
The 32-bit (non-real-mode) kernel starts at offset (setup_sects+1)*512
in the kernel file (again, if setup_sects == 0 the real value is 4.)
@@ -917,7 +943,8 @@ much a requirement for these kernels to load the real-mode part at
0x90000. bzImage kernels allow much more flexibility.
-**** SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
+SPECIAL COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
+============================
If the command line provided by the boot loader is entered by the
user, the user may expect the following command line options to work.
@@ -966,7 +993,8 @@ or configuration-specified command line. Otherwise, "init=/bin/sh"
gets confused by the "auto" option.
-**** RUNNING THE KERNEL
+RUNNING THE KERNEL
+==================
The kernel is started by jumping to the kernel entry point, which is
located at *segment* offset 0x20 from the start of the real mode
@@ -980,7 +1008,7 @@ interrupts should be disabled. Furthermore, to guard against bugs in
the kernel, it is recommended that the boot loader sets fs = gs = ds =
es = ss.
-In our example from above, we would do:
+In our example from above, we would do::
/* Note: in the case of the "old" kernel protocol, base_ptr must
be == 0x90000 at this point; see the previous sample code */
@@ -1003,7 +1031,8 @@ switched off, especially if the loaded kernel has the floppy driver as
a demand-loaded module!
-**** ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS
+ADVANCED BOOT LOADER HOOKS
+==========================
If the boot loader runs in a particularly hostile environment (such as
LOADLIN, which runs under DOS) it may be impossible to follow the
@@ -1032,7 +1061,8 @@ IMPORTANT: All the hooks are required to preserve %esp, %ebp, %esi and
(relocated, if appropriate.)
-**** 32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+32-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+====================
For machine with some new BIOS other than legacy BIOS, such as EFI,
LinuxBIOS, etc, and kexec, the 16-bit real mode setup code in kernel
@@ -1069,7 +1099,8 @@ must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %esi must hold the base
address of the struct boot_params; %ebp, %edi and %ebx must be zero.
-**** 64-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+64-bit BOOT PROTOCOL
+====================
For machine with 64bit cpus and 64bit kernel, we could use 64bit bootloader
and we need a 64-bit boot protocol.
@@ -1107,7 +1138,8 @@ must have read/write permission; CS must be __BOOT_CS and DS, ES, SS
must be __BOOT_DS; interrupt must be disabled; %rsi must hold the base
address of the struct boot_params.
-**** EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL
+EFI HANDOVER PROTOCOL
+=====================
This protocol allows boot loaders to defer initialisation to the EFI
boot stub. The boot loader is required to load the kernel/initrd(s)
@@ -1115,7 +1147,7 @@ from the boot media and jump to the EFI handover protocol entry point
which is hdr->handover_offset bytes from the beginning of
startup_{32,64}.
-The function prototype for the handover entry point looks like this,
+The function prototype for the handover entry point looks like this::
efi_main(void *handle, efi_system_table_t *table, struct boot_params *bp)
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt
index 46933e06c972..22d809aae387 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/earlyprintk.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+==============================================
+Mini-HOWTO for using the earlyprintk parameter
+==============================================
Mini-HOWTO for using the earlyprintk=dbgp boot option with a
USB2 Debug port key and a debug cable, on x86 systems.
@@ -5,47 +8,48 @@ USB2 Debug port key and a debug cable, on x86 systems.
You need two computers, the 'USB debug key' special gadget and
and two USB cables, connected like this:
- [host/target] <-------> [USB debug key] <-------> [client/console]
+ [host/target] <------> [USB debug key] <------> [client/console]
1. There are a number of specific hardware requirements:
- a.) Host/target system needs to have USB debug port capability.
+ a. Host/target system needs to have USB debug port capability.
- You can check this capability by looking at a 'Debug port' bit in
- the lspci -vvv output:
+ You can check this capability by looking at a 'Debug port' bit in
+ the lspci -vvv output::
- # lspci -vvv
- ...
- 00:1d.7 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801H (ICH8 Family) USB2 EHCI Controller #1 (rev 03) (prog-if 20 [EHCI])
- Subsystem: Lenovo ThinkPad T61
- Control: I/O- Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Stepping- SERR+ FastB2B- DisINTx-
- Status: Cap+ 66MHz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- <TAbort- <MAbort- >SERR- <PERR- INTx-
- Latency: 0
- Interrupt: pin D routed to IRQ 19
- Region 0: Memory at fe227000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=1K]
- Capabilities: [50] Power Management version 2
- Flags: PMEClk- DSI- D1- D2- AuxCurrent=375mA PME(D0+,D1-,D2-,D3hot+,D3cold+)
- Status: D0 PME-Enable- DSel=0 DScale=0 PME+
- Capabilities: [58] Debug port: BAR=1 offset=00a0
- ^^^^^^^^^^^ <==================== [ HERE ]
- Kernel driver in use: ehci_hcd
- Kernel modules: ehci-hcd
- ...
+ # lspci -vvv
+ ...
+ 00:1d.7 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801H (ICH8 Family) USB2 EHCI Controller #1 (rev 03) (prog-if 20 [EHCI])
+ Subsystem: Lenovo ThinkPad T61
+ Control: I/O- Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Stepping- SERR+ FastB2B- DisINTx-
+ Status: Cap+ 66MHz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- <TAbort- <MAbort- >SERR- <PERR- INTx-
+ Latency: 0
+ Interrupt: pin D routed to IRQ 19
+ Region 0: Memory at fe227000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=1K]
+ Capabilities: [50] Power Management version 2
+ Flags: PMEClk- DSI- D1- D2- AuxCurrent=375mA PME(D0+,D1-,D2-,D3hot+,D3cold+)
+ Status: D0 PME-Enable- DSel=0 DScale=0 PME+
+ Capabilities: [58] Debug port: BAR=1 offset=00a0
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^ <==================== [ HERE ]
+ Kernel driver in use: ehci_hcd
+ Kernel modules: ehci-hcd
+ ...
-( If your system does not list a debug port capability then you probably
- won't be able to use the USB debug key. )
+ NOTE:
+ If your system does not list a debug port capability then you probably
+ won't be able to use the USB debug key.
- b.) You also need a NetChip USB debug cable/key:
+ b. You also need a NetChip USB debug cable/key:
http://www.plxtech.com/products/NET2000/NET20DC/default.asp
This is a small blue plastic connector with two USB connections;
it draws power from its USB connections.
- c.) You need a second client/console system with a high speed USB 2.0
+ c. You need a second client/console system with a high speed USB 2.0
port.
- d.) The NetChip device must be plugged directly into the physical
+ d. The NetChip device must be plugged directly into the physical
debug port on the "host/target" system. You cannot use a USB hub in
between the physical debug port and the "host/target" system.
@@ -65,7 +69,7 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
to the hardware vendor, because there is no reason not to wire
this port into one of the physically accessible ports.
- e.) It is also important to note, that many versions of the NetChip
+ e. It is also important to note, that many versions of the NetChip
device require the "client/console" system to be plugged into the
right hand side of the device (with the product logo facing up and
readable left to right). The reason being is that the 5 volt
@@ -74,7 +78,7 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
2. Software requirements:
- a.) On the host/target system:
+ a. On the host/target system:
You need to enable the following kernel config option:
@@ -82,12 +86,13 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
And you need to add the boot command line: "earlyprintk=dbgp".
- (If you are using Grub, append it to the 'kernel' line in
+ Note:
+ If you are using Grub, append it to the 'kernel' line in
/etc/grub.conf. If you are using Grub2 on a BIOS firmware system,
append it to the 'linux' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg. If you are
using Grub2 on an EFI firmware system, append it to the 'linux'
or 'linuxefi' line in /boot/grub2/grub.cfg or
- /boot/efi/EFI/<distro>/grub.cfg.)
+ /boot/efi/EFI/<distro>/grub.cfg.
On systems with more than one EHCI debug controller you must
specify the correct EHCI debug controller number. The ordering
@@ -101,7 +106,7 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
this channel open beyond early bootup. This can be useful for
debugging crashes under Xorg, etc.
- b.) On the client/console system:
+ b. On the client/console system:
You should enable the following kernel config option:
@@ -115,7 +120,7 @@ and two USB cables, connected like this:
it up to use /dev/ttyUSB0 - or use a raw 'cat /dev/ttyUSBx' to
see the raw output.
- c.) On Nvidia Southbridge based systems: the kernel will try to probe
+ c. On Nvidia Southbridge based systems: the kernel will try to probe
and find out which port has a debug device connected.
3. Testing that it works fine:
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt
index c1df8eba9dfd..5fde68a19f57 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/entry_64.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,8 @@
+=====================
+Entries at entry_64.S
+=====================
+
+
This file documents some of the kernel entries in
arch/x86/entry/entry_64.S. A lot of this explanation is adapted from
an email from Ingo Molnar:
@@ -59,7 +64,7 @@ Now, there's a secondary complication: there's a cheap way to test
which mode the CPU is in and an expensive way.
The cheap way is to pick this info off the entry frame on the kernel
-stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack:
+stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack::
xorl %ebx,%ebx
testl $3,CS+8(%rsp)
@@ -67,7 +72,7 @@ stack, from the CS of the ptregs area of the kernel stack:
SWAPGS
The expensive (paranoid) way is to read back the MSR_GS_BASE value
-(which is what SWAPGS modifies):
+(which is what SWAPGS modifies)::
movl $1,%ebx
movl $MSR_GS_BASE,%ecx
@@ -76,7 +81,7 @@ The expensive (paranoid) way is to read back the MSR_GS_BASE value
js 1f /* negative -> in kernel */
SWAPGS
xorl %ebx,%ebx
-1: ret
+ 1: ret
If we are at an interrupt or user-trap/gate-alike boundary then we can
use the faster check: the stack will be a reliable indicator of
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt b/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt
index e396bcd8d830..6929c84c65b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/exception-tables.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
- Kernel level exception handling in Linux
+========================================
+Kernel level exception handling in Linux
+========================================
+
Commentary by Joerg Pommnitz <[email protected]>
When a process runs in kernel mode, it often has to access user
@@ -22,12 +25,13 @@ To overcome this situation, Linus decided to let the virtual memory
hardware present in every Linux-capable CPU handle this test.
How does this work?
+===================
Whenever the kernel tries to access an address that is currently not
accessible, the CPU generates a page fault exception and calls the
-page fault handler
+page fault handler::
-void do_page_fault(struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long error_code)
+ void do_page_fault(struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long error_code)
in arch/x86/mm/fault.c. The parameters on the stack are set up by
the low level assembly glue in arch/x86/kernel/entry_32.S. The parameter
@@ -49,6 +53,7 @@ return address (again regs->eip) and returns. The execution will
continue at the address in fixup.
Where does fixup point to?
+==========================
Since we jump to the contents of fixup, fixup obviously points
to executable code. This code is hidden inside the user access macros.
@@ -58,72 +63,73 @@ the code generated by the preprocessor and the compiler. I selected
the get_user call in drivers/char/sysrq.c for a detailed examination.
The original code in sysrq.c line 587:
+
get_user(c, buf);
-The preprocessor output (edited to become somewhat readable):
+The preprocessor output (edited to become somewhat readable)::
-(
- {
- long __gu_err = - 14 , __gu_val = 0;
- const __typeof__(*( ( buf ) )) *__gu_addr = ((buf));
- if (((((0 + current_set[0])->tss.segment) == 0x18 ) ||
- (((sizeof(*(buf))) <= 0xC0000000UL) &&
- ((unsigned long)(__gu_addr ) <= 0xC0000000UL - (sizeof(*(buf)))))))
- do {
- __gu_err = 0;
- switch ((sizeof(*(buf)))) {
- case 1:
- __asm__ __volatile__(
- "1: mov" "b" " %2,%" "b" "1\n"
- "2:\n"
- ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
- "3: movl %3,%0\n"
- " xor" "b" " %" "b" "1,%" "b" "1\n"
- " jmp 2b\n"
- ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
- " .align 4\n"
- " .long 1b,3b\n"
- ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=q" (__gu_val): "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
- ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"( __gu_err )) ;
- break;
- case 2:
- __asm__ __volatile__(
- "1: mov" "w" " %2,%" "w" "1\n"
- "2:\n"
- ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
- "3: movl %3,%0\n"
- " xor" "w" " %" "w" "1,%" "w" "1\n"
- " jmp 2b\n"
- ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
- " .align 4\n"
- " .long 1b,3b\n"
- ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
- ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"( __gu_err ));
- break;
- case 4:
- __asm__ __volatile__(
- "1: mov" "l" " %2,%" "" "1\n"
- "2:\n"
- ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
- "3: movl %3,%0\n"
- " xor" "l" " %" "" "1,%" "" "1\n"
- " jmp 2b\n"
- ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
- " .align 4\n" " .long 1b,3b\n"
- ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
- ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(__gu_err));
- break;
- default:
- (__gu_val) = __get_user_bad();
- }
- } while (0) ;
- ((c)) = (__typeof__(*((buf))))__gu_val;
- __gu_err;
- }
-);
+ (
+ {
+ long __gu_err = - 14 , __gu_val = 0;
+ const __typeof__(*( ( buf ) )) *__gu_addr = ((buf));
+ if (((((0 + current_set[0])->tss.segment) == 0x18 ) ||
+ (((sizeof(*(buf))) <= 0xC0000000UL) &&
+ ((unsigned long)(__gu_addr ) <= 0xC0000000UL - (sizeof(*(buf)))))))
+ do {
+ __gu_err = 0;
+ switch ((sizeof(*(buf)))) {
+ case 1:
+ __asm__ __volatile__(
+ "1: mov" "b" " %2,%" "b" "1\n"
+ "2:\n"
+ ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+ "3: movl %3,%0\n"
+ " xor" "b" " %" "b" "1,%" "b" "1\n"
+ " jmp 2b\n"
+ ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+ " .align 4\n"
+ " .long 1b,3b\n"
+ ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=q" (__gu_val): "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+ ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"( __gu_err )) ;
+ break;
+ case 2:
+ __asm__ __volatile__(
+ "1: mov" "w" " %2,%" "w" "1\n"
+ "2:\n"
+ ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+ "3: movl %3,%0\n"
+ " xor" "w" " %" "w" "1,%" "w" "1\n"
+ " jmp 2b\n"
+ ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+ " .align 4\n"
+ " .long 1b,3b\n"
+ ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+ ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"( __gu_err ));
+ break;
+ case 4:
+ __asm__ __volatile__(
+ "1: mov" "l" " %2,%" "" "1\n"
+ "2:\n"
+ ".section .fixup,\"ax\"\n"
+ "3: movl %3,%0\n"
+ " xor" "l" " %" "" "1,%" "" "1\n"
+ " jmp 2b\n"
+ ".section __ex_table,\"a\"\n"
+ " .align 4\n" " .long 1b,3b\n"
+ ".text" : "=r"(__gu_err), "=r" (__gu_val) : "m"((*(struct __large_struct *)
+ ( __gu_addr )) ), "i"(- 14 ), "0"(__gu_err));
+ break;
+ default:
+ (__gu_val) = __get_user_bad();
+ }
+ } while (0) ;
+ ((c)) = (__typeof__(*((buf))))__gu_val;
+ __gu_err;
+ }
+ );
WOW! Black GCC/assembly magic. This is impossible to follow, so let's
-see what code gcc generates:
+see what code gcc generates::
> xorl %edx,%edx
> movl current_set,%eax
@@ -154,7 +160,7 @@ understand. Can we? The actual user access is quite obvious. Thanks
to the unified address space we can just access the address in user
memory. But what does the .section stuff do?????
-To understand this we have to look at the final kernel:
+To understand this we have to look at the final kernel::
> objdump --section-headers vmlinux
>
@@ -181,7 +187,7 @@ To understand this we have to look at the final kernel:
There are obviously 2 non standard ELF sections in the generated object
file. But first we want to find out what happened to our code in the
-final kernel executable:
+final kernel executable::
> objdump --disassemble --section=.text vmlinux
>
@@ -199,7 +205,7 @@ final kernel executable:
The whole user memory access is reduced to 10 x86 machine instructions.
The instructions bracketed in the .section directives are no longer
in the normal execution path. They are located in a different section
-of the executable file:
+of the executable file::
> objdump --disassemble --section=.fixup vmlinux
>
@@ -207,14 +213,15 @@ of the executable file:
> c0199ffa <.fixup+10ba> xorb %dl,%dl
> c0199ffc <.fixup+10bc> jmp c017e7a7 <do_con_write+e3>
-And finally:
+And finally::
+
> objdump --full-contents --section=__ex_table vmlinux
>
> c01aa7c4 93c017c0 e09f19c0 97c017c0 99c017c0 ................
> c01aa7d4 f6c217c0 e99f19c0 a5e717c0 f59f19c0 ................
> c01aa7e4 080a18c0 01a019c0 0a0a18c0 04a019c0 ................
-or in human readable byte order:
+or in human readable byte order::
> c01aa7c4 c017c093 c0199fe0 c017c097 c017c099 ................
> c01aa7d4 c017c2f6 c0199fe9 c017e7a5 c0199ff5 ................
@@ -222,58 +229,84 @@ or in human readable byte order:
this is the interesting part!
> c01aa7e4 c0180a08 c019a001 c0180a0a c019a004 ................
-What happened? The assembly directives
+What happened? The assembly directives:
-.section .fixup,"ax"
-.section __ex_table,"a"
+ .section .fixup,"ax"
+ .section __ex_table,"a"
told the assembler to move the following code to the specified
-sections in the ELF object file. So the instructions
-3: movl $-14,%eax
- xorb %dl,%dl
- jmp 2b
-ended up in the .fixup section of the object file and the addresses
+sections in the ELF object file. So the instructions::
+
+ 3: movl $-14,%eax
+ xorb %dl,%dl
+ jmp 2b
+
+ended up in the .fixup section of the object file and the addresses::
+
.long 1b,3b
+
ended up in the __ex_table section of the object file. 1b and 3b
are local labels. The local label 1b (1b stands for next label 1
backward) is the address of the instruction that might fault, i.e.
in our case the address of the label 1 is c017e7a5:
-the original assembly code: > 1: movb (%ebx),%dl
-and linked in vmlinux : > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb (%ebx),%dl
+
+the original assembly code::
+
+ > 1: movb (%ebx),%dl
+
+and linked in vmlinux::
+
+ > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb (%ebx),%dl
The local label 3 (backwards again) is the address of the code to handle
the fault, in our case the actual value is c0199ff5:
-the original assembly code: > 3: movl $-14,%eax
-and linked in vmlinux : > c0199ff5 <.fixup+10b5> movl $0xfffffff2,%eax
-The assembly code
+the original assembly code::
+
+ > 3: movl $-14,%eax
+
+and linked in vmlinux::
+
+ > c0199ff5 <.fixup+10b5> movl $0xfffffff2,%eax
+
+The assembly code::
+
> .section __ex_table,"a"
> .align 4
> .long 1b,3b
-becomes the value pair
+becomes the value pair::
+
> c01aa7d4 c017c2f6 c0199fe9 c017e7a5 c0199ff5 ................
^this is ^this is
1b 3b
+
c017e7a5,c0199ff5 in the exception table of the kernel.
So, what actually happens if a fault from kernel mode with no suitable
vma occurs?
-1.) access to invalid address:
- > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb (%ebx),%dl
-2.) MMU generates exception
-3.) CPU calls do_page_fault
-4.) do page fault calls search_exception_table (regs->eip == c017e7a5);
-5.) search_exception_table looks up the address c017e7a5 in the
+1. access to invalid address::
+
+ > c017e7a5 <do_con_write+e1> movb (%ebx),%dl
+
+2. MMU generates exception
+3. CPU calls do_page_fault
+4. do page fault calls search_exception_table (regs->eip == c017e7a5);
+5. search_exception_table looks up the address c017e7a5 in the
exception table (i.e. the contents of the ELF section __ex_table)
and returns the address of the associated fault handle code c0199ff5.
-6.) do_page_fault modifies its own return address to point to the fault
+6. do_page_fault modifies its own return address to point to the fault
handle code and returns.
-7.) execution continues in the fault handling code.
-8.) 8a) EAX becomes -EFAULT (== -14)
- 8b) DL becomes zero (the value we "read" from user space)
- 8c) execution continues at local label 2 (address of the
+7. execution continues in the fault handling code.
+8. :
+
+ - 8a.
+ EAX becomes -EFAULT (== -14)
+ - 8b.
+ DL becomes zero (the value we "read" from user space)
+ - 8c.
+ execution continues at local label 2 (address of the
instruction immediately after the faulting user access).
The steps 8a to 8c in a certain way emulate the faulting instruction.
@@ -286,23 +319,26 @@ return value, however the inline assembly code in get_user tries to
return -EFAULT. GCC selected EAX to return this value.
NOTE:
-Due to the way that the exception table is built and needs to be ordered,
-only use exceptions for code in the .text section. Any other section
-will cause the exception table to not be sorted correctly, and the
-exceptions will fail.
+ Due to the way that the exception table is built and needs to be ordered,
+ only use exceptions for code in the .text section. Any other section
+ will cause the exception table to not be sorted correctly, and the
+ exceptions will fail.
Things changed when 64-bit support was added to x86 Linux. Rather than
double the size of the exception table by expanding the two entries
from 32-bits to 64 bits, a clever trick was used to store addresses
as relative offsets from the table itself. The assembly code changed
-from:
+from::
+
.long 1b,3b
-to:
+
+to::
+
.long (from) - .
.long (to) - .
and the C-code that uses these values converts back to absolute addresses
-like this:
+like this::
ex_insn_addr(const struct exception_table_entry *x)
{
@@ -313,15 +349,16 @@ In v4.6 the exception table entry was expanded with a new field "handler".
This is also 32-bits wide and contains a third relative function
pointer which points to one of:
-1) int ex_handler_default(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
+1) int ex_handler_default(`const struct exception_table_entry *fixup`)
This is legacy case that just jumps to the fixup code
-2) int ex_handler_fault(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
+2) int ex_handler_fault(`const struct exception_table_entry *fixup`)
This case provides the fault number of the trap that occurred at
entry->insn. It is used to distinguish page faults from machine
check.
-3) int ex_handler_ext(const struct exception_table_entry *fixup)
+3) int ex_handler_ext(`const struct exception_table_entry *fixup`)
This case is used for uaccess_err ... we need to set a flag
in the task structure. Before the handler functions existed this
case was handled by adding a large offset to the fixup to tag
it as special.
+
More functions can easily be added.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
index 15f5baf7e1b6..4a9d2e4dfe5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=======
+IO-APIC
+=======
+
Most (all) Intel-MP compliant SMP boards have the so-called 'IO-APIC',
which is an enhanced interrupt controller. It enables us to route
hardware interrupts to multiple CPUs, or to CPU groups. Without an
@@ -13,9 +17,8 @@ usually worked around by the kernel. If your MP-compliant SMP board does
not boot Linux, then consult the linux-smp mailing list archives first.
If your box boots fine with enabled IO-APIC IRQs, then your
-/proc/interrupts will look like this one:
+/proc/interrupts will look like this one::
- ---------------------------->
hell:~> cat /proc/interrupts
CPU0
0: 1360293 IO-APIC-edge timer
@@ -28,7 +31,6 @@ If your box boots fine with enabled IO-APIC IRQs, then your
NMI: 0
ERR: 0
hell:~>
- <----------------------------
Some interrupts are still listed as 'XT PIC', but this is not a problem;
none of those IRQ sources is performance-critical.
@@ -37,14 +39,14 @@ none of those IRQ sources is performance-critical.
In the unlikely case that your board does not create a working mp-table,
you can use the pirq= boot parameter to 'hand-construct' IRQ entries. This
is non-trivial though and cannot be automated. One sample /etc/lilo.conf
-entry:
+entry::
append="pirq=15,11,10"
The actual numbers depend on your system, on your PCI cards and on their
PCI slot position. Usually PCI slots are 'daisy chained' before they are
connected to the PCI chipset IRQ routing facility (the incoming PIRQ1-4
-lines):
+lines)::
,-. ,-. ,-. ,-. ,-.
PIRQ4 ----| |-. ,-| |-. ,-| |-. ,-| |--------| |
@@ -56,7 +58,7 @@ lines):
PIRQ1 ----| |- `----| |- `----| |- `----| |--------| |
`-' `-' `-' `-' `-'
-Every PCI card emits a PCI IRQ, which can be INTA, INTB, INTC or INTD:
+Every PCI card emits a PCI IRQ, which can be INTA, INTB, INTC or INTD::
,-.
INTD--| |
@@ -78,19 +80,19 @@ to have non shared interrupts). Slot5 should be used for videocards, they
do not use interrupts normally, thus they are not daisy chained either.
so if you have your SCSI card (IRQ11) in Slot1, Tulip card (IRQ9) in
-Slot2, then you'll have to specify this pirq= line:
+Slot2, then you'll have to specify this pirq= line::
append="pirq=11,9"
the following script tries to figure out such a default pirq= line from
-your PCI configuration:
+your PCI configuration::
echo -n pirq=; echo `scanpci | grep T_L | cut -c56-` | sed 's/ /,/g'
note that this script won't work if you have skipped a few slots or if your
board does not do default daisy-chaining. (or the IO-APIC has the PIRQ pins
connected in some strange way). E.g. if in the above case you have your SCSI
-card (IRQ11) in Slot3, and have Slot1 empty:
+card (IRQ11) in Slot3, and have Slot1 empty::
append="pirq=0,9,11"
@@ -105,7 +107,7 @@ won't function properly (e.g. if it's inserted as a module).
If you have 2 PCI buses, then you can use up to 8 pirq values, although such
boards tend to have a good configuration.
-Be prepared that it might happen that you need some strange pirq line:
+Be prepared that it might happen that you need some strange pirq line::
append="pirq=0,0,0,0,0,0,9,11"
@@ -116,4 +118,3 @@ [email protected] if you have any problems that are not covered
by this document.
-- mingo
-
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt
index 85d0549ad846..33d150d7a920 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+============
+Intel(R) MPX
+============
+
1. Intel(R) MPX Overview
========================
@@ -92,6 +96,7 @@ Handling #BR faults caused by MPX
When MPX is enabled, there are 2 new situations that can generate
#BR faults.
+
* new bounds tables (BT) need to be allocated to save bounds.
* bounds violation caused by MPX instructions.
@@ -124,9 +129,11 @@ the kernel. It can theoretically be done completely from userspace. Here
are a few ways this could be done. We don't think any of them are practical
in the real-world, but here they are.
-Q: Can virtual space simply be reserved for the bounds tables so that we
+Q:
+ Can virtual space simply be reserved for the bounds tables so that we
never have to allocate them?
-A: MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in
+A:
+ MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in
process address space to save bounds information. These tables can take
up huge swaths of memory (as much as 80% of the memory on the system)
even if we clean them up aggressively. In the worst-case scenario, the
@@ -140,19 +147,23 @@ A: MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in
consumes 2GB of virtual *AND* physical memory. IOW, it's completely
infeasible to prepopulate bounds directories.
-Q: Can we preallocate bounds table space at the same time memory is
+Q:
+ Can we preallocate bounds table space at the same time memory is
allocated which might contain pointers that might eventually need
bounds tables?
-A: This would work if we could hook the site of each and every memory
+A:
+ This would work if we could hook the site of each and every memory
allocation syscall. This can be done for small, constrained applications.
But, it isn't practical at a larger scale since a given app has no
way of controlling how all the parts of the app might allocate memory
(think libraries). The kernel is really the only place to intercept
these calls.
-Q: Could a bounds fault be handed to userspace and the tables allocated
+Q:
+ Could a bounds fault be handed to userspace and the tables allocated
there in a signal handler instead of in the kernel?
-A: mmap() is not on the list of safe async handler functions and even
+A:
+ mmap() is not on the list of safe async handler functions and even
if mmap() would work it still requires locking or nasty tricks to
keep track of the allocation state there.
@@ -167,20 +178,20 @@ If a #BR is generated due to a bounds violation caused by MPX.
We need to decode MPX instructions to get violation address and
set this address into extended struct siginfo.
-The _sigfault field of struct siginfo is extended as follow:
+The _sigfault field of struct siginfo is extended as follow::
-87 /* SIGILL, SIGFPE, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS */
-88 struct {
-89 void __user *_addr; /* faulting insn/memory ref. */
-90 #ifdef __ARCH_SI_TRAPNO
-91 int _trapno; /* TRAP # which caused the signal */
-92 #endif
-93 short _addr_lsb; /* LSB of the reported address */
-94 struct {
-95 void __user *_lower;
-96 void __user *_upper;
-97 } _addr_bnd;
-98 } _sigfault;
+ 87 /* SIGILL, SIGFPE, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS */
+ 88 struct {
+ 89 void __user *_addr; /* faulting insn/memory ref. */
+ 90 #ifdef __ARCH_SI_TRAPNO
+ 91 int _trapno; /* TRAP # which caused the signal */
+ 92 #endif
+ 93 short _addr_lsb; /* LSB of the reported address */
+ 94 struct {
+ 95 void __user *_lower;
+ 96 void __user *_upper;
+ 97 } _addr_bnd;
+ 98 } _sigfault;
The '_addr' field refers to violation address, and new '_addr_and'
field refers to the upper/lower bounds when a #BR is caused.
@@ -208,10 +219,10 @@ Adding new prctl commands
-------------------------
Two new prctl commands are added to enable and disable MPX bounds tables
-management in kernel.
+management in kernel::
-155 #define PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT 43
-156 #define PR_MPX_DISABLE_MANAGEMENT 44
+ 155 #define PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT 43
+ 156 #define PR_MPX_DISABLE_MANAGEMENT 44
Runtime library in userspace is responsible for allocation of bounds
directory. So kernel have to use XSAVE instruction to get the base
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt b/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt
index 79fdb4a8148a..e510c34d4979 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/microcode.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
- The Linux Microcode Loader
+==========================
+The Linux Microcode Loader
+==========================
-Authors: Fenghua Yu <[email protected]>
- Borislav Petkov <[email protected]>
+Authors:
+ - Fenghua Yu <[email protected]>
+ - Borislav Petkov <[email protected]>
The kernel has a x86 microcode loading facility which is supposed to
provide microcode loading methods in the OS. Potential use cases are
@@ -26,8 +29,11 @@ loader parses the combined initrd image during boot.
The microcode files in cpio name space are:
-on Intel: kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin
-on AMD : kernel/x86/microcode/AuthenticAMD.bin
+on Intel:
+ kernel/x86/microcode/GenuineIntel.bin
+
+on AMD:
+ kernel/x86/microcode/AuthenticAMD.bin
During BSP (BootStrapping Processor) boot (pre-SMP), the kernel
scans the microcode file in the initrd. If microcode matching the
@@ -43,7 +49,8 @@ normally done automatically by the distribution, when recreating the
initrd, so you don't really have to do it yourself. It is documented
here for future reference only).
----
+::
+
#!/bin/bash
if [ -z "$1" ]; then
@@ -76,7 +83,7 @@ here for future reference only).
cat ucode.cpio $INITRD.orig > $INITRD
rm -rf $TMPDIR
----
+
The system needs to have the microcode packages installed into
/lib/firmware or you need to fixup the paths above if yours are
@@ -94,9 +101,9 @@ The /dev/cpu/microcode method is deprecated because it needs a special
userspace tool for that.
The easier method is simply installing the microcode packages your distro
-supplies and running:
+supplies and running::
-# echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload
+ # echo 1 > /sys/devices/system/cpu/microcode/reload
as root.
@@ -111,22 +118,22 @@ The loader supports also loading of a builtin microcode supplied through
the regular builtin firmware method CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE. Only 64-bit is
currently supported.
-Here's an example:
+Here's an example::
-CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE="intel-ucode/06-3a-09 amd-ucode/microcode_amd_fam15h.bin"
-CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE_DIR="/lib/firmware"
+ CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE="intel-ucode/06-3a-09 amd-ucode/microcode_amd_fam15h.bin"
+ CONFIG_EXTRA_FIRMWARE_DIR="/lib/firmware"
-This basically means, you have the following tree structure locally:
+This basically means, you have the following tree structure locally::
-/lib/firmware/
-|-- amd-ucode
-...
-| |-- microcode_amd_fam15h.bin
-...
-|-- intel-ucode
-...
-| |-- 06-3a-09
-...
+ /lib/firmware/
+ |-- amd-ucode
+ ...
+ | |-- microcode_amd_fam15h.bin
+ ...
+ |-- intel-ucode
+ ...
+ | |-- 06-3a-09
+ ...
so that the build system can find those files and integrate them into
the final kernel image. The early loader finds them and applies them.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
index dc3e703913ac..6187e2a3d0e5 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/mtrr.txt
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
+=========================================
MTRR (Memory Type Range Register) control
+=========================================
-Richard Gooch <[email protected]> - 3 Jun 1999
-Luis R. Rodriguez <[email protected]> - April 9, 2015
+- Richard Gooch <[email protected]> - 3 Jun 1999
+- Luis R. Rodriguez <[email protected]> - April 9, 2015
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------
-===============================================================================
Phasing out MTRR use
+====================
MTRR use is replaced on modern x86 hardware with PAT. Direct MTRR use by
drivers on Linux is now completely phased out, device drivers should use
@@ -25,7 +29,7 @@ requests mtrr_type_lookup() should always return MTRR_TYPE_INVALID.
For details refer to Documentation/x86/pat.txt.
-===============================================================================
+------------------------------------------------------------------
On Intel P6 family processors (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later)
the Memory Type Range Registers (MTRRs) may be used to control
@@ -61,138 +65,155 @@ interface. The ASCII interface is meant for administration. The
ioctl() interface is meant for C programs (i.e. the X server). The
interfaces are described below, with sample commands and C code.
-===============================================================================
-Reading MTRRs from the shell:
+------------------------------------------------------------------
-% cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
-===============================================================================
-Creating MTRRs from the C-shell:
-# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr
-or if you use bash:
-# echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr
+Reading MTRRs from the shell::
-And the result thereof:
-% cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
-reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1
+ % cat /proc/mtrr
+ reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
+ reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Creating MTRRs from the C-shell::
+
+ # echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >! /proc/mtrr
+ or if you use bash:
+ # echo "base=0xf8000000 size=0x400000 type=write-combining" >| /proc/mtrr
+
+And the result thereof::
+
+ % cat /proc/mtrr
+ reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 128MB: write-back, count=1
+ reg01: base=0x08000000 ( 128MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
+ reg02: base=0xf8000000 (3968MB), size= 4MB: write-combining, count=1
This is for video RAM at base address 0xf8000000 and size 4 megabytes. To
find out your base address, you need to look at the output of your X
server, which tells you where the linear framebuffer address is. A
-typical line that you may get is:
+typical line that you may get is::
-(--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000
+ (--) S3: PCI: 968 rev 0, Linear FB @ 0xf8000000
Note that you should only use the value from the X server, as it may
move the framebuffer base address, so the only value you can trust is
that reported by the X server.
To find out the size of your framebuffer (what, you don't actually
-know?), the following line will tell you:
+know?), the following line will tell you::
-(--) S3: videoram: 4096k
+ (--) S3: videoram: 4096k
That's 4 megabytes, which is 0x400000 bytes (in hexadecimal).
A patch is being written for XFree86 which will make this automatic:
in other words the X server will manipulate /proc/mtrr using the
ioctl() interface, so users won't have to do anything. If you use a
commercial X server, lobby your vendor to add support for MTRRs.
-===============================================================================
-Creating overlapping MTRRs:
-%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr
-%echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr
+------------------------------------------------------------------
-And the results: cat /proc/mtrr
-reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
-reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1
-reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1
+Creating overlapping MTRRs::
+
+ % echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000000 type=write-combining" >/proc/mtrr
+ % echo "base=0xfb000000 size=0x1000 type=uncachable" >/proc/mtrr
+
+And the results::
+
+ % cat /proc/mtrr
+ reg00: base=0x00000000 ( 0MB), size= 64MB: write-back, count=1
+ reg01: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 16MB: write-combining, count=1
+ reg02: base=0xfb000000 (4016MB), size= 4kB: uncachable, count=1
Some cards (especially Voodoo Graphics boards) need this 4 kB area
excluded from the beginning of the region because it is used for
registers.
-NOTE: You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first
-region that you created is type=write-combining.
-===============================================================================
-Removing MTRRs from the C-shell:
-% echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr
-or using bash:
-% echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr
-===============================================================================
-Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s:
-
-/* mtrr-show.c
-
- Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s)
-
- Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch
-
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
- Richard Gooch may be reached by email at [email protected]
- The postal address is:
- Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
-*/
-
-/*
- This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR
- settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr.
-
-
- Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997
-
- Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998
-
-
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <asm/mtrr.h>
-
-#define TRUE 1
-#define FALSE 0
-#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
-
-static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
-{
- "uncachable", /* 0 */
- "write-combining", /* 1 */
- "?", /* 2 */
- "?", /* 3 */
- "write-through", /* 4 */
- "write-protect", /* 5 */
- "write-back", /* 6 */
-};
-
-int main ()
-{
- int fd;
- struct mtrr_gentry gentry;
-
- if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
- {
+NOTE:
+ You can only create type=uncachable region, if the first
+ region that you created is type=write-combining.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Removing MTRRs from the C-shell::
+
+ % echo "disable=2" >! /proc/mtrr
+
+or using bash::
+
+ % echo "disable=2" >| /proc/mtrr
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Reading MTRRs from a C program using ioctl()'s::
+
+ /* mtrr-show.c
+
+ Source file for mtrr-show (example program to show MTRRs using ioctl()'s)
+
+ Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+ Richard Gooch may be reached by email at [email protected]
+ The postal address is:
+ Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
+ */
+
+ /*
+ This program will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to show the current MTRR
+ settings. This is an alternative to reading /proc/mtrr.
+
+
+ Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997
+
+ Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998
+
+
+ */
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <sys/stat.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <asm/mtrr.h>
+
+ #define TRUE 1
+ #define FALSE 0
+ #define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
+
+ static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
+ {
+ "uncachable", /* 0 */
+ "write-combining", /* 1 */
+ "?", /* 2 */
+ "?", /* 3 */
+ "write-through", /* 4 */
+ "write-protect", /* 5 */
+ "write-back", /* 6 */
+ };
+
+ int main ()
+ {
+ int fd;
+ struct mtrr_gentry gentry;
+
+ if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_RDONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
+ {
if (errno == ENOENT)
{
fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
@@ -201,10 +222,10 @@ int main ()
}
fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
exit (2);
- }
- for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0;
+ }
+ for (gentry.regnum = 0; ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_GET_ENTRY, &gentry) == 0;
++gentry.regnum)
- {
+ {
if (gentry.size < 1)
{
fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u disabled\n", gentry.regnum);
@@ -213,99 +234,101 @@ int main ()
fprintf (stderr, "Register: %u base: 0x%lx size: 0x%lx type: %s\n",
gentry.regnum, gentry.base, gentry.size,
mtrr_strings[gentry.type]);
- }
- if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0);
- fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
- exit (3);
-} /* End Function main */
-===============================================================================
-Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s:
-
-/* mtrr-add.c
-
- Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl())
-
- Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch
-
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
- Richard Gooch may be reached by email at [email protected]
- The postal address is:
- Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
-*/
-
-/*
- This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first
- available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr.
-
-
- Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997
-
- Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998
-
-
-*/
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <asm/mtrr.h>
-
-#define TRUE 1
-#define FALSE 0
-#define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
-
-static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
-{
- "uncachable", /* 0 */
- "write-combining", /* 1 */
- "?", /* 2 */
- "?", /* 3 */
- "write-through", /* 4 */
- "write-protect", /* 5 */
- "write-back", /* 6 */
-};
-
-int main (int argc, char **argv)
-{
- int fd;
- struct mtrr_sentry sentry;
-
- if (argc != 4)
- {
+ }
+ if (errno == EINVAL) exit (0);
+ fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
+ exit (3);
+ } /* End Function main */
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Creating MTRRs from a C programme using ioctl()'s::
+
+ /* mtrr-add.c
+
+ Source file for mtrr-add (example programme to add an MTRRs using ioctl())
+
+ Copyright (C) 1997-1998 Richard Gooch
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+ Richard Gooch may be reached by email at [email protected]
+ The postal address is:
+ Richard Gooch, c/o ATNF, P. O. Box 76, Epping, N.S.W., 2121, Australia.
+ */
+
+ /*
+ This programme will use an ioctl() on /proc/mtrr to add an entry. The first
+ available mtrr is used. This is an alternative to writing /proc/mtrr.
+
+
+ Written by Richard Gooch 17-DEC-1997
+
+ Last updated by Richard Gooch 2-MAY-1998
+
+
+ */
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <sys/stat.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <asm/mtrr.h>
+
+ #define TRUE 1
+ #define FALSE 0
+ #define ERRSTRING strerror (errno)
+
+ static char *mtrr_strings[MTRR_NUM_TYPES] =
+ {
+ "uncachable", /* 0 */
+ "write-combining", /* 1 */
+ "?", /* 2 */
+ "?", /* 3 */
+ "write-through", /* 4 */
+ "write-protect", /* 5 */
+ "write-back", /* 6 */
+ };
+
+ int main (int argc, char **argv)
+ {
+ int fd;
+ struct mtrr_sentry sentry;
+
+ if (argc != 4)
+ {
fprintf (stderr, "Usage:\tmtrr-add base size type\n");
exit (1);
- }
- sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0);
- sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0);
- for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type)
- {
+ }
+ sentry.base = strtoul (argv[1], NULL, 0);
+ sentry.size = strtoul (argv[2], NULL, 0);
+ for (sentry.type = 0; sentry.type < MTRR_NUM_TYPES; ++sentry.type)
+ {
if (strcmp (argv[3], mtrr_strings[sentry.type]) == 0) break;
- }
- if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES)
- {
+ }
+ if (sentry.type >= MTRR_NUM_TYPES)
+ {
fprintf (stderr, "Illegal type: \"%s\"\n", argv[3]);
exit (2);
- }
- if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
- {
+ }
+ if ( ( fd = open ("/proc/mtrr", O_WRONLY, 0) ) == -1 )
+ {
if (errno == ENOENT)
{
fputs ("/proc/mtrr not found: not supported or you don't have a PPro?\n",
@@ -314,16 +337,15 @@ int main (int argc, char **argv)
}
fprintf (stderr, "Error opening /proc/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
exit (4);
- }
- if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1)
- {
+ }
+ if (ioctl (fd, MTRRIOC_ADD_ENTRY, &sentry) == -1)
+ {
fprintf (stderr, "Error doing ioctl(2) on /dev/mtrr\t%s\n", ERRSTRING);
exit (5);
- }
- fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n");
- sleep (5);
- close (fd);
- fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n",
+ }
+ fprintf (stderr, "Sleeping for 5 seconds so you can see the new entry\n");
+ sleep (5);
+ close (fd);
+ fputs ("I've just closed /proc/mtrr so now the new entry should be gone\n",
stderr);
-} /* End Function main */
-===============================================================================
+ } /* End Function main */
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt b/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt
index cd4b29be29af..3a8d6d324cfa 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/orc-unwinder.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============
ORC unwinder
============
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
index 481d8d8536ac..8c8ea7292780 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==========================
PAT (Page Attribute Table)
+==========================
x86 Page Attribute Table (PAT) allows for setting the memory attribute at the
page level granularity. PAT is complementary to the MTRR settings which allows
@@ -11,8 +12,15 @@ not having memory type aliasing for the same physical memory with multiple
virtual addresses.
PAT allows for different types of memory attributes. The most commonly used
-ones that will be supported at this time are Write-back, Uncached,
-Write-combined, Write-through and Uncached Minus.
+ones that will be supported at this time are:
+
+=== ==============
+WB Write-back
+UC Uncached
+WC Write-combined
+WT Write-through
+UC- Uncached Minus
+=== ==============
PAT APIs
@@ -23,81 +31,80 @@ attributes at the page level. In order to avoid aliasing, these interfaces
should be used thoughtfully. Below is a table of interfaces available,
their intended usage and their memory attribute relationships. Internally,
these APIs use a reserve_memtype()/free_memtype() interface on the physical
-address range to avoid any aliasing.
+address range to avoid any aliasing
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes |
------------------------|----------|------------|------------------|
- | | | |
-ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- |
- | | | |
-ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB |
- | | | |
-ioremap_uc | -- | UC | UC |
- | | | |
-ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- |
- | | | |
-ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC |
- | | | |
-ioremap_wt | -- | -- | WT |
- | | | |
-set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- |
- set_memory_wb | | | |
- | | | |
-set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- |
- set_memory_wb | | | |
- | | | |
-set_memory_wt | WT | -- | -- |
- set_memory_wb | | | |
- | | | |
-pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- |
- | | | |
-pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC |
- is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH| | | |
- | | | |
-pci proc | -- | -- | UC- |
- !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
- | | | |
-pci proc | -- | -- | WC |
- PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
- | | | |
-/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
- read-write | | | |
- | | | |
-/dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- |
- mmap SYNC flag | | | |
- | | | |
-/dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
- mmap !SYNC flag | |(from exist-| (from exist- |
- and | | ing alias)| ing alias) |
- any alias to this area| | | |
- | | | |
-/dev/mem | -- | WB | WB |
- mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
- no alias to this area | | | |
- and | | | |
- MTRR says WB | | | |
- | | | |
-/dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- |
- mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
- no alias to this area | | | |
- and | | | |
- MTRR says !WB | | | |
- | | | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| API | RAM | ACPI,... | Reserved/Holes |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap | -- | UC- | UC- |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_cache | -- | WB | WB |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_uc | -- | UC | UC |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| ioremap_wt | -- | -- | WT |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_uc | UC- | -- | -- |
+| set_memory_wb | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_wc | WC | -- | -- |
+| set_memory_wb | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| set_memory_wt | WT | -- | -- |
+| set_memory_wb | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci sysfs resource | -- | -- | UC- |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci sysfs resource_wc | -- | -- | WC |
+| is IORESOURCE_PREFETCH | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci proc | -- | -- | UC- |
+| !PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| pci proc | -- | -- | WC |
+| PCIIOC_WRITE_COMBINE | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
+| read-write | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem | -- | UC- | UC- |
+| mmap SYNC flag | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem | -- | WB/WC/UC- | WB/WC/UC- |
+| mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
+| and | |(from existing| (from existing |
+| any alias to this area | |alias) | alias) |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem | -- | WB | WB |
+| mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
+| no alias to this area | | | |
+| and | | | |
+| MTRR says WB | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
+| /dev/mem | -- | -- | UC- |
+| mmap !SYNC flag | | | |
+| no alias to this area | | | |
+| and | | | |
+| MTRR says !WB | | | |
++------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+
Advanced APIs for drivers
-------------------------
-A. Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range,
-vmf_insert_pfn
+**Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range,
+vmf_insert_pfn**
Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace do it by using mmap
interface and a combination of
+
1) pgprot_noncached()
2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vmf_insert_pfn()
-With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, drivers can
+With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine() is being added. So, drivers can
continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or
pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2.
@@ -124,23 +131,22 @@ set_memory_wc() to white-list effective write-combined areas. Such use is
nevertheless discouraged as the effective memory type is considered
implementation defined, yet this strategy can be used as last resort on devices
with size-constrained regions where otherwise MTRR write-combining would
-otherwise not be effective.
+otherwise not be effective::
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
-MTRR Non-PAT PAT Linux ioremap value Effective memory type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
- Non-PAT | PAT
- PAT
- |PCD
- ||PWT
- |||
-WC 000 WB _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WB WC | WC
-WC 001 WC _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WC WC* | WC
-WC 010 UC- _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC_MINUS WC* | UC
-WC 011 UC _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC UC | UC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ ==== ======= === ========================= =====================
+ MTRR Non-PAT PAT Linux ioremap value Effective memory type
+ ==== ======= === ========================= =====================
+ PAT Non-PAT | PAT
+ |PCD |
+ ||PWT |
+ ||| |
+ WC 000 WB _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WB WC | WC
+ WC 001 WC _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_WC WC* | WC
+ WC 010 UC- _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC_MINUS WC* | UC
+ WC 011 UC _PAGE_CACHE_MODE_UC UC | UC
+ ==== ======= === ========================= =====================
-(*) denotes implementation defined and is discouraged
+ (*) denotes implementation defined and is discouraged
Notes:
@@ -168,26 +174,26 @@ Drivers should use set_memory_[uc|wc|wt] to set access type for RAM ranges.
PAT debugging
-------------
-With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by
+With CONFIG_DEBUG_FS enabled, PAT memtype list can be examined by::
-# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
-PAT memtype list:
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
-uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
-uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
+ # mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/x86/pat_memtype_list
+ PAT memtype list:
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fadf000-0x7fae0000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb19000-0x7fb1a000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1a000-0x7fb1b000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1b000-0x7fb1c000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1c000-0x7fb1d000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1d000-0x7fb1e000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb1e000-0x7fb25000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb25000-0x7fb26000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb26000-0x7fb27000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb27000-0x7fb28000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb28000-0x7fb2e000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2e000-0x7fb2f000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb2f000-0x7fb30000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x7fb31000-0x7fb32000
+ uncached-minus @ 0x80000000-0x90000000
This list shows physical address ranges and various PAT settings used to
access those physical address ranges.
@@ -204,8 +210,9 @@ configurations. The PAT MSR must be updated by Linux in order to support WC
and WT attributes. Otherwise, the PAT MSR has the value programmed in it
by the firmware. Note, Xen enables WC attribute in the PAT MSR for guests.
+ ==== ===== ========================== ========= =======
MTRR PAT Call Sequence PAT State PAT MSR
- =========================================================
+ ==== ===== ========================== ========= =======
E E MTRR -> PAT init Enabled OS
E D MTRR -> PAT init Disabled -
D E MTRR -> PAT disable Disabled BIOS
@@ -215,9 +222,11 @@ by the firmware. Note, Xen enables WC attribute in the PAT MSR for guests.
E !P/E MTRR -> PAT init Disabled BIOS
D !P/E MTRR -> PAT disable Disabled BIOS
!M !P/E MTRR stub -> PAT disable Disabled BIOS
+ ==== ===== ========================== ========= =======
Legend
- ------------------------------------------------
+
+ ========= =======================================
E Feature enabled in CPU
D Feature disabled/unsupported in CPU
np "nopat" boot option specified
@@ -227,4 +236,4 @@ by the firmware. Note, Xen enables WC attribute in the PAT MSR for guests.
Disabled PAT state set to disabled
OS PAT initializes PAT MSR with OS setting
BIOS PAT keeps PAT MSR with BIOS setting
-
+ ========= =======================================
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt b/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt
index ecb0d2dadfb7..93becb2385b3 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/protection-keys.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==========================================
+Memory Protection Keys for Userspace (PKU)
+==========================================
+
Memory Protection Keys for Userspace (PKU aka PKEYs) is a feature
which is found on Intel's Skylake "Scalable Processor" Server CPUs.
It will be avalable in future non-server parts.
@@ -23,9 +27,10 @@ even though there is theoretically space in the PAE PTEs. These
permissions are enforced on data access only and have no effect on
instruction fetches.
-=========================== Syscalls ===========================
+Syscalls
+========
-There are 3 system calls which directly interact with pkeys:
+There are 3 system calls which directly interact with pkeys::
int pkey_alloc(unsigned long flags, unsigned long init_access_rights)
int pkey_free(int pkey);
@@ -36,7 +41,7 @@ Before a pkey can be used, it must first be allocated with
pkey_alloc(). An application calls the WRPKRU instruction
directly in order to change access permissions to memory covered
with a key. In this example WRPKRU is wrapped by a C function
-called pkey_set().
+called pkey_set()::
int real_prot = PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE;
pkey = pkey_alloc(0, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE);
@@ -45,43 +50,45 @@ called pkey_set().
... application runs here
Now, if the application needs to update the data at 'ptr', it can
-gain access, do the update, then remove its write access:
+gain access, do the update, then remove its write access::
pkey_set(pkey, 0); // clear PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE
*ptr = foo; // assign something
pkey_set(pkey, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE); // set PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE again
Now when it frees the memory, it will also free the pkey since it
-is no longer in use:
+is no longer in use::
munmap(ptr, PAGE_SIZE);
pkey_free(pkey);
-(Note: pkey_set() is a wrapper for the RDPKRU and WRPKRU instructions.
- An example implementation can be found in
- tools/testing/selftests/x86/protection_keys.c)
+Note:
+ pkey_set() is a wrapper for the RDPKRU and WRPKRU instructions.
+ An example implementation can be found in
+ tools/testing/selftests/x86/protection_keys.c
-=========================== Behavior ===========================
+Behavior
+========
The kernel attempts to make protection keys consistent with the
-behavior of a plain mprotect(). For instance if you do this:
+behavior of a plain mprotect(). For instance if you do this::
mprotect(ptr, size, PROT_NONE);
something(ptr);
-you can expect the same effects with protection keys when doing this:
+you can expect the same effects with protection keys when doing this::
pkey = pkey_alloc(0, PKEY_DISABLE_WRITE | PKEY_DISABLE_READ);
pkey_mprotect(ptr, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, pkey);
something(ptr);
That should be true whether something() is a direct access to 'ptr'
-like:
+like::
*ptr = foo;
or when the kernel does the access on the application's behalf like
-with a read():
+with a read()::
read(fd, ptr, 1);
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pti.txt b/Documentation/x86/pti.txt
index 5cd58439ad2d..8ba2a4b8c146 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/pti.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/pti.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====================
+Page Table Isolation
+====================
+
Overview
========
@@ -60,6 +64,7 @@ Protection against side-channel attacks is important. But,
this protection comes at a cost:
1. Increased Memory Use
+
a. Each process now needs an order-1 PGD instead of order-0.
(Consumes an additional 4k per process).
b. The 'cpu_entry_area' structure must be 2MB in size and 2MB
@@ -68,6 +73,7 @@ this protection comes at a cost:
is decompressed, but no space in the kernel image itself.
2. Runtime Cost
+
a. CR3 manipulation to switch between the page table copies
must be done at interrupt, syscall, and exception entry
and exit (it can be skipped when the kernel is interrupted,
@@ -124,7 +130,7 @@ Possible Future Work
boot-time switching.
Testing
-========
+=======
To test stability of PTI, the following test procedure is recommended,
ideally doing all of these in parallel:
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt
index c1f95b59e14d..5e7a7a8da518 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/resctrl_ui.txt
@@ -1,33 +1,45 @@
+===========================================
User Interface for Resource Control feature
+===========================================
Intel refers to this feature as Intel Resource Director Technology(Intel(R) RDT).
AMD refers to this feature as AMD Platform Quality of Service(AMD QoS).
Copyright (C) 2016 Intel Corporation
-Fenghua Yu <[email protected]>
-Tony Luck <[email protected]>
-Vikas Shivappa <[email protected]>
+- Fenghua Yu <[email protected]>
+- Tony Luck <[email protected]>
+- Vikas Shivappa <[email protected]>
This feature is enabled by the CONFIG_X86_CPU_RESCTRL and the x86 /proc/cpuinfo
flag bits:
-RDT (Resource Director Technology) Allocation - "rdt_a"
-CAT (Cache Allocation Technology) - "cat_l3", "cat_l2"
-CDP (Code and Data Prioritization ) - "cdp_l3", "cdp_l2"
-CQM (Cache QoS Monitoring) - "cqm_llc", "cqm_occup_llc"
-MBM (Memory Bandwidth Monitoring) - "cqm_mbm_total", "cqm_mbm_local"
-MBA (Memory Bandwidth Allocation) - "mba"
-To use the feature mount the file system:
+RDT
+ (Resource Director Technology) Allocation - "rdt_a"
+CAT
+ (Cache Allocation Technology) - "cat_l3", "cat_l2"
+CDP
+ (Code and Data Prioritization ) - "cdp_l3", "cdp_l2"
+CQM
+ (Cache QoS Monitoring) - "cqm_llc", "cqm_occup_llc"
+MBM
+ (Memory Bandwidth Monitoring) - "cqm_mbm_total", "cqm_mbm_local"
+MBA
+ (Memory Bandwidth Allocation) - "mba"
+
+To use the feature mount the file system::
# mount -t resctrl resctrl [-o cdp[,cdpl2][,mba_MBps]] /sys/fs/resctrl
mount options are:
-"cdp": Enable code/data prioritization in L3 cache allocations.
-"cdpl2": Enable code/data prioritization in L2 cache allocations.
-"mba_MBps": Enable the MBA Software Controller(mba_sc) to specify MBA
- bandwidth in MBps
+"cdp":
+ Enable code/data prioritization in L3 cache allocations.
+"cdpl2":
+ Enable code/data prioritization in L2 cache allocations.
+"mba_MBps":
+ Enable the MBA Software Controller(mba_sc) to specify MBA
+ bandwidth in MBps
L2 and L3 CDP are controlled seperately.
@@ -56,71 +68,88 @@ allocation:
Cache resource(L3/L2) subdirectory contains the following files
related to allocation:
-"num_closids": The number of CLOSIDs which are valid for this
+"num_closids":
+ The number of CLOSIDs which are valid for this
resource. The kernel uses the smallest number of
CLOSIDs of all enabled resources as limit.
-"cbm_mask": The bitmask which is valid for this resource.
+"cbm_mask":
+ The bitmask which is valid for this resource.
This mask is equivalent to 100%.
-"min_cbm_bits": The minimum number of consecutive bits which
+"min_cbm_bits":
+ The minimum number of consecutive bits which
must be set when writing a mask.
-"shareable_bits": Bitmask of shareable resource with other executing
+"shareable_bits":
+ Bitmask of shareable resource with other executing
entities (e.g. I/O). User can use this when
setting up exclusive cache partitions. Note that
some platforms support devices that have their
own settings for cache use which can over-ride
these bits.
-"bit_usage": Annotated capacity bitmasks showing how all
+"bit_usage":
+ Annotated capacity bitmasks showing how all
instances of the resource are used. The legend is:
- "0" - Corresponding region is unused. When the system's
+
+ "0"
+ - Corresponding region is unused. When the system's
resources have been allocated and a "0" is found
in "bit_usage" it is a sign that resources are
wasted.
- "H" - Corresponding region is used by hardware only
+ "H"
+ - Corresponding region is used by hardware only
but available for software use. If a resource
has bits set in "shareable_bits" but not all
of these bits appear in the resource groups'
schematas then the bits appearing in
"shareable_bits" but no resource group will
be marked as "H".
- "X" - Corresponding region is available for sharing and
+ "X"
+ - Corresponding region is available for sharing and
used by hardware and software. These are the
bits that appear in "shareable_bits" as
well as a resource group's allocation.
- "S" - Corresponding region is used by software
+ "S"
+ - Corresponding region is used by software
and available for sharing.
- "E" - Corresponding region is used exclusively by
+ "E"
+ - Corresponding region is used exclusively by
one resource group. No sharing allowed.
- "P" - Corresponding region is pseudo-locked. No
+ "P"
+ - Corresponding region is pseudo-locked. No
sharing allowed.
Memory bandwitdh(MB) subdirectory contains the following files
with respect to allocation:
-"min_bandwidth": The minimum memory bandwidth percentage which
+"min_bandwidth":
+ The minimum memory bandwidth percentage which
user can request.
-"bandwidth_gran": The granularity in which the memory bandwidth
+"bandwidth_gran":
+ The granularity in which the memory bandwidth
percentage is allocated. The allocated
b/w percentage is rounded off to the next
control step available on the hardware. The
available bandwidth control steps are:
min_bandwidth + N * bandwidth_gran.
-"delay_linear": Indicates if the delay scale is linear or
+"delay_linear":
+ Indicates if the delay scale is linear or
non-linear. This field is purely informational
only.
If RDT monitoring is available there will be an "L3_MON" directory
with the following files:
-"num_rmids": The number of RMIDs available. This is the
+"num_rmids":
+ The number of RMIDs available. This is the
upper bound for how many "CTRL_MON" + "MON"
groups can be created.
-"mon_features": Lists the monitoring events if
+"mon_features":
+ Lists the monitoring events if
monitoring is enabled for the resource.
"max_threshold_occupancy":
@@ -133,7 +162,7 @@ named "last_cmd_status". This is reset with every "command" issued
via the file system (making new directories or writing to any of the
control files). If the command was successful, it will read as "ok".
If the command failed, it will provide more information that can be
-conveyed in the error returns from file operations. E.g.
+conveyed in the error returns from file operations. E.g.::
# echo L3:0=f7 > schemata
bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument
@@ -417,15 +446,15 @@ Reading/writing the schemata file
---------------------------------
Reading the schemata file will show the state of all resources
on all domains. When writing you only need to specify those values
-which you wish to change. E.g.
+which you wish to change. E.g.::
-# cat schemata
-L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
-L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
-# echo "L3DATA:2=3c0;" > schemata
-# cat schemata
-L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=3c0;3=fffff
-L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+ # cat schemata
+ L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+ L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
+ # echo "L3DATA:2=3c0;" > schemata
+ # cat schemata
+ L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=3c0;3=fffff
+ L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff
Cache Pseudo-Locking
--------------------
@@ -442,6 +471,7 @@ a region of memory with reduced average read latency.
The creation of a cache pseudo-locked region is triggered by a request
from the user to do so that is accompanied by a schemata of the region
to be pseudo-locked. The cache pseudo-locked region is created as follows:
+
- Create a CAT allocation CLOSNEW with a CBM matching the schemata
from the user of the cache region that will contain the pseudo-locked
memory. This region must not overlap with any current CAT allocation/CLOS
@@ -480,6 +510,7 @@ initial mmap() handling, there is no enforcement afterwards and the
application self needs to ensure it remains affine to the correct cores.
Pseudo-locking is accomplished in two stages:
+
1) During the first stage the system administrator allocates a portion
of cache that should be dedicated to pseudo-locking. At this time an
equivalent portion of memory is allocated, loaded into allocated
@@ -506,7 +537,7 @@ by user space in order to obtain access to the pseudo-locked memory region.
An example of cache pseudo-locked region creation and usage can be found below.
Cache Pseudo-Locking Debugging Interface
----------------------------------------
+----------------------------------------
The pseudo-locking debugging interface is enabled by default (if
CONFIG_DEBUG_FS is enabled) and can be found in /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl.
@@ -514,6 +545,7 @@ There is no explicit way for the kernel to test if a provided memory
location is present in the cache. The pseudo-locking debugging interface uses
the tracing infrastructure to provide two ways to measure cache residency of
the pseudo-locked region:
+
1) Memory access latency using the pseudo_lock_mem_latency tracepoint. Data
from these measurements are best visualized using a hist trigger (see
example below). In this test the pseudo-locked region is traversed at
@@ -529,13 +561,14 @@ it in debugfs as /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/<newdir>. A single
write-only file, pseudo_lock_measure, is present in this directory. The
measurement of the pseudo-locked region depends on the number written to this
debugfs file:
-1 - writing "1" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the latency
+
+1. writing "1" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the latency
measurement captured in the pseudo_lock_mem_latency tracepoint. See
example below.
-2 - writing "2" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L2 cache
+2. writing "2" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L2 cache
residency (cache hits and misses) measurement captured in the
pseudo_lock_l2 tracepoint. See example below.
-3 - writing "3" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L3 cache
+3. writing "3" to the pseudo_lock_measure file will trigger the L3 cache
residency (cache hits and misses) measurement captured in the
pseudo_lock_l3 tracepoint.
@@ -546,55 +579,56 @@ Example of latency debugging interface:
In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created. Here is
how we can measure the latency in cycles of reading from this region and
visualize this data with a histogram that is available if CONFIG_HIST_TRIGGERS
-is set:
-# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
-# echo 'hist:keys=latency' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/trigger
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
-# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/hist
+is set::
-# event histogram
-#
-# trigger info: hist:keys=latency:vals=hitcount:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active]
-#
+ # :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ # echo 'hist:keys=latency' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/trigger
+ # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
+ # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
+ # echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/hist
-{ latency: 456 } hitcount: 1
-{ latency: 50 } hitcount: 83
-{ latency: 36 } hitcount: 96
-{ latency: 44 } hitcount: 174
-{ latency: 48 } hitcount: 195
-{ latency: 46 } hitcount: 262
-{ latency: 42 } hitcount: 693
-{ latency: 40 } hitcount: 3204
-{ latency: 38 } hitcount: 3484
+ # event histogram
+ #
+ # trigger info: hist:keys=latency:vals=hitcount:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active]
+ #
-Totals:
- Hits: 8192
- Entries: 9
- Dropped: 0
+ { latency: 456 } hitcount: 1
+ { latency: 50 } hitcount: 83
+ { latency: 36 } hitcount: 96
+ { latency: 44 } hitcount: 174
+ { latency: 48 } hitcount: 195
+ { latency: 46 } hitcount: 262
+ { latency: 42 } hitcount: 693
+ { latency: 40 } hitcount: 3204
+ { latency: 38 } hitcount: 3484
+
+ Totals:
+ Hits: 8192
+ Entries: 9
+ Dropped: 0
Example of cache hits/misses debugging:
In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created on the L2
cache of a platform. Here is how we can obtain details of the cache hits
-and misses using the platform's precision counters.
+and misses using the platform's precision counters::
-# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
-# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
-# echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
-# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ # :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ # echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
+ # echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure
+ # echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
-# tracer: nop
-#
-# _-----=> irqs-off
-# / _----=> need-resched
-# | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
-# || / _--=> preempt-depth
-# ||| / delay
-# TASK-PID CPU# |||| TIMESTAMP FUNCTION
-# | | | |||| | |
- pseudo_lock_mea-1672 [002] .... 3132.860500: pseudo_lock_l2: hits=4097 miss=0
+ # tracer: nop
+ #
+ # _-----=> irqs-off
+ # / _----=> need-resched
+ # | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
+ # || / _--=> preempt-depth
+ # ||| / delay
+ # TASK-PID CPU# |||| TIMESTAMP FUNCTION
+ # | | | |||| | |
+ pseudo_lock_mea-1672 [002] .... 3132.860500: pseudo_lock_l2: hits=4097 miss=0
Examples for RDT allocation usage:
@@ -603,13 +637,13 @@ Example 1
---------
On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket) with just four bits
for cache bit masks, minimum b/w of 10% with a memory bandwidth
-granularity of 10%
+granularity of 10%::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mkdir p0 p1
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=50;1=50" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
The default resource group is unmodified, so we have access to all parts
of all caches (its schemata file reads "L3:0=f;1=f").
@@ -627,10 +661,10 @@ b/w that the group may be able to use and the system admin can configure
the b/w accordingly.
If the MBA is specified in MB(megabytes) then user can enter the max b/w in MB
-rather than the percentage values.
+rather than the percentage values::
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=c\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=3\nMB:0=1024;1=500" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
In the above example the tasks in "p1" and "p0" on socket 0 would use a max b/w
of 1024MB where as on socket 1 they would use 500MB.
@@ -642,51 +676,51 @@ Again two sockets, but this time with a more realistic 20-bit mask.
Two real time tasks pid=1234 running on processor 0 and pid=5678 running on
processor 1 on socket 0 on a 2-socket and dual core machine. To avoid noisy
neighbors, each of the two real-time tasks exclusively occupies one quarter
-of L3 cache on socket 0.
+of L3 cache on socket 0::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
First we reset the schemata for the default group so that the "upper"
50% of the L3 cache on socket 0 and 50% of memory b/w cannot be used by
-ordinary tasks:
+ordinary tasks::
-# echo "L3:0=3ff;1=fffff\nMB:0=50;1=100" > schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3ff;1=fffff\nMB:0=50;1=100" > schemata
Next we make a resource group for our first real time task and give
-it access to the "top" 25% of the cache on socket 0.
+it access to the "top" 25% of the cache on socket 0::
-# mkdir p0
-# echo "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff" > p0/schemata
+ # mkdir p0
+ # echo "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff" > p0/schemata
Finally we move our first real time task into this resource group. We
also use taskset(1) to ensure the task always runs on a dedicated CPU
on socket 0. Most uses of resource groups will also constrain which
-processors tasks run on.
+processors tasks run on::
-# echo 1234 > p0/tasks
-# taskset -cp 1 1234
+ # echo 1234 > p0/tasks
+ # taskset -cp 1 1234
Ditto for the second real time task (with the remaining 25% of cache):
-# mkdir p1
-# echo "L3:0=7c00;1=fffff" > p1/schemata
-# echo 5678 > p1/tasks
-# taskset -cp 2 5678
+ # mkdir p1
+ # echo "L3:0=7c00;1=fffff" > p1/schemata
+ # echo 5678 > p1/tasks
+ # taskset -cp 2 5678
For the same 2 socket system with memory b/w resource and CAT L3 the
schemata would look like(Assume min_bandwidth 10 and bandwidth_gran is
10):
For our first real time task this would request 20% memory b/w on socket
-0.
+0::
-# echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
+ # echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
For our second real time task this would request an other 20% memory b/w
-on socket 0.
+on socket 0::
-# echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
+ # echo -e "L3:0=f8000;1=fffff\nMB:0=20;1=100" > p0/schemata
Example 3
---------
@@ -695,30 +729,30 @@ A single socket system which has real-time tasks running on core 4-7 and
non real-time workload assigned to core 0-3. The real-time tasks share text
and data, so a per task association is not required and due to interaction
with the kernel it's desired that the kernel on these cores shares L3 with
-the tasks.
+the tasks::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
First we reset the schemata for the default group so that the "upper"
50% of the L3 cache on socket 0, and 50% of memory bandwidth on socket 0
-cannot be used by ordinary tasks:
+cannot be used by ordinary tasks::
-# echo "L3:0=3ff\nMB:0=50" > schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3ff\nMB:0=50" > schemata
Next we make a resource group for our real time cores and give it access
to the "top" 50% of the cache on socket 0 and 50% of memory bandwidth on
-socket 0.
+socket 0::
-# mkdir p0
-# echo "L3:0=ffc00\nMB:0=50" > p0/schemata
+ # mkdir p0
+ # echo "L3:0=ffc00\nMB:0=50" > p0/schemata
Finally we move core 4-7 over to the new group and make sure that the
kernel and the tasks running there get 50% of the cache. They should
also get 50% of memory bandwidth assuming that the cores 4-7 are SMT
-siblings and only the real time threads are scheduled on the cores 4-7.
+siblings and only the real time threads are scheduled on the cores 4-7::
-# echo F0 > p0/cpus
+ # echo F0 > p0/cpus
Example 4
---------
@@ -731,116 +765,124 @@ to overlap with that allocation.
In this example a new exclusive resource group will be created on a L2 CAT
system with two L2 cache instances that can be configured with an 8-bit
capacity bitmask. The new exclusive resource group will be configured to use
-25% of each cache instance.
+25% of each cache instance::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
First, we observe that the default group is configured to allocate to all L2
-cache:
+cache::
-# cat schemata
-L2:0=ff;1=ff
+ # cat schemata
+ L2:0=ff;1=ff
We could attempt to create the new resource group at this point, but it will
-fail because of the overlap with the schemata of the default group:
-# mkdir p0
-# echo 'L2:0=0x3;1=0x3' > p0/schemata
-# cat p0/mode
-shareable
-# echo exclusive > p0/mode
--sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
-# cat info/last_cmd_status
-schemata overlaps
+fail because of the overlap with the schemata of the default group::
+
+ # mkdir p0
+ # echo 'L2:0=0x3;1=0x3' > p0/schemata
+ # cat p0/mode
+ shareable
+ # echo exclusive > p0/mode
+ -sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
+ # cat info/last_cmd_status
+ schemata overlaps
To ensure that there is no overlap with another resource group the default
resource group's schemata has to change, making it possible for the new
-resource group to become exclusive.
-# echo 'L2:0=0xfc;1=0xfc' > schemata
-# echo exclusive > p0/mode
-# grep . p0/*
-p0/cpus:0
-p0/mode:exclusive
-p0/schemata:L2:0=03;1=03
-p0/size:L2:0=262144;1=262144
+resource group to become exclusive::
+
+ # echo 'L2:0=0xfc;1=0xfc' > schemata
+ # echo exclusive > p0/mode
+ # grep . p0/*
+ p0/cpus:0
+ p0/mode:exclusive
+ p0/schemata:L2:0=03;1=03
+ p0/size:L2:0=262144;1=262144
A new resource group will on creation not overlap with an exclusive resource
-group:
-# mkdir p1
-# grep . p1/*
-p1/cpus:0
-p1/mode:shareable
-p1/schemata:L2:0=fc;1=fc
-p1/size:L2:0=786432;1=786432
+group::
-The bit_usage will reflect how the cache is used:
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSEE;1=SSSSSSEE
+ # mkdir p1
+ # grep . p1/*
+ p1/cpus:0
+ p1/mode:shareable
+ p1/schemata:L2:0=fc;1=fc
+ p1/size:L2:0=786432;1=786432
-A resource group cannot be forced to overlap with an exclusive resource group:
-# echo 'L2:0=0x1;1=0x1' > p1/schemata
--sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
-# cat info/last_cmd_status
-overlaps with exclusive group
+The bit_usage will reflect how the cache is used::
+
+ # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+ 0=SSSSSSEE;1=SSSSSSEE
+
+A resource group cannot be forced to overlap with an exclusive resource group::
+
+ # echo 'L2:0=0x1;1=0x1' > p1/schemata
+ -sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument
+ # cat info/last_cmd_status
+ overlaps with exclusive group
Example of Cache Pseudo-Locking
-------------------------------
Lock portion of L2 cache from cache id 1 using CBM 0x3. Pseudo-locked
region is exposed at /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock that can be provided to
-application for argument to mmap().
+application for argument to mmap()::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
Ensure that there are bits available that can be pseudo-locked, since only
unused bits can be pseudo-locked the bits to be pseudo-locked needs to be
-removed from the default resource group's schemata:
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSSS
-# echo 'L2:1=0xfc' > schemata
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSS00
+removed from the default resource group's schemata::
+
+ # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+ 0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSSS
+ # echo 'L2:1=0xfc' > schemata
+ # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+ 0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSS00
Create a new resource group that will be associated with the pseudo-locked
region, indicate that it will be used for a pseudo-locked region, and
-configure the requested pseudo-locked region capacity bitmask:
+configure the requested pseudo-locked region capacity bitmask::
-# mkdir newlock
-# echo pseudo-locksetup > newlock/mode
-# echo 'L2:1=0x3' > newlock/schemata
+ # mkdir newlock
+ # echo pseudo-locksetup > newlock/mode
+ # echo 'L2:1=0x3' > newlock/schemata
On success the resource group's mode will change to pseudo-locked, the
bit_usage will reflect the pseudo-locked region, and the character device
-exposing the pseudo-locked region will exist:
+exposing the pseudo-locked region will exist::
-# cat newlock/mode
-pseudo-locked
-# cat info/L2/bit_usage
-0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSPP
-# ls -l /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
-crw------- 1 root root 243, 0 Apr 3 05:01 /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
+ # cat newlock/mode
+ pseudo-locked
+ # cat info/L2/bit_usage
+ 0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSPP
+ # ls -l /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
+ crw------- 1 root root 243, 0 Apr 3 05:01 /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock
-/*
- * Example code to access one page of pseudo-locked cache region
- * from user space.
- */
-#define _GNU_SOURCE
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <sched.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
+::
-/*
- * It is required that the application runs with affinity to only
- * cores associated with the pseudo-locked region. Here the cpu
- * is hardcoded for convenience of example.
- */
-static int cpuid = 2;
+ /*
+ * Example code to access one page of pseudo-locked cache region
+ * from user space.
+ */
+ #define _GNU_SOURCE
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <sched.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <sys/mman.h>
-int main(int argc, char *argv[])
-{
+ /*
+ * It is required that the application runs with affinity to only
+ * cores associated with the pseudo-locked region. Here the cpu
+ * is hardcoded for convenience of example.
+ */
+ static int cpuid = 2;
+
+ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+ {
cpu_set_t cpuset;
long page_size;
void *mapping;
@@ -882,7 +924,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
close(dev_fd);
exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
-}
+ }
Locking between applications
----------------------------
@@ -921,32 +963,32 @@ Read lock:
B) If success read the directory structure.
C) funlock
-Example with bash:
+Example with bash::
-# Atomically read directory structure
-$ flock -s /sys/fs/resctrl/ find /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # Atomically read directory structure
+ $ flock -s /sys/fs/resctrl/ find /sys/fs/resctrl
-# Read directory contents and create new subdirectory
+ # Read directory contents and create new subdirectory
-$ cat create-dir.sh
-find /sys/fs/resctrl/ > output.txt
-mask = function-of(output.txt)
-mkdir /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/
-echo mask > /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/schemata
+ $ cat create-dir.sh
+ find /sys/fs/resctrl/ > output.txt
+ mask = function-of(output.txt)
+ mkdir /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/
+ echo mask > /sys/fs/resctrl/newres/schemata
-$ flock /sys/fs/resctrl/ ./create-dir.sh
+ $ flock /sys/fs/resctrl/ ./create-dir.sh
-Example with C:
+Example with C::
-/*
- * Example code do take advisory locks
- * before accessing resctrl filesystem
- */
-#include <sys/file.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
+ /*
+ * Example code do take advisory locks
+ * before accessing resctrl filesystem
+ */
+ #include <sys/file.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
-void resctrl_take_shared_lock(int fd)
-{
+ void resctrl_take_shared_lock(int fd)
+ {
int ret;
/* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
@@ -955,10 +997,10 @@ void resctrl_take_shared_lock(int fd)
perror("flock");
exit(-1);
}
-}
+ }
-void resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(int fd)
-{
+ void resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(int fd)
+ {
int ret;
/* release lock on resctrl filesystem */
@@ -967,10 +1009,10 @@ void resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(int fd)
perror("flock");
exit(-1);
}
-}
+ }
-void resctrl_release_lock(int fd)
-{
+ void resctrl_release_lock(int fd)
+ {
int ret;
/* take shared lock on resctrl filesystem */
@@ -979,10 +1021,10 @@ void resctrl_release_lock(int fd)
perror("flock");
exit(-1);
}
-}
+ }
-void main(void)
-{
+ void main(void)
+ {
int fd, ret;
fd = open("/sys/fs/resctrl", O_DIRECTORY);
@@ -997,7 +1039,7 @@ void main(void)
resctrl_take_exclusive_lock(fd);
/* code to read and write directory contents */
resctrl_release_lock(fd);
-}
+ }
Examples for RDT Monitoring along with allocation usage:
@@ -1009,17 +1051,17 @@ group or CTRL_MON group.
Example 1 (Monitor CTRL_MON group and subset of tasks in CTRL_MON group)
----------
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket) with just four bits
-for cache bit masks
+for cache bit masks::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=c" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
-# echo "L3:0=3;1=3" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
-# echo 5678 > p1/tasks
-# echo 5679 > p1/tasks
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mkdir p0 p1
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=c" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p0/schemata
+ # echo "L3:0=3;1=3" > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/schemata
+ # echo 5678 > p1/tasks
+ # echo 5679 > p1/tasks
The default resource group is unmodified, so we have access to all parts
of all caches (its schemata file reads "L3:0=f;1=f").
@@ -1028,48 +1070,48 @@ Tasks that are under the control of group "p0" may only allocate from the
"lower" 50% on cache ID 0, and the "upper" 50% of cache ID 1.
Tasks in group "p1" use the "lower" 50% of cache on both sockets.
-Create monitor groups and assign a subset of tasks to each monitor group.
+Create monitor groups and assign a subset of tasks to each monitor group::
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_groups
-# mkdir m11 m12
-# echo 5678 > m11/tasks
-# echo 5679 > m12/tasks
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_groups
+ # mkdir m11 m12
+ # echo 5678 > m11/tasks
+ # echo 5679 > m12/tasks
-fetch data (data shown in bytes)
+fetch data (data shown in bytes)::
-# cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-16234000
-# cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-14789000
-# cat m12/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-16789000
+ # cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 16234000
+ # cat m11/mon_data/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+ 14789000
+ # cat m12/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 16789000
-The parent ctrl_mon group shows the aggregated data.
+The parent ctrl_mon group shows the aggregated data::
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 31234000
Example 2 (Monitor a task from its creation)
----------
-On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket)
+--------------------------------------------
+On a two socket machine (one L3 cache per socket)::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p0 p1
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mkdir p0 p1
An RMID is allocated to the group once its created and hence the <cmd>
-below is monitored from its creation.
+below is monitored from its creation::
-# echo $$ > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/tasks
-# <cmd>
+ # echo $$ > /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/tasks
+ # <cmd>
-Fetch the data
+Fetch the data::
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
-31789000
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_l3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 31789000
Example 3 (Monitor without CAT support or before creating CAT groups)
----------
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
Assume a system like HSW has only CQM and no CAT support. In this case
the resctrl will still mount but cannot create CTRL_MON directories.
@@ -1077,28 +1119,28 @@ But user can create different MON groups within the root group thereby
able to monitor all tasks including kernel threads.
This can also be used to profile jobs cache size footprint before being
-able to allocate them to different allocation groups.
+able to allocate them to different allocation groups::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir mon_groups/m01
-# mkdir mon_groups/m02
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mkdir mon_groups/m01
+ # mkdir mon_groups/m02
-# echo 3478 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/tasks
-# echo 2467 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/tasks
+ # echo 3478 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/tasks
+ # echo 2467 > /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/tasks
Monitor the groups separately and also get per domain data. From the
below its apparent that the tasks are mostly doing work on
-domain(socket) 0.
+domain(socket) 0::
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-34555
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-31234000
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
-32789
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 31234000
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m01/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+ 34555
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 31234000
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/mon_groups/m02/mon_L3_01/llc_occupancy
+ 32789
Example 4 (Monitor real time tasks)
@@ -1106,16 +1148,17 @@ Example 4 (Monitor real time tasks)
A single socket system which has real time tasks running on cores 4-7
and non real time tasks on other cpus. We want to monitor the cache
-occupancy of the real time threads on these cores.
+occupancy of the real time threads on these cores::
-# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
-# cd /sys/fs/resctrl
-# mkdir p1
+ # mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # cd /sys/fs/resctrl
+ # mkdir p1
-Move the cpus 4-7 over to p1
-# echo f0 > p1/cpus
+Move the cpus 4-7 over to p1::
-View the llc occupancy snapshot
+ # echo f0 > p1/cpus
-# cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
-11234000
+View the llc occupancy snapshot::
+
+ # cat /sys/fs/resctrl/p1/mon_data/mon_L3_00/llc_occupancy
+ 11234000
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt b/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt
index 6a0607b99ed8..073a0f6827c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/tlb.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,10 @@
+==================================
+Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB)
+==================================
+
When the kernel unmaps or modified the attributes of a range of
memory, it has two choices:
+
1. Flush the entire TLB with a two-instruction sequence. This is
a quick operation, but it causes collateral damage: TLB entries
from areas other than the one we are trying to flush will be
@@ -10,6 +15,7 @@ memory, it has two choices:
damage to other TLB entries.
Which method to do depends on a few things:
+
1. The size of the flush being performed. A flush of the entire
address space is obviously better performed by flushing the
entire TLB than doing 2^48/PAGE_SIZE individual flushes.
@@ -31,7 +37,7 @@ sizes of the flush will vary greatly depending on the workload as
well. There is essentially no "right" point to choose.
You may be doing too many individual invalidations if you see the
-invlpg instruction (or instructions _near_ it) show up high in
+invlpg instruction (or instructions *near* it) show up high in
profiles. If you believe that individual invalidations being
called too often, you can lower the tunable:
@@ -54,9 +60,9 @@ Essentially, you are balancing the cycles you spend doing invlpg
with the cycles that you spend refilling the TLB later.
You can measure how expensive TLB refills are by using
-performance counters and 'perf stat', like this:
+performance counters and 'perf stat', like this::
-perf stat -e
+ perf stat -e
cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x84,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_duration/,
cpu/event=0x8,umask=0x82,name=dtlb_load_misses_walk_completed/,
cpu/event=0x49,umask=0x4,name=dtlb_store_misses_walk_duration/,
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/topology.txt b/Documentation/x86/topology.txt
index 2953e3ec9a02..4ad29eb0fc6d 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/topology.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/topology.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============
x86 Topology
============
@@ -66,12 +67,13 @@ The topology of a system is described in the units of:
- cpu_llc_id:
A per-CPU variable containing:
+
- On Intel, the first APIC ID of the list of CPUs sharing the Last Level
- Cache
+ Cache
- On AMD, the Node ID or Core Complex ID containing the Last Level
- Cache. In general, it is a number identifying an LLC uniquely on the
- system.
+ Cache. In general, it is a number identifying an LLC uniquely on the
+ system.
* Cores:
@@ -138,32 +140,32 @@ That has the "advantage" that the logical Linux CPU numbers of threads 0 stay
the same whether threads are enabled or not. That's merely an implementation
detail and has no practical impact.
-1) Single Package, Single Core
+1) Single Package, Single Core::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
2) Single Package, Dual Core
- a) One thread per core
+ a) One thread per core::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
- b) Two threads per core
+ b) Two threads per core::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 1
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 2
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 3
- Alternative enumeration:
+ Alternative enumeration::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 2
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 3
- AMD nomenclature for CMT systems:
+ AMD nomenclature for CMT systems::
[node 0] -> [Compute Unit 0] -> [Compute Unit Core 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [Compute Unit Core 1] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -172,7 +174,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
4) Dual Package, Dual Core
- a) One thread per core
+ a) One thread per core::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -180,7 +182,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
[package 1] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 2
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 3
- b) Two threads per core
+ b) Two threads per core::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 1
@@ -192,7 +194,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 6
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 7
- Alternative enumeration:
+ Alternative enumeration::
[package 0] -> [core 0] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 4
@@ -204,7 +206,7 @@ detail and has no practical impact.
-> [core 1] -> [thread 0] -> Linux CPU 3
-> [thread 1] -> Linux CPU 7
- AMD nomenclature for CMT systems:
+ AMD nomenclature for CMT systems::
[node 0] -> [Compute Unit 0] -> [Compute Unit Core 0] -> Linux CPU 0
-> [Compute Unit Core 1] -> Linux CPU 1
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
index 1894cdfc69d9..ea18db8c7441 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/usb-legacy-support.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==================
USB Legacy support
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==================
Vojtech Pavlik <[email protected]>, January 2004
@@ -25,20 +26,22 @@ It has several drawbacks, though:
BIOS manufacturers only test with Windows, and Windows doesn't do 64-bit
yet.
-Solutions:
+Solutions
-Problem 1) can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the
-PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into
-the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be
-compiled-in, too.
+Problem 1)
+ Can be solved by loading the USB drivers prior to loading the
+ PS/2 mouse driver. Since the PS/2 mouse driver is in 2.6 compiled into
+ the kernel unconditionally, this means the USB drivers need to be
+ compiled-in, too.
-Problem 2) can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G
-in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update
-could help, but so far no such update exists.
-
-Problem 3) is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board
-manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB
-Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding
-idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM
-on the HLT instruction as well.
+Problem 2)
+ Can currently only be solved by either disabling HIGHMEM64G
+ in the kernel config or USB Legacy support in the BIOS. A BIOS update
+ could help, but so far no such update exists.
+Problem 3)
+ Is usually fixed by a BIOS update. Check the board
+ manufacturers web site. If an update is not available, disable USB
+ Legacy support in the BIOS. If this alone doesn't help, try also adding
+ idle=poll on the kernel command line. The BIOS may be entering the SMM
+ on the HLT instruction as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt
index 2432a5ef86d9..fb7a12a83ad7 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/5level-paging.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-== Overview ==
+==============
+5-level Paging
+==============
+
+Overview
+========
Original x86-64 was limited by 4-level paing to 256 TiB of virtual address
space and 64 TiB of physical address space. We are already bumping into
@@ -16,7 +21,8 @@ QEMU 2.9 and later support 5-level paging.
Virtual memory layout for 5-level paging is described in
Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
-== Enabling 5-level paging ==
+Enabling 5-level paging
+=======================
CONFIG_X86_5LEVEL=y enables the feature.
@@ -24,7 +30,8 @@ Kernel with CONFIG_X86_5LEVEL=y still able to boot on 4-level hardware.
In this case additional page table level -- p4d -- will be folded at
runtime.
-== User-space and large virtual address space ==
+User-space and large virtual address space
+==========================================
On x86, 5-level paging enables 56-bit userspace virtual address space.
Not all user space is ready to handle wide addresses. It's known that
@@ -58,4 +65,3 @@ One important case we need to handle here is interaction with MPX.
MPX (without MAWA extension) cannot handle addresses above 47-bit, so we
need to make sure that MPX cannot be enabled we already have VMA above
the boundary and forbid creating such VMAs once MPX is enabled.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
index abc53886655e..20ab030fdb2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
+===========================
AMD64 specific boot options
+===========================
There are many others (usually documented in driver documentation), but
only the AMD64 specific ones are listed here.
Machine check
+=============
Please see Documentation/x86/x86_64/machinecheck for sysfs runtime tunables.
@@ -69,27 +72,31 @@ Machine check
Everything else is in sysfs now.
APICs
+=====
- apic Use IO-APIC. Default
+ ============== =============================================================
+ apic Use IO-APIC. Default
- noapic Don't use the IO-APIC.
+ noapic Don't use the IO-APIC.
- disableapic Don't use the local APIC
+ disableapic Don't use the local APIC
- nolapic Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility)
+ nolapic Don't use the local APIC (alias for i386 compatibility)
- pirq=... See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
+ pirq=... See Documentation/x86/i386/IO-APIC.txt
- noapictimer Don't set up the APIC timer
+ noapictimer Don't set up the APIC timer
no_timer_check Don't check the IO-APIC timer. This can work around
- problems with incorrect timer initialization on some boards.
+ problems with incorrect timer initialization on some boards.
apicpmtimer
- Do APIC timer calibration using the pmtimer. Implies
- apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
- broken.
+ Do APIC timer calibration using the pmtimer. Implies
+ apicmaintimer. Useful when your PIT timer is totally
+ broken.
+ ============== =============================================================
Timing
+======
notsc
Deprecated, use tsc=unstable instead.
@@ -98,19 +105,25 @@ Timing
Don't use the HPET timer.
Idle loop
+=========
idle=poll
+
Don't do power saving in the idle loop using HLT, but poll for rescheduling
event. This will make the CPUs eat a lot more power, but may be useful
to get slightly better performance in multiprocessor benchmarks. It also
makes some profiling using performance counters more accurate.
+
Please note that on systems with MONITOR/MWAIT support (like Intel EM64T
CPUs) this option has no performance advantage over the normal idle loop.
It may also interact badly with hyperthreading.
Rebooting
+=========
reboot=b[ios] | t[riple] | k[bd] | a[cpi] | e[fi] [, [w]arm | [c]old]
+
+ ====== =====================================================================
bios Use the CPU reboot vector for warm reset
warm Don't set the cold reboot flag
cold Set the cold reboot flag
@@ -122,6 +135,7 @@ Rebooting
efi Use efi reset_system runtime service. If EFI is not configured or the
EFI reset does not work, the reboot path attempts the reset using
the keyboard controller.
+ ====== =====================================================================
Using warm reset will be much faster especially on big memory
systems because the BIOS will not go through the memory check.
@@ -134,17 +148,23 @@ Rebooting
in some cases.
Non Executable Mappings
+=======================
noexec=on|off
+ === ===============
on Enable(default)
off Disable
+ === ===============
NUMA
+====
- numa=off Only set up a single NUMA node spanning all memory.
+ numa=off
+ Only set up a single NUMA node spanning all memory.
- numa=noacpi Don't parse the SRAT table for NUMA setup
+ numa=noacpi
+ Don't parse the SRAT table for NUMA setup
numa=fake=<size>[MG]
If given as a memory unit, fills all system RAM with nodes of
@@ -159,35 +179,45 @@ NUMA
physical node into N emulated nodes.
ACPI
+====
- acpi=off Don't enable ACPI
- acpi=ht Use ACPI boot table parsing, but don't enable ACPI
- interpreter
- acpi=force Force ACPI on (currently not needed)
+ ============================== ==============================================
+ acpi=off Don't enable ACPI
+ acpi=ht Use ACPI boot table parsing, but don't enable
+ ACPI interpreter
+ acpi=force Force ACPI on (currently not needed)
- acpi=strict Disable out of spec ACPI workarounds.
+ acpi=strict Disable out of spec ACPI workarounds.
- acpi_sci={edge,level,high,low} Set up ACPI SCI interrupt.
+ acpi_sci={edge,level,high,low} Set up ACPI SCI interrupt.
- acpi=noirq Don't route interrupts
+ acpi=noirq Don't route interrupts
+
+ acpi=nocmcff Disable firmware first mode for corrected
+ errors. This disables parsing the HEST CMC
+ error source to check if firmware has set
+ the FF flag. This may result in duplicate
+ corrected error reports.
+ ============================== ==============================================
- acpi=nocmcff Disable firmware first mode for corrected errors. This
- disables parsing the HEST CMC error source to check if
- firmware has set the FF flag. This may result in
- duplicate corrected error reports.
PCI
+===
+ ===================== ====================================================
pci=off Don't use PCI
pci=conf1 Use conf1 access.
pci=conf2 Use conf2 access.
pci=rom Assign ROMs.
pci=assign-busses Assign busses
pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK
- pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says.
+ pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable
+ says.
pci=noacpi Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing.
+ ===================== ====================================================
IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
+===========================================
Multiple x86-64 PCI-DMA mapping implementations exist, for example:
@@ -209,11 +239,12 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
mapping with memory protection, etc.
Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Using Calgary IOMMU"
- iommu=[<size>][,noagp][,off][,force][,noforce]
- [,memaper[=<order>]][,merge][,fullflush][,nomerge]
- [,noaperture][,calgary]
+ iommu=[<size>][,noagp][,off][,force][,noforce][,memaper[=<order>]][,merge]
+ [,fullflush][,nomerge][,noaperture][,calgary]
General iommu options:
+
+ ================== =======================================================
off Don't initialize and use any kind of IOMMU.
noforce Don't force hardware IOMMU usage when it is not needed.
(default).
@@ -222,8 +253,11 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
soft Use software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) (default for
Intel machines). This can be used to prevent the usage
of an available hardware IOMMU.
+ ================== =======================================================
iommu options only relevant to the AMD GART hardware IOMMU:
+
+ ================== ========================================================
<size> Set the size of the remapping area in bytes.
allowed Overwrite iommu off workarounds for specific chipsets.
fullflush Flush IOMMU on each allocation (default).
@@ -237,21 +271,31 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
noagp Don't initialize the AGP driver and use full aperture.
panic Always panic when IOMMU overflows.
calgary Use the Calgary IOMMU if it is available
+ ================== ========================================================
iommu options only relevant to the software bounce buffering (SWIOTLB) IOMMU
implementation:
+
swiotlb=<pages>[,force]
+
+ ================== ===================================================
<pages> Prereserve that many 128K pages for the software IO
bounce buffering.
force Force all IO through the software TLB.
+ ================== ===================================================
Settings for the IBM Calgary hardware IOMMU currently found in IBM
pSeries and xSeries machines:
calgary=[64k,128k,256k,512k,1M,2M,4M,8M]
+
calgary=[translate_empty_slots]
+
calgary=[disable=<PCI bus number>]
+
+ ===== =================================
panic Always panic when IOMMU overflows
+ ===== =================================
64k,...,8M - Set the size of each PCI slot's translation table
when using the Calgary IOMMU. This is the size of the translation
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
index 804f9426ed17..be9958ece8d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt
@@ -18,51 +18,68 @@ Notes:
notation than "16 EB", which few will recognize at first sight as 16 exabytes.
It also shows it nicely how incredibly large 64-bit address space is.
-========================================================================================================================
- Start addr | Offset | End addr | Size | VM area description
-========================================================================================================================
- | | | |
- 0000000000000000 | 0 | 00007fffffffffff | 128 TB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- 0000800000000000 | +128 TB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16M TB | ... huge, almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
- | | | | virtual memory addresses up to the -128 TB
- | | | | starting offset of kernel mappings.
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
- |
- | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
-____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- ffff800000000000 | -128 TB | ffff87ffffffffff | 8 TB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
- ffff880000000000 | -120 TB | ffff887fffffffff | 0.5 TB | LDT remap for PTI
- ffff888000000000 | -119.5 TB | ffffc87fffffffff | 64 TB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
- ffffc88000000000 | -55.5 TB | ffffc8ffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffc90000000000 | -55 TB | ffffe8ffffffffff | 32 TB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
- ffffe90000000000 | -23 TB | ffffe9ffffffffff | 1 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffea0000000000 | -22 TB | ffffeaffffffffff | 1 TB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
- ffffeb0000000000 | -21 TB | ffffebffffffffff | 1 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffec0000000000 | -20 TB | fffffbffffffffff | 16 TB | KASAN shadow memory
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
- |
- | Identical layout to the 56-bit one from here on:
-____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- fffffc0000000000 | -4 TB | fffffdffffffffff | 2 TB | ... unused hole
- | | | | vaddr_end for KASLR
- fffffe0000000000 | -2 TB | fffffe7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
- fffffe8000000000 | -1.5 TB | fffffeffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffff0000000000 | -1 TB | ffffff7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
- ffffff8000000000 | -512 GB | ffffffeeffffffff | 444 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffef00000000 | -68 GB | fffffffeffffffff | 64 GB | EFI region mapping space
- ffffffff00000000 | -4 GB | ffffffff7fffffff | 2 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffff80000000 | -2 GB | ffffffff9fffffff | 512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
- ffffffff80000000 |-2048 MB | | |
- ffffffffa0000000 |-1536 MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
- ffffffffff000000 | -16 MB | | |
- FIXADDR_START | ~-11 MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
- ffffffffff600000 | -10 MB | ffffffffff600fff | 4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
- ffffffffffe00000 | -2 MB | ffffffffffffffff | 2 MB | ... unused hole
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| Start addr | Offset | End addr | Size | VM area description |
++=================+============+==================+=========+===========================================================+
+| | | | | |
+|0000000000000000 | 0 | 00007fffffffffff | 128 TB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| | | | | |
+|0000800000000000 | +128 TB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16M TB | ... huge, almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical |
+| | | | | virtual memory addresses up to the -128 TB |
+| | | | | starting offset of kernel mappings. |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:** |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffff800000000000 | -128 TB | ffff87ffffffffff | 8 TB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffff880000000000 | -120 TB | ffff887fffffffff | 0.5 TB | LDT remap for PTI |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffff888000000000 | -119.5 TB | ffffc87fffffffff | 64 TB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffc88000000000 | -55.5 TB | ffffc8ffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffc90000000000 | -55 TB | ffffe8ffffffffff | 32 TB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffe90000000000 | -23 TB | ffffe9ffffffffff | 1 TB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffea0000000000 | -22 TB | ffffeaffffffffff | 1 TB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffeb0000000000 | -21 TB | ffffebffffffffff | 1 TB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffec0000000000 | -20 TB | fffffbffffffffff | 16 TB | KASAN shadow memory |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Identical layout to the 56-bit one from here on:** |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffc0000000000 | -4 TB | fffffdffffffffff | 2 TB | ... unused hole |
+| | | | | vaddr_end for KASLR |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffe0000000000 | -2 TB | fffffe7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffe8000000000 | -1.5 TB | fffffeffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffff0000000000 | -1 TB | ffffff7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffff8000000000 | -512 GB | ffffffeeffffffff | 444 GB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffef00000000 | -68 GB | fffffffeffffffff | 64 GB | EFI region mapping space |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff00000000 | -4 GB | ffffffff7fffffff | 2 GB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff80000000 | -2 GB | ffffffff9fffffff | 512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0 |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff80000000 |-2048 MB | | | |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffa0000000 |-1536 MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffff000000 | -16 MB | | | |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| FIXADDR_START | ~-11 MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffff600000 | -10 MB | ffffffffff600fff | 4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffffe00000 | -2 MB | ffffffffffffffff | 2 MB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
====================================================
@@ -76,51 +93,66 @@ Notes:
offset and many of the regions expand to support the much larger physical
memory supported.
-========================================================================================================================
- Start addr | Offset | End addr | Size | VM area description
-========================================================================================================================
- | | | |
- 0000000000000000 | 0 | 00ffffffffffffff | 64 PB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- 0000800000000000 | +64 PB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16K PB | ... huge, still almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical
- | | | | virtual memory addresses up to the -64 PB
- | | | | starting offset of kernel mappings.
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
- |
- | Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:
-____________________________________________________________|___________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- ff00000000000000 | -64 PB | ff0fffffffffffff | 4 PB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor
- ff10000000000000 | -60 PB | ff10ffffffffffff | 0.25 PB | LDT remap for PTI
- ff11000000000000 | -59.75 PB | ff90ffffffffffff | 32 PB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base)
- ff91000000000000 | -27.75 PB | ff9fffffffffffff | 3.75 PB | ... unused hole
- ffa0000000000000 | -24 PB | ffd1ffffffffffff | 12.5 PB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base)
- ffd2000000000000 | -11.5 PB | ffd3ffffffffffff | 0.5 PB | ... unused hole
- ffd4000000000000 | -11 PB | ffd5ffffffffffff | 0.5 PB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base)
- ffd6000000000000 | -10.5 PB | ffdeffffffffffff | 2.25 PB | ... unused hole
- ffdf000000000000 | -8.25 PB | fffffdffffffffff | ~8 PB | KASAN shadow memory
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|____________________________________________________________
- |
- | Identical layout to the 47-bit one from here on:
-____________________________________________________________|____________________________________________________________
- | | | |
- fffffc0000000000 | -4 TB | fffffdffffffffff | 2 TB | ... unused hole
- | | | | vaddr_end for KASLR
- fffffe0000000000 | -2 TB | fffffe7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping
- fffffe8000000000 | -1.5 TB | fffffeffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole
- ffffff0000000000 | -1 TB | ffffff7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks
- ffffff8000000000 | -512 GB | ffffffeeffffffff | 444 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffef00000000 | -68 GB | fffffffeffffffff | 64 GB | EFI region mapping space
- ffffffff00000000 | -4 GB | ffffffff7fffffff | 2 GB | ... unused hole
- ffffffff80000000 | -2 GB | ffffffff9fffffff | 512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0
- ffffffff80000000 |-2048 MB | | |
- ffffffffa0000000 |-1536 MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space
- ffffffffff000000 | -16 MB | | |
- FIXADDR_START | ~-11 MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset
- ffffffffff600000 | -10 MB | ffffffffff600fff | 4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI
- ffffffffffe00000 | -2 MB | ffffffffffffffff | 2 MB | ... unused hole
-__________________|____________|__________________|_________|___________________________________________________________
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| Start addr | Offset | End addr | Size | VM area description |
++=================+============+==================+=========+===========================================================+
+|0000000000000000 | 0 | 00ffffffffffffff | 64 PB | user-space virtual memory, different per mm |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|0000800000000000 | +64 PB | ffff7fffffffffff | ~16K PB | ... huge, still almost 64 bits wide hole of non-canonical |
+| | | | | virtual memory addresses up to the -64 PB |
+| | | | | starting offset of kernel mappings. |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Kernel-space virtual memory, shared between all processes:** |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ff00000000000000 | -64 PB | ff0fffffffffffff | 4 PB | ... guard hole, also reserved for hypervisor |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ff10000000000000 | -60 PB | ff10ffffffffffff | 0.25 PB | LDT remap for PTI |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ff11000000000000 | -59.75 PB | ff90ffffffffffff | 32 PB | direct mapping of all physical memory (page_offset_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ff91000000000000 | -27.75 PB | ff9fffffffffffff | 3.75 PB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffa0000000000000 | -24 PB | ffd1ffffffffffff | 12.5 PB | vmalloc/ioremap space (vmalloc_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffd2000000000000 | -11.5 PB | ffd3ffffffffffff | 0.5 PB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffd4000000000000 | -11 PB | ffd5ffffffffffff | 0.5 PB | virtual memory map (vmemmap_base) |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffd6000000000000 | -10.5 PB | ffdeffffffffffff | 2.25 PB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffdf000000000000 | -8.25 PB | fffffdffffffffff | ~8 PB | KASAN shadow memory |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| **Identical layout to the 47-bit one from here on:** |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffc0000000000 | -4 TB | fffffdffffffffff | 2 TB | ... unused hole |
+| | | | | vaddr_end for KASLR |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffe0000000000 | -2 TB | fffffe7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | cpu_entry_area mapping |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|fffffe8000000000 | -1.5 TB | fffffeffffffffff | 0.5 TB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffff0000000000 | -1 TB | ffffff7fffffffff | 0.5 TB | %esp fixup stacks |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffff8000000000 | -512 GB | ffffffeeffffffff | 444 GB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffef00000000 | -68 GB | fffffffeffffffff | 64 GB | EFI region mapping space |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff00000000 | -4 GB | ffffffff7fffffff | 2 GB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff80000000 | -2 GB | ffffffff9fffffff | 512 MB | kernel text mapping, mapped to physical address 0 |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffff80000000 |-2048 MB | | | |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffa0000000 |-1536 MB | fffffffffeffffff | 1520 MB | module mapping space |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffff000000 | -16 MB | | | |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+| FIXADDR_START | ~-11 MB | ffffffffff5fffff | ~0.5 MB | kernel-internal fixmap range, variable size and offset |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffff600000 | -10 MB | ffffffffff600fff | 4 kB | legacy vsyscall ABI |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
+|ffffffffffe00000 | -2 MB | ffffffffffffffff | 2 MB | ... unused hole |
++-----------------+------------+------------------+---------+-----------------------------------------------------------+
Architecture defines a 64-bit virtual address. Implementations can support
less. Currently supported are 48- and 57-bit virtual addresses. Bits 63
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt
index a5e2b4fdb170..7b564b0aa02e 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/uefi.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=====================================
General note on [U]EFI x86_64 support
--------------------------------------
+=====================================
The nomenclature EFI and UEFI are used interchangeably in this document.
@@ -14,29 +15,41 @@ with EFI firmware and specifications are listed below.
3. x86_64 platform with EFI/UEFI firmware.
-Mechanics:
+Mechanics
---------
-- Build the kernel with the following configuration.
+- Build the kernel with the following configuration::
CONFIG_FB_EFI=y
CONFIG_FRAMEBUFFER_CONSOLE=y
+
If EFI runtime services are expected, the following configuration should
- be selected.
+ be selected::
+
CONFIG_EFI=y
CONFIG_EFI_VARS=y or m # optional
+
- Create a VFAT partition on the disk
- Copy the following to the VFAT partition:
+
elilo bootloader with x86_64 support, elilo configuration file,
kernel image built in first step and corresponding
initrd. Instructions on building elilo and its dependencies
can be found in the elilo sourceforge project.
+
- Boot to EFI shell and invoke elilo choosing the kernel image built
in first step.
- If some or all EFI runtime services don't work, you can try following
kernel command line parameters to turn off some or all EFI runtime
services.
+
+ =============== ===================================
noefi turn off all EFI runtime services
reboot_type=k turn off EFI reboot runtime service
+ =============== ===================================
+
- If the EFI memory map has additional entries not in the E820 map,
you can include those entries in the kernels memory map of available
physical RAM by using the following kernel command line parameter.
+
+ =============== ================================================
add_efi_memmap include EFI memory map of available physical RAM
+ =============== ================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
index 68aed077f7b6..fc4554e038d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=========
+Zero Page
+=========
+
The additional fields in struct boot_params as a part of 32-bit boot
protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit
real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly
@@ -5,36 +9,39 @@ are in:
arch/x86/include/uapi/asm/bootparam.h
-
+======= ===== ======================= =======================================
Offset Proto Name Meaning
/Size
-
-000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information
- (struct screen_info)
-040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information (struct apm_bios_info)
-058/008 ALL tboot_addr Physical address of tboot shared page
-060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support information
- (struct ist_info)
-080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
-090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
-0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table (struct sys_desc_table),
- OBSOLETE!!
-0B0/010 ALL olpc_ofw_header OLPC's OpenFirmware CIF and friends
-0C0/004 ALL ext_ramdisk_image ramdisk_image high 32bits
-0C4/004 ALL ext_ramdisk_size ramdisk_size high 32bits
-0C8/004 ALL ext_cmd_line_ptr cmd_line_ptr high 32bits
-140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info)
-1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info)
-1E0/004 ALL alt_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB
-1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code
-1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_table (below)
-1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below)
+======= ===== ======================= =======================================
+000/040 ALL screen_info Text mode or frame buffer information
+ (struct screen_info)
+040/014 ALL apm_bios_info APM BIOS information
+ (struct apm_bios_info)
+058/008 ALL tboot_addr Physical address of tboot shared page
+060/010 ALL ist_info Intel SpeedStep (IST) BIOS support
+ information
+ (struct ist_info)
+080/010 ALL hd0_info hd0 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
+090/010 ALL hd1_info hd1 disk parameter, OBSOLETE!!
+0A0/010 ALL sys_desc_table System description table
+ (struct sys_desc_table), OBSOLETE!!
+0B0/010 ALL olpc_ofw_header OLPC's OpenFirmware CIF and friends
+0C0/004 ALL ext_ramdisk_image ramdisk_image high 32bits
+0C4/004 ALL ext_ramdisk_size ramdisk_size high 32bits
+0C8/004 ALL ext_cmd_line_ptr cmd_line_ptr high 32bits
+140/080 ALL edid_info Video mode setup (struct edid_info)
+1C0/020 ALL efi_info EFI 32 information (struct efi_info)
+1E0/004 ALL alt_mem_k Alternative mem check, in KB
+1E4/004 ALL scratch Scratch field for the kernel setup code
+1E8/001 ALL e820_entries Number of entries in e820_table (below)
+1E9/001 ALL eddbuf_entries Number of entries in eddbuf (below)
1EA/001 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buf_entries Number of entries in edd_mbr_sig_buffer
- (below)
-1EB/001 ALL kbd_status Numlock is enabled
-1EC/001 ALL secure_boot Secure boot is enabled in the firmware
-1EF/001 ALL sentinel Used to detect broken bootloaders
-290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures
-2D0/A00 ALL e820_table E820 memory map table
- (array of struct e820_entry)
-D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info)
+ (below)
+1EB/001 ALL kbd_status Numlock is enabled
+1EC/001 ALL secure_boot Secure boot is enabled in the firmware
+1EF/001 ALL sentinel Used to detect broken bootloaders
+290/040 ALL edd_mbr_sig_buffer EDD MBR signatures
+2D0/A00 ALL e820_table E820 memory map table
+ (array of struct e820_entry)
+D00/1EC ALL eddbuf EDD data (array of struct edd_info)
+======= ===== ======================= =======================================
--
2.20.1
Convert USB documents to ReST, in order to prepare for adding it
to the kernel API book, as most of the stuff there are driver or
subsystem-related.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt | 56 +-
Documentation/usb/acm.txt | 156 +++---
Documentation/usb/authorization.txt | 75 +--
Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt | 101 ++--
Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 12 +-
Documentation/usb/ehci.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt | 17 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt | 609 ++++++++++++---------
Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt | 302 +++++-----
Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt | 175 +++---
Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt | 43 +-
Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt | 155 +++---
Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt | 73 +--
Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt | 34 +-
Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt | 19 +-
Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt | 9 +-
Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt | 42 +-
Documentation/usb/ohci.txt | 5 +-
Documentation/usb/rio.txt | 83 +--
Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt | 21 +-
Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt | 203 ++++---
Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt | 552 ++++++++++---------
Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt | 100 ++--
23 files changed, 1654 insertions(+), 1230 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
index fdb47637720e..dc5e21609bb5 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+================================
Linux UWB + Wireless USB + WiNET
+================================
+
+ Copyright (C) 2005-2006 Intel Corporation
- (C) 2005-2006 Intel Corporation
Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <[email protected]>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
@@ -29,6 +31,7 @@ drivers for the USB based UWB radio controllers defined in the
Wireless USB 1.0 specification (including Wireless USB host controller
and an Intel WiNET controller).
+.. Contents
1. Introduction
1. HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
@@ -51,7 +54,8 @@ and an Intel WiNET controller).
4. Glossary
- Introduction
+Introduction
+============
UWB is a wide-band communication protocol that is to serve also as the
low-level protocol for others (much like TCP sits on IP). Currently
@@ -93,7 +97,8 @@ The different logical parts of this driver are:
do the actual WUSB.
- HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
+HWA: Host Wire adapters, your Wireless USB dongle
+-------------------------------------------------
WUSB also defines a device called a Host Wire Adaptor (HWA), which in
mere terms is a USB dongle that enables your PC to have UWB and Wireless
@@ -125,7 +130,8 @@ The HWA itself is broken in two or three main interfaces:
their type and kick into gear.
- DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired devices
+DWA: Device Wired Adaptor, a Wireless USB hub for wired devices
+---------------------------------------------------------------
These are the complement to HWAs. They are a USB host for connecting
wired devices, but it is connected to your PC connected via Wireless
@@ -137,7 +143,8 @@ code with the HWA-RC driver; there is a bunch of factorization work that
has been done to support that in upcoming releases.
- WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host adapter
+WHCI: Wireless Host Controller Interface, the PCI WUSB host adapter
+-------------------------------------------------------------------
This is your usual PCI device that implements WHCI. Similar in concept
to EHCI, it allows your wireless USB devices (including DWAs) to connect
@@ -148,7 +155,8 @@ There is still no driver support for this, but will be in upcoming
releases.
- The UWB stack
+The UWB stack
+=============
The main mission of the UWB stack is to keep a tally of which devices
are in radio proximity to allow drivers to connect to them. As well, it
@@ -156,7 +164,8 @@ provides an API for controlling the local radio controllers (RCs from
now on), such as to start/stop beaconing, scan, allocate bandwidth, etc.
- Devices and hosts: the basic structure
+Devices and hosts: the basic structure
+--------------------------------------
The main building block here is the UWB device (struct uwb_dev). For
each device that pops up in radio presence (ie: the UWB host receives a
@@ -187,7 +196,8 @@ the USB connected HWA. Eventually, drivers/whci-rc.c will do the same
for the PCI connected WHCI controller.
- Host Controller life cycle
+Host Controller life cycle
+--------------------------
So let's say we connect a dongle to the system: it is detected and
firmware uploaded if needed [for Intel's i1480
@@ -209,7 +219,8 @@ When a dongle is disconnected, /drivers/uwb/hwa-rc.c:hwarc_disconnect()/
takes time of tearing everything down safely (or not...).
- On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood
+On the air: beacons and enumerating the radio neighborhood
+----------------------------------------------------------
So assuming we have devices and we have agreed for a channel to connect
on (let's say 9), we put the new RC to beacon:
@@ -235,12 +246,14 @@ are received in some time, the device is considered gone and wiped out
the beacon cache of dead devices].
- Device lists
+Device lists
+------------
All UWB devices are kept in the list of the struct bus_type uwb_bus_type.
- Bandwidth allocation
+Bandwidth allocation
+--------------------
The UWB stack maintains a local copy of DRP availability through
processing of incoming *DRP Availability Change* notifications. This
@@ -260,7 +273,8 @@ completion. [Note: The bandwidth reservation work is in progress and
subject to change.]
- Wireless USB Host Controller drivers
+Wireless USB Host Controller drivers
+====================================
*WARNING* This section needs a lot of work!
@@ -296,7 +310,8 @@ starts sending MMCs.
Now it all depends on external stimuli.
-*New device connection*
+New device connection
+---------------------
A new device pops up, it scans the radio looking for MMCs that give out
the existence of Wireless USB channels. Once one (or more) are found,
@@ -322,7 +337,8 @@ has seen the port status changes, as we have been toggling them. It will
start enumerating and doing transfers through usb_hcd->urb_enqueue() to
read descriptors and move our data.
-*Device life cycle and keep alives*
+Device life cycle and keep alives
+---------------------------------
Every time there is a successful transfer to/from a device, we update a
per-device activity timestamp. If not, every now and then we check and
@@ -340,7 +356,8 @@ device list looking for whom needs refreshing.
If the device wants to disconnect, it will either die (ugly) or send a
/DN_Disconnect/ that will prompt a disconnection from the system.
-*Sending and receiving data*
+Sending and receiving data
+--------------------------
Data is sent and received through /Remote Pipes/ (rpipes). An rpipe is
/aimed/ at an endpoint in a WUSB device. This is the same for HWAs and
@@ -394,7 +411,8 @@ finalize the transfer.
For IN xfers, we only issue URBs for the segments we want to read and
then wait for the xfer result data.
-*URB mapping into xfers*
+URB mapping into xfers
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
This is done by hwahc_op_urb_[en|de]queue(). In enqueue() we aim an
rpipe to the endpoint where we have to transmit, create a transfer
@@ -407,7 +425,8 @@ and not yet done and when all that is done, the xfer callback will be
called--this will call the URB callback.
- Glossary
+Glossary
+========
*DWA* -- Device Wire Adapter
@@ -436,4 +455,3 @@ the host.
Design-overview.txt-1.8 (last edited 2006-11-04 12:22:24 by
InakyPerezGonzalez)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/acm.txt b/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
index 903abca10517..e8bda98e9b51 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/acm.txt
@@ -1,127 +1,131 @@
- Linux ACM driver v0.16
- (c) 1999 Vojtech Pavlik <[email protected]>
- Sponsored by SuSE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+======================
+Linux ACM driver v0.16
+======================
+
+Copyright (c) 1999 Vojtech Pavlik <[email protected]>
+
+Sponsored by SuSE
0. Disclaimer
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
more details.
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
- Should you need to contact me, the author, you can do so either by e-mail
-- mail your message to <[email protected]>, or by paper mail: Vojtech Pavlik,
+Should you need to contact me, the author, you can do so either by e-mail -
+mail your message to <[email protected]>, or by paper mail: Vojtech Pavlik,
Ucitelska 1576, Prague 8, 182 00 Czech Republic
- For your convenience, the GNU General Public License version 2 is included
+For your convenience, the GNU General Public License version 2 is included
in the package: See the file COPYING.
1. Usage
~~~~~~~~
- The drivers/usb/class/cdc-acm.c drivers works with USB modems and USB ISDN terminal
+The drivers/usb/class/cdc-acm.c drivers works with USB modems and USB ISDN terminal
adapters that conform to the Universal Serial Bus Communication Device Class
Abstract Control Model (USB CDC ACM) specification.
- Many modems do, here is a list of those I know of:
+Many modems do, here is a list of those I know of:
- 3Com OfficeConnect 56k
- 3Com Voice FaxModem Pro
- 3Com Sportster
- MultiTech MultiModem 56k
- Zoom 2986L FaxModem
- Compaq 56k FaxModem
- ELSA Microlink 56k
+ - 3Com OfficeConnect 56k
+ - 3Com Voice FaxModem Pro
+ - 3Com Sportster
+ - MultiTech MultiModem 56k
+ - Zoom 2986L FaxModem
+ - Compaq 56k FaxModem
+ - ELSA Microlink 56k
- I know of one ISDN TA that does work with the acm driver:
+I know of one ISDN TA that does work with the acm driver:
- 3Com USR ISDN Pro TA
+ - 3Com USR ISDN Pro TA
- Some cell phones also connect via USB. I know the following phones work:
+Some cell phones also connect via USB. I know the following phones work:
- SonyEricsson K800i
+ - SonyEricsson K800i
- Unfortunately many modems and most ISDN TAs use proprietary interfaces and
+Unfortunately many modems and most ISDN TAs use proprietary interfaces and
thus won't work with this drivers. Check for ACM compliance before buying.
- To use the modems you need these modules loaded:
+To use the modems you need these modules loaded::
usbcore.ko
uhci-hcd.ko ohci-hcd.ko or ehci-hcd.ko
cdc-acm.ko
- After that, the modem[s] should be accessible. You should be able to use
+After that, the modem[s] should be accessible. You should be able to use
minicom, ppp and mgetty with them.
2. Verifying that it works
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The first step would be to check /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices, it should look
-like this:
-T: Bus=01 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2
-B: Alloc= 0/900 us ( 0%), #Int= 0, #Iso= 0
-D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1
-P: Vendor=0000 ProdID=0000 Rev= 0.00
-S: Product=USB UHCI Root Hub
-S: SerialNumber=6800
-C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=40 MxPwr= 0mA
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub
-E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl=255ms
-T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 0
-D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 2
-P: Vendor=04c1 ProdID=008f Rev= 2.07
-S: Manufacturer=3Com Inc.
-S: Product=3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
-S: SerialNumber=UFT53A49BVT7
-C: #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=60 MxPwr= 0mA
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=ff Prot=ff Driver=acm
-E: Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
-E: Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
-E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 16 Ivl=128ms
-C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=60 MxPwr= 0mA
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 16 Ivl=128ms
-I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-E: Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
-E: Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
+The first step would be to check /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices, it should look
+like this::
+
+ T: Bus=01 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2
+ B: Alloc= 0/900 us ( 0%), #Int= 0, #Iso= 0
+ D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1
+ P: Vendor=0000 ProdID=0000 Rev= 0.00
+ S: Product=USB UHCI Root Hub
+ S: SerialNumber=6800
+ C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=40 MxPwr= 0mA
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub
+ E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl=255ms
+ T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 0
+ D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 2
+ P: Vendor=04c1 ProdID=008f Rev= 2.07
+ S: Manufacturer=3Com Inc.
+ S: Product=3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
+ S: SerialNumber=UFT53A49BVT7
+ C: #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=60 MxPwr= 0mA
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=ff Prot=ff Driver=acm
+ E: Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
+ E: Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
+ E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 16 Ivl=128ms
+ C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=60 MxPwr= 0mA
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+ E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 16 Ivl=128ms
+ I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+ E: Ad=85(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
+ E: Ad=04(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 64 Ivl= 0ms
The presence of these three lines (and the Cls= 'comm' and 'data' classes)
is important, it means it's an ACM device. The Driver=acm means the acm
driver is used for the device. If you see only Cls=ff(vend.) then you're out
-of luck, you have a device with vendor specific-interface.
+of luck, you have a device with vendor specific-interface::
-D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 2
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+ D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 2
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+ I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-In the system log you should see:
+In the system log you should see::
-usb.c: USB new device connect, assigned device number 2
-usb.c: kmalloc IF c7691fa0, numif 1
-usb.c: kmalloc IF c7b5f3e0, numif 2
-usb.c: skipped 4 class/vendor specific interface descriptors
-usb.c: new device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
-usb.c: USB device number 2 default language ID 0x409
-Manufacturer: 3Com Inc.
-Product: 3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
-SerialNumber: UFT53A49BVT7
-acm.c: probing config 1
-acm.c: probing config 2
-ttyACM0: USB ACM device
-acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x22 val: 0x0 len: 0x0 result: 0
-acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x20 val: 0x0 len: 0x7 result: 7
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3e0
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3f8
-usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7691fa0
+ usb.c: USB new device connect, assigned device number 2
+ usb.c: kmalloc IF c7691fa0, numif 1
+ usb.c: kmalloc IF c7b5f3e0, numif 2
+ usb.c: skipped 4 class/vendor specific interface descriptors
+ usb.c: new device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3
+ usb.c: USB device number 2 default language ID 0x409
+ Manufacturer: 3Com Inc.
+ Product: 3Com U.S. Robotics Pro ISDN TA
+ SerialNumber: UFT53A49BVT7
+ acm.c: probing config 1
+ acm.c: probing config 2
+ ttyACM0: USB ACM device
+ acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x22 val: 0x0 len: 0x0 result: 0
+ acm.c: acm_control_msg: rq: 0x20 val: 0x0 len: 0x7 result: 7
+ usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3e0
+ usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7b5f3f8
+ usb.c: acm driver claimed interface c7691fa0
If all this seems to be OK, fire up minicom and set it to talk to the ttyACM
device and try typing 'at'. If it responds with 'OK', then everything is
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
index 9dd1dc7b1009..9e53909d04c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
-
+==============================================================
Authorizing (or not) your USB devices to connect to the system
+==============================================================
-(C) 2007 Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <[email protected]> Intel Corporation
+Copyright (C) 2007 Inaky Perez-Gonzalez <[email protected]> Intel Corporation
This feature allows you to control if a USB device can be used (or
not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down
@@ -12,24 +13,25 @@ its interfaces are immediately made available to the users. With this
modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will
then it be possible to use it.
-Usage:
+Usage
+=====
-Authorize a device to connect:
+Authorize a device to connect::
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+ $ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
-Deauthorize a device:
+De-authorize a device::
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
+ $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/DEVICE/authorized
Set new devices connected to hostX to be deauthorized by default (ie:
-lock down):
+lock down)::
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+ $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
-Remove the lock down:
+Remove the lock down::
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
+ $ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/authorized_default
By default, Wired USB devices are authorized by default to
connect. Wireless USB hosts deauthorize by default all new connected
@@ -40,21 +42,21 @@ USB ports.
Example system lockdown (lame)
------------------------
+------------------------------
Imagine you want to implement a lockdown so only devices of type XYZ
can be connected (for example, it is a kiosk machine with a visible
-USB port):
+USB port)::
-boot up
-rc.local ->
+ boot up
+ rc.local ->
- for host in /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb*
- do
- echo 0 > $host/authorized_default
- done
+ for host in /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb*
+ do
+ echo 0 > $host/authorized_default
+ done
-Hookup an script to udev, for new USB devices
+Hookup an script to udev, for new USB devices::
if device_is_my_type $DEV
then
@@ -67,10 +69,10 @@ checking if the class, type and protocol match something is the worse
security verification you can make (or the best, for someone willing
to break it). If you need something secure, use crypto and Certificate
Authentication or stuff like that. Something simple for an storage key
-could be:
+could be::
-function device_is_my_type()
-{
+ function device_is_my_type()
+ {
echo 1 > authorized # temporarily authorize it
# FIXME: make sure none can mount it
mount DEVICENODE /mntpoint
@@ -83,7 +85,7 @@ function device_is_my_type()
else
echo 0 > authorized
fi
-}
+ }
Of course, this is lame, you'd want to do a real certificate
@@ -95,30 +97,35 @@ welcome.
Interface authorization
-----------------------
+
There is a similar approach to allow or deny specific USB interfaces.
That allows to block only a subset of an USB device.
-Authorize an interface:
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+Authorize an interface::
-Deauthorize an interface:
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+ $ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
+
+Deauthorize an interface::
+
+ $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/INTERFACE/authorized
The default value for new interfaces
on a particular USB bus can be changed, too.
-Allow interfaces per default:
-$ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+Allow interfaces per default::
-Deny interfaces per default:
-$ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+ $ echo 1 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
+
+Deny interfaces per default::
+
+ $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usbX/interface_authorized_default
Per default the interface_authorized_default bit is 1.
So all interfaces would authorized per default.
Note:
-If a deauthorized interface will be authorized so the driver probing must
-be triggered manually by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe
+ If a deauthorized interface will be authorized so the driver probing must
+ be triggered manually by writing INTERFACE to /sys/bus/usb/drivers_probe
For drivers that need multiple interfaces all needed interfaces should be
authorized first. After that the drivers should be probed.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
index d1eedc01b00a..68473abe2823 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,37 @@
+==============================================
+ChipIdea Highspeed Dual Role Controller Driver
+==============================================
+
1. How to test OTG FSM(HNP and SRP)
-----------------------------------
+
To show how to demo OTG HNP and SRP functions via sys input files
with 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards.
1.1 How to enable OTG FSM
----------------------------------------
+-------------------------
+
1.1.1 Select CONFIG_USB_OTG_FSM in menuconfig, rebuild kernel
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Image and modules. If you want to check some internal
variables for otg fsm, mount debugfs, there are 2 files
-which can show otg fsm variables and some controller registers value:
-cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/otg
-cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
+which can show otg fsm variables and some controller registers value::
+
+ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/otg
+ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
+
1.1.2 Add below entries in your dts file for your controller node
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
+
otg-rev = <0x0200>;
adp-disable;
1.2 Test operations
-------------------
+
1) Power up 2 Freescale i.MX6Q sabre SD boards with gadget class driver loaded
(e.g. g_mass_storage).
@@ -26,19 +41,24 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
The A-device(with micro A plug inserted) should enumerate B-device.
3) Role switch
- On B-device:
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+ On B-device::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
B-device should take host role and enumerate A-device.
4) A-device switch back to host.
- On B-device:
- echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+ On B-device::
+
+ echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
or, by introducing HNP polling, B-Host can know when A-peripheral wish
to be host role, so this role switch also can be trigged in A-peripheral
- side by answering the polling from B-Host, this can be done on A-device:
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
+ side by answering the polling from B-Host, this can be done on A-device::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
A-device should switch back to host and enumerate B-device.
@@ -49,23 +69,31 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
A-device should NOT enumerate B-device.
if A-device wants to use bus:
- On A-device:
- echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
+
+ On A-device::
+
+ echo 0 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_req
if B-device wants to use bus:
- On B-device:
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+ On B-device::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
7) A-device power down the bus.
- On A-device:
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
+
+ On A-device::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/a_bus_drop
A-device should disconnect with B-device and power down the bus.
8) B-device does data pulse for SRP.
- On B-device:
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
+
+ On B-device::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/inputs/b_bus_req
A-device should resume usb bus and enumerate B-device.
@@ -75,22 +103,31 @@ cat /sys/kernel/debug/ci_hdrc.0/registers
July 27, 2012 Revision 2.0 version 1.1a"
2. How to enable USB as system wakeup source
------------------------------------
+--------------------------------------------
Below is the example for how to enable USB as system wakeup source
at imx6 platform.
-2.1 Enable core's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/power/wakeup
-2.2 Enable glue layer's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/2184000.usb/power/wakeup
-2.3 Enable PHY's wakeup (optional)
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/20c9000.usbphy/power/wakeup
-2.4 Enable roothub's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb1/power/wakeup
-2.5 Enable related device's wakeup
-echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/1-1/power/wakeup
+2.1 Enable core's wakeup::
+
+ echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/ci_hdrc.0/power/wakeup
+
+2.2 Enable glue layer's wakeup::
+
+ echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/2184000.usb/power/wakeup
+
+2.3 Enable PHY's wakeup (optional)::
+
+ echo enabled > /sys/bus/platform/devices/20c9000.usbphy/power/wakeup
+
+2.4 Enable roothub's wakeup::
+
+ echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/usb1/power/wakeup
+
+2.5 Enable related device's wakeup::
+
+ echo enabled > /sys/bus/usb/devices/1-1/power/wakeup
If the system has only one usb port, and you want usb wakeup at this port, you
-can use below script to enable usb wakeup.
-for i in $(find /sys -name wakeup | grep usb);do echo enabled > $i;done;
+can use below script to enable usb wakeup::
+ for i in $(find /sys -name wakeup | grep usb);do echo enabled > $i;done;
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
index 1d02c01d1c7c..f94a7ba16573 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,11 @@
+===========
+DWC3 driver
+===========
+
+
+TODO
+~~~~
- TODO
-~~~~~~
Please pick something while reading :)
- Convert interrupt handler to per-ep-thread-irq
@@ -9,6 +14,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
until the command completes which is bad.
Implementation idea:
+
- dwc core implements a demultiplexing irq chip for interrupts per
endpoint. The interrupt numbers are allocated during probe and belong
to the device. If MSI provides per-endpoint interrupt this dummy
@@ -19,6 +25,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
- dwc3_send_gadget_ep_cmd() will sleep in wait_for_completion_timeout()
until the command completes.
- the interrupt handler is split into the following pieces:
+
- primary handler of the device
goes through every event and calls generic_handle_irq() for event
it. On return from generic_handle_irq() in acknowledges the event
@@ -40,6 +47,7 @@ Please pick something while reading :)
for command completion.
Latency:
+
There should be no increase in latency since the interrupt-thread has a
high priority and will be run before an average task in user land
(except the user changed priorities).
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt b/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
index 160bd6c3ab7b..31f650e7c1b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/ehci.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===========
+EHCI driver
+===========
+
27-Dec-2002
The EHCI driver is used to talk to high speed USB 2.0 devices using
@@ -40,7 +44,8 @@ APIs exposed to USB device drivers.
<[email protected]>
-FUNCTIONALITY
+Functionality
+=============
This driver is regularly tested on x86 hardware, and has also been
used on PPC hardware so big/little endianness issues should be gone.
@@ -48,6 +53,7 @@ It's believed to do all the right PCI magic so that I/O works even on
systems with interesting DMA mapping issues.
Transfer Types
+--------------
At this writing the driver should comfortably handle all control, bulk,
and interrupt transfers, including requests to USB 1.1 devices through
@@ -63,6 +69,7 @@ since EHCI represents these with a different data structure. So for now,
most USB audio and video devices can't be connected to high speed buses.
Driver Behavior
+---------------
Transfers of all types can be queued. This means that control transfers
from a driver on one interface (or through usbfs) won't interfere with
@@ -83,14 +90,15 @@ limits on the number of periodic transactions that can be scheduled,
and prevent use of polling intervals of less than one frame.
-USE BY
+Use by
+======
Assuming you have an EHCI controller (on a PCI card or motherboard)
-and have compiled this driver as a module, load this like:
+and have compiled this driver as a module, load this like::
# modprobe ehci-hcd
-and remove it by:
+and remove it by::
# rmmod ehci-hcd
@@ -112,13 +120,16 @@ If you're using this driver on a 2.5 kernel, and you've enabled USB
debugging support, you'll see three files in the "sysfs" directory for
any EHCI controller:
- "async" dumps the asynchronous schedule, used for control
+ "async"
+ dumps the asynchronous schedule, used for control
and bulk transfers. Shows each active qh and the qtds
pending, usually one qtd per urb. (Look at it with
usb-storage doing disk I/O; watch the request queues!)
- "periodic" dumps the periodic schedule, used for interrupt
+ "periodic"
+ dumps the periodic schedule, used for interrupt
and isochronous transfers. Doesn't show qtds.
- "registers" show controller register state, and
+ "registers"
+ show controller register state, and
The contents of those files can help identify driver problems.
@@ -136,7 +147,8 @@ transaction translators are in use; some drivers have been seen to behave
badly when they see different faults than OHCI or UHCI report.
-PERFORMANCE
+Performance
+===========
USB 2.0 throughput is gated by two main factors: how fast the host
controller can process requests, and how fast devices can respond to
@@ -156,6 +168,7 @@ hardware and device driver software allow it. Periodic transfer modes
approach the quoted 480 MBit/sec transfer rate.
Hardware Performance
+--------------------
At this writing, individual USB 2.0 devices tend to max out at around
20 MByte/sec transfer rates. This is of course subject to change;
@@ -183,6 +196,7 @@ you issue a control or bulk request you can often expect to learn that
it completed in less than 250 usec (depending on transfer size).
Software Performance
+--------------------
To get even 20 MByte/sec transfer rates, Linux-USB device drivers will
need to keep the EHCI queue full. That means issuing large requests,
@@ -206,9 +220,11 @@ mapping (which might apply an IOMMU) and IRQ reduction, all of which will
help make high speed transfers run as fast as they can.
-TBD: Interrupt and ISO transfer performance issues. Those periodic
-transfers are fully scheduled, so the main issue is likely to be how
-to trigger "high bandwidth" modes.
+TBD:
+ Interrupt and ISO transfer performance issues. Those periodic
+ transfers are fully scheduled, so the main issue is likely to be how
+ to trigger "high bandwidth" modes.
-TBD: More than standard 80% periodic bandwidth allocation is possible
-through sysfs uframe_periodic_max parameter. Describe that.
+TBD:
+ More than standard 80% periodic bandwidth allocation is possible
+ through sysfs uframe_periodic_max parameter. Describe that.
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
index eaaaea019fc7..7fdc6d840ac5 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-*How FunctionFS works*
+====================
+How FunctionFS works
+====================
From kernel point of view it is just a composite function with some
unique behaviour. It may be added to an USB configuration only after
@@ -38,13 +40,13 @@ when mounting.
One can imagine a gadget that has an Ethernet, MTP and HID interfaces
where the last two are implemented via FunctionFS. On user space
-level it would look like this:
+level it would look like this::
-$ insmod g_ffs.ko idVendor=<ID> iSerialNumber=<string> functions=mtp,hid
-$ mkdir /dev/ffs-mtp && mount -t functionfs mtp /dev/ffs-mtp
-$ ( cd /dev/ffs-mtp && mtp-daemon ) &
-$ mkdir /dev/ffs-hid && mount -t functionfs hid /dev/ffs-hid
-$ ( cd /dev/ffs-hid && hid-daemon ) &
+ $ insmod g_ffs.ko idVendor=<ID> iSerialNumber=<string> functions=mtp,hid
+ $ mkdir /dev/ffs-mtp && mount -t functionfs mtp /dev/ffs-mtp
+ $ ( cd /dev/ffs-mtp && mtp-daemon ) &
+ $ mkdir /dev/ffs-hid && mount -t functionfs hid /dev/ffs-hid
+ $ ( cd /dev/ffs-hid && hid-daemon ) &
On kernel level the gadget checks ffs_data->dev_name to identify
whether it's FunctionFS designed for MTP ("mtp") or HID ("hid").
@@ -64,4 +66,3 @@ have been written to their ep0's.
Conversely, the gadget is unregistered after the first USB function
closes its endpoints.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
index 5908a21fddb6..7d7f2340af42 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt
@@ -1,26 +1,32 @@
+==============
+Gadget Testing
+==============
+
This file summarizes information on basic testing of USB functions
provided by gadgets.
-1. ACM function
-2. ECM function
-3. ECM subset function
-4. EEM function
-5. FFS function
-6. HID function
-7. LOOPBACK function
-8. MASS STORAGE function
-9. MIDI function
-10. NCM function
-11. OBEX function
-12. PHONET function
-13. RNDIS function
-14. SERIAL function
-15. SOURCESINK function
-16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
-17. UAC2 function
-18. UVC function
-19. PRINTER function
-20. UAC1 function (new API)
+.. contents
+
+ 1. ACM function
+ 2. ECM function
+ 3. ECM subset function
+ 4. EEM function
+ 5. FFS function
+ 6. HID function
+ 7. LOOPBACK function
+ 8. MASS STORAGE function
+ 9. MIDI function
+ 10. NCM function
+ 11. OBEX function
+ 12. PHONET function
+ 13. RNDIS function
+ 14. SERIAL function
+ 15. SOURCESINK function
+ 16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
+ 17. UAC2 function
+ 18. UVC function
+ 19. PRINTER function
+ 20. UAC1 function (new API)
1. ACM function
@@ -44,13 +50,23 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
Testing the ACM function
------------------------
-On the host: cat > /dev/ttyACM<X>
-On the device : cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+On the host::
+
+ cat > /dev/ttyACM<X>
+
+On the device::
+
+ cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
then the other way round
-On the device: cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
-On the host: cat /dev/ttyACM<X>
+On the device::
+
+ cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+
+On the host::
+
+ cat /dev/ttyACM<X>
2. ECM function
===============
@@ -63,13 +79,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "ecm".
The ECM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
- qmult - queue length multiplier for high and super speed
- host_addr - MAC address of host's end of this
+ qmult queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+ host_addr MAC address of host's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
- dev_addr - MAC address of device's end of this
+ dev_addr MAC address of device's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
+ =============== ==================================================
and after creating the functions/ecm.<instance name> they contain default
values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -82,8 +100,13 @@ Testing the ECM function
Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+ ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+ ping <device's IP>
3. ECM subset function
======================
@@ -96,13 +119,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "geth".
The ECM subset function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
- qmult - queue length multiplier for high and super speed
- host_addr - MAC address of host's end of this
+ qmult queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+ host_addr MAC address of host's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
- dev_addr - MAC address of device's end of this
+ dev_addr MAC address of device's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
+ =============== ==================================================
and after creating the functions/ecm.<instance name> they contain default
values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -115,8 +140,13 @@ Testing the ECM subset function
Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+ ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+ ping <device's IP>
4. EEM function
===============
@@ -129,13 +159,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "eem".
The EEM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
- qmult - queue length multiplier for high and super speed
- host_addr - MAC address of host's end of this
+ qmult queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+ host_addr MAC address of host's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
- dev_addr - MAC address of device's end of this
+ dev_addr MAC address of device's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
+ =============== ==================================================
and after creating the functions/eem.<instance name> they contain default
values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -148,8 +180,13 @@ Testing the EEM function
Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+ ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+ ping <device's IP>
5. FFS function
===============
@@ -172,6 +209,7 @@ Testing the FFS function
------------------------
On the device: start the function's userspace daemon, enable the gadget
+
On the host: use the USB function provided by the device
6. HID function
@@ -185,39 +223,43 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "hid".
The HID function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- protocol - HID protocol to use
- report_desc - data to be used in HID reports, except data
+ =============== ===========================================
+ protocol HID protocol to use
+ report_desc data to be used in HID reports, except data
passed with /dev/hidg<X>
- report_length - HID report length
- subclass - HID subclass to use
+ report_length HID report length
+ subclass HID subclass to use
+ =============== ===========================================
For a keyboard the protocol and the subclass are 1, the report_length is 8,
-while the report_desc is:
+while the report_desc is::
-$ hd my_report_desc
-00000000 05 01 09 06 a1 01 05 07 19 e0 29 e7 15 00 25 01 |..........)...%.|
-00000010 75 01 95 08 81 02 95 01 75 08 81 03 95 05 75 01 |u.......u.....u.|
-00000020 05 08 19 01 29 05 91 02 95 01 75 03 91 03 95 06 |....).....u.....|
-00000030 75 08 15 00 25 65 05 07 19 00 29 65 81 00 c0 |u...%e....)e...|
-0000003f
+ $ hd my_report_desc
+ 00000000 05 01 09 06 a1 01 05 07 19 e0 29 e7 15 00 25 01 |..........)...%.|
+ 00000010 75 01 95 08 81 02 95 01 75 08 81 03 95 05 75 01 |u.......u.....u.|
+ 00000020 05 08 19 01 29 05 91 02 95 01 75 03 91 03 95 06 |....).....u.....|
+ 00000030 75 08 15 00 25 65 05 07 19 00 29 65 81 00 c0 |u...%e....)e...|
+ 0000003f
-Such a sequence of bytes can be stored to the attribute with echo:
+Such a sequence of bytes can be stored to the attribute with echo::
-$ echo -ne \\x05\\x01\\x09\\x06\\xa1.....
+ $ echo -ne \\x05\\x01\\x09\\x06\\xa1.....
Testing the HID function
------------------------
Device:
+
- create the gadget
- connect the gadget to a host, preferably not the one used
-to control the gadget
+ to control the gadget
- run a program which writes to /dev/hidg<N>, e.g.
-a userspace program found in Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt:
+ a userspace program found in Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt::
-$ ./hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
+ $ ./hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
Host:
+
- observe the keystrokes from the gadget
7. LOOPBACK function
@@ -231,13 +273,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "Loopback".
The LOOPBACK function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- qlen - depth of loopback queue
- bulk_buflen - buffer length
+ =============== =======================
+ qlen depth of loopback queue
+ bulk_buflen buffer length
+ =============== =======================
Testing the LOOPBACK function
-----------------------------
device: run the gadget
+
host: test-usb (tools/usb/testusb.c)
8. MASS STORAGE function
@@ -252,18 +297,20 @@ The function name to use when creating the function directory is "mass_storage".
The MASS STORAGE function provides these attributes in its directory:
files:
- stall - Set to permit function to halt bulk endpoints.
+ =============== ==============================================
+ stall Set to permit function to halt bulk endpoints.
Disabled on some USB devices known not to work
correctly. You should set it to true.
- num_buffers - Number of pipeline buffers. Valid numbers
+ num_buffers Number of pipeline buffers. Valid numbers
are 2..4. Available only if
CONFIG_USB_GADGET_DEBUG_FILES is set.
+ =============== ==============================================
and a default lun.0 directory corresponding to SCSI LUN #0.
-A new lun can be added with mkdir:
+A new lun can be added with mkdir::
-$ mkdir functions/mass_storage.0/partition.5
+ $ mkdir functions/mass_storage.0/partition.5
Lun numbering does not have to be continuous, except for lun #0 which is
created by default. A maximum of 8 luns can be specified and they all must be
@@ -273,18 +320,20 @@ although it is not mandatory.
In each lun directory there are the following attribute files:
- file - The path to the backing file for the LUN.
+ =============== ==============================================
+ file The path to the backing file for the LUN.
Required if LUN is not marked as removable.
- ro - Flag specifying access to the LUN shall be
+ ro Flag specifying access to the LUN shall be
read-only. This is implied if CD-ROM emulation
is enabled as well as when it was impossible
to open "filename" in R/W mode.
- removable - Flag specifying that LUN shall be indicated as
+ removable Flag specifying that LUN shall be indicated as
being removable.
- cdrom - Flag specifying that LUN shall be reported as
+ cdrom Flag specifying that LUN shall be reported as
being a CD-ROM.
- nofua - Flag specifying that FUA flag
+ nofua Flag specifying that FUA flag
in SCSI WRITE(10,12)
+ =============== ==============================================
Testing the MASS STORAGE function
---------------------------------
@@ -304,12 +353,14 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "midi".
The MIDI function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- buflen - MIDI buffer length
- id - ID string for the USB MIDI adapter
- in_ports - number of MIDI input ports
- index - index value for the USB MIDI adapter
- out_ports - number of MIDI output ports
- qlen - USB read request queue length
+ =============== ====================================
+ buflen MIDI buffer length
+ id ID string for the USB MIDI adapter
+ in_ports number of MIDI input ports
+ index index value for the USB MIDI adapter
+ out_ports number of MIDI output ports
+ qlen USB read request queue length
+ =============== ====================================
Testing the MIDI function
-------------------------
@@ -317,60 +368,63 @@ Testing the MIDI function
There are two cases: playing a mid from the gadget to
the host and playing a mid from the host to the gadget.
-1) Playing a mid from the gadget to the host
-host)
+1) Playing a mid from the gadget to the host:
-$ arecordmidi -l
- Port Client name Port name
- 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
-$ arecordmidi -p 24:0 from_gadget.mid
+host::
-gadget)
+ $ arecordmidi -l
+ Port Client name Port name
+ 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
+ 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+ $ arecordmidi -p 24:0 from_gadget.mid
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port Client name Port name
- 20:0 f_midi f_midi
+gadget::
-$ aplaymidi -p 20:0 to_host.mid
+ $ aplaymidi -l
+ Port Client name Port name
+ 20:0 f_midi f_midi
+
+ $ aplaymidi -p 20:0 to_host.mid
2) Playing a mid from the host to the gadget
-gadget)
-$ arecordmidi -l
- Port Client name Port name
- 20:0 f_midi f_midi
+gadget::
-$ arecordmidi -p 20:0 from_host.mid
+ $ arecordmidi -l
+ Port Client name Port name
+ 20:0 f_midi f_midi
-host)
+ $ arecordmidi -p 20:0 from_host.mid
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port Client name Port name
- 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+host::
-$ aplaymidi -p24:0 to_gadget.mid
+ $ aplaymidi -l
+ Port Client name Port name
+ 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
+ 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+
+ $ aplaymidi -p24:0 to_gadget.mid
The from_gadget.mid should sound identical to the to_host.mid.
+
The from_host.id should sound identical to the to_gadget.mid.
-MIDI files can be played to speakers/headphones with e.g. timidity installed
+MIDI files can be played to speakers/headphones with e.g. timidity installed::
-$ aplaymidi -l
- Port Client name Port name
- 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
- 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
-128:0 TiMidity TiMidity port 0
-128:1 TiMidity TiMidity port 1
-128:2 TiMidity TiMidity port 2
-128:3 TiMidity TiMidity port 3
+ $ aplaymidi -l
+ Port Client name Port name
+ 14:0 Midi Through Midi Through Port-0
+ 24:0 MIDI Gadget MIDI Gadget MIDI 1
+ 128:0 TiMidity TiMidity port 0
+ 128:1 TiMidity TiMidity port 1
+ 128:2 TiMidity TiMidity port 2
+ 128:3 TiMidity TiMidity port 3
-$ aplaymidi -p 128:0 file.mid
+ $ aplaymidi -p 128:0 file.mid
-MIDI ports can be logically connected using the aconnect utility, e.g.:
+MIDI ports can be logically connected using the aconnect utility, e.g.::
-$ aconnect 24:0 128:0 # try it on the host
+ $ aconnect 24:0 128:0 # try it on the host
After the gadget's MIDI port is connected to timidity's MIDI port,
whatever is played at the gadget side with aplaymidi -l is audible
@@ -387,13 +441,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "ncm".
The NCM function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
- qmult - queue length multiplier for high and super speed
- host_addr - MAC address of host's end of this
+ qmult queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+ host_addr MAC address of host's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
- dev_addr - MAC address of device's end of this
+ dev_addr MAC address of device's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
+ =============== ==================================================
and after creating the functions/ncm.<instance name> they contain default
values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -406,8 +462,13 @@ Testing the NCM function
Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+ ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+ ping <device's IP>
11. OBEX function
=================
@@ -429,13 +490,18 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
Testing the OBEX function
-------------------------
-On device: seriald -f /dev/ttyGS<Y> -s 1024
-On host: serialc -v <vendorID> -p <productID> -i<interface#> -a1 -s1024 \
- -t<out endpoint addr> -r<in endpoint addr>
+On device::
+
+ seriald -f /dev/ttyGS<Y> -s 1024
+
+On host::
+
+ serialc -v <vendorID> -p <productID> -i<interface#> -a1 -s1024 \
+ -t<out endpoint addr> -r<in endpoint addr>
where seriald and serialc are Felipe's utilities found here:
-https://github.com/felipebalbi/usb-tools.git master
+ https://github.com/felipebalbi/usb-tools.git master
12. PHONET function
===================
@@ -448,8 +514,10 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "phonet".
The PHONET function provides just one attribute in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
+ =============== ==================================================
Testing the PHONET function
---------------------------
@@ -464,41 +532,41 @@ These tools are required:
git://git.gitorious.org/meego-cellular/phonet-utils.git
-On the host:
+On the host::
-$ ./phonet -a 0x10 -i usbpn0
-$ ./pnroute add 0x6c usbpn0
-$./pnroute add 0x10 usbpn0
-$ ifconfig usbpn0 up
+ $ ./phonet -a 0x10 -i usbpn0
+ $ ./pnroute add 0x6c usbpn0
+ $./pnroute add 0x10 usbpn0
+ $ ifconfig usbpn0 up
-On the device:
+On the device::
-$ ./phonet -a 0x6c -i upnlink0
-$ ./pnroute add 0x10 upnlink0
-$ ifconfig upnlink0 up
+ $ ./phonet -a 0x6c -i upnlink0
+ $ ./pnroute add 0x10 upnlink0
+ $ ifconfig upnlink0 up
-Then a test program can be used:
+Then a test program can be used::
-http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg85690.html
+ http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg85690.html
-On the device:
+On the device::
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -r
+ $ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -r
-On the host:
+On the host::
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -s 0x6c
+ $ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -s 0x6c
As a result some data should be sent from host to device.
Then the other way round:
-On the host:
+On the host::
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -r
+ $ ./pnxmit -a 0x10 -r
-On the device:
+On the device::
-$ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -s 0x10
+ $ ./pnxmit -a 0x6c -s 0x10
13. RNDIS function
==================
@@ -511,13 +579,15 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "rndis".
The RNDIS function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- ifname - network device interface name associated with this
+ =============== ==================================================
+ ifname network device interface name associated with this
function instance
- qmult - queue length multiplier for high and super speed
- host_addr - MAC address of host's end of this
+ qmult queue length multiplier for high and super speed
+ host_addr MAC address of host's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
- dev_addr - MAC address of device's end of this
+ dev_addr MAC address of device's end of this
Ethernet over USB link
+ =============== ==================================================
and after creating the functions/rndis.<instance name> they contain default
values: qmult is 5, dev_addr and host_addr are randomly selected.
@@ -530,8 +600,13 @@ Testing the RNDIS function
Configure IP addresses of the device and the host. Then:
-On the device: ping <host's IP>
-On the host: ping <device's IP>
+On the device::
+
+ ping <host's IP>
+
+On the host::
+
+ ping <device's IP>
14. SERIAL function
===================
@@ -553,15 +628,28 @@ There can be at most 4 ACM/generic serial/OBEX ports in the system.
Testing the SERIAL function
---------------------------
-On host: insmod usbserial
- echo VID PID >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
-On host: cat > /dev/ttyUSB<X>
-On target: cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+On host::
+
+ insmod usbserial
+ echo VID PID >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
+
+On host::
+
+ cat > /dev/ttyUSB<X>
+
+On target::
+
+ cat /dev/ttyGS<Y>
then the other way round
-On target: cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
-On host: cat /dev/ttyUSB<X>
+On target::
+
+ cat > /dev/ttyGS<Y>
+
+On host::
+
+ cat /dev/ttyUSB<X>
15. SOURCESINK function
=======================
@@ -574,24 +662,27 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "SourceSink".
The SOURCESINK function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- pattern - 0 (all zeros), 1 (mod63), 2 (none)
- isoc_interval - 1..16
- isoc_maxpacket - 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
- isoc_mult - 0..2 (hs/ss only)
- isoc_maxburst - 0..15 (ss only)
- bulk_buflen - buffer length
- bulk_qlen - depth of queue for bulk
- iso_qlen - depth of queue for iso
+ =============== ==================================
+ pattern 0 (all zeros), 1 (mod63), 2 (none)
+ isoc_interval 1..16
+ isoc_maxpacket 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
+ isoc_mult 0..2 (hs/ss only)
+ isoc_maxburst 0..15 (ss only)
+ bulk_buflen buffer length
+ bulk_qlen depth of queue for bulk
+ iso_qlen depth of queue for iso
+ =============== ==================================
Testing the SOURCESINK function
-------------------------------
device: run the gadget
+
host: test-usb (tools/usb/testusb.c)
16. UAC1 function (legacy implementation)
-=================
+=========================================
The function is provided by usb_f_uac1_legacy.ko module.
@@ -602,12 +693,14 @@ The function name to use when creating the function directory
is "uac1_legacy".
The uac1 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- audio_buf_size - audio buffer size
- fn_cap - capture pcm device file name
- fn_cntl - control device file name
- fn_play - playback pcm device file name
- req_buf_size - ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
- req_count - ISO OUT endpoint request count
+ =============== ====================================
+ audio_buf_size audio buffer size
+ fn_cap capture pcm device file name
+ fn_cntl control device file name
+ fn_play playback pcm device file name
+ req_buf_size ISO OUT endpoint request buffer size
+ req_count ISO OUT endpoint request count
+ =============== ====================================
The attributes have sane default values.
@@ -615,7 +708,10 @@ Testing the UAC1 function
-------------------------
device: run the gadget
-host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
+
+host::
+
+ aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
17. UAC2 function
=================
@@ -628,14 +724,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uac2".
The uac2 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- c_chmask - capture channel mask
- c_srate - capture sampling rate
- c_ssize - capture sample size (bytes)
- p_chmask - playback channel mask
- p_srate - playback sampling rate
- p_ssize - playback sample size (bytes)
- req_number - the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
- and playback
+ =============== ====================================================
+ c_chmask capture channel mask
+ c_srate capture sampling rate
+ c_ssize capture sample size (bytes)
+ p_chmask playback channel mask
+ p_srate playback sampling rate
+ p_ssize playback sample size (bytes)
+ req_number the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
+ and playback
+ =============== ====================================================
The attributes have sane default values.
@@ -648,14 +746,14 @@ host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
This function does not require real hardware support, it just
sends a stream of audio data to/from the host. In order to
actually hear something at the device side, a command similar
-to this must be used at the device side:
+to this must be used at the device side::
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
+ $ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC2Gadget,DEV=0 | \
-aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
+ $ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC2Gadget,DEV=0 | \
+ aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
18. UVC function
================
@@ -668,66 +766,73 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uvc".
The uvc function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- streaming_interval - interval for polling endpoint for data transfers
- streaming_maxburst - bMaxBurst for super speed companion descriptor
- streaming_maxpacket - maximum packet size this endpoint is capable of
- sending or receiving when this configuration is
- selected
+ =================== ================================================
+ streaming_interval interval for polling endpoint for data transfers
+ streaming_maxburst bMaxBurst for super speed companion descriptor
+ streaming_maxpacket maximum packet size this endpoint is capable of
+ sending or receiving when this configuration is
+ selected
+ =================== ================================================
There are also "control" and "streaming" subdirectories, each of which contain
a number of their subdirectories. There are some sane defaults provided, but
the user must provide the following:
- control header - create in control/header, link from control/class/fs
- and/or control/class/ss
- streaming header - create in streaming/header, link from
- streaming/class/fs and/or streaming/class/hs and/or
- streaming/class/ss
- format description - create in streaming/mjpeg and/or
- streaming/uncompressed
- frame description - create in streaming/mjpeg/<format> and/or in
- streaming/uncompressed/<format>
+ ================== ====================================================
+ control header create in control/header, link from control/class/fs
+ and/or control/class/ss
+ streaming header create in streaming/header, link from
+ streaming/class/fs and/or streaming/class/hs and/or
+ streaming/class/ss
+ format description create in streaming/mjpeg and/or
+ streaming/uncompressed
+ frame description create in streaming/mjpeg/<format> and/or in
+ streaming/uncompressed/<format>
+ ================== ====================================================
Each frame description contains frame interval specification, and each
such specification consists of a number of lines with an inverval value
-in each line. The rules stated above are best illustrated with an example:
+in each line. The rules stated above are best illustrated with an example::
-# mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/control/header/h
-# cd functions/uvc.usb0/control/
-# ln -s header/h class/fs
-# ln -s header/h class/ss
-# mkdir -p functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p
-# cat <<EOF > functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p/dwFrameInterval
-666666
-1000000
-5000000
-EOF
-# cd $GADGET_CONFIGFS_ROOT
-# mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
-# cd functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
-# ln -s ../../uncompressed/u
-# cd ../../class/fs
-# ln -s ../../header/h
-# cd ../../class/hs
-# ln -s ../../header/h
-# cd ../../class/ss
-# ln -s ../../header/h
+ # mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/control/header/h
+ # cd functions/uvc.usb0/control/
+ # ln -s header/h class/fs
+ # ln -s header/h class/ss
+ # mkdir -p functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p
+ # cat <<EOF > functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/uncompressed/u/360p/dwFrameInterval
+ 666666
+ 1000000
+ 5000000
+ EOF
+ # cd $GADGET_CONFIGFS_ROOT
+ # mkdir functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
+ # cd functions/uvc.usb0/streaming/header/h
+ # ln -s ../../uncompressed/u
+ # cd ../../class/fs
+ # ln -s ../../header/h
+ # cd ../../class/hs
+ # ln -s ../../header/h
+ # cd ../../class/ss
+ # ln -s ../../header/h
Testing the UVC function
------------------------
-device: run the gadget, modprobe vivid
+device: run the gadget, modprobe vivid::
-# uvc-gadget -u /dev/video<uvc video node #> -v /dev/video<vivid video node #>
+ # uvc-gadget -u /dev/video<uvc video node #> -v /dev/video<vivid video node #>
where uvc-gadget is this program:
-http://git.ideasonboard.org/uvc-gadget.git
+ http://git.ideasonboard.org/uvc-gadget.git
with these patches:
-http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg99220.html
-host: luvcview -f yuv
+ http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg99220.html
+
+host::
+
+ luvcview -f yuv
19. PRINTER function
====================
@@ -740,16 +845,19 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "printer".
The printer function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- pnp_string - Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
- q_len - Number of requests per endpoint
+ ========== ===========================================
+ pnp_string Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
+ q_len Number of requests per endpoint
+ ========== ===========================================
Testing the PRINTER function
----------------------------
The most basic testing:
-device: run the gadget
-# ls -l /devices/virtual/usb_printer_gadget/
+device: run the gadget::
+
+ # ls -l /devices/virtual/usb_printer_gadget/
should show g_printer<number>.
@@ -761,23 +869,28 @@ If udev is active, then e.g. /dev/usb/lp0 should appear.
host->device transmission:
-device:
-# cat /dev/g_printer<number>
-host:
-# cat > /dev/usb/lp0
+device::
-device->host transmission:
+ # cat /dev/g_printer<number>
-# cat > /dev/g_printer<number>
-host:
-# cat /dev/usb/lp0
+host::
+
+ # cat > /dev/usb/lp0
+
+device->host transmission::
+
+ # cat > /dev/g_printer<number>
+
+host::
+
+ # cat /dev/usb/lp0
More advanced testing can be done with the prn_example
described in Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt.
20. UAC1 function (virtual ALSA card, using u_audio API)
-=================
+========================================================
The function is provided by usb_f_uac1.ko module.
It will create a virtual ALSA card and the audio streams are simply
@@ -789,14 +902,16 @@ Function-specific configfs interface
The function name to use when creating the function directory is "uac1".
The uac1 function provides these attributes in its function directory:
- c_chmask - capture channel mask
- c_srate - capture sampling rate
- c_ssize - capture sample size (bytes)
- p_chmask - playback channel mask
- p_srate - playback sampling rate
- p_ssize - playback sample size (bytes)
- req_number - the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
- and playback
+ ========== ====================================================
+ c_chmask capture channel mask
+ c_srate capture sampling rate
+ c_ssize capture sample size (bytes)
+ p_chmask playback channel mask
+ p_srate playback sampling rate
+ p_ssize playback sample size (bytes)
+ req_number the number of pre-allocated request for both capture
+ and playback
+ ========== ====================================================
The attributes have sane default values.
@@ -809,11 +924,11 @@ host: aplay -l # should list our USB Audio Gadget
This function does not require real hardware support, it just
sends a stream of audio data to/from the host. In order to
actually hear something at the device side, a command similar
-to this must be used at the device side:
+to this must be used at the device side::
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
+ $ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:2,0 | aplay -D hw:0,0 &
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC1Gadget,DEV=0 | \
-aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
+ $ arecord -f dat -t wav -D hw:CARD=UAC1Gadget,DEV=0 | \
+ aplay -D default:CARD=OdroidU3
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
index b8cb38a98c19..54fb08baae22 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,9 @@
+============================================
+Linux USB gadget configured through configfs
+============================================
-
-
- Linux USB gadget configured through configfs
-
-
- 25th April 2013
+25th April 2013
@@ -26,7 +24,7 @@ Linux provides a number of functions for gadgets to use.
Creating a gadget means deciding what configurations there will be
and which functions each configuration will provide.
-Configfs (please see Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*) lends itself nicely
+Configfs (please see `Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*`) lends itself nicely
for the purpose of telling the kernel about the above mentioned decision.
This document is about how to do it.
@@ -51,44 +49,46 @@ Usage
made available through configfs can be seen here:
http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-usb/msg76388.html)
-$ modprobe libcomposite
-$ mount none $CONFIGFS_HOME -t configfs
+::
+
+ $ modprobe libcomposite
+ $ mount none $CONFIGFS_HOME -t configfs
where CONFIGFS_HOME is the mount point for configfs
1. Creating the gadgets
-----------------------
-For each gadget to be created its corresponding directory must be created:
+For each gadget to be created its corresponding directory must be created::
-$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/<gadget name>
+ $ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/<gadget name>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+ $ mkdir $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
-$ cd $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
+ $ cd $CONFIGFS_HOME/usb_gadget/g1
-Each gadget needs to have its vendor id <VID> and product id <PID> specified:
+Each gadget needs to have its vendor id <VID> and product id <PID> specified::
-$ echo <VID> > idVendor
-$ echo <PID> > idProduct
+ $ echo <VID> > idVendor
+ $ echo <PID> > idProduct
A gadget also needs its serial number, manufacturer and product strings.
In order to have a place to store them, a strings subdirectory must be created
-for each language, e.g.:
+for each language, e.g.::
-$ mkdir strings/0x409
+ $ mkdir strings/0x409
-Then the strings can be specified:
+Then the strings can be specified::
-$ echo <serial number> > strings/0x409/serialnumber
-$ echo <manufacturer> > strings/0x409/manufacturer
-$ echo <product> > strings/0x409/product
+ $ echo <serial number> > strings/0x409/serialnumber
+ $ echo <manufacturer> > strings/0x409/manufacturer
+ $ echo <product> > strings/0x409/product
2. Creating the configurations
------------------------------
@@ -99,43 +99,43 @@ directories must be created:
$ mkdir configs/<name>.<number>
where <name> can be any string which is legal in a filesystem and the
-<number> is the configuration's number, e.g.:
+<number> is the configuration's number, e.g.::
-$ mkdir configs/c.1
+ $ mkdir configs/c.1
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
Each configuration also needs its strings, so a subdirectory must be created
-for each language, e.g.:
+for each language, e.g.::
-$ mkdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+ $ mkdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
-Then the configuration string can be specified:
+Then the configuration string can be specified::
-$ echo <configuration> > configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+ $ echo <configuration> > configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
-Some attributes can also be set for a configuration, e.g.:
+Some attributes can also be set for a configuration, e.g.::
-$ echo 120 > configs/c.1/MaxPower
+ $ echo 120 > configs/c.1/MaxPower
3. Creating the functions
-------------------------
The gadget will provide some functions, for each function its corresponding
-directory must be created:
+directory must be created::
-$ mkdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+ $ mkdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
where <name> corresponds to one of allowed function names and instance name
-is an arbitrary string allowed in a filesystem, e.g.:
+is an arbitrary string allowed in a filesystem, e.g.::
-$ mkdir functions/ncm.usb0 # usb_f_ncm.ko gets loaded with request_module()
+ $ mkdir functions/ncm.usb0 # usb_f_ncm.ko gets loaded with request_module()
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
Each function provides its specific set of attributes, with either read-only
or read-write access. Where applicable they need to be written to as
@@ -149,17 +149,17 @@ At this moment a number of gadgets is created, each of which has a number of
configurations specified and a number of functions available. What remains
is specifying which function is available in which configuration (the same
function can be used in multiple configurations). This is achieved with
-creating symbolic links:
+creating symbolic links::
-$ ln -s functions/<name>.<instance name> configs/<name>.<number>
+ $ ln -s functions/<name>.<instance name> configs/<name>.<number>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
+ $ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
5. Enabling the gadget
----------------------
@@ -167,123 +167,127 @@ $ ln -s functions/ncm.usb0 configs/c.1
All the above steps serve the purpose of composing the gadget of
configurations and functions.
-An example directory structure might look like this:
+An example directory structure might look like this::
-.
-./strings
-./strings/0x409
-./strings/0x409/serialnumber
-./strings/0x409/product
-./strings/0x409/manufacturer
-./configs
-./configs/c.1
-./configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 -> ../../../../usb_gadget/g1/functions/ncm.usb0
-./configs/c.1/strings
-./configs/c.1/strings/0x409
-./configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
-./configs/c.1/bmAttributes
-./configs/c.1/MaxPower
-./functions
-./functions/ncm.usb0
-./functions/ncm.usb0/ifname
-./functions/ncm.usb0/qmult
-./functions/ncm.usb0/host_addr
-./functions/ncm.usb0/dev_addr
-./UDC
-./bcdUSB
-./bcdDevice
-./idProduct
-./idVendor
-./bMaxPacketSize0
-./bDeviceProtocol
-./bDeviceSubClass
-./bDeviceClass
+ .
+ ./strings
+ ./strings/0x409
+ ./strings/0x409/serialnumber
+ ./strings/0x409/product
+ ./strings/0x409/manufacturer
+ ./configs
+ ./configs/c.1
+ ./configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 -> ../../../../usb_gadget/g1/functions/ncm.usb0
+ ./configs/c.1/strings
+ ./configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+ ./configs/c.1/strings/0x409/configuration
+ ./configs/c.1/bmAttributes
+ ./configs/c.1/MaxPower
+ ./functions
+ ./functions/ncm.usb0
+ ./functions/ncm.usb0/ifname
+ ./functions/ncm.usb0/qmult
+ ./functions/ncm.usb0/host_addr
+ ./functions/ncm.usb0/dev_addr
+ ./UDC
+ ./bcdUSB
+ ./bcdDevice
+ ./idProduct
+ ./idVendor
+ ./bMaxPacketSize0
+ ./bDeviceProtocol
+ ./bDeviceSubClass
+ ./bDeviceClass
Such a gadget must be finally enabled so that the USB host can enumerate it.
-In order to enable the gadget it must be bound to a UDC (USB Device Controller).
-$ echo <udc name> > UDC
+In order to enable the gadget it must be bound to a UDC (USB Device
+Controller)::
+
+ $ echo <udc name> > UDC
where <udc name> is one of those found in /sys/class/udc/*
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ echo s3c-hsotg > UDC
+ $ echo s3c-hsotg > UDC
6. Disabling the gadget
-----------------------
-$ echo "" > UDC
+::
+
+ $ echo "" > UDC
7. Cleaning up
--------------
-Remove functions from configurations:
+Remove functions from configurations::
-$ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function>
+ $ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function>
where <config name>.<number> specify the configuration and <function> is
-a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.:
+a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.::
-$ rm configs/c.1/ncm.usb0
+ $ rm configs/c.1/ncm.usb0
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
-Remove strings directories in configurations
+Remove strings directories in configurations:
-$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>/strings/<lang>
+ $ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>/strings/<lang>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ rmdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
+ $ rmdir configs/c.1/strings/0x409
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
-and remove the configurations
+and remove the configurations::
-$ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>
+ $ rmdir configs/<config name>.<number>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-rmdir configs/c.1
+ rmdir configs/c.1
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
-Remove functions (function modules are not unloaded, though)
+Remove functions (function modules are not unloaded, though):
-$ rmdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
+ $ rmdir functions/<name>.<instance name>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ rmdir functions/ncm.usb0
+ $ rmdir functions/ncm.usb0
-...
-...
-...
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
-Remove strings directories in the gadget
+Remove strings directories in the gadget::
-$ rmdir strings/<lang>
+ $ rmdir strings/<lang>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ rmdir strings/0x409
+ $ rmdir strings/0x409
-and finally remove the gadget:
+and finally remove the gadget::
-$ cd ..
-$ rmdir <gadget name>
+ $ cd ..
+ $ rmdir <gadget name>
-e.g.:
+e.g.::
-$ rmdir g1
+ $ rmdir g1
@@ -305,16 +309,16 @@ configured elements. However, they are embedded in usage-specific
larger structures. In the picture below there is a "cs" which contains
a config_item and an "sa" which contains a configfs_attribute.
-The filesystem view would be like this:
+The filesystem view would be like this::
-./
-./cs (directory)
- |
- +--sa (file)
- |
- .
- .
- .
+ ./
+ ./cs (directory)
+ |
+ +--sa (file)
+ |
+ .
+ .
+ .
Whenever a user reads/writes the "sa" file, a function is called
which accepts a struct config_item and a struct configfs_attribute.
@@ -326,29 +330,31 @@ buffer), while the "store" is for modifying the file's contents (copy data
from the buffer to the cs), but it is up to the implementer of the
two functions to decide what they actually do.
-typedef struct configured_structure cs;
-typedef struct specific_attribute sa;
+::
- sa
- +----------------------------------+
- cs | (*show)(cs *, buffer); |
-+-----------------+ | (*store)(cs *, buffer, length); |
-| | | |
-| +-------------+ | | +------------------+ |
-| | struct |-|----|------>|struct | |
-| | config_item | | | |configfs_attribute| |
-| +-------------+ | | +------------------+ |
-| | +----------------------------------+
-| data to be set | .
-| | .
-+-----------------+ .
+ typedef struct configured_structure cs;
+ typedef struct specific_attribute sa;
+
+ sa
+ +----------------------------------+
+ cs | (*show)(cs *, buffer); |
+ +-----------------+ | (*store)(cs *, buffer, length); |
+ | | | |
+ | +-------------+ | | +------------------+ |
+ | | struct |-|----|------>|struct | |
+ | | config_item | | | |configfs_attribute| |
+ | +-------------+ | | +------------------+ |
+ | | +----------------------------------+
+ | data to be set | .
+ | | .
+ +-----------------+ .
The file names are decided by the config item/group designer, while
the directories in general can be named at will. A group can have
a number of its default sub-groups created automatically.
For more information on configfs please see
-Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*.
+`Documentation/filesystems/configfs/*`.
The concepts described above translate to USB gadgets like this:
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
index 7a0fb8e16e27..098d563040cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt
@@ -1,28 +1,31 @@
-
- Linux USB HID gadget driver
+===========================
+Linux USB HID gadget driver
+===========================
Introduction
+============
- The HID Gadget driver provides emulation of USB Human Interface
- Devices (HID). The basic HID handling is done in the kernel,
- and HID reports can be sent/received through I/O on the
- /dev/hidgX character devices.
+The HID Gadget driver provides emulation of USB Human Interface
+Devices (HID). The basic HID handling is done in the kernel,
+and HID reports can be sent/received through I/O on the
+/dev/hidgX character devices.
- For more details about HID, see the developer page on
- http://www.usb.org/developers/hidpage/
+For more details about HID, see the developer page on
+http://www.usb.org/developers/hidpage/
Configuration
+=============
- g_hid is a platform driver, so to use it you need to add
- struct platform_device(s) to your platform code defining the
- HID function descriptors you want to use - E.G. something
- like:
+g_hid is a platform driver, so to use it you need to add
+struct platform_device(s) to your platform code defining the
+HID function descriptors you want to use - E.G. something
+like::
-#include <linux/platform_device.h>
-#include <linux/usb/g_hid.h>
+ #include <linux/platform_device.h>
+ #include <linux/usb/g_hid.h>
-/* hid descriptor for a keyboard */
-static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
+ /* hid descriptor for a keyboard */
+ static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
.subclass = 0, /* No subclass */
.protocol = 1, /* Keyboard */
.report_length = 8,
@@ -61,85 +64,87 @@ static struct hidg_func_descriptor my_hid_data = {
0x81, 0x00, /* INPUT (Data,Ary,Abs) */
0xc0 /* END_COLLECTION */
}
-};
+ };
-static struct platform_device my_hid = {
+ static struct platform_device my_hid = {
.name = "hidg",
.id = 0,
.num_resources = 0,
.resource = 0,
.dev.platform_data = &my_hid_data,
-};
+ };
- You can add as many HID functions as you want, only limited by
- the amount of interrupt endpoints your gadget driver supports.
+You can add as many HID functions as you want, only limited by
+the amount of interrupt endpoints your gadget driver supports.
Configuration with configfs
+===========================
- Instead of adding fake platform devices and drivers in order to pass
- some data to the kernel, if HID is a part of a gadget composed with
- configfs the hidg_func_descriptor.report_desc is passed to the kernel
- by writing the appropriate stream of bytes to a configfs attribute.
+Instead of adding fake platform devices and drivers in order to pass
+some data to the kernel, if HID is a part of a gadget composed with
+configfs the hidg_func_descriptor.report_desc is passed to the kernel
+by writing the appropriate stream of bytes to a configfs attribute.
Send and receive HID reports
+============================
- HID reports can be sent/received using read/write on the
- /dev/hidgX character devices. See below for an example program
- to do this.
+HID reports can be sent/received using read/write on the
+/dev/hidgX character devices. See below for an example program
+to do this.
- hid_gadget_test is a small interactive program to test the HID
- gadget driver. To use, point it at a hidg device and set the
- device type (keyboard / mouse / joystick) - E.G.:
+hid_gadget_test is a small interactive program to test the HID
+gadget driver. To use, point it at a hidg device and set the
+device type (keyboard / mouse / joystick) - E.G.::
- # hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
+ # hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg0 keyboard
- You are now in the prompt of hid_gadget_test. You can type any
- combination of options and values. Available options and
- values are listed at program start. In keyboard mode you can
- send up to six values.
+You are now in the prompt of hid_gadget_test. You can type any
+combination of options and values. Available options and
+values are listed at program start. In keyboard mode you can
+send up to six values.
- For example type: g i s t r --left-shift
+For example type: g i s t r --left-shift
- Hit return and the corresponding report will be sent by the
- HID gadget.
+Hit return and the corresponding report will be sent by the
+HID gadget.
- Another interesting example is the caps lock test. Type
- --caps-lock and hit return. A report is then sent by the
- gadget and you should receive the host answer, corresponding
- to the caps lock LED status.
+Another interesting example is the caps lock test. Type
+--caps-lock and hit return. A report is then sent by the
+gadget and you should receive the host answer, corresponding
+to the caps lock LED status::
- --caps-lock
- recv report:2
+ --caps-lock
+ recv report:2
- With this command:
+With this command::
- # hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg1 mouse
+ # hid_gadget_test /dev/hidg1 mouse
- You can test the mouse emulation. Values are two signed numbers.
+You can test the mouse emulation. Values are two signed numbers.
-Sample code
+Sample code::
-/* hid_gadget_test */
+ /* hid_gadget_test */
-#include <pthread.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
+ #include <pthread.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <ctype.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
-#define BUF_LEN 512
+ #define BUF_LEN 512
-struct options {
+ struct options {
const char *opt;
unsigned char val;
-};
+ };
-static struct options kmod[] = {
+ static struct options kmod[] = {
{.opt = "--left-ctrl", .val = 0x01},
{.opt = "--right-ctrl", .val = 0x10},
{.opt = "--left-shift", .val = 0x02},
@@ -149,9 +154,9 @@ static struct options kmod[] = {
{.opt = "--left-meta", .val = 0x08},
{.opt = "--right-meta", .val = 0x80},
{.opt = NULL}
-};
+ };
-static struct options kval[] = {
+ static struct options kval[] = {
{.opt = "--return", .val = 0x28},
{.opt = "--esc", .val = 0x29},
{.opt = "--bckspc", .val = 0x2a},
@@ -183,10 +188,10 @@ static struct options kval[] = {
{.opt = "--up", .val = 0x52},
{.opt = "--num-lock", .val = 0x53},
{.opt = NULL}
-};
+ };
-int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+ int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+ {
char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
int key = 0;
int i = 0;
@@ -229,17 +234,17 @@ int keyboard_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
}
return 8;
-}
+ }
-static struct options mmod[] = {
+ static struct options mmod[] = {
{.opt = "--b1", .val = 0x01},
{.opt = "--b2", .val = 0x02},
{.opt = "--b3", .val = 0x04},
{.opt = NULL}
-};
+ };
-int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+ int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+ {
char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
int mvt = 0;
int i = 0;
@@ -274,9 +279,9 @@ int mouse_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
}
return 3;
-}
+ }
-static struct options jmod[] = {
+ static struct options jmod[] = {
{.opt = "--b1", .val = 0x10},
{.opt = "--b2", .val = 0x20},
{.opt = "--b3", .val = 0x40},
@@ -287,10 +292,10 @@ static struct options jmod[] = {
{.opt = "--hat4", .val = 0x03},
{.opt = "--hatneutral", .val = 0x04},
{.opt = NULL}
-};
+ };
-int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
-{
+ int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
+ {
char *tok = strtok(buf, " ");
int mvt = 0;
int i = 0;
@@ -326,10 +331,10 @@ int joystick_fill_report(char report[8], char buf[BUF_LEN], int *hold)
fprintf(stderr, "unknown option: %s\n", tok);
}
return 4;
-}
+ }
-void print_options(char c)
-{
+ void print_options(char c)
+ {
int i = 0;
if (c == 'k') {
@@ -358,10 +363,10 @@ void print_options(char c)
" three signed numbers\n"
"--quit to close\n");
}
-}
+ }
-int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
-{
+ int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
+ {
const char *filename = NULL;
int fd = 0;
char buf[BUF_LEN];
@@ -449,4 +454,4 @@ int main(int argc, const char *argv[])
close(fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
index b3146dd7aa43..9806b55af301 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
- -*- org -*-
+==============================
+Multifunction Composite Gadget
+==============================
-* Overview
+Overview
+========
The Multifunction Composite Gadget (or g_multi) is a composite gadget
that makes extensive use of the composite framework to provide
@@ -17,13 +20,15 @@ have two configurations -- one with RNDIS and another with CDC ECM[3].
Please note that if you use non-standard configuration (that is enable
CDC ECM) you may need to change vendor and/or product ID.
-* Host drivers
+Host drivers
+============
To make use of the gadget one needs to make it work on host side --
without that there's no hope of achieving anything with the gadget.
As one might expect, things one need to do very from system to system.
-** Linux host drivers
+Linux host drivers
+------------------
Since the gadget uses standard composite framework and appears as such
to Linux host it does not need any additional drivers on Linux host
@@ -34,11 +39,13 @@ This is also true for two configuration set-up with RNDIS
configuration being the first one. Linux host will use the second
configuration with CDC ECM which should work better under Linux.
-** Windows host drivers
+Windows host drivers
+--------------------
For the gadget to work under Windows two conditions have to be met:
-*** Detecting as composite gadget
+Detecting as composite gadget
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
First of all, Windows need to detect the gadget as an USB composite
gadget which on its own have some conditions[4]. If they are met,
@@ -53,7 +60,8 @@ The only thing to worry is that the gadget has to have a single
configuration so a dual RNDIS and CDC ECM gadget won't work unless you
create a proper INF -- and of course, if you do submit it!
-*** Installing drivers for each function
+Installing drivers for each function
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The other, trickier thing is making Windows install drivers for each
individual function.
@@ -63,7 +71,8 @@ implementing USB Mass Storage class and selects appropriate driver.
Things are harder with RDNIS and CDC ACM.
-**** RNDIS
+RNDIS
+.....
To make Windows select RNDIS drivers for the first function in the
gadget, one needs to use the [[file:linux.inf]] file provided with this
@@ -75,11 +84,13 @@ RNDIS was not the first interface. You do not need to worry abut it
unless you are trying to develop your own gadget in which case watch
out for this bug.
-**** CDC ACM
+CDC ACM
+.......
Similarly, [[file:linux-cdc-acm.inf]] is provided for CDC ACM.
-**** Customising the gadget
+Customising the gadget
+......................
If you intend to hack the g_multi gadget be advised that rearranging
functions will obviously change interface numbers for each of the
@@ -97,14 +108,16 @@ things don't work as intended before realising Windows have cached
some drivers information (changing USB port may sometimes help plus
you might try using USBDeview[8] to remove the phantom device).
-**** INF testing
+INF testing
+...........
Provided INF files have been tested on Windows XP SP3, Windows Vista
and Windows 7, all 32-bit versions. It should work on 64-bit versions
as well. It most likely won't work on Windows prior to Windows XP
SP2.
-** Other systems
+Other systems
+-------------
At this moment, drivers for any other systems have not been tested.
Knowing how MacOS is based on BSD and BSD is an Open Source it is
@@ -115,7 +128,8 @@ For more exotic systems I have even less to say...
Any testing and drivers *are* *welcome*!
-* Authors
+Authors
+=======
This document has been written by Michal Nazarewicz
([[mailto:[email protected]]]). INF files have been hacked with
@@ -124,7 +138,8 @@ Xiaofan Chen ([[mailto:[email protected]]]) basing on the MS RNDIS
template[9], Microchip's CDC ACM INF file and David Brownell's
([[mailto:[email protected]]]) original INF files.
-* Footnotes
+Footnotes
+=========
[1] Remote Network Driver Interface Specification,
[[http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee484414.aspx]].
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
index ad995bf0db41..5e5516c69075 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
+===============================
+Linux USB Printer Gadget Driver
+===============================
- Linux USB Printer Gadget Driver
- 06/04/2007
+06/04/2007
- Copyright (C) 2007 Craig W. Nadler <[email protected]>
+Copyright (C) 2007 Craig W. Nadler <[email protected]>
-GENERAL
+General
=======
This driver may be used if you are writing printer firmware using Linux as
@@ -29,52 +31,60 @@ user space firmware can read or write this status byte using a device file
-HOWTO USE THIS DRIVER
+Howto Use This Driver
=====================
To load the USB device controller driver and the printer gadget driver. The
-following example uses the Netchip 2280 USB device controller driver:
+following example uses the Netchip 2280 USB device controller driver::
-modprobe net2280
-modprobe g_printer
+ modprobe net2280
+ modprobe g_printer
The follow command line parameter can be used when loading the printer gadget
(ex: modprobe g_printer idVendor=0x0525 idProduct=0xa4a8 ):
-idVendor - This is the Vendor ID used in the device descriptor. The default is
+idVendor
+ This is the Vendor ID used in the device descriptor. The default is
the Netchip vendor id 0x0525. YOU MUST CHANGE TO YOUR OWN VENDOR ID
BEFORE RELEASING A PRODUCT. If you plan to release a product and don't
already have a Vendor ID please see http://www.usb.org for details on how to
get one.
-idProduct - This is the Product ID used in the device descriptor. The default
+idProduct
+ This is the Product ID used in the device descriptor. The default
is 0xa4a8, you should change this to an ID that's not used by any of
your other USB products if you have any. It would be a good idea to
start numbering your products starting with say 0x0001.
-bcdDevice - This is the version number of your product. It would be a good idea
+bcdDevice
+ This is the version number of your product. It would be a good idea
to put your firmware version here.
-iManufacturer - A string containing the name of the Vendor.
+iManufacturer
+ A string containing the name of the Vendor.
-iProduct - A string containing the Product Name.
+iProduct
+ A string containing the Product Name.
-iSerialNum - A string containing the Serial Number. This should be changed for
+iSerialNum
+ A string containing the Serial Number. This should be changed for
each unit of your product.
-iPNPstring - The PNP ID string used for this printer. You will want to set
+iPNPstring
+ The PNP ID string used for this printer. You will want to set
either on the command line or hard code the PNP ID string used for
your printer product.
-qlen - The number of 8k buffers to use per endpoint. The default is 10, you
+qlen
+ The number of 8k buffers to use per endpoint. The default is 10, you
should tune this for your product. You may also want to tune the
size of each buffer for your product.
-USING THE EXAMPLE CODE
+Using The Example Code
======================
This example code talks to stdout, instead of a print engine.
@@ -82,22 +92,23 @@ This example code talks to stdout, instead of a print engine.
To compile the test code below:
1) save it to a file called prn_example.c
-2) compile the code with the follow command:
+2) compile the code with the follow command::
+
gcc prn_example.c -o prn_example
-To read printer data from the host to stdout:
+To read printer data from the host to stdout::
# prn_example -read_data
-To write printer data from a file (data_file) to the host:
+To write printer data from a file (data_file) to the host::
# cat data_file | prn_example -write_data
-To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:
+To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:::
# prn_example -get_status
@@ -107,60 +118,62 @@ To get the current printer status for the gadget driver:
Printer OK
-To set printer to Selected/On-line:
+To set printer to Selected/On-line::
# prn_example -selected
-To set printer to Not Selected/Off-line:
+To set printer to Not Selected/Off-line::
# prn_example -not_selected
-To set paper status to paper out:
+To set paper status to paper out::
# prn_example -paper_out
-To set paper status to paper loaded:
+To set paper status to paper loaded::
# prn_example -paper_loaded
-To set error status to printer OK:
+To set error status to printer OK::
# prn_example -no_error
-To set error status to ERROR:
+To set error status to ERROR::
# prn_example -error
-EXAMPLE CODE
+Example Code
============
+::
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <linux/poll.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <linux/usb/g_printer.h>
-#define PRINTER_FILE "/dev/g_printer"
-#define BUF_SIZE 512
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <linux/poll.h>
+ #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+ #include <linux/usb/g_printer.h>
+ #define PRINTER_FILE "/dev/g_printer"
+ #define BUF_SIZE 512
-/*
- * 'usage()' - Show program usage.
- */
-static void
-usage(const char *option) /* I - Option string or NULL */
-{
+ /*
+ * 'usage()' - Show program usage.
+ */
+
+ static void
+ usage(const char *option) /* I - Option string or NULL */
+ {
if (option) {
fprintf(stderr,"prn_example: Unknown option \"%s\"!\n",
option);
@@ -186,12 +199,12 @@ usage(const char *option) /* I - Option string or NULL */
fputs("\n\n", stderr);
exit(1);
-}
+ }
-static int
-read_printer_data()
-{
+ static int
+ read_printer_data()
+ {
struct pollfd fd[1];
/* Open device file for printer gadget. */
@@ -236,12 +249,12 @@ read_printer_data()
close(fd[0].fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int
-write_printer_data()
-{
+ static int
+ write_printer_data()
+ {
struct pollfd fd[1];
/* Open device file for printer gadget. */
@@ -295,12 +308,12 @@ write_printer_data()
close(fd[0].fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int
-read_NB_printer_data()
-{
+ static int
+ read_NB_printer_data()
+ {
int fd;
static char buf[BUF_SIZE];
int bytes_read;
@@ -329,12 +342,12 @@ read_NB_printer_data()
close(fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int
-get_printer_status()
-{
+ static int
+ get_printer_status()
+ {
int retval;
int fd;
@@ -357,12 +370,12 @@ get_printer_status()
close(fd);
return(retval);
-}
+ }
-static int
-set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
-{
+ static int
+ set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
+ {
int retval;
int fd;
@@ -397,12 +410,12 @@ set_printer_status(unsigned char buf, int clear_printer_status_bit)
close(fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int
-display_printer_status()
-{
+ static int
+ display_printer_status()
+ {
char printer_status;
printer_status = get_printer_status();
@@ -429,12 +442,12 @@ display_printer_status()
}
return(0);
-}
+ }
-int
-main(int argc, char *argv[])
-{
+ int
+ main(int argc, char *argv[])
+ {
int i; /* Looping var */
int retval = 0;
@@ -507,4 +520,4 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[])
}
exit(retval);
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
index d1def3186782..dce8bc1fb1f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
+===============================
+Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0
+===============================
- Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0
- 11/20/2004
- (updated 8-May-2008 for v2.3)
+11/20/2004
+
+(updated 8-May-2008 for v2.3)
License and Disclaimer
@@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ hardware; for example, a PDA, an embedded Linux system, or a PC
with a USB development card.
The gadget serial driver talks over USB to either a CDC ACM driver
-or a generic USB serial driver running on a host PC.
+or a generic USB serial driver running on a host PC::
Host
--------------------------------------
@@ -112,11 +115,11 @@ configuring the kernel. Then rebuild and install the kernel or
modules.
Then you must load the gadget serial driver. To load it as an
-ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this:
+ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this::
modprobe g_serial
-To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this:
+To load it as a vendor specific bulk in/out device, do this::
modprobe g_serial use_acm=0
@@ -127,7 +130,7 @@ desired.
Your system should use mdev (from busybox) or udev to make the
device nodes. After this gadget driver has been set up you should
-then see a /dev/ttyGS0 node:
+then see a /dev/ttyGS0 node::
# ls -l /dev/ttyGS0 | cat
crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 0 May 8 14:10 /dev/ttyGS0
@@ -187,24 +190,24 @@ support".
Once the gadget serial driver is loaded and the USB device connected
to the Linux host with a USB cable, the host system should recognize
-the gadget serial device. For example, the command
+the gadget serial device. For example, the command::
cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices
-should show something like this:
+should show something like this:::
-T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
-D: Ver= 2.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
-P: Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a7 Rev= 2.01
-S: Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
-S: Product=Gadget Serial
-S: SerialNumber=0
-C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=c0 MxPwr= 2mA
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
-E: Ad=83(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl=32ms
-I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
-E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
-E: Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+ T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
+ D: Ver= 2.00 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
+ P: Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a7 Rev= 2.01
+ S: Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
+ S: Product=Gadget Serial
+ S: SerialNumber=0
+ C:* #Ifs= 2 Cfg#= 2 Atr=c0 MxPwr= 2mA
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=02(comm.) Sub=02 Prot=01 Driver=acm
+ E: Ad=83(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl=32ms
+ I: If#= 1 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=acm
+ E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+ E: Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
If the host side Linux system is configured properly, the ACM driver
should be loaded automatically. The command "lsmod" should show the
@@ -219,29 +222,29 @@ Serial Converter support", and for the "USB Generic Serial Driver".
Once the gadget serial driver is loaded and the USB device connected
to the Linux host with a USB cable, the host system should recognize
-the gadget serial device. For example, the command
+the gadget serial device. For example, the command::
cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices
-should show something like this:
+should show something like this:::
-T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#= 6 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
-D: Ver= 2.00 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
-P: Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a6 Rev= 2.01
-S: Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
-S: Product=Gadget Serial
-S: SerialNumber=0
-C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=c0 MxPwr= 2mA
-I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=serial
-E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
-E: Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+ T: Bus=01 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=01 Cnt=02 Dev#= 6 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
+ D: Ver= 2.00 Cls=ff(vend.) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
+ P: Vendor=0525 ProdID=a4a6 Rev= 2.01
+ S: Manufacturer=Linux 2.6.8.1 with net2280
+ S: Product=Gadget Serial
+ S: SerialNumber=0
+ C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=c0 MxPwr= 2mA
+ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=0a(data ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=serial
+ E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
+ E: Ad=02(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS= 512 Ivl=0ms
You must load the usbserial driver and explicitly set its parameters
-to configure it to recognize the gadget serial device, like this:
+to configure it to recognize the gadget serial device, like this::
echo 0x0525 0xA4A6 >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
-The legacy way is to use module parameters:
+The legacy way is to use module parameters::
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x0525 product=0xA4A6
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt b/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
index e5f048067da4..b76268728450 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================
Infinity Usb Unlimited Readme
------------------------------
+=============================
Hi all,
@@ -19,7 +20,8 @@ have his own device file(/dev/ttyUSB0,/dev/ttyUSB1,...)
-How to tune the reader speed ?
+How to tune the reader speed?
+=============================
A few parameters can be used at load time
To use parameters, just unload the module if it is
@@ -27,26 +29,33 @@ How to tune the reader speed ?
In case of prebuilt module, use the command
insmod iuu_phoenix param=value.
- Example:
+ Example::
- modprobe iuu_phoenix clockmode=3
+ modprobe iuu_phoenix clockmode=3
The parameters are:
- parm: clockmode:1=3Mhz579,2=3Mhz680,3=6Mhz (int)
- parm: boost:overclock boost percent 100 to 500 (int)
- parm: cdmode:Card detect mode 0=none, 1=CD, 2=!CD, 3=DSR, 4=!DSR, 5=CTS, 6=!CTS, 7=RING, 8=!RING (int)
- parm: xmas:xmas color enabled or not (bool)
- parm: debug:Debug enabled or not (bool)
+clockmode:
+ 1=3Mhz579,2=3Mhz680,3=6Mhz (int)
+boost:
+ overclock boost percent 100 to 500 (int)
+cdmode:
+ Card detect mode
+ 0=none, 1=CD, 2=!CD, 3=DSR, 4=!DSR, 5=CTS, 6=!CTS, 7=RING, 8=!RING (int)
+xmas:
+ xmas color enabled or not (bool)
+debug:
+ Debug enabled or not (bool)
- clockmode will provide 3 different base settings commonly adopted by
different software:
- 1. 3Mhz579
+
+ 1. 3Mhz579
2. 3Mhz680
3. 6Mhz
- boost provide a way to overclock the reader ( my favorite :-) )
- For example to have best performance than a simple clockmode=3, try this:
+ For example to have best performance than a simple clockmode=3, try this::
modprobe boost=195
@@ -66,7 +75,8 @@ How to tune the reader speed ?
- debug will produce a lot of debugging messages...
- Last notes:
+Last notes
+==========
Don't worry about the serial settings, the serial emulation
is an abstraction, so use any speed or parity setting will
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
index e89803a5a960..d181b47c3cb6 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-* Overview
+=========================
+Mass Storage Gadget (MSG)
+=========================
+
+Overview
+========
Mass Storage Gadget (or MSG) acts as a USB Mass Storage device,
appearing to the host as a disk or a CD-ROM drive. It supports
@@ -24,7 +29,8 @@
(which is no longer included in Linux). It will talk only briefly
about how to use MSF within composite gadgets.
-* Module parameters
+Module parameters
+=================
The mass storage gadget accepts the following mass storage specific
module parameters:
@@ -146,7 +152,8 @@
- iProduct -- USB Product string (string)
- iSerialNumber -- SerialNumber string (sting)
-* sysfs entries
+sysfs entries
+=============
For each logical unit, the gadget creates a directory in the sysfs
hierarchy. Inside of it the following three files are created:
@@ -177,7 +184,8 @@
Other then those, as usual, the values of module parameters can be
read from /sys/module/g_mass_storage/parameters/* files.
-* Other gadgets using mass storage function
+Other gadgets using mass storage function
+=========================================
The Mass Storage Gadget uses the Mass Storage Function to handle
mass storage protocol. As a composite function, MSF may be used by
@@ -193,7 +201,8 @@
may take a look at mass_storage.c, acm_ms.c and multi.c (sorted by
complexity).
-* Relation to file storage gadget
+Relation to file storage gadget
+===============================
The Mass Storage Function and thus the Mass Storage Gadget has been
based on the File Storage Gadget. The difference between the two is
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
index 0f6be4f9930b..6274aee083ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+=============================
USB 7-Segment Numeric Display
+=============================
+
Manufactured by Delcom Engineering
Device Information
@@ -13,9 +16,13 @@ Device Modes
------------
By default, the driver assumes the display is only 6 characters
The mode for 6 characters is:
+
MSB 0x06; LSB 0x3f
+
For the 8 character display:
+
MSB 0x08; LSB 0xff
+
The device can accept "text" either in raw, hex, or ascii textmode.
raw controls each segment manually,
hex expects a value between 0-15 per character,
@@ -42,5 +49,3 @@ Device Operation
To set multiple decimals points sum up each power.
For example, to set the 0th and 3rd decimal place
echo 1001 > /sys/bus/usb/.../decimals
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt b/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
index a91adb26ea7b..d1111b74bf75 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt
@@ -1,19 +1,27 @@
-CHANGES
+================
+mtouchusb driver
+================
+
+Changes
+=======
- 0.3 - Created based off of scanner & INSTALL from the original touchscreen
driver on freecode (http://freecode.com/projects/3mtouchscreendriver)
- Amended for linux-2.4.18, then 2.4.19
- 0.5 - Complete rewrite using Linux Input in 2.6.3
- Unfortunately no calibration support at this time
+ Unfortunately no calibration support at this time
- 1.4 - Multiple changes to support the EXII 5000UC and house cleaning
- Changed reset from standard USB dev reset to vendor reset
- Changed data sent to host from compensated to raw coordinates
- Eliminated vendor/product module params
- Performed multiple successful tests with an EXII-5010UC
+ Changed reset from standard USB dev reset to vendor reset
+ Changed data sent to host from compensated to raw coordinates
+ Eliminated vendor/product module params
+ Performed multiple successful tests with an EXII-5010UC
-SUPPORTED HARDWARE:
+Supported Hardware
+==================
+
+::
All controllers have the Vendor: 0x0596 & Product: 0x0001
@@ -29,9 +37,10 @@ SUPPORTED HARDWARE:
USB Capacitive - Black Case EXII-5030UC
USB Capacitive - No Case EXII-5050UC
-DRIVER NOTES:
+Driver Notes
+============
-Installation is simple, you only need to add Linux Input, Linux USB, and the
+Installation is simple, you only need to add Linux Input, Linux USB, and the
driver to the kernel. The driver can also be optionally built as a module.
This driver appears to be one of possible 2 Linux USB Input Touchscreen
@@ -49,24 +58,27 @@ The controller screen resolution is now 0 to 16384 for both X and Y reporting
the raw touch data. This is the same for the old and new capacitive USB
controllers.
-Perhaps at some point an abstract function will be placed into evdev so
-generic functions like calibrations, resets, and vendor information can be
+Perhaps at some point an abstract function will be placed into evdev so
+generic functions like calibrations, resets, and vendor information can be
requested from the userspace (And the drivers would handle the vendor specific
tasks).
-TODO:
+TODO
+====
Implement a control urb again to handle requests to and from the device
such as calibration, etc once/if it becomes available.
-DISCLAIMER:
+Disclaimer
+==========
-I am not a MicroTouch/3M employee, nor have I ever been. 3M does not support
+I am not a MicroTouch/3M employee, nor have I ever been. 3M does not support
this driver! If you want touch drivers only supported within X, please go to:
http://www.3m.com/3MTouchSystems/
-THANKS:
+Thanks
+======
A huge thank you to 3M Touch Systems for the EXII-5010UC controllers for
testing!
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt b/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
index 99320d9fa523..bb3c49719e6b 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/ohci.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+OHCI
+====
+
23-Aug-2002
The "ohci-hcd" driver is a USB Host Controller Driver (HCD) that is derived
@@ -29,4 +33,3 @@ work on while the OS is getting around to the relevant IRQ processing.
- David Brownell
<[email protected]>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/rio.txt b/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
index aee715af7db7..ca9adcf56355 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/rio.txt
@@ -1,72 +1,80 @@
+============
+Diamonds Rio
+============
+
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Bruce Tenison
+
Portions Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 David Nelson
+
Thanks to David Nelson for guidance and the usage of the scanner.txt
and scanner.c files to model our driver and this informative file.
Mar. 2, 2000
-CHANGES
+Changes
+=======
- Initial Revision
-OVERVIEW
+Overview
+========
This README will address issues regarding how to configure the kernel
-to access a RIO 500 mp3 player.
+to access a RIO 500 mp3 player.
Before I explain how to use this to access the Rio500 please be warned:
-W A R N I N G:
---------------
+.. warning::
-Please note that this software is still under development. The authors
-are in no way responsible for any damage that may occur, no matter how
-inconsequential.
+ Please note that this software is still under development. The authors
+ are in no way responsible for any damage that may occur, no matter how
+ inconsequential.
It seems that the Rio has a problem when sending .mp3 with low batteries.
I suggest when the batteries are low and you want to transfer stuff that you
replace it with a fresh one. In my case, what happened is I lost two 16kb
blocks (they are no longer usable to store information to it). But I don't
-know if that's normal or not; it could simply be a problem with the flash
+know if that's normal or not; it could simply be a problem with the flash
memory.
-In an extreme case, I left my Rio playing overnight and the batteries wore
-down to nothing and appear to have corrupted the flash memory. My RIO
-needed to be replaced as a result. Diamond tech support is aware of the
-problem. Do NOT allow your batteries to wear down to nothing before
-changing them. It appears RIO 500 firmware does not handle low battery
-power well at all.
+In an extreme case, I left my Rio playing overnight and the batteries wore
+down to nothing and appear to have corrupted the flash memory. My RIO
+needed to be replaced as a result. Diamond tech support is aware of the
+problem. Do NOT allow your batteries to wear down to nothing before
+changing them. It appears RIO 500 firmware does not handle low battery
+power well at all.
-On systems with OHCI controllers, the kernel OHCI code appears to have
-power on problems with some chipsets. If you are having problems
-connecting to your RIO 500, try turning it on first and then plugging it
-into the USB cable.
+On systems with OHCI controllers, the kernel OHCI code appears to have
+power on problems with some chipsets. If you are having problems
+connecting to your RIO 500, try turning it on first and then plugging it
+into the USB cable.
-Contact information:
---------------------
+Contact Information
+-------------------
The main page for the project is hosted at sourceforge.net in the following
URL: <http://rio500.sourceforge.net>. You can also go to the project's
sourceforge home page at: <http://sourceforge.net/projects/rio500/>.
There is also a mailing list: [email protected]
-Authors:
+Authors
-------
-Most of the code was written by Cesar Miquel <[email protected]>. Keith
+Most of the code was written by Cesar Miquel <[email protected]>. Keith
Clayton <[email protected]> is incharge of the PPC port and making sure
things work there. Bruce Tenison <[email protected]> is adding support
for .fon files and also does testing. The program will mostly sure be
re-written and Pete Ikusz along with the rest will re-design it. I would
-also like to thank Tri Nguyen <[email protected]> who provided use
+also like to thank Tri Nguyen <[email protected]> who provided use
with some important information regarding the communication with the Rio.
-ADDITIONAL INFORMATION and Userspace tools
+Additional Information and userspace tools
-http://rio500.sourceforge.net/
+ http://rio500.sourceforge.net/
-REQUIREMENTS
+Requirements
+============
A host with a USB port. Ideally, either a UHCI (Intel) or OHCI
(Compaq and others) hardware port should work.
@@ -80,11 +88,11 @@ A Linux kernel with RIO 500 support enabled.
'lspci' which is only needed to determine the type of USB hardware
available in your machine.
-CONFIGURATION
+Configuration
Using `lspci -v`, determine the type of USB hardware available.
- If you see something like:
+ If you see something like::
USB Controller: ......
Flags: .....
@@ -92,7 +100,7 @@ Using `lspci -v`, determine the type of USB hardware available.
Then you have a UHCI based controller.
- If you see something like:
+ If you see something like::
USB Controller: .....
Flags: ....
@@ -107,8 +115,9 @@ hardware (determined from the steps above), 'USB Diamond Rio500 support', and
(you may need to execute `depmod -a` to update the module
dependencies).
-Add a device for the USB rio500:
- `mknod /dev/usb/rio500 c 180 64`
+Add a device for the USB rio500::
+
+ mknod /dev/usb/rio500 c 180 64
Set appropriate permissions for /dev/usb/rio500 (don't forget about
group and world permissions). Both read and write permissions are
@@ -116,12 +125,14 @@ required for proper operation.
Load the appropriate modules (if compiled as modules):
- OHCI:
+ OHCI::
+
modprobe usbcore
modprobe usb-ohci
modprobe rio500
- UHCI:
+ UHCI::
+
modprobe usbcore
modprobe usb-uhci (or uhci)
modprobe rio500
@@ -129,10 +140,10 @@ Load the appropriate modules (if compiled as modules):
That's it. The Rio500 Utils at: http://rio500.sourceforge.net should
be able to access the rio500.
-BUGS
+Bugs
+====
If you encounter any problems feel free to drop me an email.
Bruce Tenison
[email protected]
-
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
index 4273ca2b86ba..dc23ecd4d802 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
-usb-help.txt
+==============
+USB references
+==============
+
2008-Mar-7
For USB help other than the readme files that are located in
-Documentation/usb/*, see the following:
+`Documentation/usb/*`, see the following:
-Linux-USB project: http://www.linux-usb.org
- mirrors at http://usb.in.tum.de/linux-usb/
- and http://it.linux-usb.org
-Linux USB Guide: http://linux-usb.sourceforge.net
-Linux-USB device overview (working devices and drivers):
- http://www.qbik.ch/usb/devices/
+- Linux-USB project: http://www.linux-usb.org
+ mirrors at http://usb.in.tum.de/linux-usb/
+ and http://it.linux-usb.org
+- Linux USB Guide: http://linux-usb.sourceforge.net
+- Linux-USB device overview (working devices and drivers):
+ http://www.qbik.ch/usb/devices/
The Linux-USB mailing list is at [email protected]
-
-###
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
index ab100d6ee436..8fa7dbd3da9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-INTRODUCTION
+==========
+USB serial
+==========
+
+Introduction
+============
The USB serial driver currently supports a number of different USB to
serial converter products, as well as some devices that use a serial
@@ -8,13 +13,15 @@ INTRODUCTION
the different devices.
-CONFIGURATION
+Configuration
+=============
Currently the driver can handle up to 256 different serial interfaces at
- one time.
+ one time.
The major number that the driver uses is 188 so to use the driver,
- create the following nodes:
+ create the following nodes::
+
mknod /dev/ttyUSB0 c 188 0
mknod /dev/ttyUSB1 c 188 1
mknod /dev/ttyUSB2 c 188 2
@@ -28,12 +35,14 @@ CONFIGURATION
When the device is connected and recognized by the driver, the driver
will print to the system log, which node(s) the device has been bound
to.
-
-SPECIFIC DEVICES SUPPORTED
+
+Specific Devices Supported
+==========================
ConnectTech WhiteHEAT 4 port converter
+--------------------------------------
ConnectTech has been very forthcoming with information about their
device, including providing a unit to test with.
@@ -46,6 +55,7 @@ ConnectTech WhiteHEAT 4 port converter
HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
+-----------------------------------------------
This driver works with all HandSpring USB, Palm USB, and Sony Clié USB
devices.
@@ -62,7 +72,7 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
This goes against the current documentation for pilot-xfer and other
packages, but is the only way that it will work due to the hardware
in the device.
-
+
When the device is connected, try talking to it on the second port
(this is usually /dev/ttyUSB1 if you do not have any other usb-serial
devices in the system.) The system log should tell you which port is
@@ -78,10 +88,10 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
try resetting the device, first a hot reset, and then a cold reset if
necessary. Some devices need this before they can talk to the USB port
properly.
-
+
Devices that are not compiled into the kernel can be specified with module
parameters. e.g. modprobe visor vendor=0x54c product=0x66
-
+
There is a webpage and mailing lists for this portion of the driver at:
http://sourceforge.net/projects/usbvisor/
@@ -90,6 +100,7 @@ HandSpring Visor, Palm USB, and Clié USB driver
PocketPC PDA Driver
+-------------------
This driver can be used to connect to Compaq iPAQ, HP Jornada, Casio EM500
and other PDAs running Windows CE 3.0 or PocketPC 2002 using a USB
@@ -135,12 +146,13 @@ PocketPC PDA Driver
be used to flash the ROM, as well as the microP code.. so much for needing
Toshiba's $350 serial cable for flashing!! :D
NOTE: This has NOT been tested. Use at your own risk.
-
+
For any questions or problems with the driver, please contact Ganesh
Varadarajan <[email protected]>
Keyspan PDA Serial Adapter
+--------------------------
Single port DB-9 serial adapter, pushed as a PDA adapter for iMacs (mostly
sold in Macintosh catalogs, comes in a translucent white/green dongle).
@@ -148,32 +160,37 @@ Keyspan PDA Serial Adapter
This driver also works for the Xircom/Entrega single port serial adapter.
Current status:
+
Things that work:
- basic input/output (tested with 'cu')
- blocking write when serial line can't keep up
- changing baud rates (up to 115200)
- getting/setting modem control pins (TIOCM{GET,SET,BIS,BIC})
- sending break (although duration looks suspect)
+ - basic input/output (tested with 'cu')
+ - blocking write when serial line can't keep up
+ - changing baud rates (up to 115200)
+ - getting/setting modem control pins (TIOCM{GET,SET,BIS,BIC})
+ - sending break (although duration looks suspect)
+
Things that don't:
- device strings (as logged by kernel) have trailing binary garbage
- device ID isn't right, might collide with other Keyspan products
- changing baud rates ought to flush tx/rx to avoid mangled half characters
+ - device strings (as logged by kernel) have trailing binary garbage
+ - device ID isn't right, might collide with other Keyspan products
+ - changing baud rates ought to flush tx/rx to avoid mangled half characters
+
Big Things on the todo list:
- parity, 7 vs 8 bits per char, 1 or 2 stop bits
- HW flow control
- not all of the standard USB descriptors are handled: Get_Status, Set_Feature
- O_NONBLOCK, select()
+ - parity, 7 vs 8 bits per char, 1 or 2 stop bits
+ - HW flow control
+ - not all of the standard USB descriptors are handled:
+ Get_Status, Set_Feature, O_NONBLOCK, select()
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Brian
- Warner at [email protected]
+ Warner at [email protected]
Keyspan USA-series Serial Adapters
+----------------------------------
- Single, Dual and Quad port adapters - driver uses Keyspan supplied
+ Single, Dual and Quad port adapters - driver uses Keyspan supplied
firmware and is being developed with their support.
-
+
Current status:
+
The USA-18X, USA-28X, USA-19, USA-19W and USA-49W are supported and
have been pretty thoroughly tested at various baud rates with 8-N-1
character settings. Other character lengths and parity setups are
@@ -182,32 +199,37 @@ Keyspan USA-series Serial Adapters
The USA-28 isn't yet supported though doing so should be pretty
straightforward. Contact the maintainer if you require this
functionality.
-
+
More information is available at:
+
http://www.carnationsoftware.com/carnation/Keyspan.html
-
+
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Hugh
Blemings at [email protected]
FTDI Single Port Serial Driver
+------------------------------
This is a single port DB-25 serial adapter.
Devices supported include:
- -TripNav TN-200 USB GPS
- -Navis Engineering Bureau CH-4711 USB GPS
+
+ - TripNav TN-200 USB GPS
+ - Navis Engineering Bureau CH-4711 USB GPS
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Bill Ryder.
ZyXEL omni.net lcd plus ISDN TA
+-------------------------------
This is an ISDN TA. Please report both successes and troubles to
[email protected]
Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
+--------------------------------------
This driver was in most part developed by Neil "koyama" Whelchel. It
has been improved since that previous form to support dynamic serial
@@ -215,18 +237,19 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
part stable and has been tested on an smp machine. (dual p2)
Chipsets supported under CY4601 family:
-
+
CY7C63723, CY7C63742, CY7C63743, CY7C64013
Devices supported:
- -DeLorme's USB Earthmate GPS (SiRF Star II lp arch)
- -Cypress HID->COM RS232 adapter
-
- Note: Cypress Semiconductor claims no affiliation with the
+ - DeLorme's USB Earthmate GPS (SiRF Star II lp arch)
+ - Cypress HID->COM RS232 adapter
+
+ Note:
+ Cypress Semiconductor claims no affiliation with the
hid->com device.
- Most devices using chipsets under the CY4601 family should
+ Most devices using chipsets under the CY4601 family should
work with the driver. As long as they stay true to the CY4601
usbserial specification.
@@ -236,8 +259,9 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
upon start init to this setting. usbserial core provides the rest
of the termios settings, along with some custom termios so that the
output is in proper format and parsable.
-
- The device can be put into sirf mode by issuing NMEA command:
+
+ The device can be put into sirf mode by issuing NMEA command::
+
$PSRF100,<protocol>,<baud>,<databits>,<stopbits>,<parity>*CHECKSUM
$PSRF100,0,9600,8,1,0*0C
@@ -259,11 +283,14 @@ Cypress M8 CY4601 Family Serial Driver
If you have any questions, problems, patches, feature requests, etc. you can
contact me here via email:
+
[email protected]
+
(your problems/patches can alternately be submitted to usb-devel)
Digi AccelePort Driver
+----------------------
This driver supports the Digi AccelePort USB 2 and 4 devices, 2 port
(plus a parallel port) and 4 port USB serial converters. The driver
@@ -285,42 +312,49 @@ Digi AccelePort Driver
Belkin USB Serial Adapter F5U103
+--------------------------------
Single port DB-9/PS-2 serial adapter from Belkin with firmware by eTEK Labs.
The Peracom single port serial adapter also works with this driver, as
well as the GoHubs adapter.
Current status:
+
The following have been tested and work:
- Baud rate 300-230400
- Data bits 5-8
- Stop bits 1-2
- Parity N,E,O,M,S
- Handshake None, Software (XON/XOFF), Hardware (CTSRTS,CTSDTR)*
- Break Set and clear
- Line control Input/Output query and control **
- * Hardware input flow control is only enabled for firmware
+ - Baud rate 300-230400
+ - Data bits 5-8
+ - Stop bits 1-2
+ - Parity N,E,O,M,S
+ - Handshake None, Software (XON/XOFF), Hardware (CTSRTS,CTSDTR) [1]_
+ - Break Set and clear
+ - Line control Input/Output query and control [2]_
+
+ .. [1]
+ Hardware input flow control is only enabled for firmware
levels above 2.06. Read source code comments describing Belkin
firmware errata. Hardware output flow control is working for all
firmware versions.
- ** Queries of inputs (CTS,DSR,CD,RI) show the last
+
+ .. [2]
+ Queries of inputs (CTS,DSR,CD,RI) show the last
reported state. Queries of outputs (DTR,RTS) show the last
requested state and may not reflect current state as set by
automatic hardware flow control.
TO DO List:
- -- Add true modem control line query capability. Currently tracks the
- states reported by the interrupt and the states requested.
- -- Add error reporting back to application for UART error conditions.
- -- Add support for flush ioctls.
- -- Add everything else that is missing :)
+ - Add true modem control line query capability. Currently tracks the
+ states reported by the interrupt and the states requested.
+ - Add error reporting back to application for UART error conditions.
+ - Add support for flush ioctls.
+ - Add everything else that is missing :)
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact William
Greathouse at [email protected]
Empeg empeg-car Mark I/II Driver
+--------------------------------
This is an experimental driver to provide connectivity support for the
client synchronization tools for an Empeg empeg-car mp3 player.
@@ -335,6 +369,7 @@ Empeg empeg-car Mark I/II Driver
MCT USB Single Port Serial Adapter U232
+---------------------------------------
This driver is for the MCT USB-RS232 Converter (25 pin, Model No.
U232-P25) from Magic Control Technology Corp. (there is also a 9 pin
@@ -355,35 +390,39 @@ MCT USB Single Port Serial Adapter U232
Inside Out Networks Edgeport Driver
+-----------------------------------
This driver supports all devices made by Inside Out Networks, specifically
the following models:
- Edgeport/4
- Rapidport/4
- Edgeport/4t
- Edgeport/2
- Edgeport/4i
- Edgeport/2i
- Edgeport/421
- Edgeport/21
- Edgeport/8
- Edgeport/8 Dual
- Edgeport/2D8
- Edgeport/4D8
- Edgeport/8i
- Edgeport/2 DIN
- Edgeport/4 DIN
- Edgeport/16 Dual
+
+ - Edgeport/4
+ - Rapidport/4
+ - Edgeport/4t
+ - Edgeport/2
+ - Edgeport/4i
+ - Edgeport/2i
+ - Edgeport/421
+ - Edgeport/21
+ - Edgeport/8
+ - Edgeport/8 Dual
+ - Edgeport/2D8
+ - Edgeport/4D8
+ - Edgeport/8i
+ - Edgeport/2 DIN
+ - Edgeport/4 DIN
+ - Edgeport/16 Dual
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Greg
Kroah-Hartman at [email protected]
REINER SCT cyberJack pinpad/e-com USB chipcard reader
-
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
Interface to ISO 7816 compatible contactbased chipcards, e.g. GSM SIMs.
-
+
Current status:
+
This is the kernel part of the driver for this USB card reader.
There is also a user part for a CT-API driver available. A site
for downloading is TBA. For now, you can request it from the
@@ -394,6 +433,7 @@ REINER SCT cyberJack pinpad/e-com USB chipcard reader
Prolific PL2303 Driver
+----------------------
This driver supports any device that has the PL2303 chip from Prolific
in it. This includes a number of single port USB to serial converters,
@@ -403,11 +443,13 @@ Prolific PL2303 Driver
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact Greg
Kroah-Hartman at [email protected]
-
+
KL5KUSB105 chipset / PalmConnect USB single-port adapter
-
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
Current status:
+
The driver was put together by looking at the usb bus transactions
done by Palm's driver under Windows, so a lot of functionality is
still missing. Notably, serial ioctls are sometimes faked or not yet
@@ -417,21 +459,25 @@ Current status:
are supported, but handshaking (software or hardware) is not, which is
why it is wise to cut down on the rate used is wise for large
transfers until this is settled.
-
+
See http://www.uuhaus.de/linux/palmconnect.html for up-to-date
information on this driver.
Winchiphead CH341 Driver
+------------------------
This driver is for the Winchiphead CH341 USB-RS232 Converter. This chip
also implements an IEEE 1284 parallel port, I2C and SPI, but that is not
supported by the driver. The protocol was analyzed from the behaviour
of the Windows driver, no datasheet is available at present.
+
The manufacturer's website: http://www.winchiphead.com/.
+
For any questions or problems with this driver, please contact
[email protected].
Moschip MCS7720, MCS7715 driver
+-------------------------------
These chips are present in devices sold by various manufacturers, such as Syba
and Cables Unlimited. There may be others. The 7720 provides two serial
@@ -449,20 +495,24 @@ Moschip MCS7720, MCS7715 driver
don't have one of these devices, so I can't say for sure.
Generic Serial driver
+---------------------
If your device is not one of the above listed devices, compatible with
the above models, you can try out the "generic" interface. This
interface does not provide any type of control messages sent to the
device, and does not support any kind of device flow control. All that
is required of your device is that it has at least one bulk in endpoint,
- or one bulk out endpoint.
+ or one bulk out endpoint.
+
+ To enable the generic driver to recognize your device, provide::
- To enable the generic driver to recognize your device, provide
echo <vid> <pid> >/sys/bus/usb-serial/drivers/generic/new_id
+
where the <vid> and <pid> is replaced with the hex representation of your
device's vendor id and product id.
If the driver is compiled as a module you can also provide one id when
- loading the module
+ loading the module::
+
insmod usbserial vendor=0x#### product=0x####
This driver has been successfully used to connect to the NetChip USB
@@ -473,7 +523,8 @@ Generic Serial driver
Kroah-Hartman at [email protected]
-CONTACT:
+Contact
+=======
If anyone has any problems using these drivers, with any of the above
specified products, please contact the specific driver's author listed
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
index c7a0f4c7e7f1..988c832166cd 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===============
+USB/IP protocol
+===============
+
PRELIMINARY DRAFT, MAY CONTAIN MISTAKES!
28 Jun 2011
@@ -12,6 +16,8 @@ in one or more pieces at the low level transport layer). The server sends back
the OP_REP_DEVLIST packet which lists the exported USB devices. Finally the
TCP/IP connection is closed.
+::
+
virtual host controller usb host
"client" "server"
(imports USB devices) (exports USB devices)
@@ -32,6 +38,8 @@ send two types of packets: the USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT to submit an URB, and
USBIP_CMD_UNLINK to unlink a previously submitted URB. The answers of the
server may be USBIP_RET_SUBMIT and USBIP_RET_UNLINK respectively.
+::
+
virtual host controller usb host
"client" "server"
(imports USB devices) (exports USB devices)
@@ -88,270 +96,316 @@ The fields are in network (big endian) byte order meaning that the most signific
byte (MSB) is stored at the lowest address.
-OP_REQ_DEVLIST: Retrieve the list of exported USB devices.
+OP_REQ_DEVLIST:
+ Retrieve the list of exported USB devices.
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2 | 2 | 0x8005 | Command code: Retrieve the list of exported USB
- | | | devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2 | 2 | 0x8005 | Command code: Retrieve the list of exported USB |
+| | | | devices. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-OP_REP_DEVLIST: Reply with the list of exported USB devices.
+OP_REP_DEVLIST:
+ Reply with the list of exported USB devices.
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2 | 2 | 0x0005 | Reply code: The list of exported USB devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 4 | n | Number of exported devices: 0 means no exported
- | | | devices.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x0C | | | From now on the exported n devices are described,
- | | | if any. If no devices are exported the message
- | | | ends with the previous "number of exported
- | | | devices" field.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- | 256 | | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the
- | | | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.
- | | | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"
- | | | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero
- | | | bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10C | 32 | | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string
- | | | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused
- | | | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x12C | 4 | | busnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x130 | 4 | | devnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x134 | 4 | | speed
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x138 | 2 | | idVendor
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13A | 2 | | idProduct
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13C | 2 | | bcdDevice
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13E | 1 | | bDeviceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13F | 1 | | bDeviceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x140 | 1 | | bDeviceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x141 | 1 | | bConfigurationValue
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x142 | 1 | | bNumConfigurations
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x143 | 1 | | bNumInterfaces
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x144 | | m_0 | From now on each interface is described, all
- | | | together bNumInterfaces times, with the
- | | | the following 4 fields:
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- | 1 | | bInterfaceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x145 | 1 | | bInterfaceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x146 | 1 | | bInterfaceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x147 | 1 | | padding byte for alignment, shall be set to zero
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC + | | | The second exported USB device starts at i=1
- i*0x138 + | | | with the busid field.
- m_(i-1)*4 | | |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0.|
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2 | 2 | 0x0005 | Reply code: The list of exported USB devices. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 4 | n | Number of exported devices: 0 means no exported |
+| | | | devices. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x0C | | | From now on the exported n devices are described, |
+| | | | if any. If no devices are exported the message |
+| | | | ends with the previous "number of exported |
+| | | | devices" field. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| | 256 | | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the|
+| | | | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g. |
+| | | | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2" |
+| | | | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero |
+| | | | bytes. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10C | 32 | | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string |
+| | | | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused |
+| | | | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x12C | 4 | | busnum |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x130 | 4 | | devnum |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x134 | 4 | | speed |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x138 | 2 | | idVendor |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13A | 2 | | idProduct |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13C | 2 | | bcdDevice |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13E | 1 | | bDeviceClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13F | 1 | | bDeviceSubClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x140 | 1 | | bDeviceProtocol |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x141 | 1 | | bConfigurationValue |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x142 | 1 | | bNumConfigurations |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x143 | 1 | | bNumInterfaces |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x144 | | m_0 | From now on each interface is described, all |
+| | | | together bNumInterfaces times, with the |
+| | | | the following 4 fields: |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| | 1 | | bInterfaceClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x145 | 1 | | bInterfaceSubClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x146 | 1 | | bInterfaceProtocol |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x147 | 1 | | padding byte for alignment, shall be set to zero |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC + | | | The second exported USB device starts at i=1 |
+| i*0x138 + | | | with the busid field. |
+| m_(i-1)*4 | | | |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-OP_REQ_IMPORT: Request to import (attach) a remote USB device.
+OP_REQ_IMPORT:
+ Request to import (attach) a remote USB device.
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2 | 2 | 0x8003 | Command code: import a remote USB device.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 32 | | busid: the busid of the exported device on the
- | | | remote host. The possible values are taken
- | | | from the message field OP_REP_DEVLIST.busid.
- | | | A string closed with zero, the unused bytes
- | | | shall be filled with zeros.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2 | 2 | 0x8003 | Command code: import a remote USB device. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: unused, shall be set to 0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 32 | | busid: the busid of the exported device on the |
+| | | | remote host. The possible values are taken |
+| | | | from the message field OP_REP_DEVLIST.busid. |
+| | | | A string closed with zero, the unused bytes |
+| | | | shall be filled with zeros. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-OP_REP_IMPORT: Reply to import (attach) a remote USB device.
+OP_REP_IMPORT:
+ Reply to import (attach) a remote USB device.
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 2 | 2 | 0x0003 | Reply code: Reply to import.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: 0 for OK
- | | | 1 for error
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | | | From now on comes the details of the imported
- | | | device, if the previous status field was OK (0),
- | | | otherwise the reply ends with the status field.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- | 256 | | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the
- | | | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g.
- | | | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2"
- | | | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero
- | | | bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x108 | 32 | | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string
- | | | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused
- | | | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x128 | 4 | | busnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x12C | 4 | | devnum
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x130 | 4 | | speed
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x134 | 2 | | idVendor
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x136 | 2 | | idProduct
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x138 | 2 | | bcdDevice
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x139 | 1 | | bDeviceClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13A | 1 | | bDeviceSubClass
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13B | 1 | | bDeviceProtocol
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13C | 1 | | bConfigurationValue
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13D | 1 | | bNumConfigurations
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x13E | 1 | | bNumInterfaces
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 2 | 0x0100 | Binary-coded decimal USBIP version number: v1.0.0 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 2 | 2 | 0x0003 | Reply code: Reply to import. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | 0x00000000 | Status: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | - 0 for OK |
+| | | | - 1 for error |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | | | From now on comes the details of the imported |
+| | | | device, if the previous status field was OK (0), |
+| | | | otherwise the reply ends with the status field. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| | 256 | | path: Path of the device on the host exporting the|
+| | | | USB device, string closed with zero byte, e.g. |
+| | | | "/sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb3/3-2" |
+| | | | The unused bytes shall be filled with zero |
+| | | | bytes. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x108 | 32 | | busid: Bus ID of the exported device, string |
+| | | | closed with zero byte, e.g. "3-2". The unused |
+| | | | bytes shall be filled with zero bytes. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x128 | 4 | | busnum |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x12C | 4 | | devnum |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x130 | 4 | | speed |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x134 | 2 | | idVendor |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x136 | 2 | | idProduct |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x138 | 2 | | bcdDevice |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x139 | 1 | | bDeviceClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13A | 1 | | bDeviceSubClass |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13B | 1 | | bDeviceProtocol |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13C | 1 | | bConfigurationValue |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13D | 1 | | bNumConfigurations |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x13E | 1 | | bNumInterfaces |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT: Submit an URB
+USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT:
+ Submit an URB
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 4 | 0x00000001 | command: Submit an URB
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | | seqnum: the sequence number of the URB to submit
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 4 | | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC | 4 | | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
- | | | 1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number, possible values are: 0...15
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14 | 4 | | transfer_flags: possible values depend on the
- | | | URB transfer type, see below
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x18 | 4 | | transfer_buffer_length
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x1C | 4 | | start_frame: specify the selected frame to
- | | | transmit an ISO frame, ignored if URB_ISO_ASAP
- | | | is specified at transfer_flags
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x20 | 4 | | number_of_packets: number of ISO packets
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x24 | 4 | | interval: maximum time for the request on the
- | | | server-side host controller
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x28 | 8 | | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with
- | | | zeros if not used
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30 | | | URB data. For ISO transfers the padding between
- | | | each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 4 | 0x00000001 | command: Submit an URB |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | | seqnum: the sequence number of the URB to submit |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 4 | | devid |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC | 4 | | direction: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT |
+| | | | - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number, possible values are: 0...15 |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14 | 4 | | transfer_flags: possible values depend on the |
+| | | | URB transfer type, see below |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x18 | 4 | | transfer_buffer_length |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x1C | 4 | | start_frame: specify the selected frame to |
+| | | | transmit an ISO frame, ignored if URB_ISO_ASAP |
+| | | | is specified at transfer_flags |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x20 | 4 | | number_of_packets: number of ISO packets |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x24 | 4 | | interval: maximum time for the request on the |
+| | | | server-side host controller |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x28 | 8 | | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with |
+| | | | zeros if not used |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30 | | | URB data. For ISO transfers the padding between |
+| | | | each ISO packets is not transmitted. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
- Allowed transfer_flags | value | control | interrupt | bulk | isochronous
- -------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------
- URB_SHORT_NOT_OK | 0x00000001 | only in | only in | only in | no
- URB_ISO_ASAP | 0x00000002 | no | no | no | yes
- URB_NO_TRANSFER_DMA_MAP | 0x00000004 | yes | yes | yes | yes
- URB_ZERO_PACKET | 0x00000040 | no | no | only out | no
- URB_NO_INTERRUPT | 0x00000080 | yes | yes | yes | yes
- URB_FREE_BUFFER | 0x00000100 | yes | yes | yes | yes
- URB_DIR_MASK | 0x00000200 | yes | yes | yes | yes
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | Allowed transfer_flags | value | control | interrupt | bulk | isochronous |
+ +=========================+============+=========+===========+==========+=============+
+ | URB_SHORT_NOT_OK | 0x00000001 | only in | only in | only in | no |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_ISO_ASAP | 0x00000002 | no | no | no | yes |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_NO_TRANSFER_DMA_MAP | 0x00000004 | yes | yes | yes | yes |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_ZERO_PACKET | 0x00000040 | no | no | only out | no |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_NO_INTERRUPT | 0x00000080 | yes | yes | yes | yes |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_FREE_BUFFER | 0x00000100 | yes | yes | yes | yes |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
+ | URB_DIR_MASK | 0x00000200 | yes | yes | yes | yes |
+ +-------------------------+------------+---------+-----------+----------+-------------+
-USBIP_RET_SUBMIT: Reply for submitting an URB
+USBIP_RET_SUBMIT:
+ Reply for submitting an URB
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 4 | 0x00000003 | command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | | seqnum: URB sequence number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 4 | | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC | 4 | | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
- | | | 1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14 | 4 | | status: zero for successful URB transaction,
- | | | otherwise some kind of error happened.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x18 | 4 | n | actual_length: number of URB data bytes
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x1C | 4 | | start_frame: for an ISO frame the actually
- | | | selected frame for transmit.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x20 | 4 | | number_of_packets
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x24 | 4 | | error_count
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x28 | 8 | | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with
- | | | zeros if not used
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
- | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 4 | 0x00000003 | command |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | | seqnum: URB sequence number |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 4 | | devid |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC | 4 | | direction: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT |
+| | | | - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14 | 4 | | status: zero for successful URB transaction, |
+| | | | otherwise some kind of error happened. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x18 | 4 | n | actual_length: number of URB data bytes |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x1C | 4 | | start_frame: for an ISO frame the actually |
+| | | | selected frame for transmit. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x20 | 4 | | number_of_packets |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x24 | 4 | | error_count |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x28 | 8 | | setup: data bytes for USB setup, filled with |
+| | | | zeros if not used |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding |
+| | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-USBIP_CMD_UNLINK: Unlink an URB
+USBIP_CMD_UNLINK:
+ Unlink an URB
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 4 | 0x00000002 | command: URB unlink command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | | seqnum: URB sequence number to unlink: FIXME: is this so?
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 4 | | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC | 4 | | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
- | | | 1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number: zero
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14 | 4 | | seqnum: the URB sequence number given previously
- | | | at USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT.seqnum field
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
- | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 4 | 0x00000002 | command: URB unlink command |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | | seqnum: URB sequence number to unlink: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | FIXME: |
+| | | | is this so? |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 4 | | devid |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC | 4 | | direction: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT |
+| | | | - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number: zero |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14 | 4 | | seqnum: the URB sequence number given previously |
+| | | | at USBIP_CMD_SUBMIT.seqnum field |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding |
+| | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
-USBIP_RET_UNLINK: Reply for URB unlink
+USBIP_RET_UNLINK:
+ Reply for URB unlink
- Offset | Length | Value | Description
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0 | 4 | 0x00000004 | command: reply for the URB unlink command
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 4 | 4 | | seqnum: the unlinked URB sequence number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 8 | 4 | | devid
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0xC | 4 | | direction: 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT
- | | | 1: USBIP_DIR_IN
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x14 | 4 | | status: This is the value contained in the
- | | | urb->status in the URB completition handler.
- | | | FIXME: a better explanation needed.
------------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------
- 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding
- | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted.
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| Offset | Length | Value | Description |
++===========+========+============+===================================================+
+| 0 | 4 | 0x00000004 | command: reply for the URB unlink command |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 4 | 4 | | seqnum: the unlinked URB sequence number |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 8 | 4 | | devid |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0xC | 4 | | direction: |
+| | | | |
+| | | | - 0: USBIP_DIR_OUT |
+| | | | - 1: USBIP_DIR_IN |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x10 | 4 | | ep: endpoint number |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x14 | 4 | | status: This is the value contained in the |
+| | | | urb->status in the URB completition handler. |
+| | | | |
+| | | | FIXME: |
+| | | | a better explanation needed. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
+| 0x30 | n | | URB data bytes. For ISO transfers the padding |
+| | | | between each ISO packets is not transmitted. |
++-----------+--------+------------+---------------------------------------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
index 28425f736756..b0bd51080799 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-* Introduction
+======
+usbmon
+======
+
+Introduction
+============
The name "usbmon" in lowercase refers to a facility in kernel which is
used to collect traces of I/O on the USB bus. This function is analogous
@@ -16,7 +21,8 @@ Two APIs are currently implemented: "text" and "binary". The binary API
is available through a character device in /dev namespace and is an ABI.
The text API is deprecated since 2.6.35, but available for convenience.
-* How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces
+How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces
+============================================
Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces
in a text format. This is used for two purposes. First, it serves as a
@@ -26,38 +32,41 @@ are finalized. Second, humans can read it in case tools are not available.
To collect a raw text trace, execute following steps.
1. Prepare
+----------
Mount debugfs (it has to be enabled in your kernel configuration), and
load the usbmon module (if built as module). The second step is skipped
-if usbmon is built into the kernel.
+if usbmon is built into the kernel::
-# mount -t debugfs none_debugs /sys/kernel/debug
-# modprobe usbmon
-#
+ # mount -t debugfs none_debugs /sys/kernel/debug
+ # modprobe usbmon
+ #
-Verify that bus sockets are present.
+Verify that bus sockets are present:
-# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon
-0s 0u 1s 1t 1u 2s 2t 2u 3s 3t 3u 4s 4t 4u
-#
+ # ls /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon
+ 0s 0u 1s 1t 1u 2s 2t 2u 3s 3t 3u 4s 4t 4u
+ #
Now you can choose to either use the socket '0u' (to capture packets on all
buses), and skip to step #3, or find the bus used by your device with step #2.
This allows to filter away annoying devices that talk continuously.
2. Find which bus connects to the desired device
+------------------------------------------------
Run "cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices", and find the T-line which corresponds
to the device. Usually you do it by looking for the vendor string. If you have
many similar devices, unplug one and compare the two
/sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices outputs. The T-line will have a bus number.
-Example:
-T: Bus=03 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 0
-D: Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1
-P: Vendor=0557 ProdID=2004 Rev= 1.00
-S: Manufacturer=ATEN
-S: Product=UC100KM V2.00
+Example::
+
+ T: Bus=03 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 0
+ D: Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1
+ P: Vendor=0557 ProdID=2004 Rev= 1.00
+ S: Manufacturer=ATEN
+ S: Product=UC100KM V2.00
"Bus=03" means it's bus 3. Alternatively, you can look at the output from
"lsusb" and get the bus number from the appropriate line. Example:
@@ -65,23 +74,28 @@ S: Product=UC100KM V2.00
Bus 003 Device 002: ID 0557:2004 ATEN UC100KM V2.00
3. Start 'cat'
+--------------
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
+::
-to listen on a single bus, otherwise, to listen on all buses, type:
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
-# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/0u > /tmp/1.mon.out
+to listen on a single bus, otherwise, to listen on all buses, type::
+
+ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/usb/usbmon/0u > /tmp/1.mon.out
This process will read until it is killed. Naturally, the output can be
redirected to a desirable location. This is preferred, because it is going
to be quite long.
4. Perform the desired operation on the USB bus
+-----------------------------------------------
This is where you do something that creates the traffic: plug in a flash key,
copy files, control a webcam, etc.
5. Kill cat
+-----------
Usually it's done with a keyboard interrupt (Control-C).
@@ -89,7 +103,8 @@ At this point the output file (/tmp/1.mon.out in this example) can be saved,
sent by e-mail, or inspected with a text editor. In the last case make sure
that the file size is not excessive for your favourite editor.
-* Raw text data format
+Raw text data format
+====================
Two formats are supported currently: the original, or '1t' format, and
the '1u' format. The '1t' format is deprecated in kernel 2.6.21. The '1u'
@@ -122,10 +137,14 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
- "Address" word (formerly a "pipe"). It consists of four fields, separated by
colons: URB type and direction, Bus number, Device address, Endpoint number.
Type and direction are encoded with two bytes in the following manner:
+
+ == == =============================
Ci Co Control input and output
Zi Zo Isochronous input and output
Ii Io Interrupt input and output
Bi Bo Bulk input and output
+ == == =============================
+
Bus number, Device address, and Endpoint are decimal numbers, but they may
have leading zeros, for the sake of human readers.
@@ -178,24 +197,25 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
Examples:
-An input control transfer to get a port status.
+An input control transfer to get a port status::
-d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
-d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
+ d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
+ d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
An output bulk transfer to send a SCSI command 0x28 (READ_10) in a 31-byte
-Bulk wrapper to a storage device at address 5:
+Bulk wrapper to a storage device at address 5::
-dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 ad000000 00800000 80010a28 20000000 20000040 00000000 000000
-dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
+ dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 ad000000 00800000 80010a28 20000000 20000040 00000000 000000
+ dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
-* Raw binary format and API
+Raw binary format and API
+=========================
The overall architecture of the API is about the same as the one above,
only the events are delivered in binary format. Each event is sent in
-the following structure (its name is made up, so that we can refer to it):
+the following structure (its name is made up, so that we can refer to it)::
-struct usbmon_packet {
+ struct usbmon_packet {
u64 id; /* 0: URB ID - from submission to callback */
unsigned char type; /* 8: Same as text; extensible. */
unsigned char xfer_type; /* ISO (0), Intr, Control, Bulk (3) */
@@ -220,7 +240,7 @@ struct usbmon_packet {
int start_frame; /* 52: For ISO */
unsigned int xfer_flags; /* 56: copy of URB's transfer_flags */
unsigned int ndesc; /* 60: Actual number of ISO descriptors */
-}; /* 64 total length */
+ }; /* 64 total length */
These events can be received from a character device by reading with read(2),
with an ioctl(2), or by accessing the buffer with mmap. However, read(2)
@@ -244,12 +264,12 @@ no events are available.
MON_IOCG_STATS, defined as _IOR(MON_IOC_MAGIC, 3, struct mon_bin_stats)
-The argument is a pointer to the following structure:
+The argument is a pointer to the following structure::
-struct mon_bin_stats {
+ struct mon_bin_stats {
u32 queued;
u32 dropped;
-};
+ };
The member "queued" refers to the number of events currently queued in the
buffer (and not to the number of events processed since the last reset).
@@ -273,13 +293,13 @@ This call returns the current size of the buffer in bytes.
These calls wait for events to arrive if none were in the kernel buffer,
then return the first event. The argument is a pointer to the following
-structure:
+structure::
-struct mon_get_arg {
+ struct mon_get_arg {
struct usbmon_packet *hdr;
void *data;
size_t alloc; /* Length of data (can be zero) */
-};
+ };
Before the call, hdr, data, and alloc should be filled. Upon return, the area
pointed by hdr contains the next event structure, and the data buffer contains
@@ -290,13 +310,13 @@ The MON_IOCX_GET copies 48 bytes to hdr area, MON_IOCX_GETX copies 64 bytes.
MON_IOCX_MFETCH, defined as _IOWR(MON_IOC_MAGIC, 7, struct mon_mfetch_arg)
This ioctl is primarily used when the application accesses the buffer
-with mmap(2). Its argument is a pointer to the following structure:
+with mmap(2). Its argument is a pointer to the following structure::
-struct mon_mfetch_arg {
+ struct mon_mfetch_arg {
uint32_t *offvec; /* Vector of events fetched */
uint32_t nfetch; /* Number of events to fetch (out: fetched) */
uint32_t nflush; /* Number of events to flush */
-};
+ };
The ioctl operates in 3 stages.
@@ -329,7 +349,7 @@ be polled with select(2) and poll(2). But lseek(2) does not work.
The basic idea is simple:
To prepare, map the buffer by getting the current size, then using mmap(2).
-Then, execute a loop similar to the one written in pseudo-code below:
+Then, execute a loop similar to the one written in pseudo-code below::
struct mon_mfetch_arg fetch;
struct usbmon_packet *hdr;
--
2.20.1
Convert those documents and prepare them to be part of the kernel
API book, as most of the stuff there are related to the
Kernel interfaces.
Still, in the future, it would make sense to split the docs,
as some of the stuff is clearly focused on sysadmin tasks.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
---
.../convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt | 109 +--
Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt | 23 +-
Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt | 24 +-
Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt | 13 +-
Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt | 76 +-
.../watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt | 89 ++-
.../watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt | 672 +++++++++++++-----
Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt | 3 +
Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt | 31 +-
9 files changed, 733 insertions(+), 307 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
index 9fffb2958d13..dd934cc08e40 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
+=========================================================
Converting old watchdog drivers to the watchdog framework
+=========================================================
+
by Wolfram Sang <[email protected]>
-=========================================================
Before the watchdog framework came into the kernel, every driver had to
implement the API on its own. Now, as the framework factored out the common
@@ -69,16 +71,16 @@ Here is a overview of the functions and probably needed actions:
-ENOIOCTLCMD, the IOCTLs of the framework will be tried, too. Any other error
is directly given to the user.
-Example conversion:
+Example conversion::
--static const struct file_operations s3c2410wdt_fops = {
-- .owner = THIS_MODULE,
-- .llseek = no_llseek,
-- .write = s3c2410wdt_write,
-- .unlocked_ioctl = s3c2410wdt_ioctl,
-- .open = s3c2410wdt_open,
-- .release = s3c2410wdt_release,
--};
+ -static const struct file_operations s3c2410wdt_fops = {
+ - .owner = THIS_MODULE,
+ - .llseek = no_llseek,
+ - .write = s3c2410wdt_write,
+ - .unlocked_ioctl = s3c2410wdt_ioctl,
+ - .open = s3c2410wdt_open,
+ - .release = s3c2410wdt_release,
+ -};
Check the functions for device-specific stuff and keep it for later
refactoring. The rest can go.
@@ -89,24 +91,24 @@ Remove the miscdevice
Since the file_operations are gone now, you can also remove the 'struct
miscdevice'. The framework will create it on watchdog_dev_register() called by
-watchdog_register_device().
+watchdog_register_device()::
--static struct miscdevice s3c2410wdt_miscdev = {
-- .minor = WATCHDOG_MINOR,
-- .name = "watchdog",
-- .fops = &s3c2410wdt_fops,
--};
+ -static struct miscdevice s3c2410wdt_miscdev = {
+ - .minor = WATCHDOG_MINOR,
+ - .name = "watchdog",
+ - .fops = &s3c2410wdt_fops,
+ -};
Remove obsolete includes and defines
------------------------------------
Because of the simplifications, a few defines are probably unused now. Remove
-them. Includes can be removed, too. For example:
+them. Includes can be removed, too. For example::
-- #include <linux/fs.h>
-- #include <linux/miscdevice.h> (if MODULE_ALIAS_MISCDEV is not used)
-- #include <linux/uaccess.h> (if no custom IOCTLs are used)
+ - #include <linux/fs.h>
+ - #include <linux/miscdevice.h> (if MODULE_ALIAS_MISCDEV is not used)
+ - #include <linux/uaccess.h> (if no custom IOCTLs are used)
Add the watchdog operations
@@ -121,30 +123,30 @@ change the function header. Other changes are most likely not needed, because
here simply happens the direct hardware access. If you have device-specific
code left from the above steps, it should be refactored into these callbacks.
-Here is a simple example:
+Here is a simple example::
-+static struct watchdog_ops s3c2410wdt_ops = {
-+ .owner = THIS_MODULE,
-+ .start = s3c2410wdt_start,
-+ .stop = s3c2410wdt_stop,
-+ .ping = s3c2410wdt_keepalive,
-+ .set_timeout = s3c2410wdt_set_heartbeat,
-+};
+ +static struct watchdog_ops s3c2410wdt_ops = {
+ + .owner = THIS_MODULE,
+ + .start = s3c2410wdt_start,
+ + .stop = s3c2410wdt_stop,
+ + .ping = s3c2410wdt_keepalive,
+ + .set_timeout = s3c2410wdt_set_heartbeat,
+ +};
-A typical function-header change looks like:
+A typical function-header change looks like::
--static void s3c2410wdt_keepalive(void)
-+static int s3c2410wdt_keepalive(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
- {
-...
-+
-+ return 0;
- }
+ -static void s3c2410wdt_keepalive(void)
+ +static int s3c2410wdt_keepalive(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
+ {
+ ...
+ +
+ + return 0;
+ }
-...
+ ...
-- s3c2410wdt_keepalive();
-+ s3c2410wdt_keepalive(&s3c2410_wdd);
+ - s3c2410wdt_keepalive();
+ + s3c2410wdt_keepalive(&s3c2410_wdd);
Add the watchdog device
@@ -159,12 +161,12 @@ static variables. Those have to be converted to use the members in
watchdog_device. Note that the timeout values are unsigned int. Some drivers
use signed int, so this has to be converted, too.
-Here is a simple example for a watchdog device:
+Here is a simple example for a watchdog device::
-+static struct watchdog_device s3c2410_wdd = {
-+ .info = &s3c2410_wdt_ident,
-+ .ops = &s3c2410wdt_ops,
-+};
+ +static struct watchdog_device s3c2410_wdd = {
+ + .info = &s3c2410_wdt_ident,
+ + .ops = &s3c2410wdt_ops,
+ +};
Handle the 'nowayout' feature
@@ -173,12 +175,12 @@ Handle the 'nowayout' feature
A few drivers use nowayout statically, i.e. there is no module parameter for it
and only CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT determines if the feature is going to be
used. This needs to be converted by initializing the status variable of the
-watchdog_device like this:
+watchdog_device like this::
.status = WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT_INIT_STATUS,
Most drivers, however, also allow runtime configuration of nowayout, usually
-by adding a module parameter. The conversion for this would be something like:
+by adding a module parameter. The conversion for this would be something like::
watchdog_set_nowayout(&s3c2410_wdd, nowayout);
@@ -191,15 +193,15 @@ Register the watchdog device
Replace misc_register(&miscdev) with watchdog_register_device(&watchdog_dev).
Make sure the return value gets checked and the error message, if present,
-still fits. Also convert the unregister case.
+still fits. Also convert the unregister case::
-- ret = misc_register(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
-+ ret = watchdog_register_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
+ - ret = misc_register(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
+ + ret = watchdog_register_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
-...
+ ...
-- misc_deregister(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
-+ watchdog_unregister_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
+ - misc_deregister(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
+ + watchdog_unregister_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
Update the Kconfig-entry
@@ -207,7 +209,7 @@ Update the Kconfig-entry
The entry for the driver now needs to select WATCHDOG_CORE:
-+ select WATCHDOG_CORE
+ + select WATCHDOG_CORE
Create a patch and send it to upstream
@@ -215,4 +217,3 @@ Create a patch and send it to upstream
Make sure you understood Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst and send your patch to
[email protected]. We are looking forward to it :)
-
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
index 55df692c5595..a8c6751321de 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,12 @@
+===========================
+HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver
+===========================
+
+for iLO based ProLiant Servers
+==============================
+
Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
- HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver
- for iLO based ProLiant Servers
The HPE iLO NMI Watchdog driver is a kernel module that provides basic
watchdog functionality and handler for the iLO "Generate NMI to System"
@@ -20,21 +25,24 @@ Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
The hpwdt driver also has the following module parameters:
- soft_margin - allows the user to set the watchdog timer value.
+ ============ ================================================================
+ soft_margin allows the user to set the watchdog timer value.
Default value is 30 seconds.
- timeout - an alias of soft_margin.
- pretimeout - allows the user to set the watchdog pretimeout value.
+ timeout an alias of soft_margin.
+ pretimeout allows the user to set the watchdog pretimeout value.
This is the number of seconds before timeout when an
NMI is delivered to the system. Setting the value to
zero disables the pretimeout NMI.
Default value is 9 seconds.
- nowayout - basic watchdog parameter that does not allow the timer to
+ nowayout basic watchdog parameter that does not allow the timer to
be restarted or an impending ASR to be escaped.
Default value is set when compiling the kernel. If it is set
to "Y", then there is no way of disabling the watchdog once
it has been started.
+ ============ ================================================================
- NOTE: More information about watchdog drivers in general, including the ioctl
+ NOTE:
+ More information about watchdog drivers in general, including the ioctl
interface to /dev/watchdog can be found in
Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt and Documentation/IPMI.txt.
@@ -63,4 +71,3 @@ Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
The HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver and documentation were originally developed
by Tom Mingarelli.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
index 66eeb78505c3..bf5bafac47f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
- Mellanox watchdog drivers
- for x86 based system switches
+=========================
+Mellanox watchdog drivers
+=========================
+
+for x86 based system switches
+=============================
This driver provides watchdog functionality for various Mellanox
Ethernet and Infiniband switch systems.
@@ -9,16 +13,16 @@ Mellanox watchdog device is implemented in a programmable logic device.
There are 2 types of HW watchdog implementations.
Type 1:
-Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec.
-e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec.
-The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.),
-Get time-left isn't supported
+ Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec.
+ e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec.
+ The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.),
+ Get time-left isn't supported
Type 2:
-Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as
-a user-defined timeout.
-Maximum timeout is 255 sec.
-Get time-left is supported.
+ Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as
+ a user-defined timeout.
+ Maximum timeout is 255 sec.
+ Get time-left is supported.
Type 1 HW watchdog implementation exist in old systems and
all new systems have type 2 HW watchdog.
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
index b8e60a441a43..405e2a370082 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
+===================================
+Berkshire Products PC Watchdog Card
+===================================
+
Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
- Berkshire Products PC Watchdog Card
- Support for ISA Cards Revision A and C
- Documentation and Driver by Ken Hollis <[email protected]>
+Support for ISA Cards Revision A and C
+=======================================
+
+Documentation and Driver by Ken Hollis <[email protected]>
The PC Watchdog is a card that offers the same type of functionality that
the WDT card does, only it doesn't require an IRQ to run. Furthermore,
@@ -33,6 +38,7 @@ Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
WDIOC_GETSUPPORT
This returns the support of the card itself. This
returns in structure "PCWDS" which returns:
+
options = WDIOS_TEMPPANIC
(This card supports temperature)
firmware_version = xxxx
@@ -63,4 +69,3 @@ Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
-- Ken Hollis
([email protected])
-
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
index 0e62ba33b7fb..c6c1e9fa9f73 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
+=============================
+The Linux Watchdog driver API
+=============================
+
Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
-The Linux Watchdog driver API.
Copyright 2002 Christer Weingel <[email protected]>
@@ -10,7 +13,8 @@ driver which is (c) Copyright 2000 Jakob Oestergaard <[email protected]>
This document describes the state of the Linux 2.4.18 kernel.
-Introduction:
+Introduction
+============
A Watchdog Timer (WDT) is a hardware circuit that can reset the
computer system in case of a software fault. You probably knew that
@@ -30,7 +34,8 @@ drivers implement different, and sometimes incompatible, parts of it.
This file is an attempt to document the existing usage and allow
future driver writers to use it as a reference.
-The simplest API:
+The simplest API
+================
All drivers support the basic mode of operation, where the watchdog
activates as soon as /dev/watchdog is opened and will reboot unless
@@ -54,7 +59,8 @@ after the timeout has passed. Watchdog devices also usually support
the nowayout module parameter so that this option can be controlled at
runtime.
-Magic Close feature:
+Magic Close feature
+===================
If a driver supports "Magic Close", the driver will not disable the
watchdog unless a specific magic character 'V' has been sent to
@@ -64,7 +70,8 @@ will assume that the daemon (and userspace in general) died, and will
stop pinging the watchdog without disabling it first. This will then
cause a reboot if the watchdog is not re-opened in sufficient time.
-The ioctl API:
+The ioctl API
+=============
All conforming drivers also support an ioctl API.
@@ -73,7 +80,7 @@ Pinging the watchdog using an ioctl:
All drivers that have an ioctl interface support at least one ioctl,
KEEPALIVE. This ioctl does exactly the same thing as a write to the
watchdog device, so the main loop in the above program could be
-replaced with:
+replaced with::
while (1) {
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_KEEPALIVE, 0);
@@ -82,14 +89,15 @@ replaced with:
the argument to the ioctl is ignored.
-Setting and getting the timeout:
+Setting and getting the timeout
+===============================
For some drivers it is possible to modify the watchdog timeout on the
fly with the SETTIMEOUT ioctl, those drivers have the WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT
flag set in their option field. The argument is an integer
representing the timeout in seconds. The driver returns the real
timeout used in the same variable, and this timeout might differ from
-the requested one due to limitation of the hardware.
+the requested one due to limitation of the hardware::
int timeout = 45;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETTIMEOUT, &timeout);
@@ -99,18 +107,19 @@ This example might actually print "The timeout was set to 60 seconds"
if the device has a granularity of minutes for its timeout.
Starting with the Linux 2.4.18 kernel, it is possible to query the
-current timeout using the GETTIMEOUT ioctl.
+current timeout using the GETTIMEOUT ioctl::
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTIMEOUT, &timeout);
printf("The timeout was is %d seconds\n", timeout);
-Pretimeouts:
+Pretimeouts
+===========
Some watchdog timers can be set to have a trigger go off before the
actual time they will reset the system. This can be done with an NMI,
interrupt, or other mechanism. This allows Linux to record useful
information (like panic information and kernel coredumps) before it
-resets.
+resets::
pretimeout = 10;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETPRETIMEOUT, &pretimeout);
@@ -121,89 +130,113 @@ the pretimeout. So, for instance, if you set the timeout to 60 seconds
and the pretimeout to 10 seconds, the pretimeout will go off in 50
seconds. Setting a pretimeout to zero disables it.
-There is also a get function for getting the pretimeout:
+There is also a get function for getting the pretimeout::
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETPRETIMEOUT, &timeout);
printf("The pretimeout was is %d seconds\n", timeout);
Not all watchdog drivers will support a pretimeout.
-Get the number of seconds before reboot:
+Get the number of seconds before reboot
+=======================================
Some watchdog drivers have the ability to report the remaining time
before the system will reboot. The WDIOC_GETTIMELEFT is the ioctl
-that returns the number of seconds before reboot.
+that returns the number of seconds before reboot::
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTIMELEFT, &timeleft);
printf("The timeout was is %d seconds\n", timeleft);
-Environmental monitoring:
+Environmental monitoring
+========================
All watchdog drivers are required return more information about the system,
some do temperature, fan and power level monitoring, some can tell you
the reason for the last reboot of the system. The GETSUPPORT ioctl is
-available to ask what the device can do:
+available to ask what the device can do::
struct watchdog_info ident;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETSUPPORT, &ident);
the fields returned in the ident struct are:
+ ================ =============================================
identity a string identifying the watchdog driver
firmware_version the firmware version of the card if available
options a flags describing what the device supports
+ ================ =============================================
the options field can have the following bits set, and describes what
kind of information that the GET_STATUS and GET_BOOT_STATUS ioctls can
return. [FIXME -- Is this correct?]
+ ================ =========================
WDIOF_OVERHEAT Reset due to CPU overheat
+ ================ =========================
The machine was last rebooted by the watchdog because the thermal limit was
-exceeded
+exceeded:
+ ============== ==========
WDIOF_FANFAULT Fan failed
+ ============== ==========
A system fan monitored by the watchdog card has failed
+ ============= ================
WDIOF_EXTERN1 External relay 1
+ ============= ================
External monitoring relay/source 1 was triggered. Controllers intended for
real world applications include external monitoring pins that will trigger
a reset.
+ ============= ================
WDIOF_EXTERN2 External relay 2
+ ============= ================
External monitoring relay/source 2 was triggered
+ ================ =====================
WDIOF_POWERUNDER Power bad/power fault
+ ================ =====================
The machine is showing an undervoltage status
+ =============== =============================
WDIOF_CARDRESET Card previously reset the CPU
+ =============== =============================
The last reboot was caused by the watchdog card
+ ================ =====================
WDIOF_POWEROVER Power over voltage
+ ================ =====================
The machine is showing an overvoltage status. Note that if one level is
under and one over both bits will be set - this may seem odd but makes
sense.
+ =================== =====================
WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING Keep alive ping reply
+ =================== =====================
The watchdog saw a keepalive ping since it was last queried.
+ ================ =======================
WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT Can set/get the timeout
+ ================ =======================
The watchdog can do pretimeouts.
+ ================ ================================
WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT Pretimeout (in seconds), get/set
+ ================ ================================
For those drivers that return any bits set in the option field, the
GETSTATUS and GETBOOTSTATUS ioctls can be used to ask for the current
-status, and the status at the last reboot, respectively.
+status, and the status at the last reboot, respectively::
int flags;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETSTATUS, &flags);
@@ -216,22 +249,23 @@ Note that not all devices support these two calls, and some only
support the GETBOOTSTATUS call.
Some drivers can measure the temperature using the GETTEMP ioctl. The
-returned value is the temperature in degrees fahrenheit.
+returned value is the temperature in degrees fahrenheit::
int temperature;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTEMP, &temperature);
Finally the SETOPTIONS ioctl can be used to control some aspects of
-the cards operation.
+the cards operation::
int options = 0;
ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETOPTIONS, &options);
The following options are available:
+ ================= ================================
WDIOS_DISABLECARD Turn off the watchdog timer
WDIOS_ENABLECARD Turn on the watchdog timer
WDIOS_TEMPPANIC Kernel panic on temperature trip
+ ================= ================================
[FIXME -- better explanations]
-
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
index 3a91ef5af044..452002be568c 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
-The Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API.
===============================================
+The Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API
+===============================================
+
Last reviewed: 12-Feb-2013
Wim Van Sebroeck <[email protected]>
@@ -23,10 +25,10 @@ The API
Each watchdog timer driver that wants to use the WatchDog Timer Driver Core
must #include <linux/watchdog.h> (you would have to do this anyway when
writing a watchdog device driver). This include file contains following
-register/unregister routines:
+register/unregister routines::
-extern int watchdog_register_device(struct watchdog_device *);
-extern void watchdog_unregister_device(struct watchdog_device *);
+ extern int watchdog_register_device(struct watchdog_device *);
+ extern void watchdog_unregister_device(struct watchdog_device *);
The watchdog_register_device routine registers a watchdog timer device.
The parameter of this routine is a pointer to a watchdog_device structure.
@@ -40,9 +42,9 @@ The watchdog subsystem includes an registration deferral mechanism,
which allows you to register an watchdog as early as you wish during
the boot process.
-The watchdog device structure looks like this:
+The watchdog device structure looks like this::
-struct watchdog_device {
+ struct watchdog_device {
int id;
struct device *parent;
const struct attribute_group **groups;
@@ -62,9 +64,10 @@ struct watchdog_device {
struct watchdog_core_data *wd_data;
unsigned long status;
struct list_head deferred;
-};
+ };
It contains following fields:
+
* id: set by watchdog_register_device, id 0 is special. It has both a
/dev/watchdog0 cdev (dynamic major, minor 0) as well as the old
/dev/watchdog miscdev. The id is set automatically when calling
@@ -114,9 +117,9 @@ It contains following fields:
* deferred: entry in wtd_deferred_reg_list which is used to
register early initialized watchdogs.
-The list of watchdog operations is defined as:
+The list of watchdog operations is defined as::
-struct watchdog_ops {
+ struct watchdog_ops {
struct module *owner;
/* mandatory operations */
int (*start)(struct watchdog_device *);
@@ -129,7 +132,7 @@ struct watchdog_ops {
unsigned int (*get_timeleft)(struct watchdog_device *);
int (*restart)(struct watchdog_device *);
long (*ioctl)(struct watchdog_device *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
-};
+ };
It is important that you first define the module owner of the watchdog timer
driver's operations. This module owner will be used to lock the module when
@@ -138,6 +141,7 @@ module and /dev/watchdog is still open).
Some operations are mandatory and some are optional. The mandatory operations
are:
+
* start: this is a pointer to the routine that starts the watchdog timer
device.
The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
@@ -146,51 +150,64 @@ are:
Not all watchdog timer hardware supports the same functionality. That's why
all other routines/operations are optional. They only need to be provided if
they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
+
* stop: with this routine the watchdog timer device is being stopped.
+
The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
parameter. It returns zero on success or a negative errno code for failure.
Some watchdog timer hardware can only be started and not be stopped. A
driver supporting such hardware does not have to implement the stop routine.
+
If a driver has no stop function, the watchdog core will set WDOG_HW_RUNNING
and start calling the driver's keepalive pings function after the watchdog
device is closed.
+
If a watchdog driver does not implement the stop function, it must set
max_hw_heartbeat_ms.
* ping: this is the routine that sends a keepalive ping to the watchdog timer
hardware.
+
The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
parameter. It returns zero on success or a negative errno code for failure.
+
Most hardware that does not support this as a separate function uses the
start function to restart the watchdog timer hardware. And that's also what
the watchdog timer driver core does: to send a keepalive ping to the watchdog
timer hardware it will either use the ping operation (when available) or the
start operation (when the ping operation is not available).
+
(Note: the WDIOC_KEEPALIVE ioctl call will only be active when the
WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING bit has been set in the option field on the watchdog's
info structure).
* status: this routine checks the status of the watchdog timer device. The
status of the device is reported with watchdog WDIOF_* status flags/bits.
+
WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE and WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING are reported by the watchdog core;
it is not necessary to report those bits from the driver. Also, if no status
function is provided by the driver, the watchdog core reports the status bits
provided in the bootstatus variable of struct watchdog_device.
+
* set_timeout: this routine checks and changes the timeout of the watchdog
timer device. It returns 0 on success, -EINVAL for "parameter out of range"
and -EIO for "could not write value to the watchdog". On success this
routine should set the timeout value of the watchdog_device to the
achieved timeout value (which may be different from the requested one
because the watchdog does not necessarily have a 1 second resolution).
+
Drivers implementing max_hw_heartbeat_ms set the hardware watchdog heartbeat
to the minimum of timeout and max_hw_heartbeat_ms. Those drivers set the
timeout value of the watchdog_device either to the requested timeout value
(if it is larger than max_hw_heartbeat_ms), or to the achieved timeout value.
(Note: the WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT needs to be set in the options field of the
watchdog's info structure).
+
If the watchdog driver does not have to perform any action but setting the
watchdog_device.timeout, this callback can be omitted.
+
If set_timeout is not provided but, WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT is set, the watchdog
infrastructure updates the timeout value of the watchdog_device internally
to the requested value.
+
If the pretimeout feature is used (WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT), then set_timeout must
also take care of checking if pretimeout is still valid and set up the timer
accordingly. This can't be done in the core without races, so it is the
@@ -201,13 +218,16 @@ they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
seconds before the actual timeout would happen. It returns 0 on success,
-EINVAL for "parameter out of range" and -EIO for "could not write value to
the watchdog". A value of 0 disables pretimeout notification.
+
(Note: the WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT needs to be set in the options field of the
watchdog's info structure).
+
If the watchdog driver does not have to perform any action but setting the
watchdog_device.pretimeout, this callback can be omitted. That means if
set_pretimeout is not provided but WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT is set, the watchdog
infrastructure updates the pretimeout value of the watchdog_device internally
to the requested value.
+
* get_timeleft: this routines returns the time that's left before a reset.
* restart: this routine restarts the machine. It returns 0 on success or a
negative errno code for failure.
@@ -218,6 +238,7 @@ they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
The status bits should (preferably) be set with the set_bit and clear_bit alike
bit-operations. The status bits that are defined are:
+
* WDOG_ACTIVE: this status bit indicates whether or not a watchdog timer device
is active or not from user perspective. User space is expected to send
heartbeat requests to the driver while this flag is set.
@@ -235,22 +256,30 @@ bit-operations. The status bits that are defined are:
To set the WDOG_NO_WAY_OUT status bit (before registering your watchdog
timer device) you can either:
+
* set it statically in your watchdog_device struct with
+
.status = WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT_INIT_STATUS,
+
(this will set the value the same as CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT) or
- * use the following helper function:
- static inline void watchdog_set_nowayout(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int nowayout)
+ * use the following helper function::
+
+ static inline void watchdog_set_nowayout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
+ int nowayout)
+
+Note:
+ The WatchDog Timer Driver Core supports the magic close feature and
+ the nowayout feature. To use the magic close feature you must set the
+ WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE bit in the options field of the watchdog's info structure.
-Note: The WatchDog Timer Driver Core supports the magic close feature and
-the nowayout feature. To use the magic close feature you must set the
-WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE bit in the options field of the watchdog's info structure.
The nowayout feature will overrule the magic close feature.
To get or set driver specific data the following two helper functions should be
-used:
+used::
-static inline void watchdog_set_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd, void *data)
-static inline void *watchdog_get_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
+ static inline void watchdog_set_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
+ void *data)
+ static inline void *watchdog_get_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
The watchdog_set_drvdata function allows you to add driver specific data. The
arguments of this function are the watchdog device where you want to add the
@@ -260,10 +289,11 @@ The watchdog_get_drvdata function allows you to retrieve driver specific data.
The argument of this function is the watchdog device where you want to retrieve
data from. The function returns the pointer to the driver specific data.
-To initialize the timeout field, the following function can be used:
+To initialize the timeout field, the following function can be used::
-extern int watchdog_init_timeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
- unsigned int timeout_parm, struct device *dev);
+ extern int watchdog_init_timeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
+ unsigned int timeout_parm,
+ struct device *dev);
The watchdog_init_timeout function allows you to initialize the timeout field
using the module timeout parameter or by retrieving the timeout-sec property from
@@ -272,30 +302,33 @@ to set the default timeout value as timeout value in the watchdog_device and
then use this function to set the user "preferred" timeout value.
This routine returns zero on success and a negative errno code for failure.
-To disable the watchdog on reboot, the user must call the following helper:
+To disable the watchdog on reboot, the user must call the following helper::
-static inline void watchdog_stop_on_reboot(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
+ static inline void watchdog_stop_on_reboot(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
To disable the watchdog when unregistering the watchdog, the user must call
the following helper. Note that this will only stop the watchdog if the
nowayout flag is not set.
-static inline void watchdog_stop_on_unregister(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
+::
+
+ static inline void watchdog_stop_on_unregister(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
To change the priority of the restart handler the following helper should be
-used:
+used::
-void watchdog_set_restart_priority(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int priority);
+ void watchdog_set_restart_priority(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int priority);
User should follow the following guidelines for setting the priority:
+
* 0: should be called in last resort, has limited restart capabilities
* 128: default restart handler, use if no other handler is expected to be
available, and/or if restart is sufficient to restart the entire system
* 255: highest priority, will preempt all other restart handlers
-To raise a pretimeout notification, the following function should be used:
+To raise a pretimeout notification, the following function should be used::
-void watchdog_notify_pretimeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
+ void watchdog_notify_pretimeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
The function can be called in the interrupt context. If watchdog pretimeout
governor framework (kbuild CONFIG_WATCHDOG_PRETIMEOUT_GOV symbol) is enabled,
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
index 0b88e333f9e1..b121caae7798 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
@@ -1,410 +1,736 @@
+==========================
+WatchDog Module Parameters
+==========================
+
This file provides information on the module parameters of many of
the Linux watchdog drivers. Watchdog driver parameter specs should
be listed here unless the driver has its own driver-specific information
file.
-
See Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst for information on
providing kernel parameters for builtin drivers versus loadable
modules.
-
-------------------------------------------------
+
acquirewdt:
-wdt_stop: Acquire WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x43)
-wdt_start: Acquire WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_stop:
+ Acquire WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x43)
+ wdt_start:
+ Acquire WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
advantechwdt:
-wdt_stop: Advantech WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x443)
-wdt_start: Advantech WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=63, default=60.
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_stop:
+ Advantech WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x443)
+ wdt_start:
+ Advantech WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=63, default=60.
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
alim1535_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0 < timeout < 18000, default=60
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0 < timeout < 18000, default=60
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
alim7101_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30
-use_gpio: Use the gpio watchdog (required by old cobalt boards).
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30
+ use_gpio:
+ Use the gpio watchdog (required by old cobalt boards).
default=0/off/no
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ar7_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default=60)
-nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds (default=60)
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog shutdown on close
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
armada_37xx_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default=120)
-nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default=120)
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog shutdown on close
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
at91rm9200_wdt:
-wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_time:
+ Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
at91sam9_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
bcm47xx_wdt:
-wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_time:
+ Watchdog time in seconds. (default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
coh901327_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
cpu5wdt:
-port: base address of watchdog card, default is 0x91
-verbose: be verbose, default is 0 (no)
-ticks: count down ticks, default is 10000
+ port:
+ base address of watchdog card, default is 0x91
+ verbose:
+ be verbose, default is 0 (no)
+ ticks:
+ count down ticks, default is 10000
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
cpwd:
-wd0_timeout: Default watchdog0 timeout in 1/10secs
-wd1_timeout: Default watchdog1 timeout in 1/10secs
-wd2_timeout: Default watchdog2 timeout in 1/10secs
+ wd0_timeout:
+ Default watchdog0 timeout in 1/10secs
+ wd1_timeout:
+ Default watchdog1 timeout in 1/10secs
+ wd2_timeout:
+ Default watchdog2 timeout in 1/10secs
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
da9052wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 2<= timeout <=131, default=2.048s
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 2<= timeout <=131, default=2.048s
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
davinci_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 600, default 60
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 600, default 60
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ebc-c384_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=15300, default=60)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=15300, default=60)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ep93xx_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=TBD)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=TBD)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
eurotechwdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-io: Eurotech WDT io port (default=0x3f0)
-irq: Eurotech WDT irq (default=10)
-ev: Eurotech WDT event type (default is `int')
+ io:
+ Eurotech WDT io port (default=0x3f0)
+ irq:
+ Eurotech WDT irq (default=10)
+ ev:
+ Eurotech WDT event type (default is `int`)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
gef_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
geodewdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=131, default=60.
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=131, default=60.
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
i6300esb:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1<heartbeat<2046, default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1<heartbeat<2046, default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
iTCO_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds.
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat in seconds.
(2<heartbeat<39 (TCO v1) or 613 (TCO v2), default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
iTCO_vendor_support:
-vendorsupport: iTCO vendor specific support mode, default=0 (none),
+ vendorsupport:
+ iTCO vendor specific support mode, default=0 (none),
1=SuperMicro Pent3, 2=SuperMicro Pent4+, 911=Broken SMI BIOS
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ib700wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 0<= timeout <=30, default=30.
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 0<= timeout <=30, default=30.
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ibmasr:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
imx2_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (default 60 s)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds (default 60 s)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
indydog:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
iop_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
it8712f_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60)
-nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60)
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog shutdown on close
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
it87_wdt:
-nogameport: Forbid the activation of game port, default=0
-nocir: Forbid the use of CIR (workaround for some buggy setups); set to 1 if
+ nogameport:
+ Forbid the activation of game port, default=0
+ nocir:
+ Forbid the use of CIR (workaround for some buggy setups); set to 1 if
system resets despite watchdog daemon running, default=0
-exclusive: Watchdog exclusive device open, default=1
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds, default=60
-testmode: Watchdog test mode (1 = no reboot), default=0
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ exclusive:
+ Watchdog exclusive device open, default=1
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds, default=60
+ testmode:
+ Watchdog test mode (1 = no reboot), default=0
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ixp4xx_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60s)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60s)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ks8695_wdt:
-wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_time:
+ Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
machzwd:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-action: after watchdog resets, generate:
+ action:
+ after watchdog resets, generate:
0 = RESET(*) 1 = SMI 2 = NMI 3 = SCI
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
max63xx_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 60
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 60
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-nodelay: Force selection of a timeout setting without initial delay
+ nodelay:
+ Force selection of a timeout setting without initial delay
(max6373/74 only, default=0)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
mixcomwd:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
mpc8xxx_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in ticks. (0<timeout<65536, default=65535)
-reset: Watchdog Interrupt/Reset Mode. 0 = interrupt, 1 = reset
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in ticks. (0<timeout<65536, default=65535)
+ reset:
+ Watchdog Interrupt/Reset Mode. 0 = interrupt, 1 = reset
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
mv64x60_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ni903x_wdt:
-timeout: Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<516, default=60)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<516, default=60)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
nic7018_wdt:
-timeout: Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<464, default=80)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<464, default=80)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
nuc900_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds.
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeats in seconds.
(default = 15)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
omap_wdt:
-timer_margin: initial watchdog timeout (in seconds)
-early_enable: Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=0
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timer_margin:
+ initial watchdog timeout (in seconds)
+ early_enable:
+ Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=0
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
orion_wdt:
-heartbeat: Initial watchdog heartbeat in seconds
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Initial watchdog heartbeat in seconds
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
pc87413_wdt:
-io: pc87413 WDT I/O port (default: io).
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=timeout).
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ io:
+ pc87413 WDT I/O port (default: io).
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=timeout).
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
pika_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
pnx4008_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 19
-nowayout: Set to 1 to keep watchdog running after device release
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 19
+ nowayout:
+ Set to 1 to keep watchdog running after device release
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
pnx833x_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in Mhz. (68Mhz clock), default=2040000000 (30 seconds)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in Mhz. (68Mhz clock), default=2040000000 (30 seconds)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-start_enabled: Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=1)
+ start_enabled:
+ Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=1)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
rc32434_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout value, in seconds (default=20)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout value, in seconds (default=20)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
riowd:
-riowd_timeout: Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=1)
+ riowd_timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=1)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
s3c2410_wdt:
-tmr_margin: Watchdog tmr_margin in seconds. (default=15)
-tmr_atboot: Watchdog is started at boot time if set to 1, default=0
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ tmr_margin:
+ Watchdog tmr_margin in seconds. (default=15)
+ tmr_atboot:
+ Watchdog is started at boot time if set to 1, default=0
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-soft_noboot: Watchdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
-debug: Watchdog debug, set to >1 for debug, (default 0)
+ soft_noboot:
+ Watchdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
+ debug:
+ Watchdog debug, set to >1 for debug, (default 0)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sa1100_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sb_wdog:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in microseconds (max/default 8388607 or 8.3ish secs)
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in microseconds (max/default 8388607 or 8.3ish secs)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbc60xxwdt:
-wdt_stop: SBC60xx WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x45)
-wdt_start: SBC60xx WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_stop:
+ SBC60xx WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x45)
+ wdt_start:
+ SBC60xx WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbc7240_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=255, default=30)
-nowayout: Disable watchdog when closing device file
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=255, default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog when closing device file
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbc8360:
-timeout: Index into timeout table (0-63) (default=27 (60s))
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Index into timeout table (0-63) (default=27 (60s))
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbc_epx_c3:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbc_fitpc2_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sbsa_gwdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default 10s)
-action: Watchdog action at the first stage timeout,
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default 10s)
+ action:
+ Watchdog action at the first stage timeout,
set to 0 to ignore, 1 to panic. (default=0)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sc1200wdt:
-isapnp: When set to 0 driver ISA PnP support will be disabled (default=1)
-io: io port
-timeout: range is 0-255 minutes, default is 1
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ isapnp:
+ When set to 0 driver ISA PnP support will be disabled (default=1)
+ io:
+ io port
+ timeout:
+ range is 0-255 minutes, default is 1
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sc520_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 3600, default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 3600, default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sch311x_wdt:
-force_id: Override the detected device ID
-therm_trip: Should a ThermTrip trigger the reset generator
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=15300, default=60
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ force_id:
+ Override the detected device ID
+ therm_trip:
+ Should a ThermTrip trigger the reset generator
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=15300, default=60
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
scx200_wdt:
-margin: Watchdog margin in seconds
-nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+ margin:
+ Watchdog margin in seconds
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
shwdt:
-clock_division_ratio: Clock division ratio. Valid ranges are from 0x5 (1.31ms)
+ clock_division_ratio:
+ Clock division ratio. Valid ranges are from 0x5 (1.31ms)
to 0x7 (5.25ms). (default=7)
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1 <= heartbeat <= 3600, default=30
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1 <= heartbeat <= 3600, default=30
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
smsc37b787_wdt:
-timeout: range is 1-255 units, default is 60
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ range is 1-255 units, default is 60
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
softdog:
-soft_margin: Watchdog soft_margin in seconds.
+ soft_margin:
+ Watchdog soft_margin in seconds.
(0 < soft_margin < 65536, default=60)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
-soft_noboot: Softdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
+ soft_noboot:
+ Softdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
(default=0)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
stmp3xxx_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 4194304, default 19
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 4194304, default 19
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
tegra_wdt:
-heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 120)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ heartbeat:
+ Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 120)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
ts72xx_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 8, default=8)
-nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 8, default=8)
+ nowayout:
+ Disable watchdog shutdown on close
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
twl4030_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
txx9wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0<timeout<N, default=60)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0<timeout<N, default=60)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
uniphier_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in power of two seconds.
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in power of two seconds.
(1 <= timeout <= 128, default=64)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
w83627hf_wdt:
-wdt_io: w83627hf/thf WDT io port (default 0x2E)
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ wdt_io:
+ w83627hf/thf WDT io port (default 0x2E)
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
w83877f_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
w83977f_wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (15..7635), default=45)
-testmode: Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds (15..7635), default=45)
+ testmode:
+ Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
wafer5823wdt:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
wdt285:
-soft_margin: Watchdog timeout in seconds (default=60)
+ soft_margin:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds (default=60)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
wdt977:
-timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (60..15300, default=60)
-testmode: Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ timeout:
+ Watchdog timeout in seconds (60..15300, default=60)
+ testmode:
+ Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
wm831x_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
wm8350_wdt:
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
(default=kernel config parameter)
+
-------------------------------------------------
+
sun4v_wdt:
-timeout_ms: Watchdog timeout in milliseconds 1..180000, default=60000)
-nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
--------------------------------------------------
+ timeout_ms:
+ Watchdog timeout in milliseconds 1..180000, default=60000)
+ nowayout:
+ Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
index 7a4dd46e0d24..646e1f28f31f 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+===============================================
The Linux WatchDog Timer Power Management Guide
===============================================
+
Last reviewed: 17-Dec-2018
Wolfram Sang <[email protected]>
@@ -16,4 +18,5 @@ On resume, a watchdog timer shall be reset to its selected value to give
userspace enough time to resume. [1] [2]
[1] https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/10252209/
+
[2] https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/10711625/
diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
index ed2f0b860869..d97b0361535b 100644
--- a/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
@@ -1,11 +1,14 @@
+============================================================
+WDT Watchdog Timer Interfaces For The Linux Operating System
+============================================================
+
Last Reviewed: 10/05/2007
- WDT Watchdog Timer Interfaces For The Linux Operating System
- Alan Cox <[email protected]>
+Alan Cox <[email protected]>
- ICS WDT501-P
- ICS WDT501-P (no fan tachometer)
- ICS WDT500-P
+ - ICS WDT501-P
+ - ICS WDT501-P (no fan tachometer)
+ - ICS WDT500-P
All the interfaces provide /dev/watchdog, which when open must be written
to within a timeout or the machine will reboot. Each write delays the reboot
@@ -21,19 +24,26 @@ degrees Fahrenheit. Each read returns a single byte giving the temperature.
The third interface logs kernel messages on additional alert events.
The ICS ISA-bus wdt card cannot be safely probed for. Instead you need to
-pass IO address and IRQ boot parameters. E.g.:
+pass IO address and IRQ boot parameters. E.g.::
+
wdt.io=0x240 wdt.irq=11
Other "wdt" driver parameters are:
+
+ =========== ======================================================
heartbeat Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60)
nowayout Watchdog cannot be stopped once started (kernel
- build parameter)
+ build parameter)
tachometer WDT501-P Fan Tachometer support (0=disable, default=0)
type WDT501-P Card type (500 or 501, default=500)
+ =========== ======================================================
Features
--------
- WDT501P WDT500P
+
+================ ======= =======
+ WDT501P WDT500P
+================ ======= =======
Reboot Timer X X
External Reboot X X
I/O Port Monitor o o
@@ -42,9 +52,12 @@ Fan Speed X o
Power Under X o
Power Over X o
Overheat X o
+================ ======= =======
The external event interfaces on the WDT boards are not currently supported.
Minor numbers are however allocated for it.
-Example Watchdog Driver: see samples/watchdog/watchdog-simple.c
+Example Watchdog Driver:
+
+ see samples/watchdog/watchdog-simple.c
--
2.20.1
On Mon, Apr 15, 2019 at 11:55:49PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert the pcmcia docs to ReST format. Most of the changes here
> are trivial, making Sphinx properly identify titles, lists and
> literal blocks.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Acked-by: Dominik Brodowski <[email protected]>
Thanks,
Dominik
Hi Mauro,
On Mon, Apr 15, 2019 at 11:56:11PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> The debugfs interface for CMA should be there together with other
> mm-related documents.
>
> Convert this small file to ReST and move it to its rightful place.
>
> The conversion is actually quite simple: just add a title for the
> document. In order to make it to look better for the audience,
> also mark the "echo" command as a literal block.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> ---
> Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt | 6 +++++-
It wasn't really moved ;-)
> 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
>
> diff --git a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> index 6cef20a8cedc..4e06ffabd78a 100644
> --- a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> @@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
> +=====================
> +CMA Debugfs Interface
> +=====================
> +
> The CMA debugfs interface is useful to retrieve basic information out of the
> different CMA areas and to test allocation/release in each of the areas.
>
> @@ -12,7 +16,7 @@ The structure of the files created under that directory is as follows:
> - [RO] count: Amount of memory in the CMA area.
> - [RO] order_per_bit: Order of pages represented by one bit.
> - [RO] bitmap: The bitmap of page states in the zone.
> - - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example:
> + - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example::
>
> echo 5 > <debugfs>/cma/cma-2/alloc
>
> --
> 2.20.1
>
--
Sincerely yours,
Mike.
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]> writes:
> Convert USB documents to ReST, in order to prepare for adding it
> to the kernel API book, as most of the stuff there are driver or
> subsystem-related.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> ---
> Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt | 56 +-
> Documentation/usb/acm.txt | 156 +++---
> Documentation/usb/authorization.txt | 75 +--
> Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt | 101 ++--
> Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 12 +-
> Documentation/usb/ehci.txt | 42 +-
> Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt | 17 +-
> Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt | 609 ++++++++++++---------
> Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt | 302 +++++-----
> Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt | 175 +++---
> Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt | 43 +-
> Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt | 155 +++---
> Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt | 73 +--
> Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt | 34 +-
> Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt | 19 +-
> Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt | 9 +-
> Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt | 42 +-
> Documentation/usb/ohci.txt | 5 +-
> Documentation/usb/rio.txt | 83 +--
> Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt | 21 +-
> Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt | 203 ++++---
> Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt | 552 ++++++++++---------
> Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt | 100 ++--
should you change extension to .rst while at that?
--
balbi
On Mon 2019-04-15 23:55:50, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert the PM documents to ReST, in order to allow them to
> build with Sphinx.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Acked-by: Pavel Machek <[email protected]>
--
(english) http://www.livejournal.com/~pavelmachek
(cesky, pictures) http://atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz/~pavel/picture/horses/blog.html
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 5:02 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
> convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
> addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
> document.
There is concurrent work on this under way, please see
https://marc.info/?t=155381845300002&r=2&w=2
I'd prefer that one to continue, honestly.
Thanks,
Rafael
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 4:56 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> In order to be able to build html and pdf files, convert the
> documentation to ReST format.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Please don't convert these files.
They need more work than just semi-automatic conversion and the
material in them needs to go under driver-api.
This is quite hight in my TODO list.
Thanks,
Rafael
On Mon 2019-04-15 23:55:45, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert livepatch documentation to ReST format. The changes
> are mostly trivial, as the documents are already on a good
> shape. Just a few markup changes are needed for Sphinx to
> properly parse the docs.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Thanks a lot for the conversion. I tried html output and
it looks very well.
Just a question. This patch does only the formatting.
The documentation is not really generated because the file
is not renamed to .rst. Also it is not referenced from
any top level documents. Is it by intention?
I am happy even for the conversion, so:
Reviewed-by: Petr Mladek <[email protected]>
Best Regards,
Petr
On Tuesday, April 16, 2019 4:55:50 AM CEST Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert the PM documents to ReST, in order to allow them to
> build with Sphinx.
And what exactly is the motivation for doing that?
There are plans for some of these files to be converted already, some of them need to be merged or split and it just is not worth it to convert some others.
Thanks,
Rafael
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:17:11 +0200
"Rafael J. Wysocki" <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 5:02 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <[email protected]> wrote:
> >
> > Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
> > convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
> > addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
> > document.
>
> There is concurrent work on this under way, please see
> https://marc.info/?t=155381845300002&r=2&w=2
>
> I'd prefer that one to continue, honestly.
Agreed. I didn't notice the patchset.
Btw, please notice patch 11/57:
Subject: [PATCH 11/57] docs: extcon: move it to acpi dir and convert it to ReST
IMO, it makes sense to move the extcon driver to ACPI, as it sounds
to be just another ACPI driver.
Thanks,
Mauro
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:21:31 +0200
"Rafael J. Wysocki" <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 4:56 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <[email protected]> wrote:
> >
> > In order to be able to build html and pdf files, convert the
> > documentation to ReST format.
> >
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
>
> Please don't convert these files.
>
> They need more work than just semi-automatic conversion
Except for one exception (at patch 32/57), the ReST conversion on this
patch set was manually made. I basically renamed the files to
.rst, checked the errors and fixed, trying to preserve the original
document style as much as possible, while providing a good visual
for the html output.
I suspect that trying to write a script for such kind of conversion
is not an easy task, as some documents within the Kernel tree have
their own personal style, (there was even one written in LaTeX at
the CDROM docs), and I suspect that a script would end by adding
extra unwanted markups.
> and the material in them needs to go under driver-api.
Yeah, those documents make sense to be at the driver-api set.
The rationale why I placed the patch with actually renames on a
separate patchset (already on my devel tree, but yet to be submitted)
is that, this way, it should be easy for maintainers to pick the
conversion patch, apply on their trees, and, if they're not ready
yet, postpone the actual rename/move thing.
> This is quite hight in my TODO list.
OK. Feel free to use this patch as a starting point if you
want.
Regards,
Mauro
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 11:54 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:17:11 +0200
> "Rafael J. Wysocki" <[email protected]> escreveu:
>
> > On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 5:02 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> > <[email protected]> wrote:
> > >
> > > Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
> > > convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
> > > addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
> > > document.
> >
> > There is concurrent work on this under way, please see
> > https://marc.info/?t=155381845300002&r=2&w=2
> >
> > I'd prefer that one to continue, honestly.
>
> Agreed. I didn't notice the patchset.
>
> Btw, please notice patch 11/57:
>
> Subject: [PATCH 11/57] docs: extcon: move it to acpi dir and convert it to ReST
>
> IMO, it makes sense to move the extcon driver to ACPI, as it sounds
> to be just another ACPI driver.
But that can be done later, on top of the Changbin Du's changes.
Thanks,
Rafael
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:59:23 +0200
"Rafael J. Wysocki" <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tuesday, April 16, 2019 4:55:50 AM CEST Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> > Convert the PM documents to ReST, in order to allow them to
> > build with Sphinx.
>
> And what exactly is the motivation for doing that?
Providing a little of context, I tried to submit a patchset that would
just place existing documents on a sort of "staging" way, without
actually reformatting:
https://lkml.org/lkml/2019/4/10/244
Jon had some concerns about such approach.
So, I split into one patch per subsystem. Then, I looked on each, and
opted to do the conversion, as, on several cases, the conversion
seemed to be easy enough.
My selfish motivation is that I was returning from vacations and wanted to
review some stuff at the Kernel docs, but, discovered that, despite we
started migrating the documentation on May, 2016, still the vast
majority of documents that weren't converted.
For me, the main motivation for the conversion are:
1) Documents will be grouped into books and chapters,
with makes easier to study them;
2) The Sphinx javascript is very convenient for seeking a
document and a keyword within the body of the document;
3) Using a browser to read documentation allows to better
scale the document to the screen I'm using.
That's said, sometimes I just prefer to convert the document
to a PDF and read it on my tablet. PDF tools also provide
similar features.
In other words, for my own consumption, I prefer reading
documents using document tools, instead of reading in plain
text.
> There are plans for some of these files to be converted already, some of them need to be merged or split and it just is not worth it to convert some others.
Feel free to use this patch as an starting point. If you prefer,
I can split into smaller sets, but my main goal here is just
to help to speedup the conversion.
Thanks,
Mauro
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 12:41 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:59:23 +0200
> "Rafael J. Wysocki" <[email protected]> escreveu:
>
> > On Tuesday, April 16, 2019 4:55:50 AM CEST Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> > > Convert the PM documents to ReST, in order to allow them to
> > > build with Sphinx.
> >
> > And what exactly is the motivation for doing that?
>
> Providing a little of context, I tried to submit a patchset that would
> just place existing documents on a sort of "staging" way, without
> actually reformatting:
>
> https://lkml.org/lkml/2019/4/10/244
>
> Jon had some concerns about such approach.
>
> So, I split into one patch per subsystem. Then, I looked on each, and
> opted to do the conversion, as, on several cases, the conversion
> seemed to be easy enough.
>
> My selfish motivation is that I was returning from vacations and wanted to
> review some stuff at the Kernel docs, but, discovered that, despite we
> started migrating the documentation on May, 2016, still the vast
> majority of documents that weren't converted.
>
> For me, the main motivation for the conversion are:
>
> 1) Documents will be grouped into books and chapters,
> with makes easier to study them;
> 2) The Sphinx javascript is very convenient for seeking a
> document and a keyword within the body of the document;
> 3) Using a browser to read documentation allows to better
> scale the document to the screen I'm using.
>
> That's said, sometimes I just prefer to convert the document
> to a PDF and read it on my tablet. PDF tools also provide
> similar features.
>
> In other words, for my own consumption, I prefer reading
> documents using document tools, instead of reading in plain
> text.
I see, thanks!
> > There are plans for some of these files to be converted already, some of them need to be merged or split and it just is not worth it to convert some others.
>
> Feel free to use this patch as an starting point. If you prefer,
> I can split into smaller sets, but my main goal here is just
> to help to speedup the conversion.
OK, we'll see. Thank you!
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 08:21:59 +0300
Mike Rapoport <[email protected]> escreveu:
> Hi Mauro,
>
> On Mon, Apr 15, 2019 at 11:56:11PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> > The debugfs interface for CMA should be there together with other
> > mm-related documents.
> >
> > Convert this small file to ReST and move it to its rightful place.
> >
> > The conversion is actually quite simple: just add a title for the
> > document. In order to make it to look better for the audience,
> > also mark the "echo" command as a literal block.
> >
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> > ---
> > Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt | 6 +++++-
>
> It wasn't really moved ;-)
Heh, yeah! The original patch was moving it:
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=all_with_indexes&id=e02d3ba65eba1676b01c82988b8054b88e6e5cdc
It seems I forgot to fix the comment here.
I opted to do just the conversion and place the move patch on a separate
series (yet to be submitted), in order to avoid merge conflicts.
>
> > 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
> >
> > diff --git a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> > index 6cef20a8cedc..4e06ffabd78a 100644
> > --- a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> > +++ b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
> > @@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
> > +=====================
> > +CMA Debugfs Interface
> > +=====================
> > +
> > The CMA debugfs interface is useful to retrieve basic information out of the
> > different CMA areas and to test allocation/release in each of the areas.
> >
> > @@ -12,7 +16,7 @@ The structure of the files created under that directory is as follows:
> > - [RO] count: Amount of memory in the CMA area.
> > - [RO] order_per_bit: Order of pages represented by one bit.
> > - [RO] bitmap: The bitmap of page states in the zone.
> > - - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example:
> > + - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example::
> >
> > echo 5 > <debugfs>/cma/cma-2/alloc
> >
> > --
> > 2.20.1
> >
>
Thanks,
Mauro
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 09:12:32 +0300
Felipe Balbi <[email protected]> escreveu:
> Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]> writes:
>
> > Convert USB documents to ReST, in order to prepare for adding it
> > to the kernel API book, as most of the stuff there are driver or
> > subsystem-related.
> >
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> > ---
> > Documentation/usb/WUSB-Design-overview.txt | 56 +-
> > Documentation/usb/acm.txt | 156 +++---
> > Documentation/usb/authorization.txt | 75 +--
> > Documentation/usb/chipidea.txt | 101 ++--
> > Documentation/usb/dwc3.txt | 12 +-
> > Documentation/usb/ehci.txt | 42 +-
> > Documentation/usb/functionfs.txt | 17 +-
> > Documentation/usb/gadget-testing.txt | 609 ++++++++++++---------
> > Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt | 302 +++++-----
> > Documentation/usb/gadget_hid.txt | 175 +++---
> > Documentation/usb/gadget_multi.txt | 43 +-
> > Documentation/usb/gadget_printer.txt | 155 +++---
> > Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt | 73 +--
> > Documentation/usb/iuu_phoenix.txt | 34 +-
> > Documentation/usb/mass-storage.txt | 19 +-
> > Documentation/usb/misc_usbsevseg.txt | 9 +-
> > Documentation/usb/mtouchusb.txt | 42 +-
> > Documentation/usb/ohci.txt | 5 +-
> > Documentation/usb/rio.txt | 83 +--
> > Documentation/usb/usb-help.txt | 21 +-
> > Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt | 203 ++++---
> > Documentation/usb/usbip_protocol.txt | 552 ++++++++++---------
> > Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt | 100 ++--
>
> should you change extension to .rst while at that?
I did that on a first version (not submitted):
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=all_with_indexes&id=d7eec4678dbfeb1a40c58bca7a157c8a4c39fa04
but I opted do the postpone the rename to a new series yet to be
sent.
The problem is that renaming it will make Sphinx to try to build them,
causing lots of warnings because they won't be inside an index file.
Adding index would touch Documentation/index (or Documentation/drivers-api),
with would cause merge conflicts.
Once this patch gets merged upstream, a renaming patch can happen
anytime. It probably makes sense to do all renames at once, late
at a merge window.
Thanks,
Mauro
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 10:43:54 +0200
Petr Mladek <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Mon 2019-04-15 23:55:45, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> > Convert livepatch documentation to ReST format. The changes
> > are mostly trivial, as the documents are already on a good
> > shape. Just a few markup changes are needed for Sphinx to
> > properly parse the docs.
> >
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
>
> Thanks a lot for the conversion. I tried html output and
> it looks very well.
>
> Just a question. This patch does only the formatting.
> The documentation is not really generated because the file
> is not renamed to .rst. Also it is not referenced from
> any top level documents. Is it by intention?
Yes. The rationale is simple: renaming to .rst would require
to add them on an index file (or otherwise build would produce lots
of warnings). As this series is doing a lot of such conversions,
assuming that some of those patches will go through different
trees, that would cause lots of conflicts at the main index files.
So, it sounds better to apply the conversion first and then,
on a better moment (maybe late during the merge window), do the
rename and add to the index files.
>
>
> I am happy even for the conversion, so:
>
> Reviewed-by: Petr Mladek <[email protected]>
>
> Best Regards,
> Petr
Thanks,
Mauro
On Mon, Apr 15 2019 at 10:55pm -0400,
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]> wrote:
> Convert the Device Mapper documentation to ReST.
Can you help me understand why this is the direction text based
Documenation is taking in the Linux kernel? All I see is markup, and
escaping of characters, that is a chore to administer over time.
Please advise, thanks.
Mike
On Tue, 16 Apr 2019 09:28:52 -0400
Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> wrote:
> Can you help me understand why this is the direction text based
> Documenation is taking in the Linux kernel? All I see is markup, and
> escaping of characters, that is a chore to administer over time.
This is a discussion that was mostly resolved some years ago...
Classic Documentation/ is a jumbled collection of unorganized text files,
some of which contain highly useful information and others of which
haven't had much to offer since about 1996. We are working to turn it
into an organized collection where, hopefully, some thought has actually
been given to the people who will be reading it.
The ReST conversion, in particular, allows us to link documents into a
larger structure, create indexes and cross references, and produce output
in formats like HTML and PDF. It lets us present the documentation like
this:
https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/
Among other things, making the documentation more accessible in this way
makes it easier and more rewarding for developers to improve it, and I
believe we are seeing the results of that. Linus called out the
documentation work in the 5.1-rc1 announcement, for example.
Nobody has complained about the maintenance burden of RST docs - so far as
I have heard, anyway. Things do break occasionally, but problems in the
docs build almost always result from code changes that mess up the
kerneldoc comments rather than RST changes, and it's been that way for as
long as I've been paying attention.
Thanks,
jon
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 08:00:24 -0600
Jonathan Corbet <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, 16 Apr 2019 09:28:52 -0400
> Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> wrote:
>
> > Can you help me understand why this is the direction text based
> > Documenation is taking in the Linux kernel? All I see is markup, and
> > escaping of characters, that is a chore to administer over time.
>
> This is a discussion that was mostly resolved some years ago...
>
> Classic Documentation/ is a jumbled collection of unorganized text files,
> some of which contain highly useful information and others of which
> haven't had much to offer since about 1996. We are working to turn it
> into an organized collection where, hopefully, some thought has actually
> been given to the people who will be reading it.
>
> The ReST conversion, in particular, allows us to link documents into a
> larger structure, create indexes and cross references, and produce output
> in formats like HTML and PDF. It lets us present the documentation like
> this:
>
> https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/
Just to mention, in the specific case of the device-mapper patch,
this is the result of those changes (after renaming the files to .rst,
and adding an index file):
https://www.infradead.org/~mchehab/rst_conversion/device-mapper/index.html
>
> Among other things, making the documentation more accessible in this way
> makes it easier and more rewarding for developers to improve it, and I
> believe we are seeing the results of that. Linus called out the
> documentation work in the 5.1-rc1 announcement, for example.
>
> Nobody has complained about the maintenance burden of RST docs - so far as
> I have heard, anyway. Things do break occasionally, but problems in the
> docs build almost always result from code changes that mess up the
> kerneldoc comments rather than RST changes, and it's been that way for as
> long as I've been paying attention.
>
> Thanks,
>
> jon
Thanks,
Mauro
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 10:17:11AM +0200, Rafael J. Wysocki wrote:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 5:02 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <[email protected]> wrote:
> >
> > Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
> > convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
> > addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
> > document.
>
> There is concurrent work on this under way, please see
> https://marc.info/?t=155381845300002&r=2&w=2
>
I will update the serias asap. I am just a little busy these days. My
conversion includes pci, acpi and x86, others are not touched.
> I'd prefer that one to continue, honestly.
>
> Thanks,
> Rafael
--
Cheers,
Changbin Du
On Tue, Apr 16 2019 at 10:00am -0400,
Jonathan Corbet <[email protected]> wrote:
> On Tue, 16 Apr 2019 09:28:52 -0400
> Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> wrote:
>
> > Can you help me understand why this is the direction text based
> > Documenation is taking in the Linux kernel? All I see is markup, and
> > escaping of characters, that is a chore to administer over time.
>
> This is a discussion that was mostly resolved some years ago...
>
> Classic Documentation/ is a jumbled collection of unorganized text files,
> some of which contain highly useful information and others of which
> haven't had much to offer since about 1996. We are working to turn it
> into an organized collection where, hopefully, some thought has actually
> been given to the people who will be reading it.
>
> The ReST conversion, in particular, allows us to link documents into a
> larger structure, create indexes and cross references, and produce output
> in formats like HTML and PDF. It lets us present the documentation like
> this:
>
> https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/
>
> Among other things, making the documentation more accessible in this way
> makes it easier and more rewarding for developers to improve it, and I
> believe we are seeing the results of that. Linus called out the
> documentation work in the 5.1-rc1 announcement, for example.
>
> Nobody has complained about the maintenance burden of RST docs - so far as
> I have heard, anyway. Things do break occasionally, but problems in the
> docs build almost always result from code changes that mess up the
> kerneldoc comments rather than RST changes, and it's been that way for as
> long as I've been paying attention.
Thanks for the context. I clearly just haven't followed the evolution.
Certainly looks like a solid improvement.
Think the last piece I'm missing is: how does one edit a .rst document
without having to know to sprinkle syntactic sugar around? Does emacs
have a ReST mode? If not what client interface are people using to
properly change these documents?
(apologies if this is all spelled out nicely in Documentation/
somewhere, but please help this man learn to fish).
Thanks,
Mike
On Tue, 16 Apr 2019 11:48:59 -0400
Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> wrote:
> Think the last piece I'm missing is: how does one edit a .rst document
> without having to know to sprinkle syntactic sugar around? Does emacs
> have a ReST mode? If not what client interface are people using to
> properly change these documents?
There is an RST mode for Emacs, yes. But you likely don't really need
it. RST is a simple format and, in general, we try to keep the markup to
a minimum so that the plain-text files remain as readable as possible.
Most of our documents are 99% RST before anybody gets around to formally
converting them.
> (apologies if this is all spelled out nicely in Documentation/
> somewhere, but please help this man learn to fish).
Basics in Documentation/doc-guide (or
https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/doc-guide/index.html). There's
also some history and overview in:
https://lwn.net/Articles/692704/
https://lwn.net/Articles/692705/
Thanks,
jon
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 11:48:59 -0400
Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16 2019 at 10:00am -0400,
> Jonathan Corbet <[email protected]> wrote:
>
> > On Tue, 16 Apr 2019 09:28:52 -0400
> > Mike Snitzer <[email protected]> wrote:
> >
> > > Can you help me understand why this is the direction text based
> > > Documenation is taking in the Linux kernel? All I see is markup, and
> > > escaping of characters, that is a chore to administer over time.
> >
> > This is a discussion that was mostly resolved some years ago...
> >
> > Classic Documentation/ is a jumbled collection of unorganized text files,
> > some of which contain highly useful information and others of which
> > haven't had much to offer since about 1996. We are working to turn it
> > into an organized collection where, hopefully, some thought has actually
> > been given to the people who will be reading it.
> >
> > The ReST conversion, in particular, allows us to link documents into a
> > larger structure, create indexes and cross references, and produce output
> > in formats like HTML and PDF. It lets us present the documentation like
> > this:
> >
> > https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/
> >
> > Among other things, making the documentation more accessible in this way
> > makes it easier and more rewarding for developers to improve it, and I
> > believe we are seeing the results of that. Linus called out the
> > documentation work in the 5.1-rc1 announcement, for example.
> >
> > Nobody has complained about the maintenance burden of RST docs - so far as
> > I have heard, anyway. Things do break occasionally, but problems in the
> > docs build almost always result from code changes that mess up the
> > kerneldoc comments rather than RST changes, and it's been that way for as
> > long as I've been paying attention.
>
> Thanks for the context. I clearly just haven't followed the evolution.
> Certainly looks like a solid improvement.
>
> Think the last piece I'm missing is: how does one edit a .rst document
> without having to know to sprinkle syntactic sugar around? Does emacs
> have a ReST mode? If not what client interface are people using to
> properly change these documents?
I guess the main point is that, after writing a .rst file, run
"make htmldocs" and see how it fits :-)
As Jon mentioned, a large number of documents (even some written lots of
years ago) already fits into ReST, and keeping it simpler makes easier
for plain text file readers.
We do have some documents (like the media book), were we use a lot
of the markup stuff, as those documents came from DocBook and it is full of
cross-references, complex tables, images, examples, etc, but for most
subsystems, you're safe with the usual stuff.
>
> (apologies if this is all spelled out nicely in Documentation/
> somewhere, but please help this man learn to fish).
A few tips if you want to write documents that are easy to
read as text files and produce nice output after parsed:
1) it is written to document Python. So, it is indentation
sensitive. Usually most of the fixes are just to properly
indent things;
2) By default, it identifies line breaks with two \n. The
exceptions are literal blocks like:
::
foo
bar
and things like:
foo
bar
(in this case, it will bold **foo**)
Another trick that I use to avoid the need of adding an extra \n is to
convert itemized lists into a table, with:
===
foo
bar
===
3) Things like "struct *foo" usually produces error, as a single
* is interpreted as italic. The parser will look for another *. As
it won't find, it will produce an error. So, this need to be escaped
somehow.
While you can escape such special characters like * and _ with an
inverted bar, like "struct \*foo", that looks ugly for casual
text file readers.
Instead, I do either::
struct *foo
or, if I want it in the middle of a text, I use `struct *foo`.
IMO, placing it on a literal block (::) looks visually better for
both text and html modes.
Thanks,
Mauro
On Mon, Apr 15, 2019 at 10:56 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> Convert netlabel documentation to ReST.
>
> This was trivial: just add proper title markups.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> ---
> Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt | 19 +++++++++++++------
> Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt | 16 +++++++++++-----
> Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt | 16 +++++++++++-----
> 3 files changed, 35 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-)
Thanks for doing this. I should probably revisit these docs to make
sure they are still valid/correct; if nothing else that email address
is from two employers ago (my apologies to the current email address
holder).
Acked-by: Paul Moore <[email protected]>
> diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
> index a6075481fd60..cbd3f3231221 100644
> --- a/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/netlabel/cipso_ipv4.txt
> @@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
> +===================================
> NetLabel CIPSO/IPv4 Protocol Engine
> -==============================================================================
> +===================================
> +
> Paul Moore, [email protected]
>
> May 17, 2006
>
> - * Overview
> +Overview
> +========
>
> The NetLabel CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine is based on the IETF Commercial
> IP Security Option (CIPSO) draft from July 16, 1992. A copy of this
> @@ -13,7 +16,8 @@ draft can be found in this directory
> it to an RFC standard it has become a de-facto standard for labeled
> networking and is used in many trusted operating systems.
>
> - * Outbound Packet Processing
> +Outbound Packet Processing
> +==========================
>
> The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine applies the CIPSO IP option to packets by
> adding the CIPSO label to the socket. This causes all packets leaving the
> @@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ label by using the NetLabel security module API; if the NetLabel "domain" is
> configured to use CIPSO for packet labeling then a CIPSO IP option will be
> generated and attached to the socket.
>
> - * Inbound Packet Processing
> +Inbound Packet Processing
> +=========================
>
> The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine validates every CIPSO IP option it finds at the
> IP layer without any special handling required by the LSM. However, in order
> @@ -33,7 +38,8 @@ NetLabel security module API to extract the security attributes of the packet.
> This is typically done at the socket layer using the 'socket_sock_rcv_skb()'
> LSM hook.
>
> - * Label Translation
> +Label Translation
> +=================
>
> The CIPSO/IPv4 protocol engine contains a mechanism to translate CIPSO security
> attributes such as sensitivity level and category to values which are
> @@ -42,7 +48,8 @@ Domain Of Interpretation (DOI) definition and are configured through the
> NetLabel user space communication layer. Each DOI definition can have a
> different security attribute mapping table.
>
> - * Label Translation Cache
> +Label Translation Cache
> +=======================
>
> The NetLabel system provides a framework for caching security attribute
> mappings from the network labels to the corresponding LSM identifiers. The
> diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
> index 3caf77bcff0f..9333bbb0adc1 100644
> --- a/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/netlabel/introduction.txt
> @@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
> +=====================
> NetLabel Introduction
> -==============================================================================
> +=====================
> +
> Paul Moore, [email protected]
>
> August 2, 2006
>
> - * Overview
> +Overview
> +========
>
> NetLabel is a mechanism which can be used by kernel security modules to attach
> security attributes to outgoing network packets generated from user space
> @@ -12,7 +15,8 @@ applications and read security attributes from incoming network packets. It
> is composed of three main components, the protocol engines, the communication
> layer, and the kernel security module API.
>
> - * Protocol Engines
> +Protocol Engines
> +================
>
> The protocol engines are responsible for both applying and retrieving the
> network packet's security attributes. If any translation between the network
> @@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ the NetLabel kernel security module API described below.
> Detailed information about each NetLabel protocol engine can be found in this
> directory.
>
> - * Communication Layer
> +Communication Layer
> +===================
>
> The communication layer exists to allow NetLabel configuration and monitoring
> from user space. The NetLabel communication layer uses a message based
> @@ -33,7 +38,8 @@ formatting of these NetLabel messages as well as the Generic NETLINK family
> names can be found in the 'net/netlabel/' directory as comments in the
> header files as well as in 'include/net/netlabel.h'.
>
> - * Security Module API
> +Security Module API
> +===================
>
> The purpose of the NetLabel security module API is to provide a protocol
> independent interface to the underlying NetLabel protocol engines. In addition
> diff --git a/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt b/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
> index 638c74f7de7f..026fc267f798 100644
> --- a/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
> @@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
> +========================================
> NetLabel Linux Security Module Interface
> -==============================================================================
> +========================================
> +
> Paul Moore, [email protected]
>
> May 17, 2006
>
> - * Overview
> +Overview
> +========
>
> NetLabel is a mechanism which can set and retrieve security attributes from
> network packets. It is intended to be used by LSM developers who want to make
> @@ -12,7 +15,8 @@ use of a common code base for several different packet labeling protocols.
> The NetLabel security module API is defined in 'include/net/netlabel.h' but a
> brief overview is given below.
>
> - * NetLabel Security Attributes
> +NetLabel Security Attributes
> +============================
>
> Since NetLabel supports multiple different packet labeling protocols and LSMs
> it uses the concept of security attributes to refer to the packet's security
> @@ -24,7 +28,8 @@ configuration. It is up to the LSM developer to translate the NetLabel
> security attributes into whatever security identifiers are in use for their
> particular LSM.
>
> - * NetLabel LSM Protocol Operations
> +NetLabel LSM Protocol Operations
> +================================
>
> These are the functions which allow the LSM developer to manipulate the labels
> on outgoing packets as well as read the labels on incoming packets. Functions
> @@ -32,7 +37,8 @@ exist to operate both on sockets as well as the sk_buffs directly. These high
> level functions are translated into low level protocol operations based on how
> the administrator has configured the NetLabel subsystem.
>
> - * NetLabel Label Mapping Cache Operations
> +NetLabel Label Mapping Cache Operations
> +=======================================
>
> Depending on the exact configuration, translation between the network packet
> label and the internal LSM security identifier can be time consuming. The
> --
> 2.20.1
>
--
paul moore
http://www.paul-moore.com
On Mon, Apr 15, 2019 at 11:56:02PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert those documents and prepare them to be part of the kernel
> API book, as most of the stuff there are related to the
> Kernel interfaces.
>
> Still, in the future, it would make sense to split the docs,
> as some of the stuff is clearly focused on sysadmin tasks.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Reviewed-by: Guenter Roeck <[email protected]>
What is the plan here ? Submit through watchdog subsystem or through
some other subsystem ? Also, will the files be renamed ?
Thanks,
Guenter
> ---
> .../convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt | 109 +--
> Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt | 23 +-
> Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt | 24 +-
> Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt | 13 +-
> Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt | 76 +-
> .../watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt | 89 ++-
> .../watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt | 672 +++++++++++++-----
> Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt | 3 +
> Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt | 31 +-
> 9 files changed, 733 insertions(+), 307 deletions(-)
>
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
> index 9fffb2958d13..dd934cc08e40 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/convert_drivers_to_kernel_api.txt
> @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
> +=========================================================
> Converting old watchdog drivers to the watchdog framework
> +=========================================================
> +
> by Wolfram Sang <[email protected]>
> -=========================================================
>
> Before the watchdog framework came into the kernel, every driver had to
> implement the API on its own. Now, as the framework factored out the common
> @@ -69,16 +71,16 @@ Here is a overview of the functions and probably needed actions:
> -ENOIOCTLCMD, the IOCTLs of the framework will be tried, too. Any other error
> is directly given to the user.
>
> -Example conversion:
> +Example conversion::
>
> --static const struct file_operations s3c2410wdt_fops = {
> -- .owner = THIS_MODULE,
> -- .llseek = no_llseek,
> -- .write = s3c2410wdt_write,
> -- .unlocked_ioctl = s3c2410wdt_ioctl,
> -- .open = s3c2410wdt_open,
> -- .release = s3c2410wdt_release,
> --};
> + -static const struct file_operations s3c2410wdt_fops = {
> + - .owner = THIS_MODULE,
> + - .llseek = no_llseek,
> + - .write = s3c2410wdt_write,
> + - .unlocked_ioctl = s3c2410wdt_ioctl,
> + - .open = s3c2410wdt_open,
> + - .release = s3c2410wdt_release,
> + -};
>
> Check the functions for device-specific stuff and keep it for later
> refactoring. The rest can go.
> @@ -89,24 +91,24 @@ Remove the miscdevice
>
> Since the file_operations are gone now, you can also remove the 'struct
> miscdevice'. The framework will create it on watchdog_dev_register() called by
> -watchdog_register_device().
> +watchdog_register_device()::
>
> --static struct miscdevice s3c2410wdt_miscdev = {
> -- .minor = WATCHDOG_MINOR,
> -- .name = "watchdog",
> -- .fops = &s3c2410wdt_fops,
> --};
> + -static struct miscdevice s3c2410wdt_miscdev = {
> + - .minor = WATCHDOG_MINOR,
> + - .name = "watchdog",
> + - .fops = &s3c2410wdt_fops,
> + -};
>
>
> Remove obsolete includes and defines
> ------------------------------------
>
> Because of the simplifications, a few defines are probably unused now. Remove
> -them. Includes can be removed, too. For example:
> +them. Includes can be removed, too. For example::
>
> -- #include <linux/fs.h>
> -- #include <linux/miscdevice.h> (if MODULE_ALIAS_MISCDEV is not used)
> -- #include <linux/uaccess.h> (if no custom IOCTLs are used)
> + - #include <linux/fs.h>
> + - #include <linux/miscdevice.h> (if MODULE_ALIAS_MISCDEV is not used)
> + - #include <linux/uaccess.h> (if no custom IOCTLs are used)
>
>
> Add the watchdog operations
> @@ -121,30 +123,30 @@ change the function header. Other changes are most likely not needed, because
> here simply happens the direct hardware access. If you have device-specific
> code left from the above steps, it should be refactored into these callbacks.
>
> -Here is a simple example:
> +Here is a simple example::
>
> -+static struct watchdog_ops s3c2410wdt_ops = {
> -+ .owner = THIS_MODULE,
> -+ .start = s3c2410wdt_start,
> -+ .stop = s3c2410wdt_stop,
> -+ .ping = s3c2410wdt_keepalive,
> -+ .set_timeout = s3c2410wdt_set_heartbeat,
> -+};
> + +static struct watchdog_ops s3c2410wdt_ops = {
> + + .owner = THIS_MODULE,
> + + .start = s3c2410wdt_start,
> + + .stop = s3c2410wdt_stop,
> + + .ping = s3c2410wdt_keepalive,
> + + .set_timeout = s3c2410wdt_set_heartbeat,
> + +};
>
> -A typical function-header change looks like:
> +A typical function-header change looks like::
>
> --static void s3c2410wdt_keepalive(void)
> -+static int s3c2410wdt_keepalive(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
> - {
> -...
> -+
> -+ return 0;
> - }
> + -static void s3c2410wdt_keepalive(void)
> + +static int s3c2410wdt_keepalive(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
> + {
> + ...
> + +
> + + return 0;
> + }
>
> -...
> + ...
>
> -- s3c2410wdt_keepalive();
> -+ s3c2410wdt_keepalive(&s3c2410_wdd);
> + - s3c2410wdt_keepalive();
> + + s3c2410wdt_keepalive(&s3c2410_wdd);
>
>
> Add the watchdog device
> @@ -159,12 +161,12 @@ static variables. Those have to be converted to use the members in
> watchdog_device. Note that the timeout values are unsigned int. Some drivers
> use signed int, so this has to be converted, too.
>
> -Here is a simple example for a watchdog device:
> +Here is a simple example for a watchdog device::
>
> -+static struct watchdog_device s3c2410_wdd = {
> -+ .info = &s3c2410_wdt_ident,
> -+ .ops = &s3c2410wdt_ops,
> -+};
> + +static struct watchdog_device s3c2410_wdd = {
> + + .info = &s3c2410_wdt_ident,
> + + .ops = &s3c2410wdt_ops,
> + +};
>
>
> Handle the 'nowayout' feature
> @@ -173,12 +175,12 @@ Handle the 'nowayout' feature
> A few drivers use nowayout statically, i.e. there is no module parameter for it
> and only CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT determines if the feature is going to be
> used. This needs to be converted by initializing the status variable of the
> -watchdog_device like this:
> +watchdog_device like this::
>
> .status = WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT_INIT_STATUS,
>
> Most drivers, however, also allow runtime configuration of nowayout, usually
> -by adding a module parameter. The conversion for this would be something like:
> +by adding a module parameter. The conversion for this would be something like::
>
> watchdog_set_nowayout(&s3c2410_wdd, nowayout);
>
> @@ -191,15 +193,15 @@ Register the watchdog device
>
> Replace misc_register(&miscdev) with watchdog_register_device(&watchdog_dev).
> Make sure the return value gets checked and the error message, if present,
> -still fits. Also convert the unregister case.
> +still fits. Also convert the unregister case::
>
> -- ret = misc_register(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
> -+ ret = watchdog_register_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
> + - ret = misc_register(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
> + + ret = watchdog_register_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
>
> -...
> + ...
>
> -- misc_deregister(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
> -+ watchdog_unregister_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
> + - misc_deregister(&s3c2410wdt_miscdev);
> + + watchdog_unregister_device(&s3c2410_wdd);
>
>
> Update the Kconfig-entry
> @@ -207,7 +209,7 @@ Update the Kconfig-entry
>
> The entry for the driver now needs to select WATCHDOG_CORE:
>
> -+ select WATCHDOG_CORE
> + + select WATCHDOG_CORE
>
>
> Create a patch and send it to upstream
> @@ -215,4 +217,3 @@ Create a patch and send it to upstream
>
> Make sure you understood Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst and send your patch to
> [email protected]. We are looking forward to it :)
> -
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
> index 55df692c5595..a8c6751321de 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt
> @@ -1,7 +1,12 @@
> +===========================
> +HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver
> +===========================
> +
> +for iLO based ProLiant Servers
> +==============================
> +
> Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
>
> - HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver
> - for iLO based ProLiant Servers
>
> The HPE iLO NMI Watchdog driver is a kernel module that provides basic
> watchdog functionality and handler for the iLO "Generate NMI to System"
> @@ -20,21 +25,24 @@ Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
>
> The hpwdt driver also has the following module parameters:
>
> - soft_margin - allows the user to set the watchdog timer value.
> + ============ ================================================================
> + soft_margin allows the user to set the watchdog timer value.
> Default value is 30 seconds.
> - timeout - an alias of soft_margin.
> - pretimeout - allows the user to set the watchdog pretimeout value.
> + timeout an alias of soft_margin.
> + pretimeout allows the user to set the watchdog pretimeout value.
> This is the number of seconds before timeout when an
> NMI is delivered to the system. Setting the value to
> zero disables the pretimeout NMI.
> Default value is 9 seconds.
> - nowayout - basic watchdog parameter that does not allow the timer to
> + nowayout basic watchdog parameter that does not allow the timer to
> be restarted or an impending ASR to be escaped.
> Default value is set when compiling the kernel. If it is set
> to "Y", then there is no way of disabling the watchdog once
> it has been started.
> + ============ ================================================================
>
> - NOTE: More information about watchdog drivers in general, including the ioctl
> + NOTE:
> + More information about watchdog drivers in general, including the ioctl
> interface to /dev/watchdog can be found in
> Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt and Documentation/IPMI.txt.
>
> @@ -63,4 +71,3 @@ Last reviewed: 08/20/2018
>
> The HPE iLO NMI Watchdog Driver and documentation were originally developed
> by Tom Mingarelli.
> -
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
> index 66eeb78505c3..bf5bafac47f0 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/mlx-wdt.txt
> @@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
> - Mellanox watchdog drivers
> - for x86 based system switches
> +=========================
> +Mellanox watchdog drivers
> +=========================
> +
> +for x86 based system switches
> +=============================
>
> This driver provides watchdog functionality for various Mellanox
> Ethernet and Infiniband switch systems.
> @@ -9,16 +13,16 @@ Mellanox watchdog device is implemented in a programmable logic device.
> There are 2 types of HW watchdog implementations.
>
> Type 1:
> -Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec.
> -e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec.
> -The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.),
> -Get time-left isn't supported
> + Actual HW timeout can be defined as a power of 2 msec.
> + e.g. timeout 20 sec will be rounded up to 32768 msec.
> + The maximum timeout period is 32 sec (32768 msec.),
> + Get time-left isn't supported
>
> Type 2:
> -Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as
> -a user-defined timeout.
> -Maximum timeout is 255 sec.
> -Get time-left is supported.
> + Actual HW timeout is defined in sec. and it's the same as
> + a user-defined timeout.
> + Maximum timeout is 255 sec.
> + Get time-left is supported.
>
> Type 1 HW watchdog implementation exist in old systems and
> all new systems have type 2 HW watchdog.
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
> index b8e60a441a43..405e2a370082 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/pcwd-watchdog.txt
> @@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
> +===================================
> +Berkshire Products PC Watchdog Card
> +===================================
> +
> Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
>
> - Berkshire Products PC Watchdog Card
> - Support for ISA Cards Revision A and C
> - Documentation and Driver by Ken Hollis <[email protected]>
> +Support for ISA Cards Revision A and C
> +=======================================
> +
> +Documentation and Driver by Ken Hollis <[email protected]>
>
> The PC Watchdog is a card that offers the same type of functionality that
> the WDT card does, only it doesn't require an IRQ to run. Furthermore,
> @@ -33,6 +38,7 @@ Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
> WDIOC_GETSUPPORT
> This returns the support of the card itself. This
> returns in structure "PCWDS" which returns:
> +
> options = WDIOS_TEMPPANIC
> (This card supports temperature)
> firmware_version = xxxx
> @@ -63,4 +69,3 @@ Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
>
> -- Ken Hollis
> ([email protected])
> -
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
> index 0e62ba33b7fb..c6c1e9fa9f73 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-api.txt
> @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
> +=============================
> +The Linux Watchdog driver API
> +=============================
> +
> Last reviewed: 10/05/2007
>
>
> -The Linux Watchdog driver API.
>
> Copyright 2002 Christer Weingel <[email protected]>
>
> @@ -10,7 +13,8 @@ driver which is (c) Copyright 2000 Jakob Oestergaard <[email protected]>
>
> This document describes the state of the Linux 2.4.18 kernel.
>
> -Introduction:
> +Introduction
> +============
>
> A Watchdog Timer (WDT) is a hardware circuit that can reset the
> computer system in case of a software fault. You probably knew that
> @@ -30,7 +34,8 @@ drivers implement different, and sometimes incompatible, parts of it.
> This file is an attempt to document the existing usage and allow
> future driver writers to use it as a reference.
>
> -The simplest API:
> +The simplest API
> +================
>
> All drivers support the basic mode of operation, where the watchdog
> activates as soon as /dev/watchdog is opened and will reboot unless
> @@ -54,7 +59,8 @@ after the timeout has passed. Watchdog devices also usually support
> the nowayout module parameter so that this option can be controlled at
> runtime.
>
> -Magic Close feature:
> +Magic Close feature
> +===================
>
> If a driver supports "Magic Close", the driver will not disable the
> watchdog unless a specific magic character 'V' has been sent to
> @@ -64,7 +70,8 @@ will assume that the daemon (and userspace in general) died, and will
> stop pinging the watchdog without disabling it first. This will then
> cause a reboot if the watchdog is not re-opened in sufficient time.
>
> -The ioctl API:
> +The ioctl API
> +=============
>
> All conforming drivers also support an ioctl API.
>
> @@ -73,7 +80,7 @@ Pinging the watchdog using an ioctl:
> All drivers that have an ioctl interface support at least one ioctl,
> KEEPALIVE. This ioctl does exactly the same thing as a write to the
> watchdog device, so the main loop in the above program could be
> -replaced with:
> +replaced with::
>
> while (1) {
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_KEEPALIVE, 0);
> @@ -82,14 +89,15 @@ replaced with:
>
> the argument to the ioctl is ignored.
>
> -Setting and getting the timeout:
> +Setting and getting the timeout
> +===============================
>
> For some drivers it is possible to modify the watchdog timeout on the
> fly with the SETTIMEOUT ioctl, those drivers have the WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT
> flag set in their option field. The argument is an integer
> representing the timeout in seconds. The driver returns the real
> timeout used in the same variable, and this timeout might differ from
> -the requested one due to limitation of the hardware.
> +the requested one due to limitation of the hardware::
>
> int timeout = 45;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETTIMEOUT, &timeout);
> @@ -99,18 +107,19 @@ This example might actually print "The timeout was set to 60 seconds"
> if the device has a granularity of minutes for its timeout.
>
> Starting with the Linux 2.4.18 kernel, it is possible to query the
> -current timeout using the GETTIMEOUT ioctl.
> +current timeout using the GETTIMEOUT ioctl::
>
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTIMEOUT, &timeout);
> printf("The timeout was is %d seconds\n", timeout);
>
> -Pretimeouts:
> +Pretimeouts
> +===========
>
> Some watchdog timers can be set to have a trigger go off before the
> actual time they will reset the system. This can be done with an NMI,
> interrupt, or other mechanism. This allows Linux to record useful
> information (like panic information and kernel coredumps) before it
> -resets.
> +resets::
>
> pretimeout = 10;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETPRETIMEOUT, &pretimeout);
> @@ -121,89 +130,113 @@ the pretimeout. So, for instance, if you set the timeout to 60 seconds
> and the pretimeout to 10 seconds, the pretimeout will go off in 50
> seconds. Setting a pretimeout to zero disables it.
>
> -There is also a get function for getting the pretimeout:
> +There is also a get function for getting the pretimeout::
>
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETPRETIMEOUT, &timeout);
> printf("The pretimeout was is %d seconds\n", timeout);
>
> Not all watchdog drivers will support a pretimeout.
>
> -Get the number of seconds before reboot:
> +Get the number of seconds before reboot
> +=======================================
>
> Some watchdog drivers have the ability to report the remaining time
> before the system will reboot. The WDIOC_GETTIMELEFT is the ioctl
> -that returns the number of seconds before reboot.
> +that returns the number of seconds before reboot::
>
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTIMELEFT, &timeleft);
> printf("The timeout was is %d seconds\n", timeleft);
>
> -Environmental monitoring:
> +Environmental monitoring
> +========================
>
> All watchdog drivers are required return more information about the system,
> some do temperature, fan and power level monitoring, some can tell you
> the reason for the last reboot of the system. The GETSUPPORT ioctl is
> -available to ask what the device can do:
> +available to ask what the device can do::
>
> struct watchdog_info ident;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETSUPPORT, &ident);
>
> the fields returned in the ident struct are:
>
> + ================ =============================================
> identity a string identifying the watchdog driver
> firmware_version the firmware version of the card if available
> options a flags describing what the device supports
> + ================ =============================================
>
> the options field can have the following bits set, and describes what
> kind of information that the GET_STATUS and GET_BOOT_STATUS ioctls can
> return. [FIXME -- Is this correct?]
>
> + ================ =========================
> WDIOF_OVERHEAT Reset due to CPU overheat
> + ================ =========================
>
> The machine was last rebooted by the watchdog because the thermal limit was
> -exceeded
> +exceeded:
>
> + ============== ==========
> WDIOF_FANFAULT Fan failed
> + ============== ==========
>
> A system fan monitored by the watchdog card has failed
>
> + ============= ================
> WDIOF_EXTERN1 External relay 1
> + ============= ================
>
> External monitoring relay/source 1 was triggered. Controllers intended for
> real world applications include external monitoring pins that will trigger
> a reset.
>
> + ============= ================
> WDIOF_EXTERN2 External relay 2
> + ============= ================
>
> External monitoring relay/source 2 was triggered
>
> + ================ =====================
> WDIOF_POWERUNDER Power bad/power fault
> + ================ =====================
>
> The machine is showing an undervoltage status
>
> + =============== =============================
> WDIOF_CARDRESET Card previously reset the CPU
> + =============== =============================
>
> The last reboot was caused by the watchdog card
>
> + ================ =====================
> WDIOF_POWEROVER Power over voltage
> + ================ =====================
>
> The machine is showing an overvoltage status. Note that if one level is
> under and one over both bits will be set - this may seem odd but makes
> sense.
>
> + =================== =====================
> WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING Keep alive ping reply
> + =================== =====================
>
> The watchdog saw a keepalive ping since it was last queried.
>
> + ================ =======================
> WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT Can set/get the timeout
> + ================ =======================
>
> The watchdog can do pretimeouts.
>
> + ================ ================================
> WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT Pretimeout (in seconds), get/set
> + ================ ================================
>
>
> For those drivers that return any bits set in the option field, the
> GETSTATUS and GETBOOTSTATUS ioctls can be used to ask for the current
> -status, and the status at the last reboot, respectively.
> +status, and the status at the last reboot, respectively::
>
> int flags;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETSTATUS, &flags);
> @@ -216,22 +249,23 @@ Note that not all devices support these two calls, and some only
> support the GETBOOTSTATUS call.
>
> Some drivers can measure the temperature using the GETTEMP ioctl. The
> -returned value is the temperature in degrees fahrenheit.
> +returned value is the temperature in degrees fahrenheit::
>
> int temperature;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_GETTEMP, &temperature);
>
> Finally the SETOPTIONS ioctl can be used to control some aspects of
> -the cards operation.
> +the cards operation::
>
> int options = 0;
> ioctl(fd, WDIOC_SETOPTIONS, &options);
>
> The following options are available:
>
> + ================= ================================
> WDIOS_DISABLECARD Turn off the watchdog timer
> WDIOS_ENABLECARD Turn on the watchdog timer
> WDIOS_TEMPPANIC Kernel panic on temperature trip
> + ================= ================================
>
> [FIXME -- better explanations]
> -
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
> index 3a91ef5af044..452002be568c 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-kernel-api.txt
> @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
> -The Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API.
> ===============================================
> +The Linux WatchDog Timer Driver Core kernel API
> +===============================================
> +
> Last reviewed: 12-Feb-2013
>
> Wim Van Sebroeck <[email protected]>
> @@ -23,10 +25,10 @@ The API
> Each watchdog timer driver that wants to use the WatchDog Timer Driver Core
> must #include <linux/watchdog.h> (you would have to do this anyway when
> writing a watchdog device driver). This include file contains following
> -register/unregister routines:
> +register/unregister routines::
>
> -extern int watchdog_register_device(struct watchdog_device *);
> -extern void watchdog_unregister_device(struct watchdog_device *);
> + extern int watchdog_register_device(struct watchdog_device *);
> + extern void watchdog_unregister_device(struct watchdog_device *);
>
> The watchdog_register_device routine registers a watchdog timer device.
> The parameter of this routine is a pointer to a watchdog_device structure.
> @@ -40,9 +42,9 @@ The watchdog subsystem includes an registration deferral mechanism,
> which allows you to register an watchdog as early as you wish during
> the boot process.
>
> -The watchdog device structure looks like this:
> +The watchdog device structure looks like this::
>
> -struct watchdog_device {
> + struct watchdog_device {
> int id;
> struct device *parent;
> const struct attribute_group **groups;
> @@ -62,9 +64,10 @@ struct watchdog_device {
> struct watchdog_core_data *wd_data;
> unsigned long status;
> struct list_head deferred;
> -};
> + };
>
> It contains following fields:
> +
> * id: set by watchdog_register_device, id 0 is special. It has both a
> /dev/watchdog0 cdev (dynamic major, minor 0) as well as the old
> /dev/watchdog miscdev. The id is set automatically when calling
> @@ -114,9 +117,9 @@ It contains following fields:
> * deferred: entry in wtd_deferred_reg_list which is used to
> register early initialized watchdogs.
>
> -The list of watchdog operations is defined as:
> +The list of watchdog operations is defined as::
>
> -struct watchdog_ops {
> + struct watchdog_ops {
> struct module *owner;
> /* mandatory operations */
> int (*start)(struct watchdog_device *);
> @@ -129,7 +132,7 @@ struct watchdog_ops {
> unsigned int (*get_timeleft)(struct watchdog_device *);
> int (*restart)(struct watchdog_device *);
> long (*ioctl)(struct watchdog_device *, unsigned int, unsigned long);
> -};
> + };
>
> It is important that you first define the module owner of the watchdog timer
> driver's operations. This module owner will be used to lock the module when
> @@ -138,6 +141,7 @@ module and /dev/watchdog is still open).
>
> Some operations are mandatory and some are optional. The mandatory operations
> are:
> +
> * start: this is a pointer to the routine that starts the watchdog timer
> device.
> The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
> @@ -146,51 +150,64 @@ are:
> Not all watchdog timer hardware supports the same functionality. That's why
> all other routines/operations are optional. They only need to be provided if
> they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
> +
> * stop: with this routine the watchdog timer device is being stopped.
> +
> The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
> parameter. It returns zero on success or a negative errno code for failure.
> Some watchdog timer hardware can only be started and not be stopped. A
> driver supporting such hardware does not have to implement the stop routine.
> +
> If a driver has no stop function, the watchdog core will set WDOG_HW_RUNNING
> and start calling the driver's keepalive pings function after the watchdog
> device is closed.
> +
> If a watchdog driver does not implement the stop function, it must set
> max_hw_heartbeat_ms.
> * ping: this is the routine that sends a keepalive ping to the watchdog timer
> hardware.
> +
> The routine needs a pointer to the watchdog timer device structure as a
> parameter. It returns zero on success or a negative errno code for failure.
> +
> Most hardware that does not support this as a separate function uses the
> start function to restart the watchdog timer hardware. And that's also what
> the watchdog timer driver core does: to send a keepalive ping to the watchdog
> timer hardware it will either use the ping operation (when available) or the
> start operation (when the ping operation is not available).
> +
> (Note: the WDIOC_KEEPALIVE ioctl call will only be active when the
> WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING bit has been set in the option field on the watchdog's
> info structure).
> * status: this routine checks the status of the watchdog timer device. The
> status of the device is reported with watchdog WDIOF_* status flags/bits.
> +
> WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE and WDIOF_KEEPALIVEPING are reported by the watchdog core;
> it is not necessary to report those bits from the driver. Also, if no status
> function is provided by the driver, the watchdog core reports the status bits
> provided in the bootstatus variable of struct watchdog_device.
> +
> * set_timeout: this routine checks and changes the timeout of the watchdog
> timer device. It returns 0 on success, -EINVAL for "parameter out of range"
> and -EIO for "could not write value to the watchdog". On success this
> routine should set the timeout value of the watchdog_device to the
> achieved timeout value (which may be different from the requested one
> because the watchdog does not necessarily have a 1 second resolution).
> +
> Drivers implementing max_hw_heartbeat_ms set the hardware watchdog heartbeat
> to the minimum of timeout and max_hw_heartbeat_ms. Those drivers set the
> timeout value of the watchdog_device either to the requested timeout value
> (if it is larger than max_hw_heartbeat_ms), or to the achieved timeout value.
> (Note: the WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT needs to be set in the options field of the
> watchdog's info structure).
> +
> If the watchdog driver does not have to perform any action but setting the
> watchdog_device.timeout, this callback can be omitted.
> +
> If set_timeout is not provided but, WDIOF_SETTIMEOUT is set, the watchdog
> infrastructure updates the timeout value of the watchdog_device internally
> to the requested value.
> +
> If the pretimeout feature is used (WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT), then set_timeout must
> also take care of checking if pretimeout is still valid and set up the timer
> accordingly. This can't be done in the core without races, so it is the
> @@ -201,13 +218,16 @@ they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
> seconds before the actual timeout would happen. It returns 0 on success,
> -EINVAL for "parameter out of range" and -EIO for "could not write value to
> the watchdog". A value of 0 disables pretimeout notification.
> +
> (Note: the WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT needs to be set in the options field of the
> watchdog's info structure).
> +
> If the watchdog driver does not have to perform any action but setting the
> watchdog_device.pretimeout, this callback can be omitted. That means if
> set_pretimeout is not provided but WDIOF_PRETIMEOUT is set, the watchdog
> infrastructure updates the pretimeout value of the watchdog_device internally
> to the requested value.
> +
> * get_timeleft: this routines returns the time that's left before a reset.
> * restart: this routine restarts the machine. It returns 0 on success or a
> negative errno code for failure.
> @@ -218,6 +238,7 @@ they are supported. These optional routines/operations are:
>
> The status bits should (preferably) be set with the set_bit and clear_bit alike
> bit-operations. The status bits that are defined are:
> +
> * WDOG_ACTIVE: this status bit indicates whether or not a watchdog timer device
> is active or not from user perspective. User space is expected to send
> heartbeat requests to the driver while this flag is set.
> @@ -235,22 +256,30 @@ bit-operations. The status bits that are defined are:
>
> To set the WDOG_NO_WAY_OUT status bit (before registering your watchdog
> timer device) you can either:
> +
> * set it statically in your watchdog_device struct with
> +
> .status = WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT_INIT_STATUS,
> +
> (this will set the value the same as CONFIG_WATCHDOG_NOWAYOUT) or
> - * use the following helper function:
> - static inline void watchdog_set_nowayout(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int nowayout)
> + * use the following helper function::
> +
> + static inline void watchdog_set_nowayout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
> + int nowayout)
> +
> +Note:
> + The WatchDog Timer Driver Core supports the magic close feature and
> + the nowayout feature. To use the magic close feature you must set the
> + WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE bit in the options field of the watchdog's info structure.
>
> -Note: The WatchDog Timer Driver Core supports the magic close feature and
> -the nowayout feature. To use the magic close feature you must set the
> -WDIOF_MAGICCLOSE bit in the options field of the watchdog's info structure.
> The nowayout feature will overrule the magic close feature.
>
> To get or set driver specific data the following two helper functions should be
> -used:
> +used::
>
> -static inline void watchdog_set_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd, void *data)
> -static inline void *watchdog_get_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
> + static inline void watchdog_set_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
> + void *data)
> + static inline void *watchdog_get_drvdata(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
>
> The watchdog_set_drvdata function allows you to add driver specific data. The
> arguments of this function are the watchdog device where you want to add the
> @@ -260,10 +289,11 @@ The watchdog_get_drvdata function allows you to retrieve driver specific data.
> The argument of this function is the watchdog device where you want to retrieve
> data from. The function returns the pointer to the driver specific data.
>
> -To initialize the timeout field, the following function can be used:
> +To initialize the timeout field, the following function can be used::
>
> -extern int watchdog_init_timeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
> - unsigned int timeout_parm, struct device *dev);
> + extern int watchdog_init_timeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd,
> + unsigned int timeout_parm,
> + struct device *dev);
>
> The watchdog_init_timeout function allows you to initialize the timeout field
> using the module timeout parameter or by retrieving the timeout-sec property from
> @@ -272,30 +302,33 @@ to set the default timeout value as timeout value in the watchdog_device and
> then use this function to set the user "preferred" timeout value.
> This routine returns zero on success and a negative errno code for failure.
>
> -To disable the watchdog on reboot, the user must call the following helper:
> +To disable the watchdog on reboot, the user must call the following helper::
>
> -static inline void watchdog_stop_on_reboot(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
> + static inline void watchdog_stop_on_reboot(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
>
> To disable the watchdog when unregistering the watchdog, the user must call
> the following helper. Note that this will only stop the watchdog if the
> nowayout flag is not set.
>
> -static inline void watchdog_stop_on_unregister(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
> +::
> +
> + static inline void watchdog_stop_on_unregister(struct watchdog_device *wdd);
>
> To change the priority of the restart handler the following helper should be
> -used:
> +used::
>
> -void watchdog_set_restart_priority(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int priority);
> + void watchdog_set_restart_priority(struct watchdog_device *wdd, int priority);
>
> User should follow the following guidelines for setting the priority:
> +
> * 0: should be called in last resort, has limited restart capabilities
> * 128: default restart handler, use if no other handler is expected to be
> available, and/or if restart is sufficient to restart the entire system
> * 255: highest priority, will preempt all other restart handlers
>
> -To raise a pretimeout notification, the following function should be used:
> +To raise a pretimeout notification, the following function should be used::
>
> -void watchdog_notify_pretimeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
> + void watchdog_notify_pretimeout(struct watchdog_device *wdd)
>
> The function can be called in the interrupt context. If watchdog pretimeout
> governor framework (kbuild CONFIG_WATCHDOG_PRETIMEOUT_GOV symbol) is enabled,
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
> index 0b88e333f9e1..b121caae7798 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-parameters.txt
> @@ -1,410 +1,736 @@
> +==========================
> +WatchDog Module Parameters
> +==========================
> +
> This file provides information on the module parameters of many of
> the Linux watchdog drivers. Watchdog driver parameter specs should
> be listed here unless the driver has its own driver-specific information
> file.
>
> -
> See Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst for information on
> providing kernel parameters for builtin drivers versus loadable
> modules.
>
> -
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> acquirewdt:
> -wdt_stop: Acquire WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x43)
> -wdt_start: Acquire WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_stop:
> + Acquire WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x43)
> + wdt_start:
> + Acquire WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> advantechwdt:
> -wdt_stop: Advantech WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x443)
> -wdt_start: Advantech WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=63, default=60.
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_stop:
> + Advantech WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x443)
> + wdt_start:
> + Advantech WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=63, default=60.
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> alim1535_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0 < timeout < 18000, default=60
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0 < timeout < 18000, default=60
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> alim7101_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30
> -use_gpio: Use the gpio watchdog (required by old cobalt boards).
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30
> + use_gpio:
> + Use the gpio watchdog (required by old cobalt boards).
> default=0/off/no
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ar7_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default=60)
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds (default=60)
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> armada_37xx_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default=120)
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default=120)
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> at91rm9200_wdt:
> -wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_time:
> + Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> at91sam9_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> bcm47xx_wdt:
> -wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_time:
> + Watchdog time in seconds. (default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> coh901327_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> cpu5wdt:
> -port: base address of watchdog card, default is 0x91
> -verbose: be verbose, default is 0 (no)
> -ticks: count down ticks, default is 10000
> + port:
> + base address of watchdog card, default is 0x91
> + verbose:
> + be verbose, default is 0 (no)
> + ticks:
> + count down ticks, default is 10000
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> cpwd:
> -wd0_timeout: Default watchdog0 timeout in 1/10secs
> -wd1_timeout: Default watchdog1 timeout in 1/10secs
> -wd2_timeout: Default watchdog2 timeout in 1/10secs
> + wd0_timeout:
> + Default watchdog0 timeout in 1/10secs
> + wd1_timeout:
> + Default watchdog1 timeout in 1/10secs
> + wd2_timeout:
> + Default watchdog2 timeout in 1/10secs
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> da9052wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 2<= timeout <=131, default=2.048s
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 2<= timeout <=131, default=2.048s
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> davinci_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 600, default 60
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 600, default 60
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ebc-c384_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=15300, default=60)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=15300, default=60)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ep93xx_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=TBD)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=TBD)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> eurotechwdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -io: Eurotech WDT io port (default=0x3f0)
> -irq: Eurotech WDT irq (default=10)
> -ev: Eurotech WDT event type (default is `int')
> + io:
> + Eurotech WDT io port (default=0x3f0)
> + irq:
> + Eurotech WDT irq (default=10)
> + ev:
> + Eurotech WDT event type (default is `int`)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> gef_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> geodewdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=131, default=60.
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=131, default=60.
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> i6300esb:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1<heartbeat<2046, default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1<heartbeat<2046, default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> iTCO_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds.
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat in seconds.
> (2<heartbeat<39 (TCO v1) or 613 (TCO v2), default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> iTCO_vendor_support:
> -vendorsupport: iTCO vendor specific support mode, default=0 (none),
> + vendorsupport:
> + iTCO vendor specific support mode, default=0 (none),
> 1=SuperMicro Pent3, 2=SuperMicro Pent4+, 911=Broken SMI BIOS
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ib700wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 0<= timeout <=30, default=30.
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 0<= timeout <=30, default=30.
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ibmasr:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> imx2_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (default 60 s)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds (default 60 s)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> indydog:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> iop_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> it8712f_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60)
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60)
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> it87_wdt:
> -nogameport: Forbid the activation of game port, default=0
> -nocir: Forbid the use of CIR (workaround for some buggy setups); set to 1 if
> + nogameport:
> + Forbid the activation of game port, default=0
> + nocir:
> + Forbid the use of CIR (workaround for some buggy setups); set to 1 if
> system resets despite watchdog daemon running, default=0
> -exclusive: Watchdog exclusive device open, default=1
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds, default=60
> -testmode: Watchdog test mode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + exclusive:
> + Watchdog exclusive device open, default=1
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds, default=60
> + testmode:
> + Watchdog test mode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ixp4xx_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60s)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60s)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ks8695_wdt:
> -wdt_time: Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_time:
> + Watchdog time in seconds. (default=5)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> machzwd:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -action: after watchdog resets, generate:
> + action:
> + after watchdog resets, generate:
> 0 = RESET(*) 1 = SMI 2 = NMI 3 = SCI
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> max63xx_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 60
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 60
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -nodelay: Force selection of a timeout setting without initial delay
> + nodelay:
> + Force selection of a timeout setting without initial delay
> (max6373/74 only, default=0)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> mixcomwd:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> mpc8xxx_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in ticks. (0<timeout<65536, default=65535)
> -reset: Watchdog Interrupt/Reset Mode. 0 = interrupt, 1 = reset
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in ticks. (0<timeout<65536, default=65535)
> + reset:
> + Watchdog Interrupt/Reset Mode. 0 = interrupt, 1 = reset
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> mv64x60_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ni903x_wdt:
> -timeout: Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<516, default=60)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<516, default=60)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> nic7018_wdt:
> -timeout: Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<464, default=80)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Initial watchdog timeout in seconds (0<timeout<464, default=80)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> nuc900_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds.
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeats in seconds.
> (default = 15)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> omap_wdt:
> -timer_margin: initial watchdog timeout (in seconds)
> -early_enable: Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=0
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timer_margin:
> + initial watchdog timeout (in seconds)
> + early_enable:
> + Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=0
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> orion_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Initial watchdog heartbeat in seconds
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Initial watchdog heartbeat in seconds
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> pc87413_wdt:
> -io: pc87413 WDT I/O port (default: io).
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=timeout).
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + io:
> + pc87413 WDT I/O port (default: io).
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=timeout).
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> pika_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 15)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> pnx4008_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 19
> -nowayout: Set to 1 to keep watchdog running after device release
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 60, default 19
> + nowayout:
> + Set to 1 to keep watchdog running after device release
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> pnx833x_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in Mhz. (68Mhz clock), default=2040000000 (30 seconds)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in Mhz. (68Mhz clock), default=2040000000 (30 seconds)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -start_enabled: Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=1)
> + start_enabled:
> + Watchdog is started on module insertion (default=1)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> rc32434_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout value, in seconds (default=20)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout value, in seconds (default=20)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> riowd:
> -riowd_timeout: Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=1)
> + riowd_timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in minutes (default=1)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> s3c2410_wdt:
> -tmr_margin: Watchdog tmr_margin in seconds. (default=15)
> -tmr_atboot: Watchdog is started at boot time if set to 1, default=0
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + tmr_margin:
> + Watchdog tmr_margin in seconds. (default=15)
> + tmr_atboot:
> + Watchdog is started at boot time if set to 1, default=0
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -soft_noboot: Watchdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
> -debug: Watchdog debug, set to >1 for debug, (default 0)
> + soft_noboot:
> + Watchdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
> + debug:
> + Watchdog debug, set to >1 for debug, (default 0)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sa1100_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sb_wdog:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in microseconds (max/default 8388607 or 8.3ish secs)
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in microseconds (max/default 8388607 or 8.3ish secs)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbc60xxwdt:
> -wdt_stop: SBC60xx WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x45)
> -wdt_start: SBC60xx WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_stop:
> + SBC60xx WDT 'stop' io port (default 0x45)
> + wdt_start:
> + SBC60xx WDT 'start' io port (default 0x443)
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbc7240_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=255, default=30)
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog when closing device file
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=255, default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog when closing device file
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbc8360:
> -timeout: Index into timeout table (0-63) (default=27 (60s))
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Index into timeout table (0-63) (default=27 (60s))
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbc_epx_c3:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbc_fitpc2_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds (default 60s)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sbsa_gwdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default 10s)
> -action: Watchdog action at the first stage timeout,
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (default 10s)
> + action:
> + Watchdog action at the first stage timeout,
> set to 0 to ignore, 1 to panic. (default=0)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sc1200wdt:
> -isapnp: When set to 0 driver ISA PnP support will be disabled (default=1)
> -io: io port
> -timeout: range is 0-255 minutes, default is 1
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + isapnp:
> + When set to 0 driver ISA PnP support will be disabled (default=1)
> + io:
> + io port
> + timeout:
> + range is 0-255 minutes, default is 1
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sc520_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 3600, default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 3600, default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sch311x_wdt:
> -force_id: Override the detected device ID
> -therm_trip: Should a ThermTrip trigger the reset generator
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=15300, default=60
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + force_id:
> + Override the detected device ID
> + therm_trip:
> + Should a ThermTrip trigger the reset generator
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1<= timeout <=15300, default=60
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> scx200_wdt:
> -margin: Watchdog margin in seconds
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> + margin:
> + Watchdog margin in seconds
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> shwdt:
> -clock_division_ratio: Clock division ratio. Valid ranges are from 0x5 (1.31ms)
> + clock_division_ratio:
> + Clock division ratio. Valid ranges are from 0x5 (1.31ms)
> to 0x7 (5.25ms). (default=7)
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1 <= heartbeat <= 3600, default=30
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat in seconds. (1 <= heartbeat <= 3600, default=30
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> smsc37b787_wdt:
> -timeout: range is 1-255 units, default is 60
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + range is 1-255 units, default is 60
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> softdog:
> -soft_margin: Watchdog soft_margin in seconds.
> + soft_margin:
> + Watchdog soft_margin in seconds.
> (0 < soft_margin < 65536, default=60)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> -soft_noboot: Softdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
> + soft_noboot:
> + Softdog action, set to 1 to ignore reboots, 0 to reboot
> (default=0)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> stmp3xxx_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 4194304, default 19
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeat period in seconds from 1 to 4194304, default 19
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> tegra_wdt:
> -heartbeat: Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 120)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + heartbeat:
> + Watchdog heartbeats in seconds. (default = 120)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> ts72xx_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 8, default=8)
> -nowayout: Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1 <= timeout <= 8, default=8)
> + nowayout:
> + Disable watchdog shutdown on close
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> twl4030_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> txx9wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0<timeout<N, default=60)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (0<timeout<N, default=60)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> uniphier_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in power of two seconds.
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in power of two seconds.
> (1 <= timeout <= 128, default=64)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> w83627hf_wdt:
> -wdt_io: w83627hf/thf WDT io port (default 0x2E)
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + wdt_io:
> + w83627hf/thf WDT io port (default 0x2E)
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> w83877f_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. (1<=timeout<=3600, default=30)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> w83977f_wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (15..7635), default=45)
> -testmode: Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds (15..7635), default=45)
> + testmode:
> + Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> wafer5823wdt:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds. 1 <= timeout <= 255, default=60.
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> wdt285:
> -soft_margin: Watchdog timeout in seconds (default=60)
> + soft_margin:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds (default=60)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> wdt977:
> -timeout: Watchdog timeout in seconds (60..15300, default=60)
> -testmode: Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + timeout:
> + Watchdog timeout in seconds (60..15300, default=60)
> + testmode:
> + Watchdog testmode (1 = no reboot), default=0
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> wm831x_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> wm8350_wdt:
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> (default=kernel config parameter)
> +
> -------------------------------------------------
> +
> sun4v_wdt:
> -timeout_ms: Watchdog timeout in milliseconds 1..180000, default=60000)
> -nowayout: Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> --------------------------------------------------
> + timeout_ms:
> + Watchdog timeout in milliseconds 1..180000, default=60000)
> + nowayout:
> + Watchdog cannot be stopped once started
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
> index 7a4dd46e0d24..646e1f28f31f 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/watchdog-pm.txt
> @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
> +===============================================
> The Linux WatchDog Timer Power Management Guide
> ===============================================
> +
> Last reviewed: 17-Dec-2018
>
> Wolfram Sang <[email protected]>
> @@ -16,4 +18,5 @@ On resume, a watchdog timer shall be reset to its selected value to give
> userspace enough time to resume. [1] [2]
>
> [1] https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/10252209/
> +
> [2] https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/10711625/
> diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
> index ed2f0b860869..d97b0361535b 100644
> --- a/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/wdt.txt
> @@ -1,11 +1,14 @@
> +============================================================
> +WDT Watchdog Timer Interfaces For The Linux Operating System
> +============================================================
> +
> Last Reviewed: 10/05/2007
>
> - WDT Watchdog Timer Interfaces For The Linux Operating System
> - Alan Cox <[email protected]>
> +Alan Cox <[email protected]>
>
> - ICS WDT501-P
> - ICS WDT501-P (no fan tachometer)
> - ICS WDT500-P
> + - ICS WDT501-P
> + - ICS WDT501-P (no fan tachometer)
> + - ICS WDT500-P
>
> All the interfaces provide /dev/watchdog, which when open must be written
> to within a timeout or the machine will reboot. Each write delays the reboot
> @@ -21,19 +24,26 @@ degrees Fahrenheit. Each read returns a single byte giving the temperature.
> The third interface logs kernel messages on additional alert events.
>
> The ICS ISA-bus wdt card cannot be safely probed for. Instead you need to
> -pass IO address and IRQ boot parameters. E.g.:
> +pass IO address and IRQ boot parameters. E.g.::
> +
> wdt.io=0x240 wdt.irq=11
>
> Other "wdt" driver parameters are:
> +
> + =========== ======================================================
> heartbeat Watchdog heartbeat in seconds (default 60)
> nowayout Watchdog cannot be stopped once started (kernel
> - build parameter)
> + build parameter)
> tachometer WDT501-P Fan Tachometer support (0=disable, default=0)
> type WDT501-P Card type (500 or 501, default=500)
> + =========== ======================================================
>
> Features
> --------
> - WDT501P WDT500P
> +
> +================ ======= =======
> + WDT501P WDT500P
> +================ ======= =======
> Reboot Timer X X
> External Reboot X X
> I/O Port Monitor o o
> @@ -42,9 +52,12 @@ Fan Speed X o
> Power Under X o
> Power Over X o
> Overheat X o
> +================ ======= =======
>
> The external event interfaces on the WDT boards are not currently supported.
> Minor numbers are however allocated for it.
>
>
> -Example Watchdog Driver: see samples/watchdog/watchdog-simple.c
> +Example Watchdog Driver:
> +
> + see samples/watchdog/watchdog-simple.c
> --
> 2.20.1
>
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 12:01 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
>
> The kbuild documentation clearly shows that the documents
> there are written at different times: some use markdown,
> some use their own peculiar logic to split sections.
>
> Convert everything to ReST without affecting too much
> the author's style and avoiding adding uneeded markups.
Sorry for my ignorance, but shouldn't ReST use
the extension '.rst' instead of '.txt' ?
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> ---
> Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt | 5 +-
> Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 119 ++--
> Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt | 232 ++++----
> .../kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt | 37 +-
> Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt | 136 +++--
> Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | 518 +++++++++++-------
> Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt | 166 +++---
> 7 files changed, 720 insertions(+), 493 deletions(-)
>
--
Best Regards
Masahiro Yamada
Em Thu, 18 Apr 2019 18:25:45 +0900
Masahiro Yamada <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 12:01 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <[email protected]> wrote:
> >
> > The kbuild documentation clearly shows that the documents
> > there are written at different times: some use markdown,
> > some use their own peculiar logic to split sections.
> >
> > Convert everything to ReST without affecting too much
> > the author's style and avoiding adding uneeded markups.
>
> Sorry for my ignorance, but shouldn't ReST use
> the extension '.rst' instead of '.txt' ?
Yes. I have a patch with the rename step, but the problem is that doing
such renames on 57 different subdirs and then adding all of them to the
existing index.rst files (in order to add into a bookset) would cause
huge merge conflicts - and keeping them renamed without adding into
an index would cause a *lot* new warnings when building them.
So, IMO, the best would be to have the fixup stuff merged first, and
then do the renames/merges at once, after subsystem maintainers
pick the patches from this rst fixup series.
If you want to see the renaming patch, it is at:
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=all_with_indexes-v3&id=9cfeb3eb6d48d1aeff9d2ddd84880ab1dc782b00
(I'll probably split it later into per-subdir renames)
The results of this patch, plus the rename one, is at:
https://www.infradead.org/~mchehab/rst_conversion/kbuild/index.html
>
>
>
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
> > ---
> > Documentation/kbuild/headers_install.txt | 5 +-
> > Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 119 ++--
> > Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt | 232 ++++----
> > .../kbuild/kconfig-macro-language.txt | 37 +-
> > Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt | 136 +++--
> > Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | 518 +++++++++++-------
> > Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt | 166 +++---
> > 7 files changed, 720 insertions(+), 493 deletions(-)
> >
>
Thanks,
Mauro
Jon,
Em Mon, 15 Apr 2019 23:55:25 -0300
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]> escreveu:
> I have a separate patch series with do the actual rename and
> adjustment of references. I opted to submit this first, as it
> sounds easier to merge this way, as each subsystem maintainer
> can apply the conversion directly on their trees (or at docs
> tree), avoiding merge conflects.
Based on the number of feedbacks we have about this, I'm
considering to submit a second version of my conversion patch
series that would be doing the rename together with each patch,
adding the rst files to an index file.
However, doing that would produce lots of warnings. We have
already lots of those at linux-next:
checking consistency...
docs/Documentation/accelerators/ocxl.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/numaperf.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/allocators.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/attributes.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bigalloc.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/bitmaps.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blockgroup.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/blocks.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/checksums.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/directory.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/eainode.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/group_descr.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ifork.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inlinedata.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/inodes.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/journal.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/mmp.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/special_inodes.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/super.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/fmc/index.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/interconnect/interconnect.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/laptops/lg-laptop.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/virtual/kvm/amd-memory-encryption.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
docs/Documentation/virtual/kvm/vcpu-requests.rst: WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree
After thinking a little bit and doing some tests, I think a good solution
would be to add ":orphan:" markup to the new .rst files that were not
added yet into the main body (e. g. something like the enclosed example).
That will make Sphinx suppress the:
"WARNING: document isn't included in any toctree"
warning for the new files, while they're not included at the main indexes.
This way, maintainers can do all the hard work of doing/applying the ReST
file conversion/addition patch series on their own trees, and, once
everything gets merged, submit a patch against the latest docs-next
tree, removing the :orphan: tag and add them to the common index.rst
files.
That should largely avoid merging conflicts.
For example, assuming that someone converts the stuff at
Documentation/accounting and rename the text files there to
RST (I'm actually doing that), he could add the enclosed change on
the top of its index file:
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/index.rst b/Documentation/accounting/index.rst
index e7dda5afa73f..e1f6284b5ff3 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/index.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+:orphan:
+
==========
Accounting
==========
With would make Sphinx to ignore the subdir index file while
reporting errors. It will still build the documentation, allowing
the developer to test the changes.
One of the advantages is that checking the orphaned docs is as
easy as running:
$ git grep -l ":orphan:" Documentation/
...
Documentation/accounting/index.rst
...
Making easy for people to check the orphaned files and send a fixup
patch if something got orphaned after the merge window and send a
fixes patches to be applied upstream.
What do you think?
Regards,
Mauro
On Thu, 18 Apr 2019 09:42:23 -0300
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]> wrote:
> After thinking a little bit and doing some tests, I think a good solution
> would be to add ":orphan:" markup to the new .rst files that were not
> added yet into the main body (e. g. something like the enclosed example).
Interesting...I didn't know about that. Yes, I think it makes sense to
put that in...
jon
Em Tue, 16 Apr 2019 14:55:19 +0000
Changbin Du <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 10:17:11AM +0200, Rafael J. Wysocki wrote:
> > On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 5:02 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> > <[email protected]> wrote:
> > >
> > > Most of the files are already in good shape, making easier to
> > > convert them to ReST by adding proper title markups and
> > > addressing some identation and markups to properly format the
> > > document.
> >
> > There is concurrent work on this under way, please see
> > https://marc.info/?t=155381845300002&r=2&w=2
> >
> I will update the serias asap. I am just a little busy these days. My
> conversion includes pci, acpi and x86, others are not touched.
Ok, I sent a new patch series without pci, acpi and x86.
While these aren't merged upstream, I'm keeping my old patches
on my tree:
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=convert_rst_v2&id=805b16dd336dd3c27733f02ec8164b2a182972a3
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=convert_rst_v2&id=c950031ccb87ea14ff4c56f2433072d580db3572
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=convert_rst_v2&id=4f8afce866dcd8067206b3ee493ed0b682694f49
If you find anything there that would be interesting for your
series, feel free to pick from them. Everything is based on
linux-next.
Thanks,
Mauro
On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 4:56 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<[email protected]> wrote:
> The API described at sysfs.txt is deprecated.
>
> Still, as it is still part of the Kernel (and will likely be
> there for some time, as we don't simply remove APIs). So,
> it makes sense to keep it there.
>
> The conversion of this file is trivial.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Acked-by: Linus Walleij <[email protected]>
Mauro will you merge this or do you want me to merge it?
Yours,
Linus Walleij
Em Tue, 23 Apr 2019 12:52:04 +0200
Linus Walleij <[email protected]> escreveu:
> On Tue, Apr 16, 2019 at 4:56 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <[email protected]> wrote:
>
> > The API described at sysfs.txt is deprecated.
> >
> > Still, as it is still part of the Kernel (and will likely be
> > there for some time, as we don't simply remove APIs). So,
> > it makes sense to keep it there.
> >
> > The conversion of this file is trivial.
> >
> > Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
>
> Acked-by: Linus Walleij <[email protected]>
>
> Mauro will you merge this or do you want me to merge it?
Linus,
Just answered on the other e-mail: better to merge via your
tree. Just notice that this version was superseded by
[PATCH v2 15/79] docs: gpio: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
As it also does the rename to .rst.
Thanks,
Mauro
On 04/16/2019 04:55 AM, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert all documents here from plain txt to ReST format, in
> order to allow parsing them with the documentation build
> system.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <[email protected]>
Acked-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz <[email protected]>
Best regards,
--
Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz
Samsung R&D Institute Poland
Samsung Electronics